
Gass rA&SB 

Book_JiM__ 
l%5% 



GRAMMAR 

- 

OF 

^FE GREEK LANGUAGE 



FOR THE USE OF 



HIGH SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, 



BY < 
DR. RAPHAEL KUHNER, 

CONEECTOR OF THE LYCEUM, HANOVER. 

TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN 
BY 

B. B. EDWARDS, 

LATB PROFESSOR IN THE THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, AND 

S. H. TAYLOR, 

LIPS ACADEMY, ANDOVER. 



rn editio 




NEW-YORK: 

D. APPLETON & COMPANY 

346 ft 848 B EO A D W A Y . 
M.DOOO.LVIII. 



*& 






Xfy 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1852, by 

D. Appleton & Co., 

In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States 

for the Southern District of New York. 



PREFACE 



Raphael Kuhner, the author of the following Grammar 
was born at Gotha, in 1802. From 1812 to 1821, he 
studied at the celebrated gymnasium in his native city. 
Among his classical teachers were Doring, Host and Wiiste- 
mann. From 1821 to 1824, he enjoyed, at the University 
of Gottingen, the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen and 
Ottfried Miiller. While there, he prepared an essay on 
the philosophical writings of Cicero, which received a 
prize. Since 1824, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum 
at Hanover. The principal works from the pen of Dr. 
Kuhner are the following : 

1. Versuch einer neuen Anordnung der griechischen Syntax, 

mit Beispielen begleitet. 1829. " Attempt towards a 
new Arrangement of the Greek Syntax," etc. 

2. M. Tull. Ciceronis Tusculan. Disputationum libri. 1829 , 

ed. altera 1835 ; ed. tertia 1846. 

3. Sammtliche Anomalien des griechischen Verbs in Attisch. 

Dialecte, 1831. " Anomalies of the Greek Verb, etc. 

4. Ausfuhrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, in 2 

1835. "Copious Grammar of the Greek 
two Parts." The second Part of this 
aining the Syntax, translated by W. E. 
diversity of Oxford, was published in 
i Part in 1845. A second edition of 
>n of this work was published in 1851. 
however, only in part a translation, Mr. 

A* 



VI PREFACE. 



Jelf being the author of the remarks on the Cases, the 
particle av, the compound verbs, etc. 

5. Schulgrammatik der griechischen Sprache, 1836 ; zweite 

durchaus verbesserte u. vermehrte Auflage, 1843; 
dritte verbesserte und vermehrte Auflage 1851. 
" School Grammar of the Greek Language, third 
edition, improved and enlarged." The present vol- 
ume is a translation of this Grammar, from the 
sheets, furnished for this purpose by the author. 

6. Elementargrammatik der griechischen Sprache, neunte 

Auflage 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Greek 
Language, containing a series of Greek and Eng- 
lish exercises for translation with the requisite vocab- 
ularies." This Grammar, translated by Mr. S. H. 
Taylor, one of the translators of the present volume, 
has passed through eleven editions in this country. 

7. Xenophontis de Socrate Commentarii, 1841. 

8. Elementargrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, siebent 

Auflage, 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Latin 
Language with Exercises." This Grammar, trans- 
lated by Prof. Champlin, of Waterville College, has 
passed through several editions in this country. 

9. Lateinische Vorschule nebst eingereihten lateinischen 

und deutschen Ubersetzungsaufgaben, vierte Auflage, 

1849. 
10. Schulgrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, dritte sehr 

verbesserte Auflage, 1850. " School Grammar of 

the Latin Language, third edition, greatly improved." 
Dr. Kiihner has also published in the Bibliotheca Graeca 
the first part of his edition of Xenophon's Anabasis 

From the above statements, it whM 
Kiihner has enjoyed the most favorab 
preparing the work, a translation of 
sented to the public. The names of 
are among the most honored in class] 



PREFACE. 



nearly thirty years, he has been a teacher in one of the 
principal German gymnasia, and has thus had ample facili- 
ties for testing in practice the principles which he has 
adopted in his Grammars. At the same time, he has pur- 
sued the study of the classical authors with the greatest 
diligence, in connection with the productions which his 
learned countrymen are constantly publishing on the differ- 
ent parts of Latin and Greek grammar. Of course, his 
works might be expected to combine the advantages of 
sound, scientific principles with a skilful adaptation to prac- 
tical use. The " School Grammar of the Greek Lan- 
guage," being his latest publication, contains the results of 
his most mature studies. Its chief excellences, it may be 
well, perhaps, briefly to indicate. 

First, The grammar is based on a profound and accurate 
knowledge of the genius and principles of the Greek lan- 
guage. The author adopts substantially the views which 
are maintained by Becker, Grimm, Hupfeld and others, and 
which are fully unfolded in the German grammars of 
Becker. According to these views, the forms and changes 
of language are the result of established laws, and not of 
accident or arbitrary arrangement. Consequently, language 
may be subjected to scientific analysis and classification. 
The multitude of details may be embraced under a few 
comprehensive principles, and the whole may have some- 
what of the completeness and spirit of a living, organic 
system. Dr. Kuhner's grammar is not a collection of de- 
tached observations, or of rules which have no connection, 
except a numerical one. It is a natural classification of 
the essential elements of the language, an orderly exhibi- 
tion of its real phenomena. It is, at the same time, a truly 
practical grammar, fitted for its object, not by a theorist in 
his closet, but by an experienced instructor in his school. 

Second, The author has adopted a clear and satisfactory 
arrangement of his materials. This can be seen by an 



Vlll . PREFACE. 

examination of the table of contents. To those, indeed, 
who are familiar only with the common distribution, of 
subjects in our Greek grammars, the arrangement of Dr. 
Kuhner may appear somewhat obscure and complicated. 
A slight acquaintance, however, with the plan on which 
the Syntax, for example, is constructed, will show that he 
has followed the true and logical method. Abundant 
proofs of the justness of this remark may be seen in the 
exhibition of compound sentences. The particles are 
treated, not as isolated, independent words, but as a com- 
ponent and indissoluble part of discourse. 

Third, Fulness and pertinence of illustration. The cor- 
rectness of every principle advanced, especially in the Syn- 
tax, is vouched for by copious citations from the classics. 
If, in any case, a principle is stated in an abstract form, or 
if a degree of obscurity rests upon the enunciation of it, 
its meaning may be readily discovered by reference to the 
illustration. The paradigms contain much more complete 
exemplifications of conjugation and declension than are to 
be found in the grammars in common use in this coun- 
try. In this connection, it may be stated, that Dr. Kuhner 
has chosen a pure verb as the model of regular inflection. 
He can thus exhibit the stem unchanged, throughout the 
entire conjugation. 

Fourth, The perfect analysis to which the forms of the 
language, especially of the verb, is subjected, may be men- 
tioned as another excellence of the grammar. In learning 
a paradigm, in the manner which the author points out, the 
pupil first resolves the verb into its elements, and then 
rearranges these elementary parts into a complete form. 
In this method, and in no other, can he attain a mastery 
of this most difficult portion of the subject. 

Fifth, Every part of the grammar is equally elaborated. 
The closing pages exhibit the same fulness and conscien- 
tious accuracy, which characterize the forms, or the first 



PREFACE. IX 

portions of the Syntax. No part can be justly charged 
with deficiency or with superfluous statement. The view 
of the Third Declension, the scientific list of Irregular 
Verbs, the Dialectic peculiarities, the observations on the 
Use and Position of the Article, on the JNIiddle and Passive 
Verbs, on the delicate shades of thought indicated by the 
Modes and Tenses, and on the difference between the use 
of the Participle and Infinitive, may be referred to as spe- 
cimens of careful observation and nice analysis. 

The Appendix on Versification has been supplied by the 
translators, the grammar of Kiihner containing nothing on 
that subject. The materials were drawn from a variety of 
sources. A more full view is less necessary, as the excel- 
lent work of Munk on Greek and Roman Metres, trans- 
lated by Profs. Beck and Felton, is now accessible. 

Much pains have been taken in verifying the almost in- 
numerable references to classical authors. The very few 
exceptions are those cases where the author made use of 
an edition of a classic not accessible to the translators. In 
this verification, the following editions of prose authors 
were used : Kiihner's edition of the Memorabilia ; Weiske's 
and Tauchnitz's editions of the other works of Xenophon ; 
Schafer's and Tauchnitz's editions of Herodotus ; Becker's 
and Tauchnitz's editions of Thucydides ; Dobson's edition 
of the Oratores Attici ; and Stallbaum's Plato. There are 
slight variations in numbering the lines of poetry in differ- 
ent editions, particularly in the tragedians. 

The present edition has been prepared from the third 
German edition, in which the author had made many im- 
portant improvements, particularly in the Syntax, having 
availed himself of the corrections or remarks of his learned 
friends and his reviewers. This the translators have en- 
deavored to put into such a form as would best meet the 
wants of American scholars. They have not aimed merely 



PREFACE. 



at a translation ; it has been their object to state in as clear 
and concise a manner as possible the principles contained 
in the original, without reference to the particular form in 
which the statements were there made. The translators 
have also added principles and illustrations of their own, 
where it seemed desirable. 

The numbering of the paragraphs has not been changed 
in the present edition, and most of the subdivisions and 
Remarks are the same as in the former edition. The 
changes in this respect have been so few, that it has not 
been thought necessary to indicate them. 

The labor of preparing the first edition of this work was 
shared equally by the translators ; so, also, in the second 
edition as far as the 210th page. At this point in the 
progress of the work, the state of Professor Edwards's 
health made it necessary for him to relinquish his labors in 
connection with it, for the purpose of seeking a milder 
climate. After a few months' residence in one of the South- 
ern States, he was called away from his labors on earth, 
deeply lamented by his associate, and the large circle of 
friends to whom his character presented so many attractive 
qualities. His loss will be extensively felt also in the cause 
of Biblical and Classical literature, for which none cher- 
ished a deeper interest, and for the promotion of which he 
contributed with great zeal and success the rich stores of 
his elegant and varied learning. 

The proofs of the Grammar have been read by Mr. P. 
S. Byers, an associate Instructor in Phillips Academy, to 
whom special acknowledgments are due for these servicesj 
as well as for many valuable suggestions. 

Andover, July 15, 1852. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS, 



ETYMOLOGY. 



SECTION I — SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. 
Chapter I. — Letters and Sounds of the Language. 



Alphabet 

Sounds of the Letters 

History of the Alphabet 

Organs of Speech 


2a 

2b 

3 

4 


Consonants 

Breathings 

Changes of Letters 


5 
6 


Changes of the Vowels 


8—16 

8 


Contraction of Vowels 

Crasis 


9 

10, 11 

12 






13, 14 


N Paragogic (iQeKKvariKoi/) ; 

ovtq)[s) ; e| and e/c ; ov and ovk 
Strengthening and Weakening 

of Vowels 


15 

16 



Prolongation. Shortening. In- 
terchange and Variation, ... § 16 
Influence of a Vowel or Con- 
sonant on another vowel. ... 16 
Syncope, Omission of a Vowel 16 

Euphonic Pro thesis 16 

Changes of the Consonants. . . 17 — 25 

Mutes 17 

Liquids 18 

Mutes and Liquids, Liquids and 

Mutes 19 

Sibilant a with Mut. and Liq.. . 20 

Change of separated Consonants 21 

Metathesis of Liquids 22 

Doubling of Consonants 23 

Strengthening and Addition of 

Consonants 24 

Expulsion and Omission of 

Consonants 25 



Chapt. II. — Syllables. 



Nature and Division of Syllables 

Quantity of Syllables. 

Quantity of the Penult 

Accents 

Change and Removal of the 
Accent by Inflection, Compo- 
sition and Contraction 

Change and Removal of the Ac- 
cent in connected Discourse 31- 



30 



-35 



I. Grave instead of the acute 31 

II. Crasis 31 

III. Elision 31 

IV. Anastrophe 31 

V. Atonies or Proclitics ... 32 

VI. Enclitics 33—35 

Division of Syllables 36 

Punctuation Marks — Diastole. 37 



SECT. II. — GRAMMATICAL FORMS. 

Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflection 

Chapt. I. — The Substantive. 



Different kinds of Substantives. . . 39 

Gender of Substantives 40 

Number, Case and Declension ... 41 



First Declension 42 

I. Feminines 43 

II. Masculines 44 



Xll 



CONTENTS. 



Quantity and Accentuation . § 45 

Second Declension 46 

Contraction of the second Dec. 47 
Attic second Declension. ... 48 

Accentuation 49 

Remarks on Gender 50 

Third Declension 51 

Remarks on the Case-endings 52, 53 

Paradigms 54 — 63 

Quantity » 64 

Accentuation 65 



Gender 66 

Anomalous Nouns 67, 68 

Defective Nouns 69 

Interchange of Forms in the 

Declensions 70 — 72 

I. Redundant Nouns 70 

II. Heteroclites . , 71 

III. Metaplasts 72 

Indeclinable and Defective 

Nouns 73 



Chapt. II. — The Adjective and Participle. 



Nature, Gender and Declension 74 

Accentuation 75 

Summary of the Adjective and 

Part. Endings 76—80 

I. Adjectives and Partici- 
ples of three Endings. . 76, 77 
II. Adjectives of two Endings 78, 79 
III. Adjectives of one Ending 8 



Comparison of Adjectives 81 

A. -repos, -rwa, -Tepov\ -raros, 

-TctT77, -raiw 82 

B. -lav, -iov, -coV) -ov\ -httos, -77, 

-ov 83 

Anomalous forms of Comparison. 84 
Comparison of Adverbs 85 



Chapt. III. — The Pronoun. 



Nature and Division of Pronouns 86 

I. Personal Pronouns . . 87-90 

II. Demonstrative Pronouns 91 
III. Relative Pronouns 92 



IV. Indefinite and Interrogative 

Pronouns 93 

Correlative Pronouns 94 

Lengthening of the Pronoun 95 



Chapt. IV. — The Numerals. 

Nature and Division of Numerals 96 I Principal classes of Numerals 98 

Numeral Signs 97 | Remarks on the Numerals 99 



Chapt. V. — The Adverb. 
Nature and Division of Adverbs 100 I Formation of Adverbs 101 



Chapt. VI. — The Verb. 



Nature and Division of the Verb 102 

Classes 102 

Tenses 103 

Modes 104 

Infinitive and Participle 105 

Persons and Numbers 106 

Conjugation of Verbs in -a 107 

Stem, Augment, Reduplication 

and Characteristic ". 108 

Inflection-endings 109 

a. Tense-characteristic and 

Tense-endings 110 

b. Personal-endings and Mode- 

vowels Ill — 114 

Full Paradigm of a Regular Verb 115 
Remarks on the Inflection-endings 116 
Remarks on the Formation of the 
Attic Future 117 



Accentuation of the Verb 118 

Further view of Aug. and Redup. 119 

(a) Syllabic Augment 120 

(b) Temporal Augment. . 121, 122 

Reduplication 123 

Attic Reduplication 124 

Aug. and Redup. in Compounds 125-6 
Formation of the Tenses of Verbs 

in-« 127—167 

Division of Verbs in -co according 

to the Characteristic 127 

Derivation of Tenses 128 

I. Formation of the Tenses of 

Pure Verbs 129 

a. With a short Characteristic- 

vowel 130 

b. With o-in Aor. Pass, and Perf. 

Mid. or Pass 131 



CONTENTS. 



Xlll 



Paradigms of Pure Verbs § 132—137 

A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs . . 132 

(a) Without a- in the Mid. or 

Pass 132 

(b) With a- in the Mid. and 

Pass 133 

B. Contract Pure Verbs... 134—136 
Remarks on contract verbs... 137 

II. Formation of the Tenses of 

Impure Verbs 138 

Strengthening of the Stem 139 

Variation of the Stem-vowel 140 

Remarks on the Secondary Tenses 141 

A. Formation of the Tenses of 

Mute Verbs 142—144 

Remarks on the Characteristic 143 
Paradigms of Mute Verbs 145 — 148 

B. Formation of the Tenses of 

Liquid Verbs 149 

Paradigms 150—153 

Peculiarities in the Formation of 

Single Verbs 154 

Syncope 155 

Metathesis 156 

Verbs in -« with Stem of the Pres. 

strengthened . . . •. 157 

I. Verbs with v inserted 158 

II. Verbs with the syllable ve 159 

III. Verbs with au or aiv 160 

IV. Verbs in -cr/ca>, -'ktkui 161 

V. Verbs in -&« 162 

VI. Verbs with Reduplication. 163 
VII. Verbs whose Pure Stem- 
vowel a is strengthened by t 164 
VIII. Verbs which assume e . . . . 165 
Verbs which assume an e in form- 
ing the Tenses 166 

Verbs whose Tenses are formed 

from different Roots 167 

Conjugation of Verbs in -fit . . . . 168 
Division of Verbs in -jut 169 



Characteristic-vowel and Strength- 
ening of the Stem of the Pres. § 170 

Mode-vowels . 171 

Personal-endings 172 

Formation of the Tenses. . . 173, 174 

Paradigms 175 

Remarks on the Paradigms 176 

Summary of Verbs in -/«. . 172 — 190 

I. Verbs in -fit which annex the 

Personal-endings immediate- 
ly to the Stem-vowel 177 

(a) Verbs in -a 177 

#?7/*i 178 

Deponents 179 

(b) Verbs in -e 180 

(c) Verbs ir -i : Elfii. — Elfjti. . . 181 

II. Verbs in -fxi which annex vvv 

or vv to the Stem-vowel . . 1 82 

Formation of the Tenses 182 

Summary of this class of Verbs 183 
—188 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 

Vowel 183—186 

(a) in -a 183 

(b) in-c 184 

(c) in-t 185 

(d) in-o 186 

B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 

Consonant 187,188 

(a) in a Mute 187 

(b) in a Liquid 188 

Inflection of K^lfxai and ruxat 189, 190 

Verbs in -a> analogous in Forma- 
tion to those in -fii . . 191 — 196 
I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid- 
dle 191, 192 

II. Perf. and Plup. Act.. . 193, 194 

OlSa and zoiko. 195 

III. Present and Imperfect 196 

Summary of Deponent Passives. 197 
Summary of Active Verbs with a 
Mid. Fut 198 



Chapt. VII. — Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections 199 



PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. 



A. Orthography. 
Digamma or Labial Breathing F. 200 

Interchange of the Vowels 201 

Interchange of the Consonants 202-204 

Change of the Vowels 205-207 

Contraction, Diaeresis 205 

Crasis, Synizcsis, Elision, N Par- 

agogic, Hiatus 206 

Lengthening and Shortening of 
the Vowels. — Syncope. — Apo- 
cope 207 

B 



Prothesis and Insertion of Vowels 207 

Changes of Consonants 208 

Quantity 209 

B. Dialectic Forms. 

Declensions 210- 214 

Homeric Suffix (pi or <piv 210 

First Declension 211 

Second Declension 212 

Third Declension 213 

Anomalous and Defective 
Words. Metaplasts . . , 214 



XIV 



CONTENTS. 



The Adjective $215 

Comparison 216 

Pronouns 217 

Numerals 218 

The Verb 219-230 

Augment and Reduplication . . 219 
Personal-endings and Mode- 
vowels 220 

Epic and Ionic Iterative Form 221 
Contraction and Resolution in 
Verbs 222 



Formation of the Tenses ... § 225 

Conjugation in -/u 224 

Eif.il and ET/xt 225, 226 

Verbs in -co with a Sec. Aor. an- 
alogous to Verbs in -pi . . . . 227 

Verbs in -w with a Perf. and 
Plup. Act. like Verbs in -fu 228 

Verbs in -u with a Pres. and 
Impf. Act. like Verbs in -pi 229 

List of Dialectic Verbs 230 



SECT, in.— FORMATION OF WORDS. 



Radical Words, Stems,Derivatives 231 

A. Derivation 232-235 

I. Verbs 232 

II. Substantives 233 



III. Adjectives 234 

IV. Adverbs .235 

B. Compounds 236 

Formation of Compounds 237 



SYNTAX. 



SECT. I. — SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
Chapt. I. — Parts of a Simple Sentence. 



Nature of a Sentence. — Subject 
and Predicate 238 

Comparison. Attribute and Ob- 
ject 239 

Agreement 240 

Exceptions to the general rules of 
Agreement 241 

Agreement when there are several 
Subjects 242 

Remarks on Peculiarities in use of 
Number 243 

The Article 244 

Position of the Article 245 

Use of the Article with Pronouns 

and Numerals 246 

The Article as a Demon, and 
Eel. Pronoun 247 



Classes of Verbs 248 

A. Active form 249 

B. Middle 250 

C. Passive 251 

Remarks on Deponents 252 

Tenses and Modes 253 

A. Particular View of the Tenses 254 

(a) Principal tenses: Pres., 
Perf., Fut 255 

(b) Hist. Tenses: Aor., Impf., 

Plup 256 

Tenses of the Subord. Modes 257 

B. Particular View of the Modes 258 
Use of the Subj.,Opt.and Imp. 259 

The Modes with &p 260 

Position and Repetition of &v 251 



Chapt. II. — Attributive Construction. 



Ellipsis of the Substantive . 
(a) Attributive Adjective . 



. 263 
. 264 



(b) Attributive Genitive .... 265 

(c) Apposition 266 



Chapt. III. — Objective Construction. 



I. The Cases 268 

Nominative and Vocative . . . 269 
( 1 ) Genitive 270 

A. Local Relation 271 

B. Causal Relation 272 

(a) Active Genitive 273 

(b) Causal Genitive 274 



(c) Gen. denoting mutual re- 
lations 275 

(2) Accusative 276 

A. Local Relation 277 

B. Causal Relation 278 

(a) Ace. denoting effect ... 278 

(b) Acc.of the Object on which 

the action is performed . 27S 



CONTENTS. 



XV 



Two Accusatives § 280 

Remarks on the Ace. with the 

Passive 281 

(£) Dative 282 

A. Local Dative 283 

B. Dative as a personal Object 284 

C. Dative of the thing 285 

II. Construction of Prepositions . 286 



(1) Prepositions with the Gen. 

only § 287, 288 

(2) With the Dative only .... 289 

(3) With the Accusative only . 290 

(4) With the Gen. and Ace. 291-294 

(5) With the Gen., Dat. and 

Ace 295-299 

Remarks on peculiarities of the 

Prepositions . 300 



Cel4.pt. IV. — The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, Attribute and 

Object. 

I. Personal Pronouns . 302 I Prospective and Retrospective 

II. Remaining Pronouns 303 I Use of the Pronoun 304 



Chapt. V. — The Infinitive and Participle used as an Attribute 

and Object. 



A. The Infinitive 305 

(I) Inf. as an Object without 

the Article 306 

Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
with the Inf. 307 

(II) Inf. with the Article .... 308 

B. The Participle 309 

(I) The Part, as the Comple- 
ment of the Verb .... 310 



Remarks on the Inter- 
change of the Part, and 

the Inf. 311 

(II) Part, used to express Ad- 

•verbial Subordinate Re- 
lations 312 

Special Peculiarities in the 
Participial Construction 313 



Chapt. VI. — The Adverbial Objective. 



Sat ! 315 

B. Confirmative Adverbs 316 



C Emphatic Suffixes, ye, 7rep, rol 317 
D. Negative Particles 318 



SECT. II. — SYNTAX OE THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
Chapt. VII. A. — Coordination. 



Different Eorms of Coordinate 

Sentences 320 

I. Copulative Coordinate Sen- 
tences 321 

II. Adversative Coordinate Sen- 
tences 322 



HI. Disjunctive Coordinate Sen- 
tences 323 

IV. Causal Coordinate Sen- 
tences 324 

Remarks on Asyndeton 325 



Chapt. VIII. B.- 

Principal and Subordinate Sen- 
tences 326 

Sequence of Subjunctive Tenses 

in Subordinate Sentences 327* 

Use of Modes in Subordinate 

Clauses 327b 

I. Substantive Clauses 328 

A. Introduced by Sri or d>s, that 329 

B. Introduced by 'ha, so that, etc. 330 

II. Adjective Clauses 331 



Subordination. 

Agreement of the Rel. Pron. . . 332 
Modes in Adjective Clauses . . 333 
Connection of several Adjective 

Clauses 33-* 

Interchange of the Subordinate 

Clause with the Adj. Clause 334 
III. Adverbial Clauses 335 

A. Adverbial Clauses of Place 336 

B. Adverbial Clauses of Time 337 

C. Causal Adv. Clauses . 338 — 340 



XVI 



CONTENTS. 



I. Denoting Ground or 

Cause § 338 

II. Denoting Condition 339, 340 
III. Denoting Consequence 

or Effect 341 



D. Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Manner and Quantity 342, 343 
I. Comparative Adv. Clauses 

denoting Manner ^42 

II. Comparative Adv. Clauses 
denoting Quantity 343 



Chapt. IX. — Interrogative Sentences. 



I. Interrogatives 344 

II. Oblique Discourse 345 

III. Special Peculiarities in tbe 
Construction of Words and Sen- 
tences 346, 347 



Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Zeugma, 

Contraction, Pleonasm 346 

Anacoluthon 347 



Chapt. X. — Position op Words 348 

AppendixA. — Versification Page 574 
Appendix B. Abbreviations 
in writing 587 



Index of Subjects Page 589 

Greek Index 602 

Index for the Eorms of Verbs 614 



ABBEEVIATIONS. 

Aesch. Aeschylus, Ag. Agamemnon, S. Septem adv. Th. — Ar. Aristophanes. — 
Dem. Demosthenes, 01. Olynth., Ph. Philipp., Cor. Corona, Chers. Chersones., Aph. 
Aphobus. — Eur. Euripides, M. Medea, C. Cyclops, H. Hecuba, O. Orestes, H. F. 
Hercules Furens, Hipp. Hippolytus. — Her. Herodotus. — Isae. Isaeus. — Lys. Ly- 
sias. — PI. Plato, Cr. Crito, if Leges, Th. Theages, Men. Meno, Soph. Sophista, 
Crat. Cratylus, Prot. Protagoras, Phil. Philebus, Ep, Respublica. — Soph. Sopho- 
cles, O. C. Oedipus Coloneus, 0. E. Oedipus Rex, Ant. Antigone, Ph. Philoctetes, 
Aj. Ajax, El. Plectra. — X. Xenophon, C. Commentarii, An. Anabasis, H. Hellen- 
ica, S. Symposium, E. Ath. Respublica Atheniens ., E. L. Respubl. Lacedaem.,0. 
Oeconomicus, Ag. Agesilaus, E. Equ. R. Equestris. 



v5 f ^- '^ ; 



GREEK GRAMMAR 



DIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 

1. The Greek language was divided into many different 
dialects, the most highly cultivated of which were the 
^Eolic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. The .ZEolic prevailed in 
Boeotia, Thessaly, and in the iEolian colonies in Asia 
Minor ; the Doric, throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the 
Dorian colonies in Asia Minor, Italy, and Sicily ; the 
Ionic, in the Ionian colonies in Asia Minor ; the Attic, in 
Attica. 

2. The iEolic and Doric dialects are characterized by 
harshness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic, 
which is distinguished for delicacy and softness. The 
Attic dialect holds a beautiful medium between the two 
former and the Ionic, as it skilfully combines the soft and 
pleasant forms of the Ionic with the strong and full-toned 
forms of the Doric. 

3. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the 
Later Ionic. The older Ionic is the language of Hom v 
and of his school, although these poets were not satisfied 
with their own dialect merely, but were able, in accordance 
with the true principles of art, to select, from all the 
dialects, those forms which corresponded to the nature of 
their poetry ; and to employ — since the regular laws of 
versification had much influence in forming the language 

2 



14 GREEK DIALECTS. 

— a peculiar and definite poetic language, called the Epfo, 
or Homeric. This had a great effect on the language of 
all the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the 
later Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born 
484 b. c, and of Hippocrates, b. 460 b. c. 

4. The Attic dialect is divided, in accordance with cer- 
tain peculiarities, into the Older, the Middle, and the Later 
Attic. The older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 b. c. ; the 
tragic poets ; iEschylus, who died 456 b. c. ; Sophocles, 
b. 497 b. c, d. 405 b. c. ; Euripides, b. 480 b. c. ; and the 
more ancient comic writers, e. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 b. c. : 
by several orators, e. g. Antiphon, b. 479 b. c, and An- 
docides, b. 467 b. c. The middle Attic is used by Plato, 
b. 430 b. c. ; Xenophon, b. 447 b. c. ; and the orator Iso- 
crates, b. b. c. 436. The later Attic is employed by De- 
mosthenes, b. 385 b. c, and other orators, the later comic 
writers, and the prose authors in more recent times, who 
sought to preserve in their works the language of the earlier 
writers. 

5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed 
by Philip, king of Macedon, the Attic dialect came to be 
the common written language. As it extended, not only 
over all Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of 
Syria and Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the 
introduction of foreign forms and words, and it then 
received the name of the Common, or Hellenic language, 
7] Kocvrj, or 'EXKrjVLKT] SiaXe/cTos. . It was used, e. g. by Apol- 
iodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



SECTION I. 



CHAPTEE I. 



Letters and Sounds of tie Language. 
$ 1. Alphabet. 
The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four letters. 



Form. 


Sound. 


Name 




A 


a 


a 


"Aktfxi 


Alpha 


B 


fi 


b 


Brjra 


Beta 


r 


7 


g 


Tdfifia 


Gamma 


A 


s 


d 


Aikra 


Delta 


E 


€ 


e short 


*E-^rl\6v 


Epsilon 


Z 


i" 


z 


ZrjTCL 


Zeta 


H 


V 


elong 


*Hra 


Eta 





^6 


th 


Oijra 


Theta 


I 


i 


i 


*I<OTCb 


"Iota 


K 


K 


k 


KaTTTTCC 


Kappa 


A 


\ 


1 


AdfifiSa 


Lambda 


M 


P 


m 


Mv 


Mu 


N 


V 


n 


Nv 


Nu 


H 


f 


X 


m 


Xi 








o short 


(J (XlKpOV 


Omikron 


n 


7T 


P 


m 


Pi 


p 


P 


r 


: Pa> 


Rho 


s 


<79 


s 


%Ly/jLa 


Sigma 


T 


T 


t 


Tav 


Tau 


T 


V 


u 


*T<fi\6v 


Upsilon 


$ 


4> 


ph 


m 


Phi 


X 


X 


ch 


XI 


Chi 


W 


/ \lr 


ps 


m 


Psi 


n 


a 


o long 


*12 fieya 


Omega. 



16 SOUNDS OP PARTICULAR LETTERS. [$ % 

Remark 1. Sigma at the end of a word takes the form s, e. g. ceteris, in 
most editions of the classics. This small s is also nsed in the middle of com- 
pound words, if the first part of the compound ends with Sigma, though such 
a usage is contrary to the authority of the manuscripts, e. g. irpos<pepw or 
7rpocr^)epco, dvsyevns or Svayewhs. 

Rem. 2. When <r and t come together, both letters may be expressed by one 
character, r, Sti, or Stigma. 

Rem. 3. Besides then- use as alphabetic characters, e and v were originally 
used as mere marks of aspiration, the former for the spiritus asper (§ 6), for which 
in the earliest times H was also employed, the latter for the Digamma (§ 25) ; 
hence 4 as letters, they were called, in opposition to their use as aspirates, e tyi\6v 
and v\pix6v, i. e. unaspirated. Omicron and Omega (small and large o) derive 
then name from their relative size. 

Rem. 4. The principle on which most of the letters of the Greek alphabet 
are named, is entirely different from that adopted in this country and among 
the European nations, at the present day. We name each letter by the sound 
it represents, as a, b, c, adding a vowel to the consonants in order to vocalize 
them. But among the Orientals, from whom the Greek alphabet was derived, 
the name was not determined by the sound of the letter. They gave their 
letters the name of some familiar object, the first sound or syllable of which 
was the alphabetic character to be represented. For example, the Phoenicians 
and Hebrews called the first letter of the alphabet Aleph (Greek Alpha), which 
means an ox : now the first sound or syllable of Aleph is the character or 
element to be represented. The second letter was Beth (Greek Beta), a house, 
the first sound of which is the character to be represented. The third is Gimel 
( Greek Gamma), a camel. This mode of naming letters, undoubtedly originated 
from the custom of designating those letters by the picture of the object from 
which they derived the name, instead of by the characters now used. Thus 
Aleph was represented by the picture of an ox, Beth by that of a house, etc. 

$ 2a. Sounds of particular Letters. 

The sound of the letters is indicated by the Roman characters opposite tc 
them. The following remarks on particular letters are all that is needed in 
addition : — 

Remark. The sounds given to the following letters are those more usually 
adopted in pronouncing the Greek in New England ; but the usage is not 
entirely uniform. 

A has the sound of a in fan, when it is followed by a consonant in the same 
syllable, e. g. x^-k6s ; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a single 
consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is e or i, e. g. 
avaa-rda-ecas, orpa-ri^r-ns ', also, when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a 
syllable not final, e. g. p.ey-d-\r), <rrpa-r6s; it has the sound of a in father, when 
it is followed by a single p, in the same syllable, and also when it ends a word ; 
but a final in monosyllables has the sound of a in fate, e. g. Bdp-fia-pos, yap, 
aya&d, rd. 



§ 2b.] BRIEF HISTORY OF THE ALPHABET. 17 

7, before y, k, x> an( i !> has the sound of ?z<7 in angle, or nasal n in ancle, e. g 
#77eAos, ang-gdos ; KXayyr), clangor ; 'Ayxio-ns, Anchises (Angchises) ; a-vyKOTvn, 
syncope ; \dpvyi;, larynx, y before vowels always has the hard sound, like g in 
get ; also before consonants, except 7, k, %■> £> e - g- yh as - 

e has the sound of short e in met, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
same syllable, e. g. /j.4y-as, fier-d ; the sound of long e in wie, when it ends a 
word or a syllable, or when it forms a syllable by itself, e. g. 76, 3-e-w, Pa<ri\- 
4-tes. 

7] has the sound of e in me, e. g. juoj/97. 

3- has the sound of th in thick, e. g. Swa-ros. 

* has the sound of i in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, or forms a 
syllable by itself, e. g. tXiri-o-i, on, ned-i-ov ; the sound of £ in pin, when it is 
followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. irpiu, kIv-Swos* 

k always has the hard sound of Tc, and was expressed in Latin by c, e. g. 
KiKiKia, Cilicia ; KeKpoty, Cecrops ; Kucepaj/, Cicero. 

I, at the beginning of a word or syllable, has the sound of z, e. g. i-4vos ; else- 
where, the sound of x, e. g. Sia^vca, Trpa^is, &va%. 

has the sound of short in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
same syllable, e. g. \6y-os, Kv-pos ; the- sound of long in go, when it ends a 
word or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. rS, vttS, &o-6s, ro^-6-r-ns. 

or has the sharp sound of s in son ; except it stands before fi, in the middle 
of a word, or at the end of a word after -n or co, where it has the sound of z, 
e. g. ffK-nvh, j/6/j.ia-iJ.a, yrjs, naXias : before 1 it does not have the sound of sh, as in . 
Latin, but retains its simple sound, e. g. , A(rta=A-si-a, not A-shi-a. 

t followed by 1 has its simple sound, never the sound of sh, as in Latin, e. g. 
TaKaria = Galati-a, not Galashi-a ; YLpirias =Kriti-as, not Krishi-as ; Alyvirriot. 

v has the sound of u in tulip, e. g. ri>xv j hut before p the sound of u in pure, 
e. g. Trip, y4(pvpa. 

X has the hard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. raxvs. 

u has the sound of long in note, e. g. £70. 



$ 2&. Brief history of the Alphabet. 

1. The Greeks derived most of their alphabet from the Phoenicians. Ac- 
cording to the common tradition, letters were brought into Greece by Cadmus, 
a Phoenician. The Phoenician alphabet, being nearly the same as the Hebrew, 
consisted of 22 letters, the names of which are, Aleph, Beth, Gimel, Daleth, 
He, Vau, Zain, Heth, Teth, Jod, Kaph, Lamed, Mim, Nun, Samech, Oin, Pe, 
Tsade, Koph, Kesch, Schin, Thau. Vau, the 6th letter of the Phoenician 
alphabet, was rejected by the Greeks as an alphabetic character, and used only 
as the numeral sign for 6. Koph (Greek Koppa), the 19th letter of the Phoe- 
nician alphabet, was also rejected, because its sound so nearly resembled that 
of Kaph (Greek Kappa), and was used as the numeral sign for 100. Zain 
and Tsade were modifications of the same sound ; Tsade, like the Greek Zeta, 
2* 



18 ORGANS OF SPEECH. [$ 3. 

represents the sound of both, and takes the place of Zain, becoming the 6th 
letter of the Greek alphabet, while Zain (Greek San, Sampi), was rejected as an 
alphabetic character, and used as a numerical sign for 900. Thus 19 letters of 
the Phosnician alphabet were adopted by the Greeks, as alphabetic characters. 
These are the first 19 letters of the present alphabet. To these the Greeks 
themselves added the five last letters of the alphabet, viz., v, <£, x? tyj «• This 
seems to be the most rational view of the formation of the Greek alphabet, 
though somewhat different from the common legendary account, which repre- 
sents Cadmus as bringing only 16 letters into Greece, viz., a, £, y, 5, e, t, k, A, 

ft, V, O, 7T, p, c, t, v. 

2. The alphabet was not brought at once into its present complete form. 
The old Attic alphabet contained but 21 letters. H was considered merely as 
a breathing, and the place of t\ and « was supplied by e and o, and that of ^ 
and | by ®% and X2, e. g. AI0EP (alfrnp), EX0PON (tybpuv), *2TXAI (ifwx«0f 
X2TN (tvv). The alphabet is said to have been completed in the time of the 
Persian war, by Simonides, who added E, ¥, and il, and changed the breathing 
H, to the long vowel 77. The Ionians first adopted the present full alphabet 
of 24 letters, and by them it was communicated to the Athenians. This full 
alphabet was first used in Attic inscriptions in the archonship of Euclides, 
B.C. 403, before this period only the old Attic alphabet is found in Attic 
inscriptions. 

3. The early Greeks used the capital letters exclusively, and left no spaces 
between the words, e. g. METAAETOTTONEinEXEIPl20*05, i. e. fiera 5e rov- 
tov el7T6 Xeipio-ocpos. The cursive, or small character, was not introduced till 
very late. A document has been found in Egypt written in the cursive char- 
acter, 104 b. c. But cursive writing was not in general use till long after that 
time. It is first found in manuscripts in the eighth century. 

4. The early Greeks commonly wrote in the Oriental manner, i. e. from 
right to left, as may be seen in several inscriptions. Other inscriptions, how- 
ever, of equal antiquity, are written from left to right, proving that both modes 
were in use. A third method was from left to right and right to left alternate- 
ly. This was called fiovffrpo(pTfi6v> because it resembled the turning about of 
oxen in ploughing. Solon's laws were written in this way. But in the time of 
Herodotus, the Greeks wrote only from left to right. 



§3. Organs of Speech. 

1. The organs of speech, used in forming or articulating 
words, are the palate, the throat, the tongue, and the lips. 

2. The sounds which are emitted almost without any action 
of the throat, tongue, and lips, and which proceed in the freest 
manner from the breast, are called Vowels ; the rest, Conso- 
nants. 




♦ 4.] VOWELS. 19 

§4. Vowels. 

1. The Greek has seven vowels, a, t, v, which may be 
long or short, e and o, which are always short, rj and a> 
which are always long. The character (") over one of the 
vowels a, i, v, shows that the vowel is short ; (~) that it is 
long ; (") that it may be either long or short, e. g. a, a, a. 

Remake - i o, t, and v are called the principal vowels, because they denote 
the principal sounds ; the other vowels are called subordinate, because their 
sounds are the intermediates of the principal sounds. Thus, the sound of e is 
intermediate between a and i, the sound of o is intermediate between o and v ; 
77 is produced by lengthening e or a, a by lengthening o. The relation of these 
vowels may be illustrated by the following diagram : — 

2. When two vowels are so combined as to form but 
one sound, the sound so produced is called a diphthong. 
When both the vowels are sounded, the diphthong is called 
proper ; when only one, improper. 

3. The Greek diphthongs originate from the union of the 
vowels a, e, o, v, rj, co, with the vowels i and v, thus : — 

a -j- t = ot , pronounced like ai in aisle, e. g. aftf, 

a -f- v = ay, " " au in laud, " yavs, 

e -f- * = «, " " ei in sleight, " 5ew6s, 

€ -f- V = €V, ^ 

i _ f " " eu in feudal, " eTrAevtra, i\l^ov y 

" o -f- 1 = oi, " " oi in 0i7, " kou/6s, 
o -\- v = ov t " " ou in soimJ, " ovpavSs, 
v -\- i = vi f " " wfo' in whine, " inos, 
&>"j- u = a>v, (only Ionic,) " " ou in sound, " ainSs; also the im- 
proper diphthongs, a, 77, a> (i. e. a -f- z, 77 -f~ t, w -}- t) ; " alax?^ Ke W» T ?7> T V- 

Rem. 2. The pronunciation of the diphthongs o, 77, o> is the same as that of 
the simple vowels d, 77, o>, though the ancient Greeks probably gave the 1 a 
slight sound after the other vowel. 

Rem. 3. With capital letters, the Iota subscript of o, 77, o>, is placed in a 
line with the vowels, but is not pronounced, c. g. Till KAAf2I= tw /caA.<£, rf 
At577, but $877. 



20 VOWELS. [$ 4. 

Rem. 4. The Iota subscript, which in the most nourishing period of the 
Greek language was always pronounced, at length became a silent letter, and 
was either omitted in writing, or was written under the vowel to which it 
belonged. It was first written under the vowel in the thirteenth century. 

Rem. 5. The following examples will show how the Romans sounded the 
diphthongs : ai is expressed by the diphthong ae, et by i and e, oi by oe, ov by u ; 
v was generally expressed by y, e. g. 

$cu8pos, Phaedrus ; Evpos, Eurus ; ©pawes, Thraces ; 

TXavKos, Glaucus ; Boiwrla, Boeotia ; Spfjcra-a, Thressa ; 

NelXos, Nilus ; Movcra, Musa ; rpayw^s, tragoedus ; 

Aviceiov, Lyceum ; Elxd&via, Ilithyia ; Kvpos, Cyrus. 

In words adopted later, the Romans expressed a> by o, as ^35t7, ode. 

Rem. 6. "When two vowels, which would regularly form a diphthong, are tc 
be pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called Diaeresis, placet, 
over the second vowel (t, u), e. g. aldSi, for al5o7, '6'Cs, frimvos. If the acute 
accent is on the i or v, it is placed between the points ; if the circumflex, over 
them, as cu'S^s, KAe'idi, irpavs. 

Rem. 7. The pronunciation given under § 2a, as well as that given to the 
diphthongs above, is the one more generally adopted in New England. The 
original pronunciation of the Greek is lost. It is, therefore, the commoa cus- 
tom for scholars (in each country) to pronounce it according to the analogy of 
their own language. This is the method proposed by Erasmus in the sixteenth 
century, and is generally adopted in Europe at the present day. The pronun- 
ciation defended by Reuchlin ! in the same century, corresponds nearly with 
the modern Greek. 



1 Eor the benefit of those who may wish to compare the two modes, the fol- 
lowing explanation of the Reuchlinian is extracted from the Greek Grammar 
of Sophocles: "A is pronounced like a in father, far. j8, y, 5, like b, g hard, 
d; in later times, like Romaic 13, y, 8. Before /c, 7, %•> £» 7 na ^ ^ e sound of 
ng in hang, e, like Romaic e, or Italian e. , £ like z, but stronger. 77, like Erench 
6, as in fete. £-, like th in thin, ether, saiih. t, like i in machined k, like Jc. 
\, n, bike I, m, respectively, v, like n. At the end of a word it was often pro- 
nounced and written as if it were a part of the next word, f, in the Attic 
dialect, like £s ; in the other dialects, like ks. In later times, the sound us pre- 
vailed. 0, like Romaic 0, or Italian o. 71-, like p. p, like r. At the begin- 
ning of a word it was rolled ; when it was doubled, only the second one was 
rolled. It was rolled, also, after fr, <p, %- *> l^e s in soft, past. Before fi, it 
was, in later times, sounded like £ and even changed into £ in writing ; as 
Zjxipva, for 'S/j.vpi'a., in an inscription, t, like t in tell, strong, v, like Erench u. 
<p, like/ but stronger. %» like Romaic %■> German ch, or Spanish j (x). \p, in 
the Attic dialect, like (ps ; in the other dialects, like its. In later times, the 
sound 7T5 prevailed, a, like in note, nearly. When a consonant was doubled 
in writing, it was doubled also in pronunciation. During the most flourishing 
period of the language, both the vowels of a diphthong were distinctly heard 



f 5.] CONSONANTS. 21 



§ 5. Consonants. 

1. The consonants are divided, first, according to the dif- 
ferent organs of speech, by which they are formed, into — 

Palatals, y k %, 
Linguals, & r^r v\ p <r, 
Labials, /3 it cj> p,. 

Remark 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of 
speech, are called cognate consonants ; thus 7, k, x are cognate consonants. 

2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater 
or the less influence of the organs of speech in their forma- 
tion, into breathings, liquids, and mutes. 

(a) The Breathings form a kind of transition from the 
vowels to the consonants. There are three breath- 
ings : the lingual cr; the Spiritus Asper (' ), correspond- 
ing to our h (§ 6) ; and the labial F (Digamma) ; on 
the last, see the remarks upon the Dialects. 

(b) The Liquids, \ p, v p, are so called, because they easily 
coalesce with the other consonants. 

Rem. 2. The Breathings and Liquids are also included under the common 
name of semivowels, forming a kind of transition to the full vowels. 



During the brazen age, and probably during the latter part of the silver age, 
the diphthongs ai, ei, ov, had each the power of a single vowel, ai, like ai in 
aisle ; in later times, like 77, or French £ ; during the latter part of the brazen 
age, like e. av, like ou in our, house ; in later times, like av, af. ei, like ei in 
freight, nearly ; in later times, like 1. During the silver and brazen ages, e was 
often prefixed to 1 long, merely to mark its quantity ; as Kpelvco, reiaai, reifirjaai. 
And when quantity began to be disregarded, even short 1 was represented by 
« ; as ElalSapos, ElffOKpdrr}s, yupLvao'eiapx'ho'o-s. ev, like eh-00 rapidly pro- 
nounced ; in later times, like ev, ef. 01, like oi in oil, nearly, ov, like oh-00 
rapidly pronounced ; in later times, like 00 in moon, or like French ou, Italian u. 
When the Boeotians used ov for v, they pronounced it long or short, according 
as the original v was long or short ; thus, in ovSwp, <rovv, it was short, like 00 in 
book ; in 01/A77, acrovXla, long, like 00 in moon, vt, like wi in twist ; vi, like tohi in 
whip; in later times, like v. As to the diphthongs o, ??, &>, av, -nv, ccv, tney 
differed from ai, ei, 01, av, ev, ov only in the prolongation of the first vowel. 
In later times, a, 77, <? were pronounced like d, 77, w, respectively." — Tr. 



22 



BREATHINGS. 



[16. 



(c) The Mutes are formed by the strongest exertion of the 
organs of speech ; they are, fi^B^/cirr^x. 

3. The Mutes are divided, 

(a) According to the organ of speech used in pronouncing 
them, into three Palatals, three Linguals, and three 
Labials ; 

(b) According to their names, into three Kappa, three 
Tau, and three Pi-mutes ; 

(c) According to the force of articulation, into three smooth, 
three medial, and three rough Mutes. 

Rem. 3. Hence each of the nine mutes may be considered in a threefold 
point of view, e. g. y may be called a palatal, a kappa-mute, or a medial, ac- 
cording as we wish to bring into view the organ by which it is pronounced, its 
name, or the force of articulation, a medial mute requiring less force to articu- 
late it than a rough mute. 





SMOOTH. 


MEDIAL. 


ROUGH. 




Palatals 


K 


7 


X 


Kappa-mutes 
Tau -mutes 


Linguals 


T 


S 


$ 


Labials 


7T 


P 


* 


Pi-mutes 



Bem. 4. The consonants, which are produced by the same effort of the 
organs, are called coordinate, e. g. the smooth mutes, k, it, t, are coordinate. 

4. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the Breath- 
ing cr, three double consonants originate, — 

$ from irff /3<r <pff, as rv^w (ttc), x^ vx P (&<*)•> Ka.TT]\ity (<£<r), 

£ from K<r y<r x°", as tcSpat (k<t), Ae£<y (ytr), awt, (xc), 

£ is not, like ^ and £, to be regarded as a sound compounded of two con- 
sonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft z. 
Only in the adverbs in £e, is £ to be considered as composed of otf, e. g. 
'A&-})vci(e instead of 'ASrjvasde ; also, Pv(t)v (close), for $vg$t)v (from fivv4a>, 
to stop, Perf. fiifivfffxai). It may be regarded, perhaps, as a transposition 
of sounds, as when the JEolic and Doric dialects use, in the middle of 
a word, <rS instead of £, e. g. /teAurSercu for fie\lCerai. 



§ 6. Breathings. 
1. Every word beginning with a vowel has a smooth or 
a rough Breathing; the former (Spiritus Lenis) is indi- 



$$ 7, 8.] hiatus. 23 

cated by the mark ( ' ) ; the latter (Spiritus Asper) by the 
mark ( f ). The rough breathing answers to the English 
and Latin h, e. g. iaropia, historia, history. The smooth 
breathing is connected with every vowel which has not the 
rough ; but the smooth has no influence on the pronuncia- 
tion, e. g. ^AiroXKwv, Apollo. 

Remark 1. With diphthongs, the breathing is placed over the second vowel, 
e. g. otos, ev&vs, avriKa. But when the improper diphthongs, a, r), &?, are capital 
letters, the breathing is placed over the first vowel, as these three diphthongs 
are regarded, to a certain extent, as simple vowels, e. g. "Aidris ($5tjs) ; ®Hi,*fli 

Rem. 2. Originally, the Greeks had no mark for the smooth breathing. The 
rough breathing was at first denoted by E or H. But when H came to be used 
as a vowel, Aristophanes of Byzantium, about 200 years b. c, divided it into 
two characters I- and i, the former as the sign of the rough breathing, the 
latter of the smooth. Later, these became ( r ) and ( ), and at last ( ' ) and ( ' ). 

Rem. 3. The liquid p at the beginning of words has the rough breathing, 
e. g. pdfSSos. When two p's come together, the first has the smooth breathing, 
the last the rough, e. g. Uvppos, Pyrrhus ; but some editors omit both breath- 
ings, e. g. Uvppos. 

Rem. 4. At the beginning of a word, v always has the rough breathing, 
except in the JEolic dialect. 



CHANGES OF LETTERS. 

§ 7. General Remark. 

Both the vowels and consonants are subject to a variety of 
changes. These changes result from the tendency of the 
language to euphony, from their grammatical significance, and 
from the difference of dialects. The last will be considered 
in treating of the Dialects. 



I. Changes of the Vowels. 

$ 8. Hiatus. 

The concurrence of two vowels in two successive sylla- 
bles or words, occasions a harshness in the pronunciation, 



24 EUPHONIC CONTRACTION OF VOWELS. [$ 9. 

called Hiatus. This is avoided by Contraction, Crasis, 
Synizesis, and Elision. 

Remark 1. The poets, particularly the Attic, were decidedly averse to the 
Hiatus of two vowels in two successive words ; among the prose-writers, the 
orators sought most carefully to avoid it. 

Eem. 2. In the Iambuses of the tragic poets, the Hiatus is allowed in the 
interrogative ri; what? e.g. ti olv ; ri e?7res; among the comic poets, its use is 
mostly confined to t(, on, irept, 5, e.g. on is, on oy%f, irepl v/xwy, also in ot>5e 
(jUTjSe) efs (eV), ne unus quidem, to distinguish it from ovSels, nullus. In addition 
to its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is found frequently, even in the 
Tragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when possible ; still, it is mostly limited 
to special cases ; for example, it occurs with interjections and imperatives, e. g. 
t*>, val, &ua {up!), ffri, as fth, ?£n fioi iraiciv, Soph. Ph. 832; aAA" &va, e| ISpd 
vtov, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus in the Epic dialect, see § 200. 



§ 9. A. Contraction of Vowels. 

Contraction is the union of two successive vowels in the 
same word into one long syllable. These contractions arise 
either from the natural coalescence of two successive vowels, 
in accordance with the laws of euphony, or from grammatical 
principles. The first kind of contractions is called euphonic, 
the latter, grammatical. In the Common language, the follow- 
ing contractions occur : — 

I. Euphonic Contractions. 



(a) o -f- a 




= a 


as 


• ff4\aa = treAd 


* +* 




= et 


cc 


4>t Aee = </>iAei ( Comp. No. II.) 


« +< 




= r 


« 


7r6pni = iropri 


-f- 




= ov 


ti 


v6os = vovs 


(b) « -M 


} 




u 


riy-ae == rifid 


a +?? 


= d 


cc 


rifxdrjTe = TifxaTt 


a -f- l 




= ty 


CC 


yfipaX = yhpa. 


.a -f" o 


I 


= ft) 


cc 


n/xdo/xev = rificifiev 


a -\~ <a 


I 




H 


n/xdufiev = n\x5>^v 


a -f~ « 


} 




(C 


nfxdeis = Tt/ms 


a + V 


= a 


a 


nfxdrjs = nfias 


a -f- oi 




= <P 


cc 


ri/xdoifii — Tificpfii 


a -f~ ov 




== a> 


« 


TlfjidoV = TljUW 


(c) e + d 




= V 


cc 


reixed = retx^ (Comp. No. II.) 


e -f- d 




= d 


cc 


Xoed = xoa 


* +* 




= et 


" 


reixe'i = t^X €1 


e+o 




= ov 


" 


<pi\soLisv = (piXovfjLev 


€ -J- ft» 


W) 


— &> (w) 


(1 


<pl\4b) = C^tAft), OCTTGCp = OffT^ 


« -f- at 




*■ V 


" 


rinrrecu = Tw7rr?7 



♦ 9.] GRAMMATICAL CONTRACTIONS. 25 



€ -f- et 


= €1 


as: 


(piXeeis = <pi\eis 


e + V 


= # 


u 


<f>i\er]S — 4>i?\.rjS 


6 + 01 


= CU 


" 


<pi\<zois = (pi\o?s 


6 -f- OV 


= OV 


u 


cpiXeov = (piXov 


(d) 7, + C 


= V 


a 


vXrjecro'a = vtJqcrcrct. 


7? +i 


= T? 


u 


Qprjicrcra = &pjicrcra, 


77 +et 


= I? 


a 


Tl/J.-f}HS = Tl/J.fjs 


(e) t + « 




u 


ir6pTias = irdprls 


• +6 


= t 


" 


TrSpries = irSprls 


(f)o+ « 


= 0) 


(( 


ald6a = ai'ctco (Comp. No. II.) 


o+e 


= OV 


a 


jxicr^oe = /xioSov 


0+7? 


= CO 


" 


[Aia&SrjTe = /AioSaTe 


•+« 


= 01 


" 


cuSo'i = aiciot 


O 4" w (<?) 


= co (co) 


" 


fAia&oo) = fiicrfroj, irX6ca = ir\cp 


o +«' 


= at 


« 


anX6ca = airXa? 


4" et 




" 


/xia&oei = fxioSroT (Comp. Rem. 2.) 


o +?7 


= ot 


a 


/AL0-&6r) = fAlO~&0? 


0+01 




" 


{xio'&6oijJ.i = /jLioSoipu 


4" ou 


= OV 


cc 


p.iarSrSovo'i = fiicr&ovo~i 


(g) v + « 




" 


lx&vus = t'x^vs 


!>-}-* 


= V 


(( 


iX&ves = t'x^Ss 


U + 7? 




cc 


SetKj/urjrcu = demyvTcu (rarely) 


(h) co + a 


=== CO 


u 


ripcoa = fya (only in Ace. of some Sub. of 


a> 4 * 


= V 


u 


Acotcrroy = Aa><TTos. [3d Dec 



Remark 1. The above contractions take place in accordance with the fol- 
lowing principles: (1) Both vowels are retained and form a diphthong, e. g. 
Tetxei" = Tei'xei, al86i = aldo?. (2) Both vowels coalesce into a cognate long 
vowel or diphthong, e. g. riixdojxev = ri/xcofxey, alSoa = atSco. (3) A short vowel 
is absorbed by a diphthong or long vowel preceding or following it ; e. g. 
c/>iAeco = c/uAco, <pi\eov = (pi\ov, uArjecrcra = vKr\craa. (4) The short vowels, a, *, 
u, absorb the following vowel and become long ; e. g. rluae = tl/xo., Ix&vas = 
tx^^s- (5) A short vowel coalesces with the first vowel of a diphthong, ac- 
cording to the preceding principles : when the second vowel is i, it is subscribed 
with a°ri, co, but if it is any other vowel it is dropped 5 e. g. Ti/j.drjs — rifxas, 
TifiaoijXL = TCfx$[JA -■-■ Tifidov = ri/iw, Tvirreai = tvtttt]. 

II. Grammatical Contractions. 

(a) e -j- e = 77, particularly in the third Dec, e. g. rpi-fipee = rpiriprj, y4ve<= 

= yivt). 

(b) c -h a = a in the second Dec, e. g. bo"r(a — octtS, xp^°~ ea = XP va ^ 

(PL), and elsewhere, if a vowel precedes, e. g. ITepi/cAe-ea =» 
IlepiKAed, K\4-za == /cAed, uyt-ea == ^ia ; ill the Ace PI. 
Pern, of Adjectives in -eos, -ea, -eov, e. g. xpvo*e-as = XP V0 ~" S 5 
finally, in the Pem. of Adjectives in -eos, -ea, -eov, when 
these endings are preceded by a vowel or p, e. g. ipe-eos, 
e-ea, e-eo;/ = epeoDs, ipea, ipeovv, apyvpeos, ea, eov = ovs, 
a, ovv. 

3 



28 CRASIS. [$ 10 

e -J- a = t\ in the Fern. Sing, of adjectives in -eos, not preceded by q 
yowel or p ; e. g. %pu<rea =•■ xpuo-77, xp u<r * as — XP v<r V s - 

c + a = €f i n Accusatives PL in eas of third Dec, e. g. (ra<pe-as = era 
4>€?s ; so 7rjAeJs, fleets, eyxeAeis, from 7r^Aeas, etc. 
(c) o -f" « = 6 i n Adjectives in oos, on, <W, e. g. cwrA<$-a = a7FAa. 

c-f*'? = 'J m Adjectives in oW, o'n, oV, e. g. cwtAo-tj = curA?}. 

o + a = ou in Accusative PI. of (3ovs ; so also p.el£oas = fie'i^ovs, and 
the like. 

Rem. 2. The contraction of oet into ov is found only in the Inf. Act. of 
jerbs in 6a, and is accounted for from the fact that the Inf. originally ended in 
£v t not in eiv (consequently, not /iicr&6eiv = /.ua&ovv, but /j.uT&6ep = /j.i<r&ovv}, 
and in adjectives in 6eis, e. g. 'OirSeis = 'Oirovs, in which the root ends in owr, 
and consequently the t does not belong to the root. On the accentuation of 
contract forms, see § 30. 

Rem. 3. The Tragic poets sometimes neglect the contractions on account 
of the measure, yet only in the lyric and anapestic passages, not written in the 
pure Attic dialect, e. g. ko\4co, Aesch. Ag. 147 ; Too^ueW, Prom. 542 ; velneos, 
Sept. 936; eVeo, Soph. OC. 182; evpii, Trach. 114. 

Rem. 4. Sometimes the grammatical importance of the ending, or the form 
of the nominative, prevents the usual contraction, especially if the ending 
would thereby become doubtful. 

$ 10. B. Crasis. 

1. Crasis (icpacTis) is the coalescence of the final and 
initial vowels of two successive words into one long sylla- 
ble, e. g. to ovofia = TOvvofia, to eiro<;=Tov7ro$. 

Remark 1. The mark of Crasis is the same as that of the Spiritus 
Lenis ( ' ), and is named Coronis. It is placed over the vowel or diphthong 
formed by Crasis, but is omitted when the word begins with a vowel or diph- 
thong so formed, because it would then coincide with the Spiritus Lenis, e. g. 
Ta ayafrd = raya^d ; h&v = av] 3) avfrpcaire = tivfrpooire. On the accentuation, 
see § 31, II; on the change of the smooth Mute into the rough before the 
Spiritus Asper, as to vScap = frovdap, see 4 below, and § 17, Rem. 3. 

2. Crasis is found only with closely connected words, the first 
of which is unimportant; hence it most frequently occurs, (a) 
with the article, e. g. 6 dvrjp = avtjp, rov avdpos = ravSpos ; — (b) 
frequently with Kat and the interjection w, e. g. kcu apcrr) = KapcT-rj, 
S) avSpwnre = wv#pco7re, w dya#e = <oya#e, a> ava£ = wva£ ; — (c) some- 
what often in eyco with oTSa and oTjxaL, e. g. eywSa, eyw/xat; — 
(d) less often with the neuter relative o and a, as o ey<o, a cyc6 = 
ovyui, dya>; with to£, jjl£vtol, ovtol, particularly in connection 



§ 11.] MOST COMMON INSTANCES OF CRASIS. 27 

With av, dpa, e. g. rav (seldom in prose), jaevraV; rapa and ovrapa 
(poetic) ; but seldom with -rpo, e. g. irpovpyov for 7rpo epyov; fre- 
quently in composition with the augment i, as rrpovSioKa. 

3. As the second word is the most important, it has properly 
a greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the first ; on 
this principle it is to be explained, that the Iota subscript is 
used only when the t belongs to the last of the two vowels, 
e. g. Kal ura = Kara, eyu) olSa = eycoSa ; on the contrary, Kal eTTei- 
to, = Kajrctra; at dya$at = dyaS-ai, to o^Aa) = rw^Aa). 

4. When Crasis occurs with the article, and an a follows, the 
vowels of the article — even ov and a> — are combined with the 
following a into a long a, and, if the article is aspirated, the 
aspirate is transferred to the long a, e. g. 6 dvrjp = dvrjp, ol aVSpes 
= avSpes, to a\r)$4s = "flaXrj^s, rd aAAa = raAAa, tov dvSpos = rdvSpos, 
tw dvSpc = ravSpl ; also, tov avTOv = tovtov, tco avTw = ravrw. 

Rem. 2. Also the forms of the article ending in a, o, ov, a, co, 01, ai, among 
the Attic poets, combine with the first vowel of eTepos (Doric aTepos), and 
form long a; when the second word has the aspirate, as here, the preceding 
smooth mute must he changed into the cognate rough; see also § 17, Eem. 3. 
e.g.: — 

to, erepa = fraTepa 5 IVepos = arepos tov erepov = &a.T4pov 

t§ eTepco = SaTepco ol tTepoi = aTepoi ai eTepai = aVepoi 

5. In Crasis, at of the particle /cat coalesces with the follow- 
ing vowel, the a being sometimes retained and sometimes 
absorbed, e. g. Kat eKetvos = KaKetvos, Kat aV = kolv, /cat ku = Kav, Kat 
eyu) = Kayco [Kat et = xet, /cat et? = kzIs, poetic], Kat rjXS-ov = kt)\$ov 
[#at ov = kov, Kat cvSat/xiDV = KevSat^v, poetic]. 

§ 11. Summary of the most common instances of 
Crasis. 

(a) The following cases conform to the rules of contraction 
given in $ 9 : — 

a-f-a = d; a -f- 6 = a ; a -}- o = &> ; o-f-o = ou; 

o -f- e = ou ; o-j-i=oi; 77 — }— € == ■»? ; a> -{- a = s#. 

(b) The following instances belong to Crasis only: — 
o -\- v = ou as : to vdap = frovdcop (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 

o -f~ av = « u '* T ^ auT<£ = ravro 
© -f- at = a '"' ^ atrioj/ = t&tiov 



28 SYNIZESIS. ELISION. [$$ 12, 13. 

o -f- oi = q> as : 6 olvos = qvos 

o -{- V — V "to Tj/jLtrepov = brj/AeTepov (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 

« T € = w " tw e/^y = Tafia) 

a) -\- o = to " rci) 6(p&a\fxca = TcMp^raA/xti 

ot -f- a == a n [agvtoi aV == fxevT&v 

oi -f- e = ou " trot etrny = trouo-rt;/, juot eScfoet = /xov56k€i (both poetic, 

OU -j- 6 = OU " 7T0D eCTiJ/ = TToZcTlV 

OV -j- = OU " TOU OVOfiaTOS = TOVv6jJ.aTOS 

ov -\-v — ov " tou {/Saros = 3-o#5aros (§17, Rem. 3.) 

77 -J- ?7 = 17 " TJiyixepa = ^Tj/xepa (§ 17, Rem. 3.) 

« -j- ot = <£ " 6701) oI5a = iycfda 

ov -)- 7j = 7) " toD rjfxeTepov = &7ijj.eTepov, poetic. (§17, Rem. 3.) 

ov -\- ov = ov " tou ovpavov = Tovpavov 

at -J- et = a " /cal erra = /caTa 

(c) Here belong the examples given under § 10, 4 and 5. 



§ 12. C. Synizesis. 

1. Synizesis is the contraction in pronunciation of two 
vowels into one syllable, e. g. when yu-77 ov is pronounced as 
a monosyllable. It can occur only among the poets, but 
may have been used in the common colloquial language. 

Remark. The difference between Contraction and Synizesis is, that in the 
ordinary Contraction and also in Crasis, the contraction is made in writing, 
e. g. (piKw from (piXeca, Tovpavov from tov ovpavov ; but in Synizesis, it is made 
only in the pronunciation, both vowels or diphthongs being written out in full. 

2. In the Attic poets, Synizesis occurs almost exclusively 
between two words, viz., with hrd, fj, rj, fxrj, followed by a, ov, a, 
ot, e. g. €7ret ou, rj otjoVs (dissyllable), firj ov (monosyllable), fiTj 
aAAot, eya) ov (dissyllable), and eyw ct/xt S. Ph. 577; also, in a 
few single words and forms, e. g. Seoc (=$ot, monosyllable), 
iwpaKa (=t5pa/«x, trissyllable), avewy /jl£vo<s (= avcoy fievos, four sylla- 
bles), particularly in the Ionic- Attic Genitive -ew?, as ©-^o-ews 
(dissyllable). On Synizesis in Homer, see § 236. 

§ 13. D. Elision. 

1. Elision is the omission of a short final vowel before 
the initial vowel of the following word. It occurs also in 
compounds, but the apostrophe is then omitted. 



f 14.] USE OF ELISION IN THE POETS. 29 

Remark 1. The mark of Elision is tne same as tnat of the Spiritus Lenis, 
and is called apostrophe, as tovt etrriu, yevoir dv. 

Rem. 2. Elision differs from Crasis in that the former elides the vowel, 
while the latter lengthens it, e. g. aAA' dye (Elision), Ta &AAa = rdXXa (Crasis). 
This distinction, however, does not hold, when the second word begins with a 
long vowel or diphthong, e. g. rb avr6 = ravrd. 

2. In the prose writers, Elision is confined mainly to the 
following cases, where it often occurs: — 

(a) In prepositions which end in a vowel, except irepi and irpb] also pexP 1 
and &xph "used as prepositions, but rarely in evena, e. g. St oTkov, en oIkov, but 
nepl oIkov, irpb (hkov. Elision is regular in composition, except with irepi, irpo, 
and sometimes d/x<pi, e. g. aveXd-elv, but irepiopav) 

(b) In conjunctions and adverbs, aXXd, dpa, dpa, d/xa, elra, eiretra, fxaXa, 
txdKKTTa, rdxa, and in many other adverbs ending in a before dv ; also in the 
following adverbs and conjunctions, 'iva, ye, re, 5e, ovSe, /xr}54, &<rre, '6re (not 
3tj), 7roTe (with the compounds, as oijirore), rdre, en, ovk<£ti, fiTjKCTi ; e. g. aXX' 
avros, dp' oiiv, fiaXiCT dv] 

(c) In forms of pronouns in a, o, e, as ravra, roiavra, dXXa, riva ; irdrepa 
more rare ; tovto, avro, i/xe, <re, <rd (never in t6, rd) ; also in nouns and adjectives 
of the second and third declensions, ending in a, as dpapT'fifj.aTa, etc. ; dpurra, 
etc. ; epya, e. g. ravr avrd, irdvr dya&d, xp^crr' els (pepei ; 

(d) In <p7)n'i, 615a, olcr&a, and generally in verbal forms in fit, tri, i,[a, <e, o, e. g. 
(p-flfi ey&, oW dvdpa, eXeyer dv, irvirrovT dv, yevoir'' dv ; of the forms which 
admit the v Paragogic (§ 15), in prose, only eVri often suffers elision ; 

(e) In certain familiar phrases, as vrj AC ecprj. 

Rem. 3. The above elisions are most frequent in the orators, particularly 
Isocrates, much more seldom in the historians. 

Rem. 4. A smooth mute before an aspirate is ^changed into the correspond- 
ing rough, as irdvtf ocra. 

Rem. 5. A vowel, followed by a punctuation-mark, cannot be elided. Hence, 
in Avords closely connected, as vr} AC e<pr], the comma is omitted, for in such cases, 
without doubt, the ancients pronounced the words in quick succession. On 
accent in Elision, see § 31, III. 



§ 14. Use of Elision in the Poets. 

1. The use of Elision in poetry is very frequent, and much more extended 
than in prose 5 yet the following points are to be noted : A word ending in u is 
never elided ; nor a, 1, in a monosyllable ; hence the article t6, and the pro- 
nouns t\ and ti, are not elided ; and irepi in no case, — at least among the Attic 
poets, — nor otl, jxexph &XPh nor substantive adverbs of place ending in frt 
(ofri excepted), and very rarely the Optative ending in eie. 

2. The Elision of the 1 in the Dat. of the third Dec, particularly in the 
Sing., is ve*y rare in the Attic poets, and is even doubted by many. 

3. The verbal endings, fxai, rat, <r&cu, which are short in respect to the 

3# 



30 N Paragogic. [$ 15. 

accent, are rarely elided in the Attic poets : the Datives fioi and aoi are neve? 
elided. 

4. In the verbal forms which may take the v Paragogic {1^\kv<ttik6v), the 
poets use Elision or the v, according to the necessities of the verse. 

5. Sometimes in Attic poetry, a weak and grammatically unimportant sylla- 
ble is excluded by a preceding long vowel ; this is specially the case with the 
augment e, e. g. rax el ' iropevcrav, Soph. OC. 1602, eVel 'Sa/cpuca, Phil. 360. This 
omission of the vowel is called aphaeresis (atyalpeffis). It can also occur after 
a punctuation-mark, e. g. cppdorco ' VetS^ ri^co • VI tovtoii. 

$15. N Paragogic (e^eAKuo-riKoi/). — Ovroi(<s). — *E$ and 

€K. Ov (k). 

1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of two vowels 
in two successive words is by appending a v, (v 1$<l\kv(ttik.6v, or 
Paragogic,) to certain final syllables, viz. : — 

(a) to the Dat. PL in en, to the adverbs iripvai, navTa-irao-i, and 

all adverbs of place ill on, as Traaiv eA.e£a; rj HXaraLaarcv 

rjyejxovLa ; 
(/?) to the third Pers. Sing, and PL in <n, as rvirrovcnv e/x,e, 

rtS-rjo-LV Iv rrj rpcLTritfl ; so also with eort ; 
(y) to the third Pers. Sing, in e, e. g. 'drvirrev ifxe; 
(8) to the numeral eiKoo-t, though even before vowels the v 

is often omitted, e. g. ukoo-lv avopes and cUocri avSpes ; 
(c) to the Demonstrative C (§ 95, e) but rarely, and then 

always after <r, e. g. ovrocrcv, Ikuvoctiv, rovrovoriv, ovtqxtlv ; 
(£) to the Epic particles, vv and k4, and to the Epic suffix <fa; 

hence also to vocrfja. 

Remark. The poets place the v Paragogic before a consonant, so as to make 
a short syllable long by position. In Attic prose, it stands regularly at the end 
of a book or section ; it is, also, sometimes found before the longer punctuation- 
marks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of a more emphatic pronun 
ciation. 

2. The adverb ovVw? always retains its full form before a 
vowel, but drops the final 5 before a consonant, e. g. ovrm lirovq- 
a-ev, but ovto) 7roiw ; still, ovto)<s may stand even before consonants, 
when it is to be made emphatic, e. g. ovrcog ye, Xen. C. 3. 6, 9. 

3. So the Prep. i£ retains its full form before vowels and at 
the end of a sentence, but before consonants becomes Ik, e. g. 
H €lprjvi]s, but e/c tt)s dprjvrjs ; so also in composition, e. g. e|eAav- 



f 16.] STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VOWELS. 31 

r«v, but iKreXcLv. It also has its full form when it stands after 
the word it governs, and is then accented, dprjvqs e£. 

4. So ovk has its full form before a vowel, e. g. ovk aur^oos; 
before a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes oi>x, e. g. 
ovx "9&;s ; but before a consonant, ov, e. g. ov xaA.o? ; so also /x-^Ken 
(instead of ^ Zti) after the analogy of ovkItl. 

Rem. 2. When ov stands at the end of a discoiu-se, or of a sentence, and is 
to be pronounced with emphasis, the form ov with the acute accent is used 
even before a vowel ; in this case there must be an actual break in the discourse, 
as when ov stands at the end of an answer expressed interrogatively, without 
connection with what follows, as Ua>s yap ov; ? Ap 5 ovv kt\. Xen. C. 4. 2, 37 ; 
or when it is found in the answer only, and corresponds to our No ; it is found 
especially in antithetical sentences, e. g. Taya&d, to 5e kana o v : 'Eav 5e kt\. 
Xen. C. 1 . 2, 42 ; Al&ovs els rov iroraixbu ipptrrTOvv, e^iKi/ovvrc Te ov, owre efiXair- 
tov ovdiva. An. 4. 8, 3. If, on the contrary, the following sentence is closely 
connected with the preceding, then it is written ovk, e. g. ovk, oAAa kt\. Xen. 
C. 2. 6, 11. and 13 j 4. 6, 2; ovk, el or ¥,v ktX. Hell. 1. 7. 19. 

§ 16. Strengthening, Weakening, Prolongation, Slwrtening, Inter- 
cliange, and Variation of Vowels. — Influence of a Vowel or 
a Consonant on another Vowel. — Syncope. — Omission of a 
Vowel. — EupJwnic Protlwsis. 

The changes, which further take place in vowels, are : — 

i. Strengthening of vowels ; this consists in changing a weaker vowel into a 
stronger (see § 4, Eem. 1). There are different degrees of strength in the 
vowels ; the weakest is e. The strengthening takes place, e. g. in words of the 
third Dec. in os, Gen. -eos; the pure stem of these words ends in es: in the 
Nom., however, which prefers fuller forms, the weaker e is changed into the 
stronger o (in Latin into it), e. g. yevos, genus, Gen. yeveos (instead of yevev-os), 
genZr-is. In yow and $6pv (Gen. ySvar-os, dSpar-os), a, the final vowel of the 
stem, is changed into the stronger v. 

2. The weakening or attenuation of vowels ; this is the opposite of the 
change just described; it occurs, e. g. in substantives of the third Dec. in -is, -?, 
-vr , -v ; in these, the stronger stem-vowels i and v are changed into the weaker e, 
e. g. rr6\is, Tr6\co)S ; irr}x vs > ^VX ecos 5 vlvam, aivaireos ] 'do~Tv, dcreos. So with 
adjectives in -vs, -v, e. g. yXvKvs, yXvKv, Gen. -eos. 

3. Prolongation of vowels ; this changes a short vowel into a long vowel or 
diphthong, viz. a into t\ or at ; t into I or et ] v into v or ev ; e into rj or et ; into 0* 
or ov. This prolongation takes place either for the sake of euphony, or from 
grammatical reasons, or from both together 5 in the poets often on account of the 
metre. The prolongation of vowels is very prevalent in the Greek language. 
One instance only is here mentioned, namely, the strengthening of the Present 

in Mute and Liquid verbs, e. g. Kptvu, jiAOww, \<qbw, <paiu(o, Xe'nru, <pevy» t 



32 INTERCHANGE AND VARIATION OF VOWELS. [$ 16. 

instead of Kpfvoo, irxtvw, \a£na, <pav<a, xiira, cpvyw. — The reason of the prolon- 
gation is very often found in the omission ofay with a Tau-mute, more rarely 
of a mere v, or in the omission of a <r after a Liquid, or of a final Sigma, e. g. 
bSovs instead of 6d6vrs, didovs instead of 5iB6vts, $ov\svu>v instead of jSwAeu- 
ovrs ; fj.4\5.s instead of [xiKavs ; tacp-nKa instead of ecr<£aA<ra, tfyyeiKa instead of 
tfyyeXva, ecpfreipa instead of e<p&epaa; p-firap instead of pyrops, ito\pA\v instead 
of -Koijxevs, dai/Mav instead of dalpovs, alb'cas instead of aldoas, dATjd^s instead of 

4. Shortening of vowels. See the remarks on the Dialect? § 207. 

5. Interchange of vowels ; this consists in softening a long vowel into a 
short one, and as a compensation, in lengthening the short vowel immediately 
following. Thus, in the Ionic and Attic dialects, e&> instead of do, e. g. *Aews, 
-ay, instead of ?\aos, -ov, AecSs instead of Ados, vedcs "instead of vdos, MeveAews 
instead of MeveAdos ; further, in the Attic dialect, fiacriXeccs, /3a<nAed instead of 
the Ionic fiacriXrjos, -77a; so also, ir6\e<as, -ni]x^s 9 Attic, instead of ir6teos s 
irfjxvos ; e is weaker than 1 and v 9 see No. 2. 

6. Variation, i. e. the change of the radical vowel e into o and a, for the 
formation of the tenses (§ 140) and derivatives- (§ 231, 6); when ei in the 
Present is lengthened from the radical 1, it becomes 0: in the second Perf., but 
when from the radical e, it becomes o ; e. g. Tpifyta, rerpocpa, irpa^7}v ; AeiTrw 
(root Anr), AeAoiira ; cp&elpa (root <p&ep), e<p&opa, icp&apriv ; (pheyoe, <£Ao| ; rpix*** 
rpoxos] rpccpcc, rpcxp-f], rpocpevs, rpacpepds. Comp. Germ, stehle, gestohlen, stahl, 
English, ring, rang, rung. The rj is changed into a, e. g. ap-fjya, apcoy-fj. 

Rejiakk. I. Whether the o is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as a 
euphonic change of e, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, partic- 
ularly p and A, sometimes even /n and v, may be doubted. Comp. %rpaicov 9 
irpd(p7]v, icrTpdcprjv, e&paxWi eSapTjy, icp&dpriv, iffrdtoiVy eTa^uw, itcravov with 
i^eyrjp, erekov. 

7. Change of a vowel by the influence of another vowel or of a consonant 
Here belong two special cases: — 

(a) The Attic writers change the Ionic t\ into a after the vowels e and 1 and 
the diphthongs ending with 1, sometimes even after other vowels, and 
after the Liquid p, e. g. idea (Ion. iSerj), aocpia, xP e ' iC h V^P ^ tyy v P*9 
iiriava, iir4pa.ua ; 

(b) The union-vowel e in verbs in a, is changed into before the terminations 
beginning with \x and v, e. g. fiav\eva}xev % fiovXevovTai, efiovXevo/xev, ifiov 
Kevovro. 

8. Syncope {ervyKorrri), i.e. the omission of e in the middle of a word between 
a Mute and a Liquid, or between two Liquids, or between -m ; the same, also, 
occurs in the declension of certain substantives of the third Dec, e. g. irarpSs 
instead of iraripos ; in the forming of the Present tense of certain verbs, e. g. 
y'tyvopai instead of yiyevofiai, tt'ltttu instead of mirercc, jxifxvta instead of fiifxeuco ; 
and in the formation of the tenses of some verbs, e. g. rjypS/x-nu from iyelpw ; 
Syncope rarely occurs after c, e. g. %ax<>v, effir6p.r\v, ecrrai, instead of eo-exov, 
iffeirSfiriVy Zaerai. A striking example of Syncope is found in ^A^oy instead 
of %\v&ov, from 'EAEYQfl. Comp. § 155. 



♦ 17.] 



MUTES. 



33 



9. Apocope. See on the Dialects, § 207. 

10. One of the vowels a, e, o is prefixed to several words, for the sake of 
euphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, e. g. ao-repoTTy and crepoiri], aarcvpis 
and <rTa<pis, ex&es and x&* s > ineivos and tceTvos, i&4\a and i&eAcu, oupvoeis and 
Kpvos, bdvpo/xai and dvpoficu, o/ceAAa> and /ceAAco, etc. 

Kem. 2. Erom these euphonic letters care must he taken to distinguish 
(1) o when it stands for airS, e. g. a-jxvvtiu, to avert, or when used instead of 
ova, e. g. afxixra-eiu, to tear up, or instead of the a or a copulative with the 
meaning of d/xa, from which also a intensive has heen formed ; (2) e, when it 
is used instead of e| or eV, e. g. iyelpeiv, to wake up, ipcvyeiv, eructare, ip&eiv, 
irritare ; (3) o with the meaning of dfxov, e. g. dfxix^n- 



II. Changes of the Consonants. 
$ 17. a. Mutes. 

1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a great degree, 
from the tendency of language to assimilate different sounds. 
This assimilation is either a mere resemblance in sounds, as 
when XeAey-raris changed into AcAe/crou, the smooth r chang- 
ing the medial y into the smooth k ; or it is a complete identity 
in sounds, as when o-vv-pltttu is changed into crvppiirr<o. — ■ 
Sometimes, however, the language shuns a sameness in sound, 
and seeks to remove it by changing similar sounds into dissim- 
ilar, e. g. Tre-c^iATyKa for ^e-^tA^Ka, %cnr(fnx> for 2;a<£<£co. 

2. A Pi-mute (w f$ <j>) or a Kappa-mute (k y x) before a Tau- 
mute (t 8 £) must be coordinate with the Tau-mute, i. e. only 
a smooth Mute {v k) can stand before the smooth r ; only a 
medial (/? y) before the medial 8; only an aspirate (<£ x) before 
the aspirate $; consequently, ttt and kt; /3o and yS; <£# and 

[from rplfZa)) 
ypd<po>) 
X4yw ) 
ft>eX«0 

KU7TTC0) 

ypd<pci) ) 
7rAe/c&;) 
^pexw) 
Trifxivd} ) 
T/3i/3o>) 
■7rAeKO>) 
Ae-yo)) 



before t 


into 7r as : ( 


<J> 


(C 


T 


a 


7T " ( 


7 


u 


T 


a 


K " ( 


X 


(( 


T 


" 


K " ( 


7T 


cc 


8 


a 


£ " ( 


* 


u 


s 


(( 


" ( 


K 


u 


5 


<( 


7 " ( 


X 


u 


5 


" 


7 " ( 


7T 


a 


a 


(C 


4> " ( 


IB 


(C 


;» 


« 


<t> " ( 


K 


(( 


a 


M 


X" ( 


T 


li 


» 


U 


X " ( 



rirpiP-rai 


= rirpiiTTai 


yeypa<p-Tcu 


= yiypa-Krtu 


AeAe-y-rcu 


= AeAe/crax 


jSe^/jex-Toi 


= fiefip<=KT<u 


/cu7r-5a 


= KvfiSa 


ypd(p-8r]V 


= ypd&8r,v 


7rAe'/c-57?j/ 


= irXeySrjv 


/3pe'x-577J/ 


= fipeySTjv 


iTr4/j.Tr-fr7iv 


= iirefxcp&riv 


eTpifi-frriv 


= iTp'l(p&T]V 


£tt\4k-&7)V 


= iir\4x&nv 


£A4y-frr)v 


= eAex^y. 



S4 MUTES. [§ 17 

Kemark 1. The preposition e/c remains unchanged, probably by virtue of an 
original movable <r, thus e/cy, e. g. e/cSowcw, infrelveu, etc., not iydovvai t ex&«Vcu. 

3. The smooth Mutes (-n- k t) before a rough breathing, are 
changed into the cognate aspirates (<f> x ^)> not only in inflec- 
tion and derivation, but also in two separate words, the rough 
breathing being transferred from the vowel to the smooth Mute ; 
but the medials (j3 y 8) are thus changed only in the inflection 
of the verb ; elsewhere there is no change, hence : — 

air' ov = aft ov, iTrfjfiepos (from iiri, rj[Ji.ipa) = icp'fjfxepos 
iirvcpatvco (from eirl, vcpuivco) = icpvcpalvco, rervir-a = rervcpa 
ovk dcrlas = oi>x dffius, oeK-fi/xepos (from Se/co, rjf^epa) = Sexv^pos 
&ut4Kkco = aj/&4\Kco = from avri, eA/cco), but ovdeis (not ov&eis, from ovcT and els) 
ei'Ao-y-a = eifAoxa, but Aey erepav (not Aex' krepav) 
Ttrpifi-a = TeTpupa? but rp?/? ovtcos (not rp7(j) ovrccs). 

Rem. 2. The negative ouk (ov) thus becomes oy%» e. g. ou% ^5t5s- ; yet this 
change does not occur before the aspirate p, e. g. ov pi-Kra. In some com- 
pounds, the smooth Mute is retained even in the Attic dialect, according to 
Ionic usage, e. g. airr)\id<>Tr)s {east wind, from airo and 7?Atos), XevKiinros (one who 
rides a white horse, from \evic6s and 'liriros), Kparnnros, etc. 

Rem. 3. This change of the smooth Mute before the rough breathing takes 
place also in Crasis (§§10 and 11), e. g. ra erepa = SrHrepa, to liidriov — frolfid- 
riov, kcxL erepos = x&re/>os, Kai ocra 'dffris, oVws = x^°" a > x<* }<TTls > X^ irCl)S ' Yet 
this Crasis is only poetic. When the smooth Mutes irr or kt precede the rough 
breathing, both must be changed into Aspirates (No. 2), e. g. ecpfr-fj/xepos instead 
of kirri}jjLepos (from etrrd, rifxepa), vvx& oXrjv instead of vvkt oKt\v. Attic prose 
uses also the full forms, e. g. vvKra '6\t\v. 

Rem. 4. In some compounds, the aspirated liquid p changes the preceding 
smooth Mute into the Aspirate, e. g. cppotfiiou, formed by Crasis from Tvpooijiiov 
(from 7rp6 and ofyos) ; re&pnnrov (from rdrpa and iWoj), &pdffff(a from Tapdcrcrw, 
so cppovdos from irp6 and 6d6s. 

4. On the contrary, a rough Mute cannot stand before the 
same rough Mute, but is changed into the corresponding smooth, 
e.g. ^a7T<£co, B(£kxo?, tltStj, 'Aral's ; not 2ja.<£<j(x£, Bc^os, tl^St], 
A$3-l<s : on the same principle, when p is doubled, the first 
Aspirate disappears, e. g. Uvppos, not Uvppos. 

5. A Tau-mute (r 8 #) before another Tau-mute is changed 
into o- (comp. claustram from claudo) ; but it disappears before 
k (in Perf. and Plup. Act.), e. g. 

iiretSr-frviv (from irefow) becomes iireifffrrji/ 

ireifr-rios ( " irefoco) " Treio-re'os 

rjpeid-Srnv ( " ipeloa) " ypdffSr)V 

v err ci&-ita ( " 7rei3-a>) " TreiretKa. 



f 18.] LIQUIDS. 35 

6. The t, which, in the Attic dialect very often becomes cr, is 
frequently changed into o- by the influence of a following t, e. g. 
trXovaios (instead of 7r\ovrios } from ttXovtos), 'Ap.a#oi;crio? (instead 
of "AixaS-ovvr-tos), MiA/^cnos (from MtA-^ros), 'A^epow-tos (instead 
of 'A^epovr-tos), ova ta (instead of ovt-lol), yepovaia (instead of 
yepovT'ia), hmvo-ios (from iviavros). The t sometimes changes 
by assimilation the other Tau -mutes, and the Palatals, into cr ; 
thus in the forms of the Comparative in -<xow and -t,wv, where 
there is a double change, first of the Tau-mute or Palatal to cr 
by means of the i, and then the assimilation of the t to <r, e. g. 
fipaBvs (/3paSiW, /Spacriow), f3pdo~crwv, poet., Tragus (Tra^tow, 7racr- 
id)v), 7rdo-o-(i)v, poet, fieyws 3 {jLtt^oiV (instead of p:eyiW), Tayys 3 
#acro-<t)i> (instead of ra^-tW). 



§ 18. b. Liquids. 

1. The Liquid v is sometimes changed into a. Tins takes 
place, e. g. in the Ace. Sing, third Dec. of substantives, whose 
stem ends with a consonant, e. g. #copa£ KopaK-a (not KopaK-tv), 
kafnrds, \a pir do-a. The same change, also, sometimes takes 
place in the third Pers. PL Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass, of 
mute and liquid verbs, which properly should end in -vrai and 
-vro (as in pure verbs, e. g. ficfiovXev-vrai, ifiefiovXev-vTo), e. g. 
TeTpi<t>aTOLL, eTCTptcfiaTO, 7re7r/\.e^aTat, rera^arat, eo-KeuaSarou, Ke^wptSarat, 
icpSdparai (instead of Terpt^vrat, crirpi^vro, etc., from Tpi/2-io, 
vtXck-oj, rdo-or-o), o-KZvd'C-oi, ^wpt^-co, </>$eip-oo) . See $ 116, 15. 

2. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g. 

trw-Aoyt^w becomes <rvKkoyi£ca ffw-fxerpia becomes cru/^uerpfa 

4u-/jl4vco " i/x(j.eyco (Tvv-p'nrTco " avppvmw. 

Remark. Comp. iffino, iwimineo, instead of inlino, Inmineo. Assimilation 
takes place in iWv/xi, instead of oKvvpn. — 5 Ej/ before p is not assimilated, e.g. 
4vpitrro) ; yet epp'v&fxos is more frequent than ivpv&ixos ; on the contrary, eVAcwe- 
K*voo stands instead of eAAa/c/cevw. 

3. M initial before a Liquid is changed into /?, e. g 

fxXiTTeiv (from yueAi) becomes fiAirreiv 

/x\(ti<TKco ( " fxoXeiv) " jSAcootcw 

fiporSs ( " |tufyw, mors) " Ppor4s. 



36 



MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 



[♦ 19 



$ 19 c. Mutes and Liquids. — Liquids and Mutes. 

1. A Pi -mute (-n- ft </>) before fi is changed into //,, 

a Kappa-mute (k y x) ' " /* " " 7> 

a Tau-mute (r 8 3) " /a " " o-, e. g. 



(a) Pi-mute: 
($) Kappa-mute 
(7) Tau-mute: 



Terpif3-fxai 
AeAenr-juai 
yeypcup-fxai 
7T67rAe/£-^ai 
\4\ey-fiai 

ip'fipsiS-jj.cu 
Treireidr-fjicu 
Ksnofjud-fxai 



(from rp(f3a>) 

( " Aet'ra) 

( " 7 ,»tya>) 

( " 7rAe/c«) 

( " Aeyw) 

( " fye'xw) 

( " acura) 

( " €> e i'5co) 

( " 7reid-a>) 



becomes rerpififxai 

" y4ypa.fxfji.ai 

" 7r4ir\€y/xai 

remains x4\€yfxai 

becomes f34j3pey/Mu 

" jjuvcrfxai 

" ip^peifffxai 

" ire7rei<r/xai 

" KeKSfAur/Acu. 



Remark 1. In some words, the Kappa and Tau-mutes are not changed 
before ^u, e. g. a/r^, ttSt/xos, Xax^s, Kev&fidv, etc. In some words, even x 
stands before ju, instead of the original k or 7, e. g. \wxfJ-6s from t«/co>, ir\oxfJ-6s 
from irAacu). The preposition e/c, in composition, is not changed, e. g. eK^av- 

2. The medial ft before v is changed into p, e. g. 

aefi-v6s (from a4[3ofxai) becomes ce/Ws 
ipefi-vSs ( " epefios) " ipefxv6s. 

\ N before a Pi-mute (tt ft <f> ij/) is changed into /*, 
N before a Kappa-mute (k y x 9 i s changed into 7, 
N before a Tau-mute (t 8 #) is not changed, e. g. 



iy-ireipta becomes ifiireipla 
GV-fidAAa} " ififidWco 

%v-<ppo3V " efKppcay 

ev-rpvxos " e/x^vxos 

but cvyreiyw, cvvdeu, cvv&ia). 



ffvv-KaXeca becomes (TvyKaXiut 
Gvv-yiyvuxtKw " (rvyyiyvcoaita 

cvv-xpovos " (Xvyxpovos 

ffvj/-^4<o " ffvy£4co j 

Comp. im&uo, i»?primo. 



Rem. 2. The enclitics are not changed, e. g. oWep, -rorye, not oyn-ep, etc. 

Rem. 3. Also at the end of a word, v before a Pi-mute, as well as before /u, 
was, without doubt, pronounced like fx, and before a Kappa-mute, like 7 ; and 
so it is found in ancient inscriptions, e. g. TOMIIATEPAKAITHMMHTEPa., 
TOrXPHMATlSMON (i. e. rby irar4pa koX t)]v fxt\r4pa^ rhv xpVf J - aTLa 'H-ov). So also 
\ and <r are used instead of v before A and <r> e. g. 'EAAHMNOI, 'E22AMO! 
fti. e. tV A-fjfxuca, qv ~2.df.ia). 



*SOJ 



THE SIBILANT O" WITH MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 



37 



4 20. d. Use of the Sibilant <r, with Mutes and 
Liquids. 

1. A Pi-mute (jr /3 </>) with cr is changed into if/, 

a Kappa-mute (k y x) with o- is changed into £, 
a Tau-mute (t 8 #) disappears before <r, e. g. 



(a) Pi-mute: 


Aet7T(Tftj 


r from AetVcj) 


becomes Aefyw 




rplfiaoo 


(C 


Tplfico) 


U 


rpfyoo 




ypdcpffca 


U 


ypd(pa>) 


u 


ypatyu) 


(/3) Kappa-mute 


: irXeKffco 


(C 


7rAe/c«) 


u 


7rAe£<y 




Xsyffw 


' u 


Aeyw) 


CI 


Ae£a> 




PpeX™ 


u 


PpeX w ) 


u 


j8pe'£co 


(7) Tau-mute : 


avvTcra) 


" 


avvrco) 


" 


a»/i5<rcv 




ipddtrca 


r u 


ipdda)) 


u 


ipeicrea 




irel&ffco 


(< 


irefoco) 


" 


irzicra) 




ikiridcro) 


(( 


4Xirl£a) 


(C 


eA7rio"a>. 



Kemark 1. Comp. duri, read, cord ; from duco, re#o, cogno. The Prep. 4k 
before <r is an exception, e. g. e/ccci^o, not i^dxrco. — In irovs, Gen. ttoS-Ss, and 
in the Perf. active Part, in -c&s, Gen. -6r-os, after the Tau-mute disappears, the 
preceding vowel is lengthened. 

2. N disappears before cr; but when v is joined with a Tau- 
mute, both disappear before cr, but the short vowel before cr, is 
lengthened : € into et, o into ov, a, X, v into a, I, v, Comp. Rem. 3, 
e.g. 

Tv<p&£vT-(Ti becomes rvcp&€?<ri xiovr-<ri becomes Xeovfft 

<nr4i/8-a(o " criretaoi) eX/Aivfr-o'i " eX/jLiai 

rv\pavr-ffi " TuvJ/dtrt 5et/cj/iW-<ri " Sej/cw«rt 

8al/j.ov-<n " Saifiocri aej/cKpcovT-cn " E«/o(£a>(n. 

Eem. 2. Exceptions : 'Ev, e. g. ivo-ireipco ; ttoz/- before a- with another conso- 
nant, e. g. 7rcW/co7ros, in some words is assimilated ; e. g. -rrdtrcrocpos is used as 
well as irdvaocpos, etc. (in izdXiv the usage varies) ; also in some inflective and 
derivative forms in -aai and -<ris from verbs in -cziVw, e. g. iretyavacu (from 
ipaiuoo), ireiravo-is (from ire7raiVa>), and in the substantives, ^ eX/xivs, earth-worm, tj 
ireipivs, wagon-basket, tj Tipws, v is retained before cr. — In composition, the v in 
ffvv is changed into a before o~ followed by a vowel, e. g. (rv<rcr(x>C<0 (from <rvv and 
o-ctJ^w) ; but before <r followed by a consonant, or before £ it disappears, e. g. <rvw 
ffTrj/xa becomes cxxtt^o., o~vi/-£vyia becomes av£vyia. — In ^a/Keen, vt is dropped ; 
on the contrary, in TctAds, /xeXds (Gen. -aj/os), ktcIs, els (Gen. -ewj), els, and in 
the third Pers. Pi. of the principal tenses (see § 103), e. g. j3ouAeiW<n (instead 
of fSovXevovcri), the o.nission of the simple v is compensated by lengthening 
the vowel. *•" 

3. On the contrary, in the Aorist of Liquid verbs, cr is omitted 

4 



38 CHANGE OF CONSONANTS. [§ 21 

after the Liquid, but the omission is compensated, by lengthen- 
ing the stem-vowel, e. g. 

^yye\-<ra becomes tfyyeiXa €j/e/j.-<ra becomes eveijua 

tcpav-va " ecpyva e(p&ep-<ra * ecpfreipa. 

Rem. 3. Sigma is likewise omitted before a in the future of Liquid verbs, e 
being inserted before or for the sake of an easier pronunciation, and ea being con- 
tracted into a>, e. g. a77€A.-e-(rw, a^eAw. So too in the Nom. of the third Dec. 
the final Sigma is omitted, when v or p precedes, and the short vowel is 
lengthened, e. g. tlncou instead of elic6v-s, Troifx.rjv instead of iroiiih-s, p^rwp 
instead of pTjrop-s, alfrhp instead of al&ep-s. — T and <r are omitted in the Nom. 
of substantives and participles in -cay, Gen. -ovt-os ; but, as a compensation, o is 
lengthened into cw, e. g. \4ovr-s becomes AeW, fiovtevovr-s becomes fiovXevav. 

Rem. 4. In evuv/xt (instead of ec-vvfxi, ves-tio) the a* is assimilatec 1 to the 
following v, and in el/j.1 (instead of icr-fxi) <r is omitted, but e is lengthened 
into et. 

\ 21. e. Change of separated Consonants. 

1. Sometimes a consonant affects another consonant, though 
they do not immediately follow one another, but are separated 
by a vowel or even by two syllables. Thus, one A. changes 
another X into p } e. g. Ke<paXapyLa (instead of KecpaXaXyta from 
oAyeiv), yXwcrcrapyia (instead of yXuicroraXyia), apyaXios (instead of 
oAyaAeos from aXyetv) ; the suffix wXyj becomes cop?7, when a X pre- 
cedes, e. g. $aX7rwpr]. 

2. In the reduplication of verbs whose stem begins with a 
rough mute, instead of repeating this mute, which would be 
the regular formation, the first rough mute is changed into the 
corresponding smooth, thus : — 

<pe-<pl\7]Ka (from <pi\4<a) is changed into irecpi\7]Ka 

Xe-X^Ka ( " %«y) " " ksxvko. 

fre-frvica ( " Moo) " " reS-wca 

&i-&7lfu (stemQE) " " tI&tjjlu. 

Likewise in the verbs, &6eiv, to sacrifice, and nd-eW (stem 0E), to place, & of 
the root is changed into t, in the passive forms which begin with 3 : — 

irv-frrjv, rv-^jcrofxai, ire-^rjv, re-frri<roiJ.cu, instead of i&v-frr}i>, iSe-frr)v. 

So also, for the sake of euphony, the p is not reduplicated, and instead of it 
ipp is used, e. g. ippvi)Ka. 

3. In words whose stem begins with t and ends with an 
Aspirate mute, the aspiration is transferred to the preceding 



$§ 22, 23.] METATHESIS OP THE LIQUIDS. 39 

smooth r, when the Aspirate before the formative syllable be- 
ginning with <r, r, and fx, must, according to the laws of euphony 
($$ 17, 2; 19, 1; 20, 1), be changed into a smooth consonant; 
by this transposition, r is changed into the Aspirate S-. Such a 
change is called the Metathesis of the aspiration. 

Thus, rp4(p-(o (rerpcKpa Perf.) is changed into (Spiir-a-v) frptyca, frpeir-Trjp, (&p4it- 
fX.a) fye/ipa ; 

racpri, TA*-w, rcuprivai (second Aor. Pass.), into grd^a, ^dir-ro), (r^air- 
uai) Te&a/xfiai (but third Pers. PL re-r^arou, e. g. Her. 6, 103, with one 
of the better MSS. is to be xead instead of r&acpaTai) ; 

rpvcpos, TPT<£-&> into Srpv-tyoo, &pvir-Ta> (refrpwr-fxcu), red-pv^/Mxi ; 

Tpe%-a> into (3-pe/c-cro/zat) &pe£o/xar, — rpix-6s into &plq, frpi^iv] 

raxvs, in the comparative, becomes frdaaav. For the same reason, the 
future e|oj, from ex&>, to have, is the proper form, the aspiration of 
the x being transferred to the smooth breathing and making it 
rough. 

Remark 1. Teu|« from revxoo, and rpv^a from rpvxw, remain unchanged. 

Rem. 2. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, rpe(p<a, TA$Q 
(&<LirT<a), TPT*n (drpvirrw), begin with S-, the aspiration of the two final conso- 
nants <p&, changes t, the initial consonant of the stem, into &, e. g. 

£&p4(p-£rr)v, &pecp-&}ji/ai, d-pe^-dY/trea-d-at, 
e&dcp-frrii', &a<p£rds, &a(p-gri)<ro/uiai, re£rd<p-&ai. 

Rem. 3. In the imperative ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both sylla- 
bles should begin with fr, namely, dijd-t, not the first, but the last aspirate mute 
is changed into the corresponding smooth ; thus 3-tjtj, e. g. fiovXev^rjTi. 

$ 22. Metathesis of the Liquids, 

The Liquids, and also the Lingual t when ir precedes, often 
change place with a preceding vowel, for the sake of euphony. 
The vowel then usually becomes long. This lengthening of 
the vowel distinguishes Metathesis from Syncope (the latter 
bemg the mere omission of e), e. g. fiL-fivrjo-KU) (from the root /-lev, 
comp. mens), #v?jo-Ka) (from Sav-tlv), TiTjxrjKci (from rtfx-uv), 
fiefiXrjKa (from j3aX-€Lv), irrrjcrojxai (from Trerofiat). 

$ 23. Doubling of Consonants. 

1. Consonants are doubled, in the first place, for the sake of 
euphony, e. g. fiaSvppoos from (3a$v and pew ; epptov instead of 
ipeov; m the second place, in consequence of the concurrence 



40 . STRENGTHENING AND ADDITION OF CONSONANTS. [§ 24 

of like or similar sounds, in the inflection and derivation, e. g 
ev-vo//,o<? (from lv and vo/^os), eA-Aei7ra> (instead of iv\.), (rvfi-jxa^o^ 
(instead of ow/x,.), Xikufx-fxai (instead of AeAa7rja.), Xrjfx-fia (in- 
stead of XrJTTjxa), Koix-fxa (instead of K07r//,a), racr-cra) or rdr-roi 
(instead of ray-o-a)), ^o-o-coi/ or rjrroiv (instead of tjk-loiv), fiaXXov 
(instead of paX-iov), aAAos (instead of aAios, alius). 

2. In the Common language, only the Liquids, \ fi, v, p, the 
Sibilant <r, and the Mute r, can be doubled ; yet tt and k are 
also doubled in single words, e. g. t7T7ro?, a horse ; kokkos, a berry. 
The Medial y is often doubled, but this letter thus doubled is 
softened in the pronunciation ($ 2). Two Aspirates are not 
doubled ($ 17, 4). 

3. p is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. eppeov, 
and in composition, when it is preceded by a short vowel, e. g. 
apprjKTOS, j3a$vppoo<s ; but ev-pcocrro? (from ev and pdWf/Afc), 

Bemark. In imitation of Homer, the Tragic writers also double the <r, yet 
much less frequently than Homer, e. g. rScrcrov, Soph. Aj. 185; oAeWas, 390; 
i<rarv&ri, 294; ^eVo-77, Ant. 1223 ; e<ro"eTcu, iEsch. Pers. 122 ; so also in the Dat. 
PL of the third Dec. ecrtn. 

§ 24. Strengthening and Addition of Consonants. 

1. Consonants are frequently strengthened, in the inflection, by the addition 
of a corresponding consonant, namely : — 

(a) The Labials (/3 ir <p) by t, e. g. fHhaTr-T-co (instead of /3Aa/3-&>), rvir-r-ca 
(instead of rinr-a ), ptir-r-ca (instead of pi<p-ca) ; sometimes also by c, which 
assimilates the preceding Labial (thus cr<r, Attic tt), e. g. ireWw (root 
7re7r), Att. 7reTTO>, Put. ire^w, the poetic tfctro/tat, Put. o\pofx.ai ; in Setya; 
(instead of Se'^cw), # and c are changed into ^ ; 

(b) The Palatals (7 k x) are strengthened by <r, which assimilates the pre- 
ceding Palatal (thus <ro-, Att. tt), or, though more seldom, the Palatal 
unites with the c and is changed into £ e - g- Tda-cr-a, Att. rdr-r-co 
(instead of ray-co), ^picr-c-cw, Att. (pptr-r-ca (instead of cpplK-co), $4\a-<r-ca, 
Att. Pt]t-t-c0 (instead of fS-f)X- a ) 5 k/x*C w (instead of Kpdya)^Tpi(ca (instead 
of rplyco) ; a Kappa-mute with o* is seldom changed into £, e. g. au£» 
(aug-eo), aAe|&>, o8a|a> and oSa^co; the strengthening t is found only in 
7re/crco and tlktoj. 

(c) The Linguals (5 r 3-) are strengthened by cr, which with the preceding 
Lingual is changed into £ e. g. <ppdfa (instead of (ppdda), or, though 
more seldom, <r assimilates the preceding Tau-mute, e. g. \l<r<rofiai and 
\irofjLai, ip4arcrca, ipdrTu (instead of eperw), Kopvffffo) (instead of Kopv&oo). 

2. The unpleasant concurrence of pip and j/p in the middle of some words, 
occasioned by the omission of a vowel, is softened by insertrng fi between up 



f 25.] EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. 41 

and 5 between vp, tbus, in fieo-rifi-P-pla (formed from fj.eo~7)iJ.epla, fietrrjfipia)) yap.' 
•fi-p6s (from ya/x-e-p6s, yajxpos), av-5-pos (from avepos, avpSs). 

3. N also is used to strengthen the Labials, especially in poetry, so as to make 
a syllable long by position, e. g. TVjj.Tra.vov (from TV7r-r-«), crrpop.fios (from <rrp£- 
<poj)\ dxtyijSos {ra<pos) ; Kopvpfir] (Kopvcpr)) ; &p6[xfSos (rpecpeiv) , dfxcpr) (etVeTj/)} 
vvficpt) (nubere) ; bfipifxos and ofxfipi/xos, vcawpos and vuvvpvos. In the present 
tense of many verbs, this strengthening v is found, e. g. irw^dvofiai, Siyydvu, 
KafxPdvco instead of Trv&o/xai, Sriyca, Aa/3w. On the change of v, see § 19, 3. On 
the v Paragogic, see § 15, 1. 

4. 2 also is prefixed to some words, but mostly to such as begin with fi, e. g 
uoiSil and o-^cDSil, /xinpSs and a/xiKpos ; a strengthening <r is also inserted before /a 
and t in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and before & in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. Te-reAe- 
a-/j.at, TeTeAe-<r-TCH, eTeKe-a-^rqv (§ 131) ; also in the derivation and composition 
of words, o~ is frequently inserted for the sake of euphony, e. g. o~ei-<y-[j.6s, irav- 
ff-dve/xos, fioyo-a-TOKos, etc. ; instead of o~, fr also is inserted before fi, e. g. 
fjLVK7]-&-fx6s, bpxy-&-p6s, o~Kap-&-(J.6s from CKaipco, 7rop-&-p.6s from Treipca. 



$ 25. Expulsion and Omission of Consonants. 

1. In inflection, <r is very often omitted between two vowels, e. g. Tvirrriy 
4tvtttov, tvtttoio instead of TU7rre-cr-cM or TU7rr7j-cc«, irvTrre-ff-o, rvTrroi-ff-o j 
y eve-os, y e v e-a> v instead of yeve-a-os, yeve-c-wv (comp. gene-r-is, gene-r-um). 
At the end of a word, and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yevos, 
Tv\pw (=TU7r(ra>), 7rAe|<w (— TrAeVtrw), but after the Liquids, in inflection, as 
well as commonly at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. tfyy ei\a (instead 
of tfyyeX-a-a) , ay ye A <2 (instead of ayyeX-e-cr-co, ayyeX-e-a>), p-fjrwp (instead 
of pr\Top-s). Comp. § 20, Rem. 3. 

2. The Digamma softened into the vowel v (§ 200) is omitted: (a) in the 
middle of the word between two vowels, e. g. w6v (a>F6v), ovum, 6'is {oFis), ovis, 
alcav (alFd>v), aevum, veos (veFos), novus, o'naws (crKaiFos), scaevus, flo6s (fioFSs), 
bovis ; &ea>, ttAcoj, irveca, eAaco instead of &4Fca, etc. ; (b) at the beginning of 
the word before vowels and p, e. g. oJvos (Fo?vos), vinum, tap (Feap), ver, fs 
(Fls) vis, oIkos (Fo?kos), vicus, ISeiv (FiSeTv), videre, io-frfis (FeaSrjs), vestis, 
pi)yvvp.i (FfrfiyvvfjLi), frango. On the contrary, the Digamma (this softened v) 
is retained in connection with a preceding o, e, o, with which it then coalesces 
and forms a diphthong : (a) at the end of a word, e. g. flov (instead of fioF), 
fiaatXev, etc.; (/3) before a consonant, e. g. fSovs (&6Fs, bovs, bos), vavs (vdFs s h 
navis, $ovv, flowl, jSatnAeus, fiaariXevai, &evo~o/j.ai, irKeva'Ojj.ai, nrvevaopiai, eXavvco. 
But when an t or v precedes it, then it disappears before a consonant, but 
lengthens the : or v, e. g. k?s (instead of kIFs), avs (instead of avFs) t'x^us 
(instead of lx&vFs), Ace. k?v, <tvv, lx&>v'i but it disappears also, in this case, 
in the middle of a word between vowels, e. g. A"l-6s, k?-6s, crv-6s, Ix&v-os (instead 
of AlF-6s, KiF-6s, <rvF-6s, Ix^vF-os. 

4* 



42 EXPULSION AND OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. [§ 25. 

3. Since the Greek language admits an accumulation of three consonants, 
only in composition, not in simple words, unless the first or the last is a* 
Liquid, then, if in the inflection of the verb, a termination beginning with <r& 
is appended to the consonant of the root, the c is dropped : — « 

\eA.eiV-<r3-wj/ (from Aenr-w) becomes AeAe^dxov (§ 17, 2.) 
AeAe'7 a&u ( " \4y-a>) " AeAe'x&cu (§17,2.) 

etTToA-o-^at ( " CTeAA-co) " e(rraA&cu. 

Remark. On the omission of a Tau-mute, and a v and vt before <r, and a or 
after a Liquid, see § 20. On TreVe^ou, i<T(piyp,ai, etc. instead of Tr4irefj.fj.iJ.ai, 
eacpiyy/jiai, see § 144, R. 2. In composition, v is often omitted, e g. TIvSokt6- 
vos, 'AiroXXS-Supos, instead of Tlv&oyKT., 'A7roAA^5. 

4. Some words may drop their final consonant, either to avoid an accumula- 
tion of consonants, or, in verse, to prevent a syllable becoming Amg by position. 
In addition to the words mentioned under § 15, namely, ovk (ou), e£ (e/c), ovrtos 
(owtco), which usually retain their final consonant before a vowel to prevent 
Hiatus, but drop it before consonants, here belong, 

(a) adverbs of place in d-ep, e. g. irpSo^rev, oirio-frev, virep&ev, etc., which never 
drop the v before a consonant, in prose, but very often in Epic poetry, 
more seldom in the Attic poets ; 

(b) fx.JxP ls an( ^ &XP IS > which, however, in the best classical writers, drop 
their <r, not only before consonants, but commonly even before vowels, 
e. g. jue'xpi 'Ava^aySpov, PL Hipp. Maj. 281, C ; fJ.4)ipi ivravfra, Id. Symp. 
210, e ; ixexpi orov, X. C. 4. 7, 2 ; fiexp 1 epuifyas ^aXdrTTjs, Id. Cy. 8. 
6, 20 5 

(c) the adverbs arp4jxas, efiiras, fiecriyvs, ai/riKpvs, &veoos, a<pvws, which in 
poetry may drop their s, but never in prose ; in the Ionic dialect, numeral 
adverbs in -dicis also frequently drop the o- before consonants, e. g. 
•TroAAa/fi. Her. 2, 2. 

5. A genuine Greek word can end only in one of the three Liquids, v, cr (i/-, 
£, i. e. Trc, Ka) and p. The two words, ovk, not, and €«:, out of, form only an 
apparent exception, since, as Proclitics (§ 32), they incline to the following 
word, and, as it were, become a part of it. This law of euphony occasions 
either the omission of all other consonants, or it changes them into one of the 
three Liquids just named; hence, o~a>fia (Gen. ardo/xar-os), instead of cupar, 
yd\a (Gen. yd\aKT-os), instead of ydAatcr, \4wv (Gen. \4ovt-os), instead of 
x4ovr, ifSovXevov instead of ifiovXevovT ; — repas (Gen. repar-os), instead of 
rdpar, Kcpas (Gen. tcepar-os), instead of Kepar, f.i4xi (Gen. fi4xir-os), instead 

Of fi4\VT. 



W 26, 27:| nature and quantity of syllables. 43 

CHAPTER II. 
Syll ables. 

$26. Nature and Division of Syllables. 

1. Every vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with 
one or more consonants, is called a syllable. 

2. A word consists of one or more syllables. When a word 
consists of several syllables, a distinction is made between the 
stem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation. 
The stem- syllables express the essential idea of the word, the 
syllables of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea. 
Thus, e. g. in ye-ypacp-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable ; 
the two others, syllables of inflection : in Trpay-fia, the first is 
the stem-syllable ; the last, the syllable of derivation. 

§27. Quantity of Syllables. 
• 

1. A syllable is short or long, by nature, according as its 
vowel is short or long. 

2. Every syllable is long which contains a diphthong, or a 
simple long vowel, or two vowels contracted into one, e. g. 
fiovktvo) ; rypcos ; "olkcdv (from aeKwv), fiorpvs (from j36rpvas). 

3. A syllable with a short vowel becomes long by position, 
when two or three consonants, or a double consonant (£ $ \f/) t 
follow the short VOWel, e. g. otcAAco, rvij/avTts, Kopd£ (koooikos) 
Tpa.7ret,a. 

Remark 1 . The pronunciation 1 of a syllable long by nature, and of one- 
long by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced long, but the 
latter not. When a syllable long by nature is also long by position, its pronun- 
ciation must be protracted. Hence a distinction is made in pronouncing such 
words as irpdrTO}, irpa^is, Tvptr/jxa (a), and rdrru, reikis, rdy/xa (a). 

Rem. 2. But when a short vowel stands before a Mute and a Liquid (Positio 
debilis), it commonly remains short in the Attic dialect, because the sound of 
the Liquids, being less distinct than the Mutes, they are pronounced with more 



1 The method of pronunciation stated in this remark is adopted in many of 
the German gymnasia., and in some of the schools in England and Scotland, 
but not to any extent in this country. — Tr. 



44 QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. [$ 28w 

ease, e. g. 'dreKvos, &ireirXos, 'aK/xT], fioTpvs, dlSpax^os, yet in two cases the posi- 
tion of the Mute and Liquid lengthens the short vowel : • — 

a) in compounds, e. g. 'itcve/xca ; 

h) when one of the Medials (/3 y 8) stands before one of the three Liquids 
(x /a v), e. g. j6r/3Aos, evddfjios, iriirteynai ; in tragic trimeter, SA also lengthen 
the preceding short vowel. 

It is obvious that a vowel long by nature cannot be shortened by a Mute and 
Liquid, e. g. ^vvrpov. 

4. A syllable, which, contains one of the three doubtful 
vowels (a, i, v), cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long 
and short, but must be either long or short. 



y 28. Quantity of the Penult. 

In order to a correct pronunciation, the quantity of the three 
doubtful vowels, a, i, and v, in the penult of words of three or 
more syllables, must be determined. The following are the 
principal instances in which the penult is long. The quantity 
of the syllables of inflection is treated in connection with the 
Forms : — 

The penult is long, 

1. In substantives in -dcov (Gen. -aovos or -awvos), in substantives of two or 
more syllables in -loov (Gen. -iovos; but -low, Gen. -lavos), and in forms of the 
comparative in -lav, -lov (Gen. -iovos), e. g. biraoov, -ovos, 6, f), companion, Tloaei- 
Sdwv, -covos ; Ktwv, -ovos, 77, pillar, fipayiwv, -ovos, 6, arm, 'Apcptuv, -ovos ; but 
AevKaKtav, -oovos ; KaXXiwv, naXXZov, more beautiful. 

Exceptions. The two Oxy tones, tj rt'idv (l), shore, and generally 77 xuav, snow. 
In Homer, the comparatives in -ieov, iov, are always short, where the versifica- 
tion admits. 

2. In oxytoned proper names in -av6s, and in the compounds in -dyos (from 
#7«, to lead, and dyvv/xi, to break), -dvap and -Kpavos, e. g. 'Aaiavos, Xoxo.y6s, 
captain ; vavdySs, naufragus ; Biavoop, dlicpavos, having two horns. 

3. In adjectives in -ays (Fern, -dis) derived from verbs- in -dco, in proper 
names in -arns, in substantives in -irrjs (Fern. -7ns), and in those in -uttjs of the 
first Dec. (Fern, -vtis), and in proper names in -irn, e. g. axpdys, untouched; 
Ev<t>oaT7]S, Mi&pidaT-ns, iroXh-ns, -ov, citizen (Fern. iroXTris) : irpeo-pvTrjs, -ov, old 
.nan ; 'Acppotir-n, 'AficpiTphrj. 

Exceptions: (a) to the proper names in -ar-ns: TaXarns, AaA/i&njs, ^apfxarys, 
all in -Harris and -cpdr-ns, and compounds formed from verbal roots, e. g. 2o>/cpa- 
T7? s ; _(b) K p x T is, judge, from the short root Kpl, ktIttjs, builder, and &Dttjs, 
one who sacrifices. 

4. In Prop aroxy tones in -IXos, -IXov, -Ivos, -Ivov, in words in -Zv-n, -Iva, 
-vvr], -vva, in those in -vvos, when a does not precede the ending; in Pro- 



$ 28.] QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. 45 

Proparoxytones in -vpa, and- in adjectives in -vpos with a preceding long 
syllable, e. g. 

'O '6/j.IXos, multitude; ScorTyn, gift ; 6 kivSvvos, danger; 

ire8l\ov, shoe ; AXylva, yecpvpa, bridge ; 

7] Ka.fx.Iuos, oven ; alcrxvvn, shame : lo-xvpos, strong ; 

(Tetevoy, parsley ; a\p.vva, defence; (but bx^pos and 4xvp6s), firm. 

Remark 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxytones in -Zvos 
and -vpa, namely, 6 xaA«/os, rein; 6 ipTvos, wild fig-tree ; and rj /coAAvpa, coarse 
bread. 

Exceptions. Et XaTrtv-n, feast, and compounds in -yvvos (from yvvfj, woman), 
e. g. aydpSyvv os, and Kopivn, club. 

5. In substantives in -Otos, whose antepenult is long, and in compound 
adjectives in -oaKpvros and -rpvros (from daKpva, rpvco), and also in sub- 
stantives in -V/J.O,, -vyr„ and -vycoy, and in adverbs in -voov, e. g. 

6 kwkvtSs, wailing ; aWpvros, indestructible; 6\oXvyfi, ululatus ; 

addicpvTos, without tears; '{Spvpa, -dros, seat ; 6\o\vya>v, ululatus, 

fiorpv86y, in clusters. 
Exception. Mappapvyfi, splendor. 

6. In dissyllabic Oxytones in -l\6 s, -lp.6s, -lv6s, -los, -v\6s, -vfj.6s t 
-vv6s, and in Paroxytones in -vfiij, -vv-n, e. g. 

ipl\6s, bare ; rj plv6s y skin; 6 pv/j.6s, pale ; £w6s, common; 

6 x^s, fodder ; 6 'fos, dart; 6 &vfi6s, mind; Xvfir), injury; 

6 Xlp-os, hunger ; 6 xi>A<fc, juice ; so, a^Dfios, etc. ; fwvn, excusa. 

Exceptions. Bi6s (6), bow ; ir\w6s (6), washing-trough. 

7. In dissyllables in -do s, -ay 6 s (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in -ia, which 
begin with two consonants, e. g. 

6 vd6s, temple ; <pdvos, brilliant ; aria., pebble ; (pXld, door-post. 

Rem. 2. The following maybe added to dissyllables in -ia: KaXld, shed; 
&yfa, trouble ; Kovia, dust ; and to those in -aos, the variable 'tAaos, and the proper 
names in -a o s, e. g. 'A/x,(pidpdos ; Olv6fidos is an exception. 

Exceptions. Taos or rddos (5), peacock; <TKid (t), shadow. 

8. The following single words should also be noted: — 

I. a. 

"Aupdros, unmixed; veavis, young girl ; riapa, turban ; 

aviapSs, troublesome; birad6s, attendant; <pd\apos, clear ; 

av&d.8r}s, self-sufficient ; civ air i, mustard ; & <pXvdpos, tattle. 

Also the proper names, 'Afidcns, "Avdiros, ''Apdros, A^fxapdros, Qedvca, 'idcrcw, 
Upldiros, ~2.dpd-ms (Serapis), ^TvfxcpdXos, $dpcrd\os. • 

II. r. 

'Aicpip-tis, exact ; ivlirr), rebuke ; Trap&evoirfTrrjs, gallant. 

X<pbip.os, strong ; epl&os, day-laborer; 

T& rdplxos, pickled fish ; 6 rj %eAi5wj', swallow; 



46 ACCENTS. [$ 29. 

Also the proper names, 'Ayxtcrris, TpdvlKos, Evpl-rros, Kii'/cos (r),"Oirrpts, Bova-Tpis. 
The following dissyllables should be noted for the sake of the compounds: 
rlfxi), honor ; rfkrj, victory ; (pvX-f], tribe ; "uAt?, forest; AItos, little; ixticpSs, small; 
e. g. 'drlfjLos. 

in. v. 

'A/jLv/jLcov, blameless; 4pvKcc, to holdback; \d<pi>pov, booty; 

davXov, asylum ; 6 l\i>6s, den tj Trdirvpos, papyrus ; 

avTT] (u), war-cry ; lyi/irj, the ham; trirvpoy, bran. 

Also the proper names, *A{Sv8os, ^Apxvras, B&vvos, AiSvvaos, Ka/xfiva-qs, Kep- 
Kvpa, Ko>xvt6s. And the dissyllables, tyvx^h sou h ° rvpos, cheese; 6 Trvp6s t wheat; 
6 xpvvos, gold; \iiT7}, grief; tyvxpo's, cold. 

§ 29. Accents 

1. The written accent designates the tone -syllable, according 
to the original Greek pronunciation. The accented syllable 
was pronounced with a particular stress as well as elevation of 
voice. The same is true of the modern Greek. In English, 
too, while the stress of the accented syllable is more particu- 
larly prominent, there is often also an accompanying elevation 
of the voice, but not so much as in the modern Greek. 

2. In the pronunciation of Greek prose, the accent and quan- 
tity were both regarded ; thus, in avSpayiros, while the accentual 
stress was laid on the a, the proper quantity of the penult w was 
preserved. Compare analogous English words, as siinnsing, 
outpouring, in which both the accent on the antepenult and the 
length of the penult are observed. 

3. How the Greeks observed both the accent and quantity in 
poetry, cannot now be determined. But as it was generally 
sung or recited in the style of chanting, the accent was probably 
disregarded, as is constantly done in singing at present. 

4. The Greek has the following marks for the tone or accent 
(7rpo5U)oYai) : — 

(a) The acute (- ) to denote . the sharp or clear tone, e. g. 
Aoyos ; 
• (b) The circumflex (- ) to denote the protracted' or winding 
tone, e. g. o-w/xa. This accent consists in uniting the rising 
and falling tone in pronouncing a long syllable, since, e. g 
the word o-oo/xa was probably pronounced as o-oo/xa ; 

(c) The grave (-) to denote the falling or heavy tone. 



I 29.] ACCENTS. 4" 

Remake: 1. The mark of the falling tone was not nsed. Hence not &v&pw- 
rbs, \6ybs, but &v&payiros, \6yos. The mark of the grave was nsed only to 
distinguish certain words, e. g. rls, some one, and tis, who ? and, as will he seen 
in § 31, 1, instead of the acute on the final syllable of words in connected 
discourse. 

Rem. 2. The accent stands upon the second vowel of diphthongs ; at the 
beginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand 
after the breathing, but the circumflex over it, e. g. a-rra^, av?^ios, av dirr,s,, 
evpos, aTfxa. But in capital letters, in connection with the diphthongs a, 77, a> t 
fwe accent and the breathing stand upon the first vowel, e. g. a Aidr]s. On the 
diaeresis, see § 4, Rem. 6. 

Rem. 3. The grave accent differed from the acute as the weaker from the 
stronger accent in detrimental, or in the Latin fe'neratdrum, the penultimate accent 
in both words being much stronger than the preceding one. The circumflex 
accent denoted a tone like the circumflex inflection in English. 

Rem. 4. In the United States and Great Britain, Greek is not generally 
pronounced by the accents, no regard being had to these so far as the pronun- 
ciation is concerned. In a few institutions, however, the pronunciation is 
regulated by the accent ; but where this is the case, the grave and circumflex 
accents are pronounced in the same manner as the acute. No difference is 
therefore made in the pronunciation of vipA) and rip.)], nor between yj/a>p.ai and 
yvdo/xais. In these and all similar cases, the Greeks must have made distine* 
tions. 

5. Tlie accent can stand only on one of the last three sylla- 
bles of a word; it was not any natural difficiilty but merely 
Greek usage which prevented the accent from being placed 
further back than the antepenult. 

6. The acute stands on one of the last three syllables, whether 
this is long or short, e. g. kol\6s, avSpoyirov, 7r6\efjLos ; but upon the 
antepenult, only when the last syllable is short, and is also not 
long by position, e. g. avS-pomos, but avSpdrrrov. 

7. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two sylla- 
bles, and the syllable on which it stands must always be long 
by nature, e. g. rov y o-w/xa; but it stands upon the penult only 
when the ultimate is short, or long only by position, e. g. rax *, 
yprjp.a, Trpafis, at>A.a£, Gen. -clkos, KaXavpoij/, KarrjXnj/, &r)fj.u)va£. 

Rem. 5. Also in substantives in -i£ and -t£ (Gen. -Ikos, -vkos), 1 and v long 
by nature, are considered as short in respect to accentuation, e. g. <J>otVr|, Gen. 
•Ikos, K?ipv£, Gen. -vkos. 

8. If, therefore, the antepenult is accented, it can have only 
the acute ; but if the penult is accented, and is long by nature, 



48 ACCENTS. [$ 29. 

it must have the circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g. 
retxo?, irpaTre, but the acute, when the ultimate l is long, e. g. 
tclxovs, 7rpa.TTiD ; if the penult is short it has only the acute, e. g. 
rdrTO), to.tt€. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex 
stands, e. g. -rraryp, -iraTpuv; nominatives accented on the ulti- 
mate usually have the acute, e. g. Imrevs ttotci/W, Srjp. 

Eem. 6. In the inflection-endings, -ai and -oi, and in the adverbs, irp6ira\at 
and e/c7raAai, the diphthongs, in respect to the accent, are considered short, e. g. 
Tpdnefai, rvirreTai, yXucreai, &vdrpanroi, x&P 01 ' The optative endings, -o i and 
-a i, e. g. Tifx-fja-ai, c/cAeiTTot, Xeliroi, and the adverb o?koi, domi, at home, are long; 
on the contrary, oIkoi, houses, from oTkos. 

Rem. 7. In the old Ionic and Attic declension, w is considered as short 
in respect to accent, having only half its usual length, as it takes the place of o, 
e.g. Mej/eAecos, avwyecov ; — ir6\e(as, iroXtwv — ; TXews, cLynpas, Gen. tAeo, ay^pw; 
but if adjectives like 'lAeas are declined according to the third Dec, they are 
accented regularly, e. g. <pi\oy4\a)s, <pi\oye Autos ; so also in the Dat. Sing, and 
PL, as well as in the. Gen. and Dat. Dual, where the penult is long, e. g. ay-npas, 
ayr)pw, ayrjpcps, ayripcav. 

Eem. 8. In the words, e^e, that, vai%h certainly, the penult has the acute, 
apparently contrary to the rule ; but these must be treated as separate words. 
The accentuation of the words eiVe, ovre, &sirep, tjtis, tousSc, etc., is to be 
explained on the ground, that they are compounded with Enclitics (§ 33). 

Rem. 9. According to the condition of the last syllable with respect to 
accent, words have the following names: — 

fa) Oxytones, when the ultimate has the acute, e. g. rervcpds, kkkSs, S^/j; 

(b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute, e. g. tvttto) ; 

(c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute, e. g. &vfrpwiros, tvtt- 
rSfievos, &v&pcoTTOi, tvttt6/x€vol', 

(d) Perispomena, when the ultimate has the circumflex, e. g. kmus ; 

(e) Properispomena, when the penult has the circumflex, e. g. irpay/xa, <pi- 
Kovaa ; 

(f ) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented, e. g. irpdyfiara, Trpay/xa. 

1 Hence the accent often enables us to determine the quantity of syllables, 
e. g. from the acute on the antepenult of nro^rpia, fj.afrf)Tpia, we infer that the 
ultimate is short, otherwise the accent could not stand further back than the 
penult, No. 6, above: — from the circumflex on ct?tos and irpa^is, that those 
syllables are long by nature, 7 5 — from the circumflex on fjiolpa and o~re?pa, 
that the ultimate is short, 7 ; — from the acute on xhp a i fy> a > an( l "Hpa* that 
the ultimate is long, otherwise the penult of these words must be circumflcxed, 
8; — from the acute on <plxos and ttoikiAos, that the penult of these words is 
short, otherwise they must have been circumflexed, 8. — Ts. 



,~>'f 



J 30.] CHANGE AND REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT. 49 



§ 30. Change and Removal of the Accent by Inflec 
tion, Composition, and Contraction. 

1. When a word is changed by inflection, either in the quan- 
tity of its final syllable or hi the number of its syllables, there 
is generally a change or removal of the accent 

(a) By lengthening the final syllable, 

(a) a Proparoxytone becomes a Paroxytone, e. g. iroXe^os, 

TroXifxov ; 
(/5) a Properispomenon, a Paroxytone, e. g. reix ^ tzixgvs ; 
(y) an Oxytone, a Perispomenon, e. g. #eo?, Seov. Yet this 

change is -limited to particular cases. See § 45, 7, a. 

(b) By shortening the final syllable, 

(a) a dissyllabic Paroxytone with a penult long by nature 

becomes a Properispomenon, e. g. ^cvyw, <$>evye, irpaTre 

(but Tarre) ; 
(/3) a polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long 

or short, becomes a Proparoxytone, e. g. fiovXevu, J3ov- 

Xeve. 

(c) By prefixing a syllable or syllables to a word, the accent 
is commonly removed towards the beginning of the word, e. g. 
<£evya>, tyevyov; so also hi compounds, always in verbs, com- 
monly in substantives and adjectives, e. g. 68os crvvoSo?, #eds 
<j>i\6$eos, TLfxy artjao?, <f>evye a.7r6<f>evy€. But when syllables 
are appended to a word, the accent is removed towards the 
end of the word, e. g. tv7tt<o, tv— rope^a, Tu$>§r]<j6[X£§a. 

Eemark 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and 
the exceptions to the general rules here stated, will be seen below, under the 
accentuation of the several parts of speech. 

2. The following principles apply hi contraction : — 

(1) When neither of the two syllables to be contracted is 
accented, the contracted syllable also is unaccented; and the 
syllable which had the accent previous to contraction, still 
retains it, e. g. <£iAee = <£i'A.ei (but <j>l\Ul = <£tAet), yeWi = yem (but 
yeveoov = yevajj/). 

5 



50 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [$ 31. 

(2) But when one of the two syllables to be contracted is 
accented, the contracted syllable also is accented, 

(a) when the contracted syllable is the antepenult or penult, 
it takes the accent which the general rules require, e. g. 

ayairaofxai = ayaTrca/xat (pi\e6p^vos = (pi?^ov/xeuos 

icrraSros — earwros op&Sovo'i = opfrovai 

vArjeacra = v\ri<r<ra. Ti/xaovTav = TijxdbvTav | 

(b) when the contracted syllable is the ultimate, it takes the 

acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted had 

the acute ; the circumflex, when the first of the syllables 

was accented, e. g. co-Taw? = cotws, fopi = ^x°'* 

Rem. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below, under 
the contract Declensions and Conjugations. 



CHANGE AND EEMOVAL OF THE ACCENT IN CONNECTED 
DISCOURSE. 

§31. I. Grave instead of the Acute. — II. Crasis. — 
III. Elision. — IV. Anastrophe. 

I. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of 
the grave, i. e. by the close connection of the words with each 
other the sharp tone is weakened, or depressed, e. g. Et /xrj 
fjL7]TpvL7] 7repiKaXkr]<5 'HeptJSoia v\v. But the acute must stand before 
every punctuation-mark by which an actual division is made 
in the thought, as well as at the end of the verse, e. g. 'O jxh/ 
K-vpo-i iirepacre rov ttqtclilov, oi Se iroXifJUoi anrecfivyov. 

Exceptions. The interrogatives t/s, rl, quis? who? quid? what? always 
remain oxytoned. 

Remark 1. "When an Oxytone is not closely connected with the other 
words, i. e. when it is treated grammatically, the acute remains, e. g. et ro fi4\ 
\eyeis — to h.vr\p ovoixa. 

II. Words united by Crasis ($ 10), have only the accent ot 
the second word, that being the more important, e. g. rayaSov 
from ro ayaSov. When the second word is a dissyllabic Paroxy- 
tone with a short fina] syllable, the accent, according to §30, 2, 
(2) (a), is changed into the circumflex, e. g. to cVps = tovttos, 
ra aAAa = raXXa, to epyov = rovpyov ', ra pVXa = SomXa, cya> ot/xat = 
iyoijxai. 



$ 32.] ATONICS OR PROCLITICS. 51 

III. When an unaccented vowel is elided (§ 13), the accent 
of the word is not changed, e. g. tovt lanv. But if the elided 
vowel is accented, its accent is thrown back upon the preceding 
syllable, as an acute ; yet, when the elided word is a preposi- 
tion or one of the particles, a\\d, ovSe, /xrjSi (and the poetic 
rj&e, tSe), the accent wholly disappears, and also when the 
accented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided, e. g. 

iroWa iira&ov = iroTOC %ira&ov irapa ifiov = Trap ijxov 

Seiva. ep(ar5.s = Seiy ipcara.s airb eavrov = aft kavrov 

<pT]p.\ ij(t> = (p'fjfi £yc& aWa iyco = &AA' iydi 

alaxpd eAe£as = ou(?XP eXeijas ouSe £yc& = ovS' 4y<x> 

kirra -qffav = ctt i\<rav ^ Se 6s = it 5' 6s. 

IV. Anastrophe. When a preposition follows the word which 
it should precede, the tone of the preposition naturally inclines 
back to its word, and hence the accent is removed from the 
ultimate to the penult; this drawing back of the accent is 
called Anastrophe (avaarpo^) , e. g. 

fxdxns eWt but iirl y.dxr)S veccv &iro but airb vewv 

'l&aKTjv Kara " Kara 'I&dn7}j/ KaXcou iripi " irepl Ka\G>v. 

Rem. 2. The prepositions, afxcpt, avri, avd, Sid, and the ' poetic viral, virdp, 
Biai, irapai, do not admit Anastrophe. If the preposition stands between an 
adjective and a substantive, according to Aristarchus the Anastrophe is found 
only when the substantive stands first, e. g. aavfrcp iiri Sivfevri (but Su/fievTi iirl 
adv&cp). Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe in both cases. — In poetry, 
irepi is subject to Anastrophe only when it governs the Gen., but then very 
often, and even when the Gen. and irept are separated by other words. See 
§ 300, (c.) 

Rem. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used 
instead of abridged forms of the verb, e. g. dva instead of avd<T$rt\Ti ; /xera, irdpa, 
e7n, vtro, irepi, ivi, instead of the indicative present of elvai, compounded with 
these prepositions, e. g. eycb irdpa instead of irdpeifii, iripi instead of irepUo-n ; 
also, when the preposition is separated from the verb and placed -after it, which 
is often the case in the Epic dialect, e. g. bxiaas 'diro irdvras eralpovs. But the 
accent of air6 is drawn back without any reason, in such phrases as airb &a\do-- 
<rr\s oIk€?u, airb <tkoitov, air ihiridos, and the like ; in such cases it is properly on 
the ultimate. 

$ 32. V. Atonies or Proclitics. 

Atonies or Proclitics, are certain monosyllables which, in 
connected discourse, are so closely united to the following 



52 ENCLITICS. [$ 33. 

word, that they coalesce with it, and lose their accent. Thev 
axe: — 

(a) the forms of the article, 6, t), ol, at; 

(b) the prepositions, iv, et§ (es), e/c (e£), w?, ad; but if e£ is 
after the word which it governs, and at the end of averse, 
or before a punctuation-mark, it retains the accent, e. g. 
KaKw !£, H. £, 472 ; in prose, i£ does not stand after its 
case. 

(c) the conjunctions, d>? (as), d\ but if cbs follows the word 
which it should precede, it has the accent ; this position, 
however, is found only among the poets, e. g. kolkoI ws, 
for da? kclkol; 

(d) ov (ovk, ovx), not; but at the end of a sentence and with 
the meaning No, it has the accent, ov (ovk). Comp. 
§ 15, Rem. 2, 

§ 33. VI Enclitics. 

Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, which, in 
connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, 
to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or throw 
it back upon the preceding word, e. g. <£iA.os tis, 7roXc/ios ns. 
They are : — 

(a) the verbs el/xt, to be, and <pr)p.i, to say, in the Pres. Indie, except the second 
Pers. Sing., el, thou art, and <prjs, thou sayest ; 

(b) the following forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic dia- 
lect : — 



1. P. S. fJLOV 

fioi 

/ 

Ate 



II. P. S. <rov 
<roi 
<r4 



III. P. S. ol Dual. ccpui'Cv PL ccpiai {v) 

Ol 



(c) the indefinite pronouns, rls, r\, through all the cases and numbers, 
together with the abridged forms rod and t<£ , and the indefinite adverbs irds, 
nrf>, ir-}), iroi, Trofrl, iro&ev, -not, ttori ; but the corresponding interrogative pro- 
nouns are always accented, e. g. rls, ri, iroos, etc. 5 

(d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, re, rol, ye, vvv, irip (and in 
the Epic, k4, k£v, vv, pd), and the inseparable particle 5e, § 34, Eem. 3. 

Remake. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming 
with them one word, with a meaning of its own, e. g. e^re, otfre, /xrire, &sre, 
8>sirep } '6sris, etc. 



$ 34.J INCLINATION OF THE ACCENT. 53 



$ 34. Inclination of the Accent. 

1. An Oxytone so unites with the following enclitic, that the 
accent, winch is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence 
($ 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g. 

&7jp ris for &7]p rls KaXos effriv for KaXbs effriv 

Kai rives " nal rives irorafj-Ss ye " irorafibs ye 

K<xX6s re " KaXbs re irorap-oi rives " Trorafiol rives. 

2. A Perispomenon unites with tne followmg enchtic without 
further change of the accent, e. g. 

(poos ri for (peas rl (piXe? ris for (piXe? rls 

(poos effriv ' : (poos effriv KoiXov rivos " KaXou rivSs, 

Remark 1. A Perispomenon followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, is regarded 
as an Oxytone. For as (poos ianv, for example, are considered as one -word in 
respect to accent, and as the circumflex cannot go further back than the penult 
(§ 29, 7), the Perispomenon must be regarded as an Oxytone. Long syllables 
in enclitics are treated as short in respect to the accent ; hence oTvrivoiv, wvrir 
voov, are viewed as separate words, e. g. icaXoov rivoov. 

3. A Paroxytone unites with the following monosyllabic 
enchtic without further change of the accent ; but there is no 
inclination when the enclitic is a dissyllable, e. g. 

(piXos fxov for (piXos fxov but (piXos effriv, (piXoi (paffiv 
aXXos iroos " &XXos ttojs v ' &XXos Trore, aXXoov rivoov. 

Rem. 2. It is evident that if there was an inclination of the accent when a 
Paroxytone was followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, the accent would stand on 
the fourth syllable, e. g. <£ >Aoi-(paaiv, which is contrary to the usage of the 
language. 

4. A Proparoxytone and a Properispomenon unite with the 
following enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last sylla- 
ble; this syllable forms the tone- syllable for the following 
enclitic, as aj/#po>-7ros rts, e. g. 

avSrpooir6s ris for avSrpooiros rls ffujxa rv for croofxa rl 

&v&pooiroi rives " av&pooiroi rives aco/j-d effriv " ffa>/j.a effriv. 

Exception. A Properispomenon, ending in £ or ty, does not admit the incli- 
nation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. avXa£ nv6s, avAa£ itrriv, (poivi£ effriv, Kripv^ 
iariv, XaiXwp effriv. 

5* 



54 ENCLITICS ACCENTED. [$ 35 

Eem. 3. The local suffix 5e (£e), which expresses the relation to a place, 
whither, coalesces with substantives according to the rules of inclination, e. g. 

"OXv/j.irovb'e S^TjTToVSe ovpavovSs Ilv^coSe (from Tlvfrca) 
e/>e/3os§e 'E\evcr?i/dde MiyapdSe S6fxovde. 

So 'A^ra^e (i. e. 'AfrfivasBe), nXaraiafc (YlXaraial), X a M»C e (x^" 5 Ace.) The 
suffix Se when appended to the Demon, pronoun draws the accent of this pro- 
noun to the syllable before Se. In the oblique cases, these strengthened 
pronouns are accented according to the rules for Oxytones, § 45, 7 (a), e. g. 

r6o~os — roaSsde, rocovde, TO<r<£5*e, roa-fjvBe, roauvde, 
rotos — roiosfie, tt)\Ikos — rrjXiKosSe, rcuffi — roioiSe, 

%v&a — iv&dfie. 

5. When several enclitics occur together, each throws back 
its accent on the preceding, e. g. et nip n's o-e ftot cfrrjo-L 7rore. 

§35. Enclitics accented. 

Some enclitics, whose signification allows them to be in a measure indepen- 
dent, are accented in the following cases : — 

1. 'Eo-Ti (v) is accented on the penult, when it stands in connection with an 
Inf. for e^eaTi (y), and after the particles a?<X\ et, ovk, pd), &s, kcli, p.ev, oti, ttov, 
and the pronoun tovt, and also at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. I8e?v ianv 
(licet videre), et ecrriv, ovk ecrriv, tovt eariv, eem 3-eo's, etc.; the other forms of 
elfxi which are capable of inclination, retain the usual accent on the ultimate, 
when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. dal 3-eoi. 

2. The forms of (prj/xl which are capable of inclination, retain the accent, 
when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, and also when they are sep- 
arated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark, e. g. (p-r/pX iycf>. — "Ectiv 
avTjp ayc&Ss, (p7]fxi. 

3. The enclitic Pers. pronouns, cod, croi, (re, of, <r<pi<n (v), retain their accent: 
(a) when an accented Prep, precedes, e. g. irapa crov, fiera cr4, irpbs croi. But 

the enclitic forms of toe first Pers. pronoun are not used with accented 
prepositions, but, mstead of them, the longer and regularly accented 
forms, e. g. 

Trap 1 ifiov not irapd fiov irphs i/xoi not irpSs fxoi 

icar ip.4 " Kara p.e irepl ip.ov " irepi fiov. 

Eemark 1. There are, however, a few instances of enclitics of the first Pers. 
pronoun standing with accented prepositions, e. g. irpSs fie. PI. Symp. 218, c. 

Eem. 2. When the emphasis is on the preposition, there is an inclination 
of the accent, e. g. iirl ere % <rvv croi, X. An. 7. 7, 32 (against you, rather than with 
you). — The enclitic forms are used with the unaccented prepositions, e. g. e/c 
ixov, iv p.oi, es ere, is fie, %k aov, eV croi. Bat when the emphasis is on the pro- 
noun, there is no inclination, and instead of p.ov, p.ol, p.4, — ipov, ip.oi, ip.4, are 
used, e. g. iv ipoi, dAA' ovk iv aoi. 



$ 36.] DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 55 

{b) The enclitic pronouns generally retain their accent when they are em- 
phatic, as in antitheses, e. g. ip.e koi <re ; i/xh ^ <re ; hence the forms ov, of, 
I, are accented, only when they are used as reflexive pronouns. 

4. The pronoun rls is accented when it stands at the beginning of a sentence, 
e. g. rives Xeyovciv. 

5. There is no inclination, when the accent of the word on which the enclitic 
rests disappears by Elision, e. g. icaXbs 8* io~rip t but KaXhs 5e ianv — iroXXol 5* 
el<riv> but iroXXol Se elffiv* 



$36. Division of Syllables. 

Preliminary Remarks. The division of syllables, according to our mode 
of pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon "the place of the accent. The 
term accent and accented, throughout these rules, is used with reference to our 
pronunciation of the Greek, and not to the written accent on the Greek words. 

The accent (stress) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepenult in 
polysyllables, when the penult is short. The accent on the penult or antepenult 
is called the primary accent. If two syllables precede the primary accent, there 
is a secondary accent on the first syllable of the word. 

The following rules exhibit the more general method of dividing syllables, 
except where the pronunciation is regulated by the Greek accent : — 

1. A single consonant between the vowels of the penult and ultimate is 
joined to the latter, e. g. &-ya, ira-pd, fxd-Xa, t-va, i-r6s, i-x<6p, irSxe-fios, orpdrev- 
jxa, x a ^ e " 7r< ^ s > Xoxa-y6s, irnoXa-fidiv. 

Exception. In dissyllables, a single consonant following e or o is joined to 
the first syllable, e. g. Xoy-os, reX-os, Trep-l, or-i, ttoX-v, !%-&?, aroX-os. 

2. The double consonants £ and $ are joined to the vowel preceding them ; 
e. g. rd^-a, oty-os, TTpa^-is, h/Tira^-dixevos. But £ is joined to the vowel following 
it, except when it stands after e or o, or after an accented vowel in the ante- 
penult, — in which case it is joined with these vowels; e. g. vo^l-fy, vo/xi-(e t 
apTrd-fa ; but rpdire^-a, 6(-os, vopl^-op.tv, apird^-opiev. 

3. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and 
s, having the accent, and also a single consonant before or after e and o having 
the accent, is joined to these vowels ; e. g. ay-aSros, Tror-a/xos, fia-o-iX-ia, v-iroX- 
afi&v, 5-ir6r-epos, riS-o/Aev, a-irop-ia, ev-Suc-ia, im-rlfi-ia] for a single consonant 
after a long vowel, etc., see 4. 

Exception. A single consonant preceded by a, and followed by two vowels, 
the first of which is € or i, is joined to the vowel after it : e. g. arpa-nd, avacrrd- 
<reo>s, (rrpa-Tid)TT}s (not ar par-id, etc.). 

4. A single consonant after a long vowel, a diphthong or v, is joined to the 
Vowel following; e.g. airoTTj-Xo^n, icp-q-jxepos, (piXw-repos, aKoXov-&ia, aKOv-aars-, 
fxv-plas, a&v-p.ia, (pii-youres, (pv-yop.ev. 

Exception. A single consonant following long a or i in the antepenult, and 
having the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding ; e. g. airoKpxv-a.ro, e<nj- 
iiav-cyiev. 



56 DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH, ETC. [§$ 37, 38 

5. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, are 
separated ; e. g. iroX-Xa, ia-rdvai, Tegr-j/wtca, &ap-pa\QU>s, KXvrorex-vns. 

Exception. A mute and liquid are sometimes joined to the following vowel ; 
e. g, ^ri-rpuxrxoy. 

6. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last 
two, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel ; if not, the las4 
only ; e. g- 'dv-frpooiros, av-'Bpia, but irepcp-frnv. 

7. Compounds are divided into their constituent parts, when the first part 
ends with a consonant ; but if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a 
short syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word ; e. g. iic-fiaivw, 
cweK-cp(tiV7)<ris, irpofr-effis, avdfi-affks, but viro-<p7jTr)s, not inrocp^rTjs ; SO •Jrapo- 

h 37. Punctuation-marks — Diastole . 

1. The colon and semicolon are indicated by the same mark, a point above 
the line, e. g. Ed eXe^as • irdvres yap w/j-oXSynerav. The interrogation-mark is 
our semicolon, e. g. Tls ravra i-n-olrjaeu; who did this ? The period, comma, and 
mark of exclamation have the same characters as in English 5 the mark of 
exclamation is rarely used. 

2. The Diastole (or Hypodiastole), which has the same character as the 
comma, is used to distinguish certain compound words from others of like 
sound, but of dissimilar meaning, e. g. o, rt, whatever, and on, that, since ; 0, re 9 
ivJmtever, and ore, when. More recently, such words are generally separated in 
writing ncarely, e. g. '6 n, '6 re. 



SECTION II. 

ETYMOLOGY, OR GRAMMATICAL FORMS. 

§38. Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflection. 

1. Etymology relates to the form and meaning of the Parts 
of Speech. 

2. The Parts of Speech are: — 

(1) Substantives, which denote anything which exists, any 
object (person or thing) ; as man, rose, house, virtue; 

(2) Adjectives, which denote a property or quality; as great, 
small, red, beautiful, hateful ; 



♦ 38.] DIVISION OP THE PARTS OP SPEECH. — INFLECTION. 51 

(3) Pronouns, which denote the relation of the object spoken 
of to the speaker ($ 86) ; as I, thou, he, this, that, mine, thmv, 
his ; 

(4) Numerals, which denote the number or quantity of an 
object; as one, tico, three, many,feiv; 

(5) Verbs, which denote an action or state; as to bloom, to 
wake, to sleep, to love, to censure ; 

(6) Adverbs, which denote the way and manner in winch an 
action takes place, or the relations of place, time, manner, qual- 
ity, and number; as here, yesterday, beautifully (=in a beautiful 
manner), perhaps, often, rarely ; 

(7) Prepositions, which denote the relation of space, time, 
etc. of an object to an action or tiring; as (to stand) before the 
house, after sunset, before sleep ; 

(8) Conjunctions, which connect words and sentences, or 
determine the relation between sentences ; as and, but, because. 

3. Words are either essential words, i. e. such as express a 
notion, or idea, viz. the substantive, adjective, verb, and the 
adverbs derived from them; or formal words, i. e. such as 
express merely the relations of the idea to the speaker or some 
one else, viz. the pronoun, numeral, preposition, conjunction, the 
adverbs derived from them, and the verb etvat, to be, when it is 
used as a copula, with an adjective or substantive for its predi- 
cate ; as 6 avSpomos SvT]r6s i(TTLV. 

Remark. Besides the parts of speech above mentioned, there are certain 
organic sounds, called interjections ; as alas ! oh ! ah 1 They express neither 
an idea nor the relation of an idea, and hence are not to he considered as proper 
words. — Prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs not derived from adjectives 
and substantives, are included under the common name of Particles. 

4. Inflection is the variation or modification of a word in 
order to indicate its different relations. The inflection of the 
substantive, adjective, pronoun, and numeral, is termed Declen- 
sion ; the inflection of the verb, Conjugation. The other parta 
of speech do not admit inflection. 



58 DIFFERENT KINDS AND GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. [$$39, 40 

CHAPTER I. 
The Substantive. 

$ 39. Different kinds of Substantives . 

1. When a substantive (§ 38) indicates an object, which has 
an actual, independent existence, it is termed a Concrete substan- 
tive, e. g. man, ivoman, lion, earth, flower, host; but when the 
substantive indicates an action or quality, which is only conceived 
of as being something actual or independent, it is called an 
Abstract substantive, e. g. virtue, wisdom. 

2. The Concretes are, 

(a) Proper nouns, when they denote only single persons or 
things, and not a class ; as Cyrus, Plato, Hellas, Athens ; 

(b) Appellatives, when they denote an entire class or an 
individual of a class ; as moi'tal, tree, man, woman, flower. 

Remark. Appellatives are called material nouns, when they indicate the 
simple material, e. g. milk, dust, water, gold, coin, grain ; collective nouns, when 
they designate many single persons or things as one whole, e. g. mankind, 
cavalry, fleet ; nouns of quantity, when they denote measure or weight, e. g. a 
bushd, a pound. 

$40. Gender of Substantives . 

Substantives have three genders, as in Latin ; the gender is 
determined partly by the meaning of the substantives, and 
partly by their endings. The last mode will be more fully 
treated under the several declensions. The following general 
rules determine the gender of substantives by their mean- 
ing : — 

1. The names of males, of nations, winds, months, and most 
rivers, are masculine, e. g. 6 fiacnXevs, the Icing ; 61 "EXXrjves, 6 
TafjLrjXtuv (January, nearly) ; 6 'AXfaios, the Alphcus ; 6 evpos, the 
southeast wind. 

Remark 1 . Exceptions : Diminutives in -ov, which are not proper names 
(these are conceived of as things and are neuter) ; e. g. to fieipdictov, the lad 
(but proper names of females in -ov are feminine, e. g. t) Acovtiov) ; also ri 
b.vZpa.TvoZov, a slave, mancipium ; to, 7ratSi/cct, a favorite ; and some rivers, e. g. 
f] 2tu|, and also some according to the ending, e. g. r\ At?^. 

2. The names of females are feminine, e. g. y\ i^rqp, mother. 



§ 40.] GEXDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 59 

3. The names of the letters, infinitives, all indeclinable 
words, and every word used as a mere symbol, are neuter, e. g. 
to \ajxf38a, to TviTTuvy the striking ; to prprqp, the word mother. 

Eem. 2. The gender of the names of mountains is determined by their 
endings; hence (a) masculine, 'EXwdov, -wvos, etc.: those in -os, Gen. -ov, e.g. 
JlapvaaSs ; in -oes,. -a>, e. g.'ASxcs (d'Epvi;, derived from the name of a person, 
is particularly to he observed) ; (b) feminine, those in -y (a), Gen. -ys^, e. g. 
AXrvy, y l57j, Oitt} ; those in -is and -vs, e. g. v AA7ns, Gen. -ews, "AXireis, -ecov, 
Ka.pafj.fiis, -fios, "Osfyus, -i/os (masculine in Lat.), n«p^7]s, -tj^-os ; (c) neuter, those 
in -ov, e. g. Avnaiov, Ui\Xiov. 

Eem. 3. The gender of the names of places also is determined almost entirely 
by the endings ; only a few of these are feminine, properly agreeing with the fem- 
inine appellatives 777, x^P a i vycros (i. e. vsovcra x&P a )<, noXis to be supplied with 
them ; (a) names of cities and islands in -os, -ov, e. g. y Kopiv&os [ttSxis], y 'PoSos 
\vyaos], y AyXos \yyo~os\ (except 6 'OyxyvTSs, o Tipcairos, AlyiaX6s, Kavunros; 
usually 6 'Opxo/J.ev6s, 6 'AXiapros; but generally y UvXos and y 'EiriSavpos) ; and 
the following names of countries : y AXyvirTos, y Xeppovyaos, y "Hireipos, y TleXo- 
novvyo'os : {b) names of cities in -u>v, e. g. y BafivXav, -covos, y AaKeSal/jiav, -ovos, 
y 'Av&yS&v, -ovos, y XaXKySdcv, -ovos, y Kapx^w;/, -ovos (except 6 OiVewv and o 
Bpavpc&v, -wvos, usually 6 Mapa&cov, -wvos; but commonly y Zsitcvdov, -wvos) : (c) 
y Tpoi£yv, -yvos. The gender of the others is determined by the endings. 
Hence. 

(a) All names of countries in -os, Gen. -ov (except those named above), are 
masculine, e. g. 6 B6o"irepos, 'I<r&fj.6s, Hovtos, 'EXXysirovros, AlyiaX6s ; all plural 
names of cities in -01, Gen. -<av, e. g. $lXnriroi : names of cities in -ovs, Gen. 
-ovvtos, e. g. 6 "ttyovs (some of these are used both as masculine and feminine, 
e. g. QiXovs; 'AfiaSovs, Kepaaovs, 'Pa/xvovs, 2i5ovs, and Tpaire^ovs, are feminine 
only) ; those in -as, Gen. -avros, e. g. 6 Tapas; those in -evs, Gen. -eas, e.g. 
6 Qavorevs ; finally. 6 bldcrys, Gen. -yros ; 

(b) All names of countries -of the first Dec. and those of the third, which 
have feminine endings, are feminine (see § 66, II), e. g. y ^EXevtris, -7vos, y 
'S.aXauis, -Ivos, CtC.^ 

(c) AH in -ov, Gen. -ov : plurals in -a, Gen. -ow, and those in. -os, Gen. -ovs, 
are neuter, e. g. to*\Xiov, rb. AeC/crpa. rb^Apyes, Gen. -ovs. 

4. The names of persons which have only one form for the 
Masc. and Fern, are of common gender, e. g. 6 rj Scos, god and 
goddess ; b rj ttoxs, boy and girl. 

Eem. 4. Movable substantives are such as change their ending so as to 
indicate the natural gender, e. g. 6 &a<riXzvs, king; y fiaalXeia, queen. See For- 
mation of Words. 

Eem. 5. Substantives (mostly names of animals) which have but one gram- 
matical gender, either Masc. or Fem,, to denote both genders, are called 
Epicenes (tiriKoiva), e. g. y aXdeiry£, the fox, whether the male or female fox: r t 
&pKTos, the bear; y Ka/xyXos, the camel; 5 /xvs, the mouse; y %eXi5wi/, the swallow ; 
rj ols. the sheep ; y f3ovs (collectively), at fioes, cattle; 6 "ttitos, horse (indefinitely), 
but in PI., al Ittttoi ; but when the natural gender is to be distinguished, appyv, 
nude, or fryXvs. female, is added, e. g. Xayus 6 &yXvs, the female hare; aXdoirt]^ y 
&p'pyv, the male fox ; or the gender may be indicated by prefixing the article, oi 
by another adjective, c. g. 6 &pktos, the male bear. Some masculine names of 
animals have also the corresponding feminine forms, e.g. o AeW, a lion: y 
Xiaiva, a lioness. See Eem. 4. — Here belong, in the second place, the Masc 
names of persons in the PI., which include the Fcm., e. g. ol yove7s, Vie parent* 
oi iralfes, liberi, the children (sons and daughters) 



CO 



NUMBER CASE, AND DECLENSION. 



FIRST DEC. 



41,4? 



$41. Number, Case, and Declension. 

1. The Greek lias three Numbers ; the Singular, denoting one 
person or thing ; the Plural more than one ; and the Dual, two. 

Eemark 1. The dual is not often used; it is found most frequently in the 
Attic dialect ; it does not occur in the -ZEolic, nor in the Hellenistic Greek 

2. The Greek has five Cases, 1 Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
Accusative, and Vocative. 

Eem. 2. The Nom. and Voc., as they represent an ohject as independent of 
any other, are called independent cases (casus recti) ; the others, as they rep- 
resent an ohject as dependent on or related to some other, are called dependent 
cases (casus obliqui). 

Eem. 3. Neuter substantives and adjectives have the same form in the Nom., 
Ace, and Yoc. of all numbers. The dual has only two case-endings j one for 
the Nom., Ace, and Voc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. 

3. There are in the Greek three different ways of inflecting 
substantives; distinguished as the First, Second, and Third 
Declensions. 

Eem. 4. The three declensions may be reduced to two principal declensions, 
viz. the strong and the weak. The case-endings of the strong are prominent and 
clearly distinguishable, while those of the weak are less distinctly marked. 
Words of the third Dec. belong to the strong, those of the first and second to 
the weak. In the third Dec. the case-endings uniformly appear pure ; in the 
first and second this is less so, because in these declensions the stems end in a 
vowel, and hence combine with the case-endings which begin with a vowel. 
The inflexion of both the principal declensions, in the Masc. and Eem., is as 
follows : — 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 




Strong. 


Weak. 


Strong. 


Weak. 


Strong. 


Weak. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


s 

OS 

i 

v and a 


I— II s 

S 

i 

V 


€S 

(fiV 

ai(v) 
as 


t 

OiV 
IS 

as 


€ 

OLV 

OIV 

€ 


e 

IV 
IV 

6 



§ 42. First Declension. 

The first declension has four endings, a and r\ feminine ; as 
and r]<s masculine. 



See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, § 268, seq. 



•43.] 



NOUNS OF THE FEMININE GENDER. 



61 







Endings. 








Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 


ad or 7] 


as or 77s 


at 


d 


Gen. 


7}s as 


7)S 


ov 


uv 


atv 


Dat. 


V * 


V 


? V 


ais 


o.iv 


Ace. 


av av 


7]V 


av f\v 


as 


a 


Voc. 


a a 


V- 


a 77, a. 


ai 


d. 



Remark 1. It will be seen from the above terminations, that the plural as 
■well as the dual endings are the same, whatever may be the form of the singu- 
lar. 

Rem. 2. The original ending of the Dat. PI. was aicri (v), as in the second 
Dec. okti(v), e.g. SiKaiffif ralai, Ka[nrai<ri, 3-eoTcn, <TfjLiKp6t<rt t ayd&oicri. This 
form is also found in the Attic poets, and is not foreign even to prose, at least 
to that of Plato, especially in the second Dec. Even the Ionic form -770-1 (v) 
is sometinies used by the Attic poets. 



$ 43. Nouns of the Feminine Gender. 

1. (a) The Nom. ends in d or a, which remains in all the 
Cases, if it is preceded by p, €, or 1 (a pure), e. g. x^P a > land; 
l8ia,form; o-o<j>ia, wisdom ; ypda> utility ; evvoia, benevolence ; here 
also belong the contracts in d (see No. 2), e. g. fiva; some sub- 
stantives in a, e. g. aXaXd, ivar-cry, and some proper names, e. g. 

'AvSpo/xe'Sd, ArjSd, PeAd, ^lAo/A^Ad, Gen. -as, Dat. -a, Ace. -av. 

Remark 1. Th.' following words whose stem ends in p, take the ending 77 
instead of a: ic6p-n, maiden; ic6pp7], cheek; 5ep7j, neck; a&ap-n, water-gruel; and 
some proper names introduced from the Ionic dialect, e. g. 'Ecpvpr) ; the 77 then 
remains through all the cases of the Sing. — If any other vowel than e or 1, 
precedes, the Nom. and all the cases of the Sing, have 77, e. g. aicor), <pwn, (ncey-h, 
fyy] except ir6a, grass; x?^ a i color; crSa, porch; yva, Jield; <riicva, gourd; 
Kapva, walnut-tree ; i\da, olive-tree ; a\<ad, threshing-floor ; Navciicda, all Gen. -as. 

(b) The Nom. ends in d, which remains only in the Ace. and 
Voc. ; but in the Gen. and Dat., it is changed into 77, if the a is 
preceded by \, AA, o-, era- (jt), £, £ xj/. 

Rem. 2. The ending is commonly in a when v precedes, e. g. i%^va (so es- 
pecially in words in -aiva) ; but 77 is often found, as is always the case in the 
suffix avvT), e. g. eveppoavvr], also fro'ivr], Trpvfxvrj and irpv/xva, ireivT) and Tre?va. 
Aiana is the only word ending in a preceded by a single t. 

(c) In other cases, the Nom. ends in 77, which remains 
throughout the singular. 

6 



62 



NOtWS OF THE MASCULINE GENDfcft. 



[$44. 



2. If a is preceded by e or a, -ea is contracted in most words 
into rj, and -da into a in all the Cases (comp. fioppas, § 44, 3). 
The final syllable remains circumflexed in all the Cases. 

Rem, 3. The first Dec. is called the a declension, as its uninflected forms 
end in a, e. g. yvS/x-q from the uninflected yv&fiea (comp. <rvnea), veavias from 
the uninflected veavia, iroXirris from TroXirea] the second, the o declension, as 
its uninflected forms end in o, e. g. \6yos, uninflected form x6yo ; the third, the 
consonant declension, as its uninflected forms end in a consonant, and the vowels 
and v, which originated from consonants. 

Paradigms. 







a) rj 


through a 


11 the cases. 


b) a through 


all the cases. 


c) d, Gen. 7]s. 






Opinion. 


Fig-tree. 


Shadow. 


Land. 


Hammer. 


Lioness. 


s 


N. 


V 


yvdofxri 


(Tvk-( ea)7j 


(TKL-d 


Xwpd 


ffcpvpa 


Kiaivd 




G. 


T7)S 


yvd>iJ.7]s 


avK-rjs 


(TKl-aS 


X&P&s 


(rcpvpas 


\eaiur\s 




JL>. 


T V 


yviapsQ 


avK-r} 


(TKi-a 


X&pa. 


crcpvpq, 


Aeatvr) 




A. 


TT]U 


ypu>/j.r]U 


GvK-y\v 


<TKi-av 


X&pdv 


(T(pvpdv 


\4aivav 




V. 


& 


yv&jULt) 


avK'f] 


(TKL-a 


Xfya 


ffcpvpd 


\4aivd 


p 


ST. 


al 


yvciiticu 


ffVK-CU 


<TKi-ai 


X&p&t- 


crcpvpat 


Aeaivai 




G. 


TUP 


yvui/Aoov 


crvK-cov 


CKl-OiV 


X<»p(*>v 


acpvpoov 


Xeaivcev 




1). 


rais 


yvuifiais 


CVK-CUS 


aKi-cus 


X&pais 


cr<pvpcus 


Aealvais 




A. 


ras 


yvdoftas 


avK-as 


cnci-as 


X<*>pds 


a<pvpds 


Xeaivds 




V. 


& 


yvwfxai 


crvK-ai 


(TKl-tli 


XMpcu 


acpvpai 


Xiaivai 


D 


ual. 


T& 


yj/d/xd 


avK-a 


CTKl-G. 


X&pa 


ffcpvpa 


Xeaivd 






TCUP 


yv(i>[xaiv 


crvK-aiv 


triwaiv 


X<&po.iv 


crfpvpaiv 


Xsaivaiv. 



Remark 1. On the form of the article rdo instead of rd, see § 241, Rem. 10. 
On the declension of the article tj, see § 91. The & standing before the singu- 
lar and plural Yoc. is a mere exclamation. 

Rem. 2. On the contraction of -ea into -77, see § 9, II. (a) ; in the plural and 
dual of the first and second declensions, however, -ea is contracted into a. 
Comp. § 9, II. (b). Nouns in -aa are contracted as follows: N. /nuda, fxva 
'(mina), G. fJLudas, /xuas, D. /traa, fxva y A. p.j/day, fivav) PI. N. [avo.7, etc. 



4 44. II. Nouns of the Masculine Gender. 

1. The Gen. of masculine nouns ends in -ov; nouns in -as 
retain the a in the Dat, Ace, and Voc, and those in -779 retain 
the 77 in the Ace. and Dat. Sing. 

2. The Voc. of substantives in -779 ends in d: — 

(1) All in -T7}s, e. g. to£6t7]s, Voc. to£6tol, irpo^rr}^ Voc. irpo^r)- 
ra ; (2) all in -979 composed of a substantive and a verb, e. g. 
yewjjLeTprjs, Voc. yeco/xerpa, fJLVp07ru)Xrjs, O, salve -seller, Voc. fxvpo< 



44. 



MASCULINE NOUNS. ^- FIRST DECLENSION. 



63 



frwAa; (3) national names in -779, e. g. nepo-775, a Persian, Voc. 
Ilepa-a. — ■ All other nouns in -r}% have the Voc. in 77, e. g. Htpo-rjs, 
Perses (the name of a man), Voc. Heparj. 

3. The remarks on contract feminine nouns ($ 43, 2), ap- 
ply to Masc. nouns contracted from -£as, e. g. 'Epp)?, fioppas. 
In /3opeas, the ea is contracted into a, and not into -7, since p 
precedes, $ 43, 1 (a). The doubling of the p in fioppas is merely 
accidental. 

Remark 1. Contrary to § 43, I, compounds of ixerpeu (to measure), as 
yecajxirpris, end in -Tjs instead of -as: on the contrary, several proper names, etc., 
as rieAe7ri5as and yevvaSas, a noble, end in -as instead of -r\s. 

Rem. 2. Several masculine nouns in -as have the Doric Gen. in d, namely, 
TvarpaXoias, [x-qTpaXoias, patricide, matricide; bpvi&o&rjpas, fowler; also several 
proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, e. g. "TXas, Gen. 
'TAd, 'Xnoiras, -d, 'Awifias, -a, ~2vXXas, -d ; (the pure Greek, and also several 
of the celebrated Doric names, e. g. 'Apxvras, Aecovidas, Xlavaavias (also the 
Boeotian 'Eira/xeivc&vSas), commonly have ov ;) finally, contracts in as, e. g. 
Boppas, Gen. fioppa. 

Paradigms. 





Citizen. 


Mercury. 


Youth. 


Fowler. 


Sing. N. 


iroXvrrjs 


c Ep/j. (eas) 7js 


veavias 


opvi&ofrfip&s 


G. 


iroXirov 


'Ep/j,ov 


veaviov 


bpvL&o&ripa 


D. 


itoKIttj 


"Epp.fi 


veavia 


bpv&oSrripa 


A. 


iroXirrjif 


'Ep/J.TJI' 


vzav'iav 


opvi&ofrqpav 


V. 


voXItS. 


'EpiJLT] 


veavia 


opviSro£rf]pa 


Plur. N. 


iroArrai 


'Epjxai 


veaviai 


bpviSroSnjpai 


G. 


iroXirwv 


'EpjxSiv 


vzavioiV 


bpv&rofrqptbv 


D. 


iroXirais 


'Epfxals 


veaviais 


bpvi&ofrfjpais 


A. 


woXiras 


'Ep/jtas 


veavias 


opvi&o&ripas 


V. 


iroXlrai. 


'Ep/xa? 


veaviai 


bpvi&o&rjpat 


Dual. 


iroXira 


'Epjxa 


veavia 


opvi&o&ripa 




iroXiraiv 


'EpfXQkiv 


veaviau* 


bpviSroSn'ipaiv 



Rem. 3. The Ionic Genitive-ending -ea> of Masc. nouns in -77s (§ 211), is 
retained even in the Attic dialect in some proper names, e. g. ©dxeco from 
QaXqs, T^pew from Triprfs. — The contract floppas is also found in the Attic 
writers in the uncontracted form ; thus, fiopeas, X. An. 5. 7, 7. PI. Phaedr. 229, 
b. jSopeou, Th. 3, 23. fiopeav, 3, 4. 

Rem. 4. The ending rjs occurs, also, in the third Dec. To the first Dec 
belong: (a) proper names in -1877s and -dSris, e. g. QovklBlStis, 'Arpddrjs (from 
'ATpe and /Stis). MiXriddris, as well as gentile nouns, e. g. ~X-KapTidri]s ; (b) nouns 
in -T7js derived from verbs, e. g. -kov^t^s from 7rotew; (c) compounds consisting 
of a substantive and verb, or of a substantive compounded with another of the 
first Dec, e. g. iraiSoTptfiris, f3ifiXioira>Xris, ap^eSftcyis. 



64 QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION.- — FIRST DEC. [$45 



$45. Quantity and Accentuation of the First 
Declension. 

a. Quantity. 

1. The Nom. ending a is short in all words, which have tlie Gen. in -77s [§ 43, 
1 (b)] ; but long in those which have the Gen, in -as, e. g. TrreAed, ovad, aocpia, 
7rai5etd, xp^d, XP 0L ^> 7r ^ a > V^pd, ArjSd, d\a\d, etc. ; the same is true of the Fern, 
ending of adjectives in os, e. g. iAev&epa, ducald. 

Exceptions. 
The following classes of words have a short in the Nom. : — 

(a) Dissyllables, and some Polysyllabic names of places in -aid, e. g. 'larlaia, 
IlAdraia. 

(b) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -eta, e. g. dA?j&eta, MrjSeia, fiacrlXeta, 
queen, yXvKeia, except abstracts from verbs in -e v co, e. g\ /3atnAeid, king- 
dom ; SouAeta, servitude (from fiacntevco, 5ovAe«;a>) ; 

(c) the names and designation of females, etc. in -rpia, e. g. \\id\rpia, a female 
musician, words in -v Id, e. g. juuta, Terv(pv?a, the numeral /^'d, and, finally, 
some poetic words ; 

(d) Trisyllables and Polysjdlables in -oid, e. g. evvoia, frvoia; 

(e) words in -pa whose penult is long by a diphthong (except av), by, t/, or 
by $p, e. g. 7ret/)a, fxdxoupa ; ye<pvpa, <r<pvpa ; livppd. 'ETatpd, iraXalarpd, 
A?&pa, #cuSpa, KoXKvpa, are exceptions. 

2. The Voc. ending a is always short in nouns in -rjs ; but always long in 
nouns in -as, e. g. iro\7ra from iroKirys, veavla from veavias. The quantity of 
Fern, nouns in -d and -d, is the same in the Yoc. as in the Nom. 

3. The Dual ending a is always long, e. g. Moiad from Movo~a. 

4. The Ace. ending av is like the Nom., e. g. Modcrdv, x^P°- v from Movtrd, 
X&pd. 

5. The ending as is always long, e. g. Tds rpair4(ds from T/>dVe£d, o peaces, 
tous veavias, rrjs olnlds, rds oiKids. 

b. Accentuation. 

6. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws 
of accentuation permit (§ 30J). 

Exceptions. 
(a) The Yoc. deo-irora from ZeffirSrris, lord; 
■ (b) The Gen, PL of the first Dec. always has the final syllable av circum- 
flexed, which is caused by the contraction of the old ending devv, e. g, 
Xzaivoov from Xeaiva, veavi&v from veavias. — But the substantives, XPV "' 
rris, creditor; cupvy, anchovy ; irriariai, monsoons; and x^^V^, wild-boar, 
are exceptions ; in the Gen. PI. they remain Paroxytones, thus xp*Vt«j/, 
a<pvcov, €T?7<nW (but a<pv£>v, xpv (rruj/ from aepv-ns, unapt; xpv^tos, useful). 



♦ 46.] 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



65 



Remark. On the accentuation of Adjectives, see § 75. 



7 The accent of the Nom. is changed, according to the quantity of the final 
syllable, thus : — 

(a) Oxy tones become Perispomena in the Gen. and Dat. of the three num- 
bers, e. g. (Nom. Ti/xT)) T//if/s, -rj, -wv, -aiv, -cus; this holds, also, in the 
second Dec; e. g. &e6s, -ov, -co -cov, -o1v\ 

(b) Paroxytones with a short penult remain so through all the Cases, except 
the Gen. PL, which is always ^ circumflexed on the last syllable; but 
Paroxytones with a long penult become Properispomena, if the last syl- 
lable is short, as in the Nom. PL, and in the Voc. Sing, in o of Masc. 
nouns in -i\s (§ 44), e. g. yvcofxr], yvcofxai, but yvcoficov ; iroKtrrjs, tto\?tcx, 
iro\7rai, but ttoXltcov ; on the contrary, 81/07, Stkoi, but Sikcov ; 

(c) Properispomena become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
Movaa, Movarjs ; 

(d) Proparoxytones become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
\4cuva, \ealvrjs. 



§4:6. Second Declension. 

The Second Declension has two endings, o<s and ov ; nouns 
in -05 are mostly masculine, but often feminine (§ 50) ; those 
in -ov are neuter ; except Fern, diminutive proper names in -ov, 
e. g. rj TXvKepLov (§ 40). 



Endings 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 


OS ov 


01 


a 


CO 


Gen. 


OV 


cov 




OIV 


Dat. 


V 


OLS 




OIV 


Ace. 


ov 


OVS 


a 


CO 


Voc. 


os and e ov. 


01 


a. 


(O. 



Remark 1. The Gen. and Dat. endings of the different genders are the 
same in all numbers; neuters have the Nom., Ace, and Voc. alike in al] 
numbers, and in the plural they end in o. 

Rem. 2. On ths form of the Dat. PL oicn (v) : see § 42, Rem. 2. 



66 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



Paradigms, 



[147. 





Word. 


Island. 


God. 


Messenger. 


Fig. 


S.N. 


6 \6y-os 


7} v?io~os 


6{t))^6s 


6 &yye\os 


to avicov 


G. 


tov Koy-ov 


TT}S vf](TOV 


tov &eov 


ayyeXov 


TOV CTVKOV 


D. 


t<2 Xoy-oj 


rij vi)o~o) 


rql &e<5 


ayy4Xa> 


TCp (TVKCx) 


A. 


rbv Aoy-ov 


ri]u vr\o~ov 


rbv freov 


&yyeXov 


TO GVKQV 


V. 


& X6y-e 


Z) vrice 


3) fre6s 


ayyeAe 


Z) ffVKOV 


P.N. 


ot \6y-oi 


ai vrjaoi 


ol &eot 


&yye\oi 


TO, CVKO. 


G. 


tS)V \6y-wv 


toov vhffwv 


tuv freav 


ayyehav 


TU)V crvKooi/ 


D. 


tois \6y-ois 


reus vi)crois 


ro7s &eo7s 


ayyeXois 


To7s (TVKOIS 


A. 


robs \6y-ovs 


ras vqffovs 


robs freovs 


ayyeXovs 


TO. GVKO. 


V. 


dj \6y-oi 


& vrjcroi 


S) 3-eot 


&yye\oi 


& evKa 


D. 


TO) \6y-b) 


ra V7)<Tca 


rib 3-ed; 


a-yyeAtt 


TO) ffVKO) 




to7v \6y-oiv 


rcuv viiaoiv 


ro7v &eo7v 


ayyeAow 


ToTv ffVKOlV. 



Rem. 3. The Voc. of words in -os commonly ends in e, though. Dften in -os, 
e. g. d> <£>(Ae, and <■> <ptAos ; always 2> freos in classic Greek. 

$47. Contraction of the Second Declension. 

1. A small number of substantives, with o or e before the 
case-ending, are contracted in the Attic dialect ($ 9). 

Paradigms. 





Navigation. 


Circumnavigation. 


Bone. 


S.N. 


6 ir\6os 


tvXovs 


5 irep'nrAoos 


irepiir'kovs 


to bffreov 


oo~tovv 


G. 


rrh.6ov 


7rA0U 


irepnrAoov 


irsp'nrXov 


oartov 


OCTTOV 


D. 


7tAoo> 


ttAoj 


TrepiirAocp 


TrepiirXca 


oo~Teca 


OffTti) 


A. 


ttXoov 


tvXovv 


irepiirXoou 


irepirrAovv 


OCTTeOU 


O0~TQVV 


V. 


7rA(5e 


itXov 


TrepiTrkoe 


ireplirAov 


bcrreou 


OCTTOVV 


P.N. 


vX6oi 


ttXol 


irepiirXooi 


7T€piir\oi 


bcrrea 


ocrra 


G. 


ttAoW 


ttXcov 


irepiirAoajv 


TrepiirXwv 


OCTT€tol/ 


OCTTtoV 


B. 


ir\6ois 


ir\o7s 


■nspnrXoois 


TvepiirXois 


bffreots 


00~TOlS 


A. 


irXoovs 


ttXovs 


Trepiir\6ovs 


irepiirKovs 


ocrrea 


ocrra 


V. 


tt\6oi 


tt\o7 


irepitrXooi 


irepiirAoi 


oarea 


ocrra 


D. 


ir\6o) 


ttXo) 


ir€pnr\6<a 


irepiirAo) 


bareco 


bo~T<a 




ttXSoiv 


ttKoiv 


irepiirAooiv 


irepiir'Aoiv 


oareoiv 


OGTOIV 



Only the following nouns besides the above are contracted in this manner: 8 
vSos, vovs, the mind; 6 poos, povs, a stream; 6 frpovs, noise ; 6 x^ovs, dozen ; 6 dSeA- 
(pitiovs, a nephew; 6 frvyaTpidovs, grandson; 6 avetyLadovs, son of a sister's child. 

Remark. Uncontracted forms sometimes occur even in the Attic dialect 
though seldom in substantives, e. g. voce, Plato, Prot. 344, a ; much oftener in 
adjectives, particularly neuters in -oa, as to oVoa, eTepSnXoa. On the contrac 
tion of ea into a in the PL see § 9, II. (b). 



» 48, 49.] 



THE ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 



67 



$48. The Attic Second Declension. 

Several substantives and adjectives have the endings cos 
(Masc and Fern.) and cov (Neut), instead of o? and ov; they 
retain the co through all the Cases instead of the common 
vowels and diphthongs of the second Dec. and subscribe t 
under co where the regular form has t> or ot ; thus, ov and a 
become co ; os, ov, and ovs become cos, cov, and cos ; oi, ols, and olv 
become co, cos, and cov; — co, co, and cov remahi unchanged. The 
Voc. is the same as the Nom 







Paradigms 






Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


People. 

6 Xe-c&s 
Xe-w 
Ae-c? 
Xe-wv 
Xe-ws 


Table. 

7] KaX-ws 
KaX-w 
KaX-w 
K&X-wv 
KaX-ws 


Hare. 

6 Xay-cos 
Xay-co 
Xay-w 
Xay-cav 
Xay-ws 


Hall. 

rb avcloye-wv 
avwye-w 
avwye-w 
avwye-wv 
avwye-wv 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Xecp 

Xe-wv 

Xe-ws 

Xe-dos 

Xe-cp 


KaX-w 

tcdX-uv 

KaX-ws 

KaX-ws 

KaX-cp 


Xay-cp 

Xay-wv 

Xay-ws 

Xay-ws 

Xay-cp 


avwye-w 

avwye-wv 

avwye-ws 

uvwye-oo 

avwye-w 


D. N. A. V. 

G. and D. 


Xe-d> 

Xe-wv 


KaX-w 
KaX-wv 


Xay-w 
Xay-cpv 


avcaye-w 
' avwye-wv. 



Remark 1. Some words of the Masc. and Pem. gender often reject the v 
in the Ace. Sing., namely, b Xayccs, the hare; (Ace. rbv Xaydbv and Xayco), and 
commonly r) eus, the dawn ; r) aXws, a threshing-floor ; r) Kews, r) Kws, d'A&ws, r) 
Tews, and the adjectives tiynpws, not old ; eirlTrXews,fidl; wrepxpews, guilty. 

Rem. 2. This Declension is termed Attic, because, if a word of this class 
has another form, e. g. Xedos and Xa6s, vews and va6s, MeveXews and MeveXdos, 
the Attic writers are accustomed to select the form in -ews ; though, in the 
best Attic writers, the non-Attic forms also may be found. On the interchange 
of the long vowel in this Declension, see § 16. 5. 



$49- Accentuation of Second Declension. 

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quan- 
tity of the final syllable permits ; the Yoc. &deX<pe from adeX<p6s, brother, is 
an exception. 

2. The change of accent is the same as in the first Dec. (§ 45, 7) ; in the 
Gen. PL, however, only oxytones, e. g. freSs, are perispomena ; the rest are pro • 
paroxytones. See the Paradigms. 



68 REMARKS ON THE GENDER OF THE ENDING OS. [$ 50. 

S. The following exceptions to the rules given for the accentuation of con 
tracts in § 30, 2, should be observed : (a) the Dual in u of words in -oos, -eoy, 
~€ov, has the acute instead of the circumflex, e. g. tt\6co = irXd, oariw = oaroj, 
instead of irXco, bo-rob ; — (b) compounds and polysyllabic proper names, which 
retain the accent even on the penult, when it would regularly stand as a cir- 
cumflex on the contracted syllable, e. g. TrepnrxS-ov = TrepiirXov (instead of 
TrepiirXov), from irepiV Xoos — ireplirXovs ; Heipi&6-ov = Tleipt&ov (instead of 
Il€(pi3-ov),from TIeipl&oos = Tleipi&ovs ; also adjectives, e. g. sbv6-ov = evpov (not 
evvov), from evvoos = evvovs ; yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult ; 
thus, Trep'nrXoi, l*.Ot TtepnvXoi; ko.k6voi, not kclkouoi] — (c) rb Kaveov, basket, takes 
the circumflex on the ultimate, in the contract forms 5 hence kolvzov — ttavovv 
(instead of ndvow) ; — (d) words in -SeJs = Sods denoting kindred, have the cir- 
cumflex instead of the acute on the ultimate, e. g. &SeX<piSe6s = dSeXcpiSovs, 
nepheiv (instead of dSeXcpiSovs). It may be stated as the rule, that all simple 
substantives and adjectives in -eos and -oos take the circumflex on the contracted 
syllable, hence navovv, dSeXcpiSovs, xpworoDs (from xpv°~ e ~ os )- 

4. In the Attic Dec, Proparoxytones retain the acute accent on the antepe- 
nult through all the cases and numbers. See § 29, Rem. 7. Oxytones in -<as 
retain the acute accent in the Gen. Sing., contrary to § 45, 7 (a), e. g. Aec«5. XI 
here absorbs o, the inflection-vowel of the Gen. (e. g. Xoyo-o = x6yov), which 
accounts for this unusual accentuation, thus Xtoi instead of Aew-o. 



$ 50. Remarks on the Gender of the Ending os. 

Substantives in -os are regularly Masc. ; yet many are Fern. In addition to 
the names of countries, cities, and islands, mentioned under the general rule 
in § 40, the following exceptions occur, which may be divided into general 
classes • — 

(a) Substantives which denote certain products of trees and plants, e. g. 
7) &kvXos, acorn; 7) fiaXavos, acorn; 7) fivoo-os, fine linen; 7) SokSs, a beam; 7) 
fidfiSos, a staff; 7) fitpxos, bark of the papyrus ; r) ^/ccd-os, rush mat; 

(b) Such as denote stones and earths, e. g. 6 r) Xl&os, a stone ; r) Xi&os, partic- 
ularly a precious stone ; 7) lprjcpos, a small stone ; 7) tydwos, sand ; 7) ottoo'os, ashes ; 
7) fiiXros, red earth; 7) npva-raXXos, crystal (6 KpvcrraXXos, ice) ; 7) fidodvos, a touch- 
stone; r) rjXsKrpos, electrum; r) ofidpaySos, a smaragdus ; 7) fiwXos, a clod; 7) yvipos, 
gypsum; 7) vdXos, glass; 7) riravos, chalk; 7] dpylXos, clay ; 7) 7rXiv&os, brick; 7) 
fcafioXos, soot; 7) Koirpos, ordure; 7) docpaXros, bitumen; 

(c) Such as denote a hollow or cavity, e. g. r) KapSonos, kneading-trough ; 7) 'kiPoo* 
r6s and 7) xv^os, a box ; 7) <rop6s, a coffin ; r) XtjvSs, a wine-press ; 7) Xi)Kv&os, an 
oil-flask; r) icd/xlj/os, an oven; 7) <poopiajx6s, a chest; 7) TrveXos, tub; 

(d) Such as express the idea of a way, e. g. 7) 6S6s, a road; 7) afxagirSs (sc. 
6S6s), a carriage-road ; 7) rptflos and r) drpaTros, afoot-path; 7) rd<ppos, a ditch; 

(e) Many of the above substantives were originally adjectives, and hence 
appear as feminine nouns, because the substantives with which they properly 
agree are feminine. There are also many others, e. g. r) avXeios (sc. frtpa)* 



51, 52. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



69 



nouse-door ; r) fjireipos (sc. 77}), the mainland] 77 dvvdpos (sc. 777), thirsty land, desert ; 
f} veos (sc. x^P a )i a fallow field ; 77 vr)<ros (from vety, sc. 777), an island; 77 5taAe/c« 
tos (sc. <pwf)), a dialect ; 77 avyKXrjros (sc. fiovXr)), senate; 7) fidpfSiros (sc. \vpa), 
lyre; 77 StcfyieTpos (sc. ypafi/jL-fj), diameter; 77 (more seldom o) ^/caros (sc. yaws), 
boaZ; 77 &6\os (sc. olicla), round building, etc.; 

(f ) Several feminine nouns which stand alone, and hence specially to he 
noted, e. g. 77 vScros, sickness ; 77 yvd&os, jaw-bone ; 77 SpScros, dew ; 7) fir)piu^os y 
twine ; 

(g) Some words which have a different meaning in different genders, e. g. 
6 i7T7ros, horse ; 77 Yttttos, mare, also cavalry ; 5 \4ki&os, pea-soup ; 77 Ae/a&os, the 
yolk of an egg. 

Remark. On the diminutives in -ov, see § 40, Rem. 1. 



§51. Third Declension. 
The third Declension has the following Case -endings : 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Dual. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 


s 

OS 

X 

v and a 

mostly as the Nom. 


Neut.— 

Neut.— 
Neut. — 


es; Neut. a 

(OV 

o-t(v) 

ay; — a 

es ; — a. 


6 

OIV 
OIV 

6 
6 



Eemaeks on the Case -endings. 
$ 52. A. Nominative. 

1. The Nom. of Masculine and Feminine nouns ends in 5, 
e. g. 6 Kopa£ (instead of kooo-k-s), rj \cu\a\f/ (instead of A.atA.a7r-s). 
Still, the laws of euphony do not always allow tke s to be an- 
nexed to the stem; it is either rejected entirely, or, as a com- 
pensation, the short vowel of the stem is lengthened ($ 16, 3). 
But when the stem allows s to be annexed, the usual euphonic 
($ 20) changes take place in the final consonant of the stem. 

2. In this way all Masc. and Fern, nouns may be divided into 
three classes : — 

(ay The first class includes words, which in the Nom. assume 
the gender-sign ?, e. g. 






KOpixiC g 

XafMtrad "43 


71 

6 

7] 


<p\4p-s 
KopaK-s 
Xafxirdd-s 


<j>\fy (§ 20, 1) 
K<Jpa|(§ 20,1) 
Aa/jLirds (§ 20, 1) > 


yiyavr pj ■ 
PoF{Pod,bov) £ 

a:f " 


6 
6 

6 


yiyavr -s yiyas (§ 20, 2) -~ 
fe\$iv-s 5eA</u's (§ 20, 2) a> 
h &6F-S {bov-s) /3oDs, bos (§ 25, 2) ° 
AtF-s Ats (§ 25, 2) 



' (pte/3-os 
Kopa.K-os 
AafATrdd-os 
yiyavr-os 
deX(p?y-os 
@o-6s 

I AUs 



70 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 53 

(b) The second class includes words, which in the Norn, 
reject the gender-sign s, but, as a compensation, lengthen the 
short final vowel of the stem, e into ?), o into w (§$ 16, 3, and 
20, Kern. 3), e. g. 

.. f Troifiev .. [6 iroiiiriv .. f Troifxiv-os 

£ J A.eoj/T d J d (AeWr) AeW d J Keovr-os 

~ 1 ^ TO p old p^jrcop $ 1 p-fijop-os 

[aldos ^i) aid cos { (aldocr-os) al86-os \ 

(c) The third class includes words, which in the Nom. have 
the stem pure, since the stem neither assumes the gender-sign 
s, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g. 

.. f&7?p .. \ o 2r>ip (instead of &^p-s) .. ( frqp-Ss 

g J alwv d J o alwy ( " " atcov-s) d J cdS>v-os 

^ j ^pws o 1 6 ?7pa)S ( " " ?ipa)(r-s) ^5 1 (fyxaa'-os) r)po}-os 
y ZafxapT y y Sd/xap ( " " Sdfxapr-s, Zdfxapr) [ dd/xapr-os. 

3. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nom. ; still, euphony- 
does not permit a word to end in t ($ 25, 5). Hence, in this 
case, the r is either wholly rejected (as in the Masc. AeW, Gen. 
AeWos), or is changed into the corresponding cr ($ 25, 5), e. g. 

.. f7re7repi .. f rh TreirepX .. f ireir4pi-os or 6-os 

S J creAas d. J to <r4\as d J (ceAao'-oj) ffeAa-os 



TJl 



1 ccofxar o 1 to (crcSjicaT) ca>,ua ^3 1 ^A 1 



tar-os 



[ repar {. T0 (Tepcw) Tepas ^ Te'par-os. 



Eemaek. The stem 7ri)p is lengthened in the Nom., contrary to the rule : 
to 7rSp, Gen. 7rvp-6s. 



§ 53. B. The remaining Cases. 

1. The remaining Cases (with a few exceptions, which will 
be specially treated), are formed by appending the endings to 
the stem, e. g 

Stem KopaK Nom. ic6pa£ Gen. icSpaK-os PI. Nom. ic6paK-es. 

2. In forming the Dat. PL by appending the syllable o-i to 
stems ending in a consonant, the same changes take place as 
have already been noticed in regard to the Nom. of similar 
words [§ 52, 2 (a)], e. g. 

<pAe/3-cri = <p\e\pt KopaK-cri = tt6pa%L AafnrdS-crt = Aa/xirdo t 

ylyauT-CL = yiyaffi. bdovr-cri == bSovcri fioF-cri = fiovcri. 

The following points also are to be noted : — 

3. (a) The Ace. Sing, has the form in -v with masculines and 



Stem iptS 


Nom 


. epis 


Acc 


. ipiv 


bpv£r 




ipvis 




tipvw 


Kopv& 




nSpvs 




KOpW 


Xapir 




Xapis 




Xapiv 



$ 53.] THIRD DECLENSION. 71 

feminines in -tg, -vs, -av?, and -ov<; 3 whose stems end in -i, -v, -av, 
and ~ov, e. g. 

Stem ivoXi Nom. iroXis Acc. iroXiv, Stem fiorpv Nom. fiorpvs Acc. fioTpw 

vaF vav vdFs vavs vdFv vavv, $oF fiov &6Fs (3ovs f$6Fv fiovu. 

But the Acc. has the form in -a, 1 when the stem ends in a con- 
sonant, e. g. cf)\e/3, <f>\£if/, <p\e/3a — KopaK, Kopa£, KopaK-a — Aa/X7ra8, 
\a/JL7rd<5, XafjiirdS-a. 

(b) Yet barytoned substantives in -is and -vs, of two or more 
syllables, whose stems end with a Tau-mute, in prose have only 
the form in v, e. g. 

(poet. epi5-a; in the dramatists epiv) 
(poet. ipv&-a) 
(poet. Kopv&-a) 
(poet. xdpLT-a). 

In prose there are but few exceptions, e. g. Tepy&a, X. H. 3. 1, 15, and else- 
where (instead of Tepyiv) from fj Tepyis] xdp^o- (instead of xdpw )j ih. 3. 5, 16 ; 
in constant use rpiiroda, tripod. (X. An. 7. 3, 27, r air id a is to be read instead 
of rdirida.) The goddess x«P ts nas X"*/ ,tTa in the Acc. ; still, in Luc. Deor. d. 
15, 1 and 2, r^jv xdpw- 

Remark 1. Oxy tones of one or more syllables have only the regular form 
in -«, e. g. (irod) ttovs, Acc. irod-a] (eA7ri5) iXiris, Acc. i?arld-a] (x^a^uS) X^- a ~ 
/xuy, Acc. x^WvS-a. The monosyllable /cAets, Gen. KAei8-o's, contrary to the 
rule, usually has the Acc. k\£v, instead of /cAe75-a. 

4. The Voc. is like the stem, e. g. Wi^mv, Gen. Sat/xov-os, Voc. 

SaifAov. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem-form to 

appear. Hence the following points should be noted : — 
(1) The Voc. is like the stem in the following cases : — 
(a) When the final vowels of the stem, e and o, in the Nom. 

are lengthened into rj and w, the short stem-vowel reappears in 

the Voc, e. g. 

8a.lfj.oov Gen. Sal/xov-os Voc. SaTfiov 

•yipcov yepoj/T-os yepov (instead of yipovr) 

[fhT7]p firjTep-os fj.r\Tep 

'XooKpdrrjs "XuKpare-os (instead of ecr-os) ^doKpares. 

1 It is probable that the Acc. Sing, in the third declension as well as in the 
first and second, originally ended in v ; but where the stem ended in a conso- 
nant, the v could not be appended without a union-rowel ; a was used for this 
purpose; hence, e. g. KSpaKav; the termination v was at length omitted Tho 
Acc. ending a, may therefore strictly be regarded as a union-vowel. 



72 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 53 

Exceptions: Oxytoned substantives (not adjectives) retain the lengthened 
vowel, e. g. 

iroijxfjv, Gen. iroipev-os, Voc. iroi[ir)v (not iroifxiv), 
except the three oxytones : irar-ftp, avi\p, and da-op, which, in the Voc, take 
again the short stem-vowel e, but with the accent drawn back, thus : irdrep, 
&vep, 5a€p. According to this analogy, even 'Hpa/cA( 677)77* (stem 'HpdicXees) is 
shortened in the Voc. by the later writers, into "Hpa/cAes. 

(b) Adjectives in -as, Gen. -aVos, and also adjectives (not 
participles, see Rem. 5), whose stems end dn -vt, have in the 
Voc. a form like the neuter (or the stem) ; 7ras and its com- 
pounds are exceptions, e. g. 

fxe\as, Gen. au-os Neut. and Voc. (x4xdv 

Xapieis, zvt-os X a p' iev (instead of xo/Jievr, § 52, 3). 

So substantives in -ds, Gen. -aj/ros, have the Voc. in -aV (instead 
of -*vt), § 52, 3, e. g. 

yiyas Gen. avr-os Voc. ytydv (instead of yiyavr) 

KdA%ds avr-os KdA%dv 

Aids avr-os Alav. 

Rem. 2. Some substantives of this class, with the r reject also the v, but as 
a compensation lengthen the short a, e. g. "ArAds, Gen. -avr-os, Voc. "At Ad, 
noAuScfyids, Voc. IIoAy5a/m. 

(c) Substantives in -is, -us, -avs, -eus, and -ovs, whose stems 
end in -i, -v, -av, -ev, and -ov, have the Voc. like the stem, the 
s of the Nom. being rejected, e. g. 

udvris Voc. fxduri ; irpeo'fivs Voc. irpiafiv ; fids Voc. fj.v ; (rus Voc. av ; Ais Voc. 
AT; ypavs Voc. 7pcw ; fiacnXevs Voc. fiaaikev ; iSoDs Voc. jSoD. 

The word 7ra?s, Gen. iraid-os, has ?tcu in the Voc, since, by rejecting the gender- 
sign s, the stem would end in 5 (iralo), a letter which cannot end a word, and 
must be dropped. 

Rem. 3. Substantives in -is, -vs, -ovs, whose stems end in a consonant, have 
the Voc. like the Nom., e. g. d> opvis, Kopvs, irovs. Still, some substantives in 
-is, Gen. -ivos, have the Voc. like the stem, e. g. 3 oeXfyiv (also $e\<pis), from 
oe\<plsi, Gen. -7vos. 

(d) The Voc. is like the stem in all words, which in the 
Nom have their stem pure, e. g. Srjp, alwv, etc.; but 'AttoAAwv 
(Gen. -twos), Iloo-aSoov (-tovos) and o-oot?jp (-">?pos) are exceptions, 
the Vocatives being w "A7roAAov, ILoaaoov, oweo, with the accent 
drawn back. 



$ 54.] THIRD DECLENSION. 73 

(2) The Voc. is not like the stem, but like the Norn., in most 
words whose stems end in one of the consonants which cannot 
euphonically stand as the final letter (§ 25, 5), because after 
dropping the stem-consonant, frequently it could not be de- 
termined from the Voc. what the true stem was ; e. g. from 
<rdp£, Gen. aapK-os, the Voc. would be crdp (instead of <rdpK) ; from 
6 <£o)?, Gen. <£o)t-o?, Voc. cpd> (instead of <£a>r) ; from vcij/, Gen. 
vi<j)-6s, Voc. vi (instead of vi<p) ; from aty, Gen. o>7r-os, Voc. w 
(instead of &tt) ; from ttovs, Gen. 7ro8-6s, T7 bc. tt6. 

Eejt. 4. The Voc. of &va£, king, in the Common language, is like the Nom. 
3> &va£, or by Oasis 2>i/a£; but in the solemn language of prayer: S> 'dvd (in 
Horn, and the Attic poets, e. g. Soph. 0. C. 1485 : Zeu k, col (poova>), or 5>m 
(instead of &vclk.t, according to § 25, 5). 

3. Substantives in -a> and -w?, whose stems end in -o?, have 
the Voc. neither like the stem, nor the Nom., but, contrary to 
all analog)'', in -oi, e. g. 

Stem t)x os ^- yx<*> Gr. 7)x6-°s (instead of iix^-os) V. 7/x ' ( mstea( l °f yx°°~h VX°'i) 
alSos alSus alS6-os ( " " al86o~-os) aldoT ( " " ald6a-i cdd6-'i) 

Eem. 5. The Voc. of all participles is like the Nom., e. g. Si tv-ktwu, tctv- 
<p&s, rvxf/aSi Tinpwp, SeiKvvs. "Apxcav, Voc. b\pxov, when a substantive, is an 
exception. 



A. Words, which in the Gen. have a consonant before the ending 

-OS, i. e. WORDS WHOSE STEM ENDS IN A CONSONANT. 

§'54. I. The Nom. adds o- to the stem 

(a) The stem ends in X ; thus : 6 y d\s, Gen, aA-6s, Dat. PL 
aX-a-i(y). See Rem. 1. 

(b) The stem ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute — ft, ir, <p; y, yy, 
k, pK (rj adpi, o-apK-os), and ^. See § 52, 2 (a). 

(c) The stem ends in a Tau-mute — 8, r, kt, &, vS. See 
$ 52, 2 (a). On the Ace. see § 53, 3 (b). 

The stems of the Neuter, belonging to this class, end in t and kt (yaXaKr), 
but, according to § 25, 5, reject the r and kt; thus : crapa instead of o-a/xar, and 
yd\a instead of yaAaxT ; or, according to § 52, 3, they change the r into <r; on 
the omission of the r before <n in the Dat. PI. see § 20, 1. 

(d) The stem ends in v or vr. See § 52, 2 (a). 

7 



74 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[f 54. 





■f], Storm. 


fit Torch. 7], Helmet, rb, Body, i), Nose. 6, Tooth. 


Sing. N. 


AcuAaip 


Xafxirds 


Kopvs ffa/xa pis 


odovs 


G. 


XaiXair-os 


Xaf.nrd$-os 


Kopv&-os (rd/xar-os plv-6s 


6S6ut-os 


D. 


Xa.iXa.Tr-i 


Xa/u.Trdo'-i 


Kopv&-i adofiar-i plv-'i 


oBout-i 


A. 


Xa'iXair-a 


Xafxirdd-a 


Kopvv cwjua plv-a 


oSoi/r-a 


V. 


AcuAai|/ 


Kafxirds 


ic6pvs 0~a/XO, piv 


odovs 


Plur. N. 


XaiXair-es 


Xa/jurdd-es 


Kopv&-es ffafxar-a piv-es 


bBour-es 


G. 


Acu\a.ir-o)V 


Xaftirdd-ap 


Kopv&-av aa/j.dr-av plv-dv 


b$6vr-av 


D. 


XaiXd\pi(v) 


Xafjmd-(Ti{v) 


Kopv-ai(v) cru>ixa-cri[v) pi-ai(v) 


bb*ov-o~i(v) 


A. 


XaiXdir-as 


XafjurdS-as 


K6pv&-as (ra> par -a plv-as 


bd6vr-as 


V. 


XaiXdir-es 


XafxirdS-es 


Kopv&-es (rca/jLaT-a p?v-es 


do"6vr-es 


D.N.A.V. 


AaiAarr-e 


Xafxirdo'-G 


nopvfr e ffdofxar-e p7v-e 


656vt-€ 


G. and D. 


XaiXair-oiv 


Xafnrd5-oiv 


icopvfr-oiv crajxdr-oiv piv-oiv 


6<$6vt-ou>. 



So: 6 Kojoa£, -a/cos, raven; 6 Xdpvy£, -vyyos, throat; 6, t) opvls, -I&os, bird; 6 
&va£, -O.KTOS, king; r) eXfiivSt -wfros, tape-worm; 6 BeX<pis, -?vos, dolphin ; 071705-, 
-euros, giant, etc. 

Remark 1. The stem of nouns in -i\> and -£ commonly ends in the smooth 
7T and k ; the stem of those in -7I ends in -77, except 6, 7) Xvy£, Gen. XvyK-6s, 
lynx (butr) Xvy£, Gen. Xvyy-6s, hiccough). Instead of <pdpvyyos from 7) <pdpvy}>, 
throat, the poets, according to the necessities of the verse, use cpdpvyos also. On 
i) d/>i|, rpix^s, hair, see § 21, 3. 

Rem. 2. The word 7) aXs, Gen. kx-6s, signifying sea, and in the Pern, gender, 
is only poetic, and the Sing. aXs, signifying salt, is only Ionic and poetic 5 
elsewhere, only 01 axes, salt, occurs (PL Symp. 177, b. Lys. 209, e). 

Rem. 3. To class (c) belong also the contracts in -7}ls, Gen. -rjiBos = -??s-, 
■fjdos, e. g. 7] 7rapys, cheek, TrapfjSos. 

Rem. 4. The stem of rb ovs, ear, is wt, thus : Gen. w-r6s, Dat. ari, PI. d>ra, 
&rav, aai{v). The word rb repas, according to the rule of the ancient gram- 
marians, usually admits contraction in the plural, among the* Attic writers, 
after the r is dropped: repd, repay (but X. C. 1. 4, 15. PL Phil, 14, e. Hipp 
300, e. repara) ; — rb yepas, reward of honor ; rb yrjpas, old age; rb Kpeas, flesh, 
and rb Kepas, horn, reject r in all the Numbers, and then suifer contraction in the 
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Plural (except the Dat. PL) 5 
yet Kepas, besides these forms, has the regular form with r ; Thucyd. uses the 
contracted forms ; the uncontracted Kepara occurs only in 5, 71. Kepas is uni- 
formly employed in the phrase eTrl Kepas, in column. When the a, contracted 
from aa, is used by the poets as short, it must be considered a case of elision, 
not of contraction ; the same is true also of Neuters in -as, -aos, -os, -eos, e. g. 
vtccra (fr. CKeiras) instead of (T/ce7rd, i<Xed (fr. KXeos) instead of /cAe'a. 



* 55.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



75 



Sing. N. 
G. 
D. 



rb repas, wonder. 
repar-os 
repar-t 



rb Kepas, horn. 
/cepoT-os anc 
Kepar-i and Kepa 



Kepas, horn. rb Kpeas, flesh. 

Kepar-os and Kepus (Kpea-os) Kpeus 
(Kpea-'i) Kpea 



Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 



Tepar-a and repa 
repdr-au and repay 
repa-<ri{v) 



Kepar-a and /cepd 
Kepdr-wv and itep&v 
Kepa-cri(v) 



(upea-a) Kpea 
(Kped-cov) Kpewv 
Kpea-(Ti(v) 



Dual. 



repar-e 
repdr-oiu 



Kepar-e and /cepd (icpea-e) Kpea 

Kepdrr-oiv and Kepqv [Kped-oiv) KpeQv. 



Eem. 5. To class (d) belong also the contracts in -Jets, Gen. -6evros = ovy, 
otVros, e. g. o 7t\okoDs, ca&e, Gen. irXaKovvros ; also in -Jieis, Gen. -yjevros = -jjs, 
-t)vtos, e. g. Tt/ips, honorable, ti/jltjutos. 

Kem. 6. For the irregular lengthening of the vowel in Krels, els, [xeXds, and 
raXas, see § 20, Eem. 2. 

$ 55. II. TAe Nom. rejects ?, 6w£ lengthens the short 
final vowel of the stem e or o zratfo r) or ai 16, 3). 

1. The stem ends in -v 3 -vt, and -p. For the omission of v, 
and vr, before en, see $ 20, 2, and for the omission of r, in the 
Nom. of stems ending in vt, e. g. AeW, see $ 25, 5. 

2. The following substantives in -7]p: 6 TraTrjp, father ; f) pJ\- 
Tqp, mother ; rj SvyoLTrjp, daughter ; rj yaariqp, belly ; rj A7}p.r)T7]p, 
Demeter (Ceres), and 6 avrjp, man, differ from those in the above 
paradigms only in rejecting c in the Gen. and Dat Sing, and 
Dat. PL ($ 16, 8), and in inserting an a in the Dat. PL before 
the ending cu, to soften the pronunciation. 

The word av'np (stem avep), rejects e in all Cases and Numbers, except the 
Voc. Sing., but inserts a 8 (§ 24, 2), thus: Gen. av8pos t Dat. avfyl, Ace. &i>8pa, 
Voc. &/ep,*Pl. &vSpes, avSpwv, avdpacri(y), 'di/Spas, etc. 





6, Shepherd 


. o, Lion. 


6, Orator. 


<5, Father. 


7], Daughter. 


Sing. N. 


Trot/xi'iv 


Xecav 


prjTwp 


irarTjp 


Srvydr-qp 


G. 


iroifiev-os 


Xeovr-os 


p-))TOp-OS 


irarp-Ss 


frvyarpos 


D. 


iroifxev-L 


Xeovr-i 


pi]TOp-l 


irarp-l 


frvyarpi 


A. 


iroifxev-a 


Xeovr-a 


p't)Top-a 


irarep-a 


frvyarepa 


V. 


TvoiyA\v 


Xeov 


prjrop 


Trarep 


Srvyarep 


Plur. N. 


iroifiev-es 


Xeovr-es 


prjrop-es 


irarep-es 


Sbvyarepes 


G. 


TTOljAeV-OW 


\e6vr-oov 


pTjTOp-OiV 


irarep-cou 


Srvyarepcov 


?' 


7roL/u.e-ai(y) 


Xeovai(v) 


pT)TOp-(Tl(u) 


iraTp-a-<Ti{v) 


&vyarpa(ri(v) 


A. 


Troifxev-as 


Xeour-as 


p-fjTop-as 


Trarep-as 


frvyarepas 


V. 


iroi/xev-es 


XeovT-es 


fiyrop-es 


irarep-es 


&vyarepes 


Dual. 


TroL/xey-e 


Xeovr-e 


prirop-e 


rcarep-e 
irarep-oiv 


Svyarepe 
frvyarepoiv. 




iroifxev-oiv 


XedvT-otv 


py]r6p-oiv 



76 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[$56 



Eemark 1. The substantive ^ x e ' l P> hand, belongs to nouns of class No. 2, 
and differs from them only in not lengthening the e of the stem (x e p) into ij, 
but into et, e. g. x e>l P instead of x e V 5 i* * s irregular in retaining the et in 
inflection, thus : xeip, x* l P& s i etc -> except in the Dat. PI. and the Gen. and Dat. 
Dual xep<ri(i>), x e / 30 "'« Yet in poetry, the short as well as the long form is used 
in all the Cases, as the necessities of the verse require, e. g. x* l pos and x e P° s i 
X*poiv and x^/wiV, X^?**' 1 an ^ X e ' L P e<ri * 

Eem. 2. The following nouns in -uv, Gen. -ocoj, reject the v in particular 
Cases, and suffer contraction : rj d/cAv, image, eltcSvos, elitovi, etwroVa, eluSvas, etc., 
together with the Ionic and poetic forms : Gen. cIkovs, Acc. et/cc6, Ace. PI. sIkovs 
(the irregular accent is to be noted in unca and cIkovs) ; % arjScSj/, nightingale, 
Gen. cbjSoVos aad a-qdovs, Dat. aTjSoT; ^ x 6 ^^} swallow, Gen. x e ^ to *oVos, Dat 
XeAiSo?. 

Eem. 3. To class No. 2, belongs the obsolete Nonr. <5, ^ 'APH'N, Zam6 ; the 
Nom. of this is supplied by d rj afxi/Ss, Gen. apvSs, Dat. apvl, Acc. 'apva, PL 
Nom. &pes, Gen. apv£>v, Dat. a/w/&n(j/), Acc. &/>j/as; farther, the word 6 ao-rrip, 
-epos, star, though not syncopated like irar-fip, etc. belongs to this class on account 
of the assumed a in the Dat. PI. a<rTpacri{v). In substantives belonging to 
class No. 2, the accent of the Gen. and Dat. Sing, (and in the word avfjp, also 
that of the Gen. PL and Gen. and Dat. Dual) is removed by syncope to the last 
syllable, and that of the Dat. PL to the penult, e. g. -rrarpSs, ttuTpi, avSpwv, 
iraTpacri(v). The word Atj/xtjtt^ has a varying accent, viz. Ar] fiTjrpos, A-f)jj.r)' 
rpi, Voc. A-f)/j.r]Tep (but Acc. ArjfJLrjTepa). So also frvyarep Vbc. of bvydrrrip. 
On the Yoc. of irar^p and awfip, see § 53, 4 (1) (a). In poetry, according to the 
necessities of the verse, are found Svyarpes, ^vyarpwv, Ar}[j.7)Tpa, and also, on 
the contrary, iraripos, &vyar£pos, fxrjTepi, 



§ 56. III. The Stem of the Nom. is pure. 
The s is omitted without changing the final vowel of the 
stem. The stem ends in v, vt, p, and (only in Sapyp, ivife) in 
pr. The Case-endings are appended to the Nom. without 
change. On the omission of r in stems ending in vt and pr 3 see 
§ 25, 5 ; and on the omission of v, vt, before en, see § 20, 2. 







6, Paean. 


o, Age. 


6, Xenophon. 


6, Wild beast 


to, Nectar. 


Sing 


N. 


iraiav 


aldov 


"Eevocpuv 


Hp 


venrap 




G. 


ireuav-os 


aicau-os 


"ZevocpavT-os 


3-7?p-OS 


veKTap-os 




D. 


TTCUUV-L 


atcoV'i 


zevcxpoovT-i 


Snp-l 


VSKTap-l. 




A. 


ivaiav-a. 


aicav-a 


"Eevocpwi/T-a 


&rjp-a 


veKTap 




V. 


nrcuav 


alcov 


"Eei/ocpuv 


&7)p 


veKrap 


Plur. 


N. 


iraiav-es 


aloov-es 


"Bevocpcovr-es 


£T?p-es 


veKrap a 




a 


iraiav-cop 


alcou-wv 


"EevocpcavT-QJV 


frqp-5>v 


ueKTap-oov 




D. 


iraia-cn(v) 


alG)-(ri(v) 


aevo<p5>-<Ti{v) 


3-77/3-0-/ ( v) 


ysKTap(Ti[v) 




A. 


iraiav-as 


aiwv-as 


UevocpcovT-as 


&TJp-as 


veKrap-a 




V. 


iratav-es 


cuwv-es 


"S.evocpwi'T-GS 


&r}p-es 


veKTap-a 


Dual 




iraiav-s 


aloov-e 


"ZzvcxpcovT-e 


&r}p-e 


venrap-e 






iraiav-oiv 


auiw-oiv 


aevocpcovT-oiv 


&np-o?y 


veKrdp-oiv. 



§57.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



77 



Remark 1. The three words in -ccv, Gen. -covos: ^AiroXXwv, IIoo~eiSu>i>, i) 
aXcov, threshing-floor, drop v in the Ace. Sing., and suffer contraction; thus, 
{^Air6Wcova, 'Air6\\wa) 'AiroXAw, Uoaeido}, a\(a (on a\w, comp. § 48, Rem. 1, on 
kvksui, § 213, 11). Also the Ace. y\r\x<0, from i) y\r\x wv 01 * P^VX WJ/ > penny- 
royal. Gen. -wvos, is found in Aristophanes. 

Rem. 2. All the Neuters helonging to this class end in -p (ap, op, cop, vp), 
e. g. to veKTap, i\Top, ic&Xmp, irvp (Gen. TrvpSs). The word to eap, spring, may 
also be contracted, e. g. ^p, Gen. r)pos. 



B. Words which have a vowel before the ending -os in the Gen. 
§ 57. I. Words in -evs, -aSs, -ov<s. 

1. The stem of substantives in -evs, -avg, -ovs, ends in v (from 
the Digamma F) ; s is the gender- sign. On the omission of v 
between vowels, see § 25, 2. 

2. Substantives in -ev? have -id in the Ace. Sing., and -eas in 
the Ace. PL, from £Fa, £Fa<$; the omission of the F lengthens 
the a and as. These nouns have the Attic form in the Gen. 
Sing., viz. -ews instead of -eos, and in the Dat. Sing, and Nom. 
PL admit contraction, which is not usual in the Ace. PL When 
a vowel precedes the ending -evs, as, e. g. xoevs, ~Evfioevs, the end- 
ings -ew9, -iowy -id, -ids are also contracted into -£9, -a>v, -a, -as. 
Nouns in -av<s and -ovs are contracted only in the Ace. PL, which 
is then like the Nom. PL, as in all contracts of Dec. III. 





o, King. 


6, A measure. 


6, 7], Ox. 


7), Old woman. 


Sing. N. 


fiacriXevs 


Xoevs 1 


fiovs, bos for hoys 


ypavs 


G. 


fiacriAe-Qis 


Xo{eco)cos 


Po-6s, boy-is 


ypa-os 


D. 


fiao~iAe? 


Xoei 


Po-'t, boy-i 


ypa-i 


A. 


PacnXi-a 


Xo{ea)a 


Povv 


ypavv 


V. 


Pao'iXev 


Xoev 


Pod 


ypav 


Plur. N. 


PaatXris 


%06?S 


j8o-6S 


ypa-es 


G. 


fiao~i\£-tov 


Xo{e(a)cov 


Po-ccv, bo-um » 


ypa-ojv 


D. 


fSao~i\zvo~i(v) 


Xoevcriiv) 


Povai(v) 


ypavcri(v) 


A. 


Pacn\i-ds (and 


e?s) xo(ea)5s 


Pods 


ypavs 


V. 


Pao~i\z?s 


Xoeis 


Po-es 


ypa-es 


Dual. fia<ri\i-e 


Xoee 


Po-e 


ypa-e 


' fia.cri\i-oiv 


Xoeoiv 


fio-oiv 


ypa-oiv. 



Remark 1. Among the Attic poets, the Gen. Sing, of nouns in -evs some- 
times ends in -ios instead of -4u>s ; thus Qycreos, apio-Teos, and the Ace. Sing., 
not only in the Attic, but in all the poets, sometimes ends in -fj, instead of -ed, 
e. g. Uprj, fryypacpr). The Nom. and Voc. PI. in the older Attic writers, 

1 Commonly written x^os, contract x°vs. 
7* 



78 THIRD DECLENSION. [$$ 58, 59. 

especially in Thucydides, end also in -77s (fonned from the Ionic -rjes), e. g. 
BaviXris, linrTJs, UAarairjs instead of TlAaTcueis. The uncontracted Nom. Qrjtrees 
occurs in PI. Theaet. 169, 6. The Ace. ending -e?s instead of -e'ds is very 
common in Xen., e. g. robs faneis, C. 3. 5, 19. robs yovsls, 2. 2, 14. ypa<pe?s, 
(TKVTe'is, xahtsTs, 3. 7, 6. robs /3ao-iAe?s, 3. 9, 10. and elsewhere, but more seldom 
among the other Attic prose writers. The Ace. vleis is regular in all the Attie 
writers. 

Eem. 2. The following are declined like x°^ s '• Jleipaietist Gen. Tleipaius, 
Ace. Tletpcua, 6 ayvievs, altar before the door, Gen. ayviws, Ace. ayvia, Ace. PL 
ayvias, and several proper names, e. g. 'Eperpicos, ^reipiais, MrjXia, Evfious, 
Evfioa, Evfioas, UAaraias, Aapias ; yet the uncontracted forms are often found 
in proper names, e. g. ©eoTrieW, 0ea"7rieas, ^.reipiea, U\arai4wv t 3 Ep€rpi4wi/ t 
AoopUuv, TleipaUav (in Thu., X., PL, Dem.). The uncontracted forms are 
regular in aXtevs, fisherman, aXUoos, aXiia, a\teas. 

Rem. 3. The Nom. PL of /3ovs and ypavs are always uncontracted in good 
Attic writers : B6ss, ypaes ; on the contrary, in the Ace. only the contract forms 
ypavs and vavs occur ; the Ace. PL fiovs is the common form ; floas occurs only 
very seldom. 

Eem. 4. Only 6 xoOs, a measure, a mound, and 7) pods, vinegar-tree, are de- 
clined like f3ods ; but in the PL both without contraction ; only rj vavs (vdFs, 
navis), is declined like ypavs ; still, this noun is quite irregular; see § 68. 

§ 58. II. Words in -97s, -es (Gen. -eos); -ws (Gen. 
-coos), -cos and -co (Gen. -oos^; -as (Gen. -aos), -os 
(Gen. '-cos). 

The stem of words of this class ends in s. On the omission 
of cr, see $ 25, 1. In the Dat. PL, a o- is omitted. 

§ 59. (1) Words in -77s and -es. 

1. The endings -77s and -es belong only to adjectives (the 
ending -77s is Masc. and Fern., the ending -es neuter), and to 
proper names, terminating like adjectives, in -<j>dvrjs> -/^eV^s, 
-yivqs, -Kpar-qs, -/X77S779, -7reiJ?;s, -cr^eV^s, -reA^s, -k?;S?7S, -oV^tis, -ep/07?, 
-fiaprjs, -ap?7S (-">?P>7?)» -o-px*}^ -veiK?is, -XdfA7rY)s, -cra/o7S, -nr^Js, and 
(Kkirjs) kAtJs. The neuter exhibits the pure stem ($ 52, 3) ; but 
in the Masc. and Fern., e, the short final vowel of the stem, is 
lengthened into rj [$ 52, 2 (b)]. 

2. The words of this class, after dropping cr, suffer contraction 
in all the Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. Sing, and Dat. PL ; 
and nouns in -jcAegs, which are already contracted in the Nom. 
Sing, (into kXtjs), suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Sing. 



§59.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



79 





Singular. Plural. 


N. 


craprjs, clear. crapes (crape-es) crapels 


(crape-a) craprj 


G. 


(crape-os) 1 crapovs (crape-coy) crapwy 




D. 


(crape-'i) crape? crape-cri(v) 




A. 


(crape-a) crapr) crapes (trape-as) crapets 


(crape-a) crap?) 


V. 


crapes crapes (ffape-es) crapels 


(crape-a) crapr) 


Dual N. A. V. J crape-e . crap?) 




G. and D. | crape-oiv. crapolv. 






Singular. Plural. 


Dual. 


G. 


7} rpir)p7)s, trireme, {rpii)pe-es) rpiiipeis 


rpii)pe-e 


N. 


(rpriipe-os) rpi-fjpovs (rpiripe-cay) rpirjpuy 


Tpi7]pe-oiv rpiiipoiv 


D. 


(Tptrjpe-'i) rpi-fipei' Tpii)pe-cn(v) 




A. 


(rpL^pe-a) Tpirjpr} (rpiTjpe-as) rpi^peis 




V. 


rpirjpes (rpir)pe-es) rpiripeis 


' 


Singular. 




N. 


^ccKpdrrjs (JlepiKXerjs) IlepiKXrjs 




G. 


HwKp&Tovs (UepucAee-os) HepiKXeovs 




D. 


SwKparei (UepiKXee-i) {TlepucXeei) HepiKAel 


A. 


^,a)tcpaT7) (UepiKAee-a) HepucAed (Poet, also TlepiKKy) 


V. 


^wKpares '(UepiKXees) HepUXeis. 





Eemaek 1. On the contraction in the Dual of ee into t\ (not into et), and in 
the Ace. PL of -eas into -eis, see § 9, II. "When a vowel precedes the endings 
-t]s, -es, then -ea in proper names in ~kAt)s is always contracted into -a, and 
commonly also in adjectives (§ 9, LI.), e.g. IlepiKXee-a = ne/wcAed; d/cAeTjs, 
without fame, d/cAeea = d/eAea, vyi.l)s, healthy, vyiea = vyia, iyder)s, poor, ivSeea = 
ivdea, vrreppvris, supernatural, inreppvea = vireppva (Ace. Sing. Masc, and Nom., 
Ace, and Voc. PL neuter).; but sometimes the contraction into -77 occurs, e. g. 
vyiri, Sipvrj, apvrj, avTopvrj, X. E. Equ. 7, 11 I'm all the MSS.). The Ace. PI. 
Masc. and Fern, has -els, e. g. vyie?s, avropveis. 

Pem. 2. Proper names in -updrys, -cr&evris, -yev-qs, -pdvr)s, etc., also "Ap-rjs 
(Voc.*Apes),f6Tm the Ace. Sing, both according to the first and third Dec., 
and are hence called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declensions), e. g. ^caKpart) 
and ~Za>Kpa.T7iv, according to Dec. I., 'AA/ca^eVsj and -fievrjv., 'AvTicr&evr) and 
-cr&evr]v, "Apy and -r\v, etc. ; Plato commonly uses the form in -77, Xenophon that 
in -7]v, other writers both, without distinction ; in words in -vrjs, the form in -vr\v 
is preferred to that in -vr\. (The Gen. ofAprjs in good prose is "A.peo»s [often in 
Plato], yet in the poets "Apeos is also used according to the necessities of the 
verse.) But in words in -Kkrjs, the Ace. in -kAtju is first used in later writers. 
The PL is declined according to Dec. L, e. g. 'Apicrropdvai, roTs Aecoupdrais, robs 
'Apicrropdvas, robs Ar)fj.o<rSreyas ; still, 'HpaKAees occurs in PL Theact. 1G9, 6. 

Rem. 3. The Gen. PL of rpiijpris occurs, also, in the uncontracted form, viz. 
rpinpeav; but in all the other Cases it is uniformly contracted; the Dual 
also in words of this class occurs in an uncontracted form in Attic writers, 
e. g. tyyyevee, and the Tragedians use the uncontracted forms of proper names 



1 <rape-os from crapecr-os, the cr of the stem being dropped ; and so in tho 
other Cases, except the Nom. and Voc 



80 THIRD DECLENSION. [$§ 60, 61. 

in -KAerjs = kAtjs, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. 'Hpa/cAe^s, Dat. 
-jcAeet, Yoc. -/cAees. The contract Ace. in -k\t) is rare. The Voc. S> "Hpa/cAes, 
as an exclamation, belongs to the later prose. 

Rem. 4. The irregular accent of the Gen. PL and Dual is to be noted, viz. 
rptTjpufv (instead of Tpiripcov from. Tpirjpecov), Tpvr\poiv (X. H. 1. 5, 19. 5. 4, 56). In 
addition to this word, adjectives in -tj^s and the word avr apices, have the like 
accent, e. g. crvvri&icov = cvvrfccov, avTapKecov = avrdpKcov. 



§ 60. (2) Words in -ws, Gen. -coos, and in -cos and -co, 

Gen. - o o s . 

(a) -ws, Gen. -a>os. 

Thus, e. g. o f} #cos, jackal, Gen. #coos, etc. Polysyllables have 
the Ace. Sing, and PL either contracted or uncontracted, e. g. 
6 7?pcos, hero, tov ^pcoa and rjpo>, rovs r^ocoas and ^pcos. 

(b) -cos and -co, Gen. -oos. 
Substantives of these endings are always feminine. The 
stem ends in -os. The short final vowel, according to § 52, 2 
(b), is lengthened into co. Tire ending -cos, however, is retained 
in the Attic and Common language only in the substantive 
otScos (stem atSos), and in poetry in ^c6s, morning (in Eurip.) ; 
but in all other words, it has been changed into a smoother 
form, so that the Nom. ends in -co, e. g. rp^ (stem ^xos). On 
the Voc. in ot, see § 53, 4 ( 3). Tire Dual and PL are formed 
like the ending -os of Dec. II. ; thus, cuSot, y)x°h eU3 - 



Sing. N. 


7] alScos (stem alSos). shame. 


7] r)x& (stem vxos), echo. 


G. 


(alB6-os) aldovs 


(yx6-os) t)xovs 


D. 


(cu5o-i') cuSot 


ivx^-'i) yxo? 


A. 


( aldo-a) cu§<2 


(yxJ-a) t;x<S 


V. 


(cu5o-t) alSoi. 


(ip&t) VX° 7 - 



§ 61. (3) Words in -as, Gen. -aos, and in -os, Gen. -cos. 
(a) -as, Gen. -aos. 
Only the Neuters to o-eXas, light, and to SeVas, goblet, belong to 
this class : Gen. o-eXa-os, Dat. o-eXa-t, and creX-a ; PL treXa-a and 
trcX-a, Gen. creXa-cov, Dat. criXa-cri^v) ; Dual creXa-e, creXa-ou/. 

Remark 1. On the poetic shortening of the contract o, see § 54, Rem. 4. 
In the following four Neuters in -as, the a in the Gen., Dat., and in the PL, is 
changed, according to Ionic usage, into the weaker e, viz. 



$62.] 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



81 



8p4ras (poet.), image, Gen. jSpeVeos, PI. Pp4rea and fSp4rir}, jSpeTeW 
Kooas (poet.), place, PI. in Homer, Kdbea, Kcoeo-i(p). 
oiSas (poet.), ground, Gen. ovSeos, Dat. ovSet and oudei (Horn.) 
Kvecpas (poet, and prose), darkness, Gen. icp4(paos Epic, Kp4cpovs Attic, KvetpaZ 
Epic, kW^xj Attic. 

(b) -os, Gen. -eos. 
All substantives of this class are also neuter. In the Nom., 
e, the stem-vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o (§16, 1). 



Sg.N.A 
G. 
D. 


to yivos (instead 
(yeve-os) 
{yivs-X) 


of yepes), genus 
yepovs 
yeVet 


to /cAe'os (instead of KAees), glory. 
(tc\4e-os) kA4ovs 
(/cAe'e-t) /cAe'et 


Plur. N. 
G. 
D. 


(y4pe-a) 
yeve-uu and 
y4pe-o~i(v) 


yipt] 
yspap 


(/cAee-a) K\4a 
(k\4-(op) /cAeaw' 
K\4e-cri(p) 


Dual. 


(y4pe-e) 
(yepi-oiu) 


yipt] 
yepdip 


(/cAe'e-e) AcAer; 
(K\e4-otp) «cAeo«\ 



Rem. 2. On the contraction of ee into tj (instead of ei), and of ea into a 
(instead of -n), when a vowel precedes, see § 9, II. On the poetic shortening 
of the contracted d in /cAea, see § 54, Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The uncontracted form of the Gen. PI. is not unusual, e. g. opeW, 
)8eAeW, /ceoSeW, and almost without exception cw^eW; in PI. Polit. 260, a., the 
uncontracted Dual in ee occurs : rovrw rcb y4pee. In the lyric portions of the 
Attic tragedians, ird&ea, ax^a, etc. occur. 



III. WOKDS IN -is, -vs, -I, -v. 

$ 62. (1) Words in -Is, -vs. 
Tlie substantives hi -!?, -v<s originally ended in -XFs, -vFs. 



See § 25 


2. 




' 


Sing. N. 


6 k?s, corn-worm. 


f] o-vs, SOW. 


6 Ix&vS) hsh. 


G. 


k1-6s 


av-Ss 


Ix&v-os 


D. 


kU 


av-i 


iX&v-'i 


A. 


KIP 


avp 


lx&vp 


V. 


Kl 


cv 


l X M 


Plur. N. 


nt-es 


<rv-es 


iX&v-es 


G. 


KL-WP 


(TV-COP 


iX&v-toV 


D. 


Ki-ai{p) 


av-al(p) 


Ix^v-o-l(p) 


A. 


nt-as 


at-o.s, Attic ads 


iX&v-as, Attic Ix&vs 


V. 


Kt-es 


av-es 


Ix&v-es 


Dual. 


Kt-e 


■i. 
av-e 


(fx&M ixM 




Kl-OtP 


q-v-oip 


Ix&v-oip. 



Remark. The contracted Kom. PI. at &pi<vs occurs in X. Ven. 2, 9 ; 6, 2 j 
10. 2, 19. 



82 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



[§63 



$ 63. (2) Words in -is, -X, -vg, -v. 

The stem of these substantives ends in t or v. The stem- 
vowels l and v remain only in the Ace. and Voc. Sing. ; in the 
other Cases they are changed into e (§16, 2). In the Gen. 
Sing, and PL, masculine and feminine substantives take the 
Attic form in -ws and -mv, in which the w has no influence on 
the accent (comp. $ 29, Rem. 7). In the Dat Sing, and in the 
Nom. and Ace. PL, contraction occurs. 



Sing. N. 


7] iroKh, city. 


6 iryjxvs, cubit. 


rb (Tivam, mustard. 


rb &ffrv, city. 


G. 


iroke-as 


7rr;xe-ws 


anrdiTG-os 


&<XT€-OS 


D. 


x^Aet 


7ri?X« 


ffivdiret 


Garret 


A. 


ie6\iv 


nri)x ov 


aivanri 


&<TTV 


V. 


tt6m 


TT7)XV 


fflvairi 


6.CTTV 


Plur. N. 


iroXsis 


TfflX €lS 


mvdirri 


&(TT7) 


G. 


Tr6\€-03l/ 


■n-f]X e ~ 0}V 


Givaire-o>v 


a<TTG-0)V 


D. 


ir6\s-<n(v) 


7rjix€-(rt(v) 


(rivdire-cri(u) 


6,crre-(Ti{v) 


A. 


■jnfAety 


TTTIXSIS 


aivdiTT] 


d(TT7} 


V. 


TT^Aets 


iri]X €ls 


aivaTTT] 


&(TTrj 


Dual. 


7n$Ae-e 


Tnfae-e 


crivdire-e 


&(TT€-e 




7roAe-otj/ 


TTTIXZ-OIV 


<riva.iri-otv 


aare-oiy. 



Remark 1. Here belong all substantives in -£is, -tyis, most in -o-ts and many 
otbers, e. g. t) k6vis, dust ; 6 jxdvris, prophet ; t) 8<pis, serpent ; rj iriaris, faith ; i) 
vfipis, abuse; 6 ireteicvs, axe; 6 Ttpeafivs, old man; rb Ttiirepi, pepper ; rb riyyd- 
fiapi, cinnabar; rb ttuv (poet), herd (without contraction). Adjectives in -us, 
-e?a, -v are declined in tbe Masc. and Neut. like irrJX vs an( i a<rrv, except that the 
Gen. Masc. takes the regular forms -4os, -eW (not -eas, -caw), e. g. Tjdvs, i)deos. 

Rem. 2. In the Attic poets, though probably only in the lyric passages, the 
Gen. in -eos, from substantives in -is, occurs, e. g. ir6\eos. 

Rem. 3. In X. An. 4. 7, 16, the contracted Gen. ir-nx&v is found. Instead 
of the Dual form in -ee, one in -77 is also used ; likewise a form in -et (instead 
of -ee ), is quoted by the ancient grammarians from Aeschines. — The Ace. PL 
of nouns in -vs sometimes occurs uncontracted in the Attic poets, e. g. ir-fixeas. 

Rem. 4. Neuters in -1 and -v have the Attic Gen. Sing, very seldom, e. g. 
fio-rews, Eur. Bacch. 838 (831). Or. 761 (751). 

Rem. 5. Adjectives in -ts, -1, e. g. tdpts, ftp?, skilful, and some substantives 
in -h, which are partly poetic, have the regular inflection: i-os, t-i, i-es, etc., 
or both forms together, e. g. 7) fxrjvis, anger (also fxi\ui8os, etc.), 6 i) oh, sheep ; rb 
Triirtpi (Gen. -epios and -eos), pepper; 6 7) irSpris, calf; b r) tt6<tis, spouse (Gen. 
irSaios, but Dat. always nocrei) ; 7) rpoiris, heel (also rpoiridos, etc.); 7) rvpas, 
tower (G3n. rvpo-tos,'X.. An. 7. 8, 12. rvpaiv, ib. 13, but Plural rvpais, rvp<T€<ri y 
etc.) ; i) /xdyaSis (Gen. -10s, Dat. p.ayd8l, X. An. 7. 3, 32) ; some proper names, 
e. g. SueWeffis, ^Ipis (Gen. -10s, etc.), X. An. 1. 2, 12; 6. 2, 1 (5. 10, 1), finally 
one noun in -i>s, 7) eyx^vs, but only in the Sing. 



64, 65. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



83 



Sing. N. 


6, i] irSpris, calf. 


7] e7xeAi»y, eel. 


o, ^ o?s, sheep. 


G. 


TrSpri-os 


e7xeAu-os 


o«k 


D. 


7r6pri-i and irSprl 


iyX&v-i 


oil 


A. 


iropTiv 


eyx^vi/ 


olv 


V. 


irSpTL 


eyxeA-U 


ois 


Plur. N. 


iropri-es and ir6pTts 


eyXeAets 


ohs 


G. 


iroprl-av 


€7%eAe-«i/ 


oiwv 


D. 


ir6pTi~(ri{v) 


e7xeAe-£rt(j/) 


olorl(v) 


A. 


iropTi-as and TropTih 


eyX^Aets 


oTas and oh 


V. 


ir6.pTi-es and irSprls 


e '7X e ^- e£s 


ohs 


Dual. 


ir6pTi-e 


€7XeAe-6 


oh 




iropri-oiv 


^XeAe-ot?' 


OlOlV 



Rem. 6. Xenophon uses the Ionic forms of oh : o'Cv, fries, o'iwv, 6'ias, and ois. 



4 64. Quantity of the Third Declension. 

1. The inflection-endings -a, -i, -v, and -as, are short. 

Exception : The o in the Ace. Sing, and PL of substantives in -evs is long, 
■e. g. rby lep4d, robs Upias from 6 kpeus, priest. 

2. Words, whose Nom. ends in -o|, -i|, -uf, -o^, -nj>, -ufy -is, and -us, have the 
penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according as the 
vowel of the above endings is long or short by nature ; a, i, v, are long in all 
Genitives in -avos, -ivos, -vvos, e. g. 6 &<apa£, breastplate, -&kos ; 6 pfy, reed, pliros ; 
t\ aKTis, ray, -Tvos, but r\ /3&>Aa£, clod, -&kos, t) i\irts, hope, -tdos. See fuller 
explanations in Larger Grammar, Part I. § 291. 



§65. Accentuation of the Third Declension. 

1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the laws 
of accentuation (§ 30) permit, e. g. to irpay/xa, deed, irpdyfiaros (but irpayiiaTwv), 
to ovojxa, name, ovo/xaros (but ovo/jlcLtwv), 6 r\ x^ScSy, swallow, xeAiSoVos, "Zevo- 
<pcov, -ai/Tos, -tovres, -&pto>v. Particular exceptions have been noticed in the 
Paradigms. 

2. Monosyllables are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers on the 
final syllable ; the long syllable uv and oiv having the cireumflex; the others, 
the acute, e. g. 6 p.r)v, jjL-nv6s, [i-nvi, ixr]vo?y, ii-nv&v, fi7]o-t(u). 

Exceptions: 
(a) The following ten substantives are Paroxytoncs In the Gen. PL and Gen. 
and Dat. Dual : rj Ms, torch ; 6 8/ndos, slave ; 5 -n Srcos, jackal ; to KPA2, poet. 
(Gen. npards), head; to ols (Gen. o>t6s), ear; 6 7) tvcus, child; 6 arjs, moth; 6 ?; 
Tpdos, Trojan, Trojan woman; r] <pcos (Gen. epepdos), a burning; to (pus (Gen. 
<Pwt6s), light; e. g. SaSwv, Sa'Soiv, S&wv, icpaToov, {otwv, &toiv, iraiScau, Tratdoiu, 
riwv, Tptiow, (pcfticai/, (pwToav (on the contrary, twi/ 8fj.co£>v from ai duooai, t&v 
Tpa&v from at Tpwai, twu (pcoruy from 6 <pctis y man; tuu Srce&v from rj &a>^, 
injury). 



84 THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 65 

(b) The following contracts, according to the nature of the final syllable, arc 
either Properispomena or Paroxytones, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, 
as in the other Cases, e. g. rb eap (Epic r)p), spring; Krjp (Epic from Keap), heart; 
6 Acts (from Aixas), stone; 6 irpccv (from irp-qcbv), hill, e. g. i)pos (rarer eapos), r)pi 
{rarer eapi), nr)pos, Krjpi, Aaos, Aai, Aaccv, irpcbvos, irpwvi. 

Remark. The following contracts, on the other hand, follow the principal 
rule (No. 2) : crre'dp = arrip, tallow ; areciTos = ffr-nros, cppeap, well, (ppedros and 
(pp-nrSs, PL (pprjrwv, ©pa£, 0p^|, &pi)'iKos = QpauSs, and ®pr)Kos, oh, ol6s, oil, 
olcov, olai(v). 

(c) Monosyllabic participles, as well as the pronoun rls ,■ quis? retain the 
accent, through all the Cases, on the stem-syllable ; but the pronoun iras and 
6 Yldv is an Oxytone in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. ; in the other Cases either a 
Paroxytone or a Properispomenon, according to the nature of the final syllable, 
e. g. cpvs, (pvvros, cov, ovtos, pvri, fivroov, ovo~i{v), ovtoiv, rts, rivos, rivij etc. ; iras, 
iravros, iravTi, iravraiv, Trdvroiv, iraai(v), 6 Ylav, Havos, rots TLa<ri(v). 

3. The following are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, like 
monosyllabic substantives : — 

(a) 7] yvvi), wife (yvvcwcos, ywcuicl, yvvaiKolv, ywaiKcov, yvvai^i(v) ; but yvvcu- 
Ka, yvvcuttes, etc.) ; or) kvcov, dog (kvvos, kvv'i, kvvoiv, kvvwv, tcvcri(v) ; but 
Kvva, Kvves, etc.) ; 

(b) Syncopated substantives in -rip, on which see § 55, 2 ; 

(c) Compounds of eTs, units, in Gen. and Dat. Sing., e. g. ovSets, ovSevos, 
ovdevi; but ovdevat', ovBeo'i(v), SO fxrjdeis, fj.r]dev6s, etc. 5 

(d) The Attic poetic forms, 8op6s, Sopt, from 86pv. 

4. Eor the accentuation of substantives in -is, -vs, Gen. -eus, see § 63 ; of 
those in -co (§ 60), the irregular accentuation of the Ace. Sing, of T)x° a — VX^> 
(instead of t)x&): should be noted. 

5. (a) In the Voc. of syncopated substantives (§ 55, 2) in -rip, the accent, 
contrary to the principal rule, is drawn back as far as possible, e. g. 5 irdrep, 
Ssvyarep, AvuYjTep, 'dvep; so also (a) in the following substantives; 'AiroAAwv 
(ccvos), UocreiBcov {ccvos), accr-ftp (rjpos), 'A/xcploov (iovos), da->ip (epos) ; thus, d 
"AiroAAov, TlSaefiov, crcorep, "A/xcpiov, daep ; — (b) in compound substantives in 
-cov, Gen. -ovos, in adjectives in -cov, Gen. -ovos, whether simple or compound 5 
also in comparatives in -iav, -wv (in adjectives and comparatives, also, in the 
neuter gender), e. g. 'Aydfje/jvov from 'Ay ape jxvcov, 'ApicrrSyeiTov from 'Apiaro- 
ye'nwv (but 'laaov, UaAaT/xov, ^lArjpov, etc. as simple) ; & and rb eVdai/xov, & and 
rb eXeriixov, d and rb KaAAiov ; (the following are exceptions : & AaKedcufiov from 
AaKe'BaijKov, compounds in -eppcov, e. g. S> Avuotypov from AvicSippcov, Ei>&v<ppov from 
Evfrixppwv, & and rb daieppov from 8ai<ppa>v ;) — (c) in the compound Paroxytones in 
•77s, mentioned in § 59, e. g. ^.ccKpares, A-nixocrSeves ; S> and rb aS&aSes from av&d- 
877s, <pi\dAr)£res from (piAaA-fi&Tjs (but aArj^es from aArj^vs as a simple), airapnes, 
Kcuco-nfres. — (Adjectives and substantives in -corjs, -codrjs, -a\7)s, -uprjs, -riprjs, are 
exceptions, e. g. eua>57?s, evoodes, a/j.(pa>r]S dficpcoes, TravccA-ns TravuAes, vecoprjs vewpes, 
^Kpr)pr]s £i<p7jpes, r) rpir)pr]s rpir)pes, Aicoprjs 5 Aiwpes. 

(b) The Voc. of nouns in -avs, -evs, -ovs, -<*>, and -us is Perispomenon, e. g 
ypau, fiao-ikev, j8oG, 2a7r<po7, cu5o?. 



I 66.] THIRD DECLENSION. 85 



§ 66. Gender of the Third Declension. 

The natural gender — the masculine and feminine — is distinguished in the 
third Declension, not by a special form, but partly by the signification, partly 
by the forms, and in part by usage alone. The following rules will aid in 
determining the gender : — 

I. Masculines: (A) all nouns whose Nom. and stem (which can be recognized 
by the Genitive) end in -ay, Gen. -av-os ; -<av, Gen. -ovr-os and -wvt-os ; -vv, 
Gen. -vv-os (only 6 noavvv, tower) ; -sis, Gen. -ev-os (only 6 ktcis, comb) ; -as, 
Gen. -ovt-os; -ovs, Gen. -ovr-os, -ovvt-os, -od-os (o ttovs) ; -up, Gen. -op-os] -evs, 
Gen. -ews ; -tjs, Gen. (-e-os) -ovs; -«s, Gen. -«-os; 

(B) the following with exceptions : — 

(a) in --nv, Gen. -r\vos ; but 6 ?? x^ v t goose; — in -nv, Gen. -ev-os ; but 6 r) adr)v, 
gland, and tj <ppi)v, diaphragm ; 

(b) in -oiv, Gen. -&>j/-os; but 77 aXav, threshing-floor; r) j8A^x wi/ or yMx av > 
penny-royal; r) /x^Keddov (poet.), care; r) /atjkoov, poppy; t) irXarayAv, rattle 
(but 6 xA. petal of the poppy) ; i) Tp-fjpwv, pigeon; rj avKwv (poet., but prose 
6), ravine; t) 6 n&ticav bell; 

(c) in r\p, Gen. -np-os ; but r) Kr)p,fate (on account of r) Ki)p, goddess of fate) ; 
6 r) pcuo-T-ftp, hammer; (those in -wp contracted from -eop, are neuter: t& 
Krjp (poet.), Gen. Kr)pos, heart; to Zap, Gen. r)pos, spring;) — in -np, Gen. 
-pos ; but fj yao~Tr)p, yacrrpSs, belly ; — in -r\p, Gen. -ep-os; but 6 r) al&r)p, 
ether; d rj hi\p, air; 

(d) in -eip, Gen. -eip-os; but r) x«V> hand (regularly, 6 avTix^ip, the thumb) ; 

(e) in -a>p, Gen. -wp-os; but to eAcop (poet.), booty; to ireXap (poet.), monster; 

(f ) in -ovs, Gen. -o-os, see § 57, Eem. 4: 

(g) in -ws, Gen. -arr-os; but t& <pm, light; 
(h) in -^, Gen. -iros, -j8os. 

II. Feminines: (A) a/^ nouns in -as, Gen. -a5-os; -eis, Gen. -et5-os (only ^ 
K\eis, key) ; -aus, Gen. -&-os ; -«/s, Gen. -iv&-os ; -ws, Gen. -uz/&-os ; -ns, Gen. 
►7jt-os; -is, Gen. -it-os (oitly 77 X°-P LS ) 5 " us » Gen. -u5-os and -u3--os; -<x> and -ws, 
Gen. -J-os ; 

(B) the following nouns with exceptions : — 

(a) in -is, Gen. -i-os: but 6 xaAts, pure wine; 6 <pd\Kis, a part of a ship; 6 
apTis, carpenter's tool; 6 k?*, corn-worm; 6 yKavis, a kind offish; 6 Ais 
(Epic), lion, Mid 6 r) oh, sheep; — in -is, Gen. -ecos, but 6 opxis, testicle (77 
opxis, a kind of olive) ; 6 o<pis, serpent; 6 (later also 77) *x is > viper; 6 (later 
rj) x6pis, bug ; ol and at nvpfieis, law-tables; — in -is, Gen. -id-os, but 6 cp&Sis, 
-iSos, a kind of cake; r) 6 riypis, Gen. -ios and -iSos, tiger; — in -is, Gen. 
-ifr-os] but 6 7) upvis, bird; — in -is, Gen. -?v-os; but 6 5eA(/>is, dolphin; 6 
IktIs, weasel; 6 t) frts, heap ; 6 tcA/us, marsh-mud; 

(b) in -us, Geb. -v-os; but 6 $6Tpvs, cluster; 6 frprjws, footstool; 6 lx^vs,flsh; 
6 p.vs, mouse ; 6 v4kvs, corpse ; b o-Taxvs, ear of com ; 6 <tk6\\vs, mode of 
tonsure ; 6 Ti<pvs, the night-mare ; 6 Kat>8vs, a Median garment } 6 r) vs or <rvs, 



86 THIRD DECLENSION. ft 67. 

swine; 6 /tteAdVSpus, tun-fish; i) (later also 6) eyx^Aus, eel', b xp^vs, a sea- 
fish; — in -vs, Gen. -ews; but 6 Trehetcvs, axe; © a^jx^ cubit; 
(c.) in -«;/, Gen. -ov-os; but 6 dKficoy, anvil; 5 irplav, saw; 6 navwy, rule; d 
&£co;/, axle ; 6 ael(rooy, earthen-vessel ; 6 iiricreloov, flag ; o rj k'icov, pillar ; 6 
fcKaS&v and aKpe/xccu, bough; 6 \ay&v, gulf ; 6 irKayy^v, doll; 6 fxvp/xrjddu^ 
anfs nest ; 6 t) aAe/cTpuav, cock and hen. 
Remark 1. Nouns in -£ are partly masculine, partly feminine, except those 
in -o£ (Gen. -a/cos), which are masculine ; most of those in -£ are feminine; the 
larger part of those in -^ are masculine, but many are feminine, e. g. i) nakav- 
po\|/, -ottos, shepherd's crook; r) AatAa^, tempest; i) o\p (vox), ottos, voice; i) (rarely 
6) &ty, wTr6s,face; i) (p\4ty, (pAejSos, vein; t) x^P^j holy-water; t) KarTJAity, -i<pos, 
upper story, etc. 

III. Neuters : (A) all in -a, Gen. -ar-os ; -tj, Gen. --nr-os (only rb ndpr)) ; -t, 
Gen. -tr-os (only to fie At with its compounds) ; -vp, Gen. -vp-os (only rb irvp, Gen. 
TTvp-6s,fire) ; -op, Gen. -ar-os or -Tip, Gen. -nr-os \ -op, Gen. -op-os; -as, Gen. -ot-os; 
•vs, Gen. (-e-os) -ous; -t, Gen. -eos ; -v, Gen. -v-os, and -eos, and -ot-os 1 , § 68, 1 ; — 

(B) the following with exceptions: (a) -op, Gen. -op-os; but 6 $dp, star- 
ling; (b) -as, Gen. -a-os} but 6 Aas, stone; (c) -&>p, Gen. -ar-os (except 6 ax<6p, 
iX^Pi eerrwp, t)x4kt(cp, § 68, 15). 

Rem. 2. The following single words may be noted in addition : t) Sals, Gen, 
Sair-6s, feast ; rb crais or crais, ffrairSs, dough; rb ovs, Gen. o>r-6s, ear. 

§ 67. Anomalous Forms of the Third Decle?ision. 

All substantives, whose inflection differs from the rules and 
analogies above given, are included under the irregular substan- 
tives of the third Dec. All the anomalous forms of the third 
Dec. may be divided into three classes : — 

(a) The first class includes those substantives whose Nom. cannot be derived, 
according to general analogy, from the Genitive-stem, e. g. i) ywn, wife, Gen. 
ywaiK-6s^ 

(b) The second class incudes those substantives, which, with one Nom. 
form, have in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation ; both of these, 
however, may come, in accordance with the general rules, from one form of the 
Nom., e. g. o i) opvis, Gen. -ifros, bird, PL opv&es and opveis, as if from opvis, 
Gen. -ecos. These substantives are called Heteroclites (i. e. of different declen- 
sions or irregularly declined). 

(c) The third class includes substantives, which, with one Nom. form, admit, 
in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation, one of which may be 
derived from the Nom, form in use, but the other supposes a different Nom. 
form, e. g. ^pdway, -ovros, servant, Ace. frepdirovra and poet. b^pa-ira, as if from 
frepa-ty. This formation is called Metaplasm (transformation), and the substan- 
tives included under it, Metaplasts. The Nom. form, presupposed in this case, 
is called the Theme, 



$68.] ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THIRD DEC. 87 

$ 68. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declenion. 

» 

1. Vow (to, knee), and Sopv (to, spear), see § 54 (c). 

In the tragic poets, the Epic forms, yovvaTa and yovva, yowacn, occur ; 
also in the Attic poets, the Gen. Sopos, Dat. So pi, and even 86pei, and 
PI. 86 pt] instead of Z6pa.ro., are formed from 86pv\ and in the phrase, Sopl 
k\e?v, to take a prisoner of war. this Dat. form is retained even hy the Attic 
prose writers. 

2. Twrj (rj, woman), Gen. ywaiK-6s (as if from ywai|), Dat. 
yvvaiK-L, Acc. yvvatK-a, Voc. ywai ; PL yvvaiKes, yvvaiKiov, yvvat^i (v), 
•ywaiKas; on the accentuation, see § 65, 3 (a). 

3. Aopv, see yoVu, No. 1. 

4. Zevs, Gen. Aios, Dat. Aw, Acc. Am (as if from £us), Voc. 
ZeO. 

Poet, corresponding forms are Zt\v6s, Zt)vI, Zrjva. 

6. ©c/aa-n-cov (6, servant), -ovtos. In Eurip. Acc. ^iparra, PL 
Separres, § 67 (c). 

6. Kapa (to, head), an Epic and poetic word, Gen. Kpar-os, 
Dat. Ac/oari and Kopa, Acc. to Kapa, to Kpara (rov Kpara, § 214) ; 
Acc. PL tovs Kparas, § 67 (c). 

7. KAets (17, key), Gen. KAet§-os, Dat. KAetS-i, Acc. kA-civ (§ 53, 
Rem. 1), later KAetSa; PL Nom. and Acc. /cAets, and KAei8e? a 
KAetSa?, § 67 (b). 

Old Attic, K\ys, K\rjd6s, .K\ydi, KXfjSa. 

8. Kvwv (o, rj, dog), Gen. kw-os, Dat. kwl, Acc. Kwa, Voc. kvov\ 
PL Kwes, M-yvcov, kuo-i, kvvol'S. 

9. K'nra (to, oil, fatness), in the Epic dialect always in the 
phrases, aXdij/aoS-ai Xiir iXatip, ^ptcrat and ^ptcrao-^at AtV eAata), and 

so also in the Attic prose, dXel^eo-Sai, ypUo-Sai Xiira ; Awra is thus 
an abridged Dat. instead of AtWi, AiVa, from to AtVa, Gen. -aos, 
but eXatoi^ must be considered as an adjective from iXda, olive, 
so that AtVa eAatov means olive-oil. 

10. MapTus (6, witness), Gen. [idprvpos, Dat. fidprvpt, Acc. 
fidprvpa, and in Simonides p.dprvv ; Dat. PL p.dprvo-i (v). 

11. Na{J? (17, ship), Gen. veco?, Dat. v?/t, Acc. i/aw, Voc. want- 
ing; Dual, Gen. and Dat. veotv (Nom. and Acc. wanting); PL 
vrjes, vewv, vavo-£(v), vav<s. Comp. ypavs, § 57. 

In Attic poets and later prose also, vr]6s, vr\i, vrja, etc- 



88 DEFECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. [$ 5w 

*2. "Op vis (6, rj, bird), Gen. 6pvl3-o<s, etc. The PL has a col- 
lateral form declined like 7roA.is, except the Dat. : opvl$e<s and 
opvets, opvcSoiv and opvt&v, 6pvlo~i, opvlSas, opveis, and opvZs, § 67 (b). 
So 'Ava^a-pcris, 'Ava^apatSos, and 'Ava^apcrews. 

In the Attic writers, the t is sometimes short, o/wy, fymj/, Aristoph. Av. 16. 
270, 335 (but opvls, opvlv, 70, 103, 73). 

13. Uvv£ (y, place of meeting), Gen. 7tvkv-6s, Dat. ttvkvl, Acc. 
irvKva. 

14. Srjs (o, moth), Gen. o-e-os; PL o-ees, Gen. o-cW, etc.; in the 
later writers, Gen. cny-ros. 

15. ^,K(jjp (to, dirt), Gen. o-Karos, etc., and vStop (to, water), 
Gen. vSaros, etc. To both of these belong: — 

16. <E>peap (to, a well), and o-reap (to, talloiv), Gen. -e'aros and 
-r^ros (a long in Attic, short in Epic). 

17. <E>#ot5, <£#ots (6, ar£ of cooking), Gen. <fi$0L-6s and (from 
<jiS-ois) <j>$oi8-os ; PL </>#oas and </>#oi8es. 

18. Xo9s (6, <z measure), x°°s> X°^» X ^ X° e9 > X°^ v * x ovo "^ X° as 
like /3o£? (§ 57) ; also Gen. x°ws, Acc. xo«> Acc. PL ;(oas, a s if 
from xoe^s. The latter forms are preferred by the Attic writers ; 
Xovs, with the meaning of mound, is inflected only like fiovs. 
The form ^oeus * s Ionic, Dat. x 0€ ' 1 '' 

19. Xpws (6, skin), xp^r-6<s, XP WT 4 XP^ ra - Collateral forms in 
the Ionic dialect and the Attic poets, are, Gen. XP '^ XP ^ X/°° a J 
like atScos. The Dat. xp§ is found in certain phrases with iv, 
e. g. iv xp$ KeipecrSaL, Xen. Hell. 1. 7, 8. £vp€L £v XP§> it shaves close 
to the skin, it comes home, Soph. Aj. 786. 

§ 69. Defective Nouns of the Third Declension. 

Some nouns of the third Dec. are wanting in one or more of the Cases, and 
are, consequently, called Defectives. Existing forms, however, of such substan- 
tives, are found, for the most part, only in certain phrases, e. g. 

Xp4tos (t5, debt), Ionic-Attic form for the Nom., Gen., and Acc; also t5 
XP^os, Gen. xpeovs, PI. ra xpea, Gen. %?^ v 5 tne D at « an d Dual are wanting j 
ovap and v-n-ap (only as Nom. and Acc), in dreaming and waking ; o<pe\os (only 
as Nom. and in the construction of the Acc. with the Inf.), advantage; fidKij 
only in the phrase virb ixaAns, under the arm. 



M 70, 71.] REDUNDANT NOUNS. HETEROCLITES. 89 

Remarks on the Declensions. 

§70. I. Redundant Nouns. 

Nouns are called Redundant, which have two modes of 
inflection in all or in most of the Cases : — 

A. They belong to the same declension, 

(a) of the same gender, e. g. 

6 \€ws and Ados, people; 6 pews and va6s, temple; 6 Kayds and \ay6s, hare; 
6 kolAws, rope, PI. also k&\oi ; r\ a\ws, threshing-floor, PI. also at a\oi ; 7] Topyca 
and Topyuu. 

(b) of different genders (hence called heterogeneous), e. g. 

6 vajros and rb vwrov, bach (the last form was regarded by the Atticists as the 
only proper form, still rbv vurov Xen. E. Equ. 3, 3) ; 5 C v 7°s an( l T0 &y6v, yoke. 
— In the PI. the neuter form of these heterogeneous nouns is more frequently 
used, e. g. 6 euros, ra aura ; ol Seo-/j.ol, and more commonly ra Secr/xa ; 6 o-ra&fj.6s, 
a station, balance, ol crra&fxol and ra. gtc&jxo., stations, and ra. o-ra^/xd, sometimes 
also balances; ol (vyoi does not probably occur. 

B. To different declensions, and commonly of different gen- 
ders (heterogeneous), e. g. 

5 <p&6yyos and t\ <p&oyyri, voice; 6 x&pos and t) x^P a » space; rj ox&n and 6 
f>X^ 0S i rising ground; i) Stya and rb dtyos, thirst; % vd-K-n (the older form) and rb 
vairos, valley, etc. It should be observed further, that the word 6 irpicrfivs, dder % 
has only Ace. irpicrfSw, Voc. irpeo-jSu; these three forms are almost entirety 
poetic (TrpecrfZvTepos and irpto-frvraros formed from this, are in frequent use) ; 
in the Common Language. 6 Trpeo-fivrrjs, -ov, elder ; in the meaning of messenger, 
envoy, the Common Language uses in the Sing. 6 TrpeafSzvrris, -ov ; but in the 
PL ol and rovs irpeo-fieis, Trpeo-fieav, irp^o'fieai ; also, to odupvov and rb tidnpv 
tear. The latter and older form is retained in the poetic dialect ; still, the Dat. 
PI. BdKpvo-i is found even in the Attic prose-writers (Thu. 7, 75; Dem. c. Onet. 
I. § 32). 

§71. II. Heter oolites. 

Heteroclites [$ 67 (b)] have two modes of formation; they 
are either of the third Dec, which have been already presented 
together ($ 68), or of two different declensions. Those of dif- 
ferent declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 

A. Of the First and Third Declension. 
Several substantives in -77s are inflected, either in whole or in 
part, according to the first and third declensions : — 

(a) Some in -7js, Gen. -ov and -7jtos, through all the Cases according to both 
S* 



90 THIRD DEC. METAPLASTS. [$ 72. 

declensions : 6 ixvxrjs, mushroom, Gen. fivicov and /uu/ctjtos, and some proper 
names, e. g. Xdpys. The name ©oAtjs, in the old Attic, has ths Ionic Gen. 
form ©aAeco, Dat. ©aA??, Ace. ©aA^y; in the later writers, 0aAoD and ©oAtjtos, 
®d\7)Ti and 0aA?jTa. Observe that the accent is drawn back on 0aAea>. 

(b) The proper names mentioned, § 59, Rem. 2, have ?j as well as r]v in the 
Ace. Sing. only. 

B. Of the Second and Third Declensions. 

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions : several 
substantives in -os, as masculine, are inflected according to the 
second Dec, but as neuter, according to the third Dec, e. g. 6 
and to oxos, chariot, rov o^ov and oxovs, rbv oxpv and rb o^os ; 6 
and rb o-k6tos, darkness. 

(b) Of the contract second and third declensions : =— 

■n-pSxoos (tj, watering-pot), Att. irp6xovs, Gen. npSxov, etc., Dat. PL irp«fxov<ri 
(like flovs, fiovaiv). 
Oldiiruvs, Gen. OtStTroSos and (poet.) Of§i7rou, Dat. OlSfaoSi, Ace. OlSiiroda and 

Old'nrow, Voc. OiSl7TOU. 

(c) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — 

In the Ace. Sing., 6 yeXccs, laughter y yeXooros, yeXari, Ace. y4\wra and 
y4\<av, and the three following: Trdrpots, patruus, fi^rpcos, avunculus, and 
Mivas, which, in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., are inflected according to the third 
Dec. and the Attic second Dec. ; in the other Cases, according to the third 
Dec. 

irdrpas, Gen. irdrpci} and Trdrpccos, Dat. irdrpuii, Ace. irdrpwv and Trdrpcoa; 
MiVcos, Gen. Miuca and Mlvaos, Dat. Mlvm, Ace. Mivw (§ 48, Eem. 1), Mivwv 
and MtVwa. 

§72. Ill Metaplasts. 

Metaplasts [$ 67 (c)] like Heteroclites, have two modes of 
formation ; they are either of the third declension, which have 
been already presented together (68), or of two different declen- 
sions. Those of different declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 

(a) Of the Common second and third declensions : — 

AevSpov {rb, tree), Gen. dev$pov, etc. ; but in the Dat. PI. among the Attic 
writers, Seudpeai (from the stem rb AENAP02) and SevSpois, the first form is 
regarded by the Atttcists as the better. To this stem belong, also, the forms 
rep Sevdpei and rh deu^pr], which occur in the Attic poets, and in later prose 
writers. 

KoivoovSs (6, partaker), Gen. koiuoovov, etc.; Xenophon uses the forms ot 
K.awu>ves and rovs iwivwvas (from KOINHN). 



♦ 73.] INDECLINABLE AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 91 

Kpivov (rb, libj) Gen. Kphov, etc., with the secondary form in the Dat. PL 
Kpivsvi in Aristoph. from the PI. fcplvea (in Herod.). Comp. devSpov. 

A as (6, stone), Gen. Xaos and in Soph. 0. C. 196. Kaov. 

'O oveipos [and poetic rb oveipov], dream. Gen. bvsipov and bvelparos. 

Uvp (to, fire), irvpos. But PL, ra irvpd, watch-fires, according to the second 
Dec. 

'Tibs (b, son), Gen. viov, etc. Together with this formation, there is another 
according to the third Dec, much in use, particularly in the Attic writers, from 
the theme 'TIET2, Gen. vleos, Dat. vtet (Ace. vUa is rejected) ; PL vleis, Gen. 
vleav, Dat. vl4<ri, Ace. (vleas), Attic vle?s (§ 57, Rem. 1); Dual, idee, Gen. 
vUoiv. 

(b) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — 

The three substantives, y aAws, threshing-floor ; b rados, peacock; and b rvcpdbs, 
whirlwind, have, together with the common inflection according to the Attic 
second declension, another according to the third declension, in -<avos, etc., e. g. 
rv<pwva. 

Be:nlark. The words tj d\<as and 6 rados are generally declined accord- 
ing to the Attic second Dec, Ace Sing. a\cov, rawv ; still, the v is commonly 
rejected from aXcos in the Ace, § 48, Eem. 1. But the forms aXwvos, aAwves? 
a\<aai(u), rawvi, rawues, rawffiVy etc., are used on account of their greater 
perspicuity. 

§73. Indeclinable and D efective Nouns. 

1. Substantives which do not vary the termination, but retain in all the Cases 
the form of the Xom., are called indeclinable. Except foreign proper names, as 
6 'Afipad/jt., rod 'Afipadfj., and the indeclinable cardinal numbers, all indeclinable 
nouns are of the neuter gender. Here belong especially : — 

(a) The names of the letters, e. g. rb, rod, rip, &\<pa' : 

(b) Most of the cardinal numbers, e. g. 5e/ca avdpuv; 

(c) Tb, rod, r§, xP ec ^ u i necessity, destiny, and &4fiis with itrriv and elvai, and 
several foreign words, e. g. rb, rod, t<£ Trdax a > 

(d) The substantive infinitives, e. g. rb, rod, t&> ypdcpeiv. 

2. Some substantives are used only in the Sing., or only in the PL Such 
words may be termed defective in number. The reason of it is found, either 
in the meaning of the word, or simply in usage, e. g. 6 alfrhp, ether ; ol ir-ncrlai, 
tlte Etesian wind ; al 'A^j/cu, Athens ; ra. 'OXiifxiTLa, the Olympic games. Comp. 
further, Syntax, § 243. . 

3. It has been already noted, § 69, that some substantives arc found only in 
single Cases (Defcctiva casu). 



92 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. [§§ 74, 75 

CHAPTER II. 

The Adjective and Participle. 

$74. Gender, and Declension of the Adjective 
and Participle . 

1. The Adjective and the Participle, like the Substantive, 
have three genders, being varied by inflection to agree with 
the gender of their substantive. But all adjectives have 
not separate forms for the three genders ; many have but 
two endings, one for the Masc. and Fern., the other for the 
Neuter, e. g. 6 acocppav avrjp, r) aaxfipcov <yvvrj, to aa)(j>pov 
rercvov. Several, indeed, have but one ending, commonly 
used only for the Masc. and Fern. See § 80, e. g. 6 cfrvr/as 
avrjp, rj (fivyas yvvrj. 

2. In Adjectives and Participles of three endings, the 
Masc. and Neuter belong to the same declension (second or 
third), and the Neuter is like the Masc. in the Gen. and 
Dat. ; the Fern, is always of the first Dec. 

Remark 1. Hence, in an Adjective in -os of three endings, the Masc. is 
declined like \6yos (§ 46), the Fern, like Sjktj or cmid (§ 44), and the Neut. 
like gvkov (46). 

Rem. 2. The declension of Adjectives and Participles differs only in a few 
points from that of the Substantive ; these will be noted hereafter. But it may 
be remarked here, as an essential deviation, that Participles always have the 
Voc. of the third Dec. like the Nom., § 53, Rem. 5. 

§75. Accentuation of Adj ectives and Participles. 

The accentuation of Adjectives and Participles is like that 
of Substantives, with a few exceptions, which are now to be 
noted : — 

1. The Fem. is accented on the same syllable as the Masc. through all the 
Cases, where the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. koXos, tcaA'f), koXov ; 
Koiicpos, KoixpT], Koxxpov] x a p' L€ls ,'X a P l€(rcra i X a ?' l * v 'i H-*^ as > H&aiva, fi4\av] ^ipT\Vy 
repeiva, repeu ; fiapvs, jSapeta, (Sapv ; fiovAevtras, fiovXevcraffa, fiovXzvffav ' ridels, 



i 75.] ACCENTUATION OF ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 93 

Remark 1. In adjectives in -os, -rj, -ov, or -os, -a, -ov, the Fern., on account 
of the length of the final syllable (77, d), must be a Paroxytone, when the Masc. 
is a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, e. g. av&pdnrivos, avfrpairlvri, avSpw- 
irivov] iXev&epos, iXzv&epa, iXev&epov; Kovcpos, KOixp-n, Kovcpov) cnrovScuos, o"irov- 
Saia, <rirov8a7ov ; but, when the final syllable in the declension is short, it again 
takes the accentuation of the Masc, i. e. it becomes again a Proparoxytone, or 
a Properispomenon, e. g. av&pc&irivai, iXev&epai, Kovcpat, trirovScuai, like av&p&in- 
voi, iXev&epoi, Kovcpoi, crirovSaioi. Hence the difference between 'P68iai, Avkicli 
(yvvcuKes), as adjectives, and 'Po5 tat, Av/efat, as substantives, according to 
§ 45, 6. 

2. Participles accent the same syllable in the Neuter Nom. as in the Masc, 
when the nature of the syllable permits, e. g. 

iraiBevwv, Tra^Sevov nix-^aoiv^ Tifj.T]<Tov 

(piX&v, (piXovv Xnr&v, Xnrov. 

Rem. 2. Yet Adjectives sometimes deviate from this rule, see § 65, 5. 

3. Contracts in -ovs, -rj, -ovv, from -eos, -ed, -eov, 60s, -6-q, or 6a, -6ov (except 
the Nom. and Ace. Dual Masc. and Neuter, which are Oxytones, § 49, 3), are 
Perispomena through all the Cases and Numbers, though the uncontracted 
forms of those in -eos are Proparoxytones, e. g. apyvpeos = apyvpovs, apyvpeov 
= apyvpovv. On contracted compounds in -00s, -oov, e. g. ewow, evvow, see 
4 49, 3. 

4. Barytone feminines of adjectives and participles, whose Masc. is of the 
third declension, are Perispomena [§ 45, 6 (b)] in the Gen. PL, but all the 
other Cases retain the accent of the Masc, e. g. 

fiapvs, -e?a, -v Gen. PL £apeW, fi ape iS>v 

Xo.pieis, -lecrcra, -teV " yapiivTuv, x a P le0 ~°~® v 

fieXas, jxiXaiva, fieXav " /j.eXdvuv, peXaivcov 

iras, iraaa, irav " iravrow, it a o~ a) v 

rv(p&eis, -tio~a, -iv " rvepdrevrow, rvcp&e io~G>v 

rvtyas, rvipacra, rtyav " rv^avrutv, t v -ty a o~ G> v ; but, 

av^pwirivos, -ivn, -ivov " d v&pco izi vcov, as Masc, P., and N. 

iXev&epos, -epd, -epov " e\e v&iptav, as Masc, P., and N. 

tvttt6/x€vos, -*vt\, -evov " rvirrofievcDv, as Masc, P., and N. 

Rem. 3. On the accentuation of the monosyllable iras, and of monosyllabic 
participles in the Gen. and Dat., see § 65, 2 (c). 

Rem. 4. On the accentuation of the Nominative of compound adjectives, 
the following things are to be noted : — 

(a) Those in -os, when the last part is formed of a substantive or adjective, 
follow the general rule [§ 30, 1, (c)], and are Proparoxytones, e. g. <piX6- 
TeKyos (from t4kvov), irdyKaKos (from kolkos). But if the last part is 
formed of a verb, then adjectives with a long penult, are Oxytones, e. g. 
xI/vxoto/attSs, fj.e\oiroi6s, Seiv(air6s, 6dr)y6s ; but those with a short penult, 
are commonly Paroxytones, if they have an active sense, but if a passive, 
Proparoxytones, e. g. 

X&ofiSxos, one casting stones ; X&6t3oXos, cast down by stones ; 

fx-qrpoKTovos, matricide; jj.rjTp6KTovos, slain by a mother ; 

&T)porp6(pos, nourishing wild beasts ; frnp6rpo<pos, nourished by wild beasts. 

Words compounded with prepositions, a privative and intensive, ev and 



94 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [$ 76. 

5vs, and aei, ayay, api, apri, 4pt, rj/xt, £a, Tray, and tto\v, are always Pro 

paroxytones, and hence exceptions to the rule respecting words with a 

short penult. 
'(b) Verbal adjectives in -r6s remain Oxytones, even in compounds, if they 

have three endings, but are Proparoxytones, if they have but two. See 

§ 78, I. (c). 
(c) All compounds in -ir\7]£, -p<6£, -rp<»>£, -a<pa£, are Oxytones. 



Summary of the Adjective and Participle Endings, 



§76. I. Adjectives and Participles of three 
Endings. 



I. -OS, -5J, -OV, 



Nom. 

Gen. 

Nom. 

Gen. PI. 

Nom. 

Gen. PL 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Gen. PL 

Nom. 

Gen. 

Nom. 

Gen. 



aya&os, 

ay a&ov, 

oydoos, 

oyfiocov, 

ypa<p6fjt,eyos, 

ypa(pofj.4vcoy, 

Siicaios, 

Sucaiov, 

diKalew, 

ex^pos, 

ex^pov, 

aSrp6os, 

a&p6ov, 



Gen. PL dd-p<W, 



ayaSri], 
ay a&rjs, 
6yd6n, 
dy86a)v, 

ypa<pofj.4vr)i 
ypacpofievooi/* 
tiiKaia, 
SiKalas, 

iX&pa, 

ad-pod, 

a&poas, 

a&p6ay, 



ayo&ou, good, 

\yaSov 

oySoov, eighth, 

oydSwv (§ 75, 4.) 

ypacpo/xeyoy 

ypacpoixivuv 

SlKaioy, just, 

SiKalov 

Sutaiay 

4x&p6v, hostile, 

£x&pov 

a£rp6oy, full, 

a£rp6ov 

a&poooy. 



Most of the adjectives belong to this class. The Pem. ends in «, when pre- 
ceded by t or p, § 43, 1. Still, adjectives in -oos have -6a in the Pern., when p 
precedes o, otherwise, -6n, e. g. afrp6a, 9 jet 6y56rj. On the accentuation of 
adjectives in -os, -t\ (d), -ov, see § 75. 

Adjectives in -eos, -4 a, -eov, which denote the material, e. g. XP^ " 60 ^ 
golden; apyvpeos, silver; Kepa.fx.eos, earthen; and multiplicative adjectives in 
-60s, -6t\, -6ov, e. g. airx6os, single; 5nr\6os, double, are contracted. On the 
accentuation, of those in -eos, -4a, -eov, see § 75, 3, and on the contraction of 
those in -4a into -a, -077 into -rj, and -6a into -a, see § 9, II. 

Xpvo~-eos, xpuc-eS, xP^ ff '^ 0V 

Xpvc-ovs, xP v(r ~y> xP v( i~ vv 

4p4-eos, ipe-4a, ip4-eov 

ipe-ovs, ipe-a, ipe-ovv 

apyvp-eos, apyvp-4d, apyvp-eov 

apyvp-ovs, apyvp-a, apyvp-ovy 

dnr\-6os, dnr\-6r), 5nr\-6ov 

SittX-ovs, 8iir\-rj, SnrX-ovv. 

Remark 1. Contraction is seldom omitted in Attic classic prose, not unfre- 
quently in the Tragedians, e. g. xpvvea, Xen. Ag. 5, 5 ; yet a&p6os, -6a, -6oy, 
crowded, is rarely found contracted; diKpoos, -6a, -6ov, two-pronged, is com- 
monly contracted in the Masc. and Neut., Zinpovs, Zatpovv, but in the Pern, the 
uncontracted form is usual, 77 §iicp6a\ 6 yd oos is always uncontracted. 



II. 



-v : Nom. yXvKvs, y\vKe?a, y\vKv, sweet, 
Gen. yA.vit4os, yAvicelas, y\vic4os 

Gen. PL y\vn4a>v, y\vK*iav, y\vK4uv (§ 75, 4.) 



$ 76.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. 95 

The declension of the Masc. is like irrixvs, though with the common genitives 
in -eos, -icav ; the declension of the Neut. is like aarv, yet always uncontracted in 
the PI. (-«*).. The only deviations from the regular accentuation are, Taurus, 
r)fj.icreia, rtfucrv, half; &r)Xvs, 3-^Aeta, &rj\v, female ; irpeafivs, old (used only in the 
Masc), and some poetic fonns. ®rjXvs is sometimes used as feminine in Homer 
and in the Tragedians. 

Rem. 2. The adjective rifxiffv s, in the Attic writers, has both the contracted 
and uncontracted forms in the Ace. PL, rj/xia-eis and rj/xio-eas : also the Xeut. 
Tlfxio-ea is found in several passages in Demosthenes in the contracted form 
fj/jiio-q. Sometimes the Ionic Pern, form -e'a occurs, e. g. irXaTta, X. R. Equ. 1, 
14. .'in all MSS.) i)fj.iaeas, PL Menon. 83, c. in the best MSS. 

HI. -vs, -vffa, -vv: Nom. deiKvvs, deiKi/uffa, Sgikvvv, showing, 

Gen. SeinvvvTOs, oeucvicrns, SeLKvvvros 

Gen. PL ozlkvvvtoiv, o'ziKvva&v, Scikvvvtuiv (§ 75,4.) 

Nom. <pvs, (pvcra, <pw, produced, 

Gen. (pvvros, <pvaris, <£>tWos [§ 65, 2 (c).] 

Gen. PL (pvvrcav, <pvau>v, (pvvTcav. 

So the Pres. and second Aor. Act. participles of verbs in -fu. Por the de- 
clension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d). 

IV. -eis, -e ff <r a, -e v : Nom. x a p' L€ls i X a p' Lea,ara > X a p'<* v -> lovely, 

Gen. x a P ievT0S y x a P L * aa " f ) s ) X a P' L€yT0S 

Gen. PL x a ? l * VT(av i X a P l z°~ (T ® v , %apteW«y. 

For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), the only difference 
'being that the Dat. PL ends in -e<ri, not -euri, e. g. xapieffi. — The Masc. and 
Neut. is in the Nom. a Paroxytone, in the Pern, a Proparoxytone ; yet the 
ancient grammarians prescribe that the Neut. of x a p' ieis should be accented on 
the antepenult, hence x*? l * v - 

Rem. 3. Some of the adjectives in -i)€is, -t\ e <r <r a, -rj e v, and -oets, -6 iff' 
a a, -6e v, admit contraction, e. g. 

Nom. Ti/xTi-eis, Tifx-ii-ecrcra, tl(j.t}-gv, honored, 

TL/jirjs, Tifj.r)o~o~a, ti/atjv 
Gen. TifirjvTos, Tifirjcrcrris, rLfXTJuros 
Kom. fj,eXiT6-eis, /JLTeAiTo-effffa, /xeXno-cv, honeyed, 

fxeXirovs, jxeXirovcrcra, fxeXiTovu 
Gen. LieXiTOvvros, fxeXiTovacrris, /j.€Xltovvtos. 

V. -els, -el a a, -e V. Nom. XtKpSrels, tei<pfre?<ra, Xeicp&ev, relictus, 

Gen. AeKp&evros, Xei(p<b-eicrr)s, XtKp&evros 

Gen. PL XtKp&evTow, XtKp&eiawi', Xei<p&4vTwv 
Nom. r&eis, Ti^6?o-a, Tid-ej/, placing, 
Gen. Ti&4vTOs, T&dcrrjs, ridei/ros. 

For the declension of the Masc. and Neut, see § 54 (d), and also in the Dat 
PL, e. g. ru^eto-t. So likewise the first and second Aor. Pass. Participle, and 
the Pres. and second Aor. Active Part, of ridrr\[ii and 'it)\u, e. g. lets, U7<ra, leV, 
els, elcra, eV, &eis, &e?cra, &eV. 

VI. -d 5, -o t v d, -d v : Nom. fxeXds, jxiXaiva, fxeXdv, black, 

Gen. fj.eXa.vos, fJ.eXaii/7)s, fxzXapos 

Gen. PL jxeXauaiv, lAtXaiv&v, /xeXavow. 

In the same manner only raXas, TaXaiva, raXav, unhappy, the feminine Voc. 
of which has also raXav, Por tho declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 
(d), with Rem. 6. 



96 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OP THREE ENDINGS. [§ 76. 

Vll. -a s, -a a 1 a, -av: Nom. iras, irdaa, irav, all, every, 
Gen. iravros, irda-ns, icavros 

Gen. PL irdvrcov, iraacov, trdvrcov. 

In the same manner only the compounds of iras, e. g. fords {airaaa, airav), 
ffvfiiras, irpoirds, etc. ; these compounds have a short a in the Neut., in dac- 
tylic and anapestic verse. See § 54 (d),for the declension of the Masc. and 
Neut., and § 65, 2 (c), for the accentuation of the simple adjective in the Gen. 
and Dat. PI. and Dual. 

VILT. -as, -dad, -dv: Nom. Aetyds, Aetydcrd, Xeityav, having left. 
Gen. Xeixpavros, Xeirpdays, Xd\pavros 

Gen. PI. Xeiipdvrcov, XeL\paacov, Xenpdvrcov. 

So the first Aor. Act. Part., and also the Pres. and second Aor. Act. Part, of 
forrj/ju: terras, -daa, -dv ; ards, -daa, -dv. Por the declension, see § 54 (d). 

IX. -r\v, -eiva, -ev: Nom. rdprjv, r4peiva, r4pev (poetic), smooth, 

Gen. repevos, repeivns, repevos 

Gen. PI. repevcov, repeivcov, repsveov. 

No other adjective is thus declined. Por the declension, see § 55, 1. 

X. -o v s, -o v <r a , -6 v : ^Nbm. Zioovs, oioovaa, oioov, giving, 

Gen. oioovros, oidovar)s, Sio6vros 

Gen. PI. 8id6vrcov, oioovacov, Dio6vrcov. 

Thus only the Part. Pres. and the second Aor. Act. (Dovs, dovaa, $6v, Gen. 
Sovros, oova-ns, Gen. PI. Fern. oovawv) of verbs in -copi. 

XI. -co v, -over a, -6 v : Nom. hicd/v, hKovaa, hn6v, willing, 

Gen. hicSvros, hKovar\s, htcSvros 

Gen. PL huSvrcov, huovacov, £k6vt6ov. 

Thus only the compound dincov, commonly daw, &Kov(ra, aicov. Por the 
declension, see § 54 (d). 

XII. -co v, -over d, -o v : Nom. Xe'nrcov, Xtiicovaa, Xziirov, leaving, 

Gen. Xeiirovros, Xeiirovarjs, Xeiirovros 

Gen. PL XenrSvrcov, Xeurovacov, Xeiirdvrcoy. 

So also the Pres., Put.,, and second Aor. Act. Part., the last, however, with a 
different accentuation : -dv, -ovaa, -6v, e. g. Xtircbv, -ovaa, -op. Por the declen- 
sion, see § 54 (d). In the same manner, the Present participles of contract 
verbs in -doc, -ico, and -6co, e. g. 

Nom. Tijxwv, -S>cra, -wv Nom. <piXa>v, -ovcra, -ovv 

Gen. rifxccvros, -coarjs, -Sivros Gen. PL cpiXovvrcov, -ovacov, -ovvrcov. 

Gen. PL rificovrcov, -coacov, -chvrcov. Nom. pna^rcov, -ovaa, -ovv 

Gen. PL fxiaSf ovvrcov , -ovacov, -ovvrcov. 

The Put. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs is declined like cpiXcov, cpiXovaa, cpiXovv, 
Gen. <piXovvros, etc., e. g. airepwv, -ovcra, -ovv (formed from crirtpecov, etc.), from 
fftreipco, to sow. 

XIII. -cos -via -os:Nom. rervepds, rerv(pv7a, rervepos, having struck, 

Gen. rerveporos, rervepvias, rerveporos 

Gen. PL rerveporcov, rervcpvtcov, rervcpSrcov. 

> On the form harks, -coca, harks and -6s, etc., see below, § 193, Rem. 2 and 3. 



$ JV.i 



ADJECTIVES. PARADIGMS. 



97 



31'V Tl ie adjectives, peyas, ,u e 7 a A 7?, /* e 7 a, srrazf , tt A u s, iroXX-f), 
ttpAu, u» ft, are irregular in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. of the Masc and Neut. 
Si!ng. ; \ L e oiher parts are regular : bat even izoXXov instead of iroXvv or iroXv, 
occurs m the Attic poets; Aesch. S. 824, uses the Toe. peyaXe: irpaos, 
•a-paeii, irpaov, soft, is also irregular; it has, throughout the Fern., in the 
PI. and Dual Neut., as also in the Gen. PL Masc, and sometimes, also, in the 
other Cases of the Masc. PL, a form like irpavs, -e?a, -i) (comp. yXvicvs, -ela, -v), 
which occurs in ths Dialects. See the Paradigm. 



77. Paradigms, 



S. N. \ayc&-6s 


aya5-Ji bryaSf-ov, gooc 


(ptXl-OS 


(piXi-a. 


<plXi-0!/,\0Yelj 


Gr. aya^r-ou 


ayab-r\s uya^-ov 


(piXi-ov 


(piXi-ds 


(piXi-ov 


D . aya&-(p 


aya&-fj aya&-<p 


(piXi-cp 


(piXi-a 


<piXi-(p 


A. aya&-6v 


ayaS-'fty b.ya$-6v 


(piXi-ov 


(piXi-dv 


(piXi-Cfi. 


^ . aya&-4 


dyaS-ii o\ya&~6v 


<piXi-€ 


(piXi-d 


(piXi ov 


P.N. \ayab-oi 


aya^-ai aya^-d 


<biXi-oi 


(piXi-at 


(p'iXi-a 


G. \ayc&-w v 


aya&-a>v ayaS-uv 


(piXi-cov 


(piXi-cav 


(plXi-OJV 


D. ayaS-o?s 


aya$-a?s aya^-ois 


(piXi-ois 


(piXi-ais 


(piXi-OLS 


A. 


ayefo-ovs 


aya&-ds aya&-d 


(piXi-ovs 


(piXl-ds 


(piXi-a 


V. 


ay aS-oi 
ayaS-d> 


aya2r-ai aya^r-d 
ayaS-cL aya&-& 


\cpiX1-01 


(piXi-ai 


<p{Xi-a 


Dual 


(piXi-ca 


<piXi-d 


(piXi-co 


\aya&-o?v 


aya$-a?v aya&-0iv. 


{(piXi-oiv 


(piXi-aiv 


(piXi-oiv. 


S. X. yXvKvs 


yXvKeia yXvKv, swe^t 


vpaos 


irpaeia 


irpaov, soft 


G. yXvKe-os 


yXvKeids yXvKe-os 


irpaov 


irpaz Las 


irpaov 


D. yXvKS? 


yXvKeia yXvKei 


irpacp 


irpaeia 


irpa(p 


A, yXvKiiv 


yXvueiav yXvuv 


■.rpaov 


irpaeiav 


irpaov 


V. yXvKV 


yXvKela yXvKv 


icpcios(e) 


irpaeia 


irpaov 


P. X. 7A.u/cets 


yXvKelai yXvKea 


irpaoi, irp 


acts irpae?ai irpaea 


G. yXVK€Cn}V 


yXviceiccv yXvudcov 


irpaea>v 


it pae luv irpaetvv 


D. 7Au/cecn(j/) yXvKeiais yXvKea'i(v) 


irpaois, irp 


a€<ri irpaeiais it paea 1 


A. 7Au«:6rs' 


yXvKeias yXvKea 


irpdovs, 7r p 


acts it p ae 


ids irpaea 


V. 


yXvice?s 


yXvK(7ai yXvKea 


irpaoi, irp 


ae?s irpae?ai irpaea 


Dual. 


yXvxee 


yXvKeta yXvicee 


irpdoi 


irpaeia 


irpdcc 


7Av/ceotz/ 


yXvKeiaiv yXviceoiv 


irpaoiv 


it paeiaiv irpaoiv. 


S. N. 


Xapiets 


Xapiecrcra x a P l€U 


Xeupt&eis 


X€i<p&e?cra 


Xeicpd-ev 


G. 


XapievTos 


Xapieaarjs x a P Leuros 


Xeicpb-euros 


Xei<p&€i(rris 


XeicpS-evros 


D. 


Xapievri 


Xapieaar] x a P LevTL 


Xei<p&evTi 


Xe«p&e(o-p 


Xeup&evTi 


A. 


Xapievra 


Xapieacrav x a P i€U 


XeKp&ivra 


XeLfpSelo-av 


Xei(p&ev 


Y. 


Xapiev 


Xapieacra x a P iev 


Xeicp&eis 


Xei(p&e7o-a 


X€L<pdrev 


P.N. 


Xaplevres 


Xaplecrcrai x a p' l€VTa 


Xei<f)$emes 


XeL<p&e?(Tai. 


XeHp&evra 


G. 


XapitvToov 


Xapiecracou x a P lej/TC °v 


\zi<pb4vT0)V 


XtKp'&eMroop 


XeKphevrav 


D. 


Xapi€ai(v 


Xapieaaais xapiecn(j/) 


Kei<p$uo~i[v 


XeL(pxrelo~aii 


Xei<p&e7o-i(v) 


A. 


Xapievras 


Xapiecrards x a P L6UTa 


\tl.(p2r<EVTG:s 


Xei<p§elo~as 


XeKpSevra 


V. 


Xapievres 


Xapieaa'ai x a P LeuTa 


\ei(p $■«/"•€? 


Xei<p&e?(Tai 


XeKpdrevra 


Dual. 


Xapievre 


Xapiecrcra. xapievre 


KeupSevre 


XtKpSetaa 


Xeicb&evTe 




Xapievroiv 


Xapiecrcraiu x a P l * VT0LV ' 


\eKpS4m ow 


Xeupdeicraiv Xeicp&tvToii/. 



ADJECTIVES. rARADlGMS. 



[$77 



Xpvcreos 


Xpvcrea 


Xpvcreov, golden 


airXovs 


airXori 


airX6ov, single 


Xpvcrovs 


Xpvo-ij 


Xpvcrovv 


airXovs 


airXrj 


airXovv 


Xpvcreov 


Xpvcreas 


Xpvcreov 


airX6ov 


airX6ris 


airXoov 


Xpvcrov 


Xpva-rjs 


XpvGov 


airXov 


airXris 


airXov 


Xpvcreca 


Xpvo-ea 


Xpvcreca 


airXoca 


airXor) 


airXoca 


Xpv<T<£ 


Xpvcrj) 


Xpvo-y 


airXca 


airXrj 


aTtXcp 


Xpvcreov 


Xpvveay 


Xpiaeov 


airXoov 


airXorjv 


airXoov 


Xpvcrovv 


Xpvcrvv 


Xpvcrovv 


airXovv 


airXTJv 


airXovv 


doubtful 


Xpv<rea 


Xpvcreov 


doubtful 


airX6t] 


airX6ov 




Xpvcrri 


Xpvcrovv 




airXrj 


airXovv 


Xpvcreoi 


Xpvcrecu 


Xpvcrea 


airXooi 


airXoai 


airXSa 


Xpvcro? 


Xpv<ra7 


Xpv<ra 


airXo? 


airXa? 


airXa 


Xpvcrecov 


Xpvffeow 


Xpvcrecov 


airXScav 


airXScav 


airX6cav 


Xpvcr&v 


Xpvatov 


Xpvcrwv 


airXwv 


airXcav 


airX&v 


Xpvcreois 


Xpvcreais 


Xpvcreois 


airXSois 


airXSais 


airXoois 


XpvcroTs 


Xpvcrcus 


Xpvcrols 


airXoTs 


a.irXa'is 


anXoTs 


Xpvareovs 


Xpvcreas 


Xpvcrea 


airXSovs 


airXSas 


airXSa 


Xpvaods 


Xpvcras 


Xpvcra 


airXovs 


airXas 


airXa 


Xpvcreoi 


Xpvcreai 


Xpvcrea. 


airXooi 


airXoai 


airXoa 


Xpvcrcn 


Xpvcrcu 


Xpvcra 


airXo? 


airXa? 


airXa 


Xpvcreca 


Xpvcrea. 


Xpvcreu) 


airXoca 


airXoa 


airXoca 


Xpvcroo 


Xpvcra 


Xpvcraj 


airXca 


airXa 


a-rcXG) 


Xpvcreotv 


Xpvcreaiv 


Xpvcreoiv 


airXSoiv 


airXoaiv 


airX6oiv 


Xpvcrdlv 


Xpvcrcuv 


Xpvcrotv 


airXolv 


airXaiv 


airXotv 


dpyvpeos 


apyvpea 


apyvpeov y silver 


rervepcos 


rerv(pv?a 


rervcpoSy having 


dpyvpovs 


apyvpa 


apyvpovv 


rerveporos 


rervepvias 


rerocporos (struck. 


apyvpeov 


apyvpeas 


apyvpeov 


TervcpoTi 
rervcp6ra 


rervepvia 


rervcp6ri 
rervepos 


apyvpov 


apyvpas 


apyvpov 


Terv<pv7av 


apyvpeca 


apyvpea 


apyvpea) 


rervepdres 


rervcpvTai 


r\rvcpora 


apyvpu) 


apyvpa 


apyvpep 


rervcpSrcav rervcpvicav 


rervcp6ra>v 


apyvpeov 


apyvpeav 


apyvpeov 


rervcp6cri 


rervcpviais 


' rervcpocri 


apyvpovv 


apyvpav 


apyvpovv 


rerveporas 


rervepvias 


rervepora 


ctpyvpee 


apyvpea 


apyvpeov 


rervcpSre 


rervepvia 


rervepore 




apyvpa 


apyvpovv 


rervcp6roiv rervcpviaiv 


rervcp6roiv 


ir o Xvs 


iroXXr) 


ttoXv, much 


fx eyas 


fxeyaXrj 


fxey a, great 


iroXXov 


iro\\r\s 


ttoXXov 


jxeyaXov 


/xeyaXrjs 


fieyaXov 


ttoXX<5 


iroXXfj 


ttoXXcS 


fxeyaXo) 


fxeyaXr) 


Lieydh (p 


7TO XvV 


iroXXov 


•K oXl) 


jxeyav 


fxeyaX7]V 


Lieya 


TT OXv 


iroXXr) 


iroXv 


[ley a 


jxeyaXT) 


fxeya 


ttoXXol 


iroXXai 


iroXXd 


jxeyaXoi 


fxeyaXai 


jxeyaXa 


ttoXXojv 


"KOXX&V 


TTOXX&V 


fxeyaXcav 


fxeyaXcav 


LieydXcov 


ivoXXo7s 


iroXXaTs 


7T0XX0?S 


/xeyaXois 


LieyaXais 


LieyaXois 


TTOXXOVS 


TroXXds 


TTOXXd 


[leyaXovs 


/xeydXas 


jxeyaXa 


iroXXoi 


iroXXai 


iroXXd 


jxeyaXoi 


LieyaXai 


fieyaXa 








fxeyaXca 


LieyaXa 


/xeydXco 








jxeyaXoLV 


/.ley aXaiv 


fxeydXoiv 



$78. 



ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 



99 



ndXas 


/.idXaiva 


jxzXav, black 


iras 


iraffa 


travy all 


fitXavos 


fj.t\aiv7}s 


fieXdvos 


TravrSs 


irdcrris 


iravros 


/xeXavi 


fj-eXalvy 


/xeXavi 


iravri 


Trdffrj 


iravri 


fieXava 


fieXaivav 


IxiXav 


Tvavra 


ivao-av 


irav 


fxiXav 


fiiXaiva 


/i4Xav 


iras 


iracra 


irav 


/xeXavts 


fieXaiwi 


fxeXava 


irdvres 


■naval 


iravra 


fjieXdvOJV 


[xeXaivu>v 


fieXdvcav 


irdvrwv 


iraauv 


irdvrwv 


/xeXaai 


[ieXaivais 


fxeXacrt 


Tract 


irdaais 


•nuori 


IxiXavas 


/AtXaivas 


/xeXava 


irdvras 


irdaas 


iravra 


/j.4Xaves 


fizXaivai 


/xeXava 


irdvres 


iraffai 


iravra 


/xeXave 


fieXatva. 


jx4Xave 


Trdvre 


irdffd 


irdvre 


/xeXavoiv 


/xeXaivaiv 


fieXavoiv. 


Trdvroiv 


irdcraiv 


TTaVTOlV. 


(TTO.S 


aracra 


ffTav, standing 


Xnr&v 


Xntovaa 


Xnrov, leaving 


aravros 


(xrd(T7]s 


(Xravros 


Xl7t6vtos 


Xnrovcrris 


Xlitovtos 


aravri 


crrdcrr) 


crravri 


Xiirovri 


Xiirovo~r) 


XlTTOVTl 


err dura 


(TTaaau 


ffrdv 


Xnrovra 


Xiirovo-av 


XlTTOV 


crrds 


crracra 


GTCLV 


Xiirwv 


Xnrovcra 


XiirSv 


(TTavres 


(TTucrai 


crduTa 


Xiirovres 


Xiirovcrai 


XiirSvra 


ffrduTcou 


GTcxrcov 


(TTavrcav 


XiirSvToov 


Xnrovo'civ 


Xiirovrcav 


(TTacn{v) 


cravats 


o~Tao~i(v) 


Xnrovcri(v) 


Xmovcrais 


Xnrovo~i(v) 


cravras 


crrdcras 


cravra 


Xiirovras 


Xnrovaas 


XiirSvra 


aravres 


crraaai 


ffrdvra 


Xiirovres 


Xiirovo~ai 


Xnr6vra 


<rrdvT€ 


<Trd(ra 


(TTaVTZ 


Xiirovre 


Xnrovffa 


Xiit6vt€ 


arduTOiv 


ardaaLj/ 


ardvroiv. 


Xnr6vroiv 


Xiirovo~aiv 


7^iir6vroiv. 


(pavcov 


(pavovad 


(pavovv, about to 


^eiryj/u? 


£evyvvo~a 


(evyvvv, joining 


(pavovvros 


(pa.VOV(TY)S 


(pavovvros [show 


^evyvvvTos £evyvvo-r\s 


{evyvvvros 


(paVOVVTl 


(pavovcrri 


(pavovvri 


{evyvvvri 


(evyvvarj 


{evyvvvri 


(pavovvra 


(pavovaav 


(pavovvra 


^evyvvvra (^evyvvaav 


£evyvvv 


(pavwv 


(pavovad 


(pavovv 


(evyvvs 


{evyvvcra 


(evyvvv 


(pavouvres 


(pavovcrai 


(po.vovvra 


^evyvvvres £evyvvo~ai 


Cevyvvvra 


(pavovvroov 


(pavovo~S>v 


(pavovvTOiv 


^vyvvvroov £evyvvcr£>v 


(evyvvvTcov 


(pavovo~i 


<pavovo~ais 


(pavovai 


{evyvvo-i 


£evyvvaais 


(evyvvo-i 


(pCLVOVVTCLS 


(pavovaas 


(pavovvras 


(evyvvvras ^evyvvaas 


fcvyvvvTa 


(pavovvres 


(pavovaai 


(pavovvra 


£evyvvvres 


(evyvvaai 


(evyvvvra 


<P<XVOVVT€ 


(pavovcra 


(pavovvre 


Cevyvvvre 


£evyvvad 


Cevyvvvre 


(pavovvroiv 


(pavovcaiv 


(pavovvroiv. ' 


(evyvvvroiv (evyvvcraiv 


(evyvvvTotv. 



Remark. All participles in -eis are declined like XeupSels (see § 76, V.) ; all 
participles in -us, like Scikvvs (see § 76, III.) ; all participles in -as, like <rrds (see 
§ 76, VIII.); the Pres. Fut. and second Aor. Part. Active, like Xnrdv (§ 76, 
XII.) ; the Fut. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs, like o-irepu,v (§ 76, XII). 



§ 78. II. Adjectives of tivo Endings. 

Adjectives in -os of two endings are declined like dya^oV, 
except that they have no separate form for the feminine, the 
same form being used for the masculine and feminine. 



100 ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. [$ 78. 

I. -o s, -ov] 6 7] dXoyos, rb dXoyov, irrational. 

To this class belong, 

(a) A few simple adjectives without particular derivative endings, e. g. 6 t) 
fidpfiapos, not Greek ; Xafipos, vehement ; ^fiepos, gentle ; XoiSopos, calumniating ; 
ri&a<r6s, mild; xepcos, unfruitful; tJovxos, silent; Sdiravos, extravagant; tcoXos, 



(h^Most simple adjectives with the derivative-endings -ios and -eios, and 
-tjxos, e. g. 6 t) crooT-fipLos, saving ; 6 i) fiaoriXeios, regal; 6 i) yvcopi^os, recognizable ; 

(c) All compounds, e. g. 6 t) dXoyos, rb dXoyov, irrational; 6 i) apyos (instead 
of azpyos), inactive (but apyos, -t), -6v, bright) ; 6 t) TrdyitaXos, very fair (but naXos, 
•?), -6v) ; 6 i) rraXXevKos, very white (but Xevnos, -f), -6v) ; freoTrvevarros, -ov, divinely 
inspired (but TruevorSs, -t), -6v) ; adjectives compounded with adjectives in 
-k6s, which then become Proparoxytones, e. g. 6 i) xpevSarriKos, not pure Attic, 
but ('AttlkSs, -i], -6v) 6 7] (XKroirepaiKos (but UepcriKSs, -r), -6v). 

Exceptions are adjectives derived from compound verbs with the deriva- 
tive-endings -k6s, which remain Oxytones; those in -t4os, which remain 
Paroxytones, e. g. iiriSeLKTiK6s, -f), -6v, from iiriSeUvvfjn ; those in -r 6 s vary 
between two and three endings, e. g. aveicrSs, -i), -6v (from aj/e'xco), and av€Kr6s, 
-6v, see Lobeck, ad S. Aj. 1296. Paralipp. p. 482, sq. Poppo ad Th. 2, 41, 4. 
But when compounds in -ros, -ri), -t6p, are again compounded, they have but 
two endings, and are Proparoxytones, e. g. 6 r) anaraoKevaffros. 

Remark 1. Comparatives and Superlatives have three endings, even when 
the Positive has but two, though there are some rare exceptions, e. g. airopdore- 
pos i) Xrjipis, Thu. 5, 110. SvsefifioXcbraros r) AoKpis, Id. 3, 110. 

II. -ovs, -ovv) ot) evvovs, rb evvovv, benevolent. 

Adjectives with these endings are, 

(a) Those compounded with the contracted substantives vovs and ttXovs, and 
hence in the Masc. and Pern, are declined like these, but in the Neuter like 
bffrovv (§ 47), yet the Neuter PL in -oa. does not admit contraction, consequently 
ra evvoa. On the accentuation, see § 49, 3. 

Rem. 2. Attic waiters sometimes omit the contraction in the PL, e. g. kcuco- 
v6ois X. Cy. 8. 2, 1. Kpv^iv6ovs X. Ag. 11, 5. Usvooi X. H. 2. 1, 2. 

(b) Such as are compounded with the substantive tvovs, e. g. 6 r) 7toXvttovs, 
rb ttoXvttovu, and are inflected like it, but in the Ace. Sing., even as OlUirovs 
[§ 71, B. (b)], are partly of the contract second Dec. and partly of the third, 
e. g. Gen. iroXvirodos and ■koXvttov ; Ace. TroXviroh'a and ttoXvitow, etc. 

Rem. 3. In several adjectives of this kind, e. g. dirovs, fipadvirovs, 8'nrovs, 
avnrTOTrovs, the inflection does not follow the second Dec. 

III. -co s, -co v ; ot) 'IXecos, rb 'iXecov, compassionate. 

Adjectives of these endings are like the Attic second Dec. (§48). 

Rem. 4. The Ace. commonly ends in -cov, but in a number of compound 
words, it ends in -co (§ 48, Rem. 1 ), e. g. &£ioxpew, avdirXzco, dynpeo (in r»&pect to 
the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7), iTriirXeco, viripxpw. 

Rem. 5. There are three endings to the simple adjective: — 

TlXeoos, TtXea, irXecov, full. Gen. TrXeco, rrXeas, irXeoo, PL irXioo, 7rXeai, rrXea] the 
compounds are either of two endings, e. g. 6 t) audwXecos, rb avdirXeoov, PL ot at 
eKirXeq) (nr-n-els eicirXeoo X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. e/c7rAe« rpdirefat X. Hier. 1, 18), ra eKirXeco 
X. Cy. 3, 1, 28. 1, 6, 7, and even the Nom. PL irx4a>, of the simple adjective 
is not seldom used for the Masc. and Pern., or they have (yet more seldom) 



$ 78.] ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 101 

three endings, e. g. avajrXeus, avairX4a (PL Phaedon 83, d.), avairXtuv. Eur. 
Ale. 730, has irx4ov, after the example of Homer, as Neuter Sing. So like* 
wise compounds, seldom in the Sing., e. g. to e/xirXeov, Soph., oftener in the 
PL, e. g. efiirXeoi PI. Rp. 6. 505, c. and very frequently in the Neuter, e. g. 
€«7rAea X. Cy. 6. 2, 7, and 8. TrepiirXea 6. 2, 33. Also from 'iXecvs, Plato Phaedon 
95. a. has 'iXea as Neut. PI. 

Rem. 6. 'O 7] aws, to guv, salvus, is formed from the old word 2AOS by 
contraction. In addition to the Nom. aus, croov, this word forms only the Ace. 
Sing, cruv, like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Ace. oruov. The form <ra 
(from crda), occurs as Fern. Sing, in Eurip. Fr. 629. (Dind.) and as Neut. PL in 
Plat. Critias, 111, c. in the best MSS. The PL consists of forms from cus of 
the second Dec. and of forms from the lengthened co-os, namely : — 

PL N. ol at aus (from crues), and ol auoi, at crcocu, N. aua, rarely aa. 
A. tovs Tas o~us (from awas), and tovs o'uovs, N. o~ua, rarely aa. 

The Singular forms of auos are very rare in the Attic writers, e. g. auos, X. 
An. 3. 1, 32. 

Rem. 7. The compounds of ic4pas and y4xus are partly like the Attic 
second Dec, partly like the third Dec, e. g. 6 t) xp v coK€pus, t5 xp^^Kspuv, 
Gen. xpucro/cepa) and xpvcoicepaTos ; 6 t) (piXoyeXus, to <pi?\.6yzXuv, Gen. cpiXdyeXu 
and <piXoy4xuTos ; fiovicepoos, Gen. fiovKepu and fiovKep&Tos, so evuepus. The 
adjective Svs4pus follows the third Dec only, e. g. Svs4puros, etc. Forms like 
the Common second Dec. originate from forms of the Attic second Dec, e. g. 
SiKepov, vfticepoi, &Kepa. On the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7. 

IV. -uv; -ov\ N. o t) adoeppuv, to aucppov, prudent, 

G. tov ttjs tov aucppovos (according to § 55, 1). 

Rem. 8. Erom 6 r) ir luv, fat, comes also the Eem. form irleipa, even in prose 
writers; so also irp6<ppaaaa from 5 r) Tvp6<ppuv, occurs in the poets. 

Rem. 9. Here belong, also, the Comparatives in -uv, -ov, -iuv, -Tov ; but in 
respect to the declension of these it is to be noted, that, after the rejection of 
v, they are contracted in the Ace Sing., and in the Nom., Ace, and Voc PL 
See the Paradigms, § 79. In the Attic writers, the uncontracted forms in -ova, 
-oves, -ovas, frequently occur, e. g. /xd£ova, eXaTTOva, KaXXiova, iXaTTOves, 
Kanloves, [xei&ves, fieXTioves, irXeioves, fJTTOvas, fieXTlovas, iXaTTOvas, X. Cy. 5. 2, 
36. 7. 5, 83. 2. 1, 23. 2. 1, 13. 5. 2, 36. Hell. 6. 5, 52. Cy. 7. 5, 70. On the accen- 
tuation, see § 65, 5. 

V. -7] s, -e s ; X. 6 r) aXr)&r)s, to aXr)&4s, true, 

G. tov ttjs tov aXr]&4os, aXrj&ovs (§ 59). 

On the contraction of -4a into -a (instead of -rj), where a vowel precedes, see 
§ 59, Rem. 1. 

Rem. 10. Compounds in -4tt)s (from 4tos, Gen. 4tovs), are either of two 
endings, C g. iropeiav x^er}?, PI- Ep- 10. 615, a. ircpi6^u Trj X'^^TeT, Phaed. 249, 
a,, or they take a particular Eem. form, namely, -4tis, Gen. -4tioos, e. g. 

€TVt4t7)S, F. e7rT6TiS ; TpiaKOVTOVKl^OiV 0"KOV^(OV, Th. 1, 87. 

Rem. 11. Simple adjectives in -r\s are Oxy tones, except irXi)pris, irXrjpes, 
full. On the accentuation of the Voc. and of the Neuter, see § 65, 5, and on 
the accentuation of the Gen. PL § 59, Rem. 4. 

VI. -7J v, -e " ; N. 6 r) appyv, to appev 

G. tov tt)s tov appevos (§ 55, 1). No other word like this. 

VII. -up, -op) N. o 7) aTrdTup, to anaTop, fatherless, 

G. tov tt)s tov airaTopos (§ 55, 1). In like manner only 
apAyrup, 'dp.7\T0p. 

9# 



102 



PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 



[H9 



VIII. -is, -i; (a) N. 6 7) VSpis, to ?fyn, knowing, 

G. rov ttjs rod idpios (§ 63, Eem. 5). 

In like manner, only vr)o~Tis, temperate, and rp6<pis, nourished. In addition to 
the form in -ios, these adjectives have another in -i$os, but more rare, and only 
poetic, e. g. iSptSa, 'ffipides. 

(b) N. 6 7) evxapis, to 6u%opt, agreeable, 
, G. rod rrjs rov evxapiTos. 

Here belong the compounds of %«/"*> naTpis, eAms, <pp6vris, which are 
declined like the simples, e. g. eveXiris, eve\iri, Gen. eveKiridos ; <pi\6irarpis, Gen. 
(piKoirdrpiSos ; the Ace. ends according to § 53, 3, in -tz/, e. g. efetoror, €v"x a P lv .i 
but compounds of 7roAis, when they refer to persons, are inflected in the Attic 
dialect in -i5os, e. g. <f>i\6iro\is, Gen. -idos, yet in tb3 Ace, <pi\6noXiv and -i5a; 
still, as epithets of cities, etc., they are inflected like ir6\is, e. g. /caAAiVoAts, 
SuccuSiroMs, etc., Gen. /caAA(7rJAecos-, etc. 

IX. -vs, -u ; (a) N. 6 t) &8cucpvs, to tidaicpv, tearless. 

So compounds of Mnpv ; yet these inflect only the Ace. Sing, like the third 
Dec, e. g. &daKpvv, Neut. frdaupv. The other Cases are supplied by addupvTos, 
-ov, Gen. -ov, according to the second Dec. 

(b) N. 5 7] dtirrixvs, to SnT^x", tlV0 e ^ s l° n 9i 

G. TOV TTJS TOV diTTTJX^OS. 

Here belong the compounds of irrjxvs ; the declension is like yXvKvs, j\vk6 
(§§ 76, II. and 77), except that the Neuter PI. in -eo is. contracted into -??, like 
&<rTr], e. g. 8nrf)xV' 

X -o v s, -o v 5 N. 6 77 /jLovSdovs, to /xovSSov, one-toothed, 

G. TOV TTJS TOV [X0J/6d0VT0S. 

So the remaining compounds of ddovs. Por the Dec, see § 54 (d). 



79. Paradigms. 



S.N. 


epdo^os 


ivfio^ov 


dlirovs 


Siirovv 


G. 


eV5o'|ou 


£v8o£ov 


Siirodos 




D. 


iydd^ca 


ev5o£<y 


S'nrodi 




A. 


evdo^ov 


evdo£ov 


8lirob*a and Siirovv 


hlirovv 


V. 

P.N. 


ev&o^e 


evSo^ov 


SlTTOV 


8'nrovv 


evdo^oi 


evdo£a 


SiVoSes 


Siiroda 


G. 


4vd6^wu 


evdofav 


SnrSScav 




D. 


£pd6£ois 


£vdo£ois 


8l7TO(TZ 




A. 


4v56£ovs 


ev8o£ovs 


Sirrodas 


Sl-rroda 


V. 


ez/So|oj 


«/5o|a 


SiVoSes 


SiTroda 


Dual. 


ivSo^ca 


ivdo^ca 


d'nrotie 






iv86£oiv 


£i>5o£oiv. 


tinrSSoiv- 



$79.] 



PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 



103 



S.N. 


evTr\(o-os)ovs £vtt\(o-ov)ovv 


'iXeas 


'iXeoov 


G. 


evirXov 




'IXeca 


D. 


evir\<a 




'iXeca 


A. 


evirXovv 




't?<£cav 


Y. 


doubtful 


YXecas 


IXewv 


P.N. 


eZirXoi evirXoa 


thecp 


'IXeu 


G. 


evirXcov 




XXecav 


D. 


eihrXois 




iXecvs 


A. 


evirXovs evirXoa 


"Xeas 


"Xeca 


V. 


evwXoi evirXoa 


'IXeco 


iXea 


Dual. 


evirXca 




'iXeco 




evirXoiv. 




'iXecpv. 


S.N. 


evSaifiwv £v§cuij.ov 


eX&tav 


ex&iov 


[j.eifav fJ-^C 0J/ 


G. 


evSatfj.oi'os 


tx& 


ovos 


fielfavos 


D. 


evfiaifAOVi 


i X S> 


OVl 


fj.ei£ovi 


A. 


evdai/xova evZaip-ov 


eX&i-ova-ib. 


ex^iov 


fxei^ova p-eifa ^C ou 


V. 


evSai/xov 


fc& 


ov 


fj.e?(ov 


P.N. 


evdaipoves evdalfj.ova 


ex&ioves 


eX^i-ova 


(j.e((oves [j.ei(ova 




. 


ix&iovs 


ex&io 


fiei^ovs H-^C 00 


G. 


evo*aifx6vo}V 


iX& 


ovcov 


fxei^ovcav 


D. 


evdai,uoai(v) 


i x M 


ocri(v) 


lxei(o<ri(v) 


A. 


evdaifj-ovas evdalfxova 


ex&lovas 


ex&iova 


/j.el£ovas fxet£ova 






ex&Lovs 


e'x^toj 


fxetfyvs !**'<■& 


Y 


evSai/xoves evoaifiova 


like the IS! 


ominative. 


like the Nominative. 


Dual. 


evdalfj-ove 


i X & 


ove 


f/.ei^ov€ 




evdaipSvoiv. 


&& 


i>vow~ 


fj.ei£6voiv. 


S.N. 


a\7]S-f)S aXrj^es 


vyir\s 


vyies 


G. 


a\r]&(e-os)ovs 


i 


c jyi(e-os)ovs 


D. 


a\7]&(4-'i)e? 


i 


'jyi(e-'i)e? 


A. 


aXrj^(e-o.)v aX-qbes 


vyi (e-a) 


a 2 vyies 


V. 


aXrj&es 


X 


jyies 


P.N. 


a\7]2r(e-es)e7s aX7]^(e-a)r] 


vyi(e-es)e7 


s vyi(4-a.)a 2 


G. 


aXr)5(e-<ov)a>v x 


i 


)yi(e-ei)v)a>v 


D. 


aX7i&ecn.(v) 


i 


)yieo~i{v) 


A. 


a\7}^( e-as)e?s aXriS( e-a)rj 


vyi(e-as)e'i 


s vyi(e-a)a 


V. 


like the Nominative. 


like t 


he Nominative. 


Dual. 


a\7i&(e-e)7) 


i 


>yi{e-e)ri 




aA7i&(e-oiv)o?v. 


i 


ryi{e-oiv)6iv. 


S.N. 
• G. 


evxapis zvX a P l 
evx&pLTOs 


airdrcop 

< 


airarop 
nrdropos 


D. 


evxo-piTL 


i 


nraropi 


A. 


ebxdpira and evxdpiv evxo.pi 


airdropa 


dirarop 


Y. 


evxapi 


I 


iirarop 


P.N. 


evxapires ebxdpira 


airdropes 


airdropa 


G. 


evxapircov 


c 


VKO-TOpOiV 


D. 


elxo-pici. 




nrdropai 


A. 


evxdpiras ebxdpira 


airdropas 


airaropa 


V. 


• evxo.pt.Tes ebxdpira 
evx&piT€ 


airdropes 


anaropa 


Dual. 


c 


iirdrope 




eiixapLTi 


HV 

>0. Rem. 4. 


c 


iirar6poiv. 


1 but/i 


VVT)S4-WV = 0~VV7)&Oi)V, § f 


2 §59, Pern. 1. , 



104 ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. [$ 8( 

§ 80. III. Adjectives of one Ending, 

Adjectives of one ending have no separate form for the Neu 
ter, partly because then meaning is of such a nature that the} 
generally occur in connection with persons, and partly because 
their formation admits of no separate neuter form. In poetry. 
however, these adjectives sometimes occur in those Cases in 
which the Neut. form is like that of the Masc. and Fern., i. e 
in the Gen. and Dat, even in connection with neuter substan- 
tives, e. g. fiavidaLV Xvcrcnjixacriv, Eur. Or. 264. kv irivrfri crw/xan, la 
El. 375. They very seldom take a separate form for the Neut, 
e. g. hrr]kv<$ 3 6 7r?JXvSa eSvea, Her. 8, 73 ; a derivative adjective is 
commonly used, where the neuter is to be denoted, 

Endings. 
I. -as, Gen. -ou; o fxovtas, Gen. fioyiov, single (Paroxytone). 
II. -as, Gen. -avros: or) andfxas y Gen. -amos, unwearied (Paroxytone). 

III. -dr, Gen. -dSos: o t) cpvyds, Gen. <pvyd8os, fugitive (Oxytone). 

IV. -ap, Gen. -apos : only ^to/cap, though the Pern, form ^ua/catpais sometimes 
found. 

V. -7j s, Gen. -o v : 6 i^eAovr^s, Gen. i&eAovrov, voluntary. 

Some of these adjectives take, in connection with Pem. substantives, a sepa- 
rate Pem. form in -is (Gen. -ilos), e. g. evcairr)s, Pem. warns, fair-looking. They 
are Paroxytones, except e&eAovr7]s, e/coi/r^s, and vfSpio~Ti]s. 

VI. -77s, Gen. -titos: 6 7) apyfjs, Gen. apyrjros, white. 

So all compounds in -frvris, -tififc, -jS^tjs, -tAtjs, and -k/x^s, and some simple 
adjectives, e.g. yvfiuijs, naked; x e pfc> needy; irevTjs, poor ; Tv\dvr\s, wandering, 
etc. 

VII. -t\v, Gen. -rjvos : S 7) anrrfa Gen. fotTrivos, unfeathered. In like manner 
no other. 

VIII. -d>s, Gen. -&ros: 07) ayv&s, Gen. ayvSrros, unknown. 

So all compounds in -Ppdbs, -yvas, and -xp^>s, and also airTc&s, firm. 

IX. -is, Gen. -idos : 6 7) avaAias, Gen. avaAKidos, poioerless. 

These adjectives after the omission of a feminine substantive to which they 
belong, are, like those in -as, -ados, e. g. r) 'EAAas (sc. 777), used as substantives, 
e. g. 7) Trarpis (sc. 777), fatherland. 

X. -vs, Gen. -iidos: 67) vctjAvs, Gen. ve^Avdos, one lately come. 
In like manner only a few other compounds. 



$ 81 1 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 105 

XI. -£, Gen. -yos, -kos, -xos : 6 r) ap-ira^ Gen. -ayos, rapacious. 
6 7] 7}At£, " -i/cos, equal. 
6 r) /jL&vii!-, " -i»x os > one-hoofed. 

XII, -i^, Gen. -7T os : 6 r? afyt^j Gen. -iiros, high. 

Xm. Such as end in an unchanged substantive, e. g. forcus, childless ; [xaKp6- 
X* l P> long-handed; avrox^ip, done with one's own hand; /xaKpaieav, long-lived; 
uaKpavxyv, long-necked ; AevKao-n-is, having a white shield. The declension of such 
adjectives is like that of the substantives, e. g. /xaKpavx^os. On the compounds 
of irovs, however, comp. § 78, II. (b). 

§ 81. Comparison of Adjectives. 

1. The quality expressed by an adjective may belong to 
an object in different degrees : — 

(a) When the quality belongs to one object in a higher 
degree than to another, the form is called the Comparative, 
e. g. Plato was more learned than Xenophon. 

(b) "When the quality in the highest degree belongs to an 
object, the form is called the Superlative, e. g. Plato was 
the most learned of the disciples of Socrates. 

(c) The form of the adjective which expresses its simple 
meaning without any comparison, is called the Positive, 
e. g. Plato was learned. 

2. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of com- 
parison ; the participle does not admit it, except in a few 
rare cases, where the participle has the meaning of an 
adjective, e. g. ippcofjuivos, -e<xrepo?, -eararo^. 

3. The Greek has two classes of terminations for the 
Comparative and Superlative. The first, and much the 
most common, is -repos, -re pa, -repov, for the Compara- 
tive, and -tcltos, -toltt], -tcctov, for the Superlative; the 
second is -(t~)o)v, -(l)ov, or -cov, -ov, for the Comparative, 
and - (l) 0-T09, - (I) crrr), - (c) <ttov, for the Superlative. The 
l is the union-vowel. 

4. The first class of terminations is appended to the stem 
of the adjective by the connecting syllables o (&>), at, t?, e?; 
hence the general rule : In most adjectives, the usual end- 
ings are appended to the stem by means of the connecting 
syllable. 



106 ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [§82. 

Eemaek. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
the Greek, like the Latin, can prefix fiaWov (magis) and ixd\i<rra (maxime) to 
the Positive. This periphrasis is necessary in all adjectives, which, for the sake 
of euphony, have no Comparative form. 

§ 82. A. First Form of Comparison. 

Comparative, -repos, -rep a, -rcpov; 
Superlative, -raro?, -rar^, -retro v. 
These endings are appended to the stem of the adjective ; 
the stem is found by rejecting os in the Nom. of the second 
Dec, and the same syllable in the Gen. of the third Dec. 
I. Adjectives in -os, -rj (-a), -ov. 

(a) Most adjectives of this class annex the above endings to 
the stem by means of the union -vowel oorw; the union- vowel 
is o, when a syllable long by nature or by position ($ 27, 3), pre- 
cedes, but (o, when a short syllable precedes, — w being then 
used to prevent the concurrence of too many short syllables, 
e. g. 

KOv(f>-os, light, Com. Kovcp-6-Tepos, Sup. Kovcp-S-raros, -77, -o^, 

Icrxvp-Ss, strong, " Icrxvp-o-repos, " l<Txvp-6-Taros, 

\eirr-6sf thin, " X^irT-6-repos, " \eKT-6-Ta.Tos y 

<r<podp-6s, vehement, " crcpoSp-S-repos, " acpo^p-S-raros, 

triKp-Ss, bitter, " iriKp-S-repos, " irtKp-6-raTos, 

(TO(p-6s, Wise, " ffO<p-(»)-T€pOS) " GO(p-Ct)-TaTOS, 

t%vp-6s, firm, " ixvp-ca-repos, " ixvp-d-raros, 

tig-os, worthy, " agi-d-repos, " agi-cti-raros. 

Remakk 1. A mute and liquid here always make a syllable long by posi- 
tion, though the Attic poets, on account of the verse, sometimes consider such 
syllable as short, e. g. euTe/cvdjroros from eure/ews, Eur. Hec. 579. 618. (Pors.), 
Sus7roT^tcoTepa, Id. Ph. 1367. 

(b) Contracts in -cos — ~ov<s and -oos = -ovs are contracted also 
it the forms of Comparison ; the first contract e and w the union- 
vowel into o) ; the last assume the union-syllable es and contract 
in with the preceding o, e. g. 

7rop(pvp-eos = iropcpvp-ovs air\-6os = cnrA-oSs 

irop(pvp-e<&Tepos = iropcpvp-cv-repos airXo-ia-repos = anA-ovs-repos 

irop<pvp-ea>TaTos = Tropcpvp-d-raros airXo-^ff-raros = airX-ova-raTOs. 

Here belong also contracts of two endings in -ovs and -ovv, e. g. evv-oos=* 
iftv-ovs, Neut. evi/-oou = evv^ovv, Com. ei>vo-eo~-Tepo$ = ew-ovs-repos, Sup. ewo* 
sa-raros = : ^vv-ova-Taros. 



$ 82.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. 107 

Eem. 2. Adjectives in -oos take also the uncontracted forms of the Compara- 
tive and Superlative in -odrepos, -ocararos, e. g. evirj/odoTepoi, X. E. Equ. 1, 10. 
<ei>xpod!>Tepos, X. 0. 10, 11. 

(c) The following adjectives in -atos: yepaios, old; 7raAat- 
os, ancient; 7repatos, on the other side; a-yoAaios, at leisure, 
assume -repos and -raros without a union-vowel, e. g. 

yepcu-Js, Com. yepal-repos, Sup. yepat-raros, 

iraKai-os, " iraAai-repos, " Trakai-raTOS. 

Eem. 3. IT a A at (J s and <rxo\a?os .have also the usual forms of Compari- 
son; iraAaiSjepos, (rxoAcuorepos, so also yepadn epos, Antiph. 4, p. 125, 6. 

(d) The following adjectives in -os: cvStos, calm; fjo-vxos, 
quiet; tStos, peculiar; to-os, equal; ixicros, middle; opSpcos, 
early ; oxf/tos, late; 7rapa7r\r}(rios } similar; and 7rpwtos, m £/^e 
morning, assume the union-syllable at, the Comparative and 
Superlative thus becoming like the preceding words in -atos, 
e.g. 

fiicr-os, Com. fiev-al-repos, Sup. /xecr-ai-TaTos, 

ffii-os, " Idi-al-repos, " i'St;at-TaTos. 

Eem. 4. Sometimes also the common form is found, e. g. riavx^repos, 
yavx&TaTos ; (piXasrepos, (piXccraros are the usual forms in the Attic writers. 
Here belong also the adverbial forms Trpcoiairepov, irpwialreTa, from irpwl'os ; thus 
in Plato; likewise Trpcolrepoy and rrpatrara; thus always, as it seems, in Thu. 
(Popp. ad 7, 19, 1), also in Xen. Anab. 3. 4, 1. irpuirepov according to the best 
MSS. (on the contrary irpwiairaTa, Cy. 8. 8, 9). The adjective <pl\os has 
three forms: <pi\(t>r€pos seldom (e. g. Xen. C. 3. 11, 18.), and (piXcoraros, 
ipiXa'nepos seldom in prose (e. g. Xen. An. 1. 9, 29, though one good Ms. lias 
<pi\d)Tepov), and <pi\airaros seldom in prose (e.g. Xen. H. 7.3, 8.), <pl\repos 
poetic, and <pi\ra.Tos very frequent ; the Comparative is usually expressed by 
fmXXov (fn\os. In addition to tbese three forms, also the Superlative <p(AurTos 
(as in Homer, the Comparative (piXlwv) is found in Attic poetry. 

Eem. 5. The two adjectives, fieo-os, middle, and veos, young, have a special 
Superlative form, pLeaaros, vearos', but this is in use only when a series 
of objects is to be made prominent, fietraros denoting- the very middle of the 
series, and viaros the last or most remote, whereas /xeffairaros expresses the 
idea of the middle in general, and vetibraTos retains tire primary signification 
of the adjective, young, new. In prose, viaros is used only in reference to the 
tones of music [vio.ros <p&6yyos) ; and then the Feminine is contracted, u^r-n, 
the lowest line or string. 

(e) Two adjectives in -os: ippw/xevos, strong, and a/cparos, 
unmixed, append the union-syllable £s to the stem, e g. ippw/w 



108 ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OF COMPARISON. [$82. 

ear-repos, eppco/xev-ecr-raros, aKpaT-ea-repos, aKpar-eV-raros. So also 
atSotos has aiSot-ecr-raros in the superlative. 

Rem. 6. Further, the adjectives, & <p fro vos, rich; o"irovdalos, zealous; and 
a'ff/j.evos, glad, sometimes take the above form, as a<pfrov4o-Tepos, -to-rctros, 
together with the common form, -d/repos, -ojraros. From &a-fj.evos is formed 
ko~/j.evurrepos, and the adverbial neuter, ao'/xevalrara and aa^v-^a-raTa. — Several 
other adjectives also have this formation, yet for the most part only in poetry, 
e.g. evfapos, unmixed (of wine) ; ridvfios, sweet; iirlireSos, flat (eirnre8eo~Tepos, 
X. H. 7. 4, 13), and all contracts in -ovs' } comp. (b). The forms in -dcrepos, 
-eo-raros, belong properly to adjectives in -tjs and -a>v. 

(f) The following adjectives in -09: XdXos, talkative; jxovo- 
<}>dyos, eating alone ; 6 \j/ o<£ ay 05, dainty ; and t? r (o x 6 9, poor, 
drop 09, and append the syllable 19, e. g. AaA-09, Com. XaX-ur- 
repos, Sup. AaA-to--raro9 ; 7rro)^o9 has also Sup. 7rTO)^oraro9. 

Rem. 7. These endings properly belong to adjectives in -rjs, Gen. -ov. 

II. Adjectives in -779, Gen. -ov, and \f/ev$r}<;, -£<s, Gen. -eo9, drop 
-979, and append the syllable -19, e.g. /cAe^r-^ (Gen. -ov), thievish, 

Com. KXe7TT-l0--T€p0S, Slip. KA€7TT-lCr-TaT0S ', J^€v8-tO--T6p09, lj/€v8-La- 
TttT09. 

Exceptions. 'TPpicrr-fis, -ov, insolent, has v^piffrSrepos, X. An. 5. 8, 3, vfipi<TT6- 
raros, X. An. 5. 8, 22. C. 1. 2, 12. From aKpar-fjs (Gen. -eos) is the Com. aicpa- 
riffrepos, to distinguish it from hupario'TaTosy No. (e). 

III. Adjectives of the third Declension. The Comparison- 
endings are appended to the stem of the adjectives, either 
directly or by inserting the syllable -€9 (also -t9). 

(1) Those in -v<s, -eta, -v, 779, -e9 (Gen. -eo9=-ou9), a;, 

-av, and the word /ia/cap, happy, append the endings of Com- 
parison directly to the pure stem, which appears in the Neuter 
form, e. g. 

jKvkvs, Neut. -v — y\vKv-repos yXvKv-Taros 

aXrjfr^s, Neut. -es — aXTifriff-repos a.Xrj&eo'-TaTos 

fx4Xas, ■ Neut. -av — /xeXav-repos fxcXdv-raros 

raXas, Neut. -av — raXav-repos raXav-raros 

fiaKap, — fiaKap-repos ftatcdp-Taros. 

Rem. 8. The adjectives rj 5 v s, raxvs, and ttoXvs are compared in -low and 
-a>v. See § 83, I. 

(2) Adjectives in -wv, -ov (Gen. -01/09), assume -e9, e. g. 

evdalfuw, Netit. €v8aif.wv, happy. 

Com. evdaiu.ov-fo'-Tepos, Sup. evSaifioveff-raros, 



$ 83.] ADJECTIVES. SECOND FORM OF COMPARISON. 109 

(3) Adjectives in -£ sometimes assume -es, sometimes -is, 
e.g. 

wprjA?!;, Gen. a<p-r]\iK-os, groiving old, apTra£, Gen. ap-rray-os, rapax, 
Com. a<prjAiK-€cr-Tepos, Com. apTray-io'-repos, 

Sup. af-nAiK-ecr-raros, Sup. apiray-iv-raros. 

(4) Adjectives in -as, -ev, whose stem ends in vt, append the 
Comparison-endings directly to the stem, the last t being 
changed into cr, and the preceding v being then dropped ($ 20, 2). 

Xapizis, -iev, Gen. x a p' l€t/T -° s > pleasant. 

Com. xa/Jiea-repos, Sup. x a p' l * <T ' TaT0S ' 

(5) The compounds of x^/ 31 * assume w, e. g. 

iirixapis, Gen. iirixapir-os, pleasant. 

Com. iirixapiT-a-repos, Sup. iirixapir w-raros. 

'AxuptfTe/jos in Homer, comes from axapir-repos ; comp. No. '4). 

$83. B. Second Form of Comparison. 

Comparative. -tW, Neut. -lov, or -<ov, Neut. -ov. 
Superlative, -to-ros, ~i<tt7], -io-tov. 

Re3Iaek 1. On the quantity of * in -iW, -iov, see § 28, 1 ; on the declension, 
$ 78, Eem. 9 ; and on the accent, § 65, 5 (a). 

This form of Comparison includes, 

I. Some adjectives in --us, which drop -v<s and append -Casv, 
etc.; this usually applies only to ^Si/s, sweet, and ra^u's, swift 
(the other form of these adjectives in -vrepos, -vraros, is some- 
times used, but not by Attic writers). Taxvs has in the 
Comparative Sacro-cov (Att. Sarroiv), Neut. $ao~o-ov (^arrov). 
Comp. $$ 21, 3, and 17, 6. TaxiW is found only among the 
later writers. Thus, 

Tjti-vs, Com. Tjd-tav, Neut. 7}5-ro^, Sup. tf8-i<rros, -tj, -ov. 

Tax-vs, " &ao~o~oov, Att. 3-cCttwv, Neut. ^ao-ow, Att. dwrroj', Sup. T{£x £ 0" ro ^ 

Rem. 2. The other adjectives in -vs, as fia&vs, deep; fiapvs, heavy ; fipa- 
Svs, slow; fipaxvs, short; yAvKvs, sweet; daffvs, thick; evpvs, wide; o!-vs, 
sharp; irpzo-fivs, old; wkvs, swift, have the form in -vr epos, -vraros (§ 82, 
III.) ; in Attic poetry, however, single examples of these adjectives are found 
with the other form, e. g. fipax^ros, Trpeafitcrros, &iaaros. 

II. The following adj ective s in -p o s : a I o- x p ° s, base ; e x & p 6 s, 
hostile; KvSpos, honorable; and oIkt p 6 s y ivr etched (but always 

10 



ilO ADJECTIVES. ANOMALOUS FORMS >DF COMPARISON. [$84, 

otKT/ooTepos in the Comparative), — the ending -pos here also 
being dropped, e. g. ato-xpos, Com. cuorx-iW, Neut ai'cr^-Zov, Sup. 

Rem. 3. O^ktkttos, KvStwi/, Kvdio-ros, are poetic. Besides this form, in -low, 
etc., which is preferred by the Attic writers, the above adjectives have also, 
though seldom, the other form in -6repos y -draros, e. g. ix^P^ TaT0S 5 Dut always, 
in prose, olnTpSraTos 



$ 84. Anomalous Forms of Comparison, 



Positive. 


Comparative. 


Superlative. 




1 aya&6s, good, 


afxeivwv, Neut. 'apzivov 


&p«7TOS 






fieXriaj/ 


PeKriGTOs 






(fieXrepos, Poet.) 


((ZeXraros, Poet.) 






Kpeicrcuyj Att. KpeirTcou 


KpOTHTTOS 






Xtpuv 


X<pffT®S 






((peprepos, Poet.) 


((pipraTOs, (pepioiis, 


Poet.) 


2. kclkSs, bad, 


Kouctwv 


KoLKicrros 






Xeipwj/ 


X*LpL(TTOS 






7j<rtr«y, Att. ^ttwj' 


Adv. nfiKiarra 




3. KaXos, beautiful, 


KaXXl&v 


K&XXl<TTO$ 




4. aXyeivSs, painful, 


aA/yeij^Tepos 


aXyeivoTouos 






aA/yiwv 


ftXyicrros 




5. /xaKpSs, long, 


jUaKjooVepos 


fiaKporaros 






(fiaao-uv, Poet.) 


fl-fjKiffTOS 




•6. fiiKpSs, small, 


fiucpSrepos 


jJUKpOTWTQS 






ixdcrcrwy, Att. iXarrruv 


iAaxi&TOS 




7. bxiyos, few, 


fieiav 


bxlyurros 




8. fxeyas, great, 


pxlfav 


[Aeyicrros 




■9. iroXvs, much, 


7rA.ei&)i/, or irXexau 


irXeiffT&s 




10. pottos, easy, 


pqoiV 


p^CTOS 




11. irtirwv, ripe, 


TTfiralrepos 


TreiraiTaros 




12. 7nW, fat, 


iriSrepos 


iriSraros. 





Remark 1 . The Superlative dpicrros (from "Ap-ns, the god of war), and the 
Comp. ap-di/ay, have particularly the idea of bravery, boldness; fieXricov, like the 
Latin melior, signifies better, in a moral sense, though by no means confined to 
that ; Xcfxav is mostly used in such phrases as X$6v &rrt, it is better, and Xyaros 
mostly in the Voc. fi> X$(rre. The poetic Superlative <p4piaros is found in 
Plato, in the exclamation 5 (pepicrre ! most worthy ! The irregular forms of 
fwcpSs, viz. ixda-crccv, iXaxicrros, express both the idea of smallness and fewness 
(bxiyos); but [xeiwv generally expresses the idea of fewness, seldom that of 
smallness; the regular forms of punpSs, viz. p.LKp6repos, -oraros, always retain 
their original idea of smallness, and also bxiyiarros that of fewness, though bxiyos 
often signifies small. 



$84.] ADJECTIVES. — ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPARISON. 1U 

Rem. 2. The use of the longer and shorter form of the Comparative 7rA.etW, 
rrAeW, should he particularly noted. The neuter irheov is more frequent than 
irXeiov, especially when it is used adverbially ; irXeovos and irXelovos, irx4ovi 
and -trXeioyi, Ace. -n-xico, irxiova, and nXe'ica, are used indiscriminately 5 PI. Tsom. 
and Ace, usually irXeiovs, also irXetoves and irXeiovas (but not irXeovs) ; irXdw 
is much more frequent than irXica : irXeiovuv and nXe'ioai are more frequent than 
•rXzovw and ttAcWi. Finally, the shortened form of the Neut. Sing. 7rAer^ 
(formed from 7rA€?op), but limited to such phrases as irXeiv r) jivpioi, should be 
mentioned as a special Atticism. 

Several adjectives, which express the idea of an order or 
series, have only the Comparative and Superlative forms, 
because, on account of their signification, 'Jiey cannot be used 
absolutely, but only in comparison. An adverb of place is 
usually the root of these forms of Comparison, e. g. 

v from irp6), irporepos (prior), irpajros (primus), first. 

( " &voi), aj/urepos (superior), avdoraros (supremus). 

( " virep), vneprepos (superior), higher, {nripTaros, Poet, vttotos (supremus). 

( " inrol), vcrrepos (posterior), later, va-raros (postremus), last. 

( " e£), €(Txotos (extremus), outermost. 

( " ttXtjctiov,- prope), {irXr\vios, Homeric), TrXncriaiTepos, or irXvcn4(rT<epos 

(proprior), nearer, TrXna-iairaros, -eararos (proximus), nearest. 
( " TTp6co)),far, Trpocrwrepos, farther, TrpcxrcbraTos, farthest. 

Rem. 3. Other adjectives in the Comparative and Superlative, which are 
also derived from adverbs, have no Positive form of the adjective, e. g. yp^a, 
quietly, 7}pep.4(TTepos, ypefxecrTaTos ; Trpovpyov, useful, 7rpovpyiaiTepos, more useful^ 
irpovpyiaiTaros. 

Rem. 4. Comparatives and Superlatives are also formed from substantives. 
Here two cases are to be distinguished : (a) when the substantive, both in form 
and signification, is the Positive from which the Comparative and Superlative 
may be formed, i. e. when the substantive can be considered as an adjective, 
e. g. SovXos, slave, SovXSrepos, more slavish; — (b) when the substantive, in 
respect to the signification, is not really the Positive, but only in respect to the 
form can be considered as the basis of the Comparative and Superlative, the 
proper Positive form having been lost, (comp. KparurTos from the Epic Kparvs, 
tXtyxicrros from the Epic iXsyxvs-) Numerous examples of the last kind may 
be found in poetry, particularly in Epic. See § 216, Rem. 2. 

Rem. 5. For the sake of greater emphasis, the Comparative and Superla- 
tive are sometimes compared, e. g. ecrxa-ros (Superb), eVxaTwrepos, icrxarcira- 
ros ; so TrpdoTiaros from irpuros. This is frequent in the Comic writers, seldom 
in Homer and the Tragedians, still more seldom in prose. 



112 



COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 



N 85. 



$ 85. Comparison of Adverbs. 

1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, when compared, have 
commonly no independent adverbial ending ; the Comparative 
is expressed by the Ace. Sing, neuter of the Comparative 
adjective, and the Superlative by the Ace. PI. neuter of the 
Superlative, e. g. 



ccxpas 


(from 


(TO(p6s) 


Com 


. (ro(pd>repov S 


up. (ToipcaTaTa 


cacpm 


( " 


cra<p7)s) 




cra<p£<rTepov 


<ra(p4(nara 


XapMTws 


( " 


Xapieis) 




Xapiecrrepov 


Xap^crara 


ev8ai/J.6v(tis 


( " 


evdalfx.coy) 




evdai/xovecTTepov 


^vSaifjLouecrTdTa 


alorxp&s 


( " 


alcrxpds) 




afoxiov 


alcrx^TO. 


TjSzws 


( " 


7)86s) 




^Slov 


TjSiOTa 


raxws 


( " 


rax^s) 




^affffov, -TTOV 


Tax^Ta. 



Remark 1. The Singular of the Comparative is used, because only two 
objects are compared, and it is affirmed that one of these is better, etc. than 
the other ; but the Plural of the Superlative, because the object compared is 
the best, etc. of many others. 

Eem. 2. But sometimes these adverbs also retain in the Comparative the 
adverbial ending of the Positive -us, e. g. xaAe7ra>Te/ws, aArj&effrepus, fxox&ypo- 
repus, aaAAiovus, especially fiei(6uus, etc. The Neuter Singular is seldom used 
in the Superlative, and belongs mostly to poetry. 

2. All original adverbs in -co, e. g. aw, Kara), e'^co, «rco, etc., 
retain the ending -co regularly in the Comparative, and almost 
uniformly in the Superlative, e. g. 



dvu, above, 
itdru, below, 



Com. dvuripu 
Karurepu 



Sup. avardro} 

KaTWTaTW. 



In like manner, most other original adverbs have the ending 
■to in the Comparative and Superlative, e. g. 



ayxov, near, 
iripa, ultra, 
tt}Aov, far, 
ends, far, 
iyyts, near, 



Com. ayxorfyo) 
irepairepca 
TTjXoTepco 
kKaaripu 
iyyvTepa) 
iyyurepov 



Sup. dyxordraf 

Sup. wanting 
rriXordru 



ZKaiTTaTOO 



iyyvrdra) and 
iyyvTara 
tyyia-ra (rarely). 



« 86, 87. 



THE PRONOUNS eyu, (TV, OV. 



113 



CHAPTER III. 



The Pronoun 



$ 86. Nature and Division of Pronouns. 

1. Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea 
of an object, but only the relation of an object to the 
speaker ; i. e. they show whether the object is the speaker 
himself (the first person), or the person or thing addressed 
(the second person), or the person or thing spoken of (the 
third person), e. g. I (the teacher) give to thee (the scholar) 
it (the book). 

2. All pronouns are divided into five principal classes : 
(1) Personal, (2) Demonstrative, (3) Relative, (4) Interrog- 
ative, (5) Indefinite Pronouns. Pronouns are again di- 
vided, according to their signification and form, into (a) 
Substantive, (b) Adjective, and (c) Adverbial Pronouns, 
e. g. iycb ravra iTroirjcra) (a) I, thou, he, she, it; (b) my, thy, 
his; (c) here, there, thus. 



I. Personal Pronouns. 

A. Substantive Personal Pronouns. 

$ 87. The simple cyto, ego, o-v, tu, ov, sui. 



Singular. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


/jlov (fJ.ov), ifiov, of me 
fjLoi (fioi), i/xoi, to me 
fi4 {fie), e>e, me 


(TV, thou 

<rov (aov), of thee 
<roi (<roi), to thee 
o~4 (ere), thee 


wanting 

ov (ov), of himself , etc. 
61 (oi), to himself, etc. 
6(4), himself, etc. 


Dual. 


N.A. 
G.D. 


vd>, we both, us both 
vyv, of us both, to us 
both 


<r<pw, you both 
<T(pqu, of you both, 
to you both 


crepcae, Acc. (Poet.), them both 
(TtyoSiv (o-<pct)'Lv), of them both, 
to them both 


Plural. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


^eTs, we 

71/jLCOV, of us 

r}jxiu, to us 
rifius, us 


vfi^s, ye (u) 
i/xcoi/, of you (v) 
vfuv, to you (v) 
vfxtis, you (0) 


<r<pets, Neut. <T(pia (Poet.), (<T(f>ea) 
a<pa>v, of them [they 
ff<pi(Ti(v) (<r<picn[y]), to them 
<r<pa.s, Neut. c^ea (<r</>ea), them. 



10* 



114 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS ifJLOLVTOV, aeaVTOV, ZdVTOV. [§ 88. 

Remark 1. The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis, 
without any mark of accent. Comp. §§ 33 (b), and 35, 3. On the accentuation 
and use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see § 302, Rem. 3. The Vocative 
is here, as in the following paradigms, omitted, because, when it occurs, it is 
always like the Nominative. 

Rem. 2. The Gen. Sing, of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer, 
often has, among the Attic poets, also the forms i/xeSrev, <r 4&ev, e'&ej/; these 
forms always retain their accent, except when cd-ey is not used as a reflexive 
(sui), but as a pronoun of the third person (ejus). Comp. § 35, 3 (b). 

Rem. 3. The Ace. Sing, and PI. of ov has in Attic poetry also the form 
vxv \viv) signifying him, her, it, PI. them, e. g. Soph. OR. 868. 1331, instead of 
avrovs and auras. See the Dialects, § 217. 

Rem. 4. The oblique Cases of ripeis and fytets, when not emphatic, some- 
times undergo a certain inclination among the poets, being written in the fol- 
lowing manner: tj/xcou vfuav, Vi/aIu vfj.lv, or Jjjxiv vfxiv; still, this inclination 
cannot take place if a Paroxytone precedes. The shorter form of the pronoun 
of the third Pers. is used in the Dat. and Ace. PI. by the poets (also by the 
Attic writers), e. g. Dat. c<pi (or <r<plv) instead* of atyiff^v)*, to them, Ace. <r<p4 
instead of <rcpas, them. Both forms, a<pl and <r<piv, though sellom, are used by 
the poets as the Dat. Sing. ; the form o~<pi, on the contrary, is used much more 
frequently as the Ace. Sing, instead of avrov, -i\v, -6, also as reflexive instead 
of havr6v. 



§ 88. (b) The Reflexive Pronouns, ifxavrov, aeavrov, 

iavrov . 



Singular. 


G. 


4fxavTov, -rjs, of 


ffeavTov, -rjs, or 


kavrov, -rjs, or 




myself 


cravTov, -rjs, of thyself 


avrov, -r)s, of himself, of herself 


D. 


ifxavrcf, -rj, to 


aeavrcp, rj, or 


eavrcp, -fj, or [itself 




myself 


GavTcp, 77, to thyself 


airy, -77, to himself, to herself, to 


A. 


4fj.avr6u, -r\v, 


aeavTov, -r)v, or 


eavruv, -i)v, -6, or [itself 




myself 


cavr6v, -t]v, thyself 


avrov, -i)v, -6, himself, herself, 


Plural. 


G. 


7]fx&v avr&v, of 


vjxwv avT&v, of your- 


kavr&v or avroov, or 




ourselves 


selves 


C(pS>v avTcov, of themselves 


D. 


Tjfuv avro7s, -a?s, 


i>fj.?i/ avrols, -a?s, to 


eavTo?s -a?s, or avrois -a?s, or 




to ourselves 


yourselves 


ar<pi<riv avro7s -ais, to themselves 


A. 


yjjxas avrovs, -as, 


v/xas avrovs, -As, 


kavrovs, -as, -a, or avrovs, -as, 




ourselves 


yourselves 


-a, or 
crcpas avrovs, -ds, ffepea avrd, 








themselves. 



§§ 89-91.] RECIPROCAL AND DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 115 



§ 89. (c) Reciprocal Pronouns. 

To express reciprocal relation, the Greek has a special pro- 
nominal form, which is made by the coalescence of aXkoi aXXwv, 
aXXot aAAot?, aAAoi a\\ov$, into one word. From the nature of 
the relation, this word can have no Singular. 



Plural Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 



a\Xi)Xcov, of one another 
aWr)\ois, -ais, -ois 
aWr)Xovs, -as, -a 



Dual ci.WtiA.ou/, -cuv, -oiv 
ahXi)Xoiv, -ouv, -oiv 
iAAtjAcw, -a, -co. 



§ 90. B. Adjective Personal Pronouns. 

Personal pronouns, having the form, of adjectives, are called 
Possessive pronouns, since they express possession. They are 
formed from the Genitive of substantive personal pronouns: — 

i/j.6s, -i), -6v, mens, -a, -urn, from i/xov; ^ueVepos, -repa, -Tepov, noster, -tra, -trwm, 

from r)p.cov ; 
tros, -r), -6v, tuus, -a, -urn, from (rod : v/xirepos, -repa, -Tepov, vester, -tra, -trum, 

from vjxcov ; * 

o-cpirepos, -repd, -Tepov, suus, -a, -urn, from <r<pwv (used in speaking of many ; 

when single persons or things are spoken of, Att. prose always uses the 

Gen. kavTov, -Tjs). The Epic form, os, H\, &V, suus, -a, -urn, also occurs in 

the Tragedians, though seldom. 



§ 91. PI. Demonstrative Pronouns. 













Singular. 










the 






hie 


haec 


hoc 


ipse 


ipsa 


ipsum 


Nbm. 


6 


V 


t6 


OVTOS 


aVTT] 


TOVTO 


clvtSs 


avTi] 


avTo 


Gen. 


rov 


rrjs 


TOV 


TOVTOV 


TaVTTJS 


TOVTOV 


avrov 


aVTTJS 


avTov 


Dat. 


rep 


T V 


TCp 


TOVTCO 


TaVTT) 


TOVTCO 


avTco 


CIVT7J 


avTcp 


Ace. 


TdV 


T7JV 


TO 


TOVTOV 


TaVT7]V 


TOVTO 


avrov 


avTTjv 


O.VTO 












Plural. 








Nom. 


ol 


al 


rd 


OVTOl 


avTcu 


TOVTCt 


ai)Toi 


avTal 


avrd 


Gen. 


TCOV 


TCOV 


TCOV 


TOVTCOV 


TOVTCOV 


TOVTCOV 


avTcov 


avTcov 


avTccv 


Dat. 


ro7s 


reus 


TOtS 


TOVTOLS 


TOLVTCtlS 


TOVTOLS 


avrois 


avTais 


avTois 


Ace. 


rovs ras 


TO. 


TOVTOVS 


TaVTOS 


TaVTCt 


avrovs 


avras 


avTa 












Dual 










N.A. 


TCx) 


(t<£) 


TCO 


TOVTCO 


(rauTd) 


TOVTCO 


ovtco 


avTcl 


avTco 


G. D. 


to?v 


raiv 


TOIV 


TOVTOIV 


TCXVTCUV 


TOVTOIV 


avTolv 


avTouv 


cxvtoIv. 



1. The pronoun ovtos is composed of the article 6, rj, t6, and the pronoun 
outos; where the article has o, co, or oi, they combine with the first syllable 
of outJs and make ov ; all other vowels of the article are absorbed by the 



116 



RELATIVE PRONOUN. 



[$92. 



first syllable of avros. Hence the first syllable of ovros ends in ov where the 
article has o, w, or 01 ; elsewhere in av. The same rule holds when avros is 
compounded with an adjective pronoun, e. g. roaovros (from roaos and avr6s). 
Examples : 6 avros == ovros, i) avrr) = avrr], rb avro = rovro ; rod avrov = 
rovrov, r?is avrr)s = ravrrjs, etc. ; SO roaos avros = roaovros, roar] avrr) — roC' 
avrr], roaov avro = roaovro, r6aov avrov = roaovrov, etc. 

2. Like 6, r), r6 is declined, o5e, rjde, ro'Se, ToDSe, T^sSe, PL o'toe, a;5e, ra5e ; 
Like ovros are declined, toctoutos, roaavrr], roaovro(v), tardus, -a, -um, roiov~ 
ros, roiavrt], roiovro(v), talis, -e, rrjXiKovros, rrjXiKavrr], rr]XiKovro{v), so great, 
so old ; it is to be noted, that the neuter Sing., besides the form in o has 
also the common form in ov ; 
Like avros is declined, £ice7vos, itce'ivr], itce?vo, he, she, it, &AAos, #AAtj, &AAo, 
alius, alia, aliud, the neuter Sing, here also ending in o. 

Remark 1. The neuter form in o seems to have rejected a 5, as may be 
inferred from the Latin, is, ea, id, ille, -a, -ud, alius, -a, -ud. — On the Dual 
forms, rd, ratv, ravra, ravraiv, see § 241, Pern. 10 (b). — Instead of iKelvos, the 
Ionic kcTvos is also used in Attic poetry ; this word occurs somewhat frequently 
in Attic prose, but always after a long vowel or diphthong ; nence Aphaeresis 
(§ 14, 5) must be assumed here, as r) ^Kelvas, PL Pp. 2. 370, a. 





Singular. 


Plural. 


: 


Nom. 


roaovros roaavrr] roaovro(v) 


roaovroi roaavrai 


roaavra 


Gen. 


roaovrov roaavrrjs roaovrov 


roaovroiv roaovruv 


roaovrcov 


Bat. 


roaovrw roaavrr] roaovrw 


roaovrois roaavrais 


roaovrois 


Ace 


roaovrov roaavrrjv roaovro(v) 


roaovrovs roaavras 


roaavra 




Dual. 






N. A. 1 roaovrca roaavra roaovru 






G. D. | roaovroiv roaavraiv roaovroiv. 





Rem. 2. The article usually coalesces by Crasis (§ 10) with avrSs and forms 
one word, viz. avros (instead of 6 avr6s, idem), avrf), ravr6, usually rav- 
r6v (instead of rb avro), r avrov, but rrjs avrrjs, ravrQ, ravrrj (to distinguish 
it from ravrrj, this), but rbv avrov, rrjv avrrjv, avro I, avrai, ravra (instead of 
ra. avrd, to distinguish it from ra\>ra, haec), but roov avrccv, ro7s avrois, etc. 



92. III. Relative Pronoun. 







Singular. 






Plural. 






Dual. 




Nom. 


OS 


•t) 


'6 


0% 


a'l 


a 


03 


a 


8> 


Gen. 


OV 


V s 
V 


ov 


wv 


&v 


&v 


oTv 


axv 


oTv 


Dat. 


V 


V 


oTs 


ah 


oTs 


OIV 


atv 


oh 


Ace. 


'6v 


r)v 





ovs 


ds 


3 


& 


•I 

a 


&. j 



4 93.1 



INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 



117 



§ 93. IV. Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns. 

The Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns are denoted 
by the same form, but are distinguished by the accent and 
position, the Indefinite being enclitic (§ 33) and placed after 
some word or words, the Interrogative being always accented 
and placed before. 

"Remark 1. When the interrogative pronouns stand in an indirect question, 
the relative o is placed before their stem, which, however (except in the case 
of osris), is not inflected, e. g. oiroios, biroaos, oirSrepos, etc. 



F Sing. N. 


r\s, some one N. Ti, some thing 


ris j quis ? ri ; quid ? 


G. 


riv6s, or rod 




rivos, or rod 


D. 


rivi, or t<£ 




rivi, or r(f 


A. 


rivd N. rl 


riva ri 


Plur. N. 


rives N. rivd and &rra 


rives riva 


G. 


TlVQoV 




rivcav 


D. 


TlO-'l(v) 




rio-i(v) 


A. 


nvds N. rivd and &rra 


rivas riva 


Dual N. A. 


rive 




rive 


G. and D. 


nvolv 




rivoiv. 


X. 


osris, whoever ^ris '6 ri 


o'irives a'lrives 


ariva, or arra 


a. 


ovrivos, or orov fjsrivos 


wvrivoov (rarely orccv) 


D. 


yrivi, or oto) rjrivi 


oTsri<ri(v) (rarely oroiffi[v] ) aTsrio-i(v) oTsri<ri(v) 


A. 


ovriva rjvriva o ri 


ovsrivas asrivas 


ariva, or arra 


Dual N. A. Strive, 


'irive, G. D. oTvrivo 


iv, aivrivoiv. 



Eem. 2. The form arra not enclitic (Ion. acro-a) is often used instead of rivd 
in connection with adjectives, e. g. Seiva arra, fu K pa. fora, or placed first, e. g. 
?)V yap Srj arra roidde, PI. Phaedon. 60, e. On the accent of wvrivwv, otvrivoiv, 
aXvnvoiv, see \ 34, Eem. 1. The shorter forms, orov, '6ru, etc. are used by the 
dramatists almost always ;" orov, '6rq> are also used by the orators ; but orwv, 
<Sto<tl{v) are very rare in prose. The negative compounds of rls, viz. o8ns, 
otiri, /j.-fjris, /j.'fjTi, no one, nothing, inflect the simple rls merely, e. g. ovrivos, 
otinves, elc. These forms are poetic ; instead of them, prose writers use ovSeis, 
M$eis; only ovn and \tfoi are used in prose jvith the adverbial meaning, in no 
respect, not at all, and in the phrase, ovn ye tin (^n ye 5^), let alone then, much 
less. 




6 f) to oe?va. some one, some thing 
rod rrjs rod Se7vos 
T<2 rrj r<2 SeTvi 
rbv rr\v ro 5e7va 



Plur. 



oi Se?yes 
rwv Seivcov 
"wanting 
robs SeTvas. 



Rem. 3. AelVa is also used indcclinably, though seldom, e. g. 



rov rep rov 



118 



CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 



1*94 



§ 94. Correlative Pronouns. 

Under Correlative Pronouns are included all those which 
express a mutual relation (correlation) to each other, so that if 
one implies a question, the other with a corresponding form 
contains the answer. 

1. This mutual relation is either a general or a definite one. The general 
correlation is expressed by risj ri; who? what? t\s, t\, some one, some thing; 
tide, ovros, he, this; 4ks?vos, that one; ovSels, no one; '6 s, who, which, etc. Here 
the forms of the correlatives do not correspond with each other, except in the 
case of ris. For example, if a question is asked 'tj tIs, the answer may be by 
t\s, 6'5e, ovros, etc. 

2. The definite correlation has four different forms, viz. the Interrogative, 
Indefinite, Demonstrative, and Relative. This fourfold correlation belongs both 
to adjective and adverbial pronouns. All the four forms come from the same 
root, but they are distinguished, partly by a different accent, partly by a differ- 
ent initial : the Interrogative begin with ir, the Indefinite have the same form, 
though with a different accent, the Demonstrative begin with t, and the 
Relative with the Spiritus Asper. The indirect interrogatives, as shown above, 
§ 93, Rem. 1 , place the relative 6 before the initial ir. 

3. Correlative adjective pronouns express relations of quantity and quality ; 
correlative adverbial pronouns, the relations of place, time, and manner, or 
condition. 



(a) Adjective Correlatives. 



Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Relat. and De- 
pend. Interrog. 


ir6cos, -rj, -ov ; 
how great? how 
much ? quan- 
tus? 


irooSs, -t), -6v, 
of a certain 
size, or number, 
aliquantus 


tocos, -7], -ov, so great, so 

much, tantus 
TocScSe, roa^de, rocrSvSe 
tocoutos, -avrr), -ovto(v) 


ocos, -t\, -ov and 

6ir6o~os, -77, -ov, 

as great, as 

much, quantus 


iro?os, -a. -ov ; 
of what kind? 
qualis 1 


ttoiSs, -a, -6v, of 
a certain kind 


to?os, -a, -ov, of such a 

kind, talis 
TOtSsde, TOiaSe, roi6vde 

TOIOVTOS, -O.VT7], -OVTo(v) 


oTos, -a, -ov and 
SiroTos. -a, -ov, 

of what kind, 
qualis 


ir7]XiK0S, -r\, -ov ; 
how great? how 
old? 


wanting 


ttjXIkos, -t], -ov, so great, so 
T7]Xik JsSe, -j)Se, -ovSe [old 
T-nXiKovros, -ai)T7), -ovto[v) 


tjaIkos, -7], -ov and 

6irr]XiKos, -7], -ov, 

as great, as old. 



Rbmaek 1. The simple forms tocos and to7os are seldom used in Attic 
prose ; tocos and toIos are found in the phrase, tolos t) to?os, PI. Phaedr. 271, 

d, and elsewhere ; tocos koI tocos (PI. ib.) ; 4k tocov. (so long time since), PI. 
Leg. 642, at end ; t6g<$ with a Comparative, corresponding to the relative '6ca>. 

e. g. Th. 8, 24. X. Cy. 1. 6, 26. Vect. 4, 32. 



195.1 



LENGTHENING OF THE PRONOUN. 



119 





(b) Adverb 


ial Correlatives. 




Interrogative. 


Indefinite. 


Demonstrative. 


Eelative. 


Indirect 
Interrog. 


irov ; where ? 


irov, somewhere, 


wanting (hie, 


ov, where. 


oirov, where. 


nbi? 


alicubi 


ibi) 


ubi 


ubi 


irfoev ; whence? 


iro&ev, from some 


wanting (hinc, 


o&ev, whence, 


diroSev, 


tinde ? 


place, alicunde 


inde) 


unde 


whence, undo, 


iro?; whither? 


7toi, to some place, 


wanting (eo) 


of, whither, 


oiroi,whither. 


quo? 


aliquo 




quo 


quo 


irore ; wAen ? 


irore, some iime, 


t6t€, then, turn 


ore, when, 


oirore, 


quando 1 


aliquando 




quum 


when, 
quando 


irrjviKa ; quo 


wanting 


TTjvi- ") hoc 


TjviKa, when. 


OTTTJULKa, 


temporis punc- 




kSSg ! ipso 
rrjui- [ tem- 


quo ipso 


when, quo 


to ? quota ho- 




tempore 


ipso tem- 


ra? 




Kavra J pore 




pore 


7TWS; AOZT? 


ircbs. some how 


ovtci)(s) Side, so 


OJS, UOW 


oirws, how 


7T7j ; wjiither ? 


irr], to some place, 


rjjde ( hither, 
ravrri \ or here 


rj, where, 


otttj. where, 


how? 


thither, in some way 


whither 


whither. 



Rem. 2. The forms to express the idea of here, there (hie, ibi), wanting in 
the Common language, are supplied by evravSa, ev&aSe, and the idea of hence, 
thence (hinc, inde), by ivfrwde, evrev&ev; ev&a and evbev in the old and poetic 
language have both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a 
relative sense, except in certain phrases, e. g. evba /xh — evSa Se, hie, illic, 
ev&ev teal evSev, hinc, illinc, and when the signification of place is changed to 
that of time, e. g. ev&a Xeyei, then he says, ev&ev, thereupon. The forms rcas, thus, 
tt}, hither, here, are poetic ; &s (instead of ovrws), is also for the most part 
poetic ; in prose, it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, e. g. /col &s> vel 
sic, ovS' (/xrjS') us, ne sic quidem, and in comparisons, ws — as, ut — sic, PI. Rp. 
7. 530, d. Prot. 326, d. ; also &>s ovu, so then, Th. 3, 37. 



$ 95. Lengthening of the Pronoun. 

Some small words are so appended to the pronouns, for the purpose of giving 
a particular turn to their signification, that they coalesce and form one word. 
They are the following : — 

(a) The enclitic ye is joined to the Personal pronouns of the first and second 
person, in order to make the person emphatic, by putting him in contrast with 
others, e. g. eyuyye, I for my part. The pronoun iya> then draws back its accent 
in the Nom. and Dat. e. g. eytoye, efiovye, efioiye, ipeye, avye. As ye can be 
joined with any other word, so also with any other pronoun, but it does not 
form one word with the pronoun, e. g. ovtos ye. 

(b) The particles 8-h (most commonly Sr}irore), and ovu, are appended to 
relatives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to oaos, in 
order to make the meaning general or indefinite, i. e. to extend it to everything 
embraced in the object denoted by the pronoun, c. g. osrisSi), osTisS-fiiroTe, Sstis- 
S-niroTovv, dsrisovu, tjtisovu, briovv, whoever it be, I know not ivho, nescio quis, qui- 
cunque (Gen. ovtivosovv or brovovv, t]stlvosovv, Dat. cfnviovv or otwovi/, etc.) ; — 
farooosSri, 6noo~osovi/, 6aos$r,iroTe. quantuscunque ; — birnXinosovv, however great, 
how old soever ; so also wsirepovv [comp. (d)]. 



120 NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [$ 96. 

(c) The suffix 5e is joined with some demonstratives for the purpose of 
strengthening their demonstrative relation, e. g. ode, rj8e, r68e ; roi6sBe ; to<t6s- 
5e ; T-nXitcSsde, from toTos, tScos, tt}\Ikos, which change their accent after Se is 
appended (§ 34, Kem. 3). 

(d) The enclitic irep is appended to all relatives, in order to strengthen the 
reference to a demonstrative, and thus to connect the relative more closely with 
its antecedent ; hence it denotes, even who, which, the very man, who, etc. e. g. 
Ssirep, H]Txep, oirep (Gen. ovirep, etc.) ; offosirep, olosirep (Gen. oaovirep, o'iovirep, etc.) j 
'6&nrep, o&euTrep. 

(e) The inseparable demonstrative r, is appended to demonstratives and some 
few adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative sense. It takes the 
acute accent (which yet, according to § 31, I., is changed into the grave in con- 
nected discourse) and absorbs every short vowel immediately preceding it, and 
also shortens the long vowels and diphthongs : — 

ovtoctt, this here (hicce, celui-ci), avriji, tovtt, 

Gen. tovtovt, rauTrjoT, Dat. tovtcqT, ravrrjt, PI. ovtoil, avratf, ravri] 

68t, ^8r, ToSr from ode ; wcu from w5e ; ovtuo-t from ovrws ; 

ivrevfrevt from ivrev&ev ; iv&afit from eV^ctSe ; vvvi from vvv ; Sevpi from Sevpo. 



CHAPTER IV. 

The Numerals . 

$ 96. Nature and Division of Numerals. 

1. Numerals express the relation of number and quantity. 
They are divided into the following classes, according to their 
signification : — 

(a) Cardinals, which express a definite number absolutely, 
and answer the question, hoiv many ? e. g. one, two, three. The 
first four Numerals and the round numbers from 200 (oWoo-ioi) 
to 10,000 (fjivpioi) and then compounds, are declined; but all the 
others are indeclinable. The thousands are expressed by 
adverbial Numerals, e. g. rptsx^ot, 3000. 

(b) Ordinals, which denote a series, and answer the question, 
which one in the series? All have the three endings of adjec- 
tives, -o?, -77, -ov, except Sevrepos, which has -o?, -a, -ov. All up 
to 19, except 2, 7, 8, end in -to? and have the accent as near 
as possible to the beginning of the word. From 20 upwards 
they end in -o-to<$. 

Remark 1. Adverbial Ordinals, which also denote a series, are expressed by 
the Neut. Sing, or PL, with or without the article, but sometimes also with tho 
adverbial ending -cos, e. g. irpurov, to irp&Tov, irpcoTa, to. irpa>Ta, irpuToos. 



$ 9G.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. 121 

(c) Numeral adverbs, which express hoiv often, or how many 
times anything has happened, and which answer the question, 
hoiv many tunes ? They are formed, except the first three, from 
the ordinals with the ending -a/as, e. g. 7revTa/as, five times 
($ 98). 

(d) Multiples, which show the number of parts of which 
a whole is composed, and answer the question, hoio many fold! 
All are compounded of 7rAo9s, and are adjectives of three end- 
ings, -oils, -r), -ovv ($$ 76, I, and 77). 

airXovs, -77, -ovv, single; SiirXovs (2), TpiirXovs (3), TeTpairXovs (4), irevTa.irb.ovs 
(5), e^airXovs (6), eirTairXovs (7), OKTairXovs (8), ivvairXovs {9), denairXovs (lOj, 
enaTOVTairXovs (100), -^LXLairKovs (1000), pLvpiaizXovs (10,000). 

Rem. 2. The adverbial Multiples in answer to the question, how many 
fold ? or into how many parts ? are formed from the Cardinals with the ending 
-%a or -xv and -x&s> 6. g. irevTax&j irevTaxv, irevTax&s. 

(e) Proportionals, which, denote a proportion, and answer the 
question, how many times more ? All are compounded with the 
endings -irXacnos, -id, -iov (more seldom -7rAao-iW, -ov, e. g. eKarov- 
TairXaaLwv, -ov) \ — 

SurAao-ios, twice as much (as another which is taken as an unit), TpnrXdo-ios 
(3), TeTpairXacrios (4), irevTairXdcnos (5), e£airXdcrios (6), eirTairXdaios (7), OKTa- 
irXdaios (8), ivvairXdaios (9), SefcairXdcrios (10), eKa.TOVTp.itXdaios (100), ^tAto- 
jrAcunos (1000), /xvpioirXdo-ios (10,000). 

(f ) Substantive Numerals, which express the abstract idea 
of number. Except the first, all are formed from the Cardinals 
with the ending -as, Gen. -ados : — 

7) p.ovds (from /j.6vos, only), more seldom i\ kvds, unity ; Svds, duality; Tpids (3). 
reTpds (4), irevTas or ire fxirTas (5), e£as (6), efiSo/xds (7), oySods (8), evveds (9). 
Se/cas (10), elicds (20), Tpiaads (30), TeTTapuKOVTas (40), irevT7]K0VTds (50), e/ca- 
Toi/Tas (100), x'Aias (1000), /iuptas (10,000), 5uo fivpiddes (20,000). 

Rem. 3. In addition to the Numerals mentioned above, there is still another 
class, which does not, like those, express a definite number, but either an 
indefinite number or an indefinite quantity, e. g. evioi, some; irdvTes, all; iroX- 
?gi, many (§ 77); oXiyoi, few; oXtyov, oXlya, a little; ovdels, no one; ouSeV, 
nothing, etc. 

2. Numerals, like pronouns, arc divided, according to theii 
signification and form, into Substantive, Adjective, and Adver- 
bial Numerals, e. g. rpets rjxSov ; 6 rptros avyp ; t^is. 
11 



122 



NUMERALS. 



97, 98 



f 97. Numeral Signs. 

1 . The Numeral Signs are the twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, ta 
which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after e, BaG, or the Digamma I\ o* 
2t?, s- ; the last character is taken from the figure s-, which is a mutilated form 
of the Digamma, but which has only an accidental resemblance to the abbre- 
viation of a (r) and t (§ 1, Kem, 2) \ — Koirira, 5, as the sign for 90; — 2a/x7i-r, 
^ , as the sign for 900. 

2. The first eight letters, i. e. from a to fr with the Bad or 2t?, denote the 
units ; the following eight, i. e. from i to it with the KoWa, the tens ; the last 
eight, i. e. from p to co with the 'Sap-ir?, the hundreds. 

3. Up to 999, the letters as numeral signs, are distinguished by a mark 
placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral 
signs, only the last has this mark. "With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but 
the letters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, a' = 1, ,« = 
1000, { = 10, ,t = 10,000, /e$ft& = 5742, /»»/*£' = 1842, / = 100, ,p = 
100,000. 





§ 98. Prin< 


oipal Clas 


ses of Numerals. 




Cardinals. 




Ordinals. ' 


la' 


els, fita, e'y 




Trpcoros, -77, -ov, primus, -a, -um 


2)8' 


Mo 




devrepos, -d, -oy 


3 7' 


rpeTs, rpia 




rpiTOS, -77, -ov 


4 5' 


reTTapes, -a, or Teo-o*aoey, -a 


rerapros, -77, -oj/ 


5e' 


irevre 




irefiTTTOS, -77, -01/ 


6 r' 


H 




ckTos, -77, -01/ 


7C 


iirrd 




€$5oaOS, -77, -ov 


87/ 


OKTCi) 




67800s, -77, -oy 


9& 


ivvia 




eya-ros, -77, -oi> 


10 1' 


Seica 




SeKa-ros, -77, -o?' 


11 ut 


eV5e/co 




e^5e/caTos, -77, -or 


12 <£' 


5c65e/ca 




8a>5e'/caTos, -77, -01/ 


1.3 1* 


rpeis ("rpia) Kal SeKa 1 


rplros, -77, -oy koI SenaTOS, -77- -or 3 


14 i5' 


T€TTapes(a) Kal 5eKa 2 


rerapros, -77, -oj' Kal Se/caros, -77, -0^ 


15 te' 


TreyreKai'SeKa 




TrepTTTOs, -77, -oj/ Kal Senaros, -77, -oy 


16 tr' 


e/cKatSe/ca 




eKTOs, -77, -o?' Kal denaros, -77, -o*' 


17 iC 


ejrra/caiSe/ca 




'4fido/j.os, -77, -ov Kal deKaros, -77, -oy 


18 47?' 


o/crcoKaiSe/ca 




67800s, -77, -oy Kal deKaros, -77, -oy 


19 & 


^yyeaKaiSeKa 




IVaTos, -77, -oy Kal SexaTos, -77, -oy 


20 k' 


E%c0<rt(jr) 




etKOOTo's, -7% -oV 



1 The rare Attic form TpisKalSeKa is indeclinable. 

2 The non- Attic form Teo-o-apanaidaca is indeclinable. 

3 The forms given from the 13th to the 19th are preferable to rpisKaid4KaTos t 
TCTTapaKatSeKaTos, irevTeKaiSeKaros, etc. 



198.] 


NUMERALS. 3 




Cardials 


Ordinals. 


21 ko! 


sXkoctiv el?, /ufa, e7 


ef/cocrrby, -$7, -cV, irp&TOS, -77, -oj> 


30 A' 


Tpta/coj/ra 


rptaKocrros, -77, -<fo> 


40 // 


TCTTapd/coyra 


T€TTapaKO(TT6s, -S], -6v 


50 j/ 


7reyT?7/coi/Ta 


irevT7]KO(TT6s, -77, -oy 


60 % 


e|77KOj/ra 


e|a/cocTTos, -77, -0^ 


70 o' 


e)35o/i.7}/covTa 


efiSo/xTiKoaTos, -77, -c^ 


80 t/ 


o75o7jK:oi/Ta 


tVySoTJ/COCTT^S, -77, -O)/ 


90 5' 


eVef77/coz/Ta 


ivevriKOffTos, -77, -Jy 


100 p' 


e/cdroy 


eKaro<XT6s, -4j, -ov 


200 </ 


5id/cocnot, -at, -a 


Std/ccxrtocrTtfc, -77, -ck 


300 t 7 


rptd/ccfcnoi, -at, -a 


TptaKocriocrTSs, -77, -ov 


400 1/ 


TeTpaic6(rioi, -at, -a 


TeTpa/cocrtocrros, ^'j, -cJj/ 


500 <p' 


irevTaK6<xioi, -at, -a 


Trej/TaKocrtoo-Tos, -77, -6v 


600 x" 


QaKocrtot, -at, -a 


e^aKocrtocrrSs, -77, -6v 


700 y 


eTTTOLKdcrioi, -at, -a 


iirTaKOfftocrros, -77, -ov 


800 «' 


OKTatcocrioi, -at, -a 


oKraicocriocrTSsi -77, -oy 


900 ?>> 


ZvvaKocrtoi, -at, -a 


iwaKO(rioo'T6s, -77, -t^ 


1000 p. 


X&101, -at, -a 


XtAtocrros, -77, -oV 


2000 ,j3 


Sis^iA-iot, -at, -a 


Stsx^'of'rJs', -77, -Jy 


3000 ,7 


Tpisx^ioL, -at, -a 


rptsx^o(rr6s, -77, -cfo> 


4000 ,5 


TeTpd/cts%tA.tot, -at, -a 


T€TpaKlSX^O(TT6s, "t\, -6v 


5000 ,e 


7re;/TaKiS'XiA.ioi, -at, -a 


TTe^Ta/ctsxtAtocTTos, -77, -cJv 


6000 ,r 


e£a/«sxtAtot, -at, -a 


e^aKtsx'AiocrTJs, -77, -ck 


7000 ,£ 


e7TTa«:tsxiAtot, -at, -a 


eTrraKtsx^oarTos, -77, -cfr 


8000 ,77 


OKTOLKisxi^oi, -at, -a 


o/cTa/ctsxtAtocrT^y, -77, -&/ 


9000 ;&• 


et/j/d/ctsxiAtot, -at, -a 


ippaKtsx^iocTToSi -77, -cfv 


10,000 y t 


fj.vpioi, -at, -a 


fjtvpiocrros, -77, -oy 


20.000 ft 


dLSfJLvpioi, -at, -a 


dtsfivptocTTos, -77, -oy 


100,000 ,p 


oeKaKtsfivptot, -at, -a 


SeKaKts/xvptocTTos., -77, -6v 


1,000,000 ip 


eKaTOPTaKiSfJ-vptoi, -at, -a 


^KaTovTaKisp.vpioar6s : -"fj, -6v 


8,000,000 Kfi 


StanocrtaKisfxvpioi, -at, -a 


dtaKO(TtaKts/J.vpiO(TT6s : -77, -cJy. 




Numeral Adverbs. 


1 o7ra|, once 


13 TptSKatdeKaKts 


50 Trej/TTjKourdKis 


2 5is, ^Wce 


14 TerTapesKaiSeKaKts 60 kty]KOVTaKis 


3 rpts 


15 TreyTe/catSe/cd/cts 70 efiSofxr}KOVTdKts 


4 TSTpaKlS 


16 4/c/cat5e/<:d/cts 


80 oydoTjKouTaKis 


5 irevrdicis 


17 67rTaKat5e/<:d/a5 


90 ivevy\Kdvr diets 


6 e|d/cty 


18 o/cTco/caiSe/cd/cts 


100 QKarovTaKts 


7 €7TTc£/a? 


19 ivveaKaidtKaicis 200 diaKcxridKis 


8 oktiLkis 


20 elKocraKts 


300 rptaKOfftaKts 


9 evvedicis, ivaKij 21 elKoaaKts airai 


1000 x'A"*'"*' 


10 Se/cctais 


22 eiKocaKts Sis 


2000 Stsx'Aid/cts 


1 1 ^v8eKa/as 


30 rpiaKouTaKis 


10,000 /xvpiaKis 


12 oa>5e/cd/as 


40 TCTrapaKOVTaKts 20,000 SisfivptaKis. 



123 



124 REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. [$ 99. 



§ 99. Remarks. 

1. The rarer subordinate forms of 13, 14, etc., used by later writers, are 
fieKarpels, Neut. SeKarpla, deKarerrapes, -a, Se/ca7revTe, etc. 

2. Mvpioif 10,000, when Paroxytone (fxvploi), signifies innumerable. 

3. In compound numerals, the smaller number either precedes the larger, 
and then always with ical, or it follows the larger, usually with Kal, sometimes 
without it. The first order corresponds with the usage in English, e. g. Jive 
and twenty; the second only in part, e. g. twenty-Jive, e. g. 

25: irevTe Kal ^Koai(v), or tfKoffi Kal iripre, 
345 : tt4vt€ Kal reTrapaKOvra Kal rpiaKScrioi, or rpiax. tgtt. ko\ it. 

The same holds of the Ordinals, e. g. 

7refiirTQS Kal eiKoarSs, or elKoffrbs Kal iriixmos. 

4. The tens compounded with 8 or 9 are frequently expressed in the form of 
subtraction, by means of the participle of SelV, to want, which agrees with tha 
larger number, e. g. 

49 : irevT7)K0VTa ivbs diovra err] 1 , undequinquaginta anni, 
48 : irtvTTiKovTa Ivotv deoura err}, duodequinquaginta anni, 
39 : yrjes fiias diovcrai reTTapaKovra, undequadraginta naves. 

So with the Ordinals, e. g. 

49 : evbs 8eW TreynqKoarbs aurjp, undeqiunquagesimus vir. 

5. Fractions are usually expressed by fxepos or [xoipa. These words, as 
denominators of the fraction, are put in the Gen., depending on the numeral 
which denotes the numerator. If they are expressed as denominators, they are 
understood with the numeral denoting the numerator ; if they are expressed 
as numerators, they are understood with the numeral denoting the denominator, 
e. g. •§• is ra>v irivrs fiepw ra S«5o [jue'pj], or twv iriure \jx€pwv\ to. Buo fieprj, two 
parts of the Jive; f is roov oKrcb fioipwv al irivre [/xoTpai], or ray okt& [fxoipuy] at 
5uo ixolpai. But one half is expressed by compounds with fyu t e. g. i]fj.idapeiK6v, 
half a daric ; so in the PI. rpta, trevre ruxiSapeiKa, a daric and a half two darics 
and a half — Fractions are also expressed by an ordinal with fxopiov or fxepos, 
e. g- rpnr\\ji6piov or rpirou /xepos = J, irtpLirrov jjiipos = j ; a mixed number is 
also expressed by ^/a preceded by a numeral, e. g. ir4vre rj/xi^apsiKci = 2j darics, 
also by iiri prefixed to an ordinal, e. g. eirirpiTov = l£, iiriire/AirTou = 1-^. 

6. The Cardinal numbers compounded with avv are equivalent to the Latin 
distributives, e. g. awSvo (bini), two together, two at a time, each two, ffvvrpets 
(terni), o-vfureyre (quini), etc. 

1 Fifty years, wanting one. 



$ 100.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE ADVERB. 125 

7. Declension of the first four Numerals : — 



Nom. 


eh 


fiia eV 


Qvo 


Gen. 


kvos 


fjiias kvos 


SvoTv (very seldom dve?u) 


Dat. 


hi 


fj.1% kvi 


5vo?v (Sva-i[y] Ionic and Th. 8, 101.) 


Ace. 


eva 


fxiav ev 


Svo 


Nom. 


rpe?s 


Neut. rpia 


TeTTapes, or re<r(rapes Neut. reTTopa 


Gen. 


rpioov 




rerrapcav 


Dat. 


Tpi(rL(i>) 




T£TTapcri(i/) 


Ace. 


rpets 


Neut. rpia 


rerrapas Neut. rirrapa 



Kemaek. Like eTs are also declined ovdeis and fx-nSels, no one ; like efs too 
they hare the irregular accent, e. g. ovdds, ovSe/xla, ouSeV, Gen. ovdevos, ou5e- 
/xias, Dat. ovSevi, ovSep-ia, etc. ; but in the PL ouSeVes (finSeves), -ivuv, -£<ti(v), 
-eras. Comp. further, § 65, 3 (c). The form Svw, instead of 8vo, seems to be 
foreign to the Attic dialect. Avo is often used as indeclinable in all the Cases. 
"AfMcpa. both, is declined like 8vo, Gen. and Dat. afx<po?v, Ace. &fi<pa>. 



CHAPTER V. 

The Adverb 



h 100. Nature and division of the Adverb. 

Adverbs (§§38 and 314) are indeclinable words, denoting 
the relations of place, time, manner, modality, intensity, and 
repetition. They are formed either from essential words 
(§ 38, 3), viz. Substantives, Adjectives, Participles, or from 
formal words, viz. Pronouns and Numerals, or they are 
primitive words, e. g. ov, fjurj, icai, fjurjv, rj, civ, etc. 

(a) Adverbs of place, e. g. ovpavofrev, coelitus, iravTaxy, ubivis ; 
(1)) Adverbs of time, e. g. vvKrap, noctu, vdv, nunc; 

(c) Adverbs of manner, e. g. koXus, ovtw(s) ; 

(d) Adverbs of modality, which, e. g. vai and ov(k), express an affirmation and 
negation, or e. g. /x-qv, roi, %, $ pA\v, 57?, 'lacas, irov, dv, v-duras, etc. which 
express certainty, definiteness, uncertainty, conditional! t y ; 

(c) Adverbs of intensity and frequency, e. g. p.d\a, trduv, ttoAv, ocov, etc. rpls, 
three times ; atois, again; iroWaKts, often. 
11* 



126 



FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 



[HOI 



$ 101. Formation of Adverbs. 

1. Most Adverbs are formed from adjectives by the ending 
-ws. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the adjective ; 
hence, as the stem of adjectives of the third Dec. appears in the 
Gen., and as adjectives in the Gen. PL are accented like 
adverbs, the following rule for the formation of adverbs from 
adjectives may be given : — 

Change -cov, the ending of the adjective in the Gen. PI, into -cos, 
e.g. 



<pl\-os, lovely, 
Ka\-6s, fair, 
Kalpi-os, timely, 
air\(6-os)ovs, simple, 
evp(o-os)ovs, benevolent, 
7ras, all, rravrSs, 
cdxppav, prudent, 
Xapitis, pleasant, 
raxvs, swift, 
fi4yas, great, 
a\7)&7}s, true, 
ffvvfi&qs, accustomed, 



Gen. PL <pi\-av 
" KaX-wv 



icoupi-wv 

(evvo-cw) cvvow 

irdvr-uv 

(racppov-aiv 

Xapiivr-wv 

rax^-eav 

IxeyaKrwv 

akr)&( 4-wi/)£}V 



Adv. <pi\-us 
KaX-us 
Kcupi-a>s 

(evvo-ws) evvws 

iravr-as 

ffoo<pp6v-u)S 

Xapi4vT-cos 

rax^-cos 

/xeyaA-ws 

aAr)&(4-a)s)a>s 

(ffvvri&i-ws) <rwi)S(i)s. 



Remark 1. On the accent of compounds in -rj&cas, and of the compound 
avToipKws, see § 59, Eem. 4, also on the accent of ewwj, instead of ewwj, § 49, 
3. On the comparison of Adverbs, see § 85. 

2. In addition to the adverbs with the ending -cos, there are 
many which have the endings of the Gen., Dat, or Ace. 

(a) The Gen. ending appears in many adverbs in -77s and -ov, 
e. g. i^rjs, ec/)e^s, in order; e^owi-tv^s, suddenly; irov, alicubi; 7rov, 



ubi? 



07T0V, OV, 



ubi 



ibi ; ovSafxov, nowhere. 



(b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. or Locative 1 ending, occurs 
in the following adverbs, 

(o) In adverbs with the ending -?, e. g. ^pi, in the morning, comp. %p, spring, 
awpt, unseasonably ; eK-nri (Dor. eVart), aeK-rjri, knovTi, aeKovrt; in adverbs 
of manner in -ei and -r, from adjectives in -as and -77s, and almost exclu- 
sively in adverbs compounded of a privatfve and iras or avr6s, e. g. 
mavopixd and Trauopiit. On the use of both forms, see Large Grammar, 
Part I, § 363 (0). 



1 The Locative Case, is one which denotes the place where. 



I 102.] CLASSES OF THE VERB. 121 

(#) In local adverbs in -o?, commonly derived from substantives of tbe sec- 
ond Dec, e. g. 'l<rS[xo? from 'Icr&fi6s, TIv&o? from TIv&6, Msyapo't (rh 
Meyapa), Uetpaio?, Kixvvvoi from 77 KiKWva), oT, ovoi, quo, whither, ojf/coi, 
domi, from oIkos^ 

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -o?, derived from substantives, denote an indefinite 
where, but tliose derived from pronouns commonly denote tbe direction whither, 
yet sometimes the indefinite where. 

(y) In local adverbs in -ai. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g. 
Xa/tt*t, humi, iraKai. To this form corresponds the PL locative form 
-7] a i (v), or where i precedes, -a<riv, derived from substantives of the first 
Dec. ; this ending originally belonged to plural substantives only, but 
was transferred later to substantives in the singular number, e. g, ©77,877- 
<ri{v) from 07?/3a.t, *Kfrr)vr)o~i(v) from 'A&rjvcu, TI\aTaiaxn(v) from UKaraiai ; 
Hepyaerr)ai(v) from Tlepyaaf), 'OAu/^7ndcri(z/) from 'QXvpLirla. 

(8) In adverbs in -77 and -o, e. g. aAA?7, irepr], Tre^, on foot ; Kpvcprj, Aad-pd, 
elicr), temere ; ov§ap.r], drifj-cxria, publice ; Koivrj, in common ; iSia, privatim ,• 
KOfuSrj, diligenter ; also 71-77, 07777, irdvTri, 77, 7-77, r^Se, ravrr], etc. ; 77 and a com- 
monly have an Iota subscript. 

(c) The Aec. ending occurs in the following forms, 

{a) In the endings -r}v and -av, e. g. irpcbriv; /xaKpdu, far ; irepav and ireprjv, 

trans (but ir4pa, ultra), etc.; so also of substantives, e. g. SIktiv, instar; 

o.k\>A\v (acme), scarcely ; ooopedi/, gratis. 
{&) In the ending -ov, e. g. S-npov, diu; arj/xepov, hodie ; avpiou, to-morrow. 
\y) In the endings -Sou, -dr}v, -5 a (adverbs of manner), e. g. avrocrx^y, 

cominus ; xcwSoV, linroTpoxdSrfv, a-jroaradd. 
(8) In some substantive forms in the Ace. of the third Dec, e. g. x* L P lv i fa' 

ihe -sake of; irpcuna, gratuitously. 



CHAPTER VL 

The Verb. 

Nature and Division op the Verb. 

4 102. Classes of the Verb. 

1. The Verb expresses an action or state, which is af- 
firmed of a subject, e. g. the father writes, the rose blooms, 
the boy sleeps, God is loved. 

2. Verbs are d'.vided into the following classes : — 

{1) Active verbs, which express an action, that the sub- 
ject itself performs or manifests, e. g. <ypd(j)w, to ivrite ; 
^aXXco, to bloom (comp. § 248) ; 

(2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, which express an action 
that the subject performs on itself the subject being, 



128 VERBS. TENSES. [$ 103 

therefore, both agent and object, e. g. pov\evo}xat, 1 
advise myself, I deliberate ; 
(3) Passive verbs, which express an action that the sub- 
ject receives from another object, e. g. rinrrofjiat viro 
tlvos, I am smitten by some one. 
3. Verbs, which are used only in the middle form, are 
called Deponent. They have either a reflexive or intransi- 
tive meaning. They are divided into Middle Deponents, 
which have a middle form for their Aorist and Future, e. g. 
yapiCp^ai, gratificor, Aor. lyapiaa^Vy Fut. yapiovixai ; and 
into Passive Deponents, which have a Passive form for 
their Aorist, but commonly a middle form for their Fut., 
e. g.» iv^vfjLeofjLcu, mecum reputo, Aor. ive^v/jLrf&Tjv, mecum 
reputavi, Fut. iv^v/jLTjo-ofjuu, mecum reputabo. Comp. § 197. 

§ 103. The Tenses. 

1. The Tenses denote the time of the action of the verb. 
The Greek has the following Tenses : — 

I. (1) Present, fiovkevco, I advise, 

(2) Perfect, jBeftovXevrea, I have advised; 
II. (3) Imperfect, iftovkevov, I was advising, 

(4) Pluperfect, iftefiovXeviceiv, I had advised, 

(5) Aorist, iftovkevcra, I advised (indefinite) ; 
III. (6) Future, /SovXevo-co, I shall or will advise, 

(7) Future Perfect (almost exclusively in the mid- 
dle form), (3ef3ovXevaoiJL(u, I shall have advised my- 
self, or I shall have been advised. 

2. All the Tenses may be divided into, 

a. Principal tenses : Present, Perfect, and Future ; 

b. Historical tenses : Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. 

Remark. The Greek has two forms for the Perf. and Phrperf. Act., two for 
the simple Frit. Pass., and two each for the Act., Pass., and Mid.. Aorist ; these 
two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses ; i. e. the 
first Perfect is a primary tense, the second Perfect a secondary tense, etc. 
Still, only a very few verbs have both forms ; most verbs construct the above 
tenses with one or the other form, but not with both. No verb has all the 



$$104,105.] VERBS. MODES. PARTICIPIALS. 129 

tenses. Pure verbs (§ 108, 5) form, with very few exceptions, only the primary 
tenses. Mute and liquid verbs (§ 108, 5) may form both the primary and 
secondary tenses, but no verb has all the forms in use. The Put. Perf, which 
is found in but few verbs, is entirely wanting in liquid verbs. It is seldom 
found in verbs which have the temporal augment (§ 121), e. g. alpew, to take, 
7Jp-fl<rofj.cu, PI. Prot. 338, c., aTi/taw, to dishonor, TiTi/jLotxrofxai, Dem. 19, 284. 



$ 104. The Modes. 

The Modes denote the manner in which the action of 
the verb is represented, whether as a direct affirmation, a 
condition, or a command, etc. (comp. § 258, seq.) The 
Greek has the following Modes : ■— 

I. The Indicative, which makes a direct affirmation, e. g 
the rose blooms, bloomed, ivill bloom. 

II. The Subjunctive, which expresses what is merely 
conceived, or conditional. The Subjunctive of the his- 
torical tenses is called the Optative. Comp. ypdcfrotfu with 
scriberem. 

Kemark. See § 257, 2 (a), (b), and Pern. 1, for the manner in which the 
Aorist may use both forms of the Subj., and how the Future may have an 
Optative. 

III. The Imperative, which expresses a command, e. g, 
(SovXeve, advise. 

$ 105. Participials {Infinitive and Participle^ 

Besides the modes, the verb has two forms, which, as 
they partake both of the nature of the verb and also of 
the nature of the substantive and adjective, are called 
Participials : — 

(a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive participial, 
e. g. e^reXo) fiovXevetv, I wish to advise, and to flovXeveiv, 
the advising. 

(b) The Participle, which is the adjective participial, e. g. 
fiovXevwv avrjp, a counsellor. 

Ki.mauk. These two participials may be called verbum infinitum; the re- 
maining forms of the verb, verbum finitum. 



130 VERBS. STEM, AUGMENT, AND REDUPLICATION. [$$ 106-103 



$ 106. The Persons and Numbers. 

The personal forms of the verb show whether the sub- 
ject of the verb be the speaker himself (I, we, first person) ; 
or a person or thing addressed (thou, you, second person) ; or 
a person or thing spoken of (he, she, it, third person). They 
also show the relation of number: Singular, Dual, and 
Plural (comp. § 41, 1), e. g. fiovkevco, I, the speaker, advise ; 
fiovkeveis, thou, the person addressed, advisest; fiovkevei, he, 
she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; ftovkeverov, 
ye two, the persons addressed, advise ; /3ov\evovcn, they, the 
persons spoken of, advise. 

Remark 1. The student will at once observe that the ending, or personal 
forms of the Greek verb, determines the person and number •without the subject 
being expressed. So in Latin. But in English, as the verb is not varied so 
as to indicate the person and number of itself, the subject must be expressed. 

Rem. 2. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual throughout the 
Act., and none for the Pass. Aorists ; in these instances it is expressed by the 
form of the first Pers. PI. 



$ 107. Conjugation. 

Conjugation is the inflection of the verb in its Persons, 
Numbers, Modes, Tenses, and Voices. The Greek has 
two forms of conjugation, that in -<w, which includes much 
the larger number of verbs, e. g. fiovXev-co, and the older, 
original conjugation in -jut, e. g. lanj-fic, to station. 

Conjugation of Verbs in -«. 

$ 108. Stem, Augment, and Reduplication. — Char- 
acteristic. 

1. Every verb is divided into the stem, which contains the 
ground-form of the verb, and into the syllables of formation, by 
which the relations of person, number, tense, etc. are denoted. 
The stem is found in most verbs in -w by cutting off the ending 
of the first Pers. Ind. Pres., e. g. /JovXev-w, \£y-u> 3 rpt/3-o). 



ft 109, lit).] VERBS. INFLECTION AND TENSE-ENDINGS. 131 

2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings 
to the stem, and are then called inflection- endings, e. g. fiovXtv-oi, 
fiovXtv-aoj .fjovXev-o-afjuu, or are prefixed to the stem, and are 
then called Augment and Reduplication, e, g. i-fiov\cvov, Iivas 
advising; fo-ftovXevKa, I have advised. For a change in the stem 
<)f many verbs, e. g. rpiir-oi, ri-rpocp-a, k-rpdrr-rfv, see § 140. 

3. The Augment is. e prefixed to the stem of verbs which 
begin with a consonant, e. g, i-fiovXtvaa, I advised; but in 
\ r erbs "which begin with a vowel, it consists in lengthening the 
first stem-vowel, a and c into -q (and in some cases into ei), i and 
v into I and v, and o into w. The Augment implies past time, 
and hence belongs to all the historical tenses (Imperfect, 
Aorist, and Pluperfect) ; but it is confined to the Indicative. 

4. Reduplication consists in repeating the first stem-conso- 
nant with e, when the stem begins with a consonant ; but when 
the stem begins with a vowel, the Reduplication is the same as 
the augment, e. g. j3e-/3ov\€VKa, I have advised; Wtcvko, I have 
supplicated, from 'i/cere^-co. The Reduplication denotes the com- 
pletion of the action, and hence belongs to the Perfect, Pluper- 
fect, and Future Perfect. For a fuller view of the Augment 
and Pteduplication, see h 119, sq. 

5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -w is cut oil, 
is called the verb-characteristic, or merely the characteristic, 
because, according to this, verbs in -w are divided into different 
classes ; according as the characteristic is a vowel, a mute, or 
a liquid, verbs are divided into pure, mute, and liquid verbs, e. g. 
(3ov\ev-u), Ti/m-w (pure verbs), rpifi-oi (mute), (paiv-iD (liquid). 

$ 109. Inflection- endings. 

In the inflection-endings, so far as they denote -the relation 
of tense, mode, and person, there are three different elements : 
the tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel, and the personal - 
ending, e. g. fSovXcv-ix-o-p-at. 

$ 110. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings. 

1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands 
next after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark 



132 VERBS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. [$ 111. 

of the tense. In pure verbs, k is the tense -characteristic of the 
Perf. and Plup. Ind. Act., e. g. 

f$€-fiov\€v-K-a i-fie-fiov\ev-K-€iv ; 

the characteristic of the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
the Fnt. Perf. is o-, e. g. 

$ov\zv-(r-(a PovXev-cr-o/xat 0e-&ov\ev-cr-ofAat 

i-fiov\ev-(T-a £-fiovXGV-(r-d/J.r)v ; 

the characteristic of the first Aor. Pass, is S-; the first Put. 
Pass, has, besides the tense-characteristic cr, the ending of the 
first Aor. Pass. -St], thus, 

i-fiovXev-fr-Tiv f3ovAev-&7)-(r-ofAai. 

The primary tenses only (§ 103, Rem.) have a tense -charac- 
teristic. 

2. The tense -characteristic, together with the ending follow- 
ing, is called the tense-ending. Thus, e. g. in the form fiov- 
Xevau), a- is the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable 
o-o) is the tense-ending of the Fut. The stem of the verb, 
together with the tense-characteristic and the augment or 
reduplication, is called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g. in Zfiov- 
\zucr-a, i{3ov\€vo- is the tense-stem of the first Aor. Act. 

§ 111. (b) Personal-ending s and Mode -voiu els. 

The personal-ending denotes the person of the verb, and 
takes a different form according to the different persons and 
numbers; the mode-vowel connects the tense-stem and the 
personal-ending, and takes a different form according to the 
different modes, e. g. 



1 Pers. 


. Sing. 


Ind. Pres. 


M. 


fiovXev-o-fiat 


Subj. povAev-a-iiicu 


3 " 


u 


" Put. 


" 


fSovXev-c-e-rcu 


Opt. fiovAev-a-oi-TO 


1 " 


PL 


" Pres. 


" 


fSov\ev-6-/j.e&a 


Subj. f}ovhev-a>-/xe&a 


2 " 


IC 


(C (C 


" 


/3ouAev-e-o-&e 


" ^SouAeu-Tj-trd-e . 


1 " 


Sing. 


" A.I. 


" 


i/3ovAeu-(T-d-/A7}j> 


" fiovX^v-a-ca-jxai 


3 " 


u 


u u 


C( 


£{5ov\ev-(r-a-To 


Opt. fiovAev-cr-cu-To. 



Kemakk. In the above forms, fiovAev is the verb-stem, and jSouAeu, jSot/Aeutr, 
and ifSovAevo- are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Put., and first Aor. 
Mid. : the endings -pai, -rat, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels o, 
u, e, oi, 7) a, at, are the mode-vowels. The mode-vowels e and o of the Indie 
%re lengthened into t) and « in the Subj. 






M 112, 113.] MODE-VOWELS. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



133 





$ 112. 


Summary of the 


Mode-vowels. 






Indicative. 


Subj. 


Opt. 


Impr. 


Inf. 


Part. 


Person. 


Pres. and Fut. 
Active. 


Impf., A. II. A. and 
M. and Prs.and F.M. 


Act. Mid. 








S. 1. 


go 







a 


CO 


OL 


_ 


et, e 


O), 


2. 


ei 




6 


V 


V 


OL 


e 






3. 


et 




€ 


V 


V 


OL 


€ 






D.l. 


— 







— 


CO 


01 


- 






2. 


€ 




e 


V 


V 


01 


e 






3. 
P. 1. 


e 






6 





CO 


01 
01 


e 






2. 


€ 




e 


V 


t\ 


OL 


e 






3. 










(a 


CO 


01 


e 








Indicative. 


Optative. 


Impr. 


Infinitive. 


Person. 


Plpf. 


A. I. M. 


A. I. A. and 

Pf. A. 


A. I. A. 

and M. 


A. I. A. and M. 


A. I. A. and M. 
a 


S. 1. 


€t 


d 


d 


ai 


- 


2. 

3. 


et 
ei 


a 
a 


a 
e 


at 

at 


o a 
a 






D.l. 

2. 

3. 

P. 1. 


et 
et 
et 


a 
a 

d 
d 


d 
d 
d 


ai 
ai 
ai 

O.L 


a 
a 


Participle. 

A. I. A. and M. 
and P£ A. 


2. 


et 


a 


a 


at 


a 


a 


3. 


(«)6 


d 


d 


ai 


a 





§ 113. Personal-endings 


of Verbs in -co. 


I. Active Form. 


II. Middle Form. 


A. Ind. and Subj. 
the Princ. tenses. 


B. Ind. and Opt. 
the Hist, tenses. 


A. Ind. and Subj. 
the Princ. tenses. 


B. Ind. and Opt. 
the Hist, tenses. 


Sing. 1. 

2. 

3. 
Duall. 

2. 

3. 
Plur. 1. 

2. 

3. 


s 

TOV 

rov 

fX€V 
T€ 

(vri) cri(v) 


v, Opt. flL 
s 

TOV 
Tt\V 

fj.ev 

T€ 

v, o~av 


flCLL 
a LXL 
TOLL 

fieSov 
o~&ov 

0~&0V 

/xe&a 
<r&e 

VTCLl (CLT CL l) 


fxr,v 
ao, o 

TO 

fX&OV 

(T&OV 

cr&Tjv 
(itSa 

vt o (aro) 


C. Imperative. 


C. Imperative. 


Sincr- 2. 
Dna! •>. 
Plur. ■>. 


TOV 3. TOOV 

re 3. Tcocrav 


Sincr. 2. ((to) o 3. crdco 

FJual 2. abov 3. oScov 

Plur. 2. abe 3. oSwo-av, (?&ooy 


D. Infinitive. 


1). Infinitive. 


v Pre-.. Fut., and Aor. II. 

vai Perf. Act. and Aor. I. and 11. Pass. 

t Aor. I. 


cr&cu 


E. Participle. 


E. Participle. 


Stein j/t, with exception of the Perf., 

whose stem ends in -ot. 


/jLfvos, fievT], /xevov : 
fifvos, fJ-tvri, fievov, Perf. 



134 PERSONAL-ENDINGS. [$ 114. 

Remark. The Personal-endings follow so directly the mode-vowel, and are 
so closely joined to it, that often the two do not appear separately, but are 
united together, e, g. p<tvX€v<r-ris, instead of PovXevcr-rj-is, PovXev-r), instead of 
QovXev-e-ai (a and e coalescing and i being subscribed). 

$ 114. Difference between the Personal-endings \n 
the Principal and the Historical Tenses. 

1. The difference between the Principal and Historical tenses is important. 
The Principal tenses (Pres., Perf., and Put.) form the second and third Pers. 
Dual with the same ending -o v, e. g. PovXev-e-rov PovXev-e-rov ; PovXev-e-cr&or 
fiovXev-e-o-frov ; the Historical tenses also form the second Pers. Dual in -or, 
but the third in -77 v, e. g. 

iPovXev-e-r v ej8ouAeu-e-T 77 y, iPovXei-e-ff&ov e/JouAeu-e-cr 3-771/. 

2. The Principal tenses form the third Pers. PL Act. in -<ri{v), from -vri t 
-v<ri, and the Mid. in -vrai ; the Historical tenses in the Active, in -v, and Mid., 
in -vroi e. g. 

PovXev-o-v 0* 1 = fiovXev-ov(ri(v) iPovXev-o-v 
PovXev-o-v t a 1 iPovXev-o-v r 0. 

Eemark. In PovXevouat the v is dropped, and as a compensation the o pre- 
ceding it is lengthened ; so also in the Put. Act. Comp. 116, 5. 

3. The Principal tenses in the Sing. Mid. end in -fiai, -cot, -rat 5 the Histori- 
cal in -fj-Wj "^°> " T0 > e - g- 

PovXev-0-fJ.ar lPovX€v-6-fXi)V 

PovXev-e-crai = j8ouAeu-r;, ejSouAeu-e-cro = iPovXev-ov 

PovXev-e-rai iPovXev-e-r 0. 

4. The Personal-endings of the Subj. in the Principal tenses are like those 
of the Ind. in the same tenses ; the Opt. are like those of the Ind. of the His- 
torical tenses ^ 

2 and 3 Du. Ini. Pr. PovXeve-rov Subj. PovXevrj-r v 

PovXevz-tr & o v " fSov\zvi\-<r&ov 

3 PI. " " QovAeiov-o- 1 ( <) " PovXevoo-ff 1 {v) 

PovXevo-vra " fiovXeva-vrai 

1 Sing. " " PovXevo-pai " PovXevw/Aai 

2 *■ " " PovXev-rj " PovXev-y 

3 " " " PouXeve-rai " PovXevrj-rat 

2 and 3 Du. " ImpfeiSovAeue-rov, -4-tt]v Opt. PovXevoi-rov, -oi-rrjv 

e/3ouAeue-o" $■ y, -4-a^nqv " PovXevoi-ff&ov, -qi-ob-qv 
3 PL u " £PovXevo-v " PovXevot-ev 

£PovXcvo-VTO " PovXevoi-vro 

1 Sing. " " iPovXevo-fxriv " PovXevoi-/j.7jV 

2 " " " (£PovXeve-<ro) £PovXev-ov " (PovXevoi-ff 0) PovXevoi-o 

3 " " " £PovXeve-To " PovXevoi-ro. 



$ 115.] CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB IN -io. 135 

§ 115. Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -oo 
Preliminary Remarks. 

1. Since pure verbs do not form the secondary tenses (§ 103, Ecm.) these 
tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs and one liquid 
verb (rpip-a), Aelir-w, stem Ain, (paiu-w, $AN), so as to exhibit a full Conju- 
gation. 

2. In learning the table, we are to note, 

(1) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into, (a) Personal-ending, 
(b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-characteristic, (d) Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f ) 
Augment, or Eeduplication. 

(2) The spaced forms, e. g. jSouAeu-er ov, fiovAev-7)Tov, third Pers. Du. Ind. 
and Subj. Pres., may direct attention to the difference between the Historical 
tenses in the Ind. and Opt., and the Principal tenses. 

(3) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are 
distinguished by a star (*). The learner should compare these together, e. g. 
PovXevaa, 1. Sing. Ind. Put. Act. or 1. Sing. Subj. I. Aor. Act.; fiovXtvaai-, 
2. Sing. Imp. I. Aor. Mid., PovXevacu, 3. Sing. Opt. I. Aor. Act., fiov\ev<rai, 
Inf. I. Aor. Act. 

(4) The accentuation (§ 118) should be learned with the form. The follow- 
ing general rule will suffice for beginners : The accent of the verb is as far from 
the end as the final syllable will permit. Those forms, whose accentuation 
deviates from this rule, are indicated by a dagger (f ). 

(5) When the Paradigm is thus thoroughly learned, the pupil may first 
resolve the forms either of fSovAevot, or any pure verb, into their elements, i. e. 
Personal-ending, Mode- rowel, etc. 5 observing this order, viz. fSovXevao) is. (1) 
first Pers., (2) Sing., (3 J Ind., (4) Put., (5) Act., (6) from j3ouAeva>, to advise; 
then he may arrange the elementary parts of the form, and in the following 
order: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment, or Reduplication, (3) Tense-characteristic, 
(4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel, (7) Per 
sonal ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel and Personal-ending. E. g. 
What would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised himself using the 
Aor. of the Pres., jSoi/Aeu-w, to advise 1 ? Answer: The Verb-stem is /SouAeu-, 
Augment, e, thus e/3ou\eu ; the Tense-characteristic of the first Aor. Mid. is <r, 
thus Tense-stem is i-fiovXev-ar ; the Mode-vowel of the first Aor. Ind. Mid. is o ; 
thus, i-fiovAev-cr-a ; the Personal-ending of the third Pera. Sing, of an Historical 
tense of the Mid. is to ; thus, e-/3ovAeu-o--a-To. 

Remark. By making himself familiar with the above elements, the pupil 
can construct from the root any form of the verb he may wish. 



136 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN 



[4 115. 



Tenses. 



Indicative. 



Subjunctive 
of the Principal teases. 



Present, 

Tense- 
stem: 
fiovAev- 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 



Imperfect, 

Tense- 
stem : 
e-/3ouAev- 



Perfect Z, 

Tense- 
stem: 
fie-fiovXev-K 



Pluper- 
fect Z, 

Tense- 
stem: 

f}ovAev-K- 



Perf. II 
Plpf. II 



Aorist Z, 

Tense- 

stem : 

e-/3oyAeu-<7- 



Aorist II, 
i-Aiir- 



Future, 
j8ouAev-<r- 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P.l. 

2. 

3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 

P.l. 

2. 
3. 



S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 



P. 1, 

2, 
3 



S. 1. 
2, 
3, 

D.2 
3 

P.l 
2 
3 



S. 1. 

2. 



S. 1 



/3oi>Aeu-o>,* / advise, 
(iovAev-eis, f/iow advisest, 
fiovAev-ei, Ae, sAe, if advises, 
fiovAev-erov, ye two advise, 
)8ovAeu-e tov, fAey two advise, 
fiovAev-ofxeu, we advise, 
jSouAeu-ere,* you advise, 
/3ovAey-o u <r t (v), they advise, 
i-fiovAev-ov,* I was advising, 
i-fiovAev-es, thou wast advising, 
e-)8ouAeu-e(j/), he, she, it was adv. 
i-fiovAev-erov, ye two were adv. 
i-fiovAev-eryv, they two were adv. 
i-fiovAev-ofjLev, we were advising, 
i-fiovAev-ere, you were advising, 
i-fiovAev-ov,* they were advising. 



fiovAev-<a,* I may advise, 

fiovAev-ris 

fiovAev-y^ 

fiovAev-rjrov 

fiovAev-7) t o v 

PovAtv-wfitv 

PovAgv-tjtg 

j8ouAeu-cocn(j') 



/3e-/3ouAeu-/c- 
fie-fiovAev-tc- 
/3e-/3ouAeu-/c- 
fie-j3ovAev-K- 
/3e-/3ouAeu-/c- 

advised, 
/3e-/3ouAeu-K- 
/3e-j3ouAeu-K 
j8e-/3ouAeu-«:- 



a, I have advised, 
as, thou hast adv'd, 
e( v),%~ he, she, it has a. 
arov, ye two have a. 
arov, they two have 

afizv, we have adv'd, 
■a.Te, you have adv'd, 
aai{v), they have a 



K-tiv, I had advised, 
K-€ts, thou hadst adv. 
K-ei, he, she, it had ad. 
K-eirov, ye two had 



-j8e-/3ouAeu 
-/3e-/3oi/Aeu- 
-jSe-jSovAeu- 
-fie-fiovAev- 

advised, 
-j6e-/3ouAeu-/c-e t t r\ v,they two had 

advised, 

-fie-fiovAev 

i-fie-fiovAev 

/3e-/3ouAeu 



■K-ei/xev, we had adv. 
-K-eire, you had adv. 
K-earav, they had a. 



-ire-(pr}y- 
-fiovAev- 
-fiovAev- 
-fiovAev- 
-ffyvAev- 
-povAev- 
-fiovAev- 
-jSouAeu- 
e-j8ouAeu 



a, 1 I appear, 
ew, 2 I appeared, 
cr-a, I advised (indef.), 
a-as, thou advisedst, 
a--e(v), he, she, it adv'd, 
ff-arov, ye two advised, 
(r-dr-nv, they two adv'd. 
o--afiev, we advised, 
cr-are, you advised, 
cr-a v, they advised, 



t-Aiir-ov, Heft, 
e-Anr-es, etc. declined like Impf. 
Ind. 



fiovAev-cr-oo,* I shall advise, 
I like the Indie. Pres. 



fie-l3ovAev-K-co,Imayhavea 

fie-fiouAev-K-rjs 

fie-fiovAev-K-r) 

e-fiovAev-K-TjTOV 
fie-fiovAev-K-r] r ov 

/3e-l3ovA€V-K-a)fxeu 

)8e-j8ouAeu-/c-r/Te 

fi€-fiovAev-K-o)<rt(v) 



ire-(pi)v-(d., I may appear, 



fiovAzv-cr-wf 
(3ouAev-cr-7)s 
fiovAev-cr-ri * 
fiovAev-(T-r]TOV 
f$ovAsv-(r-7] TOP 
fiovAtv-cr-cafMev 
PovAev-c-rjTe 
fiovAev-(r-w(ri(v) 



may 



advise 



aItt-w, etc., like the Subj 
Pres. 



The inflection of the 2d Perf. in all the Modes and Participles, is like that of the 1st Perf. 



$ 115.] 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -0J. 



137 



Modes. 



Optative 
i. e. Subj. of Historical tenses. 



fSovXzv-oijxi, I might advise, 

fiovAev-ois 

fiovAev-oi 

fiovAev-oirov 

fiovAev-oiT-nv 

f}ov?^ev-oi/j.ev 

\fiovAev-oiT6 

\fiovAev-o lev 



^e-^ovAev-K-oi/xi, I mig. have a 
fie-fiovAcvK-ois 
fie-fiovhev-K-oi 
&e-fiovAev-K-oiTOV 

/3e-j8ouA.eu-K-o it 77 v 

/3e-j8oi/Aeu-/c-oi/iei/ 
fie-fiovAfv-K-oire 
fie-&ov\ev-K-o 1 e v 



Tre-<p7)v-oi[ju, 1 might appear, 
PovAev-cr-aifii, I mirjld advise. 
fSovAzv-a-ais, or -etas 
fiovAev-a-ai,* or -eie(v) 
fiovAev-ff-aiTov 
{SovAsv-a-aiT-n v 
fiov\ev-(r-cuiJ.zv 
fiovAev-a-aiTe 
fiovAev-cr-a lev, or -e 1 a v 



povAev-cr-a 1 e v, or -e lav 
\irr-oifit, etc.. like the Opt. 
Impf. 



$ovAev-e, advise, 
QovAev-zTcc, let him ad. 
fiovAev-erov, ye two ad. 
fiovAev-eTwv, let them 

both advise, 
jSouAeu-eTe,* do ye ad. 
fSov\ev-4ro}(ra.v, usually fiovAev-ovrav,* let them a. 



Imperative. 



Participials. 



Infill. ; Particip. 



fiovAev- 
ear, 

to 
advise, 



fiovAev-av 
fiovAev-ovaa 
fiovAei-ov\ 
G-fiovAev-ovros 
fiovAev-ova-ns. 
I advising, 



[fie-fiovAev-K-e,*] etc.. 
like the Imp. Pres. 
vet only a few Per- 
fects, and such as 
have the meaning 
of the Pres., form 
an Imperative. 



■cp'riv-e, appear, 



fiovAev-cr-ov, advise, 
fiovAev-cr-aTOi) 
fiovAev-a-aTov 
^ovAev-tr-draiv 

fiovAev-a-aTe 
fiovAev-cr-aTaxTav, nsua 



0e-Pov- 

Aev- 
k-4vcu,1[ 
to have 
advised, 



fie-fiovAev-K-tibsi 

fie-fiovAtv-K-vTa* 

p , €-fiovAev-tc-6s'\ 

G. -K-OTOS, -K- 

vias, having 
advised, 



Tre-(prj- [Tre-cpTjv-cis't 
vi-va.i,\ 1 



(SovAtv-a-os 
iov- IfiovAev-a-dcra 



Aev- 

to 

advise, 



fiovAev-o'-a.v'] 
Genitive : 
fiovAev-a-avTos 
fiovAev-cr-daris, 
having advised. 



-aai/Toei/k 



fSovAzv-a-oijAi, I would advise, 
like the Opt. Impf. 



A'nr-e, etc., like 
Imp. Pres. 



the 



Anr- Anr-a>v,ovaa, 6v\ 

ClV, t G. 6vTOS, OV(T7)S, 



fiovAev- fiovAev-a-oov, 
<r-eiv, 'etc. like Pr. Pt 



2 The inflection of the 2d Pluperf. is like that of the 1st Plupcrf, both in the Ind. and Opt. 
12* 



138 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -CO. 



[§ 115 



Tenses. 


U to 


The 


a Pi § 


i 




S * £ 


Indicative. 


bubjunctive 
of the Principal tenses. 






S. 1. 


fiov\ev-o/j.ai, I deliberate, or am 


PovXev-cafxai, I may de- 






2. 


)8owAeu-?; * [advised, 


)8ouAeu-7? * [/iterate, 




Present, 


3. 


fiovAev-eTai 


/3ouAeu-7} t a i 






D.l. 


fiov\ev-6fj.e^ov 


fiovXzv-wix&ov 




Tense- 


2. 


)3ouAeu-ecr^oj/ 


fiov\ei>-7)(T&ov 




stem: 


3. 


ySouAew-ecr^oi' 


fiov\ev -na&ov 




jSouAev- 


P.l. 


jSouAeu-dTte&a 


fiovAev-do/ie^a 






2. 


fiovXtv-ea&e * 


(}ov\ev-7}<r&e 






3. 


/3ouAeu-o yrai 


fiovtev-u, </ t a. i 






S. 1. 


£-$ovXev-6ix7)v, I was deliber- 








2. 


e-/3ouAeu-o u [ating, 






Imperfect, 


3. 
D.l. 


e-j8ouAeu-6TO 
e-/8ouAeu-^eS-oj/ 






Tense- 


2. 


e-ySouAeu-ecrfroj' 






stem: 


3. 


€-/3ovAeu-etrd-'»7Z/ 






e-/3ouAev- 


P.l. 
2. 
3. 


e-jSouAeu-cfyiefra 

e-ySouAeu-ecrd-e 

e-jSouAev-oj/TO 








S. 1. 


Pe-fiovXev-fi a t, ZA&ye deliberated, 


fie-fiovAev-fjievos, &, Imay 






2. 


jSe-jSouAeu-trat 


jSe-jSouAeu-^eVos ?js [Aaue 
fie-f}ovAev-/j.ei'OS ?| [e/efo'ft- 




P erf ecU 


3. 


)3e-j8ouAeu-Tcu 






D.l. 


jSe-jSouAeu-jUefroy 


[eratec?, 




Tense- 


2. 


jSe-jSouAeu-crdw 


Be-fiovXev-fjLevco "fJTOV 




stem: 


3. 


/3e-/3ouAeu-«r&oj/ 


fte-fiovAGV-fJLOVQl) ?itov 




j8e-j8ot>Aeu- 


P.l. 


jSe-^ouAeu-^&d-a 


)8e-j8ouAeu-yueVoi 5yiei/ 






2. 


(3e-fiov\ev-(rfre * 


/Se-jSouAew-^eVot ^re 






3. 


j8e-/3ouAeu-i'Tat 


jSe-jSouAeu-^aeVoi Sat 






S. 1. 


e-/3e-j8ouAev-/i f\v, I had deliber- 






Pluperfect, 


2. 
3. 


i-fie-fiovAev-co [ated, 
e-j8e-/3ouAeu-T o 






Tense- 


D.l. 


e-j8e-/3ouAei;- i ue3-oj' 








2. 


e-/3e-^ouAeu-a'3'OJ/ 






jSouAeu- 


3. 


i-/3<=-fiov\ev-(r£rr} v 






P.l. 


e-/3e-/3oi/Aeu-/xe3-a 






2. 


e-/3e-)8ovAeu-(rid-6 








3. 


e-ySe-^SovAeu-j/ro 








S. 1. 


e-/3ovAeu-cr-a fj.r)v, I deliberated, 


PovXev-ff-w jj.a.1,1 may de- 






2. 


e-/3ouAeu-c-&> [(indefinite) 


fiov\Gv-(r-7) * [liberate, 




Aorist I., 


3. 


e-/3oyuAe?j-o*-aTO 


$ov\sv-<T-r] t a i 






D.l. 


e-j8ouAeu-<r-a i ue3-oi' 


/Sov\sv-(r-dby.€&oi/ 




Tense- 


2. 


e-jSouAeu-o'-acrd-oi' 


fSov\€v-cr-T)(r&ov 




stem-. 


3. 


i-fiov\ev-<r-d (T^7]v 


/3ov\ev-a-7) a&ov 




6-/SouAeu-o"- 


P.l. 


e-jSouAeu-C-afie&a 


^ouAeu-cr-cojU.eS'a 






2. 


e-ySouAeu-c-acrd-e 


/8ouAeu-a-77cr3-6 






3. 


i-Pov\ev-(T-a vr o 


jSouAeu-cr-co i> t a* 




Aorist II. 


S. 1. 


£-\nr-6(n)v, I remained, like Ind. 
Imp erf. 


Anr-co/xcu, / mai/ remain, 
like Pres. Subj. 




Future, 


S. 1. 


(3ov\ev-(r-ofj.ai, I shall deliberate, 
like Pres. Indie. 






Fut. Per/., 


S. 1. 


/3e-j8ouAeu-o--o^at, I shall have de- 
liberated, like Pres. Indie. 







♦ 115.] 



PARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN -CO. 



139 





Modes. 


Participials. 




Optative 
i. e. Subj. of Hist, tenses. 


Imperative. 


Infin. 


Particip. 






f3ovAev-ov, deliberate^ 
fiovAev-eo-fro) 

fSovAev-ea&ov 
fiovAev-ecr&ci)}/ * 

fiovAev-ea&e^ 


fiovAev- 

to deliber- 
ate, 


fiovAev-6fievos 

fiovAev-o/xzuw 

fiovAev-6/xevov, 

deliberating, 




0ovAtv-eo~&ci}(rav, usually fiovAev-eaduy * 




fiovAev-o i/.'. 7] v, I might 
fiovAev-o i o [deliberate, 

J3ovA€V-0 l T 

fiovAev-oifx&ov 

fiovAev-oioSov 

fiovAzv-oi cr&7)V 

fiovAev-oi[A€&a. 

fiovAev-oia&e 

fiovAzv-oivro 










fie-fiovAev-^ievos unv, I 
fie-fiovAev-fxevos €hfs\m^t 
j8e-/3ouAeu-/ueVoy sir) [de- 
liberate. 
{Se-fiovAev-Lievcti efrjrov 
fie-fiovAev-fiei/a) zIt)T7]v 
fie-fiovAzv-fxevot c'irf/xeu 
fie-fiovAev-fxevoi zXnre 
/k-jSouAeu-fteW dvaav 


fie-fiovAev-cro, deliberate, 
fie-fiovAev-cr&co 

fie-fiovAev-crdov 
/Se-fSovAev-a&eov * 

/3e-/3ovAeu-<rd-e * 


fie-fSovAev- 
cr3-at,t to 
have delib- 
erated, 


fie(3ovA€v-/j.4uos'\ 

fiefiovAev-fxei/T] 

/3e/3ot/Aeu-yue- 

vov,\ having 

deliberated, 




fie-fiovAev-a&axrav, usual 


J /3e-/8ouAeu-(T&a>j/ * 












fiovAev-a-a [\x-r\v, I might 
fiovAev-cr-a i o [deliberate, 
j8ouAeu-o"-atTo 
fiovAev-G-aifxe&ov 
fiovAev-o~-aioSov 
fiovAcv-cr-a itr&riu 
fiovAev-a-a.iiJ.zda 
fiovAsv-a-aioSz 
fiovAev-a-ai vr o 


fSovAtv-cr-ai,* deliberate, 
fiovAev-a-dcr&co 

fSovAzv-G-aa&ov 
fiovAev-cr-da&ow * 

(3ovA€v-<r-ao-&e 


fiovAev- 
G-za-bai, 
to deliber- 
ate, 


fiovAev-cr-d/xevos 
fiovAev-(T-ap.4wr] 
fiovAev-a-afxei/ov 
having deliber- 
ated, 




fZovAev-o'-do'daxTai', usual 


[y &ovAev-<T-doSc0i/* 




Aitr-0LLL7]v,lmight remain, 

like Opt. Impf. 
0ovAev-a-oifxnu,I m. have 
ddiberated,likeOjitlmp. 
fie-fiovAfv-ff-ol/xvu, Isli'd 
deliberate, like Opt. Imp. 


ArrroD,! -ttr&a), like Pres. 
Imp. 


Anr-4cr&ai\ 


Anr-6fiet/os, -o- 

P-4VT], -6/X€VOV 






fSovAev- 
cr-e<rdai 


fSovA€v-o~-6/xG- 

VOS, -7], -ov 






fie-fiovAev- 
o~-6<r&ai 


fiz-flovAev-o~-6- 

LLZVOS, -7], -OV. 



140 



VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 



P 116 



Tenses. 


5Q 

111 

fc to- 


The 




Indicative. 


Subjunctive 
of the Principal teases. 




Aorist Z, 

Tense- 
stem : 
e-/3ouAeu-3-- 


8:1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


i-fiovAev-fr-rju, I was advised. 

4-fi0V\€V-&-7)9 

i-fiovAev-fr-rj 
i-fiovAev-&-r)TOV 
e-fiovAev-Sf-'f) tt)v 
i-fiovAev-^-7]fiey 
e-jSouAeu-^-Tjre 
i-jHovAtv-dr-T) <rav 


(3ovAev-fr-u, / might have 
fiovA€v-&-j]s [been advised. 
fiovAev-b-r] 
PovA€vS-t)tov 
fiovAev-d-rj tov 
fiovAev-fr-oofAei/ 
/3ouAev-3--7)Te * 
0ovAev-&-& (T i (u) 




Future I. 


S. 1. 
2. 


fiov\ev-£rn-cr-o[xai> I shall be adv. 
j8ouAeu-3->)-a'-r7, etc., like the 
Ind. Pres.'Mid. 






Aorist II. 


S.I. 

2. 


£-rpi(i-T]v, I ivas rubbed, 
i-rpip-ris, etc., like the first 
Aor. Ind. Pass. 


rpifS-5), I may have been rub'd, 
rpifi-fjs, etc., like the first 
Aor. Subj. Pass. 




Fut. 11. 


S. 1. 
2. 


Tpifi-T)-(r-oixai, I shall be rubbed, 
rpifi-7}-(r-ri, etc., like the first 
Put. Ind. Pass. 






Verbal Adjectives : fiovAtv-ros, --t), -6v, advised, 





$ 116. Remarks on the Inflection- endings. 

1. The personal-endings of verbs in -co are apocopated forms, as may be 
shown from the older conjugation in -/*t, and in part from the dialects (§ 220, 
1 ) ; thus, -fxi in the first Pers. Sing. Ind. and Subj. Act. and -rt in the third 
Pers. have disappeared, e. g. fiovAev-eo instead of fiovAev-o-fu or PovAev-ajxi, 
j8ouAsu-« instead of fiovAev-e-n (by the dropping of -{xi in fiovAev-o-fu, the o is 
lengthened into &>, and by the dropping of -ti in povAev-e-Ti, e is lengthened 
into et) ; in the first Pers. Sing, first Aor. Ind. Act., v has disappeared, e. g. 
iPovAevaa instead of ipovAevaav ; in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Act., except 
the first Aor., -£•£ has disappeared, e. g. /3ouAeu-e instead of ftovAev-e-fri ; but the 
first Aor. Imp. Act. has a different ending -ov, e. g. PovAev-cr-ov. 

2. The second Pers. Sing. Act. has the ending -a $■ a in the Common lan- 
guage in the following forms only : — 

ola&a, nosti, from the Perf. oTScc; ydeio-fra and #5 770- 3- a, Plpf. of oT5o; 
e(p7ia&a, Impf. from (pri/xl, to say ; tfo-fra, Impf. from elfxi, to be ; ij etcr&a, 
Impf. from eTfju, to go. 

3. There is no special form for the first Pers. Dual Act., or for the first 
and second Aor. Pass. ; the first Pers. PI. is used for this purpose. Comp. 
§ 106, Kern. 2. 

4. The original form of the first Pers. PI. Act. is -fj.es (not -ftev). Comp, 
the Dialects, § 220, 6, and the Latin ending -mus, e. g. ypd<p-o-[xes, scrib-i-mws. 

5. The original form of the third Pers. PI. Act. of the Principal tenses was 



$ 116.1 VERES. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 



141 



SIVE 





Modes. 


Participials. 




Optative 
i. e. Subj. of the Hist, tenses. 


Imperative. 


Infin. I Participle. 




fZovAev-fr-eiriu, I might be 




fiovXev- fZov\ev-&-eisT 




/JouAeu-^-en?* [advised, 


fiov\ev-&-r]Ti, be thou ad- 


fr-TJucu, '■ /3ovA.€v-&-e7<rat 




ftovXevS-eir) 


{Sov\ev-&-7)TQ) [vised, 


to be ad- jSoi/Aeu-d-eVf 




f$ov\ev-2r-eir)TOv 


j8ouA.eu-&-7jTOi/ 


vised, Genitive : 




0evXev-^r-€i'fiTT}v 


fZov\ev-&-7)Toov 


/3ovkev-&-4i/Tos 




(3ov\ev-&-elriiJ.ev and -eifxeu 




fiov\ev-&-d(rris, 




j8ouA.eu-&-et7}Te and -etVe 


fiov\€i>-&-7iTe * 




being advised, 




)3ouAeu-3-€?ej/ 


fiovXev-&-7)Two~av 








Qov\ev-&r\-(T-oiix7)V, I should 




fiovAev- 


fiovAev-&r]-(r-6- 




be advised, etc., like the 




^7}-(Te- 


(Jievos, -7}, -ou 




Impf. Opt. Mid. 




cr&cu 






Tpi&-eir)v, I might be rubbed, 




rpi&- 


rpifi-eis,'] etc., 




T/3ij8-ei7jy, etc.. like the first 


Tptfi-7)&i, -r,Td}, etc., like 


rjuai 


like first Aor. 




Aor. Opt. Pass. 


the first Aor. Imp. Pass. 




Part. Pass. 




Tpifi-rj-a-ol/jLTiv, I should be 


Tpifir)- 


TpifZ-ri-o--6p.evos, ' 




rubbed, etc., like the first 




ffeoftat 


-7], -OU 




Fut. Opt. Pass. 








&ov\ev-T€OS, -rea, -reou, to be advised. 



-uTi; when r was changed into c, u was dropped (§ 20, 2), e. g. fiovXevouri = 
PovAevouai — f$ov\evov<ri. On the irregular lengthening of the vowel pre- 
ceding the u, see § 20, Rem. 2. 

6. In the first Pers. Sing. Plup. Act., Attic writers use, together with the 
form in -eiu, a form in -t\, which arises from the Ionic ending of the Plup. -ea, 
e. g. ifiefSovAevK-T) instead of -n-eiu. The mode-vowel et in the third Pers. PL 
is commonly shortened into e, e. g. ifiefiovAev-K-£-<rau instead of ifiefiovAev-K- 
fi-aau. 

7. The first Pers. Sing. Opt. Act. has the ending -fit in verbs in -co, e. g. 
Traifev-a jjli, iraihtvar-ai-ni; but the ending -r)u in the first and second Aor. Pass., 
according to the analogy of verbs in -pi. This i\ remains through all the per- 
sons and numbers, though it is often dropped in the Dual and PL, especially 
in the third Pers. PI. and then, etrifieu = e?/j.eu, drjTe = eTre, elycrau = eieu, e. g. 
iratb'evSrelriijLeu and Trai5evSe?/j.eu, /m?crd-ei7jTe and -d-en-e, <pavelno-au X. H. 6. 5, 
25., TrpoKp&elrio-au Ibid. 34., ire/x(p^ei7]aau Th. 1, 38, and (more frequently) 
-S-eTef (-e?€i/). 

8. The Attic Optative endings -r\v, -t\s, -17, etc., and the third Pers. PL -ev 
(rarer -7]arav) which appropriately belong to verbs in -pa, are used with verbs in 
-co, in the following cases : — 

(a) Most commonly in the Imperf. Opt. of contract verbs, e. g. ti/xwt)u, 

<piXoiT]u, p.io~bo'n)u ; 
(1)) In all Futures in -w, e. g. <pa.uo'n\u Soph. Aj. 313., ipoirj Xen. Cy. 3. 1, 

14, from the Fut. <pav£>, ZpG> ; 
(c) SomeAvhat often in the second Plup.. e. g. ix-rrecpevyotriu S. 0. R. 840., 

Tpoc\7)\v&ol7)s X. Cy. 2. 4, 17., Trewo&otr} Ar. Acharn. 940; 



142 VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [$116. . 

(d) In the second Aor. trxoiw uniformly (%<rxov from lx&>) ; still, not gen- 
erally in compounds, e. g. irapdcrx 01 ^ 1 ' 

9. The forms of the first Aor. Opt. Act. in -€iox, -ete(j'), -etai/, instead of 
-ais, -at, -cuv, have passed from the JEolic Opt. in -eta, -etas, etc., into com- 
mon use in all the dialects, and are employed by the Attic writers more fre- 
quently than the regular forms, e. g. fiovXeva-eias, -ete(j/), -etav. 

Remark. The second Pers. Dual Act. of the Historical tenses often ends, 
among the Attic writers, in -y\v instead of -ov, e. g. elirerriv PL Symp. 189, c, 
iiredr]fXTj(rdTr]V Euthyd. 273, e., ^ffrrjv 294, e., iheyerrjv L. 705, d., iKotvwvqad- 
rqv lb. 753, a. On the Dialects, see § 220, 9. 

10. The Middle endings -crat and -co, when immediately preceded by a 
mode-vowel, drop or (§ 25, 1), and then coalesce, except in the Opt., with the 
mode-vowel, e. g. 

j8ouAeu-e-o*ai . 6ouAeu-e-at = fiov\ev-r) 

j8ouAeu-77-o"ai BovXev-rj-ai = jSouAev-?? 

fiov\ev-oi-cro /3ouAeu-ot-o 

ej3ovAeu-e-<ro e/Joi/Aeu-e-o = e/3ouAev-ou 

ifiovAevff-a-cro ifiovXeixr-a-o = ej8oi/Aeu<r-a>. 

11. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Put. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers 
use a subordinate ending in -et, together with the ending -77, e. g. fiovXev-y and 
-et, j8ouAeuo--77 and -et, fSefiovXeixr-r] and -et, Pov\evfrfj(T-r) and -et, Tpifijjcrr), and -et, 
TToir} and -e?, d\fj and -e?. This form in -et passed from the Attic conversational 
language, into the written language ; hence it is the regular form in the Come- 
dies of Aristophanes, but is avoided by the tragedians. Also Thucydides 
and Xenophon use it 5 other writers, as Plato and the orators, employ both 
forms ; yet three verbs always take the form -et, namely, 

fiov\ofj.cu )8ot;Aet (but Subj. fioi\r)) 

o'tojxat diet (but Subj. 1'77 ) 

8\po[xcu Put. (fyet. 

12. Together with the endings of the third Pers. PL Imperative Act. and 
Pass, -eraxrav, -drwcrav, -adrwaav, the abbreviated forms -6vrcov, -dvrav, 
-o-frcov, are used; and since they are employed very frequently by Attic 
writers, they are called Attic forms. These abbreviated Imperatives of the 
Active Yoice are like the Gen. PL of the Participle of each tense respectively, 
except the Perfect ; and the Middle form -aSav is like the third Pers. Dual, 
e.g. 

Pres. Act. ^ovXeviruxrav and fiovXevovToov 

Perf. " TreTroi&eTcocrav " ireTroi&6vrwv (Gen. Part. ireirot&STav) 

Aor. I. " fiovXevcrdTCticrav " fiovXevffdvTcav 

Pres. Mid. fiovAevea&ooffav " fiovAevecr&ow 

Aor. " (rKeipda&ctiaav " ffnetydcrSoov. 
The Aor. Pass, ending -eviav or -4)twv, abridged from --^rcacrav, is found in 
PL Legg. 856, d. irefupSrevruv, and lb. 737, e. 5tavefi7ifrf]Ta)v (according to several 
MSS.). 



4 117.] \ r ERBS. ATTIC FUTURE. 143 

13. Besides the simple form of the Subj. Perf. and the Opt. Plup. Act., a 
periphrasis, formed by the Perf. Part, and the Subj. or Opt. of elvat (to be), &, 
eiriv, is yeiy frequent, e. g. TreTraidevKcos 5, educaverim ; ireiraiSevicws eirjv, educa- 
vissem. Yet this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, more than a 
simple completed action ; comp. PI. Hipp. M. 302, a. el KeK/j.r)K<bs ri, r) rerpco- 
uevos, r) 7re7rA7J7 [xevos, r) &AA' briovv Treirov&ws enarepos tj/xccp elf], ov kou a/xcpo- 
repoi av rovro ire-ir 6y&o i/iev ; examples of the simple forms are, a-Kei\r)<pr), PI. 
Pp. 614, a., e\Xi)cp(titTiv Polit. 269, c, efiTreirrcoKoi X. An. 5. 7, 26., KaraXeXoiiroiev 
X. H. 3. 2, 8., airoKexupyK 01 i D « 5, 23., virriperr)Koi ib. 5. 2, 3., TreiroirjKOi Th. 8, 
108., esfiePX-fiKoiev ib. 2, 48. — The Imp. Perf. does not often occur in the Act., 
e. g. yeycove, Eur. Or. 1220. 

14. The Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, append the personal-endings to the 
tense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj. and 
Opt. (with few exceptions, which will be further treated below, § 154, 9), 
but must also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle and 
elvai, e. g. 7re7rai5evfj.4vos 5, eXr\v, educatus sim, essem. 

15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, of pure verbs ends in 
-vrai, -vro, e. g. fiefiovXevvrai, efiefiovXevvro ; but in mute and liquid verbs, this 
formation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually express this person 
periphrastically, by means of the Perf. Part, and elcrl(u), sunt, r)o~av, erant; the 
older and middle Attic writers, however, sometimes use the Ionic forms -arm, 
-a.ro (instead of -vrai, -vro) ; the a of these endings is aspirated after the 
Kappa and Pi-mutes, and hence changes the preceding smooth Kappa or Pi- 
mute into the corresponding rough (comp. § 144) : but this a is not aspirated 
after the Tau-mutes ; thus, 

rptfi-w, to rub, Perf. re-rpifx-fiai 3 T?.rerpt<parai (for rerpifivrai) Pip. ererplcpa.ro 
irXeK-co, to twine, ire-irXey- /xai " ireirXexo.rai ( " ireivXeKvrai) eireTrXex&TO 

rdrr-co, to arrange, re-ray-fiai " rerdxarai ( c: rerayvrai) irerdxo.ro 

XwpiC-u, to separate, Ke-x&picr-iJ-ai " /cex^piSaTcu ( " K.ex&pib'vrai) eKexcopl8a.ro 
<pfrelp-v, to destroy, e-tp&ap-ixai " ecp&dparai ( " ecp&apvrai) ecp&dparo. 

16. The two Aorists Pass, follow the analogy of verbs in -jii, and hence are 
not treated here. 



$ 117. Remarks on the Formation of the Attic 
Future. 

1 . When one of the short vowels a, e, ?, in the Put. Act, and Mid. of verbs 
in -orco, -aofiai, from stems of two or more syllables, precedes o~, certain verbs, 
after dropping cr, take the circumflexed ending -S>, -ov/xai ; because it was fre- 
quently used by the Attic writers instead of the regular form, this is called 
the Attic Future, e. g. e\dco (usually e'AatW), to drive, ixd-cr-a), Put. Att. e'A<£, -as, 
-cj, -arou, -uijxev, -are, -t7>cri(v) ; reXeco, to finish, reXe-cr-co, Put. Att.TeAoi, -els, -e?, 
'urov, -ovfieu, -eire, -ovcri(v) : reXe-cr-o/xai (reXeo/xai), reXov/j.ai, -e7, -eirai, etc.; 
Kouifa, to carry, Put. KOfit-cr-to, Put. Att. ko/j.i(o, -ie7s, -ie?, -teirov, -iov/j.ei/, -ie7re, 



144 VERBS. ACCENTUATION. [$ 118. 

wv<ri(v) ; tcopuovixai, -ie?, -te?rcu, -lov/xt-frov, etc. This Put. is inflected like the 
forms of contract verbs. 

2. This form of the Fut. is found only in the Inch, Inf., and Part. ; never in 
the Opt., thus, TeAw, reAeiV, reA&v ; but reXsaoifii. The verbs which have this 
form are the following: (a) eAaco (e'Aowa), to drive; reAeco, to finish; /caAeco, 
to call; and, though seldom, aAew, to grind; — (b) all verbs in -t£« (character. 
S) ; — (c) a few verbs in -d £a, very generally j8i/3a£o> ; — (d) of verbs in -pn, all 
m-dvvvp.i and also a/x<pievvvp.i,to clothe (ajj.<pia>,-ie?s, etc.). A few exceptions 
to this Put. are found even in the Attic dialect, e. g. iAdaco X. Cy. 1. 4, 20., i\d- 
ffovras X. An. 7. 7, 55., reAeaovcriu Cy. 8. 6, 3., KaAecreis 2. 3, 22., vopiaovai 3. 
1, 27. (according to the best MSS.) ^(picreo-fre, Isae. de Cleonym. hered. § 51. 



§ 118. Accentuation of the Verb. 

1. Primary Law. The accent is drawn back from the end of the word 
towards the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. 
fiovAeve, fiovAevojxai, fiovAevo-oj/, iravcrov, rv^/ov, but jSovAeuets, fiovAeveiv. On 
the ending -cu, see § 29, E. 6. 

2. This law holds good in compounds, e. g. (f>epe irposcpepe, (pevye encpevye, 
AeTn-e cbroAeiTre; also in words in the Subj., when they are not contracted, e. g. 
KCLTacrxtoy KardcxyS) Kardarx^^v, iirlcnra), iirta7rr]s (but avafioo, airoffTU), 5ia8«, 
irapaSco, ava{icop.GV, etc., on account of the contraction, auafida), avafidafiev, etc.). 
Still, this rule has the following exceptions: (a) the accent cannot go back 
beyond the syllable of the preceding word, which before the composition, had 
the accent, e. g. o.tt65os (air6 the preceding word being accented on the ultimate), 
ffviu-irpoes, iiriax^s, e7rtSes (not airotios, crvpurpoes, eTucrxes, e7Ti5es) 5 (b) the accent 
cannot go back of the first two words of the compound, as in the examples 
just quoted, and also <tvv4k8os, Trapeses (not <rweid>os, but like e/c5os; not 
Trdpev&es, but like ev&es) ; (c) the accent cannot go back of an existing augment 
(this holds of the Impf., Aor., and Plup. as well as of the Perf.), e. g. irposeixov 
like six ov i "^o.pi(Tx ov like Zaxov, i^rjyoy like -fjyov, i£rjv like -f]v (not irp6seix 0J/ > 
Trdpe<rxov, efyyov, Qw) ] SO also TrposrjKOP like i]KOj/, airtipyou like zlpyov, but 
Imp. 'direipye, also a^>?/crai, acp7KTo, like I/ctcu, Tkto. 

Exceptions to the Primary Law. 

3. The accent is on the ultimate in the following forms : — 

(a) In the Inf. second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neut. 
Sing. Part, of the same tense as acute, e. g. Anr&u (from Anrhiv), Anrwv, -6v) 
and in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, etVe, 
eA&e, evpe, Aafie, and t8e (but in composition, &Treiire, cbrJAajSe, direAfre, efriSe). 

(b) Also in the Imp. second Aor. Mid. as circumflex, e. g. Aafiov, 3-oD (from 

Ttd-TJfli). 

Eemark 1. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials ) of the second Aor. 
Act. draws back the accent in all verbs according to the primary law, e. g. 
zKfiaAe, e£eAi&e, skSos, endore, cbr^Sos, dWSoTe, /xerdSos, pLerdSoTs (yet not dnodos, 



$ 118.] VERBS. ACCENTUATION. 145 

fitraSos, see JSTo. 2), but e/C|8aAe?v, eK^aAcov, iicXnreiv, e^eA&c&v, etc. But in the 
Imp. Sing, second Aor. Mid. of verbs in -a, the circumflex remains on the 
ultimate in compounds also, e. g. infiaAov, a<piK.ov, eKAnrov, iiriAaSrov, acpeAov, 
iveveynov ; so in verbs in -pi, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla- 
bic preposition, e. g. irpodov, ivSrov, acpov : yet the accent is drawn back, when 
the verb is compounded with a dissyllabic preposition, e. g. airotiov, KardSfov, 
cnr6&ov ; but in the Dual and PL of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all 
cases drawn back, e. g. e/c/3aAe<r&e, airoAdfieo-&e, irpoSoa&e, ev&ea&e, Hfpec&e, 
Kard&ea&e. 

(c) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -s (Gen. -ros), con- 
sequently in all active Participles of verbs in -fit, as well as in those of the first 
and second Peif. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass, of all verbs, e. g. fiefiov- 
XevKws (Gen. ■6ros). ) Trecprivc&s (Gen. -otos), fiovXtv&els (Gen. -cj/tos), rvireis (Gen. 
-4vros), lards (Gen. -dvros), ri&els (Gen. -evros), SiSovs (Gen. -6vros), Ssikvvs 
(Gen. -vvros), Siaards, in&els, TrpoSovs, Gen. diaardvros, eic&evros, irpodSvros. 

Rem. 2. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytone, is an excep- 
tion, e. g. iraiSevads, Gen. TraiSevaavros. 

(d) In the Sing, of the first and second Aor. Subj. Pass, as circumflex, e. g. 
Bov\€v&a>, rpifico (a> being contracted from -ecw). 

4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : — 

(a) In the Inf. of Perf. Mid. or Pass., of first Aor. Act. and second Aor. 
Mid. ; also in all infinitives in -vat, hence in all active infinitives according to 
the formation in -fit, as well as in the Inf. of first and second Aor. Pass, and 
of the first and second Perf. Act. of all verbs, e. g. rervcp&ai, PefiovAevafrai, 
rerip.r]a&ai, ir€(piAria&ai, /j.e/j.i<r&w(r&ai ] — <pvAa£ai, fiovAevaai, rijj.r)(Tai, <piAr)aai, 
fiioftaxrai ; — Aiirea&ai, e/c&eVdttt, diad6cr&ai] — Icrrdvai, ri&evai, SiSdvai, Seinvvvai, 
arrival, iKcrrr}vai, &e7vai, iK&elvat, dovvai, fieradovvai : — &ovAev&r)vaL, rpifirjvai ; 
— flefiovAeuKevai, AtAonrevai. 

(b) In the Participle Perf. Mid. or Pass., e. g. (SefiovAev/jievos, -fievi], -fxevov, 
renp.T)iJ.4vos, irccpiAr/fxevos. 

(c) As circumflex in the Dual and Plu. of the first and second Aor. Subj. 
Pass., e. g. f3ovAev£rai}j.€V. 

Rem. 3. The three corresponding forms of the Inf. first Aor. Act., Imp. 
first Aor. Mid., and the third Pers. Sing. Opt. first Aor. Act., when they consist 
of three or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished 
from one another by the accent, in the following manner : — 

Inf. 1st Aor. A. fiovAevcrai, Imp. 1st Aor. M. fiovAevcrai, Opt. 1st Aor. A. jSouAeiVcu, 
irovqaai, irolrjcrai, iroirjffai. 

But when the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the Inf. 
first Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt., first Aor. Act., e. g. 
<pvAa£ai ; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. <pvAa£ai. 

J3 



146 VERBS. SYLLABIC AUGMENT. [$$ 119, 120?. 



* 119. Further view of the Augment and Redu- 
plication. 

1. After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication 
($ 108, 3), it is necessary to treat them more particularly. 

2. As has been already seen, all the historical tenses (the 
Impf., Plup., and Aor.) take the augment, hut retain it only in 
the Ind. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal 

§ 120. (a) Syllabic Augment. 

1. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem 
begins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing e 1 to the 
stem, in the Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication in the 
Plup. In this way, the verb is increased by one syllable, and 
hence this augment is called the syllabic augment, e. g. /3ov- 
Xevw, Impf. i-fiovXevov, Aor. i-fiov\evcra, Plup. i-j3e-/3ov\evK€Lv. 

2. If the stem begins with p, this letter is doubled when the 
augment is prefixed (§ 23, 3), e. g. pun™, to tJiroiv, Impf. eppnrrov> 
Aor. eppaj/a, Perf. tppi<f>a. Plup. ippcfaw. 

Remark 1. The three verbs fiovAofiai, to will ; Svuafiai, to be able; and 
ueAAco, to be about to do, to intend, among the Attic writers take 77, instead of e, 
for the augment ; still, this is found more among the later than the earlier 
Attic writers, e. g. ifiovXrj&rjv and j]l3ov\r)&r)i' ; i8wd,/j.7]v and 7]5vt/d/j.rju, idwf}&T)v 
and 7]dvvr)^rjv (but always iSwda&rjv) 5 e/ieWoj/ and 7^u.eAAoi\ The Aorist is 
very seldom rj/xeXXrjaa (comp. X. H. 7. 4, 16. 26). 

Rjem. 2. Among the Attic writers, the augment e is often omitted in the 
Pluperfect ; in compounds, when the preposition ends with a vowel ; in sim- 
ples, when a vowel which is not to be elided precedes, e. g. avafiefiriKei, X. An. 
5, 2, 15 ; KaTadedpa l uJ)Kecrai', X. H. 5. 3, 1 ; KaTaXeXenrro, X. Cy. 4. 1, 9 ; Kctra- 
TreTTTc&Kei, Th. 4, 90; ai cwfrrJKcu yeyeurjvro, X. Cy. 3. 2, 24 (according to the 
best MSS.) ; but in the Impf. and Aorists, the syllabic augment is omitted 

1 According to analogy, we may suppose that e is prefixed to all verbs in the 
augmented tenses, whether the verbs begin with a vowel or consonant. If the 
verb begins with a consonant, e appears as an additional syllable, e. g. %-irpar- 
tov, but if with a vowel, e is assimilated with that vowel and lengthens it, if it 
is not already long, e. g. ayca, Impf. eayov = tfyov ; efreAw, Impf. eed-eAov == 7>'&e- 
Kov ; okgXXco, Impf. ioneXXov = tiiceXXov. If the word begins with a long vowel, 
it absorbs e, e. g. T)Xd<XKO), Impf. H\Xa.(TKov = yXaarKov ; a>&££o, Impf. ici>2n(ov = 
&&i£ov. When the verb begins with e, the augment e is sometimes contracted 
With this into ei, e. g. dx "* instead of ^x w - 



$§ 121, 121.] VERBS. TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 



147 



only in the lyric parts of the tragedies, and here not often ; in the dramatic 
portions it is rarely omitted, and only in the speeches of the messengers (pf)(reis 
ayyeXiKai) ; also at the beginning and middle of the trimeter, and likewise at the 
beginning of a sentence, and even in these cases but seldom. The Impf. 
Xpy v, which, together with ixpv^i is used in prose, is an exception. 



§ 121. (b) Temporal Augment. 

The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins 
with a vowel ; it consists in lengthening the first stem-vowel. 
This is called the temporal augment because it increases the 
time, e. g. 



a becomes 
e 


V, 


g. "aya 


Impf. j)yov 


Perf. ^%a 

" fjXTTlKa 


Plup. ^x 6 " 7 
" i]\irlKetv 


t: 


h 

0), 


' 6/XlX4(l) 

1 'v&pi(u 


' ; 'lK4revov 
" &fii\ovv 


" 'lic4TevKa 

" b)fll\7]Ka 


" ' liter eviceiv 

" &/J.l\7)K€lV 

" 'vfipiKeiv 


at " 
av » 

01 « 


y\v, ' 


: alp ea 
1 av\4o) 
'' qIkt'i^o) 


" 7?poui/ 

" 7]V\0VV 


" T)pT]K.a 

" f\vKr\Ka 

" $KTlKa 


" rjprjKeiv 

" (pKTlKeiV. 



Remark. Verbs which begin with 7j, f, u, a>, ou, and et, do not admit the 
augment, e. g. ^rrdofjiai, to be overcome, Impf. tjtt w/u-rju, Perf. tjtttjiUcu, Plup. 
rjTT-f] ij.7ti/ ] 'I ir 6o), to press, Aor. "lircixra; 'virv6(i>, to lull to sleep, Aor. "ibrj/axra ; 
u(pe\4co, to benefit, Impf. bxp4\eov; ovTaCa), to wound, Impf. ouTa^oz/; et/cw, 
to yieW, Impf. d/coy, Aor. eT|a ; €t/cdXa>, to Ween, is an exception, which among 
the Attic writers, though seldom, is augmented, e. g. efrca^bj/, elicao-a, zXnaaixai, 
6eldom r)Ka£ov (e. g. Th. 6, 92. i)Ka(ov, in the best MSS.), fiKaaa, riKao-fiai. 
Also those verbs whose stem begins with eu, are* usually without an augment, 
e. g. (tixopai, to supplicate, evx6/j.r)v, more rarely t)vxom v -> Dut ^ er ^ yvyH-u ( n °t 
tvy/xat) ; cvplo-Kw, to find, in good prose, always omits the augment. 



$ 122. Remarks on the Augment. 

1. Verbs beginning with & followed by a vowel, have d instead of 77, e. g. 
'dfo, (poet.), to perceive, Impf. y cuoj/ • but those beginning with d, ov, and 01 fol- 
lowed by a vowel, do not admit the augment, e. g. 'ar)5tCop.ai, to have an un- 
pleasant sensation, Impf. 'd-ndi^o/xriu : avaivu, to dry, Impf. avaivov; olaKi£(i), to 
steer, Impf. oldua&v ; also avakiaKw, to destroy, though no vowel follows d, has 
avdXuxra, avOXaiKa, as well as avr)\w(ra, dWjXw/ca. But the poetic aeioa) (prose 
£8w), to sing, and dWa> (Att. ao-aw). to rush, take the augment, e.g. ■fjeiSoj/ (prose 
»j5oj/). rji^a (Att. fifa) ; olofxai, to '< V, ,, . w6p.T}v, etc. does not belong here, since 
the following ot, is not a part of the stem. 



148 VERBS. REDUPLICATION. [$ 123 

2. Some verbs also beginning with oi and followed by a consonant, do not 
take the augment, e. g. oIkov p e co, to guard the house, Aor. oiKovprjaa ; olvifa, to 
smell of wine, Impf. oiviQov] olv 6 co, to intoxicate, Perf. Mid. or Pass, olvwfievos 
and (f>v(a{x4vos ; ola-rpdu, to make furious, Aor. o^iarp-naa. 

3. The twelve following verbs, beginning with e, have ei instead of t\ for the 
augment, viz. law, to permit, Impf. efav, Aor. efacra; i&i£co,to accustom (to 
which belongs also efo&a, to 6e accustomed, from the Epic &d-co) ; e To" a, poetic 
Aor. (stem 'EA), to place (in prose only, Part. Aor. Mid. ecrdfievos and ela-dfievos, 
establishing, founding) ; lAiVirw, to wind ; eA/cco, to draw ; Aor. etA/cucm (stem 
'EAKT) ; eTAov, to to&e, Aor. (stem 'EA) of cu'pe'co; Ziro/xai, to follow ; ipyd- 
Co /j. a i, to work ; epirco, kpirv £cd, to creep, to go; ia-nduyto entertain ; % x w > to 
have (on the Epic et/xai, see § 230). 

4. The six following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal, 
augment : — 

&yvv ft i, to break, Aor. za£a> etc. (§ 187, 1). 

a\i(TKOfjLai, capior, Perf. eaAco/ca and ^Aewca, captus sum (§ 161, 1). 

a j/ 5 a »/ a>, to please (Ion. and poet.), Impf. hdvdavov, Perf. eaSct, Aor. eaSo? 

(§ 230.) 
o u p e co, mingere, iovpovv, iovprjica. 
co 3- e co, to push, ido&ow, etc. (sometimes without the augment, e. g. Sicod-oOiTo, 

Th. 2, 84 ; e'lcocr^Tjcroy, X. H. 4. 3, 12 ; &frei, PI. Charm. 155, c). 
coj/eo/iot, to buy, Impf. iccvov/xTju (uyovfirjUf Lys. Purg. Sacril. 108. § 4; e|co- 

vovvto, Aeschin. c. Ctes. c. 33 ; cWcove?To, Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. ewv-ncrd' 

fxriv (see however § 179, 6.), Perf. iwvnfxai. 

5. The verb eopTct^co, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second 
syllable, Impf. eupraCoy. The same is true of the following forms of the 
Plup. II.: — 

EIKH, second Perf. ecu/ca, lam like, Plup. icpKeiv. 

€\TT0fxai, to hope, second Perf. eoXira, I hope, Plup. ecoAirety. 1 

EPm, to do, second Perf. eopya, Plup. i&pyeiv. ) 

6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at the 
same time, the Spiritus Asper of the stem being then transferred to the € of 
the augment : — 

opdca, to see, Impf. ec&pwv, Perf. kApaKa, kupafj.ai. 

avolyw, to open, Impf. av4q>yov, Aor. cWco|a (Inf. avo?|at), etc. 

a\lcrKOfj.ai, to be taken, Aor. ed\cov (Inf. &Aco>cu, a), and 7/Acoj/. 



§ 123. Re duplication. 

1. Reduplication ($ 108, 4) is the repeating the first conso- 
nant of the stem with e. This implies a completed action, and 
hence is prefixed to the Perf., 1 e. g. Xi-XvKa, to the Fut. Perf., 

1 Strictly, we may say that the first letter of all verbs is repeated in the 
Perf., whether the verb begins with a vowel or a consonant. When the conso* 



* 123.] 



VERBS. 



REDUPLICATION. 



149 



e. g. K£-Koo-jxr)aro}x<u (from Kocr/xeto), and to the Plup., which, as an 
historical tense, takes also the augment e before the reduplica- 
tion, e. g. l-fiz-{3ov\evKuv. This remains in all the modes, as 
well a^ in the Inf. and Part. 

2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem 
begins with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid ; but 
verbs beginning with p, yv, yX, /3X,* take only the simple aug- 
ment, except /?Aa7TT(D fiifiXacfia, fiXaacfirjfieo) /Je/^Aacr^/x^Ka, and 
fiXao-Tavaj (SejSXdcTTrjKa and ej3Xa.arTr)Ka } e. g. 



Auco, to loose, 
&vw, to sacrifice, 
(bvTevw, to plant, 
Xopevw, to dance, 
ypd<pa, to write, 
kAiVoj, to hend down, 
Kpiuw, to judge, 
irueo), to breathe, 
frAdco, to bruise, 
pi-rrTca, to throw, 
yvwpt£w, to make known, 
£Aa/ceuo>, to be slothful, 
yXiKpu, to carve, 



Perf. Ae-Au/ccc 

" re-dvica (§ 21, 2.) 

" Tre-<pvT€VKa (§ 21, 2.) 

" Ke-xopevKa (§ 21, 2.) 

" y4-ypa<pa, 

" k4-k\iko. 

" Ke-Kpaca 

u Tri-TTvevKa 

" Te-frAo/ea (§ 21, 2.) 

" ifiPup* (§ 23, 3.) 

i-yvwpiKa 

e-$Aa/cewca 

e-yAv<pa 



Plup. i-\e-\vK€iv 

" i-re-fruKeiv 

" i-Ke-xopevneiv 

' ; i-ye-ypdcpeiv 

;; i-Ke-KpiK€U/ 

" i-ire-TTvevKeiv 

" i-re-frAaKeu/ 

" ippicpsiv 

" i-yvwpiKeiv 

u i-fiAaicevKeiv 

" i-y\6(peiv. 



3. Besides the verbs just mentioned beginning with p, yv, /3A, 
yA, the reduplication is not used, when the stem begins with a 
double consonant or with two single consonants, which are not 
a mute and liquid, or with three consonants, e. g. 



£r)\6a), to emulate, 
£€v6(0, to entertain, 
\pd\Xu, to sing, 
<nrelpa>, to sow, 
KTlfa, to build, 
invacro), to fold, 
CTpo.rr\yiui, to be a general. 



Perf. i-tfXctiKa 

" e-|eVw/co 

" e-^aA/ca 

u €-<rirapKa 

" e-KTi/CO 

" %-TTTVXO- 

" i-arparriyriKa 



Plup. £-£t)\(!)K€lV 

• " i-\pd\K€lU 
" i-o-n-apKeiv 

" i-KTLKZlV 

" i-TTTvxeiv 

" i-o~TpaTT\y{]K£iv 



nant is repeated, € is joined with it in order to vocalize it. If the verh begins 
with a vowel, the vowel is doubled and the two coalesce, if the initial vowel is 
short, and thus font a long vowel ; but if the initial vowel is long, it absorbs 
the other, e. g. 

frya>, Perf. properly aaxa = ^x a 

dyeipcti, " " ieyepKa = ijyepica 

Sometimes when the verb begins with e, the double e, instead of coalescing 
into -7], is contracted into -et, e. g. 4du, Perf. e5fa/co, instead of ^a/co. 

1 Words beginning with these letters are excepted on account of the diffi- 
culty of repeating them. 



13* 



150 VERBS. ATTIC REDUPLICATION. [$ 124 

Remark 1. The two verbs fi i [i v 4} a k w (stem MNA), to remind, and kt<xo* 
u.ai, to acquire, though their stem begins with two consonants, which are not a 
mute and a liquid, still take the reduplication, fie-fivri/juu, ks-kthplcu, i-/jLe-/xwfjfMr)v y 
i-K€-KT^[X7]v. The regular form eKT-nfiai, is Ionic, but it is found also in Aesch. 
Prom. 792, and in Plato with Kc-icrrinai] likewise in Th. 2, 62. -Kposf&T-nfxeva. 
(as according to the MSS. it must probably be read, though elsewhere, Th. 
always uses KeKTrjfxat). Perfects f )rmed by Metathesis or Syncope, are seem- 
ing exceptions to the rules of reduplication, e. g. 5e5/«jKa, ireirTafxai, etc. (§§22, 
and 16, 8.) 

4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this 
liquid, but take et for the augment : — 

Aafxfidva, to take, Perf. tfXr}<pa. Plup. elxtyeiv 

Xay%dvoo, to obtain f " e/fA^X" " eiX'f)X eiv 

Xiya, crvXXsyo}, to Cittect, " ffvvelXoxa, ffvvetXey/xat " ffvv€iX6x^v 
'PEH, to say, " dp-nica " €lp-f)Keiv 

fieipopcu, to obtain, " cljxaprai (with rough breathing), it is fated. 

Rem. 2. The regular reduplication is sometimes found in the Attic poets, 
e. g. AeA^ue&a, tyXXeXtyixeuos, also in Xen. €TrtXeXeyfx4voi occurs, Cy. 3. 3, 41 
(Altorf, aireiX^yiiivoi), and e/cAeAe'x^at, H. 1. 6, 16. — AiaXeyofiai, to converse, 
has Perf. dieiXeypai, though the simple Xeyoo, in the sense of to say, always 
takes the regular reduplication, XeXey/xcu, dictus sum (Perf. Act. wanting) 



§ 124. Attic Reduplication. 

1. Several verbs, beginning with a, e, or o, repeat, in the Perf. 
and Plup. before the temporal augment, the first two letters of 
the stem This is called the Attic Reduplication The Plup. 
then veiy rarely takes an additional augment; e.g. SiwpwpvKTo, 
X. An. 7. 8, 14 ; so rjK-rjKoew, but sometimes d/oyKoeiv. 

2. The verbs, which in the Attic dialect have this reduplica- 
tion, are the following : — 

(a) Those whose second stem-syllable is short by nature : — 

aX4a>, -«, to grind, iiiia, -a>, to vomit, 

(a.X-'fiXeKa) aX-riXefffiai 4fJL-i]fi€Ka. ifi-ii^ffitai 

e/<t-rj/ie/ceij/ i/x-r]fx4cr/x'nv 

iXaco (iXaiyoo), to drive, 
eX-ijXaita, iX-'fjXafiai 
iX-7]Xa.K€iv iX-r}XdfJ.7]y 

'OAEH, ohXvfii, to destroy, 
oX-dtXefca Perf. II. 6x-toXa ('OAfl) 
bX-wXineiv Plup. II. oX-uXttv 



(aX-riXiiceu/) 


aX-7]Xe(TiJ.7}v 


ap6(t>, -co, 


to plough, 


(ap-7)poKa) 


ap-'fipo/xat. 


(ap-r]p6iceiv) 


ap-7]p6fj.r]y 


'OMOft, 6/xvv/xi, to swear, 


Ofl-dfJLOKa 


ofi-ojfjLOfffjiai 


OLl-C0fJ.6K€lV 


o/x-cofi6(rfi7]v 



4 i25.| AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION IN COMPOUNDS. 151 

e\4yX&i to convince, opvrrw, to dig, 

(eA-VjAeyxa) 4\--r\hzyfxai 6p-a>pvxa op-capvy/xai and tipvy/xai 

(£\-7i\.4yx*w) 4\-7]\4y/xT]v bp-upvxeiv bp-wpvyjxrjv and apvyfxrjv. 

Further: eAtVtreo, to wind, \iA-T}\ixa), i\-r]\iyp.ai (the rough breathing be- 
ing rejected), and in good usage among later writers. eihiyfiai ; 6(<o ('OAX2), 
to smell, oS-uda] <t>4pw ('ENEKH), to carry, ii/~7}i/oxa, iu~T]veyp.ar, ifffrico fEAH), 
to eat, i8-r)<5oKa, iS-rideo-fiai ; a^ycc, to lead, Perf. usually ^x a > ayyoxa (instead 
of ay--t]yoxa, so as to soften the pronunciation) is later, and is rejected by the 
Atticists as not Attic, though in I;ysias 3 but Perf. Mid. or Pass, always ^y fx.au 

(b) Those which, in the second stem-syllable have a vowel 
long by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduplication 
(except epetSoo) : — 

a\el(pu^ to anoint, o.kovoo, to hear*, 

a\-r]\i(pa aK-7]Xikifx.ai aic-7]Koa y\KOv<Tfxai 

a\-T)\i(peu/ a\-r}\(fi/j.7)v 7}k-t] k6 eiv ijKOixrfxrjv 

'EAET0H, epxofxai, to come, ipelSw, to prop, 

4\-7)\v&a ip-T] pe ilea ip-ripeKTixai 

4\-7}Av&eiv i-p-ripeiiceiv ip-7]pei<T(A7jv 

ayelpoa, to collect, iyeipw, to wake, 

■ay-riyspica ay-r}yepfx.eu (iy-rjyepica) iy-^yepfiai 

b.y-"t\y£pK€iv ay-Tjye pfj.r}j/ (iy-rjyepKzw) 4y-t\y 4 pix.-r\v. 

So from iyeipa comes the second Perf. iyp-^yopa (on account of euphony 
instead of iy-yyopa), I wake, second Plup. Act. iyprjyopeiv, I awoke. 

Remark 1. The forms included in parentheses are such as are not found 
in good Attic prose. 

Rem. 2. The verb Jzyco, to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
(bepcoy to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication ; here, however, the 
reduplicated vowel takes the temporal augment, and that only in the Ind., and 
the vowel of the stem remains pure : — 

&yoi, to lead, Aor. II. tfy-ayev, Inf. ayayCiv, Aor. II. Mid. yyayS/xrtv ; 
<p4po), to carry (stem 5 ErK), Aor. II. tfv-eyKov, Inf. e»'-ey/ee»', Aor. I. tfy-eyKa, 
Inf. 4u-4yicai, Aor. Pass, ? qv-4x^rnv, Inf. 4v-^x^W al - 



•$ 125. Augment and Reduplication in Compound 

Words. 

\ First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the 
augment and reduplication between the preposition and the 
verb ; the final vowel of prepositions, except ire/at and 7rpo, is 
elided [$ 13, 2, (a)] ; vpo frequently combines with the augment 
by means of Crasis ($ 10), and becomes 7rpov; 4k before the 
syllabic augment is changed to ii ($ 15, 3 ) ; and ev and crvv 



152 



VERBS. REMARKS. 



[* 126. 



resume their v which had been assimilated 
($ 19, 3), or dropped (20, 2), e. g. 

aTro-fid\\oi>, to throw from, Im. air-efiaT^ov Pf. airo-fiefiAriKa Pip. 



18, 2), or changed 



irepi-tfiaWov 

irpo-ePaKkov 

irpovfiaWov 

e|-e73ccAAoj/ 

aw-sXtyov 

Cvv-ippiirrov 

iv-tyiyv6\n\v 

iv-efiaWov 

ffvv-eanzva^ov 



•7re/H-j8e/3A?j na 

Trpo-fiefiAr)Ka 

irpo-fiefiAriKa 

e/c-jSejSAij/ca 

ffvv-eiAoxa 

<rw-4ppi<pa 

£y-yzyova 

«rw-eo7cewtKa 



a7T-ej8e)8A^/cetj' 

7T€pt-6)8ej8A7}«:etv 

jrpo-efiefi\.7)Keiv 

jrpovf}efiA.7}K€ur 

o"yj/-e{AJxetj/ 

ffvv-epp'upeiv 

ip-eyeyoveiv 

iv-efitfiXriiceip 

<rvi/-e<rKeuaK€iv. 



7T6pi-^aAAw, to f/i?wy around, 
irpo-PdWa}, to throw before, 

€K-j8aAAa>, to if7zrow Oltf, 
truA-Aeya), to coZ/ec£ together, 
(rvp-piiTTco, to throw together, 
iy-ytyvo/jLcu, to be in, 
ejU-jSaAAa), to i/irow in, 
(rv-aicevdfa, to pack up, 

2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with 8us, take the aug 
ment and reduplication, (a) at the beginning, when the stem 
of the simple verb begins with a consonant or with rj or o>; (b) 
but in the middle, when the stem of the simple verb begins 
with a vowel, except rj or w, e. g. 

Sus-Tuxew, to be unfortunate, i-dvs-rvxovv Se-dvs-rvxv^^ e-Se-Sus-Tux^Kew 
5us-&>7rec«>, to ma&e ashamed, i-dvs-cairovv Se-Sus-ctnrrj/ca e-Se-Sus-aTr^/cew 
Sus-a/36(TTeco, to be displeased, 8vs-rjpe<TTovs dvs-Tjpea-rrjKa <Svs-7]p€<rT7}Keiv. 

Eemakk 1. Yerbs compounded with ev may take the augment and redupli- 
cation at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit them at the 
beginning, and evepyeriw usually in the middle, e. g. 

ey-Tuxeoj, to be fortunate, Impf. t)v-tvx*ov, but commonly ev-rvxeov 

ev-ux^ouai, to feast well, " ev-ax^H-W 

ev-epytrico, to do good, " ev-rjpy^reou, but commonly ev-epyereov, Perf. 

ev-rjpyeTrjKa, but commonly ev-epy^TrjKa. 

3. Tliird Rule. All other compounds take the augment and 
reduplication at the beginning, e. g. 

/iv&oXoyea, to relate, £(j.v&o\6yeov ue-/xvdro\6yr)Ka 

olnodo[x4a), to build, ^Kodo/j-eov <(iKcZ6yLT]Ka. 

Thus irafiprjo-idCofAai (from irappTjcria, and this from irav and pTjaris), to speak 
openly, Aor. i-irap^rjaiaa-diJLrjv, Perf. ire-Trappr)o~lao-[xcu. 

Eem. 2. 'OSoTrotea) has the Perf. o)So7re7roi^(r3-ot, X. An. 5. 3, 1. Lycurg. c. 
Leocr. § 139, has h'jroTerpocp'rjKeu. 



1 126. Remarks. 

1 . The six following words compounded with prepositions take the augment 
in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi- 
tion : — 



$ 126.] VERBS. REMARKS. 153 

6.fx.TrexofM>u, to clothe one's self, Impf. ^/xTreixo/xriv, 1 or afxireix. Aor. -h/xireax^H-Vy 3 
avexoy-ai, to endure (not av4x<») , " Tiveixofxyv " t]v^<tx^M v 

a.fM<piyvo4a), to be uncertain, " ^(peyvoovu and 7]jj.(piyv6ovv 

avop&oa, to raise up, " riv&p&ovv Perf. rivwp&coKa " 7]v<t>p&a)<ra 

ivox^eco, to molest, " yvax^ovv " ijj/^x^vxa " ^y^xA^ca 

irapowew, to riot, " tirapcpvovv " ireirap^v-nKa " iTrapyvncra. 

ti. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not 
compounded with prepositions, but are derived from other compound words, 
viz. 

Stairaw (from dlaira, food) , (a) to feed, (b) to 6e a judge, Impf. eStj/rajj' and 
di^ruy, Aor. tZiyr-ncra and diyrricra ; Perf. SeSi^TTj/ca ; Impf. Mid. SirjT(a/x7}i> 

5iaKov€w, to serve (from 8ia/cows, servant), Impf. ihi-q^vovv and §it]k6vovv, 
Perf. SeStTyK^/fa 

afjupHTfirireu) (from AM*I2BHTH2), to dispute, Impf. Tuxfyzvfr-rrrovv and jifi<pi<r- 
firiTovv. 

3. Exceptions to the first rule. Several verbs compounded with prepositions, 
take the augment before the preposition, since they have nearly the same 
signification as the simple verbs, e. g. 

ifxptyvoea) (voea), to be uncertain, Impf. 7)/j.<piyv6ovv, or ■hp.cpsyvoovv (No. I) 

ap.(pi4vvvfj.i, to clothe, Aor. 7]fx<pUaa, Perf. JiiM<pUa/j.ai 

iiricTajJiai, to know, Impf. y\Tti(na.}i.'r\v 

cuplriiAi, to dismiss, " acpiovv and T]<p[ovv, or 7]<p{eiv [biita 

Ka&i£a}, to set, " iKaSnCov (old Att. also Ka&7£bv), Pf. ice/cei- 

Kabefy/Acu, to sit, " eKa&e£6fi-nj/ and Ka&e£ (without Aug.) 

K<i&7i/Aai, to sit, " £Kc£rr)iJ.nv and Ko£rt}}ji.r\v 

Ko&evSw, to sleep, " d/ca&evSoj', seldom /ca^uSoy. 

4. Those verbs are apparently an exception to the first rule, which are not 
formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by deriva- 
tion from a word already compounded, e. g. 

ivauTiovfjiai, to oppose one's self to (from evavrios) Impf. rjvavTioiixriv 

avr id ik4(i>, to defend at law ( " avriSiKos) " J)vti8ikovv and tjvt^Ikow 

avTifioAeca, to hit upon ( " ai/TifioX-h) " 7)vri&6Xovv 

ifxitopacti, to gain Lij traffic ( " ifiiropr)) " 7ifj.Tropow 

i/j-irtSSa), to establish ( " I/wreSos) ' ; $uxir£Zovv. 

5. Many verbs, however, which apparently are formed only by derivation, are 
treated, even by the best classical writers, as if they were compounded of a 
simple verb and a preposition. Thus, Trapavo/j.4oo, TrapriuSixow and Trapev6/xovu, 
Traprjuo/xria-a, Perf. TrapaveuS/x^Ka, although it is not from irapd and avofxiw or 
vofxew, which two verbs are not in use, but from the compound irapdvo/xos ; so 
further, eyxelpo (from 'ErXEIPOS), to take in hand, Impf. £v€x*' L P ovv 5 ef'^v 
fieu (from 'EIIIGTMOS), to desire, Impf. eTrefrv/AOvu; ivSv jxio pai, Aor. ive&v/A-f)' 
frr\v, Perf. svT&vfjL-nnai; Kar-nyopeu (from Kari]yopos), to accuse, Impf. KaT7j7<$- 
pow, Perf. KaT7)y6p7]Ka; ir pobv/xov/Aai (from Trpo&u^os), to cfesire earnestly, 
Impf. TrpovSuiAOv/Ariv and irpo^vfjLOv/xriu; so iynwiiia&iv, TrpocprjTeveiv, eVeSpevcJV, 
hcK>.-n<Tid^iu, viroTTTeveiv, iitn-nhzveiv, tfupavi^ziv, cvvspyCtv, etc. 

1 So PI. Phaed. 87, 6, according to most and the best MSS. 
* Eur. Med. 1128, and Aristoph. Thesm. 165. 



154 VE?.BS IN -W. — DERIVATION Of TENSES. [j$$ 127, 128 



Formation of the Tenses of Verbs in -<a. 

h 127. Division of Verbs in -w according to the 
Characteristic. 

Verbs in -co are divided into two principal classes, accord- 
ing to the difference of the characteristic (§ 108, 5) : — 

I. Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel ; these are 
again divided into two classes : — 

A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, 
except a, e, o, e. g. iratDev-co, to educate ; \v-coj to loose ; 

B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is a, e, or o, e. g. 
rifia-co, to honor ; <j>i\i-co, to love ; fuo*&6~co, to let out 
for hire. 

II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant; 
these are again divided into two classes : — 

A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine 
mutes, e. g. \el7r-c0, to leave ; ifXeic-co, to twine ; ire'fe-to, 
to persuade ; 

B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four 
liquids, \, fi, v, p, e. g. ayye\\-co, to announce ; ve/x-co, 
to divide ; <j)alv-co, to shoiv ; (f&elp-a), to destroy. 

Remark. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act., 
all verbs are divided into : — 

(a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not 
accented, e. g. \v-u, irKeic-a, etc. ; 

(b) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumflexed in the first Pers. ; these 
are consequently contract verbs, e. g. rifxw, <(>i\w, fwrfroi. 

§ 128. Derivation of Tenses. 

All tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, the inflection-endings men- 
tioned above (§ 113), being appended to this. The Primary tenses only' have 
a distinct tense-characteristic (§ 110); this is always wanting in the Pres. 
and Impf., the mode-vowels and personal-endings being sufficient; but the 
Pres. and Impf. very frequently strengthen or increase the pure stem, e. g. 
rvirr-u} (pure stem TTn), a^apr-duo) (pure stem 'AMAPT) ; the Secondary tenses 
never admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure stem, and without 
the tense-characteristic ; yet, in certain cases (§ 140), they admit a change of 



I 129.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF PURE VERBS. 155 

the stem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which are formed from a common stem, 
may be distinguished from each other and classed by themselves. Tenses, 
included in such a class, may be said to be derived from one another. The 
principal classes are the three following : — 

I. Tenses, which may strengthen the pure stem. These are the Pres. and 
Impf. Act., Mid., or Pass., e. g. 

(pure stem TTII) tutt-t-w rvir-r-ojiai 

%-TVTT-T-OV i-TVTT-T-6flT]V. 

II. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These are the Primary 
tenses, e. g. 

(a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act, e. g. (ir4-(ppaB-Ka) Tr4-<ppmca, i-ire-ippa- 

(b) Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. These do not have the tense-charac- 
teristic; from the Perf. Mid. or Pass, the Put. Perf. is formed by 
rejecting -fiat and annexing -orofiai, e. g. re-Tu^-jucu (instead of t4tvtt- 
fxai). ire-rvfi/xriv, rervyofjiai (instead of TeTU7rcro,uai). The Perf. has 
a short vowel, but the Put. Act. and Mid. a long vowel, e. g. Xva, 
\4\vKa, AeAfytcu, Xvaca, Xvcro/nai, 54a, deSrjKa, deSe/icu, Srjcrco, Srjao/xai ; 
so the Put. Perf. has a long vowel, e. g. AeAucro/xat, 5edr,<ro}xai ; 

(c) Pirst Put. and Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. rfya rinj/ofiat 

e-Tu^a i-rirtpd.iJ.rjv ; 

(d) Pirst Aor. and first Put. Fass., e, g. i-rvcp-^Tjj/ rvip-^r](rofj.ai. 
III. Tenses, which are formed from the pure stem without a tense-character- 
istic, may yet, in certain cases, admit a change of the stem-vowel. These 
are the Secondary tenses, e. g. 

(a) The second Perf. and second Plup. Act. e. g. re-i-wr-a, i-re-Tihr-eiv ; 

(b) The second Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. 4-Ad&-ov, i-Xa&-6jj.riv from Aav 
Savo) (pure stem AA0) ; 

(c) The second Aor. and second Put. Pass., e. g. i-rvir-riv, rvir-f](rojj.ai. 

4 129. I. Formation or the Tenses op Puke Verbs. 

1. In pure verbs, both Barytoned and Perispomena, the 
tense-endings are commonly appended to the unchanged char- 
acteristic of the verb, e. g. fiovXev-cra), f3ef3ov\zv-Ka. Pure verbs 
commonly form no Secondary tenses, but only the Primary 
tenses; the Perf. with k (W), the Fut. and Aor. with cr and S 
(o-o), o-a, dry, Srjo-o- fxat). Pure verbs, however, are subject to the 
following regular change in the stem : — 

2. The short characteristic vowel of the Pres. and Impf., is 
lengthened in the other tenses, viz. 

I into t, c. g. /j.r)vt<i), to be angry, privi-aa), 4-/jLJivi<ra, etc. 

•0 " v t " kw\v-w (v commonly long), to hinder. kwAu-o-w, k^-kwAv/xqu, etc. 



156 TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. [§ 130 

c into 77, e. g. (piXi-co (cpiXu>), to love, <piA.rj-cra>, ire-cpiXrj-Ka, etc. 

o " w, " juto-3-o-co (fiio-frco), to let out for hire, (iifffrd-ffoo, fxe-p.io^>w-Ka, etc. 

a " 77, " Tiixa-co {TifiS}), to honor, t^tj-cw, re-Tt/ATj-Ka, etc. 

Remark 1. a is lengthened into a, when e, 1, or p precedes it [comp. § 43. 
1, (a)], e. g. 

ia-a, to permit, ia-aca, dao~a, e'laica, e1a[xat, eldfrrji/', effTia-a, to entertain, tenia. 
ow ; <poopa-<a, to steal, (pcapa-aco ; but iyyvd-w, to give as a pledge, iyyv-rjcru) ; )3oa<w, 
to call out, fioTiffofxai, tfSo-ncra (like 07807]). 

The two following imitate those in -edco, -idea, -pact, viz. 
a\oa-co, to strike, to thresh, old Att. Fut. a\oa-<ra> ; but usually aAoTjovw; 
ct.Kpoa-ojj.ai, to hear, Fut. aicpoacrofiai, Aor. ^Kpoaadp^v (like a&poa). 

Rem. 2. The verbs XP« W > to <7* ye an oracle; xp^o/xoi, to wse; and rirpdca 
to bore, though p precedes, lengthen & into 77, e. g. xpTjo-o^ot, rp-fjcrw. 

$ 130. Formation of the Tenses of Pure Verbs ivith 
a short Characteristic-vowel. 

The following pure verbs, contrary to the rule ($ 129, 2) re- 
tain the short characteristic-vowel, either in forming all the 
tenses, or in particular tenses. Most of these verbs assume a 
or in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and first Aor. Pass., and in the 
tenses derived from these, and also in the verbal adjectives; 
such verbs are designated by : Pass, with cr. 

(a) -ta>. 

Xpicc, to sting, Put. xpio-u, Aor. ixpicra, Inf. xp?°' al ' Pass, with a 1 ; (but xP^oj, 
to anoint, Put. xp^ ltr&, > Aor. txpi°' a > ^ n ^ XP^°" at > -A- 01 "' Mid. ixp^^-H-W j Perf. 
Mid. or Pass. Kexpi-cr-ptai, Kexp^frai ; Aor. Pass. expi-cr-^r-nv j verbal adj. 
Xpto'Tos). 

Remark 1. ^rafiw, to perceive, of the Ionic dialect, belongs here (§ 230), 
The poetie a'ica is found only in the Pres. and Impf. ("aiov, § 122, 1). 

(b) -v(o. 

1. 'Avvco (also old Att. avvTw) to complete, Put. avvcru ; Aor. ffwo-a. Pass t . 
with c. 

apuo> (also old Att. apvToo), to draw water. Put. apvcrco', Aor. tfpvcra. Pass. 

with <r. 
p W (0),fo c/ose, e.g. the eyes, Fut. ^u(ra>, Aor. ejiui(ra; but Perf. /ze^O/ca, to J 3 

closed, to be silent. 
wTv<a(h), to spit, Fut. Trrvaa; Aor. Zirrvaa. Pass, with o- (e7TTu-cr-fr7ji/), verbal 

adj. Trrv-cr-r6s. 

2. The following dissyllables in -veo lengthen the short characteristic-vowel 
in the Fut and Aor. Act. and Mid. and in Fut. Perf. Mid., and Suoj also in the 
Perf. and Plup. Act.; but they resume the short vowel in the Perf. and Plup 



$ 130.] TENSES OF PURE VERBS WITH SHORT VOWEL. 157 

Act. (except dvw), Mid. or Pass., in the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and in verbal 
adjectives : — 

5 v to, to wrap up, Fut. Sucrw Aor. *dv<ra Perf. SetivKa d48vf>.ai Aor Pass. eSfobj? 
&&<>), to sacrifice, " Svcrtti " t&vcra. " ridvKa. Tt&vp.ai " " irvfrnv 
\6w, to loose, " Au<r« " lAiicra " \£\vaa AeAv/ucu " " iKvfrnv. 

Rem. 2. The doubtful vowel v is commonly used as long in the Pres. and 
Impf. by the Attic poets ; but in prose it must be considered as short ; hence to 
be accented five, irTve, Ave, etc., and not five, irrve, Ave, etc. 

(c) -acw. 

rekda, to laugh, Put yeXacofiai. (seldom yeXaffu) ; Aor. 4y4\ao~a. Pass. 

■with <r. 
eAaw (usually eXavvu), to drive, Put. eAao-w (Att. caw), etc. See § 158, 3. 
&Aaa>, to bruise, &Aa<rco, etc. Pass, with <r (Te&Aa-ff-ficu, i&\d-<r-frr)i/). 
KXaca, to break, /cAacrw, etc. Pass, with <r (/ce'/cAa-cr-jUcu, iK\d-o--frnv). 
XaXaa, to loosen, xaAa<ra>, etc. Pass, with a* (ixaXd-a-Srnv). 
5 an da (usually SafidCw), domo, Aor. iddfiaaa. Pass, with c. 
nepdw, to transport, to sell, Put. nrepaau ; Aor. iirepdcra; Perf. TceiripdKa. (but 

irepdo), to pass over, Intrans., Put. Trepdcw ; Aor. iwepaaa). These seven 

verbs have a liquid before the characteristic-vowel a. 
<T7raaj, to rfraw, oTracrw, etc. Pass, with <r (eV7ra-cr-$i7i>). 
<r%aa>, to foose, to open, (T^acco, etc. 

(d) -e'a;. 

1. Aloeofiai, to reverence. See § 166, 1. 

d/ceo/^at, to ftea?, cbceVo/icu, 7)Kecrdfir)v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, tfice-cr-ficu; Aor. Pasa. 

^/ce-c-^Tjj'. 
a\4u, to grind, to beat, dAe-<r-a>, Att., yet seldom a\w ; Aor. ^Aecra; Perf. Mid. or 

Pass. aA^Aeo^at (§§ 117, 2, and 124, 2). 
apKew, to suffice, etc. Pass, with <r. 
e>ea>, to wif, Put. ifiecu, etc.; Perf. Act. efi^fieKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, e/t^fir- 

/^at (§ 124, 2). 
£ew, to 6oi7 (usually intrans., and (ewvfii, usually trans.). Pass, with <r. 
|e'o>, to scrape. Pass with o\ — TtAew, to accomplish. Pass, with o- (§ 117, 2). 
Tpe'o>, to tremble, -e<ru, etc.; verbal adj. rpe-c-rSs.— jcew, to pour. See § 154, 

Eem. 1. 

2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others the short vowel: — 
alvzca (in Attic prose i-naiveoi), to praise, Put. oiVeVw ; Aor. fjuea-a; Perf. yvena; 

Aor. Pass, yvefrijvi Put. Pass. a\ve^ri]<TOfiai ; verb. adj. aluerds, -reos; but 

Perf. Mid. or Pass, yvnfiou. 
alpew, to choose, Aor. Pass, ypefrnv; also rjp-fifrnv] atprja-w, ypr)Ka, rjp-nficu. 
ya/xeco, to marry, Put. ymu; Aor. eynfia; Perf yeydfnjKa; Aor. Pass, eyafi-qSrnv 

(I was taken to wife). 
Se'eo, to bind, $t](tw, %hi)<ra., eZr)adp.7)v ; but 8e'5e/ca, deSefiai, itiefrnv; Put. Perf. 

SeST/trojitcu is commonly used for Hcfrhcroficu (the latter is used by Dcm. and 

later writers). 

14 



l5S VERBS.-*- AORiST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH <7. [$ 131. 

eaAe'w, to call, Put. Ka\4cr<a, Att. ko\oo (§ 117, 2); Aor. eKoAecra; Perf. Act. 

/ce/c\r?Ka ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. zce/cX^at, lam called; Put. Perf. Ke/cAiVo^af, 

I shall be called; Aor. Pass. iich^^nv, Put. Pass. /cA.TjdTjo'o^ai ; Put. Mid. 

KaXovfxai ; Aor. Mid. iKaksffajx-nv. 
no&eco, to desire, iro&4(rojj.ai, Lys. 8, 18, PI. Pliaed. 97, a. ; 4ir6&e<ra y Isoc. 4, 122. 19, 

17; elsewhere, 7rod^<ra>, €7ro3ij<ra; Perf. Act. ireir6SrnKa ; ircTo^vpLai ; Aor. 

PaSS. 4lTO&4trfrnV. 

jrovew, laboro, Put. irovrjo-a, etc. (to ztwA;) ; irovzcra) (to be in pain) ; Perf. 7re7ro- 
V7]fca in both senses; Mid. and Pass, always have 77, e. g.^irovno-afxriu and 
4irovf]^7jv, Perf. ireirovn/xai, 

(e) -ow. 
Ap6w, to plough, Put. ap6a<a, Aor fy>otra; Perf. Mid. or Pass. api}po/j.cu (§ 124, 
2) ; Aor. Pass. tydfrnv. 



$ 131. Formation of the Aor. and Fut. Pass., and . 
<t/*e Perf., Plup erf. Mid. or Pass, with <t. 

1. Pure verbs, which retain the short characteristic- vowel in 
forming the tenses, in the Aor. and Fut. Pass, and in the Perf. 
and Plup. Mid. or Pass, (also in the verb, adj.), unite the tense- 
endings 3r]v, //.a 1, etc. to the tense-forms by inserting o- ($ 130), 
e g. 

re\4-w 4-re\4-(r-frnv T€-r4\€-(r-fxai 

Te\€-<T-frf]<ToiAai i-re-TeX4-(T-fX7)v. 

2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have 
a long characteristic -vowel in the -stem, or lengthen the short 
characteristic-vowel of the stem in forming the tenses, have the 
same formation, viz. 

aicovw, to hear, Aor. Pass. 7]kov-c-^7]v, Put. Pass. aicov-(r-frf)(roficu, Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. ^Kov-ff-fxai, Plup. TiKov-ff-jx-nv ; iuavco, to kindle; /ceAeuco, to command; 
the Deponent SiairapaKeAevofiai, to arouse; Kvaiw, K.vb\(*, to scratch (^wai-a-fiat, 
MKwn-ff-ficu, iKval-a-frnv, 4Kvi]-cr-frnv) ; kv\tq), to roll; Aeuw, to stone (iAev-tr-frnu, 
Perf. seems to be wanting) ; £vco, to scrape; iraiw, to strike; ira\al(a,to wrestle 
(iiraAai-<r-&-nv) j ?rAew, to sail; irpieo, to saw ; irralw, to strike against, to stuni' 
ble ; palu (poetic), to destroy ; a-eiw, to shake; vco, to rain, Aor. Pass. v-a-^nv f 
I was rained upon, Perf. Pass, v-c-yitoi (icpv-(r-/j.4vos, X. Ven. 9, 5), Put. v<rofj.cu 
(instead of v-<r-fr(}-<r-op.cu) ; <pp4u>, to send (only in compounds, e. g. elo-<p. y 
iK<p., to lead in), Put. (pp-fto-co, etc., Mid. (pp^o-o/xat, Aor. Pass. 4<ppr}-<T-frnv ; %<( <w, to 
/ieap up (/cexw-c-^uat, 4x&-o'-&w) j XP" W > ^° 5' l " ue an oracle (K4xpi]-<T-ixai, 4x9^'°^ 
fruit/, § 129, Kena, 2) ; xp' i(a -> t0 anoint [§ 130, (a.)] ; ^aueo, to toucft ( ei//av-<r-/iot, 
Hippocr.). 



♦ 131.] VERBS. AORIST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH <T. 159 

3. The following vary between the regular formation and 
that with o- : — 

yeva, to cause to taste, Mid. to taste, to enjoy, Perf. Mid. or Pass. yiyev/Mcu (Eurip.); 

but Aor. Pass, probably 4yev-<r-frr)v. Comp. yevpa, but yev-a-reov. 
Bpda>, to do, Put. opa<ru), etc.; Perf. 5e5pd/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. SeSpd^ot and 

S^Spa-ff-fiai (Th.) ; Aor. Pass. 45pd&frnv (Th.). Verbal adjective Spa-c-ros, 

dpa-ff-reos. 

bpavw, to break in pieces, Perf. Mid. or Pass, r&pav-cr-ficu (Plat, r&paviiai) ; 
Aor. Pass. 4&pav-(T-Sn}v. Verbal adjective frpav-cr-Tos. 

KKaiw, Att. ifXdu, to weep, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeicXavfxcu and n4K\av-o--ixai. 

/cAei&j, to shut, Perf. Mid. or Pass. /ce/cAe^cu commonly, KzK\ei-<T-/j.cu Aristoph=; 
k4k\t)[j.cu Tragedians, Tbu., sometimes PI., rarely Xen. ; Aor. Pass. e/cAef- 
<T-Sri)Vi Attic i/cArf-a-Srii' (Tb.) ; Put. Pass. K\ei-o~-frh<roiJ.ai. Verbal adjective 
KAei-c-Tos, KXrj-a-ros. 

koXovoo, to maim, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KSK6\ov(j.ai and KeKoKov-cr-fAcu ; Aor. 
Pass. 4ko\ov-o'-&7)v and iKo\ovdrr}v. 

Kpovw, to strike upon, Perf. Mid. or Pass, /ce/cpou/iot and (seldom) KeKpov-a-pLat 
(X. H. 7^4, 26) ; Aor. Pass. iKpov-c-Srnv. 

uecc, to heap up, Put. vfjau, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. vivr\p.a.t. {vzirn-a-jxai doubt- 
ful) ; but Aor. Pass. 4vi)-o--&riv (Arrian). Verbal adjective vt]t6s. 

v4a> (collateral form v-nfrw), to spin, Perf. Mid. or Pass. vivn-o--p.ai\ but Aor. 
Pass, kv^rnv. Verbal adjective vtyt6s. 

\pdw,to rub, Perf. Mid. or Pass, fy-n/jLai and tyr}-<r-ficu ; Aor. Pass. tyr\frnv and 
i\\/rj-(T-Str)i/ (instead of which the Attic writers use e^?r/jucu, e^x^" from 

4. The following verbs assume o- in the Aor. Pass., but not 
in the Perf. : — 

fxip.vfj(rKQ} (MNA-fi), to remind, Pf. fxefiirnfxai, I remember, A. P. ifxvi)-o--frnv 
Trueco, to bloiv, ireiririjfj.a.1 (poet.) 4"Kv£v-o~-frnu 

Xpaofiai (xpupai), Utor, KexPW " ixph-vSw 

iravu, to cause to cease, to finish, iriiravfxai 4irav-o--^7]u 

and iiravb-nv, iravfrfjo-op.at Ion. and Tb. Verbal adjective irav-a-reos. 

5. The following verbs, though they retain the short charac- 
teristic-vowel in the Perf. and Aor. Pass., do not assume or: — 

Svco, &uw, Kvo) [§ 130 (b), 2], e'Acico [§ 130 (c)], cuWco, atpeu, 5eco [§ 130 (d), 2], 
dpo'w [$ 130 (e)], xew [§ 154. Kern. 1], <reua>, to excite (§ 230) 



£60 



UNCONTRACTED AND CONTRACT VERBS. U$ 132-134. 



Paradigms of Pure Verbs. 

A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs. 

$ 132. (a) without a- in the Mid. and Pass. 



kwAvw, to hinder. ACTIVE. 


Pres. 


Kh>\v-(t) 


Perf. 


zce-zcco-Av-zca 


Put. 


KW\V-(TQ) 


Aor. 


i-K(£>Av-<ra 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. \KwKv-ofjLai 


Perf. 


K€-K(i>\v-IJ.ai 


Put. 


KooXv-aofJiai 


Aor." 


i-Kw\v-ffd- 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. 


i-K(0\v-&T}V 


Eut. 


KuXv-fr-fiffo/ieu. 



133. (b) with o- in the Mid. and Pass. (§ 131). 



Perf. S. 1. 


Ke-neAev-ff-fxcu 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Mid. 2. 


Ke-zceAev-trat 


zce-zceAeu-co 


zce-zceAeS-tr^ot 


or 3. 


zce-zceAeu-c-rcu 


K€-K<E\ev-a&a) 


Participle. 


Pass. 1. 


K€-KeXev-<T-fi^ov 




Ind. D. 2. 


zce-zceAeu-erfrov 


zce-zreAeiz-o-d-oz/ 


Ke-KeAev-ff-fizvos 


3. 


zce-zceAeu-a'&oj' 


Ke-KeAev-a&wv 


Subjunctive. 


P. 1. 


zce-zceAeu-c-jUe&a 




Ke-KeXev-(r-/j.€VOS & 


2. 


zce-zceAeu-cr&e 


zce-zceAeu-crfre 




3. 


Ke-zceAeu-cr-juevoi el(r((v) 


K€-Ke\ev-<T&w<ra 


> or K€-Ke\ei>-(r&(i)v] 


Plupf. Q . 
Mid or 


i-K€-K€\ev-ar-[Ar)v D. e-zce-zceAeu-a"-,ue3w P. 


i-Ke-Ke\€i>-(r-fJLe&a 


Pass. * 
Ind. 3 - 


e-K6-/ceAeu-(ro " e-zce-tfeAeu-irdw " 


e-zce-zceAeu-cr&e 


e-/C6-/ceAeu-(T-TO " i-Ke-KeAev-crfr>]v " 


/ce-zceAev-c-uej/ot ^car 


Opt. 


Ke-KeXev-cr-fxevos ^i7]V 


Aorist Pass. 


l-/ce\eu-(r-3-7jj' Future Pass. zceA 


eu-<r-3^cr<tyiai. 



B. Contract Pure Verbs. 

$ 134. Preliminary Remarks. 

1. The characteristic of contract pure verbs is either a, e, or o (§ 127) ; these 
are contracted with the mode-vowel following. The contraction, which is made 
according to the -rules stated above (§ 9, 1.), belongs only to the Pres. and 
Impf. Act. and Mid., because in these two tenses only is the characteristic- 
vowel followed by another vowel. The Paragogic v in the third Pers. Sing, 
Impf. Act. disappears in the contraction. On the tense-formation, see §§ 
129-131. 



$ 134.] PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 16i 

2. The contract forms of verbs in -dca in the Indicative and Subjunctive are 
the same ; contracts in -Sw have the same form for the second and third Pers. 
Sing, in the Indie. Opt. and Subj. viz. -ols, -o?. 

3. The contracted Infinitive of verbs in -dw, which, in. our editions of the 
classics, is more commonly written with an Iota Subscript, is without that letter 
in the ancient inscriptions, being contracted from -aev, e. g. ri/xau, not ri/x^u. 

4. If only one syllable follows the parenthesis in the paradigm, the termina- 
tion of the uncontracted form is the last syllable in the parenthesis, and the 
syllable after the parenthesis is the termination of the contracted form, e. g. 
«n/i(a-&>)<£ = Ti/xdw, rt/xw, ri/j.(d-eip)av = Ttytaeiv, Ti/xav } but if more than one 
syllable follows the parenthesis, the syllable, or syllables, after the last hyphen 
is the common ending of the contract and uncontracted forms, the uncontracted 
word embracing all the letters of the form except the vowel after the paren* 
thesis ; the contract, all without the parenthesis 



H* 



162 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



[* 135 



§ 135. Paradigms of 



ACTIVE. 



« 




^tj'Si 


u <n 

Bflai 


gg.J 


& 






S. 1. 




2. 




3. 


Indica- 


D.l. 


" tive, 


3. 




P. 1. 




2. 




3. 




S. 1. 




2. 




3. 


Sub- 


D.l. 


junc- 


2. 


tive, 


3. 




P. 1. 




2. 




3. 




S. 2. 




3. 


Impera- 


D.2. 

3. 

P. 2. 


tive, 




3. 


Infin. 






Nora. 


Partici- 




ple, 


Gen. 



Present. 



Characteristic a. Characteristic e. Characteristic o, 



Ti{x{d-<a)o}, to honor, 

Tijj.(d-€is)as 

Tijj.(d-ei)<$ 

Ti/j.(d-e)a-Tov 

rifx(d-e)a-Tov 

r/,u(a-o)w-/A6i/ 

riix(d-e)a-T€ 

Tifx{d-ov)Si-(n{v) 



(/>iA(e-a>)<£, to love. %i(T^(6-(a)co, to let, 



<ptA(4-eis)e?s 
<pih(4-ei)e'i 

(pi\(4-e)€7-rov 

<pLX(4-e)e7-Toy 

<pi\(e-o)ov-f.iey 

<piA(4-e)e?-re 

(piA{4-ov)ov-<xi{v) 



Ti/j.(d-u)co 

Tifj.(d-ns)as 

Tifx.(d-r))$ 

Ti[x{d-n)a-rov 

rifx(d-r))a-TOU 

rifj.{d'(a)w-iJ.^v 

Tifx{d-7i)a-Te 

rifx(d-(o)a>-<ri(v) 



Ti/x(a-e)a 

Ttix(a-e)d-Ta) 

ri l u(d-e)a-TOV 

rifx.(a-e)d-Tcou 

TL/j.{d-e)a-T€ 

Tifj.(a-4)d-TW(rav, 

Tljx(a-6)u>-VTU)V 



Tifx(d-eu/)av 



Ti,u(a-ow)u}V 

rifj.(d-ov)u>-cra 

Tifx(d-oy)wv 

Tlfl{d-o)u-VTOS 

Ttfx(a-ov)u>-(TT)S 



/.U(T&(6-€)0V-T0V 

/j.lct&(6-€)ov~tov 
/j.ht&(6-q)ou-(j.€v 
/Aicr&(6-c)ou-Te 
fj.icr&(6-,>v) ou-(Ti(u) 



(f>iA(e-(i))a> 

<(>iK.(4-r)s)?)S 

<pi\(€-n)ij 

(pi\(4-r))rj-rou 

(pt\(4-7])rj'TOU 
(j>lA(4-(i))to-fM€V 

<pi\{4-i))ri-T€ 
<piA(4-co)a>-<ri(v) 



<£iA(€-e)et 
<j>iA(e-4)ei-Ta) 
<pi\{4-e)e?-Tov 
cpi\(e-4)ei-T(ai/ 
(pi\(4-e)e?-T€ 
(pL\(€-4)€i-rci}(Tav or 
<pi\(e-6)ov-vrav 



<pi\{4-siv)ziu 



<pi\{4-Gov)G>v 

<piA(4-ov)ov-(ra 

(pi\{4-ov)ovv 

<pi\(4-o)ov-VTOS 

<pi\(e-ov)ov-(rns 



fA.ia&(A-r]s)o?s 

fXlli &(6-7])o>-tov 
[A<(7&(6-Tl)(i)-TOV 

Hi<r&(6-r])c0-Te 



juia"3-(o-e)ov 
yaab{o-4)ov-ru) 

(J.l(T&(6-e)0V-T0V 

/j.icr&(o-4)ov-Ta>v 

[Al(r&(6-€)0V-T€ 
/J.l(T&( O-4)0V-T0t)(TaV 

or (xicr&{o-6)ov-VT<dv 



fii(r&(6-eiv)ovv 



IAI<T&{6-(CV)G)V 

fucr&(6-ov)ov-(ra 
[xiaS[6-ov)ovv 

fAl<T&{6-0)0V-VT0S 

fJ.l(T^{ o-ov)ov-<T7\s. 



Imp e rfe c t . 





S. 1. 




2. 




3. 


Indica- 


D.l. 
2. 
3. 


tive, 




P. 1. 




2. 




3. 



iTifx.(a-ov)(cv 
4riiiL(a-€s)as 
iTi/j.(a-e)a 

iTifJL(d-e)a-TOV 

iTi/j.(a-4)d-T7]u 

eTi/x{d-o)S)-fj.ev 

iTi/j.(d-e)a-re 

lTijx{a-ov)uv 



£<piX(e-ov)ovv 

£<pi\(€-e)€t 

i(pi\(4-e)e?-rov 

i<pi\(e-4)€l-Tr]v 

i(()i\(4-o)ov-ixev 

i<pi\(4-€)e?-T€ 

i<piA(e-ov)ow 



ijXKrfr(o-oi/)ovi/ 
£ju.i(r&(o-es)ovs 

£fii(r&(6-e)ov-Tov 

i/ui(T&(o-4)ov-Twv 

i/u.i(r&(6-o)ov-/Aev 

e/xicr&(6-e)ov-Te 

ifj.l<r&(o-ov)ovv 



* 135.] 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



163 



Contract Verbs. 





MIDDLE. 




Present. 






Characteristic, o. 


Characteristic e. 


Characteristic o. 




Tijx{a-o)w-ixai 


^tA^'-oJou-^cu 


fxia^(6-o)ov-fxai 




Ti/x(d-r))a 


(piX(e-ri)f)^ 


lAia&{6-ri)(H 




Ti{i[d.-e)a-rai 


<pi\(4-G)e?-Tcu 


fjii(r^(6-e)ov-Tai 




TlfJ.{a-6)u>-{J.€^0U 


^)tA(e-o')ou-/ie3-oy 


flL(T&(0-6)0l>-fJ.6&0V 




TLfj.(d-e)a-(T^ou 


</>iA( e-e)e?-a'i3-oi' 


jUi(Tid-(o-e)oG-(r(3-o? 




Tt/jt.(d-e)a~<T&ov 


tpi\(4-e)e?-cr^-ov 


[zicr&(6-G)ov-(r&oi/ 




Ti/j.(a-6)a>-fi€&a 


(pi\(-€*6)ov-fi.e&a 


a yUiO"id-( 0-6 ) OV-fJL€&a 




Ti/j.(d-€)a-<r&e 


<piA(4-e)e?-o~&e 


/j.ia^(6-e)ov-G'^€ 




Ti/j.(d-o)a>-vrat 


<j>L\(e-o)ov-i/Tai 


lxioS[6-o)ov-vTai 




ri/j.(d-co)(a-fxai 




<pi\(4-oa)(a-iMU 


IAKrS{6-(ti)5>-jA(u 




TLfx(d-7))q. 


E 


<pi\(4-ri)fj 


jurcr3-( 0-77)0? 




Tifj.(d-r))a-Tai 


S 


<pl\(4-T))T)-Tai 


fJU0~&(6-7])ct}-TCU 




Tlfl(a-du)ci>-/Jl.€^OV 


o 


<pi\(e-(a)(a-ixeStov 


IAlO-&{o-d))<i>-[JL&OV 




Tifi(d-r])a.-<j&oi' 


r$ 


<piX.{4-t])ri-aStov 


fMlO-&[6-7j)c0-O-&OV 




Tijx(d-rj)a-(r^ov 


s 


<pik(4-i})rj-(r&oi' 


/j.io-&(6-7))a>-cr&ov 




Tifj.(a-to)a>-/j.e&a 


U- 


<pi\(e-d>)ci>-ue&a 


jju<r&(o-a>)cb-/Ae&a 




TLfi(d-r])ci-cr&e 


§' 


<pi\(4-7i)rj-cr&6 


fM(T&(6-7))0O-(J&e 




ri(x{d-b})S}-vTai 




<pi\(4-a})w-vTai 


fJLl(T&( 6-03 ) a-j/rcu 




Tiix{d-ov)ca 


<pi\(4-ov)ov 


/AlO-&(6-0v)0V 




Tiix{a-£)d-<jS<a 


<pi\(e-4)ei-o~&co 


fiio-&(o-4)ov-cr&c>> 




riix{d-i)u-c&ov 


(pi\(4-€)e7-o~&ov 


fxicr&(6-e)ov-a&oj/ 




ri(x{a-e)d-<r^(av 


(plA[€-4)el-(T&Q}V 


lxicr^r{o-4)ov-(rStcov 




Tifj.(d-e)?i-cr&€ 


(pi\(4-e)e?-(T&€ 


fjLicr&(6-6)ov-(r&e 




TifA(a-e)d,-<r&cixrav, or 


<pi\(e-4)ei-aSrcccrav, or 


lxioS(o-4)ov-o~Sa<rav, or 




rifx{a-4)d-(T^f(t!V 


(\>i\(z-4)ei-(T&tov 


lxio-Sf(o-4)ov-uStoov 




Tt/i(a-e)a-o~i&cu 


<pi\{4-e)zi-oSat 


yuio"i9-( o-e ) D-cd-cu 




TifJ.(a-6)o)-fxevos 


(pi\(e-6)ov-/j.€vos 


(JU(T&( 0-6 )0V-/J.€V0S 




Tl/J.(a-0)ci)-/J.€l'7) 


(pi\(e-o)ov-fx4ur] 


fMlO-&(0-0)0V-fx4v71 




Ti k u(a-6)a>-fxa'ov 


(pi\{e-6)ov-fievov 


/acd-( 0-6 ) ov-fj.evov 




ri/x{ a-o)<o-/x4vov 


<pi\{ e-o ) ov-fx4vov 


fxio~&(o-o)ov-ix4vov 




Ti/j.(a-o)a)-/Ji.4uT]S (pL\(€-o)ov-/xeu7]S 


IAlO~&(o-o)oV-[J.4u7)S. 




Imperfect. 




iTlfJ.(a-6)w-IJLT}U 


i(piK(e-6)ov-fx7)v 


£fxiaS(o-6)ov-fji.Tiv 




iTLjx(d-ov)S) 


i(pi\(4-ov)ov 


£/j.io'&(6-ov)ov 




irifi[d-e)a-ro 


icpi\(4-e)e?-T0 


£fuo~&(6-e)ov-7o 




£tiIx{cl-6)u-ii&ov 


e<pi\(€-6)ov-fj.z&ov 


4/J.lO-&(o-6 ) OV-fJL&OP 




6Tj/i(a-e)a-cr3-oj/ 


i(piX ( 4-e ) zi-aSov 


ifxio-&(6-e)ov-cr&ou 




£rifi.{a-e)d-(rfrr)v 


4<pt\(c-4)el-crfrr)v 


£fxio-&(o-4)ov-o-&7)v 




cVj//.(u-J)a>-/ieda 


i<ptk(e-6)ov-/j.€Sa 


e/xiO"&( 0-6 )ov-/j.€&a 




(rifx{d ()ri-ff&e 


4(pi\(4-e)e?-a&G 


ifj.ia&(6-e)ov-o-&€ 




iit/M i o)5j-vto 


i<pi\{4-o)ov-vTO 


4yuo-b{6-o)ov-vTO 



164 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



P 136. 



CO 


^ TO 

So 


Imperfect. 




Characteristic a. 


Characteristic e. 


Characteristic o. 




Opta- 
tive. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.l. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Ti;j.{d-oi)oi-ixi 
Tifx[d-ois)(^s 

TlfJ.(d-Ol)cp 
7l/J.(d-0l)<£-T0V 

Ti/j.(a-oi)cp-Tr)v 

Tt(Jl[d-Ol)$-fl€V 

Tl/J.(d-Ol)<p-TG 

t ijx{d-oi)w-ev 


<pi\{i-oi)o7-fxi 
<pi\{4-ois)o7s 
<pi\[4-oi)o7 

<pl\(£-Ol)o7-TOV 

<pi\(e-oi)oi-T7)v 
(pi\(4-oi)o7-/j.ev 
<pi\(e-oi)o7-T€ 
(piA(4-oi)o7-€i' 


fJ.L(T&(6-Ol)o7-[JLt 

(aict&(6-ois)o7s 
u.Kr&[6-oi)o7 

pU(T&(6-Ol)o7.TOV 

fj.ia^(o-oi)oi-rr)v 
fiKr&(6-oi)o7-/Ati/ 
f.ucr£r(6-oi)o7-Te 

/J.HT&(6-Ol)67-€J/ 




Attic 
Opta- 
tive, 


B.l. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


riix(a-oi)w-7]u 
Tip.(a-oi)a)-r)s 

Ti/x(a-oi)cp-r}TOV 

Tl/J.(a-Ol)a}-7]TT]V 

rifj.(a-oi)cf -7]/j.ey 

Ti/x(a-oi)w-77re 

Tijj.(d-oi)u}-ev 


<pi\(e-oi)oi-r]V 

<pt\(e-oi)oi-ris 

<pi\(€-oi)oi-rj 

<pi\{e-oi)cl-r)Tov 

(pL\(e-oi)oi-riTTju 

(pi\{€-oi)oi-7]jxev 

<piK(s-oi)oi-7iTe 

<pi\{e-oi)o7-eu 


lxiab{o-oi)oi-7]v 
fxi(r&(o-oi)ot-T)s 
fucr&(o-oi)oi-ri 

/Al(T&(o-oi)ol-r)TOV 

fucr&( o-oi ) oi-'fjTrjv 

/J.l(T&(o-oi)oi-T}fM€P 

/j.i(r&(o-ol)ot-TiTe 
/ju<r&(6-oi)o7-€v 




Indica- 
tive, 


Perf. 


TrecpwpaKa 


Tre<pi\7)Ka 


lUejiuordw/ca 




Plup. 


iTeTl/J.7)K€lV 

£ire<poopaKeiv 


iirecpiArjKeiv 


4lAZ[Al(r&(*>KCU' 




Put. 


Tiju^crco <pcopd<rco 


<pi\i\<ju> 


IAl<T&d)<TQ) 




Aor. 


iri/x^ffa £<pwpa<ra 


i(pi\ri<Ta 


ifitd^dxra 




F.Pf. 








PAS 


Aorist, | iri[xri&r)V £(poopa&r)v \ £<piA'ti&r)u | efua&w&riv j 


Verbal adjectives : T^oj-Teos, -rea, -reov, (pcapa-Ttos, -Tea, -TeW, 



$ 136. With short Vowel 



ACTIVE. 



Tenses. 



Present, 

Imperfect, 

Perfect, 

Pluperfect, 

Puture, 

Aorist, 



Characteristic o. 



cnr(d-ci}}a), to draw, 

ecnr(a-ov)(av 

tairaKa 

iairaiceu/ 

(Tiraaca 

tcnraffa 



Characteristic e. 



TeA(4-a))a>, tocom- 

ir4\(e-ov)ovv[plete. 

TeTeAe/co 

eTereAe/fetJ/ 

reXw 

eVe'Aeca 



Characteristic o. 



ap{6-(o)u, to plough. 

¥ip(o-ov)ovv 

ap-ypoKa 

ap-T)pOK€lV 

apScrca 
'fipocra 



PAS 



Aorist, 



s<nrd-a-h-t)v 



I eT6Ae-(r-3-7ji 



rjpo&riv 



Verbal adjectives : o-xa-c-Teos, -Tea, -reou.- 






* 136.] 



PARADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 



165 



] 


Imperfect. 


Characteristic o. 


Characteristic e. 


Characteristic o. 




Tlfl(d-Ot)cf-0 
Tl/J.(d-Ol)<p-TO 

Tifj.(a-oi)q}-/j.€&ov 

TlfJL{d-Ol)$-(T&OV 

Ti/x(a-0L)cp-a^7}u 
Ti^(a-oi)(S-fi€^a 
Ti(i(d-oi)q>-(r&e 

TlfJi(d-0l)<p-l'TO 


(pi\(€-oi)oi-/xr]v 

<pt\(4-oi)o7-o 

<pi\(4-oi)o7-ro 

<pi\(e-oi)oi-/j.e&ov 

<piA(4-oi)o7-a&ov 

<piA(e-oi)ol-(rfrr)v 

<pi\(e-oi)oi-fj,e&a 

<pi\(4-oi)o7-abe 

<pi\{4-oi)o7-vro 


fiia&( o-oi ) oi-firjv 

/Aia&(6-ot)o7-o 

jj.i<r&(6-oi)o7-To 

fj.ia^r(o-oi)ol-/x^ov 

fj.ta&( 6-oi)o7-cr$rov 

fj,ia&(o-ol)oi-a&7)v 

fju<r&(o-oi)ol-/x€&a 

/xia&(6-oi)o7-a&€ 

fiiah{6-oi)o7-vro 






• 






T€Ti/J.7]/Xat 
TT€<pd!)pd/J.ai 


irefpthtiiuu 


/jLe/j.i<r&a>/Aai 




iTT€(pCCpS.fjLT]V 


i-KSCplX'fjfJt.TJl/ 


£fJ.e[U(T&cb/A7IV 




rifj-ifdo/xai <pupa.aofj.ai. 


(pi\r](TOfiat 


jj.iaSooaofj.ai 




iTi i ur](rdfj.7]v £<p<apdadfj.7]u 


i(pi\7jcrdfi7]v 


4fiiaSojadfj.7jv 




Terifirjaofxai Tre<pcopdaofj.ai 


Tre<pi\7}ao/j.ai 


ILtlxiaStdxronai 


SIVE. 


| Future, | Tifj.7}&T)o~o/jLai <pc»pa&r)(roiJ.cu j <piXi)^t](roixai f fiHr&afrfio-o/xcu 


<piXf]-r4os, -rea, -t4ov, [Aia&a-Teos, -r4a, -t4qv. 



in forming the Tenses. 



MIDDLE 



Characteristic a. 



ffTr(d-o)<2-fxai 

4air(a-6)d>-fir}V 

taita-a-fxai 

4a"Kd-(T-IX7]V 

<rira.aofj.ai 
iairaad/xrju 



Characteristic 



T€\(4-0)0V-fJ.aL 

£TeX(e-6)ov-fM7]u 
TereAe-cr-jUoi 
irer eX4-a-fJ.T)P 

T€\OV[J.ai 

eTeXead/j.rjv 



Characteristic o. 



dp(6-o)ov-/j.ai 

7]p(0-6)0V-flT]V 

ap-r\pofj.ai 
dp-7]p6fj.r)u 
dpSaofiai 
7)poadfj.v,v 



SIVE. 


| Future, 


| aira-a-S^aofiai \ T€Ae-a-&rjaofj,ai 


apofrqaofiai 


TeA.€-<r-Te'os, 


-4a, -4ov, apo-T4os, -4a, -eov. 





166 REMARKS ON THE CONJ. OF CONTRACT VERBS. [$ 13? 

Remark. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. Pass, with <r, see §§ 130. 
131 ; on the omission of the <r in apripofxai, ypofrny, see §131,5; and on the Atti6 
Reduplication in ap-hpo/j.ai, see § 124, 2. The further inflection of 4<nra-<r-fxai, 
i<nrd-<r-ix7)v, TereAe-cr-juai, iT€Tc\4-(r-fj.r]v, is like that of k€k4\€v-o--/jlcu, § 133. On 
the Attic Fut, TeAeVco — TeAw, -e7s, etc., re\4ffOfiai — r eXov nai t T€\y [el], 
etc., see § 117. 

§ 137. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract 
Verbs. 

1. The Attic dialect omits contraction only in the cases mentioned under 
$ 9. Eem. 3 ; but verbs in -4<a with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. 7rA«o, to sail, irv4<t> y 
to blow, 3-ecw, to run, etc. are uniformly uncontracted, except in the syllable -« 
(from -eet or -ee), e. g. 

Act. Pi*. Ind. irAeco, ir\e7s, ir\e7, ir\4ofJLey, 7rAe?re, ir\4ovai (v), 

Subj. 7rAea\ 7rAe?7S, ir\4y, ir\4co/j.*ey, ■7r\4r)Te, rcXiuai (v), 

Imp. 7rAe?. Inf. TrAeTy. Part. 7c\4<av. 
Impf. Ind. 2ir\eov, eirXeis, e?rAe:, iir\4o/x€V, €7TA.e?Te, eirAeoj/. 

Opt. irXeoifxi, 7r\4ois, etc. 
Mid. Pr. Ind. ir\4ofxai, ir\4y, TrXeirai, TrXeS/xe&ov, irAeto-froj/, etc. 

Inf. 7rAe?a&ai. Part. TrAeo^evos. Impf. iirXe 6 jxriv. 

2. The verb 5e&>, to fo'nd, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu- 
larly in compounds, e. g. to Sow, toG 5oDj/tos, Siadov/xai, Kar4Sow. But 5e7, iZ 
is necessary, and 54o/xai, to need, follow the analogy of verbs in -4u>, with a 
monosyllabic stem, e. g. to SeW, d4ofiai, de7o^rai ; uncontracted forms of d4o/j.ai 
occur, instead of those contracted into -e t, e. g. 84erai, Seeo-3-at, 4d4ero, Xen., 
and sometimes also forms of other verbs belonging here are uncontracted, e. g. 
tirkeev, X. H. 6. 2, 27 ; irAe'ei, Th. 4, 28 ; aw4x^v, PI. Rp. 379, e. 

3. Several verbs deviate in contraction from the general rules, e. g. 

(a) -ae, -aei, -ay, are contracted into -77 and -77, instead of into -o and -9, e. g. 
C(a-w) <2, to live, (rjs, -Cy, -^jtoj/, -^e, Inf. £t>, Imp. £77, Impf. e&v, -77*, 
-77, -77Y0J/, --f]TT]v, -Tjre; — 7reij/(a-&?) ct>, to hunger, Inf. TTew'Tjy, etc.; — 81$- 
(d-co)a>, to thirst, Si^ys, etc. Inf. di^rjv; — nv{d-)S>, to scratcJi, Inf. kvt\v\ 
— o-fx(d-o) a>, to smear,Jjif.<rfj.7Jv; — ^(a-w)«5, to rub, Inf. 1^971/ ; — XP («-°) 
u-fxai, to use, XPV> XP% TaL > XP? "^ " 5 so airoxp^f^ai, to have enough, 
airoxpw&aL] — airSxpt) (abridged from airoxpy), it suffices, Inf. hroxpw, 
Impf. airexpy ', — X P (<* " u ) <*>> *° 5 fli;e aw orac ^ e i to prophesy, XPV S > XPV> XPW- 

(b) -00 and -oe are contracted, as in the Ionic, into -o>, instead of into -ov, and 
-6y into -£, instead of into -o7, e. g. pt7(o'-&>) <S, to freeze, Inf. pt-ywy 
(Aristoph., but piyovv, X. Cy. 5. 1, 11), Part. G. piywvros (Aristoph., but 
piyowrccv, X. H. 4. 5, 4), and piySxra (Simon, de mulier. 26), Subj. piy$ 
(PI. Gorg. 517, d.), Opt. pty^ (Hippocr.). 

Remark 1. The Ionic verb lZp6<a,to sweat, corresponds in respect to con- 
traction with piy6<a, to freeze, though with an opposite meaning: ISpGxri, 
IBpcprjv, tdpiiffa, ISpwvres. 



$ 138.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF IMFURE VERBS. 167 

4. The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of tha 
Opt. in -i)v (§ 116, 8), viz. in the Sing., especially in the first and second person, 
of verbs in -eo> and -6a>, the form in -oi-nv is far more in use than the common 
form, and in verbs in -aw it is used almost exclusively ; but in the Dual and 
PI. the common form is more in use. The third Pers. PL has always the 
shorter form, except that Aeschin., 2. § 108, Bekk., uses doKoi-qaav. 

5. The verb Xovco, to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac- 
tion in all the forms of the Impf. Act. and of the Pres. and Impf. Mid., which 
have -e or -o in the ending, e. g. eAou instead of eAoue. i\ov/j.ev instead of i\ov- 
0/j.ev, Mid. AovfxaL (Aoei, Aristoph. Nub. 835. according to MSS.), Xovrai, etc., 
Imp. Xov, Inf. Aova&ai, Impf. i\ov/xr}u, ixou, 4Xovto, etc., as if from the stem 
AOEH ; still, uncontracted forms are found, e. g. Kovofxai, eXovovro (Xen.). 

Eem. 2. On the change of the accent in contraction, see § 30, 2. 



n. Formation of the Tenses of Impure Verbs. 

§ 138. General Hemarks. 

Pure and Impure Stem. — Theme. 

1. Impure verbs ($ 127, II.) undergo a variety of changes in 
the stem. In the first place, the stem of the verb is strength- 
ened : — 

(a) Either by an additional consonant, e. g. rvtr-T-a, stem TTIT; npd(-w, stem 
KPAr ; (ppdfa, stem <£PAA ; and even by inserting an entire syllable, e. g. 
hfiapr-du-ic, stem 'AMAPT ; 

(b) Or by lengthening the stem-vowel, e. g. <pevy-w, stem 3>Tr; A^d-w, stem 
AA0 ; ttjk-o}, stem TAK ; 

(c) Or secondly there is a change of the stem-vowel in some of the tenses; 
this change may be called a Variation (§ 16, 6), e. g. KXeirr-u, i-KXair-riv, 
k4-k\o<p-ol ; comp. Eng. ring, rang, rung. 

2. The original and simple stem is to be distinguished from 
the strengthened stem ; the first is called the pure stem, the 
last, the impure. The Pres. and Impf. commonly contain the 
impure stem ; the Secondary tenses, when such are formed, and 
specially the second Aor., contain the pure stem ; the remaining 
tenses may contain either the pure or the impure stem, e. g. 

Pres. TU7r-T-«, to strike, Aor. II. Pass. 4-rvrr-7]v Fut. Act. rvrpw (rvir-a<») 
" Kefa-a, to leave, " Act. %-\"nr-ov " " Aetyw (Aenr-(ra>) 

t; <rcpd£-w, to kill, " Pass. i-cr<p ay- t\v " " atpd^a} ((T(pdy-a<a) 

" (paiv-co, to show, " " 4 - <p &. v - t)v " Mid. <p a v-ovjxai 

M ip&eip-w, to destroy, " " 4 - <p & a p-r\v ' ; Act. (p&ep-w. 



168 IMPURE VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM. [§ 139 

3. When a form of a verb cannot be derived from the Pres. 
tense in use, another Present is assumed ; this assumed Pres. 
may be termed the Theme (Sepa), and is printed in capitals, 
to distinguish it from the Pres. in actual use ; thus, e. g. </>evyo> 
is the Pres. in use, <£YrO is the assumed Pres., or the Theme, 
designed merely to form the second Aor., Z-<f>vy-ov. 



k 139. Strengthening of the Stem. 

1. The stem is strengthened, first, by adding another conso- 
nant to the simple characteristic consonant of the stem, e. g. 

TVTTTCD (tV7t), to Strike, AOT. II. PaSS. €-TV1T-T]V 

rdrTu (ray), to arrange, " " i-T&ynv 

Kpdfa (npay),to cry, " Act. %-Kpay-ov. 

2. Yet the strengthened stem is found only in the Pres. and 
Impf. ; in the other tenses the simple stem appears, e. g. 

Pres. tvtttco Impf. Ztvittov Aor. II. Pass. hvTrrjv Put. rtyu (r{nrffco). 

Remark 1. The characteristic of the pure stem, e. g. •n- in TTII-n is called 
the pure characteristic ; that of the impure stem, e. g. ttt in tvttt-u, the impure 
characteristic. 

3. The stem of many verbs is strengthened also by length- 
ening the short stem-vowel in the Pres. and Impf. ; this short 
rowel reappears in the second Aor., and in liquid verbs, in the 
Fut. Thus, 



o is changed 


into -n in mute verbs, 




e. g. (e-Aa^-oy) A^&a> 


& 


at in liquid verbs, 




" ((pau-a) <paiv<a 


€ 


€i in liquid verbs, 




" ((p&ep-w) <p&elp<a 


r 


« in mute verbs, 




" (e-Klw-ov) Aet7T» 


X 


I in mute and liquid 


verbs, 


" {i-rpip-nv) rptpa 


V 


v in mute and liquid 


verbs, 


" (i-4>pvy-7}v) (ppvyco 


v " 


ev in mute verbs, 




" (Z-<pvy-ov) (pevyw. 



Rem. 2. This strengthening of the stem distinguishes the Impf. Ind. and 
Opt. from the same modes of the second Aor. ; likewise the Pres. Subj. and 
Impf. from the same modes of the second Aor., e. g. enpaCoi' tupayov, Kpd£oifii 
Kpdyo'./ju, Kpdfa fcpdyct), Kpd£e Kpdye ; — eAernw iXiTrov, Xs'nroijxi xfiroifii, Kefou 
\tirw. Ae«re \tire. 






or 


n. Act. 


e-T parr -ov 


u 


Pass. 


i-KXa-K-TiV 


u 


K 


i-rpa<p-7)y 


u 


U 


i-ffr pacp-Tjv 


u 


« 


i-Ppax-W 


«( 


(( 


i-Sap-r]v 
i-araX-7]V 


u 


u 


i-(TTrap-7]u 


(( 


(C 


i-(p^dp-r}v 


(( 


Act. 


e-T afx- ov. 



$ 140.] VERBS. CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. 169 

$ 140. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel. 

1. The change or variation of the stem-vowel [$ 138, 1 (c)], 
occurs only in the Secondaiy tenses, with the exception of a 
few first Perfects. 

2. Most mute and all liquid verbs, with a monosyllabic stem, 
and with e as a stem-vowel, take the variable a in the second 
Aor., e. g. 

TpeV-co, to turn, 
/cAeV-T-ai, to steal, 
Tpecp-w, to nourish, 
<TTp4<p-a, to turn, 
fipex-v, to wet, 
Sep-a), to flay, 
(TTe'AA-w, to send, 
<nreip-(a, to sow, 
(p&dp-w, to destroy, 

TffMV-a, to cut, 

The second Aor. erafiou (from refivu), to cut), is very rare in Attic prose (Th. 1. 
81. TofMco/jLev) ; regular ZrepLov; the second Aor. ifipexw (from /3pe'x&>, to wet), is 
poetic and late ; common form e'jSpe'x^Tjj'. The first Act Pass. ZrpicpSrnv (from 
Tpe'7roj), i&pecpfrriv (fwrpecpco), icrrpicp&riv (fr. o~Tp4<p(o), belong more to poetry than 
prose ; e'/cAe'^&Tjj/ (fr. k\4ittco) Ionic and Eur. Or. 1575 (K\e<p&ds). Aepa, crireipa y 
and <p&e(po}, have no first Aor. Pass. The variable a does not occur in polysyl- 
lables, e. g. tfyyekoi/, T)yy£\riv, &(pe\ov, r)yep6[u.7}V. 

Remark 1. As this variable vowel distinguishes the Impf. from the second 
Aor. Act., e. g. trp^ov (Impf), irpaivov (Aor. II.), in some verbs of this class 
(2, above), whose second Aor. Act. is not in use, the variable vowel does not occur 
in the second Aor. Pass., because that tense cannot be mistaken for the Impf, 
see § 141, Rem., e. g. fixi-iru, to see, Impf. %-fS\eir-ov, second Aor. Pass. e-/3AeV- 
t\v (first Aor. Pass, is wanting) ; \£*yv, to collect (in compounds), second Aor. 
Pass. Kare-\4y-riv, crvveXeynv (more seldom Aor. I. <rvve\ex&1 v i Qe^X&V'i with 
the meaning to say, always iXex&nv) ; so also \4ir-a, to peal, z-\4tt-t\v (first 
Aor. Pass, wanting) ; 7rAe'/c-o>, to braid, usually i-ir\a,K-r]u, but also £-tt\4k-t)v 
Plat, (first Aor. Pass. iir\ex&W, Acsch. Eum. 259) ; <px£y-u>,to bum, i-(p\4y-r]u 
(more seldom icpkex&yv) ; ipsya, to censure, £-\i/4y--nv, first Aor. Pass, wanting. 

Rem. 2. The verb 7tA^ttw, to strike, when uncompounded, retains the tj 
in the second Aor. and second Put. Pass., but when compounded, it takes the 
variable a: thus, £-izXr\y-r\v, Tc\r)yf)(ro[xcu, e|e-7rAay-77i', KaTe-7rKay-r]u, iK-irKayr]- 
ffoixai) o-'fjirw, to make rotten, and tt]kw, to melt (trans.), also have the variable a; 
heiife Perf. <reo-7j7ra, / am rotten, second Aor. Pass, io-airrjv, second Put. Pass. 
o~a.Tz{](Toixa.i ; Tut. r^co, Aor. irm\a ; second Perf. TeT7j/ca, lam melted; second Aor. 
Pass. iraK-riv; also first Aor. Pass, ir^xfrnv, PI. Tim. 61. b., Eur. Supp. 1033. 
15 



170 VERBS. CHANGE OP THE STEM-VOWEL. [$ 140. 

3. Liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with e for a 
stem-vowel, take the variable a, not only in the second Aor., but 
also in the first Perf. Act., in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and the 
first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

<TTeAAa>, to send, Put. <rreA-« Pf. e-trraX-Ka e-crraX-jxai Aor. e-<rTciA-&7)v 
(p&elpco, to destroy, Put. cp&ep-a> Pf. e-cp&ap-ica e<p&ap-(icu. 

The first Aor. Pass. io-TaT^nqv is poetic ; tlie first Aor. Pass, of Sepa, o-nzipu, 
<p&elpw is not in use ; but instead of it the second Aor. Pass., thus, eSap-rfv, 
£<nrdpyr)v, i(p&dp7}v. The variable a does not occur in polysyllables, e. g. 
ijyyeXKa, 7)YyeAfrnv from ctTyeAAa, ayrjyepficu, yyep&rjv from ayelpa. Conip. 
No. 1. 

4. Mute verbs, which have c in the final stem-syllable of the 
Pres., take the variable o in the second Perf. ; but those which 
have ec, take 01; liquid-verbs, which have e or et in this syllable, 
take o, e. g. 

SepKOfiai (poet.), to see, deSoprca Sepw, to flay, BeSopa 

rp4cpo3, to nourish, r4rpo<pa iyeipco, to wake, iypyyopa, I awoke, 

Keliru, to leave, AeAowra aire'ipco, to sow, ecnropa 

7ret&a>, to persuade, iri7ro&a, I trust, (p&eipco, to destroy, %(p&opa poetic, (e<p&apK<x f 
prose). 

Rem. 3. Here are classed the following anomalous second Perfs. ; e&» 
(Epic), efiwS-a instead of e?£-a, to be wont, ela&evcu, elco&cvs, Plup. elw&eiv; — 
'EIAQ, video, o?5a, I know; — 'EIKH, soma, to be Wee, to appear, Plup. ew/ceiv; — 
eAira) (poet.), to cause to hope, eoAira, I hope, Plup. ecoAiretj/, i" hoped ; — 'EPm, to 
do, eopya, Plup. ia>pyeiv; — prjy-yv/xi, to break, e/Jpwya, lam broken (but on crrjira}, 
see Rem. 2). 

5. The following take the variable o in the first Perf. also, 
contrary to the rule in No. 1. 

k\4tttu, to steal, first Perf. /ce/cAo^a, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ke'/cAe^ai (very 

rare and only poet. /ce/cAa/i^at). 
Key co t to collect, first Perf. <rvvei\oxa, e|eiAoxa; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

<Tvyel\ey/.iai. 
irefiiroo, to send, first Perf. iriiroiKpa; but Perf. Mid. or Pass, vreirepifxai. 
Tp4-ira), to turn, first Perf. rerpocpa (like the second Perf. of rpecba), to nourish), 

and TcrpcKpa ; still, this last form is rare ; the more usual form is rerpocpa. 

The variable a in the Perf. Act. is not found elsewhere, and is probably 

here used only to distinguish it from rerpocpa, Perf. of rp4<pci>. 

6. The following mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem, and 
with c for a stem-vowel, like liquid verbs (No. 3), take the 
variable a in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; still, the a is not found hi 
the first Aor. Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs, e. g. 



$ 141.] VERBS. REMARKS ON THE SECONDARY TENSES. 171 

<rrp4<pca, to turn, Pf. Mid. or Pass. ea-rpafM/xai, but first Aor. Pass. 4<rTp4<pfrnr 
Tpeira, to turn, " " TerpafM/Aai, " " eTpicpfrqv 

rp4(pca, to nourish, " " r4^pafj./j.ai i " 4dp4<p&nv. 

On k\4tttci), see No. 5. 



$ 141. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses. 

1. The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in wanting the 
tense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-endings {-ov, 
-6p.f)v, -nv, -ria-ofiai, -a, and -ew) immediately to the pure characteristic of the 
verb, e. g. %-Kiir-ov, second Aor., but 4-Trai5ev-ar-a, first Aor. ; partly, in being 
formed throughout from an unchanged pure verb-stem (except the Perf. which 
prefers a long vowel, see No. 2), e. g. AeiVw, 4-\lir-ov, (pevyco %-cpvy-ou; and 
partly, in taking the variable vowel, e. g. arp4<pco 4-<rrpa(p-nu arpdcp-7](rofjLai, 
but 4-<TTp4<p-frriv (§ 140, 2). 

2. The second Perf. either lengthens the short stem-vowel t into f, a into 77, 
and, when it stands after other vowels or p, into d, e. g. 

Kpdfa, to cry out, second Aor. i-Kpay-ov second Perf. ic4-Kpay-a 

(ppia-a-ca, to shudder, stem: *PIK (1) " ir4-(pplK-a 

&aAA&>, to bloom, • Put. &a\-w " Te-^A-a ; 

so, -> r 4(pvpa, \4\n&a from $AN-w, AA0-w ; or it retains the long vowel or diph- 
thong of the Pres., e. g. ir4<p€vya. from <psvyca (but second Aor. Act. 4<pvyov), 
r4rr]Ka, a4arr]Tra from r-fjKco, cr'fjTrca (but second Aor. Pass, zrannv, 4aairnv, see 
§ 140, Rem. 2 j ; a short vowel occurs only in the cases referred to in § 124, and 
$ 140, 4. 

Remark. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. could not be distinguished 
from the Impf, or at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., since this last form 
has a different ending from the Impf, and could not be mistaken for it, e. g. 

ypa(p(o Impf. eypacpov A. I. iypatya A II. Act. want. A. II. P. 4ypu<pnv (A. I. P. does 

not occur in classical writers). 
kXTuo} " %k\Ivov " tKhlva. " " A. II. P. eWj/7}y (A. LP. eW- 

£771/ in Aristoph). 
tyvX<0 " 4\pvxou " tyv^a ' ; " " expvxvvy Plat, (epvynv 

Aristoph. Nub. 152 [with the variation \pvxeiari] and often in the later writers ; 
A. I. tyfy&Wi Plat.). 

3. The following points, also, are to be noted: (a) There is no verb which, 
together with the second Aorist, forms the three first Aorists; (b) There is no 
verb which has in use at the same time the second Aor. Act. and Mid. and the 
second Aor. Pass. ; but all veil)?, which form the second Aor. have either the 
second Aor. Act. and Mid. only, or the second Aor. Pass. only. A single 
exception, in regard to both the particulars specified, is seen in the verb Tp4iro), 

. which has three first Aorists together with three second Aorists : irpairov 
(Ion.), 4rp8.ir6iJ.ni', 4rpa.TYnv, irpetya (the common form in Attic). 4rpei\idtxT]v 
(transitive, e. g. rp4y\ia.abai us <pvyr\v, to put to flight), 4Tp4<pSnv (used more by the 



172 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE-VERBS. [$ 142 

poets, see § 140, 2) ; but in compounds, e. g. eiriTp^brivai, Antiph. 4. 126, 4 
127, 5). 

There are but few exceptions to the statement under (b), since the second 
Aor. Act. and Mid. and the second Aor. Pass., occur but rarely, and mostly 
in the poet, dialect, e. g. stvttov Eur., and irvirriv ; eXlwov and tTdirrjv ; iXeitpfrrju, 
and very seldom i\nr6fj.7)u. 

4. It is rare that a verb has both Aor. forms ; where this is the case, the two 
forms are used under certain conditions, namely : — 

(a) The two Aor. forms of the Act. and Mid. have a different meaning, i. e. 
the first Aor. has a transitive meaning, the second Aor., an intransitive. The 
same is true of the two forms of the Perf., where they are constructed from the 
same verb. See § 249, 2. 

(b) The two forms of the Aor. belong either to different dialects, or differ- 
ent periods, or to different species of literature, prose or poetry. Still, in some 
verbs, both forms occur even in prose, e. g. air^Xkax^nv, and usually \iT7]X\a.yT]v, 
fi\aip&7ji'ai and $\afirivai, both for ex. in Thuc. Several verbs in poetry have a 
second Aor. Act., which in prose have commonly a first Aor. only, e. g. Kreiva), 
to kill, Aor. prose, eKreiva, poet, iniavov and inTav, 

(c) The two Aorists stand in such a relation to each other, that the forms 
of one Aorist take the place of the forms of the other not in use, and in this 
way each supplies, respectively, the place of the other, as will be seen under 
the verbs rifrrini and SiSufii. 



A. Formation of the Tenses of Mute-Verbs. 
§ 142. Classes of Mute Verbs. 

Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three 
classes, according to their characteristic ; in each of these 
classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in .the Pres. and 
Impf. are distinguished from those with an impure charac- 
teristic (§ 139, Rem. 1) : — 

1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (fi, it, <j> pure 

characteristic; ttt ([§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 
e.g.- 

(a) Pure characteristic: nzkyjir-w, to send; Tpifi-co, to 
rub ; <ypd(p-a>, to write ; 

(b) Impure characteristic : tv7tt-co, to strike (pure char- 
acteristic 7r, pure stem TTTI) ; pXaTrr-cD, to injure 

. (& BAAB) ; pliTT-co, to hurl (<£, r PI$). 

2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute (k, 7, x 



J 143.] MUTE VERBS. REMARKS ON THE CHARACTERISTIC. 173 

pure characteristic ; acr or Attic tt [§ 24, 1] impure 
characteristic), e. g. 

(a) Pure characteristic: ifkeic-co, to weave; ay-co, to 
lead; revx-a, to prepare; 

(b) Impure characteristic: ^piaa-w, Att. (jyptTT-co, to 
shudder (pure characteristic k, pure stem <3>PIK) ; 
rdaa-co, Att. tott-(d, to arrange (7, TAT) ; firjacr-cD, 
Att. firjTT-w, to cough (x, BHX). 

3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (t, 8, ^, 
pure characteristic ; f [§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 
e.g. 

(a) Pure characteristic: avvr-w, to complete; aS-co, to 
sing ; 7refo-(D, to persuade ; 

(b) Impure characteristic : (ppa^-co, to say (pure charac- 
teristic 8, pure stem $PAA). 

$ 143. Remarks on the Characteristic. 

1. The following mute verbs in -7tto» and -cffco (-rrco) form the Secondary- 
tenses, especially the second Aor. Pass., and have for their characteristic : — 

7r: KAeVr-co, to steal; kSttt-o), to cut; tvttt-w, to strike (second Aor. Passive 
i-K\o.Tr-7)v, etc.). 

/3: /3Aa7TT-w, to injure, and KpvirT-oo, to conceal (second Aor. Pass, i-pxafi-rji/ 
and efihd<pfrnv, e-Kp&fS-'nv and £Kpv<pfrnv). 

<p: pdirT-o), to tinge; ShLttt-w, to bury; hpinrr-w, to break; pdirr-oo, to sew to- 
gether; p'nrT-Q}, to cast; (TKaTTT-a, to dig (second Aor. Pass. £-fia<p--nv, 
i-r acp-Tjv, 4-Tpv<p-Tiv, ip-pa<p-t]v, ifi-ptcp-Tjv and £ppi<p&r)v, i-cricacp- 
-nv). 

k : (ppiaa-cti, to shudder (second Pcrf. Tr£-<pplK-a). 

y. dAAa(ro-o>, to change (second Aor. Pass. aXXdy-rjuai, first Aor. Pass. 
aAAax&r}fc«j poetic), fj.da<rco, to knead [jxay-rivai), 6pv<r<rc>}, to dig (opvy-rjuai 
and bpvx^wat), 7rA7j<r<ra>, to strike (£-TrXr)y-r]y, i^-irXay-yv), Trpa<r<ra), Att. 
irpSTTtt, todo {ire-ir p ay- a),<T<pdfa (Attic mostly (rcpdrTca), to kill (£-<r(pay- 
•nv, rarely, and never in Attic prose, iacpdxfrnv), rdacru, to arrange (rayeis, 
Eur., elsewhere irdx&w), <ppd<r<T03, to hedge round (i<ppdy-r]v and zcppdxfrnv). 

2. Two verbs strengthen the pure characteristic k by t, like verbs with the 
impure characteristic ttt: — 

ttckt-co (commonly ireKTeco, also 7re£/co>), to shear, to comb, Put. 7re£<w, etc. , 
still, Keipeti/ is commonly used for ire/crew with the meaning to shear, and 
terevlfav and ^aiunu with the meaning to comb; 
» TiKT-ca (formed from tl-tck-u:), to beget, Fut. rej-oficu, second Aor. Act. 

ere/cov, second Pcrf. tcto/co. 

3. The following verbs in -crcru), -tt« have a Tau-mute, not a Kappa- 
mute, for the pure characteristic: apfj.6TTu> (non-Attic ap/nSfa), to Jit, Put. 
•6<T<a\ — )3\ittw, to take honey, Fut. -tVor, — 0pd<r(rco (n on- Attic fipdfa), to 
shake; — ipeaaco, to row, Fut. -ecrw ; — ird<r<r<i), to scatter. Fut. -daw; — irXdff- 
cw, to form, Fut. -dau; — irri(r<ru, to husk, Fut. -tVtw ; — and Poet, Ifxaffffu, to 

15* 



174 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. [§ 144. 

whip, Fut. -dcrw, Kv&crcrw, to sleep, Eut. -axrco ; Xevcrcrco, to look, Eut. Aeu<ra> ; 
Xicrcrofxai (poetic, especially Horn., also xirofxai),to pray, Aor. iXicrd{xr]v f 
iKiT6[xr}V : vicrcrofiai, veiffcr o/iai, to go, Eut. veicroixai ; ko pier (Too, to equip 
(Epic Perf. /ce-K^pufr-juat)- 

Here are classed derivatives in - co t t o> : A. : /x c6 t t w, to hunger ; dveipcoTTw, 
to dream ; utt^wttw, to &e sleepy. 

4. The following verbs in - cr <r o> vary between the two formations : vdcrcrw, 
to press together, Eut. rct|o?, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, v£vacrp.ai ; verbal Adj. vacnos ; 
— a<pvcrcr(D (Poet.), to oraitf, Eut. -v|co, Aor. tftpvera, 7}<pvad/xr)}/. 

5. Of verbs in -£00, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-mute, commonly 5, 
there are only a few primitives, e.g. e forest, Poet., Ka&efoiuw, prose, J seart 
myself, 'l£o}, commonly ko^-i^w, to seotf; o'xiC C0 » *° separate; x^C w > alvum 
dejicere ; yet there are very many derivatives, namely, all in -d& and most in 
-l£ct>, e. g. e<vhX&>, elKa£a>, etc. 

6. Verbs in - £o>, whose pure characteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly y, 
are mostly Onomatopoetics, i. e. words whose sound corresponds to the sense ; 
the greater part of these denote a call, or sound, e. g. aid £«, to groan, Eut. 
aia|ct>; aXaXd(w, to shout (avdd£acrfrai, to speak, Aor. wanting in Her.); 7pu£o>, 
to grunt; ko'cQw, to squeak, to grunt (like a swine), Fut. ko'/'£&>; Kpd(a, to 
scream, Aor. e/cp^oi'; Kpd>£a}, to caw, to croak; jxao-rl^a, to whip; odd (to, to 
scratch ; olfxcii £co, to lament, Eut. ol/x^o/xai ; 0X0X6 £co, to cry out, to shout ; pvcr- 
rd£a), to drag about; crrd£(a and <xraXd£o3, to trickle; arevd£(a, to sigh, 
crr-npiCco, to make firm; crrl^a, to mark, to prick; crvpl£w, to whistle (Fut. 
crvpl^o/xai, etc.; crvpicrca, etc., later, and not Attic) ; <r<pd(co (Attic mostly crepdr- 
7oo),to kill ; cr(pv £ca, to throb ; rpi £o} t to chirp (rerplya, Ion. and poet.) ; <p A v £<», 
to bubble, and the Poet. fid£cc, to prate, Eut. /3a|co, third Pers. Perf. Mid. or 
Pass. fieJBaKTcu ; fipt£w, to slumber (fip7£cu) ; d at (a, to divide, to kill ; eA.eA.f(w, 
to~whirl, to tumble; ivapl £u>, spolio ; p e £u>, to do (eopya). 

7. The following verbs in - £co vary between the two modes of formation : 
Pao-rd £«, to lift up, to support, Fut. -dcrw, etc., Aor. ifiacrTdx&yv ; — S i <r t a £«, 
to c?oa&i, Sttrraa-co, from which the verbal Subst. dtcrray^s and Slcrrdcns] — vvcr~ 
t d £w, to noc?, to s/eep, Fut. -acrco, Aor. Zvvcnacra, in the later writers vvo~Td£a>, 
etc., e. g. Plut. Brut. 36 ; — iralCto, to jest, Fut. ttcu^ovjucm and Trail-opai, Aor. 
Att. iiraitra (in later writers e7rai£a, 7re7raixa), Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. ir4Traicrp.ai. 
(in later writers ireiraiy/xai, siraix&nv) '■> verbal Adj. iraicrreos ; — a predict, to rob, 
Att. apirdarofjiai, ripiracra, etc. (but in the Epic and Common language apird^w and 
-dcrca, etc., second Aor. Pass. 7]pirdynv) ; — fiv £w, to moan, has H. 8, 20. iirefiv^av, 
but in Hippocr. ey.v<rev. 

8. The following verbs in - £&> have 77 for a pure characteristic : /c A a £a>, to 
sound, to cry, Perf. ne-icXayy-a, Fut. KXdyl<a, Aor. I'/cAo/yla; — irXd£<o (poet.) to 
cause to wander, Eut. •7rAa7|a>, etc. Aor. Pass, iirxdyx^w j — ffaXirt £a>, to blow a 
trumpet, Eut. -ty^co, etc. (later also -icrca, etc.) 



§ 144. Formation of the Tenses. 

Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and 
Mid. with the tense-characteristic <t 3 and the first Perf. and 
first Plup. Act. with the aspirated 1 endings -a and -elv, when 
the characteristic is a Pi or Kappa-mute; but with the# 

1 The Perf. Act. of all verbs properly ends in Ka, but where k is preceded by 
a Pi or Kappa -mute, that mute combines with k and is changed into the cor- 
responding rough. On the contrary, a Tau-mute before k is dropped, e. g. 
rervTTica = T*Tv<pa ; ireirpdyKa = ireirpaxa, but iriireiua instead of Treirei&Ka. 



§ 144.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. 175 

endings -tea, -tceiv, when the characteristic is a Tau-mute ; 
though the Tau-mute is omitted before k (§ 17, 5). 

Remark 1. Por the change of a Tau-mute into cr, before jx in the Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, see § 19, 1 ; for the change of a Tau-mute into <r before t, see § 17, 5, 
but this <r is omitted before <r of tbe personal-endings, e. g. irdireiff/juu, -<ttcu, 
ir*<ppa(Tixcu, -ffrai ; but second Pers. Trdirei-aai, ir4(ppa-<rai instead of 7re7rezcr-cr<u, 
■n-4(ppa<r-<rai. The vowels a, i t v are short in verbs which have a Tau-mute as a 
characteristic before endings with the tense-characteristic a and k (-ica, -iceiv), 
C. g. ebpet^o), <ppa<roi, eeppacra, ireippaKa ; 7r\d<T(Tco, to form, irXacrco ; vo^'ifa, to think, 
ivdfxia-a ; /cAv£a>> to wash, k\v(to), etc. ; in like manner, short vowels remain short, 
e. g. app.6£as, Vip^okc. 

Rem. 2. On the changes which the mutes undergo by the addition of the 
endings beginning with o-, $-, /u-, or r, and before the aspirated endings -a, -eiv, 
see §§ 17, 2 and 3. 19, 1- 20, 1 ; on the lengthening of -e into -ei before <r of 
verbs in -eVScu or -eVdw, e. g. o-irevS-a, Put. (cr7reV5-crco) crireiaco, Aor. eo"jrei(ra, 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. iaireiaixai, see § 20, 2 ; on the omission of o* in endings 
beginning with a&, e. g. KeKpvcp&ai instead of KeKpv\l>&ai (/ce«:pu<p<rd-a:), ireir\4x~ 
Sou instead of 7reirX4^ai, see § 25, 3 ; on the endings of the third Pers. PI. 
Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., -arai and -&t o instead of -vrai, -vto, see §§ 18, 
1 and 116, 15 ; on the variable vowel in the Secondary tenses, and in some first 
Perfects and Perfects Mid. or Pass., see § 140 ; on the Att. Put. of verbs in 
-dfy, and -l£co, e. g. 0t£a£a>, Put. /8cjS&ra>, fiifia, -as, -£, -wrov, -u>fj.eu, etc., /fo/it^w, 
Put. KotXhroo, KOfiiw, -ie?s, etc., see § 117. 

Rem. 3. When /* precedes a Pi-mute, which is the characteristic of the 
verb, c. g. in Tr^u-ir-a, the fi is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, before endings 
beginning with /j, ; thus, Trep.ir-ci), to send, ire-ire/x-iJiai (instead of ir4-irefXTr-fiat, 7re- 
TreiAfj.-p.ai), ireirep.\pai, TriirepLTTTai, etc., Inf. ireTrep.<p&ai, Part, ireirefxpeuos J SO 
KapLiTT-u}, to bend down, Ke-Ka/i-fiai (instead of Ke-Kapur-jxai, Kt-Kap.p.-fj.ai). Also 
when two gammas would stand before /t, one y is omitted, e. g. acptyy-w, to tie, 
H-crcpiy-jAcu (instead of e-o-(pi,yy-fj.ai), eo-<piy£ai, ZacpiyicTai, etc., Inf. ia<ptyx&ai, 
Part. i<r<piyp.4uos ; so Qt\4yx<0, to convince, i^KiiKeypiai (instead of i^€\i)\cyxp-ai, 
4Ze\f)yyfj.ai), iZe\7)\ey£ai, etc. Both the jx and 7 are here dropped to prevent 
the concurrence of three consonants. 



176 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



[$ 143. 



Paradigms of Mute Verbs. 

* 145. A. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Pi-mute 

(A *i *•) 

(a) Pure Characteristic, /3, it, <p (Put. -^«). 

rpifio}, to rub. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 
Impf. 
Perf. 

Plup. 
Put. 
Aor. I. 



Ind. rpifi-ca Subj. Tpifi-co Imp. rp?fi-e Inf. Tpifi-eiv Part, Tpifi-wv 

Ind. Z-rplfS-ov Opt. rpifi-oifii 

Ind. (ri-TpIfi-a) re-rplcp-a Subj. re-Tpicp-io Imp. not used, Inf. t€- 

rpl(p-ivai Part, Te-TpIcp-oos 
Ind. (e-Te-Tptfi-eiv) i-re-rptcp-eiv Opt. Te-rpicp-oifU 
Ind. (TpifS-aa) rpixpa Opt. Tptyoifii Inf. 7ptyeij/ Part, rptycev 
Ind. e-Tpt^a Subj. Tptyco Opt. Tptyatfxai Imp. TpT^oj/ Inf. Tpifai 

Part, rpfi^ay. 



MIDDLE. 



Ind. rpi/3-ofxai Subj. rpif3-wfj.ai Imp. rpifi-ov Inf. Tpip-eofrai Part. 

Tpt/3-<fyteyos 
Ind. i-TpIj3-6fj.7iv Opt. Tplf3-oifJ.7]V 



Pres. 
Impf. 



Perf. 



Ind. 
S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D. 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



(re-Tpi/3-iUai) 

Ti-Tpifx-fxai 

r4-rpi\pai 

Te-rpnr-Tcu 

Te-rpifx-fxeSfov 

ri-Tpi<p-&ov 

r4-Tpi<p-&ov 

Te-TpifX-fLe&O. 

7e-Tpi(p-&e 
Te-r ptu-fxivoi elai(v) 
or Te-rpicp-araL 



Imperative. 
(ri-Tpifi-cro) 
re-Tprtyo 
Te-Tpi(p-&a) 

Te-Tpi(p-&ov 
re-Tpi(p-&u>v 

ri-Tpi(p-&e 
Te-Tpi<p-&axrav 
or Te-Tpi<p-Sa)V 



Infinitive. 
(Te-Tp7/3-&ai) 

T6-TpT<|)-3-at 

Participle. 
re-Tpifx-fiivos, -f\, 

Subjunctive. 

T6-T pilJ.-fJ.4vOS C 



Plup. 
Ind. 

Opt. 



S. 1. 
2. 
3. 



i-Te-Tpifj.-fj.riv D. i-re-Tpifi-fxe^ov P. e-re-TpifL-fxe^a 
i-ri-Tpi\po e-ri Tpi(p-&ov i-ri-rpi<p-&e 

i-Ti-Tpnr-TO i-Te-Tpi<p-Sriv re-Tpifj.-fj.ivoi r}(Tav 

re-Tpifj.-fj.ivos e"u)v [or i-re-Tpicp-aTO 



Put. 
Aor. I. 

P.Pf. 



Ind. Tptyofxai Opt. Tpi\poi/j,riv Inf. Tptyecrd-cu Part. Tpi\p6fj.evos 

Ind. e-TpL^dfj-riv Subj. rptywfxai Opt. Tpi\palfj.r]v Imp. Tptycu Inf. 

rpixpaa&cu Part. Tpiij/ctjuej/os 
Ind. Te-Tptyofxcu Opt. Te-Tpi^oifxrjv Inf. Te-Tpfyecrfrai Part. Te-rpx^- 

fxevos. ^^ 



PASSIVE. 



Ind. (e-rpfjS-STjj/) i-Tpl<p-&r)v Subj. rpi<p-&£> Opt. rpi<p-&eir}v Inf. 

Tpi<p-&r)vai Imp. Tpt<p-SriTi Part. Tptsp-frels, (instead of L Aor. 

Pass., commonly II. Aor. Pass.) 
Ind. rpi<p-Sr)<rofj.ai Opt. Tpi<p-&r)(roifj.7}v Inf. Tpi(p-Sr)(recr&ai Part. Tpicp- 

Ind. i-Tptf3-vv Subj. Tpt/3-<£ Opt. rptfr-elriv Imp. rptp-q&i Inf. Tp?)8- 

Tjj/at Part. rpffi-eis 
Ind. Tp?(3-r)o~ofjLai Opt. rp1fi-rjcroifj.rjv Inf. Tpip-r)o-e(r&ai Part. t/w£- 



Aor. I. 


Put. I. 


A.I V 


p. n. 



Verbal adjective: (Tpi#-T<fc) rp^r-rds, -^, -Jv, rpnr-Tios, 



W 146, 147.] 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VEE.BS. 



177 



§ 146. (b) Impure Characteristic, ttt in Pres. and Inipf. (Fut. -pa>) 

kStttcd, to cut. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE, f PASSIVE. 


Pres. 
Perf. I. 
Perf. II. 

Fut. 
Aor. I. 
Fut. Pf. 


KOTTT-U 

(k4-kott-o) K4-KO<p-a 

K4-Kow-a (Horn.) 

(/C07T-(7w) KOXpO) 

Z-Kotya 


KOTTT-OfXat 

K4-KOfx-fiai, like r4-Tpi/j.fiaL 

A. I. i-Kocp-^nv 
KO-tyofxai F. I. Kocp-frqvofxai 
i-KO\pduT}v A. II. c-k6tt-7]v 

KG-K6\pOfXai F. DZ. KOTT-TJCOfXai 




Verbal adjective : kott-tos, 


•i n -6v, kott-t4os, -r4a, -t4ov. 


tc&n 


Inflection of the '. 
7t-t-«, to bend down (K4Kafx-fj.c 


Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

u for K4Kafj.fj.-fj.ai, § 144, Kem. 3). 


Ind. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D. 1. 

2. 
3. 
P. 1. 
2. 
3. 


K4Kafj.jj.at 
K4Kafj.\pai 

K4KafJL7TTai 

KeKafj.fj.cSov 
K4Kafi<pStov 

K4Kafl<p&OV 

KeKafifiefra 

K4KafJ.<p&€ 

KCKa/j.fj.4voi clai(v) 


Imperative. Infinitive. 
K4Kafj$o KCKdfKpbai 
KCKdfjcpZco Participle. 
K4 K afj.^o V KKawivos, -v, -ov 
KeKdfjcpStwv Subjunctive. 

KCKafJ.fJ.4v05 8> 

KCKdfup&waav, or KCKaficpdroov] 




Verbal adjective : Ka/xinrSs, 


-fl, -6v, Kafj.TTr4os, -r4a, -t4ov. 



$ 147. B. Verbs, ivhose Characteristic is a Kappa- 
mute (y, k, x). 

(a) Pure Characteristic, y, k, %• ( D ) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and 
Impf., (ro~, Att. tt, rarer £ 

it\4k-ci), to weave. Fut. -£«. raaraw, Att. toLtto}, to arrange. 



ACTIVE. 



Pre?. 
Perf. 



Fut. 
F.Pf. 



7rAe/f-cu 
(7T€-7rA.eK--a) 
Tr4-Tr\ex-a 
{rr\4K-crco) 7rAe|a> 



MIDDLE. 



irKcK-Ofiai 

(ir4-Tr\€K-fiai) 

ir4--nXcy-fj.ai 

ir\4£ofj,ai 

ire-Tr\4^ofj.ai 



ACTIVE. 



Taac-ci) 

(r4.ray-a) 

re-rax-a 

(rdy-aco) rd^co 



MIDDLE. 



rdcc-o/xai 

r4-rayfiai 

rd^ofiai 

rc-rd^ouai 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. I (4-tt\4k-&tiv) i-TT\4x-&r)v 

Fut. I. I TvKix-^'ho-ofJLai 

A. II. 4-ir\dK-i)v and 4-ttk4k-7}v 

F. II. i TT\aK-7}(TOfLai 



( i-Tay-frr}v) i-rax-frnv 

rax-&vo-0fj.ai 
4-Tay-r]V 
Tay-r\aofiai 



Verbal adjective: tt\ckt6s, -tj, -6v; tt\ck-t4o5, -r4a, -t4ov; raKr6s, TctKTeoy. 



1?8 



PARADIGMS OF MUTE VERBS. 



[$ 145. 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 


tcmtct&j, to arrange, and <r(ptyyco (§ 144, Rem. 3), to bind. 


Ind. S. 1. 


rsrar/fxai 


ecrcpiy/xai 


Imperative. 


2. 


Terai-at 


eacpiy^ai 


r4ra^o 


£<r(j)iy^o 


3. 


riraKrai 


ecrcpiyKTai 


Terax^w 


io~(f>iyx&c>> 


D.l. 


TST&yiA&OV 


i<r<piyHt&ov 






2. 


rerax&ov 


ea<piyx&ov 


t4to.x&ov 


ecr<piyx&ov 


3. 


Terax&ov 


e<T<piyx&ov 


rerdx^cov 


iacj)iyx^o>v 


P. 1. 


rerdy/xe^a 


ecrcpiyix&a 






2. 


Terox^-e 


4acpiyX&z 


T€Tax3-e 


4<r<piyx&£ 


3. 


reray \x4voi elo~l(v), 


io (piy pivot el(ri(v) 


Terdx&vcrai/, 


£o~<piyx&uGav, 




or T6TaX<* rat 




or reTdx&w 


or iccpiyx&M 


Inf. Terdx&ai 


iacplyX&at Part, mayfx4vos ia<piyp.4vos. 



Remark. The student will observe particularly the changes which take 
place in the inflection of the Perf. Pass, of these verbs : rerpi/x-pat (instead of 
rerpifi-ficu), j8 before p being changed into fx\ r4rpi\pai (instead of Terpnr-trai), 
it and o- forming \J/ ; rerpnr-rai, the characteristic ir remaining unchanged ; 
rsTpHp-Sov (instead of Terpiir-^ov), the characteristic tt being changed into 0, to 
be of the same order as the & following (§ 17, 2) ; so others similar. In like 
manner, T4ra.yp.ai : r4ra^at (instead of r4ray-o~ai), y and <r forming £ ; r4raitrai 
(instead of r4rayrai), y being changed into k, to be of the same order as the 
t following ; r4rax^ov (instead of reray&oy), y being changed to correspond 
with fr. 



§ 148. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Tau- 
mute (8, t, $), 

(a) Pure Characteristic, 5, t, £-. (b) Impure Characteristic in Pres. and Impf., 
£ rarer era: — Put. <ra. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 


tyevo-ci), 


$evd-ofjLai, 


<ppdC-w. 


(ppdC-ofxai, 




to deceive. 


to lie. 


to say, 


to think, 


Impf. 


e-rpevd-ov 


£-\pevd-6pr]u 


€-<ppa(-ov 


£-<ppa^-6prjv 


Perf. 


(e-ipevo-Kct,) 


(e-ipevd-pai) 


(ire-(ppati-Ka) 


(ir4-<ppaS-pai) 




e-tyev-ica 


'4-^evcr-pai 


ire-(ppa-Ka 


Tr4-(ppao~-ficu 


Plup. 


i-1p€V-K€U/ 


i-\p€vcr-fX7]U 


£-ire-(ppa-K6iv 


i-ire-^pdcr-prjv 


Put. 


(ipev8-o~(i)) 


(■^/evS-aopai) 


(<p pad- era)) 


((ppad-ffoiAcu) 




xpev r-co 


\pev-(ro/j.ai 


(ppa-aw 


(ppd-aopai 


Aor. I. 


4-ipev-o~a 


£-y\i€v-o~diAi)v 


4-cppa-aa 


£-(ppa-crdjxT]u 


P. Pf. 




i-xpev-aopai 




ire-tppd-ffo/xai 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 


(e-^ey5-3'77J') 


£-tyevcr-&7)i/ 


(£-(ppdd-Srr]u) 


i-<ppd(T-&7}V 


Fut. I. 




■tyev(T-&7)crofxa.i 




<ppao--frfi<rofj.aL 


Ver 


bal Adj. : (tyevd-r 


ios) Tpeucr-Teos, -re 


x, -r4ov ; (ppa(r-r4c 


s, -r4a, -r4ov. 



$ 149.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 179 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 



Ind. S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
IX 1. 

2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 



eipev<r-{j.eu 

%tyev-o &ov 
%\pev-o&ov 

e^/eucr-yU.eVot elffi(v) 



Imperative. 
e\pev-(ro 

Ityeu-ord-oy 

e\pev-ar&e 



Infinitive. 
i-ipevcr-&ai 

Participle. 
4-tyev(r-/u.evos, -r/, -op 

Subjunctive. 
i-tj/eva-fMeyos 3>. 



i\pev-(r^w(Tav, or ityev-ff&ow] 



has in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. o-eVw-^ua: from o-cZxa 



Kemark. 2a>£a>, to save, has in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, a 
(Attic), and aea-wo-^ai, but Aor. icrdfrrji', verbal Adj. ffaarios. 



4 149. Formation of the Tenses of Liquid Verbs. 

1. Liquid verbs (§ 127, II. B.) form the Frit. Act. and 
Mid. and the first Aor, Act. and Mid. without the tense- 
characteristic a (§20, 3) but the Perf. Act. with the tense- 
characteristic k, e. g. 

crcpaAAca (stem 2$AA), Fut. crcpaX-Sj, first Aor. e-trcprjX-a, Perf. Z-<r(pa\-Ka. 

Remark 1. The endings of the Fut. in liquid verbs, namely, -<£, -ov/xcu, are 
formed by contraction from -eVw, -icrojicu after the rejection of <r (§ 20, 3). The 
inflection of these contracted endings is like that of contracts in -4a in tbe 
Pres. Act. and Mid.: <pi\-a>, <j>i\-ov/xai. (§ 135) ; <r is omitted in the Fut. of liquid 
verbs, to prevent the harshness occasioned by the combination of that letter with 
the preceding liquid. The Fut. Perf. is wanting in liquid verbs. 

2. The Present tense of Liquid verbs, with the exception 
of a few whose stem-vowel is e, is strengthened, either by 
doubling the characteristic X, or by inserting the liquid v 
after the characteristic ; also, by lengthening the short stem- 
vowel, as in all verbs in -ivco, -vvoa, -vpco, or by changing it 
into a diphthong (§ 16, 3), e. g. o-fy&X-X-co, re/jb-v-co, tcpiv-co, 
a/xdv-co, fcrelv-co, $aiv-w (stems %$AA, TEM, KPIN(l), 
'AMTN(y), KTEN, $AN) ; but fiev-co, ve/ju-co with a pure 
•stem. 

3. Except the Pres. and Impf. the tenses are formed from 
the pure stem, but the final vowel of the stem is lengthened 
in the first Aor. Act. and Mid. (see No. 5), e. g. <r$aXX-oy 
(2$AA), Fut. <T<f)aX-(o, second Aor. Pass. i-acjxiX-Tjv, first 
Perf. Act. e-G$aX-ica, first Aor. Act. e-a^rjX-a. The second 
Aorists Act. and Mid. rarely occur, and scarcely%t all in 



180 



FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERB! 



[$ 149 



prose ; on the contrary, the second Aor. Pass, is more in use 
than the first Aor. ; the first Aor. is wholly wanting in many 
verbs. 

4. In liquid verbs with an impure characteristic, the 
ground-form of the stem is not borrowed, as in the case 
of mute verbs, from the second Aor., but from the Fut, 
since only a few verbs of this class form a second Aor. Act, 
and Mid. 

5. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes according as 
the stem-vowel of the Fut. is a, e, I, or v before the ending •&>. 
In the first Aor. Act. and Mid. a is lengthened into v, e into 
ei, X into I, v into v (§ 16, 3). Thus : — • 

I. Class with a in the Future. 
Pres. Fut. 

ccpaKK-oiy to deceive, cr<pa\-G> 

Kajxv-w, to labor, kol /x-ov/jiai 

reKfxaip-a, to point out, re/fjuap-w 

(paiy-a, to sliow, <pav-S> 

II. Class with e in the Future. 
fxitr-u, to remain, ft e v - u> 
ayy4\\-a>, to announce, ayye\-ca 
t4jj.v-(o, to cut, re^-w 
vifx-<a, to divide, ve[j.-a> 
Kretv-to, to kill, Krev-w 
lixeip-w, to desire, lixep-u 

III. Class with t in the Future. 
ri\X-(a, to pluck, r^\-a> €-r!\-a 
Kpiu-co, to separate, KpXv-a> %-KpIv-a. 



Aor. 

€-<T(pr}\-a 
wanting 

4-T€K/J.7]p-a 

e-cprjv-a. 

tjyyeiX-a 
wanting 

e-KTeiv-a 



IV. Class with v in the Future. 

<rvp-a>, to draw, . avp-a 

ap.vv-oo, to defend, a[xvv-(a 



z-avp-a 

¥ip.vv-a. 



Kem. 2. The following verbs in -cuvoo of the first class take u in the Aor. 
instead of 77, namely, l^xvaivo}, to make emaciated {"Hrx v °- va i l&X v ®- val ) '■> KepSaivw, 
to gain (eKepdava, tcepdat/ai) ; KoiXaivoo, to hollow out (inoiXava, KOiXavai) ; XevKaivai, 
to whiten ; opyatvcc, to enrage ; ireiraiva, to ripen ; also all verbs in -paivco, e. g. 
irepaivw, Fut. irepavS), Aor. iirepava, Inf. irepavai (except rerpaipcc, to bore, irerp-r)' 
va, rer prjj/ai), and all in -taivw, e. g. -jviaivw, to make fat, iiriava, itiavai (except 
uialvto, to stain, [xirjucu, rarely fitavai). — The verbs cr-qnaivw, to give a signal, and 
Kc&aipa), to purify, have both a-nfiijuai (which is usual among the Attic writers), 
Kc&rjpai, and a-qfxavai, Ka&apcu. Also alpoo, to raise, and aWofiai, to leap, are 
formed with a : apai, a\a<r&at, but in the Ind. the a is changed into 77 on account 
of the augment, e. g. ^pa, i]\d/xr)v (second Aor. t)\6ixt\v is not used in the Ind 
and very rarely elsewhere). Comp. on o, § 16, 7 (a). 



f 149.] FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF LIQUID VERBS. 181 

6. The first Perf. Act. of verbs with the characteristic v 
(according to § 19, 3), must end in -y/ca, e. g. fie^lary-Ka^ 
Plut. (from fMiaivoo instead of fie-fjuuiv-Ka), irecfxir/Ka, Dinarch. 
(from (palvco), irapoD^iryKa, Polyb. (from Trapo^vvco, to excite^). 
But the form in -<y/ca is found only among later writers. The 
best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by dropping the 
v, e. g. /ceKpl/ca, KkicKiKa from Kpivco, Kkivco (so also Ketcephaica, 
among later writers, also Kefcip8ar/fca, but Keicephrjica, Dem. 
56, 30. from fcepSalvco) ; or also, as in /crewco, by using the 
form of the second Perf., e. g. aireicTova, in the sense of the 
first Perf. (etcTcuyica, etcTafca, from the time of Maenander), 
or, as in the case of verbs in -ivco, by not forming any Perf., 
as, e. g. in puevco, by forming it from a new theme, as nep,£- 
vrjfca from MENEI2. 

7. The three following verbs with the characteristic v 
drop that letter, not only in the Perf. and Plup. Act., but 
also in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, and in the first 
Aor. Pass. : — 

Kpivw, to separate, Ke/cptKa ninpiixai inptfrnu 

kXtvw, to bend down, k4kKiko. zce/cAi^oi iKAferjv (the 2d Aor. iKXtvnu is rare). 

irXvvci}, to wash, (irzirAvKa) TriirXvjxax iirXv^rjV (Hippoc.) 

Rem. 3. Tehca, to stretch, and ktciuw, to hill form the above-mentioned tenses 
from new themes, viz. TAfl, KTANH, KTAft, thus : — 

ri-raKa r4ra.jj.ai irafrnv 

eKTaxa (and e/CTcry/ca) etcTa/xai inrafrnv (tKravfrnv among the later writers); 

yet the forms of Krdvu here presented, are not Attic. The Attic writers use 
%Krova. as the Perf. Act. (see No. 6), and instead of enra/xai. and iKrdfrnu, sub- 
stitute r4&wnKa and air&avov in passive phrases with im6 and the Gen., or 
afrpprifxai and av-ppe^rnu, without a preposition. 

Rem. 4. Kptva, kAiVco, ttAiW, and Kreiuw, among the poets, often retain v in 
the first Aor. Pass, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. eKAiV&ijj/, 
iir\vvht]v ; in prose, these forms seem to be doubtful, yet KareKXivfrn is found in 
X. Hell. 4. 1, 30, in all the copies. 

8. On the formation of the Perf. JNIid., the following 
points should be noted : — 

Verbs in -atvw and vuco, usually drop the v before the endings beginning with 
ft, and insert a to strengthen the syllable, e. g. (paiv-w Trecpa-a-ixai Tre-cpd-a-ix&a; 
vcpaii>a) v(pafffj.ai; fiepalvw /xe/, ipaa-/j.ai (Luc.) ; a"nfxaivu) (Ti(rri^a<Tp.ai ; irepaluw Treir4' 
paa/jLai ; paivw epfrao-fxai : itajtyvto Tre7rd.xv<r/J.ai ; r^Svyca Tidva/xai ; \4-nrvvo3 AeAeV- 
rv(Tp.ai ; 6£iW &^vtTfjLa.i; br\\vv<a TedTjAuoyxcu (Luc); iriaivoo Tmriaa/xai ; rpaxvvoo 

16 



182 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



& 150. 



rerpdxva-fiat (Luc); Xvfiaivofj.cu XeXxxfiacpihoi elvl(v) ; fiialvw fxefiiaa-fxai ; but 
some verbs of this kind assimilate the v to the following /*, e. g. tripalv-a, 
^■fjpa/x-fxat instead of itfipav-ficu (also i^paCfiai), itapo^vvoo, Trapa>£v(x/j.ai i alcrxvv-ot 
jfarxvwai (Homer) ; a very few verbs drop v among the later writers, without 
substituting a strengthening <r ; the vowel, however, is made long, e. g. rpaxw-Wy 
to make rough, re-rpaxv-fiai also rerpdxvo'fiai and TeTpdxvfxfiai. It is evident that 
in the personal-endings, except those beginning with /*, the v remains, e. g. 
Tre(pa(r-p.ai, irz<pav-ffai, ire-cpavrcu, i^-f]pa/j.-/jLai, -avaai, -avrcu, flVxuMucu, -vvcrai, 
-vvTai, -v/jL-fxefrov (see <paiv-co and ^paivco, § 151) ; still, it is to be noted that the 
form of the second Pers. Sing., in -vcrai, is rare ; instead of it the Part, with 
6? is used, e. g. ire<pa<rix4vos eT, etc. 

Rem. 5. On the omission of <r in endings beginning with <r&, ste § 25, 3 ; 
on the variable a, in the first Perf. Act. and Mid. and in the first Aor. Pass., and 
also in the second Aorists of liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and the 
stem-vowel e, see § 140, 3 : on the Perf. of ayelpu, and iyeipw with Att. Redup., 
see § 124, 2 (b). 

9. In the second Perf. (which, however, belongs only to 
a few verbs) the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is 
lengthened, as in the first Aor. Act., except in verbs with e 
in the Fut., which take the variable o (§ 140, 4), e. g. (paw-to, 
first Aor. e-cfrrjv-a, second Perf. Tri-tfrrjv-a) but Gireip-w, Fut. 
<nrep-a), second Perf. e-airop-a. 

Rem. 6. Second Aorists Act. and Mid. are rare in liquid verbs, e. g. efiaXov, 
ifid\6/x7)V, eKavov, eirrapov (doubtful in prose) from fidXXw, Kalvw, irTalpu, ktsI- 
vo) ; Aorists are also formed from some irregular verbs ) a few verbs, also, have 
a second Aor. Pass., e. g. those with monosyllabic stems, as 5e/>«, iSdprjv, ^&et- 
pco, (TTeAAo;, cpaivci), fxalvu), kXivw, etc 



150. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs. 
ayyeXXa), to announce. 



ACTIVE. 


Pres. ayyeXXw Perf. I. tfyyeX-Ka Perf. II. t-cpfrop-a, perdidi, from ip&eip-u 


Fut. Ind. 


S. 1. 


ayyeX-co Opt. ayyeXolfu or ayyeXolriv 




2. 


ayyeX-e?s ayyeXo?s " ayyeXoirjg 




3. 


01776 A-et ayyeXo? " ayyeXoi-q 




D. 2. 


ayyeX-eTrov ayyeXoirov u ayyeXoirjTOi/ 




3. 


ayyeX-siTov ayyeXohrju " ayyeXoi^rrjv 




P. 1. 


ayyeX-odfiei/ ayyeXo?/J.ev " ayyeXoi7]/j.ep 




2. 


ayyeX-elre ayyeXolre " ayyeXolrjTe 




3. 


ayyeX-ov(ri(u) ayyeXoTev " ayyeXo?ey 
Inf. a776A6?y Part. 077c X£>v, -ovva, -ovv 


Aor. I. 


tfyyeiX-a, ayyeiXa, ayy eiXaifii, &yyeiXov, hyyeTXai, ayydXas 


Aor. II. 


Ind. rjyyeX-ov Subj. ayyeXca Opt. ayyeXoi/xi Imp. ctyyeAe 


(rare) Inf. ayyeXeiu Part. ayyeXdov, -ov<ra, -6v. 



* 151.] 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



183 



MIDDLE. 


Perf. Ind. 


S. 1. 


fjyye\-/j.ai 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 




2. 


rjyye\--rai 


tfyyek-o~o 


7J77eA-3-ot 




3. 


rjyye\-rai 


■riy-/4\-&<a 


Participle. 




D. 1. 


T)yy4\-ix&6v 




7iyye\-[x4vos 




2. 


rjyye\-&ov 


tfyyeX-bov 


Subjunctive. 




3. 


fiyytX-frov 


r)yye^-&(i}V 


i]yys\-/j.ej/os & 




P. 1. 


7iyyeA-fj.e&a. 








2. 


tfyyt-A-fre 


^77eA-3-6 






3. 


7)yyeA-/j.evoL elai(v) 


7777 iXfrwcTav, or riyylx-Soov] 


Plup. Ind. 


T)yyiX-\x,r\v, -cro, -to, -jj.e&oy, -dw, -$rr\v, -fie&a, Ss, TyyyeXfitvoi r)cray 


Put Ind. 


S. 1. 


ayyeX-ovjxai 


Opt. ayyeX-oi/x-rfv 


Infinitive. 




2. 


dyye\-rj, or -el 


ayye\-o?o 


yyeX-eTcrdrai 




3. 


ayye\-e?Tai 


ayye\-o?TO 


Participle. 




D. 1. 


ayyeX-ovfie&ov 


ayyaX-oifxe^ov 


ayyeX-ovfievos 




2. 


ayyeX-eTa&oi- 


ayyeX- o?cr&oj/ 






3. 


ayyeX-ticrdrov 


ayye\-oio~ST}v 






P. 1. 


ayyeh-ov/Ae&a 


ayyeX-oifxeSra 






o. 


ayye\-e?cr&e 


ayye\-o?(rde 






3. 


ayyaX-ouvTcu 


ayyeX-oilvTO 




Aor I. 


Ind. 7)Yy£i\-d/A7}v, etc. 


Aor. II. 


Ind. 7777^-0,11771/ Subj. ayyeA-wfiai Opt. ayy€\-ol/xr]V Imp. 


(rare) 


ayyeX-ov Inf. ayyeX-eabcu Part. ayyeX-S/xevos. 


Verbal adjective : ayyeA-reos, -rea, -riov. 



§ 151. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to the 
stem-vowel of the Future. 

(a) with d in the Future: a-paWcc, fallo; cpaivcc, to show, Mid. 

to appear. 



ACTIVE. 



Pre?. 
Perf. I 
Perf. II 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 



-rcpaW-co 
e-o~<pak-Ka 

tr-paA-u, e?s, et 
H-er<p7]\-a 



MIDDLE. 



crcpakK-oixcu 
i-o~<pa\-(xai 

ccpa\ovfj.a.: 
wanting 



ACTIVE. 



MIDDLE. 



(paw-to) <pa.iv-ou.ai 

(ire-cpay-Ka.) j Tr4-(pacr-ixat 
Tr4-(pr]v-a, 1 appear, 



(pav-co 
e-cprjv-a 



(pav-ov/j.cu 
£-<pi)v-atx7iv • 



1 I shall appear, airocb., I shall affirm. 2 Prose airecp., it was affirmed hy 



PASSIVE. 



Aor. I. 


i-<r<pah-Srr)v (poet.) 


i-cpav-frr-v, I appeared, 


Fut. I. 


<T<pah-d7)cro{xai (poet.) 


<pai/-frf]o-o/j.at 


Aor. 11. 


i-o-(pa.K-r]v 


i-cpo.v-7]v, I appeared, 


Fut. II. 


cTcpaX-rj-ro/xai 


<pa.v--fio~ofj.ai, I "'HI appear. 



Verbal adjective : o-<pa\-7eos, -rea, -riov, (pav-rdos. 



184 



PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 



[M 152, 153 



Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of 




(paly-Co, to show ; ^rjpaiv-coyto 


dry, and re iv-ta (§ 149, Rem. 3), to stretch. 


Ind. S. 1. 


Tre-(pa(T-fxai 




£-jj,r)pafj.-fj.ai 


T4-TO.-fA.at 


2. 


Tr4-<pav-<rai 




i-^ripav-arcu 


Te-Ta-irai 


3. 


ir4-<pav-rai 




i-^pav-rai 


Te-Ta-Tai 


D. 1. 


ire-<pd(T-fj.&ov 




£-£r)pdfj.-fj.€&ov 


Te-Toi-fjLe^ou 


2. 


ir4-(pav-&ov 




£-^r)pav-^ov 


T4-Ta-(rfrov 


3. 


ir4-<pav-&ov 




£-^r)pav-^ov 


t4-t<x-o~&ov 


P. 1. 


ire-(pdo*-fj.e&a 




i-£r}pdfi-/j.€&a 


Te-Ta-fie&a 


2. 


Tr4-(pav-&€ 




i-tfipav-fre 


T6-Ta-£T^6 


3. 


ire-(pao~-fj.4voi elai(v) 




i-J^pafX-fxivoi elai(v) 


Te-Ta-VTai 


Imp. S. 2. 


(ir4-(pav-<ro) 




(£-£f)pai>-cro) 


T6 TO.-0'O 


3. 


ire-<pdv-&ca 




i-£7ipdv-&0) 


Ts-Td-cr&o> 


D. 2. 


ir4<pav-&ov 




£-%hpav-&ov 


t4-t<x-oSoi> 


3. 


ire-cpdv-frwis 




£-ty)pdv-&(av 


Te-Ta-a&wv 


P. 2. 


Tr4-(pav-&G 




£-£r)pav-&e 


re-Ta-cTiS-e 


3. 


ire-cpdu-^uxrav, or 




i-tflpdv-Suxrav, or 


Te-rd-a&bxrav, or 




ire-(pd}/-&wv 




i-tflpdv-froov 


re-Ta-a&ccv 


Inf. 


ire-<pdv-&ai 
Tre-(pacr-fi4uo5 


i-tflpdv-frai 


Te-Ta-o"i^ai 


Part. 


£-^7]paix-/x4vos 


Te-TO.-fJ.4vOS 



§152. (b) with e in the Future: 'Ipe'ip-co (Ion. and Poet.), to 
desire, and (TtcAAco, to send. 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 
Perf. I. 
Fut. 
Aor. I. 


ifj.eip-co 
'{/xep-Ka 

IfJL^p-U 

t'ueip-a 


1/neip-o/j.ai 
'Ifiep-fiat 
lfj.ep-oup.ai 
lfj.eip-diJ.rjv 


(TT6AA-W 

e-crraA-Zfo 

(TTeA-« 
e-CTeiA-o 


creAA-o/xot 
e-CTdA-jUat 
(TTtX-ovfAai 

£-0-T€l\-dfJ.7)l/ 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 
Fut. I. 


lfx4p-frt)v 
lfxep-&r)<rofj.ai 


4-crTdA-&r)v 
o-Ta.\-&r)<rofA. 


A. II. £-CTak-7)V 

at F. II. <rTah-i)crofXtti 


Verbs 
Remai 


il Adj. ifxep-Tos, -7}, 
k. The inflection 


-6v, lfxep-T4os, -t4i 
of the Perf. Mid. 


i, -t4ov, CToA-roy, (TToA-Teos. 
or Pass, is like fjyye\-fxai. 



§ 153. (c) With t and v in the Future. 
(a) tIw-co, to pluck ; avpca, to draio ; fxoXvv-ui, to defile. 



Pres. 


TiAA-w 


Perf. 


TiKK-ofxai 
t4-tiK-kci, 


Fut. 


re-TiA-jUat 

TiA-« T?\-ovfj.ai 


Aor. I. 
A. I. P. 
F. I. P. 


e-TtA-a~~ 4-TlK-dfxrfv 
e-Ti\Sr)v 
Ti\Sr)(rofxcu 



Aor. II. and Fut. II. P. e-av, 



crvp-co 
avp-oixai 
ae-crvp-Ka 
(x4-(Tvp-fxai 

ffvp-ia avp-ovfiai 
e-avp-a £-cvp-dfjii]v 
£-<Tvp-&r)v 
cvp-^rjaofiai 



avp-rjv, a , vp-7](T0fxai 



fxo'kvv-oa 

fxoXvv-ofxai 
(fie-fioXvy-Ka) 
fj.e-fj.6kvcr-fj.cu 

fxoXvv-(o fxoXvv-ovfxai 
e-fxoAvv-a £-fxo\vv-djXT}v 

£-fXO\VV-&T)V 

fj.oAvv-&r)o*ofj.ai 



Verbal Adj. ti\-t6s, tiA-t4os, crvp-Tos, avp-T4os, (jloXw-tSs, /j.o\vv-t4os. 
Remark 1. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of Te-TiA-/tot, <r4-<rvp- 
fiai, is like riyyeX-fiai, and that of fj.e-fj.oAvff-fj.ai like ir4-<paff-fj.ai, that of rjffxvfj,- 
fiai (from alffxvv-co, to shame), like e-£r)pafx-fiai. 



* 154.] 



PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. 



185 



(0) kAtv-ou, to bend down; irXvu-w, to wash, with v dropped (§ 149, 7). 



ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


ACTIVE. 


MIDDLE. 


Pres. 
Perf. 

Put. 
Aor. I. 


kXiv-w 
Ke-/cAt-/co 

kXXv-u 
%-kXIv-o. 


KXtv-ojxai 
K4-KXX-/xai 

KXXu-ov/xai 
i-KXIv-afx-qv 


irXbv-a 

ir4-irXv-Ka 

ttXvv-(u 

4-irXvu-a 


TvKuv-ofxai 
tt4-ttXx) -/xai 
ir\w-ovfJt.ai 
i-TrXvu-d/xriv 


PASSIVE. 


Aor. I. 
Aor. II. 


i-K\t-&T)v Put. I. KXi-frfja-Ofiai 
i-K\tu--nu Put. II. KKiu-^aofxai 


i-irXv-frnv irXv-frf)o~Oficu 


Verbal Adj. k\i-tos, -r\, -6v, k\i-t4os, -Tea, -t4ov, ttAv-tos, ttAv-t4os. 
Rem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ki-K^/xai and ir4-Tr\v~ 
ixai is like re-Ta-fiai, and corresponds with that of pure Terbs. 



$ 154. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of 
single Verbs, both Pure and Impure. 

1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle 
form, e. g, aKovw, I hear, Fut. d/<m'o-o/xai, I shall hear, Aor. r/Kouo-a, 
I heard. See § 198. 

2. The following verbs in -atw or -aco and -ew, whose stem 
ended originally in -au 1 and -ev (aF, eF), resume the v in the 
Aorist and Future ($ 25, 2) : — 

Kaia) (old Attic nan seldom, and without contraction), to burn, Put. leavcra', Aor. 

e/couo-a ; Perf /cc/couko ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, Keicavfiai ; Aor. Pass, inavd-qv ; 

Put. Pass. Kav^rria-ojxai:, verbal Adj. Kavar4os, Kavaros, kwtSs] but second 

Aor. Act. 4ko.t)v, I burned. Intrans., in the Ion. and later writers. 
KXaiui (kXclw seldom, and without contraction), to weep, KXauao/j.ai or KXavaov^ai 

(No. 3), KXava-ca late ; first Aor. Act. e/c\aucra, etc. ; Perf. Pass. /ce/cAav^at ; 

Aor. Pass. iKXavcr^rrjv late. See § 166, 18. 
&4a, to run, Put. &€i><ro/j.ai or Srevaov/xai (No. 3), &ewr« late; the other tenses 

are wanting. See rp4xw, § 167, 5. 
v4u), to swim, Put. vexxroiiai or vevaovfiai (No. 3) ; Aor. tWutra; Perf. v4uevKa. 
7rAea>, to sail, Put. TrXevo-ofxai, usually irXevaov/xai (No. 3) ; Aor. €7rAeu(Ta; Perf. 

ireVAeu/ca ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ^TrXevc fxai ; Aor. Pass. eirXevo-frnv ; verbal 

Adj. TrAeuo-reos. 



1 The v in the Fat. of these verbs is occasioned by the reappearance of tho 
Digamma (F) softened into the vowel v. The Digamma would regularly 
stand in the Pres. before the personal-ending u, but is omitted where it comes 
between two vowels : it appears, however, in the Fut., as it there stands before 
the consonant <r. This is analogous to the disappearance, in the Pres., of some 
aspirate, perhaps h (comp. veho), in the Latin verbs fluo, struo, and the reap- 
pearance of the same in the Perf. before s, with which it combines and forms x. 
16* 



186 PECULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OF VERBS. [$ 154. 

•nveo), to blow, Put. irvevcrofxai or Truevcrov/xai (No. 3); Aor. eirj/evffa; Per£ 

ireTTi/evKa ; late Tut. irj/eixrw, and Aor. Pass. iTrvev<r&r)v. 
pea, to yZow;, Put. pevffofiai ; Aor. eppev<ra ; both forms extremely rare in the 

Attic, which uses instead of them pvr](rop.ai, ippvrjv (§ 192, 7), and so also 

the Perf. ippvrjKa. 

Remakk 1. The verb %kw [x^ w -> X™o>)-> to pour out, differs from the pre- 
ceding verbs: Put. x«»; Put. Mid. x e V at (see No. 4); Aor. e^ea, Subj. x«», 
Inf. xeai, Imp. x* ov > x^tco, etc 5 Aor. Mid. ixedfxriu (see No. 7); Perf. Act. 
Ke'xv/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ke'xfytai ; Aor. Pass, ex^^j Put. Perf. x^cro/xat 
(§ 223, R. 2). The forms with «v belong only to the Epic; Put. x e " w j Aor. 
exeua. 

3. The circumflexed Fut in -oS/xat which, properly belongs tG 
liquid verbs only, is used by the Doric writers with other verbs 
also, whose Future would regularly be in -o-o> or -o-o/xai, e. g. 
tui/'gj, -eis, -€?, -ovfjiev, -ctre, -ovvrai ; rvij/ov/xaLy etc. ; this is called the 
Doric Fut. and is in common use in the following verbs, yet 
only in the Middle form, with the signification of the Fut. 
Act. : — 

<peuy-oo, to flee, Put. <pev£odfjiai and <pev£ofuu 

7rai£-o>, to sport, " Trcu£odfjt.at " Trat^o/j.ai 

xK'^i alvum exonerare, " x 60 * "/"*' 

7rt7TT-«, to fall, " ire<rovp.ai (riETH) 

irvvSd.vou.ai, to inquire, " Trevcrov/xai, usually 7reu<rQ./mt, 

and also in those mentioned under No. 2 : /cAat'co, 7rA.e<y, TiWa, v£w y 

4. Future without the tense -characteristic. The Fut. of the 
following verbs, being without the Fut. characteristic o-, and 
having the inflection of the Present, takes entirely the form of 
a Present, viz. : — 

eS-w, Epic, usually ivSriw, to eat, Put. %5-ofxai ; itlv-xa (Tim), to drink, Put. irl- 
opai ; x«o, to pour out, Put. x* *) X e ^> X e *> etc - 5 -^ ut - Mid. x^o/m: (see Rem. 1 ). 

5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of liquid verbs 
in -ovfjicu without o- : — 

fidx-ofJLai, to fight, Fut. /j.ax-ovjxcu (formed from the Ion. fxax-ecofjicu). 
e^ofiai ('EAXl), to sit, Put. (id-ovfiai) Ka&ed-odfxau 

6. The Fut. Perf. of the following verbs has an Act. form: — 

Sfvf]ffKu, to die, Perf. re&v-nica, lam dead, Put. Perf. refti/few or -£op.ai, I shall 

be dead ; 
tffrijjM, to station, Perf. tcrT-nKa, I stand, Put. Perf. £o , tt)£(o or -£o(mu, I shall 



$ 155.] VERBS. SYNCOPE. 187 

stand. 'E<tt?7|w and re^vfj^co are old Attic ; e<TT7)£ofj.ai and Te&v7)£ofxcu aro 
only in the Attic, X. Cy. 6. 2, 17. 

7. The three following verbs, though not liquid, form the 
first Aor. according to the analogy of the second Aor., without 
the tense-characteristic o- : — 

etVe«/ (second Aor.), to say, first Aor. elir-a; <pepco ('ErKfi), to bear, first Aor. 
rfveytc-a (second Aor. TJveyitov) ; %ew, ex €a ( see Pern. 1). 

Ee^i. 2. In the second Aor. eirearov, from IIET-co (ir'nTT-co), to fall, the a is 
not the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, the t having here been 
changed into er (Dor. iirerov). The first Aor. eirecra, is late ; in Eurip. Ale. 471 
and Troad. 294, the readings are not sufficiently confirmed. 

8. The following pure and impure verbs form the Perf. Subj. 
and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass, without the aid of the auxiliary 
ei/jtt ; the impure verbs by assuming an c as their characteristic 
in forming the tenses, become analogous to pure verbs : — 

Krd-ofiai, I obtain, Perf. nenTTificu, I possess, Subj. KtKT&ncu, -jj, -tjtcu; Plup. 
tK.eKTT}iA7}v, I possessed, Opt. KeKTrjfxTjv, kskttJo, kzkttjto or KeKrcofxTfv, -§o, 

-CpTO. 

fjn/xyna-Kco (MNAH), to remind, Perf. fj.4fj.vr)fxai, I remember, Subj. /xe/xvcafxai, -ij, 

-7}tcu ; Plup. ifj.efj.v7ifj.-qv, Opt. fiefj.vTJfjt.7ii/, -rjo, -rJTO or fj.efj.vcpfj.7ji', -<£o, -£to, and 

in X. An. 1. 7, 5. fiefivoio (in all the MSS.). 
jSaAAw, to throw (BAA), Perf. f3efiA.7]fxai, second Pers. PI. Perf. Subj. SiajSe- 

(3Ar}o~&e, Andoc. p. 22. § 24. 
KoAeaj, to name, Perf. zce/cA^ou, lam named; Plup. iiteKAJifj.7jv, Opt. KeKXrjfXTjv, 

-rjo, -fjro. 

Rem. 3. iKTeTfjL7j<r&ov may be found in PI. Ep. 564, c ; at present, however, 
the right reading is eKTerfx-qaecr^ov, according to most MSS. 



$ 155. Syncope. 

1. A few verbs, in some forms, suffer Syncope (§ 16, 8). 
E. g. the following words in prose : — 

irerofiai, to fly, Aor. Iirr6fx7]v, irrecr^ai, Put. Tvr-qo'Ofxai (e syncopated). 

iyelpw, to wake, second Aor. 7\y pofx-qv (also the Inf. eypeoScu with the accent 
of the Prcs.), I awoke (riyepfrnv, I was awaJce), (et or i syncopated.) 

ipXOfJLdi, to go, second Aor. t)k&ov, Inf. ekSrelv, etc., from 'EAEY0Q (u synco- 
pated), (§ 167, 2.) 

olfuu, to suppose, instead of olofxai, cpfxrjv instead of u>6fj.7)v. 



188 VERBS. METATHESIS. [$ 156. 

2. This Syncope occurs most frequently after the redu* 
plication ; thus, e. g. 

a. In the Present : 
yiyvofj-ai, to become, instead of yi-yevofxai, stem TENfl. 
Ixillvw, to remain, Poet., instead of ixi-jx4vta. 

ir'nrTCi), to fall, instead of 7ri-7reTa>, stem nETXl. 
TriirpdcrKCi} from Trepaa). 

b. In the Perfect: 

ireTavvvfu, to spreaa out, veirTaiiai] 7reVrco/ca (from nETQ), to/all. 



$ 156. Metathesis. 

1. Metathesis (§ 22) occurs in the formation of the tenses 
of several verbs, most frequently in the Perf., Plup., first 
Aor. Pass., and first Fut. Pass, (seldom in the second Aor. 
Act.), sometimes also in the Pres., both for the sake of an 
easier or more euphonic form, and, in poetry, for the sake 
of making a syllable long by position. 

2. In the Common language, the following verbs are 
subject to Metathesis : — 

fid\Aw, to throw, Fut. jSaAcD (j8aAA^o-«, Aristoph. Vesp. 222); Aor. efiaAov; 

Aor. Mid. if3d\6Li7]v ; BAA: Perf. j8e'/3A7?Ka; Perf. Mid. or Pass. f34f3\7}- 

(.tar. Aor. Pass. ifiXyj^-nv; Fut. Pass. jSAijdTjcro/xcu ; Put. Perf. /3e/3A7j0-°j"c"' 
da.fji.da), usually Sa^afc, to tame, Fut. dafxaa-co ; Aor. idd/xaffa; AMA: Perf. 5e5- 

firjKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. d4d/j.r]ixai ; Aor. Pass. eS/^&Tji/, 4§dpvnv. 
defxco, to build (mostly Poet, and Ion.) ; Aor. Act. eSet^a ; Aor. Mid. iSeifxafx-nu; 

AME : Perf. 8 e 5 [x -n k a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, dedfivfiai. 
&vf)<rnci), to die, Aor. airi^avov; Perf. r4&vnKa. 
& pea cr koo, to leap, Aor. %&opov. 

KoAew, to call (Poet. klkX^o-kco, like &v7}<tkw), Put. koAw; Perf. /ce/cATjfea. 
Kd/xva), laboro, Aor. eKafxov, Perf. /ce/c^Tj/ca. 
ovceAAco, c/ceAew, to make dry, second Aor. e a - k A 77^5 Perf. effKXrjKa; Put. 

(TK/\r](roLiai. 
renvoi), to cut; Aor. '4tcliov\ Perf. t 4t ll^ko.. 
r\-f}ffofiai, Iwillbear; Aor. 4t\t)v) Perf. r 4 r A t\ k a, from the stem TAAA. 

Remark. When the stem of the verb is dissyllabic, then the vowel trans- 
posed by Metathesis coalesces with the following vowel; (a) In inflection: — 

Kspd-vvvpii (Poet, nepd-w), to mingle ; Put. Kepacra) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, k e/cpd 

fxai instead of Ke-Kp4a-fxai ; Aor. Pass. eKpd.&r)i'. 
TtiirpdffKO), to sell (instead of TwrepdcrKO), iwrpedffnu)), from irepcLu) (hence Put 



M 157, 158. 1 VERBS IN -CO WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 189 

irepaffw) : Perf. 7r eirpaKa, it 4irp a/Aa. ; Aor. Pass, iirpa^r-qv; Put. Perf. 

TreTT^acrojUot. 
(rropi-vvvjii, to straw; secondary form arpdovvvixi (instead of <rrp^6vvvp.i) \ 

Put. <r t /) ci <r a> ; Aor. ecrpaxra; Perf. Mid. or Pass. etrrpauai; Aor. 

Pass. k<np&&'t\v. 
ire\d£a), appropinquo, to bring to, ireXd&a), ir\dd-«; Aor. Pass. iireXaafrnv ; 

Poet. Att. iir\a&r)V, second Aor. Att. 4ir\afi7]u; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

Att. iriirXaixai. 
(b) The same holds also in the stem of the verb frpaTTco, to disturb (formed 
from rapaTTcc, Tpadrrw), an Attic form of rapavaw) Aor. &d-pa£a. 



§ 157. Verbs in -co with the Stem of the Present 
strengthened. 

1. It 1ms already been seen ($$ 138-140), that the stem of 
many verbs is strengthened in the Present ; but this strength- 
ening remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the 
modes of strengthening already mentioned, by r (ttt, kt), cr (era; 
£), and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are others, which 
will now be specified. 

Remark. All the forms which are assumed for the sake of constructing the 
tenses in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 138, 3). The abbreviations, D. M., 
signify Deponent Middle, and D. P., Deponent Passive (§ 102, 3). The fit, placed 
in parenthesis, shows that the form standing before it, is analogous to the con- 
jugation in -/mi, to be treated below. See § 191. 

$ 158. I. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the 
Pres. and Imp/, by inserting v before the ending. 

Preliminary Remark. Baivca lengthens the stem-vowel o into cu ; i\aww, 
a into av ; Svvco and irTi/a, v and l into v and f. 

1. BtuVto, to go (BA-), Fut. j&jo-o/xcu ; Perf. /Se/fyca (§ 194, 2) ; 
second Aor. efirjv (/jll, $ 191); the Pass, occurs in compounds, 
e. g. avafiaivojxai, dva/3e/3u/xcu, 7rapa/3e/3aju,cu, avefiaSrjv, 7rapefiaSr)v 
[$$ 130 (c), and 131, 5]. Verbal adjectives, paros, /Scti-eos. 

Remark. First Aor. Act. ifr-ncra, and Put. /3tj<t«, are transitive, / brought, 
will bring, and belong only to the poetic, Ionic, and later writers 

2. Svvu), to go in, to go under, to put on. The unstrengthened 
verb 8vco (KarcSuw) has in the Pres., in the Fut Svo-oj and first 
Aor. Act. zovcra, a transitive signification, to wrap up, to immerse, 



190 VERBS IN -W WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [\ 158. 

to sink; (so also Perf. in X. An. 5. 8, 23, 6.7roSi8vKev ;) Aor. 
Pass. ISwV; Fut. Pass - Sv&jo-opu [$ 130 (b),2]. But the Mid. 
hvofxai, SiBvfjLai, Svaojxcu, iSvcrdjxrjv, signifies to wrap up one's self, to 
go into, or under, to clothe one's self; likewise the Perf. SeSv/ca 
and the Aor. «W (/«, § 191), have an intransitive signification, 
like Svofxai. Verbal adjectives, SiJros, oVreog. 

3. eAaww, to inve (secondary form eAw, -as, etc. poetic, yet 
also in X. Cy. 8. 3, 32. owre\a, Imp.) ; Fut. eAao-w (in later writers, 
though also X. An. 7. 7, 55. eAao-ovras), commonly Att. i\S>, -as, 
-a, Inf. eASv ($ 117); Aor. rjAao-a; Perf. iXrjXaKa ; Mid. to Jme 
.//wra we, Aor. ^Aao-a/x^v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. iXrjXafjLat ; Inf. eAi?- 
Aao-^at [$ 124, 2 (a)] ; Aor. Pass. rjXaSiqv [a in the tense-forma- 
tion, $ 130 (c) ; without o-, $ 131, 5]. — Verbal adjectives, cAaro'g, 
cAareos (X. Hipparch. 2, 7). 

4. Sww and &va (poet.), to rage, Put. ^ucw, etc. ; second Aor. Part, bvpevos 
(/it), ra$rtn$r. 

5. ttiVo), to drink, Fut. 7rio/xab ($ 154, 4), among the later 
writers Trtov/xat, but also, in X. Symp. 4, 7. 7rieto-#e ; second Aor. 
e7riov, Inf. 7rtetv, Part. 7rtwv, Imp. wZSi ($ 191), poet., and seldom 
prose wte; IIO- Perf. iriiroiKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 7riiroix.ai ; Aor. 
Pass. e7ro#77v, Fut. Pass. 7ro#?jcro/xat [$$ 130 (c), and 131, 5]. 
Verbal adjectives, worog, Troreos. 

6. two, to jpay, to expiate, Fut. tio-co; Aor. erio-a; Perf. Act. 
reriKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rerur/Mu, Aor. Pass. iricrSrjv ($131). 
Mid. rivo/xat, to ge£ pay from, to avenge, to punish, rlo-ofiai, erio-a- 
/x^y. Verbal Adj. tkttcov. In the Pres. and Impf. the penult is 
long in Epic, short in Attic ; in the other tenses, it is long in all 
the poets. 

Tuo, to honor, rifrw, erlcra, rirlfiai, Poet. 

7. cfrSavw, to anticipate, Fut. KfrS-qo-opeu, more rarely <£#ao-oo, e g. 
X. Cy. 5. 4, 38. 7. 1, 19; first. Aor. e<pwa, and (in prose more 
seldom) second Aor. tySrjv (/u, § 191) ; Perf e<££aKa. In Pres. 
and Impf a in Epic, a in Attic. 

8. 4>&-6/» (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., e. g. PI. Phaedr. 246, c. 
Symp 211, a.), to perish (seldom to consume), Put. cp&tcra> and Aor. e(pfr?<ra, trans. 
to consume. — Intrans., Put. Q&to'ofj.at ; Perf. e^&fytca, ety&ivrcu ; Plup. and second 
Aor. i<p&tiA7)v, Subj. <j>&ia>ficu, Opt. <t>&tfjt.7)v> Q&iro, Imp. <£d-/<rdw, Inf. <p&la&ai, 



4 159.] VERBS IN -ttf WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 191 

Part, (pdi/devos, e. g. X. Cy. 8. 7, 18. ro7s (p^i/xevois, the dead (/xt, § 192). Verbal 
adjective, cp&iTos. 
Here belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a consonant : — 

9. Sawn), to bite, Aor. 'SaKov ; Fut 8rj£ofjuu (late 8-j£u>) ; Perf. 
Aor. $e&qx a > P ei "£ Mid. or Pass. SiSrjyixat; Aor. Mid. l^a^v 
( Hippoc.) ; Aor. Pass. e&rjx*h v ; Fut. Pass. Sqx^w ^ 1 - 

10. Ka/jivo), to labor, to be weary, Aor. cKatiov; Fut. Ka/xortiac ; 
Perf. KeKfX7]Ka (§ 156, 2). 

11. T6/XVW, to cw£, Fut. TC/x.ai; Aor. Ztcjxov (erajuov, § 140, 2); 
Perf. T€Tfxr]Ka (§ 156, 2) ; Mid. ft? cut for one's self (something) ; 
Aor. Mid irefiofirp/ ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rerfirjfmL (Subj. rer/x^o-- 
#oj>, $ 154, Rem. 3); Aor. Pass. ertoj^v; Fut. Perf. t€t/ai7<to/«h. 
Verbal Adj. tjxtjtos, rt^i-eos. 



$ 159. II. Verbs, ivhose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable vc 
before the ending. 

1. pv-vioi, to stop up, Fut. /3voroi ; Aor. efivcra ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
fitpvo-fuxL ; Aor. Mid. i(3vo-djxr)v ; Aor. Pass. ifivaSrjv ($ 131). 

Pres. j8uw, not used by the Attic writers. 

2. LK-viofiat (the simple is seldom used in prose, e. g. Th. 5, 
40. PL Phaedr. 276, d., the compound being generally used 
instead of it), d^tKveo/xat, to come, Fut. d<£i£o/>iai ; Aor. a^lKOfi-qvy 
acftLKeaSaL ; Perf. d^ty/xai, d^t^at; Plup. d<£iytu;v, d</>iKro. Verb. 
Adj. CKT05. 

3. kw-cw, to /jws, Fut. kuo-co: Aor. eKuo-a [$ 130 (b)]. But 7rpos- 
Kwea), to icor ship, Flit. 7rposKW7Jo-(o ; Aor. 7rposeKw^o-a (also poetic 
TrposeKvcra, Inf. 7rpo?Kuaat). 

4. vTncrx-vio fxai (viTicrx-ofAac Ion.), strengthened form of ^7r€^o/xai, 
properly, to Ao&£ owe's self under, to promise, Aor. vTrecrx-ofxyv, Imp. 
V7rocr^oi) ; but Fut. V7rocrxy cro l xaL > Perf. V7recr^/xat. So, d/x,7rtcr^vo{;- 
ftat or d/A7r€;(o/xai, to c/oZ/ie (from d/A7re'x<jo, to surround), Impf. d/x7T€t- 
Xov, Fut. d/i.(£e£cD, Aor. ^fjuncrxov, dtt7rtcr^£t^, Flit, d/x^e^ottat ; Aor. 
rjfnrurxofirjv and y)\xire.<Tyoivr]v (§ 126, 1). 



192 VERBS WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 160. 

$ 160. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Imp/, by inserting the syllable av, 
more rarely aiv, before the ending. 

a. av or aiv is inserted without any change. 
Preliminary Remark. All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a 
uireefold stem, viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second 
Aor. from the pure stem, the Put. and Perf. from a third stem, consisting of a 
pure stem and an assumed e, which is changed in the inflection into i\ ; hence 
the Put. and Perf. are formed like the same tenses of verbs in -ea>. — The a in 
the ending -du<a is also short in Epic 1 (except in the three verbs, tuai/a, (p&dvw, 
and kix&vu) 5 but long in Ik6.voo in Attic. 

1. alcrS^-av-ofjiai (seldom aioSofxai), to perceive, Aor. rjoS-ojxrjv, 
alorSecrSaL', Perf. ^o-^/xat; Flit, atcr^o-o/xat ; verb. Adj. alaS^rjros. 

2. dfxaprdvo), to miss, Aor. y/xaprov (late rj/JLaprqaci) ; Flit, djxap- 
rrjo-o/xai (ajxapTrjcrw, only in Alexandrine Greek) ; Perf. rjixdprrjKa; 
Perf. Pass. rjjxdpTT] ^at ; Aor. Pass. rjfjLapr^rjv (X. An. 5. 9, 21. 
Vect. 4, 37). Verb. Adj. djxapTiqriov. 

3. a,7re^avo/>iat, to be hated, Aor. a7rr)x$6fjL7p/ (poet. rjX^Wv) > 
Inf. aTre^eo-^at with irregular accent; Fut. dTrexSrjo-ojiai ; Perf. 
owr}x$ 7 )f J t' aL } I am hated. 

4. avidva) (and av^w), to increase, Flit, av£rj(ra>; Aor. rjv^rjaa; 
Perf. tjv&ikol ; Mid. and Pass, to thrive, Perf. rjvfyixai ; Fut. av£rj- 
oro/xcu and avtjrjSrjcrofJLaL ; Aor. rjv^rjS^rjv. 

5. fiXaorTcLvQi, to sprout, Aor. e^Xacrrov (later i/3\d(TTr]cra) ; Flit. 
ySA.ao-rrjo-0) ; Perf. ij3Xd<TTr]Ka and fiefiXdcrTrjKa (§ 123, 2). 

6. SapS-dvo), commonly in composition, Kcn-aS., to sleep, Aor. 
KareSapSov (KaraSap^evra, Aristoph. Plllt. 300) ; Flit. KaTa$ap$r}o-o- 
ftat ; Perf. KaraSe^dpS^rjKa. 

7. l£dvco and Ka3t£dv(D, secondary form of ?£a>, Ka#i£a). See 
§ 166, 16. 

8. KXayydvo), used of dogs, a secondary form of K\d£<D, to cry 
out, Fut. KXay^w (K€K\dy£oiAai, Aristoph. Vesp. 930) ; Aor. Zi<\ay£a, 
ScAayov, Eur. Ipll. T. 1062; Perf. Ke/cAayya (old form zce/cA^ya). 

9. oZSdvw, olSaivio (also olMw, otSew), to swell, Fut. ocS^ctcd; Perf. 

10. SXio-Sdva) (oXLo-Satvoi used by later writers), to slip, Aor. 
wXto-^ov ; Fut. oAto-^crw ; Perf. wAio-^Ka (first Aor. wAib-^o-a 
later). 



\ 160.] VERBS IN -CD WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 193 

11. ocrcppaLvopLaL, to smell, Aor. (ixycppopirjv ; Flit ocrcpprjcropLCU. 
Pres. 6<r(ppa<r&ai was a rare Attic form ; Aor. o^<r(ppr]<rd/j,7]v and ocnppav^rjuai 

late. 

12. cxpXuTKoLvo) (rare Inf. 6<pXeiv, Part. 6(pXcov), to be liable to a 
fine, to incur punishment (the double strengthening icr/c and av 
is to be noted) ; Aor. wcpXov ((xKpXrjo-a, Lys. 13, 65. and by later 
writers) ; Fut. o^A^o-co ; Perf. ax^XtjKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

b. av is appended to the pure stem, and v is inserted before 
the Characteristic-consonant. 

Preliminary Remark. The short vowel in the middle of the pure stem 
is changed into a long one, in inflection. The v is subject to the usual changes 
before the Pi and Kappa-mutes (§ 19, 3). 

13. cpvyyavn) (instead of ipv-v-yav(o), ructo, Aor. rjpvyov, Fut. 
ipev£ojj.ai. 

14. S-iyyavo}, to touch, Aor. eSvyov', Fut. $l£o fiai. 

15. Xayxavco, to obtain by lot, Aor. eXa^oi/; Fut. Xrjgofiai; Perf. 
a.\r)xa (rarely A.eA.oy^a from AErX-, COmp. ireirovSoL, TraSeiv, irev- 
Sos) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. etXrryfiaL (§ 123, 4) ; Aor. Pass. kXrjx^W- 
Verbal Adj. XrjKTtos. 

16. Xa/jifiavoi, to take, Aor. eXafiov, Imp. Xdfie and Attic Xafti 
[$ 118, 3 (a)] ; Fut. A^ojucu; Perf. etX^a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
etXrjpLpxu ($123, 4), (XeX^oi Aesch. Ag. 876) ; Aor. Mid. iXa/36jjL7]v ; 
Aor. Pass. iXr)<p$r)v ; Fut. Pass. Xrjcp^-qa-ojxat. Verbal Adj. X^7rros, 

A^7TTC0?. 

17. Xav^ai/w (poet, and also X. O. 7, 31, also Xrj&oi), to be con- 
cealed, Aor. ZXaSov (I. Aor. eXrjaa late in simple words) ; Fut. 
Xr/aro); Perf. XeXrjSa, I am concealed; Mid. XavS-6.vop.ai (Ion. and 
poet, also XrjSopiai), in prose en-iA. (seldom en-A..), to forget, Fut. 
Aqo-o//.<u; Perf. XeXrjcrjxai (j 131); Aor. ZXaSofjLrjv ; Fut. Perf. XeX?J- 
o-ofxcu, Eur. Ale. 1981. 

18. Xt/A7ravw, rare secondary form of Xz'uroi. 

1 9. pLO.vSa.vo), to learn, Aor. 'ip.aSov ; Fut. pcaSrjcropLai ; Perf. 
ILtpaSrjKa. — The a remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are 
formed from the stem MA©E, according to No. a. Verb. Adj. 
piaSrrros, p.aSrrreo<;. 

20. irvvSavouai, to inquire, to perceive, Aor. iirvSopiyjv ; Perf. 7T€- 

17 



194 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 161 

irvo fxaL, Triirvcrai, etc. ($ 131); Flit. 7reuo-o/xcu (very rarely rreuo-ov- 
pat, §154, 3). Verb. Adj. 7r€ucrrds, ?revaTeo?. 

21. Tuyxavw, to happen, Aor. ei-u^oi/; Fut. re^o/Aat (TEYX-) ; 
Perf. TervxrjKa (TYXE- according to No. a). The transitive of 
this verb is the poetic rev^co, paro. 

22. cfivyyavio, secondary form of favyw, to flee, Fut. favio/xai 
and -iovfxcLL ($ 154, 3) ; Aor. 'd<f>vyov ; Perf. iri^evya,. Verb. Adj. 

favKTOS, -T€09. 

23. xavSoj/w, to 7^&?, contain (spoken of vessels), Aor. e^aSov ; 
Perf. with a Pres. signification Ke^ai/Sa; Fut. xdo-ojxoLi (stem 
XENA-, comp. hraSov, iriuroyucu). 

§ 161. IV. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by annexing the two conso- 
nants, (tk or the syllable mtk. 

2/c is annexed, when the stem-characteristic is a vowel, and ktk, when it is a 
consonant ; kv-'cckq} and xP'"l-' i<J ' KO l Xf:u are exceptions. Most verbs, whose pure 
stem ends with a consonant, form the Future, etc. according to the analogy of 
pure verbs, in -aw, -eco, and -6a, e. g. eup-icr/cw, Fut. evprj-aa from 'ETPE- ; d/xjSA/c- 
k<0, Fut. a/j.{i\(i>-(r(0 from 'AMBAO-. Some of these verbs, in the Pres. and Impf., 
take a reduplication also, which consists in repeating the first consonant of the 
stem with i, and may be called the improper reduplication. Most of these verbs 
correspond to the Latin Inchoatives in sco : yiyv&VKO), yfidaKco, yrjpdo-Ku. 

1. dX-wrK-o/Aai, to be taken, to be conquered, with this meaning, is 
used as the Pass, of alp£<$, Impf. rjXia-KopLrjv; ( e AAO-) Fut. dAwo-o/xcu ; 
second Aor. r/Xtov, Att. £d\{ov and 77JW (/xi, § 192, 9), I was taken; 
Perf. ^AwKa, and Att. coAwko, and tJAooko,, I have been taken (Aug., 
h 122, 4 and 6). The Active is supplied by alpciv, signifying, to 
take captive, to conquer. Verb. Adj. dAwrds. Xen. uses both 
caAwv and rjXuv, An. 4, 4. 21. ; Thu. only eaAan/ and eaAwKa: Plato 
also only eaAco/ca. 

2. a/x^Ato-Kw (seldom d/x/3Adw), to miscarry ('AMBAO-), Fut 
d//./3Acoo-co ; Aor. rj/x/SAwo-a ; Perf. tJ/x/SAooko. ; Perf. Pass. 7//x/?Aa)/xai ; 
Aor. Pass. ^/x/3A<jo&jv. 

3. dva/3ia>o-Ko/xai, (a) to recall to life, (b) to live again, Aor. 
avej3iwcra.fjLr)v, I recalled to life ; but second Aor. dve/^W (fit, $ 192, 
10), J lived again. 

4. avakia-Koi (also aj/aAdco), to spend, to consume, Impf. dv^Aio-Kov 
(avd^ow without Aug.) ; Fut. avaXuau) ; Aor. avrjXdxra and dm- 



$ 161.] .VERBS IN -CD WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 195 

Xcoora, KarqvaXuxra ; Perf. dvrjXwKa and dvdXaiKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
av^XoifJXLt and dvdXoijxai ; Aor. dvaXoiS-qv, dvrjXwSrjv ; Put. Pass. 
dvaAco^o-ojaai. Thu. and the Tragedians preferred the unaug- 
mented forms ; Plato and the orators, the augmented. 

5. upeo-Kio, to please, Fut. dpecrco; Aor. r/pecra [§ 130 (d)] ; (Perf. 
aprjpcKa. in Sext. Emp. ;) Mid. with Accusative, to appease, to 
satisfy, Fut. dpeaofxai, Aesch. Suppl. 654 ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, rjpeo-- 
/w,at; Aor. Pass. rjpeaSrjv, Soph. Ant. 500. Verbal Adj. apeo-ros. 

6. j3iftpu)crKQi, to eat (Fut. Att. 4'So/^at from io-9-iw, second Aor 
tyayov), Perf. ficfipiDKOL; Part /3e/3pcos ($ 194) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass 
fieftpwfjLaL (Aor. Pass, ifipud-rjv, and Fut. Pass. fSpiD^rja-ofxai non- 
Attic ; instead, the forms of eo-#io> are used). 

7. yeyavia-Kco (mostly Poet.), to call, to make known, Put. yeywficv ; Aor 
€7e7wv7j(Ta; Perf. yeycoua, "with a Present signification; — further, yeyuveirco, 
Xen., yeyav€7v, Poet., seldom prose, e. g. PI. Hipp. M. 292, d, from the Prim. 

TErnNEH. 

8. yrjpdo-KU) (or yrjpdoi), senesco, to grow old, Fut. yrjpdaro/Acu (sel- 
dom yrjpdao) Plato) ; Aor. iyrjpaaa (in Aesch. Suppl. 901., Trans. 
to cause to grow old), Inf. yrjpacrai (instead of it yrjpavai, from an 
old second Aor. lyrjpav, was preferred by the Attics, fit, $ 192, 1) ; 
Perf. yey^pa/ca, I am old. 

9. yiyvwcTKO} (ytvooo-Koo), cognosco, to knoio (rNO-), Fut. yvuicro- 
fiai; second Aor. eyvtov (/xl, $ 191); Perf. eyvwKa; Perf. Mid. or 
Pass, eyvoxr/xat ($ 131) ; Aor. Pass. Zyvd)o-$r)v; Fut. Pass, yvcocr^- 
crofixu. Verbal Adj. yvtooTos (old form yywros), yrcooTeos. 

10. 8iSpao-Ka), to run away (only in compounds, e. g. d-roS., ckS., 
6W>.), Fut. Spdu-ofxac; Perf. Se'opcuca; second Aor. ISpav (j«, $ 192, 

11. evpio-Koi, to fend, second Aor. evpov; Imp. evpe [$ 118, 3 
(a)]; CEYPE-) Fut. evprjw, Perf. cfy^a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
evprjjxai; Aor. Pass, evpefyv [$ 130 (d)] ; Fut. Pass. evprjSrjo-oiAai ; 
Mid. to obtain, Aor. cvpofxrjv (Aug. $ 121, Rem.). Verbal Adj. 
cvperos, cvprrreos. 

12. r)f3do-Koj, pubesco, to become marriageable, Fut. ry^o-co; Aor. 
Yifiqo-a; Perf. ^fy/ca (^/3da>, to 6e young, but dxrqfidoi, to become 
young again). 

13. ^i'770-Kw, commonly d7roJv>jo-Kw, to <&'e (Metathesis, $ 156, 
2), (0AN-) Aor. d7T£.9wov (Poet. «$aiw; #ouw, ot -JWoVres, Z/id 



196 VERBS IN -to WITH STRENGTHENED STEM* [$ 161 

dead, aiso in prose) ; Fut. a-rro^avovjxa.i (Poet, ^avov/iau) ; Perf. 
TtSvrjKa (not a7roTe$vr)Kd) both in prose and poetry, T£$vdp.cv 
($ 194), etc. Inf. r^Wai; Fut. Perf. tc^cd ($ 154, 6), and 
among later writers Te#wj£o/x,ai, J s/^a/Z &e r/m^. Verbal Adj. 
JhrqTos, mortal. 

14. SpwcrKa) (§ 156, 2), to spring, to leap, Aor. ZSopov; Fut. 
^opovfxat; Perf. Te#opa. 

15. IXdo-KOfxaL, to propitiate, Fut. iAa<xo//,ai; Aor. I. iXda-dp,r]v ; Aor. 
Pass. IXdcrSrjv. 

16. fjL€$v<TKa) t to intoxicate, Fut. /xc^vo-co; Aor. ifiiSvaa. But 
{jl€$vo), to be intoxicated (only Pres. and Inipf), borrows its tenses 
from the Passive, e. g. ipie^va-^v (§ 131). 

17. fufjcvrjo-Ku), to remind (MNA-), Fut. fivrjo-ay ; Aor. ijxvrja-a; Mid. 
to remind one's self, to remember, also to mention ; Perf. fiifivrjfmif 
memini, I remember, I am mindful (Redup. $ 123, Rem. 1), 
Subj. {JLejAvw/xai, -rj, -rjrai ($ 154, 8), Imp. jxifivrjcro ; Plup. ZfiepLvrj- 
fxrjv, I remembered, Opt. fxcjxvy/xyjv, -rjo, -fjro, or juc/wco/x^v, -wo, -a>ro 
(§ 154, 8) ; Fut. Perf. fxepLvrjo-opiai, I shall be mindful (among the 
Tragedians also, I will mention) ; Aor. lixvyjo-S-qv, J remembered 
(ijxvrjo-dfjLrjv Poet.);* Fut. iAv*)or$rj(roiAai, I shall remember (airofivrj- 
o-ofxou, Th. 1, 137). 

18. Trdorxyi (formed from 7ra#o-Koo, by transferring the aspiration 
of # to k), to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. h-aSov; 
(KEN®-) Fut. 7reto-o/xat; Perf. 7r€7rov#a. Verbal Adj. TraSrjTOS. 

1 9. TwrivKoi, to give to drink, Fut. 7rto-w ; Aor. hficra. 

20. 7n7rpda-K0), to sell, rare in Pres. Act. (Fut. and Aor. in the 
Common language expressed by a7roS(oo-o/xai, direoopL-qv) ; Perf. 
iriirpaLKa (§ 156, Rem.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ?re7rpa/xat (Inf. ireirpao-- 
#ai, often instead of the Aor. ) ; Aor. e7rpd$r)v ; Fut. Perf. 7T€7rpa- 
o-oju,at in the sense of the simple Fut. 7rpa-9^o-o//,ai, which is rare 
and not Attic. Verbal Adj. -n parous, irpareos. 

21. creptcrKW (seldom crrepeco, a7rooTepowra?, Isoc. 12, 243, 
according to the Ms. Urb.), to deprive of Fut. o-Teprjcra) ; Aor. 
ia-riprjcra; Perf. ecrrep^Ka; Mid. and Pass. crrepicrKO/xai, o-repovpai, 
privor; but o-Tepo/^ai, Jam deprived, Fut. areprja-ofmi, rarer crre.pt]- 
$7](Top.aL (dTroo-TepeLoSe, Andoc. My St. 149); Perf. ia-Teprjfxaf, Aor. 
io-Tepr}$r)v. The simple occurs most frequently in the middle 
form ; in the Act, the compound d-Troo-TtpLo-m is more frequent 



§$ 162, 163.] VERBS IN -<0 WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 197 

22. riTpuo-Ko), to ivound, Fut. towo-cd ; Aor. 'irpwaa ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. TerpoijxaL, Inf. TerpiocrSaL, Part. rer/3(OjU,ei/os ; Aor. €Tpo)S-r]v ; 
Fut. rp(M^r](TOjxai and rpwo-ofxai. Verbal Adj. rpa>ro9. 

23. cfxio-Ku, to say, to think (Ind. and Imp. very rare), Impf. 
£<jf>acrKov ; Fut. <j>rjcroi\ Aor. e^cra. — (Pass. e<^acrK€TO, S. Ph. 114). 

24. ^ao-icw, to gape (XAN-, among.the later writers x a ^ V0) )> Aor. 
c^ai/ov ; Fut. yavovixai ; Perf. Kexqva, to stand open. 

Remark. In 8i5a<r/ca>, doc-eo, the k belonging to the stem is strengthened 
by <r prefixed : hence the k remains in forming the tenses, Put. 8i5a£o> ; Aor. idi- 
8a|o; Perf. 5e5i'5axa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. deMSayfiai ] Aor. Pass. iSiddx^v. 
Verb. Adj. 5i5a/cT^s, -reos. The same usage is found in the Epic and poetic 
verbs, dAd^cr/co;, dAuc/ca, Aaovcw. See § 230. 



§ 162. V. Verbs which have a Secondary Form in -$<o. 

Several verbs, particularly in poetry, have secondary forms in -frw, e. g. 
<p\€y4&eu/, poetic (instead of <px4yeiy), to burn; riyepe&ovrai and 7)epe- 
SovTOLi, Epic, instead of ayeipovTai and adpovrai. Here belong also the end- 
ings -c£rov and -d^roi/xi of the Impf, and -d&eii/ of the Pres. Inf., which are used 
even in Attic prose, e. g. dAe'|co, to ward off, tragic Inf. dA/cc&ei*/ (stem 5 AAK) ; 
a/iwco, to ward off, a/xwd^eiy, Impf. y/Avi/c&ov ; — Siw/cw, to pursue, SiaKa&eu', 
Impf. idid>Ka&ov, also prose ; — et'/cw, to yield, Impf. €Xkc&ov, elKa&ot/Ai ; — efyyco, 
to shut up, Impf. and Aor. etpya&ov; — e%&>, to have, cx^eiu ( m Homer <rx&^eety 
as Aor.). 



$ 163. VI. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
the Pres. and Impf. by prefixing a Re duplication. 

The reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the root with 
the vowel t. In the Epic and poetic dialects, there are also verbs, which take 
the Attic reduplication, i. e. they repeat the first two letters of the root ; see 
okox'C*'* o.Tra<pi(TK(>}, apapicTKU, § 230. 

1. /3cj3d^(jj } to make go, to convey, Fut. Att. /?i/3w, -ag, -a (still 
also (3t/3d(ro), X. An. 4, 8, 8. 5. 2, 10). Verbal Adj. /Ji/Wreos. 

2. yiyvofiai (ytvop.ai) instead of yiyei/o/xai ($ 155, 2), to become, 
to be, (TEN-) Aor. iyevopirjv (late Attic eyev^iyv) ; Fut. yevrjcro/xcu 
(PL Parm. 141, e. yevrjo-zTai, fiet, and moreover yeve^TJo-excu, ejjicie- 
tur) ; Perf. yeyiv-qp-at, I have become, f actus sum, exstiti, and yiyova 
with a present signification, lam, implying lam by birth; eyevo- 
firfv and yiyova are also used as preterites of elfu, to be. 

3. 7rt7TTw (instead of Tcnviru, § 155, 2), to fall, Imp. wMir*; 
(IIET-) Fut. 7T€o-ovfxaL ($ 154, 3) ; Aor. hrccrov (very seldom first 

17* 



198 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$$ 164, 165. 

Aor. eWra), § 154, Rem. 2 ; Perf. trim-oiKa with irregular variable 
Vowel (Part. Treirrws, 7re7moros, Poet § 194, 5). 

4. Ttrpaw, to fore, Fut. rprjcrw, Aor. hpr}cra. More usual the 
secondary form rerpacvo), Fut. rerpavw; Aor. ireTprjva ($ 149, Rem. 
2) ; Perf. TtrprjKa, rerprjfxat. Verbal Adj. Tprjros. 

Several verbs of class IV (§ 161) belong here, as yiyvcoovcw, and several verbs 
in -/xi, as Si'Sco/xi. 



$ 164. VII. Verbs, whose Pu r e Stem-vowel a is 
strengthened in the Pres. and Imp/, by i. 

Here belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic : ayaio/xai, to be in- 
dignant; data, to divide and burn ; ixaio/xai, to rage; mice, to dwell. See § 230. 

§ 165. VIII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem assumes c in the 
Pres. and Impf. 

1. yap.€<x), to marry (of the man), Perf. yeyapy/ca; but Fut. 
ya/xw; Aor. eyrjixa, yrj/jLac (lyafxyjaa first in Menander, then in 
Lucian. ; ya//,?jo-eias with the better reading ya/x^o-aas in X. Cy. 
8. 4, 20). Mid. yap.ovp,ai (with the Dat), to marry (of the 
Woman, nubo), Fut. yap.ovp.ai ; Aor. kyr)p.apx)v \ Perf. yeyap^ai. 
Pass, hi matrimonium ducor, Aor. iyap,rj$r)v, etc. [) 130 (d), 2]. 

2. yrjSea), Poet, usually Perf. yiyrjSa (also prose), to rejoice, 
Fut. yrjStjo-u). 

3. SoKeo), to seem, videor, to think, Fut. 8o^w (SoktJo-w poet); 
Aor. e8o£a (cSo'/ayo-a Poet.) ; Aor. Pass. KaraSox^s, Antiph. 2. 116, 
2; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se'Soy/xat (SeSoKif/wu, Ionic and Eurip.), 

4. KTvireci} (Poet.), to resound, Put. -^ca?, etc.; second Aor. Zktvttov (Epic and 
S. 0. C. 1450) ; first Aor. i K riirr)(ra (ib. 1606). 

5. jxaprvpia), to bear witness, Fut. p.apTvpr}o-u), etc. But pLaptvpo- 
pat, Dep. Mid. to m/Z as witnesses. 

6. £vpea>, to shear, to shave, Mid. £uoo/x<u; Aor. i$vpdpL7]V, but 
Perf. k^vp-qpiai. 

7. <J#eoo, to push, Impf. e<o#ow; Fut. ww and w^crco; Aor. 
€co(ra, wo-ac ; Perf. eWa late, Plut. ; Fut. Mid. waopiai ; Aor. ctocra- 
/w?v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. euo-ficu ; Aor. Pass, kwrfrqv ; Fut. Pass. 
a>o-&Jo-o/xa6 (Aug. $ 122, 4). Verbal Adj. wotos, -t«>s. 



§ 166.] VERBS IN -CO WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 199 

§ 166. Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and 
Imp/., but which assume an c in forming the 
tenses. 

This change has taken place in the formation of verbs in -ea, partly from 
necessity, as is the case with verbs whose characteristic is |, i|/ ; partly for the 
sake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the introduction 
of consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is eve, x& 5 an( l partly from mere 
choice or the desire of euphony, as in verbs whose characteristic is 8, t, £ A, 
p, it, k, x-> «» a h 6 ? ot - The € is changed into t\ in inflection. Exceptions : 
etidofiai, GX&o/xaL, and fxa.xofJ.ai [§ 130 (d)]. 

1. aXBofiai, to feel shame, to fear (Pres, and Impf. old poetic, in the Common 
language aiSeofxai), Impf. aldo/jL-ni/ without Aug.; Put. ald4o*ofj.ai and -fi<roLiai 
(iTraide<rfrfi<rofjuu, Eur. Iph. A. 889) ; Perf. i}8e<r/j,4vos, Dem. Aristocr. 646, 1 ; 
Aor. TpBeaa.fj.7jv (with Ace), as a law-term in Attic prose, signifying to pardon a 
suppliant ; but also in poetiy, signifying to be ashamed of to fear ; but in tbis 
sense ySeo-frnv is commonly used. 

2. dXc&a, to ivard off, Act. seldom in prose, X. Cy. 4. 3. 2, a\4£- 
eiv; Fut akttqaui (Aor. 7]X££r)o~a, Horn.) ; Mid. to ward off from 
one's self Fut. dXe^o-o/xat (aX4£o/xcu as Fut of 'AAEK- is rare, 
e. g. S. Or. 171. 539. X. An. 7. 7, 3) ; Aor. ^Ae^d/^v (^Ae^o-d/^v, 
Horn, and X. An. 1. 3, 6. in all the best MSS.) (Inf. second 
Aor. (xAKa^eiv, used by the Trag., § 162.) 

3. av£w, to increase; see av£dvaj, § 160, 4. 

4. ax^ofxai, to be vexed, Fut. ax^a-opuu, and in prose usually 
dx#eo-#ijo-o/>t.(u (both with the same signification) ; Aor. rpflio-Sriv 
(§ 131). 

5. fioo-KO), to feed, Fut. /?oo-/ojo-w ; Aor. if36o-Kr)o~a ; Mid. intrans. 
to feed, to eat. Verbal Adj. /Soros, fioo-KrjTeos. 

6. povXofxa.1, to wish (second Pers. fiovXet, § 116, 11), Fut. fiov- 
\rjo~ofj.ai ; Perf. /?e/3oi>A->7/xat ; Aor. i/3ovXrj$r]v and rjpovXrjSrjv (Aug., 
$ 120, Rem. 1). 

7. Sew, to ivant, to need, usually Impers. Set, it is wanting, it is 
necessary ($ 137, 2), Subj. Sir), Part. Se'ov, Inf. Seiv; Impf. eSei, Opt 
oVoi; Flit Se^crei; Aor. e'8e7/o-e(v) ; Perf. Seoe77Ke(v) ; Mid. Seo/xat, to 
need, Fut. hcrjo-ojxai ; Aor. iSerjSrjv ; Perf. SeSirj/xat. 

8. c#eAw and $e'Aa), to will, Impf. rpeAov and eSeXov; Fut. 
€$eA?}ar<o and ^eArjo-w; Aor. rj^iXrjaa and iSiXrjaa; Perf. only 
^eAr/ca. 



200 VERBS IN -W WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [$ 166 

9. et'Ao), elWo), I'AAco, also elXia), to press, to shut up, Flit. eiArycra) ; 
Perf. Mid. or Pass. eiA^/xai; Aor. Pass. dXrjBiqv. 

10. cXkw, to draw, Fut. e\$o) (wliich is preferred to the other 
form £\kvct(x) from e EAKYO) ; Aor. etkicva-a ($ 122, 3), cXkuotu 
(more common than e!A.£a) ; Perf. ciXfriuca; Mid. to draw to one's 
self, ViKvo-ofxat, d\Kvo-aixr)v ; Aor. Pass., Fut. Pass., and Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, only elXKVoSrjv, eAKVcr^cro/xai, elXKyo-jxac. 

11. 'EIPOMAI, Aor. TjpofjLrjv, I inquired, ipicrSac, epw/mi, ipoLfxyv, 
ipov, ipofxevos ; Fut. eprjo-o/mt. The other tenses are supplied by 
ipwrav; but the Aor. ^ocoTT/o-a is rejected. 

12. Zppui, to go forth, Fut. ipprjo-w ; Aor. rjppyjcra ; Perf. rjpprjKa. 

13. evSw, commonly /ca^evSw, to s/eep, Fut. Ka^euSTJo-w ; Aor. rare 
and late; Perf. wanting (Aug., §J 121, Rem. and 126, 3). Verb. 
Adj. KaSevSrjTeov. 

14. ej(w, to Aave, to 7^o^, Impf. ei^o? 122, 3) ; Aor. e<rx ov 
(instead of 'd-aexov), Inf. o-^etv, Imp. erne's, 7rapdax&s according to 
Verbs in /u (in composition also cr^e, as Karao-;^ 7rapa<r;(e), Subj. 
<xXaj, -$9, Trapacrx *, ^apaen^s, etc., Opt. <rxovqv (/xc, $ 192, Rem.), 
but in compounds irapaax 01 ^ etc., Part, fr^w]/; Fut. e£co and 
tr^cro); Perf. ecr^/ca; Aor. Mid. icrxoyfqv, Subj. o^co^ai, Opt. cr^oc- 
/uz/yv, Imp. o^o u, Trapdcrxov, Inf. cr^ecr^at, 7rapa<xxeo-#ai, Part, cr^oyxei/05 ; 
Fut. eiofiai and ax^crofxaL ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, eo-^/xat ; Aor. Pass. 
iarxefyv (not used in good Attic). Verbal Adj. octo?, and oftener 
poetic o^eros, -reos. 

15. e^w, to C00&, Fut. e^crw (Fut. Mid. tyrjaoficu, Plat. Rp. 372, 
c.) ; Aor. yjij/rp-a; Aor. Pass. r)i}/r]$r]v; Perf. Mid. or Pass, fpfnjfiai. 
Verbal Adj. ecjiSos, or £\J/t]t6s, t'i/^Teos. 

16. t£<D (Plat. Symp. 196, 6), commonly KaSl^oi, to seat, to sit, 
Impf. iKaSt^ov, old Attic Ka#t£ov; Fut. Ka^iai (117, 2); Aor. 
€KaM(xa, old Attic KaKcra (§ 126, 3) ; (Perf. KeKa^tKa;) Mid. I seat 
myself Fut. KaSi^-qcrofiaL ; Aor. iKa^urdfirp/, J seated for myself, I 
caused to sit. But jca$e£ojuxu, I seat myself, I sit, Impf. eKa#e£op7i/ ; 
Fut. KaQeSovjxai. 

17. k^Sw, to «w^e anxious (Act. only Epic), Fut. k^StJo-w ; Perf. 
KeKrjSa, I am anxious; Mid. /oJSo/xcu, to 6e anxious, in prose only 
Pres. and Impf. ; in Aesch. S. 138, is found Imp. Aor. Mid. 

18. icXawD 3 to weep (kA.<xo) seldom, and without contraction), 



$ 166. J VERBS IN -O) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 201 

Flit KAauVoyxai (KXavo-ovjACLi, $ 154, 2, in Aristoph.), rarer (in 
Dem.) /cAaoycrco, or kAo^o-co; Aor. e/cAavo-a; iKX.avo-d/JLrjv, S. Trach, 
153; Perf. KCKAcwpxi, and later KiKkavajxat ($ 131, 3). Comp. 
4 154, 2. Fut. Perf. Ke/cAauWcu, Aristoph. Nub. 1440. Verbal 
Adj. K/\.atK7TOS and kAouto?, /o\.au(TTeos. 

19. [xdxopa-h to fight, Fut. [xaxpvfxai, § 154, 5 (Epic and late 
prose (JLaxqcro/xac) ; Aor. ifxaxcordfx^v ; Perf. jx€fxd)(7]fxai ; Aor. Pass. 
ifjui.xto'Syv late. Verbal Adj. (xaxereos and /xa^reos. 

20. /xeAAco, to intend, to be about to do, hence to cfe/<z?/, Impf. 
tjxeWov and 7//>ceAAov; Fut. /v.eAA^cra) ; Aor. ifxiWrjaa; Pass. //.eAAeo-- 
£ac, to &e ^w£ q^ delayed. (Aug., § 120, Rem. 1.) Verbal Adj. 
/xob^reov. 

21. /xcAet jitoi, curae mihi est, ^ concerns me, I lay it to heart 
(rarely personal /xeAco), Fut. /^eA^o-a; Aor. €/Ae'Ar/o-e(v) ; Perf. 
fj.eix£\r]Ke(v) ; Mid. fxiXojj.ai, commonly e7rt/xeAo/xat (and e7rt/xeAo{;/x,ai, 
but Inf. probably c7ri/*eAecr#cu) ; Fut. e7rt/xeA^cro/xat (sometimes 
€7rt/xcA?7^o-o/xat) ; Perf. €7n/-ie/xeA?7ja(H ; Aor. hrefxek-qS-qv. Verbal 
Adj. iTTifjLeXrjTeov. 

The compounds, e. g. ^Ta/j.4\ei, poenitet, are used as impersonate only; sel- 
dom fxerafAeKofjuxi, to repent (Thuc.), Aor. fiereixcA^rju (late) ; (jl€/j.t]Kws, caring 
for. 

22. /at5£co, to ^c/j, Flit, fxvt,-qcroi, etc. 

23. 6^o), to smell, i. e. to emit an odor, Fut. o^o-co ; Aor. w^qaa 
(Perf. o8coSa with the meaning of the Pres. in Homer and the 
later writers, $ 124, 2). 

24. oLo/xaL and oT/zcu, to think, second Pers. ot« ($ 116, 11); 
Impf. u>6fj<r)v and ky/^v ; Fut. ot^cro/xat ; Aor. vp-qS-qv, ol-qSyvai ; Perf. 
wanting. (Aug., $ 122, 1.) Verbal Adj. ofyreos. 

The abbreviated forms, ol/xat, ^/x-nu, are used in prose as a mere paren- 
thetic expression, like the Lat. credo, and hence are often employed in an 
ironical sense; oXojxai, on the contrary, has such a sense, only when it is a 
governing verb ; still, this difference of usage is not fully observed even by tho 
best Attic writers. 

25. oi^o/Atxi, I am gone, have gone (with sense of Perf), abii t 
Impf. (?x c >M v (sense of Aor., also Plup.), I went aiuay, had gone, 
Fut. olxrjo-ofxai ; Perf. yxqixai, commonly as a compound, e. g. 
Trapiaxq^ai, X. An. 2. 4, 1. in the best MSS., Ion. and Att. Poet 



202 VERBS IN -W WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [§ 166, 

olx (i)Ka ( so originate, ot^a, otK-w^a, ot^-wKa, comp. the Epic oKw^a 
from 9<a>, § 230). 

26. ocfietXio, to owe, debeo, I ought, must, Fut. ofatXrjau) ; Aor. 
fe><j!>ei%7o-a ; Perf. axjka'A^Ka ; second Aor. wfaXov, -es, -e(v) (first and 
second Pers. PL not used), in forms expressing a wish, utinam. 

27. 7ratw, to strike, Fut. 7ratcra> (Att. secondary form Trairja-m in 
Aristoph.) ; Aor. eWto-a; Perf. iriiratKa (the simple late); Aor. 
Mid. eTraio-dfjLrjv ; Pass, with o- ($ 131 v 2) ; yet instead of 7rc7raio-» 
//,cu and Z7rai(T$r]v, €Tr\rrpqv and 7re7rA.7pyp.a1 were commonly used 
Verbal Adj. 7ratcrreos. 

28. 7repSa>, usually 7repSop<xi, emittere fiatum, Aor. en-apSov ; Fut. 
TrapSrjo-oiACU ; Perf. 7re7ropSa (§ 140, 4). 

29. niTo/Aou, to jly, Fut. (TrerTJo-oju-at, Aristoph.) commonly imj- 
cropai ; Aor. commonly in prose and in the Comic writers, otto- 
p.r?v, 7rrecr$ai (rarer h?To\p.y\v ', hrrrjv, tttw, Trra.ir\v, Trrrjvai, TrraSy poet, 
and in the later writers ($ 192, 2) ; Perf. 7renr6rr)p,ai (Aristoph.). 
— Syncope (§ 155, 1). 

30. o-KeAAw (or o-KeA.€co), to Jry, Aor. cWAtiv ($ 192, 4), and Perf. 
to-KkiqKa, and Fut. G-KX-qo-oixai, intrans. to d^?/ z<?p, to wither. — Met- 
athesis, $ 156, 2. 

31. TV7TTO), to strike, Fut. Attic n;7rT?jo-<o (rifyo), Homer); (Aor. 
I. €TV7myo-a late; en^a, Horn. ; Aor. II. Ztvttov, Eur. Ion. 779; for 
the Aor. of this word, the Attics use eVar a£a, hraia-a ;) (Perf. 
TtTvirr-qKciy Pollux) ; Fut. Mid. rvTrTrja-ofiai, Aristoph. Nub. 1382. 
Pass, blows will be inflicted; Perf. reVu^ou, Aesch. (rerv7rT?7/>tat 
late); Aor. Pass, krvirqv (irviTTri&rjv late). Verbal Adj. Tvrmrr£o<s. 

32. xaip<3i, to rejoice, Fut. x^PW * (^apiju-ofxac late) ; Aor. ix"-PV v 
(fu, $ 192, 8); Perf. KcxdprjKa (Aristoph. and Herod.), I have 
rejoiced, and Kzx&pw al (poet.), lam glad. Verbal Adj. x a p™s. 

Remark 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -dvw (§ 160), 
and inrKTx v ^ f ia h of those in § 159. 

Rem. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed (§ 149, 6) ; still, 
t ley form the Put. and the Aor. regularly, e. g. 

fxevo), to remain, Put. fj,eva>] Aor. ifieiva; Perf. /Mefievrjica. Verbal Adj. 

fxeverSs, fxevereos. 
yifiw, to divide, Put. vefiZ; Aor. Zveifxa; Perf. veve/xrjKa; Aor. Pass, eve* 
fA7]Snr}v. — Mid. pefj.ofj.ai, Put. vefj.odjj.cu; Aor. iveifj.dfj.rjv; Perf. Mid. of 
Pass, vevefj.rjfj.ai. Verbal Adj. vefxrfreos. 



$ 167.] VERBS WITH TENSES FROM 1 IFFERENT ROOTS, 203 

§ 167. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different 
Roots, and ivhich are classed together only in 
respect to Signification. 

1. alptu), to take, to capture, e. g. a city, Impf. jjpovv; Fut 
alprjo-oi; Perf. jjpyKa; Aor. (from e EA) elXov, eAetV; Aor. Pass. 
rjpeSrjv; Fut. Pass. cupe#?jo-o/mi [$ 130 (d)]. — Mid. to choose, Aor. 
€l\6fX7)v; Fut. alprjaofxai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rjp-qp,ai; Fut. Perf. 
rfprjcropLcu, PI. Prot. 338, b. Verbal Adj. cuperos, -reos. 

2. epxopcu, to go, to come (only the India of the Pres, in use in 
Attic, the remaining modes and the participials being borrowed 
from €i/xt (§ 181) ; thus, ep^ofxai, lu>, l$i, iivai, hxtv), Impf. ^p^opnqvy 
commonly tjuv and -Ja, Opt. ioi/u; Fut. dpi, I shall go (^w, I shall 
come) ; — ('EAEY0-) Perf. iXjXvSa [$ 124, 2 (b)] ; Fut. toop 
almost exclusively poetical and later prose, still also Lys. p. 
165, HI; Aor. ?}X%v, &&o, &&h/u, iXAi [$ 118, 3 (a)], ZXMv, 
£\3(x)V. Verbal Adj. fxereXevureov. 

"EpxofJ-ai has in common the signification of to come and to go ; the idea of 
coming commonly helongs to the form from eA&e?;/, and the idea of going to that 
of elfii. But in compounds, each of these three verbs expresses both ideas, and 
only the preposition limits it to the one or to the other signification. 

3. «t£m«>, to eat, Impf. rjo-Siov, (e'Sw, Ep.) Fut. eSo/xcu, (§ 154, 4) ; 
Perf. ZSrjSoKa ; Aor. tyayov, <£ayav ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ZSrjStcrjAai, 
124), 2; Aor. Pass. rjSeo-Srjv. Verbal Adj. eSeo-ros, eSeoreos. 

4. 6pd(x), to see, Impf. iwpayv ; Perf. loopd/co. (Poet, also copdKa, 
Aug., $ 122, 6) ; Aor. (from 'IA-) elSov, ISio, tSoufii, iSi, $ 118, 3 (a), 
Idecv, ISwv. (On the second Perf. ol8a, I know, see § 195.) Fut. 
(from 'Oil) oxj/ofjuai (2. Pers. o^«, HI 6, 11). — Mid. or Pass. 6pG- 
yaat; Perf. JMid. or Pass, ewpd/xat, or wpLfxca, S^ou, etc.; Inf. <S</>#ai; 
Aor. Mid. elSoprp/, l&eo-Sai, ISov (and with the meaning ecce, tSor), 
as a simple only Poet. ; Aor. Pass. w(/>^v, 6<£#>}i/ai ; Fut. o<£$rycr- 
Ojxat. Verbal Adj. oparos and otttos, 6ttt€0<5. 

5. Tp€x w > ^° run > (APEM-) Fut. SpafjiovfjLai; Aor. eSpa/xov; Perf. 
§c$pdp.r)Ka ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eViSeSpa/^/xai (X. O. 15. 1). Verb. 
Adj. SpeKTtov. 

Srpe^ofjiai, t^p^a, rare and poet. — Second Perf. only Epic SeSpofxa (APEMH). 

6. <f>ipoj (only Pres. and Impf), to bear, fOI-) Fut. oto-w (Aor. 
Imp. oto-e, oio-cTw, fo-wTg-, in Aristoph., see $ 230, under <£epco) ; — 



204 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN -pit. [§ 168 



(*EPKO, or 'ENErKO) Aor. II. fyeyicov (rarer Aor. I rjve)Ka.i), -^ 
-e(v), -o/xev, -ere, -ov (arid -apa/, -are, -av), ($ 124, Rem. 2), Opt. 
iveyKoifxi, etc. (rarer -cu/u, etc.), Inf. eVey/eetv, Part. eVeyKwv (rarer 
eVey/cas), Imp. eVey/ce, -erw, etc. (and -arw, etc.) ; — ('ENEK-) Perf. 
wfyoxa ($ 124, 2) ; Mid. to carry o^ carry away, wm, Fut oto-o- 
uat; Perf. Mid. or Pass, evrjveypai (-y£at, -y/crcu, or ivrjvcKrai) ; Aor. 
Mid. rjveyKaixrjv, eVeyxat, -acr&u, -apevos ; Pass, (a) to 5c borne, 
carried, (b) to fear ewe's 5e^ to hasten; Aor. Pass, rjvix^rjv; Fut. 
evex$rj<rofwj. (rarer ourSrjaopai). Verb. Adj. oiotoV, oterreos (Poet. 
^>epros). 

7. </>?7/xi ($ 178), to say, Impf. e<^v with the meaning of the 
Aor. also <£dVcu and <£as (§ 178, Rem. 2); — ('EII-) Aor. ewrov, 
ewrto, €t7roi/At, et7re [$ 118, 3 (a)], (the other forms of the Imp. are 
rarely or never used, compound TrpoWe), etVeu/, ewiw (first Aor. 
€t7ra, not very frequent in Attic writers, more frequent ei7ras, 
very frequent ei7rare, rarely el-n-av, Imp. dirov rarely, very frequent 
ei7raro), dirarov, dirdrav, and always etVare ; all other forms want- 
ing in the Att). From the Epic Pres. eipco, come Fut. epw, Perf. 
eXfniKa, Perf. Mid. or Pass, etp^at ($ 123, 4); — C PE ") Aor. Pass. 
ipprjSip/ (ippelhjv appears not to be Attic), prjSrjvou, poet's; Fut. 
Pass. prjSrjo-ojxcu and etpTJo-o/xai. — Mid. only in compounds, Fut. 
chrepovp.ai, and first Aor. d7rei7racr#cu, to a'ewy, to 6c wearied out, to 
give up, like d7rewretv. Verbal Adj. prjros, pryreos. 

Instead of the Pres. (py/xt, other words are sometimes used, particularly in 
composition. Compare airayopevee, I forbid, airelirov, I forbade ; aj>Ti\4ya>, I 
contradict, avrzlirov, I contradicted, the compounds of elire?u in the Aor. being 
more frequent than aTrrjySpevcra and avreX^a. So, ayopevw riva kokws > / speak 
ill of one, but avTeiirov kcikcos. 

§ 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -put. 

1. Verbs in -fit, the number of which is small, differ from 
those in -co, principally in taking different personal-endings 
in the Pres. and Impf., several also in the second Aor. Act. 
and Mid. ; and also in omitting the mode-vowel in the Ind. 
of the above tenses. The formation of the remaining 

1 The first Aor. is preferred to the second, in the first Pers. Sing. Indie, when 
the next word begins with a consonant ; also in the persons of the Imp. which 
have o ; hence e^ey/ce, but iveyfedrw. 



$ 169.] DIVISION OF VERBS IN -fU. 203 

tenses is like that of verbs in -a>, with a few exceptions. In 
omitting the mode-vowel, these verbs are analogous to those 
in -dco, -eco, and -oca. 

2. In the Pres. and Impf., most verbs in -ya with a mono- 
syllabic stem, take a reduplication (§ 163) ; this consists in 
repeating the first consonant of the stem with l, when the 
stem begins with a simple consonant or a mute and liquid; 
but, when the stem begins with err, ttt, or with an aspirated 
vowel, i with the rough breathing is prefixed to the stem. 
These verbs are the following : — 

2TA 'i-<TT7]-fj.i nPA iri-fi-irfrj-fju. 

XPA KL-xpfl-p-i AE (8t-8r)-/j.i) 5i5eWt(z/) 

BA (0i-0T)-fjLi) £t/Sos 0E ri-frn-fu 

nTA 'l-Trra-jxai 'E X-r]-fj.L 

riAA 7ri-jU-7rA77-/xt AO cu-5a>-/«. 

Remark. Most verbs in -/xi do not follow this conjugation throughout in 
the three tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs, 
Tifrnixi, to put ; r t<TT7]iJ.i, to place ; Kda/iu, to give, and 'typi, to send, have this 
conjugation most full, though even these have forms in use borrowed from the 
conjugation in -co, together with several forms of the inflection in -fii. See 
$ 172, Kern. 8 

$ 169. Division of Verbs in -yi. 

Verbs in -yn are divided into two principal classes : — 

1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel, 
The stem of verbs of this class ends : — 

(a) in o, e. g. 'l-ffr-n-ju, to place, Stem 2TA- 

(b) " e, " riSy-fii, to put, " 0E- 

(c) " o, " Si-Sw-fii, to give, " AO- 

(d) u i, " dpi, to go, " 'I- 

(e) " <r, " elfil, instead of icr/xl, to be, " 'E2-. 

2. Such as annex to their stems the syllable -vvv or -vv, 
and then append to this syllable the personal-endings. The 
Btem of verbs of this class ends : — 

A. In one of the four vowels, a, e, t, o, and assumes -vvv 

(a) in o, e. g. <TKeZa-vvv-ixi, to scatter, Stem 2KEAA- 

(b) " e, " Kope-vvv-fxi, to satisfy, " KOPE- 

(c) " *, only ri-vuv-fii, to atone, " TI- 

(d) " o, e. g. o-Tpeb-vvv-fju, to spread out, " 2TPO-. 

18 



206 VERBS IN -/it. STEM OF THE PRES. STRENGTHENED. [$ 170 

B. In a consonant, and assumes -vv. 



(a) in a mute, e. g. 8eiWu-/«, to show, Stem AEIK- 

(b) " liquid, " o^-vv-iii, to swear, " "OM-. 
Eemark 1. When a diphthong precedes the final consonant of the stem ; 

that consonant is omitted before the -in/, except it be a Kappa-mute, e. g. 

ctf-vvfAcu Stem 'AIP (comp. aXp-oo, &p-vvjxcu) 

dal-vv/xi " AAIT (comp. Sais, dair-6s) 

tcai-vvfxcu " KAIA from KAA (comp. Perf. Ke'/ca5-,uai, KticeurfJLai) 

Rrei-vviu " KTEIN from KTEN (Put. Krev-w) ; but 

SeiK-pO/xt, eipy-vvpi, £evy~vv/ju, oiy-vv[xi. 
Rem. 2. Verbs of the second class, — those in -v/u, — form only the Pros, 
and Impf. like verbs in /xi, and even in these tenses, only a part of the forms 
are in -v/ju, the others in -vco; in the Sing. Impf. the forms in -vca are predomi- 
nant, and in the Pres. Subj. and in the Impf. Opt., these are the regular forms. 
The verb xrfie-vpv-fit, from the stem 2BE-, is the only verb of this class which 
forms the second Aor., namely, Za-$r\v ; several verbs in -«, form their second 
Aor. according to the analogy of these verbs, e. g. dvw, eSu^. 

§ 170. Characteristic-voivel and Strengthening of 
the Stem of the Present. 

1. In verbs of the first class, the short characteristic-vowel 
of the stem, a, e, o, is lengthened in the Pres., Impf, and 
second Aor. Act. : — 

a and e into ?j, and o into w. 
Still, in verbs in -c and -o this lengthening extends only to the 
Ind. Sing, of these three tenses ; but in verbs in -a, to the Dual 
and PL Ind. also, and likewise to the entire Imp. and the 
second Aor. Inf. Act. In the second Aor. Inf. Act. of verbs hi 
-e and -o, e is lengthened into et, and o into ov, e. g. Sel-vai, Sov- 
vat. But hi the same tenses of the Mid., the short character- 
istic-vowel remains throughout 

2. Verbs in --D/u, whose stems end in a vowel, and hence 
annex -vw, retain the short characteristic-vowel, except those 
whose stem ends in -o, e. g. o-roco-wv/u (2TPO-) ; but verbs 
whose stems end in a consonant, and hence annex -w, are 
strengthened in the stem of the Pres. by lengthening the stem 
vowel, namely, 

o becomes 77, as in irriy-vv/xt, second Aor. Pass, evay-riv 
a " ai, " al-vv/xai instead of &pi/vfj.cu, stem 'AP, 'AIP 
« " ei, " Zs'iK-vvfxi, stem AEK, hence Ion. e5e£a 
v " €u, " fcvy-vvni, second Aor. j^ass. eCty-rjv 



$$ 171, 17?-] VERBS IN -/U. — PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 207 



$ 171. Mode-vowels. 

1. The Ind. Pres., Impf, and second Aor. do not take the 
mode-vowel (§ 168, 1),- and hence the personal- endings are 
9 « *>exed immediately to the stem of the verb, e. g. 

l-ffTd-fie&a e-Ti-de-^e&a e-SJ-iue&a. 

2. The Subj. has the mode-vowels & and 17, as in verbs in -w ; 
but these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel and 
form one syllable : this coalescence differs from the contraction 
of verbs in »o>, as follows : — 

dr) and drj coalesce into 77 and ?? (not, as in contracts in -da, into a and a), 6$ 
coalesces into oS (not, as in contracts in -6<a, into 01), e. g. 

i-ard-ca = l-cnw l-crd-ris = l-arrjs t-CTa-77-Tcu = l-crrrj-Tcu 

crrd-a = at Si ard-ris = crys 

TI-&4-0) = TI-&6) 71-&4-TJS =5 TI-&TJS Tl-&4-W-/Aai = Tl-&U-[A(U 

8i-56-a> = 5t-3&) 8i-5o-??s = St-SaJs St-So-fl = 8j-8<£. 

Remark 1. This form of the Subj. of ftmj.ut and Ttdij/w is like the Subj. 
of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs, e. g. tv$&£>, -??s, -77, etc., tvtt-S>, -rjs, -77, 
from tvtt-to), aTa-&a}, ~fjs, -77, from '{(ttti/xi. 

Rem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in -v/xi is like that of verbs in -va, e. g. Seucvva), 
•iris, etc. 

3. The Impf. and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel t, 
which is annexed to the characteristic- vowel, and with it forms 
a diphthong, e. g, 

Impf. Opt. A. l-G-ra-i-qv = \-qtgX-t\v Aor. II. A. arai-r]v Impf. M. l-ffrai-(JLt]y 

5i-5o-i-7ji/ = 5t-5o^-rj^ Soi-rju 5i-8oi-/A7)v. 

Rem. 3. The Opt. of verbs in -e (rifrmu) is like the Aorists Opt. Pass, of 
all verbs, e. g. (TTa-^el-r)y, Tvcp-&el-r)v> TVTr-el-T)v. 

Rem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -Dpi, like the Subj. Pres., follows th3 
form in -o>, e. g. deiKvvot/ii. The few exceptions will be considered below. 

§ 172. Personal- endings. 

1. The following arc the personal endings for the Act. : — 
(a) For the Indicative Present, 



Sing. 1. 


-fit 


7-OT7J-/* 1 


2. 


•s (properly -<n) 


'/-0-T7J-S 


• 


-a-i(v) (properly -n) 


'{-OT7\-ari[v 



208 



VERBS IN -/U. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



[§ 172. 



'l-ffTa-TOV 
'{-(TTOL-TOV 

'l-ara-jxeu 
i-<rra-T6 
]X-ara-vri '{-(TTa-ari(v)]- 



Dual 2. -rov. 

3. -rov 

Plur. 1. -[iev (properly -jxes) 

2. -re 

3. [-w^)] (properly -vri) 

The ending of the third Pers. PL -v<ri{v) is changed into -a<ri{v), and then 
is contracted with the preceding stem-vowel of the verb. Still, the Attic dia- 
lect admits contraction only in the stems ending in -a, thus : — 

from X-ara-vffi is farmed i-araffi. (l-<rrd-aai) 

" Tl-fre-vffi " ri-&e?o~t * Att. Ti-fre-a<ri 

" di-So-va-i " St-5o0<rt " oVScf-dtu 

11 deiK-vv-vCi " SetK-i'iJa'i " 8e«c-yu-&r t . 

Remark 1. The uncontracted form in -eutn, -cidcrt, -udtrz, is the only one 
used in Attic prose, though it also occurs in the Ionic dialect ; the contracted 
form in -e?tn, -oven, -Den, is the usual form in the Ionic writers, very seldom in 
the Attic poets. But from ftjju (stem f E), to send, this Attic form louri (con- 
tracted from i-4-acri) always occurs. 

(b) The personal-endings of the Subj. Pres. and second 
Aor. do not differ from those of verbs in -co. 

(c) The following are used for the Impf. and second Aor. 
Ind.: — 

Sing. 1. -v In 

2. -s 

3. 

-rov A. 

-ri]v 

-fiev (properly -pes) 

-T6 

-o~cw 



Sing. 1. 

2. 

3. 
Dual 2. 

3. 
Plur. 1. 

2. 

3. 



f. 'l-o-rrj-v 


i-riSy-v 


'(-ffrrj-s 


i-rl-frr)-s 


'(-arrj 


e-rl-frij 


. e-arrr]-rov 


e-^e-rov 


k-ffTr\-rt\v 


£-&£-TT]V 


. €-CTT7]-[i.eV 


e-fre-^ey 


e-crT7j-Te 


e-3-e-T6 


£ , -o~rr}-o~av 


e-fre-o~av. 



Rem. 2. The Ind. of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs is like the second 
Aor. ecrrrjv, e. g. irvTr-Tjv, i-o~ra-&r)i> i -7)S, -77, -rfrov, -tjttjj/, -rjfiev, -rjre, -rjcav. 

(d) The personal- endings of the Opt. Impf. and second Aor. 
(except the first Pers. Sing.) differ from those of the Opt. of 
the historical tenses of verbs in -to, only in being preceded by 
7j ; comp. the endings of fiovkevoiiu, /3ovAevo-ai/xi, etc. with those 
of 

ffral-rjv, i-ffral-T]V &d-7]v ri-drei-rjv Soi-rjv Bi-doi-rjv. 
Rem. 3. In the Dual and PI. Impf. Opt., the -77 is commonly rejected in the 
Attic dialect, and the ending of the third Pers. PI. --nffav is almost always 
shortened into -ev, e. g. 

rifrel-rj/Aev = r&etfxev taral-r)re = lo'ratre 

ri&d-rjo'av = ri&uev didol-rjaav = Si5o?ev, 



$ 172. 



VERBS IN -{U. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 



208 



Sing. 2. 

3. 

Dual 2. 


-frt 

-TOO 
-TOV 


3. 
Plural 2. 


-TCOV 
-T€ 


3. 


-ruffav 



(rt-fre-fri) 


(8t-8o-£ri) 


TI-&4-T0O 


8l-86-t(o 


Tt-id-6-TOV 


8i-8o-rov 


Tl-&4-TO>V 


8i-86-ra>v 


riSe-re 


8l-5o-T6 


Tt-3-e-Toxra?/ 


8i-86-T(aaav 


TlSfivTWV 


8l-86vtcov. 



The same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs, e. g. irafievfrdrjuev =» 
ireu8ev&-e7nev (wholly like T&elyv). — On the contrary, in the second Aor. Opt. 
Act. of 'lo-TTifii, T&rjfu, Blda/Ai, the abbreviated forms are very rare, except the 
third Pers. PL, which is commonly abridged. 
Rem. 4. The forms 8i8cS-qv and Scp-qv also occur. 

(e) The endings of the Pies, and second Aor. Imp. are: — 

{'i-GTa-$n) 
l-cra-TO) 
'[-(Tra-Tov 
l-ard-r(ov 
"-crra-re 
l-o~Ta-Tcoo~av 
or l-aravruv 

Rem. 5. The second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. rejects the ending -3-t, and, as a 
compensation, lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into 77, e into 
€i, into ov, v into v, 

'l-crra-Sn becomes 'L-<ttt] rt-fre-fri becomes Ti-3-et 

8i-8o-frt " 8i-8ov 8elic-vv-fri " 8einvv. 

The ending -fri is retained in the Pres. only in a very few verbs, e. g. <pd&i 
from (prifii, fofri from ei/xl, fth from eT/xi, and some others ; it^lso occurs in cer* 
tain Perfects of verbs in -co, e. g. rifrva&i. 

In the second Aor. of rib-rim, "-qya, and 8i8co/j.i, the ending fri is softened into 
s; thus, S-e'-^t becomes 3-es, e-3-: = es, So-fo = 86s ; but in the second Aor. of 
'1<tt7\ixi, the ending -&t is retained ; thus, crTy-fri ; also in the two Aorists Pass, 
of all verbs, e. g. Tvirrj-Sri, TmiSeud^Ti (instead of irai8evfrr)-&i, § 21, Rem. 3). In 
compounds of o-ttj&i and firi&i, the ending -Tjd-t is often abbreviated into d, in 
the poet, dialect, e. g. irapdo-ra, airScnd, irpofid., Kardfid. 

(f ) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf. is -vat. 
This is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic- vowel ; 
but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel (a being 
lengthened into 77, e into a, o into ov, § 170, 1) ; thus, 

Pres. i-<Tra-vai ri-&4-vai 81-86-vai 8(iK-vv-vai 

Second Aor. arrj-mi &e?-vai 8ov-vai. 

Rem. 6. The Inf. Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like arrival, e. g. Tvrrrj-vat, 
Bov\ev&r)-vai. 

(g) The endings of the Res. and second Aor. participle are 
-vt9, -vTo-a, -vt, which are joifl sd to the characteristic-vowel 
according to the common rules ; thus, 

l-crd-vrs = l-crrds, l-arao'a, l-arav 
ti-&4-vts — Ti-&eis, -ilea, -eV 
8i-86-vts = bi-8ovs, -o'vaa, -6v 
Ssuc-vv-vts = 8eiK-vi)s, -vera, -vv. 

18* 



otocs, ffraaa, crav 
&els, &u<ra, iS-eV 
8ovs, -ov<ra, -ov 



210 VERBS IN fll. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. [$ 173. 

Kem. 7. The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like th* 
Part, ri&els, or 3-ets, e. g. rvir-eis, -e?cra, -«/, fiovAev&-els. 

2. The personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs 
in -co, except that uniformly, in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and 
almost always in the Impf. Incl. and in the Imp., the personal- 
endings retain their full form, -o-ai and -cro. Still, the following 
points are to be noted : — 

(a) The second Pers. Pres. Ind. of verbs in -a (as for^/ii, diuafiai) , is only -curat 
in Attic prose 5 the contracted form is found, from the earliest period, only 
in the poetic dialect, e. g. iiriaTa. from iiriarafiai in Aesch., dwr) (from the Ionic 
ending -ecu) instead of Siva, in Soph, and Eurip. — In the second Pers. Imp. 
and in the Impf, 'Lgtu> seems to be only poetic; but, iirla-rca, yTrio-TO), Siva, 
i)8 vvw, are the regular forms in good prose, and the uncontracted forms 
scarcely occur except in the poets and later writers. 

(b) In verbs in -e, the contract forms in the Imp. Pres. are poetic and rare, and 
in the Indie. Impf. not at all in use; thus, Impf. iri^ea-o, Imp. ri&eo-o (ti&ov) ; in 
the second Aor., both of verbs in -e and -0, the contract are the regular forms, 
e. g. Indie, t&ov, Imp. &ov ; eSov, Sou. In verbs in -0 also, the uncontracted 
forms seem to be the usual ones in the Impf. and Imp. : <f5i§oo-o, 810W0. 

(c) The contracted fonns are uniformly employed throughout the Subj. ; in 
the Opt., as in verbs in -a>, the o- is always omitted, yet the form remains 
uncontracted. 

Eem. 8. The Sing. Impf. Act. of rfowxi, is irforii', 2 Pers. irtfreis, 3. irifrei 
(from TI0EH), iriSreis and er/^et being more frequent than iTiSrrjs, irlfrn] on 
irifMi, see § 180; the Sing. Impf. Act. of SiScofxi is always idiSovv (fr. AIAOfl), 
eSiSovs, etc. (X. An. 5. 8, 4. is to be read idiSovs instead of 48i8eos, according to 
the best MSS.) In verbs in -v/m, the forms in -vat are usual throughout the Pres. 
and Impf., especially in third Pers. PI. Indie. Act., e. g. deiKuvov<n(v), and 
the only forms in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., e. g. SeiKvvu}, o/avvod, <rv[xfny- 
i/uca, together with delKw/j.i, 6/jlvv/u.i, <Tv/j./xiyvv[j.i. — In Attic poetry, there are also 
contracted forms of riSrrnni and 'irjfu in the second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. 
Ind. Act., e. g. nSrds, his, r&e?, lei. — But the Middle admits the formation in 
-v<a only in the Subj. and Opt. 

Formation of the Tenses. 
§ 173. I. First Class of Verbs in -m. 

1. In forming the tenses of the Act., the short characteristic- 
vowel is lengthened, both in the Fut. and first Aor. Mid., 
namely, a into rj, e into y\ ; also in the Perf. Act. of tlStj/xl and 
trjfjii, e is lengthened into et, and o into w ; but in the remaining 
tenses of the Mid., and throughout the Pass., the short charac- 
teristic-vowel is retained, with the exception of the Perf. and 
Plup. Mid. and Pass, of TiSrjfii and trj/ja, where the et of the 
Perf. Act. (reSeLKa, re^et/xat, eT/ca, etjxat) is retained. 

2. The first Aor. Act and Mid. of riSrjjju, ltj^i, and oYSw/xi, has 
k for the characteristic of the tense, not o- ; thus, 

€-3tj-k-o, y-K-a, e-Sco-K-a. 



i 174.] VERBS IN -/XL. FORMATION OF TH. 

The forms of the first Aor. Act. IS-qua, y<a, and tv 
are usual only in the Lid., and generally only in th 
the other persons, the Attic writers commonly used tb 
of the second Aor. ; in the other modes and the partic± x 
the forms of the second Aor. were always used. 

Examples of the first Aor. in the PI. Ind. are: €^vKa,uey, X. C. 4. 2, 15. 
iS&icafiev, X. An. 3. 2, 5. 0. 9, 9. 10. eSoWe, Antiph. 138, 77. eSoxau, X. Cy. 
4. 6, 12. ed-77/ccw, H. 2. 3, 20. a<pT} K av, Cy. 4. 5, 14. 

Also the forms of the second Aor. Mid. of ti.%u, irjpi, and 
oi8o) /At, are used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. ; 
i)KdfjL7}v from l-qixt occurs, though but seldom. On the contrary, 
the forms of the second Aor. Ind. Act. of TtSypu, 1-qp.i, and oY3co//.t 
{t$qv, rjv, y Soiv), are not in use. 

3. The verb ca-rqpLi forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like 
verbs in -co, with the tense -characteristic a; e. g. Z-orrj-cr-a, l-crrq- 
cr-dfjLTjv. The second Aor. Mid. iardfx'qv is not used. Some 
other verbs, however, have a second Aor. Mid., e. g. hvra^y\v 3 
i—pLdfxrjv. 

Remark 1. The second Aor. and the second Put. Pass, are wanting in these 
verbs, also the Fut. Perf., except in 'larri/xi, the Put. Perf. of which is Icrn7|a> 
and e(TT-f)tofxai, § 154, 6. 

Bex. 2. On the meaning of the verb "o-r-npa, the following things are to be 
noted : the Pres., Impf, Fut., and first Aor. Act. have a Trans, meaning, to 
place; on the contrary, the second Aor., the Perf. and Plup., Act. and the Put. 
Perf.. have a reflexive or Intrans. meaning, to place one's self, to stand, namely, 
iar-nv, I placed myself, or I stood; 'iarnKa. (with present signification), I have 
placed myself, I stand, sto ; loTrj/ceij', stabam; e<TT7j|a>, ia-rrj^o/xai, stabo {b.(peari}^ui, 
I shall withdraw). The Mid. denotes either to place for one's self to erect, to stand, 
consistere, or to place one's self; Pass, to be placed. "Ectttj/co and k<nr\K.s.iv usually 
take the place also of the forms ecrTa,uai and karaiJL-nv, which occur but rarely. 

$ 174. II. Second Class of Verbs in -pu. 

There is no difficulty in forming the tenses of verbs of the 
second class ($ 169, 2). All the tenses are formed from the 
stem, after rejecting the ending -wvjxi, or -vvju. Verbs in -o, 
which in the Pres. have lengthened the o into <d, retain the <a 
through all the tenses, e. g. crrp<o-wv-//.i, ^w-wv-pu, pw-wv-pa, Fut. 
(ttooj-o-w, etc. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, in form- 
ing some of the tenses, assume a Tlicme ending in a vowel, 
e. g. 6p.-vv-pLL, Aor. wpi-o-aa, from 'OMOfi. The second Aor. and 
the second Fut. Pass, occur only in a few verbs, e. g. £evy-™-/u. 
See $ 182 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN 



-flL. 



[* 175. 



§ 175. Paradigms of 









ACTIVE. 










1 


£ »5 

si * S3 


2TA- to p/ace. 


0E- to put. 


AO- to (jwe. 


AEIK- to s/ioiy. 




















s.i. 


'/-(TT7J-jUt 


tI-&7]-/AI 


Si-Sco-fXL 


deiK-vv-fii l 








2. 


(-(TTTJ-S 


rl-frrj-s 


Sl-Soo-s 


8ei/c-^i)-s 








3. 


r /-o-T7j-(n(j/) 


Ti-8rr)-<ri(v) 


5i-dco-(Ti(u) 


8ei/c-w-a't(v) 








D.l. 














H 


2. 


'/-CTTa-TOV 


rl-dre-TOV 


Si-do-rov 


Set/c-yw-Toy 






■3 


3. 


t-fl-Ta-TOJ/ 


rl-fre-TOj/ 


Sl-So-tov 


SeiK-VU-TOJ' 






P. 1. 


i'-a'Td- i ue*' 


ri-&£-/X£i/ 


di-do-ixev 


de'iK-vv-fjiej/ 






2. 


t-OT&-T€ 


Ti-i&e-Te 


Si-So-Te 


SeiK-w-re 








3. 


t-<TTa-(Ti(r) 


Tt-i9-e-d<rt(j/) 


di-do-acri(v) 


8ei/c-j/i/-d<n(j/) 










(from icrrd-dcn) 


and Tt,-&e7<ri(v) 


and 8i-dov<ri(v) 


and8etK-j/Go'<(j') 








S.l. 


i (TTW 


Ti-frcD 


St-Sw 


8ef/c-|/u-« 








2. 


i-CTT?7-S 


TL-frfj-S 


dl-d(p-S 


SeiK-vv-^s 






1 


3. 


I- (Try 


■Tl-drfj 


8i-8<p 


etc. 






D.l. 












S 


2. 


L-ffTrj-TOU 


Ti-grrj-Tov 


8i-8u>-tov 






1 




3. 


\-0T7\-TOV 


Tl-&?j-T01/ 


Si-dcH-Toy 






P. 1. 


1-<jtS}-ja£V 


ri-frw-fxej/ 


di-Sob-fxev 










2. 


l-CTTJ-TG 


Tl-&7)-T€ 


Si-Sco-re 










3. 


l-ffrS>-(ri[v) 


Tl-&&-(ri(v) 


Si-dw-ai(v) 










S. 2. 


'i-arrj 2 


rl-Stei 2 


8i-8ou 2 


de'iK-vv 2 










(from 'Io-tS&i) 


(from T&e&i) 


(from SiSo&f) 


(from SetKvvdi) 






1 


3. 


l-(TTOL-T(ti 


Ti^e-rco 


Si-So-TCs) 


8e(K-J/U-T« 






s 


D.2. 


'i-ard-rov 


Tl-i^e-TOJ/ 


St-So-rov 


8e^/c-vi5-TOi' 






&. 

Qj 

1 

^ 


3. 


i-(Tra-TO>v 


Ti-^e-TCOJ/ 


Sl-So-TW^ 


Sei/c-j/u-rcoi/ 






P. 2. 


"-crra-re 


Ti-3"6-T6 


8i-5o-T6 


8eiK-vi)-T6 






3. 


l-ffra-Taxrav 


Ti-&4-Tco(rav 


Si-So-T&xraz/ 


deiK-vv-Tcoarav 










and l-GTavroov 


and T:-^eW&;^ 


and 5i-S(^z/To>j' 


and Zzik-vvvtwv 






Injin. 


i-crra-vai 


•n-fre-j/ai 


8t-SJ-i/oi 


deiK-i/v-vcu 






Part. 


i-ffras, aaa, av 


ri-greis, eicra, eV 


di-dovs, ovffa, 6v 


SeiK-pvs, vera, iv 






G. avTos 


G. 4vTQS 


G. Svros 


G. vvros 








S.l. 


'l-(TT7\-V 


i-Ti-&7]V 


i-di-dow 3 


i-Seln-i/vv 








2. 


'/-CTT7J-S 


4-Ti-&eis 3 


i-Si-dovs 8 


i-SeiK-vvs 








3. 


t-CTTJ 


e'-Tt'-^et 3 


e'-Si'-5ou 3 


i-Selic-vD 






R> 


D.l. 














1 


2. 


'/-tTTd-roj' 


e-Tt-3-e-Toi' 


£-8i-So-tov 


e-SeiK-yv-Tov 






^ 


3. 


l-<rra-rriv 


£-Ti-&e-rr\v 


£-8i-86-T7]v 


4-SeiK-vv-TT]v 






J 2 


P. 1. 


'l-ffTa-nsv 


i-TL-^e-fxev 


e-Si-8o-//e^ 


i-tt'iK-vv-ixtv 




*; 




2. 


"-ara-re 


£-rl-&€-T€ 


e-8t-5o-T6 


i-SeiK-vv-Te 




l 




3. 


"-ara-aav 


i-rlSe-crav 


e-8t-5o-o"cw 


£-deiK-vv-crau 




1 




S.l. 


i-crrai-7]V 


ri-frei-rji' 


5i-doi-7]v 


SetK-vv-oi[xi 




fl 




2. 


i-(TTa(-7]S 


Tl-&d-7)S 


di-dol-rjs 


SeiK-vv-ois 








3. 


l-aral-rj 


Tl-&d-7] 


Si-8oi-7/ 


etc. 






«3 


D.l. 














2 


2. 


l-(TTCU-TOV 4 


Tl-&€?-TOV 4 


8!-8o?-tov 4 








^ 


3. 


t-(TTal-T7)V 


Tl-&el-T7)U 


di-Sol-rrjv 








P. 1. 


l-(TTCU-fJLSV 


Ti-fre7-fAev 


Si-do?-/x€v 










2. 


l-(TTCU-Te 


Tt-3-e?-Te 


dl-doT-T€ 










3. 


l-arcu-ei/ 


Ti-3-ei-ej/ 
pecially SetKwou 


Si-BoT-ev 
<ri{v). Also Imj 






1 A 


d Sei/cj 


v-ci), -eis, etc., es 


)f. 4ScLKj/voj/, -ves, 


-ve 


l± 


and th 


e Part, usually 8 


elkvv-wv, -ovffa, - 


w{\ 172, Rem. i 


). 2 § 172. Rem. 



$ 175.] PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fJLt. 

Verbs in -pi. 



213 





MIDDLE. 




2TA- to place. 


0E- to put. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to show. 




'[-(TTOL-fJiai 


Ti-^e-/xat 


8i-5o-fj.ai 


SeU-vv-fiai 




'l-ara-aai 


ri-^e-<rat 


5i-Bo-aai 


SeiK-vv-acu 




'/-(TTci-TCU 


Ti-3-e-Tot 


Si-So-rai 


SeiK-VV-TCU 




t-ffra-iJL&ov 


Ti-&4-/xe&ov 


'8i-86-/j.e&ov 


8€iK-vi-/xe&ov 




'(-crTa-cr&ov 


ri-fre-a-frov 


5i-5o-o~&ov 


SeiK-vv-o-frov 




'L-aTa-aSov 


ri-^e-o^ov 


St-do-o-^ov 


lieiK-vv-cr&ov 




t-OTcL-fie^a 


Ti-&4-fj.e&a 


8i-86-(j.e&a 


8eiK-v&-fM€&a 




t-crra-<r&e 


Ti-^6-0-^6 


Si-So-tr^e 


SdK-vv-cr&e 




'i-crra-vrai 


ri-^e-vrat 


Si-5o-VTai 


SeiK-w-vrai 




1-ffTU-fiat 5 


Ti-frw-fiai 


5i-8w-/j.ai 


SeiK-vv-oofiai 




i-<TTTJ 


Tl-frf) 


8i-8q> 


oeiK-vv-rj 




l-ffTTJ-Tai 


ri-^rj-rat. 


8i-8a>-Tcu 


etc. 




1-<TT(I)-IJ.&0V 


T l-&Q>-fJ,€&OV 


8i-8c&-fj.e&ov 






i-<jTy)-o&ov 


Ti-frrj-crSov 


St-dw-a^ov 






l-crrri-cr&ov 


TiSrj-cr&ov 


dt-dw-ar&ov 






l-<rTa>-[M€&a 


Ti-&a>-/x<=&a 


di-dd!)-/j.e&a, 






l-ory-abe 


Ti-&r)-o-&e 


di-Sw-a&e 






l-ffTW-UTCtl 


ri-^co-vrai 


Si-Sw-vrai 






l-ara-ao and 


Ti-d-e-cro and 


Si-So-o-o and 


SeiK-vv-ao 




'i-CTTW 


Tt-3-ou 


Si-Sov 






i-GTa-a&co 


Ti-3-e-cr3-« 


di-56-a^ca 


SeiK-vv-o-frco 




'l-(TTa-<rSrov 


ri-fre-oSov 


Sl-do-a^ov 


8<ziK-VV-0-&OV 




i-a-rda^uv 


TL-&e-ff&COV 


di-$6-c&wv 


h'ziK.-vv-crSa>v 




tcrra-crSe 


riSe-aSe 


St-So-a&e 


SeiK-vv-o&e 




i-ara-a^wcrav and 


Ti-ib€-<rS<i)(ra.v and 


Si-So-o-fraxrai' and 


Seuc-vv-a&wo'av 




l-ard-o'^eav 


Ti-&4-<rSa>y 


5i-8o-<t&coj/ 


and SeiK-vv-a&wv 




'l-<na-(T&ai. 


ri-&e-(T&ai 


8l-8o-o~&ai 


5eiK-vv-a&at 




l-CTa.-fj.evos, 77, ov 


Tt-S-e'-yuevos, 7J, ov 


8i-86-(xzi'os, 7), ov 


SeiK-VV-fJ.€V05, 7], 

ov 




i<na-/i7)u 


4-TL-^4-fJ.7]V 


4-8i-86-fj.r]v 


4SeiK-VV-/JL7JV 




'l-crra-cro and '/-o-tcd 


i-Tl-fre-o-o 


4-di-So-ffo 


4-de'iK-vv-co 




'{-(TTa-TO 


e-Tt-^e-TO 


4-Si-So-ro 


4-8eiK-VV-T0 




l-ffTa-ue&oe 


4-ti-&4-[j.&ov 


4-8l-86-/UL€&OV 


4-SeiK-vv-/xe^ov 




'l-GTa-oftov 


4-TL-&e-<r&0P' 


4-8l-do-o~&ov 


4-deiK-vv-a^ov 




l-ffTa-afrriv 


4 TL-&4-(T&71V 


4-Bi-8o-o~&riv 


4-8eiK-vv-o~frriv 




l-<rr&-fi&a 


4-Ti-&4-/j.&a 


4-Si-56-/j.e^a 


4-SeiK-vv-fie^-a 




'{-<na-<r&e 


i-ri-be-ffbe 


e-5i-5o-crd-e 


4-5eiK-vv-o'&€ 




"-(TTa-VTO 


4-Tl-&e-VTO 


4-Si-So-vro 


4-8€ik-vv-vto 




l-OTai-fj.r]v 8 


TL-boi-lXt]U 7 


di-doi-/j.r]V 7 


dciK-vv-oifi-nv 




i-arat-o 


ri-Srol-o 


5t-So?-o 


Seuc-vv-oio, 




l-CTTCU-TO 


Tl-&o7-TO 


b~i-8o7-TO 


etc. 




l-ffrai-fie^ov 


Tl-^OL-fl^OV 


8i-8ot-iJ.e&ov 






I-otcu-oSov 


Tl-&o7-(T&OU 


8i-do?-cr&ov 






l-arai-crdvv 


Tl-bol-oS>f]U 


o'l-Soi-o'&nv 






i-tTTai-iit&a. 


Ti-&ol-/u.e&a 


Si-Soi-neba 






l-GTCU-ff&t 


Ti-&o?-cr&e 


Si-Sol-o&e 






l-ffTCU-VTO 


TlSol-VTO 


dl-doT-VTO 




5. » 4 172, Rem. 8. 


4 § 172, Kern. 3. 


5 On the irreg. :u 


cent of iiriffjafiai* 


etc., sec § 176, 1. * 


On the accent in 4 


irto-Tcuo, etc. sec § 1 


76, 1. 7 ^ 176, 2 



214 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/XL. 



[* 175. 



ACTIVE. 






[0 

9) 
■3 


^ Q 


2TA- to place. 


0E- to put. 


AO- to r^Ve. 


AEIK- to show. 




£ 


£ 
















S. 1. 


e-arrrj-v, I stood, 


(H-frl-p) ) A. I 


(e-8a>-j/) ^ A. I. 










2. 


e-crT-n-s 


(e-frri-s) > used 


(e-S<y-s) > used 










3. 


%r<XTI\ 


(e-^7j) ) for it 


(e-8w) ) for it 








.» 


D.l. 














8 


2. 


e-(TT7}-T0V 


e-be-rov 


e-8o-TO?/ 


wanting. 






^ 


3. 


i-CTTj-Trju 


£-&4-tt]V 


€-80-777*' 








^ 


P. 1. 


%-(TT7)-fi€V 


<!-&e-/j.ev 


e-So-fxev 










2. 


e-ffrrj-re 


6-&6-T6 


e-do-re 










3. 


%-ffTr\-oa.v 


e-fre-aai/ 


%-do-ffav 








S..JL. 


crrw 1 


&W 1 


8<S l 










2. 


arris 


Sri-s 


8<£-s 








a? 


3. 


arr) 


ttf 


8<jJ 








■§ 


D.l. 














s 


2. 


ar-n-rov 


Srq-Tov 


85-TOJ/ 










3. 


cr-n-Tov 


&r)-Tov 


8G)-T0V 








r.i. 


(TTCD-fieV 


&CO-/J.€!/ 


Sw-fjity 










2. 


(TT7J-T6 


&r)-Te 


85-T6 






$ 




3. 


(ttS>-(ti{v) 


Sru-(fi(p) 


S&?-<rj(»') 








S. 1. 


arai-7]u 


frd-nv 


Soi-tjj/ 






I 




2. 


CTOI-7JS 


bei-7]s 


dot-rjs 






^ 


S 


3. 


(Trai-T] 


&ei-ri 


001-7] 








D.l. 














e 


2. 


ffral-riTov 2 


&el-7)T0V 2 


8oi-7]TOV 2 








* 


3. 


arai-T)Tt]v 


^■ei-7)T7]U 


S01-t)t7]V 










P. 1. 


aTai-tj/xev 


bei-rifiey 


So(-7l/.L€V 










2. 


<TTa(-7)Te 


Se(-r)Te 


doi-7]Te 










3. 


arai-ev 


&e?-ev 


So?-€V 








S. 2. 


O-TTJ-frl 3 


fres (&&*) 4 


86s (5^0 4 








» 


3. 


T 7) -TOO 


fre-T<w 


8o-TCt) 










D.2. 


(TTT) -TOV 


fre-rop 


8J-TOV 








£ 


3.- 


(TTT) -TQOV 


fre-rav 


8^-T&>|/ 








1 


P.2. 


(Ttt) -re 


be-re 


8(J-Te 








3. 


(Tr-fj-Tcoaav 


dre-Tooo-av and 


§6-T<ao~av and 












and (ttolvtcov 


id-evT&jf 


dSurcoy 






In fin. 


(TTTJ-J/ai 


fret-vou 


hov-vai 






Part. 


eras, ao~a, av 


3-e/s, eTca, ey 


oovs, ovaa, 6v 








Gen. aravros 


Gen. 3-eVroy 


Gen. S^iroy 






Future. 
Aorist I. 


(TTTJ-O'a) 


§ri\-(T<0 | 8c6-<ra> 


Selfa 




e-<TT77cra, I 


e-3~»j-/ca 1 e-8a>-/ca 


e-5ei|a 






[placed, 


Instead of these forms, the 2d Aor. is 








used in the Dual, PI. Ind. and in the 










other Modes and Participials, § 173, 2. 






Perfect. 


€-(TTT)-Ka, b sto, 


Te-frei-Ka | 8e-8a>-/ca 


de-^eLya 




Pluperfect. 


£-o~Ti)-Keiv and 

d-(TTT)-K€lV 


e-Te-3-et-Kew 


e-Se- o ca -utiv 


i-oe-Seixetv 




Fid. Per/. 


e-o-T^w old Att. 


wanting. 


wanting. 


v/anting. 




PAS 


Aor. I. \ i-erTa-frqv \ 


i-re-Striv 9 j i-86-frnv j e-5eix-&7?*> 


1 The compounds, e. g. curoa 


rw, e/ei&oj, SzaSa), have the same accentuation as 


the simples, e. g. airocrrSio'i 


eK&rjTOp, 8iad£>/j.ev. 2 See § 172, Rem. 3. 3 In 


composition, Trapdo'Tri&i, it 


zpdo'Ta ; aTrScTTri&i, cwr&rrd, § 172, Rem. 5. 4 In 


composition, irepl&es, e^fres 


; a7n$8os, endos] irepi&eTe, encore, § 118, Rem. 1. 


8 See § 176, 3. 6 iredvv ai 


id rebuff opMi instead of i&ibriv and &e&Vojuai, 





* 175.] 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -fJLl. 



215 





MIDDLE. 




2TA- to p/ace. 


0E- to pu*. 


AO- to give. 


AEIK- to s/iou;. 




( i-crrd-fXTju does 


4-&4-/J.7JV 


e-So-fxrjv 






not occur, but 


e-&ov (from ed-eco) 


e-8ov (from eSocro) 






i-Trrd-fjiriv 


e-3-e-TO 


e-So-ro 






4-TTpld-fM7]v) 


e-*je-/ie&oj' 


i-86-/j.e&oi/ 








e-&e-<r&oj' 


t-So-oftoj/ 


wanting. 






e- l &e-(rdT7*' 


e-5<$-<rd-»7z/ 








£-&4-[ie&a 


€-5o'-/Aeidw 








e-&e-<r&e 


€-5o-<r&e 








e-S-e-jro 


e-5o-?/TO 






(ara>-/.iai does not 


&v-fiai 7 


8u-/j.ai 7 






occur, but irpia- 


^ 


8<£ 






fJLai, -7?, -7JTCU, 


(SjTJ-TCU 


5&-TCU 






etc.) 


&77-0-&O;/ 


5w-cr3-e 
5<£-j/tcu 






(ffiai-firju does not 


Kroi-pr\v 8 


8oi-jxit)v s 






occur, but 7rpicu- 


fro?-*) 


8o?-o 






/*tjj/, -aio -euro, 


3-cu-to 


So?-to 






Otc.) 


&ot-fj.e&a 

&o?-cr&e 

Soi-vro 


Soi-fi&ov 

5ot-0"d77J/ 

5oi-|U6f5-a 

8o?-cr&e 

So?-j/to 






( <TTa-£TO, Or (TTcD 


&ov (from &eVo) 9 


Sou (from 8o'(to) 9 






does not occur, 


^e-(r^a> 


86-cr^ca 






but Trpia-cro, or 


SV^-adoy 


86-a&ou 






?rpta>) 


fre-O&e 

&4-(rdra)crav and 


86-afre 
86-(T&(t)aa.v and 






(crra-crdcu) vpiacr. 
(ffTa-fieuos) Trpla- 


&6-<rdtu 


86-(r&ai 






&4-fj.evos, -17, -oj/ 


86-fj.evos, -7j, -ov 






fJLZVOS 










GTi)-<Tonat 


^-(TOjUai 


Sdj-GO/Aal 


Sei^OfiaL 
i-Sei^d/xyu 




i-ffTrj-ad/iLrju 


(i-^7]-Ka-fX7]i/) | (e-8a>-/ca-^77^) 






Instead of these forms, the second Aor. Mid. is 








used by the Attic writers, § 173, 2. 






e-trra-fieu,] 73. 1J. 2. 


re- id- e i -fxai 


$e-8o-uai 


8e-8eiy-uai 




€-(TTa-yU77l/, § 173, 


€-T€-d el -fJL7]V 


^-Se-S^T?!/ 


i-8e-8tiy-fXT}}/ 




Rem. 2. 










(-a-T7)^o/j.ai, io 


wanting. 


wanting. 


wanting. 


S I V E . 




Fut. 1. \ crTa-&ii<To/j.ai. | Tc-^rjcro/xa/ 6 j do-d->'](ro/j.ai 


8eix-dy<ro/j.ai 


§ 21. 2. 7 Al-o ill composition, ivfrwflCU, -fj, -f/Tat, etc., i 


iro'bwiJ.ai, -fj, -fjrai, 


etc., (KSuuai, -y, -wTai, etc., airoowaai, -eZ, -arrat, etc. 8 ^ 


>ee $ 17(5, 2. 9 In 


Composition, /caTadoi;, aTnfoou; irepidou, airSSov] Kard^ea^e 


, 7T€pi8ofT&e; 6^€(T- 


&(, np68o<T^€ : but ivdov, e/sdov; irpoSov, ii/Sov, § 118. Rem 


1. ,0 4 154, 0, and 


* 173, Rem. 2. 





216 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -fXl. [$$ 176, 177. 



$ 176. Remarks on the Paradigms . 

1. The verbs Svvafxai, tobe able; eiriarajxai, to know, and xp^^o-h to hang, 
have a different accentuation from 'larafiai, in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., 
namely, Subj. 5iW,uc«, i-niffTUfiai, -y, -tjtcu, -rjoSov, -r)a&e, -cavrai; Opt. hwaifx-nv, 
iTTL(rrai/j.7]y, -aio, -airo, -ata&ov, -attr&e, -aiuro; SO also bvaijxnv, -aio, -airo (§ 177, 
4), and inxpid^v (§ 179, 6). 

2. The forms of the Opt. Mid. Impf. and second Aor. in -ot, viz. Ti^oi/x-nu, 
&oiwni > were preferred to those in -ei, viz. Ti&elju.'nv, -e?o, -e?ro, etc., ^eifxr]v, -e?o, 
-€?to, etc. In compounds, the accent remains as in simples ; thus, ivSoiuriv 
(iv&tlwnv), iv&o?o (eV&e?o), etc. ; so also in compounds of doifiriv, e. g. Siadoiurjy, 
BidSo7o, etc. 

3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup. : K-ora-Tw, '4-aTa-uey, 
e-o-rd-Te, e-o~Td.-o~i(v), see § 193. 

4. Verbs in -dpi, as has been seen, form the Subj. and Opt. like verbs in -vco. 
Still, there are some examples where these modes follow the analogy of verbs 
in -in', oiros /xr] Siao-KeSdvvvTai (instead of -utjtcu), PI. Phaedon. 77, b. \pvxoir6 
re Kcd ireyvvTo (from -viro, instead of -voito), Ibid. 118, a. 

5. In the later writers, e. g. Polybius, a Perf. and Plup. are found with the 
Trans, meaning, I have placed, namely, e'cra/ccc, ko-Taitziv. 

Summary of Verbs in -/xi. 

1. Verbs in -fit which annex the Personal-endings immediately 
to the Stem-vowel. 

§ 177. (a) Verbs in -a (l-a-rrj-fiL; 2TA-): 
1. Ki-xprj-fAi, to lend, to bestow (XPA-), Inf. Kt^oavai, Fut. xprjo-w, 
Aor. exprjaa. Mid. to borrow, Fut. ^o^o-o/xat. (Aor. f^o-a/^v in 
this sense is avoided by the Attic writers.) To the same stem 
belong : — 

2. XP^» ft * s necessary, oportet (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. xPV-> Inf. XPW al > 
Part, (to) XP*& V (usually only Nom. and Ace.) ; Impf. expy", or xpw (with 
irregular accent), Opt. XP^V (from XPE-) ; Put. xp^™ m Soph, (but not 
XPyvet). 

Inf. xpvv, airoxpriv, in Eurip., by contraction from XP^ IV - 

3. airSxpy, it suffices, sufficit; the following also are formed regularly from 
XPAH : airoxp^ffi(v), Inf. airoxpw; Part, airoxp&s, -ooo-a, -S>v ; Impf. air4xpv 5 Put. 
a.Troxpyo*ei ; Aor. airexpw^iv)^ e tc. Mid. airoxp^f^ai, to abuse, abutor, or consumo, 
Inf. a7roxpr)o~&ah is inflected like xP^°F- a h § 129, Kem. 2. 

4. SvLvrjfjLL (with Attic reduplication instead of ovovrj/xc), to ben~ 
efit, ('ONA-) Inf. ovtrarai; Impf. Act. wanting, ox^eAow being 
used for it ; Fut. dvrjo-a) ; Aor. uivqara, Inf. ovrjcrai (for it Svrjvcu, like 
a-TTJvaL, in PL Rp. 600, d.). Mid. oviva/x.<u, to get benefit, be bene- 
fitted, Fut. ov^o-o/xat ; Aor. oivrj^-qv (ajvdfxrjv later, but also in Eur. 
lovacrSe), -7}cro, -tjto, etc., Imp. ovycro, Part, ovrjfxevos (Horn.), Opt. 
dvaijxrjv, -ato, -euro (§ 176, 1), Inf. ovaarSai; Aor. Pass. wrjSrjv rarer 



$ 1.78.] 



SUMMARY OF VERBS IN 



■fU. 



217 



instead of wv-qLi-qv. The remaining forms are supplied by 

5. 7rL-fx.-ir\r)~fjLt, to Jill, (1TAA-) Inf. 7ri//,7rA<xra6 ; Impf. i7rLjjL7rXrjv ; 
Fut. 7rXrjaoi ; Perf. ireTrXr]Ka ; Aor. hrX-qva ; Mid. to Jill for one's 
self, 7ri//,7rAa/x,ai, Inf. iripvrrXaoSai ; Impf. i7riix7rXdfJL7]v ; Aor. hrXrjcra.- 
fx-qv; Fut. 7rXrjcro[jLcu; Perf. Mid. or Pass. TreVA^oymi ; Aor. Pass. 
i7rXijcr3-7)v (§ 131); Fut. Pass. TrXrja-Srjaojxat ($ 131); second Aor. 
iTrXrj/ArjVy Poet. Verb. Adj. irXrjcrTeos. 

The ^ in the reduplication of this and the following verb is usually omitted 
in composition, when p. precedes the reduplication, e. g. i[xiriirXaixai, but iveirifx- 
rrxd/xriv. Contrary to this rule, however, forms with and without /x are both 
used by the poets, according to the necessities of the verse. 

6. iri/A7rp7]fja, to burn, Trans., in all respects like Tri\x.-KXy\\Li : 7rprj- 
(Tco, hrp-qcra, 7T€7rprjKa, Tre7rpr]o-/MaL } hrprjoS-qv, TrpyjoSyoropLaL, TrtrKp-qvoiuxi. 

7. TAH-MI, to endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting (instead of 
them viropiivoi, di/e^o/xat) ; Aor. erXrjv, (tAw,) rXaiqVy tXtjSl, rAas 
(TAaaa) ; Fut. rX^a-ofxai ; Perf. TerX^Ka. Verbal Adj. tXtjtos. (In 
Attic prose this verb is rare.) 

8. (fi-q-LLL, to say (stem <£A-), has the following formation: — 

§ 178. 



Present. ACTIVE. 


Imperfect. 


Indi- 
cative 

Subj. 
Imp. 

Inf. 
Part. 


8.1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


(pt]fii l 
(prjs 

(pf](Ti{v) 

(pa-Tov 

(pa,T6v 

(pa/xeu 

(pare 

(pd(rl(u) 


Indi- 
cative 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.2. 

3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


%(p7)V 

eyrjs, usually e07j<r&a 

Z<M [(§116,2). 

e(pa.TOU 

£(paT7\v 

e(pa/xev 

e(pare 

e(pd(Tav 


(pa,; (pfjs, (prj, (prJTOV, (pw/xa/, 

(pire, (pa)cri(v) 
(pabi, or (paSi (o-v/x(pa&i), (parco, 

(p&rou, (parow, (pare, (parw- 

o~av and (pduTuv 
(pavai 
((pds, (puaa, (pdu 

G. (pdvros, (pdo"ns) 


Opt. 


(pai-nu, (pai-ns, (pair], (pa'n)Tov 
and (paTrou, (patrjTrjv and 
(pairrju, (pa(r)/xev and (pax- 
fieu, (paiTjre and (pane, (patev 


Fut. 
Aor. 


(pf)crco 
€(prjaa. 


MIDDLE. 


Perf. Imp. 7T v-hcxo-^oj (PI. Tim. 72, d.), let it be & 
Pragm. 3. [X. Cy. 6. 1, 21, is a false reading 
687, in chorus. Part, (pd/xevos (rare), affirmii\ 

Verbal adjective, (par6s, < 


aid. Impf. Ind. %(pavTo, Lys. 
] ; Inf. (pda&ai, Aesch. Pers. 

/• 



'In composition: ai/ri(prifxt, (rv/xcprf/xi, dvr l(priai(v), avix(pT)<Ti(v), etc., but olvti- 
<pt)s (accent on ultimate), au/x^s, and Subj. avri<pu>, auri(pfjs y etc. 

19 



218 DEPONENTS BELONGING TO VERBS IN -fJU. [$ 179, 

Remark 1. In the second person <j)r?y, both the accentuation and the Iota 
subscript are contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the 
Pres. Ind. (except <pys), see § 33, a. 

Rem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to say in general, (b) to affirm, 
(aio) to assert, to assure, etc. The Put. (pyffcc, and Aor. fyrjo-a, have only the 
last signification. The Part. <pds is not used in Attic prose ; still, ty PI. Ale. 2, 
139, c. (pavTes. 

Rem. 3. With <j>7]/j.l the verb tj/xi, inquam, may be compared, which, like 
inquam, is used in the spirited repetition of what had been said ; the imperfect 
§v, 7^ is used in the phrases t> $ iy<a, said J, % & '6s, said he, to describe a con- 
versation. 



$ 179. The following Deponents also belong here. 

1. aya//,cu, to wonder, Impf. rrydpL-qv', Aor. rrydcrfhjv (rjyao-dfATjv, 
Epic and Dem. 18, 204) ; Fut. a-ydo-opai. Verbal Adj. dyacrros. 

2. Svvajxai, to be able, second Pers. Swao-ai [Svvy from the Ion. 
Sweat, tragic and later, § 172, 2, (a)], Subj. oww/mi (§ 176, 1), Imp. 
Bvvacro, Inf. BvvaaSai, Part. Swa/xcvos ; Impf. iSvvd/xrjv and rjSvvdfxrjv, 
second Pers. eSwto (not e&vvaoro, $ 172, 2), Opt. Swaifirp/, Swato 
($ 176, 1) ; Fut. Zwrjcrofxai ; Aor. £$vvrj$7]v, r)$vvrj$r)v and iSvvdcrSrjV 
(not ^Swao-^v), the last Ion. and in Xen. (Aug., § 120, Rem. 
1) ; Perf. SeSw^/aai. Verbal Adj. Swaros, able and possible. 

3. cTTib-ra^at (like LaTa/xai), to knoiv, (properly, to sftmc£ upon 
something, to be distinguished from e<£io-ra//,ai), second Pers. 
eVto-Tao-ai (e7rtcrra seldom and only Poet.), Subj. cTrio-ro^ai (II 176, 
1), Imp. «r«rra> [seldom and only in the poets and later writers, 
€7Tio-rao-o, $ 172, 2 (b)] ; Impf. r)7n<TTd]Ar]v, rjiricrru) [seldom and 
only in the poets and later writers, rj-n-tcrraa-o, § 172, 2 (b)], Opt. 
e7ri0Tai/*,?iv, bridraLO (§ 176, 1) ; Fut. eVio-r^o-o/xai ; Aor. 7)TrL(TT7]$Y)v. 
(Aug., $ 126, 3.) Verbal Adj. Ittktttjtos. 

4. epapai, to love (in the Pres. and Impf. only poetic, in prose 
ipdoi is used instead of it) ; Aor. rjpdo-S-rjv, I loved; Fut. Zpao-Srj- 
crofxaL, I shall love. [Pass, epw/mi (from ipdw), I shall be loved.] 
Verbal Adj. ipaoros. 

5. Kpe/xa/xat, to hang, be suspended, pendeo, Subj. KpepuoLiai 
(k 176, 1), Part, Kpep-a/xevos ; Impf. eKpe/mp-Tp, Opt. KpefJLaijxrjv, -aio, 
-airo (§ 176, 1), (Arist. Vesp. 298, Kpi/xoLo-Se, comp. //.dpi/ap-ai, 
$ 230, and fJL€pLvolfjLr]v 3 § 154, 8); Aor. cKpepLdo-Swv ; Fut. Pass 



$ 180.1 



VERBS IN -/u. 



219 



Kpe/xao-^cro/xou, I shall be hung ; Fut. Mid. KpejjLijcrofjLai, pendeho 
I shall hang. 

6. irpLacrSai, to buy, lirpiafx-qv, second Pers. lirpioi (an Aor. Mid., 
and found only in this tense, which, the Attic writers employ 
instead of the Aor. of wveo/xat, viz. i<nvr](rdp,7]v, which is not used 
by them, § 122, 4), Subj. Trpuo/xai (§ 176, 1) ; Opt. irpvaip^Vy -aio, 
-euro ($ 176, 1); Imp. 7rpia>; Part. 7rpia//,evos. 



$ 180. (b) "Per&s m -c (ti-^-jui, ©E-) 

"1-^-ju.t (stem C E-), to se«d. Many forms of this verb are found 
only in composition. 



ACTIVE. 



Pres. 



Impf. 



Perf. 
Aor. H. 



Ind. 'tr)iAi, tys, '(t)o-i(v) ; 'lerov\ 'lefiev, '/ere, la<ri(v) [ieTcri(j/)]; 

Subj. lea, ifjs, ly; irjrovj Ico/xeu, trjre, luai(v) ; a<piG>, cupirjs, a(pii), 

etc. 
Imp. Vet, ieVa>, etc. — Inf. Uvai. — Part, his, h?<ra, ley. 



Ind. 'low (from 'IEH), atyiovv (rarer ricpiow, rare '/e«/, irpo'hiv, rjcpieiv), 
'his, 'hi, acphi (rarer 7]<piei)\ 'Utov, Uttjv, 'hjxev,'hre,'haa.v, 
a<pU(rav (rarer ricpieffav). 

Opt. tefyv (second Pers. PI. cupione, Plat.; third Pers. PI. atiioiev, 
X. H. 6. 4, 3). 



eT/co. — Plup e'Ueiv. — Put. rj<rca. — Aor. I. fj/ca (§ 173, 2). 

Ind. Sing, is supplied by Aor. I. (§ 173, 2); Dual eTrov, a<pe?Tou, 

e'trrju ] Plur. eTfiev, /ca&ei/xej/, eTre, aveire, effav, commonly 

elaav, a(pe7<ray. 
Subj. S, ys, a<pu>, acprjs, etc. 
Opt. e"a)v, et'7jy, e'(r) ; erro;/, a(pe?TOP, e'iTt\v ; eT/xev, acpei/xev, eFre, a^et- 

re, efey, acpeiev. 
Imp. es, &J>es, eVw ; eVoj/, 6,<peTov, %r<av\ ere, a^ere, erwaav and eWcwj/. 
Inf. efpcu, d<^e?vat. — P. e'is, etffa, a<pe?aa, ev, acpev, Gen. euros, e'larjs, 

a<bevTOS. 



Remark 1. On the Aug. of a<plr)fjii, see § 126, 3. 

Rem. 2. The form of the Impf. 'lt\v is very doubtful, and the forms '[y\s, 'ti\ 
arc very rare. The form 'leiv has the ending of the Plup., like the Impf. of el/xi, 
to go ; it is Att. and Ion., a secondary form of 'low. 



220 



VERBS IN -fXl. 



[* 181 



MIDDLE. 



Pres. 



Impf. 



Aor. II. 



Ind. "efiai, Uaai, 'terai, etc. — Subj. loofxcu, cKpioofiai, Ifj, a<pijj, etc. 
Imp. 'Uvo, or 'iov. — Inf. 'U<r&ai. — Part. ti/xevos, -77, -ov. 



Ufxrjv, 'lecro, etc. — Opt. U(fj.7]V, Att. ioifi7}V } loio, cupiolo, etc. 



Ind. ei/J.7]V Subj. wfxai, a<pwficu, 77, a<prj, rirai, acprtrcu 

ef<ro, a<pe?o~o Opt. irpool/xrjv, -o7o, -o7to, -oifi&a, -o7(T&e, 

eTro, CKpelro -oivro (irpoelro, TTpoeib'&e, irpoeivro 

elfieha, etc. are rarer forms) 

Imp. ov (a<pov, irpoov), second Pers. PI. 
eVd-e (a<p€(r&e, irpSecr&e), eoftco, etc.). 
Inf. €0~&ai. — Part, efxevos, -77, -ov. 



Perf. etfiai, pe&eifiai ', Inf. eToftcu, ixefrelo-frai. — Plup. e%ixr)v, efao, a^euro, etc. 
— Fut. H)<Tofiai. — Aor. I. 77*4"7» / (rare, § 173, 2). 



PASSIVE. 



A. I. elSrt)v, P. £&?}vcu, etc. — Put. efrfio~o/tai. — Verb. Adj.fnk, ereos (a<peros). 



Rem. 3. Besides the two verbs ri^rj/xi and %«, only the following dialectic 
verbs belong here, viz., 'AH-MI, AI-AH-MI (AE), (though Si5ea(ri(v), from the 
last is found in X.) ; SiCvf^at and AIH-MI. 



$ 181. (c) Verbs in -i, only et/xt ('I), to go. 

Preliminary Remark. The verbs elfii, to go, and etfJ, to be, are pre- 
sented together (though the last, on account of its stem 'ES, does not belong 
here), in order to exhibit to the eye the agreement and disagreement of the two 
verbs in their formation. 



PRESENT. 


Ind. S. 1. 


el/xl, to be 


Subj. 5 


Ind.l. 


elfu, to go 


Subj. %(a 


2. 


it 


V s 


2. 


e? 


Xr)5 


3. 


ia-Ti(v) 


V 


3. 


el<ri(v) 


fy 


D. 2. 


Igt6v 


?)TOV 


D.2. 


Xtov 


%-qrov 


3. 


iarrSv 


%TOV 


3. 


Irov 


ityrov 


P. 1. 


ia/xev 


cbfxev 


P. 1. 


IjASV 


loofxev 


2. 


iarre 


?JT€ 


2. 


2re 


tyre 


3. 


elo~i(v) 


S>ffi(u) 


3. 


%aei{v) 


%o)cn{v) 


Imp. S. 2. 


Xtrfri 


Inf. elvai 


Imp. 


i&t, irpSs&i 


Inf. levai 


3. 


ecrrco 






(seld. irpSsei) 




D.2. 


€(T70V 


Part. &v, odcra, 


3. 


Itw 


Part. ld>v, lov- 


3. 


ecrrcov 


6v 


D.2. 


frov, irpSsnov 


era, X6v 


P. 2. 


eare 


G. ovrosy ovcrris 


3. 


Vtoov 


Gen. i6vros, 


3. 


etfTaffav 


(irapdov, Trapov- 


P. 2. 


fre, irposire 


\0V0"lf}S. 




(rare ecrrav) 


aa, irap6v, 


3. 


Xruicav, or 


{irapi(av, irapi- 




6vtccv, Plat. 


G. irap6vTos) 




Iovtwv {Xtwv 


ovo'a, irapiSv, 




Legg.879,b.) 






Aesch.E.32.) 


G. irapi6vros). 



t 181.] 



VERBS IN 



■flh 



221 



IMPERFECT. 


Ind. 


Opt. 


Ind. 


Opt. 


S7l7 


fy, I was 


€tT}V 


S. 1. 


fjeiv or 77a, / went 


fof^tt or 
\oif\v 


2. 


fa&a (§ 116, 2) 


dt]s 


2. 


rjeis and rjeia&a 


lois 


3. 


fy (from fe-v) 


6*77 


3. 


fa 


"101 


D.2. 


i\<TTOV {flTOv) 


eXlt)TOV 


D.2. 


yeirov, us'ly yrov 


101T0V 


3. 


f\(TTnV \f\TT\v) 


elfynjif 


3. 


r)t'nT\v, " 77x77^ 


IoIt7)V 


P.l. 


■ft(T[X.€V 


eirj/xev (seldom elfiev) 


P.l. 


rjei/iev, ' : 77/^6^ 


Xoifj.ev 


2. 


7)Te (fi<rre) 


e^Te (seld.poet. elre) 


2. 


fJ€LT€, " tJt6 


?01T€ 


3. 


iicrav 


tfrjcrav and eley 


3. 


■fjecrau (yaav poet.) 


'loiey 


Fut. eao/xai, I shall be, ear), or etret, etrrar, etc. — Opt. i<roifii]v. — Inf. etrecr^-ot. 


— Part, iaopzvos. — Verbal Adj. icrTeov, (rvveareoy. 


Middle Form : Pres. Xefxai, Uffai or fy, Ut<zi, etc., Imp. teo-o, Inf. fecr&cu, 


Part. U/j-euos: the Impf. te/tfiK, ^fetro, etc., signifying to hasten, ought 


probably to bs written with the rough breathing, which is strongly- 


confirmed by the manuscripts, and to be referred to %-^fii. — Verbal Adj. 


ItSs, Iriov, rarer ir^reov. 



Remark 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of elfd, to be (except the second 
Pers. eT), see § 33 (a). In compounds, the accent is on the preposition, as far back 
as the general rules of accentuation permit, e. g. irdpeifu, irdpei, irdpeo-ri{v), etc. 
Imp. 7rdpi<rdi, £wht&i ; but iraprjv on account of the temporal augment, irapiarai. 
on account of the omission of e (irapeVeTcu), irapelvcu like infinitives with the 
ending -vcu, irapco, -77s, -77, etc., irap^Te, irapziev, on account of the contraction ; 
the accentuation of the Part, in compound words should be particularly noted, 
e. g. irapwv, irapovcra, irap6v, Gen. irapSvros (so also irapiwv, Gen. irapiovTOs). 

Rem. 2. The compounds of el/xi, to go, follow the same rules as those of 
elfj.1, to be ; hence seA r eral forms of these two verbs are the same in compounds, 
e. g. irdpeifii, 71-apet, and Trdpei(n(v) (the last being third Pers. Sing, of e?/« and 
third Pers. PI. of elfxi) ; but Inf. irapisvai, Part, irapuav. 

Rem. 3. The form eTev, esto, be it so! good! shortened from 6*77 and strength- 
ened by a u, must be distinguished from the shortened form ehv instead of 
eif)<jav of the third Pers. PI. Opt. Impf. — A secondaiy form, yet critically to be 
rejected, of the third Pers. Imp. 77TC0 instead of 6<tto>, is found once in PI. Rp. 
361, c, with the varying reading earco. — The form of the first Pers. Impf. is 
often 7), among the Attic poets, and sometimes also in Plato ; the form ij/xrjv is 
rare (Lys. 7, 34, X. Cy. 6. 1, 9). — The form of the second Pers. Impf. fc is 
found frequently in the later writers, and rarely in lyric passages of the Attic 
poets. — The Dual forms with <r are preferred to those without c; on the con- 
trary, TJre is preferred to fare (Aristoph.). 

Rem. 4. The form of the third Pers. Sing. Impf. tfeiv instead of pet, from 
ilfjLi, sometimes occurs, even before consonants, Ar. Plut. 696. ■Kpo'srjeiv (in 
Senarim) : PL Crit. p. 114, d. (in the best MSS.) ; 77W, PI. Crit. 117, e.' (in the 
best MSS.) ; irpoyeiv, PI. Tim. 43, 6 ; airfetv, ib. 60, 'c ; airrjeiv, ib. 76, b. 

Rem. 5. The Ind. Pres. of etui, to go, has regularly in the Attic prosc- 
writers the meaning of the Fut. I shall or will go or come ; hence the Pres. is 
supplied by epxo/iai (§ 167, 2) ; the Inf. and Part, have likewise a Pres. and 
Fut. meaning. 



19* 



222 



VERBS IN -flL. 



r * 182. 



II. Verbs in -fit which annex the Syllable vvv or vv to the 
Stem-vowel and append to this the Personal-endings. 

$ 182. Formation of the Tenses of Verbs ivhose Stem 
ends with a, e 3 o, or ivith a Consonant. 

A. Verbs whose Stem ends with a, e, or o. 



Voice. 


Tenses. 


a. Stem in a. 


b. Stem in e. 


c. Stem in o («). 


Act. 


Pres. 
Impf. 
Perf. 
Plup. 
Put. 

Aor. 


ffKedd-yvv-fu ' 
i-VK&d-vvv-v l 
€-cr/ceSa-Aca 
i-aneSa-Keiv 

CTKeda-ffca 

Att. aTceScD, -as, -a 

e-o7ce5a-o"a 


KOp4-VVV-fll * 
4-KOp4-VVV-V l 

Ke-Kope-na 

4-K€-KOp4-KeiU 
K0p4-ff(t)) 

Att. Kopaiy -els, -et 
i-K6pe-aa 


arp<i}-vuv-fii l 
4-arpca-vvv-p * 
€-<rrpa)-Ka 

4-ffTp<i)-KSlV 

crrpdo-cca 
s-CTpca-tfa 


Mid. 


Pres. 

Impf. 

Perf. 

Plup. 

Put. 

Aor. 

P.Pf. 

Aor. 

Put. 


<TKfSd-vvv-fJi.ai 

4-(TKeZ<X-VVV-^t]V 

i-(Tic45a-cr-fxai 
4-cricedd-(r-iA7)v 


K0p4-vvv-fxai 
4-Kope-vuy-fXT]V 
Ke-icSpe-ff-fiai 

£-Ke-KOp4-(T-/jL'r)V 

Kop4-cr-ofxai 

4-Kope-cr-dfj.r}P 

K€-Kop4-<r-o/xai 


aTpdo-vvv-fjiai 
4-crTp<a-vvv-ixt\v 
e-trrpcc-fjiai 

4-GTp&-\i.'f\V 


Pass. 


i-aK&d-ff-frriv 
<TKeda-(T-^-f}(rofj.ai 


i-icop4-a-&riJ/ 

KOp^-(T-^T](TOfXai 


4-(TTpW-&7IV 

<rTp(t}-&-f)<ro/j.ai 


Verbal Adj. 


aK(da-<f-r6s 
cvceSa-er-Teos 


Kope-(T-T6s ffTp(o-r6s 
Kope-ff-r4os ffTpa}-r4os. 

- KOpG-VVVb), 4-KOp4-VUVOV (TTpCO-VUVU, €- 


1 And (TKeda 
(Trpw-vvvov (v a 


■wuw, ianeZd-vvvov — 
lways short). 



B. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Consonant. 



Pres. 


6\-Kv-fii, 1 perdo, J o\-\v-[xai, pereo, 


6/JL-VV-fJl.l l 


ofjL'Vv-fxat 


Impf. 


&\-Av-v l \ W\-\V-/J.T}V 


iofx-vv-v l 


oifi-vv-firiv 


Perf. I. 


6\-d}\€-Ka ('OAEn), perdidi, 


ofjL-wfxo-Ka 


ofJL-<£>ixo-ixai 




§ 124, 2. 


foMon) 




Perf. II. 


6\-eo\-a, perii, 


§ 124, 2. 




Plup. I. 


6\-ax4-Keiv, perdideram, 


6fl-0/J.6-K€lV 


ofx-ufxS-fxriv 


Plup. II. 


6\-<a\-eiv, perieram, 






Put. 


oA-w, -us, -ei 1 6\-ov/j.ai, -ei 


o/x-ovfxai, -ei 




Aor. I. 


ooXe-aa | A. II. otk-S/xriv 


&[x.o-(ra 


oDfxo-adfJLTfv 






A. I. P. a>n6-<r-, 


bTJV (et WfJI.6^T}u) 






F. I. P. 6fjLo-<r-S 
'ojjwv-ov (always 


-i](TOfxai. 


# ' 


And bA\v-co, &\\v-ov — bfivv-Uy i 



Kemark. "OAXvfu comes by assimilation from 6\-vvfii (§ 18, Kern.). Por an 
example of a stem-ending with a mute, see SeUvvixt above, under the para- 
digms (§175). The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of tfivvfu is bfj.wfxo(rix4vos. The 
remaining forms of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the a- among the Attic 
writers, e. g. oju.cc/xoTai, b^ixoro. 



f 183.] SUMMARY OP SOME VERBS IN -fll. 223 

Summary op the Verbs belonging here. 

The Stem ends, 
A. In a Vowel and assumes -wv. 

$ 183. (a) Verbs whose Stem ends in a. 

1. K€pd-wv-fML (poetic secondary form Kipvda), Ktpvrjfu; Epic and 
poet. Kcpdoi) , to mix, Flit. Kepacrco, Att. Kcpto ; Aor. eKepoura ; Perf. 
K€Kpa.Ka ; Mid. to mix for one's self, Aor. iKepao-dfxrjv ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. KCKpa/xat (KCKepacr/xat, Aliacr. 29, 13; Inf. KeKepaaScu, Luc. 
Dial. Meretr. 4, 4) ; Aor. Pass. iKpaSyv, Att. also eKepao-^v 
(Metathesis, $ 156, Rem.). 

2. Kpejxd-wv-pu, to hang, Flit, /cpe/mcrco, Att. Kpefxu> ; Aor. €/<pe//,a- 
o-a ; Mid. or Pass. KpcLidwvLiax, to hang one's self or 6e /«^ (but 
Kpe/x,a/xai, to kwo-, § 179, 5) ; (Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKpejua/xai in 
later writers;) Fut. Pass. Kpe/^ao-^rjo-o/xcu ; Aor. iKptLcdo-Srjv, I was 
hung, or I hung. 

3. 7reTd-wv-[u } to spread out, to open, Fut. 7T€Tao-a), Att. 7rerw ; 
Aor. €7reTacra (Perf. Act. 7T€7reraKa, Diod.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
7re7rra/Aai ($ 155, 2) (7re7reracrp,at, non- Attic and Luc.) ; Aor. Pass. 
€7reTacr^ryv. 

4. o-Kc8a-wi5-/xt, to scatter, Fut. o-KcSao-w, Att. o-kcSw ; Aor. eo-Ke 
Seo-a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. eo-KeoW//,cu ; Aor. Pass. ko-Kf&dvdrjv. 

$ 184. (b) Fer^s ivhose Stem ends in e. 

Preliminary Remark. The verbs fhrpvpi, cfriwvyu, and also §&>vvv\ii 
(§ 186), do not properly belong here, since their stem originally ended in <r, 'E2- 
(eomp. ves-tire), 2BE2- (comp. &r/3ecr-Tos), znS- (comp. fycr-T-fip, C<2<r-7y>oi/, C^o- 
T7js, (^xt-t^s) ; but by the omission of the <r, they become analogous to verbs in 
-e and -o. 

1. €-wv-fj.i, to clothe, in prose u.iL<$nkvvv\xi, Impf. aLicfaivvvv with- 
out Aug. ; Fut. djxcfiLeo-o), Att. d/x^tw ; Aor. r}fx<f>Uo-a ; Perf. Act. 
wanting ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. y)\x$U<TLw.i, rjfx^Ua-ai, ^/x(/>tWrat, etc., 
Inf. ^tco-^at; Fut. Mid. d/^teVo/xai. (Aug. $$ 126, 3. and 230.) 
The vowel of the Prep, is not elided in the Common language, 
hence also k-mioacrSai, X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. 

2. £e-wv-fxi, to boil, Trans., Fut. £eo-w ; Aor. c£eo-a ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass. c£eo-p.cu ; Aor. Pass. c£car$r)v. — (£c<o, on the contrary, is 
usually intransitive). 



224: SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN /«. [§$ 185-187. 

3. Kopi-vvv-/xi, to satiate, Fut. Kopiao), Att. ko/dco; Aor. €Kopeo-a; 
Aor. Mid. iKopaa-d^v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KtKopto-fjLai; Aor. Pass, 
e/copeo-^v. 

4. crfie-wv-iu, to extinguish, Fut. o-jSeVw ; first Aor. ccr/Seo-a, 2" 
extinguished; second Aor. (.crp-qv, I ceased to bum; Perf. eo-p-qKa, 
I have ceased to bum. — Mid. crfBivvvpiai, to cease to bum, intrans. 
Fut. o-^Tjo-ojuat ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ea-fSea-jxat; Aor. Pass. eo-/?eo-~ 
$771/; Fut. Pass. o-peo-SrjcrofjLaL. No other verb in -w/xt has a 
second Aor. Act. ($ 191, 2). 

5. (rropi-wv-ixiy to spread out (shortened form o-Topvvjxi, Poet, 
and X. Cy. 8. 8, 16), Fut. crTopiaru), Att. oropw; Aor. ecrropecra; 
Mid. to spread out for one's self. The other tenses are formed 
from o-TpwwvjJLi ; Zarpuxr ap,7]V ; eoTpw/xou, iarpoo^rjv, crrpwros (non- 
Att. co-Topea/xai, ioTopecr$7]v 3 and icrTopyjSrjv) . See § 182. 

$ 185. (c) FerSs whose Stem ends in i. 

Ti-vvv-fxi (TI-), to pay, to expiate, Mid. ri-vvv-ficu, to get pay, to punish, to avenge, 
secondary Epic form of rivco and rivofxai. — In Attic poetry, the Mid. is often 
found, and with one v, Ttuv/xai. 

§ 186. (d) Verbs in o, with the o lengthened into o>. 

1. £w-wv-p,i, to gird, Fut. £wcrw; Perf. c^w/cot, Paus. ; Aor. e£wo-a; 
Mid. to gird one's self Aor. Mid. e^axra/x^v ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, 

Z^OXTfAOLL (j 131). 

2. pw-wv-pci, to strengthen, Fut. pcoo-w ; Aor. 2/5/Wa ; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass, eppufxai, Imp. Zppwo-o, vale, farewell, Inf. ippiocrSai; Aor. 
Pass. ippuor$r]v ($ 131) ; Fut. Pass, poja^rjaofxai. 

3. crTpw-vvv-fu (§ 182), to spread out, Fut. o-Tpwa-co; Aor. Icrrpoi- 
<ra, etc. See (TTopewv-pLi ($ 184, 5). 

4. -xpw-wv-fjii, to color, Fut. xpajo-a> > Aor. e^paxra ; Perf. Mid. oi 
Pass. Ke^pcoo-/iat; Aor. Pass, ixpuoSyv. 

B. Verbs whose Stem 3nds in a Consonant and assumes -yu. 

§ 187. (a) Jrc a ikZWe. 

1. ay-vv-pu, to break, Fut. a£w; Aor. ea£a, Inf. a£ai (Part. Lys. 

100, 5. Karea^ai/res with the Aug.) ; second Perf. 4'dya, J awi 

broken ; Mid. to 6rea& for one's self Aor. Za£dp,r]v ; Aor. Pass, 
cayip/ (Aug., § 122, 4). 



\ 187.] SUMMARY OF SOME VERBS IN -/*£. 225 

2. Sclk-vv'Iju, see $ 175. 

3. zlpy-vv-iu (or eipyco), to s/£W2 in, Flit, eip£w ; Aor. eip£a, Inf. 
clplou, Part, ep£as (PL Polit. 285, b.), irepupiavrts (Tli. 5, 11), 
£w«p£avros (PI. Rp. 5. 461, b), Subj. /ca^eipl^s (with the variation 
jca^eplry?), PL Gorg. 461, d; Aor. Pass, eipx&?v; Perf. eTpy/xcu. 
;But eipya), eip£a), etpfa, eipx$r]v, to shut out, etc.) 

4. £evy-vv-fu, to join together, Fut. £«;£» ; Aor. e£eu£a 5 Mid. to 
yom to or for one's self, Fut. £eu£o/xat; Aor. ££ev$dp,r]v; Perf. Mid. 
or Pass €^efiyiim ; Aor. Pass, c^dx-^v, and more frequently 
elvyrjv. 

5. fuy-vv-jxi, to mix (pwcrya), secondary form), Fut. /«§&>; Aor. 
I/At^a, fu£at; Perf. ^pilx a (Polyb.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, fxipaypiat, 
/xe/ux&u; Aor. Pass. i/xtx^Vj and ipuyrjv; Fut. Pass, /ux-^cro/xai ; 
Fut. Perf. /Ae/u^o/xai. 

6. oty- 1^3 -//,i, usually as a compound: (Tlie Attic use of tlie 
form oZyvvfu is not certain) dvoiyi/v/xi, Sioiyioyxt (but instead, 
dvotyco, Stotyoo, are more frequently used in the Pres. and dvewyov 
always in the Impf), to qpew, Fut. dvot£w; Aor. dveu>£a, dvot^at (in 
X. Hell. Tjvoiyov, rjvoiZa, signifying to put to sea, to weigh anclwr) ; 
first. Perf. dvea>x a > I have opened; second Perf.' dvewya, i" stowd 
<?pm, instead of which Att. dveo>y/xai ; Impf. Mid. avewyojxrjv ; Aor. 
Pass, avaox^rjv, avov^rjvat. (Aug. § 122, 6.) Verb. Adj. avoiKTtos. 

7. S/xopy-vv-fu, to ivipe off, Fut. op,op£w ; Aor. &fxop£a ; Mid. to 
wfpe off from one's self; Fut. o/xop£op;ai; Aor. wfxop$dfxrp/ ; Aor. 

Pass. djpLOp^S-qv. 

8. Trrry-vv-jXL, to fix, fasten, freeze, Fut. 7nj£w; Aor. hrr)i<x\ first 
Perf. Triirq-xa, I have fastened; second Perf. TreV^ya, J standfast, 
am frozen ; Mid. 7ryyvvfxai, I stick fast ; Perf. 7T€7rrry fxac, I stand 
fast; Aor. Pass, kirdyqv (more seldom cVtJx&p) ; second Fut. 
Pass. 7rayiqarofJLa.L. Verbal Adj. 7T7]kt6s. 

9. prry-vv-pu, to rend, Fut. prj^w; Aor. €ppr]£a; second Perf. 
^pwya, J ara re?^ ($ 140, Rem. 3); Aor. Mid. ipprj^dixrjv ; Aor. 
Pass, ippayrjv {zpp-qx^W rare) ; second Fut. pdyrjo-opLai. 

10. <j>pdy-vv-fju (commonly <£pao-<rcD, (fypdrro), § 143, 1), to break, 
Impf. Z<f>pdyvvv (Time. 7, 74. S. Ant. 241); Fut. <f>pd£a>; Aor. 
e</>pa£a; Perf. Mid. or Pass, -rri^pay^ai ; Aor. Pass. i<f>pdx^rjp 
(i<t>p(x.yr]v first used among the later writers). 



226 VERBS. — Ka/xai awD fjfAai. . [$$188, 189 



$ 188. (b) Verbs whose Stem ends in a Liquid. 

1. \kp-vv-fxai (Epic and also in Plato), to take, obtain, secondary form of crfpo- 
(jiai, and used only in particular phrases, to obtain, to acquire, namely, a reward, 
spoils, etc. Impf. y\pvvp.t\v. The remaining forms come from afyofxai. 

2. KTu-vv-fii, commonly written ktivi/v/u in the MSS., to put to 
death, Att. prose secondary form of /a-eiVco, is used in the Pres. 
and Impf. The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-. 
The v of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong ($ 169, 
Rem. 1). 

3. o\-Xv-fiL (instead of oX-w-pu), to destroy. See $ 182, B. In 
prose, only in compounds. 

4. o/x-vv-[jli, to swear. See $ 182, B. 

5. 6p-vi}-/H (poet.), to rouse ($ 230). 

6. (TTop-vv-fxiy to spread out. See aropivvv/xi, $ 184, 5. 

$ 189. Inflection of the two forms of the Perf. k€i/acu 
and rjp,ai. 

Preliminary Remark. The two forms of the Perf. Ke?fiai and fjjucu, 
are so essentially different, in their formation, from the other verbs in -/*t, that 
they require to be treated by themselves. 

a. Ket/^cu, to lie. 

Kct/xai, properly, I have laid myself down, hence I lie down ; 
then Pass. I have been laid down, I am lying down (e. g. dva/ca- 
jxat, I am laid up, i. e. consecrated, crvyKziTat, it has been agreed 
upon, compositum est, constat, but avvri^eirai V7r6 twos, it has 
been agreed by some one) ; this verb is a Perf. without reduplica- 
tion, from the stem KEI- (contracted from KEE-). 

Perf. Ind. KeT/mi, nuffai, Kenai, Kel/xe&a, /ceio-fre, Kelvrai ) 

Subj. /cewjuat, Key, Ke-nrai, etc. 

Imp. ku<to, Keicr&ca, etc. 5 — Inf. Ke?(T&ar, — Part. Kei/xevos. 
Impf. Ind. €Kei[A.rjv, Hkckto, eKeiro, third Pers. PI. eKeivro. 

Opt. Keoi/xriv, Keoio, k4olto, etc. 
Fut. neicrofMcu. 

Compounds ava.Keiij.aA, KaraKei/xai, KaraKeiffai, etc.; — Inf KaTaKeTafrai ; — Imp 

KaraKCKTo, eyKeiffo. 



W 190, 191.] VERBS IN -<o WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -/At. 2/^7 

§ 190. b. *H>cu, to sit. 

1. T H/xat, properly, J /i&?/£ seated myself, I have been seated, 
hence, I sit (Ion. and poetic, also used of inanimate objects, 
instead of ISpvjxcu, I have been fixed, established?) ; this verb is 
a Perf. of the poet. Aor. Act. eto-a, to set, to establish. The stem 
is e HA- (comp. rja--Tai instead of ^S-rat, according to ^ 17, 5, and 
the Lat. sed-eo). 

Remark 1. The active Aorist-forms of efoa are dialectic {§ 230) and poet., 
but the Mid. signifying to erect, to establish, belongs also to Attic prose, eltrdfjirivi 
Part, (ladfievos (Th. 3, 58, hxadfievos) ; Imp. K<rcu, eWcu (e^eoocu) ; Put. poetic 
co-opal, %<r<rofiai (i<pe<r<ro/xai). The defective forms of this verb are supplied by 
ISpvco. 



Perf. 



Ind. Tifjixu, i\crai, Tjffrai, ^e^o, rjcr^e, rivrat 5 

Imp. T/tro, fjodw, etc. 5 — Inf. rjo&at 5 — Part, ^/xevos, 

7l[XT]v, rjcro, 77OT0, ifae&a, 7/od-e, fyro. 



Plup. 

2. In prose, the compound Ka^rj/xat is commonly used instead 
of the simple. The inflection of the compound differs from the 
simple in never taking o- in the third Pers. Sing., and in the 
Plup., only when it has the temporal Augment: — 

Perf. Ka^rjfxai, Ka&T}<rai, /ca^-rjTot, etc. ; — Subj. Ka^a/xai, nady, Ica&i]- 

tcu, etc. ; — Imp. ko^oo, etc.-, — Inf. /caSHjod-ai; — Part. Kafrfr 
fievos. 
Plup. iKafrfi/xriv and ko&tj/atjj/, e/cadijao and ko^tjoo, e/cci^rjTo and 

ko^tjoto, etc.; — Opt. Ka^roifirju, Ka&o'io, Ka^oiro, etc. 
Rem. 2. The Opt. forms : Ka&rjfjLrjv, -??o, -t?to, etc. are doubtful. — The 
defective forms of 77/zcu are supplied by '4£c<rfrcu, or '{Csoftai (prose Kc&4£e<r&ai, 
kc&l£co~&cu). 

Verbs in -», which follow the analogy of Verbs in -/it, in forming 
the second Aor. Act. and Mid., the Pres. and Perf. Act. 

$ 191. I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 

1. Several verbs with the characteristic a, c, o, v, form a 
second Aor. Act. and (though rarely) a second Aor. Mid., ac- 
cording to the analogy of verbs in -/u, — this tense being without 
the mode-vowel, and appending the personal- endings to the 
stem. But all the remaining forms of these verbs are like 
verbs in -oj. 

2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the 
modes and participials is like that of the second Aor. Act. of 



228 



VERBS IN -CO WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -/U. [$ 191. 



verbs in -/xt. The characteristic- vowel, with some exceptions, 
is lengthened, as in &rrqv 9 viz. a and e into rj, o into co, T and v 
into I and v. This lengthened vowel remains, as in &mjv 9 
throughout the Ind., Imp., and Inf. The third Pers. PL in -yo-av 
(Char, a) and -vaav shortens the vowel, when the poets use the 
abridged form in -v, instead of -ow, e. g. epav, eow. The Subj., 
Opt., and Part., with some exceptions, which will be noticed in 
the following tables, are like verbs in -/u, e. g. /3<wqv (orafyv)* 
<rfidr\v ($€t7]v), yvotrjv (Socrjv), yvovs (Sous). The Imp., like crrrj^t, 
in the second Pers. Sing., takes the ending -#i, and the stem- 
vowel remains long through all the persons ; in compounds of 
j3atvoi, ftr]$i is also shortened into /3d, e. g. Kara/3d, 7rp6j3d 9 ct's/fo, 
€/x/5d, e7rt/3d instead of KardprjSi, etc. 



Modes 


a. Characteris. a 


b. Characteris. e 


c. Characteris. o 


d. Character, v 


and 


BA-X1, fiaivu, 


2BE-n, afievuvui, 


TNO-n, 7171/^0"- 


Sr-oo, 


Persons. 


to go. 


to extinguish. 


ko), to know. 


to icrap up. 


Ind. S. 1. 


%-fi-q-v, I ivent, 


eafiriv, I ceased to 


iyvw, I knew, 


tdvv, I went in 


2. 


e-fir)-s 


eo-&7)s [burn, 


eyvws 


e8vs [or under, 


3. 


%-fa 


z<tPt) 


%.yvu> 


eSv 


D. 2. 


e-fir]-T0v 


%.(J$1)TOV 


eyvarou 


edvrov 


3. 


i-/3-f]-T7JV 


£afZ4]T7]v 


iyv(i>T7]v 


iSl)T7]V 


P. 1. 


e-Prj-fxev 


ecrfirjfiev 


eyvoofxzv 


eSvfxev 


* 2. 


e-firj-re 


eo-/3?jTe 


tyvooTe 


eSure 


3. 


e-fir)-crav 


iv$r\ac>.v 


Zyvoovav 


eSvcrav 




(Poet. e/3av) 




(Poet, Zyvow) 


(Poet. eSw) 


Subj. S. 


(3w, Pfjs, $rj l 


<r/3£>, fis, rj 1 


yv<a, yvcas, yvco x 


Svco, rjs, 77 1 


D. 


firvrov 


fffSr\TOV 


yucorov 


dvTjTOV 


P. 


fiaiuey, 7jTe, 


afitopei', 7jT6, 


yUU/XCV, UT€, 


Svu)fj.ey, 




u(Ti(y) 


Shti[v) 


uari(u) 


7JT€, <0<Tl(v) 


Opt. S. 1. 


fiair\v 


fffieirju 


yvoir)v 2 




2. 


fiairjs 


crPelr)s 


yvo'vns 




3. 


/3alr) 


afidrj 


yuoirj 




D. 2. 


(ZairjTov et oatov 


<rfielr]TOV et eTrov 


yvoirjrov et o'hov 




3. 


j3aiT}T7)v et a!iTr\v 


o-fi€iriT7]v et eirrju 


ypoir)T7)v et o'lTnv 




P. 1. 


fiaiTj/uLev et aifiev 


afidrifji.ei' et €?/j.ev 


yvoir){xzv et oT/xeu 




2. 


fialrjTe et aire 


o-fietrjTe et etTe 


yyoirjre et oTre 




3. 


ficuev (seldom 
/3at?j crav) 


cr/3eTez> 


yvolev (rarely 
yuolr)(Tav) 




Imp. S. 


j8^i, -fjTca 3 


fffir)&i, -firca 3 


yvw&i, toTOO 3 


85&1, VTO> 3 


D. 1. 


$r\rov, rjTwv 


<rfir)rov, i)r(av 


yvurov, UTCtiV 


Zvtov, vruv 


P. 2. 


j3f?T6 


<rf5r]Te 


yvSsre 


SvT€ 


3. 


p-f)TQ>xrcw and 


cfiyyTuiffav and 


yvdoraxrav and 


dvToxrav et 




fiaVTCOP 


cfiivTwv 


yvovrwv 


Svi/TOW 


Inf. 


firjvaL 


fffirivcu 


yv&vai 


Bvuai 


Part. 


fids, a<ra, a.v 


<r/3eis, eTtra, iv 


yvovs, ovaa, 6v 


dvs, vera, vv 




G. $6.VTOS 


G. fffiivros 


G. yv6vros 


G. Zvvros. 


1 Compo 


unds, e. g. avafica, avafifjs, etc. ; airo 


(rfZa> ; Siayvoo ; avadvco. 


2 Aeschyl. Suppl. 230 (215) crvyyvyr) ; but i 


a the Mid. form crvyyvoiro. 


3 Compounds, e. g. avdfi-nSn, avafirrrs ; .cwrotr/ 


fy&i ; Sidyyco^i ; avdSv&i. 



$$ 192, 193.] VERBS IN -0) LIKE VERBS IN -/Xt. 229 

Remark. The Opt. form Sv-nv (instead of Svi-nv) is not found in the Attic 
dialect, but in the Epic (§ 227). 

$ 192. Summary of Verbs with a second Aor. like 
Verbs in -fit. 

Besides the verbs mentioned above, some others have this form : — 

1. SiSpdaicw, to run away (§ 161, 10) Aor. (APA-) eSpav, -as, -a, -d/Meu, -are, 
°aaav {ZSpdv Poet.), Subj. Spa, Spas, Spa, Sparov, Spufxey, Spare, SpSxri{v), Opt. 
Spainv, Imp. Spc&i, -drco, Inf. Spavai, Part. Spas, -affa, -dv, Gen. Spdvros. 

2. irirofj-ai, to fly (§ 166, 29), Aor. (IITA-) Zirrnv, Inf. irTrjvai, Part, irrds ; Aor. 
Mid. iTTTdp.T]v, irrdo-frai. 

3. Trplaa&ai, see § 179, 6. 

4. <r/ceAA&> or cr/ceAeco, to dry, second Aor. (2KAA-) %o-k\v\v, to wither, Intrans., 
Inf. o~Khr\vai, Opt. <rn\aif)v. 

5. <p&d-pa), to come before, to anticipate (§158, 7), Aor. tcpfrnv, (pfrrivai, (p&&s, 
$&&, (p&al-nv. 

6. Kal<a, to burn, Trans. (§ 154, 2), Aor. (KAE-) iicd-ni/, I burned, Intrans.; but 
first Aor. %Kavaa, Trans. 

7. peca, to flow (§ 154, 2), Aor. ('PYE-) ippvriv, I flowed. 

8. x a 'P w > t0 rejoice (§ 166, 32), Aor. (XAPE-) exa^v. 

9. aXio-Ko/xai, to be taken, Aor. (AAO-) r'iKav and IdAcoj/ (§ 161, 1), aAoDj/cu, 
oAw, -(fs, -£, etc., aXotrju, aXovs (always a, except in the Ind.). 

10. jSio'w, to live, Aor. iplav, Subj. #ia>, -^s, -$, etc., Opt. fiicp-nv (not fitoirjv, 
as yvoi-qv, to distinguish it from the Opt. Impf. fiio'i-ny), Inf. fSi&vai, Part. jSious 
[oDo-o, ow] ; but the cases of jStous are supplied by the first Aor. Part. &i<a<ras. 
Thus: avefriav, I returned to life, from ava$idxrKO[iai (§ 161, 3). The Pres. and 
Impf. of ySicJoj are but little used by the Attic writers ; for these tenses, they em- 
ploy (a> ; besides these tenses, only the Put. tficrsiv was in good use among Attic 
writers ; the remaining tenses were borrowed from f}i6u> : thus, Pres. £a> ; Impf. 
efav (§ 137, 3) ; Fut. fiiAffofiai, more rarely Ch^^'i Aor. «j8W (X. O. 4, 18, has 
also cpiaxrev) ; Perf. fie&la>Ka ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, fiefiiurai, Part, fie^ico^vos. 

11. <pv<a (0 or v), to produce, second Aor. i<pvv, Intrans., to be -produced, be born, be 
naturally, <pvvai, <pvs, Subj. <pv<a (Opt. wanting in the Attic dialect) ; but the first 
Aor. e<pvcra, Trans. / produced ; Fut. <pv<ra>, Trans. 7 will produce. The Perf. 
ire<pvKa, I am produced, also has an intransitive sense, so also the Pres. Mid. 
<pvo/xai ; Fut. (picofxai. 

Remark. Here also belong the forms <rx*s and trxol-nv of the second 
Aor. %<rxov from ex&>, to have (§ 166, 14), and irl&i of the second Aor. iinov 
from mi/a, to drink (§ 158, 5). 

$ 193. II. Perfect and Pluperfect. 

The Attic dialect, in imitation of the Epic, forms a few Per- 
fects of pure verbs immediately from the stem, e. g. AI-O, to 
20 



230 



VERBS IN -to LIKE VERBS IN -/At. 



p 19a 



fear, Se-Sc-a, then rejecting the mode-vowel, in the Dual and PL 
Lid. Perf. and Plup., and to some extent in the Inf., e. g. Se-8i- 
fxev instead of Se-oY-a-jaev. In this way, these forms of the Perf. 
and Plup. become wholly analogous to the Pres. and Impf. of 
verbs in -/u, e. g. t-o-ra-^cv. The stem- vowel remains short, e. g. 
SeSt//,ev, reVAajaev, rerXdvai ; but in the third Pers. PL Perf, the 
mode-vowel a is not rejected, e. g. oVoY-do-i; with verbs in -aw, 
however, a is contracted with the stem- vowel, e. g. re-rAa-ao-i = 
re-rAa-a-i. 

Remark 1. Except the forms of Ain and '/crnj^i, all the Perfects of this 
kind belong almost exclusively to poetry, particularly to the Epic. The Sing. 
S«'5ta is not Attic. 

Rem. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, and, since it not only 
wants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -d-t in the second Pers. Sing., it is 
wholly analogous to the forms in -ju. So the Inf. Both append their termi- 
nations to the short stem-vowel ; SeSzeW is an exception. The Subj. Perf. and 
the Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem-vowel is o, are formed like verbs in -fit, since 
the Subj. Perf. admits the contraction of the stem- vowel with the termination, 
and the Opt. Plup. ends in -ai-qv, e. g. eerra-cw, iarco, -rjs, etc., rerXairiv. The 
Part, of verbs in -aw contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -d>s and -6s, 
e. g. earcu&s = etr-rcfo, e<TTa-6s = kcrrws and karos, and also have a peculiar 
feminine form in -Siva, e. g. ecnwa ; all the Cases retain the a>, e. g. karSnos, 
icrruarjs, etc. 

Rem. 3. The form resolved by e is retained in some participles, in the Ionic 
dialect, e.g. kcre&s, standing firm; so from T&vr)ica, r&veds (never re&vws) 
together with Tefrvniccas, is retained in the Attic dialect also. In these forms, 
w remains in all the Cases, e. g. 

icrre&s, karrewaa, iffrecas, Gen. kffrecoros, -(fxrys. 
re&rews, re&veaxra, Te&vecas, Gen. re&veuTos, -(acrrjs. 

BefirjKa, and rerXrjKa never have this form of the participle. 





Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Perfect. 


Pluperfect. 


Ind. S. 1. 


8e-5i-a 


iSeSteiv 


'E-2TA-A 




2. 


Se-dl-as 


eSeStets 






3. 


Se-Si-e(j') 


iSeStei 






D. 2. 


Se-St-TO*' 


iSiSXrov 


z-ffra-vov 


tGraTov 


3. 


Se-dt-TOV 


ideSiTTjV 


e-ffra-Top 


e<TTaT7]P 


P. 1. 


te-^t-fiep 


effeStftev 


€-(TTa-/j.ey 


effrafxev 


2. 


Se-dt-re 


ideSXre 


€-CTa-T6 


co-rare 


3. 


8e-Si-dtrt(#) 


iSeSXffav (JSeSieCai/) 


i-(TTa-(ri(v) 


ecrraffav 


Imp. 


8e-Si-&i, SeStTco, etc. 


'd-crra-fri, etc., 


3 Pers. Pi. 


Subj. 


8e-8t-c», -rjs, -77, etc. 


earrarcoffav an 


I -dvrav 


Inf. 


8e-Si- evai 


k-cfra-vai 




Part. 


St-dX-ds, -v?a, -6s, Gen. -6tos 


k-<TT<Z>s, -Sxra, 


-6s{-6sl) 






Gen. -cDtos, 


-(txrrjs 


Subj. Pf. 


earaj, fjs, -rj, etc. 






Opt. Plup. 


hcrax-qv, Dual karo!vr\rov and -cut 
etc., third Pers. PI. kffraitv. 


ov, PL sffralrif 


iev and -cufxa', 



9$ 194, 195.] VERBS WITH A PERF. LIKE VERBS IN '{U. 231 

Rem. 4. The Opt. Plup. third Pers. Sing. Sedietr}, PI. Phaedr. 251, a. is re- 
stored according to traces in the MSS. The Plup. of '1<ttt}(jli, in this form never 
takes the strengthened augment et. — The Imp. Perf. ecrrd&i, etc., and the Opt. 
Plup. ia-Tai-nUy etc., are poetic only. But the Inf. earaVai is in constant use ; 
yet l<TT7j«:eVai is very seldom ; also the Part. Iotcos, -axra, is far more frequent 
than k(TT7]K(x>s, -via; the neuter 4<tt7ik6s, on the contrary, is more frequent than 
Io-to's. Instead of the Ind. Sing. Perf, Plup., and Part, of Se'Sta, the forms 
of SeSoiKa are more frequent ; besides the Indie. Perf. and Plup., particularly 



$ 194. Summary of Verbs with a Perfect like Verbs 

in -/xi. 

Besides the two verbs above, the following have this form of the Perfect : — 
1. yiyuopai, to become, rEI\AA (stem TA) : Perf. (Sing, y4yova, -as, -e), 767a 
fxeu, y4yaT€, y4yddcri(v), Inf. yey dfj.ev (Epic), Part. ytyds, yey ucra, yzycas, Gen 
7«7«tos. 

•2. fialva, to go, Perf. fiefirjKa, BEBAA: PI. jSe/Ja^ej/, -aTe, -a(ri(v), third Pers. 
PI. Subj. ipfcPa<ri(v) (PL Phaedr. 225, e), Inf. 0e0&vcu, Part, fe&ds (X. Hell. 
7. 2, 3), Pe/3v?a (fcPaxra, PI. Phaedr. 254, b), fc&ws, Gen. fc&coTos] Plup. 404- 
fiafxev, -ut€, -daav. These abridged forms are almost wholly poetic and dia- 
lectic (§ 230). 

3. frj/^OTccu, to die, r4&vnKa, TE0NAA : PI. r4Svaixev, Ted-pare, T&va<n{v), Imp. 
t4&vc&i, Part. t&vt\k<Jos, T&vnnv?a, TefrvrjKSs, or re&i/eds, T&v€w<ra (Lys. and 
Dem.), re&veos, Inf. r&vavai (Aesch. T&vavai from T&va4vai) ; Plup. 4t4&v$.- 
<rav, Opt. r&valriv. 

4. TAAX2, to bear, Perf. re'rArj/ca, TETAAA: Dual t4t\o.tou, PI. TeVAdjUej', 
TeTAdre, TeTAatn^), Imp. TerAd&i, -arw, etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. rerKavai, but 
Part. TeTA77/cwy; Plup. eVe'rAd^ey, ererAdTe, eTeVAd<rcw, Dual 4t4t\S.tov, ereTAtt- 
ttjc, Opt. TeTAai7jy. 

5. Here belong the two participles of, 

PiPpdxrKw (§ 161, 6), to ectf, Perf. jSe'/fyw/ca, poetic fiefipdes, Gen. -wroy. 
7ri7TTw (§ 163, 3), to fall, ir4irTU)Ka, Att. Poet. •7re7rTc6s (comp. § 230). 

Remark. There are also found, in imitation of Homer, /ce'/cp 07/^ ey and 
the Imp. K4xpax&h from the Perf. MKpaya (from Kpafa, £0 cry ow£) ; also the 
Imp. ireVeto-di, from ir4iro£ra, to trust (from 7retd-co, to persuade), is found in 
Aesch. Eum. 602. See § 230. The Perfects olZa and eot/ca require a distinct 
consideration. 



§ 195. Ot8a and eoua. 

1. OT8a, Perf. from 'EIAft (second Aor. cTdov, I saw, Inf. I8e?y, videre), 
properly I have seen, hence / know; for the syllable ol, see § 140, 4; for the 
change of 8 into <r in ?(rTor, etc., see § 17, 5; for the change of 5 into a in 
f<r/4ey, see § 19, 1. Its inflection is as follows: — 



232 



OtSa AND eoi/ca. 



[* 196, 



PERFECT. 



Ind. 


S. 


1. 
2. 
3. 


D 


2 


3. 




P 


1. 

2. 
3. 



olSa Subj. et5<£ Imp. 

oTo-^o 1 €i'5^y fir&t Inf. 

oT8e(j/) €t5^ ftrrw etSeVcu 

fcTTOJ/, ftTTOV ej57}TOJ>, -7JT0V 3fcT0J>, IffTWV 

fofxev elSHfiev Part. 

2f(TT6 etSJJTe i'crTe etScos, -uto, -6s 

t(ra<Ti{v) et5«(Tt(>/) i'o'T&xraj' 



PLUPERFECT. 



Ind. S. 1. 
2. 
3. 



fieiv 2 Dual PI. rfte^ej/ (Poet, rjcfxev) 

rjSeis and -et(r3-a 1 ij'SeiTOU, Poet, fjcrrov TJSeire ( " 77(rre) 
pSet(j/) ^SeiTrjv, " fj<TTT]V fjdecrav ( " yffav) 



Opt. Sing. etSefqp, -rjy, -17; Dual eiSenjToi/, -fjrr]u; PL eldeirj/xeu (seldom etSet- 

/*€»/), etSenjre, et5e?ej/ (seldom etSetTjcraf). 
Fut. tfyofiai (Ion. et'SrVcw, though Isocr. o-uvetSirjo-e's)) / shall know or 

experience ; sometimes also eldevai, el8w, elSelrju, have the same 

meaning. — Verbal Adj. \<niov. 



~2vvoida, compounded of olda, I am conscious, Inf. cvveidhai, Imp. ffvi/iafri, 
Subj. <rvv€i8w, etc. 



1 $ 116, 2, oldas scarcely occurs in Attic. 

2 First person J7&77, second ^Siicr&a, third $$77, are considered as Attic 
forms ; yet rjSeiv, 'fjdeio-fra (also'^Seis), rjfet, are found in the best Attic wri- 
ters. Otda/xev, oiSare, oftJacn(i'), instead of Xcrfieu, etc., are rarely found in 
the Attic writers. Comp. X. An. 2. 4, 6. Antiph. p. 115, 3. PI. Ale. 141, 
e. Eur. Suppl. 1047. X. O. 20, 14. oldas occurs in X. C. 4. 6, 6. The 
shortening of the et into e in the Dual and PI. of the Opt. fjSefxev, is poetic 
and rare. S. 0. T. 1232. 



Remark. The Perfect, I have known, is expressed by tyi/cana, and the Aorist, 
1 knew, by Zyvcav. 

2. "Eoik a, lam like, I seem, Perf. of 'EIKft (of this the Impf. d/ce, is used in 
Homer), poetic eT/ca instead of eouca, eluevcu instead of ioitcivai, and (instead 
of ioiKa<Ti) the anomalous Att. third Pers. PI. ei£a<n, even in prose (Plat.), Part. 
ioiKcas, in the Attic writers only in the sense of like ; Att. eludes and et/ceVcu 
(instead of ioiicds, ioiicevai) commonly in the dramatists, only in the sense of 
probable, likely, right; hence especially in the neuter cikSs, as ws ehSs, as is 
natural; Plup. Zyueiv (§ 122, 5), Fut. e^co (Ar.). 

Here belongs the abridged form eoiy^ey, among the Tragedians, instead of 
6of/co/A6</ ; comp. "tffuev. The poetic Mid. forms tf'i£cu (Eur. Ale. 1065), second 
Pers. Sing. Perf., and %ikto, third Pers. Sing. Plup., are constructed according 
to the same analogy. 

§ 196. III. Present and Imperfect. 

There are also some Present and Imperfect forms, mostly in the Epic dialect, 
which, according to the analogy of verbs in -/xt, take the personal-endings 
without the mode-vowel. See § 230, under avvoo, rauvw, epuw, ffevcn, e8«, <pepw • 
oluai (§ 166, 24), of the Common language, belongs here. 



4 197.] DEPONENT PASSIVES. 233 

$ 197. Summary of the Deponent Passives 
102, 2, 3). 

"Aya/xai, to wonder, dvvafjai, to be able, Kpefiaiiai, to hang, 

alSeo/xai, to reverence, dvsapeo-Teofjai, to be dissat- XoiSopeofiai, to revile, 

aKaofxai, to wander, isfied, fiaivofiai, to be mad, 

aiuWdoficu, to contend, evavTi6ofiai, to resist, fieTafxeAofxai, to regret, 

avrioofiai (Poet.) adversor, evdvjj.eofj.ai, to lay to heart, fj.vffdTTOfj.ai, to loathe, 
airovoeofiai, to be distracted, evvoeofxai, to consider, vefJ.ecrdofj.cu (Poet.), to ba 

airopeofxau, to be perplexed, eirifxeKofxai and -eofiai, to justly indignant, 
apMTTOKpaTeofxai, to have an take care, ofofxai, to suppose, 

aristocracy, e-Kivoeofiai, to reflect upon, oKiyapxeofiai, to have an 

apuiofiai, to refuse iirlffTafxai, to know, oligarchy, 

dx^ofiai, to be displeased, epafxai (Poet.), to love, ireipdofxai, to try, 

fiovAofjai, to icish, evdvfj.eofj.ai, to be happy, Trpodvfj.eofj.ai, to desire, 

fipvxdofjai, to roar, evAafieo/xai, to be cautious, irpovoeofiai, to foresee, 

Seofxai, to want, ewo/xeofiai, bonis legibus crefiofiai, to reverence (Aor. 

depKo/xai (Poet.), to see, utor, io-ecpdrjv, PI. Phaedr. 

HrffioKpaTeofiai, to have a eviropiofiai, to be opulent, 254, b). 

democracy, rido/xai, to rejoice, <piXoTiixeofxai, to be ambi' 

ZiaKeyofxai, to converse, depofjai (Poet.), to become tious, 
tiiavoeofiai, to think, hot, vrroTorreofiai, to conjecture. 

Remark 1. The Aor. of several verbs have a Mid. as well as a Pass, form, 
e. g. av\i(o/xai, to lodge; XoiSopeo/mai, to revile; bpeyofiai, to strive after; irpayfxa' 
Tevofjai, to carry on business (Pass, rarer); <pi\o<ppoveofiai, to treat kindly. Also 
several of the above verbs belong here, yet they more seldom have a middle 
Aorist, e. g. ayafnai, Aor. Mid. in Dem. aldeo/xai, see § 166, 1, afiiKkdofjai, Aor. 
Mid. in later writers, apveofjai in Herod. Aesch. and in later writers, Sta\eyo/j.ai 
in non-Attic writers, iirivoeofxai in later writers, \oi8opeo/xai, Aor. Mid. in Isae. 
6, 59, ireipdofiai often in Thu., irpovoeofxai, Eur. Hipp. 683. Paus. 4. 20, 1. <pi\o- 
Tifxeofiai in Isoc. and Aristid. — Several of the above list of verbs have a mid- 
dle as well as a Passive form in the Put. : alSeo/xai, § 166, 1, oi-xdofjai, § 166, 4. 
SiaAeyofiai, to converse with, StaXe^o/xai and rarer 5ia\exdi]crofiai, Siavoeofiai, to 
think, iTTifiehofiai, § 166, 21. Trpodvfj.eofj.ai, to desire, Trpodv/irjo-ofiai and rarer Trpodv- 
fn]di](TOfiai. Both rjdo/j.ai, to rejoice, and the poetic epa/xai, to love, have a passive 
form for their Fut.: 7]<xdi)<T0fiai, epaad-i\o-ofiai, § 179, 4. 

Rem. 2. All the other Deponents are Middle Deponents, or are used only 
in the Pres. and Impf. 

Rem. 3. Among the Deponent Passives, are very many Active verbs, which 
in the Mid. express a reflexive or intransitive action, but have a Passive form 
for their Aorist ; on the contrary, a Middle form for their Future, e. g. <po/3eoo, 
terreo, to terrify ; tyofindrivai and (po^aeadai, timere, to fear. Here belong all 
verbs in -aiueiv and -vveiv, derived from substantives and adjectives, almost 
all in -ovv, and most in -i£eiv, c. g. exxppaiveiv, to gladden, eixppawdrjvai, eixppa- 
velo-dai, and evcppavdrjcreo-dai, to be joyful, to be happy ; Treiraiveiv, to make ripe, 
ire-navdrivai, TreTTavelcdai, maturescere, to ripen; alaxvveiv, to shame, alo~xwdi\vai, 
aia-xweladai (rarer alcrxovdr\o-eadai), to feel shame ; eXaTTOvv, to make less, e'Aar- 
Tw'&rivai, eWaTTaxreadai, to be inferior, to be conquered ; x°*-°u v > io make angry, 
XoXwdiji/ai, x°^ ' ea '& aL i succensere, to be angry; fxa\aKi(eiv, to make effeminate, 
fxaKaKiadrii/aL (rarer naKanio-aadai), naKaKieladai, to make one's self effeminate, to 

20* 



234 



ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE. 



[§ 19a 



be effeminate ; bpyifap, to make angry, bpyi(r&rjpai, bpyieia&ai, and bpyiorfrfio-eafrat, 
succensere, to be angry ; there are very many others also, of which only those 
most in use will be mentioned here : — 

'kyeip (from apdysip, come, avax^vai and avayayza&ai, signifying to be carried 
to sea, in mare provehi, but Flit. apd£ear&ai), aydpeip, aypvpcu, a&poi£eip, alcrxvpeip, 
aviav, cupzip, aWarreip ( oAAay^cro/tai, often also aWd!;€(r&ai), ap/j.6£eip, aaxoAe7p, 
av^dpeip, acpavifav; — fiaAAeip ; — Sairapap, diairap ; — £&l£eip, iireiyeiv (ijveix- 
&r]p), eariap, euco%eiV ; — 7]ttS.p (F. 7)TT7)&ri<rouai and rarer ■^TT7?cro / uai) ; — ISpveip; 
— Kipe7p, kAipsip, Koip.a.v, KOfjiifav (KOfiur&rjpcu, to travel, but K.op.i(raa&ai, sibi recti' 
perare, to recover for one's self), tcplveiv, KvAipdeip; — \4yeip, Adireip, Aveip, 
Avire7p ; — /j.e&vffKeiv, fiiypvpai, fJUfivfjO'Kzu' ; — bptyeiv {bp^x^wai, an d rarer 
6p4£a(r&ai), 6pp.ap, ox*7p ; — irei&eiv (Fut. ireicro(j.ai, I will obey, but Treicr&Tjao/Aai, I 
will be persuaded), ivqypvpai, irAavav, ttA.4k61p, 7rh'f]TTeip, iroAiTeveip (also itoAit*v~ 
cracr&ai), iroyeueiv; — prjypvpai, pwpvvvoa; — aeieip, cr^ireip {o~airr\pai, aairrjaear^aA), 
o-KeSavvvvai, crirav, tnretpav, aireipeip, creWeiv (araXrjpai, CTa\T}(T€(r§a.i), crp4<psiv 
(irrpaxpiivatf (TTpa(pr)crecr&ai), acpaWeiv (<r<paAr)pai, a(pa\7}(re<r&cu, seldom acpaAzlcr- 
&ai), <er<i>£eip (ffu&rjvcu, to save one's self, but (rcctrao'S-cu, to save for one's self, sibi 
servare) ; — rapdrreip, r4pireip, Tp4irtip (Tpairrjucu, to turn one's self to turn, rpfyacr- 
&cu, to put to flight), rp4<p€iv, — <paiveiv (<pavr)vai, (pavfja-ea^ai and <pave?ofrcu, to 
appear, but tpav&rjvai, to be shown), (paprd^eip (<papTaafrf](reafrai), <p4ptip (eVex&rj- 
pai, oXaecrScu and ivex&'h (re<T & a h rarer oicr^ffofxai), (p&elpeiv (<p&aprjpcu, (p^ap-fjcea- 
3tu [cp&epeTa&ai, Ion. and poet.], <pofiG?v ((po&r)(re<r&ai and 4>o/3r)S7](reo-&cu) ; — ij/eu- 
5<=lp (xj/eva^Tivai, ipevo-frf)(rop:ai, to deceive one's self, be deceived, but if/evaea^ai, i/>eu- 
o~axr&a.i, to lie) ; — X^ v * 



$ 198. Summary 



"Aide* (4'8&>), to sing, 
clkovco, to hear, 
a\a\d(a), to shout, 
ajj-aprdpoo, to miss, 
enraprdeo, to meet, 
bvnoXava, to enjoy, 
apirdfa, to seize, 
(3a8l&, to go, 
Paha, to go, 
BiSca, to live, 
(3\4ttci), to see, 
Bodco, to cry out, 
ye Ada, to laugh, 
yt\pd(TK<a, to grow old, 



yiypoxSKtti 



to know 



daKPCti, to bite, 
dap&dpw, to 
Setcrat, to fear, 
Sxairaw, to live, 
ZibpdcKu, to run away, 
SidcKca, to pursue, 
eyKWjxidfy, to praise, 



of the Active Ver 
Middle Future, § 

ctjuf, to be, 
iiraipeoo, to praise, 
i<r&ia>, to eat, 
bavfjidfy, to wonder, 
&e«, to run, 

Srnpdca, fr-npevw, to hunt, 
&iyydpa), to touch, 
frvfiffKw, to die, 
frpaxTKoo, to leap, 
Kafipca, to labor, 
KAaleo, to weep, 
K\4irT(a, to steal, 
KUfJidfy, to revel, 
Xayxdpo), to obtain, 
KaixBapw, to take, 
XiXP-dco, to lick, 
ixap&dp(a, to ham, 
v4co, to swim, 
pevco, to nod, 
olSa, to know, 
olp<&£a), to lament, 
b\o\vfa, to howl, 



bs most in use ivith 
154, 1. 

op.pvpu, to swear, 

bpdoo, to see, 

ovp4ca, urinam redere, 

iraify, to sport, 

ird<rx&, to suffer 

irrjddco, to leap, 

iripa), to drink, 

Triirro}, to fall, 

ir\4w, to sail, 

irv4(a, to blow (but crv/A 

irvevffw), 
irviya, to strangle, 
iro&4w, to desire, 
nrposKvv4(a, to reverence, 
p4co, to flow, 
po<p4ca, to gulp down, 
<riydb), to be silent, 
ffiwvduj to be silent, 
VKdoTTTw, to mock, 
trirovMCfi), to be zealous, 
<TvpiTTu), to whistle, etc., 
tiktu), to produce, 



$ 199.] PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 235 

rpexco, to run, rw&dfa, to rail at, x^ ffKW i to 9 a P e > 

rpwyco, to gnaw, <pevyco, to flee, X^C w j to ease one ' s se lfi 

ruyxafco, to obtain, <p&dvca, to come before, x«pe<w, to contain. 

Remark. Some have both the Active and Middle form for the Future ; the 
Middle, however, is preferred, e. g. a'5a> (aarea non-Attic), ap-rdfa, fiioco, ynpd- 
(o7c)w, j8Ae7rw, Siw/foj, eyftrw^ia^y, iircuveco, fravfidfa, k\€tttu), pocpeoo, <rK(t>TTT0o, 
TiKTCd, x a P^ a ' — ®ilpd(ti, S-npevco, Ko\dfa are also used with the middle form. 
The following compounds of x a P* M have an Active and Middle form in the 
Fut. : O7ro-, crvy- irposx^p^o), but am- and irpox^peco have only the Active form. 



CHAPTER VII. 

$ 199. Prepositions and Conjunctions. 

Besides the Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Numeral, 
Adverb, and Verb, there are also the two following parts of 
speech, viz. Prepositions and Conjunctions. On the forms of 
these nothing need be said ; hence these parts of speech are 
treated in the Syntax, so far as it is necessary. 



PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS 



PARTICULARLY OF THE EPIC DIALECT. 



A. ORTHOGRAPHY. 

$ 200. Digamma, or Labial Breathing F. 

1. The Greek language had originally, in addition to the Spiritus Asper ( ' ) 
and the Lingual Breathing <r, a Labial Breathing, 1 the sound of which corre- 
sponds nearly to the ~Eng.f or the Latin v. In accordance with its form (F), 
which is like one Gamma standing upon another, it is named Digamma (double 
Gamma) ; and as the iEolians retained it longer than the other Grecian tribes, 
it is called the iEolic Digamma. It has the sixth place in the alphabet, namely, 
between e and £ and is named Bad. Comp. §§ 26, 1 and 25, 2. 

2. This character disappeared very early ; but its sound was in some cases 
changed, in some of the dialects, into the smooth Labial j8, e. g. fila, vis, Fls 
(later Xs) ; in other instances, it was softened into the vowel v, and, after other 
vowels, coalesced with these, and formed the diphthongs av, ev, yv, ov, a>v, e. g. 
vavs (vdFs). navis, x^ w ix^ 03 ) -2Eol., fiovs (&6Fs), bovs, bos, Gen. bovis; in 
others still, it was changed into a mere gentle breathing, which at the beginning 
of a word is denoted by the Spiritus Lenis, but in the middle of a word and 
before p is not indicated, e. g. Fis, vis, "s ; oFis, ovis, ois ; elhiw, volvo ; Fpodov, 
p6Sou, etc. ; it was also changed, in the beginning of some words, into a sharp 
breathing, which is denoted by the Spiritus Asper, e. g. eo-n-epos, vesperus; evi/vfii, 
vestio. 

3. In the Homeric poems, no character denoting the breathing F any longer 
exists ; but it is very clear that, in the time of Homer, many words were 
sounded with the Digamma, e. g. &yyv/xi, 6^a|, avdffo-w, avSdva, cap, ver, the 

1 " The Vau, or Digamma, an important agent in early Greek orthography, 
less, however, a principal than a subsidiary letter, retained much of its previous 
character of vowel-consonant, or, in the technical language of the Oriental 
schools, of quicscible letter. It was chiefly used as a liquid guttural, or aspirate, 
somewhat akin to our English wh, to impart emphasis to the initial vowel of 
words, and possessed the power, with certain limitations, of creating metrical po- 
sition. But these vague and indefinite properties, were not such as to entitle it to 
a regular or habitual place in the written texts of the popular Epic poems. It 
was retained by the Boeotian states in monumental inscriptions till the 145 
Olympiad." — Mure's Hist, of the Lamjuafje and Literature of Greece, vol. i, p. 85 ; 
vol. iii, p. 513. 



238 DIALECTS. [§ 201 

forms of 'EI Aft, video ; Zouca, efrcotn, viginti; et/xa, vestis ; elireip (comp. vocare), 
ckyjKos, tvvv/Mj vestio ; kos and Us, suus ; ov, sui ; of, sibi ; eWepos, vesperus ; oIkos, 
vicus; oivos, vinum, etc. ; this is obvious from the following facts : (a) words that 
have the Digamma cause no Hiatus, e. g. irpb e&ej/ (= irpb Fe&ev) ; — (b) hence 
also a vowel capable of Elision, when placed before a digammated word, cannot 
be elided, e. g. \i-nev 54 e (= 5e Fe), airb eo (= curb F4o) ; — (c) the paragogic v 
(§ 15) is wanting before words which have the Digamma, e. g. Sale ol ( = Scue 
Foi); — (d) ov instead of ovk or ovx, is found before the Digamma, e. g. eVel 
oij e&ev iarri %epetW (= ov Fc&cv) ; — (e) in compounds, neither Elision 
nor Crasis occurs, e. g. diaenreixev (= SiaFenrefxev), aayf)S (= aFayfjs) ; — (f ) a 
digammated word with a preceding consonant, makes a vowel long by position, 
e. g. yap 4&ej/ (where the p and the Digamma belonging to efrev make a long 
by position) ; — (g) long vowels are not shortened before words that have the 
Digamma, e. g. /eoAAe't re <rTi\$a>v /car elfxao-i (= /cai Felfxao-i), II. y, 392. 



$ 201. Interchange of Vowels. 

Preliminary Remark. The dialectic peculiarities in the change of vow- 
els, as well as of consonants, never extend to all the words of a dialect, but are 
uniformly limited to certain words and forms. 

1. The three vowels, e, 0, d, called (§ 140, 2 and 4) variable vowels {rp4<po}, 
rerpocpa, iTpd<pr)v) undergo various changes in the dialects : — 

a is used instead [of e (Ion.), e. g. rpdirw, rdixvca, fxiya&os instead of rpdirco, 
refMvo}, fxeye&os ; so also Doric rpdcpco, ctciapSs, "Apra/xis instead of Tpzcpct), 
ffKiepos, "Aprefiis ; and in several particles, e. g. o/cct, r6na, irona. instead of 
frre, r6re, irSre. 

€ instead of a in the Ionic dialect, when followed by a Liquid, e. g. recrtrepes, 
ipo-r\v, ve\os, flepe&pov (Ion.) instead of reWapes, four, &po~r]v, a male, va\os, 
glass, (Sdpa&pov, gulf; also in many verbs in -<xo>, e. g. (poireco, opeca (Ion.), 
instead of <poiTaa>, opdw. 

e instead of (Doric), e. g. efto*e(i4)KovTa instead of e/35o/^/co»/Ta. 

a instead of o (Ion.), in appcadelv instead of bppwSuv. 

2. The following cases are to be noted in addition : — 

The long a is a special peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in par- 
ticular, the so-called Plateiasm (i. e. the broad pronunciation) of the Dorians, 
e. g. afitpa, Kairos, advs, Aaixdrr]p. The older and the later Ionic have softened 
this grave d into i\. The Attic uses both the Doric o and the softened 17, (§ 16, 
7). Comp. Dor. afiepa, Ion. fjfiepa, Att. rjfxepa (with the Ion. 17 and Doric a) ; Ion. 
<ro<plt\ y Dor. and Att. o*o<pia ; Ion. &d>pT}£, Dor. and Att. &cf>pa£. — So, also, in 
the diphthong av, among the Ionic writers a is changed into 7] : vtjvs, yprjvs, 
instead of vavs, ypavs; likewise in the diphthong at in the Dat. PI. of the first 
Dec, ys and yen (Ion.) instead of ais and aicri. — Still, in certain words, the 
Dorians retain the tj, as the Ionians do the d. 

97 instead of « ( JEolic and Doric), e. g. o-ap^ov, tt}vos, btfja, so the Infinitive^ 
e. g. \afirjv, KaXrju, instead of crrj/xeTov, K€?uos, 6j-e7a, \afie7v, Ka\e?v. 

ax instead of « (Doric), e. g. <pfralpu instead of Qfrelpu). 



$$ 202, 203.] CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 239 

v often instead of o (JEolic), e. g. <rv<p6s, ow^ia instead of <ro<pos, ovoiia, so in 
Homer dyvpis instead of ayopd ; and in the Common language, evdt/v/j.os, iravi]* 
yvpis, etc. 

cd instead of ov before a Liquid and <r, and at the end of a word in the termi- 
nations of the second Dec., and in the stem of several words; — oi instead of 
ov before the breathing a in the third Pers. PI. oicn{v) instead of ov<ri(v), and in 
the participle ending -oicra instead of -ovcra, and in Molcra and 'Ap&oio-a instead 
of MoScra, and 'Ape^ovcro ; the above use of o> instead of ov is Dor., yet not in 
Pindar ; the use of ot instead of ov is iEolic and Pindaric, e. g. 

Tw icpdfio) instead of rod icprifiov, 2w (also Ion. and Pindar.) instead of ovv, 
8u\os instead of SovXos, wpav6s instead of ovpavos, fia>s instead of fiovs ; — tvtt- 
roiai(v) instead of rvirrovo-i{v), rinrToiaa instead of Tinrrovaa, <pi\4oio~i[v) instead 
of <pi\ov<riv, ixoi<ra instead of %x ovffa ' 

Some other instances will be considered below, in treating of the Declensions 
and Conjugations. 

$ 202. Interchange of Consonants. 

The change of consonants in the different dialects is according to the two 
following laws : — 

Coordinate consonants (§ 5, Eem. 4) interchange with each other; and cog- 
nate consonants (§ 5, Rem. 1) interchange with each other. 



$ 203. I. Interchange of coordinate Consonants. 

A. The Mutes : (a) The smooth Mutes it and k. The interrogative and 
indefinite pronouns, ir&s, -n-Sre, tto7os, 6iro7os, etc., are in Ion. kws, k6t€, etc. 

k instead of r : ir6re, -kot4, tre, r6re, &ttot€, aXXore, are in Dor. ttSko, iroKa, 
b"Ka, t6ko, 6tt6ku (Poet. cW/cKa), iiAAo/ca ; so oko. (shortened from oicaKa) instead 
of grew. On the contrary, r instead of k : rrivos Dor. instead of kuvos, hceutos. 

it instead of t (iEol. and Dor.), e. g. ire/zire instead of irei/rc. 

(b) The Medials $ and y, e. g. fik-nxuv ( Att.), penny-royal, is in Ion. yXrjx^^ 
fi\e<papov, eye-lash, is y\4<papov. 

8 instead of 7 (Dor.), e. g. da instead of 77? ; hence iynyAyr-np instead of 
Yt]}d\vr]p. 
5 instead of £ (Dor.), oSexSs instead of 6fSe\6s. 

(c) The Aspirates 3- and <£, c. g. fri'ip, beast, &\av, &\lpeiv, ov&ap, udder, are 
in Dor. <p-fip, <p\av, <p\i&ziv, oZ<pap (uber) ; (p-t]p and <p\iflziv also in Homer. 

• x instead of &: ftfym is in Dor. ix^Oj an(1 opv&os, etc. (from tipvis) is tipvixos, 
etc. 

B. The Liquids: (a) The Liquids interchange with one another: v instead 
of \ before h and r, often in the Dor. dialect, e. g. fybov, $4uri<rros (Dor.) 
instead of ^A&oi/, PcKticttos; also (Ion. and Att. ) -rrKev/iuu, ptilmo, instead of 
irvfvfxwu, \lrpov instead of vlrpou. 

p is rarely used instead of A, e. g. Kplfiauos, oven, Att., instead of Khifiavos. 



240 DIALECTS. [$ 204. 

(b) The Liquid p and the breathing <r in the later and often in the middle 
Attic : pp instead of the Ion. and old Attic p<r, e. g. &pa-ijv and tppt\v, a male ; 
Kopfft] and Kofipt], back; but pp remains where the augment is used, and in com- 
position. 

§204. II. Interchange of cognate Consonants. 

(a) The Palatals y and /c, e. g. Kvcupevs, fuller, is preferred by the Att. writers 
to the other form, yva<p evs. 

k and x in SeKo/xai (Ion.) instead of Sexo/zat. 

(b) The Linguals & and t, e. g. cfiris (Ion. and Epic) instead of av&is, again. 

Remark. In some words a change of the aspiration, from one syllable to 
the other, occurs, e.g. K^cay (Ion.) instead of x iT & v > iv&avTa, hie, iv&evrev, hinc, 
(Ion.), instead of ivTavSa, ivrevfrev; Kv&p-ri (Ion.) instead of xvrpa, pot. 

a and t, e. g. TloTe&av, %-kstov, etKart, tv, t£ (Dor.) instead of Uoffeiouv, IW- 
crov, eftcotn, (rv, ce. The Attic forms tcvtXov, beet; Tr\\ia, sieve (from (rySru), 
rvpfir] (from avpu), turba ; vr)p.spov, to-day, and ttjtcs, this year (the two last only 
in the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers ffrj/xepoy, a^Tes), 
are in the Ion. and Common language aevrXov, arjXla, ffvpfir]. 

ffff and tt. Instead of ffff, employed in the older and the later Ionic, in old 
Attic and in most other dialects, — the new and often also the middle Attic 
in most words uses tt, e. g. rdcrffu, yXwffffa ; but Att. rdrrco, yXurra. (But 
when era- results from composition, it remains unchanged.) Yet the Ionic 
forms prevail, not only in the older Attic writers, but are also found in other 
authors, some words always having ffff, e. g. irdffffa>, to scatter; irr^ffffco, to 
crouch; fiver cos, a deep; irrlffffo}, to husk; irTVffffu, to fold; fipdffffu, to shake; 
irruffffb), to cower; ip4ffffca [ipirroi is rejected), etc. 

<r and v in the Dor. verb-ending -/xes, e. g. rvTrofxes (instead of the common 
form Tvirro/xeu, see § 220, 6) ; also ales Dor. instead of aUv. 

0-5 instead of £ ( JEol., so also in Theoc.) but only in the middle of words, e. g. 
fxeXiffSerai, fjLeffdcw instead of /ieAifcrai, fj.4fav or p.eifav, not at the beginning of 
words, nor if 3- precedes, or <r follows, e. g. fj.ox&K OVTl i e7rt^3-v^bi<ro. 

£and tt, ffvpiTTtiv, apfj.6TT€iu (Att.) instead of avpi^iv, app-o^eiv. 
Here belong : — 

£ and <r and ffff, e. g. \vv (Epic and old Attic) instead of ffvv ; Zt\6s and Tpi£6s 
(Ion.) instead of Siffffos, TpiffcrSs ; K\d£ Dor. instead of kKcus (k\€?s) ; even in the 
Eut. and Aorists, the Dorians, and also Homer, in several verbs use | instead 
of ff, see § 223, 5. 

(c) The Labials <p and it, — the first Att., the last Ion., — e. g. a.ff<pdpayos Att., 
aarirdpayos Ion. So iEol. and Dor. tt, instead of <p, e. g. afiirl ( JEol.) instead of 
ajupi ; hence in the Common language, apvirex^v, etc. 

fi and 7r, e. g. Trsdd [Mo\. and Dor.) instead of /xeTd. 

(d) The double consonants £ and ty, and the two single consonants of which 
they are formed, though transposed, in the JEol. dialect, e. g. ffKevos, <rird\is 
instead of £eVos, tyaxts, yet only at the beginning of a word. So <r<p and y, 
e. g. i/>€ Dor. instead of <r<pL 



$ 205. j CONTRACTION AND DIAERESIS. 24] 

Change of the Vowels. 

§ 205. Contraction. — Diaeresis. 

1. In the Dialects, the following contractions, which differ from those men- 
tioned in § 9, are to be noted: eo and eov, sometimes also oo and oe are con- 
tracted into eu in Dor. and Ion. — not, as commonly, into ov ; so ao, aov, and 
oov (Ion.) are contracted into eu — not, as usual, into a and ov, e. g. <pi\evfrom 
(pi\eov = <pi\ov ; TrAetVey from ir\4oi/es ; TrXTipevvres from Tr\r\p6ovTes = irXrjpovv 
res ; iSiKatev from iSinaloe = iSiKaiov ; elpcorevv from elpcaraou = elpdorccv ; 7c- 
Aeuo-a from ye\dovcra = yeXSxra 5 Si/ccueGci from Si/coiooDcrt = Si/caioucn. But 
commonly the Dorians contracted oe into co (instead of ov), e. g. rvpoevra = 
rvpuvra instead of rvpovvra, piyoov instead of piyovv. 

2. Ao, aov, and aw are contracted in the Doric dialect into d (instead of &>), 
namely, in verbs in -da, in genitives in -ao and -dW, in substantives in -dav, 
Gen. -dovos, and in proper names in -Xaos, e. g. <£i/<rai/Tes, x«^«o-'j ye~kav from 
<pvcrdouTts, x a ^ ovor h ye\dw, — tclv Kopav from rdajj/ Kopdwv = rwv Kopwv;—' 
Tloaeidav, -auos, Att. Hoo~ei8a>v, -uvos] — MeveKas, 5 Ap/ceo*tAds, Gen. -a, D&t. -a. 

3. Ae and act are contracted in the Dor. (but not in Pindar) into 77 and p 
instead of d and a, in verbs, e. g. i<j>oiri], <poirfjs instead of icpoira, <poiras. See 
§222,111.(1). 

4. The Attic dialect is the opposite of the other dialects, particularly of the 
later Ionic ; since, while the other dialects often avoid contraction, and the later 
Ionic commonly, the Attic almost always admits it. The tendency of the later 
Ionic towards uncontracted syllables is so great, that it even resolves the long 
sounds (which are never resolved in the other dialects) into their simple ele- 
ments, e. g. <pi\hai instead of <pi\rj, which had been contracted from <pi\£ri. 
Epic poetry often uses, indiscriminately, contracted and uncontracted forms, 
according to the necessity of the verse, e. g. atucav and ancov. 

5. On the contrary, it is a special peculiarity of the Ionic dialect, that while 
it delights to avoid contractions, it still, in particular cases, admits them, where 
the Attic dialect does not, e. g. Ip6s (r), Ipevs, Ipevo-aoSai Ion., instead of lepos, 
etc., and especially the contraction of ot\ into a>, particularly in the verbs &ody 
and votiv, e. g. £/3coo-a, %vu>cra (ayi/c&o-ao-Kev Horn, from ayvoiw), ivvzvwKa instead 
of i&oriara, iv6r]cra, Ivvzvo'-qKa ; so oyZ&KOvra in Homer, instead of oyZo^KOVTa. 

6. The opposite of contraction is Diaeresis (8ialpe<ris), the separation of a 
diphthong into its vowels. Diaeresis is specially used in the iEol. dialect. 
The use of it in Homer, also, is not rare ; most frequently, in such words as 
teparate the two vowels by means of the Digamma, namely, at in 7rdi's ; av in 
t'vTfii], breath (from &Frifii)', av<rTa\4os, dirty; ei" in e"t'a7ca>, to make like, ei'/cTO, 
tiKJov, i'iKTriv: ei) very often in the adverb iili (= eS, well), e. g. 0) Kpivas, 4'vktI- 
fievos ; when p, v, p, or a follows ei) in compounds then they are doubled, e. g. 
4vfifj.e\ir}s, Ivvvryros, ivftp'oos, ivao~e\p.os ', o'i in vis (6Fis, ovis), 6'iofj.aL (comp. opi- 
nor), 6'io-r6s, &i'£a, tii^av (from otyvvfii). 

21 



242 DIALECTS. [$ 206. 



$ 206. Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Paragogic, 
Hiatus. 

1. In particular instances the Dialects differ from the laws of Crasis stated in 
§§10 and 11 ; namely, in the Ionic dialect and in Pindar and Theoc, the o of 
the Article coalesces with d and forms o>, and with at and forms w, e. g. rb &yaX- 
ua = T&yaA/J.a ] SO t«A^£S, to>i»to, wvb\p, uvdpes, wv&pwiroi, <piro\oi, from rb &Atj- 
fre's, rb ainS, 6 avfjp, oi dudpes^ oi &v&punroi, oi alir6\ot. In Herodot. occur, iapiffros, 
o>vt6s, S>Woi, with the smooth insteao. of the rough breathing (from 6 cipicrros, 
6 avr6s, oi &Woi) j Homer uses Crasis seldom, namely, only in &pio~ros, wvr6s., 
TaAAa, ov(jl6s (instead of 6 i(J.6s), rovvstca, o&Vcko (instead of ov eVewa) 5 Karytio is 
doubtful. 

2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are : r&Kyeos, r&urpa instead of rod &\yeos, 
rep tiu/Tpcp ; so and e = o>, ou and e = 77, e. g. 6 *\cupos = &\a(pos, o e£ = a>£, koI 
€ 'k = k ^k, nal clire = tcrjire, ical idv or f\v — k%v, which last is also Ion. 

3. Ionic writers admit the common Crasis in ov, in the Masc. and Neut. of 
the Art. and in Hrepos, e. g. ovrepos, rovrepov. 

4. The use of Synizesis (§ 12) is very frequent in the Homeric poems: — 

(a) In the middle of words, it is oftenest found in the following combination of 
vowels (the vowels over which the line is placed being pronounced as one 
syllable, whether consisting of two or more vowels) : «a, ea, ecu, eas; co, 
eoi, cov ; €a>, ea> ; e. g. crri&ea, rj/ieas, &sot, xpv&eois, re&vea>re ; much rarer 
in ae, la, lai, it), ir), to, e. g. aeSAeuW, ir6\ias, tt6\ios', 00 only in 
S7800J/; voi only in ZaKpvoiffi; 171 in drjioio, drjicav, b'rjioio'i, tfia] 

(b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels : 77 a, 77 c, 77 77, 

77 et, 77 ov, t] oi\ ei ov] a? a, *a> ov ; the first word is either tf, ^, 8^7, yA\, and 
eVef, or a word with the inflection-endings, 77, a>, e. g. 77, ov, 877 a(pvei6raros, 
U$] &AA01, slXairiVT) r/e yafxos, aafiecrrcp ou8' i/toV. 

5. Elision (§§13 and 14) is found very often in Homer, particularly as fol- 
lows : — 

(a) The a is elided in the PI. Neut. and the Ace. Sing, of the third Dec, 
rarely in the Aor. ending -ca, e. g. aAe^' i(i4 Od. fi, 200 ; commonly in 
the particle &pa: 

(b) The e in e^e, ^e, tre, etc.; in the Voc. of the second Dec, in the Dual of 
the third Dec, in endings of the verb, and in particles, e. g. 8e, re, rore, 
etc. (but never in t8e). 

(c) The t in the Dat. PI. of the third Dec. ; much rarer in the Dat. Sing., 
and only when it could not be mistaken for the Ace, e. g. x°"P € ^e r$ 
tipvidr' 'Odvo'evs, H. k, 277 ; in &/j.fu, v/x/xi, and <r<pi ; in adverbs of place in 
-3-t, except those derived from substantives ; in ettcoo~i ; finally, in all end- 
ings of the verb ; 

(d) The in airS, vir6 (but never in irp6), in hvo, in the Neut. of pronoun* 
(except to'), and in all endings of the verb ; 



§ 207.] LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF TOWELS. 243 

(e) The ai in endings of the verb fiat, rat, crfrai (<rai only in rio* b\iyf)ire\e<av, 
H. o, 245, and ot in the Nom. of the first Dec. in o£e? o&iW, H. A, 272) ; 

(f ) The oi in pot, to me, and in the particle, rot. 

6. The v paragogic (§ 15) is commonly rejected in Ion. prose, e. g. iracr 

7. The Hiatus (§ 8) is admitted by Homer in the following cases : — 

(a) In long vowels or diphthongs either in the Arsis of the verse, e. g. 
avr&e | <y '05u [ tnji" ; or in the Thesis, in which case the long vowel or 
diphthong is considered short, e. g. oXkoi e | <rav ; 

(b) When the vowel does not admit Elision, or but rarely, e. g. iretttii apwev ; 

(c) When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark, e. g. oAA' &va, el 
fxe/xovds ye ; 

(d) In the Fern. Caesura (i. e. the caesura succeeding a short syllable) after 
the first short syllable of the third foot; — as this caesura here divides the 
line into two parts, it is opposed to the close connection which would 
arise from eliding the final vowel, e. g. 

Keif)] ] Se rpv(pd | \eta || a/i \ ecnrero \ X el pl 7ra I X^Vi ^- 7> ^76. 
rwv ot | t£ eye | vovto ]| e | v\ peyd \ poten ye \ ve&Ar), H. 6, 270 ; 

(e) In the metrical Diaeresis, 1 after the first and fourth foot of the verse, e. g. 

eyxet I 'iSofievrjos ayavov AevnaXlSao, II. /*, 117. 

ireLvtyat eir 1 'ArpelS-p * Ayapeiivovi | ovAov "Ovetpou, II. #, 6. Comp. £ 422 ; 

(f ) Where the first word has the apostrophe, e. g. SeVSpe' e&aKkev ; 
fe) Sometimes in proper names ; 

(h) Words, which have the digamma occasion no Hiatus (§ 203, 3), e. g. 
ob | 5e ovs | TtcuSas e | aovcev (= oi/tie Fovs). 

$ 207. Lengthening and Shortening of Vowels. 

1. The following vowels are lengthened: — 

A in Homer is sometimes lengthened into at ; this occurs in aleros, alei, ayal- 
o/j.ai, instead of aerSs, etc. ; so also irapai (also KaTcuPcnal), in the tragedians 
Stat, and analogous to these, inral, instead of irapd, did, far6. 

a into 7} in Homer, in yepeSovrat, Jiyepe&ovTai, tye^eis in the Arsis, conse- 
quently on account of the metre. 

d into ai before a (iEol.) in the Ace. PI. of the first Dec. ; also in fieAcus and 
rdkais instead of LieAas, raAas, tcus instead of ras, naXcus instead of /coa£s ; in 
Pindar, in the first Aor. Act. Part., e. g. rtycus, -cucra instead of -as, -atru ; but 
always iras. 

Av into ui) (Ion.) in rpavpa, &av/j.a and its derivatives : rpdovpa, ^vlicl, 
&av[jLd(a> ; and in pronouns compounded with abr6s into a>v, e, g. kuvrov, <reo>u- 
rov, i/xecavrov instead of eavrov, etc. ; so also rcovrS instead of to.vt6. 

E into ei in the Ion. writers before a Liq. in a number of words, e. g. elveieu 
(also in Attic prose), Keiv6s, (twos, aretvSs, elpcurdca. Homer lengthens e info 

1 Metrical Diaeresis, is where a word and a foot end togcthel . 



244 DIALECTS. [$ 207. 

ei according to the necessities of the verse, in other words, also, which in Ionic 
prose have e, e. g. elv, inreip, irelpas, end, (ppelara (from <ppiap, a well) ; also befora 
vowels in adjectives in -eos, e. g. xP v o~* l <>s ; in substantives and pronouns, e. g. 
a-ireios, 4/u.eio ; in verbs in -e», e. g. reAelco, irvetco, also in elcos instead of eW, 
until; sometimes also in the Augment and Reduplication, e. g. elAr}Aov&a, eiot- 
Kviai, SelSict, SetSe^aTai. 

E into -n (Horn, and Dor.), in the Dec. of substantives in -evs, e. g. ficuriAevs, 
Gen. -Tjos, etc.; further (also Ion.), in adjectives in -eios, e. g. fiaaiA7)'Cos, royal; 
likewise in single words, e. g. kAtj'is, KA-niSos (Ion.), etc., instead of KAels, and 
in very many substantives in a of Dec. I., e. g. aArj^rji'Tj instead of aA^d-eta. 

H sometimes into at (JEol.), e. g. Svaiciao instead of bvho-Kco. 

O into oi (Ion. and Horn.) before a vowel in several words, e. g. irolrj, iroirjeis, 
Xporfi, poi77, etc. ; in the Gen. of the second Dec. in Homer, e. g. &eo?o instead 
of 3-eou, and in (poivios, %opoiTU7ri77, odonrSpiov, ay Koivno'i(v), and j)yvolrio'e(v). 

O is changed into ov (Ion. and Horn.) before a Liq. or Sigma, still only in a 
certain number of words ; and, in the Dor., before a Liq. into g>, e. g. 

ic6pos Ion. tcovpos Dor. Kcopos fx6vos Ion. fiovvos 

fivofia " ovuo/xa " covofxa "OAvfjnros " OvAvfiiros ; 

also in the oblique cases of S6pv and yovv. — But substantives, which have the 
variable vowel o, cannot be thus lengthened, e. g. trovos from irivoiuu, 86/xos from 
S4fia>. 

O into co in Homer, on account of the verse, in Aid>vvo-os, K-nrcbeis, Tpcoxdco, 
irwrdo/Acu (and also tpoxdco, Trordoixai) . 

T into ov often (Dor.), e. g. frovydr-np instead of ^vydr-np. In Homer, in 
tlkriAov&a. 

2. The Epic dialect can resolve contracted syllables, when necessary, 
namely, d into aa, a into aa ; t\ into en, ei-n, 7717 ; <w into oca, coo, coco ; particularly 
in the inflection of verbs, e. g. opdas instead of dpas, Kp-q-nvov instead of Kprjvov, 
Spoco instead of dpco, yeAwovres instead of yeAtovres, rjficbcocra instead of fjficoo'a 
also cpocos instead of (pus, light (from <pdos), and proper names in -cpcov, e. g. 
Arj/xocpocov. 

3. Another mode of lengthening a vowel in the Epic dialect is by resolving 
an original Digamma or a Spiritus Asper into a vowel, e. g. e#/c?7Aos and e/c^Aos 
(F4k7}Aos), ovpos instead of opos, bound; ovAos instead of oAos, ijiAios instead of 
7?Aios ; ei'o-os instead of i<ros ; dAicrcrco instead of eAtWco (comp. volvo), 7)dbs instead 
of eW. In the Ionic, and sometimes in the Epic dialect, the co (contracted 
from ao and aco), is resolved by e, e. g. (Ik4tco) //ceVew instead of licfrao, irvAicoi 
instead of irvAdcov. 

4. The following vowels are shortened : — 

At into before a vowel, often in the iEol. dialect, e. g. apx&os, 'AAk&os 
instead of apxouos, 'AA/caTos ; in Homer, in erapos, kraprj, zTaptfcG&ai. 

Ei into e before liquids (Ion. and in Horn.), in the forms x e P^ s > X € P^ fr° m 
Xeip, hand, so also Att. x 6 ? "^ X € P (r ' l '-> a l so (Ion. and Dor.) before a vowel, in 
Proparoxytones in -eios, and in Properispomena in -e?a ; in Homer, only in a 
few Fern, adjectives in -us, e. g> 



f207.] LENGTHENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 245 

iiriT-fjdeos, -e-q, -gov Ion. instead of -eios coitia instead of wneia from ukvs 
TeAeos, -677, -eov " " -eios fia^eyj " fia&e?a " fia&is 

sbpiri from ebpvs " " -eia 8a<re7j " SaceTo " 5a<ruy ; 

so also in Horn. 'Ep/xm instead of 'Epada] also ei in Ion. is shortened into e, 
when two consonants follow which make the vowel long by position, e. g. 
aTrSde^is instead of a-rroSei^is, /ue^wj' instead of fidfav, Kpiaaav instead of Kpei<r- 
<rav\ finally (Doric) in forms of the verb, e. g. oet'Ses instead of aeiSets. 

Remark 1. In the JEol. dialect, e* before a liquid is very often shortened 
into e, and the Liq. is doubled, e. g. Krevvw, o-ireppw, «TeAAa, instead of Krdvw, 
(Tiretpci), wretA^. 

H is changed into e in Horn, in apyin, apyera, from apy-fts, -r^ros, shining, and 
in the Subj. ending -ere instead of -7jTe ; also -o/xev instead of -cofxev, e. g. effiere, 
fraip-ii^ofxev. 

Oi into often in the Dor. and JEol. dialects, e. g. iroco instead of iroiu. 

Ov into in Horn, in the compounds of irovs, e. g. deAAj7ros, apriiros ; often 
in Theocritus in the Ace. PI. of the second Dec, c. g. rws Avkos instead of robs 
Xvkovs ; also -Sol. )3oAAa instead of fiovX-h ; so too in Horn. fi6\erai, £oAea-&€ 
from fiovXoucu. 

5. On the Ionic- Attic interchange of the vowels, see § 16, 5. 

6. The use of Syncope (§ 16, 8) is frequent in Homer, particularly in forms 
of the verb, as -will be seen below ; he also has riirre instead of TiVore, 7A0KT0- 
<pdyos instead of yaAaKToepdyos. 

7. Apocope (airoKoiT'f]) is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
beginning with a consonant. It is employed by the Epic and Doric poets, 
sometimes also by the Ionic, and in a few single forms even by Attic prose 
writers. It occurs with the prepositions, e. g. avd, Kara, irapd, rarely with air6 
and u7ro, and with the (Epic) conjunction dpa. The accent is then thrown 
back; dv before £, ?r, <p, p, is changed into dp (§ 19, 3), e.g. a/j. £oyto?cn, 
a/xfialveiv, a/j. irekayos, ap <p6vov, o^ueW; the t in ndr is always assimilated 
to the following consonant, except that the corresponding smooth mute stands 
before a rough mute (§ 17, 4), e. g. na8 5vvafj.iv, nair cpdhapa, kclk /ce^aA^y, Kay 
y6w) examples of d-n-6 and \m6 are, a7r7re^et, u/30aAAeii/ (Horn.); examples 
from Attic prose, dpfidrris, dfxfio\ds, X. Cy. 4, 5, 46. 7. 5, 12, dpiruTis. 

Rem. 2. In the concurrence of three consonants, assimilation is omitted, and 
the final consonant of the preposition is rejected, e. g. ad/crave, Ka<rxede, a/xvd- 
cret, instead of /ca/cKTcwe, /caacrxe&e, d/xfj,vd<Tet. 

8. Prothesis (§ 16, 10) occurs in Homer, in aarspoTrh (crTepo-rH]), e&eAa> (&eAa>), 
4ke7vos (kuvos), ipvopai (frvofiai) ; Homer also often resolves the i^into the vowel 
«, namely, i(p<rr}, teSva, e'eucocn, eicros, etnrov, 44\So/xai, iep/xevos. 

9. Sometimes, for the sake of the metre, Homer inserts €, c. g. d5eA0e(k, 
Keve6s, instead of doeA^os, Kevos] so also in the Gen. PI. Fern. oireW, 7rpa>TeW. 
To prevent the accumulation of short syllables, he inserts in several compound 
words an 77 in place of the short vowel, e. g. ravrikeyeos, Z-nr\l5o\os, eirrieTav6s, 
b\tyrjTre\4u), cAewj>7j/3({Aos, instead of ravvK., iirifl., eVteT., oAiyoir., iAacpofldAos* 

21* 



246 DIALECTS. [$ 208. 

An t is inserted in Homer after 01 in Sfiotios instead of tifioios, and in the Dual 
•ouv instead of ~oiv. 

10. The later Ionic, also, sometimes inserts e before a long vowel : (a) in 
some genitives of substantives and Fern, pronouns before &>, and in ovros, rot- 
ovros, and o.vt6s before long inflection-endings, e. g. avtyewv, xw^wv^ e/ceij/eW, 
rouTeW, avreW, avriw ; (b) in some forms of the verb before a long vowel, e. g. 
lareaai, Suy4o)/xai, Svj/4couTai; (c) some verbs in -« have forms as if from -ea>, 
e. g. fid A A (o (TUjUySaAAe^uej/os, inrepPaAAceiv ; iri4£<a Trie^vfx^vos (also in Hom. 
•jriegevv instead of iinefav) ; also e^/ee, em'xee, #(£Aee, from eif/<w, ej/e'x«, 2><pAov ; 
finally, the three following forms of the Perf. in -ee instead of -e : olx&Kee, 
07rc«57r€6, ec&^ee. 

§ 208. Change of Consonants. 

1. In the Ion. dialect, the rough breathing has no effect on the preceding 
smooth mute, e. g. an ov, iir-fi/xepos, ovk baioos, etc. 

2. In the Horn., Ion., and Dor. dialects, a 8 or 3- remains before jj. in certain 
words and phrases (contrary to § 19, 1), e. g. o5/i^ instead of do-fi-f], XBfx^v, bpxo&- 
/j.6s, iireir&ij.ej/, Kenopv&uei/os ; also in the Hom. dialect, the v remains before <r 
(contrary to § 20, 2) in avards, cWxe&eW, irav<rvdlri instead of iracravdir} ; 
finally x before ft (§ 19, Rem. 1) in anaxnevos, acute. 

3. The Metathesis (§ 22) of p often occurs in Hom. and in other poets, e. g. 
KpaStrj instead of KapBia, heart, ndprepos and updrepos, strong, KapTiaros, fidpSio'Tos 
(from PpaZvs, slow) ; also in the second Aorists eirpa&ov, tSpafrov, %b*pa.Kov (from 
irep&w, to destroy, Sap&dvw, to sleep, SepKOficu, to see) ; here belongs also ^{xfiporov 
instead of fjfiparoy (= ^/xaprov, according to § 24, 2). 

4. Homer doubles a consonant (comp. § 23, Rem.) after a short vowel, 
according to the necessities of the verse in the following cases : — 

(a) The liquids and Sigma on the addition of the augment, mostly when 
there are three successive short syllables, e. g. eAActfJoj/, ejxfxafrov, iwzov, 
effcreva ; 

(b) In compounds also, the liquids and Sigma are doubled, e. g. ve6\\ovros 
(from vios and Kovu) \ afifMopos, (piXofijACLSris ] b.vv4<ps\os, ivvvrjTos; fia&vp' 
poos 5 ivco-eXixos ; 

(c) In the inflection of the Dat. in -o~i, and of the Eut. and Aor., e. g. venvcrai, 
Zoofiaffai', KdkGcro~a, bfibcraai, (ppdaaofiaiy e£eiVicrcra; 

(d) In the middle of several words, e. g. oWov, r6<raov y onlo-aca, irpSffffeo, 
fieffaos, pejueVcra, j/e/xso'o'ri&els, &vff<rav6eis. 

Homer doubles the mute tr in Interrogative pronouns which begin with Sir, e. g. 
oirirws, etc.; — k in weAeicKov, ■jreAeKKaco ; — r in otti, ottco, ott€V, — 5 in eSSetcre, 
7re/)tS5etVoo'a, aSSees, &S8tji/. 

Remark. The doubling of p, which always takes place in the Common 
language when the augment is prefixed, and in compounds when a short vowel 
precedes, may be omitted in the Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the 
verse, e. g. epe(ov from tW£o>, xP vff 6pv7os. For the same reason, one of the 
consonants, which is elsewhere doubled, is omitted in the Epic dialect, though 



f 209.] QUANTITY. 247 

rarely, c g. 'OSvcrevs, 5 A%iAeu5, cpdpvyos, instead of 'OSuflvrefo, AxtAAevs, 
(pdpvyyos* 

5. Homer often places a consonant before a short syllable, to make it long 
by position, namely, a v in vdcvvfivos, aTrd\a/j.vos, iSpvv&ri, ap.vw^7j, vTre/j.vfuj.vKt ; 
a t after it in irroXefios, tttoXis, irroKUSfpov ; a 3- after x m x^"/-*"*- ^ Stx^a, 
Tpix&a> rerpax&d, and after A. or p in /j.d?&aKos, 4ypriy6p&a<ri ; or be places a 7 
before 5 in ipiydoviros, iySovirrjo-^, and a <r before ll and k in a/xiKpos (also Att. 
4 24, 4), ffuzZavvviu (comp. Kft>vr)iii), cr/xoyepws (comp. yttoyepwsjj (TfiepSaAeos. 
Here belongs also the Epic prefix of fi (= v, according to § 24, 3), before flpo- 
ros in composition, so as to strengthen the long syllable and give fulness to the 
word, e. g. fc/xfiporos, Tzptyi/xfipoTos, and in ixLMpav'n] instead of a.(pcurirj. 

§ 209. Quantity. 

Preliminary Remark. Only a few general rules will be given here ; the 
quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned from 
rules previously given, or by observation. 

1. A syllable which has the vowels e or o, followed by another vowel or a 
single consonant, is short by nature, e. g. tckos, &eos, £077. 

2. A syllable which has the vowel rj or 00, or a diphthong, is long by nature; 
so all contracted and circumflexed syllables are long by nature, e. g. "ypws, 
ovpav6s, &kwv (instead of de/ccey), iri/xd (from iri/xde), iras, <r7ros, \pvxos, vvv. 

3. A syllable which has a doubtful vowel (a, 1, v), followed by another vowel 
or a single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position, e. g. 'dei- 
Zovres, Haifiovtri, (pvrj, juax?J, (pfkos, apyvpeos. 

4. A syllable which has a short or doubtful vowel followed by two consonants 
or a double consonant, is long by position ; e. g. iKeofrai, eKaTojx^T], 5e|do-frcu, 
<X^^tos-, <pv\\ov~ 

Exceptions to No. 3. 

(a) o of nouns of the first Dec, which have the Geif. in -as, is long in all the 
Cases in which it occurs, e. g. r^iepd, (pi\ta, -as, -a, -dv, etc. (Comp. § 45.) 

(b) a in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec, is long, e. g. Nom. Sing. 
Xiaipd, Dual AecuVd. 

{c) a is long in the Gen. Sing, in -ao and Gen. PI. in -dwv, e. g. 'A-rpei'Sdo, 
ayopacav. 

(d) the ending -as of the first Dec is long, both in the Nom. and Gen. Sing., 
and in the Ace PL, e. g. Nom. rapids, Gen. cuids, Ace PL U^ds. 

(e) o of masculine and feminine participles in -as is long; so also other words 
in -as where vr or v have been dropped, e. g. aicowrds {outovaavTs), aKo6~ 
adaa, iffras, fids; yiyds (yiyavrs), fxixds (fxeXavs). 

(f ) a in the third Pers. PL Perf. Ind. Act., e. g. Ttrxxpacri. 

(g) v is long in the Sing, of the Prcs. and Impf. Ind. Act. of verbs in -vpu^ 
also in the masculine and feminine Sing, of the participle; e. g. SdKvvfiiy 
ifeiKvvv, StiKvvs, SeiKudffa. — Other exceptions may be learned by obser* 
ration. 



248 DIALECTS. [$ 209 

5 In Epic poetry, a mute and a liquid (§ 27, Rem. 2) commonly make a 
syllable long by position ; the vowel is shortened, for the most part, only when 
the form cannot otherwise be suited to the verse, e. g. reix^crXirXrira. 

6. The final syllable of a word in verse, is uniformly long by position: (a) 
when it ends with a consonant, and the following word begins with a conso- 
nant, e. g. KsxSn | cou Tpw | as ; also (b) when the final syllable ends with a 
short vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with 
two single consonants, wbich are not a mute -and liquid, e. g. ci8,urj | tt)v, %v | 
ovttco v | 7to Qvybv j tfyayev \ avfjp, II. k, 293. But a mute and a liquid in this 
case, always make the syllable in the Arsis long ; on the contrary, the syllable 
in the Thesis, may be either long or short according to the necessities of the 
verse ; e. g. fir] y.oi \ Swp' ipa \ to 7rp<f<pe | pe XP V I v*vs y A.(ppo \ Sn-jjs, II. 7, 64 ; 
on the contrary, in the Thesis, avrap '6 | irX-rjaiov \ e<rrr) j kci, II. 8, 329 ; but 
&j/5pa I &vt)tov i \ 6vra, ttol | Acu ire \ Trpcc/xevoy | atay, II. it, 441. 

Rem. 2. In the names 2«a^aj/5pos, Zdicvvfrcs, ZeAem, even <tk and ( do not 
make a syllable long by position in Homer; so also IV [ etrd uk4 \ irapvov, Od. 
c, 237, occurs. 

7. A long vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word, in Homer, commonly 
becomes short before a word beginning with a vowel, when it is in the Thesis, 
but it remains long when it is in the Arsis, or when the following word has the 
digamma, e. g. yfievij \ eV j8eV \ beo-ait/, H. a, 358. vies, 6 \ fxkv Kred | tov, 6 8* 
ap 1 I Evpvrov I 'A/cropi | avos, II. j8, 621. avrap 6 \ %yv<# \ rjcriv e | v\ (ppeal \ (pdovrj 
\<r4v re (ycriv = Ffj<riv). But sometimes a long vowel in the Thesis is not short- 
ened before words which do not have the digamma, especially in the fourth foot 
of an Hexameter, e. g. t<5 /atJ | /j.oi irare j pas Tro& 6 \ /j.otp | eV&eo | Ti(xjj, II. 8, 
410, and before a punctuation-mark, e. g. /ceTcr^ar, | ctAA' iird | /xvvov, II. e, 685. 

8. A long vowel or a diphthong in the middle of a word before another 
vowel is but seldom shortened by the poets, and for the most part, in certain 
words and forms ; thus, e. g. in Homer, iirsii) ("""), e/xTraios ("*"*), ohs (""), j3e- 
f}\-riai (""*), and often in the Iambuses of the Attic dramatists, e. g. ofos, iroios, 
toiovtos, roiSsde, oi'ei (frtrai olofiai), TroieTv; and always before the demonstrative 
I in pronouns, e. g. rovrovi, aiirad'. 

9. In Epic poetry, a short syllable in the Arsis is usually considered long, 
if it stands at the beginning of a word, e. g. aa-widos | 'd/ca^o | rou irvp, II. e, 4 ; 
or at the end, in which case it is followed either by a liquid (A, p, v, p), or a <r 
or 8, the sound of which is easily doubled in pronunciation, or by a word with 
the digamma, e. g. Kal ireS: | d A« | revvra, H. /*, 283. &vyare \ pa. Iqv (= Ft)v), 
II. A, 226. 

Rem. 3. A syllable in itself short, may be used as long or short in the same 
word, according as it is or is not, in the Arsis, e. g. ''Apes "A | pes &poro \ Aoiye*, 
— oVSpes "t I caffiv and irXeiova \ ''icraffiv. 

10. Not unfrequently in Homer, from the mere necessities of the verse, 
a short vowel is measured as long in the Thesis, when it stands between 
two long syllables. This occurs in the middle of a word, and oftenest with 
i, e. g. %<r& vtto I 8e£r | 77, II. 1, 73. rj<ri irpo | frvfrf \ ??<n, H. £, 588 5 this is rarely 
the case at the end of a word, e. g. ttvkvol \ po>ya\4 \ tju, Od. p, 198. rfj 8' hcl | 
u«/ Top J 7« jSAocru | pairls \ iffre^d \ voarn. D. A, 36. 



$$210,211.] FIRST DECLENSION. 249 



B. DIALECTIC FORMS. 

$210. Homeric Suffix <j>t (cjav). 

1. In the Homeric dialect there is, besides the Case-inflections, a Suffix (pi(v), 
which properly and originally denotes the indefinite where, like the local Dat. 
(see the Syntax) ; it is also used to express other relations of the Dat., as the 
Dat. of the instrument, and with prepositions (such as in Lat. govern the Abl.), 
it expresses those relations of the Gen. which in Latin would be denoted by 
the Abl. 

2. The Suffix <pi is found with substantives of all the declensions, and is 
always annexed to the unchanged stem of the word : — 

I. Declension only in the Singular : (a) Dat. ayzX-q-cpi, a-yXdit}^ {in the 
herd), frvpr)(pi, before or without the door (in several ancient editions rj(pi is 
incorrectly written with an Iota Subs. t)(pi) ; (b) Gen. (Lat. Abl.) curb 
vevprjcpiv laXXziv (to shoot an arrow from the string), e| ewrjcpi Sropeiv (to spring 
from bed), Kpareprj^i fiirjcpi, II. <p, 501 (with great force), apt f/oi <paivoixivr]- 
<piv, Od. 5, 407 (as soon as the morning dawned). 
II. Declension both Singular and Plural. All these forms, without respect to 
the accent of the Nom., are paroxytone (-6<piv) : (a) Dat. 8aKpv6<piv (with 
tears), p-fiaTtop araXauros fre6<pii/ (an adviser equal to the gods) ; — (b) Geni- 
tive (Abl.) curb or e/c iraacraXSpiv (to take from the pin), e/c &e6<piv (through 
the gods), cur ocrreScpiv (from the bones). 
HI. Declension almost exclusively in the PI. $>iv is here used with not a large 
number of neuter substantives in -os (Gen. -eos), also with KorvXriSdij/ and 
vavs, e. g. irpbs Korv\ridou6(pi(u) (with the union-vowel o), to the arms, vav- 
<pi(v) (at the ships) ; in words in -os, the ending -os must always be restored 
to its original form -es, since (pi is always annexed to the pure stem ; thus, 
oxe(T<pi(y), <rvv ox^o~(pi(v), kot optff(pi(v), airb, Sid, e'/c crT^e<T(pi(v). 

$ 211. First Declension. 

1. (a) The Epic and Ionic writers use 77 instead of the original long a (which 
the Dorians use) through all the Cases of the Sing., e. g. ri/xd, -as, -a, -kv 
(Dor.) ; cro(pl7], -rjs, -y, -yv, &vpr), -rjs, verjvirjs, -77, -r\v (Epic and Ion.) : so H^e- 
XoTretrjs, HrjveXoTreiri, from Tl7]v4KoTreia, (pp-f]Tpri, Boperis, Bope'77, Bop4r\v. 

Exceptions in Homer are 3-ed, goddess, -as, -a, -au, "Navo-utda, <f>e/d, also AjVei'ds, 
Avyeias, 'Epfxeids, .and some other proper names in -as pure. The Voc. of vifjKpti 
is vv/xcpa instead of vvp.(pi), II. 7, 130. Od. 5, 743. 

(b) In substantives in -eta and -01a, derived from adjectives in -77s and -ovs, as 
also in some other feminincs, the short a in Attic is also changed into 77 in 
Ionic, e. g. aXri&elr), avaiddr), tvirXolr), kv'ktot] instead of dA^&etd, di/cu'Seid, 
eijirhoia, Kviaaa. 

(c) The iEol. and some other dialects have -d instead of -77s, as the Masc. 
ending in the Nom. Sing., like the Latin. The Epic also uses this form, accord* 



250 DIALECTS [$ 212 

ing to the necessities of the verse, in a great number of words, particularly in 
-to, e. g. lirirSra, alxwroi, Kvavoxcura, vecpeXrjyepeTa, iirirrjAdrct, /xrjrUrd, fvpionH. 
The Voc. retains the ending -a in all these words. 

2. The Gen. Sing, of masculines in -ys and -as originally ended in -do , -do 
was then contracted into -co (Dor. into -a). In Horn, both the uncontracted 
and contracted form is found; he also resolves the -co, originating from 
-oo, by means of e (comp § 207, 3) ; it is further to be remarked, that the -co 
in respect to accent is considered short (§ 29, Rem. 7) and the e is always pro- 
nounced with the Synizesis ; -eco becomes -co when a vowel or p precedes (still 
AtWeoo, II. e, 534). Thus there occur in Homer, 'Epfxelas, Gen. 'Ep/xetdo and 
'Epfieico; Boperjs, Gen. Bopido and Bopico; 'ArpeiSrjs, 'A-rpeiSdo, and 'ATpeiSecw, 
lutrao and iKereco ; ei)^e\t«, 'Aalco. In Homer, then, the Gen. endings of nouns 
in -ay or -77s, are -ao, -co, or -eco (not -ov). The Gen. ending -eco, becomes, in 
the Ion. writers, the usual ending, e. g. iroXlreco, 'ArpdSeco. 

3. The Ace. Sing, and PI. of masculines in -rjs is commonly formed in the 
Ion. dialect like the third Dec, e. g. rbv SecrirSrea, robs Seo-7r6reas from BeinroTTjs^ 
-ov, Mi\rtddea from Mi\rid5r)s, -ov. 

4. The Gen. PI. of all the endings was originally in -day ; -dcou was after- 
wards contracted into -wv (Dor. in -av). Homer uses both the uncontracted and 
contracted forms, e. g. fredcov and frewv, irapeidcov and irapeicov. He can also, 
as in the Gen. Sing., again resolve, by means of e, the -cov originating from 
-dcov; the ending thus becomes -eW, which is commonly pronounced with 
Synizesis, e. g. irvXecov, drupecov, ayopecov. The Gen. ending -ecou becomes in the 
Ion. writers, the common form, e. g. Movcrecov, rifiicov. 

5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -cuo~i(v) ; this ending is found in the Dor. 
writers, in the Att. poets, and even in the older Att. prose writers ; in the Ion. 
writers, -atari was changed into -r)cri(v) and -ys; and in the Att. and Common 
language, -cucri was shortened in -ais. In Homer, the Dat. PI. ends in -ijcti, --ps, 
and -ais, yet the last is found only in frecus and aureus. 

6. The Ace. PL, in JEol., ends in -ais (as in the second Dec. in -01s instead 
of -ovs), and in Dor. in -as (as in the second Dec. in -os instead of -ow), e. g. 
rah ri/xais (JEol.) instead of ras ri/xds (but Dat. PI. ri/xaio'i) ; iracras Kovoas 
(Dor.) instead of irdcrds Kovpds. 

$ 212. Second Declension. 

1. Nominative Sing. Proper names in -\aos are changed in the Dor. dialect 
into -\ds (Gen. d, Dat. at), e. g. MeveAds instead of MeveAaos, NtKohds, 'Apueai- 
\as. 

2. Genitive Sing. Homer uses both the common form in -ov, and that in -010 ; 
the tragedians, also, in the lyric passages, use the ending -oto. Theocritus has 
the Dor. ending -co and -010. 

3. Genitive Sing, and PI. Some genitives are formed according to the 
analogy of the first Dec. (a) Herodotus has some Masc. proper names in -05 
with the ending -eco in the Gen. Sing., e. g. Barreco instead of Barrov, Kpoicreco, 
KKeofifipSreco, Mey.[}Aidpeco, and some Masc. common nouns with the ending 



§ 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 251 

-eW in the Gen. PL, & g. ir€<r<r4cov ; (b) The ending -da>v instead of tLe Ion. 
-4wv belongs to the Dor. (comp. alyav instead of al-ydwv from a?£, § 213, 5). 

4. The Gen, and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect ends in -ouv instead of -oiv % 
e. g. &[xonv instead of &jxoiv (§ 207, 9). 

5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -oio-t(v). This form, as well as the 
abridged form in -ois is found in Homer and in all the poets, and in Ion. prose 

6. The Ace. PI. ends, in the Dor. writers (except Pindar) in -us and in -os 
(like -os in the first Dec, § 211, 6), e. g. rus uSfias, vofios, so also tus \ay6s, the 
hares ; uZEol. in - o i s, e. g. irao-o-aXois instead of -ovs. 

7. Attic Declension, The Gen. Sing, in the Epic dialect ends in -uo, instead 
of -«, in Il77j/eAea>o (II. £, 489 ; though most MSS. have TlrjveXeoio) from Urjyi- 
Aeus, and in Tlereuo from Uerews. — In yd\us, sister-in-law, *A&u$ and Kus, the 
w originating by contraction, is resolved, in the Epic dialect, by means of o ; 
hence ya\o\cs, 'A&o'ws, Ko<ys, Gen. -coo. On the words y4\us, ISpojs, epus, see 
§ 213, 7. 

8. Contracted forms of the second Dec. are rare in Homer, namely, vovs only 
Od. k, 240 (elsewhere v6os), xeipdppovs, II. A, 493 (but u, 138. x* l H-<>-PP 00S ) an< i 
Xzip-tfpot, H. 5, 452, also TldvStovs, Tldvfrov, Tldv&u. Homer does not contract 
other words; in words in -eos, -eov, he either lengthens the e into et (§ 207, 1), 
or employs Synizesis, as the measure requires. 

§ 213. Third Declension. 

1. In the Dor. dialect the long o here also takes the place of tj, e. g. uav, 
fxtiyos instead of \xr\v, /jltjvSs, etc., "EAAdV, "EAAdj/es, Troifxav instead of Troifi-qi/^ Gen. 
-eVos, v eSras, -tiros instead of yeorrjs, -7]Tos. 

Alfrfip, frfjp, frrjpes, and all names of persons in -r-fip, are exceptions to this 
Dor. usage. 

2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, r\ commonly takes the place 
of the long a, as also elsewhere, e. g. *tupt)\, ofyl, '/p7j| instead of &dbpti£, Upti%. 

3. The Dat. PI. in the Epic dialect, ends, according to the necessities of the 
measure, in -<rt(v), -ao'i(v), -eai(v), and -e<ro~i(v). The ground-form is -e<ri(v) 
and the strengthened form is -€<r<ri(v). This ending is always annexed, like 
the other Case-endings, to the pure stem, e. g. /ciWcrct (from /ctW, Gen. kw-os), 
veKv-eo-cri (from vexvs, -v-os). The ending -eo-t(v) is found in Homer only in 
Xvetriv, oUo~i, x^P^h an d avaKr-ecriv (from oVa|, dvanr-os). In Neuters, which 
have a radical <r in the Nom., the a is omitted when it stands between two 
vowels (§ 25, 1), e.g. £ir4-&T<ri (instead of eW<r-e<r(rt from to eras), 5e7ra-e<rcni/ 
(from to Senas). In stems in -av, -ev, -ev (aF, eF, oF), the v (F) must be 
omitted, according to § 25, 2 ; thus, j8J-e<r<n instead of p6F-eao-t, l-mry-ecro-i 
instead of 'nrir-fiF-ca-o-t. The ending -<r<ri is annexed almost exclusively to 
stems which end in a vowel, e. g. viKv-aai from vIkvs -v-6s ; but also Ipt-trcn 
from Ipis {-iZos) and commonly "novai from novs (no5-6s). The Dat. form in 
-aai never admits the doubling of <r. — The ground-form -e<n is very common 
in the Dor. poets and prose-writers ; also the Ionic prose has this form fire 
quently in stems ending in -v y c. g. p^v-toi. 



252 DIALECTS. [$ 2ia 

4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect, ends in -onv (as in the 
second Dec, § 212, 4), e. g. irodoZiv, ^eip-fjuouv. 

5. The Gen. PL in the Ion. dialect often ends in -ewe, e. g. xw*«w, av$p4u>v 
(§ 207, 10). Theocritus has rav alyav (instead of tuv aiywv) from y df£, a goat, 
after the analogy of the first Dec. 

6. The Epic dialect sometimes forms the Ace. Sing, of words in -vs (stem v) 
in a instead of v, e. g. cvp4a ttovtov, ix&va, v4a from vavs. 

7. The words y4\u>s, laughter; I8pu>s, sweat ; epo>s, love, which properly belong 
to the third Dec, in Homer follow the Attic second Dec. in some of the Cases, 
e. g. ldp£>, /Spy instead of Idpura and Idpuri; y4x<a and y4Aoov, y4Xa>, instead of 
y4\(ara and yeXuri, epco instead of epcori. 

8. Words in -is, 1 Gen. -idos. "The Horn., Ion., and Dor. dialects often 
inflect these substantives, particularly proper names, in -tos, e. g. fiyvios, Horn., 
&4fj.ios, Herod.. &4tios, Dat. &4tI, Horn. Those ending in -is, -iSos, in the Epic 
dialect have the Dat. only in -i instead of -8i. Substantives in --nis, -rjidos, 
are sometimes contracted in the inflection, by the poets, e. g. iraprfis, -irapfjdos 
(instead of Trap-ni'Sos), N^prj/'y, Urjpfjdss. See § 54 (c). 

9. The Neut. ods, wtos, ear, is in Dor. 8>s, wto's, etc., and in Horn, odas, Gen, 
ovaros, PI. ovara; the Neuters, <Tr4ap,fat; odfrap, udder, and irelpap, end, have 
-aros in the Gen., namely, ar4aros, ov&ara, ireipara, Trelpcuri. In the words 
repas, hc4pas, Kp4as, the Epic writers reject t, e. g. r4paa, -dcov, -de<rcri{v) ; /cepec 
Dat.; PL ic4pa, icepdcav, -ae<rcn(j/), and -ao-i(v) ; PL Kp4a, Kpedwv, upewv, and Kpeiuv, 
Kpea<ri(v). Among the Ionic writers these words, like fip4ras, etc. (§ 61, Kem. 
1), often change the a into e, e. g. nepeos, ic4pea, /cepeW, to Tepea, Kp4ecro~i(v). 
See § 54 (c). 

10. In the words irar-qp, fi."f)T7]p, etc., Homer either retains or rejects the e 
through all the Cases, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. av4pos and 
avdpSs, av4pi and avdpt, etc., but only avBp&v, avdpdai and -4a<ri ; yaarr-fjp, yacr- 
r4pos, -4pi, and yacrrpSs, yaffrpi, yaffr4pa, ya(TT4pes; Ar]fx-f}T7]p, -i]r4pos, and -Tjrpos, 
Ar]fXT]T4pa', frvydrrip, -r4pos, and -rp6s, etc., Srvyar4peacri(v), but frvyarpuv ; fJ.7)T7}p 
and war-ftp, -r4pos, and -rpSs. etc. See § 55, 2. 

11. In Homer, the word Ix&P, blood of the gods, has in the Ace lx& instead of 
tX^po-i an d KVKecav, 6, mixed drink, has in the Ace kvkcw or Kviteiu. See § 56, 
Rem. 1. 

12. In -bus, -evs, -ovs. Of ypavs, there are found in Homer only the Nom. 
yprjvs and ypyvs, Dat. ypr[i and the Voc. yprjv and yprji). In the Ion. dialect, 
also, the long a is changed to 77 ; thus, Gen. yprjSs, PL yprjts ; this also appears 
in vavs, navis, see the Anomalies. — The word fiovs is regularly declined in 
Her., hence Nom. PL fioes, Ace. fiovs ; in the Ace. PL Homer uses both fi6as 
and fiovs. On the Epic Dat. fiSeco-i, see No. 3. In Doric, the Nom. is fias, 
Ace. fiwv, Ace. PL fias. This form of the Ace. Sing., occurs also in the II. tj, 
238, in the sense of bull's hide, a shield made of bull's hide. See § 57. 

1 The student may consult the first part of the Grammar, where similar 
words are declined ; references to the particular section will be given at the end 
of the paragraphs here. 



$ 213.] THIRD DECLENSION. 253 

13. In common nouns in -evs, and in the proper name 'AxtAAeus, 77 is used in 
the Epic dialect, instead of e, in all the forms which omit v (F) of the stem, 
this is done to compensate by the length of the vowel for the omitted v (F) ; 
thus, jSacrtAeus, Yoc. -e0; Dat. PL -even (except dpicrr^ea(ri(v) from apicrTtvs), but 
fiacnXrjos, -rfi, -rja, -7jes, -t\cov, -7jas. Yet the long a in the Ace. -ed, -eds of the 
Attic dialect, again become* short. Among the proper names, the following 
are to be specially noted : 'Otivcrcrevs, Gen. 'OSvcrcrrios or 'OSvarjos and 'Odvcro-4os, 
also 'Odvarevs (Od. cv, 398), Dat. 'OSiNrfJi" and 'OSi/cre?, Ace. 'Odvcraria and 'OSw- 
o4a, also 'OSvcrrj (Od. t, 136) ; TlrjXevs, UrjXrjos and Ur]\4os, Il7?A^i' and Tbj\&L 9 
Urfhrja; the others, as 'Arpevs, TuSeus, generally retain the -e and contract -eos 
in the Gen. by Synizesis, and sometimes -ea in the Ace, into -77 ; thus, TuSeos, 
-e'i", -ea, and -77. — la the Ion. of Herodotus, the inflection with 77 in common 
nouns is very doubtful ; in proper names, the e is regular, e. g. Ilepcreos, Aa)pi4es y 
4>a>/ceW, AloAeas. 

14. In -77s and -es, Gen. -eos. In Homer, the Gen. Sing, remains uncon- 
tracted. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, both the uncontracted form -ees, and 
the contracted form -ets is used for the Nom. PI. The Gen. PI. remains uncon- 
tracted (except when a vowel precedes the ending -eW, e. g. fcxpywi' from 
(axpyeow) ; so also the Ace. PI. ending -ea?. "Aprjs has in Homer "Ap-qos and 
"Apeos, "Aprj'i or "Apri^Apei^Apr] and "Aprju, H. e, 909, T Apes and "Apes (§ 209, 
Eem. 3). See § 59. ^ 

15. In proper names in -K\rjs, the Epic dialect contracts ee into 77, e.g. 
'HpaK\47]s, -kAtjos (instead of /cAeeos), -77*, -77a, Voc 'Hpa/cAets; but in adjectives 
in -c'tjs it varies between -et and 77, e. g. ayaKXrfjs, Gen. ayatcArjos, but e'i)«Ae?aj 
(Ace. PI.) from ei)/cAe^y, ivppe-fjs, Gen. ivppeTos. The Ion. and Dor. writers, and 
sometimes the poets for the sake of the verse, reject an e in these words, e. g. 
UepiKXeos, -e'i", etc. ; so also in Homer, Sus/cAe'd, II. /3, 1 1 5, and virepSea, U. p, 330. 

16. In (a) -as, Gen. -aos. In Homer, the contracted forms, ripca Dat., and 
Mii/w Ace. occur. — (b) -c6s and -co, Gen. -<fos. Words of this kind even in the 
Epic and Ion. writers, as well as in the Attic, always have the contracted form, 
except xpds ana its compounds, e. g. XP°° S > xp°h XP^ a - — The Ion. dialect fre- 
quently forms the Ace. Sing, in -ovv instead of -co, e. g. 'IcS, 'low, tjcos, t\ovv. — 
The JEoL Gen. Sing, ends in -as, e. g. offices, ^.dircpcos instead of aldovs, ^ancpovs, 
thus, in Moschus, ras 'Ax&s. See § 60. 

17. In (a) -as, Gen. -aos. In Homer, the Dat. Sing, is either uncontracted 
or contracted, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. yfipat and y-iipa, 
Seira, o~4\a. But the Nom. and Ace. PI. is always contracted, e. g. SeVa. — On 
those in -as, Gen. -eos, see § 61 (a), and Rem. 1. 

(b) In -os, Gen. -eos. The Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the 
verse, has sometimes the uncontracted and sometimes the contract forms, 
except in the Gen. PL, which is always uncontracted. The Gen. Sing, is also 
uncontracted, except in some substantives which contract -eos, as in the Dor., 
into -eus ; thus, 'EpefSevs, frdpo-evs, ydvevs, &d,u/3et/s, &4pevs ; Dat. Sing, frepei" and 
depet, /caAAei* and kclAAii. Nom. and Ace. Plurals in -ea, commonly remain 
uncontracted, but they must be pronounced with Synizesis, i. e. as one syllable, 
e. g. j/etKea, /Se'Aea. — The Ion. dialect is like the Epic. — In enreos, /cAe'os, Se'os, 

22 



254 DIALECTS. [$ 214. 

Jtpeos, the Epic dialect lengthens e, sometimes into «, sometimes into t\ ; thus, 
Gen. orirdovs, Dat. <nrrji, Ace. <rirsos and ciriuos, Gen. PI. oTreW, Dat. o , ir4o , o'i(p) 
and <T7T77 e<r(n (;/) ; xP e0S an( ^ XP e "> y j ^^ an ^ K^em. 

18. In -Is, Gen. -lios; -us, Gen. -uos. The Epic dialect contracts those in 
^vs, in the Dat. Sing., e. g. ^r£ut, irAe3-u?, pe/cui ; the Ace. PI. appears with tho 
contracted or uncontracted forms, according to the necessities of the verse, 
though more usually contracted, e. g. tx&vs instead of ix&vas, 8pv$ ; veitvas is 
always uncontracted ; the Nom. PI. never suffers contraction, hut is pronounced 
with Synieesis. The Dat. PI. ends in -ixra-i and -iWo-t (dissyllable), e.g. ix^v<r- 
triv and Ix&veao-iv. See § 62. 

19. In -is and -t. Gen. -tos, Att. -ecos; -Us and -u, Gen. -Cos, Att. -ecus: — 

(a) The words in -ts, Att. Gen. -evs, in the Epic and Ionic dialect, retain t 
of the stem through all the Cases, and in the Dat. Sing, always suffer contrac- 
tion, and usually in the Ace. PI. in the Ionic writers, and sometimes also in 
Homer (-« = -F, -las = -Is), e. g. irSXis, ttSAlos, ir6\l, tt6\iv, iroMes, iro\i<av, iroAuri, 
vr6\tas, and iroAIs. In the Dat. Sing, however, the ending -et and -ei is found 
in Homer, e. g. ir6<re'i and 7roVet from tt6<tis ; in some words, the i of the stem is 
changed into e in other Cases also, e. g. iird\£<-is instead of iird^ias, iird\^(ri(v), 
especially in ir6\is, which, moreover, according to the necessities of the verse, 
can lengthen e into t\ ; thus, Gen. 7ro'Aios, ttoAcos, and irSKyos, Dat. iroAe't, fl-oAet, 
and ir6\r}'£, No^. PI. irShees and TrSXrjes, Gen. ttoAIcov, Dat. noAleo-ffi, Ace. ir6\ias, 
■jr6\eis, irSXrjas) from oi*s, ovis, Dat. PI. ofeo-o't(j'), oUa-i(v), oeffi(v). See § 63. 

(b) The words in -vs, whose Gen. in the Attic ends in -eas, in the Ionic 
make the Gen. in -cos, e. g. ir-ftxeos, except ZyxeAvs, Gen. -vos ; in the Dat. Sing., 
both the contracted and uncontracted forms are found in Homer, e. g. evpii, 
Tr-flX € h TAoTe?. In the Nom. PI., the form can be either contracted or uncon- 
tracted ; in the Ace. PI., the uncontracted form in -eas is regular, which, when 
the verse requires, can be pronounced as a monosyllable, e. g. 7reAe«:€os (tri- 
syllable). 



$ 214. Anomalous and Defective Words. — Metaplasts. 

1. T6vv (to, knee) and 86pv (to, spear, § 68, 1), are declined in Homer as 
Follows : — 

Sing. yovvaros and yovvds Soiparos and dovpos dotipart and Sovpt 

PL Nom. yoivara " yovva Sovpara " Soupa — Dual 5ovpe 

Gen. yovvwv Zoipcav 

Dat. yovva<Ti{v) and yotiveffcriiv) %ovpa<n{v) and Zovp<=(rxn{v). 
The form yovuaffai (II. i, 488, p, 451, 569) has critically little authority. 

2. The following forms of /cap a (to, head, § 68, 6) are found in the Homeric 
dialect : — 

Sing. Nom. Kdpfj Gen. Kdprjros Kap^aros Kpards Kpdaros 

Dat. KaprjTi Kaplan tcpari Kpdart 

Acc. KdpT} (tov Kpara, Od. &, 92, and irrl /cap, II. v, 392). 



$ 215.] ADJECTIVES. 255 

PL Nom. tcdpd. Kapriara ; secondary form Kapijva 
Gen. Kpdruv " Kapr\vwv 

Dat. Kpao-^j/) 
Ace. updara " Kaprfva 

3. Ados (6, sforce, Horn., instead of Ads), Gen. Ados, Dat. Adi', Ace. \aav, Gen. 
PI. Aawv, Dat. \de<ro~i{v). 

4. Mefs (o, month), Gen. ^fo's, Ion., instead of yA\v, -6s, but also in Plato. 

5. Navs (r), ship) is inflected in the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects as 
follows : — 

S. Nom. Ep. and Ion. vnvs vrj'p Dor. vavs 

Gen. vi)6s (also Tragic) veos vaos (also Trag.) 

Dat. vrjt vat 

Ace. vr\a via. vavv and vav 

D. Nom. Ace. Voc. »^je rde 

Gen. and Dat. vzolv vaolv 

P. Nom. j/7/65 pees vaes 

Gen. vnuv (vavepi only Ep.) vea>v vawv 

Dat. ^7ju(Ti (vaO^t only Ep.) vi)eo~o'i{v), veeacri(v) vavcri(v) 

Ace. P7?as reas vaas. 

6. "O/ws (6 ^, bird), Gen. opvTSr-os, Doric o/mx-os, etc. (§ 203). 

7. Xefp (tj, hand), Ion. x e P<k) X e P l '> X e V a > Dual x e <P 6 ) X*? ^ v (poet, also xetpoiV), 
PL x 6 P €y ) X*P*° v i X € / ,<ri (*') (x ei/ P ecrt ( ,/ )) anc * -wcC") m Homer), x*P as ' 

Rp:mark 1. Metaplasm (§ 72) occurs in Homer in the following words 
dA/c?'/, 7), strength, Dat. dA/c£ (from Nom. 5 AAE) ; 'Atdrjs, -ov, 6, Gen. &ib*os, Dat 
&i"5t ( 5 AI5); 'AvTicpdrTis, -ao, 6, Ace. 'AvTicpaT-qa f ANTI<t> ATET2 ) ; Icukt), y, pur- 
suit, Acc. IGjkol ('IHE) ; va-fjLTvT], r), battle, Dat. v<r/x?vt (vo~fx.is) ; — TldrpoKKos, Gen 
TlaTpSuXov and -k\t)os, Acc. -kAoi/ and -K\r)a, Yoc. -/cAets (ITATPOKAH2) ; avSpd 
ttoSov, to, slave, Dat. PL a.ySpaTr6deo-cri(v) ; irpSscoirov, to, face, PL TrposdoiraTa 
vposdoirauri ; vtos, 5, son, has from 'TIET2 and 'TIS the following forms : Gen 
vUos and vtos, Dat. vk? and uft, Acc. vUa and i/fa ; Dual vU ; Nom. PL vtees and 
wietf and ufey, Dat. vldai, Acc. ule'os and vtas ; — OiSinovs, Gen. O;5t7ro'8ao 
('OIAinOAHS). 

Kem. 2. The following are defective in Homer : \iri Dat. and rd AlVa, Ztncn; 
Ais and A?»/ = AeW and \4ovra ; jxdcrTi and yd<jTiv = fjidariyi and -o ; ctixos, 
o-n'xes, o-Tixas, row ; ovae, tw, Nom. and Acc. Dual, 6o</i eyes; ocpeXos, advantage, 
and r)8os, pleasure, in the Nom. only; ^>a, something pleasing, and 8e(ias,fonn, in 
the Acc. only : T/Aeo's, infatuated, Voc. ^Ae and fjAee' ; finally, 5a>, /cp?, aA<pt, as 
Nom. and Acc. Sing., from which come the forms Swfia, house, Kp&r), barley, 
&\<piTov, dried barley. 

§ 215. Adjectives. 

1. Some adjectives in -vs, -em, -v, have sometimes in the Homeric dialect, 
the feminine form -ea or -ei? ; viz. a>/ce'a (instead of o>Ke?a), /3a&e'a (instead of 
/8a£e?a) ; Gen. jSadcV (and /3odenjs) , Acc. jSadeV ; so also in Herodotus, -ea, 
seldom -€ia, e. g. fiaSea, -e'77 and -e?a, fiapea, evpea, Idvs, -e'a and -eTo, ^Aea (from 
&vjAus), r//xi(reo. 

Ui:mark. In Epic and Doric poetry, some adjectives of this kind, and also 
some in - 6 e t s and - tj e 1 s, are of the common gender, i. e. they have but one 



256 DIALECTS. [$ 216. 

termination for the Masc. and Eem., e. g.^Hpri &nK.vs 4ov<ra, H. r, 97 ; so rjdbs 
hvTfi-f], Od. ju, 309, and the irregular iroXvs: iroXvu 4<f>' vyp-fjv, H. k, 27 ; so 7}fxa- 
&6*is, dv^-e^oets, apyti/Jeis, rroi^is, agreeing with feminine substantives. — The 
Epic ei'Jc or t)vs, Neut. yi) [iv and e3 only as an adverb), wants the feminine 
form ; in II. (a, 528, is found Sdpwv ola SiSwcri KaKcHv, '4repos Se id ecu (sc. Swpco;/), 
therefore 4 amy as the Gen. PL Neut., unless perhaps from Scapwy the cognate 
Soaewv is to be supplied for 4dwv to agree with, as in durripes idcav sc. Mazwv ; 
the Gen. Sing, is efjos. 

2. Adjectives in -fcis, -r)€<r<ra, -7}ev, are often found in Homer in the contracted 
form -fjs, -rj<r(ra, -rjv, e. g. Ti/xrjs (and T^n/eis), Tifxrjvra; those in -<Jets, -oe(T(ro, 
-oey, contract -oe into -eu, e. g. TreSia Xcorevi/ra. 

3. In the Epic dialect, iroXvs is regularly inflected in the masculine and 
neuter, viz. Nom. iroXvs and ttovXvs, Neut. 7roA.y, with the secondary forms 
voXX6s, ttoXXSv, Gen. iroX4os, Ace. ttoXvv and irovXvv, iroXv and iroXXov ; Nom. 
PI. iroXees and 7roAers, Gen. iroX4<av, Dat. iroAeVt^), TroX4acri(v), and TroAeeccn^), 
Ace. iroXeas and ToAe?*. — The Ionic dialect inflects iroXXos, -r), -(Jv, regularly 
throughout. 

4. Compound Adj. in -os (comp. § 78, 1.) often have in Horn, a feminine ending, 
viz. -r), e. g. d&a»/ar77, ao-^4art], iroXvcpSpfirj, api^-qXT] (but also apifoXoi airyai, II. 
X, 27), a/j.(pil3p6f7}, ayx^dXt], apyvpow4(a, aficpipvTT] ; on the contrary, kXvtSs as a 
feminine is found in II. j3, 742. Od. e, 422, from the simple kXvtos, -ft, -6u. Also 
the ending -os of the superlative is sometimes found as feminine, e. g. oXocoraros 
65/j.r}, Od. 5, 442. Kara irpu>Ti<TTov oircoTrTjv, H. Cer. 157. Comp. § 78, Eem. 1. 

5. Compound adjectives in -rrovs, -tow, Gen. iroBos, in the Epic dialect, can 
shorten -irovs into -iros, e. g.^lpis aeXXoiros, II. &, 409. rpiiros, II. %, 443. 

6. 'Eplypes from 4pit)pos, 4pvo-dpix.ares and -os from 4pvo-dp/jLa,Tos, are examples 
of Metaplastic forms of adjectives in Homer. 

§ 216. Comparison. 

1. In the Epic dialect, the endings -dbrepos and -c^TaTos are used for the sake 
of the metre, even when the vowel of the preceding syllable is . long, e. g. 
oi(vpdoTepos, oi^vpcaraTos, KaKo^eivurepos, XapwraTos. — ""AvirjpSs, troublesome, has 
the Comparative avn}p4<XTepov, Od. j8, 190, and &x a P LS > disagreeable, axapio-repos, 
Od. v, 392. Comp. § 82, Eem. 6. Adjectives in -vs and -pos, in the Homeric 
dialect, form the Comparative and Superlative in -lav, -iov, and -io~ros, -f\, -ov, 
sometimes also regularly, e. g. 4Xax»s, little, 4xdxio-ros, yXvicvs yXvuluv, fla&vs, 
{5d&i(rTos, Kvb~p6s, kvShttos, olnrpSs oIktio-tos and olnrporaTos, iraxvs irdx^fTos, 
wp£o~f5vs TrpearfiKTTOs, qokvs &kio~tos. 

2. Besides the anomalous forms of comparison mentioned under § 84, the 
following Epic and dialectic forms require to be noticed: — 

ay a^ 6 s, Comp. apelwv, Xcoiow, Xwhepos (Ion. Kpecrcrwv, Dor. icdppwv), Sup. 

K.dpTl(TTOS. 

Kan 6 s, tcaicdoTepos, x ei P° Te P 0S i X*P* l(av -> X e P ei ° T€ P 05 (I)° r - Xtpyuv, Ion. %o~o~<av), 
Sup. rjKHTTos (II. \j/, 531, with the variation ^kkttos, which Spitzner prefers). 

bxiyo s, Comp. dxifyv (bxi(oves ^cav, populi suberant statura minores, II. <r, 
519) ; firfwv, Bion, 5, 10. 

£77*8*05, Ion., Comp. pyiTepos (Ion. P17W), Sup. prftraros and pr)'io-Tos. 

f&padvs, slow, Comp. f}pd&o~a>v, Sup. fiapdio-ros (by Metathesis). 

jj.au pos, long, fidcrawu; — Trax^s, thick, Trdao'wy. 



§211. 



PRONOUNS. 



257 



Remark 1. The positive XEPH2 (x^PVh X*PV a > X^PV^y X*PV a ) found in 
Homer, and belonging to xepeiW, always has the signification of the Compara- 
tive, less, baser, weaker. The PL ir\4es and (Ace.) ir\4as are found in Homer 
from the Comp. 7rAeW. 

Rem. 2. In the Epic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
in many instances, are derived from Substantives ; some of these forms have 
been transferred to the Common language: 6 f3a<ri\evs fia<nAevTepos ; rb 
n4p8os, gain, Kepdiov, more lucrative, KepSiaTos; rb 'aXyos, pain, aXyiwv, more 
painful, &Ayicnos; rb p"iyos, cold, plyiov, colder, more dreadful, plyiaros; rb ktj- 
Sos, care, kt]8iittos, most dear ; b tj kvwv, dog, KvvTepos, more shameless, kvvtcltos. 



217. Pronouns. 



l.S.N. 


iycio and (before a vow- 


av Epic ; tv Dor. and 






el) eywv Epic; eyca 


JEol. ; tvvtj Epic 






and eycav iEolic 






G. 


ifieoy e/uev, fxev (fxev) 


rev Dor.; o~4o (ceo), 


eo (eo), ev (ev) Epic 




Epic and Ion. 


aev {(rev), Ep. and Ion. 


and Ion. 




e/ieTo Epic 


o-elo and Teolo Epic 


eh Ep. ; ie7o later Ep. 




ifx4&ev Epic 


cr4&ev Epic 


e&ev (e&ev) Epic 




efxevs, ifjovs Doric 


revs, reovs Dor. 


eovs Dor. 


D. 


efiol,fiol (fJ.oi),efioiMiO\. 


(Tol Epic 






efdv Doric 


riv Dor. ; re'tp Dor. et 


iv Dor. (usually or- 






Ep. (usually Orthot.) 


thotone) 






toI (toi) Ep. and Ion. 


eo?, ot(o/)Ep.( Reflex.) 


A. 


ifj.4, fi4 (fxe) Epic 


c4 (o-e) Ep. ; t4 Dor. 


ee, e (1) (as Neut. H. 






tv (tv) Dor. 


a, 236.) 






tIv in Theocritus 


vlv (viv) Dor. (and Att. 

poet.) (him, her, it) 
fj.lv (fiiv) Ion. (him, her, 

it; seldom PI.) 
o~(pe Dor. et Att. poet. 


D.N. 


vwi 




(ftpui'v (o'<p(a'iv) ~\ 




G.D. 


vS>'lv 


-Epic 


"*&> ***„ Upic 

acpcaiv, acpipv I i 


<rtpuiv,a , (p(aiv ) 


A. 


VCVl, V& 




o~<pwi, o~<pa> J 


o~(p(ti4, o~(pa)e > Epic 








a(pw, o~(p<i) ) 


P.N. 


Tlfxels Epic ; 7jfx4es Ion. 


vftels Ep. ; vjx4es Ion. 






a/ues Dor. ; dfxfjes Epic 


vfj.4s Dor. ; vfj.fj.es Ep. 




G. 


Tjfiewv Ion. and Epic 


vfi4(ov Ion. and Epic 


o~(p4(tiv (o~(pei>)v) Ion. 




Tjfieluv Epic 


vjxelwv Epic 


and Epic 




dfj.fj.4av -ZEolic ; d/xevv 


vfi/xecov iEol. 


o-<po>v Epic 




Doric 




o~(peia>v Epic 


D. 


TJfUV, 7ljJ.IV, 7JfJ.IV EpiC 


vfuv, vfj.lv, vfj.lv Epic 






&/j.fii(v) JEol. and Ep. ; 


vfxfj.i(v) Epic 


(n/>t (<r(/>t) Ion.; c0t- 




afuv and afilv Dor. 




cri(j/), [o-<pio-i(v)],a(plv, 




afifj.4o~i(v) JEol. 




(o-<piv),o-(pl ((T(pi) Ep.; 
^t iEol. 


A 


7jfi4as Ion. and Epic 


i>fx4as Epic and Ion. 


o-(p4as (o-(peas) Ion. 
and Epic 




7)fias, 7ifids Epic 


vfias, vfids Epic 


acpas, atye'ias Epic 




&fj.fj.e Epic ; au4 Dor. 


ijfxfxe Epic ; vfx4 Dor. 


(o-c^e) Epic (Il.T, 265.) 
&a(pe M6L 


Remark. The forms suscej 


Dtible of inclination are those written without 


an accent. 



22* 



258 DIALECTS. [$ 218u 

2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns, efiavrov, creavrov, etc., are 
never found in Homer; instead of them, he writes the personal pronouns and 
the pronoun avros separate, e. g. e/x avr6v, 4/j.o). avr<p, e/xev auTTjs, I avr^u, of 
avrrj. When the pronoun avros stands first, it signifies himself, herself, itself 
even. But the Ion. writers use the compound forms e/xecovrov, creasvTov, ewvrov, 
etc. Comp. § 207, 1. 

3. Possessive pronouns : re6s, --f), -6v Dor. and Epic, instead of a6s ; eos, -6, 
-6v, and os, 7), ov, suus, Epic ; h[x6s, -i], -6v Dor. and Epic, &fi/xos, afi/xerepos iEoL, 
instead of 7]fxerepos ; vw'trepos, of us both, Epic ; v/x6s, -ft, -6v Dor. and Epic, 
ijfj.fji.os JEol., instead of v/xerepos ; o-cpwtrepos, of you both, II. o, 216 5 o~<p6s, -fa -6v 
JEol. and Epic, instead of a<perepos. 

4. Demonstrative pronouns : (a) 6 7] ro (Dor. 'd instead of ff) ; Gen. t«S Dor., 
ro?o and rev Epic, tSs Dor. 5 Dat. ra Dor. ; Ace. rdv Dor. ; PL rol and to/ Dor. 
and Epic; Gen. rdwv Epic, rav Dor.; Dat. To?cn, touch, ttjcj, and t?;s Epic; 
Ace. r6s, tJs Dor. 

(b) SSe: Epic Dat. PI. ro?sde<rt and roTsSecro-i instead of to?s8c; Epic Dat. 
rotcride instead of ro?s8e is found also in the Tragedians. 

(c) ovros and avr6s: an e stands before, the long inflection-endings in the 
Ion. dialect (§ 207, 10), e. g. rovreov, ravrer)s, rovreca, rovreovs, avrerj, avrecov. 

(d) eKetvos is written in Ion. and also in Att. poetry Ke?vos, Mo\. nrjvos, Dor. 
rrjvos. 

(e) On the Ion. forms wvrSs, ravrS instead of 6 avrSs, to abr6, see §§ 206, 1, 
and 207, 1. 

5. Kelative pronouns : S Dor. and Horn., instead of os ; 0T0 Ion. and Epic ; 
'6ov Epic seldom, er/s II. ir, 208 ; fjo-i and ys instead of als. Besides os, tJ, tho 
other forms of the pronouns are supplied, in the Dor. dialect, by the forms of 
the article, e. g. r6 instead of '6, rod instead of ov, rrjs instead of ^s, etc. The 
Epic dialect uses both forms promiscuously, according to the necessities of the 
verse. In the Ion. dialect also, the forms of the article are frequently used 
instead of the relative. 

6. Indefinite and interrogative pronouns: (a) rls, rl: Gen. reo (reo) Epic 
and Ion., rev (rev) Epic, Ion., and Dor., Dat. rev (rea), t<£ (t<j>) Epic and Ion. ; 
PI. &Wa Neut., 6ttit6l do-ffa, Od. r, 218, Gen. reap (rewv) Epic and Ion., Dat. 
reoicri Epic and Ion. (roun, S. Trach. 984). 

(b) ris, rl : Gen. reo Epic and Ion., rev Epic, Ion., and Dor., rea> Ion. 



(c) osris: Nom. oVis,Neut.#Tt,oTrfEp. 
Gen. orev Ep. and Ion.,&Veo, 

orreo, orrev Epic. 
Dat. oreco, '6rco Ep. and Ion. 
Ace. '6nva Epic, Neut. '6ri, 

'6rri Epic. 



Neut. PI. oriva Iliad. 
orecou Epic and Ion. 

oreoiffi Epic and Ion., brerjai Her. 
'6nvas Epic, Neut. artva and aWa Epic. 



§ 818. The Numerals. 

The JEol. and secondary form of fiia is la, fys, fy, tav ; also t£, H. (, 422, is 
Instead of kvi. Avo and Svw are indeclinable in Homer ; the secondary forms 



§ 219.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 259 

are Soid (indecl.), dotoi, dotal, dotd, Dat. 8oto?s, doio?<f , Ace. Sotd (indecl.), doiovs, 
■as, -d. — Ul<rvpes, -a iEol. and Epic, instead of TeWapes, -a. — Au<4Se/ca and dvo- 
tcaiSena Epic, also StibSeica. — 'EetKoari Epic, instead of ff/coct. — 'OySuKoura and 
ivvi\K0VTa Epic, instead of dydo-fiKovra, ivzvqicovTa. 'EweaxtAot and 5e/caxtAot 
Epic, instead of eWa/asx'A' 04 and p.vptot. The endings -dttovra and -anoa-ioi in 
the Epic and Ion. become --huovra, --naSa-tot. The Epic forms of the ordinals 
are rpiraros, rerparos, efiSofiaTos, oySoaTos, Zvaros, and dvaros. 



The Verb. 

$219. Augment. — Reduplication. 

1. All the poets, except the Attic, may reject the augment, according to the 
necessities of the verse, e. g. Autre, ardXavTo, &4<rav, oparo, eAe. The Ion. 
prose, as well as the Epic dialect, may omit the temporal augment 5 it may also 
omit it in the Perf., e. g. ap.p.at, epyao-p-ai, oXicnp.ai, which is done by the Epic 
writers only in &vwya and epxarat from etpyou. 

2. On the omission of the Epic dialect to double the p when the augment is 
prefixed, e. g. epe£as, and on the doubling the liquids, e. g. tWeua, see § 208, 
4, and Rem. 

3. & in the Dor. writers is changed into d by the augment, and at. suffers no 
change, e. g. ayou instead of i\yov, a'lpeov instead of fjpeou. 

4. Verbs which have the Digamma, in Homer take the syllabic augment, 
according to the rule, e. g. audduw, to please, Impf. kavSavov, Aor. %a8ov , — efi&o- 
(tat, videor, ht<rdfxr{u, also in the participle ietcrd/xevos. On account of the verse, 
the e seems to be lengthened in elotxvla, e#a5e (eFaSe) from avSdvw. 

5. In Homer, the verbs olvoxoew and auddvea, take at the same time both the 
syllabic and temporal augment, viz. i&voxoet, II. 5, 3, yet more frequently qvo- 
X<ta ; e^Sa^e and rivdaue. 

6. The reduplication of p is found in Homer, in peptnrco^eVos, from pvir6<a, to 
make dirty. On the contrary, the Epic and poetic Perfects, efi/xopa from /xeipofxat 
and io-0-vp.at from <reva>, are formed according to the analogy of those beginning 
with p, i. e. by Metathesis ; hence ip.p.opa, etc., instead of fj.ep.opa. — The Epic 
and Ion. Perf. of KTao/xai is tKT'qp.ai. A strengthened reduplication is found in 
the Horn, forms SeiSe'xarcu and SetSe/cro. 

7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the 
reduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the simplo 
augment e is commonly omitted; thus, e. g. koju^w, to grow weary, Subj. Aor. 
Kei<dfj.w ; Ke\ofj.at, to command, £K£K\6p.r\v) kXvw, to hear, Aor. Imp. k4k\v&i, 
fce/cAuTe; Xayxduw, to obtain, KeAaxov ; \ap.f3dvco, to receive, AeAa/3eV&at ; 
A a vS dv<a, lateo,to escape notice, AeAa^ov ; irei&a, to persuade, ireiTidrov, Trcirt&6- 
\it)v\ repirco, to delight, tct pan 6 p.nv ; rvyxdvu, to obtain, t*tvk€?v, TtrvKzoStat; 
4>ENH, to murder, eirecpvov, iri<pvov\ <ppd£a>, to say, to shax. ni<ppahov y iir4<ppa8ov. 
Aorists with the Att. reduplication (comp. § 124, Rem. 2) commonly take the 
augment: 'APH, to Jit, jjp-apov; 'AXfi, to grieve, ^K-axou; dAe£«, to ward off, 
ij\-a\Koy, dAaA/ce«/ ; opvvut, to excite, iop-opou ; £vlirTu>,to chide, iv-evtirov. Two 



260 DIALECTS. [$ 220. 

verbs in the Aor. take the reduplication in the middle of the word : viz. 4vlirT<a t 
yv-TTTaTrev, and epu/cta, to restrain., ypv-Kanov, ipvicaKeeu/. Comp. the Presents, 
ovivq/xif ariTaWco, oimrTevca. 

8. In the Dialects, there are still other forms of the Perf. and Plup. with the 
Att. reduplication (§ 124) ; thus, e. g. atp4cc, to take, Ion. ap-aipriKa, ap-alpr)p.ar, 
aKaofiai, to wander, Epic Perf. with a Pres. signification aA-aA^ot; 'APXi 
(apapicrKw), to fit, Poet, ap-apa, I fit, (Intrans.), Ion. opjpa; 'AXD. (a/ccix'T^)? & 
grieve, Epic and Ion. aK-r]x e f xaL i ewc-ax 7 ?/" " 5 'ENEKft (<p4pw), to carry, Ion. £v 
■fli/eiy/uai; epet7rco, to demolish, Poet. £p-j)pnra, Epic 4p-4pnrTo; 4pl£w } to contend^ 
Epic 4p-T]pi(r/j.ai. 

§220. Per sonal- endings and Mode-vowel s. 

1. Eirst Pers. Sing. Act. The original ending -^t of the first Pers. Sing., is 
found in the Epic dialect in several subjunctive > e. g. Krdvwfu, aydyw/xi, Ti>x<»fii, 
'ikco/xi, £&4\a>fj.i, idwfjLi. Comp. § 116, 1. 

2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. In the Dor., and particularly in the iEol. and Ep. 
dialect, the lengthened form -a&a is found (§ 116, 2). In the Ind., this 
belongs almost exclusively to the conjugation in -/it, e. g. Tib-no-fra, <prj<x&a, 
5i5otcr&a, Traprjcr&a. In Homer, this ending is frequent in the Subj., e. g. e'&e'Apo-- 
&a, et7r?7(r^a, more seldom in the Opt., e. g. KAaioicr&a, jSaAotcr&a. 

3. Instead of the ending -eis, the Dor. frequently bas the old form -es, e. g. 
rinrres instead of rvirreis ; so in Theocritus o-vplcrdes = avpifas. 

4. Third Pers. Sing. Act. In the Epic dialect, the Subj. sometimes has the 
ending -ai, (arising from -ti) appended to the usual ending of the Subj., e. g. 
4&4\r)(ri(u), &yr)<ri, aAaA/q?<rt; the Opt. only in irapacpSai-nai. 

5. Instead of the ending -et in the Pres. Ind. of the Dor. dialect, the form -rj 
is used, though seldom, e. g. didda-KTj instead of StSaV/cet. In the second and 
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Act., Theocritus uses the endings -tjs, --n instead of -ay, 
-e, e. g. ttgtt6v&i)s, ottcoitt] instead of Tr4irov^as, oirooire. 

6. Eirst Pers. PI. Act. The Dor. dialect has retained the original ending 
-pes, e. g. TVTTTOjj.es instead of tv-kto^v (§ 204). 

7. The third Pers. PI. Act. of the principal tenses, in the Dor. dialect, ends 
throughout in -vti, e. g. tvtttovti (instead of tvtttov<ti), tv^ovti, tvtttoovti 
(instead of TvirTuxri), TeTvcpauTi, 4ttcuv4ovti, 4^airaT(auTi. In the ^Eol. and Dor., 
this ending in the Pres. and Eut. is -oici instead of -ou<n, e. g. Trepnrp4oi<n{v), 
va[oi<ri{v). 

8. Personal endings of the Plup. Act. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, the 
following forms occur : — 

Eirst Pers. Sing., -ea the only Epic and Ion. form (-77 old Att., § 116, 6), e. g. 
4T€^Tjirea, f!5ea, ireirolfrea instead of 4Tefrf]ireu' i etc. 
Second " " -eas, e. g. eVed^Treas, Od. a, 90, instead of eT&S^7rets. 
Third " " -ee(v), e. g. 4yeyovee, /caTaAeAonree, 4fiefip&Keev (not Horn.). 

Second " PI. -eWe, e. g. o-vmjZeaTe, Her. 9, 58. 

Remark 1. The third Pers. Sing. Plup. Act. in -et, as well as the same 
Pers. of the Impf. in -et, is found in Homer before a vowel with the j/paragogic; 



220.] PERSONAL-ENDINGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 263 

thus, effryKeiv, H. ^, 691. fePX-fiKeiv, H. e, 661. &, 270. |, 412. 5e5et7Tj/7jKetv, Od. 
p, 359 ; — ija-Keiu, II. 7, 388. 

9. The second and third Pers. Dual of tr^e historical tenses are sometimes 
exchanged for each other. Thus in Homer, the forms -rov and -o-frov (second 
Pers. Dual) stand instead of -7-771/ and -o-frnv (third Pers. Dual), e. g. BidiceToy, 
II. k, 364. \a<pvcrcreToi>, II. or, 583. froopiiccsaSov, H v, 301. On this inter- 
change in Attic, see § 116, Bern. 

10. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Ind. and Suhj., Impf. Ind. and Opt. Mid. or 
Pass., the first Aor. Mid. Ind., after dropping <r, remain uncontracted in the 
Ion. and often in the Epic dialect, e. g. eTrn-e'AAecu ; Homer uses either these 
forms, e. g. AeiTrecu, AtAcuecu, acpiKqai, ipvaffeai, eTravpjcu, inve% vcrao, iystvao, or 
the contract forms, -77 (from -ecu), -eu (from-eo), -co (from -ao), e.g. en-Aeu, %px ev > 
<ppd(eu, iKpe/xw. When the characteristic of the verb is e, it is very frequently 
omitted in the Ion. dialect, before -eat and -eo, e. g. <pi\4at instead of <piAe'ecw, 
<pi\4o instead of <pi\eeo ; so in Homer, e'/cAe", H. co, 202, yet with the variation 
e/cAe' from KAeo/xai, Comp. § 222, B (3). — The ending -eo in Homer is 
lengthened into - e t 0, e. g. eoeio, <T7re?o, and the ending -eecu is contracted into 
-eta*, in verbs in -e'co, e. g. /tv&e?cu, veT/cu. Homer sometimes drops <r in the 
second Pers. Sing. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, also, viz. pefivriai (and /.Ufivr)), 
04{$\r)ai, iacrvo. 

11. The Dual endings -rr\v, -(rfrrjv, and first Pers. Sing. -/j.t}v, in the Doric 
are, -rdv, -<r&av, -p.a.v (§ 201, 2), e. g. z<ppa<T<xjj.av. In the later Doric, the 
change of 77 into d is found, though seldom, even in the Aor. Pass., e. g. eVuTrdv 
instead of irinrriv. 

12. The personal-endings -fxe^ov, -/ue&a, in Epic, as well as in Doric, Ionic, 
and Attic poetry, often have the original forms -fj.ecr&oi/, -/xecr^a, e. g. Tvitro^a- 

13. The third Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., in the Ionic and Epic 
dialect, very generally ends in -arai, -aro, instead of -vtcu, -vto, e. g. irenel- 
frarai, TmravaTai, £{iefiov\eva.TO, eVTaAaro ; very often also the third Pers. PL 
Opt. Mid. or Pass, is -oiaro, -aiaro, instead of -oivto, -cuj/to, e. g. TinrrolaTo 
instead of tvtttoivto, ap^aXaro (Homeric), instead of a.py\aa.ivro. Also the 
ending -euro, in the Ion. dialect, has this change, though the o before v becomes 
e, e. g. e'/SouAe'aTo instead of ifiovkovro. In verbs in -aw and -e'w, the 77 in the 
ending of the Perf. and Plup. -^vrai, -tjjto, is shortened in the Ionic into e, e. g. 
oiKearai instead of u>Kt)vrai from oik4w, eVer^e'ciTo instead of eVer^j/To from 
Tifidu. Also instead of -avrai, the Ionic dialect has -earai (instead of -darcu), 
e. g. ireirreaTai instead of ireirravTai. ^K-rtiKarai, in Herodotus, from the Perf. 
acplyfiai (Prcs. acpiKueoficu) is the only example in which the rule stated § 116, 
5, is not observed. 

Rem. 2. Two Perf. and Plup. forms arc found in Homer with the ending 
• Sotoi, -Soto, from verbs whose characteristic is not 8, viz. e'AatVco (e'Aaco) 
4\7}Aafxat e'ATjAaoaTO, Od. 77, 86, and cucaxifa a.K'hx*t iai ax-nxioarai, II. 0, 637 ; tlio 
8 seems to be merely euphonic ; yet it is to be noted, that the reading is not 
wholly settled ; the forms ipfxxbarai and ippdZaro (from palvw) must be derived 
from the stem 'PAZn (comp. pdaaare, Od. v, 150). 



262 DIALECTS. [$ 220. 

14. The third Pers. PI. Aor. Pass, -rjcrav is abridged into -ev, in the Doric, 
and also frequently in the Epic and poetic dialect, e. g. rpd<pev instead of irpA- 
<prj(rav. In the Opt. this abridged form is regular in the Common language 
(§ 116, 7), e. g. Tvcpdre7ev instead of rvcp^elrja-au. 

15. The third Pers. PI. Imp. Act. in -two-ow, and Mid. or Passfin c&axrav, is 
abridged in the Ionic and Doric dialect (always in Homer) into -vtuv and -ofteov 
(§ 116, 12), e. g. tvtttovtwv instead of tvttt tTaxrav, irtiroi&ovTuv instead of ireiroi- 
frtTaxTav, TVTTTe<r&(t)v instead of rvn-rea^wcrav. 

16. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. co and rj, are very frequently 
shortened in the Epic dialect into o and e, according to the necessities of the 
verse, e. g. ?o/xev instead of Xtofiev) <p&i6pe<T&a instead of -cfytefra; ffrpicperai 
instead of -rjrot (§ 207, 4). 

17. The first Aor. Opt. Act., in the JEolic dialect ends in -em, -eias, -etc, etc., 
third Pers. PI. -etov, instead of -atfxi, -cus, -at, etc., third Pers. PI. -oxcv. See 
§ 116, 9. 

18. Infinitive. The original full form of the Inf. Act. is -fxevaiy and with 
the mode-vowel, -eleven, which is found in the Epic, Doric, and JEolic dialects. 
This form is sometimes shortened into -fiev (-e'yuev) by dropping at, sometimes 
into -»/ at by syncopating fie (e/j.e). But in the Epic dialect, the ending -eiv also 
is found, formed from -e/j.ev, and in contract verbs, and in the second Aor., also 
the endings -Uw and -etV. The Pres., Eut., and second Aor. take the mode- 
vowel e and the ending -/xev, hence -4/j.ev, e. g. rvirr-e-fiev, rvipefiev, cnre/iey. — 
Verbs in - a co and - e co, as they contract the characteristic-vowel a and the 
mode-vowel e of the Inf. ending -4/j.evai, have the form -^/xevai, e. g. ycyfj/xeuai 
(yodw), (piAr)/JL€vai (<pi\4a>), (pop-q/xevai (cpopeca). — With the ending -'fj/xevai corre- 
sponds that of the Aorists Pass., e. g. rvKT](xevai instead of rvjrrivai, aoAAtcr 
frft/xevai ; so always in the Epic dialect ; but the Doric has the abridged form in 
-7j/A6j/, e. g. Tvirrjfxei/. — In the Pres. of verbs in -/xi, the ending -fiev and -/xeuai is 
appended to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in the second Aor. Act., to 
the pure stem, e. g. ri&4-/j.ev, Ti&e-fxevai, la-rd-fJLeu, lcrrd-fj.evai, 8id6-nev, 5i56-fj.evai, 
SeiKvv-fjLey, Seucvv-fievai:, &4-/x€V, &4-/Aevcu, <$6-/A€V, dS-fievai, SO also in Perfects 
derived immediately from the stem of the verb, e. g. re^vd/xiv, fiefiduev. The 
following are exceptions, viz. ri^rj/j-evai, II. \p, 83 (with which the forms of the 
Pres. Part. Mid. n^^vos, kixvh-^os, correspond), StSouvat, II. eo, 425, also the 
Inf. second Aor. Act. of verbs in -a and -u, which also retain the long vowel 
(§ 191, 2), e. g. (TT^-fievai, firj-fjievcu, Sv-Lievai, insfead of arrival, ovvai. 

19. Besides the forms in -4fj.evai and -4/iev, the Doric dialect has one in -ev 
abridged from these, e. g. ayev instead of ayeiv, Eut. appSaev instead of apfxS- 
creiv ; second Aor. Idev instead of I5e?v, AajSeV instead of AajSe?;/, etc. In the 
Doric of Theocritus, the JEol. Inf. ending -tjv is found, e. g. x a ' l P'*) v i second 
Aor. Aa£?>, instead of x a ' l P eiv i *-a/3e«/. 

20. The Inf. ending of the Aor. Pass. -r)fxevaL, -rifxev, is abridged into -t]v in 
the Doric writers, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. fie&vofrriv instead 
of -fr?ivat. The Inf. ending of the Perf. Act. varies between -t\v and -etv in 
the Doric and JEolic writers, e. g. Te8rewpi)ic7)v, yeySveu/ instead of refrewprjicemi, 
y*yov4vai. 



4$ 221, 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS 263 

21. Participle. The JEolic dialect has the diphthong oi instead of ov before 
<r in participles, and ai instead of d, e. g. riirrwv, rvirroiaa, tvtttov, Aaj3o?(ra, 
\iiro7(ra instead of -ovo-a; rvtyats, -cura, instead of rv^/ds, -acra (§§ 201, 2, and 
207, 1). The Epic dialect can lengthen the accented o into u in the oblique 
cases, e. g. /xefiauros, irecpvwras. — The Perf. Act. Part., in the Doric dialect, 
sometimes takes the ending of the Pres., e. g. TretyplKovres instead of TrecppiKSres. 



§ 221. Epic and Ionic Iterative form. 

1. The Ionic and particularly the Epic dialect, and not unfrequently, in 
imitation of these, the Tragedians, have a special Impf. and Aor. form with the 
ending -ckov, to denote an action often repeated, or continued. This is called 
the Iterative form. It is regularly without the augment. 

2. It is generally found only in the Sing, and in the third Pers. PI. Ind. of 
the Impf. and Aor., and is inflected like the Impf. ; for in the Impf. and 
second Aor. Act. and Mid., the endings -o-kov, -ovcey, <nee(i/), -o~k6ijlt]v, -o-/coi»(eo, ev), 
-cTceTo, preceded by the union-vowel e, are used instead of -ov, -6fj.r)v, and in the 
first Aor. Act. and Mid. the endings -acrKov, -ao-K6ii.t\v are used instead of -a, 
-dy.r\v, e. g. 

(a) Impf. Siyev-eo-KOP, S-eA-ec/ces, eV-eo'/cefr), 7reA-eo7ceTo, fioffK-iffKOVTO. In 
verbs in -dw, -dzffKov is abridged into -affKov, which, according to the necessities 
of the verse, can be again lengthened into -dao*Kov, e. g. vucaffKonev, vaierdacr- 
kov. Verbs in -eo> have -hffKov and -co'kov, e. g. tcaAe-ecrne, {SovKoAeecKe ; o3!xi/e<r- 
kov, 7ro)A.eV/ceTo, /caAec/ceTo ; when the verse requires, -hatcov can be lengthened 
into -eleaKov, e. g. i/eiKeUcncov ; verbs in -6ca do not have this Iterative form 
among the older authors ; verbs in -fit omit the mode-vowel here also, e. g. 
Tide-o-Kov, Sldo-cicov, SeiKvv-o-Kov ; in some verbs the ending -affnov has taken the 
place of -eo-KOV, e. g. ptirT-ao'KOU, Kpinrr-affKov, from p'nrTco, KpinrTca. 

(b) Second Aor. eA-etr/ce, £ctA-eo7ce, (pvy-eo-ice ; in verbs in -jxi, without a mode- 
vowel, e.g. (TTa-tr/ce ( = e(mj), irapefidaKe (= irapefir)), 86o~Ke, 8v<nce; also an 
Iterative form of the second Aor. Pass, is found, viz. (pdveo-nz instead of i<pdvr), 
II. A, 64. Od. ft, 241, 242. 

(c) Eirst Aor. e'AdVaavcej/, avS^a-ao-Keu, #<r-a07ce, ^yrjc-atnceTo, ayvtiff-aaice 
(instead of aypo-fio-acrice from ayvoew). 



$ 222. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs. 

I. The Epic dialect. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -dw, -kw, -6<a, are subject 
to contraction, but by no means so generally as in the Attic. The contraction 
is made according to the general rules, with a few exceptions, as will be seen in 
the following remarks. 

A. Verbs in -da>. (1) In these verbs, the uncontracted form occurs only in 
certain words and forms, e. g. irepaoi/, Kareffictaov, vaierdovai ; always in uAaw, and 
in verbs Avhich have a long a for their characteristic, or whose stem is a mono* 
syllable, e. g. SupcLwv, ireivdMV, expae, ixpdeTe (from XP& W > io aii ack) 



264 DIALECTS. [$ 222. 

(2) In some words, a is changed into e, viz. jxevolveov from fit-voivdv, jjvreoy 
from oWda>, dfiSicXeov from b/xoKXau. Comp. § 201, 1. 

(3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted forms, the contracted syllable 
is resolved, as often as the measure requires it ; this is done by inserting a simi- 
lar vowel, commonly shorter, more seldom longer, before the vowel formed 
by contraction 5 in this way, a is resolved into ad or dd, and <a into 000 or wu> 
(§ 207, 2). The short vowel is used here, when the syllable preceding the 
contracted one is short, e. g. (bpS>) bp6o ; but if this syllable is long, the long 
vowel must be used on account of the verse, e. g. yfidxaca. The resolution does 
not take place with the vowel d before a personal-ending beginning with r, 
e. g. Spa-rat., dpa-To. Thus : — 



(©poets) 


Spas 


Spaas 


(opda) 


bpoH 


6p6u) 


(bpdea&ai) 


dpa(r&ai 


opaa(r&ai 


(opdovca) 


bpSxra 


6p6co<ra 


(fievoivdei) 


fxevoiva 


fievoipda 


(fiodovcri) 


fiovcri 


& 060MT1 


(*W 


ids 


i&as 


(opdoi/ju) 


bpwjj.1 


OpOCpfXL 


(fivdeoftcu) 


fj.va(T&ai 


fxvaaaSai 


(Spaovai) 


ZpSxfi 


dpctxtxri. 



Remark 1. In Od. £, 343, the form '6prjai (from bpdeai) occurs instead of the 
bpridi, which Eustath. cites. In the following Dual forms, oe is contracted into 
77 : Trposav8r)T7)v, avXiiT-qv, avvavvi)TT\v , <poiT7)Tr)v instead of -drr]v ; so also in the 
two verbs in -ea>, b/JLapTrjTrjv, airei\7)Ti)v instead of -e'iTr]V. 

4. When vt comes after a contracted vowel, a short vowel may be inserted 
between vr and such a contracted syllable, e. g. Tifi&ovra instead of r)Pa>vTa, 
yeXdoj/res, [xvwovto ; in the Opt. also, the protracted - a 1 instead of -cp is found 
in ijfiuoi/jLi (instead of ^/3aoi/n = i)fScpfju). The following are anomalous forms : 
vaierdaxra (instead of -cWa), <rd<a, second Pers. Imp. Pres. Mid. and third Pers. 
Sing, Impf. Act. from 2AX2, to save. 

Rem. 2. On the Inf. in -faevai of verbs in -aw and -4ca, see § 220, 18, and on 
the Epic-Ionic contraction of o-r\ into «, see § 205, 5. 

B. Verbs in -ew. To this conjugation belong also all Futures in -ew and 
-4o/j.ai, all second Persons in -eo, -ecu, and -tjcu, second Aor. Inf. Act. in -eW, 
and the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -e'a> and -efa. 

(1) Contraction does not take place in all forms in which e is followed by the 
vowels a), o>, 77, j], 01, and ov y e. g. (piXew/xev, (piXioipn, etc. ; yet such uncontracted 
forms must commonly be read with Synizesis. In other instances, the contrac- 
tion is either omitted according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. <pi\4ei, ipea> 
Eut., oTpvviovffa Eut., jSaAeW second Aor. Act., ire<r4e<r^ai Eut. Mid., /iiyeooin 
second Aor. Subj. Pass. ; or contraction takes place, and then, when eo is con- 
tracted, it becomes eu (§ 205, 1), e. g. alpevfxriv, avrevv, yevev ; except avsppiirrow 
and iirSpfrovv. 

(2) Sometimes the open e is lengthened into et (§ 207, 1), e. g. eVeAeteTo, 
ireXeiou, TrAeiety, oKveia ; — Scu^eta instead of dap.w, p-iye'iy -instead of puyf) 
(second Aor. Subj. Pass.). 

(3) In the ending of the second Pers. Sing. Pres. Mid. or Pass., two Epsilons 
coming together are either contracted, as in the third Pers., e. g. fiv&e-eai 
= fivfre?ai, like jU,u3-e?Tot, veiai y like veirai, or one e is elided, e. g. /xv&eai, 



§ 222.] CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS. 265 

irwKecu. This elision commonly occurs both among the Epic and Ionic writers, 
in the second Pers. Impf. and Imp. Pres. Mid. or Pass., e. g. cpofreo, cuce'o, aheo, 
efyyeo. In such cases, the accent is on the penult, whether the word ends with 
-eot or -eo (§ 220, 10). ' 

Rem. 3. On the irregular contraction in the Dual, see Rem. 1 ; on the Inf. 
in --fifievcu, see § 220, 18. 

C. Verbs in -6 a. These verbs follow either the common rules of contrac- 
tion, e. g. yowov/xai, yovpova&ai, or they are not contracted, but lengthen o into 
w, and then the forms of verbs in -oca resemble those of verbs in -aw, e. g. 
tfipcbouTa, Idpdovo-a, virpcaopras (comp. rj^coovra, 4 above) ; or they become wholly 
analogous to verbs in -aw, since they resolve -oven (third Pers. PI. Pres.) into 
-owo-i, -ovuro into -6 co pro, and -o?ev into -ocpev, and consequently suppose a 
contraction like that of verbs in -aw: (dp6ovcri) dpovci dpocao-i (comp. op6cao~i), 
(StjiSovto) Btjiovpto d-qiocapro (comp. bp6cavTo), (hi\'i6oiev) §%> c?p Srj'iocaep (comp. 
bp6caev). But this resolution into -6ca or -wo is confined to such forms as admit 
it in verbs in -aw ; hence, e. g. the Pres. dpo?s, dpo?, dpovre, and theulnf. dpovp, do 
not admit this resolution. 

II. Ionic dialect. (1) In the Ionic dialect, only verbs in -aw and -6a> suffer 
contraction ; verbs in -e'w commonly omit it, except the contraction of -eo and 
-eov into -eu, which frequently occurs (§ 205, 1), e. g. <pi\edfj.ev instead of cpi\4o- 
ficp = (piXovpev, icpiXevp instead of icpiXeop = i(pi\ow, (ptAeu instead of <pi\-4ov 
= <pi\ov. 

(2) The uncontracted forms exhibited in the table (§ 135) of the second 
Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Mid. or Pass, in -e'77, -dy, -6ri, -eov, -dov, -6ov, e. g. 
<pi\4rj, Tt/m??, /uua&or), cpiXeov, rifxaov, fxicr&6ov, etc., are found in no dialect, and 
are presented merely to explain the contraction. Eor even the Ionic writers 
use here the contracted forms of verbs in -dca and -6ca, e. g. n/xa, fxia&oT, ri^ca, 
fiicr&ov, etc. ; but of verbs in -e'w, as also in barytone verbs, they do not use the 
endings -77, -ov, but -eat, -eo, e. g. T^rr-eat, ervirr-eo, cpi\4-eai, icpiXe-eo. — On the 
elision of e in the ending -e'eo, see above, No. 1, B (3). 

(3) Verbs in -aw follow the common rules of contraction; but in the uncon- 
tracted form, the a is changed into e, e. g. bpica, bpeofiep instead of dpdea, xpeerai, 
XpeopTai instead of xP^ Ta h etc. Comp. § 201, 1. 

(4) Ao in the uncontracted forms is frequently lengthened into e'w (§ 207, 3), 
e. g. X9^ 0iVTai i 4kt4copto, bpecapres, ireLpeca^evos instead of (xpdoprai) xP"> vral > 
etc. 

(5) The change of the a into e, as in <5pe'w, explains the usage among the Ion. 
writers of sometimes contracting ao and aov, and also eo and eov in verbs in 
-e'w, into -eu (§ 205, 1), e. g. elpcarevp instead of elpcaraop, yeXevaa instead of 
yeXaovcra, dyairevpres instead of dyandopres. So also in the Doric dialect, e. g. 
yeXevpn instead of yexdovcru This contraction into eu instead of ov is often 
found even in verbs in -6ca, e. g. diKaievai instead of (8iKat6ovcri) Sikcuovcti, 
SiKaievv instead of Sucaiovp, iSiKalevp, crrecpapevprai from crTe<pap6co. 

(6) In Ionic prose, the Epic resolution is found but seldom in verbs in -dw, 
e. g. Kopi6cacn y r\yop6caPTO, Her. 

23 



266 DIALECTS. [$ 223 

III. Doric dialect. (1) Contrary to the common usage of the Doric, ae and 
aei are contracted into 77 and r> (§ 205, 3), e. g. rifxrJTe instead of ri/xdere = 
rifxaTe, (poirfjs instead of <poiras, bpr\v instead of bpav. The Inf. is written 
without an t subscript, as the uncontracted form originally ended in -aiv 
Comp. also II. 5, also § 134, 3. 

(2) The Inf. of verbs in -ew has a double form, either the abridged form in 
-4v instead of -civ, e. g. iroi4v instead of 7roieZj/, or according to the analogy of 
verbs in -aw, a form in -qv (from -4r\v), e. g. <pihrjv instead of <pi\4eiv = <pi\eiv, 
KocrySiv instead of Kocrfxe?v, (ppovrjv instead of cppove7y. 

(3) In the Doric and JEolic dialects, -ao, -aov, and -aw are contracted jito a 
(§ 205, 2), e. g. i7eij/ajj.es instead of Treiua>[xeu {ireivdo^v), ireivauri instead of 
T€w(a-ou)w-<n, yeXau instead of ye\(d-(oj/)cov, (pvaajrres instead of (pv(r(d-o)a>-vTes. 

Eem. 4. On the contraction into -eu instead of -ou, see § 205, 1. — A striking 
peculiarity of the Doric dialect, especially of the later Doric as used by The- 
ocritus, is, that it frequently has a long a even in the inflection of verbs in -ew, 
e. g. iirovaara instead of ki(6vr\<sa. from «wew, icpiXcura instead of e^tATjca from 
<pik4u. 

$ 223. Formation of the Tenses. 

1. Besides the verbs mentioned (§ 130), the following also in the Homeric 
dialect retain the short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. kot4u>, to 
have a grudge ; veucea), to quarrel ; ravvca, to stretch ; ipvw, to draw. On the con- 
trary, eVau/ew, to approve, has 4ir-pvri<Ta. 

2. In the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. of pure verbs, which retain the 
short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, and in the same tenses of verbs 
in -£w, -<r<rw (-ttw), the a can be doubled in the ending, in Homer and other 
non- Attic poets (§ 208, 4), e. g. iyeAa&ae, Korea-ffd/xeuos, bfxdffaai, irdvvffixe, 
hindacrcu, k6jj.kt(T€. 

3. The form of the Attic Fut. (§ 117) occurs in the Homeric dialect in verbs 
in -ifa, c. g. Krepiovo-i, ay\a'ie?<r&cu, together with the common Futures bp(x.l<r<ro- 
(j.ev, KoirptcrcrovTes, Kovi<raovcn{v). From verbs in \-ew, -doo, -u«, Horn, forms 
Futures which are similar to the present of these words, viz. in verbs in -ew, he 
often uses the ending -4a> instead of -ec«, e. g. nop4ei, II. $-, 379. nop4eis, II. v, 
831. fiaxeourcu, II. /3, 366 ; — in verbs in - aw, after dropping <r, he places before 
the vowel formed by contraction, a corresponding short vowel, e. g. aur i6u, 
i\6co<ri, da/j.da; — in verbs in - v w, ipvovcri and ravvovcri are found. 

4. In the Doric dialect, all verbs in - (^w take £ instead of a in those tenses 
whose characteristic is <r, i. e. in the Fut. and Aor., e. g. $i/ca£w, S</ca£w, e5i/ca£a, 
instead of 81/cacrw, itiiccxra,. But the other tenses of verbs with the pure charac- 
teristic 5, follow the regular formation, e. g. iSiKda^rrjv, not eSi/cdx^??*'. This 
peculiarity of the Doric appears even in certain verbs in -aw, wbich, in forming 
the tenses, retain the short a, and in this respect are analogous to those in -(to, 
which likewise have a short vowel, e. g. ye\dcc, £y4\a£a instead of £y4\aoa, yet 
not viicdcc, j/i/cd£w, but vikcutco (Att. vucf)<rw). In Doric poetry, the regular form 
of all these words can be used, according to the necessities of the metre. 

5. The following verbs in -£w have, in Homer and the Ionie dialect, £ instead 



$ 223. J FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 26? 

of cr, through the whole formation, viz. afipord^a, to wander; aXaird^w, to 
empty, Eut. akaird^u, etc. (so also Xenoph. An. 1. 1, 29) ; 5j/o7raAi£o>, to shake; 
dai £&>, to divide, to put to death ; iyyvaKl fa>, to give ; iuapi £a> , to spoil a dead 
enemy; &pt/A.\[(w, to break in pieces ; fiepp.r]pi(co, to reflect; 7r e A e ^ t £"w, to 
shake ; ir o A e p. i £a>, to contend ; tr t v </> e A i £a>, to smite. 

6. Liquid verbs in -at va>, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with the 
ending -ava instead of --nva. (§ 149, Rem. 2), have d in the Doric, and 77 in the 
Epic and Ionic. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and poetic dialect of 
all periods, form the Eut. and first Aor. with the ending -<xo) and -a- a, viz. 
KeAAw, to land (/ceAtrcu, comp. k4vgcu from kgvt4u>, to goad) ; eiXw, to crowd 
together (eAacu) 5 Kvpot, to meet, to fall upon; apapicKca ('AP-fi), to fit (^paa, ci.p<rai) ; 
op-vvpa, to excite (opera, 3>p<ra) ; Siacp&eipw, to destroy (diacp&epcrcu in Homer) ; 
Keipa), to shave (eKepaa in Homer, but first Aor. Mid. iKeipd/xrjv) ; (pvpw, to mix, to 
knead ((pvpcrw, eepvpaa, ircepvpo'op.ai, Epic and old poetic; second Aor. Pass. 
i(pvpr)v in Lucian, who also has the poetic Perf. ir4(pvpp.ai, while in prose, the 
verb (pvpdo), i<pvpaaa, TT€<pvpap.ai, etc., is used). The Opt. 6(p4\\eiev, Od. fi, 334. 
H. it, 651, is formed according to the usage of the JEolic. 

7. To verbs which form the Eut. without the tense-characteristic a (§ 154, 4) 
belong the following forms of the Epic dialect : fi4op.cu or fie'iop-ai, second Pers. 
fiey, I shall live, perhaps from fiaivw, to go, to live, also from AAX1, to know, to 
learn, and KEIQ. (Ke?p.ai, to lie down), S-qoo, 5-neis, dr)op.eu, S^ere (I shall view, find), 
and Kelto or k4w, Kei4p.ev, Ketcov, k4cjv. 

8. To verbs which form the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic or 
(§ 154, 7) belong the following forms of the Epic and poetic dialect: x e '«> to 
pour out, exeua (Homer; Att. ex ea ) 5 ceva, to shake, zor<reva and iaaevd/x-ny 
(Homer). d\4op.ai and a\4vop.ai, to avoid, ??AevaTo, etc. (§ 230) ; Kaiw, to burn, 
6/070, e/ceto Epic, e/cea Tragic (§ 230). 

9. To verbs which have an active form for the Fut. Perf. (§ 154, 6), belongs 
also the Epic Kexap^o-co (with Kexapvo'op.ai), I shall be joyful, from x a ' l P u ' 

10. The exchange of the endings of the second Aor. with those of the first 
Aor. (§ 154, 7) is somewhat frequent in the Epic dialect, e. g. fSaivw, to go, 
e/3 17 ereTO, Imp. firiaeo ; Svo/xai, tophinge, eSucreTO, Imp. Svo-eo, Part. SvaSfieyos ; 
070*5 to lead, a£eTe, d^e/xeu ; Uviofxai, to come, T£ov; i\4yp.r\v, I laid myself down 
to sleep, Imp. Ae£o, Ae£eo ; upvvpu, excito, Imp. upaeo, opcrev; <p4pw, to bear, 
olcre (olcre is also Att.), oftreTe, o\g4tq), oigovtoiv, ola4p.ev, olcr4p.evai ; adScc, to 
sing, Imp. aelffeo. 

11. Several second Aorists, in Homer, are formed by a Metathesis of the 
consonants (§ 156), in order to make a dactyle, e. g. Zhpanov instead of %ZapKov 
(from h4pKO/xcu), zirpc&ov (from 7rep&o>), eSpa&ov (from Sap&dua), tfixfiporov 
(instead of H]p.apTov from ap-ap-rdvoi). Eor the same reason Homer syncopates 
the stem (\ 155), e. g. ayp6p.evos from ayep4(rScu (dyeipco, to collect) ; eypero, 
eypeo (Imp.), typono, eypecr&cu (with the accent of the Pres.), iyp6p.evos from 
iyep4(T&cu (iyelpw, to wake) ; itt6p.t]v, iirr6p.r]v, iTT4crbai, irr6p.evos (ir4TOp.cu, to 
fiy) : e'/ce'/cAeTo, Ke/cAe-ro, KeK\6p.evos (ic4hop.ai, to summon, excite) ; ir4<pvov, eirtcj>vov 
(*ENH, to kill). 

12. In the first Aor. Pass. Homer inserts a v, aceording to the necessities of 



268 DIALECTS. [$ 223 

the verse, not only as other poets (§ 149, Rem. 4) in nplvco and kxIpu (SiaKpiv- 
d^Te, KpivSeis, eKXlvfrn), but also in ISpvoo, to establish, and irveco, to blow (Idpvy^rjy 
and Idpvfrnv, afXTrvvi/&r}) . 

13. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs 
as in the tense-formation assume an e (§ 166) or are subject to Metathesis 
(§ 156, 2), e. g. %a!ipa> KexdprjKa (from XAIPE-H), £aAA« fiefiX-ntta (from BAA). 
Except these, he forms only second Perfects (which belong commonly to 
intransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification) ; but even in pure verbs 
and in the impure verbs mentioned above, he rejects the k in certain persons 
and modes, and regularly in the Part. ; in this way, these forms become analo- 
gous to those of the second Perf. These participles either lengthen a and e into 
77, e. g. fSefiapricos, burdened (from BAPEH), KeKopt]ds, satisfied (from Kope-vw/ni), 
KenoTncos, enraged (from Korea), reri-ncos, troubled (from TIEH), TerX7]ds, enduring 
(from TAAn), KeKacpiqcos, gasping for breath (from KA^EXl), tceKfi-ncos, wearied (from 
Ka/xvco), TreiTTrjcas (from irr^crffco, to shrink through fear), re&wncbs, Ke/crrjoVt, Kexa- 
orjc&s (from x^P 00 ) 5 — or tne y retain, though more seldom, the stem- vowel without 
change, e. g. #e/3aws (from fiaivco, BAH), enyeyavia (from yiyvoficu, TAD.), deSacbs 
(from SidaffKco, AAX1), irecpiivla (from <pvco), eo-racos (from 'tcrr-nixi, 2TAX2), fxe^das 
(with (xen&ds and fxe/j.d6res from MAXi). The accented of the oblique cases 
can, in the first instance, according to the necessities of the verse, be lengthened 
into co, hence re&vrjoTos and -utos, re^urjora and -cora, KeKfi-nSra and -cora ; but 
when the Nom. has a short penult, co is always used (except in eo-TdSros), e. g. 
fiefidu>Tos. The ending -cos, formed by contraction, is resolved by e in ireirr^Ta 
(from ttltttco), re&vecoTi, and according to the necessities of the verse, e can be 
lengthened into ei, e. g. re^ueicoros. The feminine form - <£ <r a is found only in 
PePSxra, Od. v, 14 ; in some feminine forms, the antepenult, which properly would 
be long, is shortened on account of the verse, e. g. apdpvla (Fern, of aprjpcbs from 
apapl<TKw), /j.efJidKv7a (of /j.e/x'nKc&s, from fxr)icdo[MCu), refrdXvla (of refrnXcbs, from 
fraXXco), XeXdnvTa (of XeXrjKcos, from \do~Kco), Treira&v7a (from irdcTX(»). 

Remark 1. The form resolved by e, in the Ionic dialect, has become the 
permanent one with some participles, e. g. eo-Tedos; so Te&vecbs (never re&vcbs) 
and r&vriKtos from rebwt]Ka, remains even in the Attic dialect. In these forms, 
the co remains through all the cases, e. g. 

teredos, earecoaa, karecos, Gen. ecrrecoros, -cda-n's 
re&vecos, re&vecbara, re&uecos, Gen. re^uecoros, 'Coo~r)S. 

Bej37j/ca and reTX-nita never have these forms. Comp. § 193, Rem. 3. 

14. Some verbs, which in the stem of the Pres. have the diphthong ev, 
shorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect into v, in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and 
in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. 

irevfrofiai, to ash, ir eirvcr p.ai ; crevco, to shake, Mid. and Pass, to hasten, effav- 
fiai, first Aor. Pass. effavS'nv; revx<» (poet.), paro, Perf. rervyfiai, Aor. 
€T^x^' nv: > (p^vyco, to flee, Text ire<pvyfxevos. 

Rem. 2. X e.co (formed from x^w* X el "oo), to pour out, follows the analogy of 
these verbs, in the forms Kex^Ka, Kexvfiai, exv&w ; these forms have been trans- 
ferred to the Common language also (§ 154, Rem. 1). Contrary to the analogy 



$ 224. CONJUGATION IN -jXL. 269 

just stated, the v is long in the Homeric form itivvviiai from irvsca (irvsFw), to 
blow. 

Rem. 3. In Homer, Od. a; 238, the third Pers. Opt. Plup. \e\vro instead of 
\e\viTo is found, according to the analogy of TT-r\yvvTo, Zaivvro. 

Rem. 4. The Homeric Perfects anaxhiJ-tvos, dAaAri/j.evos, dprjpefievos, ikrjXdfa- 
vos. d/cax^o-^-at, aAdATja&ai, have the accentuation of the Pres. 

§ 224. Conjugation in -jxl, 

1. On the lengthened form of the second Pers. rl^yo-fra, didoiofta, see § 220, 
2; on the Iterative forms in -fficov, see § 221 ; on the Inf. forms in -fxevai, -/tey, 
see § 220, 18. 

2. In the Epic, Ion., and Dor. writers, some verbs in -/« in the second and 
third Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf., frequently have the contracted forms of verbs 
in -4a and -6co (§ 172, Rem. 8), e. g. r&els, Tid-e?, didois, Sido?, irifrei, idiSovs, 
eS/Sou, Ui ; — contracted forms of "(tttjijli are very rare, e. g. terry instead of 
'lo-TTio-i, Her. 4, 103. In the second Aor. Opt. Mid. the Ionic writers have the 
resolved form 3- e o i [xt] u, as if from ©EH, e. g. irposfreoiro, Trposfreoiofre. 

3. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -v/xi form an Opt., not only in the Mid., as 
sometimes in Attic writers, e. g. Scuvvto, U. w, 665. (comp. XeKvro, § 223, Rem. 
3), from Saiuv/xai, but also in the Act., e. g. iKdv/xev (instead of e/c5uj7?^ey) from 
e/c§ya), (pvr\ (instead of cpvtr)) from <pv<c, so <p&io, <p&?ro Opt. of i<pfriixr)i' from 
(pSriev. 

4. The third Pers. PI. Impf. and second Aor. in -e-ffav, -ij-a-av, -o-ffav, -ca-crav 
-v-aav, are abridged in the Epic and Dor. dialects into -ey, -av^ -ov, -vy, e. g. 
€Tt&ej/ instead of ertd-eo-ai/, ed-ev, &eV instead of e^ecraj/ ; %<rrdv, arav instead of 
%<TT7]<rav, <pbav instead of ecpShiaav, e/3cw, fidv instead of efirjcrau] %5i$ov, Sidov 
instead of iSidoaav, eSou, 5oV instead of edocrav ; Zcpvv instead of ifyvcav. 

5. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. Act. has in Horn, the common form 
'/(TT77, but II. :, 202. Ko£rl(TTa ; irorl&ei in Theoc. instead of iroTiSres or irpSs&es 
from TI0EH. — In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and second Aor. Mid. Imp., 
Homer rejects the a and admits the uncontracted form even when it could be 
contracted, e. g. dalwo, fidpuao, cpdo, avvbeo, «/&eo. — In the Ion. dialect, the first 
o of the ending -acrcu, second Pers. Mid. or Pass., is changed into e, after the 
rejection of the a, e. g. e 7r i <r t e a t, Svveai, instead of iiria-racraL, dvvacrcu ; hence 
the contracted forms 4 tt I a r rj in the Ion. poets, and also di/vy (§ 172, 2) in the 
Tragedians. 

6. The short stem-vowel is sometimes lengthened before personal-endings 
beginning with fx and p, according to the demand of the measure, e. g. ri^rjfxe- 
vos ; didovvcu ; so also 8i8&>&i, '(Ar)£n instead of 'Ihadn. 

7. The third Pers. Sing. Subj. has often in the Epic dialect the ending -<ri 
(§ 220, 4), e. g. 8£(ri and Sdoricri (instead of 8<£), fxeSrirjan. 

8. The contracted Subj. of verbs with the characteristic a and e, is sometimes 
resolved by e in the second Aor., Epic dialect, and regularly in the Ion. 

(a) Verbs in -a (IW^u) : — 

(l<rrd-\ Ictoo Ion. tare-a, iar4-JJS, IcrTe-ufxev, -e'-7}Te, -e-axrt 
(ot<£-) <ttS> " <TT€-a>, (rre-Tjs, <7Te-«/A€J/, etc. 

23*' 



270 



DIALECTS. 



[§ 224. 



Remark I. So also in Herod.: 7rpoe(rreaTe and e<xTe'a<n, to-reds, instead of 
*da<ri, -aws, Gen. earf-wTos, Neut. effrsws, Pem. eareaxra. So also in the Ait, 
re&veas (with tc^tj/cws), Te^ewcra, renews, Gen. refrvewros. 

(b) Yerbs in e (Ti^7}/j.i) : — 

Tt^w Ion. TL&e-w,Ti&4-r)s f r&4-wfj.ev, -6-tjtc, -i-cotri 
ti&co/acu " Ti&4-a>fj.ai, TiS-e-77, etc. 

&<£ " fre-co, S-6-77S, fre-co/xev, etc. 
frufxat " &4-a>fJ.ai, etc. 

Rem. 2. Here also the two Aorists of the Pass, of all verbs are like the 
verb riSmiu, e. g. 

TV1TUI, -7}S Ion. TU7T6CO, -677S, -4ti>[XeV, -67JT6 

So,u«, -77s " da.fj.4co, -4rjs, -4co l uev, -e7jTe 

eupe&a;, -rjs " €vpe&4co f -4rjs, etc. 

(c) Verbs in o (SiSw^i) ; the contracted second Aor. Subj. is "esolved in 
Homer by means of «, e. g. ScSaxrt instead of 8«<n. 

9. In the Subj. second Aor., Homer uses the following forms, according to 
the nature of the verse : — 





Contracted, 


Resolved and lengthened forms, 




Sing. 1. 


(TTCO 


cTTeco, cTTeico, fidonai 




2. 


crrffs 


ar-fiys 




3. 


crrf} 


crry-p, ififrfiri, <pT)ri, cpfrfjr} 




Dual. 


ffTTJTOV 


irap<TTri€Tov 




Bur. 1. 


(TTWfXev 


aT4cop.ev (dissyllable) crTeio/^ei/, KaTafieiofxcv 


2. 


arijTe 


(TT7J6T6 




3. 


CTTW(Ti{v) 


trr4wcri(v), TrepiaT-fiwcri, R. p, 95. 




Sing. 1. 


&w 


&4iv, id-eico, dafjL€Lio 




2. 


&VS 


&4ys, frhys, and fre'iys 




3. 


Stf 


&4y, 3-7777, awfpj, and fxefrdy 




Dual. 


StrjTov 


&derov 




Plur. 1. 


&cZ/j.ei/ 


S4to/J.ev, freto/xty 




2. 


$7)7-6 


Sa/xeiere 




3. 


&cocri(v) 


&4oocn(v), &ela)cri(v) 




Sing. 1. 


dec 






2. 


Beds 






3. 


5q> 


Scvr)cri(v) and 5c6?; 




Plur. 1. 


8a>,uej/ 


Scco/xeu 




2. 


5WT6 






3. 


dcctri(u) 


Scdcccn(v) 





Rem. 3. The resolution by means of e is found in verbs with the stem- 
vowels a or e; the e is commonly lengthened, (a) into et before an sound; 
(b) into 77 before 77 in verbs with the stem-vowel a; (c) sometimes into et, some- 
times into 77 before 77, in verbs with the stem-vowel e. Verbs with the stem- 
vowel are resolved by co. 

10. The Impf. iri^rqv. or commonly iri^ovi/, has in the Ion. the form tribea 
(like irervepea Ion. instead of irervcpeiv, § 220, 8), iri&ees, -ee, etc. 

11. In Homer, a shortened form of the first Aor. ecrrr]aav, is found, namely, 
tcTTacrav, they placed, II. fx, 56. Od. 7, 182. c, 307 ; also eo-TTjTe (with the variation 
e(TT?7Te), R. 8, 243, 246, instead of eWdTe (eoT77KaTe). 



f$225, 226.] CONJUGATION IN -fit. Et/xt, TO BE. ET//.1, TO GO. 271 

12. In the third Pers. PI. Mid. or Pass, the v hefore the personal-endings -tou 
and -to is regularly changed, by the Ion. writers, into a (§ 220, 13), e. g. 

r&eaTcu, SiSoarai, eSeiKvva.ro Ion., instead of T&evrai, etc. 
But when an a precedes the v, the a is changed into e, and v into a, c. g. larearai 
Ion., instead of '[crravrai, lo-rearo Ion., instead of 'lo-ravro. 

13. The third Pers. Sing, in the Doric is -n, e. g. 'Icrari, rfonTi, 8/oVri, deiK- 
j/Otj, and the third Pers. PI. ends in -vn, e. g. lo-ravri, Ti&evn, SiSovti, SeiKvvvri. 

14. The forms of the first Aor. Mid. eSnKa.fj.nv and e8wKdfj.r)v and the Part. 
SyriKaixeyos are found in the Ion. and Dor. writers ; on the contrary, the Att. 
writers use here also, the forms of the second Aor. Mid. The remaining 
Modes, as also the Part. doiKa.fji.evos, are not found. 

15. From Si'Soyzi, Homer has a reduplicated Put. di$cao~ofj.ev and StSwcreir. 



225. El fit ('E2-)> io be- 



PRESENT. 


S. 1. 
2. 

3. 

P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Indicative, 
efxfxi iEol.. instead of eV-^ai 
eWt Epic, also Eur. Hel. 1250. 

els Ion. 
eVri Dor. 

elfxev Epic and Ion. 
eVre' regular 
%affi(v) Epic and Ion., Ivri Dor. 


Subjunctive. 

1. ecu Ep. and Ion. fiereioi Ep. 

2. e??s Ion. 

3. e77, e'?7cn(z/), ycri(v), eXn Epic, e?? 
Ep. and Ion. 

PL ewfiev, enre, iWi Ep. and Ion. 


Imperative. 
S. 2. tWo iEol. and Epic 
P. 3. eovToov Ion. 


Inf. e/xevai, ejj.fji.evai, efiev, efxfxev Epic 
r)fxev or r)fies, eJ/xev or el/xes Dor. 


Participle, 
euv, eovcra, eov Ep. and Ion. 


IMPERFECT. 


S. 1. 

2. 

3. 
D.3. 
P. 1. 

2. 

3. 


Indicative. 

ea (comp. eri&ea), r)a, eov, eaKOV Epic and Ion. 
enoSa Epic, eas Ion. 

env Ep. and Ion. ijnu, i\ev, eo-Ke(v), Ep., fc Dor. 
fjaTnv Epic 

^uej/ or t) jj.es, elfiev Or eZ^ues Dor. 
eare Ion. 

etrav (eVecraz/) Epic and Ion. ; etaro (instead of 
t)vto) Od. v, 106. 


Optative. 

eois 

eoi Epic and Ion. 

elre Epic 
elev Epic 


Fut. eo-ofiai and eo~<To}iai, etc. Epic, according to the necessities of the verse, 
2. eo*eat. 3. efferai, iffeirai. 



22G. ETfu ('!-)> to g°- 



Frea. hid. S. 2. eTcrda Epic, e7s Ion. 
Inf. tfievai, Ifxev Epic 



£«&/. Sing. 2. Pers. fycrda Epic 



Impf Ind. S. 1 . 
2. 
3. 



rjla (and pet*/) Epic and Ion., tf'iov Epic 

ffi« (and fjeis), Us Epic 

ft'e (and ijei) Epic and Ion., ^i'e(j/) Epic, ye(v), U(v) Epic 



272 DIALECTS. [§ 227 

P. 1. f ijofxev 

3. ij'iov Epic, tf'icrai' and rjo-av Epic and Ion., 'Igolv Epic 
D.3. fryjz/Epic 
Opt. S. 3. Xoi Epic, iefy H. t, 209. (eV and efy II. o, 82. e», 139. Od. £, 496, 

come from elfxi). 
Fut. and J.or. Mid. et<xo[j.ou, eXaaro, third Pers. Dual eeicraer,^, II. o, 544. 



Verbs in -co, which in the Pees., Perf., and second Aor. Act. and 
Mid., follow the analogy of Verbs in -/*<. 

§227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 

In addition to the Aor. forms mentioned (§§ 191, 192), the poetic and 
especially the Epic dialect has the following : — 

A. The Characteristic is a Vowel. 

(a) Stem-Vowel a (efi-nv, BA-) : 

/JaAAcw, to throw, Epic second Aor. Act. (BAA-, efiX-nv) ^v^X-qrriv, Od. <p, 15, 
Inf. ^vfxfi\T}/j.ej/cu (instead of -ijvcu), II. <p, 578 ; Epic second Aor. Mid. (e$X-r\- 
H7]v) e^Xrjro, £v/j.fiXr)VTO, II. |, 27, Inf. fiXri<r&ai, Part. PXrj/xeuos, Subj. Iu^jSAtj- 
rai, p\-f)zTcu (instead of ^A^tjtcu), Od. p, 472, Opt. /3Ae?o (from BAE-, comp. 
irifxirX-qiii), II. v, 288. Hence the Put. fiXi'iaofiai. 

yrjpdco, or ynpdaKco, to grow old, second Aor. third Pers. Sing, eyfjpa, II. p, 197, 
Kareyripa, Herod. 6, 72, Inf. (Att.) ynpavai, Part. (Epic) yqpds. The d in 
iyrjpa, etc. is used instead of 77 on account of the preceding p. m See Sidpdcncco, 
§ 192, 1. 

KTeiVco, to Mil, Epic and poet, second Aor. Act. (KTA-) enrav retains the short 
vowel ; thus, eKra.fj.ep, eKTare, third Pers. PI. also etcrdv instead of eurdaav, 
Subj. Krai (first Pers. PI. Krecofiev Epic), Opt. KTairju, Inf. Krduai, (Epic KTdpev, 
KrdfjLevai), Part, /eras; Epic second Aor. Mid. with Pass, sense, dire/craTo, 
KTacrbai, KaraKrafiei/os. 

ovrdoo, to wound, Epic second Aor. Act. ovra third Pers. Sing., Inf. obrd/xeuat, 
obrdp-ev (the a remains short as in tv.rdv) ; Epic second Aor. Mid. ovrdfxeyos, 
wounded. 

treXdfa, to approach, Epic second Aor. Mid. eVA-j^ui^, (Att. iirXdfA7}v), irXrjro, 
irXrjvTO. 

ttXt)&oo (irtfAirXTj/Ai}, to fill, Epic second Aor. Mid. eirX-nro and ttXtjto, errX-nuro, 
also in Aristoph., who uses the following forms also : Imp. ttXwo-o, Part. efnrX-f}- 
fieuos, Opt. efxTrXrifx-nv with the variation iix-KXelfxy\v, as xp e ' ir ) from xpvi"-^) an( ^ 
j8Ae?o from efiXJux-qv (BAA-). 

irTrj<raa), to shrink with fear, Epic second Aor. Act. (nTA-) (eirT-qv) KaTa-Kr-hTrit 
third Pers. Dual. 

<p&dva), to come before, Epic second Aor. Mid. (p^d[xevos. 

Eemark. Prom e$r\v {fialva) are found in Homer the forms $q.ti]v (third 
Pers. Dual) and virepfrdo-w (third Pers. PI.) with the short stem- vowel. 



$ 227.] VERBS IN -W LIKE VERBS IN -fll. 273 

(b) Stem- Vowel e (fr-jS^, 2BE-): 

AAQ, Epic, stem of 8t5acnc&>, to teach, second Aor." Act. (AAE-) iSdrjv, I learned) 
Subj. Sow, Epic Saeiw, Inf. Sarjvcu, Epic Sarj/xevai. 

(c) Stem-Vowel t: 

<p&[-va>, to consume and to vanish, Epic second Aor. Mid. iQ&t/j.rjv, <pfri<rfrtu, <p&i' 
Hzvos, (p&lcrSw, (p&iu>/x.ai, Opt. (p^i^rjv, <p&tro. 

(d) Stem-Vowel o (eyjw, TNO-) : 

fiiPpuxTKGo, to eat, Epic second Aor. Act. efipwv. See § 161, 6. 
7rAwco (Epic and Ion. secondaiy form of 7rAe«), to sail,- Epic second Aor. Act. 
eirAau, eTrAwfiGv, Part. ttAws, Gen. ttK&vtos. 

(e) Stem- Vowel u (e5u*/) : 

kAu&> (poet.), to hear, Epic Imp. second Aor. Act. /cAvd-t, /cAure; and k4kKv&i, 

/ce'/cAuTe (§ 219, 7). 
Aua>, to loose, Epic second Aor. Mid. Auto, Kvuro. 
■xvio), to breathe, Epic second Aor. Mid. (I1NT-, from irveFw, Tryevw) ^/xnyvro 

instead of avzirvvro, to breathe again, 
arevw, to shake, Epic second Aor. Mid. iffffvfxvu, I strove, e<x<rvo, <rvro. 
Xew, to pour out, Epic second Aor. Mid. (XT-, from x^ a > X 6 ^) X^ VTO i X"^ vos > 



B. The Characteristic is a Consonant. 

oAAo^ch, to leap, Epic and second Aor. Mid. ahao, dAro, £ird.\p.evos, eVtaA^ej/oy, 

Subj. aKnrai. 
apapicTKU) ('AP-), to Jit, Epic frp/xevos, fitted, 
yeuro, to take, Epic, from F4\to, the Digamma being changed into y and the 

radical A before r into v (§ 203, B). 
yiyvoixai, to become, poet, eyevro, yivro. 
5e'xo^ot, to to/ce, Epic eSe/cTo, Inf. dex&ai, Imp. 8e£o. The first Pers. Sing. 

£§4yiAT)v and the Part. SiyfAzvos have, like the Perf. SeSey^ot, the meaning to 

expect, await. 
iXeAifa, to whirl, Epic eAeAtKTO. 

tKi/eofjicu, to come, Epic Tkto, '(K/xevos and tK/xevos, favorable. 
AEXH, to 7ie cfozrn, Epic i\ey/xr}v, eAe/cro, to /a// one's se//" cfozm (same sense as 

eAe£a,io?»/), Imp. Ae|o. — A67W, to collect, to choose, to count, Od. t, 335. i\4ypvnv t 

I counted myself , Od. 5, 451. Ae/cro apibfiSy, he counted the number, 
uialvco, to soil, Epic /xidv&nv (third Pers. Dual, instead of ipuav-aSnv). 
uiffyco {jxlyvvju), to mix, Epic (a'ikto. 

opvvu) {upvvfxi), to excite, Epic S>pro, Inf. updai, Imp. opffo, opazo, Part, opfxevos. 
•7ra\Ao>, to brandish, Epic ird\To, Ae Sprang. 

irep&w, to destroy, perdo. Homer uses irepSai instead of irepd-oSai. 
nHm (irriyvv/xi), to fix, Epic irf/KTO, k<xt£itt\kto. 



274 DIALECTS. [$ 228. 

$ 228. (2) Per/, and Plup. Act. (Comp. $§ 193, 194). 

(a) The Stem ends in a Vowel. 

yiyvo/xai, to become; TErAA, Stem TA: Perf. (Sing, y4yova, -as, -e) Epic and 

poet, yeydfiev, -are, -dao-i(v), Inf. Epic yeydfiev, Part. poet, yeyds, yeyaxra, 

yeyws, Gen. yeyuros ; — Plup. Epic eKyeydrr\v. 
Balvw, to go, Perf. BeBrjKa, BEBAA: Epic and poet. PI. BcBa.fj.ev, -are, -affi(v), and 

BeBdd<ri{v) ; third Pers. PI. Subj. ififePwri (PL Phaed. 252, e), Inf. BeBavai, 

Part. Epic BeBaws (also Attic prose BeB&s, Xen. Hell. 7. 2, 3), -v?a (PeB&ffa, 

PI. Phaed. 254, b), Gen. Bepawros (Att. 0e0wTos) ; — Plup. iB^dfiev, -are, 

=a<rai'. 
S'eiSco, to fear ; besides the forms mentioned (§ 193), the following Epic forms 

are to be noted: deidL/xev, Seidire; Inf. SeiSi^e^ instead of dedievai; Imp. 

5ei8i3-t, Seidne ; — Plup. edeidifxev, eSelSurav. 
^pXOfxai, to come, Perf. Epic elX7)Xov&a instead of eX^Xv^a, PL elx^Xov^uev. 
$rv7}<TK0}, to die, Perf. r4^V7jKa, TE0NAA : PL r4&vdfiev, r4^vdre, re^vacn(v), Imp. 

re&va&i, Part. Te3r?7Kc6s, re&vr)Kv?a, refrvyKos or Ted^/ecta (Te^ecDca. Demosth. 

40, 24), re&vews (Epic redraws, -wtos, -tjJtos), Inf. re&vavai (Aesch. r&vavai 

from re&vaevai, Epic re&vd/j.ev, -dfievai) : Plup. ire&vdaav, Opt. re&vatyv. 
TAAD., to endure (second Aor. erX-qv), Perf. rerXyKa, TETAAA: Dual TerXdrov) 

PL rerXdfxev, rerXdre, rerXao-L(v), Imp. rerXd^i, -arco, etc., Subj. wanting, 

Inf. t€tAo>cu (Epic TeTAa^e*/), but Part. Epic rerXridos ; Plup. Dual irerXaTov, 

irerXar^v, PL ererXafiev, ererXdre, ererXaffav, Opt. rerXair]v. 
MAH, to sfrt'ye, Perf. fj.4fj.ova; MEMAA: Epic fj.4fxdfj.ev, -drov, -are, -dao-i(r), Imp. 

fxefxaTeo, Part, fiefxd&s, Gen. fj.efidSnos and fiefid6Tos, third Pers. PL Plup. 

fiefxdffav. 

Here belong the two participles of 
BiBpootTKU), to eat (second Aor. eBpw), Perf. BeBpooKa, poet. BeBpcis, Gen. -<Stos; 
iriTTTw, to _/a//, TreTTToona, Epic irenTeus, Att. poet. 7re7TTc6s. 

(b) The Stem ends in a Consonant. 

It is to be observed in respect to the formation, that when the consonant of 
the stem comes before a personal-ending beginning with t, the r is changed 
into 3-, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. form, e. g. 
irel'&a), to persuade, 7r4iroiSra, to trust, Epic Plup. iireiri&fj.ev, Imp. in AeschyL 

Eum. 602, TreTreiagn (instead of ireiriorfri). 

Eemark. Thus the Epic form Tceiroa&e, stem TIEN© with the variable o 
(ITON0), instead of ireivovSrare from Trdax^ 5 from ireTrov&are by dropping the 
connecting vowel a, comes Tr4irov&Te ; and hence as a Tau-mute before another 
Tau-mute is changed into c (§ 17, 5, comp. 'iS-re = tcrre), ireTrov&re becomes 
TreTTA va&e, and as v is dropped before a, it4iro(TTe; finally, this form, as has been 
seen, assumed the appearance of the Mid. form (3-e) and so became ireiro<T$re. 



Perf. Ind. S. 

D.2. 

3. 



iteupdya, -as, -e(v) (Kpdfa, to bawl) Plup. eKeK.pa.yeiv, -eis, -ei 
KeKpayarov iceKpax&ov eKeupdyeirov iieeicpax&ov 

KeuptyaTov KeKpax&ov ineKpayeiT7]v eKeKpdx^W-' 



$ 229.] VERBS IN -G) LIKE VERBS IN -fU. 275 

P. 1. KeKpaya/Aev KSKpayfAev iK€Kpdyei/j.ev £ic4Kpay/.i6V 

2. KeKpayare Kinpax&e e/ce/cpcvyetre intKpax&e 

3. KeKpayd.cri(v) iKeupdysicrav, -ecrav 
Imp. Kzicpax&h -ax^ w > " a X^ 6 > etc - I ni> - KeKpayevai. Part. neKpayds. 

So the Epic Perf. c^aya with the sense of the Pres. I command, avcoyas, &vuy€, 
PI. dv<ay/xsv: Imp. &vu>ye and fti/co^d-i, avwyeTta and avcox^-w, ai/dyere and 
Sywx^e; Subj. 0^777 ; Inf. avooytfAtv ; Plup. ^j/ciryea, -nv&yei; Opt. a^coyois. 

tye'ipcc, to awaken, Perf. iyprjyopa (stem 'ErEP with the variable 0), /am awake; 
from this, Homer has the forms: Imp. iypriyop&e instead of eyp-nySpare, Inf. 
4yp7)y6p&cu (as if from iyp-qyop/Acu) and iyp7)y6p£ra<ri(v) instead of iyprjySpa- 
ci{v) third Pers. PI. 

oT8a, I know, the regular forms oiSo^ey, o5f5are, o<5a(n(j/) are found but rarely in 
the Ion. and Att. writers (§ 195, 1), second Pers. oTSas in Horn, and Ion 
(rarely Att. § 195, 1 ). The form ffi-fxev is Epic, Ion., and Doric. Inf. ftp-evai 
and fffyiej/ Epic, Subj. tSeco Epic. instead of et5<£ (Ion. ei'Seco), Part. I8v?a Epic 
and etSiuo. 

Plup. 1. Pers. Sing. $Sea (hence the Att. 37877) Epic instead of ydeiu 

2. " " r)€i5eis and ^eiS-ns Epic instead of fjSeis 

3. " " 7jei5ei and ^e'577, jfSee^), Epic instead of jfSei:. — TjeiSe, 

Herod. 
3. " PI. "icrav Epic instead of rjSeaav. 
Fut. et$?V« Epic and also tf<ro[j.cu. 
eoina, lam like, Epic, c'Cktov (Dual), Jftcrqp (Plup. Dual) ; hence in Plup.' Mid. 
or Pass. %'Cktq. 



§ 229. (3) Present and Imperfect. 

Finally, there are certain forms of the Pres. and Impf. mostly in the Epic 
•dialect, which after the analogy of verbs in -/xi, take the personal-endings with- 
out the Mode-vowel. Thus : — 

avvu, to complete, in Theocritus : Impf. fri/v-pes (instead of ^vvo/xeu), &vv-to (instead 

of 7}vveTo). 
ravvw, to stretch, to span, II. p, 393. rdvv-Tcu (instead of ravverai). 
epvw, to draw, epvrai, etpvTO, epvro, epvao, pd(r&ai (§ 230). 
<revu), to shake, Epic Pres. cevrai and (by variation) orovrai, Imp. aovcro and 

abridged aov, aova&e, troutr^oj (to move one's self, to hasten). The Imp. has 

passed into the common colloquial language. 
$5w, commonly ia&loo, to cat, Epic, Inf. eS/xeuai. 
<pcpo), to carry, Epic Imp. (pepre instead of (pepere. 



276 DIALECTS. [$ 230 



$ 230. Alphabetical List of Verbs in the Dialects 
to be specially noted. 

hdw (&Fdu>),to hurt, to deceive; Horn. ^rai; the Att. Tragedians use the 
has the following forms : Aor. daaa following forms : aWa> and &Vcra>, 
and affa ; Pres. Mid. aarai, Aor. aaad- ?T|a, a£cu and ^£a, a\ai. 
fxyv, Aor. Pass, ada&yv. Verb. Adj. a/'a> (Ep.), to hear, only Pres. and Impf 
aar 6s (a-daros). 'd'iov. Comp. iira'i'oo. 

kyalo/xai, Epic and Ion. prose (§ 164) aKaxK 03 (Epic), to trouble, stem 'AXH, 
and aydofxai (Ep.), to be angry at, a,nd second Aor. yuaxov-, Put. aKaxyvw, 
in the Pres. Epic also to grudge, to first Aor. yicdxycra ; Mid. anaxKoiAai, 
enu?/, Put. ayddojxai ; Aor. yyacd^yv. &x°f Jial or &x vv f ial i t° oe sa( ^i Aor. 

dye/pw, to co^ecf, Epic second Aor. Mid. yKax^yu (§219, 7); Perf. olk^x^oa 
ayepovTO, Part, aypo/xevos (§ 223, 11); (§ 219, 8, comp. apype/xat, opcopefxai) 
Plup. aynyeparo ; Aor. Pass, dyepSy, and aKaxy/xai, third Pers. PI. d/c?jxe- 
third Pers. PI. ctyepd-e;/-, Epic Pres. SaTat (§ 220, Rem. 2) and dicyx^arai, 
TiyepeSofiai (§ 162). Part. aKyx^^vos and aKaxy^vos, Inf. 

ayj/oew, to 6e ignorant, Ep. Aor. yyvoiyae dtcdxyo-frai (§ 223, Rem. 4); Plup. 
(§ 207, I), hyvchvcxTKe (_§ 205, 5). Epic aKaxeiaro. 

&yvv/M, to. break, Aor. Epic ^£a instead d/caxi"ews (Epic), sharpened, pointed, 
of ea£a ; third Pers. PI. Aor. Pass. from 'AKQ, acuo, instead of dKay/xepos 
&yev Epic instead of idyyaav. (§§ 19, Rem. 1, and 208, 2). The % 

&ycc, to lead, Epic second Aor. Imp. comes from the Perf. Act. 
&£ere, Inf. a\4jxevai, a^e/xev (§ 223, aKyhiw, to neglect, Aor. aK^deffe(u). 
10) ; first Aor. Mid. &£ctcr,d-e, d^avro. dxdojxai, to wander about, Ep. Perf. dxd- 

aeida) (prose a5a>), to si/?.<7, Epic second A7?jucu (§ 219, 8), dXaXy/mepos, aXaXya- 
Aor. Imp. aeiVeo (§ 223, 10). Scu (§ 223, Rem. 4). 

aeipw (prose ctipoo), to raise, Epic first dxdalpa, to make increase, Epic Aor. 
Aor. Act. deipa, Mid. deipafiyv, Pass. j]\daue(u). 

aepfr-nv ; Epic second Aor. Mid. ap6- &Ae£&>, to keep off, Epic second Aor. 
fxyv from aipco; Epic Plup. &<apro ^XclXkov (§ 219, 7), (from 'AAKXl), 
instead of ^pro with the variable aXaXnelv, aXaXKuv ; Fut. aXaXnyacd. 
vowel, and transposition of the aug- aXeo/xat and dXevojxai (Epic), to shun, 
ment; Epic Pres. yepe&ofxai (§ 162). Aor. yXevd/xyp, Subj. dxiyrai, Opt. 

'AHMI, ('AE-,) to 6/oiy; in Homer, are: aXeairo, Imp. dXeatrSre, Inf. dAeuacr&cu 
Part, deis, aivros; third Pers. Sing. and dAeW&a: (§ 223, 8). 
Impf. 'dy, aei, didet ('AEH) ; in the aX&yo-KO), dX&i<TK<a (Ion. prose), to Am?, 
other forms, the y remains contrary Put. dX&Qo>, etc. 
to the analogy of ri&yfii (§ 224, 6): aXiraivoo (Epic and poet.), to sin, Put. 
&77TOJ/, ayvai, d^/xez/cu ; Mid. and Pass. a.Xiry'ffo) ; Aor. y'Xirov, aXirS/j-yv, aXi- 
'dyjxai, to blow, vSfxevos nal ay/xevos, TeV&a: ; Perf. aXiTru.ievos, sinful (§223, 
drenched with rain and beaten with the Rem. 4). 
wind ; Impf. Mid. dyro. aXXo/aai, to spring, Epic second Aor. 

at5o,ucu and al8eo/j.aL in Homer, to be Mid. dAo-o, etc. (§ 227, B). 

ashamed, to respect, Epic al^yaofiai, aXvuriw, to be in trouble, Epic Perf. dAa- 
ySicrfryi' and -pdecrdfiyv. XvKTyjxai (§ 219, 8). 

afrujiu (Ep.), to take (instead of alpuv/xai, dAuc/cco (Ep.), to escape, aXv^co, ijXv^a. 
§ 169, Rem. 1), only Pres. and Impf. dxtyaivo) (Ep.), to find, Sec. Aor. dA<pe?j/. 

atpeca, to take, Ion. Perf. dpaipyita., dpat- ajxaprdvoo, to miss, Epic Aor. y/xfiporop 
pyjxat (§ 219, 8); Epic second Aor. (§§ 223, 11, and 208, 3). 
Mid. yivro instead of eAe-ro (§ 227, afxirXaKiiXKca (Ep. and poet.), to err, Put. 
P>). a[jt.TrXaK'f](Tca ; Aor. yfxirXaKOU. 

a'Caffa, Epic (d, but vira'i^i, II. (p, 126 ; dz/Sa^co (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to please, 
i) instead of aara-co, to rush, Ep. forms: Impf. kdvfiavov (Herod.), e^i/8. and 
^ii|o, Subj. di|a>, Part, d'/'^as ; Aor. ^i/S. (Ep.) ; Aor. eaSov (Herod.), aSov 
Pass. yi'x^W ( a l so m Plat.), Inf. di'x- (Ep.) ; Inf. adelv; Perf. edSo; Put 



§ 230. j LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 277 

aSfac*. — Aug., § 219, 4, 5. In The- Mid. Trans., to lead, ep-nara, iPrjad- 

ocritus ed8e ; Ep. Aor. evador (§§219, /utji/ ; second Aor. Mid. ifirjaeTo, Imp. 

4, and 207, 3). cmp-fio-eo (§ 223, 10). Ep. secondary 

hvnvo&e, to spring up, Ep. Perf. with form : £t/3a<rdw, to stalk, strength- 

Att. Eeduplication and the variable ened secondaiy form from fiaivw ; 

o (§§ 219, 8, and 140, 4), from also 0i0a, fiifiaovra, fiifiSxra and (from 

'ANE0H. . BIBHMI) fri&ds; finally, Imp. £a<r/ce, 

avrdw, to meet, Epic tfvreov [§ 222. A and Inf. e7n/3ao-/ce^ei/. 

(2)J ; o-vvavr^r-nu (§ 222, Eem. 1). fid,\\a>, to throw, Ep. second Aor. tfiX-nv, 

avvco, to complete, Epic Impf. in Theoc. ejSAV 7 ?" [§ 227, A (a)], Eut. @\r)ao- 

avvpes, &vvto (§ 229). fiat; Ep. Perf. fSefioh-n/Acu (used of the 

&vu>ya (Ep. and poet. Perf.), to command, mind) ; but )8ej8A.??/xot (of the body). 

avcay^v, Imp. dvwx&h etc. (§228); ftapeoo (Ep.), to be heavy, frefrap-n&s (§ 223, 

Plup. ty&yea (§ 220, 8). In certain 13). 

forms this Perf. is changed into the fiefipwfrois (Ep.), to eat, instead of j8i- 

inflection of the Pres., e. g. third fipdo-Kois. 

Pers. Sing, avuyet, Impf. ijvcoyov and fi4o/j.ai and fielofiai, I will go, ivill live, 

dvcayov; Eut. avcii^co ; Aor. fjvw£a. Ep. Eut. &er), ^eoVecr^a (§ 223, 7). 

airavpdca (Epic), to take away, Impf. fiidopLai (Ep.) instead of fr-afafjiai, to 

airr)vpa}j/, -as, -a ; first Aor. Act. Part. force, i^o-aro, /3e/SiiiK€. 

atrovpas ; first Aor. Mid. dir-nvparo, fSifipwo-Kw, to eat, Ep. Aor. sfipoov [§ 227, 

Part, airovpdfievos. A (d)] ; Perf. Part. fiefSpws, -utos 

airacpio-Kw (Ep.), to deceive, Eut. airacp-r)- (§ 228). 

aw, second Aor. Act. tfwacpov, Opt. fiXuaKco (Ep. and poet.), to go, instead 

Mid. aird(poiTO. of /xXwaKca (§ 18. 3), Aor. epoXov, 

o.Trei\4(a (Ep.), to threaten, airetX'hr'nv [xoXtiu, /jloXwv (also X. An. 7. 1, 33, 

(§ 222, Eem. 1). lioXoo-iu) ; Perf. fj.ep.fi\<oKa (instead of 

airSepce, an Ep. Aor., he hurried off, jx^fxiXcoKa) ; Eut. /xoXov/xai. 

Subj. airoipern, Opt. airoepo-eie. fiodw, to cry otit, Ep. Aor. eficoera instead 

airrw, to join to, Ep. Aor. Pass, kdcpfrr), of i^o-nera (§ 205, 5). 

fell on. PovXofxai, to will, Ep. fiSXerai, jSoAeo-fre 

apapia-Kco (Ep.), fo^, stem APH, first (§ 207, 4), TrpofiifiovXa, I prefer. 

Aor. ■JJptra, £po-ai (§ 223, 6) ; first Aor. fipvxdo/xai, to roar, Ep. Perf. fiefipvxa, 

Pass, iip&ei' instead of ¥ip£rq<Tav; sec- with the sense of the Pres. 

ond Aor. tfpapov (§ 219, 7; also In- Fa/xeco, to marry, Ep. Eut. ya/xew ; Ep. 

trans, to 6e adapted, to please), more Eut. ya/xeo-aeTai, II. t, 394, will give in 

usual than the first Aor. ; Perf. &pu- marriage. 

pa (Ion. &pr)pa) (§ 219, 8), I am fitted, ydvv/xai (Ep.), to Je (//ac?, 7cWrcu ; Eut. 

Intrans., Ep. apapvla (§ 223, 13), Perf. yavvaa^Tai. 

Mid. or Pass, apypefxai, dpripe/xei/os TAH, Ep. Perf, y4ya/xeu, to have become, 

(§ 223, Eem. 4) ; Aor. dppxvos, adapted etc. (§ 228). 

(§ 227, B). yiyuva Ep. and poet. Perf. with the 

\APA£l, apdofxat, to pray, Epic second sense of the Pres. to cry out; in Horn., 

Aor. ap-h/jLevai, Od. %, 322. third Pers. Sing, yeywve (also with 

&puvfjLai, to gain (§ 188, 1 ). the sense of the Aor.), Part, yeywuus, 

'AH, Ep., (a) to blow, see &rjfii] (b) to Inf. yeyowe/xev ; Plup. iytydbuei. Erom 

sfeep, Aor. fetra, acrafAev ; m (c) to satis- the Perf a Pres. has been formed of 

fy (also Intrans. to be satisfied), Inf. which there are in Horn. : Inf. ^eyco- 

"dfxevai instead of aefxevai; Eut. daco ; ye?*/, Impf. iyeywvevu. 

Aor. #cra, daaa^rai. Verb. Adj. Jmitos, ytivo/xai (Ep.), to 6e 6or«, to 6c produced, 

5tos. Aor. Mid. to beget, to bear, Subj. yef- 

BaivcD, to walk, to go, Ep. forms : Perf. veai instead of yzivr\ai. 

flepafxev, etc. (§ 228); second Aor. yivro, to seize (§ 227, B). 

Dual $dT7)v, third Pers. PL ''nrepfia- ynpdco, to (/row old, second Aor. tyfipa, 

ao.v (§ 227, Eem.), third Pers. PL etc. [§ 227, A (a) |. 

%&av, $dv (§ 224, 4), Inf. /S^uevctJ, yodco (poet.), to «*»/, Ep. third Pers. PL 

Subj. besides /3w, etc. : /3eio>, /3t)?;, /3ei- Aor. 7^01/. 

o/xej/ (§ 224, 9); first Aor. Act. and Aaiuufxi (Ep.), to entertain, to feed (in 

24 



278 dialects. [$ 230. 

stead of Sair-vvixi, § 169, "Hem. 1), ere, to await (e. g. an attack, a wild 

Put. daio-cc ; Mid. Salwixai, to feast, to beast), in the following forms : 5e%a- 

consume, second Pers. Sing. Impf. Ind. rat instead of Sex "™ 1 (§ 220, 13), 

Saivv (Saivvo instead of eSalvvao, II. /x, 147, Perf. SeSeyixai with the 

§ 224, 5), third Pers. Sing. Opt. Sat- sense of the Pres., Put. SeSe^otxai, 

vvto instead of --uiro, third Pers. PI. excipiam, second Aor. Mid. fSe/rro, 

SouvvaTo; Aor. eSaicrdy.riv. etc. (§ 227, B); Perf. Mid. SeSoKv/j.4- 

Saicc, Ep., (a) to divide ($ 164), Put. vos, awaiting, lurking, II. o, 730. 

Sdao/xai; Aor. (also prose) edao-dixrjj/ ; Seiko (instead of Se7<a>), Ep. instead of 

Perf. Vass. SiSa(Tixai,amdivided,broken, Sea, to want, from which come iSeirj- 

SeSaiarai ; (b) to 6urn, to inflame, Perf. (re, Ae wanted, Sr\o~ev, lie ivas in want 

SeS-ne, he burnt; Mid. to bum, blaze, of; Mid. Sevoixai, to be wanting, Eut. 

Intrans., second Aor. Subj. Sd-nrau Sev^aro/xaL. 

Sajxvdca and 5dfiu7]fj.i, Ep. secondary AIAHMI (AE-), Ep. and older Ionic- 
form of Sa/xdca, to subdue, from Att. (Xen.), secondary form of Seco, 
which come third Pers. Sing. Pres. to bind, SiSeacri (Xen. An. 5. 8, 24) ; 
Safj.ua ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. iSd/xva Impf. 5i5t? instead of e'SiSrj, II. A, 105. 
and Sdfxva, Sd/xvaaice ; second Pers. SiQofiai (Ep. and Ion.), to seek; it re- 
Sing. Pres. Mid. Safiva ; — Sdfivr]<ri t tains the 77 (contrary to § 170, 1, 
Sdfj.vaiJ.ai, etc. comp. S AHMI) : i8i(r)To, el'(t]VTo, Si- 

SapSdvw, to sleep, Epic Aor. ZSpa&ov (yo^ai, SiQnfxevos (in Herod.) ; Sffoou 

(§ 223, 11). (Horn.), Si(eai (Theoc.) 5 Eut, SiCfao- 

Sareofxai, Ep. secondary form, used in fxai ; Aor. iSi£ri<rdfj.riv. 

the Pres. and Impf., from Saiofxai, to AIHMI (AIE-), of the Act. only evSievav 

divide. (third Pers. PI. Impf.), II. cr, 584, they 

AAft (Ep. and poet,), (a) to teach (= drove away ; Mid., to ma&e one run, to 

SiSdo-Koo), (b) to learn (= SiSdaKOfj-ai), make free, oftener to scare, to chase 

to (a) belong the Ep. second Aor. (specially with the Inf.), SUvtcu, II. 

SeSae (Horn.), eSae (Theoc. and ^, 475, Sieff&ai, II, /u> 304, Subj. 

Apoll.); to (b) SeSads (Horn.), SeSa- Si-qrai, SiWtch, Opt. Siotro (comp. 

run (in other authors) ; Ep. second tl&oito). 

Aor. Act. eSdwv, I learned [§ 227, A Sico (Ep.), to flee, Sie, SeiSte, Siov, I fled. 

(b)], from which Ep. Sar)<rofj.ai, SeScr^- Sovireco (Ep.), to sound, Perf. SeSovTrSros ; 

Ka, SeSarjfieuos. Erom the Perf. a Aor. eSoinr-ncra and iySoinrno-a (from 

new Ep. Pres. has been formed, SeSd- TAOTn-, comp. t6tttco and Krvneco). 

ua&ai, Inf. Here belongs also the Swa/nai, to be able, second Pers. Ion. 

Ep. Eut. Syce {I shall find, meet with), Swear, Aor. Ep. eSwdo-^rjv and eSvwn- 

Srjeis, Si]Ofxev, Sijere (§ 223, 7). ad/xnu (§ 179, 2). 

Searo (Ep.), it seemed, Aor. SodcrcraTo, Svco, to go in, to ivrap up, Ep. Sv/xevai in- 

third Pers. Sing. Subj. Sodffarerai stead of Svpai from eSw ; Ep. second 

(instead of -rirai). Aor. Mid. Sucrero, Svcreo, SvoSfievos 

Set'Sco, to fear, the Pres. occurs only in (§ 223, 10). 

the first Pers., Eut. Seivofiai ; Aor. 'Eyeipcc, to aivake, Ep. Aor. eypero, he 

eSeicra, Ep. eSSeura (as is probable awoke, etc. (§ 223, 11) ; Ep. forms of 

originally eSFeicra), Perf. Ep. SeiSoiica Perf. eypriyopa are eyptyopbe, etc. 

instead of Se'Sot/ca, and SeiSto Ep. (§ 228). Erom the Perf. has been 

instead of SeSia (§ 228). formed the Pres. iypr/yopooov, watch- 

SelKuv/j.i, to show, Ion. (AEK) Sety, £5e£cc, ing, Od. v, 6, as if from iyp-nyopdco. 

etc.; Mid. Seiitvvfxai in the Ep. dialect eSw and eViko (Ep.), to eai (= eV*h'a>), 

has also the sense, to greet, to welcome, Inf. eSfxevai (§ 229) ; Impf. ZSov and 

to drink to; so also in the Perf. Sei- eSecntov, Perf. eS^Sws; Perf. Mid. or 

Sey/xai with the sense of the Pres., Pass. iSrjSorai. 

SeiSexarai third Pers. PI. ; Plnp. Sei- 'E©n, from which come the Ep. Z&cav, 

Sskto, to welcome, Setdexaro. wont, accustomed, and the Perf. eJfcofra 

SepKo/xai, to see, Ep. second Aor. eSpatcov (§ 140, Rem. 3). 

(§ 223, 11). 'EIAH, 5 IAn, Aor. elSov, I saw, Ep.lSoy, 

SeXOyuai, to receive, Ion. Sinojxai; in Horn. Inf. tSeW, Subj. ?5&yu ; Ep. Pres. 

this verb signifies also, to toi&e, ea;cip- Mid. e'/SeTcu, ^ seewis, et'SJ/iej/os, ap- 



$ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 2^9 

pearing, making like; Fut. tfo-o/xai] eVeVw or ewemw (Ep.), to sag, to tell, 
first Aor. eladfj.r)v and 4eio~dfxriv, elcrd- Impf. with the sense of the Aor. 
fj.€vos and 4eio~d/j.ej/os (§ 219, 4) ; sec- tveirop, evveirov, Aor. tvicttov (comp. 
ond Aor. l§6fj.r)v, I saw. 4o-ir6/.<,7)i/ from eVo^-cu), Imp. evicrires, 

EIKH, third Pers. Sing. Impf. ef/ce, it Subj. ivtcnrco, Opt. ivUrvolfil, Inf. ewe 
appeared, II. tr, 520 ; Perf. eowa, J am 7re?>, Fut. eVtyw and ivia-n-fjcrw. 
like, Ep. third Pers. Dual tiKrov and 4vt)vo&a, Ep. Perf. from 'EN0H or 'EN- 
Plup. 4tKT7]i/ (§ 228), Part. ioiKcis and E©n with the sense of the Pres. and 
II. (p, 254. ei/ews, et/cuta and II. o~, 418. Impf, 4irewf]vo^€, to sit on, II. j8, 219. 
eloiKvTai ; Ep. Plup. Mid. ^'i'/cro and to lie on, H. Cer. 280. Comp. av-^uo- 
eiKTo, it was like. 3-e above. 

el\va> (Ep.), to cover, envelop, d\v<ra>, ivimca (Ep.), to chide, second Aor. eV- 
efAu/icu, third Pers. PL etAiWcu; from evltrov, ■hv-Timirtv (§ 219, 7). 
eAuw comes Aor. Pass. 4hv(r$T}v. %wv[xi, to clothe, Ep. and Ion. eivvfju ; 

eiAco, to press, to drive, from which in Ep. Eut. eWco ; Aor. eWa and e<ra, 
Horn, only €l\6/j.evos ; in the same itra-dfi-nv, kicrcraro, eaacr&ai ; Perf. 
author, eiAe'w, ee/Aeoj/ ; the rest are ef^at, efa-cu (and eW«i), eTTcu, etc., 
from 'EA, e. g. eXaav, Inf. eAo-cu and d/x4vos : second Pers. Plup. eWo, 
eeAo-at, Part. eAtras (§ 223, 6) ; '4e\/xai, third Pert «Wo and eWro, third Pers. 
eeAyueVos ; second Aor. Pass. 4dhT)v Dual eVd7j>.j third Pers. PI. elaro ; — ■ 
(from eAAco), third Pers. PL a\sv, on eeWaro, eecrro, comp. § 219, 4. 
aArjvai and dA^ej/ai, aAefo. eWa, Jam ft/ce, § 228. Comp. 'EIKfl. 

elfj.1, to be, § 225. eVa/'w, to understand, Aor. iirffiaa (t), 

et/zt, to 0o, § 226. Herod, and Apollon. (§130, Rem. 1 ) 5 

etpyu, to shut out, Ep. Impf. epya^ou the poet, dtco is found only in Pres. 
(§ 162). Comp. epyco. and Impf. 

dpofxai (Ep. and Ion.), to ask, Impf. 4ira.vplo-KoiJ.cu (Ep. and poet.), to receive 
€\p6fjL7]u ; Eut. dpj]<ro/j.cu ; second Aor. advantage or injury from a thing, Aor. 
7]p6jrt]v, Subj. ipd>/j.e&a, Opt. epoiTo, iir7]vp6/j.r]U, iTravpecr&cu (first Aor. eVrju- 
Inf. epeaSrai in Horn, with the accent pcfyoji/ in Aeschyl. and in the later 
of the Pres.; — Ep. secondary forms writers) ; Eut. 4itavpi]o-oixai. Of the 
of the Pres. (a) 4peofxcu, cpeecr&ai; Act. in the sense to touch, to injure, 
Impf. epzovro; (b) ipew, Subj. epeco- Homer uses, second Aor. Subj. eVau- 
fxtv, Opt. epzoijAzv, Part. epeW. prj, Inf. iiravpe?!/, 4iravpe/j.ev. 

'EIPTMI, sec ipvw. iiriara/jLai, to know, second Pers. iiricrry, 

ilpco, Ep. and Ion., sero, to arrange in a Ion. poet. 

roio, to string, first Aor. il-eipas, exse- eVco, as a simple, in Act. only Ep. in 
rens, Herod. 3, 87 ; Ep. Perf. Mid. or the sense tracto aliquid, to take care of 
Pass, eep/xai, iep/j.4uos (in Herod, ep- (II. £ 321 )j generally used as a 
ixevos), Plup. eepTo. compound, e. g. irepieirw, SteVco, etc., 

tfpw, to say, Pres. only Ep., Fut. 4pa>, second Aor. Act. eo-nov instead of 
Ep. e'pe'o). e<r-e7roj/, in Homer 4ireo-nov, 4irio-jre7v, 

ef<ra, Ep. Aor., I placed, from the stem 4-nio-it6v ; Fut. fyoe, Ep. e'^e'ij/ets ; Mid. 
'EA- (comp. scd-eo), Opt. aveo-cufxi, also as a simple, generally signifying 
Imp. eto-ov, Part, ecras (aueffaures ; to follow ; Impf. Ep. eir6fj.r}u instead 
inreio-as, Her. 3, 126. 6, 103), Inf. e\peV- of elir6/LL7}u ; Fut. 'tyofxcu ; second Aor. 
<rcu; Aor. Mid. k<rd}j.t]v and ifcraaro, Mid. ^crirSfiw, o-nicr&ai, crirov (imcr- 
Part. i<pe(T<Tdjxevos (Her. 1, 66. eiVa/xe- ttov) ; Ep. forms: C7re?o, kaireaScti, 
voi), Imp. e(peaaai ; Fut. e'^eVff-ecr&at. Subj. zairoojAai, Opt. kairo'm.'nv ; Inf. 

iXavuco, to drive, Pres. e'Aaw, Ep. e'A^w ; eo-Trea&ai and crTre'crfrcu, Part. €(nr6/j.e- 
Impf. Ep. eAojj/ : Fut. Ep. £\6w(n vos. Herodot. has from irepieira} also 
instead of-e'A<£cn; Ep. Perf. e'ATjAa- irep^(pSr7\vai and irepte'^eo-^ai instead 
juei/os (§ 223, Rem. 4), third Pers. of 7repie^^creo'^at. 
Sing. Plup. e'A?jAaoaTo (§ 220, Rem. ep7«, commonly iepyw, Ep., instead of 
2) ; Ion. Perf. £\-{]\ao~ixai and Aor. etpyw, to shit in and shut out, with the 
Pass. ii\do-&7}i'. secondary forms £4pyvv/xi, ipydbw, 

e'AeAi(w, to '"A///. Ep- second Aor. Mid. eepyd&a), Aor. ep|a; Perf. Mid. or 
tAeAz/cTo (§ 227, 1)). Pass, eepyfieu, third Pers. PL epxaTai, 



280 



DIALECTS. 



[*230 



third Pers. PL Plup. eepxaro and 
%pXo-ro ; Aor. Pass, ipx&eis. 

epBoo and pefy (Ep.), to do, Put. pefa, 
Aor. eppe£a and epe£a, or ep£«, ep|a 5 
Perf. eopya, Plup. ic&pyew (§ 140, 
Rem. 3), Perf*. Mid. or Pass, iepyfie- 
vos, Aor. Pass, pex&eis, pex^wau 

ipe'ida, to prop, Ep. Perf. io-npedaTai 
($ 219, 8). 

ipeiira) (poet, and prose), to ^?-oio cfoiwn, 
Ep. Plup. ipepiiTTO ($ 219, 8). 

4pi8aiva> (Ep.), to fight, Aor. Mid. e/jtS^- 
cacr^at. 

eptX«, to jfyfa, Ep. 4pl£ofuu, Perf. Mid. 
ip-fipuTfiai (§ 219, 8). 

fppco, to wander about, Ep. Aor. epcat. to 
Awry away (§ 223, 6). 

epv&aivco (poet.), to recfae??., Put. epv&T]<ra}, 

ipvKca, to keep off, Ep. second Aor. Act. 
■t)pvK.aKov, epvuaneew (§ 219, 7). 

ipixa and eipvca (Ion. and Ep.), to few, 
Put. ipvcro) (<r<r) and Ep. ipvovcri ; 
Aor. eptra (o-<r) and e'/puo-a; Put. 
Mid. epvao/xai and Ep. epvea&cu ; Aor. 
4pv<Ta,j.i7)v (era-) and elpvaajx-qv ; Perf. 
Pass, third Pers. PL elpvarat, II. £, 
75, and Plup. eipwro, II. <r, 69. etpiJ- 
aro, II. 0, 654 (of ships drawn to 
laud, long in the Arsis); Plup. 
Mid. etpvTo (<pd<ryauov, had drawn the 
sivord, v long in the Arsis), Od. x-> 
90. — Secondly, the Mid. in Horn, 
and poet, takes the sense to save, to 
shelter (from danger) ; in this sense 
there are the following forms : epvero, 
tfpvTo and epvro, which are to be 
regarded as syncopated forms of the 
Impf. — The two following Mid. 
secondary forms have also the sense 
of to guard: (a) Ep. 'EIPTMI, Inf. 
elpvixeuai, Hes. Opp. 816; Mid. to 
guard, eXpvarai instead of etpvurai, 
Inf. epvofrai, efyva&ar, — (b) Ep., 
poet, and, though very rare, Attic 
prose pvofxcu, Inf. pvoSrai instead of 
pvea&cu; Impf. third Pers. Sing. 
epiiro, ivas watched, Hesiod. Th. 304, 
third Pers. PL pvar instead of epvov- 
ro (they protected) ; Aor. eppvad/xr]i/ 
and Ep. pvady^v (but II. 0, 29. pvad- 

epxop-at, to go, Ep. Perf. etA^Aou&a, first 
Pers. PL elA-fjAovSpev ; Epic Aor. 
ijAv&ov. 

€X<w, to have, Ep. Aor. ecrx& ov i o*x&ov 
and iax w (§ 162) ; Ep. Perf. ox^ko, 
(for oitcaxa, k and x being trans- 
posed, and the word having the 



Attic Redup.) ; Ep. Plup. eVci>xa™ 
they were closed, II. jx, 340. 

T llfxai, to sit, carat, earo (Ion.), and e'la- 
rcu, e'laro Ep., instead of rjvrai, fjVTo. 

rj/xveo (Ep.), to sink, Perf. inrefxv^/xvKe, to 
let the head sink, II. x> 491. The 
above form has the Att. reduplication 
i/x-f)/xvKe ($ 219, 8), and is strength- 
ened by v (§ 208, 5). 

Qepo/xai (Ep.), to warm one's self, Put. 
frepvofxai (§ 223, 6); Aor. e&e'pT^, 
Subj. &epe<a. 

(SbjAeco (Ep. and poet.), to sprout, Put. 
&7)A-f)(T<a, etc.; Perf. re^rj Aa (TeSaAv'ia 
Ep. § 223, 13) ; second Aor. e&aAov. 

0HIIX2 (Ep.), to sfrm, Perf. Ted^Tm; 
Plup. ire&i'iTrea; second Aor. (from 
TA4>X2) eracpov. 

^vi-jaKca, to die, Perf. re^uriKa, PL re&var 
fxev, etc. (§ 228). 

frpuxTKo* (Ep., Ion., and poet.), to spring, 
Aor. e&opov ; Put. &opov/xcu, Ep. 3-ope- 
o^cu; Perf. re&opa. See § 161, 14. 

'iSptta (Ion.), to sweat, IdpSxri, ISpuj/res, 
idpSxra, lSpcp7]u (§ 137, Rem. 1). 

"■nut, to send (Ep. and Ion.), Aor. erjKa: 
Put. 7jcra>, but Od. <r, 265, aveaei ; in 
the Ep. and Ion. dialects, there are 
several forms from the theme '1X2, 
e. g. aviet instead of avl-ncri Her., 
tvviov instead of ^wieffav Horn., e/.ie- 
riero and jj.ejxeTifj.euos Herod., instead 
of fxeSrleTOy fxe&ei/xevos. 

tKveo/xai, to come, Ep. Pres. 7/c« and 
Impf. Tkov; Ep. Aor. f|oi> (§ 223, 10) 
and f/cTo, etc. ($ 227, B). 

'IAHM1 (instead of 'IAA), to 6e merciful 
Of the Act. only the Ep. Imp. '/Atj^j, 
Z>e merciful (in addresses to the gods) 
instead of 'lAa&i (§ 224, 6), as in 
Theoc. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. iArjK-nai} 
Plup. Opt. Ep. tA.7]Koij Mid. poet. 
'lAa/xai, to appease. 

1<Ta.ix.i (Dor.), to know, Iffys, fcrdTi, fyafxev^ 
Part. %<ras. 

Kaiw/Acu (Ep.) instead of Kafowixai 
(§ 169, Rem. 1) from the stem KAA, 
to excel, Perf. /ce/cacr/xat ; Plup. e/ce- 
Ka<r/xi7y. 

/cotco, to turn, Ep. Aor. eicna (Trag. 
ewea), Subj. Krjofxei/ instead of -coi.(.eu, 
Opt. third Pers. Sing. K-fjai, third 
Pers. PL Ki\aiev, Inf. Krjai (in the 
Odyss. also Ke?cu, Keiojxev, Keiavres) \ 
Aor. Mid. eK-nd[xr}v, K7]dp.evos (in the 
Odyss. Keidfievos, neiavro) ; second 
Aor. Act. end-nv (I burned, Intrans.), 
Inf. Karj/xeuai. 



§ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 281 

Kafiuco, to weary one's self, Ep. KeK/xrjcis, /cAa£s> ? to sound, Ep. Perf. with the sense 

-Sir os, -6tos (§ 223, 13), Ep. second of the Pres. KeKX-qya, KeKX-qy&s, PI. 

Aor. Subj. KeKafxco (§ 219, 7). KtKXriyovTes (as if from /ce/cA^co) ; 

/ceTyuai, to lie, in Hom. k4oj/tcu, as if from Aor. eKXdyov. 

Keofxai ; Ep. and Ion. KeeTai, Keea&ai; KXeiw, to shut, Ep. arid Ion., K\rj'iu>, Aor. 

second Pers. Sing, Ke?<rcu and Ke7ai, inA-ififfa (t), /cA7??crcu; Perf. Mid. or 

third Pers. PI. Ktivrai and Ep. /ceia- Pass. zce/cA^at (third Pers. PI. /ce/cAe- 

rai and (Ion.) /ce'arcu, Subj. Kecc/nai, arai instead of KeKXrjarai) ; Aor. Pass, 

third Pers. Sing, /cf/rai ; Impf. k4o.to iKXrjiafrqv ; from the Ion. kXtjico come 

and Keiaro Ep. instead of ck^u/to ; the forms often found in the Att. 

k4<tksto : Ep. Eut. /ceico, /cea>, KetW, writers, viz. /cAt/co, eKXyo-a, KtKXrj/j.a.1. 

/ceo??', KeUfjizv. /cAeco (Ep.), to celebrate, of which only 

Kejpco, to s/irar oj^ cwi q^ Ep. Kepca), KXeo/j.ai, Impf. e/cAeo instead of e/cAeeo 

^epcra (§ 223, 6), but iKeipdp.r)i>. (§ 220, 10). 

/ceAAa>, to dnwe, Ep. e/ceAa-a (§ 223, 6). /cAuco (Ep.), to Aear, Imp. /cAue, KXvere ; 

KeXo/iai (Ep. and poet.), to wr^e, Eut. second Aor. Imp. kXv&i, kXutc; and 

KeA-fiao/j.a.1, first Aor. £KeXT](rd/j.wv ', KetcXvSn, Ke/cAure [§227, A (e)] ; the 

second Aor. iK€KX6/u.r}i>, etc. (§ 223, Impf. zkXvov is used instead of the 

11). Ind. Pres. 

K€fT<?co (Ep.), to p7'c&, stimulo, Aor, koVtcd, to sfr/£e, second Perf. KeKotra in 

/ceWcu (§ 223, 6). Horn., instead of KeKocpa. 

Kzpdvvvp.1, to mix, Ep. tcepda (Kepoovras) Kopeuvv/xi, to satisfy, Ep. Eut. Kopica and 

and Kepcuco (Imp. Kepcue); Kipvdv (Kip- Kopivca, Perf. K^Kop-q^ai, to which the 

ras, Impf. inlpva) and Kipv7)/j.i (Impf. Part. neKop-qdos (§ 223, 13) in respect 

iKipp-n, Kipvds) ; Ep. Mid. nepcovrai (as to its meaning belongs. 

if from Kepap.ai) ; Impf. Kepoavro Ep. /coTew and Korsofxai (Ep.), to 6e angry, 

instead of iKep&vro from Kepdca. first Aor. Part. Korecras ; Perf. Part. 

Kep8atVo>, to #am, in Ion. and later wri- kskottjoos (§ 223, 13) ; Mid. Eut. kotc- 

ters : iKepd-qcra; K€p8r]0-ecr&ai and /cep- aofxai (cnr); Aor. e/corecra/xrji' (<r<x). 

8a.veop.ev in Herod. KpaC 1 ^ ^° &awtj cry owf, poet. Perf. KtKpa- 

Kev&o) (Ep.), to conceal, Eut. Keutrw, Aor. 7a, KeKpa.yp.ev, etc. (§ 228) ; Eut. /ce- 

e/ceuca ; Perf. /ce'/ceud-a ; second Aor. Kpdt,op.ai, Aristoph. 

<ekv&ov, kvSov, Subj. /ce/cu&a> (§ 219, /cpatVw (Ep. and poet.), to complete, ac- 

7) ; Mid. only Pres. and Impf. complish, Ion. commonly Kpaiaivw, 

k ijBca, to make anxious, in the Act. only Impf. eKpaiaivov ; Ep. Eut. Kpaveca ; 

Ep. Eut. K-ii07]crco ; Perf. KeK-qSa, 7 am Aor. eKp-nva and Ep. eKprwva, Imp. 

anxious ; Ep. Eut. Perf. KeKa.8-qo-op.ai, Kpr\vov and Ep. Kp-tyqvov, Inf. Kprjvcu 

II. fr, 353. and Ep. Kp-qrivai ; Ep. Pei'f. Pass. 

Kibvap.ai } Ep. Secondary form of cr«:eSaf- KeKpdavrai (Eur. KtKpavTai) ; Ep. Eut. 

visual, to scatter, only Pres. and Impf. Mid. Kpaveop.ai. 

KivvfAcu (Ep.) instead of Kiveopiai, to stir Kreivca, to kill, Ep. Eut. Kreveca (Ep. 

o?ie's se//, to 6e moved, Pass, Kivvp.evos. Part. Kraveovra, KaraKTaveovai(v) and 

Kipvdca and Kipvqp.i, Ep. secondary form KaraKTauha^e with the variable a ; 

of Kepdvvv/xi, to mix, from which comes Aor. Ep. and poet. %kto.vov ; Ep. 

the Part. Kipvds, Impf. iKipva and second Aor. Act. €kto.u, etc. [§ 227, 

/api/77. A (a)] ; first Aor. Pass, third Pers. 

/fiX^ w an( * Kixavo/xai (Ep. and poet.), PI. e*Ta&ej/ Ep., instead of e/cro^7j- 

to reach, meet with, Aor. e/ax o,/ > ^ ut - <rai '« 

Kixhaopiai, other forms not found in /cypea), rarely /c6pw (Ep. and poet.), to 

the Att. poets; but Ep. Impf. e/a'xa- J^»<^, to reach, Aor. eKvpaa (§ 223, 6), 
j/ov, second Pers. iKix^ts (from and more seldom iKvpyaa, Eut. Kvpa-co 
KIXE-) ; second Aor. Sul>j. kix& and and more seldom Kvp-hcw ; Perf. kskv- 
KJXetw, Opt. kix^'i-Wi I n f- Kixwai, p-qKa. 

Part. Ktx e ' s an( l Mid. Kixypevos ; Aor. Acryxc^w, to partake, Ion. Fut. Xa^o/xai ; 

Mid. iKixvvoiTo. Ep. Aor. Subj. AeAax&> (§ 219, 7), 

kioj (Ep.), to 70, only Pres. and Impf. ' Trans, to make partaker in the phrase 
The Part, /aau' is accented like Iwv ; bavovra irvpSs, to give the dead the 

Aor. )LteT€/cia^o^ (§ 162). Aonor of fire, i. e. 7»a£e /urn partaker 

24* 



282 DIALECTS. [§ 230 

of; Pcrf. AeAoyx" Ep., instead of MAfl (Ep.), to strive for, Perf. with tha 

eiA7jx« [Od. A, 804. AeAo^xdcn], sense of the Pros., in Sing. fx4[xovtx 

AAZTMAI (= Aa(,Vcu, to to/je), Epic (comp. y4yova with TErAA), jx4jxaTov, 

i\d(vTo. fx4p.ajxev, etc. (§ 228). 

Acui/3dVa>, to receive, Ion. Aajx^iofxai, AeAa- fx^ipofxai (poet.), to obtain, Ep. efx/xope 

firiKa, AeAafi/xai, AeAcfyicbd-cu, iAd[A<p&7]v, third Pers. Sing. Pcrf. (find II. a, 

Aa/j-TTTeos ; also Dor. AeAdfirjKa, but 278), third Pers. Sing, second Aor. 

AeAd/x.uoi, AeAatp&at ; in Dramatists Act. (Augment, § 219, 6) ; Pcrf. Pass. 

AeA^ucu ; Ep.Aor.AeAa/3e<ridxu (§ 219, e'lfiaprai, it is determined (§ 123, 4). 

7). ^ue'Aaj, commonly Impers. jue'Aet, & con- 

Kav&dvoo, Ep. oftener A^co, to be hidden, cerns, Hay it to heart, Ep. Perf. ia4w 

concealed; Ep. second Aor. Act. Ae, Part. jue^Acfo ; Ep. Perf. Mid. /*e/*- 

Subj. AeAa>co and Mid. AeAabofirji/ fiAerai and Plup. ^e'uySAero instead of 

(§ 219, 7); Perf. Mid. Ae'Aaoyicu ; in U€/j.y}AT]Tai, i/ne/x-nA^To, comp. /3Ac<;cr- 

Theoc. Ac«rdT)/.tei/ (= Ai? crd-r^ou) in- kco ; yet these forms were more 

stead of AaS-ecrd-cu ; i-mA^co and properly considered as a Pres. and 

iKArjSrca, to cause to forget, Ep. Aor. Impf. 

iir4A7](ra; £kA4Ao.&ov. fieuoivdca, fxtvoiveov, § 222, I, A (2). 

hdo-Kco (Ep. and poet.), Aor. eAaKov] firjKdofxai, to bleat, Ep. Perf. /j.4(j,i)Ka with 

Ep. Perf. AeArjKa (poet. AeAd.-ca and the sense of the Pres., ^e^d/cinci 

e'/cAe'Aa/ca even in Demos.) with the (§ 223, 13); Aor. (jlclkuv; itom the 

sense of the Pres. ; Ep. Part. AeArj- Perf. the Impf. 4fi4fi-nKov is formed. 

Kdos, AeAd/cu7a (§ 223, 13) ; Eut. Aclkt)- fiiaiveo, to stain, Ep. second Aor. fxidv- 

(Tofxai; first Aor. poet. eAa/c7j<ra, Ep. frrjv (§ 227, B). 

Aor. Mid. AeAdicovTo (§ 219, 7). fjiiyvv/xi, to mix, Ep. Aor. ju,i«:to (§ 227, 

AEXI2 (Ep.), to cause to Zto dW?j, eAe£a, B). 

4A€^d/jL7]u, I laid myself down, I lay, I [ivKaofxai, to roar, Ep. fie/AVKa, Aor. 

rested, Ep. Aor. iAey/x-qv, etc. (§ 227, B). 'epvicov. 
Kovu), to wash, Ep. Aoe'ctj, Aoue'w, Impf. Naico, Ep. and poet., to c/we//, first Aor. 

4Aoveov, iA6eov ; Aor. Inf. Ao4(rcrai, Zvaacra, I caused to dwell ; Mid. with 

Part. Ao4<r(ras; second Aor. Act. Pass. Aor., to settle down: yda-ao/xai, 

eAoou, third Pers. Sing. A6e Od. k h.TTtva<T(Td\x.y\v, ivdaSri^v. 

361, A6ov; Mid. Pres. Inf. Aove<r&cu vsik4oo (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to quarrel, 

and AoDcr&cu; Eut. Mid. AoeWo^ucu ; Eut. j/ei/ce'crw , Aor. eVei/cetra (§ 223, 

Aor. Mid. Inf. Ao4acra<r&ai ; Part. 1). 

Aos(r<rdfj.evos ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. rtX«, to trasA, Pres. and Impf. ; the other 

A4Aovfxai. tenses are formed from vitctw, which 

Auco, to loose, Ep. second Aor. Mid. among the later writers came to be 

Auto, Avvro [§ 227, A (e)] ; Ep. Plup. used in the Pres. and Impf. also; 

Opt. AeAGro (§ 224, 3). thus, Eut. vtycc, Perf. Mid. or Pass. 

Maivofxai, to rave (iKfiaiuco, to make vevifx^ai, poet. ; Aor. Pass, ivicpfrny, 

raving, also Aor. e/xrjz/a, Aiist. ; doubt- Hippocr. 

ful X. H. 3.4, 8) ; second Perf. y.4/j.7]- vicraoixai (Ep.), to go, Eut. vicrofiai (the 

va (Soph.), / am ravBig (Theoc. 10, form veiaao/xaL is rejected). 

31, fx^fidv-qixai) ; the Eut. is /xavovfxat 'OAT220MAI (Ep.), Aor. wdvo-djx-nv, to 

in Herod. {fxavhcro/xai in the later be angry, bSvo-djxsvos ; Perf. oSuSvo-fiai 

writers). with the sense of the Pres. (§ 219, 8). 

fxaio/xai. (Ep.), to seek, Eut. fido-opai oTda, to know, § 228. 

(eVijuacrcrerai) ; Aor. 4fj.aadfMrjv. oXofxai, to think; Ep. ofco, oica, o'iop.ai, 

ixavhdvu, to learn, Eut. in Theoc. fxa^ev- uiS/xriP, oXoito ; Aor. Mid. oiard/xTjv 5 

jxai (like /xaxov/j.ai). Aor. Pass. wia&r)v, oia&eis. 

li.dpvafs.ai (Ep.), to fight, only Pres. and ovo/xai (Ep. and Ion.), to blame, ovocrai, 

Impf., like Svyafxai, but Opt. jxapvoi- third Pers. PL ovovrai, Imp. 6vo<ro ; 

Ixt]v, Od. A, 513. Impf. u>v6fxn)v, Opt. ovoifM-nv, qvoito 5 

uaxop-ai, to contend, Epic /j.ax4ovTou 1 Eut. ovo'vo^ai ; Aor. wvoad/xriv and 

^axeTTat, /ucax^oiTo, fj.ax4oivro, Part. av6a^ry]U ; Ep. owecr^e (comp. ovA6jx- 
yuaxe'o^^os and ixax^ov^vos ; Ep. ez/os), II. co, 241, instead of ovea^t 

Fut. fiaxrio-oixai and fxax^ofxai ; Aor. and this instead of 6vo<r£re from 5 ON- ; 

eiiaxeo-ctjiiTjj/. Ep. Aor. Mid. #j/aTO. 






$ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 283 

opdoa, to see, Ion. 6p4w, Epic 6p6u>, Irapf. first Aor. i-nepcra (§ 223, 6) ; second 

S>peou; Ep. second Pei-s. Sing-. Pres. Aor. zirpa&ov (§ 223,11); Ep. second 

j\Iid. bpriai, third Pers. Sing. Impf. Aor. Mid. Inf. irepfrai (§ 227, B). 

bpriro ; Ion. Perf. oircoira. tt4to/j.cu, to fly, second Aor. £tct6[xi}v, etc. 

'OPErNTMI, from which Ep. opeypvs, (§ 223, 11). 

stretching oat ; opeyai.to stretch; Mid. Trevkrojxai (poet, instead of Trvu^duo/nai), 

to stretch one's self] to reach after, Ep. Ep. second Aor. Mid. Opt. Trerrv&oi- 

Perf. Mid. dpwpeyp.cu, third Pers. PI. to; Perf. -n eVuoTmt (§ 223, 14). 

opcapixarcu (§ 219, 8), Plup. third iriepvov, eirs<pvov, Ep. second Aor. Act. 

Pers. PI. opcop^xaro. of #EN£1, to kill (§ 219, 7). Part. Trecp- 

vpvijxi (poet.), to excite, Put. opcrw, Aor. ywi/ with irregular accentuation; Ep. 

2>p<ra (§ 233, 6); Ep. Perf. Iwtrans. Perf. Pass. Tv4<parai, irecpda&ai ; Put. 

vpcopa (§ 219, 8), Subj. bpwprj, Plup. Perf. xe^rjo-o^ai (cornp. SeS^cro/xat 

opwpei and a>pa>pei ; Ep. Aor. dipope;/ ; from 5e5e/xc«). 

Mid. opvonai, to rouse one's self, to stir, iriiy ■vvp.a.i, to fix, Ep. Aor. tvt\kto, kut4- 

Ep. Put. ope?Tcu, Aor. wpopaf)T> ; Ep. ir-n;<TO (§ 227, B). 

Aor. Mid. .SpTo, etc. (§ 227, E) ; Ep. irlxvap-ai, Eq. secondary form of 7reAa£o>, 

Perf. opuptTai, Subj. opwprjTai (/, 219, to draw; ?zea?*, only Pres. and Impf. 

8). ■nip.irXrip.i, to fill, Ep. Aor. Mid. xAtjto, 

ao-(ppalvop.cu, to smell, Ion. Aor. Mid. etc. [§ 227, A (a)]. 

ocrtypavTO. ttiittw, to fall, Ep. 7re7rrews (§ 228). 

ovrdo), to wound, Ep. Aor. o/^v, etc. 7rtTvaw and ttitptjixi, Ep. secondary form 

[§ 227, A (a)]. of 7rerdvuvp.i, to spread out, from 

6(pei\(a, to owe, be under obligaticr,^ ought, which come Impf. tvitvu instead of 

must, Ion., poet, (except ir. the lira- Hirva, and Part, irirvds. 

matic dialogues of Att. waiters), and TrXfaeo), to strike, Ep. second Aor. Act. 

in late prose ocpeXov, -es, -6, Ep. irciirX-nyov, 7r4irXT]yoy and it zTvXriy 6 p.T]V 

&<peXXov, ocpeXXov, in Jo/ms which (§ 219, 7). 

express a wish. irXdoca (Ion.), to sail, Ep. second Aor. 

o<peAAa> (Ep.), to increast, only Pres., Act. zirXoov, etc. [§ 227, A (d)]. 

Impf., and Opt. Aor. o^cAAeiej/, Od. 7rveco, to breathe, in Horn. Perf. Triirvvjxai 

)8, 334. (§ 223, Hem. 2), to be animated, intel- 

riaAAco, to shake, Ep. second Aor. Act. ligent; second Aor. Act. Imp. d/xir- 

dfj.7r€TraXcoi/ (§§ 207, 7, and 219, 7) and vue, second Aor. Mid. dfnrvvro [§ 227, 

second Aor. Mid. -rrdxro (§ 227, B). A (e)] ; Aor. Pass. h.p.Trvvvdrn instead 

7roo-xw, to suffer, Ep. Perf. Part, ireira- of ap.irvvSrn (§ 223, 12). 

duty, as if from ire-naSa ; Ep. Perf. irTrjaara, to crouch, shrink from fear, Aor. 

ireiro<T&e (§ 228, Ecm.). €ttti7|o ; second Aor. KaraitraKdiv, 

irareo/xai (Ion.), to taste, to cat, Aor. Aeschyl. Eum. 247; Perf. ZnTr)xa, 

iirao-dp.rit' : Perf ire-irao-fiai. Part. Ep. TrenT-nocs, £>tos (§ 223, 13); 

irei^roa, to persuade, second Aor. Act. Ep. second Aor. KarawT-nT-nv [§ 227, 

eir&ov, Aor. Mid. iiri^ofxrij/, only poet. A (a)]. 

in the Att. writers (tt&ov is a false PaiVa>, to sprinkle, regular Aor. eppava ; 

reading in Plat. Phaed. p. 117, a); Perf. Mid. or Pass, ^pao-fxai. In 

Ep. second Aor. Act, irein^ov, Subj. Horn, ipoddarai (§ 220, Bern. 2). 

Trewi&w, Opt. irziri&oifJLi, Inf. irein&eiv, pe£a>, see epSco. 

Part. ■Keiri&oov, Imp. iri-mbe {\ 219,7); pryew (Ep. and poet.), to shudder, Fut. 

second Aor. Mid. etnSsSjx-nv-, to trust, piyiiau ; Aor. ippiyr\aa ; Perf. Ep. 

Opt. 7re7r&o(To ; from, the second Aor. epplya. 

come ttl&tio-j), to be obedient, ireivi&riao), 2ao'o>, ccoco and croa (Epic), to save 

to be convinced, -m2rf)<Tas, obedient; on (= <rd>fa) ; from o-abw Put, <rad><Ta) , 

eTTtV^ej/ andTreVc-jo-^i (sec § 228). Imp. Pres. Act. o-aco [§ 222, I, A 

w*\d{oo, to draio near (Trag. ireXdZco, (4)]; third Pers. Sing. Impf. Act. 

7rAc&a>), Fut. 7reAao-a;, poet, sometimes adou and (taw instead of eVaoe ; Aor. 

7reAci; Ep. Aor. Pass. ineXdab-nv, ivdwaa; Fut. Mid. aauao/xai, Aor. 

poet. Ait. <v\a^r7]i, Mid. Ep. inX-fi/xT)]/, Pass, co-ac^e ; from o-cia) Part. <rc6- 

etc, Att. 1tcX6.>l7)v [if 227, A (a)]; oi/Tes and Impf. awzanov ; from aJc* 

Ep. Perf. TrtTrA-^eVos, Att. ireirXdpiai. Subj. Pres. (Top, o-J?;.y, (Towo-i. 
«-cp&» (poet.), to destioif, Fut. Trepan; azuw (poet.), to pirf in violent ??id^'o», 



284 DIALECTS. [$ 230. 

Mid. to haste, Ep. Aor. etrcrei/a and (peldofxcu, to spare, Ep. second Aor. Mid. 

ffeva, iaaevd/jLTji' and (revd/x-nu (§ 223, Tr€<piSoLfjL7]u, irecpidecr&cu (§ 219, 7) , 

8); Perf. ecravfj-ai (§ 223, 14); Plup. from (pddojxai comes TreQid-fiaoficu. 

ia-crvfxriy ; second Aor. Mid. icrcrifM-ni/, <pepco, to carry, cpepre Ep. instead of 

etc. [§ 227, A (e)]; Aor. Pass. eV<ru- <pepere (§ 229); Ion. and Ep. forms 

3-771/ Soph., ££e(ru&r)v Horn. — On the are : Aor. fjveiKa, eVel/ccu, etc., iiueucd- 

Ep. o-evrcu, aovrai, etc., see § 229. /x-qv ; Perf. iu^vciy/xai ; Aor. Pass. 

VKiSva/iai, to scatter, Ep. secondary form riueix^w) — Ep. second Aor. Imp. 

of ovceScu/j/UjUcu, only Pres. and Impf. olce, Inf. o«re/*ej> (§ 223, 10); first 

a-Tepeca, to rob, first Aor. Inf. o-TepeVcu Aor. avtpaai, Herod. 1, 157 (comp. 

Ep. instead of <TTtpf)(rcu. 6, 66. avco'Caros instead of au&iffros). 

{TTvyeco, to fear, to hate, Ep. second Aor. <pevy(a, to flee, Ep. irtcpvyixivos, escaped, 

iarvyov; first Aor. ecrrv^a, Trans., to (§ 223, 14). 

make fearful. (pSdvw, to come before, anticipate, Epic 

TArn, Epic second Aor. rerayctiv, (p&d/xevos [§ 227, A (a)]. 

seizing. cpSreipco, to destroy, Ion. ~Fu.t..Sia<pSrap4o/jLai 

TAAAH, to endure, Ep. Aor. irdXaca, instead of (pSfap-fjao/xaL ; Aor. Siacp&ep- 

Subj. raxderorco; second Aor. irX-nv eai (§ 223, 6). 

(§ 191, 4); Perf. rerXriKa, rerXafxev (p&ivw, to vanish, and Ep. <p&t<o, to con- 

(§ 228), Fut. tKt)(toi.icu. siane, and sometimes to vanish, perish 

ravva) (poet.), to stretch, Ep. rduvrai (Ep. first Pers. long), Eut. <pdiaco: 

(§229). Aor. ecp&icra:, Mid. to perish, Eut' 

rapdaaoo, to disturb, Ep. second Perf. <p&L(ro/j.ai ; Perf. e^dfyicu; Plup. e<£d-i- 

rirp-qxa, I am disturbed. fi-nv; Ep. Aor. i<pSijx-nv, etc. [§227, 

TEMn, to reerc/i, overtake, Ep. Aor. erer- A (c)] ; Ep. Aor. Pass, third Pers. PI. 

ixou (§ 219, 7). aire<p&&eu. 

reprco, to delight, Ep. erdpepfr-nv, irdpir-nv, (pi\4co, to love, Ep. Aor. ityixdix-nv {<pi- 

iTpdn-nv, Subj. first Pers. PI. rpaireio- Xoourai, <p?\cu). 

fiej/ ; second Aor. Mid. irpairoixriv and (ppdfa, to speak, Ep. Aor. treeppadov 

TZTapir6ixr}v ($ 219, 7). (§ 219, 7). 

rei^xo) (poet.), to make ready, to obtain, (pvpec, to knead, in prose, forms its tenses 

Eut. Teu£o> ; Aor. %T€v£a, Perf. Ep. from (pvpdoo, e. g. (pvpdcrw, etc., Aor. 

TeTeux^s, having obtained; Fut. Mid. Pass. i<pvpd&r)v, Plat. Theaet. 147, c. 

Teu|o^o:; Aor. Mid. Tev£a<r,vku ; Perf. (but i(pvp^r)u, Aesch. Ag. 714); yet 

TCTvyfxai (§ 223, 14), third Pers. PI. Perf. Trecpvpfxai, and in Aristoph. 7re- 

Ep. TerevxaTcu, Inf. t<=ti>x&cu ", Plup. (pvpa/Acu ; Fut. Perf. irzcpvpo-ecr&cu 

irervyixriv, third. Pers. PI. Ep. erereu- Pind., Epic and poet, (pvpaia, etc. 

Xa.ro; Aor. Pass, irvx^qv; Fut. Perf. (§ 223, 6). 

TeTev^o/xcu ; — Ep. second Aor. t€tu- <£uo>, to produce, Perf. irecpvica, Ep. third 

Keti/, tztvkovto, reTVKea&cu (§ 219, 7). Pers. PI. Tretyvacri, Part. Trtcpv&ras, 

TIEH, Ep. Perf. Act. Teri-ndos, -6ros, ire(pvv?a (§ 223, 13); Impf. Ep. cttc- 

anxious, and Perf. Mid. / am anxious, <pvKov. 

second Pers. Dual Terirja-^ov, Part. Xd(o/j.ai (Ep.), to retreat, yield, Aor. Mid. 

rerirj/xeyos. KeKadovro (§ 219, 7); Aor. Act. /ce/ca- 

rlvpvfiai, Ep. secondary form of ripofxai, Sou and Fut. Ke/caSTjcra), Trans., to aV 

to punish; in Att. poetry with one pn've 0/! ro6. 

v, rtw/jLai (§ 185). X a ' L P°°i to rejoice, Ep. Fut. /cexapV^j 

T/jL-fiya, Ep. secondary form of r4/j.vca, Kexapfaofica ; first Aor. Mid. xV aT0 5 

to cuf, first Aor. rfx^a's ; Aor. Pass. second Aor. Kexdpovro, KexapoiaTO 

third Pers. PL Tfidyev. (§ 219, 7); K€ X apvws (§ 223, 13); 

Tp4<pu, to nourish, Ep. second Aor. Perf. Kexap/weVos, Eur.; Verb. Adj. 

erpacpov, I nourished, Perf. rerpoqxx, x a P T ^ s - 

Intrans.; Aor. Pass, irpdcprjp, third x av ^ vca (Ep-), to hold, to contain, Aor 

Pers. PI. rpdepsv. exaSov ; Perf. with the sense of the 

$alva), to show, Ep. (paelvcav, enlightening ; Pres. /cexavSa; Fut. x e ' l(T0 l xaL (courp 

Ep. Aor. Pass. i(paduSrr]u ; Perf. Mid. enudw, ireiaofiai). 

or Pass. ir4(pa<Tfxcu, third Pers. Sing, x 6 '"? to P 0Mr 0Mi ) Ep., Fut. x e ^ 5 A or * 

ir4<pavTca ; Fut. ire<p-f]<roiJ.ai ; second ex 6Ua 5 second Aor. Mid. x^ T0 > X^/* 6 " 

Aor. {pdveo-Kev, II. A, 64. wj f§ 227, A (e)]. 






$ 231.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 285 



SECTION III. 

FORMATION OF WORDS. 

$231. Primitive ivords. — Stems* — Derivatives. 

1. "Words are formed, (a) by derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord- 
ance with certain laws. 

2. Those words, from which other words are derived, but which are them- 
selves underived, are called primitives (vocabula prxmitiva). Primitive words 
are either verbs (which constitute the greater part), substantives, adjectives, or 
pronouns. A primitive has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g. 
rp4<p-w, ypd<p-co, <pep-co, Xey-a, \l&-os ; na\-6s ; ip.-4. 

3. The roots, i. e. the forms which remain, after the rejection of the inflection- 
endings, are all monosyllabic. Still, the roots do not always appear pure in 
the primitives, but often with a strengthened form, e.g. Sdx-v-cc, iK-vt-ofxat, 
av£-dv-co, rv{y)x'°-v-w, aX-icTK-o/xai, iri~Tvpa-<TKu>. Comp. §§ 139, and 157, 1 
Yet these strengthened forms extend only to the Pres. and Impf. 

4. Words which are derived (vocabula derivata) from primitive words, are : — 

(a) Either Stems, i. e. such words as are formed from primitives by merely 
assuming another inflection-ending, which is without any special signification. 
To these indefinite endings belong several of the third Dec, e. g. the gender- 
sign s (5 yty, 7) dty, 7) /3t7|, i) 7ttu£, 7] vad-s, 6 7] fiov-s, 6 t) 7rcu-s, instead of 7rcu8-s ; 
in many words the s is omitted, see § 52, 1) ; the endings -is (t) o~irdv-is, want, 
7) iKr-is), and -vs (6 ardx-vs, t) Itrx-vs) ; also the endings of the first and sec- 
ond declensions, e. g. -77, -a, -os, -ov [v'ik-t], Kvtz-t], pl£-a, ttXovt-os, vocr-os, poS-ov) ; 
finally, several adjective-endings, e. g. -os, -77, -ov (<pi\-os, -77, -ov), -vs, -e?a, -v 
(y\vK-vs, -e?a, -v), etc.; 

(b) or Derivatives, i. e. such words as are formed either from primitives, 
or from stems, by assuming a special derivation-syllable with a special l sig- 
nification, e. g. xpucr-o'-w, to make golden, to gild ; py-rcap, orator ; ypa<p-iK.6s, skilled 
in painting. 

5. The root is often lengthened in derh *tion (§ 16, 3), e. g. At^-tj (from 
\ad-e?v), xh v (from xai/-e?//) : or it takes the variable vowel (§ 16, 6), e.g. rp4(p- 
cc, Tpo(p-7], rpo(p-6s, Tp6(p-i/j.os, rpcxp-epSs. A strengthening consonant (§§ 139, 
1, and 157. seq.) may also be added; or the final consonant A be doubled, e. g. 
itdhXos from Kak6s ; some stems also take a reduplication, e. g. ott-wtt-t), iS-wS-i), 
ay-wy-6s, ~2i-o-v(p-os (from 2E#-ft, comp. crocp-Ss). Other changes also may be 
made in the root, as has been shown in § 16. 

6. The change of e into (seldom into a) and of ei into 01 ($ 16, 6) requires 

1 By comparing the examples under (a) and (b), it will be seen that the 
terminations of the former arc not significant, while those of the latter are. 



286 FORMATION OP WORDS. [§ 232. 

• 
special attention. It occurs, (a) in Oxy tones of the first Dec. in ^ and o of 
more than one syllable, e. g. Tpocp-ii, nourishment (from rp4(p-a>) ; fxov-i), a remain- 
ing (from fxiv-tti) 5 <pop-d, a carrying (from (p4p-co) ; aXoi(p--f}, salve (from aXGi<p> 
a,) ; — (b) i n dissyllabic Barytones of the second Dec, which denote what is 
done, or the result of an action, e. g. x6yos, ivord (from x4y-<a) ; cpov-os, murder 
(from «£EN-n, comp. eirecpvov) ; vopos, a law (from v4y.-u); — (c) in dissyllabic 
Oxytones of the second Dec. in -fi6s, and in dissyllabic oxytone adjectives of the 
second Dec. in -6s, which, for the most part, denote an active object and often have 
a substantive meaning, e. g. irXox-p-os, plait of hair (from 7rAeVa>) ; <rroX-fjLos, 
garment (from (tt4xx-ui) ; ttoixtt-os, attendant (from ire/xTr-w) ; aocp-os, wise (from 
2E*-n, sapio); Tpocp-os, nourishing, nourisher (from Tp4<p-oo) ; — (d) in monosyl- 
labic substantives of the third Dec, e. g. <£Ao£, _/?ame (from (px4y-a>) ; 5op£, 
antelope (from depK-ofiai) ; — (e) in oxytose substantives in-eus and adjectives 
in -as, which, however, have sometimes a substantive sense, e. g. rpocp-evs, nour- 
isher (from rp4(p-co) ; arcop-ds, scattered (from o"irep-<Tiv) ; Xoy-ds, chosen (from 
X4y-ca) ; Spofx-ds, running (from APEM-H, comp. dpa/j.-e7y) ; — (f ) in all derivatives 
of the forms mentioned, e. g. in substantives in -a/xos, adjectives in -i/xos, verbs 
in -dec, -4<a, -6u>, -evca, -t£», e. g. irx6K-afxos; rp6<p-L/j.os ; <p&ov-4co (from <p&6v-os), 
Sufi-do) (from Stfyi-os, and this from 54/j.-co), etc. 

Remark. The change of e into a (comp. § 16, 6) is found only in a few old 
poetic derivatives, e. g. rpacp-epSs. 

Rem. 2. Words derived from verbs are called verbals; those derived from 
substantives or adjectives, denominatives. 



A. Derivation. 

f232. I. Verbs. 

1. All derivative verbs end in -<£«, -4oo, -t&>, -oca, -ica, -eu&>, -«££«, -f £w, 
-<$£&>, -uC^j -aiuco, -vvw, -alp a, -el poo. All these verbs must be considered 
as denominatives ; for though the stem-substantive for several verbs of this 
kind is not in use. yet the analogy of the other verbs requires that a substan- 
tive should be assumed as the stem of these also. Many of these derivative 
verbs, especially many in -£ta and -da, supply the place of obsolete primitives, 
e. g. <pix4oo, TL/jLao*. — On the formation and signification of derivative verbs the 
following points are to be noted : — 

(a) Verbs in -do* and -a£&>, which are mostly derived from substantives of 
the first Dec, and those in -l£oo which are derived from substantives and 
adjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since 
they denote either a condition or the exercise of agency or activity, e. g. roXjxdoo, 
to be bold, from roX[xa, boldness; %oXdoo, to be angry, from x°M» 9 a H> yodeo, to 
weep, from y6os ; (Jifcdfa, to judge, from Mien ; iXirlfa, to hope, from iXids ; 6pl(co, 
to limit, from opos ; alrlCoo, to beg, from ctirns, beggar ; sometimes those in -do 
denote fulness, abundance, e. g. x o ^aco, to be full of bile, have much bile. — Verbs 
in - d £<ti and - I (co formed from proper names, express the effort to resemble 
single individuals or whole nations, in custom, nature, language, sentiment 



$ 233.] DERIVATION OF VERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES. 287 

Such verbs are called Imitative verbs, e. g. 8apid£b>, to be a Dorian, i. e. to speak 
or think as a Dorian, Awpteus; kW-nvifa, to personate the custom or language of a 
Greek, to be a Greek in custom, etc. ; (tyS'ifa, to be a Mede in sentiment. 

Remark 1. Verbs in -ifa often signify to make something into that which 
the root denotes. See (c). 

Rem. 2. Verbs in -6fa and -vfa are very rare, e. g. ap(x6fa, to Jit ; epirvfa, to 
creep. — By the ending -d(a> also, verbs are formed, which denote the repetition 
or strengthening of the idea expressed by the simple verb ; these are called 
Frequentative and Intensive verbs, e. g. pnndfa, to throw to and fro, jacto, from 
piTTTw.jacio ; CTevafa, to sigh much and deeply, from ar4v<a, to sigh ; eiicdfa, properly, 
to liken again and again, to compare on all sides ; hence to infer, conjecture. 

(b) Verbs in -4 a and -eva> are derived from substantives and adjectives of 
all declensions, and commonly express the intransitive idea of the primitive, for 
the most part, the being in a condition, or the exercise of agency, the practising of 
that which is signified by the primitive ; but they are sometimes transitive also. 
When the stem ends in -es, which is the case, e. g. in adjectives in -77s, -es, the 
es is omitted, and when it ends in -ev, the eu is omitted before the ending -evca, 
e. g. (pi\4u, to be a friend, to love, from <pi\os, arvx4(o, to be unfortunate, from 
Q-Tvxhs (stem aTir^ey), ev5a.ijut.ov4a), to be prosperous, from evdaifx-cov (stem evSaifiou), 
ayopevco, to speak in public, from ayopd, market, Koa/j.4a}, to adorn, from noo-pos, 
fSaaiXevw, to be a king, from jSacnAevs. 

(c) Verbs in - 6a>, which are mostly derived from substantives and adjectives 
of the second Dec, those in -aivw, which are commonly derived from adjec- 
tives, more rarely from substantives, and those in -vva, from adjectives only, 
generally denote the making or transforming something into that which the primitive 
word signifies; in like manner several in -/£&>, see Rem. 1, e. g. xP vcr dot>, to 
make golden, to gild, from xP vcr 6s, S-n\6co, to make evident, from 8f/Aos, ayvifa, to 
make pure, from ay vos, TrXoviifa, to make rich, to enrich, from irXovros, KoiXaivu), 
to make hollow, from koIXos, Aewccuvw, to make white, from Aeu«Jy, fiapwea, to 
burden, from fiapvs. 

Rem. 3. From the Fut. of several verbs, are formed verbs in -cretw, which 
denote a desire for that which the primitive word signifies; these are called 
Desiderative verbs, e.g. ye\acreto), to desire to laugh, from y^Aau), to laugh, ttoAc- 
fiyaeiu), to desire to engage in war, from Tro\e/xi(co, 7rapa5a><reicu, to be inclined to sur- 
render. There are also other Dcsideratives in -aw and -law, e. g. Savarda), to 
wish to die, /xad-nridu), to wish to become a disciple. 

Rem. 4. Some verbs in -o-/<a> have an inceptive sense (beginning to be), and are 
called Inceptive or Inchoative verbs, e. g. ynpdo~Ka>, to begin to be old, to grow old; 
yevcidcTKCD, to begin to have a beard; yfidaKca, pubesco. 

$ 233. II. Substantives. 

Substantives are derived : — 
1 From verbs and substantives, and express — 

a. A concrete idea, i. c. the idea of an active person (concrete nouns) : 
(a) With tlu: endings -qvs (Gen. -im) for the Masc, -etd or -i<r<ra for the 
Fern.; -T7js [-6T7JS. -6ti)s, -h-ns, -ur-ns] (Gen. -ov) (mostly I'aroxvtones), -r-f]p 
and -rwp (Paroxytones) for the Masc, -rptd (Proparoxytonea), -rpis, -tjs, 



288 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 233. 

and -is (Gen. -idos), -reipa (Proparoxytone) for the Fem. ; -cov for the Masc,, 
-aivd for the Tern.; -cos for the Masc, -cots and -coiv-n for the Fem., e. g. 
Upevs, priest, Fem. Upeia, from le/xfc ; av\i)Tr\s and -^p, flute-player, Fem. auA^- 
rpia, av\t]Tpis, from auAeco ; acoTrjp, deliverer, crcoreipa, from crc«)£a> ; iroXiT7]s, 
citizen, ttoXTtls, from 7rJAts ; p-tjTcop, orator, from 'PE-H ; frepdirwr, servant, &cpd- 
iraiva, from frepcuj/ ; olKer-ns, a stave, from ol/cos ; 8-np.6rrjs, one of the people, from 
StJiUos ; 6tt\It7]s, a lioplite, from oVAoj/ ; crrpcvricoTns, a soldier, from ffrparid. 

()8) With the ending -^s (Gen. -ou), seldom, and only from verbs with the 
variable vowel [§ 231, 6 (c)], e. g. irop.ir6s, attendant, from ir4p.irio', 6 r\ rpocpos, 
nourisher, nurse, from rpecpco ; apu>y6s, an ally, from ap-f}yco. 

b. They express the abstract idea of action, i. e. action or energy apart from 
the person who manifests it. These are abstract nouns : — 

(a) From verbs : 

(a) with the endings -cris (Gen. -areas) and (more seldom) -cria, substantives 
which denote the transitive or active idea of the verb, e. g. irpa^is, actio, an acting 
from irpdrrco ; iroi-ncris, a making, from iroUco ; doKip,a<rla, a proving, from dota/idCco ; 

(£) with the ending -p.6s (Gen. -ov), such as denote the intransitive idea of 
the verb, e. g. 6dvpp.6s, weeping, from oSvpopai ; 

(7) with the ending -p.a, such as denote the effect or result of the transitive 
action of the verb, e. g. irpayp.a, something done, p.yrjp.a, monumentum, iroirjp.a, 1 the 
thing made or done ; 

(8) with the endings -p.?), -77, -a (all for the most part Oxytones), and (from 
verbs in -evcc), -eia, such as denote sometimes a transitive relation, and some- 
times the effect of that relation, e. g. ropA\, a cutting, from r£p.vco ; dcuS^, song, 
from aeidco, <p&opd, destruction; iraideia, education; 

(e) with the endings -os (Gen. -ou), -ros (Gen. -tov) and -os (Gen. -ovs) 
such as denote, generally, an intransitive relation, also a transitive, and partly 
the effect of the action of the verb, e. g. \6yos, word, from \4ya> ; kcokvtSs, 
lamentation ; ro ktjSos, care. 

(b) From adjectives (and substantives, which are sometimes used in an 
attributive sense) : — 

(a) with the endings -id, from adjectives in -os, and some in the third Dec, 
e. g. crocpia, wisdom (from cro(p6s) ; sv§cap.ovia, happiness (from ev8alp.cov, Gen. 
-ov-os) ; 

(j8) -id (Proparoxytones) from adjectives in -rjs and -ovs, whose stem ends in 
€ and 0, with which -the 1 of the ending coalesces and forms ei and 01 (thus -em, 
-01a), e. g. aX-fj^eia, truth (from aXrj^s, Gen. -e-os), svvoia, benevolence (from 
evvo-os, evvovs) 5 

(7) -trvvn mostly from adjectives in -cov (Gen. -ovos) and -os, e. g. <rco(ppo- 
trvvn, modesty (from crcccpptov, Gen. -ov-os) ; diKcuo-crvv-n, justice (from Sikcuos) ; 

(8) -tijs, Gen. -tt?tos (commonly Paroxytones) from adjectives in -os and 

1 Nouns derived from the first Pers. Perf. Pass, denote the result of the action 
of the verb, e. g. (<svprip.cu), evp-n/xa, the thing found, the discovery ; those from the 
second Pers., the abstract act, e. g. (etiprjacu), evpetris, the act of finding ; those 
from the third Pers., the agent or doer, e. g. (euoTjTcu), evperfjs, the discoverer* 



$ 233.] DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 289 

-vs, e. g. 1<t6tt]s, Gen. -ottitos, equality (from foos) ; iraxvT7]s, thickness (from 
iraxvs) ; 

(e) -os, Gen. -eos = -ovs, from adjectives in -us and -r/s, and such as have 
the forms of comparison in -i<av and -kttos, e. g. rdxos, to, Gen. rdxovs, swift- 
ness (from rax^s), \pev8os, to, Gen. -ous, falsehood (from ^evS-fc), alorxos, to 7 , 
baseness (from alcrxp^s, alcrxiw) 5 

(C) -ds, -dSos (only in abstract numeral substantives) e.g. 77 /iopas, unity; 
Suets, duality ; Tpids, a triad. 

Remark 1. In abstracts in -Tia, which express both a transitive and intran- 
sitive relation, from compounds in -ros and -T7?s (Gen. -ov), the t is commonly- 
changed into o\ e. g. adAo^eTta and -via (adAo&eT7/s), a&avacria (aSdvaTos), atca- 
frapo-ia, ofyfiXeipia, etc. So also with adjectives in -10s, e. g. Mi\7]<rios (M/Atjtos), 
ei/mutnos (eViaurds). Comp. §§ 17, 6, and 234, Rem. 2. 

Rem. 2. The older Attic poetry sometimes makes the a long in the endings 
-eta and -01a, e. g. aj/cuSefd, irpcvoia. 

2. From substantives alone, the following ?lasses denoting the names of 
persons and things, are derived : — 

(a) Gentile nouns, i. e. the names of persons derived from their country, in 
-eus (Fern, -is, -180s), -tttis (Fern. -Iris), -cZttis (Fern. -arts), -rjTrjs, -ur-ns, e. g. 
Awpievs (a Dorian, one from Doris), Aw pis, ^vfiapiT-ns, -itij, '2,7rapTiaTr}s, 'Aiyiirf,- 
ttjs, 'H-rreipuTTis. Comp. § 234, 3 (g), etc. 

(b) Patronymics, i. e. the names of persons derived from their ancestors, with 
the endings -idrjs (Fern, -is, Gen. -i5os) ; also - ta 5 77 s 1 ; but substantives of the 
first Dec. in -77s and -as, and many of the second and third Dec. whose stem 
ends in 1, and some others, have -dS-ns (Fern, -ds, Gen. -ddos) ; these endings are 
appended to the stem, and where the stem ends in e, this e and 1 of the ending 
-:5tjs combine and form a diphthong, as in n^Ae/o^s, e. g. Upia/x-idrjs, Fem. Upia/x-is 
from Upia/M-os, Ti7]A€iS7]s from n^Aeus, Gen. IiTjAe-eos, KeKpoiriSvs from Kei<po\f/, 
Gen. -ott-os, Tla.i/&oi§Tis from IldV&oos, -ovs ; TeXa^wv-idZns from TeXa/xwu, Alved- 
577s from Alueas, 0eo-T*a87js, Fem. ©ecm-as from ®eo~Tios. 

(c) Diminutives (frequently with the accompanying idea of contempt) with 
the endings -iov which is the most usual, -apiov \-aaiov\ (seldom) and some 
few with the endings -vWiov, -vAAis, -vopiov, -ucpiov (-d<piov) (which 

belong mostly to the language of the common people and to comedy) ; is 

(Gen. -180s and -T5os), -tdiov (formed from -is); icr/tos, -ioni) {-'htkiov, 

iyvt), -ixviov) ; tdevs (but only of the young of animals), e. g. ^ipdniov, youth, 

from /*e?pa£ -a/c-os, naiS-iov, a little child, from ireus, irai5-6s ; — iraio-dpiov ; -daiov 
instead of -dpiov only in Kopdaiov (from /copa, young woman) on account of the 
•receding p: /xeipaK-vKKioi/, anavb-vAKis from &nav&a, thorn, vqa-vo'piov, islet; 
£wv-<pioi>. little animal; XP V(T '^ 10V from xp v<r ^ s ] — irivaic-is, little tablet, from 
*iva\\ a/xa^is, little wagon; prja-tStov, islet, from vrjo-os ; upeabiov (instead of 
-t^Siov) from Kpeas, oIkiZiou (instead of oliti-iSiov) from oIkIcl; — vtavi-GKos, vzavi- 
aitr) from v e aulas 5 -'igkiov seldom, e. g. kotvXlo'kiou from kotv\t) ; -iy.v-t), 

1 This form is used, when the syllable preceding the Patronymic ending is 
long, otherwise the word would not he adapted to hexameter verse, since one 
Btort syllable would stand between two long syllables ; thus, U-qXfjidfjs. 

25 



290 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 234 

•ixviov only in iroxixvn, iroXixviov from ir6Xis, KvXixvn-, kvXIxviop from kuAi£$ 
— Xay-iSevs, young hare, from Xayc&s ; aer-idevs, young eagle, from ae-ros. 

(d) Designations of place, with the endings -tou (in connection with the 
preceding vowels -aiov, -eiov, -$ov) and -etov, which denote the abode of tho 
person designated by the primitive word, or a place consecrated to a divinity 
or hero ; -wi/ (Gen. -&vos), seldom -e&v, and -cop id, which denote the residence 
of persons or a place filled with plants, e. g. ipyaorr-fip-iop, workshop, from ipyacr- 
r'fjp, and so others in -rripiop from -r-fjp or -r-ns ; sometimes also this ending is 
used with reference to vessels, e. g. iroThpiop, drinking vessel; novpeiop, barber's 
shop, from novpevs, -e-cos (several in -iop [-eiop] have another signification, e. g. 
rpo<pe?op, xoages of a nurse, from rpocpevs) ; ®rjae?op from Qrjaeis, -e-ovs, 'A^rjpaiop, 
Mowelbv; — avfip&v and yvpcttKcbv, apartments for men and women; iirircav, stable 
for horses ; podc&p and frod&vid, bed of roses ; irepiffTepe&p and -KepurTcpwp, dove- 
cote. 

(e) Substantives which denote an instrument or a means of accomplishing 
some object, with the endings -rpop and -rpa, e. g. £iWpa, curry-comb ; 8>&cuc- 
rpop, tuition-money ; Xovrpop, water for washing; XovrpSp, bath; also to designate 
place> e. g. opx^o-Tpa, dancing-room, instead of the ending -r'fjpiop. 

$ 234. III. Adjectives. 

1. From verbs are derived adjectives with the following endings: — 

(a) With the ending -os, which is annexed to the stem of the verb. These 
adjectives express the transitive, intransitive, or passive idea of the verb from 
which they are derived, e. g. (pavSs, brilliant, from cpaipoo ; XolttSs, the remainder ; 
the verb-stem of many is not in use, e. g. kcckSs. 

(b) With the endings -ik6s, -rj, -op, and -ifxos, -op, -ifxos, -tj, -qv or 
-crifios, -ov, which denote ability, fitness, aptness. Of these, those in -in6s have 
a transitive signification, those in -iy.os both a transitive and passive, e. g. 
ypa<p-ii<6s, fit or able to paint ; rp6(p-ijxos, nutritive; ld-o~ifj.os, curable. 

(c) A few with the ending -v6s, -^, -6v with an intransitive or passive 
signification, e. g. dei-p6s, frightful (AEIH), o-ejx-p6s, honored, honorable (creySo^cu), 
<rrvy-p6s, hated, hateful (2TTr\Q), tto&€iv6s {ivobioo), desired. 

(d) A few with the ending -\6s with a transitive signification, -wXSs, --ft, 
-6v and (from verbs in -aw) -r]X6s, -rj, -d" with a transitive and intransitive 
signification, e. g. 8ei-x6s, timid; eiaray-Xos (instead of iKirXayXSs from iiar\-f)ff- 
a -co), frightful; cpeid-ooXSs, sparing; (nyi)X6s, silent; aTrar-nXSs, deceitful. 

(e) With the ending -ap6s, -d, -6p (from verbs in -dco and -aivu) with an 
intransitive signification, e. g. %aAapos, slack ; fiiapSs, stained; also in <p&opep6s, 
envious; poa , 7\p6s, diseased; olnrpSs, pitiable. 

(f) With the ending -fxa>p, -pop (Gen. -ovos) with an intransitive significa- 
tion, e. g. fivi-fjioov, mindful, memor (MNAfl,), porjfiup, intelligent (poeoo). 

(g) With the ending -t] s, -es (Gen. -eos), e. g. irXrip-ns, plenus. 

(h) With the ending -ds (Gen. -dSos) with a transitive, intransitive, or pas- 
sive signification, e. g. (pop-ds, bearing {(pepw) ; Spo/xds, running (APEMX1) ; Xoyds, 
chosen (Xeyoo). 



$ 234.] DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 29! 

(i) With the endings -ros, -T17, -t6v, and -rios, -rea, -r iov (verbal 
adjectives) ; those in -to s denote either a completed action like the Perf. Pass. 
Part., e. g. \o<-t6s (from Aeyw), dictus; or the idea of possibility = English 
termination -ble, which is their usual signification, e. g. opa-ros, capable of being 
seen, visible. In their formation, most of these follow eitner an existing or an 
assumed Perf. Pass., e. g. 



fiovAev-ca 


fie-fiovAev-Tcu 


fiov\ev-r6s, -reos 


Ti/J.d-0} 


re-rifx-n-rai 


ti/xt)-t6s 


(pcapd-ot 


ire-cpupu-Tai 


cpcopa-rios 


<pi\e-ta 


"7re-<piAr]-Tai 


(pl\7)-TOS 


Xe'-w 


K€-xv-rai 


Xv-t6s 


7TX4k-0} 


Tre-irX^K-Tai 


7rAeK-T<fo, -reos 


\£y-<a 


Ae-AeK-Tat 


AeK-Tos 


(TreA-A-w 


e-<TTaA-Tcu 


(TraX-rios 


reiv-co (TA-H) 


Te-rd-rai 


ra-reos 


Sl-tiw/xi (AO-fl) 


54-So-rai 


So-tos, -reos. 



Eemark 1. Very many verbal adjectives, however, follow the analogy of 
other forms of the verb, not according to any definite rule, but take precisely 
such a form as suited the ear of the Greeks. Thus, for example, a considerable 
number followed the form of the first Aor. Pass., e. g. aipe-ca, ype-Srnv, aipe-r6s ; 
irav-w, i-irav-cr-^riv, irav-a-r6s i -reos; xpa-o,uc«, i-xp"f)-o~-&r}P, xpr)-o'-T6s, -reos] 
arp€(p-ci}, i-o~Tp€<p-&-qv, o"TpeTr-T6s ; rp€TT-co, i-Tpe<p-&7)i/, rpeir-reos ; rpecp-u, i-&pe(p- 
3-171/, frpeir-Teos ; 'l-crrri-fxi, eara-Striv, ffra-r6s, -t4os ; iiraive-ca, iirrjui-^v, iiraive- 
t6s ; — some the form of the second Aor. Act., e. g. e%w, e-crxe-roj', o-x^-tos) 
alpeco, et'Ae-Toz/, eAe-Ttfo ; '/77/xi, %-rov (commonly sTtov), acp-e-reos, eV-e-T^s; ti3tj- 
fu, z-he-Tov, $re-r6s, -t4os; — some the form of the Pres. Act., e. g. fieua, /xeu- 
€tov, /xeve-rSs, -reos: d/u.1, X-tov, l-reos] so a7r-euxe-Tos from 'ETXE-TON (evx<> 
ixai) 5 Bvva-r6s (Svva/.iai) ; (prifxi, cpa-rov, (pa-ros. 

2. Adjectives are formed from substantives and adjectives : — 

By the ending -to s (in connection with the preceding vowel of the stem 
-aios, -eios, -oios, -aos, -vios) and -ik6s (which, when v precedes, becomes -kos 
and when t, often -ai<6s). These adjectives have a very great variety of mean 
ings. They frequently indicate the mode or manner of the adjective idea, 
often also in a very general manner, that which proceeds from an object and is 
connected with it or related to it, e. g. ovpdu-ios, heavenly, pertaining to heaven ; 
Kc&dp-ios, cleanly (but na&ap6s, clean) ; iAev&epios, frank, liberal, liberalis (but 
i\ev&epos, liber) ; ay opaios, belonging to the market-place (ayopd) ; Sepeios, summer- 
like {bipos, -e-os), alSolos (alSces, -6-os), ypepos and ijpuos] rpiirrixvi-os ; 5ov\lkos] 
&7]\vk6s, fxavtaKOS. 

Rem. 2. In some words the ending -a7os also -icuos occurs, e. g. xepo"a?os, 
ffitoTaios and (tkotiouos. In several words the ending -aios (§ 17, 6) is used in- 
stead of -T-ios, e. g. <pi\OT7]crios ((pi\6T7]s, -tjtos), sitovcrios (skwv, -6vtos). 

3. Adjectives are formed from substantives alone : — 

(a) With the ending -e 10 s (mostly Paroxytones), which are formed from 
words-denoting persons, especially from proper names ; but in respect to their 
signification they arc like adjectives in -ik6s, c. g. aub~pe?os, belonging to a man, 
manly, yvvaiKelos, avSp&trzios, 'O/xJipeios. 



292 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 235, 

(b) With the endings -eos == -ovs and -tvos, which denote the material 
of which anything is made, like the English ending -en, e. g. xpu(r-eo$ = xp v ~ 
aovs, golden; xaAweos = xaA/coOs, brazen; £vA-wos, wooden; o~kvtivos, made of 
leather, leathern. 

(c) With the ending -tv6s (seldom -tvos), derived from substantives. These 
express certain relations of time ; sometimes, also, an abundance or fulness, 
e. g. ko~irep-iv6s, vespertinus ; x&etr-tvcfc, hesternus ; 6peiv6s, mountainous (6pos, Gen. 
-e-os). 

(d) With the endings -ets, Gen. -euros (always preceded by a vowel, 77, 
when the substantive from which the Adj. is formed, is of the first Dec, and o, 
when it is the first or second) 5 -pos, -ep6s, -Tjpos, -dAeos, which denote 
fulness or abundance, e. g. vA-fj-eis, woody ; irvpo-eis, fiery ; alax-p^s, base ; vos- 
ep6s, and voo~-i)p6s, unhealthy ; pco/x-aAeos, strong. Exceptions to those in -ets, 
are Sevdprjeis from ZevZpov , %«P'ets from x^P ls - 

(e) With the ending -4\p 10 s, which have the transitive sense of verbal sub- 
stantives in -7)p and -17s, e. g. cioT-hpios, preserving, that preserves. 

(f) With the ending -do 8 77 s, Neut. -codes (formed from -o-eiD^s from e?8os, 
form, quality). These adjectives denote a quality or resemblance, but often 
also a fulness or abundance, e. g. (pAoydbdys, resembling flame, fiery ; iroubD-ns, 
abounding in grass, grassy. 

(g) With the endings -1 os (Fern, -id), -k6s, -ikos (Eem. -ktj, -iK-n), -r)v6s 
(Fern. -771/7?), and when 1 or p precedes, -dv6s (Fern, -avt)), -7vos (Fern, -ivn) ; 
these are Gentile adjectives, which are also frequently used as substantives, 
particularly those in -77^, -dv6s, -Ivos, which are formed only from names 
of cities and countries out of Greece, e. g. KopivS-ios, -ia, 'A&rivcuos, -aia, X?os 
(instead of -tios from Xios), 'Apye?os (from"Ap-yos, -e-os) ; Aaicedaifiov-iKos ; Kv£ik- 
7)v6s, -rjvfi (Kv£lkos), '2apdi-av6s, -avi] ('Zdpdeis, Ion. Gen. -i-u>v), 'AyKvpav6s 
{"AyKvpa), TapavT-tvos, -ivr\ (Tcipas, -avr-os). 

k 235. IV. Adverbs. 

1. Adverbs are formed from verbs : — 

With the endings -Z-qv or, when the primitive has the variable 0,-dSrjv, 
which denote mode or manner, e. g. Kpvfid-nv, secretly (KpdirTco) ; ypdfi-Z-qv, by 
writing, scribendo (ypdcpco) ; o-irop-aSriv, scatter edly, sparsim. 

2. From verbs and substantives : — 

With the ending - 8 6 v or - a 8 6 v, - 77 8 6 v (mostly from substantives). These 
also denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external form, e. g. 
aixicpavSSi/, openly, aperte ; Sta/cptSov, distinctly; fioTpvdSv, grape-like, in clusters 
(&6Tpvs), lAaSov, in troops, catervatim ; ayeAridSu, in herds, gregatim ; KvynSSff 
like a dog. 

3. From substantives, pronouns, and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the 
three relations of place, viz., ivhence, whither, and where, by the endings -&ev, -8e 
(-(re), and -S-t, e. g. ovpav6Sev, from heaven ; ovpav6v-§e, into or to heaven, <obpav6- 
Sn, in heaven; 'dAAo-frev, from another place, aliunde, itAAo-cre, to another place, alio, 
&AA0-&1, at another place, alibi. — Rules in respect to the accent of those in freu 



$ 236.] DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 293 

and -3-t: (a) Dissyllables are either Paroxytones or Propeiispomena, e. g. 
irp6cr&ev, yri&ev, ai&i; (b) polysyllables are Paroxytones, when the penult is 
short by nature, e, g. Aecr/3o&ej> from AeVySos, Kvn-pofrev from Kinrpos, ovpavoSev, 
ovpavo&i from ovpavos ) exceptions : ofrcod-ej/, oIko&i, evdo&ev, tV5o&i, irdvro&ev, 
&KAo&ev, kxdo-To&ev, and some poetic words ; (c) polysyllables whose penult is 
long by position, are without exception Proparoxytones, e. g. ivroaSrev, oVfc-fre;/; 
(d) polysyllables whose penult is long by nature, are Proparoxytones, when the 
primitive was a Barytone, e. g. e|a>d-ey (e£«), kripicdrev (eVepos), 'Afrfivrj&ev 
{'ASrqvcu) ; but Propeiispomena, when the primitive was an Oxytone, e. g. 
YlvStwbev {Ylvfrcb), @pL?i&ev (®pid). On the accent of those in -5e (-ere), see § 34, 
Eem. 5. 

Remark 1. Words of the first Dec. retain their a or 77 before -3-ez/; those 
of the second, their ; and those of the third, the of the Gen. ending, e. g. 
'OAi//i7T£d^€z/, 27rapT7j-3-ej/, olKo-bev, ctWo-frev ; but the vowels a, 77, and o are 
often exchanged with each other, e. g. pi£6-&ev from pi£a, Wleyapofrev from 
Meyapa, rd. 

Rem. 2. Adverbs in -co, and also others, append the endings to the un- 
changed vowels, e. g. dvco-^reu, Karco-bev, e|w-3-ev, ittei-Sev, iyyv-fri, %i>do-&ev, 
et/So-hi. Some forms of the comparative in -repos lengthen o into co, e. g. 
a/j.<poT4pco-frev. In some of the above forms, w can be shortened into o in poetry, 
and then rejected entirely, e. g. e£o-&ev, Trp6cr-&ev (instead of Qco&ev, irpScrccSev), 
and in imitation of Doric usage, <r is often omitted before £-, e. g. firikuzv, eWo- 
3-ez/ (instead of oTricrd-ev, eVrocrd-ez/). 

Rem. 3. The ending -5e is commonly appended to substantives only, and to 
the unchanged form of the Ace, e. g. aAaSe, to or into the sea (d\s), Tlv&code (from 
Uv&co), oiKovde only Epic, elsewhere o'Uade (from the stem 'OIE), as cpvyade (from 
$YE) instead of ej> vy-rjvSe which is not in use, 'EAevcriVaSe). In pronouns and 
adverbs, -ere is appended instead of -Se, e. g. e/ce?-cre, ciAAocre, krepcoae, ovdapocre, 
TT\\6cre : more seldom in substantives, e. g. o^/cocre. — In plural substantives in 
-as, aSe becomes (e, e. g. 'A^raCe, 0-h{Sa£e ; but some substantives in the singu- 
lar, also, follow this analogy, e. g. 'OKvp.Tria(e ; so the poetic adverbs, &vpa£e, 
to the door,foras, epa(e, xa^«C e > t0 ^ ce ground, humum (from the obsolete sub- 
stantives, tpa, x a H-a> earth). 

Rem. 4. Instead of -5e or -are, the Epic dialect has -5 is also, e. g. x«M«8is 
instead of x a ^C € ^ ctAAucus instead of &AAocre, and cn/ca5is, domum. 

Rem. 5. Several pronominal forms with the usual suffix, have, between the 
stem and the suffix, the syllable a%, which is to be accounted for by the ending 
-clkis coming before the aspirated relative, e. g. iroW-ax-oSev (from 71-oAAa/as 
and o&ev), iravr-ax-o<re ; this occurs also in most pronominal adverbs of place 
in -77, -ov, -01, e. g. aAA-ax-oS, alibi, iroW-ax-ov, iravT-ax-rJi 7roAA-ax-?7, iravr-ax-o'i. 

§ 236. B. Compounds. 

1. Every compound consists of two words, one of which explains the other 
more definitely. The explanatory word usually stands first, e. g. vau-jxaxia, 
sea-fight, as is usual in English in composite words. The word which is explained 
by the other, shows to what class of words the compound belongs, i. e. whether 
it is a substantive or verb, etc. 5 thus, e. g. vav-fiaxia is a substantive, vav-fxax^v 
a verb, vav-jxdxos an adjective. 

Remark 1. The explanatory word takes the second place in the compound 
but seldom, and mostly in poetic words, e. g. Seicndaiixcou, i. e. detcras rovs Soc- 
pevas. 

25* 



294 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 237 

2. Both words stand either in an attributive relation to each other (= a substan- 
tive qualified by an adjective or by another substantive in the Gen.), e. g. k<xx- 
e !"» ( = KaK ^ ^'£ £S ' bad condition) ; (rxiaypacpia (— axias ypa<p-f)), painting in light and 
shade; linr-ovpis (= 'ittttov obpd), horse-tailed; or in an objective relation (= a 
verb, adjective, or substantive with the Case of a substantive in the relation of 
an object, or with an adverb in the same relation), e. g. liriroTpo(pe7y (= 'tirirovs 
Tpecpetv), iir-Korp6<pos\ yav/xax^y (i- e. vava\ /xdxscr&ai), vavjxdxos, yavfxax'i-a '■> 
ei»Tu%e?j/, evrvxys ', avtardi/ai, aydcraros, aydaratris. 

3. The verb can be compounded with prepositions only, e. g. euro-, e/c-, avn-, 
irpo-, e/x-, Sia-, Kara-, napa-, npoa-fSaivsiv ; comp. § 237, 5 ; the substantive and 
adjective, either with substantives and adjectives, or with prepositions, or with 
separable and inseparable adverbs and prefixes, e. g. o-cc/j.aTo-(pv\a^, rjSv-Xoyos ; 
irepi-crracris, 5id-Aeu/cos ; eb-rvx^s, av-airios ; the adverb, with prepositions only, 
e. g. Trcpi-aradoy. 

Rem. 2. All other compounds are formed by derivation from words pre- 
viously compounded, e. g. eb-rvx^iv and eb-rvx&s from cb-rvxhs. 

Rem. 3. (a) Separable adverbs are suc?i as are used alone, as well as in 
composition, e. g. ev, well; irAqy, except ; apa, at the same time; dyxh near; dpri, 
now, recently ; &yay (aya-), very; irdKiv, again; iraAai, long since; Sis from Svo, 
bis, or the same as Si'xa, dis, separately ; irav, wholly ; ebrvx^iv, ebrvxys, prosperous ; 
Tr\7]lj.fx€\7]s {-kK-tiv, fJLtXos), violating harmony; irX-rju/jLeXely, ^Ae^eA^o-is ; hjxarpo- 
Xaca, to run together, a/xarpoxia ; ayxifia-Teiv, to go near to ; ayx&d\a<rcros, mart 
propinquus; opnd-aATjs, now blooming ; ayaa&evris, aydppoos, aydwicpos, very snowy ; 
iraXifj.^Xao-ros, that buds again ; ira\ai(pvTos, planted long since ; 5ts%iAioi, two thou- 
sand ; 5i<p£royyos, having a double sound ; irdvcrocpos, all-wise. 

(b ^Inseparable adverbs are such as are used only in composition. They are 
as follows : — 

(a) 7]{J.i-, half, semi, e. g. 7]fx(<p\eKTos, half-burned, semiustus. 

(/3) 5 vs- expresses difficulty, adversity, or aversion, and is often the antith- 
esis of eu, e. g. $vstvx*w and sbrvx^v, SvsSaifJLOvia, misfortune ; 

(7) a Privative (usually ay- before a vowel) has the force of the Latin in, and 
expresses the negation of the idea contained in the simple word, e. g. 
&o-o<pos, unwise ; ari^ia, dishonor ; dircus, childless ; avaWios, innocens. 

(5) a Collective and Intensive, like the Latin con in composition, expresses com- 
munity, equality, or a collective idea, and hence also intensity, e. g. (commu- 
nity, especially in the names of kindred and companions) &5eA<£os, brother, 
from de\<pvs, womb; (equality) ardXavros, of the same weight ; aireSos, even ; 
(in a collective sense) a&p6os, collected (&p4a>, frpiojAcu, to cry aloud), doAA^s, 
collected (from aXrjs or a\r}s), ayeipoo, ayeXr] ; (intensity) arevt]s, intent, in- 
tentus ; &ctklos, very shady ; &Ppojj.os, making a loud noise. 

Rem. 4. The Euphonic a (§ 16, 10) must be distinguished from the Collec- 
tive a, e. g. o-rdxvs and ao-raxvs, an ear of grain ; a-repo-ir!) and affrepoirr], lightning. 



§ 237. Formation of Compounds. 

1. When the first part of the compound is a verb (§ 236, Rem. 1), the pure 
(sometimes also the strengthened) stem of the verb remains unchanged, if the 
following word begins with a vowel, e. g. <pep-avyf)s, irzifr-apxe'iy ', or the final 
vowels e, 0, 1, also the syllables cri, ecr, eai, <ro, are annexed to the stem of the 
verb, if the following word begins with a consonant ; <r also is annexed when 



§ 237.] FORMATION OF COMPOUNDS. 295 

the following word begins with a vowel, e. g. b*aK-4-&vp.os, At7r-o-Ta/cT7js and Aenr 
o-rdicTrjs, repir-i-Kepavyos, iyep-(rl-yeA<cs, (pep-ea-fSios, rajA-eai-xpus, 4AK-eci-7re7rAos, 
p.i£of3dp{iapos (== fuy-ao-fi.), ptycurms ( = piir-ff-acnns), irXri^nnros (= irXr)y-cr- 

ITTTTOS). 

2. "When the first part of the compound is a substantive or adjective, the 
declension-stem of the substantive generally remains unchanged, e. g. (first 
Dec.) viK-n-cpdoos, ayopa-vSfxos ; (second Dec.) \oyo-ypd<pos, lo--r)p.epos (by Elision), 
Ko.Kovpyos (by Crasis), AaycofioAos (Xaya>s) ; (third Dec.) acrrv-vopos, rj(iv-\6yos, 
ftov-tyopfios, vav-fiax'^a ; nvp-cpopos, pieKay-xoXia, Traur)yvpis ; in some, the union- 
vowel is annexed to the stem, e. g. o-apar-o-cpvKa^, <pvcri-o-\6yos, SaSovxos (by 
Crasis, instead of SaB-6-exos) 5 in neuters in -os, Gen. -e-os, the e is elided before 
«, e. g. ^L(f)-o-(p6pos, or the declension-stem in -es [§ 61, (b)] is retained, e. g. 
reAes -cpopos 5 so also in other neuters, e. g. Kepas-fi6\os, <pm-<p6pos. 

Eemaek 1. In the first Dec, however, the union-vowel is often found 
instead of the declension-stem, e. g. SiK-o-ypdcpos (St/c?j), Aoyx-o-<p6pos ; so also 
the ending -77 or -a is annexed even to words of the second and third Dec, e. g. 
^auaTT]-(p6pos, acnridrj-cpSpos; neuters in -os (Gen. -eos, PL -77) frequently vary 
between the and 77, e. g. ^i<po<popos and £i(pr)<p6pos, CKsvocpSpos and (TK6vn<p6pos. 

Rem. 2. In some words of the third Dec, more seldom of the first and 
second, t is annexed to the pure stem, as a union-vowel, e. g. Ttvpiirvovs, alyi- 
&6tt)s; pvarnroXos (pvo-rr]s), p.vpiirvovs. In several words a euphonic o~ (crt) is 
inserted, e. g. p.oyo-o--TOKOs, ^eo-xx-ex^rpia, together with the regular &zoex&p' ia > 
vav-crl-iTOpos* 

3. "When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes 
take place, which arise from the general rules respecting the change of 
-consonants. 

4. Respecting the second part of the compound, it is to be noted, that the 
words beginning with a, e, 0, in composition regularly lengthen these vowels 
(if the last part of the compound is a simple) into 77 and co, e. g. (a) evrjvepos 
from avzp.os, crparriySs from &yw, €vr)va>p from avf)p ; (e) dusiiperpos from iper- 
fx6s, SusijAaros from e'AaiW ; {e) avaxpsX-'ns from o^eAos, irayuAe^pos from oAAiyu, 
avAvvpos from pvopxt.. 

5. In relation to the end of the word, the following points should be noted : — 

A. In the Greek language, as has been seen (§ 236, 3), a verb can be com- 
pounded only with prepositions ; but if it is necessary to compound a verb with 
another part of speech, this is never done immediately, but by means of a 
derivation from a compound word either actually existing or assumed. Then 
the derivative-ending, commonly -ew, is regularly appended to this compound 
word : e. g. from Hinrovs rp4(p€iu, to keep Itorses, the derivative is not tmrorpecpeLv, 
but by means of the compound substantive 'nnrorpdepos, it is linroTpo<pGca ; so 
&eo<re/3ew from &eoo-el3r)s, va.vp.axzw from vavpdxos, euTt/%eiV from evTvxvs. 

B. The compound is an adjective or noun : — 

a. The second part is derived from a verb, and has the following endings : 
(a) Most frequently -os, -ov 1 c g. frnpoTp6(pos, nourishing wild beasts, frnp6rpQ' 

<pos, nourished by wild beasts. See § 75, Rem. 4. 
(fi) -77s (-T17S) or -as (Gen. -ov), -r\p (-Trip), -rotp, commonly used as 

substantives with a transitive signification, e. g. evepyzT-ns, benefactor; 

yopLQ&errjs, legislator; /ivpoirw\ris, opviSoMipas, iraidoAzTaip , 



296 FORMATION OF WORDS. [$ 237 

(y) - V *> - € s, commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, e. g. 

&eo<piA'fis, beloved of God; evjAa&rjs, quick to learn, docili3 ; evirpeir'f]?, 

becoming; 
(5) -s (-£), e. g. ^euSffytapTus from MAPTYH, vopocpvAat. 

b. Or the second part is a substantive : — 

(a) An attributive relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the 
first containing a more definite explanation of the last. The substantive 
remains unchanged. The first part is an adverb or preposition, sometimes also 
a substantive or adjective, e. g. o/xoSovAos, a fellow-slave ; fiov\i/jt.os, excessive hun- 
ger, bulimy ; aKpoiroXis, citadel. 

(b) An objective relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the 
last denoting the object of the first. This division includes a large number of 
adjectives, the first part of which consists either of a verb, or, though more 
seldom, of an adjective, of a separable or inseparable adverb, or of a preposi- 
tion used as an adverb, e. g. Seia-iBalfxcov = 6 robs dai^ovas Seicas, iirixaipeKaKos 
= 6 to?s kclkoTs kiriyaXpuiv, KaKoSai/xoov = 6 nanbv Sai/xova ^X 0iV i ^sepoos, one who 
has an unhappy love, ev&eos = 6 tov &ebv iv 4auT<£ ex a>v > &noiK.os = 6 aivb tov 
oIkov &v, &ircas = 6 ircudas ovk %x<»v. In all these examples the form of the sub- 
stantive remains unchanged, 1 where the substantive has a form which is appro- 
priate for the Masc. or Fern, of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the 
substantive assumes a corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -os (Gen. -ov), -cos 
(Gen. -oo),-t)s (Gen. -ovs), -is (Gen. -idos), -<av and (when it ends in -v) -s, e. g, 
<rvvSenrvos (Sslirvov), a fellow-guest, ev&vSinos (Si/nj), Uti/aos (rip.-fi) : Sexrifi^pos 
(rjfjiepa), (piXoxpTlfunos (xpyp-a, xpvuaTa), a(rrop.os (arS^a), evyeas (yy), having a 
fertile soil; \eiir6vsoos (vavs), one ivho deserts the ship ; avwcpeX-fjs (to ocpeXos), btva\~ 
Kts (aA/dy), axp'n/J-oov, aSciKpvs, Gen. -vos (to Sdnpv). 

c. Or the second part is an adjective : — 

The adjective retains its form, except that those in -vs commonly take the 
ending -rjs ; the first part consists 'either of a substantive or an adverb, e. g. 
acrrvyeircov, near the city, urbi vicinus; irdvcocpos or 7rdcro-o<pos, -ov, very wise; av6- 
fxows, -ov, unlike ; irp6§r)\os, -ov, arjdris from 7]Svs, TroSa>Kr)s from ojkvs. 

1 For example, Seio-idaifMoov is an adjective of two endings, the ending -a>v 
being both Masc. and Fern., therefore the substantive dalfiwv is not changed in 
composition ; but avvdenrvos takes a regular adjective termination, as the sul> 
stantive Sdirvov has neither a Masc. nor Fem. ending. 



SYNTAX 



SECTION I. 

SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 



CHAPTEE I. 
Parts of a Simple Sentence. 

f238. Nature of a Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate. 

1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the ex- 
pression of a thought in words, e. g. To poSov ^rdWec) 6 
av$pa)7ro<; ^vtjtos iarcv. The conceptions of the mind are 
related both to each other and to the speaker. The con- 
ceptions or ideas themselves are expressed by Essential 
words (§ 38, 4) ; their relations to each other, partly by 
inflection and partly by Formal words. 

Thus, e. g. in the sentence Tb Ka\bv pSdou &d\\-ei iv rep rod irarp-bs K-qir-io, 
there are five essential words : k<xK6s, p6Sov, &d\\eiv, imri\p, ktittos ; their rela- 
tions to each other are expressed partly by their inflection and partly by the 
Formal words rS, eV, red, rod. 

2. Every sentence must necessarily have two parts, a sub- 
ject and a predicate. The subject is that, of which some- 
thing is affirmed ; the predicate that, which is affirmed of the 
subject, e. g. in the sentences, to poBov ^rdXkec — 6 aiS&pcoTro? 
^vtjtos iarcv, to poBov and 6 dv$pcD7ro<$ are the subjects, ^d\- 
\ec and ^vtjtos iarcv, the predicates. 

3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the 
sentence; the subject is subordinate to it and can be 



298 syntax. [$ 238 

expressed by a mere inflection-ending of the verb, e. g, 
BiBco- /jl c, (J) give. 

4. The subject is a substantive or a word used as a 
substantive, viz. a substantive pronoun or numeral; an 
adjective or participle used as a substantive ; an adverb 
which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article ; a 
preposition with its Case ; an infinitive ; finally, every word, 
letter, syllable, and every combination of words can be con- 
sidered as a substantive, and with the neuter article com- 
monly agreeing with it, can be used as a subject. The 
subject is in the Nom. 

Tb poSov fraAAet. — 5 Eya> ypdcpco, <r v ypd<peis. — Tpe?s ^A&oj/. — 'O <ro<pbs ev* 
haijJiuv earl. — Ol <p&ovov vr es yiurovvrai. — O t ir a A a t avdpeloi ijcrav. — O l ir e p I 
Mi At idS riv koAws ifiax^cravro. — X. Cy. 8. 3, 42. Ovroi ovrus i)Sv i<rri rb 
%X elv xMi uaTa ' & s o-viapbv rb air ofidWeiv. — Tb SiSaCKetv /caAoV icrriv. 
— X. R. L. 9, 2. eirerai rfj apery cra>(ecr&ai els rbv irXeico %p6vov fiaKXov, i) 
rfj nania. — To ej crvvSear/xSs icrriv. — Tb r)ra /xaKpSv icrriv. — Tb yvca&i ffeav- 
rbv koKov icrriv. 

Remark 1. In the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive, the 
subject is in the Ace, as will be seen § 307, 3. In indefinite and distributive 
designations of number, the subject is expressed by a preposition {els, irepi, Kara) 
with its Case, e. g. Els r4rrapas %7&ov, as many as four came (with round, num- 
bers els also signifies about, at most). X. Cy. 8. 3, 9. ecrraaav irparov jxev ra>v 
dopv<p6pa>v els r er pan ts%(A.iou s {about four thousand stood), efxirpocr&ev Se rwv 
irvA&v els r ecrcrapas, SisxtAto: Se enarepoiSev roov irvAwv. X. H. 6. 5, 10. 
eepvyov els AaKedai/xova rwv irepi ^rdewnrov Tey ear u>v ire pi 6 KraKocr iov s. 
So ko& eKacrrovs, each one singly, one by one, singuli ; Kara e&vT], singulae gentes. 

5. In the following cases the subject is not expressed by 
any special word : — 

(a) When the subject is a personal pronoun and is not particularly emphatic, 
e. g. Ypdcpca, ypdcpeis, ypdcpei ; 

(b) When the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro- 
priately belong to every subject, but only to a particular one, the subject 
being, as it were, implied in the predicate. Thus, olvoxoevei in Horn. 
sc. 6 olvoxo'os, the cup-bearer pours out the wine; &vei in Her. sc. 6 Svri)p. 
X. An. 3. 4, 36. e7rel iy'iyvcacTKOV avrovs ol"EXX7]ves fiovAo/mevovs airievai Kal 
SiayyeAAo/xevovs, eK7)pv£e (sc. 6 Kiipv^) ro?s"EAAr)crnrapacrKevdcracr&ai. So 
crt] jxaiv ei r~p cr aAir lyy i, e a aAir iy£ev, sc. 6 craAinKri]s { the signal is 
[was] given by the trumpet). So Ave must explain words which denote the 
state of the weather or the phenomena of nature ; as v e i, it rams ; vlcpei, 
it snoivs, fipovra, acrr pdirr e i, sc. 6 Zeis. Th. 4, 52. e cr eicre, there was 
an earthquake. X. Cy. 4. 5, 5. crvGKord^ei, it is dark; 

(c) The subject is easily supplied from the context ; thus, in designations of 
time, e. g. r)v iyyvs tjAiov ducr/xaiv (sc. i) T]jxepa). ^Hv a.fj.(pl ayopav irA-hSrovcral 
and the like ; irapex^t /*ot, sc. Kaipos, it is time, it is allowed, one can = licet^ 



IvfeCre ) SUBJECT. PREDICATE. COPULA 299 

e ( ,J> ler. 3, 73. rj/xiv irape^ei avacrdxraa^ai -tt\v apxw> In this way the 
wcrv S 3-eo's is very frequently omitted in certain phrases, e. g. Trpovn- 
fiai** i, SC. o 3-e^s ; tt p o x &> p et /zoj (sc. ra irpdyuara), things prosper to me, 
I succeed, comp. Th. 1, 109. In such expressions as cpatri, Xeyovat, etc.. 
the sutject dv^pccirot is regularly omitted, as it is readily apparent 5 

^d) Sometimes the subject is supplied from some word of the sentence. Her. 
9, 8. rov 'laSrfx'ov ireix^ov Kai <T(pi i\v irpbs reXei, sc rb Te?xos, they 
vxdkd the Isthmus, and the [iuali] icas, etc. X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. iropevaof.icu 
tv&vs irpbs ra /SatriA. eta, ical ?jv fj.hu avSi(TTf)Tai, sc. 6 fiaaiXevs. So also 
other Cases as well as the Nom. are thus supplied, e. g. PI. L. 8G4, d. 
iratdia xp^\ aevos i ovdei/ ira) rwu to iovt <av (sc. iraiSccv) Siacpepcw; 

(e) With the third Pers. Sing, of the verb, in a subordinate clause containing 
a general idea, and in definitions, the indefinite pronoun t I s is sometimes 
omitted. PI. CritOll. 49, C ovre avraSuceiv 5e?, ovre nanus iroieiy ovZzva 
av&pwTTwv, oi/S' av qtlovv irdaxv ^n avr&v, not even if any one should 
suffer from them ; so often with the Inf. ; but if a participle stands in 
connection with the Inf., e. g. Eur. M. 1018. Kov<pa>s cpepeiv xP^l Sv7\rbv 
out a av/xepopas, the participle must be considered as the subject. 

Eem. 2. Such expressions as 8e?, xpV> Sokc?, irpexei, QecrTi(v), eVSe'xeTai (it is 
possible), KaAcDs, eu ex ef > *X €l ^yov {consentaneum est), Xeyerai (it is said), etc., 
the Greek language always sonsiders as personal, the following Inf. or substan- 
tive sentence being regarded as the subject of these verbs. 

6. The predicate is a verb, an adjective, participle, ad- 
jective pronoun or numeral, or a substantive with the 
Formal word ehcu ; elvai, in this relation, is usually called 
the copula, since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc. 
with the subject, and forms one thought, e. g. 

Tb f>6Zov bd\Kn. — '0 av&pcanss ^vnr6s iany. — 'Afrai/a-roi elcriv oi 
&eoi. — 'H apery) KaK-f] ivriv. — 'A ya&r) irapaicpaais icrriu eraioov. — Kvpos 
i\v /Sacr ihev s. — Tovto rb irpuy.ua ivri r 6 5 e. — 2u 7) or & a iravrwv irpuros. 
— Oi avZpes i) ea v r p e t 5. 

Rem. 3. The finite verb denotes both the thing affirmed (id qxiod pracdicatur) 
and the relation of the affirmation to the subject and speaker ; the relation to 
the subject, is denoted by the personal-endings of the verb ; the relation to the 
roeaker, by its Modes and Tenses; e. g. the ending of the verb \4yu shows 
that its subject is in the first person, and its being in the Ind. mode Pres. tense, 
indicates that the speaker asserts something directly, at the present time. But 
if the predicate is expressed by an adjective or substantive with elvai, the 
affirmation is denoted by the adjective or substantive, and its relation to the 
speaker by eluai, C. g. evdaiuwi/ elfii = evSaiuove-ca, evSaiucw e? = evhaiixove-eis , 
*v8aiuoves ioovro.i = evSaiuo^-aoucriy, though there is a difference between the 
two modes of expression. 

Beh. 4. It is necessary to distinguish between the use of thai, as a Formal 
and as an Essential word; in the former relation, il is merely a copula, con- 
necting the subject with the substantive or adjective, etc. (§238,6,); in the 
latter, it has the idea of being or existence, being in a certain condition, etc. 
€o-ti &e<k = &eo's icrrtv &v (there is a God, God exists), as in Her. 3, 10K. tcv 
Sfeiov v irpoi/oir] iarl iovcr a crotpr]. 



300 SYNTAX. [* 239 

Rem. 5. In order to give greater emphasis to the predicate, the simple idea 
expressed by the verb, is resolved into the participle and copula elvai. This 
mode of expression, however, is more usual in poetry, though it is found also 
in prose, particularly in Herodotus, comp. Rem. 3. Eur. C. 381. ttws & raXai- 
TT(ap\ ^re irdcrxovres rdSe ; Id. H. 117. i\v crirevScov. Her. 3,99. airap- 
veo fiev 6s ecrri. Id. 9, 51. 77 vt)0*6s £o~ti airb rod 'Aawirov (Setca crradiovs 
airexovcra. PI. E. 860, e. el ravra ovrcos exovrd ecrriv. Dem. 01. 3. 
(v. 1.) 11, 7. ravr av eyvw/cJies ?j<rav, they would have been convinced of these 
things. 

Rem. 6. The copula el vat is sometimes omitted, though commonly only in 
the Ind. Pres. ; elvat is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, but 
properly a verb. This ellipsis is most frequent in the following cases : — 

(a) In general propositions, observations, and proverbs. Eur. 0. 330. 6 fxeyas 
oXfios ov /xSvifAOS ev PporoTs. X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. arpaTta yap y\ pdar-i] (oSos) 
Tax'taTTy '■, 

(b) Very often with verbal adjectives in -reos, as also with other expres- 
sions denoting necessity and duty, e. g. a v d y k 77, % e co j/, befits, e I k 6 y, 
also with Kcupos, &pa and the like. Dem. Ph. 3, 129, 70. 7)/n?v y virep ttjs 
iXev&eplas ay cov to-reov. Id. Cor. 296, 205. an/xias — eV dovXevovo-p ttj 

. ir6Xet <pepetv avdyKT)', 

(c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. erotfios, irpSfrvfAos, ot6sre^ Svva- 
t6s, paStov, %aAe7r^i/, SrjXov, &£tov, etc. Pi. Phaedr. 252, a. (77 
tyvxv) SovXevetv eroi/xr]. Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. eyio iracrxtw ortovv erot- 
fxos. X. C 1, 1, 5. SrjXov ovv, on ovk av (^caKparris) irpoeXeyev, el jxt} 
eiriarevev aX-nSev<retv. Comp. ib. 2, 34. Here belong also the expi-essions 
bav/j.ao'rbv Scrov, it is very wonderful (= mirum quantum), ajxrixavov oaov, it 
is quite impossible, inconceivable (= immane quantum), see § 332, Rem. 10. 
On oi>8e\s Ssns ov {— nemo non), see § 332, Rem. 12. 

Rem. 7. The Ind. Impf. is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aeschin.. Ctes. § 71, v\>£ 
ev [xeo~a> (sc. ^v) kcu Traprj/j-ev rrj ixTrepaiq els rrjv eKKArjcriav, the Ind. Pres. also is 
not very often omitted after conjunctions, e. g. SirSre, iirei (comp. X. C. 1, 46) ; 
on the contrary, very frequently after on and &s (that), e. g. X. C. 1. 2, 52. 
Xeyoov, &s ovdev 6<peXos. The subjunctive is but seldom omitted after the rela- 
tive ts &v, and especially after conjunctions, e. g. PI. Rp. 370, e. av av avroTs 
Xpeta (sc. rj). The ellipsis of the Opt. when &v belongs to it is more frequent, 
e. g. X. Cy. 1.4, 12. ris yap 'av, e<pao~av, cod ye tKavcvrepos 7re?aat (sc. ett]) ; Ib. 2. 
3, 2. $v jjiev 7]/xe7s vtnto/xev, SrjXov, on o'i re iroXe/xiot av rjfxeTepot (sc. eX-qo'av). The 
ellipsis of the Imp. is very rare, e. g. S. O. C. 1480. 'Ixaos, S> dai/xwv. X. An. 3. 
3, 14. to?? odv &eo?s X&P IS ( sc - effTw), on ov avv nroXXrj pdofiy, aXXa. avv bxiyois 
tfX&ov. The participle is very often omitted, especially after verba intelligendi 
and declarandi, e. g. X. S. 3, 7. StjaSv ye, on cpavXos (sc. idv) (pavodfiat, but else- 
where also, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 15. &ro7ra Xeyets Kal ovda/xais -rrpbs aov (sc. ovra), et 
nullo modo tibi convenientia ; even in such cases as Th. 4, 135. xet|U«j/os reXevruv- 
tos Kal -n-pbs %ap ^'877 (sc. ovros). The Inf. is often omitted after ooKeTv, riyelcr- 
Sac, vopiCeiv and the like, e. g. Th. 7, 60. fiovXevrea idoKei. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14. 
cbnoWa fxe itceXevcras rots CTparnyiKois (sc. etvat) vofxi^o/xevoLS avdpdcn dtaXeyea- 
§ai. 

$239. Comparison. — Attribute and Object. 

1. When the predicate belongs to the subject in a higher or 
lower degree than to another object, this relation is denoted by 
the Comparative, e. g. 'O Trarrjp iacl^uv ivriv, 7} 6 vlos. : — e O 



$239.] COMPARISON. — ATTRIBUTE AUD OBJECT. 301 

cro<f>b<s /xaWov xcupet T Z7 aperr}, rj rots xpi]p.acnv. And when the 
predicate belongs to the subject in the highest or lowest 
degree, as respects all other objects compared, the Superlative 
is used, aod commonly takes with it a partitive Genitive, e. g. 
^wKpa-rns ttolvtuv 'J&Wrjvwv crocpojTaTos r\v. — 'O crocpbs ttolvtuiv 
fj.aXi<TTa IttlSv putZ rrjs aperi}?. 

Eemakk 1. The Comparative is strengthened or more definitely stated in 
the following ways : (a) by en, still, even, etiam, e. g. /neifav en, still greater ; 
(b) by fxaKpcp, oXiyu), iroAAo?, eV l 7roAA<iJ, ocrcv, TocrovTCf] p.4ya, 
bxiyov, ttoKv, ocrov, roaovro, -which show how much more or less of the 
quality expressed by the adjective is intended, e. g. iro A Aw ndfav, multo major, 
far greater, tt oWu en p.ei£oves, multo majores etiam ; (c) sometimes by/uaA- 
Kov. Her. 1, 32. fiaWov oA^iurepos iarri (far). 

Eem. 2. The Superlative is strengthened or more definitely stated in the 
following ways : (a) by icai, vel, even, e. g. ko.\ p.d\iara, vel maxima, very greatly 
indeed; (b) by words denoting measure or the degree of difference, viz. 7roAAa>, 
fxaKpw, 7roAu, Trap a ttoAv, ocrco, roaovrcv, e. g, iroAAw dpio-ros, multo 
pracsUinfi.ssimus.thebestbyfar; fiaKpca dpurros, longe praestantissimus ; (c) even 
by the Superlative: p.d\i<TTa (7r\e7o-rov and p.dy kttov p&et.j, e. g. S. 
O. C. 743. ir\e7(TT ov avSpwirtav kolkkxtos. Th. 7, 42. p.dXio~ -a Setj/oraTos ; 
(d) by the relative: is 1 (oirws). on and 7), olos (§ 343, Eem. 2), e.g.wy 
rdx^ra, qua.m celerrime. o r i /xdhicrra, y dpia-rov, e. g. PI. Apol. 23, a. tt o A A a I 
(jl4i> cbrex^etcu p.oi yeySixwi teal olai x aXe7rc *> raTal Ka ^ Papirarcu. X. An. 4. 8, 
2. x<°piov oTov x a ^ 1TuraTGV j ( e ) hy e^s> units, e. g. Her. 6, 127. ^Ad-e 2.p.iv- 
SvpiS-qs ~2,v£apirr)s, ts iirl Tr\e7crr ov £77 %^-'^ s e ^ s avr)p airiKero. X. An. 1. 
9. 22. 5%>a 7rAe?(rTa e?s ye avT)p &u i\dp.fiave, he received the most gifts, at least 
considering the fact that he was but a single individual (C. Tusc. 2. 26. 64. amplitu- 
dinem animi unam esse omnium rem pulchcrrimam) : (f ) a peculiar mode of 
strengthening the Superlative, is by joining iu ro?s with it, in which case the 
Superlative must be repeated, e. g. 'O "Epas Iv ro?s irpea fivTa.T6s ten 
(i. c. eV rots Trpeo-fJvTaTois oi<ri), the oldest among those who are very old. Her. 7, 
137. tovt6 p.01 iu rolai &€i6to.t ou <paluerai yevea&ai. PI. Symp. 173. b. 
~2.wKpa.Tovs ipa<rT7]s tiv ip ro7s /ua A terra ru>v t6tz. The construction with the 
Fein. IB found only in Thuc, e. g. 3,81. (<nd<xis) iv rots irpwT-n e'yeVe-ro. lb. 
17. iv to7s xAelffTai vyes. In such instances. ro?s must be considered 
a.> Neat. In like manner, the expression '6 p. 01 a (6p.o?a Ion.) to7s was used 
with the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. aefSovrai 8e 'Apa/3ioi tcio-tis avdpdmwv 6p.o7a 
to7ct 1 p.d\i<rr a (sc. ere/SojueWs), like those who respect very much, ut qui maxime. 
Til. 1. 25. xpvp.dTwvSvvdp.et ovres tear inuvov rbv xpovov o p.01 a t o?s 'E\Kt]Vwv 
tt\ovo~ twrdrots. The Superlative is also intensified by joining a positive 
with it. e. g. 'Ayadwv hnxiwv Kpariaros, the best among the good horsemen = the 
very best. 

Rem. 3. The Superlative relation is often expressed more emphatically by 
■ ■>'. adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, preceded by ob (Litotes), 
instead of positive adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, e. g. obx vKtara, 
not the kast especially, ov KaKiaros, ovk £ \dxivT s, Stronger than p.d- 
Kio-ra, jSe'ATKXTos, p.eyt(TTos. Sometimes, also, it is expressed antithetically, c. g. 
11 x V Ktara, ctAAa /uaAtCTa. 

1 Tls, '6n arc not in themselves intensive particles, but merely connect some 
part of* SvvapLai understood, and in that way may In* said to gi ye intensity to 
- iperlative. Sometimes hvuap.a.1 is expressed, e. g. Eivo<pwu ayiaTarai 
lardbpLzvos eVl 7r6\ep.ov is i5vva.ro KdWiaro.. 

26 



302 SYNTAX. <$ 240 

2. A sentence consisting of a subject and pieciicate may be 
extended by defining the subject and predicate more exactly. 
The word or words which define the subject more fully, is 
called an attribute, or attributive. The subject is more exactly 
described, therefore, (a) by the addition of an adjective (attrib- 
utive 1 adjective), e. g. to kcl\6v p68ov; (b) by the Gen. of a 
substantive (attributive Gen.), e. g. 6 rov /?ao-iAews ktjitos, 
regis hortus (=regius hortus) ; (c) by a substantive in the same 
Case as the word which is more definitely described, e. g. 
Kvpos, 6 {3ao-i\ev<>. The explanatory word is here said to be in 
apposition with the word explained, and may be called an 
appositive of that word. The predicate (which is termed the 
object), is more exactly described, (a) by a Case of a substan- 
tive ; (b) by a preposition with a substantive ; (c) "oy the Inf., 
(d) by an adverb, e. g. e O cro<£os r-qv aptT-qv do-Ket. lie pi rrjs 
TrarpiSos jxa^ojxcSa. 'A7rtei/at i-inSvpLii). KaAws y/oa<£as. 

§ 240. Agreement. 

1. The finite verb agrees with the subject in Pejjpson and 
Number; the adjective, participle, pronoun, and numeral, in 
Gender, Number, and Case. The substantive, as a predicate, 
agrees with the subject only in Case; in Gender, Number, and 
Case, only when it denotes a person, and hence either has a 
particular form for the Masc. and Fern., or is of common gender. 
The same principle applies to substantives in apposition ($ 266, 
1). But when the substantive denotes a thing, it agrees with 
the subject only in Case, e. g. 

'E7&J ypd<pcc, <rv ypd<peis, ovros ypd<pei. — 'O &v&pwKos &vnr6s iariu. — 'H apery 
Ka\r) earTiv. — Tb Trpayfxa aXaxphv icrriv. — Ol "EWrjves TroAefwcwTaroi tfaav. — 
c O naAbs ttcus, 7) cro(pr) yvvi), rb fxiKpbv tzkvov. — 'Eyeuecr^rju rci) &udpe tovtm 
(KpiTias koiX 'A\Ki@iddrjs) (pixret. (piXoTifiordra) irdvTwv ' Afrrjvaiai/, X. C. 1.2, 14, 
■ — Kvpos r)u fiatfiAevs. — Tofxvpis r\v fiaaiXeia. — Kvpos, 6 fiaaiXevs, *T6/xvpis, r) fiacrt- 
Aetcu On the contrary, tt\v Stvyar epa, §<ziv6v r i ndAAos na\ fieyf 
&os, i^dyoov w5e elfev (his daughter a uoonder in beauty and size), X. Cy. 5. 2, 7. 

1 When the adjective merely ascribes some quality to the substantive with 
which it agrees, it is called an attributive adjective, but when it belongs to the 
predicate and is used, in describing what is said of the subject, it is called a 
■predicative adjective, e. g. in the expression 6 aya&bs dvr)p (the good man), dya* 
&6s is attributive, but in o h>-r\o icm dya&6s (the man is good), it is predicative- 



♦ 240.] AGREEMENT. 303 

2. The predicative adjective or substantive agrees with the 
subject as above stated, when the following and other similar 
verbs, which do not of themselves express a complete predicate 
sense, have chiefly the force of the copula : — 

(a) The verb V7rdpx^v, to be the cause of, to be, to exist ; 

(b) Verbs signifying to become, to increase, to grow, e. g. ytyvo- 
fxat, Z<jivv, avidvojJLo.L ; 

(c) The verbs /AeVw, to remain, and Kario-niv, to be established, 
appointed, to stand; 

(d) Verbs signifying to seem, appea* show one's self, e. g. 
eoi/ca, cpatvofxat, S^Amyxai ; 

(e) Verbs signifying to be named, e. g. KaXovfxai, oVo/xa^o/xat, 
Aeyo/xat, ulkovu), to be called (like audire) ; 

(f) Verbs signifying to be appointed to something, to be chosen, 
to be named, e. g. alpovfxat, a7ro$eiKvvfAai ; 

(g) Verbs signifying to be regarded as something, to be recog- 
nized as something, to be supposed, e. g. vo^itpfxai, Kpivo- 
fAOLi, v-iroXafxfiavofxai ; 

(h) Verbs signifying to be given as something, to be received as 
something, to be abandoned, cast off, and the like, e. g. 

Kvpos iyevero j8a<nAei»s roou Tlepcrobv. — Tovrois 6 QiXiincos /i4yas Tjv^rj^rri 
(Dem.). — 'AA/a/3ta577S rjpt&r) crpaTriyos. — 'Avrl <pi\wv Kal £eVcuf vvv /c^Aa/ces 
kou &eo?s ix^pol aKovovcriv (audiunt), they hear themselves called flatterers, etc., 
Dem. Cor. 241. 

Eehark 1. When the verbs mentioned under (e), (f ), (g), (h), have the 
active form, they take two accusatives (§ 280, 4). 

Rem. 2. Several of the verbs above named, are also joined with adverbs, 
but they then express a complete predicate sense ; e. g. ^coKpdrrjs i\v (lived) a el 
<rvv toIs i>4ois. KaXus, kolkSjs icrriu (it is well, etc.). Aeii/wj %<rav iv 
(pvXaKrjcri oi BafivAtibvioi (diligenter versabantur in custodia), Her. 3, 152. 
Ma.T7)v elvcu, to be in vain. Etvai, as well as the verbs yiyveo-frai and irecpv 
k4v<xi, is very often connected with adverbs of place and degree, of which 
the corresponding adjective-forms are not in use, as 8 j x «> X w P ' s » e k c£ s, /x a k - 
pdu, ir6pp(0, iyyvs, ttXtjc lov, bfxov, aXis, fiaXXop, /a aX terra, e g. 
Totou ' A&T)j/aiu)V ar parity o?cri iyiv out o §i%a al yvS>fj.ai ( sententiae in diversas 
■partes discedebant), Her. 6, 109. 

3. When a Demonstrative, E/elative, or Interrogative pronoun, 
either as a subject or predicate, is connected with a substantive 
by the copula elvai, or one of the verbs mentioned in No. 2, 
the Greek commonly, as the Latin regularly, put the pronoun 
by means of attraction, in the same gender and number with 



304 SYNTAX. [$ 241 

the substantive to which it belongs. So too, when the pronoun 
is in the Ace. and depends on a verb of naming, e. g. 

Ovr6s itrriv 6 avhp. — Auttj iarl ir-ny}) Kal apx^ irdvruv rwv KaKwv. — > 
Ovtoi 877 'Afrrjuaiol ye SiKrjv avr^jv KaXovcriv, aAXa ypacprjv, PI. Eutyphr. 
princ. — Tlapa twv irpoyeyevrnxevav ixavSrauere • avrrj yap apicrt] di8a<r tca- 
A. t a, X. Cy. 8. 7, 24. — T i s itrri it tj 7 7^7 ttjs ape-r^s ; — IIcSj>T€S ovroi v6p.oi 
eitriv, ovs rb irArj&os crvveT&bv Kal 5oKip.daav eypatye, X. C. 1. 2, 42. — 'Edit ris 
tpiAos fj.01 yev6[xevos ev iroielv i&4\y, ovros fxoi fiios icrrl (this is my means of 
life, hie mihi est victus) 3. 11, 4. 

Rem. 3. Yet the Greeks not unfrequently put tfie pronoun in the Neut. 
Sing., e. g. "Eari Se tovto rvp avvis, Fl. Rp. 344, a, Avhere in Lat. it would 
be, Est autem haec tyrannis. Tovr 6 icrriv 77 8 1 k a 1 <r v v 77, ib. 432, b. Tovto 
7T7J7^ Kal apxh Kivl)o~eoos, Phaedr. 245, c. The JSTeut. PL is sometimes used 
instead of the Neut. Sing. ''Eycaye (pri/A ravra pikv (pXvapias eluai, X. An. 
1. 3, 18. See § 241, Rem. 3. The neuter pronoun denotes the nature of an object ; 
on the contrary, the pronoun that agrees with a noun, denotes the quality of the 
object. Hence there are cases where the two forms of expression cannot be 
interchanged, e. g. Ti cVti <p&6vos; quid est invidia? (what is its nature?) 
and t i s icrri <j>&6vos ; quae est invidia ? (what is envy ?) The neuter demon- 
strative is also always used, when it is more fully explained by a word in appo- 
sition, e. g.Ovrovr fy evdaifxovia, ws zoiice, KaKov airaAAayr], PI. Gorg. 478, C 



$241. Exceptions to the general rules oj Agreement. 

1. The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree 
with the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Constructio 
Kara crvveatv). Hence, after a collective noun in the Singular, 
when it is used of persons, as well as after the names of cities 
and countries, used for the inhabitants, and also with abstracts 
which stand for concretes, the Plural is used, and such a gender 
as belongs to the persons denoted by these words. 

Her. 9, 23. rb TrXrjfros <f?re/3o^fr?7 crav. Th, 4, 32. 6 aXAos (rrparbs 
aw 4 fi a ivov. 5, 60. rb ffr p ar SireS v avex&povv. 2, 21. iraurl rp6irco 
a.vqpe&io'To 77 ir6\is Kal rbv HepiK\ia iv opyfj elx ov ' With attributive adjec- 
tives, this construction is rare and only poetic, e. g. R. x> 84. <piAe t4kvov (Hec- 
tor) ; but it is very common in prose with a Part, which stands in a remoter 
attributive relation, e. g. Th. 3, 79. iirl tt> ir6\iv iire-KXeov iv iroAAj} rapaxy 
ital <p6fia) ovras. X. Cy. 7.3, 8. S> ayaSf)} Kal ttlcttt) i(/uxi o%xV $% airoXi- 
ircov 7}/ias. X. H. 1. 4, 13. o e/c tov &areos oxXos 7]frpoio-&r} irpbs ras vavs, 
fravudCovres Kal l8e?v $ov\6 /xevo 1 rbv 'A\Kifitdd7]v. R is very frequent 
with the pronouns, Th. 1, 136. cpevyei is KepKvpav ws avT&v (sc. KepKvpai 
<av) evepyerrjs. 4, 15. is tt)V 'Zirdpr'qv us T)yye\frr] to. yeyevrj/j-eva irepl TlvXov, 
e8o£ej/ avroTs (sc. ro?s ^irapTidrais). X. Cy. 3. 3, 14. ffvyKaXiaas irav rb (rrpa* 
r 1 cor tKb v eAe|e irpbs air ovs roidde. Also with the relative pronoun ; see on 
adjective-sentences, § 332, 5. 



§241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 305 

Eemaek 1. "When the subject is expressed by the Neut. article r6 or r i in 
connection with a substantive in the Gen. PI., the predicate is commonly in the 
PL, being conformed to the attributive genitive ; the predicative adjective or par- 
ticiple takes the gender of the attributive genitive. S. Ph. 497. rd tuv diaico- 
vojv rbu ot/caS' fjivsiyov <tto\ov {^ireiyov "which has the Neut. PI. rd for its 
subject would regularly have been in the Sing, according to JSTo. 4, but is con- 
formed to the plurality in StaKovcov). PI. Rp. 8. 563, c. rb rSiv b-qpicov 
€Ac v Step wrepd iariu (the Sing, iurlv is used on account of the Xeut. PL 
iAev&eparepa, according to No. 4, while iAev&epwrepa is conformed to the idea 
of Srnpia contained in Srqplwv). 

Rem. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is the following: 
When a substantive subject with an attributive substantive in the Gen. PL 
expresses periphrastically a substantive idea, as tyvxh Teipecrtao, the Participle 
which stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agrees in Case 
with the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen., 
which expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. A, 90. ?^A&e 8' eVl 
tyvxy 07/)3aiou 1 eipsaiao xpixrzov aKr\izrpov ix<av,tlie shade of the Thehan 
Tetanias came, having a golden sceptre (here %x (av agrees in number with ^i»x^j 
but in gender with Teipeo-lao). II. /3, 459, bpvi&cov it er znvoov e&vea 7roAAa, 
fiv&a. Kai ev&a rroroovrai ayaWofxevai irrepvyeaaiu. 

2. When the subject is exjoressed, not as a special and defi- 
nite object, but as a general idea, the predicative adjective is 
put in the Neut. Sing, without reference to the gender and 
number of the subject. 

(The English sometimes uses the words thing, or something. Sometimes the 
pronoun r I, or the substantives XPV H- a > t pay p. a, are connected with the 
adjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, the English uses the 
article the). 

P. /3, 204. ovk ayaSbv -KoXvKoipavi-n {a multiplicity of rulers is not a gooa 
thing): eh Koipavos ecrrco. Eur. 0.760. deivbv ol iroKKoi, KaKovpyovs orav 
ex<a<n TpocrraTas. Id. M. 329. 7tAt?j' yap tzkuuv ep.oiye (piKrarov tt6\ls. Id. H. 
E. 1295. at paradoxal \vTrj)p6v. Her. 3, 82. 77 fMovvapx'iV Kpdriarov (a 
monarchy is the lest thing, or most desirable). PL Pp. 2. 364, a. Ka\bv uev r\ 
<r<ti<ppo(TvvTi re Ka\ 8 iKaioavvt), xaAexbr fxevrot nal iir iirovov. Also 
in abbreviated adjective sentences, e. g. Her. 3, 108. rj Xeaiva, ibv lax^P^- 
rarov ical & paavrarov, d-na\ ev rep /3uw riKrei ev. PL Rp. 4, 420, C. 01 
6<p&a\fj.o I, KaWicrr ov 6v, ovk ocrrpeicp ivaXnXijj.pi.evoi eiffiv. Her. 3, 53. 
Tvpavvh xP'0H- a <r<paXep6v. PL Th. 122, b. avp-fiovXT) iepbv xpVH-a. Dem. 
01. 1. 21, 12. airas p.ev xSyos, av airy rd irpdyp.ara, p.drai6v ti (palverai ical 
Kiv6v. 

3. "When the subject is an Inf. or an entire sentence, the 
Greeks usually put the predicative adjective in the Neut. PL 
instead of the Sing., where the English uses the pronoun it, 
e. g. it is pleasant to see the sun. This occurs most frequently 
with verbal adjectives in -tos and -reos; with those in rtos 
and many in -to?, the Inf. is implied in the word itself, c g. 

26* 



306 SYNTAX, [§241 

dfxvvT€a ia-TL nvLy some one is to be helped; incrra. ecrri tols <£tAois, 
friends are to be trusted. 

Her. 1, 91. tt\v ireirpaifAevriv fxo?pau a 8 v par d icrri (it is impossible) aTro<pvye€ip 
Kal &ea>. 3, 83. SijAa, on Set eVo y£ riva i)fi4cov fiacrt\4a yevea&ai. Th. 1, 86. 
ovs ov v a pad or 4 a ro?s 'ASrjpalois i&riv, ovSh Kal Aoyois 8 laKpir 4 a, &AA& 
rtucoptjTea kv Ta%6i. 4, 1. aSvpara i\v eV tw irapopri rovs Aonpovs a/.iv- 
vecr&ai. 

Rem. 3. In like manner, the Greek very often uses the PL ravra, rdde 
{sometimes also e'/cetVa), to express an idea in its whole extent or in the most 
general manner, the plural bringing before the mind all the particulars involved 
in the idea. Th. 6, 77. ovk ^Iwj/es TaSe etVtV, ovb" 'EWtisttoptloi, aAAa Acapirjs, 
it (this) is not Ionians, etc. Aeschin. Ctes. p. 55. ovk tern ravra apxv (this is 
not an office). Id. Leg. p. 50. tuSt' i<mv 6 irpodoTrjs, this is the traitor. PI. 
Phaedon. 62, d. o av6r)ros dvSponros rdx 'av olrj&eir) ravra, (pevKr4op elvai airb 
rod SecnrSrov. In the English these plurals are generally translated by the 
singular, as this, that. 

4. The subject in the Neut. PI. is connected with a verb in 
the Sing., inasmuch as a plurality of objects in the neuter, was 
regarded by the Greeks as one connected whole, the individual- 
ity being lost sight of. 

Ta, C& a T P*X ei ' — Ta irpdyfiard £arriKa\d. X. Ven. 12, 11 evv rfj 
w6\zi o~ d>C*rai Kc " o.ir6\\vrai t« o'lKzia e/cacTTou. Eur. M. 618. natcov yap 
avdpbs Sup' 6vr\criv oxjk e%ei. 

Rem. 4. Also in adverbial participial phrases, a neuter plural is joined with 
a participle in the singular, e. g. 8 6 £av ravra, quum haec visa, decreta essent. 
X. An. 4. 1, 13. 8 6£av 8e ravra, iichpvlav ovrco iroisiv, when these things had 
been agreed upon, orders were given, etc. Yet, X. H. 3. 2, 19. do^apra 8e rav- 
r a Kal it e pavSevr a, rh /.tep arparev/xara airrjh&ep. 

Rem. 5. There are some exceptions, however, to the rule just stated ; most 
of them may be referred to the following cases : — 

(a) When the subject in the Neut. PL denotes persons or living creatures, 
the verb is very often put in the PL in accordance with the Construct io 
Kara ffvvexriv. Th. 4, 88. to; r4\7] (the magistrates) ru>v AaKeSifxoviwv 
bfxoo-avra Bpaaldav e£ 4tt efi\pap. 7, 57. roffdSe fiera ' 'Afrnvaiuv 
e&vr] icrpdrevop. PL Lach. 180, e. ra fieipaK la 8 laXeyo/xep oi 
£ tv i fi e fi v 7] vr a i ~2,wKpdrovs Ka\ o~<p68pa iiraipovaiy. 

(b) When the objects contained in the plural are to be represented individu- 
ally rather than collectively, or when the idea of plurality composed of 
several parts (which may also have relation to different times and places) 
is to be made prominent, 1 e. g. X. An. 1. 7, 17. ravrrj rfj i]jj.4pa ovk ifiax*- 
ffaro {iao-i\evs, &AA' viroxupovvroop cpavepa i)crav Kal 'lir-ncap Kal av&pumav 
%X V7 I ToAAa (many tracks here and there). Cy. 5. 1, 14. ra fj.ox^"nph 
ap^pcair ta iracrwv, dljxai, ru>p 67r^u/xicc^ aKparrj £o~ri, K&ireira epcoTo ain- 

1 It will often, therefore, depend upon the view in the speaker's mind, whether 
tie Sing, or PL is to be used. 



f241.] EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 307 

wvn a i, the singular iari is used here because mankind is referred to as a 
class, but the plural alriuurai, to denote that each individual blames love, the 
charge being made too, in a different manner and at different times. Th. 5, 
26. e|a> (praeter) rovroov Trpbs rbv MavnviKOv Kal 'Eiridavpiov iroXefAov Kal is 
#AAa afj.<pOTepoiS afxapr-q/xara iy evovr o, mistakes of each of the two, at 
various points and times. X. An. 1. 4, 4. i\o~av Se ravra Svo reixV' 

' z) The non-Attic poets from Homer down, very often use the PL simply on 
account of the metre. 

]1em. 6. The plural subject, masculine or feminine, is connected in the poets, 
though rarely, with a verb in the Sing. Pind. 01. 11. (10.) princ. fieXi'ydpves 
vfivo. ixrrepcov apxal \6ycov reWerut. This construction is very limited in 
prose-writers ; it occurs with ear l and ?i v, but only at the beginning of a sen- 
tence (comp. il est cent usages), which then assume the character of impersonal 
expressions. Her. 1, 26. eari Kal jxera^v tt]s re ira\airjs tto\los Kal rod vnov eirra 
ardoioi. PI. Pp. 5, 462, e. eari Kal iv rals aWais iroXeaiv dpxovres re Kal SrifJ.os. 
In like manner the Greeks regularly say eariv, o'[, sunt, qui. See § 331, Kern. 
4. The construction mentioned § 242, Pern. 2, is very different from this. 

5. A subject in the Dual, as well as two subjects in the Sin- 
gular, very often have a predicate in the PL, e. g. Avw o-rpara 
av€)((jjpr)<Tav. Twv avriov SeovTCu ko.1 f) yvvr) Kal 6 avrjp. The 
rule seems to be, that when the affirmation is made of each of 
the two separately, the Dual is used, but when of both together, 
the Plural, e. g. Mivws Kal AvKovpyos vopiovs e$€T7)v (each 
gave laws) ; rjSovrj aoi koll Xv7rrj iv rrj 7roAa fiaariXtvacTov. 

Rem. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken of, 
but only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally connected, 
e. g. ir6Se, x e <P e > <*> T6 > or sucn as we conceive to stand in a close and reciprocal 
relation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc. 

Rem. 8. The Dual very often interchanges with the PL, especially in par- 
ticiples, e. g. II. A., 621. t ol S' ISpci a. ir e »|/ v x o v r o %tTcoi/coi/ ard vr e irorl trvoiriv. 
PL Euthyd. 273, d. iyeXaadr -qv &fj.<p<a J3\e\pavr ej els aA\7?Aco. 

Rem. 0. A subject in the PL sometimes has a verb in the Dual, when two 
objects mutually connected, or two pairs, are spoken of, e. g. II. 8, 452, sqq. &s 
8' ore x^' 1 t xa ^f > ° l Tora/xoi, Kar vpeaepi p eovr e s, is fnaydyKeiav av /J.f3d\- 
\erov ofiptfjov vScvp, . . &s ru>v fiiayo/xevcov yevero laxv Te <p6fios re (two streams 
running on opposite sides are compared with two hostile parties). II. &, 185, 
sqq. "Zdv&e re Kal av U.6Sapye, Kal At&wv Admire re S7e, vvv /jloi rr\v ko/juStjv airo- 
riverovy — 191. dAA' e <p o fxapr elr ov Kal air evSer ov (two pairs). 

Rem. 10. The following points also are to be noted in respect to the 
Dual: — 

(a) A substantive in the PL is very often connected with the Duals Svw, 
Svo, but seldom with Svolv. II. e, 10. Svco viees. II. f, 4. ti.vefx.oi 
Svo. Aesch. Ag. 1395. Svo?v ol/xuyfiaa iv. PL Soph. 244, b. irpos- 
ipwjjievoi Svo7v 6v6/u.aa lv. PL Pep. 614, C. Svo x^ 'f jLaTa ^X /* 6 '- 
vu aWrjho iv ; 

(b) The Duals tw, rotv, ra>Se, ro7vSe, rovru, rovroiv, avrw, avro7v, &, oTv, in 
prose are used both as masculine and feminine (i. c. they are of common 
gender), C. g. ti/xepa) tw iroKee — tw yvvaiKe — a/x(pu> rovru tw rj/iepa — ro?i> 
ytveaioiv — rovru rw rex ya — rovroiv ro7v Kivncreoiv — tw dSw. The Fem. 



308 SYNTAX. [$ 241 

form of the article rd, is extuemely rare, e. g. rh 8' ovv ic6pa, S. Ant, 
769 ; oftener the form Tat v, X. H. 6, 4. 17. PI. Tim. 79, d; so 4k ralvde 
5* ovcaiv irap^>4voiv, S. 0. C. 445. Tavra occurs Av. Pac. 847, but 
TBvroii'is more frequent, e. g. t a v r a i v fiSvaiv, S. 0. C. 859 ; 4k t a v - 
raiv, 1149: to.vtg.iv o\ r atv oia&riKatv, Isae. 5, 15. Auto, S. Ant. 
570. Besides the pronouns mentioned, sometimes other attributives also 
in the Dual are used as of common gender ; the participle but seldom. 
PI. Phaedr. 237, d. r]/xoiv 4v iKaaTcp Svo tiv4 4o~tov 15 4 a 'dpx°VT e Kal 
QLjovTe, olv GTr6/ji.e&a — • tovtco Se k. t. A. 

6. When the predicate is a substantive connected to the 
subject by elv<u or any other verb having the character of a 
copula ($ 240, 2), the verb often agrees by means of attraction, 
as commonly in Latin, with the nearest predicative substantive. 

Her. 3, 60. rb ^kos tov bpvyp.aTos kitTa aTadioi eicri. 2, 15. cu 07jj8cu 
AtyvTTTOs e/caAeeTO. Th. 3, 112. 4aTov ovca \6<pca 7} , ldofx4vt] u^tjAco. 
4, 102. t}> %oopiov tovto, OTrep irpoTepov 'Evv4a 68ol 4Ka\ovvTO. Isocr. 
Paneg. 51, b. Hctti a pxu<a>TaT a tGsv 4&vS>v Kal fieytcrTas dvvaaTetas tyovTa 
5/cvfrai Kai ®paKes kcu Tlipaai. So also in the participial construction, e. g. Th. 
5,4. KaTaAa/xfidvovo'i Kal fipiKivvias, o v epv/xa 4v tt} AeovTivr}. PI. Ij. 735, e. 
tovs fx£yio~Ta 4^y]jxapTT}K6Tas, auiaTovs oh ovTas, /j.eyio'TTjv oe ovffav fi\dfi7)v 
irStews, airaXXaTT^iv tfw&ev (instead of ovtcls). So also Her. 3, 108. rj AeWa, 
ibv l<rx v poTa.TOv Kal &pa<ri>TaTov, cura| 4v TCf fiicp t'iktci eV, instead of 
4ov<ra. Comp. No. 2. A similar attraction occurs sometimes in sentences 
denoting comparison, e. g. twv koivwv ti dpa Sievoovfj.r)v, uv oudev av /xaWov, % 
Tis &\Xos €X €( ) Fl. Theaet. 209. a. (e% et ^ ere agreeing with tls instead of av). 
In Latin this is much more frequent. 

7. A superlative connected with a partitive Gen. commonly 
takes the gender of the subject, more rarely that of the partitive 
Gen. 

II. <p, 253. (aleTov) '6s& dfia KapTiaTos re Kal &kio~tos ictTenvwv. x-> 
139. KlpKos, 4\acpp6TaTos ireTe-nvccv. Her. 4, 85. 6 TIovtos 7reAayeW 
airdvTwv irecpvKe &avfj.a<ri(t>TaTOS. Menandr. p. 193. (Mein.) voo-cov %a^€- 
ivdoTaTos (p&6vos. X. C. 4. 7, 7. 6 'f]\ios tov irdvTa X? 0>vov ^dvT(av \a/jnrp6' 
TaTos tov Sia/ievei. PL Tim. 29, a. 6 k6o~ijlos KaWio-Tos toov yeyovoTcav. 
Plutarch. Consol. 102. c. r\ Xvitt] x a ^ e ' 7ra ' T °' r V tto&Sov. On the contrary, 
Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. ffififiovXos ayaSrbs x? 1 l (ri l x ^ TaT0V xal TvpavviKta- 
TaTov airdvTwv KT7]fxaT(av 4o~tI (the Superlative here taking the gender 
of the partitive Gen. KT-nixdrwy). 

Rem. 11. When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed, the 
Masc. form may be used, referring to words denoting females ; (in this and 
other similar irregularities, less regard is had to strict grammatical principles 
than to the general idea to be expressed, ) e. g. ~2vv€\r)\v&a<riv ws 4/j.h KaTaXeXeifj.' 
/j.4vai dSeA^ai re Kal &8eA(/nSat Kal avetyial TocravTai, &st elvai 4v tt} oIkio, Te(ro~a* 
pesKaiStKa tovs 4\ev&4povs (free men), X. C. 2. 7, 2. 'H o~T6?pos ovffa /xoarxos 
ovk ave^Tai tIkto^tos &AAous, ovk ex " * a ^ T *? Tewa, she cannot endun 



§ 242. | AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 309 

that other persons (Masc.) should bring forth young. Eur. Andr. 711. So also the 
tragic poets use the Masc, when a woman speaks of herself in the PL, e. g. 
S. El. 391 (Electra says of herself) TTe<rovy.&\ et xpv> ^arpl Tiy.capovy.evoi. 

Kem. 12. Sometimes the first Pers. PL, or the Pers. pronoun first Pers. PI 
is used, for the sake of modesty, instead of the Sing., the speaker representing 
his own views and actions as common to others. This usage, which is very 
frequent in Latin, is rarely found among the Greeks in the Common language. 
^Xl 3 AA«ijSta577, Kal r)y.e?s tt\\ikovtol ovres Seivol to roiavra ?iy.ev (I also teas at 
that age sharp in these matters), X. C. 1. 2, 46. "Evvoid Tro& ijy.1v iyetero (the 
thought once occurred to me), Cy. 1. 1, 1. Ilepi y.hv olv rccv Trpax^vrwv iv rep 
irapivTi tclvt s%x o l x * v ehreiu. Among the poets, particularly the Tragedians, 
this use of the PL is more frequent, and a transition from the Sing, to the PL 
often occurs, e. g. Eur. H. F. 858. "H\iov yapTvp6y.so~&a Spaa, a Spav ob 
fiovKoyat. Hipp. 244. alb'ovye&a yap to \e\eyy.4va y.oi. 

Rem. 13. In an address directed to several persons, the Greek has several 
peculiar idioms : — 

(a) The Imp. Sing. ei7re and some others, which denote an exhortation or 
animating call, e. g. &ye, <pepe, 18 4, is frequently connected in the Attic 
writers with a Voc. PL, or with several vocatives, e. g. PL Euthyd. 283, 
h. etVe fxoi, & ~2.wKpar4s re Kal i>ye?s ot &Woi. Dem. Chers. 108, 74. ejVe 
yoi, fiovXevecr&e. 

(b) In an address directed to several persons, the predicate in the PL often 
refers to a Voc. which denotes only one of the persons addressed ; this is 
done for the purpose of making the principal person prominent. Od. £, 
310. 'KvtIvo, ovttus tcTiv xrwep<pid\oicn ye& vp.1v ScuWcr&at. p., 82. vi\a 
IhvvzTz, (paiSiy 'OSuo-o-ev. X. H. 4. 1, 11. ?r, 4<pr), vy.c'is, §> 
'Hp itt ir id a, Kal 8 1 8 a <r k e t e avrhv fSov\7)$ri)va\. airep r/yeTs ■ ol yev or) avaa- 
rdvres iSioaaKov. An interchange of the Sing, and PL often occurs 
among the Tragedians, when the chorus is either addressed by others, or 
speaks of itself, the poet having in mind, at one moment, the whole 
chorus, at another their leader, e. g. S. 0. C. 167. |e7>oi, yd) S^t dSt/07- 
dw co 1 TricrTevaas. 

(c) The second Pers. Imp. instead of the third, is sometimes connected with 
the indefinite pronoun rls or ir a s t is, or even with a substantive and 
tIs ; this idiom, which is not common, occurs mostly in the Attic dia- 
logue, e. g. Ar. A v. 1186. x<*>P €l (instead of x°>P eiTa} ) SeDpo iras virnpe- 
T7js (every servant come hither): ro£eve (instead of ro^ev4rw) iras tls 
(every one use his bow). Hence, also, the transition from the third Pers. to 
the second, e. g. Eur. Bacch. 327. (345.) crreix^r <a tis &s rdxos, iA&ibv 
Se &a.KOvs tovs8\ 'lv olwvooKOTrsi, yox^ois rpiaivov Kavdr petyov 4y.ira\iv, 
Kal — y4be s. Comp. Larger Grammar, § 430, 2 (7). 



$ 242. Agreement when there are several subjects. 

1. When there are two or more subjects connected together, 
there is a double relation to be distinguished : — 

(a) The subjects are regarded as expressing multitude, and 
the predicate is referred to all the subjects equally; then 
the predicate is in the Plural, and when there are but two 
subjects, in the Dual or even in the Plural (comp. k 241, 



310 SYNTAX. [$ 242 

5); the gender of the predicative adjective is determined 

according to the following rules : — - 

(a) With words of like gender denoting persons, the 
adjective has the same gender; with words of dif- 
ferent gender denoting persons, the' gender of the 
adjective is conformed to the masculine subject, 
rather than to the feminine or neuter, and to the 
feminine rather than the neuter; in both cases the 
adjective and verb are plural. 
(/5) With words of like gender denoting tilings, the 
adjective is either in the same gender and in the 
plural, or is in the neuter plural; with words of 
different gender denoting things, the adjective is in 
the neuter plural. 
(y) When words denoting persons and things stand hi 
connection, the adjective is plural and takes the 
gender of the words denoting persons, when the 
persons are to be considered as the more prominent 
idea, or the things are to be viewed personally ; but 
when both are to be viewed merely as thhigs, the 
adjective is in the neuter plural. 

Kal \r]&r) 8e Kal a&v/xia Kal ovsKoXia Kal p. a via iroW&Kis iroKKols Sia 
rr)u tov <y<I)[xaTos Ka%ei,iav els ttjv Zidvoiav e jxtti-kt ova iv, X. C. 3. 12, 6. 2a>Kpa- 
rei o fj.i\7]T a yevo fx4v(a Kpirias re Kal 'A\ki@ idSrj s irXelaTa kcmcl ttjv 
tt6\lv iTroi7](rdT7)v, ib. 1. 2, 12. 'H paKXrj s Kal & 7] (revs {x6vol tcov -xpoye- 
yevr\}x4v(i)V virep tov filov tov tu>v av&pctiiroov a^\7}Tal KaT 4aTT\aav, Isocr. 
Pan. 212. Kal r) yvvr) Kal 6 avr)p aya&oi elaiv, PL Men. 73. Al S4 irov 
t)ix4t epai T 5 &Ao%ot Kal vr)ir ta TtKva e'iaT evl fieydpois ttot io4y Lievai, 
II. /J, 137. '£ls e?8e uoTe'pa re Kal pLT)T4pa Kal adeAcpovs Kal tt\v eaviov 
yvvalKa alxH- a ^^ >T0VS y^y^vr)fj.4yovs, ed&Kpvaev, X. Cy. 3. 1, 7. 'H 
bpy^} Kal 7) aaweaia elal KaKai. — ^Zwiiaros KaWos Kal lax vs 5eiA<£ Kal 
KaK(p ^vvoiKovvTa irp4irovTa (paiveTai, PI. Menex. 246, e. Evy4veiatTe 
Kal S v v a [x e i s Kal t ijxal drjAa eaTiv aya&a oWa, PI. ? R> i) ay op a Kal to 
irpvTavt]'Cov Tlapia) Aiid-w f) a k rj fx 4 v a, Her. 3, 57. Ai&oi re Kal ttKiv&oi 
Kal £v\a Kal K4pa[xos aTaKTOos ipp i{ifj.4va ovdev xP'h^ 1 ^^ earu/, X. C. 
3.1,7. 'H tu%7) Kal 3>i \nnr os i)crav t&v epywv Kvpioi, Aesch. e H koA« 
\lo-T7) ttoXlt eia re Kal 6 KaWiffTOS avrjp Aotira av t){uv eft) SieA&elV, 
tv paw is T€ Kal Tvpavvos, PL Pp. 562, a. 

(b) Each subject is considered separately and by itself; then 
the predicate is confined to one of the subjects and 



4 242.] AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 311 

agrees with it. This construction is also used, when one 
of the subjects is to be represented as more prominent 
than the others. There are here three positions of the 
predicate: (a) before all the subjects; (b) after all the 
subjects ; (c) after the first subject. 

PI. Lys. 207, d. (£>tA€t ae 6 iraT^p ical r\ firjrrjp. Her. 5, 21. e'lireTO crept 
Kal 6%7j^aTa Kal SepdirovTes Kal 7} iracra 7toAAt} TrapacTK€vr]. X. R. Ath. 1, 2. 
ol irevr)Tes Kal 6 5^/ios tt\4ou e%ei. PI. Symp. 109, c. al rifial avroTs Kal ra 
lepa. rairapartov avSpcaircav T}<pavi£sr o. Th. 8, 63. o I iv rfj MiX-qrca Kal 6 
y A<rrvoxos . . . £&dpcnio~e. Th. 3, 5. MeAeas Ao/cwy a<p iKve7rai Kal 
'EpfxeiwvSas 07j/3a?os. X. An. 2. 2, 1. $a\?vos cpx €T0 Ka * °' 1 °~ vv avrcp. 

Remark 1. Sometimes the verb, though it follows different subjects, agrees 
with the first subject, the remaining subjects being then represented as subor- 
dinate, e. g. X. An. 1. 10, 1. fiacr i\svs Se Kal ol avv avrcv S tea k ecu elsTriir- 
rei. So also with the attributive adjective, e.g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. Ittto ofio- 
Aovs Kal 7)p.iofi6Aiov 'Attikovs (the adjective here agreeing with 6fio\ovs 
rather than rnxio^oXiov). Th. 8, 63. 'Acrrvoxos i7rv&eTO rbv 2t po p.fi f % £ S77 »» 
Kal r as vavs aTreX7]\v^6ra. 

Rem. 2. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., if several nouns in the 
PI. denoting things precede, when it is intended to represent those nouns as 
making up one whole, as a condition, state, etc., e. g. PL S. 188, b. Kal itdxvai 
Kal % a A a ^a t Ka ^ * pvffifiai e/c irXeove^ias Kal aKoajxias irepl oAA^Aa tcov voiob- 
twv ylyvzrai ipcoriKtov. 

Rem. 3. When the subjects are connected by ^ — jj, aut — aut, Kai — /ecu, 
ct*~ el. one — oi/re, neque — neque, the predicate agrees with the subject 
standing nearest to it, if each subject is to be regarded separately and by itself, 
e. g. 3) ovtos, $) eKe7uos aA.r)&rj \4yei, aut hie, aut illc vera diet; but when the 
subjects are not considered separately or as independent of each other, but as 
expressing plurality, the predicate is in the PI., e. g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. a 
Ar)/.iocpwi/ ^ ®f\pnrmZr)S exovcri. 

Rem. 4. The attributive adjective commonly agrees with the substantive 
nearest to it, e. g. 'A/Acporepois ol abrol 8 p k 1 Kal £v(X[Aax'ia KarecrTrj, Th. 
But where perspicuity or emphasis requires it, the adjective is repeated with 
each substantive, e.g. irdvrts &i>5pes Kal iracrai yvvalices; or the con- 
structions stated under No. 1 are observed, e. g. 'H p a k A 77 s Kal 77 cr e b s fx6uoi. 
Tlar^p Kal /xrjrrjp Kal c\Se\(pol cu'x/uaAcoTot yeyev7)[x4voi, etc. See 
examples under No. 1. 

2. When several subjects of different persons have a com- 
mon predicate, the verb (which is commonly plural) is in the 
first person rather than the second or third, and in the second 
rather than the third. 

'E7o> /cal (tv ypdcpofxev, ego et tu scribimus. — 'E7W Kal eKuvos ypdcpojiev, ego et Me 
scribimus — ''TLyu Kal ah Kal e/ceTz/os ypdcpojxsv, erjo et tu et Me scribimus. — 5i> Kal 
4ice7uos ypdepere, tu et Me scribitis. — 'Eycb ical 4ks?voi ypdepo/xev. — 2i> Kal iicuvoi 
ypdepere. — 'U/xe7s ical 4kzivoi ypdcpofiey. — 'Y/iels Kal eicuvos ypdepere. 

Rem. 5. Sometimes also for the sake of a more forcible, contrast, the person 
of the verb agrees with the subject nearest to it, e. g. X. C. 4. 4, 7. trepl tou 



312 SYNTAX. [$ 243. 

SiKaiov irduv olpLai vvv ^X eLV elireiv, irpbs h ovre ffv ovr av &\\os oi)8els Su- 
vaiT avTciireiv. PL Phaedon. 77, d. o/j.a>s 8e p.oi So k els <rv re Kal ^i/x/iias 
7)B4ci>5 av Kal rovrov Siairpayiiarevo-aoSai {pertractare) rby Ao^oy. X. An. 2. 1, 
1 6. a v re yap "EAAtjv el Kal r)fj.e?s. Comp. Eem. 4. 



$ 243. Remarks on certain Peculiarities in the use 
of Number. 

1 . The Sing, has sometimes a collective sense and takes the place of the 
PI. ; thus in the poets : Sdicpvov, a Kris, arayuv, crrdxvs, harvest, etc. ; 
in prose: kvjjux, e<rSn)s (like vestis), \i&os, irXiy&os, &nire\os, i) i7r- 
icos, cavalry, tj a a iris, a body of troops, etc. 

2. Entire nations, that live under a monarchical government, are sometimes 
designated in prose, by the Sing., e. g. 6 II epo"ns, the Persians, 6 'Apdfiios, 
6 Av8 6s, 6 'A<r<rvpios, etc. This rarely occurs in respect to nations that 
have a free government, e.g. rbv "EAA-nva <pi\ov Trpos&ea&ai, Her. 1, 69. Also 
the words ar par Harris, iroAefxios and the like, are sometimes used in the Sing, 
instead of the PI. 

3. The PI. properly belongs only to common nouns, not to proper names, nor 
to the names of materials, nor to abstracts ; still, even such nouns in certain rela- 
tions take the PL, namely, when they express the idea of a common noun : — 

(1) Proper names : (a) to denote several individuals of the same name, e. g. 
Svo Karv\oi ; (b) to denote persons that possess the nature or the qualities 
of the individual named, e. g. PL Theaet. 169, b. ol 'HpaKhees T6 koL 0tj- 
a4es, men like Hercules and Theseus. * 

(2) Names of materials occur not seldom in the PL, since either the single 
parts, which make up the material, or the dhTerent kinds of a given material, 
are contemplated, e. g. aA.es, salt; tydjxa&oi, sand; irvpol Kal Kpi&ai; dve- 
fios Kal vSara, oivoi iroXvr e\e?s, otvoi iraXaioi; £vAa Kal \i&os, 
etc. 

(3) Abstracts in the plural have a concrete signification, since the plural is 
used when the separate kinds or circumstances or relations of the abstract idea, 
are denoted, or the manifestation of the abstract action, as repeated in different 
places or times ; hence also when the abstract idea relates to several persons, 
e.g. Herod. 7, 158. vfliu [xeyaAai wcpeAiat re Kal inavpe ffeis yey6vaai. 3, 
40. i/jiol at ffal jieyaXai €UTu%iot ovk apeffKovcri. So ex^Vy inimicitiae ; (Tra- 
vels, seditiones; <pi\iai, raXatiroo plai, aerumnae; Srdvaroi, mortes ; ^i>xv 
Kal &d\7n), frvfioi, animi; <p6{Soi, cp povi](r eis, reflections; airex&etai, 
a v 8 p i a i, brave deeds ; vyieiai Kal eve£iai ruv awfxdrcau, like valetudines, 
etc. ; it i o~ r e i s, testimonia ; evvoias Sovvai, to show acts of kindness ; x°-P lTes i 
presents; in many cases, the PL denotes a plurality of parts, e. g. ir\ovroi, 
treasures, divitiae (irXovros, riches, abstract) 5 ydfioi, nuptiae; v^Kres, the hours 
or watches of the night, horae nocturnae ; racpai, fanera, etc. So, e. g. in Eng- 
lish, How long these nights are ? when one night is meant. 

Kemaek. The Greeks commonly use the PL of Abstracts as well as Con- 
cretes, when they refer to a PL Adj., the idea contained in the abstract term 



$ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 313 

being then applicable to several persons, e. g. komo\ ras \pvxds; naXol rk 
<ru> jxar a; &pto~Toi ras <pvo~Gis; nal ra?s yvd>/j.ais Kal to7s a&p.ao'i 
a<pa\x6jj.evoL, X. Cy. 1.3, 10. 

4. When neuter adjectives, pronouns, and numerals are used as substantives, 
the Greek, like the Latin, always employs the PL, when several individual 
things, individual relations or circumstances, a whole which is represented as 
consisting of single parts, are to be understood by these words : the English often 
uses the singular here, as this, that (ravra, e'/ceTi/a). Comp. § 241, Rem. 3. The 
Sing, of adjectives used substantively is put in the Xeut., when an abstract idea, 
a whole as such, is to be expressed, e. g. to koXov, the beautiful in the abstract, 
to KaKou, the bad. The PI., on the contraiy, denotes a concrete idea, i. c. the 
different parts, classes or conditions which are implied in the abstract, e. g. t& 
KaXa, res pulchrae ; Td Kana, mala, the evil deeds, things, etc. 

§ 244. The Article. 

1. The subject as well as every substantive, takes the 
article, when the speaker wishes to represent an object as 
a definite one, and to distinguish it from other objects of the 
same kind. The substantive without the article denotes 
either an indefinite individual, or it represents an abstract 
idea in the most general manner, without any limitation. 

"Avd- pccTros: (a) a man. as an individual, i. e. some one of the race of men; 
(b) man, a man. as a species; 6 av&pcoiros: (a.) the man, as an individual, the 
man whom I have in view and consider as an individual distinguished from 
other men ; (b) the man, as a class or species, as I think of him as something 
definite and limited in respect to his entire nature or constitution; — yaXa, 
viill\ to yd\a, the milk (as a particular substance) ; cocpia, tcisdom, t\ <ro<pla, 
the wisdom [viewed as a definite property or particular kind of wisdom) ; <pi\oo~o<pia y 
philosophy in general. -,) <piKoao(p(a, as a particular science or a particular branch of 
philosophy. When the Inf. is to be considered as an abstract substantive, it has 
the article, e. g. to ypd<peiv. But the abstract noun takes the article when 
it expresses a concrete idea, e. g. % crdo-is, the (particular) sedition; to 
vpuyixa, the (particular) deed; hence also the PI. at ardo-eLs, to. irpdy- 
li ar a. 

PioiAnK 1. From what has been said, it follows: (a) That the substantive, 
as the subject of a sentence, may stand with or without the article, according 
as it is intended to be represented, either as a definite or an indefinite object; 
(b) on the contrary, that the substantive^ as a predicate, must be generally with- 
out the article, since the predicate does not denote a definite individual, hut only 
the abstract idea of a finality in general. Her. 1. 103. vv£ ri -ri/xepa iyevero, the 
day became night. Isocr. Nicocl. 28, a. A.070S aXrjSrrjs Kal i/6/aijj.os Kal 8'iKaios $vj$)$ 
ayadT'is Kal Tno-TTjs eXh~u)\6v ian. But when the predicate denotes a definite, 
a before-mentioned, or a well-known object (No. 6), it of course takes the 
article. Her. 1. G8. awe/SaAAe-ro rbu ^Opecrrrju tovtov elvai. edthat 

this was tli'- Orestes, namely, the our before-mentioned. 5,77. ol S 1 itnrofiSrat 
tKaAtovro ol irax^s, the rich ban: the name of (i<j d) 'nnroftorai. In 

27 . 



314 SYNTAX. [$ 244, 

passages like X. Cy. 3, 3, 4. 6 fxeu ravra eliruv irapyXaaev ■ 6 Se 'Apjxevios <rvfi" 
iroovTT€[j.ire Kal ol aXXoi irdvres dv&pcoiroi, avaKaXovvres rbv cvepyervv, rbv 
avdpa rbv aya&ov. An. 6. 6, 7. ol 5e &XXol ol irap6vres rcav o~rpari(aroo» 
iirixetpov(TL fiaXXeiv rbv Ae^nvirov, avaKaXovvres rbv ir podorrjv, the article 
denotes, that the ideas expressed by benefactor, honest man, traitor, point to a 
definite action either before named, or well-known. — When the predicate is a 
superlative or a substantive with a superlative, the article is not used in Greek ; 
the English, however, uses it here. Ol $a<rr)X?rai eiai it ovnp6r ar oi avSpwiruiv 
tccd a8 iku)t ar o i {the most wicked, etc),Dem. 25, 2.'AvBpl /caAw Kaya&a> ipya- 
<ria Kpar io'TV earl yeoopyia, X. Oec. 6, 8. Comp. § 241, 7. 

2. Hence the article is used to denote the whole compass of 
the idea, everything which can be included under the term 
used; one object is here considered as a representative of the 
whole class. 

'O 'dv&pa)Tros &vnr6s ear i, men (i. e. all men) is mortal. Xpl] »& abrb <p&ey- 
yeoftai rbv prjropa Kal rbv v6/j.ov, Aesch. Ctes. 16. 'H avBpela KaX-f) 
i<rriv, i. e. everything which is understood hy the idea of avopeia. Tb yd Acs 
rjSu iffriv. 

Rem. 2. Where the English uses the indefinite article a or an, denoting 
merely a class, as a man, or an individual of a class who is not distinguished 
from the others, as some man, it not being determined what man, the Greek 
omits the article ; hence avfrpwiros in both instances. 

Rem. 3. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where, according to the 
statement in No, 1, it would be inserted. This is the case: (a) In appellations 
denoting kindred and the like, where the particular relation is obvious of itself, 
or is sufficiently definite from the connection or the context, e. g. irari)p, \xr\r-np^ 
vlos, aoeX<p6s, ircuSes, yovels, avrjp, husband, yvvh, wife, etc. Comp. the expres- 
sions, Father has said it, Mother comes ; (b) When two or more independent sub- 
stantives are united, forming one whole, e. g. Tra?des Kal ywcuxes (like English 
wife and child, horse and rider), irSXis Kal olKiai [city and houses), Th. 2, 72; (c) 
When common nouns are, at the same time, used as proper nouns ; these being 
definite from their nature or from usage, do not need the article, e. g. tfXios, obpav- 
vos, 'dcrrv, used of Athens, ttoXis, of a ■particular city, known from the context, 
yrj, of a particular country, fiacriXevs, of a particular king, commonly the king of 
Persia, etc. ; other like expressions are avep.os, fraXaacra, etc. The article is 
often omitted also with words denoting time, though this is generally the case 
only in connection with prepositions, e. g. acp ri/xepas, /.(.expi vvktos, &fj.a opSrpa), 
irepl rjXtov Svcr/xds, /xera 'IAtou aXooffiv. The omission of the article is altogether 
natural when a common noun has an abstract signification, or expresses an 
action, or the manner of an action, most frequently in connection with prepo- 
sitions, e. g. 'nyela&ai &eovs, to believe in gods. 'EttI deTirvov eX&e?v, to come to 
supper, to a feast, X. C. 1. 3, 6. 3 E<£>' 'ittttov levai, horse-back. 'Eirl &r]pav e^ievai 
(i. e. ad venandum), X. Cy. 1. 2, 9. Uorepov eTrKTrd/xevov t) vio X^ v ^ C e ^7 0S 
Xafielv Kpetrrov, ?) fj.r] eivicrrajxevov (ad vehendum), X. C. 1. 1, 9. y Eirl vSup levat 
(aquatum ire), Her. 3, 14. 

• Rem. 4. The names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and vices, often 
omit the article, even where they occur in a definite relation, since, as well- 
known appellatives, they have come to be used as a kind of proper names, e. g. 
Jldvra /iev ovv e/iotye Sokc? to KaXa Kal ra ayaSa. aaKTjrd eivai, ovx tfKiara Se 
<r<a<p poavvn. X. C. 1. 2, 23. 'Eirel ovv id re Si/ccua Kal ra. aXXa KaXa re Kal 
ayaSrk irdvra apery irpdrrerai, orjXov eivai, on Kal diKaioo~vvn Kal t) &XXt] iraaa 
apery] o-o<pla iari, 3. 9, 5. 'Eir icrrr] jxt\ dpa cro<pia iarlv, 4. 6, 7. MaXurra. ykp 



$ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 315 

i/j.€/j.7i\r)Kei avTcS iTnriKrjs, Cy. 8. 3, 25. The omission of the article is natural 
also, when an abstract is to be represented actively, e. g. 'Ev cpi\o crocpia (Saiv, 
in philosophizing (in philosophando) , PI. Phaed. 68, c. But where a particular 
art or science, etc. is to be distinguished from another, the article is used, e. g. 
7/ pwiopiK-f), v apiSrixvjiKT). The substantives fieye&os, ttXtj&os, vxpos, eS- 
pos, (id&os, yep os and the like, are very often found in the Ace. or Dat. 
without the article, as they are to be received as a kind of adverbial expression, 
e. g. TvoTa/xbs KvSvos ovo/xa, evpos Svo irKe&pwv, two plethra wide, X. An. 1. 
2, 23. 

3. The article is very often used with common nouns to 
denote what belongs to an object or is requisite for it, what is 
due to it. 

X. Cy. 3. 3, 6. 'Evo/xl^e yo.pi et etcaaros rb fxepos a^ieiraivov iroiricreie, rb okov 
aural na\ws ex eiI/ (partem, cui praeest; centuriam suam). 8. 3, 3. vei/xas Se rovrcov 
(ruv <tto\q>v) rb /xepos eKacrrco ruv 7iye/x6vccv, etteXevcrev avrobs rovrois Koo~/J.e?v 
robs avrwv cpiXovs (partem debitam). An. 7. 6, 23. aAAa, cpai-nre &v, eSei ra 
£v4x v P a Tore A-«/3e<V, us ^Se el efiovAero edvvaro av ravra e^airarav (the meas- 
ures requisite to guard against deception). 5. 6, 34. ot crrpanwrai. TjireiAovv airy 
el \-n\povrai airoSLSpdcTKouTa, cm. t^v D'iktiv eivt^croiev (the due, deserved pun- 
ishment). 

4. Hence the article veiy often takes the place of the posses- 
sive pronoun, when it is connected with such substantives as 
naturally belong to a particular person, mentioned in the sen- 
tence. In such cases, the English uses the possessive pronoun. 

Ol yoveis ra reKva err epy over iv (parents love ttieir children). 'O errparrjybs 
robs err par iu>r as eVl robs iro\efj.lovs &yei (leads HIS soldiers). Kvpos re 
KaraTVT)hT]CTas aivb rod dp/xaros rbv ^wpa/co eveb°v Kal avafias eirl rbv 
'iirirov r a iraXra elsras x e 'P as eAa/3e, X. An. 1. 8, 3. 

5. As the article may make one object prominent, by indi- 
vidualizing it and presenting it apart from others, it is often 
used, when an object is to be represented in a distributive rela- 
tion to the predicate of the sentence. 

Tlposairovcn e>e (iierdbv 6 Kvpos vTTiax v ^ Tal Swcretv avrl SapeiKov rpla y/j.ih'apeiKa 
rod p.t)vbs rep err par iccry (singulis mensibus singulis militibus, three half- 
paries a month to each soldier, comp. English so much the pound), X. An. 1. 3, 21. 
(coinp. 5. 6, 23.) Aa.peiK.bv eieacrros otcrei rod fx-nvbs vp.wv (each of you shall 
a Daric each month), 7. 6, 7. 'O oe o-vvedicrSels rbv eva ^ea/ibv evl ttyw 
ir poire /lire iv, ore p.-,] irapei-n TroAAa, ovvair av olXvttus tw ev\ xpw<^a' (singula panifl 
■ a, to dip each mors,/ into the different sauces), Id. C. 3. 14, 6. 

G. The article is properly and originally a demonstrative 
pronoun, and is still often used in a demonstrative sense This 



316 SYNTAX. [$ 244. 

is particularly the case in Homer, where the article almost uni- 
formly has a pronominal relation. Comp. $ 247. 

The simplest use of the article as a demonstrative, is as follows : An object 
not before described or referred to, when it is first mentioned as an indefinite 
individual, docs not take the article ; but when it is repeated, it takes the article, 
because it has been already referred to and is known, e. g. Eldov &vdpa • 6 Be 
avfjp [xol eAe|ev. Hence the article is also used when the speaker points to an 
object, e. g. <i>epe /j.ol, & irai, rb fS ifixiov {the booh = this or that booh). In this 
relation, the article maybe used with material nouns, e. g. Aos /j.oi rb yaXa (the 
milk, which had been pointed out) ; and even when a part only of the material is 
referred to, the article is employed, though material nouns elsewhere are always 
without the article, as they contain no idea of individuality, e. g. Ylluw rod 
oXvov (of this wine). The article is often used in speaking of persons or things 
known and celebrated, where the Latin uses the pronoun Me, e. g. 6 KaXbs 7ra?s, 
that beautiful boy ; this is very frequent with proper names. See No. 7. "Ore 
aep&s ayelpas r)\v avaplSr firjr ov (frpanav ^A&ej/ iirl r)]v 'EAAaSa (that 
numberless host), X. An. 3. 2, 13. 

7. Personal proper names as such, i. e. so far as they in them- 
selves denote merely individuals, do not take the article. But 
they take it, when they have been already mentioned, and 
are afterwards referred to (No. 6) ; or even when they have not 
been before named, if it is intended to designate them as well- 
known and distinguished (No. 6). Plural names of nations, 
and also the names of countries, districts, and festivals, are 
both with and without the article. 

'SotKpdrys ecj>7]. So also where an adjective is joined with a proper name, 
e.g. <ro(pbs 2 oo k par r) s, the wise Socrates. ''Y.viK.no'av Qrifiaioi AaKeBai/j.o- 
plovs. 'Afipo KOfxas ov rovr eiro'n}<rev, aAA' eirel tfKove Kvpov ev KtAt/cfci 
ovra, avaarpe\pas e/c ^oivlkt]s iraph fiacriAea airqXavvev, X. An. 1. 4, 5. Ku- 
pov Be fieraTTe/xirerai (Aape7os) . . avafialvei ovv 6 Kvpos, X. An. 1. 1, 2. *Airb 
rod 'IAitrcroD Aeyerai 6 Bopeas rrjv 'ClpelSrviav apirdaai, PL Phaedr. 229, b 
(as well-known names). 

Rem. 5. When a noun in apposition, accompanied by the article, follows 
a personal proper name, the proper name does not take the article, e. g. 
Kpo?tros, o rwu AvB&v fiaffLXevs. But yet when the article is used, e. g. 
6 Kpo7aos, 6 rwv AvB&u fiacxiXevs, it has a demonstrative sense, and desig- 
nates the proper name as one already mentioned or known. The noun 
in apposition is accompanied by the article, when it serves to distin- 
guish the person or thing mentioned from others of the same kind, or 
when the person or thing named is to be pointed out as one known, e. g. 
'SooKpdrris, 6 <pi\Gao<pos ; ^cvKpar^s, 6 'A&rjvcuos, Socrates, the philosopher, the 
Athenian; Xeipicrocpos, 6 AaKeBai^Svios ; on the contrary, the noun in apposi- 
tion does not take the article, when it expresses merely an adjective attribu- 
tive, e.g. Her. 1, 1. 'UpoBoros ' ' AXinapvao a evs, Herodotus of Halicarnassas. Th. 
1, 1. ©ovKvdioris 'Afrrjvcuos, Tlmcydides an Athenian, or of Athens. KXedvwp 
'Opxo/ueVtos, Cleanor of Orchomenus, X. An. 3. 2, 4. The names of rivers are 



$ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 317 

commonly placed as adjectives between the article and. the word irorafios, e. g 
6"A\us iroTafjios (the river Hal ys), Her. 1, 72. 6 'AxeAcoos -KOTaixos, Th. 2. 102. 
ircl rbv ~Zdpov iroTafxov, iirl rbv Ylvpafxov Trora/j.6v, X. An. 1. 4, 1. eift tqv ~Evcppd' 
tt)v iroTa/jLov, 11. irpbs rbv 'Apdfrj' TvoTaixov, 19. Examples like the following 
are more seldom : iirl t<S iroTafj.(3 KaKvirdpei, Th. 7, 80. iirl tcV irorafjibp 1 rbv 
"Epiveov, ib. 82. Sometimes the article is wanting : eirl Vdpov irorapLov (accord- 
in<r to the bgst MSS.), X. An. 1. 4, 1 : br\ "Apiraaov iroraixov (according to the 
ISS.), ib. 4. 7. 18 ; 7roraf^bs ^.eXiuovs, 5. 3, 8. The names of mountains, 
islands, seas, cities, etc., are also placed between the article and the noun, when 
they are of the same gender or, at least, of the same declension as the nouns to 
which they belong, viz. yrj, aKpov, opos, vrjtros, etc., e. g. £ttI ttjv SoAiryeiai' k<x>iat)v, 
Th. 4. 43 : rb ~2,ovviov aKpov, 77 QecrirpcoTls 777, 77 A77A0S vr,o~os: rov ~2Ko/j.f3pov opovs, 
Th. 2, 96'; rod A'lfxov opovs, Th. 2, 96 (<5 Al^os) ; 77 E0A/377 Xlfxvp, Th. 1, 58. 4, 
103; J] Mevd-n iroXis, Th. 4, 130. But if the gender (or declension) is not the 
same, they must be regarded as in apposition with the nouns to which they 
belong, and are placed before or after them. e. g. r<S upsi rfj Tepavda, Th. 4, 70 ; 
rr)v &Kpav fb Kvvbs arnj-a, 8. 105 ; ttjs''IS7]S rod opovs, 108 ; 77 A-riKvkros rb cppov- 
piov, 4, 113 ; rb yoipiov at 'Ewe'a odoi, 1, 100 ; ri]v tvoKiv tovs Tapaovs, X. An. 1. 
2, 26. The article is seldom omitted, e. g. fab 'AfiSripcov irSAeccs, Th. 2, 97. 

8. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives, 
they regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The Eng- 
lish here either employs an adjective used substantively, as the 
good; or a substantive, as the speaker (=the one speaking) ; or 
resolves the participle by he icho, they ivho, that which (=to the 
Lat. is, qui). This usage is very frequent in Greek with all the 
participles. 

'O o-ocpos, the icise (man), a icise (man), ol ayc&ol, ol kclko'i, ol StKa^ovres (those 
who judge), the judges ; ol Aeyovres, the orators; rb dya&ov, rb kcsXov, to Ka\d, 6 
0ov\6fjt.evos, quivis ; 6 rvx&v, whoever happens. 'O Tz\dara coc/>eA<2z/ rb uoivbv 
ueyiajuiu Tipwv d^iovrai. 'O irKeio-ra w<p e A 770" as rb k. fi. r. a£iovTcu. 'O 7rAe?- 
crra «c/>e A 77 euv r. K. ft. T. a£icoidYjcreTcu. — 'O dptrriv %\<av irXovre? pXv ovrow 
ip'iKwv ttoAAwz/, TTAouTet 8e Kal aXXoov fiovXojxevwv yevea&ai Kal tv p.ev irpdrruu exet 
rovs o-vvr)o-Sti)croixevovs, tdv 8e ri crc/xzAr?, ov aivavi^ei twv fior}&7) cr6v- 
t co v, X. An. 7. 7, 42. But when the adjectives and participles are designed to 
express only a part of a whole, the article is omitted, e. g. ayc&ol, good men ; 
<pi\ocro(povi/T6S, lAaSSfTes : KaKa Kal alaxp a %irpa£*i/. 

9. Participles also take the article, when definite individuals 
are spoken of, in the sense of those, who ; a participle with the 
article is very often appended to a preceding substantive, in the 
form of apposition, in order to give prominence to the attribu- 
tive meaning, somewhat in the sense of cum, earn, id dico, qui, 
quae, quod, or et is quidem, qui. 

Her. 9, 70. irpcoroi isrjXbov TeyeqTai is rb relxos, Kal tt\v GK-nvr\v tov MapSoviov 
olrroi iaav ol 5 tapir da avr e s (and these are they tliat robbed, etc.). X. C. 2. 6, 18. 
ov jjlqvov ol Idiuirat rovro iroiovo'tv, a\Xa ical iro\(is a I twu re Ka\u>v (xaAiaTa 
€irifjL(hovfj.ej/ai, Kal rd alcrxpd riKto-ra tt posit (Aevai ttoWukis 7ToAe/it«w5 

27* 



318 SYNTAX. [$ 245. 

exovo-i Tpbs aXXrjXas. 3. 5, 4. Boicorol p.ev, ol irpoo-frev ouS* tv rfj eavrcov tq\ 
fiSJvres 'A&r)valois dvev AaKedai/j-oviccv re kcu roov aXXwv UeXoirovvr]a<i(av avrirtki 
Tea&ai, vvv d-KeiXovcriv avrol Ka& eavrovs efifiaXeiv els r\\v 'Arrucffv. 

10. The Greek may convert adverbs of place and time, more 
seldom of quality, into adjectives or substantives by prefixing 
the article. In like manner a preposition with its Case may be 
made to express an adjective or substantive meaning. 

'H 'duca ttoXls, the upper city. 'O [xera^v roiros, the intervening place. Ot ivSa.5* 
&v&pa)iroi or ol eV^ctSe. 'O vvv fiaaiXevs. Ot iraXai aocpol dvtipes. Ol r6re, th* 
men of that time. f H avpiov (sc. rjfxepa). f H i^aitpi-ns fxerdaraffis. 'O del, an im- 
mortal. So rb and rh vdv, now, i. e. at the present time,' rb iraXai, formerly, in tin- 
former time ; rb irplv, rb avrina, immediately. Ol irdvv rwv arpariwruv, the best ol 
the soldiers. Tb Kapra \pvxos. C H dyav d/meXeia. 'O 6/xoXoyovfievcas SovXos. Til 
6, 80. rty aKLvSvvcos SovXetav. So also rb irdfiirav and rb irapdirav, omnino, rh 
Kapra, rb irapairoXv used adverbially. Even : 'H ru>v yecpvpav o v SiaXvais, the 
not destroying of the bridges. 'O irpbs robs Uepcras ir6Xep.os. Ot irepl (piXoaocpiav, 
the philosophers. Ol iv dcrrei. f H iv Xeppovrjo-a) rvpavvis. 

11. The neuter article to, may be placed before every word 
or part of speech, when the word is not considered in relation 
to its meaning, but is used only as a form of speech, or when 
a preceding word is repeated, without regard to the structure 
of the sentence in which it is repeated. The Greek, by prefix- 
ing the article, may give even to whole phrases the form and 
meaning of an adjective or substantive. 

Tb rvirrw, rb rvirreis. Dem. Cor. 255, 4. vfieTs, S> dvdpes 'A&r)va?oi' rb 8* 
v/j.e?s orav e'lirco, rr]v ir6Xiv Xeyw. PL Rp. 352, d. ov irepl rod iivirv)(6vros (de rf 
levi) o Xoyos (eo'rlv), aXXa irepl r ov ftvriva rpoirov Xph Cv^. 

§ 245. Position of the Article. 

1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by 
intervening particles, e. g. /xeV, Se, ye, re, ydp, $rj ; by the indefinite 
pronoun rls (in Herodotus very often), and by avrbs iavrov. 

Tbv fiev dvSpa, r)]v he ywa7na. When a preposition stands before the article, 
the prose-writers say either : irpbs 5e rbv dvSpa, or irpbs rbv &v$pa de, but not irpbs 
rbv 5e dvdpa. — Ta>v ris Uepaeuv, Her. 1, 85. To?s avrbs avrov irrjpi.ao'i fiapvverai, 
Aeschyl. Ag. 845. 

2. When several substantives are connected by koli or rl — 
koli, there are two Cases: (1) the article is repeated with each; 
then the separate ideas expressed by the substantives are con- 



§ 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 31t 

siclered independent of each other, or they stand in contrast ' 
or (2) the article is not repeated; then the separate ideas aift 
considered as forming one single conception. 

~£ctiKpa.T7]S irdvTa 7]ys?ro &eous etSeVcu, rd re XeySfxeva ko! irpa.rr6p.evoi. KaX rh 
s-iyfj fiovXevo/xeva (the first two members form a whole, hut the last is contrasted 
with them), X. C. 1. 1, 19. At pafiiovpylai KaX 4k rod irapaxpypa r^vai, 2. 1, 20. 
At iiri/j.eXeiai ruv KaXoov re Kaya&u>v epyoov, ib. Td re avp.<pepovra KaX /cexaptc- 
fieva, 2. 2, 5. Ot crrparrriyoi KaX Xoxayol, An. 7. 3, 21. To p.eyaXoirpeires re koX 
iXevSepiov KaX rb raireiv6v re KaX aveXei^epov (here the first two and also the 
last two form one single conception), X. C. 3. 10, 5. Tobs aypobs robs eavrov nal 
oIkiccs, Th. 2, 13. Ot 7rcu8es re kcu yvvcuKes (so many MSS.), PI. Rp. 557, c. 

3. When a substantive having the article has attributive 
expletives joined with it, viz., an adjective, participle, adjec- 
tive pronoun or numeral, a substantive in the Gen., an adverb 
or preposition with its Case ($ 244, 10), then the article has a 
different position according to the idea to be expressed, as will 
be seen from the two following cases : — 

(a) The attributive is joined with its substantive to express 
a single idea, as the ivise man = the sage, and is designed to 
contrast the object denoted by its substantive with other objects 
of the same kind. In this case, the attributive stands either 
between the article and the substantive, or after the substantive 
with the article repeated ; or the substantive stands first without 
the article, and the attributive follows x with the article. 

aya&bs avfjp or 6 avrjp 6 aya^os or a.vr\p 6 aya&os (in contrast with the bad 
man). See Rem. 1. Ot irXovcrioi iroXTrai or ol iroXtrai ol irXotaioi (in contrast with 
poor citizens) . 'O i/j.bs iraryjp or 6 irarrjp 6 e/xos. Ol rpels dudpes or ol avdpes ol rpels. 
'O iSiv 'A&rivaiwi' Srj/u.os or 6 drip-os 6 ru>v 'A&rjvalcov (the Athenians in contrast with 
another people). Ot vvv &vSpo)iroi or ol dufrpconoi. ol vvv. 'O irpbs robs Tlepcras 
v6Xe/ios or d ir6Xep.os 6 irpbs robs Tlepcras (literally the against the Persians tear, i. e. 
the war against the Persians, in contrast with other wars). 'Airb &aXdao-ris rrjs 
'luvcav. Tvpavvls ?? ev Xeppov7]<rcp. 'H ev 'Zo.XajMVi npbs rbv Uepo-r]V vav/xaxia, the m 

1 Where the attributive expletive consists of several words, or where tbe 
•expletive is itself qualified by another expletive, it is usually placed after its 
substantive, otherwise too long- a phrase would intervene between the article 
and its substantive ; such expletives involved the idea of some such phrase as, I 
mean, etc., C. g*. r)vXioSr)0-av ev rals Kco/Acus rals virep rod iredlou rov irapa rbi/ 
Kevrpir-qv iroTa/xdi/ (they encamped in the villages [7 mean] those above, etc.). Here 
K(t)fxa.is is qualified by virep ireStov, and tins by irapd Kevrplrr]v, etc., X. An. 4. 3, 1 
Tpiros fiaarbs Xoiirbs "f\v, . . . o virep ri\s eirl rep irvpl KaraXr)(p&elo~r]S tjwXaiais T7JS 
WKrbs i/7rti Twj/ i&eXdvrwv, here 6 virep and what follows qualifies the word paw- 
ros, X. An. 4. 2, 14. 



320 syntax. [§ 245 

Salamis against the Persian sea-fight, i. e. the sea-fight in Salamis against, etc. These 
last examples show that a substantive with its Case has an adjective force. 

Remark 1. In the first position (6 aya&bs avrjp), the emphasis is on the 
attributive, e. g. Ae? Traioeias Koivooveiv to 3-f?Au yevos 7]/jl?v tw toov appevoov 
(yevei), PI. L. 805, d. But in the second position (6 aurip 6 ayabos), the idea 
expressed by the substantive is represented as a definite one or one already 
mentioned, or is contrasted with that of another substantive ; in the third posi- 
tion [av)ip 6 aya&6s), the idea expressed by the substantive is represented as in- 
definite, but in contrast with another. Tt Siacpepei &v&pooiro s aKpaTrjs Sfnpiov 
rod a.K pareardr ov, X. C. 4. 5, 11. 'H apery evvecni p.ev &eo?s, crvvecrTi 5e 
av&pco tt ois to?s ay a&o?s, 2. 1, 32. Tb apuxTov ov robs v6[x.ovs icrlu lax 1 ''' 
eiv, aXX' &vopa rbv fMera (ppovfjceoos fiaa lXikov, PI. P. 294, a. Aioutovvrai at 
fj.ev tv pavvioes Kal oXiyapx'iai to?s r poisz 1 s toov e<p ecrrt] kot oov, at §1 
TroAets (republics) at orj /jlo Kpar ov /xevai to7s vofiois ro?s Ke ijxev o is, 
Aeschin. 3, 6. To linriKbv rb eK eiv oov (sc. tcov 'Xku&oov) ovrca jxaxerai, T & 
3e ottXit ifcbv to ye toov 'E X X t] v co v, as eyoo Aey&v PL Lach. 191, b. 'Eycc 
/u.ev ovv exeivovs tovs avopas (ptJiA ov \xovov toov a oo fi a t oo v toov tj fiere p oov 
TraTepas eivat., aXXa, nal ttjs eXev&eptas rrjs re TjjxeT epas Kal ^v/XTravToov, 
toov ev TTJSeTrj rjTrelpoj, PL Menex. 240, e. Aie^epxovTai Tas re o~vj.L<popas Tas 
e/c rod iroXe/xov rod tt pb s aXXrjXov s i)fuv yey evr] iievas Kal Tas oo<pe- 
Xeias Tas etc tt)S <tt par etas ttjs e7r' eKetvov e o~o/j.e v as, Isocr. Paneg. 
43, 15. Sometimes the position varies in the same sentence, e. g. Tas /j.eyd- 
Xas rjoovas Kal to, aya&a tb /neyaXa i) ireL&oo Kal i) Kaprepia Kal oi ev 
t<2 Kaipol ttSvoi koL kivSwoi irapixovTai [great pleasures and advantages), X. Cy. 3. 
3, 8. Uoos 7Tore i) 'aKpaTos d iKaio avvn irpbs aoiKiav tt]v &Kparov 
e%et ,• PL Rp. 555, a. Then the second position does not differ from the first. 

Rem. 2. With a verbal substantive, the attributive expressed by a preposi- 
tion and its Case, is often placed after its substantive without the repetition of 
the article. So also, when an attributive explanation comes between the article 
and the substantive : f H crvyKo^LOT] 4k tcov aypSov is to &o-tv, Th. 2, 52. 'H vvv 
ifieTepa opyr] es MLTvX-nvaiovs, 3, 44. Trjs toov yvvaiKoov (piXias irpbs tovs ctvhpas, 
X. Hicr. 3, 4. Also the more definite expletives of an Inf., Part, or adjective, 
frequently are not placed between the article and these words : T^v cocpi av 
tgvs apyvpiov tgj fiovXo/xevoo irooXovvTas co<pio-Tas airoKaXovonv, X. C. 1. 6, 13 
(instead of tovs ttjv o-o<plav . . . irooXovvTas, in order to make prominent the idea 
in ttjv ao<piav). 

(b) The attributive is joined with its substantive not to 
express a single idea, but is to be regarded as the predicate of 
an abridged subordinate clause ; then the attributive is not con- 
trasted with another object of the same kind, but with itself; it 
being designed to show that the object to which the attributive 
belongs, is to be considered, in respect to a certain property, by 
itself, without reference to another. In this case the adjective 
without the article is placed either after the article and the 
substantive, or before the article and substantive. 

'O avrip ay a^ 6s or ay a&bs 6 aviip, a good man (= ay a&bs &v, the man who 
is good, inasmuch as, because, if he is good). Of 'avSpooiroi /xiaovai rbv dvSpa Ka- 
k6v or KaKbv Tbv avdpa, they hate the bad man, i. e. they hate the man, inasmuch 
as, because, if he is bad. (On the contrary, rbv KaKbv &v8pa or rbv &vdpa Th* 
kxk6v % the bad man, in distinction from the good ; hence, tovs fj.ev aya&ovs. ow 



$245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE.. 321 

frpdj-rrovs ayaTrcofiev, robs 5e Kaxovs fxicrov/xev.) 'O fiacnXevs yfiecos x a P l C* TaL r o?s 
iroXirats ayafroTs, good citizens, i. e. if or because they are good (on the contrary, 
rots aya&o?s iroXlrais or ro?s iroXirais ro7s aya&oTs, good citizens, in distinction 
from bad citizens). 'O Srebs rr\v i^uxV upar icmqv rep avSrpwirco ive<pvo~ev (a 
sold, as it is the most excellent), X. C. 1. 4, 13. Ol inrb rod tjXlov Kara\aLar6p.evoi 
ra xpw/iara /xeXavrepa ix ov<TiV ( a blacker skin ; the blackness of the skin is 
the consequence of the KaraKaLnreabai inrb tov rjXlov), 4. 7, 7. 'Eveirpriadv re ras 
o~K7]vas 4 prjfMovs kcu ra xPVf jLara St^piraa'av (quia deserta erant), Th. 1, 49. 'A|i<£ 
(postulo) robs frepdirovras i/xol jxkv &<p&ova ra eTnrr\fieia irapao-nevd^iv, avrobs 5e 
pvqfievbs rovrcov airreo'&ai (= &sre avra acpfrova elvai), X. C. 2. 1, 9. 

Eem. 3. If a substantive having the article has a Gen. or a preposition and 
its Case connected with it, the position under (a) occurs, only when the sub- 
stantive with its Gen., etc. forms a contrast with another object of the same kind, 
e. g, 6 rwv 'A^rjvaiuv Srj/xos or 6 firi/xos 6 rwv 'ASrqvaicov (the Athenians in contrast 
with another people) ; the emphasis bere is on the Gen., e. g. Ovic hWorpiov riy&rai 
elvai o'A&rjvaiwv fir) /xo s rbv 7] fialcov fir) jxov, ava/xifj-vncrKerai 5e /cat toss 
rwv it p oySvwv rwv kavr ov els robs Orjfiatovs it poyovovs evepyeo~ias, 
Dem. (Psephism.) 18, 186. 3 E&avarc!>frr) inrb rwv iv rfj SirapTTj reXwv, X. 
An. 2. 6, 4. On the contrary, the Gen. without the article, is placed either before 
or after the other substantive, when that substantive denotes only a part of that 
expressed in the genitive ; the emphasis is then on the governing substantive, 
e. g. 6 firjfxos 'ASnjvaiwv, or ' Afrqvaiwv 6 firj/xos, the people and not the nobles. 
Hence, with this position, a partitive and not an attributive genitive is used ; 
the Athenian people is not here considered in contrast with another people, but 
a part of the Athenian people is contrasted with another part of the same, viz., 
the nobles. Compare further, rj HwKpdrovs <pi\oo~o<pia or 77 (piXoaocpia rj ^wKpdrovs, 
i. e. the philosophy of Socrates, the Socratic philosophy, in contrast with the 
philosophy of another, e. g. Plato's, the Platonic, with 77 <pi\o<ro(pia 'SwKpdrovs or 
"XwKpdrovs ?j (pikoaocpia, i. e. the philosophy of Socrates and not something 
else of his, e. g. his life. "Qsirep olicias ra, tear co&e v (domus infimas partes) 
lo~x v porara elvai 5e?, ovrw Kal rwv tt pd^ewv ras apx&s /cat ras {nro&e- 
<reis a\7j3-e?s Kal fiixaias elvai irposb.Kei, Dem. 2. 10. Tovrov ev eSpexpe ital iirai- 
Sevaev, us fione? 'A&rivalwv r u> tt Xri&e 1, to the multitude, not to the intelligent, 
PL Menon. 90, b. Tb elfios rod iraifiSs (contrasted with rovvoua rod irai- 
fi6s), PL Lysid. 204, e. 

Rem. 4. When the genitive of the substantive pronouns is used instead of 
the possessives, the reflexives i/xavrov, osavrov, etc. are placed according to (a), 
e. g. Tbv i/xavrov Trarepa or rbv irarepa rbv i/xavrov, etc. ; but the simple personal 
pronouns fxov, aov, etc. stand without the article, either after or before the sub- 
stantive with the article, e. g. 6 irar-hp fxov or fxov rrarrip, 6 ivar^p crov or crov 6 
irar-np, 6 iraryp avrov (avrrjs) or avrov (avrris) 6 irar-np, my, thy, his (ejus) father, 
8 irarrjp riixuv, vfiwv, vt£v, aurcov, or rjfxuv, vjxoov, vuv, avrwv 6 irarrtp, our, your, 
their (eorum) father. But when the substantive has another attributive joined 
with it, these pronouns can stand between the substantive and that attributive, 
c. g. 'H ndxai t]/j.cov (pvo-is. In the Sing, and Dual, the enclitic forms are always 
used ; these never stand at the beginning of a sentence; but in connected dis- 
course they can stand before the substantive which has the article. The Gen. 
of demonstrative and also of reciprocal pronouns, have the position of (a), e.g. 
6 rovrov (ha'ivov) iraryp or 6 rrarijp 6 rovrov (ine'ivov). Trj aWrjAocv evvoia. The 
demonstratives arc sometimes also found without the article after the substan- 
tive with the article, c. g. Ol avayKaioi iKeivov, Isac. •). 10. Ta lepa. indvov, ib. 
36. Tov irarpbs rovruv, 1C 3. Tj? vvv vfipei rovrov, Dem. 4, 3. 

Rem. 5. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest 
with the adjectives &Kpos, ixe<ros, to~xaros. When the position mentioned 



322 SYNTAX. [$ 245. 

under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attributive forms a contrast with 
other objects of the same kind, e. g. r) \xio-n ir6\is or iroMs r) /J.4o-n, the middle city, 
in contrast with other cities ; r) icrxdrr) v?i<ros, the most remote island, in contrast 
with other islands. 'Es rb £<rx aT0V zpvf-a, rrjs vfjcrov (in contrast with other ipv- 
(jLa<ri), Th. 4, 35. When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b) 
occurs, the substantive is contrasted with itself, the attributive then only defin- 
ing it more fully. In this last case, we usually translate these adjectives into 
English by substantives, and the substantives with which they agree as though 
they were in the genitive, e. g. iirl ra> opei &Kp<a or eV anpu> tw 6p€t, on the top 
of the mountain (properly on the mountain where it is the highest) ; iv fxtar) rfj 
■nrSAei (seldom iv 77J 7roAei /J.e<rr)), in the middle of the city; iv iaxdrr] rfj vrjaca 
or iv vrjcrca rfj icrxdrrj, on the border of the island. 'Ev fiiaots ro7s TvoXe/u-lois 
airi&ave, X. H. 5. 4, 33. Kara fxiaov rbv kvkXov, Cy. 2. 2, 3. Ot Uepaai irepl 
&Kpais reus X e P a ^ X €l P L0 * as daae'ias exovffiv, 8. 8, 17. 

Rem. 6. In like manner, the word fx6vos has the position mentioned under 
(a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substantive, e. g, 
6 /j.6vos ttcus, the only son; on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b), 
when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate, e. g. 'O 7ra?s /xSvos or 
fx6vos'6 ira?s irai£ei, the boy plays alone (without company). Mov-qv ruv avfrpwircov 
(yXiarrav) iirolrjcrav (oi freoi) o'lav ap&povv rrjv (pwvqv, i. e. r) ruv av&p. yAurra 
fj.6v7] icrriv, rjv iiroirjcrav o'lav k. t. A., they made the human tongue only, capable of 
articulating sounds, X. C. 1. 4, 12. 

Rem. 7. When a substantive has two or more attributives, one of which 
limits the other (§ 264, 2), one position maybe as an English, e.g. Oi &AA01 aya- 
&ol av&pooTToi, the other good men ; or the limiting attributive with the article either 
stands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or the 
limited attributive with the article stands first, and the limiting attributive fol- 
lows with the article and substantive. f O vavnubs 6 ruv (3ap fidpoov ffrpa- 
r6s. Ai aWai ai Kara to o-oofxa r)S ovai, the other bodily pleasures, PI. Rp. 
565, d. 'Ev ro7s &A\ois ro?s ifiols xvp' 1015 ) ^ys. 2 81- (When 6 aAAos is 
joined with an adjective used substantively, the article is commonly repeated, 
e. g. TaAAa to iroXiriKa, X. Hicr. 9, 5. Oi 'aWoi oi iraparvyxdvovres, X. Apol. 
11.) 'H ovx iJKio'ra /3Acuf/acra r) Ao ifxcaSr) s v6o~os, Th. 1, 23. 'Ev rfj rod 
Albs rfj fieylo-Tj) koprfj, Th. 1, 126. 'Es avrbv rbv iirl r<f> orrS/xari rod Xi^ivos 
rbv 'irepov irvpyov, 8, 90. 'Ev rfj apxaia rfj 7) /.ieT 4 pa (pcovfj, PI. Cratyl. 
398, b. Tb iv 'ApKaSta rb rov Aibs iepov, Rp. 565, d. The limiting 
attributive can also stand between the substantive and the limited attributive ; 
in this case the article is used before each of the three parts, e. g. ra relxv 
ra iavrwv ra fianpa airertXeo-av, Th. 1, 108. (But the article is omitted with 
a limiting demonstrative standing between the substantive and the limited 
attributive, e. g. Trjv rovrov ravrrjvl rr)V &avfj.aarr]V K€<paXr)v, PL Symp. 213, e.) 
Einally, if the limiting attributive with the article is placed first, the limited 
substantive and its attributive follow, both without the article, e. g. Ilpbs ras 
irdpoiSe o~v [xcpopas ei>8 ai /j.ov a s, Eur. Hel. 476. TdXas iyco rijs iv i^axfj 
^vjx^oXrj s fiapeias, Ar. Acharn. 1210. 'Airb ra>v iv rfj Evpciirrj ir6Xea>v 
'EXXr/vl 8 lev, X. H. 4. 3, 15. Tas virb rfj Qpanrj o'lKOvaas iroXeis 'EXXijvi- 
8 as, 4. 8, 26. 

Rem. 8. When an attributive participle has a more definite expletive belong- 
ing to it, their relative position is as follows : — 

(a) 'O irpbs rbv iroXejj,ov aipe&els ar parrjyo s. 

(b) r O arparrjybs irpbs rbv irSXefiov aipe&ei s. 

When there are two of these more definite expletives, one stands either 
after the substantive or after the participle, e. g. TV irpbs EvfiovXov y^vofAevnv 
Ttiariv v/x?v, Acschin. 3, 25. Toov ko,^ 6/xo.s ireirpayfievuv Ka\a>v rfj 7r<$Aei, 
Dem. 18, 95. T-Jjs vvv virapxovo-ns avrco Swdpews, 4, 4. T&s ivap vjxoov vrcap* 
\_ovaas avr<§ rifids, 20, 83. 






$ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 323 

(c) 'O alpe&els irpbs rbv iroXe/xov trr p arrjyo s. Tr]V virdpxovcrav rij 
iroAei Svvafiiv, Dem. 8, 10. 

(d) 'O alpe&els a r parrjybs irpbs rbv irotefiov. Ttjv irposovcrav a5o£- 
iav tw irpdyfiari, Dem. 6, 8. 

(e) 'O irpbs rbv irohefiov cr parrjybs alpe&eis (this position is most fre- 
quent, when the participle has two more definite expletives). Tds bub 
rovrov fi\aacprj/j.ias el pt] fi e v as, 18, 126. Ai irpb rod arofiaros vrjes 
v av fiaxov aai, Th. 7, 23. Tb irpbs AifSv-qv fiepos rerpafifievo v, 58. 
When there are two or more explanatory words belonging to the partici- 
ple, they are either placed between the article and the substantive, e. g. 
Tyv roie Q-qfSaiois pufi-nv kcu do£av vir dp%ov crav, Dem. 18, 98; or 
they are so separated, that one is placed either before the participle or 
after it, e. g. Ot irapa tovtov \6yoi Tore pT]&evr es, Dem. 18, 35. 
Tavrijv r 7] v airb rod roirov aacpaXeiav virdpxovo'av rij iroXei, 19,84. 

Rjm. 9. When a participle used substantively has predicative expletives 
joined with it, these are placed between the article and the participle. Thus, 
for example, irporepos, irpuros, varepos, vararos (he came first, etc.), becomes : 
6 irporepos (irpG>T os, vcrr epos, vcr aro s) acpiKOfievos (he who came 
first); aKwv afiaprdvei becomes: 6 olko)v a/xaprdvoov; avSpeTos vo/ii^erai: 6 
avbpeTos vo fiiQofievos ; avrbs adiKel: 6 avrbs ddTK&v (one doing wrong of 
his own accord)] roiovrSs eariv: 6 r oiovros wv; fiovos eariv : 6 fiSvos So v. 
When the predicative expletive consists of an adjective and substantive, the 
substantive is usually placed directly after the participle, e.g. irpuros reray- 
p.evos ra^iapxos (he who had been placed as the first centurion). 

4 246. Use of the Article ivith Pronouns and Numer- 
als, ivith and without a Substantive. 

1. The article is sometimes used with personal substantive 
pronouns in the Ace, either when the j^rsonality is to be made 
prominent instead of the person merely, or, what is more fre- 
quent, when a person previously mentioned is referred to. On 
o Trotos, see $ 344, Rem. 3. 

Tbv eavrbv Si) Aeycov fidXa Gefivws Kal eyKa>fiid{o*v (his important person), PL 
Phaedr. 258, a. Aevpo Stj, ?) 5' '6s, ev&v ^ar, Hot, e(pt)v ey&>, Xeyeis, Kal irapa 
■vivas robs vfias(i.e. Kal rives elalv ovroi, ovs \eyeis ijfias), PL Lys. 203, b. 

2. The article is used with a substantive which has a pos- 
sessive pronoun belonging to it, or the Gen. of a personal or 
reflexive pronoun ($ 245, Pv,em. 4), when the object is considered 
as a definite one or as relating exclusively to possession; the 
possessive is placed between the article and the substantive 
\k 2io, 3 (a)]. 

'O 4 fibs variip, 6 abs \6yos, thy word (a definite or particular one), b efibs ira7s, 
my son (a definite one of several, or even the only one) ; also 6 \6yos <rov\ rbv 
creavrov irarepa or rbv irarepa rbv aeavrov ; on the contrary, the article is omitted 
when it is to be denoted, that the object named belongs to the possessor in 
common with others of the same kind, or when the substantive with the posses- 



324 syntax. [$ 246 

sive is a predicate or in apposition : ifxbs aSeXcpos or aSeXcp6s /mov, a brother of 
mine (it not being determined which); 4/j.bs nous or ttcus /j.ov, ovtos icm(u) 
acjeXcpbs cros or aSeXipos aov ; ovtos, adeXcpbs 4/x6s or adeXcpos fxov. 

3. A substantive to which one of the demonstrative pronouns 
ovtos, o8e, iKelvosy and even air 6s, ipse, is joined, regularly 
has the article. As these pronouns are not considered as at- 
tributives, but either as substantives (he, the man), or are taken 
in a predicative sense (the man, who is here), they stand either 
before the article and the substantive, which is then in apposi- 
tion with the pronoun, or after the article and substantive [comp. 
$ 245, 3 (b)]; thus: — 

ovtos 6 avrjp or 6 av)ip ovtos (not o ovtos av-fip), 
T^Se 7} yv&\xr\ or r\ yycv/xr] rjSe (not 77 rjde yv&jxr)), 
iice?vos 6 avr\p or 6 aurjp 4k6?vos (not 6 4ks?pos avrjp), 

avrbs 6 fiacriXevs or 6 fiaoiXevs ovtos (but 6 avrbs /3acriXevs [seldom (6) fiacri~ 
Xevs 6 avrSs] signifies idem rex, the same king). 

Remark 1 . The substantive does not take the article : — 

(a) When the pronoun is used as the subject, and the substantive as the 
predicate (§ 244, Rem.. 1), e. g. avrr] 4o-t\v avBpbs aper-h (this is the virtue of 
a man), PI. Men. 71, e. Avtt) e<rTa> LKav)] diroXoyia, Apol. 24, b. Klutjo-ls 
avTT] /xeyicrT-n 5^ ro?s"EXXr]cnu 4y4veTo (this was the greatest agitation), Th. 

I, 1 ; hence a distinction must be made between tovtco tG> didaoKaXca 
Xp&vTca (they have this teacher), and tovtco didao-KaXcp xp&vtcu (they have this 
man for a teacher). Te/cfiTjpuw tovtco xP^^evos (which signifies tovto 4ctti 
TeK/.L7]piov, ca ixpyTo), X. C. 1. 2, 49. TavTr\v ypw/j.-qu e%co (which signifies 
avTT) icrrlj/ r\ yuci/xr), %v e'xw), An. 2. 2, 12. If, however, the predicative 
substantive is to be represented as a definite object or one before-men- 
tioned, it takes the article, e. g. 'Oirore (^UKpdTrjs) ri rep x6yco die£ioi, diet 
toov {idXio'Ta o/xoXoyov/xeuccv iiropeveTO, vo/j/ifav Ta.vTr\v t)]u aacpaXeiav 
elvai Xoyov (hanc esse firmam Mam disputandi rationem, viz. such a mode 
as had been clearly shown by previous examples), X. C. 4. 6, 15. 

(b) "When the substantive is a proper name, e. g. ovtos, iice?vos, avrbs ~2o*Kpd- 
tt]S. Ev^rvBrj^os ovtoctl, X. C. 4. 2, 3. NiK^pdrov rovrov, Symp. 2, 3. 
Xapfj.idris ovToai, 2, 19. Kvrbv Mevwpa, An. 1. 5, 13 ; or when a common 
name is used instead of a proper name, e. g. Avtov fiacriXews, An. 1. 7, 

II. 'E7Ti yr\v T7]j/5e j]X&ofj.ev (with the variation 4rrl rr\v yr\v t.), Th. 2, 
74. The article occurs but seldom, and then with a demonstrative force. 
Ti 5t]t 4k.s7.vqv Tbv a X rj v hav^dC^o^v ; Ar. Nub. 181. TovSe rbv 
'iTTirirjv /J.eTeirefj,ipdfj.e&a, Her. 5, 91. Comp. 8, 27. 

(c) When the idea of an object is to be expressed absolutely, the substantive 
without the article is joined with the pronoun avr6s. Comp. § 244, 1. 
Aur^) SecnroTela aurf/s SovXeias, PL Parmen. 133, d. Aut rj s hncTTT]- 
\xr\s ov fxeTexo^v, 134, b. Ovk avrov SeairSrov drjirov, '6 4&ti dsair6rT)S i 
eKeivov dodx6s 4ariv, 133, d. 

(d) When ovtos a. vfjp is used to denote emotion, especially scorn or con- 
tempt, instead of the pronoun av. Ovrocrl avr] p ov iravaerai (pXvap&v', 
Et7T€ jxol, S> ~2,a>KpaTes, ovk ai<TX vl, V ovo/xara iSbjpeiW ; (= blockhead, why dont 
you cease ?) PI. Gorg. 489, b. Ovk oT<? arra Xeyeis, & 2w/cpaTes, aXX* aXXov 
Tiva ipwTa. 2. Outos b.vr\p ovx inro/xevet w<peXovp.evos (= you, oh man 
can you not bear to be benefited ? lb. 505, c 



k 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 325 

(e) In passages like Ovroi, ovs Spare, fidpfiapoi iroXe/uawTepoL rj/xiu ecrovrat, X. 
An. 1. 6, 16, the relative clause supplies the place of the article. But 
there are few passages like : <£e'pe Aafi&v x iT &vas txkv rovrovai and the 
following tovs St x iT & uas > X. Cy. 8. 3, 6, where the demonstrative is 
used like a deictic (that which points out) adverb (here, there). The poets 
very often omit the article where the prose-writers must use it. 

Rem. 2. When the pronoun ovtos or ineTvos belongs to a substantive having 
the article and an attributive, then these pronouns are often placed between the 
attributive and the substantive, e. g. Ai rav UeXoTTouvrio-iav avrai vrjes, Th. 8. 
80. 'H CTez/77 avTT} odos, X. An. 4. 2, 6. 'O Aifivs e/celVos AeW, Ad. H. A. 
7, 48. So 6 avrbs ovtos iroAefios, Luc. de hist, conscr. c. 14. So also with the 
genitives fxov, o~ov, aiirov, etc. (§ 245, Rem. 4) ; likewise with iras, oKos, e. g. 6 
aya&os fiov irarrip ; rj ruv 'ASrnvaiav iraaa (0A.17) iv6Xis. 

4. A substantive with which tolovtos, roiosSe, too-ovtos, 
rrjXiKovTos, are joined, takes the article placed according to 
$ 245, 3 (a), when the quality or quantity designated by these, 
is to be considered as belonging to a definite object, one before 
mentioned or known, or as belonging to a whole class of objects 
previously named. 

**Ap ovv Zvvaio top toiovt ov ccfj-efx-irrou (pi\ov vofilfciv ; (i. e. talem, qualis anted 
descriptus est),~K. Cy. 5. 5,32. TIcDs kv ovv 6 toiovt os avrjp b~ia<p&dpoi tovs 
veovs (i. e. talis vir, qualem descripsimus Socratem), C. 1. 2, 8. TcDv too- ovtoov 
Kai to iovtccv aya&uv v/x?v tca\ to7s aWois 'A&rivatois ixovrzs x°-P LV ( m relation 
to what precedes), Dem. Cor. 327, 305. 'Opcibv tovs t7)\ikovtovs cpvAdr- 
Tovras [xaKKTra Tas ywcuKas (relating to the preceding yepaiw, but at the same 
time designating the whole class of the yepaiot), X. R. L. 1, 7. So also when 
taken substantively : 6 toiovtos, to. toiovto.. On the contrary, the article must 
be omitted, when the object is indefinite : any one of those who are of such a 
nature, or are so great, e. g. Toiovrov avSpa ovic av siraivoiris. 

5. When -n-as, 7ravTes, 6'A.os belong to a substantive, the 
following cases must be distinguished : — 

(a) When the idea expressed by the substantive is considered 
as altogether a general one, the article is not used. 

Uas avbpcoTTos (seldom avbpooiros iras), every man (i e. every one to whom 
the predicate man belongs ; iravres avfrpwiroi, all men. So also 0A.77 tt6\is, a 
whole city, tt6\ls o\r), a whole city. Then iras in the singular signifies each, 
every. Has may often be translated by mere, or utter, e. g. 'O "Epws 4v irdo-p avap- 
X'« Ka\ avojxia (a>v, PI. Rp. 575, a. TldvTa aya&u na\ Ka\a a.Trepyd(ovTai, Polit. 
284, a. 

(/5) When the substantive to which 7ms, irdvr^ belong, is to 
be considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes 
the article, which is placed according to $ 245, 3 (a). Here ttS?, 
7ravT€s are emphatic. 

2Z 



326 SYNTAX. [I 246. 

'H Ttacra 777, the whole earth ; ol trdvres ttoTutcu, all citizens without exception. 
This usage is more seldom than that under (a). This construction occurs also 
with ok os, hut it is still rarer than with was, e. g. 7) 3a?j tt6xis, ttoXis rj oX-n, the 
whole city. Here the singular iras always has the sense of whole. netpaofrai 
{XPv) KOivi) ffcoCeiv r)\v iracav 2t/ceAtav, Th. 4, 61. ''Edo^eu avro?s ov robs 
irapovras \x6vov airoKrsivai, aXXb. /cat robs airavras MirvXr)vaiovs,3,36. Tb 
uXov avdyKt] tb it a v r a ^ e p 77 etvai, PL Theaet. 204, a. 'Av&ptoiroio-i yap rots 
rracri Koivbv rov^ajxaprdveiv, S. Ant. 1023. 'EKeivws fjLOi (paiverai, cosirep ra rod 
TTposcoirov fiSpia e%et irpbs rb '6Xov irpSscoToj/, PI. Prot. 329, e. Hence it 
signifies, in all. Ilip.irov{ri -joXtovs robs irdvras SirXiras, a thousand hop- 
lites IN ALL. *£vveir\ripu&T}(rav vrjts a I iraffai Se/ca fxaXicrra nal e/caToV, Th. 3, 66. 

(y) When the words 77-as, 7ravTe?, intended merely as a more 
definite explanation, without any special emphasis, belong to a 
word denoting a definite object and hence having the article, they 
are then placed according to § 245, 3 (b). This is by far the 
most frequent use of 77-as, Travres. The word oAos also is usually 
constructed in the same manner, in connection with a substan- 
tive and the article. 

Ol arparicorai eTXov rb err par 6 it eSoy airav or airav rb err par 6 ire 5 op. 
Of ar par 1 Sir at irdvres or irdvres ol err par 1 cor at naXcos i/j.ax^cravro. 
Aia. r)\v iroXiv '6 Xrjv or Sia oXtjv r^v ir6Xiv (simply through the whole 
city, whereas dia rrju oXrju tt6Xiv, through the whole city). Aiafialvovcn ird vr es 
els rb Bv^dunoi/ ol crrparicorai, X. An. 7. 1, 7. El virb ttjs 'EXXaSos 
ir d a 7] s a£io?s eV aperrj d-av/j.d&a&ai, r )]v 'EAActSa ireipareov ev iroietv, X. C. 2. 
1, 28. 

6. When eKao-ros, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the 
article is omitted, as with 7ras in the sense of each, every, when 
the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as a general 
one ; but when the idea contained in the substantive is to be 
made prominent, it takes the article which is always placed 
according to h 245, 3 (b). 

Kara r)}V Tjfxepav endcrrriv, Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or tcatf endcrrriv r)]v 
rnxipav, every single day, but ovk bxiya icrrl KaSr' eKacrrrju rj/xepav (quotidie, 
each day, every day, general) roiavra opav re nal aicoveiu, X. C. 4. 2, 12. A A 
•kicdcrrri 7]XiKlq irposreraKrai iroieiy, $i7)y7}cr6p.e&a, X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Tvpavvovv- 
rai inrb 5e/ca avSpuv, ovs Avaavh'pos KarearrjO'ev eV eKacrrri iroXei, H. 3. 5, 13; 
but "O riti.v iv rfj yfj I k a tr r 77 KdXbv 7^ aya&bv rj, /j-e/xurjcrovrai, in every single 
land, Cy. 8. 6, 6. Kal ^yep-wv p.ev "?\v 6 5e<77r<$T7}S I zed* err 77 s rijs olicias, An. 
7. 4, 14. 

7. When cKarcpo?, each of two, a/x^xo and d/^orepo?, both, 
belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here 



$ 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 327 

only two known, therefore definite objects can be spoken oZ. 
The article is here placed according to h 245, 3 (b). 

'E7rl r wv irXev p £>v e k ar e pcoy, X. An. 3. 2, 36, or 4ttI I kclt e poiv r coy 
irXevpSiv. Ta Sto a.[/.<p6r € pa or a/xcpor e pa to. (bra. 'AfxcpoTv roiv 
X^poTu or to?!/ x e / ,0 ^ ,/ o-fj.(po7v. Ka&' kKar epov rey esu-Aoit, Th, 
4,14. T<£ wrl €KaTepa>,3L Yen. 5, 32. 

8. hi respect to the pronoun avros and the indefinite pronouns 
or numerals a\\o<s 3 erepos, ttoXvs, TrAeiW, 7rXeto-ro5, the 
following points are to be observed : — 

(a) 'O avr6s signifies the same, idem, e. g. 6 aiirbs frySpcviros, idem homo ; rav 
t6, the same; but 6 ay&pcoiros o.vr6s or avrbs 6 &v&pwires, homo ipse. 

(b)'AAAos = alius, another, in contrast witi. ipse (avros) ; 6 cxXXos = reliqum, 
the other ; ol &XX01 — reliqui, certeri, the rest, e. g. 7) &XXt\ "EXXas, reliqua Graecio 
the rest of Greece, in contrast with some part before named ; ol aXXoi av&pwirot . 
the other men or the others, in relation to definite individuals. T Q. ^Apials Kal e i 
6.XX01 oo-oi r)re Kvpov cp'iXoi, Ariaeus and the rest. But c O TXous £ire<pavn /xtr 
&XXuv, Glus appeared icith others, in contrast with himself; — 'drepos = one 
of two (it not being determined which), or it forms a contrast with 6 avr6s and 
denotes difference or contrast; — 6 erepos = the other, i. e. the definite ODe of 
two, e. g. 7] krfpa %eh? rfj kripa xpv™ ; "' e t e p o i in reference to two parties. 

(c) The following cases of ttoXvs, ttoXXol are to be distinguished: (a) 
When ttoXvs, iroXXoi belong to a substantive without the article, as iroXvs tt6vos, 
voWt) o-irovdri, iroXvs x6yos, ttoXXoI av&pcoiroi, an object is denoted as an indefi- 
nite one, e.g. lio7\vv %x ovo ~ al tovov areXe7s rr)s tov ovros &4as atr^pxovrai 
(having much toil), PI. Phaedr. 243. b. TLoXXol frvdrptairoi rod irXovrov dpi- 
•yovrai (many men, general) ; (£) but if the object is represented as dennite, or 
one previously mentioned or known, the article is used with the substantive, 
and iroXis is then placed : (1) as an attributive between the article and the sub- 
stantive, C. g. 7j ttoXXt) ffirovdr] rb aXrj&etas lde7v rredloy (magnum Mud, de quo 
dixi, studiurn, that great zeal, of which I have spoken), PI. Phaedr. 248, b. 7 av iripi 
rbv 7roA.iT x6yov iiroielro *Ava£ay6pas (multum ilium sermonem, e scriptis ejus 
satis cognitum), 270, a. 'Ej/ ra?s 7roXXa7s yeyeareffi (among the many genera- 
tions mentioned), Phaedon. 88, a; ol ttoXXoI av&pwrroi signifies either the 
Many men named or a multitude of men belonging together, in opposition to the parts 
of the whole, hence also ol ttoXXoI, the many, the mxdtitude, the populace, plebs, 
or even the most, the majority (in contrast with the separate individuals), c. g. 
"Off a ol dxlyoi robs iroXXovs fxr] ireitravres, aXXa Kparovvres ypdcpoutfi (what the 
Jew prescribe to the many [the majority] not by persuasion but by force), X. C 1. 2, 45 : 
rb iroXv, the greater part, e. g. Twu iroXzp.licv rb pikv rroXv efxeuey, pepos 5' av- 
r&v airr\vra rots Kara. ra. &Kpa (most of the enemy remained), X. An. 4. 0, 24. What 
is true of the Positive, is true also of the Comparative and Superlative. 'Eay 
ipiXovs r) iroXiv co(peXe7v 8e'??, irorepto r) TrXeiccy ax°^V Tovrwy (Trifj.€Xe?a^ai, 
rep ws cyw vvv, r) t£ ws crb [xaKaplfas Ziairwp.ivcc (the greater leisure, considered 
as a definite thing, or as a definite whole), X. C 1. 6, 9. Et iSidov, inl rovry 



228 syntax. \J 246. 

bviMdov, Stwj ifJ.ol dobs jxeiov /at) airodoir] vfuv rb irXe'iov, An. 7. 6, 16. "Eirerai 
rrj aperfj (rJCe<rd-cu 6t ' s r ^ v t^c/w %povov jiaAAoj/, 77 tt? Ka/aa, K. L. 9, 2; oi 
7r X e : o u s or r b 7r A 4 o v signifies the majority in opposition to the minority ( oi ixdcr- 
ffovs ) , therefore a definite whole ; oi Tr\€?crroi,the most, rb irXelarov^the greatest 
part, also to be considered as a definite whole. — Or, (2) iroXvs is joined with 
the substantive having the article, and is placed according to § 245, 3 (b) ; 
-iroAvs is then to be taken in a predicative sense, e. g. 5 E7rel k&pa iroXXa rb. 
Kp4a {when he saw the flesh that it was much, the flesh in great abundance), X. Cy 
1.3,6. ^(piffi to A A ai r a &irop a ^vix^e^Kora (sc. opcovres), Th. 1, 52. rioA- 
\))V t)]v air lav e!x ou (^ ie y hud censure in great abundance, i. e. were very 
severely censured), 6, 46. 

(d) 'O A I y o t, few, e. g. oXlyoi tv^pwiroi ; ol bxiyoi, the few, i. e. either the 
few mentioned, or to be considered as a definite whole, viz., emphatically the 
Oligarchy, considered as a whole, in opposition to oi iroXXo i, e. g. Ilp4o-fiets 
oi M77A101 trpbs fieu rb ttAtj&os ovk tfyayov, eV Se rals apxeus Kal ro7s oXiyois 
Xeyeiv e/ceAewoj/, Th. 5, 84 ; but when only an indefinite idea is expressed by the 
word dxiyos, the article is omitted, e. g. IlpodoSrijvai rr\v iroXiv tin bxiywv (by 
5, not by the Oligarchs). 



9. When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the 
article is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is 
indefinite, e. g. rpets aVSpes rjXSov ; but the substantive takes the 
article which is placed : (a) according to § 245, 3 (a), when the 
substantive with which the numeral agrees, contains the idea 
of a united whole; hence also, when the number of objects is to 
be represented as a sum-total, after the prepositions dp£4 ttc/h, 
cis, vir4p ; but the article is here used most frequently, when a 
preceding substantive with a cardinal number agreeing with it, 
and without the article, is referred to. 

O: t&v {Sao , iX4wv olvox^oi diSoaffi ro?s rpial 5 atcroXo is bxowres r\\v 
fpidXrjv (with the three fingers, i. e. the three generally used), X. Cy. 1. 3, 8. ^Hj/, 
8t€ ereAeura, a /j. (pi ra irevr^Kovra err] (he had reached about the sum of 
fifty years), X. An. 2. 6, 15. 'Itttc^is els robs rerpaKi s%« Xiovs aweX4- 
yovro avr<2, /cat to£6tcu els robs /xvptovs, Cy. 3. 2, 3. Tots KepKvpaiois ruu 
eif/cocrt vewv ov irapovaciu (referring to the preceding words oi Kepuvpcuoi 
e'tKOO'i vavalv avrovs rpexj/diJ-evoi, Th. 1,49). 

(/?) But the article is placed according to § 245, 3 (b), when 
the numeral without any emphasis, is joined with the definite 
object, merely to define it more definitely, and when the nu- 
meral had not been previously mentioned, e. g. 'E^a^eo-avro 
ol jaera TlepiKAeovs oTrAirai ^tAtoi or ^tXtot ol /xera II. OTrXirai, the 
hoplites with Pericles, a thousand in number, fought. 



$ 247. J ARTICLE AS A PRONOUN. 329 

Kem. 3. The article is frequently omitted with substantives which have an 
ordinal number joined with them, as the ordinal in a measure supplies the place 
of the article. TpiTov eros rep Tro\4fj.a) eVeAeirra (lie died the third year), Th. 
2,103. Comp. 3. 25, 88. 

$^47. The Article as a Demonstrative and Relative 
Pronoun. 

1. The article 6 rj to had originally the sense both of a demonstrative and 
relative pronoun. 

2. In the Homeric poems, the pronoun 6 rj t6 has almost wholly the sense 
both of a substantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which refers to an 
object, and represents it as known or already spoken of, or brings it before the 
mind of the hearer, e. g. H. a, 12. 6 (he) yap ^A&e boas iirl vr\as 'Axcuwv. 29. 
T77 v (her) 8' iya> ov Xvcroo. Od. k, 74. ov yap fioi &4fjus iarl KOfxi^e^v ov5' aTroirefx- 
ireiv avZpa tov (that man), os /ce freolaw a.Trex& 7 ) Tat /J-aKapeo-ffiv. Hence, in 
Homer, the substantive is found in very many passages without the article, 
where later writers, particularly the Attic, would use it. Comp. H. a, 12 seq. 
with PL Ep. 393, e. Yet there are, in Homer, evident traces of an approxima- 
tion or agreement of this apparent article with the real article, which was not 
fully developed before the time of the Attic writers. Thus in Homer, as in 
the Attic writers, it gives the force of substantives to adjectives and participles, 
e. g. 6 &pio-Tos, 6 viKTjcras, 6 yepaiSs ; SO also, to irpiv, rb irp6crdrev (prius) ; it is 
found in' connection with a substantive and an attributive adjective or adverb, 
the attributive being placed between the article and substantive, e. g. Twv irpo- 
Ttpcov ereW, II. A, 691. Tbv de^ibv "irirov -ty, 336. Ol evep&e &eoi £, 274. Tb gov yepas 
a, 185. Tb abv fxivos a, 207 ; so it is used in case of apposition, e. g. Od. A, 298. 
Ka\ Ar]d7}u elSov tV Tvv5ap4ov irapaKoiTiv. Od. £, 61. oVa/cTes ol vioi ; further, 
"AvTvyes at irepl 5i<ppov, II. A, 535. 'Av5pwv tS>v t6tc i, 559. Tte7s oi AoAioio, Od. co, 
497 ; also with the demonstrative, at /ewes cu'Se t, 372 ; it also takes the place 
of the possessive pronoun, e. g. 11. A, 142. vvv /xev S?? tov 7r ot pb s aet/cea TicreTe 
Xu/3r]v (of your father), and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. o, 218. 
iyicoo-fxelTe to. Terra's tTalpoi, vt\C /xcXalvv (the Tei>x €a belonging to the ship). 

3. The use of the article as a demonstrative adjective, is not unfrequent in all 
the post-Homeric writers (§ 244, 6) ; but as a demonstrative substantive pronoun, 
it was retained, in certain cases, through every period of the language ; thus : — 

(a) T b 5 4 (id autem, or on the contrary), very frequently at the beginning of a 
sentence; <5 fi4v (is quidem), 6 54 (is autem), ol 5 4 (li autem) very fre- 
quently at the beginning of a sentence; irpb tov (it poTov). formerly ; 
often Ka\ t6i/, tJjv, et eum, et earn, at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. 
X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. Ka\ Tbv /ceAeuo-ai 5ovvai. In connection with /cat, the 
Greek says in the Nom. : /col 8s, Kal H\, koI o'i (§ 334), but in the Ace. /col 
Tbv, Kal T-fiv; seldom t 6 ye, id quidem, t$, ideo, and the like. 

(b) In such phrases as, Tbv Kal t6v, Tb Kal t6, this man and that man, this 
thing and tluxt thing ; to, Kal tc£, varia, bona et mala. 

(c) It is used immediately before a sentence introduced by '6 s, o a os or oTos, 
which sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjective, of 

28* 



330 syntax. [§ 248. 

especially, an abstract idea. This usage is confined mostly to Plato. 

PI. Phaedon. 75, b. bpi-yzTcu rod '6 icriv 1<rov (= rod Xffov ovtos), he reaches 

after that which is equal. Prot. 320, d. e/c yrjs Kal irvpbs pti^ai/Tes Kal r <2 v 

off a irvpl Kal yfj Kepdvvvrai. Soph. 241, e. eiVe fj.ifxr)fj.dTcov, dre <pavrafffxd- 

rcay avrwv r) Kal nepl Tzyy&v ra>u, offai irzpl ravrd elffi. 

(d) In such phrases as, o fj.lv — o 5e, ol fx4v — ol Se,the one — the other, 

some, the others. Isocr. Paneg. 41. els fxkv robs vfipi(oj/Tes, to?s 5e SouAeiW- 

T£s, treating some with contempt, and being slaves to others. Very frequently 

to fiev — rl 5 e, t& fj.4v — rcfc 5 e, partly — partly, rfj fj.iv — rfj 5e, 

on one side — on the other side. 

4. In the Homeric language, the demonstrative 6 rj to, is frequently used in 

place of the relative. II. a, 125. a\Aa to. fx\v 7roAtW i^irpaSrofiev, to. S45affTou 

{quae ex urbibus praedati sumus, ea sunt distributa). The relative use was 

transferred from Homer to the Ionic and Doric writers also ; so the Tragedians 

take this liberty, though very rarely. Her. 3, 81. ra piev 'Ora^s e?7re, AeAex&w 

Ka.fj.6i Tavra • r a 5' is to ir\rj§os &uooye (pepeiv to Kpdros, yj/dofj.r]s tt}s apiffrrit 

Vjj.dpT7]Ke. Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 482. 



§248. Classes op Verbs. 

In relation to the subject, the predicate can be .expressed 
in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, 
which are indicated by different forms : — 

(1) The subject appears as active, e. g. ( irais ypd^>€t y 
to atf&os ^dWei. — But the active form has a two-fold 
signification : — 

(a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is 
directed, is in the Ace, and therefore appears as pas- 
sive or as receiving' the action, e. g. Tv7ttcd tov TralSa, 
lypdcjjco tt]v iiri(TTo\rjv, — Transitive verb- 

(fS) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the 
subject, as To av^os ^dWec, or when the verb has an 
object in the Gen. or Dat., or is constructed with a 
preposition, e. g. 'Etti^v/jlcj t?5? dperr)?, xaipw rfj crocfjia, 
/SaSitco ek rr\v iroXiv, — Intransitive verb. 

(2) Or the subject performs an action which is confined 
to, or is reflected upon itself, e. g. Tvirropbai, I strike my- 
self ; fiovkevofiai, I advise myself, or I deliberate ; tvitto- 
Ilcli tt\v fcecfrakrjv, I strike my own head; Kwraarpk^o^ai rrjv 
yijv, I subjugate the land for myself ; djivvoiiau tovs irokejii' 



§249.] CLASSES OF VERBS. ACTIVE FORM. 33x 

ovs, I keep off the enemy from myself, — Middle or Reflex- 
ive verb. 

Remark 1. "When the reflexive action is performed by two or more subjects - 
on each other, as Tvivrovrai, they strike each other ; SiaKeXevoprai, they exhort each 
other, it is called a reciprocal action, and the verb, — Reciprocal verb. 

(3) Or the subject appears as receiving the action, i. e. 
the action is performed upon the subject, e. g. 01 arpartwraL 
virb tcqv 7ro\e[Xi(Dv iStco^rvo-av, were pursued^ — Passive verb. 

Rem. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the / 
Greek has only two. tenses : the Fut. and Aor. All the other passive forms \ 
are indicated by the Mid., since the passive action was considered as a reflexive^ 
one. 

Remarks on the Classes of Verbs. 

$ 249. A. Active Form. 

1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion, 
besides a transitive signification, have an intransitive or reflex- 
ive sense. (So in English, as he leads, the birds move, the car- 
riage breaks, the snow melts, which have also a transitive sense ; 
so the Lat. vertere, mutare, declinare, etc.) 

'Axep wz/ Torafibs es/3aAAei is ttiv \lixvt]v, Th. 1,46. 'H Bo\/3r] Xl/xvtj i£i-n- 
aiv is SaXaaffav, 4, 103. 'Eyyvs i\yov ol "EKXrjues (comp. to draw near),~X.. 
An. 4. 2, 15. So also avdyeiv, to go back, to withdraw; d i ay eip, perstare, to 
continue, are found in prose. — 'EXavveiv or iXavveiv 'iinvta (X. An. 1. 8, 1), 
to ride; irposeXavveiv, adequitare, to ride up to. — Many compounds of fiaXXeiv, 
e. g. i jx /3 a A A e t v and e I s /3 a A A e i v,'tofall into, to empty (of a river) ; e k /3 o A - 
Xeiv, to spring forth, to put forth (of plants, etc.) ; per afiaXXeiv (like mutare), 
diafiaXXeii/,to cross over ; ir po s fiaXXe iv rivi, to make an attack upon ; (rv/x- 
jSaA.A.eii' rivi, manus conserere, to engage in combat with ; i it i /3 a A A e i v, to fall 
upon; virepfiaXXeiv, to exceed, to be prominent. — KXiveiv and its com- 
pounds, e. g. iwucXlveiv, to incline to something ; airoKXiveiv, declinare. — T pencil/, 
like vertere ; iirnpiireiv, se permittere, to entrust one's self to. — ^Tp4(peiv (like 
mutare) and its compounds. — Tlraleiv, to strike against, to stumble; irposirraUiv, 
as fieyaXws Trpos4irTa.i<ra.v, they suffered a total shipwreck (Her. 6, 95). 'A-rraA- 
A a t t e i v, to get off, escape. — Compounds of S i 8 6 v a t, as ivdib*6vai, to discharge 
itself (of a stream) ; iiriditi6vai, proficere, to increase, advance. — Compounds of 
leva i, e. g. aviivai, to relax, be remiss; i<pievai (sc. havrbv) laxvpy y4Xa>Ti (indul- 
gere), PL Rp. 388, C. Compounds of fiiayeiv, /xiyvvvai, as <rv/j./xiayeiv, 
commisceri ; -rrposfj-iyvvvat, to fight with, also appropinquate, e. g. irpose^av t<$ 
Ttlxei, Th. 3, 22. Alpeiv, to get under way, set out (of ships, to weigh anchor), 
also compounds, e. g. ol fidpfiapoi airrjpav iic r?is Ar\Xov (to set sail), Her. 6, 99 ; 
avraipetv (sc. x^P as ) riv ' l > to fifa with, to ivithstand. — 'S.vvdirreiv, manus con- 



332 syntax. [$ 249. 

severe. — "Ex^t?, to land; %x eiJ/ Tlv< ^ s (desistere), Th. 1,112; ex*"' with adverbs, 
as ev, Ka\as, kukws, like bene, male habere; %x elv ap<pi ri, in aliqua re occupatum 
esse ; Trpos£x* lv ( sc - vovv), attendere, to give one's attention to, or appellare, to land; 
irpo4x* lv ) praestare; iirex^LV, se sustinere, or expectare, in mente habere, e. g. e7re?- 
Xov aTpaTevecr&aL; kot^x^v, se retinere, also to land; irapsx eiv -> e. g. rfj /xovtriKfj, 
musicae se dare ; airex^v, to be distant from ; avrexeiv, resistere.— U p drretv with 
adverbs, e. g. eu, kcck&s, or with the Ace. of adjectives, e. g, Kdkd, Kaitd, to fare 
well or ill. — Aiar pifjeiv (consumere), versari, to employ one's self. — Compounds 
of (pipe iv, as diacpepeiv, to be different, differre; virepcpepeiv (eminere) itKovtw. — 
'AvaKa/j.fidvetv,refici, recreari. — OltceTv, administrari, e. g. iroXis olice? (the 
state is managed), Plat. — TeXevrav, to end,to die. — Karopfrovv, to succeed. — 
NikSc, to prevail, e. g. iviKa 7] x e ' L P aj/ T< ^ yv(ap.4wv (like vincit sententia), Her. 
6, 109. 'EAAeiir eiv, officio suo deesse ; aTroAziireiv, to remain behind, fitc. 

2. Several active verbs with a transitive signification, which 
form both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive, but in the 
second Aor. an intransitive sense : — 

Svca, to wrap up, first Aor. '48v<ra, I wrapped up, second Aor. %Z\iv, I '£?ent in, 
'lar-npn, to place, " earvaa, I placed, " zarnv, I stood, 

(pvo), to produce, " etpvera,, I produced, " e^vv, I was produced, 

(T/ceAAw, to make dry, " ('4<rKr]Xa, poet. I make dry), " ecr/cA^v, I withered. 

So several active verbs with a transitive signification, which 
form both Perfects, have in the first Perf. a transitive, but in the 
second an intransitive sense : — 

iyeipco, to wake, first Pf. iyfiyepica, Ihave awakened, see'd Pf. iyp-ftyopa, lam awake, 
oWvpt., perdo, " oAwAe/ca, perdidi, " 6'A«Aa, perii, 

irei&ca, to persuade, " iriireiKa, I have persuaded, " ireiroi&a, 1 trust, 
avoiyca, to open, " auecpxa, I have opened, " aveaya, I stand open 

(§ 187, 6), 
Trpdrrca, to do, " iriirpax^ J have done, " irsirpaya (sc. e3), / 

fare xoell. 

Moreover some second Perfects of transitive verbs, which do 
not form a first Perf, have an intransitive sense : — 

&yvvp.i, to break, second Pf. 'iaya, I am broken, 
pT]yvvjxi, to tear, " eppaya, lam torn, 

tt\koo, to smelt (iron), " rirvKa, I am smelted, 

TTTiyvvfii, to fasten, . . " iriir^ya, I am fastened, 

ffrfTTca, to make rotten, " adarjira, I am rotten, 

(palva, to show, " Tricpnva, I appear. 

Remark 1. The Pass. aXlffKOfiai, to be taken, has an active form in the 
Perf. and Aor., viz., eaAco/ca, Ihave been taken, hdx<av, I was taken (§ 161, 1). 

3. Intransitive active verbs are sometimes used in 1he place 
of the passive. 



$ 250.] CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 333 

This is particularly the case with ird<rx €iu > Triirre lv, <pevyeiv, ev, na- 
nus anoveiv, &vr)crK€iv, more seldom reAcuTov. These active verbs 
with virb and the Gen. are very commonly used instead of the passive of such 
verbs as atiineiv, plirreiv or fSaAAeiv, diciineiv, KTelveiv ; &vr}(rneiv in certain forms 
is always so used (§ 161, 13). Me7o\a it so- 6 vr a (eversa, were destroyed by) 
irpriy/xaTa virb t\ <r a ovav, Her. 7, 18. Aeivorepov iv6fti£ov slvai nances inrb rcov 
TToXiTwv anoveiv (audire, they thought it worse to be evil spoken of by the citizens), 
$) na\a>s inrep ttjs irohews aTro&wfi<meiv, Isocr. Paneg. 56, 77. So imriirTeiv vir6 
rivo s, expelli ab aliquo ; very often (pevyetv too twos, fugari ab aliquo, to be put 
to flight by some one, or in a judicial sense, accusatum esse ab aliquo, e. g. ao-efidas 
(pcvyeiv viro rivos, to be accused by some one of impiety. Ev, nanus ir a. r % « 
viro ffov, I am benefited, injured by you. 'EreXevrija'av ir' 'AS-nvaliov 
iinterfecti sunt), Her. 6, 92. 

Rem. 2. It will be seen (§ 279, Rem. 5) that intransitive active verbs are 
frequently used in poetry in a transitive sense, e. g. aarpdirTuv creAas, fiaivziv 
7r65a. 

Rem. 3. The transitive active is not unfrequently used, when the subject 
does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be performed by another ; 
yet this usage is admissible, only when it is evident from the context or from 
the nature of the case, that the subject does not itself perform the action. X. 
An. 1.4,10. Kvpos rbv irapddeurov e £ e noipz na\ ra fiaari Aeia nar e nav<r ev, caused 
to be cut down. So frequently aTronreiveiv, frd-n-Teiv, olnoSo/xeTv and similar exam- 
ples ; often also SiSdantiv, naiSeveiv (comp.Pl. Prot.320, a. 324, d. Menon. 94, b). 

§ 250. B. Middle Form. 

1. The Mid. denotes an action, which is performed by the 
subject, and is again reflected upon it or is confined to it. Two 
cases are here to be distinguished : — 

(a) The Mid. denotes, first. and most frequently, an action 
which the subject performs upon an object within its own 
sphere, i. e. upon an object belonging to the subject, connected 
with it, or standing in any near relation to it. In English, this 
relation of the Middle voice is expressed by a possessive pro- 
noun, or by the preposition to or for with a personal pronoun. 

TinrTOfJLai, iTvipd/xriv tt}v necpaArjv, I strike, I struck my own head (rvirreiv n., to 
strike the head of another) ; AovaaoSai robs ir6Sas, to wash one's own feet (Aovziv t. 
tt., to wash the feet of another) ; aironptyaaSai to kavrov, to conceal one's own 
' affairs ; 7repi/5/$7?|acr&at x iT &va, suam vestem, to rend one's own garment (irepippyj^ai, 
alius, that of another) ; irapaax^bai ri, to give something from one's own means, to 
furnish of one's self, as vavs, hence also to show, e. g. etivoiav irapex^^ai (on the 
contrary irap^x^v rivl irpdyjiaTa, <p6$ov, etc., to cause trouble, fear, etc., to some 
one); — aTrodcl£aa&ai n, c. g. %pyov, yvdfX7}v, Hvvap.iv, to show one's own work, etc. ; 
iTrayyeiXao-Sai ri, to promise ; in a reciprocal relation : vd/iaa^rai ri, aliquid inter 
se parti r/\ to divide something with each other, so /xepio-aoSrai ; — voiiiaaoSai ti, to do 



334 syntax. [$ 250. 

or make something for one's self, e. g. dp-fjVTjv, ffirovSds (iroisiv, to do or accomplish), 
iroiiiaraG&ai ir6\efxov, to carry on war ; iirtfxeAeiav, to use care ; dyea&ai yvvcuKa, to 
take a ivifefor one's self to marry ; eAeV^at ti, sibi sumere, hence to choose, prefer ; 
dpcurfrai ti, to take up for one's self to lay on one's self (cupeiv ti, to take up something 
in order to lay it upon another) ; ahrjcracr^rai n, to ask for one's self (air e?v, to ask) ; 
Trpd£ao-drcu xpV^ T ^ Tiva, sibi ab aliquo pecuniam exigere : /j.ia&axra(r&ai, conducere, to 
hire for one's self (but fju<T&w<ycu, locare, to let out) ; fieraire/x\paaSrai, to cause to come 
to one's self to send for ; KaTaaTptyacr&ai, Ka.Ta$ov\c!bcra<r&cu yrjv, sibi subjicere ter- 
ram ; ayaprrjaaa^ai riua, sibi devincire, to make dependent on one's self; airoXvcraa&at 
riva, to free for one's self to ransom; iropi<rao , &ai ti, sibi aliquid comparare [iropi^iv 
rl tivi, alii aliquid comparare), Kop,icra.(r&ai, 6 g. nAarcueTs iratSas nal yvvouttas 
iKKeKO/j.i(Tfi4voi ^ffav is ras 'A&Tjvas, Th. 2, 78 5 KT^ao'Srai, TrapatTKevdo'ao'- 
fral ri, sibi comparare ; &eor&ai and ypdtyaa&cu v6/xovs are used of one who makes 
laws for himself, or of a law-giver, who is himself, also, subject to the laws 
which he has made for others ; on the contrary, frelvai and ypd\pai v6\iov are used 
of one who is not subject to the law which he has made, or generally of one 
who gives laws to others, without expressing any further relation, e. g. "Exois 
ttv 6i7re?y, OTi 01 favfrpooTToi robs aypdcpovs vS/xovs efrej/To; 'Eyob fj.\v &eovs olfiai 
rovs vofiovs tovtovs to?s av&pwirois &e?vat, X. C. 4. 4, 19; — a/u.vva(r&cu tovs xoAe- 
/xlovs, propulsare a se hostes, hence to defend one's self against any one (afxvueiv, 
properly to ward off, then to help) : Ti/j-cop^aao^rai ti, to revenge one's self on some 
one, to punish him (rificapeTv tivi, to help one) : rptyacrSai, to put to flight; anooaao'- 
hai /ca/ca, a se propulsare mala ; aTroTre/x^ao^rai Tiva, a se dimittere ; airoo-eiaao-^al 
ti, a se depellere; irapaiT-Yiaaafrcu, deprecari; dia&ea&ai, airodScr^ai, to sell; cbro- 
Tpe\l/a(T&cu, aTrofia\€o-&ai, cnroKpovcracrErcu. Several Deponent Middle verbs also 
belong here (§ 102, 3). 

(b) The Middle denotes, second, but much more seldom, an 
action which the subject performs immediately on itself, so that 
the subject is at the same time, also, the object of the action. 
The English here uses the active verb with the Ace. of the 
reflexive pronoun, e. g. twto/acu, I strike myself; crui^a/x^v, / 
struck myself. Here belong particularly the following verbs: — 

' Airdy^ai Tivd, to strangle some one; air dy^aa^rai, to strangle one's self; 
Tvtyacr&ai, icStyacr&ai, to strike one's self; Kv\pao-&ai, to bend one's self 
down; oliciffao*&ai, migrare; iir ifia\£ a&ai, to apply or devote one's self to 
something; irapacrKsvdaao'&ai, se parare; Ta^ao-bai, to place one's self in 
order of battle, e. g. ovtco ^iez/ Kepuvpcuoi ct d^avT 0, Th. 1, 48 ; [but also to fix or 
establish for one's self according to No. (a), e. g. Td£aa&ai cpopop, to agree to pay 
tribute;] Trpos&4<r&ai, se adjungere, to agree with; 'i<TTao-&ai (o-ttjvcu, ko-rduai) 
and its compounds, to place one's self [but also according to No. (a), sibi ponere, 
to place for one's self e. g. TpSTraiov]] 6 p/xlcrao'&ai, Ka&op(j.lcrao-&ai, to land 
(comp. Th. 4, 15); KVKAdxraa&ai, to encircle (comp. Th. 5, 72), but Kvic\a&rj- 
vai, to form a circle or place one's self in a circle; Tpair4cr&ai [not TptyaaScu, 
*ee No. (a)], to turn one's self ( Th. 5. 29, 73) ; iyyvh<racrfrai,to pledge one's self; 



$ 250.J CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM. 335 

irav<rao-&ai, to cease (from iravw, to cause to cease) ; 5ei£acrd-cu, to sJimu one's 
self; particularly verbs which express an action performed by the subject upon 
his own body, e. g. \ov<r a<r&ai, vl-tyaaStai, aAei^acfrat, xP l(raa '& al > 
£axra(T&ai, y v/xvd aacr&a i, ica\v\paa&ai, ko a/j.-fjCacr^ai, a/xcp ieo~ aa- 
frai, evSvcrao'drai, i Kdvcracr&at, Kzlpa<r&ai, aiv ofj.6 p£ao-&at, se abster 
gere; airo/xv^aaSrai, se emungere ; airo^7\a , ao'^ai, se abstergere ; crrecpa- 
vuxrao-frai; o~TeiAa<r&ai, to get ready, to Jit one's self out; also some few 
verbs which in the Mid. express internal, mental action, e.g. <pv\d£ > aa , &ai, to 
be on one's guard, to be cautious (but (puXarreiu rira, to guard some one) ; rp-ncpi- 
<ra<r£rai, to determine or decree by vote (but -ty-qtyi&iv, to put the vote) ; fiovAev- 
aaa&ai, to deliberate, to advise one's self (but fiovXeveiv tiv'i, to advise some one) ; 
yeuo-airS-oi, to taste ( yeveiu, to cause to taste, to give a taste of) ; r i\xu>pr\<r a.?- 
&ai, to avenge; the reciprocals ZianaTaXvo-aaSrai. irpos riva, to be reconciled 
to any one ; o , vv&6<r&ai i to bind one's self, to agree with any one ; cr7re lo-acr&ai, 
to make a treaty, peace with; airoo-x^o-^ai, to restrain one's self, to abstain 
from; several compounds of 'Iti/ju, e.g. i<pie<rfrat t to strive; ixpiea&at, to 
yield, be remiss; /j.e&ie<r&ai, to neglect, be remiss; avriir oiT)<Ta<r&ai riuas, to 
strive for something; avriXafHeo-frai. twos, to lay hold of something. Here 
belong, also, most Deponent Middle verbs (§ 197, Eem. 2). 

Remark 1. This immediate reflexive relation is expressed also: (&} by middle 
verbs with a Pass. Aor., e. g. SiaXveiu, to separate, diaXv&yjvai, SiaAvrrecr&cu, to 
separate one's self discedere (see § 197, Rem. 3); (b) by the active form, e. g. 
fieTaPdWziu, to change one's self (see § 249. 1) ; (c) by the active form with the 
Ace. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. iiraiue7u kavr6v, avaprav kavrou, to attach one's 
self to, to make one's self depend on any one ; aTroKpinrreiv kavrou, i&i((:Lv kavr6v, 
rrapix elv zavr6v, hivoXveiv eavrov, to free one's self, a-Koatpdrreiv kavrov, airoKTei- 
vew kavr6u ; the Mid. then has the signification of the Pass. ; thus, iiraive?o-&ai, 
kiroKTtivtoSai, airoacpaTTecr^ai, laudari, interjici, jugular i ab alio, and has for its 
Aor. and Put. a Pass. form. Sometimes the active form with the reflexive 
pronoun is used, even when the verb has a middle form. This mode of expres- 
sion is very natural in antithesis or contrast, e. g. 'E^peuei/ airb 'l-rnrov, 6ir6re 
yvfxvdffai kavr 6v re nal t obs '(ttitovs, X. An. 1. 2, 7. 

Rem. 2. The Mid. in the same manner as the Act. (§ 249, Rem. 3), can be 
used, when the subject does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be 
done by another. There is this difference, however, in the two cases, that in 
the Mid. the action always refers, in some way, to the subject. 'O Trarrjp robs 
rraiSas e'5i5a|aTo (iira.Lb'evcraTo), which signifies cither, the father educated the chil- 
dren for himself, or, if it is clear from the context, he caused them to be educated 
(as X. C. 1. 6, 2 ; on the contrary, diddcrKeiv, TrcuSeveii/ arc used without referring 
back to the subject, § 249, Rem. 3) ; Keipaakrai, to shave one's self or to get shaved. 
'Apyz7oi cr<p4a>v elaSvas iro ir] crdfxev oi {having caused to be made) ave&eo-av is 
Aehcpovs, Her. 1, 31. Tlavcravias rpdire^au Tlepo~i.K7]v irapert&eTo (caused to be set 
before him), Th. 1, 130. Oj AaKedai/jLovLoi K-fjpvKa Tr4fx.\pavTes robs vetcpobs 5ie/co- 
h'io-clut o (caused to be removed), 4, 38. 

Rem. 3. The reflexive relation of the middle to the subject, is often so 
slight, that in our mode of considering it, it almost disappears, and sometimes 
consists only in a very gentle intimation, that the action will be completed to 
the advantage or disadvantage of the subject, e. g. II. o, 409. otire irorh Tpwes 
Aavauv iSvvauTo <pd\ayyas prj^dfxsv oi (in suum commodum) kXktivo'i fxiyrifitvai. 
Hence the reflexive pronoun is not seldom used with the middle, particularly 
in antitheses, in order to bring out emphatically the reflexive sense which 
exists in the middle only in a general and indefinite manner, e. g. s.ei>o<pwv 



336 SYNTAX. [§ 251. 

fiovXevercu kavT$ ovo/xa koX dvuap.iv ire piiro irjcrac^ai (to gain a name and 
power for himself ) X. An. 5. 6, 17. 'EireSei^avro ras avrcov apsrds, Isocr. 
Paneg. 58, 85. 'PaSrvpov avroTs tear e<TT "fio-avr o top fiioi/, 63, 108. TV 
ipavrov yv&pnv airocpai vopevos, Id. Permut. 309, 22. 

Eem. 4. In many verbs, the active and Mid. appear to have a similar sig- 
nification ; but on a closer investigation, the difference in the meaning is 
obvious ; the active expresses the action absolutely, or objectively, without any 
accessary idea ; the middle, on the other hand, expresses the same action in 
relation to the subject, or subjectively. Hence, the middle is employed when 
the literal meaning is changed into the figurative, e. g. SioaceTv of an outward 
arrangement, Siot/ceto-ftat of mental ; 6pi£eiv literally, 6pi£e<T&cu figuratively ; 
(TTa^tfxav only in a literal sense, to measure, but crTabpaoSai also in a figurative 
signification, to weigh or measure in one's mind, aliquid secum perpendere ; aKoweTy, 
to look at something, aK07re?(r&cu, to look mentally, to consider; so in derivative 
verbs in -eua> and -evopai, the active form is used absolutely, to be in a certain 
state ; the middle, on the other hand, signifies, to act the part of that which is 
indicated by the root, to show one's self as such, to have the tendency or habit, to act 
as such, e. g. irovnpsvw, to be bad, irovnpevop.ai, to demean one's self badly ; ttoKi- 
reuw, to be a citizen, iroXnevopai, to live and act as a citizen ; rajjuevw, to be a 
manager, rap.ievofj.cu, to conduct business, to arrange, especially in a metaphorical 
sense, e. g. robs v6p.ovs ; arpareva}, to undertake an expedition, used of a general or 
a state, o-rparevopai, to engage in an expedition, used of the soldiers. Derivatives 
in -l£ofiat correspond in sense to those in -evopai, e. g. ao-re''c(op.ai, to demean my- 
self as a citizen ; x a P leJ/T ' l C°l J - al i t° ac t zn an agreeable manner. Still, derivatives 
in -i^co, from names of nations, reject the middle, e. g. dwpifa, to demean myself ox 
to speak like a Dorian. 

Eem. 5. Several verbs which in the active have a causative sense, in the 
middle have a simple intransitive sense, though some of them are constructed 
with an Ace, e. g. <po{iri<rai, to cause to fear, <po$-r]o'ao~&ai, to fear; alo~xvvai, to 
make ashamed, alcrxwelcr^rai, to be ashamed, to feel shame ; iropevcrai, to cause to 
go, to convey, iropevcracr^ai, to go ; TrepaiSxrai, to cause to pass over, irepaidio-ea-^ai, 
to pass over ; Koiprjaac, to cause to sleep, lull to sleep, Kot/xTjaaaSrai, to sleep; iravo-ai, 
to cause to cease, Trava'aa^ai, to cease; irKay^ai, to cause to wander, 7rAdy£eo~frai, 
to wander, etc. 

Bem. 6. The middle form, as already stated (§ 248, Eem. 1), is often used 
to express reciprocal actions. This is particularly the case with verbs signify- 
ing to contend, vie with, converse with, embrace, salute, to make an agreement or com- 
pact, e. g. fidx^o-^ai, to fight with ; apiWaoSrai, to contend with ; ayavi(eo-&ai, to 
strive; 5ia\4yeo-&ai, to converse with; acnrd(eo-&at,, to salute; ravra (TvvTi&eoSai, 
mutually to agree on these points ; cnrouSas o"ir4v5eo-&ou or iroido'&ai, to make a treaty 
(crirovSas iroieiv signifying to make a libation). So also, where the action is not 
strictly reciprocal, but where the idea expressed by the verb necessarily sup- 
poses two persons or two parties, as in questions and answers, e. g. Trvv&dveo-&ai 
and epea&ai, to inquire; cbro/cptVea'd-ai and aTrap.elfieo'&ai, to answer; crvpfiovXcv- 
*<r&cu, to consult with one, ask his advice, and avaKoipovo-frai, to consult one (avaKoivovv 
being especially used of consulting oracles). 

§ 251. C. The Passive. 
1. From the reflexive signification of the Middle, the Passive 
is derived. Here the subject receives the action from another 
upon itself, — permits the action to be performed upon itself. 
Hence the subject always appears as a passive or suffering 
object. 



§251.] CLASSES OF VERBS. THE PASSIVE. 337 

Mao-Tiyov/jLcu, Qnpuov}xcu [vivo twos), I receive blows, punishment, I let myself be 
struclc, punished = / am struck, punished (by some one) ; fixdirTO/xai, aducovjxcu, 
I suffer injury, injustice; S&do-Ko/xai, I let myself be instructed, I receive instruction, 
I learn, hence vir6 twos, from some one = doceor ab aliquo; Trei&o/xai, I persuade 
myself, or I permit myself to be persuaded, biro twos, by some one = I am per- 
suaded. 

2. Yet, there are but two tenses, the Fut. and the Aor., which 
have special forms to express the passive sense of an action ; 
the remaining tenses are expressed by the Mid. 

3. Hence the following rule : The Fut. and Aor. Mid. have 
a reflexive (or intransitive) sense only; but all the other tenses 
of the Mid. serve at the same time for the Passive also. 

Remark 1 . Still, the Fut. Mid. has sometimes a Pass, sense also. The reason 
of this may be found in a great measure in the shorter form of this Fut. compared 
with that of the Fut. Pass. This passive use of the Fut. Mid. is found most 
frequently with Pure verbs ; much more seldom with Mute verbs, and very sel- 
dom with Liquid verbs (probably not at all in Attic prose). Mao-TiydxreTai, 
crTpefiXdoveTai, SeS^creTat, eKKav^-ricreTai TajcpSraX/xo), TeAeuTah/ irdvTa ko.k& 
•Kafocbv avacrKivZvXevSrr]ffeTai, PL Pp. 361, e. T77 t£>v xpV^TCcy 0"7rdVet kcoXv- 
aovrai, Th. 1. 142. "Hv tis &ovXri§fj kclkos yeveaSai, KoXaafrijcreTcu tt? TTpeirovcrt) 
ftrj/JLia' 01 5e aya&ol t 1 \xr\ a ovt at tols irpos^Kovcriv dSfXois tt}s apeTrjs (but the 
brave shall be honored ivith the befitting rewards of valor), 2, 87. T\ep\ twv acpeTe- 
pu>v <ppovpiQ>v, &s 4Tn.fiovAevcroiJ.4j/6ov, TroXXdms irpd.yixa.Ta elxov, X. C. 6, 1, 
10. Ej p^ofxeha (includemur) , X. An. 6. 6, 16. 'H 777 ev <p v A a £ e r a 1 inrb twv 
(ppovpovi/Tcov. Ok ayj/oowTes, oVt ev eZpeva oivt vtto twv TroXefxiojv, H. 7. 2, 
18. Very commonly a 5 t k i) a [x a 1, dp\o\xcu (from dpx^, impero), fixdrpo- 
fxai, & pei]/ /j, a 1. So always aXooaro^iai. Some verbs have both forms 
of the future, as, e. g. w<peXe?v, gnfxtovv, o-Tepeiv, (pofieiv, dyeiv ; then the Mid. 
form seems to denote a condition, the Pass, an action received. But in very 
many instances, the Pass, sense is only apparent, e. g. 'H tt6Xis fipaxea i)<rSe?<ra 
/xeydXa £-n fx .00 a eT at, shall suffer great loss therefor, in contrast with Ppaxea 
i)o&., Th. 3, 40. 'l.ov £o~>vtos, $4xtiov SpetyovT a 1 kcu iraiS eve ovTai (they 
shall grow up better and educate themselves), PI. Crito. 54, a. 

Rem. 2. The use of the Mid. Aor. instead of the Pass, is, in all instances, 
only apparent ; so Od. b, 35. Kovpoo Ze Svu iced irevT-nKovra Kpivdcr&a>v koto 
Srj/xov, means, let them select for themselves (on the contrary, 48. Kovpai Se icpiv- 
&ei/Te ovoo k. TrevT., the selected). Hes. Sc 173. Kairpoi doiol air ov pd/xevo 1 \bv- 
xds, they had deprived each other of life. PI. Phaedr. 244, e. Top dpSws fxavevTi nal 
KaTao-xo/xeucc, "in fine frenzy " and in ecstasy. 

Rem. 3. It has been shown, § 197, and Rem. 3 (comp. § 250, Rem. 1), that 
the Aor. Pass, of very many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote a 
reflexive and intransitive action, e. g. fiovXo/xai, I will, e&ovXi)£rr)v, I ivilled ; 
ev<ppa'ivu>, I gladden, cheer, evcppaivojxai, I am glad, ev <p pdvS-nv, I was glad. In 
a few verbs, the Pass. Fut. is used in the same way, e. g. r t dofxai, I rejoice, 
T]<rfrr)v, I rejoiced, i)cr&riao/xai, I shall rejoice. See § 197, Rem. 1. 

Rem. 4. The author or cause of the passive condition or state is generally 
expressed by the Prep. vir6 with the Gen., e. g. Ol o-TpaTiuTai v-n-b twv ttoX~ 
epiav eZiwxSf)<rau. Instead of vtto, irp6s with the Gen. is used, when at the 
same time a strong and direct influence of a person, or of a thin g viewed as a 
person, is to be expressed, e. g. 'ATi/xa^adu, a.SiKe7a!bai irpSs tivos. Bavav- 

29 



338 SYNTAX. [4 251. 

(TiKaX T€X val ^Ik6tu>s ado^ovyrai irpbs tcov iroAewj', X. 0. 4, 2; also Trap a 
with the Gen. is used, when the author is at the same time to be represented as 
the person from near whom, or from whose vicinity, or through whose means 
internal or outward, the action has proceeded ; hence used specially with ir4/i- 
irecr&ai, SiSooSrai, w^eAetcr^ai, <Tv\\4ye<r&ai, Aeyeafrcu, 6jj.o\oy<=?o-&ai, <rr)/J.alv6<r&cu, 
iTTiSeiKuva-^ai (demonstrari), e.g. 'O ayyeXos iir 4/j,<p&r) irapa fiao*i\4<as (sent 
both by and from near the king). 'H ^yiffrrj evrvxia tovtw t$ avSpl nap a 
3-ewv 8 48 or ai. YloXXa xPV/ J - aTa - Kvpcp irapa tS>v (piXcov ffvveiXey /x4v a 
r)v. Ta. 8apa irefiireTai irapa to v fiacr iXevovros, Her. 7, 106. Tairapa 
rS>v &6(5j' o'7]ixaiv6 jxeva, X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. Uapa iravTcov 6/xo Xoyelr at, 
An. 1. 9, 1. Ol/xai yap /xe irapa aov crofyias it A rj pooSr rj ere o~& a i, PL Symp. 
175, e. J E/c is still stronger than irapa, used especially with verbs of giving ; yet 
it is seldom used by the Attic writers, e. g. 'E/ceiVw avrv i) %&pa. 4 k fiacr iX4<as 
4 8 6& v, X. H. 3. 1, 6: in Her., however, e/c is very often used instead of viro 
simply. The use of v it 6 with the Dat. is almost wholly poetic, e. g. da/xrivai 
vtt6 t 1 v 1 ; in Attic prose only in certain connections, e. g. vlbs virb r$ itarpl 
T^pap.jx4uos,V\. Ep. 558, d. Tvyxduei virb it a 18 or pi fir) aya&q) ireiraiSev' 
p.4vos, Lach. 184, e. When the passive condition is not caused by persons, but 
by things, the Dat. is commonly used (= Lat. Ablative), e.g. 'H irSAis iroXXa?s 
avufyopats iirie(eT0, the city ivas distressed by great misfortunes. — The above 
usage corresponds with that of the Latin, the voluntary agent with a passive 
verb being put in the Abl. with the preposition a or ab, the involuntary agent 
in the Abl. without a preposition. 

Rem. 5. The Dat. of persons, however, is very often used, particularly with 
the Perf. tense, and regularly with verbal adjectives. The Pass, has in such 
instances an intransitive or reflexive sense, and the Dat. indicates the person by 
whom the action was performed, or for whom it was performed. While viro 
with the Gen. denotes merely the author of the passive action, the Dat., at the 
same time, denotes that this action stands in relation to the author, e. g. "£ls 
fioi irp6repov 8e8r)\caTai, i. e. as the thing has been before pointed out by me, and for 
me now stands as pointed out, Her. 6, 123. 



4. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that the Act., not merely 
of transitive verbs with the Ace, may be changed into the per- 
sonal Pass., like the Latin, but also the Act. of intransitive 
verbs with the Gen. and Dat. 

^^ovov[j.ai viro tlvos (from <p&oveiv rm, invidere alicui),i. e. I experience 
envy from some one, am envied (in Latin, on the contrary, invidetur mihi ab 
aliquo). X. Conv. 4, 29. KpsirrSv 4o~ti irio~rev €(f&ai iirb tt)s irarpiSos fxaXXov, i) 
air io~re?o-&aL (from iricrreveiv and airio'T^LV tivl), I am trusted, I am distrusted. 
Th. 1, 82. Tifxeis viT ^A&nvaiwv iir ifiov\€v6ixe&a (imfiovXeveiv rivi). PI. Pp. 

3. 417, b. Kal iiTLfiovXevovres, Kal iir ifiovXevS [xevo 1 did^ovai iravra rbv fiiov. 
8. 551, a. acr/ceTrat 8r) rb ael rificc/xevou, afie\e?rai Se rb aTifia&ixsvov. X. S. 

4, 31. ovk4ti aireiXodfiai, a\k' ij8r} aireiXa #\A<ns. So apx&rjva., KpaTT)- 
Sr)vai, yyeiJ.ovev&riJ'ai, K ar a<p povri&rivai vtt6 twos (from 'apx^v, Kpa- 
re?v, riyeuoveveiv, naTacppouelu tivos), iir t% e iprj&rjvai (from iirixeipe?u tiul). 
On uSirTOfiai. tt]U Ke<pa\r)v, 4iriTp4iro[xai tt\u <pv\aKr)v, see § 281, 3. 

Rem. 6. The Greek may form a Pass, from other intransitives also, yet, for 
the most part, only when the subject is a thing, particularly a Neut. pronoun, 
or a Part. used as a Neut. substantive, e. g. Kal puKpa af.iaprr]^4vTa (vel parva 
peccata), X. An. 5. 8, 20. 'At^xi^i/to);/ (rerum infeliciter gestarum), Dem. 
Cor. 298. 212. 'Eirl tovtois iyw a\r)& evofx4u 01s Mdwfjil <roi t\v ifxiju 8e£tW 



to 252, 253.] tenses and modes. 339 

(ea conditione, ut haec vere dicantur), X. Cy. 4. 6, 10. 'E*> h\ avdpi iroW&v ape- 
ras KivSvvGvecr&ai (in -periculum vocari), Th. 2, 35. Ov padtov ra virb ttoWuu 
KivSvvev&evra v<fi tubs p-n&yvcu, Lys. 5, 112. 



$ 252. Remarks on the Deponents. 

It has been seen above (§ 102, 3) that Deponents are simply verbs which 
occur either in the Mid. only, or in the Mid. with a Pass. Aor., and have a 
reflexive or intransitive signification : and, also, that they are divided into Mid. 
or Pass. Deponents, according as their Aor. has a Mid. or Pass. form. The 
reflexive sense of many Deponents is so slight, that they seem to be, in our 
mode of regarding them, merely transitive verbs, e. g. Se'xo/uai ri, I take (namely, 
to myself) something. ipydCo/ial n, fZid(o/j.at nva, etc. Such Deponents are often 
used in a Pass, sense, particularly in the Perf. and in the Pass. Aor. Examples 
of the Pres., Impf., and Fut. in a Pass, sense are very rare, and are found only 
in such Deponents as have in single examples an active form, e. g. fitd(e<r&ai, 
a/yei<rdut. 

Udura air etpyaCTai t<3 &e<£>, PI. L. 710, d. MefJUfxTj/xeyos (ad imitatio- 
nem expressus, made like), Her. 2, 78. Ev ivTtfrv pinixevov (well-considered), PI. 
Crat. 404, a. N7?es ovk ^xp^o-^-naav (adhibitae sunt), Her. 7, 144. 

Eemark. Several Deponents have both a Mid. and Pass. Aor. ; the Pass, 
form has then a Pass, sense, e. g. iSej-dfx-nv, excepi, i8 4x&yv> exceptus sum ; 
ifiiacrdix7}v, codgi, i f3 idaSynv, coactus sum; £ktt) crdfx-nv, mini comparavi, 
4ktt)&7) v, comparatus sum (I was gained)', oAocpvpacr&ai, to lament, 6\o- 
<t>vp&?ij/ai, to be lamented; a/ce'cr ao-frat, to heal, aiceo-&7)v at, to be healed; 
air ok piuac&ai, to reply, airo k p iSrr) vai, to be separated. In a few verbs only 
arc both Aorists used without distinction of meaning (§ 197, Rem. 1). 



$ 253. Tenses and Modes of the Verb. 

(a) Tenses denote the relation of time expressed by the 
predicate, tins being designated either as Present, Future, or 
Past, e. g. the rose blooms, ivill bloom, bloomed; 

(b) Modes denote the relation of what is affirmed in the predi- 
cate to the subject; this relation being denoted either as an 
actual fact, as a conception or representation, or as a direct 
expression of the will. The mode winch expresses a fact, as 
the rose blooms, is called the Indicative ; that which denotes a 
conception, as the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive ; that which 
denotes the direct expression of the will, the Imperative, as 
give. 



340 syntax. [§§ 254, 255. 



§ 254. A. More Particular Vieiv of the Tenses. 

1. The tenses are divided, according to their form and mean- 
ing, into two classes : (a) into Principal tenses, which, both in 
the Ind. and Subj., always denote something present or future; 
(b) into Historical tenses, which in the Ind. always denote 
something past, in the Optative, something present or future. 

2. The Principal tenses are : — 

(a) The Present: (a) Indicative, e.g. ypdcpofiev, scribimus ; (/3) Subjunctive, 
e.. g. ypd(pwfj.€i/, scribamus ; 

(b) The Perfect: (a) Indicative, e.g. yeypd<pa/xev, scripsimus ; (j3) Subjunc- 
tive, e. g. yeypd<p<ajx^v, scripserimus ; 

{c\ The Future Indicative, e. g. ypdxpofiev, scribemus, we shall write; Subjunc- 
tive wanting ; 

(d) The Puture Perfect Indicative, e. g. fiefiovXevo-ofiai, I shall have advised 
myself, or I shall have been advised ; Subjunctive wanting. 

The Subj. Aor. also belongs here, e. g. ypdtya, scripserim or scribam. See 
f 257, 1 (a). 

3. The Historical tenses are : — 

(a) The Aorist : (a) Indicative, e.g. eypatya, I wrote; (j8) Optative, e.g. 
ypdipcu/xL, I might write, or / might have written ; 

(b) The Imperfect: (a) Indicative, e.g. eypcupov, scribebam ; (/3) Optative, 
e. g. ypd(poi[xi, scriberem ; 

(c) The Pluperfect : (a) Indicative, e.g. iyeypdcpeiv, scripseram ; (£) Optative, 
e. g. ysypd(poi[xi, scripsissem ; 

(d) The Optative of the simple Puture, e. g. ypdtyoifii, I would write, and of 
the Put. Perf, e. g. f3efi}ov\evo'o(fx.7)v, I would have deliberated, ox I would have 
been advised, when in narration (and consequently in reference to the 
past), the representation of a future action, or of one to be completed at 
a future time, is to be expressed, e. g. 6 oiyyeXos eXeyev, otl ol iroXefiioi 
viK-fjo-oiev, the messenger said, that the enemy would conquer ; eAeyev, on 
irdvra inrb rod (rrpar-qyov eu fie fiovXevcroiro, he said that everything 
would be well planned by the general. 

$255. (a) Principal Tenses: Present, Perfect, Future, 

1. The Present Indicative represents the action as taking 
place in time present to the speaker. The Present is often 
used, in the narration of past events, for the purpose of a more 
vivid and graphic represel/^on ; past time is then viewed as 
present. This is called the Historical Present. 



$ 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 341 

TavTTjv tV rdcppov /3a<nAei>s /J.4yas iroie? avrl ipvfxaros, insid^ Trvv&dver a. 
Kvpov irposeXavvovra, X. An. 1. 7, 16. ^Hv ris Tlpiafuo'eov veararos UoXvdoopos, 
'EKafSns irais, ov e/c Tpoias ifiol irarrjp BiSwtri Hpiajxos iv oollois rpecpeiv, Eur. 
Hec. 1116. The Hist. Pres. is sometimes used even in passages which in them- 
selves, aside from adverbs like irore, iraXai (poet, irdpos), are considered as 
involving past time, e. g. Zwvt dscucovcras naloa, ov i k a w ^e i it o t 4, Eur. El. 
419. 

Remark. 1. An action is* often viewed by the language as present, which 
belongs, indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or in 
its results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following verbs particu- 
larly are used: (a) verbs of perceiving, e. g. a /c o u w, TcvvSdvo pai, aicr&d- 
vo/xat, yiyvca <TK<a, (xav&dvw (like Lat. audio, video, etc., and Eng. to hear, 
to see, to perceive, to observe), when the object of these verbs is to be represented 
as still continuing in the present ; (b) <p e vyco, I have given myself to flight, and 
I am now a fugitive, hence to live in exile; vlkoj and k par So (I am a victor, 
hence have conquered), ^ttw^oi {lam vanquished, have been vanquished), cloikw 
(lam in the wrong, have done wrong), yiyvofxai (I am descended), etc.; (c) in 
poetry: (povevco (lam a murderer, have murdered, e. g. S. Ant. 1174), &v}}<TKa> 
(I am dead, have died, S. El. 113), tIktoj, yevvoj (I am a father or mother, Eur. 
Ion. 356. Her. 209), etc. This usage extends to all the Modes and Participials 
of the Pres. as well as to the Impf. Qe/xiaTOKXea ovk atcoveis 'dvopa aya&bv 
yeyovSra; PI. Gorg. 503, c. Yldura irvv&avo fxevos 6 Kpo7o~os eire/Aire is iZirdp- 
rnv ayyeXovs, Her. 1, 69. Tt Se; av iKtivo aKTjKoas, on Mvaol Kal liia-'ioai iv rfj 
fiacriXeoos X^P a Karexoures ipvfj.ua itdvv x w P ia ovvavrai £r\v iXev&epoi ; — Kal tovto 
y, ecp-n, aKovco, hast thou heard ? a nova, yes, I have knoivn of it, X. C 3. 5, 26. 
AirayyiXtTe ""Apiaicp, on 7]fxe?s ye v lk5> fxev fSaariXea, Kai, ws Spare, ovdels 7]fuu 
en Jxaxerai, An. 2. 1, 4. To)*/ v i k a v t a> v iarl Ka\ ra iavrav o~d>(eiv Kal to twc 
fjTTcafievcov Xafxfidveiv, 3. 2, 39. Aapiov Kal Ylapvcrdrioos ivaioes yiyvovrai 
Svo, 1. 1, 1. 

Rem. 2. Oix o M at ^-^ 'i^, with Pres. forms, are often translated in Eng. 
by Perfects, namely, o1x°l J - a h I have departed, and tj/ccw, I have come; yet 
oXxofxai, properly means, I am gone, and 77 keh, / am here (adsum), e. g. M^ 
Xvttov, on 'Apdcnras o1x^ Tal e ' s T0 ^ iroXeLtiovs, that Araspas is gone, has 
departed (= transfugit) to the enemy, X. Cy. 6. 1, 45. "Hkw veKpwv Kevgrfxava 
Kal (tkStov irvXas Xnrcev, Eur. Hec. 1. 'Tfxe7s fj,6Xis acpiKvua&e, onoi 7]fj.e7s iraXai 
TjKOfiey, X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. 

Rem. 3. But the language often considers an auction as present, which is not 
yet accomplished, but is either actually begun, or is begun in our mind, or pur- 
pose ; such an action is virtually future, though considered as present. Com- 
pare the English : I go to-morrow, i. e. I shall go, I intend to go, and the like. This 
usage also belongs to all the Modes and Pai-ticipials of the Pres. and the Impf. 
It specially holds of the Pres. of e J/j. 1, which, in the Ind. has regularly the mean- 
ing of the Eut., / shall go; the Subj. includes a Eut. meaning in itself (§ 257, 
Rem. 4) ; but the Inf. and Part, have both a Pres. and Fut. meaning. "E it e 1 ra 
Ta re vvv ovra iv rep TrapaSeiaa) gr-qpla didw/xi coi, Kal aXXa Tvavrooaira crvX- 
X4£'j>, X. Cy. 1. 3, 14 (dioco/xi, I offer). "EKaarSs ris eirei&ev "Zevocpuvra 
vTroo-Trjval t))v apxw (persuadere studebat), X. An. 6. 1, 19. MnvXrivaToi eVi 
M0vfj.vav ws irpooioofx4v7]v iarpdrevo-av (putantes parari ibi proditioncm), 
Th. 3, 18. In like manner often the Pres. Part, after verbs of motion, e. g. 'H 
■ndpaXos is ras 'A&Tjvas eirXevaev, airayyiXXovaa ra. yey ov6ra (for the purpose 
of announcing), X. II. 2. 1, 29. Kot t£ piyei aTrwXXvfjLe&a, Kal x i ^ v ^Xeiari] 
i\v (we expected to perish), An. 5. 8, 2. — Oxjk evSvs acp-qaca avrbv, oi»S' direi/xi, 
aXX' ip r) ffo /j. a 1 avrbv Kal i ^erdff a>, PI. Apol. 29, e. 'E7re2 r) Mavodvr) Trapec 
Kevd^ero ws a-rr 10 v a a iraXiv irpbs rbv dvSpa, ioe7ro avTTJs b , Ao~Tvayr]s KaTaXcire'iv 
rbv Kvpov, X. Cy. 1. 3, 13. 

29* 



342 syntax. [$ 255. 

Eem. 4. But also actions or events wholly future are sometimes indicated 
as. present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker 
the action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when he is so firmly 
convinced of its occurrence, that it appears already present, e. g. 'Eu /.u$ it-a-xv 
T^j/Se t V x^P av TposKTao-frs Kal iKsivnv paAAov iAev&epovre (you gain, 
vjM gain, and free), Th. 4, 95. *Hj/ fravrjs av, ircus off iKcpevyei ptopou • aov ff 
ov deAoutnjs Kar&aveiv, roVSe Krevw, Eur. Andr. 381. 

2. The Perfect (Indicative) represents a past action in time 
present to the speaker ; the action appears as already accom- 
plished at the present time. Hence the Perf. represents not 
only a past action, but its present effects or results. 

Fey pa (pa r)\v iirt(rro\r)v, I have wkitten the letter, the letter is NOW writ- 
ten, whether written now, or some time ago ; the writing is the past act, the 
letter is the result still present. 'H iroXis eKricrai, the city was built (in past 
time), is now built, and there it now stands built. 'Ao-rvdyris rwv iv M-fjSois irdvruiv 
8eo~Tr6rr)v kavrbv ireTroir) Ke v, X. Cy. 1. 3, 18. OuSeV ierri KtpdaXsdorepov rod 
viKav 6 yap Kparwv ajxa irdurA avvhp-K a«e, Kal robs audpas, Kal ras yvva?Kas, 
4. 2, 26. 

Rem. 5. Since the Perf. brings past time into close connection with the 
present, the Greeks in many Perfects contemplated less the peculiar act of 
completion, than its result as exhibited at the present moment ; and hence they 
used the Perf., in order to indicate a present condition or state that was occa- 
sioned by the completion of the action. As such a use of the Perfect does'not 
belong to the English, we translate many Greek Perfects by our Present, where 
the present condition is more prominent than the past act ; the Plupf. of such 
verbs is then translated by our Impf, e. g. re&vnKa (I have died), lam dead 
(Eur. Ale. 557. r e&vaa iv oi bavovres, those who died, are dead); KSKr-n/Aat (I 
have acquired), I possess ; re&avfj.ai<a (I have been wondering), I am astonished ; 
(StfiovKeviAai (I have taken counsel with myself), I am determined; irecpriua (I 
have shown myself), I appear ; olda, novi (I have seen'), I know ; refrnXa (I have 
blossomed), I bloom; ireVoi^a (I have convinced myself), I trust ; jSe/377/ca (I 
have taken steps), I am going; /xe/ivrifiai, memini (I have called to mind), / am 
mindful, or remember; KenXrifxai (I have been named), / am called, etc. The 
Pres. and Impf. of many verbs, especially such as express the idea of to sound, 
to call, are not used at all, or but very seldom, so that the Perf. and Plup. seem 
to take entirely the place of the Pres. and Impf., e. g. KeKpaya, I cry, properly, 
I am a crier ; jiepLVKa, I roar. 

Rem. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition or state 
produced by it, is more obvious in the Pass, than in the active. Comp. 77 &vpa 
/ce/cAe 1 err a t t the door has been shut, and it is now shut. So particularly the 
third Pers. Sing. Perf. Imp. Pass, is often used, when one would command with 
emphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain fixed and permanent in its 
condition, i. e. not only that the action should be performed, but particularly 
that the result should continue, e. g. rb ayKvpiov avtairaoSo), let the anchor be 
drawn up and remain so ; AeAei</>&w, reliquum esto, let it remain permanently ; 7re7rei- 
pda&co, let it be tried ; vvv Se rovro reroX/xTjo-^ca dire?u. So the Inf. in the Oratio 
obliqua, X. H. 5. 4, 7. ££i6i/res 5e eJirov, rrju &vpav /ce/cAe?<r&ai, that it be shut, and 
remain shut. 

Rem. 7. The Perf. is used with special emphasis, even of future actions, the 
occurrence of these being affirmed with the same definiteness and confidence, 
as if they had already taken place. II. 0, 128. Steeps pas! you are lost, will be 



$ 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 343 

lost. So oXcaXa, like pern, interii, actum est de me, it's all over with me, ivill be, 
etc. PI. Phaed. 80, d. ij $vxb airaXXarrofjiei/r] rod acofiaros^ ev&vs 8 iair e(pv(rr}- 
roi Kal airSXcaXev. 

3. The Future (Indicative) denotes an action as future in re- 
lation to the present time of the speaker. The Greeks very 
often use the Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an 
Hist, tense, to express that which shall, should, must, or can be, 
where the Latin employs the Subj.; the other forms of the 
Fut., particularly the Part., are also so used. 

T$6fxovs virdp^ai Set roiovrovs, 5i uv ro?s jxev aya&o?s evri/xos Kal iXev&epos 6 jSios 
irapacTKevao'Sr^o'erai (should be obtained), ro?s 8e nandis raireivos re Kal aX- 
yeivbs Kal afiiaros 6 alkv iiravaKelcrerai (should be imposed upon them), X. Cy. 
3. 3, 52. Oi els r^v fiacriXiKriv t£x v W ira&evSjxevoi ri dia<pepovai roJu e£ avdyK7)S 
tcuKOTra&ovi/Twv, et ye ir eivr\cr ovo~ i Kal 8n//7?<roucri Kal p lydtxrov cr i Kal ay 
pvirviiaovcri (if they must hunger, etc.), C. 2. 1, 17. y E5o|e rep Stj^oj rpiaKovra 
&j/5pas eXioSai, o: robs Trarplovs v6fiovs ^vyypdipovg- 1, natf otis iroXir ever ovfft 
(who should draw up laics, according to which they should live), PI. 3. 2, 3. 

4. The second person of the Fut. Ind. is often used to express 
commands, exhortations, admonitions, entreaties, and, in con- 
nection with the negative ov, prohibitions ; here the accomplish- 
ment of what is affirmed is not demanded, as is the case in the 
Imp., but is left to the choice of the person addressed, and is 
only expected. This differs chiefly from the Imp. only in being 
a milder form of expression. On the contrary, the Fut. is used 
with the negative ov, interrogatively, when, in a strong and 
indignant tone, the .accomplishment of the action is expected 
necessarily. 

"Op a oZv kolL Trpo&vfjLOv Kari^eiv, edv voos irp6repos ep.ov 'ffiys, Kat p,oi (ppd- 
<rets (you will communicate it to me = communicate), PI. Rp. 432, c. *Hs oZv 
iroi4)o- ere Kal irei&eo-fre p.oi (you will do thus, etc. = do thus), Prot. 338, a. 
OJ 8 pder eis rovro, tliou wilt not do this, as I Jtope = do it not ; but ov Sp d a e i s 
rovro; wilt thou not do this? = do it. Ov iravat) x(y<av ; non desines dicer e ' 
instead of desine dicere. PI. Symp. in. ov irepifxevels ; wilt thou not went ? Dem. 
Phil. 2, 72. ov <pvXa£ea&, i<pr\v, oirws p.7} de<rir6rr)v evp-qre ; But when in this 
manner, a negative command is to be expressed, the negative p.r\ is to be used 
with ov; and when two sentences of this kind, one with an affirmative meaning 
and the other with a negative, follow each other, ov stands in the first sentence, 
urj in the last. Ou p.7] <pXvapr\o-eis ; Ov p.r) XaX-rja e i s, aXX" aKoXov&r] cr e is 
ipoi, Ar. Nub. 505 (instead of pA] cpXvdpei, fxi] XaXei, aXX* aKoXov&ei]. PI. Symp 
175, a. ovk ovv KaXeis avrbv Kal p.r) OKp'fjo'e is. 



344 syntax. [$ 256, 

5. The Future Perfect (Indicative) represents a future action 
as past (completed) in relation to another future action ; hence 
a future prior to another future. Such an action is future with 
reference to the present, past with reference to another future. 

Kal Toicri fie fitter a i ia&\a KaKolaiv [the good shall have been mixed with evil), 
Hes. Op. 177. 'H iroXtrda reXeas /ce koo~ fxT]a er ai, iav 6 toiovtos avrr\v iirio~* 
Koivrj <pv\a% 6 Tovroiv iiriffT'fifj.av, PL Rp. 506, a. As the Greek Perf. frequently 
denotes the present condition or result of a completed action, so the Put. Perf. 
frequently denotes the future condition or result of a completed action. Hence 
the Put. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated by the present tense 
of other verbs (see Rem. 5), must be translated by the simple Put., e. g. jte/^- 
aop.ai, meminero (I shall have reminded myself), I shall be mindful, shall remember 
(but fii/Tjaofiai, I shall remind myself) ; KtKT'ho-o/xai {I shall have acquired), I shall 
possess (but KTTja-ofxai, I shall acquire), etc. 

Rem. 8. The Put. Perf., like the Perf. (Rem. 7), is used instead of the sim- 
ple Put., to express a thing emphatically. Here as in the Perf. used for the 
Put., the speaker looks upon the action as already accomplished ; hence the 
Put. Perf. often denotes the rapidity and certainty of the action, the process 
or progress being left wholly out of view, e. g. &pd(e, Kal ireir paterae (and it 
shall be [certainly, immediately] done), Ar. Plut. 1127; <pi\os rifjiiv ovdels 
XeAeiiperai (no friend will [certainly] be left us), X. An. 2. 4, 5. So also in 
the Inf. Avo?v % rpicov 7]fi€pcoi/ ravra tt eir pd^ea bai, Dem. 19, 74. In the Act. 
the periphrasis /3ej3ouAeu/ca>s eaofxca is found. 

Rem. 9. The Put. Perf. is used in Greek only in principal clauses, and in 
subordinate clauses introduced by otl and ws (that), by e I used instead of ort, 
and by & st e (so that), all with the Ind. In all other subordinate clauses, the 
Aor. Subj. (more seldom the Perf.) is used instead of it, in connection with a 
conjunction compounded of dv, as idv, iirdu, iireiddv, orav, rrcplv dv, hr dv, us 
&u, etc., e. g. 'Eav tovto Ae|??s (si hoc dixeris), a^apTTjay. 



§256. (b) Historical Tenses: Aorist, Imperfect t and 
Pluperfect. 

1. The Aorist (Ind.) expresses past time, in a wholly indefi- 
nite manner, with no other relation, e. g. typaij/a, I wrote, Kvpos 
TroXXa 'iSprj IvLK-qcev. It thus stands in contrast with the other 
tenses which express past time ; still, so far as it indicates past 
time indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these 
tenses. 

2. Both the Impf. and Plup. (Ind.) represent an action as 
past, but always as having relation to another past action. But 
the Impf. expresses the action as contemporary with this other 
past action ; the Plup. expresses the action as already past 
before this other past action. 



$ 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 345 

'Ev S ah eirai£es, iyu iypatpov, while you were playing. I was writing. "Ot« 
iyyvs i\crav ol fidpfiupoi, ofET^Arivts ifiaxouTO. "Ore ol fidpfiapoi iir e\-n\v- 
& e c a v, ol "E\A7jj/es ijxdxovT o. Tore (ore*' ravT-n Ttj /x a % n ) oi "EAAtjpzs 
&appa\zwTa.Ta 4fj.dxovT o. 'E^eiS^ ol "EXKrjves iir e A 77 A v d e a av, ol Tro\ep.ioi 
air e7r e^euyetrac. r 'Ore ol crv/j.uaxoi £irA-qo~ia£ov, ol , ASr}va?oi tovs lie po~as 
iv*viK7}K€0~a.v. 'II 7 e 7 pdcpeiv t))v i7ricrTo\y)v, I had written the letter [before 
the friend came). 

Remark 1. It is to be noted that the Greeks freely use the Aor. instead of 
the Plup., when the relation of the past time to another past time can be easily 
inferred from the context, and no special emphasis lies in this relation, e. g. 
''Eireior] ol "EW-qves £ irriA&ov (quum Graeci venissent), ol iroXi^iioL airewecpevye- 
<rav. The Aor. is often employed even instead of the Perf, when the relation 
of the past time to the present need not be expressed emphatically. 

3. Hence the Aorist (Ind.) is used in historical narrations, in 
order to indicate the principal events, while the Impf. (Ind.) is 
used to denote the accompanying circumstances. The Aor. 
narrates, the Impf. describes. Hence in the narration of past 
events, the Aor., which introduces the principal facts, is very 
often interchanged with the Impf., which describes and paints ; 
often, also, with the Hist. Pres., which, like the Aor., relates the 
principal events, and places them vividly in the present ; not 
seldom, also, with the Plup., sometimes with the Perf. By this 
interchange of the tenses, the narration has the greatest liveli- 
ness of representation, and the finest shades of expression. 

^Hp.05 8' 'Ea>s<p6pos elcri (p6us ipzwv iirl yaiav, rrjiios TrvpKa'ir] 4/j.apaiyero, 
TravoaTO 8e <p\6£ (the f re upon the funeral pile began to abate, and the flame 
ceased), II. ty, 228. Tovs TreAraaras 45 41-avTO ol fidpfiapoi Kal i ,uax 0f/T ° ' 
eVel 8' iyyvs 1\o~av ol oirXlrai, £t pair ov to • koX ol ireXracrTal ev&bs t'tirovTO 
(the barbarians withstood the peltasts and continued to fight with them ; but ichen the 
hopUtes dreiv near, they fled, and immediately the peltasts set out in pursuit), X. An. 
5. 4. 24. "Evvifrt] t<£ ddoKTiTco teal i^aTrivrjs dp.<poTepcabeu robs 'A&yvaiovs &opv&7)- 
kirivai- koX t6 p\v evuuv/xoi/ Ktpas avrwv, onep 8/7 Kal it po k^x 01 P"h * e '» eiifrJrs 
d-rrophayzv e<pvyc Kal 6 BpacriSas, virox^povvTos ^8tj outov, iimrapLUiU ra 5e|ia>, 
t it p wcr kct at' Kal ireaovTa axnbv ol /xev 'Afrnvaloi ovk alcri& dvov t at, ol 8e 
ir\r)o-ioi/ bipai/Tes airi) u cy Kav • Kal 6 yXv KAeW, u>s to irpSiTou ov 8 ievoe?To 
y.ivav, svhbs (pevyeev, ko.1 KaTahrjcpSels virb MvpKtvlov ireATao~Tov, a 7r d v 17 <r /ce 1 • ol 
Of avTov £i/<rr pastures ctAitcu t\\x.vvovt k. t. A., Th. 5, 10. 'O jAu ■noXe/j.os 
airdi/Taiy r,fia.s Tuu elp7]iJ.4i/(ey dire a rep-n /cf • Kal yap toi TreveaT epovs Treiron}Kz y 
Kal ttoKKovs KivOvvovs iro/j.(veiv rj vdyKaae, KaYirpbs robs "EWrjvas 8 tafie fiAT]- 
K( Kal irdvTa Tpoirov TtTaXanru>pr)K£v 7]/j.as, Isocr. Par. 163, a. (The 
Perfects denote the remit, the Aorist tlie event.) 

Kmi. 2. Inasmuch as the Aor. Ind. represents a past action independently 
at;<l absolutely, ancon lected with any other past time, while the Impf. Ind. 
represents a past action as always connected with another past action, being. 



346 syntax. [$ 256. 

consequently, employed in exhibiting an action in its duration and progress, and 
hence used in description ; accordingly the Aor. expresses a moment or point of 
time, while the Impf, denotes duration or continuance. The Aor. therefore 
describes a momentary action or a single action ; the action, however, described 
by the Aor. may be a continued or protracted one, but the writer in using the 
Aor. presents no such view of it, communicating merely the fact of the occur* 
rence. The Impf., on the other hand, describes an action in its continuance 
and progress, — not merely a single act, but a series of acts. It often depends on 
the choice of the writer whether the Impf. or Aor. is used. An action graphi- 
cally presented in its duration and progress by the Impf., can be stated histor- 
ically as a mere past act, by the Aor. And so, many actions stated in the Aor. 
might be more vividly described by the Impf, if the writer wished it. 

4. On the use of the Impf. and Aor. Ind., the following things 
are to be noted : ■— 

(a) The Impf. appears sometimes to stand instead of the Pres., since an 
action which continues into the present time, is referred to a past time in which 
it occurred, or was known to the speaker. Kvpos e£eAatW — iirl rbv XaAov 
irora/xSv, ovra rb evpos Trhe&pov, TrA^pn 8' Ix^vwu [xeyaAwu Kal irpaecoy, ovs oi Hivpoi 
freobs £v6/At£ov Kal adiKuv ovk etcav (which the Syrians consider as gods, 
namely, as I then saw), X. An. 1. 4, 9. ^AcpiKouro irpbs rb MrjSias KaAov/xevov 
re?xos • — a7re?x 6 &e BafivAobvos ob iroAvy 2. 4, 12. T?7 Se irp&rri ripepa acp'iKovro 
em rbv ivoraixSv, os &pi £e rr\v re ruv M.aKpcovwv \%&pav\ Kal r^v rwv ~2,kv&iuG>V) 
4. 8, 1. 'A-rap, 3> eraTpe, ap ob rSSe -f]V rb devdpov, i(j> oirep fjyes rjfxas ; PL Phaedr. 
230, a. Ovk &p ayaStbs to ttoAitiko. U.epiKArjs ^ v Ik rovrov rov \6yov (namely, 
when he so appeared to us, consequently — ovk 'dp" dya&os eo-riy, &s etyalvero, 
he is not therefore distinguished, as he then seemed to be), Gorg. 516, d. — From the 
idea of duration or continuance contained in the Impf. several other relations orig- 
inate : (a) The beginning of an action, e. g. iirel eyybs eyevovro, Qaivivris oi fxev 
abruv iro^evov, some of them began to shoot their arrows ; — (/3) habit or custom, 
e. g. abrbv o'iirep irp6s&ev irpos gkvv ovv> Kal r6re TrposeKvwqaav, those who were 
before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did it then also ; — (7) wish, endeavor or 
attempt, e. g. irpuros KAeapxos T0US uvtov arpariccras efiid^ero Uvai, Clearchus 
endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance. 

(b) The Aor. is often used in general propositions which express a fact bor- 
rowed from experience, and hence what is customary ; here a single fact which 
has been observed to be true in many instances, but not established as universal, 
is stated to be generally true, — the truth frequently observed in regard to a 
single event, is considered as holding in the case of other similar events. In 
such cases the Aor. is usually translated into English by the present, or by the 
Verb is wont, is accustomed, with the Inf. II. p, 177. alel re Aibs Kpeiaaoov v6os 
alyioxoio, osre Kal dAKi/xoy ai/dpa <£o/3€?, Kal d<pelAer v'iktju pv'idiccs (who 
inspires the brave man with fear, and bears off the victory). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. al fxev 
yap TrAeiarai iroAeis irposrarrovcri rols iroAirais fxrj KAeirreiv, fi}} apird(eiy, Kal raAAa 
ra roiavra aisavrcos' rjv 8e ris rovrmv ri vrapafialvr), ^n/xtas avrdis en e&eo-ar 
(were accustomed to impose a penalty upon them). Dem. 01. 1(2). 20, 9. orav e« 
vAeoue^ias Kal irovnpias ris, tbsirep ovros (QiAnnros), lo~x v o~n, tj irpu>Ti) irp6<pa(Tis 
teal /JLiKpbv irra7cr/j.a drravra a v e % a £ t i<r e Kal dieAvcev. 



§ 256.] HISTORICAL TENSES. 347 

Rem. 3. When the idea of being wont to do, as found in the Aor., is to be 
made prominent, or when a native habit is to be expressed, the Greek uses the 
verbs (piXelv and e&eXeiv. Her. 7. 10, 5. cptXeei yap 6 bebs to. virepex ovTa irdvra 
KoXoveiv. 157. tgj ev fiovXev&evri irp-hy/xari reXevrr] &s rb eiriirav XPV°' T h e&eAet 
iiriyiveo^au 

(c) Hence in poetry, the Aor. is often used in comparisons, instead of the 
Pres., since comparisons contain facts that are known and founded on often 
repeated experience. H. y, 33 — 36. cvs 5' ore ris re SpaKovra ISuv iraXivopcros 
nirearr} ovpeos ev fri]<TO~ris, xm6 re rp6p.os eXXafie yvTa, &ty r dv ex& pT)o~ ev, 
2)Xp6s re p.iv elXe irapeids ' &s avns Ka& o/xiXov eSv Tpcawv dyepu>xoov ( sc - napis). 
II. 7r, 482. tfpiire <V, cos ore ris dpvs ij pi ire v. 

(d) The Tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an impassioned or 
emphatic expression of a decision or determination, which has respect, indeed, 
to the present time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as having been 
previously established and settled in his own mind. The English often trans- 
lates such Aorists, in a very imperfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong 
especially verbs expressing strong feeling or passion, e.g. direirrvcra (I do 
abhor), eyeXacra (I cannot help laughing), eirrfvecra, (pfxco^a, i^av/xacra, 
dirajfjiocra, T)0~h'nv. S. Phil. 1434. a 8 5 av Xafiys <rv cTKvXa rovSe rod arparov, 
r6£wv e/u.cav fj.vrjp.e7a, irpbs irvpav e/j. rjv k6j.u£s - Kal crol ravr, 'AxtXXzcos reKvov, ira- 
pyvecra, this Ilounsel thee, this 1 have counselled thee. Eur. Med. 223. XP^ Se 
\evov p.ev Kapra irposx^peiv (se accommodare) ir6Xei ov5' darby fjvecr, osns 
avfrdd-ns yeyks iriKpbs iroXirais eaflv djxablas viro (nee laudo, nee unquam laudavi). 
Hec. 1276. Polym.: Kal ai\v ydvdyKi) ircuda Katrdvdpav Sravelv. Hecuba : direTV- 
rvffa, this thought I do abhor = a thought which I have ablwrred. 

(e) With like effect the Aor. is often used by Attic writers, apparently instead 
of the Pres. in urgent appeals or commands, expressed in the form of a question 
introduced by rl olv ob or ri ov. The speaker wishes, as it were, to see the 
desired action already accomplished. X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. ri oiiv, ecp-n 6 Kvpos, ov Kal 
rr]u 5vvap.iv e X e | d s poi (quin igitur mihi recenses ? why hast thou not yet told me of 
the forces? insAsad of tell me forthwith !) 5. 4, 37. ri olv, ecp-n, S> TaSdra, 
■ovx^ T « p-ev reixv (pvXanrj ^x v P° 1 ' tiroi-ncr as (why therefore have you not made 
the walls strong by a guard? = at once make them, etc.) ; PI. Phaedon. 86, d. el ovv 
ris vjxwv eviropojTepos i/xov, r i ovk air e/c pivar o ,■ (is quam celerrime respondeat, 
let him answer at once). The Pres. is also so used ; yet the expression is then 
far weaker, e. g. Ti olv, i) S % os, ovk epcaras: (stronger than epura, but 
weaker than Ti ovv ovk f)pa>ri}aas or rjpov;) PI. Lysid. 21 1^ d. Tt oZv ov 
ckotvov jxe v, X. C. 3. 1, 10. 

(f ) The Aor., like the Perf. (§ 255, Rem. 7) is used, when the speaker confi- 
dently considers a future event as already taken place. II. S, 160 — 162. e'inep 
~ydp re Ka\ avriic 'OXv/jlitlos ovk ereXeo-creu, c«r Te Kal mj/e TeAe?, ovv re fieyaXco 
birer icrav avv trepfjcriv KecpaXijcri. yvvaitf re Kal reKeecrcriv (then hare (hey paid a 
Jtcavy penalty, then shall they pay). Eur. Med. 78. air a X 6 (jl€<t& dp, el Kaicbv 
irposoiaofiev veov iraXaiy (then we shall perish, if, etc.). 

(g) The Aorist is very often used in all its forms to denote the coming into a 
condition ; this the Ind. alwsys represents naturally in the past. BacriXtvo, I 



348 syntax. 1$ 257. 

am a king, ifiaoriAevffa (not Iivas a Icing, but) I came to be a king, was made a 
king, fiao-iAeixras, having been made king, rex /actus. BovAevco, lam a senator 
(X. C. I. 2, 35), j3ov\ev(ras, having been made a senator, senator /actus (ib. 1. 1, 
18). 2oG o~TpaTi)yi}o~avTos, te duce /acto (ib. 3. 5, 1). 'Icxwo, lam strong, 
la xv&as> having become or been made strong, potens /actus (Th. 1,3). Avvtj- 
& e i s T polentiam nactus. 'Acr§€vrj<rai r to have become sick, in morbum ivtcidisse, 
Kvpos 7iydcr&-n avr6v (YLXzapxov), X. An. 1. 1, 9. Cyrus came to admire him, ejus 
admiratione captus est. 



§257. Subordinate Modes. 

1. As the Aorist Indicative expresses a past action as inde- 
pendent and completed, having no relation to another past ac- 
tion; while the Imperfect, always representing a past action in 
relation to another past, and being used in describing and paint- 
ing, presents the action in its duration and progress, so the 
same distinction holds in regard to the subordinate modes of 
the Aorist and Present : l The subordinate modes of the Aor. 
(Subj. Opt. and Impr.) together with the Lifinitive and Partici- 
ple, are used, when the speaker wishes to represent the action 
by itself, as completed ; the subordinate modes of the Present 
together with the Infinitive and Participle, and also the Imper- 
fect Opt. are used, when the speaker, considering the perform- 
ance of the action, wishes to represent it descriptively in its dura- 
tion and progress. In this way the following modes stand in 
contrast with each other : 

(a) The Subjunctive and Optative Aorist with the Subjunctive Present and the 
Optative Imperfect, e. g. ^vyca/xev ' and (pevyupLev, let us flee. With 
<pvya)/xev> the idea of fleeing itself is urged and is had in mind ; with 
<psvy<»ix<zv , I rather have reference to the performance and progress of 
the action ; the Aor. expresses the action with more energy, as it denotes 
an instantaneous, momentary act. The same distinction exists in all 
the following examples. Ti iroirio-w^v and iroicopLev ; ivhat shall we do ? 
Aeyw, 'iva p.d&r)s and 'iva fiav&dvns, ut discas; Zhtyov, 'iva fid&ois 
and 'iva /xavSravois , ut disceres. The Greek Subj. always refers to the 
/uture, and hence is never used, as in Latin, of the present and past, e. g. 
Laudat puerum, quod diligens sit or /uerit, because he is or has been. In 
subordinate clauses with ts dv, %av, orav, etc. [§260. (a)], the Subj. Aor. 
corresponds with Latin Fut. Perf. (§ 255, Rem. 9). 3 Ea^ tovto hiyys , 
a(MapT7)0"n (si hoc dices or quotiescunque hoc dicis, errabis). 'Eo^ toi>'t< 

1 The subordinate modes of the Imperf. are supplied by those of the Pre* 



$ 251.] SUBORDINATE MODES. 349 

Ae'lj? s , aixaf>T7](TT) (si hoc dixeris, if you shall have said). Comp. the exam- 
ples tinder §§ 333. 3. 337, 6. 339. 2. II. (b). The Impf. and Aor. Opt. has 
the sense of the present or future in clauses which express a supposi- 
tion, conjecture, or undetermined possibility, in prose commonly with dv, 
in hypothetical clauses with el ; the Opt. in this sense is found in clauses 
denoting a wish, in final clauses, and in direct interrogative clauses, 
particularly in deliberative questions. Tovto paSlws av yiyvoiTo or 
yevoiTo, this might easily be done. See §§ 259, 3 and 6, and 260, 4. El 
tovto Key o is or A. e £ e i a s , ap-apT dvois or a fj.dpTo is b\v, if you 
should say this, you would err. See § 339, II, (a). EXSre tovto yiyvono 
or ykvono , that this might be! See § 259, 3. (b). y EAe7<jj', tva. 
fiav^dvois or (jid&ois , ut disceres. See§330.2. Tis Toiavra viroXafx- 
fidvoi or vtt o\d&o ij who would suppose such things ? See § 259. 3. (e). 
Ovk efx 0J/ > ottoi TpeTroifiTjv or t p air o i fj.f) u , I knew not what I should 
do. See § 259. 2. The following case also belongs here : When the 
subordinate clauses in §§ 333, 3. 337, 6. and 339, II, (b), arc made to 
depend on an historical tense, and the Opt. without dv takes the place of 
the Subj. with os dv, oto.v, eireiody, %av, etc., the Opt. has a future sense. 
Ovs dv thu to. KaXa. eTrtT-ndevovTas, Ti/j.7jaca (quos videro). *E(pr)v ovs 
XSoi/u.1 Ta/coAa emT-ndevovTas, Tifxrjcreiv (quos visurus essem). 'EireiSdv 
<rv /Sou A. 7? SiaXeyea^ai, o~o\ 5 ia\e^ofj.ai (si or quotiescunque vis). "Ecp-nv, 
£ ire id r) ab fiovXoio h*ia\eyeo~&o.i, col dia.\e£eoSat (si or quotiescunque 
relies, of the future). In other kinds of clauses, the Opt. of the Impf. and 
Aor. has si past sense, so that it corresponds with the Ind.of each of these 
tenses. Ticraacpepirns SieJUaXe tov Kvpov, ws eirifiovXevo i avTw (that he 
was plotting against him). "EAe^av, oti Kvpos diro&dvoi (that C. was 
dead). 'OirSre oi a E?^Xrjves toIs 7ro\e/j.lois eirioiev or eireK&oie v , cbre- 
<pevyov, quotiescunque impetum faciebant). 'Avafiiobs e\eyev, d e/ce? 
Idoi (what he had there seen, a dependent question). Comp. Xo. 2, (b). 

(b) The Imperative Aorist with the Imperative Present, e. g. $vye and 
<p c v 7 « fee. Aos and Sidov /j.oi to frifrhiov, give. M77 Sopv f$ elTe , S> dvdpes 
1 'A&T)vaioi, dAA.' e fi/xeivaT e poi, oTs eSe-ftfrnv vjxuv, /xr/ Sopufieiv e<p' oh dv 
Xiyw (the principal fact is here efx/xelvaTe, the more definite explanation 
hop\)${iTt) PI. Apol. 30, C. ^Eireiddv diravra dKOvo~r}Te, KpivaTe, /xtj irp6- 
Tcpov TrpoAa/j.fidi'eT e. Dem. Ph. 1. 44, 14. 'AAA', 2> ^wKpoaes, eVt koX 
vvv 4/j.ol ireiSov koi o~wSt}t 1 PL Crito 44, b (= e/xol ireiSSfxevos (rcvfrnTi, 
i. e. by a process of persuasion, save yourself). In precepts respecting 
the rules of life. etc. the Pres. is the natural and usual tense. Tobs /xev 
beobs <pofiov,Tobs 5e yoveis Tip. a, tovs 5e <pi\ovs alcrx^ vov > T0 '* 
5e v6p.ois -rretdov, Isocr. Demon. 16. Comp. 4 259, 4. 

(c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Present, e. g. 'EdeAco <pvye7v 
and <peiyeiv, I Wish to flee. 'Ikixvos elyn iroiriaai and iroie'iv ti. 
('H yecupyia) fxabelv Te pdcrTri eduxei dual kcu tjS'io'tt] i pyd£eo-&ai , X. 
Occ. 6, 9. Alp€Tu>T€p6v iffTi KoXws a 7r o 3 a v e 1v , v) (tjv atVxpws, Isocr. 
Pan. 95. Ov to (jlt) KafSelv to dyodd ovtw ye xoAcnw, &sirep to \afi6yTa 

30 



350 SYNTAX. [$ 257. 

ffrepr]&r]vai Xvirr]p6v, X. Cy. 7. 5, 82. KeAeuw ere SoOycu and SiSctx'cu 
(AOi rb fiifiXiov. KaAeVas o Kvpos 'Apd<nrr}P MrjSov, rovrov e/ceAeucre Siacpv- 
Aa|at auT<j? -Hji' Te yvvaitca Kal rr]v o~KT]vr]v, X. Cy. 5. 1, 2, with which 
compare in 3. following: ravrrjv dlv e/ceAeucej/ 6 Kvpos SiacpvXdrreiv 
rbv 'Apd<rirr]v, eW av avrbs Kafir] (to continue to guard, the subordinate 
clause necessarily implying duration in SiacpvXdrreiv). In the oratio obliqua 
after verbs of saying and thinking, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. is frequently 
used to denote what is past; then the Inf. Aor., like the Ind. Aor., is used to 
denote the principal events, the Inf. Pres., like the Ind. Impf, to denote the 
accompanying subordinate circumstances, e. g. 'A&rjvdioL Ae'701/cn, StKalcas 
4£e\dcrai (robs UeXao-yovs)' KaroiKrjfxevovs yap rovs HeXaayovs vwb t<£ 
'Tixrjaar^ iv&evrev opfxecofxei/ovs, ad tKeeiv rdde' (poirav yap alel ras 
a'cperepas frvyarepas re Kal rovs rraiSas err vSwp ' ov yap elvai rovrov rbv 
Xpovov o~<pi<Ti Kca oiKeras ' okcos 5e eA&oiev avrai, rovs TLeAaayovs vrrb vfipios 
$iao-&ai acpeas k. t. A. (Oratio recta: e^^Xaffap-ev' oi yap TleXacryol 
tjSIkow rdde' £<poirav, etc.) Her. 6, 137. The Inf. Aor. has a 
past relation only after verbs of saying or thinking, and in the construction 
of the Ace. with the Infinitive with the article. 'Evrav&a Xeyerai 
*Arr6xX<ev e/cSelpot Mapcvav /ecu rb Sepp.a Kpe fidarai ev rep dvrpep, X, 
An. 1. 2, 8 (cutem detraxisse — suspendisse, to have flayed, and hung up). 
Comp. No. 2, (c). ©av/xaarbv (paiverai /xoi rb rrei(T&r)vai rtvas, &s 
TZwKpdrrjs rovs veovs diecp&eipev, X. C. 1. 2, 1 (persuasion esse quibusdam, 
that certain individuals had been persuaded). Tb fi.eSep.lav ruv rroXewv 
aXuvai rroXiopKia, p.eyio'rSv ettri o*r]p.e7av rod Sia rovrovs ir e iir&evr as 
rovs &a>Keas ravra rra&eiv, Dem. 19, 61. (But when by the Ace. 
with the Inf. with the article, a purpose is expressed, the Inf. Aor. has 
naturally something of a future relation, e. g. 'Ewep.eXr]&riv rod diSda- 
KaX6v fioi riva yev ecr&ai , I took care that I might have some one as a 
teacher, X. C. 4. 2, 4.) In all other cases the Inf. Aor. has the relation of 
present time. 

(d) The Participle of the Aorist with the Participle of the Present; comp. 
Active (pvydr with Xav&ave (pevywv. UepierrXccov 'Zovviov, ,3ovX6p.evoi (p&rjvai 
air lk6/x€voi is rb acrru (wishing to come into the city sooner) Her. 6, 115, 
Tovs av&pcvrrovs Xrjcrofiev emrre<r6vres (will secretly attack), X. An. 7. 3, 43. 
In all such examples the Aor. does not express the relation of past time, 
but merely the. action of the verb taken by itself; the time is denoted by 
the finite verb with which the Part, is connected ; the Aor. Part., there- 
fore, denotes only that the subordinate action (expressed by the Part.) is 
contemporaneous with the principal action (expressed by the verb). Yet 
it is to be observed, that the Aor. Part, is commonly used to designate 
past time, e. g. Tavr elrrcov aire fir] = ravr elire /cat aire fir]. — It may be 
added here as a general principle, that while the Aor. Part, generally 
denotes past time, the subordinate modes of the Aor. and Present, of 
themselves denote no relation of time, the Aor., however, designating a 
momentary, the Pres. a continued action. 



fr 257.] SUBORDINATE MODES. 351 

2. The subordinate modes and participials of the Aonst, form 
a contrast also with the subordinate modes and participials of 
the Perfect and Pluperfect ; the former denote an action abso- 
lutely, as past or completed ; the latter, on the contrary, in rela- 
tion to the subject of the finite verb; by this relation the sub- 
ordinate idea of the duration of the result of what is denoted by 
the verb, is naturally derived. In this way the following forms 
stand in contrast with each other: 

(a) The Subjunctive Aorist with the Subjunctive Perfect, e. g. "Eav o-rrovb'ul 
yivwvT ai, fyovaiv (e/ceTcre), zvSev e£oi«rt to eiriTrjdeia (if a treaty shall 
have been made), X. A. 2.3, 6. A Ov av yvwpifxov (kvo>v fS 77 ), acira^Tai, Kay 
/u7jSei/ 7rw7roTe bif avrov aya&bv w eir6i>&r) (whomsoever he recognizes, he 
greets, even if he shall have received no favor from him), PI. Rp. 376, a. 
'A7re^6tri3-6 tw aWorplcoy, 'Lv aatyaKiarzpov tovs oVkovs robs vfxerepovs avrajy 
K€/cT7j(r&e, Isoc. Nic. 49. ( Comp. § 255, Rem. 5.) It has already been 
stated No. 1. (a) that the Greek Subj. always refers to the future. 

(b) The Optative Aorist with the Optative Pluperfect, e. g. Ol 'Ii/Sot eAe£cw, 
'6ri Tre/i^ete ff<pas 6 'IvZ&v &a<ri\evs (had sent), X. Cy. 2. 4, 6. "ESeiaau, 
fj.T] Xvrra tis losirep kvo~\v rj/jLut/ e /xir e it r u> k 1 (that some madness had 
fallen upon ns, the effects still continuing), X. An. 5. 7, 26. 'Ayncrihaos 

eSe^dr] rr\s irSAecas a(pe7';ai avrbv ravrrjs ttjs arpar-nyias, Xeycw, on tb irarpl 
avrov TroWa vttt) p €T-f) koi 7] ruv MavTiveow ttoAis iv ro?s irpbs Meao~7)wnv 
■n-o\i/j.ois, H. 5. 2, 3. In what instances the Opt. Aor. is used of the 
present or future, and in what of the past, has been stated in No. 1, (a). 

(c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Perfect; comp. aivoSaueiv with 
T&vnKevai. Tlarpbs Kvpos \4yerai yeveo~frai Ka/J.$vaeu, Tlepawv Paai- 
Keus X. Cv. 1. 2, 1. Aeyerat avSpa riva ruv Mr]8wu i Kire-irAr) x& al 
iroXbv S7) riva xp^vov eVi rQ /caAAei rod Kvpou (stood or continued amazed), 
ib. 1.4, 27. Comp. § 255, Rem. 6. 

(d) The Aorist Participle with the Perfect Participle; comp. aTroSraucov with 
Te&VTiKws, Plat. Acm. Paul. c. 36. extr. Tlepo~ebs juep e%et Kal veviKT\- 
fievos (even tleough vanquished, in the condition of one vanquished) robs 
naioas, Al/xi\ios 5e Toys avrov (sc. iraldas) viKr\aas a-rrefiaXei/ = veu'iKwrai 
fiiv — ex 61 ^ — » iptKrjffe \x.iu — a7re'#aAe 5e. Perseus even though conquered 
still has his children; Aemilius in his otherwise successful war, lost his. 

Rsmabk 1. From the above explanation, it is evident why the Aor., though 
nn Historical tense, has besides an Opt. a Subj. also; the Aor. Subj. stands in 
contrast, on the one hand, with the Subj. Pres. ; on the other, with the Subj. 
JPerf The Greek Fut. has no Snbj. as in Latin (e. g. Gaudet, quod pater ven- 
turus sit), because the Greek Subj. of itself denotes future time. _ But the Aor. 
has an Opt, which stands in dependent sentences after an historical tense, and 
consequently, in direct discourse, takes the place of the Ind. Future, e. g. 
*Hyyei\w, o'Vt Tro\ep.ioi vikj](tohu (that the enemy wotTLD conquer). X. An. 7. 

1, 33. iktytv, on (toiixos tin riyua'dai avrois els to Aekja KaXov/xevoi; tyda 7roA.A£ 



352 syntax. • [$ 258. 

Ka\ aya&a, \t)$oivto (where they would receive). X. Cy. 8. 1, 43. emiieXelro 
Sjtgjs fi^re Hffiroi, /xTjre &itotoI 7TOT6 Z(To ivto . (But eiri/xeXelTai, oircas .... ecrov- 
rcu). X. An. 4. 1, 25. ecp-n elvai 'dupov, t> el fi-f} tis tt p o tear aX^-ty oit o , aSuvarov 
eaev&cu irapeA&eli/. t (0 ratio recta : el irpoKaTaXTj^erai, aSvvarov ecxrai irape'KSe'iv.] 

Rem. 2. Verbs of willing, refusing, delaying, entreating, persuading, com* 
manding, forbidding, hindering, of being able, and unable, expecting (irpos- 
SokcD, e7ri5o£os elpi t eltc6s eariv, it is likely, to be expected), when they relate to a 
future object, are sometimes connected with the Fut. Inf., sometimes with the 
Pres., sometimes with the Aor. The Put. Inf. is used, when the idea of futurity is 
to be made specially prominent, e. g. a condition continuing in the future ; the 
Inf. Pres., to denote a continuing or permanent condition, the idea of futurity, 
evident of itself, being left out of sight ; this Inf. is also used to denote the 
immediate occurrence of the action ; the Inf. Aor., when the idea of the action 
itself is made prominent. In English all three forms of the Inf., when the subject 
of the Inf. is the same as that of the governing verb, are translated by the Pres. 
Inf. : MeAAw ypdtyeiv, ypd<peiv, ypdtyai (lam now about, to write, intending 
to write). 'ASvvar oi el<r iv eTri/xeKels e <r e a £• a i (unable to become and continue 
careful), X. Oec. 12, 12. 'Ad vvar ol elffiv els eirifieKeiav ruu tear dypbv epywv 
naidevea&ai, ib. 12, 15. 'Advvaroi r\iuv ecrovrai ia.vTt]v tt\v eTri/xeAeiav 
d i8ax&V va - l i ib. 12, 13. 5 A va/3d AActoi irowfja-e iv t« Seovra, Dem.31, 9. 
'A&tjvcuol ave fiaWovT o rb irau fiT]Xo-vi](T a crfr at, Her. 6, 58. 'EATrt^et 
paUws vuas i £a7T ottj ere iu, Dem. 860, 54 (he hopes to deceive you). 'EATridas 
irape'xfTai 7]/j.as evSat/xovas iroirjcrai, PI. Symp. 193, d. (he gives hope that he 
will make us happy). With verbs of willing or being able, the Put. Inf. is more 
seldom than the Aor. or Pres. After verbs of saying, promising, swearing, 
thinking, the above threefold construction (Inf. Put., Pres., Aor.) is used, but the 
Inf. Aor. regularly expresses something past (see No. 1), seldom what is future, 
e. g. Of IlAaTairjs ev6pnaav eiri&ej.ievoi padiws Kparrjcrai, Th. 2, 3, (se victores 
fore). ' 'AtrSKpLvai, & ^Ay6pare' ov yap ol/xai ce e^apvov yeve<r£rai, a evavrlov 
'A&7}vatwv anduTcoj/ eiroiri<ras, Lys. Agor. § 32 (credo te negaturum). After verbs 
of saying, thinking, hoping, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. with &v, is often used in 
nearly the same sense as the Inf. Put. without &v. See § 260, (5), (a). 

J 258. B. A more particular Vieiv of the Modes. 

The Indicative, the Subjunctive (Optative) and the Im- 
perative Modes [$ 253, (b)], are distinguished as follows: 

(a) The Indicative expresses a direct assertion, an actual fact. 

Tb p6dov 3-aAAet. 'O irar^p yeypatpe tt\v eivicrToX^v. Of ivoXe'puoi 
a 7T e <p v y o v. Of iroXtrai robs TroXefiiovs v iKrjcrova iv. 

(b) The Subjunctive denotes a supposition, conception, or 
representation. The Subj. of the Hist, tenses is called the 
Optative. 

"Iwfxev ! eamus! — Ti iroiwp.ev ; quid facia?nus? what shall ice do? Ouk ex«, 
oiroi Tpdironfiai, nescio, quo me vertam. Ouk elxov, oiroi r p airoi fxrjv, nescie- 
bam, quo me verterem. Aeyw, 'iu el5f}s, dico, ut scias, in order that you may know 
it. v EAe£a, 'iv elSeirjs, dixi y ut scires, in order that you might know it. 

(c) The Imperative denotes the immediate expression of the 
will, being used in commands, entreaties, etc. 



$ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 353 

Tpdxpov and ypd(pe, twite. Bpadias ja\v (pl\os yiyvov, yzvofxevos Se Treipw Siapi- 
veiv, Is. Dem. 7. Tpa^/dTco and ypa<p4ra, let him write (§ 257, 1. b). The com- 
mand expressed by the Imp. is not always to be understood as a strong com- 
mand, entreaties, exhortations, and counsels, being also expressed by the Imp. 

Remark. The Modes exhibit the relation of an expressed thought to 
the mind of the speaker. Hence they denote nothing objective, i. e. they never 
show the actual condition of an action ; the Ind., in itself, does not denote 
something actual; nor the Subj., in itself, something possible; nor the Imp., 
something necessary ; the language represents these ideas by special expres- 
sions, e. g. aXyfrcos, SvyaaSrai, Se?, xpv> etc - The modes express subjective rela- 
tions solely, i. e. the relations to the mind of the speaker, showing how he 
conceives of an action. A mental operation is either an act of perception, an 
act of supposition or conception, or an act of desire. The Ind. expresses 
an actual perception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents 
as a reality, whether an actual, objective fact, or a conception ; even the future, 
which, in itself is something merely imagined, can be conceived by the speaker 
as a reality, and hence is expressed by the Put. Ind. The Subj. expresses 
a conception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a 
conception, whether it has an actual objective existence, or is a mere mental 
conception. The Imp. expresses desire ; it denotes what the speaker conceives 
and represents as something desired, whether it be an actual objective necessity 
or not. 

$ 259. Use of the Subjunctive, Optative and Im- 
perative. 

1. The Subj. of the Principal tenses, the Pres. and Perf., as 
well as the Sub. Aor., alway relates tofutureiime [$ 257, 1, (a)], 
and is used in Principal clauses : 

(a) In the first Pers. Sing, and PL in exhortations * and warn- 
ings, where the Eng. uses let, let us, with the infinitive ; the 
negative is here pJ]. 

(b) In the first Pers. Sing, and PL in deliberative 2 questions, 
when the speaker deliberates with himself what he is to do, 
what it is best to do ; here also the negative is //,?). 

"lco/xev, eamus! let us go, suppose we go ! Mr) tape v. "Aye (cpepe, ea) Iwfiev. 
*e'pe 3f5« (come now, let me see), Her. 7, 103, «J>epe St;, t) 5' os, irei padta irpbs 
v/j.as aTroAoyri<racr£rai, PI. Phaedon. 63, b. Such an exhortation is very often ex- 
pressed in the form of a question preceded by /JouAet,- yet in this case, the 
subjunctive is a subordinate clause dependent on #ovAet, e. g. BouAei ovu, 8vo 
€?5r; bto/xev Trei&ovs ; (do you then wish that we propose two hinds of persuasions =g 
let us propose), PI. Gorg. 454, e. Tt iro icu/xeu; quid faciamus? what shall we 
do? Etna (Mcv, $ ffiyw/xeu; Eur. Ion. 771. In no? ns (ppovTiSos eA^r?; &, 

1 This use of the Subj. is called Conjunctiva adhorlativus. 
~ Conjunctivus deliberative. 

30* 



354 syntax. [$ 259. 

0. C. 170, tIs is used instead of the first Pers., where shall one go? ( — iroi eA3<* 
or eX&oofxei/, like ttol (ppevoov e\&w ; 310). Mr) epcofxai; shall 1 not ask? X. C. 1. 
2, 36. "Ocra 01 oAiyoi robs rroWovs fxrj izeia'avTes, aAAcb Kparovyres ypdcpovai, tt6t- 
epov fiiav (p ca fxev, 7) fir) (pcofxev elvai; 45. So also in indirect discourse, 
and in all persons. Ovx exa>, '6iroi r pdircafxev (I know not, whither I shall turn 
myself, what I shall do). Ovk e^ovaiv eKeivoi, '6ttol (pvy<ao-i, X. An. 2.4, 20. Ovk 
0I8' el 5o) (to eKTra/xa), I do not know whether I shall give the cup, Cy. § 8. 4, 16. 

Remark 1. In the second and third Pers. the exhortation takes the form 
of a command or wish, and hence is expressed by the Imp. or Opt. Od. x> 77. 
eXfrcafie v §' ava affrv, fior} 5' SoKiVTa yevoiTo. Yet there are also passages 
in which the second Pers. Subj. stands in connection with 'dye and <pepe instead 
of the Imp., e. g. $ep\ <£ Texvov, vvu koX to tt)s vt]o~ov fjid&ri s, S. Ph. 300. 

Rem. 2. On the use of the second Pers. Subj. with \tA\ to express a prohibi- 
tion, e. g. fir) ypd^ns, ne scripseris, do not write, see No. 5. 

Rem. 3. A wish is very seldom expressed by elbe with the Subj. instead of 
the Opt. Ei'fr' al&epos &v(a TTTWKades o^vt6uov Slcc irpev/j.aTos eAoxri fi (0 si 
aves me sursum in aetherem per auras stridentes capiant), S. Ph. 1094 (without varia- 
tion). Comp. E 3f3-e Tives evval SiKaiwv v/xevatcov ev "Kpyei (pavwai TeKvoiaiv 
Eur. Suppl. 1028. Efd-' — alffxi-ov eldos olutI tov KaXov Act/3co (in some MSS. 
Aa/3e2>), Hel. 262. 

Rem. 4. In the third place, the Subjunctive is somewhat frequently used in 
principal clauses, in the Epic language, instead of the Eut. Ind., though with a 
slight difference of meaning. Both express a present conception of a future 
action ; but the Eut. Ind. represents what is still in the future as known and 
certain in the view of the speaker, while the Subj. represents what is future as 
merely a concession or admission of something expected. II. £, 459. nai 
■noTe tis e.'iTrvo-iv (and one may say, it may be expected or conceded that one will 
say). II. 77, 197. ov ydp t'ls fie fiir) ye eiccbt/ aeKovra SlrjTai (one ivill not force me 
away = I will not admit that one will, etc.). a, 262. ov ydp irea to'lovs ?8ov avepas, 
obhe ?8a> jx a 1 (no) do I expect that I shall see such men, nor am I to see; ovde 
otyonai, would mean, I certainly shall not see). Od. £ 201. ovk e<r& ovtos di/rjp 
diepbs J3poT6s, ov8e yevt]Ta.i. tt, 437. ovk eo-& ovtos h.vr\p, ovt eWercu ov8e 
yevriTai (nor is it to be expected that he will be). The frequent use of the Subj. 
with ovSe fj.ii in the Attic writers, is wholly analogous to the principle just 
stated. See under § 318, 6. 

2. The Opt. Impf. and Aor. is also used in principal sen- 
tences, to denote deliberative questions (i. e. such as express 
doubt and propriety), but differs from the Subj. in such ques- 
tions in referring to past time. 

Theocr. 27, 24. ttoXKoi [x e/xvdoot/TO, v6ov 5' efxbv ovtls eatie ' — Kctl t'l, <pi\os, 
p e^aifiij ydy.01 Tc\i\&ovo'iv avlas, i. e. quid facerem 1 sc. turn, quum multi nup- 
tias meas ambiebant, sed eorum nullus mihi placebat, ivhat could I then do ? Tho 
deliberative Opt. is very frequently used in indirect questions, in relation to an 
historical tense in the principal clause. ""Eir^peTo 6 2eufr?js tov TraiSa, el iraiaeiev 
clvt6v, X. An. 7. 4, 10 (whether he should put him to death). Oi 'Erndd/xuioi irefi- 
tyavTes is A e \cpobs tov &ebv iirripovTo, el irapaSoiev Kopiv&tois tt/u ttSXu/, Til. 

1, 25 (whether they should surrender the city). 



$ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 355 

Rem. 5. In the principle given in Xo. 2, the act of supposition or conception 
belongs to the past, and this is the common use of the Opt. (the Subj. of the 
historical tenses), in subordinate clauses. But the Opt. is also used, where the 
act of supposition or conception is a present one. When a present conception is 
expressed by the subjunctive, e.g. lupev, eamus, t'i elirupev ; quid dicamus? 
then the realization of the conception may be assumed or expected from the 
present point of time. But when a present conception is expressed by the 
Opt. (Subj. of the historical tenses), the speaker places himself back, as it 
were, out of the present and the vivid connection, which exists between the 
present and the actual accomplishment, and represents the conception as one 
separate from his present point of time. Hence a present conception expressed 
in this way, very naturally suggests the subordinate idea of uncertainty. Thence 
arises the following use : 

3. The Opt. Aor. and Impf. (Subj. of the historical tenses), 
is used, in principal clauses, of present or future time in the 
following cases : 

(a) To express, in a general manner, a supposition, a present 
or future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, presumption 
or admission. The prose-writers here commonly use the modal 
adverb av with the Opt, § 260, 2, (4), (a), but the poets very 
frequently use the Opt. without av. A negation is here ex- 
pressed by ov (ovk). 

d O 8e avrb avTcp av6poiov e%r\ /cat Sidcpopov, crxoXfj ye ttov tu ciAAw opoiov ^ cpiXov 
yevoiro (that would scarcely be like or friendly to another, as one would readily 
admit), PI. Lysid. 214, d. 'AnoXopevrjs Se rrjs tyvxys t6t ¥)8t] t)jv <pvaiv rrjs 
aaSeveias eir 1 § e ikvv 1 rb crupa Kal Tax" crairev 8 1 I x t t [animo exstincto 
turn vero corpus imbecillitatem suam ostendat et intercidat, it is natural to suppose or 
assume, that the body would give signs of weakness), Phaed. 87, e. 

(b) To express a wish. A negation is here expressed by jj.rj, 

II. Xi 304. prj pav cWttouSi ye Kal aKheius air 0A0 1 pr\ v, may 1 not perish! S. 
Aj. 550. 2> 7ra?, yevoio ivarphs evrvx^crrepos, ra 5' ctAA' opoios ! Kal yevoi av ov 
KaK6s, may you be more fortunate than your father, but in other things like him ! then 
you would not be wicked. X. Cy. 6. 3, 11. 'AAA', fi) Zev fieyiare, XafSelv pot 
yeuoiTO avTo'v, us eyu fiov\opai, may I be able to take him. The wish is com- 
monly introduced by tide, el yap (in the poets also by el alone). Od. 7, 205. 
el yap ipol Toao-f)vSe &eol hvuap.iv irapabelev! X. Cy. 6. 1,38. et yap 
yevoiro! (In poetry us is used like Lat. utinam. Eur. Hipp. 407. us 
o 7r 6 ho it irayKaKus ! ) 

Rem. 6. When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be 
realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used, e. g. Et&e tovto iytyvero ! 
cfoe tovto iyeveTo ! utinam hoc factum esse.t I O t/iat this were done, or had been 
done ! So & <p e A e s ypd^ai I O tfoit you had written ! (but I know that you have 
not). X. An. 2. 1, 4. ctAA' &(pe\e pev Kvpos £ijv ! O that Cyrus were still alive! 
(but I know that he is not). Also e)f&e, et yap, us u<pe\ov, es, e(j/) with 



356 syntax. [$ 259. 

the Inf., particularly in poetry. On the wish expressed by irws 'av with the Opt., 
see § 260, 2, (4), (d). On the infrequent use of the Subj. to denote a wish, sea 
Eem. 3. 

(c) A command is also expressed in a milder way, in the 
form of a wish. 

Ocl. £, 408. TaxKTra fioi &dov eTcupoi elev, let my companions come within. II. 
K7)pv£ ris ol %i?oito yepalrepos, let some herald follow. Arist. "Vesp. 1431. 
epSoi ris tjv e/ca<TTos eldeirj rexvyv. X. An. 3. 2, 37. el pikv ovv &Wos ris 
fiiXriov opa, aWas ex eTW ' e * ^ e H-V> Xeipiaocpos fxkv r)yoiro. 

(d) The Optative is used to express a desire, wish, and 
inclination, in a general manner, without expecting the realiza- 
tion. A negation is here expressed by \xr\. 

Theocr. 8, 20. ravrav (rr/v avpiyya) Kar&elriv {1 would be willing or desire 
to place)' ra 5e tw irarpbs ov Kara$n]crG}. Her. 7, 11. fir} yap etrjv e/c Aapeiov 
yeyovus, firj ri/xcaprio'd/jicuos 'AS-nvaiovs, I should not be descended from Darius, 
unless, etc. 

(e) In direct questions the Opt. is used, when a mere admis- 
sion or supposition is expressed. 

(a) In Homer the interrogative clause then forms, in a measure, the protasis 
to the conditioned clause, i. e. to the clause depending on the condition ex- 
pressed by the question. II. 8, 93, seq. r) pa vv jxoi rC irl&oio, Avudovos vie 
Sa'icppov; TXairjs K€v MeveXaco iTwrpoeixev tayyv lov, irao'i Se /ce Tpcaeaai x°-P lv 
Ka\ Kvdos &poio, will you now listen to me, i. e. if you will, you would dare, etc. (the 
same as e? rl fioi Tri&oio, r\air]s tcev, etc.). Here irifroio, etc. is the in- 
terrogative clause containing the condition, and rhairfs, etc. the conditioned 
clause depending on the preceding. When the question has two members, the 
first, expressed by the Opt. without 'av, contains the condition, the last, ex- 
pressed by the Opt. with &v, contains the conditioned clause. II. |, 191. r) pd 
vv fjLot r x(&oio, <pi\ov T6kos, orri kgv tfiroo, r)4 Kev a p v r) <T a i o Kor<z<T(rafx4vn roye 
SfvjxS ; will you be persuaded by me, — or will you refuse ? (fi) In the Attic writers, 
the Opt. is also used in a question without reference to a conditioned clause. 
These questions, however, always imply a negative. Aesch. Choeph. aAA' 
vir4proXjxov avdpbs (ppovrjjxa ris \eyoi; who could describe? — no one, i. e. who 
can you suppose could describe ? S. Ant. 604. redv, Zev, h*vva<riv ris avdpwv virep- 
fiaala Kard<rxoi; who could restrain ? i. e. who can be supposed to restrain ? 
Arist. Plut. 438. &va£ "AiroAXov Kal freoi, tto? ris <pvyoi, where could one fly ? 
Dem. Phorm. 921, 1. Kal ocra filv elire /j.era rrjs aXrj&zias, fify xp7jcr^e r^Kfxr}pi(a ' a 
b' i^/evaaro rb vcrTtpov, TricrrSrepa ravS" viroXajSoir e elvai ; haec vos veriora 
existimaturos quis putet ! PI. Ep. 437, b. ap ovv — rrdvra ra roiavra ra>v ivavricov 
aXXr)Xois §drjs ; can you consider all such things to be opposite to each other ? i. e. 
can I assume that you, etc. 



$ 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 357 

Rem. 7. The deliberative Opt. (No. 2) differs from this. 

Rem. 8. All the cases mentioned under (a) (b) (c) (d) (e), are to be regarded 
as elliptical sentences, which have originated from a conditional sentence like 
e?Ti %x ois > 80177 s dv \\ 339, II, (a)], if you had, you would give. 

(4) The following points in addition are to be observed 
respecting the Imp., [§ 258, 1, (c)] : Though the Imp. always 
refers to time present to the speaker, yet the Greek has several 
Imp. forms, viz., a Pres., Perf., and Aor. These forms, how- 
ever, do not express a different relation of time, but only the 
different condition or circumstances of the predicate. The dif- 
ference between the Imp. Aor. ypdxj/ov and the Pres. ypa^e, has 
been explained, $ 257, 1, (b). The Imp. Perf. has always the 
sense of the Pres., with the accompanying idea of the perma- 
nence or continuance of the result, e. g. fxefxvrja-o, memento, be 
mindful, remember ; rj Svpa KCKAetV^u, let the door be shut 
(and remain shut). See h 255, Rem. 5. 

5. In negative or prohibitive expressions with fitf (ne), the 
Greek commonly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp. ; 
but instead of the Aor. Imp., the Aor. Subjunctive is used. 

M77 ypdcpe or [XT] ypd-tyys (but neither ^77 ypdcprjs, nor jx)) ypatyov). M^ 
ypaiperw or fir] ypd\l/rj,ne scribito (but neither llt] ypdcpy, nor jxr) ypaipdrca). 
M77 fioi avriXey* or fi 77 fxoi avr iXi^rj s, do not speak against me (but 
neither p.7] avriXiyris nor ixt] avTiK^ov). Isoc. Dem. 24. M 77 8 e v a (pi\ov irotov 
irp\v av i^crdcrris, irws KexPV TaL J0 ^ s "Tpdrepov <pi\oi.s. 36, 29. fj.r)dej/l (Tu/xcpopas 
oveitiiar) s' kolv)) yap 77 tvxv Kal to /xeWou ct.6pa.Tov. Th. 3, 39. Ko\acrSrr)Tu<Tav 
8e koI vvv a^icas rr\s aSucias, Ka\ ftr/ toIs ixkv bxiyois r\ curia irpo sre&jj, rhv 8e 
Srj/xov air o\vo~t]t e. 

Rem. 9. Yec sometimes in the Epic poets, though very seldom in other 
poets, fi-fj is found with the second Pers. of the Aor. Imp., e. g. II. 8, 410. rw 
/x-f) fxoi iraripas iro^ dfioirj ei/freo Srv/j.w. The third Pers. is frequently found 
even in the Attic prose writers. X. Cy. 8. 7, 26. ixr]Se\s I8 4ru. 

6. The third Pers. Imp. is very often used (the second more 
seldom), to denote that the speaker admits or grants something, 
the correctness or incorrectness of which depends upon himself. 
This is called the concessive Imp. 

OvTus ^x e ' TW » & s <™ ^h els {admit that it is as you say), P. Symp. 201, c 
'EoiKeTu 8?/ (77 tyvxv) ^vp.(pvTco Swdixei viroirrepov fevyous Te nal tjuiSxov (grint 
that the soul is like, etc.), Phacdr. 246, a. Aeyeru irepl avrov, ws eKatrros 
ytyvuxruei (admit that each one speaks of it), Th. 2. 48. 



358 syntax. [$ 260 

Rem. 10. In the interrogative formula of the Attic poets: o1o-& o Spacov, 
— ol<x& us -Ko'it\(Tov ; (do you know what you are to do ?), the Imperative is to be 
explained as a transition, easy to the Greeks, from the indirect to the direct 
form of speech. It is also explained by considering it the same as 8pa<rov, 
olaSr' '6; do, — do you know what? The formula is a softer mode of expression 
than the Imp. Spdaov or tvoit]o-ov. The use of the third Pers. Imp., not only 
in dependent questions, but also in other subordinate sentences, is according to 
the same analogy. Her. 1, 89. vvv £>v iroirjaov a>8e, eif roi dpeffnei, ra £yu> Xeyco' 
Ka.Ti<jov rwv Sopv(popwv £tt\ Trdarjai rfjcrncvXriGi (pvXaKovs oi XeySvriav — , &s 
ccpta (sc. X9'^f JLara ) dvayKaiccs exet deKarev&TJucu rep Ad (oi XeySvrwv = Ka\ 
ovroi \ey6vrwv, who should say, or and let them say). Th. 4, 92. 8ei|cu, 
or i — Kardo-froixrav, they might obtain ! 

Rem. 11. On the transition of the third Pers. Imp. to the second, see § 241, 
Rem. 13, (c) ; on the use of the Fut. instead of the Imp., see § 255, 4, and on 
the Opt. with dv in the sense of the Imp., § 260, 2, (4) (b). 



§ 260. The Modes in connection with the Modal 
Adverb av (zee, k£v). 

1. The Modal adverb av (Epic kc'(v), Doric #ea, *aV), denotes the 
relation of a conditioning expression or sentence to a condi- 
tioned one ; indicating that the predicate of the sentence to 
which it belongs, is conditioned by another thought either ex- 
pressed or to be supplied. By the particle av, the realization 
of the predicate is made to depend upon the realization of 
another predicate. Therefore, where a predicate is accom- 
panied by av, the predicate is represented as conditioned by 
another thought ; av always refers to a condition. 

2. A complete view of the use of av cannot be presented 
except in connection with conditional sentences. Yet, as it 
is used in all kinds of sentences, it is necessary to explain 
its construction here. It is connected : 

(1) With the Fut. Ind. The predicate expressed by the 
Put. Ind., seems to the speaker, at the time then present, 
always to depend on conditions and circumstances. Whenever 
this idea of dependence is to be made specially prominent, av 
(Epic k£) can be joined with the Fut. ; yet this construction is 
rare in the Attic dialect. 

Od. p, 540. et 8' '0§ucrei>s eA&oi — , afyd k e avv cp iraidl fiias aw or iff erat 
avdp&v, he would punish. II. |, 267. aAA' i'3- 5 , iyib Se ice roi Xapirwv fiiav 
OTrXorepdav oScrca birvieixevai,dabo,scil.sitibilubuerit. X. Cy. 6. 1,45. vfipiffrfyv ovv 
vofilfav avrSv, eS oT5' '6tl da/xevos av irphs dvdpa, oTos <ry e?, diraWayocrerat 
(so the MSS.). 7. 5, 21. orav Se Ka\ aicr&covrai r)fj.as tvdov vvras, iroXv av ert paWov, 
% vvv, axpsioi iffovrai virb rov iKireirXTJx&ai (dv is wanting in only two MSS.). 



$ 260.] MODAL ADVERB (XV. 359 

Eemaek 1. With the Pres. and Perf. Ind., &v is not used. Por that which 
the speaker expresses as a present object, cannot at the same time be expressed 
as something, the realization of which is dependent on another thought. In 
those passages where av is found with the Pres. or Perf. Ind., either the reading 
is questionable, or av must be referred to another verb of the sentence, e. g. Ovk 
o!S' av el irelaaL/jLi (instead of et -rreiaaLfXL av). Eur. Med. 937 : so often vofiify av, 
01/j.ai av and the like followed by an Inf., where &v belongs to the Inf. ; or it ia 
to be considered as an elliptical mode of expression, as in X. S. 4, 37. eyw 8e 
oi/To> 7ro/\Aa ix w i & s l^oXis avra Ka\ iyu a v avrbs evpiaKw, I have so many things 
that Iicith difficulty find them, indeed if I should seek for them myself I should not 
find them. Nor is &v used with the Imp. Por what the speaker expresses as 
his immediate will, cannot be considered as dependent on a condition. The 
few passages referred to in proof of the use of av with the Imp., are all, criti- 
cally considered,, questionable and prove nothing. 

(2) "Av is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses : the 
Aor., Impf. and Plup. : 

(a) To denote that something might take place under a cer- 
tain condition, but did not take place, because the condi- 
tion was not fulfilled. The condition is then expressed 
by el with the Lid. of the historical tenses. 

Et tovto %\eyes (eAe|as), r\ /xapraves (ri^iapTes) &v, i. e. if you said this, 
you were wrong, or if you had said this, you would have been wrong, but now I know 
that you did not say it, consequently you are not wrong; Lat. si hoc dixisses, 
errasses (at non dixisti; ergo non errasti). Elf rt eXxo^ev, iSidofxev 
(edofxev) av, if ice had anything, we woidd give it to you, or if we had had any- 
thing, ice would have given it to you ; si quid habuissemus, dedissemus. Also with- 
out an antecedent clause, e. g. exd-p-qs & v i laetatus fuisses (scil. si hoc yidisses). 

Rem. 2. Here belong also the expressions, ySuriv &v, iyw tis &v, 
fl crSrer 6 r is &v, (per6 tis &v, and the like, as in Latin, putares, crederes, diceres, 
cernercs, videres, you (one) would think, or you (one) icould have thought. Here ei 
iraprjv, ei e\eyev, et elBev, el idvvaro, and the like, as conditioning antecedent 
clauses, are to be supplied. "Ev&a S77 eyvco tis av rovs 6/aotiij.ous ireTraiSev/j.4- 
vovs, us 8e? (turn rori videres, then one might see, were he present), X. Cy. 3. 3, 
70. "Evda 877 eyvco ns av, oaov &£iov etr) tb cpi\e?a&ai &pxovra virb tuiv dp%o / u.e- 
vuv, 7. 1, 38. Ev&vs abv tovtois elsTT7]8r)cravTes els rbv iT7]Xbv &uttov, $) Ss tis a if 
wero, ixeTtdopovs e^eicofiKTav ras a/xd^as (eclerius, quam quis crcdcrct). An. 1. 5, 8. 
'E ireppw a-^rrj 8' av tis naKetva I8a>v (one might be encouraged if he saw those 
things), Ag. 1, 27 

Rem. 3. With the Ind. of the historical tenses, &v is often omitted. Then 
the speaker has no reference, in his representation, to the condition contained 
in the protasis or antecedent, on account of which the action expressed in the 
apodosis or conclusion could not be completed, but he emphatically represents 
the predicate 93 an actual fact. X. An. 7. 6, 21. Efrrot 877 tis &v Ovkow alo-xvvp 
outgo /xoopus e£airaTa>;Aei/os ; Ned fxa. Ala fj a X vv °" A t7 7 I/ fJ-evTOi, el (mb iroXefxiov ye ovtos 
e^r}iraTi\kn]v ' <pi\qj 8' vvti ('^airaTav aXcrxiov /xoi 8o/ce7 elvai, y) e£a7ra-racrd-at. LyCUTg. 
Leocr. p. 154, 23. et fj.lv oxjv fav eTvyxavev 6 'AtxvvTas, iicelvov avTbv n ap e ix°~ 
fiyv" vvv 8e vfx?v Ka\u> tovs crvveiSoTas. The ellipsis of &v is most frequent in 
expressions which denote the idea of necessity, duty, reasonableness, possibili- 
ty, liberty, and inclination, e. g. xpv v i t Set. &cpe\ov; with verbal adjectives 
in Tt'osj with irposiJK e, Kaipbs 7) v, elKbs J)V, naXbv -f)v, alcr XP 0V i\Vy 



360 SYNTAX. [$ 260. 

&£lov %v, ko\wj €?%€, ei-yv, virripxsv, ejiteAAey, e (ZovXo /xriv. Lys. 
123,3. XP^?^ Se (re, efrrep ^(T&a xPV&tos, iroKv fiaWov [x-qvvr^v yevea&ar vvvde 
<tov rd epya cpavepd yey evnrai k. t. A., you ought or you ought to have been 
(oportebat). X. C. 2. 7, 10. et /*«/ roivvv alffxpov n e^ieXXov epydaraaSrai, &dva- 
tov avr avrov irpo ai p er e ov r\v' vvv V a /xev Soice? KaXXiara /cal irpeTruSeaTepa 
yvvai$v elvai eiria-ravTai, a>s eowe k. t. A., mors praeferenda erat. So also with 
the Inf. X. C. 1. 3, 3. ovre yap &eo?s e<p7} KaXcos ex 61,/ ) ei ' TC »s peydXais 
frvo-lats /xaXXov ^ tcus ff/xiKpcus exaipov, f or he said it would not be proper for the 
gods, if, etc. Very often without an antecedent sentence, e. g. alo~ xpov %v 
ravra iroieiv, turpe erat, it would be base, would have been; e^r/v ravra iroieiv 
licebat, it would be lawful ; KaX&s €?%e. Comp. with the above the use of the 
Ind. in Latin, where the Subj. might have been expected, in such expressions as 
aequum, justum, rectum est, it would be proper, longum est, it would be tedious, and 
the participle in dus in the conclusion of a conditional clause, as Si Romae 
Cn. Pompeius privatus esset, tamen is erat deligendus. 

Rem. 4. In all the above expressions, however, dv can be used ; so also in 
Latin, the Subj. is sometimes found instead of the Ind. Dem. Phil. 1. 40, 1. 
el yap e'/c rod TrpoeXwXv&Sros XP^ V0V Ta Beovra ovroi o~vvef}ovXevo~av, ovSev av 
vfxas vvv edei fiovXeveafrai.. So also in Lat. the Subj. is used instead of the 
Ind. 

Rem. 5. The Pres. tense of xp~hi $ € h irposrjKei, tcaX&s exet, etc., is used of 
things which can yet take place. Comp. possum commemorare, which implies 
that I still can do the act, and pater am commemorare, which implies that I 
cannot do it. 

Rem. 6. *Kv is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind. 
of an historical tense of the verb KivSwve iv, to be in danger, to seem, since 
the verb by itself implies that the action expressed by the Inf. connected with it, 
did not take place ; for what is only in danger of occurring, actually does not 
occur. Th. 3, 74. 7) tt6Xis e Kivdvvevo'e iraaa diacp&aprjvai, el dve/xos eireyevero 
rfj cpXoyl iirtcpopos is avrriv, the whole city was or would have been in danger 
of destruction, if Aeschin. c. Ctes. 515, R. el ^ dpo/Aw fxoXis i^ecpvyo/xev els 
AeXcpovs, eicivSvveixrafiev diroXeo'&ai. So if in the apodosis, oXiyov, 
H ik pod, rdxa, nearly, almost, are joined with the Ind. of a historical tense 
in the concluding clause ; for what only nearly takes place, actually does 
not take place, hence the Ind. without dv is appropriate in both these cases. 
Plat. Symp. p. 198, C 67^76 ivbvfj.ovjj.evos, on avrbs ou% 6i6s t' eaofiai ovb" eyyvs 
rovrcov ovdev KaXbv elirelv, U7r' alax^^V 5 bxiyov dirob~ pas q> % 6 fx 77 v, eX TT7] e?%ov, 
I had almost fled for shame, if Without a protasis, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. nal itws 
8ia7T7)Sa)V avrca b 'Ittttos ir'nrrei els yovara, Kal fuicpov KaKelvov e£er pax"h^i- 
ffev. Comp. the Lat. prope (paene) cecidi, I came near falling. 

(/3) To denote that an action takes place (is repeated), in 
certain cases, and under certain circumstances. The his- 
torical tense in the principal clause is then commonly the 
Impf. The condition under which the action is repeated, 
is expressed by a subordinate clause with ei, ore, etc. and 
the Opt. ; the condition, however, is often omitted. 

El-n-ev dv, he was accustomed to say, he would say as often as this or that happened, 
as often as it was necessary, and the like. X. C. 4. 6, 13. el Be tis avrcp irepi tov 
avr iXeyoi, eVl rrjv vir6$reo-iv iir avrjy ev av irdvra rbv Xoyov, as often as 
one contradicted him, he would (he was accustomed to) carry back the whole argument 
to the original proposition, 1. 3, 4. et Sen. 86£etev amia (^coKparei) o"t)\x.alveG- 



§ 260.] MODAL ADVERB av. 361 

&ai trapa ra>v be&v, t)ttov av e it e £ cr & 77 Trapa. ra ffriuaivo/xeva Troiriffai, 3) et rt. 
avibv eirei&ev SSov Xafizlv rjyefj.6va Tv<p\bv — avrl fixiirovros. An. 2. 3, 11. e? ris 
avTcp ZokqIt] tS>v irpbs tovto T€Tay/u.4vciiv fiXaxeveiv, eiraiev &V, he would beat 
Mm. 1. 5, 2. ol fxev ovoi, eiret tis Siwkoi, TrpoSpafi6vres av 'iffTaff av, as often as 
any one pursued them, they would stop (the Plup. having the sense of the Impf. 
6 255. Rem. 3). 3. 4, 22., oxore 8e didffxoizv at •jrAeupai tqv TrXaiffiov, to fxiffov 
av i^eTrlfAirXa&av. 

3. With the Subjunctive, to represent the future conception, 
which the Greek expresses by the Sub. [J 257, 1, (a)], as con- 
ditional, and depending on circumstances. The following cases 
are to be distinguished : 

(a) The deliberative Subj. [§ 159, 1, (b)], takes av, though but 
seldom in direct, more frequently in indirect questions, when 
a condition is to be referred to. 

Tt 7tot' av ovv X4ya}fj.ev j (what shall we therefore say, if the thing is so 1 ) 
etc. PI. L. 655, c. iyco yap tovto, 5 UpoTaySpa, ovk wyjnv SioaKTov ilvai, vol 8e 
KiyovTi ovk iyja ottojs av air iff tS) (i. e. el ffb xiyeis), I know not howl could 
disbelieve it, if you say so, Prot. 319, b. *Av §' av rjfieis viKoajxev, XeXv/xivns tt?s 
yecpvpas ovx 'i^ovffiv enelvoi, oirov av (pvyccffiv,^S.. An. 2. 4, 20. Et Se ffoi /j.}) 
Soke?, ffKi^ai, iav (i. e. et av) toSg col [iaKkov ap iff ktj, C 4. 4, 12. 

(b) The Subj., which is often used in the Homeric language instead of the 
Put. Ind. (§ 259, Rem. 4), is frequently found with &v, which is to be explained 
in the same manner as with the Put. Ind. [No. 2, (1)]. Et 5e' zee /xr) dooao-iv, iyeb 
5e' kcv a.vTbs eXcofxai II. a, 137, then I myself will (without doubt) take it, less 
direct than the Put. Ovk av tol xP a ' La 'H-V K & a P ls > H. y, 54. 

(c) In subordinate clauses. In this case, av usually stands 
with the conjunction of the subordinate clause, or combines 
with the conjunction and forms one word. 

In this way originate iav (from el &v), iirav (from eVel av), orav (from tfre &v), 
6-rr6Tav (from SttSt^ 'av), irplv h>, %v& &v, obi &v, ov &v, oirov av, 0? &v, ottoi av, fj 
&v, onr) &v, obev &v, 6ir6bev £,-, etc., bs &v (quicunque or si quis),ohs olv, 6iro?os av, 
Zeros tv, oiroffos av, etc. In all these expressions, a possible assumption is de- 
noted ; it is assumed that something is possible in the future ; the future occur- 
rence of it depends upon the assumption of the speaker, i. e. the speaker 
assumes and expects that it will be, e. g. iav tovto Kiyps, if you say, shall say 
this (viz. according to my assumption, or as I expect you will), aixapT-fjcrn , you 
will be wrong. 

(4) With the Opt., but not with the Opt. Fut. 
(a) The Opt. with av must always be considered as the principal clause of a 
conditional sentence, even if the condition is omitted, e. g. si n ix ois i Sofys &v, 

31 



362 syntax. [$ 260. 

if you had anything, you would give it (you may perhaps have something, and 
then you may give it to me). The Attic writers in particular, use this mode 
of expression, to denote firmly established and definite opinions and views of 
anything, and even to denote actual facts with a degree of reserve, moderation 
and modesty. A negation is here expressed by ov(k). Her. 3, 82. avfybs evbs, 
rod aptcxTou (i. e. el cLpurros e'in) ovfiev ajxeivov av (pavetrj, nothing would seem 
better than. 7,184. ftvdpes av elev ev avrdlcn resraepes (Avpiddes Kal eiKOo~t, there 
may have been two hundred and forty thousand men. 5, 9. ye volt o 8' av irav-iv 
r£> ii.a.KpSi XP° V( ?-> a M might happen. X. Cy. 1, 2, 11. &r)p5ivres ovk av api&r-f]- 
ffatev, while hunting they would not breakfast = they do not breakfast. 13. 
eirei8av ra. nrevre Kal e%KOcnv err] hiareKecruaiv, eiriaav fiev av ovroi ir\e76v rt 
yeyovSres 7? irevrijKovra err] ano yeveas. PL Gorg. 502, d. Ar)ixr)yopla &pa ris 
i(TTtv 7} Troirp-iK-h. Call. &aiverai. Socr. Ovkovv tj pi)ropiK.)} Srj/xrjyopia av e^rj. 
By the Opt. with av, Homer [§ 339, 3, (a) (0)] and Herodotus often denote a 
supposition respecting something that is past. Her. 9, 71. ravra /xev Kal (p&6vci> 
av etvoiev, they might have said these things from envy. 1,2. e1r\cav b* a* 
ovroi KpyjTes, these might have been Cretans. 

Eem. 7. If the Opt. is used without &v, as §• 259, 3, (a), the action is ex- 
pressed with greater emphasis and definiteness, since the speaker has no refer- 
ence to the conditioning circumstances, which might prevent the realization of 
the thing conceived. Comp. pela Se6s y e&eA<av Kal rriXS&ev &v5pa cradoaai, 
the propitious deity, I think, can save, Od. 7, 231, and ffadxrai 'av, could, 
might save, if he wished. Hence the omission of ot,v in the freer language of 
poetry, is far more frequent than in prose, which has more regard to the actual 
relation of the things described. 

(b) So also the Opt. is used with av, as a more modest and 
mild expression of a command or request, since the thing de- 
sired is represented as dependent on the will of the person 
addressed and is thereby made conditional. Here also a nega- 
tion is expressed by ov(k). 

PI. Phaedr. 227, c. \eyots &v instead of \4ye (properly, you may speak, if you 
choose). Tim. 19, 0. aKOvoir av ^877 ra fiera ravra irepl rrjs ivoXireias, you 
might hear then, instead of hear then. S. El. 1491. x w P°^ s ^ v i y ou might go. II. 
#, 250. with a degree of irony, ®epo-?r — Xffx^o — / ov yap iyc)> <reo (prj/xl x e P €L0 '- 
repov fiporbv aXXov ejxjxevai — * rep ovk av fiacriXrjas ava crr6fi ex^v ay op ev- 
01s, Kai a-cpiv ovelSed re ir po<p spots, v6crrov re (pvXdcrff is! instead of fxr} 
ay6peve, etc., you should not harangue, nor be heaping up reproaches, etc. In the form 
of a question, X. Hier. 1, 1. ap" &v /xoi i&eXT}crais, 5 'lepwv, Si-nyqcracr&ai, a 
eiKbs eidevai ere fieXriov i/xov ; would you be inclined, viz., if I should ash you. With 
ov in the form of a question, II. e, 456. ov k av S77 toVS' &vdpa fxdxris epvaato 
[xereA&cbv ; might you not, could you not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him. 
In a sharper and more urgent tone as an exclamation, II. 0, 263. ovk av 87) 
p.01 afia^av e (poir At<r<r air e rdx^ra, ravra re irdvr eiri&elre, 'Iva irp^ffOdy 
fiev odolo ; would youmot get ready the chariot, if I commanded it 1 



$ 260.] MODAL ADVERB O.V. 363 

(c) The Optative with av has the same force in interrogative 
as in other sentences, and may commonly be translated by the 
auxiliaries can, could, would. 

II. cv, 367. *? ris <re TSoito . . , ris av 877 roi v6os efojy how would you then feel? 
H. t, 90. aAAa ri kcv p e£aifii; what could I do? S. Ph. 1393. rt Stjt av rj/xeTs 
Spu/nev: Dem. Phil. 1, p. 43, 10. Xiyerai ri Kaiv6v; yevoiro yap &v ri Kaivd- 
repov, 7) MaKedwv avrjp ' Afrnvaiovs KarawoKeixcov ; can there be any stranger news 
than — 1 

Ee3I. 8. Comp. 71-0? ris cpevyei • whither does one flee ? Arist. Plut. 438. iroi 
ris <pvyoi ; whither may one flee ? (more definite than with &v). Eur. Or. 598. 
7rot ris &v cpvyot ; whither would one flee ? whither could one flee ? where in the 
world could he flee ? S. Aj. 403. iroi tls ovv <pvyv ; whither shall one flee or is one 
to flee ? 

(d) The Dramatists, particularly, often express a wish, in the 
form of a question, by 7rws and the Optative with av, it being 
asked how something might, could, would take place under a 
given condition. 

Soph. Aj. 338. S> Zed, — it us av rov al/xvXurarov . . 6\eacras re\os bdvoifxi 
Kavr6s ; how might, could, would I die ? instead of, that I might die ! Eur. Ale. 
867. ttwj av o\oi finv; PI. Euthyd. 275, c. irios av Ka\S>s aoi 5 i-nyncr ai- 
fj.r] v ; how can I appropriately describe to you ? that I could ! 

Eem. 9. But the Opt. in itself, as the expression of a wish, does not take 
the conditioning adverb av [§ 259.3, (b)]. II. £ 281. &s ice 01 avbi ya7a x& vot 
is not properly expressed as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus (us = 
ovrus) the earth should then open for him. 

(5) The Inf. and Part, take av (k«Q, when the finite verb, which 
stands instead of the Inf. and Part., would take it : 

(a) The Inf. with &v after verba sentiendi and declarandi, consequently the Inf. 
Pres. and Aor. with &v, instead of the Ind. Pres. and Aor. with &v, or instead of 
the Opt. Impf. and Aor. with &v in direct discourse ; the same principle holds 
when the Inf. is used as a substantive. The Inf. Perf. with &v instead of the 
Ind. and Opt. Plup. with av, is more seldom. The Inf. Fut. with av is rare in 
Attic: instead of it the Inf. Aor. or even the Pres. with &v is commonly used. 

Ei t: clxev, e<pv, oovv ai & v ( Oratio recta : elf ri efyov, eSwKa &v), he said that 
if he had anything, he would have given it, dixit, se, si quid habuisset, daturum fuisse. 
Elf rt ix°h *<PVy Sovvai &v (Or. recta : etri ex 01 !* 1 ) $olv,v &v), dixit, se, si quid haberet, 
daturum, esse. 'E7W Soku 8e«a/cis a v Kara. t9js yrjs tear aSuvai r/Siov, f) 6<p&rj- 
vai ovro) raireivSs, X. Cy. 5. 5, 9 (Or. recta: Bckolkis av air o&dvo i/it ijSiov, tf 
6<p&elnv), methinks I would rather sink ten times beneath the earth, than to be seen in 
this humble condition. 'Hyovfxai . . ovk av aKpirovs avrovs airio\o\ e vat, aAAa 
rr,v irposrjKovcrav SiKvv 5 e Sick evai, Lys. 27, 8 (Or. recta : ovk av cijroAwXf- 
av — i8 edu> kg o~ av &v). Olfiai yap ovk av axapitrrevs fiot 'e^eiv, I think you 
uK>uld not be unthankful to me, if I entreated the king, etc., (Or. recta : ovk hv axa- 



364 SYNTAX. [$ 261 

pio-rws 1*01 exoire or o-xot-nre, but not Qoire, see No. 4). "Oaw yap peify 
Svvap.iv e%ei ^ o-pXVy Toirovru> fiaXXov av r\yi\ffaTO avr^v Kal Kar airX-fj i-eiv robs 
iroXiras, R. L. 8, 3. ITws exeis -n-pbs -rb £&4\eiv av Uvat &KXnros eirl Se?irvov; 
(the same as 7ra)s ex^is Trpbs rovro '6ri e&e'Aots av Uvai olkXtjtos eVl b~e?irvov ;) 
PL Symp. 174, b. Et olv x4yoip.i, eS oW, on Snpi.'nyope'iv &v fie <palr]s,~Pl 
R. 350, e. 

Rem. 10. In Latin the conditioned Inf. is expressed as follows : 
ypdcpeiv dv = scripturum esse, ysypa(p4vai dv = scripturum fuisse, 
ypdipai dv = (a) scripturum fuisse, or (b) as Pres., scripturum esse, 
ypd^eiv dv = scripturum fore. 

(b) The Participle with dv after verba sentiendi, or when the Participle takes 
the place of an adverbial subordinate clause. The same principles hold here 
as with the Inf. The Fut. Part, with dv is rare in Attic Greek (the reading is 
commonly doubtful when it occurs) : instead of the Put. Part., the Aor. or 
even the Pres. with dv, is generally used. 

Her. 7, 15. €i>plo~Ka> 5e a>5e av yivS/xeva ravra, et Xafiois ttjv eptsrjv o~K£vi\v 
{reperio, sic Tiaec futura esse, si sumas vestes meas). X. C. 2. 2, 3. ai iroXeis 
eVl to?s p.zylcrrois aZiKT)ixacri £r\p.iav frdvarov TreiroirjKao'iv, u>s ovk av fielCovos kolkov 
<p6@a) tt)v aZiKiav iravcovr e s (existimantes' se non gravioris mali metu injuriam 
COERCITUROS FORE, thinking that they could deter from crime by the fear of no 
greater evil). Th. 6,38. ovre ovra, ovre av yevS/xeva Xoyoiroiovo~iv (i. e. & 
otire iarlv, ovr av y 4vo iro, they fabricate what neither is nor will be). Isocr. 
Phil. 133. Ev fofri (jLTjSev dv [xs rovrcov e m x^i-p^o" avr a ce irel&eiv, et 8vvao~- 
reiav fxovov Kal irXovrov koopcav e'| avrcov yevnaSfievov ( = on e7re%€ tpajtra &v), 
PI. Phil. 52, c. 8iaKeKpl/j.€&a x^P^ rc * s Te Kabapas ySovas Kal ras crx^Sbv a-Ka&dp- 
rovs op&as av A e%^ « I eras ( = Kal a? o-%e5by aKa&aproi op&Zs av Aex&etef). 
So, also, with the case absolute : X. An. 5. 2, 8. ecrKoweTro, Tr6repov eft] Kpelrrov 
airdyeiv Kal robs 8ia/3e/377KdVas, r) Kal robs bivXiras 5ta/3t/3a£e«', us aX6vros av 
tov x u> P >l0v (= vo/xlfav, '6tl rb x <a p' l0V aXoin dv). 



$ 261. Position and Repetition of av. "Av without a 

Ve r b . 

1. "With the combination mentioned in 260, (3), c, as os dv, trplv dv, small 
particles like Se', r4, p.4v, yap, sometimes come between, e. g. os 5" av. 

2. As av represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be joined 
with the predicate, e. g. Xeyoipu &v, zXeyov av ; yet it commonly follows that 
member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. PL Crito. 53, c. 
ko\ ovk oXei &o-xitfJ-ov*av (pavelcr&ai rb rod 'ZwKpdrovs irpayfta. Hence it is 
regularly joined to such words also as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to 
negative adverbs and interrogatives, e. g. ovk &v, ovb" &v, oviror 'dv, ovdeiror &v, 
etc. — ris &v, ri dv, ri 5' dv, ri Srjr &v, ttws dv, irobs yap &v, ap dv, etc. ; — also 
to adverbs of place, time, manner, and other adverbs, which, in various ways 
modify the expression contained in the predicate and define it more exactly, 



$ 262. j ATTRIBUTIVE CONSTRUCTION. 365 

e. g. ivrav&a av, t6t &v, cik6tcos av, Xacos &v, Tax *v, fxaAiffT &v, tjkhtt av, fi6\is 
&v, crxo^fl dv, paStcos av, paar &v, rdx^T av, atyob'p av, TjBecos av, Kav (instead 
of Kal &v, etiam, re/), etc. 

Eemask 1. In certain constructions, the &> belonging to the Opt. is re- 
moved from the dependent clause, and joined with "the principal clause ; this 
is particularly the case in the phrase, ovk old' av el PL Tim. 26, b. iyk yap, 
h jxev x&es rjKovcra, ovk av olda el SvvaifJLTjv airavra iv fxvrj/xri TvaAiv Aafie7v. 

Bem. 2. In certain parenthetic sentences, the &v belonging to the Opt. is 
placed first; thus particularly, av ris eiiroi, <pair\. PL Phaed. 87, a. ri ovv (,) Uv 
(pair] 6 Koyos (,) en a-niarets ; 

3. "Kv is very often repeated in the same sentence (k4 very seldom). The 
reason of this is two-fold : 

(a) It is used once at the beginning of the sentence, in order to show, in 
the outset, that the predicate is conditional. This is particularly the case, 
when the principal sentence is divided by intervening subordinate clauses, or 
when several words precede the conditioned verb to which &v belongs. &st 
$.v, el a&evos Aafioifxi 5 77 Acoo'aifx av oV avTols cppovw, S. El. 333. 

(b) The second reason is a rhetorical one. "Av is joined with the word 
which requires to be made emphatic. If the rhetorical emphasis belongs to 
several words in one sentence, &v can be repeated with each. But besides this, 
&v can be again placed after the conditioned verb to which it properly belongs. 
PL Apol. 35, d. a a (pus yap &v, el Tre'iSoi/xi vfxas, &eovs av 5i5acr/coi/u fx}) 
riye?o-&ai vuas elvai. Eur. Troad. 1244. acpavels av ovres ovk av v/xvrj^e'iiJ.ey 
av Movo-ais. 

Bem. 3. Homer sometimes joins the weaker k4 with &v, in order to make 
the conditionality or contingency still more prominent. II. v, 127, sq. 'iaravTo 
<pd\ayyes . . , as ovr &v Kev "hp-qs 6v6aairo /xere^wv, ovre K 'h^vair). 

4. "Av is very frequently found with a conjunction or a relative without a 
verb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context ; thus especially 
&s &.v, SiSTrep av el, irws yap av, ircas 5' ovk &v, osirep &v and the 
like. $of3ov/j.evos, usirep av el na7s (i. e. &sirep av (pofio?ro, el iraTs eft?), PL 
Gorg. 479, a. 



CHAPTEB n. 

§262. The Attributive Construction. 

Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea 
contained in the substantive to which they belong, e. g. 
to Ka\6 v pohov, 6 ^ e 7 a 9 irah. The attributive may be : 

a. An adjective or participle, e. g. to kclXov pohov, to 

^ dWo v a\feo<$ \ 

31* 



366 syntax. [$ 263. 

b. A substantive in the genitive, e. g. ol rod BivBpov 
Kapiroi ; 

c. A substantive with a preposition, e. g. rj 7r p o 9 rrjv 

d. An adverb, e. g. ol vvv av^ipamoL ; 

e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Kpolcros, 6 fiao-LXevs. 



§ 263. Ellipsis of the Substantive to which the 
Attributive belongs. 

When the substantive which is to be more fully explained by the attributive, 
contains a general idea, or one which can be easily supplied from the context, 
or is indicated by some word of the sentence, or, by frequent usage in a particu- 
lar connection, may be supposed to be known, then the substantive, as the 
less important member in the attributive relation, is often omitted, and the 
adjective or participle becomes a substantive. Substantives which are often 
omitted with attributive adjectives, are : dv&panros, avfrpa-rroi, avnp, avdpes, ywf], 
yvvcutces, xp^/xa, xp^arcc, irpayixa, Trpdy/xara, rip-ipa, yrj, x^P a -> f^o7pa, 686s, X €t V> 
yvcv/j.7], \prj(pos, T^x vy \i ""oA-e/ioy, etc. ; those omitted with the attributive genitive are : 
•jroT?7p, lJ.r]Tr]p, vlos, ttcus, frvydrrip, a$e\cp6s, au-fjp {husband), yvvr] (wife), oiKia, 
oJkos, x^P ct j 7V {land). The substantive is omitted with the following classes 
of words : 

a. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun, and participle. 

(a) Such as denote persons : ol SrvnToi, mortales; ol <ro<pol, ol yeLvdfieuoi (instead 
of yoveTs) : ol %x ovT * s i the rich; ol <pv\a.TTovres (<pvXa.K.ss) ; ol SiicdfavTes, judges ; 
ol \4yovres, orators, etc. 

(/3) Such as denote names of things : (a) appellatives : ra 7)(xeT<zpa (xpwa-Ta), res 
nostrae; ra ifj.d, res meae, everything lohicli relates to me; to. naXd, res pulchrae; ra 
Kaicd, mala (§ 243, 4), t] vcrrepaia, r\ iiriovaa, ■)] irpdiTT], Sevrepa, etc. (r}fx4pa) ; rj 
•n-oAe^ia (x<f>pa), the enemy's country ; tj <piAia, a friendly country ; ?j oIkov/x4vt] (yrj), 
the inhabited earth ; t\ frvvdpos (yrj), a desert ; r\ ev&e?a (686s)] tV Tax^o"rr\v, quam 
celerrime; tt\v Ko"r\v (/xoTpav) airoStdovcu ; 7] TreKpioixevi] (/xo7pa); tj Se^id,7j apicrepd 
(X^p)'i V viKwcra ( yv<x>\}.y] ) ; t)}v ivavrlav (^Tjcpov) ri&ecr&ai; r] prjTopitcf) (r£x vr l)' 

(b) Abstracts : to Ka\6v, to ayc&6v, or Taya0r6v, the beautiful, the good; to 
€vti>x4s, good fortune; rb uvaiaSriTov, want of feeling ; to koivov, the common- 
wealth (e. g. tS>v ^afjLioov) ; rb Srapcrovv, confidence. 

(c) Collective nouns denoting persons: rb ivavrlov, the enemy ; to vtv-iikoov, 
the subjects. Adjectives in -ik6v especially belong here, e. g. to ttoKitikov, the 
citizens; t6 ottMtikov, the heavy armed; to o\k€tik6v, the servants; to 'EKXrjviKou, 
to fiapfiapiKoi', rb IttttlkSu, etc. The plural of adjectives of this ending is often 
used to denote a number, collection, or series of single events, e. g. to Tpa'iKa, 
the Trojan war ; to, 'EAArjviKa, the Grecidn history; to, vavTind, naval war, but also 
naval affairs. 



§ 264.] . ATTKIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 367 

b. The attributive genitive also is used without the governing substantive, 
e. g. 'AXe^avSpos, 6 $iAiirirov (vlos), Mcua rj 'ArXavTos (frvyaT-np) ; then with the 
prepositions ev, els and e/c with the Gen. of a person to denote his abode, e. g. 
iv adov (ofacv) elvcu: els qSov (oJkov) eT&e'tv ; els. 5i5acr/coAwv (poirav, to go to the 
toucher's; els TlKdruvos (poirav, ire/xireiv, to go or send to Plato' 's ; 4k didaaKdkcov 
airaWdTTea&ai, PL Protag. 326, c. to leave school; els ttjv Kvpov (yrjv) eXStetv] 
to t?is rvxys, the events of fortune ; ra ttjs iroAews, the affairs of state ; to tov 
7ro\e/u.ov, the whole extent of the war ; ra ' ' ASr\vaicov <ppove7v, ab Atheniensium par- 
tibus stare; ra ttjs opyTJs, ra ttjs ip.ireiplas, rb to>v i-n-i^rv/niuv (that which pertains 
to anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc.)-; to rav iraldwv,the custom of boys; 
rb ru>v aXteeav. 

c. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e. g. ol vvv, ol Tore, ol 
naXai, ol eV^aSe (av&pwiroi), ret o'ikol (irpdypiaTa), res domesticae, 7] e^rjs, (r)/j.epa), 
the following day, etc. 

d. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposition 
3\ which it is governed, e. g. ol Hat? rifj-as, ol e^^jxeov, our contemporaries ; — ol 
apL(pi or irepi nva, e. g. TiAaTuva, signifies (a) a person with his companions, 
followers, or scholars ; cl a/upl Tleio-ia-rparov, Pisistratus and his troops ; ol a/xcpl 
SaArju, Thales and other philosophers of his school ; ^Apa Aeyeis tt)v twv &euv 
Kplcriu, V ol irepl KeKpova 81 aperr^v k'tcplvav, which Cecrops and his tribunal 
on account of their excellence, decided, X. C. 3. 5, 10. — (b) more seldom the com- 
panions, followers, or scholars alone, without the person named. — Further, ol 
avv nvi, ol fxerd twos, the followers, etc. of any one ; ol vir6 tivi, the subjects of 
any one ; ol airo twos, asseclae, or descendants of one ; ol ev a/rrei ; ol irepl cpiAoao- 
<plav ; ol irepl t)]u Sri)pav ; ol a/j.(pl Tbv irSAefxov, etc.: — to. napd twos, intelligence 
respecting any one, or commands of any one; — rb ko.t e/xe, rb eV e/xe, as far as in 
my power, as far as in me lies. 

§ 264. a. Attributive Adjective. 

1. The attributive adjective (participle, adjective pronoun 
and numeral), expresses a quality which belongs to an object, 
as the beautiful and blooming rose. On the agreement of the 
adjective with the word which it defines, see § 240. 

Remake: 1. The participles AeyS/xevo* and icaAov/xevos are used, where the 
Latin has qui dicitur, vacatur, quern dicunt, vocant, etc., and the English the 
phrase so-called, as it is called, are called, etc., e. g. AaKeScu/xoviot rbv lepbv KaAov- 
fievov ir6Ae/xov eCTpdrevaav (the Sacred war, as it is called, or the so-called Sacred 
wur), Th. 1, 112. 'S.kottwv, '6irws 6 KaAov fxev o s virb t&v crocpio-Twv Koafxos ecpv 
(the k6q- fxos as it is called by the sophists), X. C. 1. 1, 11. 

Rem. 2. It has already been stated (§ 245, Rem. 5), that the adjectives 
&xpos, p.4<ros, ecxo-Tos, must in certain cases be translated into English by 
substantives. 

Rem. 3. Many personal nouns which denote an employment, station or 
age, arc treated as adjectives, and the word airr\p is joined with them, if the 
man is to be considered in relation to his employment, station or age ; but 



368 " syntax. . [$ 264. 

the word av-hp is omitted, if the man is considered as merely performing 
the duties of a particular office or employment. Thus av^p fxdvTis signifies a 
man who is by profession a prophet, and pavris without b.vr\p, a man who, for 
the time being, acts as a prophet ; thus av})p fiao'iAevs, avfyp rvpawos, av^p ttoi- 
pA)v, avrjp pr)Tcop, avr)p irpeafivTqs, avT]p veavias, ypavs yvvr\, etc.; also in the 
respectful form of address among the Attic orators and historians, e. g. dudpes 
diKaarai, avBpes arparicorai. So likewise with national names, e. g. av^p ^KStT)- 
vcuos, 'ApSripirris. This usage is still more extensive in poetry. See Larger 
Grammar, Part II. § 477. 

2. When two or more attributive adjectives belong to a sub- 
stantive, the relation is two-fold. The relation is: (a) coordinate, 
when each adjective is equally a more full explanation of the 
substantive ; then the adjectives are commonly connected by 
/cat, re — *at; "where there are several adjectives, the con- 
nective is used only before the last ; (b) subordinate, when a 
substantive with one of the adjectives forms, as it were, a 
single idea, and is more definitely denned by another adjective. 
In this case there is no connective between the two adjec- 
tives. The subordinate relation occurs particularly when pro- 
nouns, numerals, adjectives of time, place, and material are 
joined with other adjectives. 

2w/c,f!KT77S aya&bs Kal ao<pbs avi)p ?jv. TloWol aya&ol a'vo'pes or iroWol 
aya&o\ Kal crocpol dydpes. HoWa Ka\a epya. 'O e /xb s zrcupos <rocp6s. 
Ovtoj 6 avrip aya&os. Tpeis aya&ol 'dudpes. Tb vcpwrov KaXbu irpayfia. 
Od. », 322, sq. icrrbs U7jbs eeiKoaopoLo fxeXaivns. 

Rem. 4. The numeral iroXXoi is used in Greek, like multi in Latin, 
generally in the coordinate relation, and in this way the idea of plurality is 
made emphatic, while the English commonly uses the subordinate, e. g. iroXXa 
Kal KaXa epya, multa et joraeclara facinora. The Greek and Latin is many and 
noble deeds, the English commonly many noble deeds. 

Rem. 5. In the Greek, the attributive adjective very frequently takes the 
force of a substantive, and the substantive to which the adjective properly 
belongs, is put in the attributive genitive. Here the following cases are to 
be distinguished : 

a. The substantive stands with the plural adjective which takes the gender 
of the substantive, e. g. ol xpvo'rol tS>v aj/frpwiroev ; rd crnovdcua tu>v npay/xdrcav. 

b. The adjective which becomes a substantive is sometimes in the Neut. 
Sing., sometimes also in the Neut. PI. Th. 1. 118, ol 'A&rjvcuoi eirl fieyo 
exwp7j«Taj/ Svvdfxecos (= eVl fieyaXrjv Swa/xiu), had attained a high degree of 
■power. Thus many phrases with irdv, e. g. els ird.v naicov {in omne genus 
calamitatis) a<piKve7(T^rai.] ev -rravrl kcikov elvai] els irav TrpoeX-qXv&e p.ox&V pi as. 
Moreover, the Neut. pronoun is very frequently joined with the genitive, espe- 
cially in prose. Th. 1,49. £ > vveiveo~ov is rovro dvdyKi)s, to this degree of 
necessity. X. An. 1. 7, 5. £v toiovtw rov klvSvuov. Dem. Ph. 1,51. els 
ToSS- 5 v fi pews eXrjXv&ei/. 

c. The substantive is made to depend upon the adjective in the Sing, which 
takes the gender of the substantive which it governs, instead of being in the 



V 264.] - ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 369 

Neut., e. g. 7] iroXKr) rrjs neAonwi/^crou instead of rb ttoAv rrjs FT. The word 
q/uio-vs is most frequently used in this manner, often also iroAvs, irAeiwv, 
irKelcrro s and other superlatives, e. g. 6 ^(xktvs tov xp^ov: iirl rfj ij/xicrela 
rrjs yvs. X. Cy. 4. 5, 1. nefxireTe rod a'nov rbv rifiiavv, rav &pTwv tovs 
j) fit o~ e is. Th. 7, 3. T7/j/ irKei(TTT]v ttjs o~r panels Trapera^e : SO ttoKA^j ttjs 
X<*>pas, rbv Tr\e7(TT0v rod xp^ov. Th. 1, 2. ttjs 777s tj apiorrr] del ras /xera- 
fioAas t&v oiKTiropcav e?x^« 

3. The Greek, like the Latin, frequently uses the attributive 
adjective to define the subject or object, not by itself, but only 
in reference to the predicate. In this way the designations 
of place, time, number, also a reason, condition, and manner 
can be expressed by adjectives, which agree with a substan- 
tive in gender, number, and case. 

a. Adjectives of place and order. Od. (p, 146. t£e /j.vxoiTaros aid in- 
stead of eV ixvxoLTarco. Also, itpwros, irp6repos (of two), vararos, vcrrepos (of 
two), jJLtcros, reAeuTcuos, irXayios, fierecopos, &Kpos, &vpa?os, SraAdao-ios, etc. S, 
Ant. 785. (poircts inrepirSvT 10 s instead of inrep Tbv iz6vrov. Th. 1, 134. 'Ivc 
fj.T] viraiSpios raXaiirwpoir}., that he might not suffer in the open air. Here belong 
also ttus, eKatrroSi knar epos, &fX(po>, afjupor e po s, etc. § 246, 5, 6 and 7. 

b. Adjectives of time, e. g. 6\pios, op&pios, £a>driv6s, ko-xepios, vvx i05 > {.izvovvktios, 
bepivos, x& l C° s > iapiv6s, x^epiJ'Js', etc., especially those in -a7o s, e. g. Sei/Tepcuoy, 
TpiTcuos, etc., XP^ V10S (after a longtime), etc. II. a, 497. r)epi7j 5' avefin /x4yau 
ovpav6u instead of fipi, she went early. X. An. 4. 1, 5. aKonatovs SteAfrelV 
rb ireS'iov, to pass through the plain in the dark. TerapTcuos, tt e/xirr a?os c\(pl- 
K6to, he came on the fourth, fifth day ; xptvio* ?i?&ev, after a long time. 

c. Adjectives of manner and other relations, e. g. 6£vs, raxvs, alcpviZios, 
PpaOvs, inrocrTrovdos, 6.0-iroydos, '6pKios; kte&v, i&eAovcrios, &kcov, &okvos, i^ehouriis 
riavxos ; (rvxvos, iroAvs, a&p6os, ttvkvSs, o~irdvios, fxouos, e.g. vir6<Tir ov8o 1 air-pe- 
aau = i/Trb enrovhais, they wend away under a truce. Th. 1, 63. tovs veKpovs 
uTroffirSuSovs a-rrzb'oo-av rots TloTidaiaTais, they gave up the dead under the truce. 

Rem. 6. But when the qualifying words cannot at the same time express 
a quality of the subject or object, but belong solely to the predicate, the 
adverb must be used, e. g. icaAas aSeis, you sing beautifully (not KaAbs aSets, 
for the person who sings beautifully, is not necessarily beautiful). When the 
Greeks expressed such designations of place and time, as properly belong to the 
predicate, by adjectives, it is to be explained as resulting from their vivid mode 
of conception. For example, ecirepios ^A&e, vespertinus venit, he came (as it 
were) enveloped by the evening. 

Rem. 7. The distinction between irpwros (irpSrepos, vo-repos, vo~Ta- 
ros), irpwT7)v [tt por 4pau, v ff t ipav, v a TdTt]v), and irpwrov (Trp6re- 
pov, v(TTepoi>, vo-rarov or vct ara), jx6vos, fiSvrjv and fx6vov t^v 
fVio-roAV eypaype, appears when the sentence is analyzed; irpuros, jxovos 
mean,/ am the first, the last, the only one of all who has writ tat litis letter, like 
PRIMUS scripsi ; TrpuTTju, v ar dr T)i>, fx6vi)v tt\v iiri(TroKi)V eypa^a, this letter 
ims the first, the last, the ou/y one I have uritten; the adverbs irpGiTov, irp6Tspov y 
etc., on the contrary, are used in stating several actions of the same subject, in 
the order in which they occurred, e. g. 'O 7rcus irpwrov p.\v t)]v 4m<TTo\r]r 



370 syntax. [M 265, 266. 

eypatyev, erreira eTraiffev, vffrara 5e air-pet; or irpoorov, vtrrarov, for tJie 
first, last time; so the adverb [xovov places the predicate in opposition to 
another predicate, /a.6vov eypatya t)]v iiriaroX^v, I have only written the letter % 
(not sent it). 



h 265. Attributive Genitive. 

The attributive genitive will be considered in treating the 
genitive, k 275, Rem. 5. 

h 266. c. Apposition* 

1. A substantive is said to be in apposition, when it is put 
in the same Case with another substantive or with a substan- 
tive personal pronoun, and even with a personal pronoun implied 
in a verb, for the sake of defining these words more fully ; if 
the appositive denotes a person, it is also put in the same gen* 
der and number, as the word which it defines, comp. § 240, 1. 
An appositive referring to two or more substantives is put in 
the plural, when it is a common noun. 

Kvpos, o fiao~iAevs. T6/j.vpis, 7} fia<rl\eia. 'E/cetpos, 6 /3 aff tAetW. X. Cy 
5.2, 7. tt\v frvyarepa, deivov ti icdWos Kal /xeye^os, i^dywv w8e eTirev. Th. 
1, 137. &efxiffTOK\rjs r\KOi irapb. ere, I, Themistocles, have come. Luc. D. D. 
24,2. d Se Maias rrjs 'ArAavros Siaicov ovfiai avrols (instead of iyk 6 
Malas sc. viSs). 

2. When a substantive is in apposition with a possessive 
pronoun, it is put in the Gen., since the possessive pronouns 
take the place of the Gen. of the personal pronouns. 

'E/ubs (= i/xov) rod a&hlov filos, the life of me, wretched, a&Xiov being here in 
opposition with i/x6s. Ta/xa ( = ra i/xd) rod Svffr-fivov kcskb, the evils of me, un- 
happy one ! 277 rrjs KaA\(<rT7}s ev/xopepia, thy gracefulness, most beautiful one ! 
In English, as the examples show, such a Gen. with the possessive may be 
often expressed by an exclamation, e. g. '"EXeaipca rbv cbv rov a&Aio v fSlov, 1 
pity thy life, wretched one I or by an accessary clause, e. g. I pity thy life, thou who 
art so miserable. So too the Gen. is put in apposition with adjectives which stand 
in the place of the attributive Gen. PI. Ap. 29, d. 'A&ij vaios &u ir6\ews 
rrjs fieylo-T-ns (instead of 'ASyvcov, TrSXecos), 7r6\ews being here in apposi- 
tion with 'AS-nvcuos which is equivalent to 'Afr-nvcot/. On the expressions d 
•)]fj.eT€pos, v/xerepos, ccperepos avrwv irarrjp, see the remarks on the pronouns. 

Remark 1. On the ellipsis of the words vlos, ttcus, S-vydrrjp, ywfj, etc. in 
apposition, see § 263 ; on the use of the article in apposition, see § 244, Kem. 6. 
In the phrases 6vo/xd iari /xoi, ovojxa rl^rjfii (rifrefiai) rivi and the like, the name 



$ 266.] apposition. 371 

itself, as an appositive, is put in the same Case, e. g. "Ovo/xd £<rrl fioi 'Ayd&a>v % 
my name is Agaihon. 'O irais eAeyej/ ovofxa elvai eavraj "'AydSeva. 'EvTav&a fy 
ir6\is (xzydXT], ov o\xa V avrfj Kopaurtj, X. An. 1. 5,4. ib. 2. 4, 13 and 25. Tavrri 
rfj tpvouda ib-4/j.e^a iroAiv ovojjlol, PI. Ep. 369, c. {to this community ice gave 
the name city, culled it a city). 'Av7?p TreV^s Kal drnj.0Tucbs eKT-r\(xaro rrji/ /3cwnA.t/ca>Ta- 
Tr\v koX &eioTaT7)v it pos-qyopiav, rbv Ai k a iov, Plut. Ar. 2. (received the 
surname,the Just). (The Gen. also is used in the same phrase : 3>«kiW inTyo-aTo 
tt]v rod Xpr)<rT ov npos-nyopiav, Plut. Ph. 10. The Nom. also occurs: 
'Avrjp yevd/xtvos Trposei\r}(pe ttjv tqou Trovt)pSov koivt]V iirwvv p.iav <rv Kocpdvr r) s, 
Aesch. f. 1. § 27.) See 269, Rem. 3. 

Eem:. 2. A substantive in the Nom. or Ace. sometimes stands in apposition 
with the whole sentence : in the Nona., when the appositive expresses a judg- 
ment on the whole sentence ; in the Ace, when the appositive denotes a thing 
accomplished, a result, a purpose, or object, e. g. Eur. Or. 496. eVel yap £%eirvev- 
trev 'Ayaue/xveov fiiov, irX-qy els &vyarpbs T7js ifxris (caesus a Jilia mea) virep Kapa, 
— a%<rxi<TTOv ipyovl II. a>, 735. ^ ris 'Axaiwv (avrbu) ptyei x* l P<>s eAaw 
airb irvpyov, Kvypbv 6\e&pov. Eur. Or. 1105. 'E\evqv Kravo^jxev, Mei/eAew 

KVTT7]V TTlKpUV (i. C «STe zlvai \VTT7)V ITLKpdu). AeSCh. Ag. 225. 6TA7J &VT7]p 

yevecr&ai Svyarp6s, ttoK^/jlccv apooydv l&sre zlvai apuydv). In like manner, a 
Part, or adjective is sometimes added as a clause in apposition to a whole sen- 
tence, e. g. Tlei&ei fA7roAAa>j/) 'Ope<TT7]v fx-nTep' , H] cr<p' iydvaro, KTtivai, irpbs 
ovx 'diravras svKAsiav <pepov (a deed that brings no fame), Eur. Or. 30. 
Kal $7] irapzhai (solutum est) o-a>/xa, <rol fxkv ob <pi\ov Suppl. 1070. 

Eem. 3. The Inf. also is sometimes used as a clause in apposition with a 
word, especially with demonstrative and relative pronouns, so as to define 
more exactly an idea before expressed in a general manner. Ov yap iirl 
rovrcp KodTjTat 6 Si/ccwrTTjs, iirl r aJ Kar a%apt (^trd-cu Ta 5'iKaia PI. Apol. 
35, c, the judge does not sit for this, mz,,for the purpose of compromising justice for 
favor. A A 877 irposreraKTai rf} /jLavTuci}, in icr kott e?v tovs 'Epcaras Kal lar- 
peveiv, Symp. 188, c. 

3. With a substantive, expressing the idea of plurality, one 
substantive or even several substances denoting the parts of 
that plurality or whole, are often put in apposition, instead of 
being in the Gen. according to the natural construction. This 
may be called distributive or partitive apposition. Here belong 
especially the words e/cao-To?, e/caVcpo?, 71-as (every one), ol //,«/ — 
ol Se, aAAos aAAov (alius aliiun, one this, another that, one another, 
or mutually), aAAos aWoSev {alius aliunde, one from one i^lace, 
another from another, or one on one side, another on another). The 
subject, which denotes the plurality or whole, may be implied in 
the verb. This kind of apposition is used when the whole is to 
be expressed with the greater emphasis, while with the Gen 
the parts are to be made more prominent. 

Od. o, 424. 87? T($Te KaKKeiovrcs efiav oIkSuSc znaffTos {in swim quisque 
domum sese contulerunt, they went each one to his own house). Her. 3, 158. iyavov 
Iv ttj kw'vTov rd^L eKacrros {in svo quisque ordine manscrunt). Th. 1, 89. olKiai 
ai juec TroWal (= rut/ oIkiSiv iroWal) iireirTUKeffau, o\lyai 8e Trtpiij(Tai>. X. 
R. L. 6. 1. iv Ta7s &\Acus Tr6A(<ri tu>v kavrov tuaaros Kal iraiSwv Kal oIkctwv koX 



372 syntax. [$ 267. 

Xp~np& T03V &px oV(T lv ( sw * s quisque liberis imperant). Cy.3.1,3. St edidpaafco v 
tfSr] enaffTOS eVl ra eavrov, fiov\6pevoi to ovr a. iiarod&i/ 7roie?a&ai. C. 2. 7, 1, 
toj airopias ye twv cpiAcav ras fihv Si' 'dyvoiau iireiparo (^ocKparris) yvwpr} 
aKe?ff&ai, ras Se di evSeiav SiSdaKcav Kara. Svvapuv aWrjXois eVap/ceTV. PL 
Charm. 1 53, 6. Kai pe &s elSov elsi6vra e'£ airposSoKTjTov, ev&vs Tr6ppa>&ei' 77 cr 7r a - 
£ovro &XX05 &A\o&€f (they welcomed me one from one place, another from 
another). Still, in this case the verb sometimes agrees, not with the appropri- 
ate subject, but with the words enao-Tos, iras. X. An. 1. 8, 9. -navres outol Kara 
e&VT) ev ivXaicrica ir\-f}pei av&p&irwv eicacrrov e&vos iiropev ero. The parti- 
tive appositive is often accompanied by a participle. X. Cy. 3. 1,25. evioi 
<po@ovp.evoi, p.)] Arj<p&evTes airofrdvaxriv, virb rod <p6fiov nvpoairo^tv^o'Kovaiv, ol p.ev 
p iirr ovvr e s eavrovs, ol Se air ay %o p. e v o i, oi Se airoccparropevoi. 
Her. 3, 82. avrbs enaffros flovA6 p.evo s icopvcpcuos eluai yvu>prjai re vmav, 
is e%3-ea peydha aAXfaoiai air iKveovrai. Here belong those passages, in 
which, after the principal subject, there is another subject in the Xom. with a 
Part, connected with it ; the latter subject, however, making a part of the prin- 
cipal subject. Th. 4, 73. (ol 'A&Tjvaloi) 7)o-i>x a ( 0,/ i Xoyi^opevoi Kal ol 
etceivcov err paryyol prj avriirakov elvai ff(plo~i rbv k'ipSwov, the Athenians kept 
iilence, since even their generals, namely, of the Athenians, supposed that, etc. 

Kem. 4. In the same manner in poetry, especially in Epic, but very seldom 
in prose, two objects (commonly in the Ace.) are joined to one verb; the first 
of these denotes the entire thing, the other, that part of it to which the action 
of the vei'b is particularly directed, both being in the same Case. This figure 
may be called <r%7? pa icafr oXov Kal p.epos, i. e. a construction by which 
the part is put in apposition with the whole, instead of the word denoting the 
whole being in the Gen. and governed by the word denoting the part. If the 
whole expresses a plurality, a distributive apposition may take place. TloUv 
a e eiros <pvyev epnos bS6vra>v, Od. a, 64, what a word escaped thee, thy lips! 
where epKos the part is in apposition with ere, the whole. Tpwas Se rpSpos 
alvbs vir7)Av&e yvta eKacrrov, II. v, 44. 'Axcuo?crtj/ Se fieya c&evos epfiaA* 
e KaffTCti KapSirj &XXr)Krov iroXepi^eiu rjSe paxeo~&ai y II. £, 152, sq. 



CHAPTER III. 

§ 267. The Objective Construction. 

As the attributive construction (§ 262) serves to define 
the subject, or in general, a substantive idea, more fully, so 
the objective construction serves to complete the predicate, or 
define it more fully. By object, is to be understood here 
everything which, as it were, stands over against (pbjectum 
est) the predicate, i. e. everything which stands as the com- 
plement of the predicate and defines it more fully : (a) 



§ 268.] THE cases. 373 

the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their Cases, (c) the Infini- 
tive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. 

Remark. The object completes the idea of the predicate, when the predicate 
necessarily requires an object, e. g. 'Eiri&v/j.S) ttjs aperris. BovAo/ulcu ypdcpeiv. 
The object defines the idea of the predicate, when the object is not necessarily 
required, e. g. Tb poSov av&e? £v rep ktjttu). The predicate is thus defined by 
the specifications of time, place, degree, means, manner, and instrument. 



§268. I. The Cases. 

1. All the relations, which- the Greek denotes by the 
Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, were originally consid- 
ered relations of space. 

2. The action of a verb, with which the substantive 
object is connected, is contemplated under the idea of 
motion. In this manner the object of the verb appears in 
a three-fold aspect : first, as that from which the action 
of the verb proceeds ; secondly, as that towards which 
the action of the verb tends ; thirdly, as that by or with 
which the action of the verb takes place. In this way 
three Cases originate : the Genitive, denoting the motion 
or direction whence, the Accusative, 'whither, and the Da- 
tive, where. 

3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man- 
ner as those of space. Thus the Gen. (the whence-case) 
denotes the time from which an action is conceived as 
proceeding ; the Ace (the whither-case), the time to which, 
or over which the action is conceived as moving ; and the 
Dat. (the where-case) the time in which an action is con- 
ceived as existing. 

4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as 
relations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the 
author), was conceived as a local outgoing of an action 
from an object (Genitive) ; the effect (the result, the con- 
sequence), as a motion toivards an object (Accusative) ; 
the means (the instrument), as the resting of an action 
with or in an object (Dative). 

32 



374 syntax. m 269, 270 



$ 269 Remarks on the Nominative and Vocative 

1. The Norn, and Voc, so far as they do not express objective relations, 
cannot be considered as Cases ; the Nom. is the form for the subject, and the 
Voc. is the form which is used in calling to or in a direct address to a person 
or a thing. But also the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined 
to the subject by the copula thai, is expressed, as in other languages, accord 
ing to the laws of agreement, by the nominative ; and even the objective rela 
tion of an effect or result with the verbs mentioned in § 240, 2, is viewed in the 
Greek and Latin as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nominative. 

Remark 1. With the verbs bvoixd^iv, 6uofxd(e<rSfai and the like, the Inf. eiuai 
is often added to the Nom. or Ace, and thus in some degree the relation of 
the effect or result is indicated. Her. 4, 33. ras 6vo/u.dCovo~i AriAioi etvai 
'TTrepoxvv Te Ka ^ ActoSi/cTy*'. 5, 99. ffTpaniyovs dXKovs 07reSe|e (instead of cbre- 
Sei|e) MiXrjaiwf tlvai. 

Rem. 2. On thai, and yiyveofrcu with an abstract word, see § 284, 3(9). 

Rem. 3. Since the Nom., as the Case of the subject, denotes an object as 
independent, the Greeks use it not only in the case mentioned in § 266, Rem. 
1, but even with verbs of naming in the active. Her. 1, 199. Mi/Aitto 5e 
Kakiovori rr\v 'AcppoSirrjp 'Acravptoi, the Assyrians call Aphrodite, Mylitta. 

2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Voc. in a direct sum- 
mons or call; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. contains an explana- 
tory exclamation, which takes the place of a sentence. Here belong particu- 
larly the following instances : 

(a) Ovtos e'ither alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a proper name, 
is oftel used when one calls out to another, in the sense, ho there ! heus tu : PI. 
Symp. 172, a. 6 $a\T] pevs, ecpt], ovtos ''AiroWSS to pos, ov irtpifxeveis '-, 
which means, see ! this is that Apollodorus, the Phalerean, who comes there ! 

(b) Very often in this way, the Nom. with the article, is joined as an apposi- 
tive to a call or direct address. 

PI. Symp. 218, b. oi 5e olfcerai, Ka\ tf tis ciWos ecrrl fSsfSiqXos re Kai aypoi- 
kos, irvAas irdvv /xeydkas ro?s ooo\v iiri&eo'&e (the same as, v/j.s7s 8e, oiKerai ovres). 
X. Cy. 4. 5, 17. fth /j.ev ovv crv, %<p-q, 6 it peo~fiv retro s (instead of cru, us el 7rp.), 



§ 270. (1) Genitive, 

The Gen. is the Whence-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a 
local relation, the object or the point from which the action of 
the verb proceeds, e. g. etkav 6Sov, cedere via, to withdraw from 
the ivay ; (b) in a causal relation, the ground, origin, or author, 
in general, the object, which calls forth, produces, excites, occa- 
sions the action of the verb, e. g. eWfyuxo rfjs aptrrjs (§ 268) ; 
apexes is here the object which calls forth, etc. the desire ex 
pressed by eVi^v/xw. 



$ 271. J LOCAL RELATION OF THE GENITIVE. 375 

$ 271. A. Local Relation. 

1. The use of the Gen. expressing purely local motion is 
rare and only poetic, e. g. Ei fxrj rovSe 7reio-avTes Aoyw ayotvro 
vrjcrov (ab insula abducerent) S. Ph. 613; this relation is com- 
monly indicated by prepositions with the Gen., e. g. air 6, from, 
ck, out of, nap a, from near an object, etc. 

2. But the Gen. very often expresses the relation of separa- 
tion, namely, with verbs denoting removal, separation, loosing, 
abstaining, desisting, ceasing, freeing, depriving, differing from, 
missing, deviating from. Genitive of separation. 

Prose words of this kind are : irapaxoope?u, virox^p^v, ej/cetj> and vireintiv, 
biraviaTaaSrai and i£irTTa(r&ai, voarcpi^eiu, x w p' l & iv i Siopi^eiv] cupteVcu, acpiza&at, 
o.7re'xeiv, cbrexea-dw, iraveiv, Travecr&ai, kwXvsiv, ipTjT-ueiu, eXpyziv, Xveiv, iXevSrzpovV) 
airaAXdrreiu, arepely, airocrrepuv (rrepeo'&ai, XVP ^, ep-np-ovy, Suxpepeiv, ap-aprd- 
ueii/, a(paAAe<r&ai, ^euSecr^ai, etc. : Siexeu/ and airex* lJ/ i to be distant, etc. 

Her. 2, 80. ol yedorepoL avTzw rdiai irpecrPvrepoMn avvrvyxdvovTss tXitovcri 
Tr)s 6Sov (withdraw from the way). X. Cy. 2, 4, 24. inroxoope7u rod ire 
Biov {to retire from the plain). Hier. 7, 2. irapax^oelv odov. Symp. 4, 31. 
{nrauicrT avr at 8e p.oi ^877 Kal S6.K<av Kai odSiv i^icrravrai olirXoxxnoi 
(rise up from their seats and turn aside from the road). Vectig. 4, 46. airexei 
rue apyvpzlwv r\ iyyvrara tt6\ls Mtyapa ttoKv irXtlov twv Trei/TaKoaiwi/ arra- 
5iW (is distant from the silver mines). PI. Menex. 246. e. iirio-T-fjp.7) x^P'-C ' 
[kivn 5iKaio<rvj/7)s (knowledge apart from justice). Uavofxai x^ov {1 
cease from anger). Aua>, hiraWaTT a> rtva Kanwv (I free one from evils). 
Her. 3, 81. yvcii p^rj s ttjj a pi ar-ns r\ fxdpr-n /ce (he has mistaken the best view). 
5, G2. Tvpavvwv rj^ev^epuSfnaau. X. Hier. 7, 3. done? p.oi rovrca dt.a<p€~ 
oeiv auijp rioy aKXoiv ^dxav, tb TifxrjS op4yea&ai (to differ from other ani- 
mals). — \pev8o/xai, (r<pdAAop.ai e \ir id o s, d6£-ns, tux^s { to ue cheated, 
to be deprived of hope, etc. ) . ' A <p i i\ p. i riva ttj s air i as. 'A ir o a r e p u riva 
twv aya&wv. Trjs fiaaiheias ecrr 4p-q p.ai. Comp. § 280, Rem. 3. 

Remake 1. Many of these verbs are often constructed also with the prepo- 
sition anS, C. g. e'Aeud-epouj/, airaXXarTeiu air6 (of persons, as eAeu&epcw rr]v 
'E\\dda airb ruv Mi]Swv), hveiv, tXpyeiv, aireipyziv, £pT}T\>ziv. 

3. In like manner, the Gen. of separation is joined with ad- 
jectives, adverbs, and substantives which express the same idea as 
the above verbs, e. g. eAev^cpos, /xoVos, naSapos, Kevos, eprjfws, yvp.v6s, 
vp<pav6s, Qiao's — 8ui<popo^y dAAoTpto? (with the Dat, disinclined) 3 
aAAotos, eVcpos; with many adjectives compounded of a priva- 
tive ; with avev, x^pfe, TrXrjv, e£a>, CKas, Si\a, Trlpav, etc. 



.376 syntax. [$$ 272, 273. 

S. El. 387. at 8e crdpKes at iceval (ppevav aydK/xaT ayopas elaiv (bodies without 
minds). Her. 3, 147. aira&))s KanSov (without suffering evils, i. e. free from). 
Th. 1, 28. (piXovs Troi€?<rSai erepovs ro»v vvv ovrcav (to make friends other 
than, different from the present ones). X. C. 4. 4, 25. Trorepov robs &eobs rjyfj to) 
Siitaia vojxo&ereiv, $} &A\a rwv dotal a v. Cy. 3. 3, 55. aTraldevros fiov- 
(Tiktjs (uneducated in music). So txrifios eiraivwv. Ave is, eAeu&epia 
kolkgov. Her. 6, 103. tt4 pt\v rrj s ooov (on the other side of the way). Dero 
Phil. 1.49, 34. rod Trdax^v avrol ko.k5>s e£a> yei>r}cre(r&e. 

4. Here belong verbs of beginning and originating, e. g 
apxe<r$ai, ap^etv, virapxcw, Kardp^etv, c^ap^etv. 

"Kpx^o-Srai rivos, e.g. rov tto\4/jlov, means simply to begin something, 
without any other relation: izvj/ ro7s frecus ctpx eo "^ at xph Tavrbs epyov (to 
begin every work with the gods ) ; but &px^tv, virapxeiVi Kardpx*iv have a 
relation to others beside the subject, i. e. they signify not merely to begin abso- 
lutely, but to begin before others, to do something first or before others, to begin first, 
hence to be the cause or author: Tobs ifreAovras <pvyrjs apx^iv iroXv Kpsirrov 
abv toTs iro\efiiois rarro/xivovs, r) Iv rfj rifierepa rdl-ei, bpav (it is better to see those 
disposed to begin the flight [set the example of flight] in the enemies' ranks than in 
ours), X. An. 3. 2, 17. 'H 7]/j.epa ro7s "EWrjffi /xeydXcoy KaK&v &p£ei(will 
begin, be the cause of great calamities), Th. 2, 12. r T7rapx et,/ a.5iK&y epyooi/, 
evepyecrlas. 

Hem. 2. "Apx 60 "^" 04 air ^ twos (or vo&iv) means, to proceed from a thing 
and to begin with it, e. g. apx*o~fr(u curb tmv cttoix^v, to begin with the first prin- 



§ 272. B. Causal Relation. 

The Gen. in the causal relation signifies, also, an outgoing, 
but not, as in the local relation, a mere outward relation, but an 
inward and active one, since it expresses the object by whose 
inward power the action of the subject is called forth and 
produced. 

§273. (a) The active Genitive, or the Genitive as the 
general expression of Cause. 

1. The active Genitive stands in the first place, as the Gen. 
of origin or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to 
originate from, spring from, produce from, be produced from, 
e. g. yiyveaSai, <$>veiv, <j>vvou, etvat. Genitive of origin or author. 

Her. 3, 81. apiarcoy av^puv olubs &pi<TTa PovXevfiaru ylyyefffrai (it is 
reasonable that the best designs should originate with, from the best men, the aySpup 



$ 273.] CAUSAL GENITIVE. 377 

being active in, o: the cause of the result). X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. irarphs /*h 5^ 
AeyeTcu 6 Kvpos yevecr&ai Rap fiver ov, Uepawv fiaaiAeoos (to be the son of 
Cambyses) ' 6 8e Ka,ut3vcrns ovtos tov UepaeiSwv yevovs t)v (sprung from the race, 
of Persidae) ' f^.T]T pbs Se bjAoXoyeiTai MavSdvrjs yev4o-&ai. PI. Menex. 
239, a. fxias fjL7}Tphs irdvres adeA<po\ (pvures. Attributive Gen.: 'O rov 
&acr iXews vlos, i. e. 6 (e/c) rov fiaaiXeccs yevvn&els vlos. Ta tcov avfrpdnrav 
trpdy/xara. 

Remaek 1. Commonly the preposition e/c, more seldom air o, is connected 
with the genitive. 

2. The active Genitive stands, in the second place, as that 
object which has gained another, made its own and possesses 
it; the Gen. therefore denotes the owner or possessor. This 
Gen. stands : (a) with the verbs elvai, yeveo-Sai (to belong to), 
7roi€to-&u, to make one's oiun; (b) with the adjectives t'Sios (also 
with Dat), oiKetos (with Dat, inclined), Upos, Kvpios. Possessive 
Genitive. 

Antiph. 5. 140, 92. to /xhv aKovcriov afxaprruxa tt)s tv'xVS eCTt, to 8e 
kKovaiov ttjs yvwp.'ns (an involuntary fault belongs to fortune, a voluntary one 
to our own will). Lys. Agor. 135, 64. iyevcTO 6 Ev/xdpr]s ovtos Nt/co/cAe'ous 
(belonged to Nicocles, was his slave). Th. 5,5. iyevero M.eo-0-nwn AoKpcav Ttva 
Xp6vov (belonged to the Locrians). Ttjs avTTJs yvufx-qs elvai (ejusdem sententiae esse). 
'EavTod elvai (to be one's own master). Dem. Phil. 142. 7. t)v vpcov avT&v 
4&e\r)(rnTe yevecr&ai (to be your own masters), non ex aliis pendere. Also elvai 
twos, alicujus esse, alicui addictissimum esse, to belong to some one, to be earnestly 
devoted to something, e. g. elvai $i\iirirov ; elvai tov jSeATicrroi; (studere rebus optimis). 
X. Ages. 1, 33. tt\v 'Aaiav eavTuv iro lovvTai (they bring A. under their 
power). Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. t) it6\is rjfi&v Kvpia yevofievn toiovtwv aya- 
&u>v ovk e(p&6vr)o-e to7s aWois (having become the possessor of such advantages). X. 
An. 4. 5, 35. iJKOvirev avTOv (tov "ttttov) lepbv elvai tov 'H\iov (sacred to 
the sun). 5.3, 13. 6 iepbs x^pos ttjs 'Apr efii Sos. Dcm. 01.1. 26,28. ol 
Kivh'vvoi twv i<pea-TijK6T(t>v (ducum) ?8toi, [xht&os b" ovk eaTiv. 2.32,16. 
Tav ttjs Kvpios ttjs x&pas yevhaeTai. In the attributive relation: 'O 
tov fiao- i\4u>s kt)ttos. f H ~2.uK.pdT ovs aperf). UaTTjp N eoirToAe fiov. 

Rem. 2. The Gen. is connected with \eyeiv,<pdvai, vo/xi(etv, T)ye7o~bai, Kpiveiv, 
vno\a/jLl3dv(iv, as it is with elvai. Dcm. 01. 2. 34, 21. biKaiov ttoKitov icpivu 
tt]v tuiv irpay/j.dTccv acaT-npiav avT\ tt)s iv tQ Keyeiv xdpiros alpe?o~&ai. 

(c) Hence the Gen. with eTvai denotes also : (a) the charac- 
teristic, peculiarity, habit, etc. of a person or thing, the charac- 
teristic, peculiarity, etc., being commonly expressed by an Inf. ; 
((3) a property or quality, viz., price, measure, number, time, space, 
etc., also what is requisite for a thing. Genitive of quality. 

32* 



378 syntax, [§ 273. 

*A.v8p6s ifrrivaya&ov eu iroieiv robs (piAovs. In English this Gen. ia 
translated in various ways, e. g. it is the business, manner, custom, peculiarity, duty, 
mark of a brave man ; it becomes a brave man ; it bespeaks a brave man ; a brave 
man is wont, and the like. Dem. Phil. 1, 54. KaKovpyov 4<tt\ Kpi&evr cbro- 
&ave7v, crrpaynyov Se fxaxo^vov to?s 7roAe/.u'ots (it is the cliaracteristic of a 
criminal to die being sentenced, but of a general to die fighting, etc.). 01. 1. 18, 2. 
eCTt rwv aia'XP&v (Neut.), /^aAAo^ 5e rcay al ff x' 1 ^ r ^ v ■> Tr6Xecov, a>v rffxzv 
7T0T6 Kvpioi, <paivecr&at irpoi€p:evovs. Chers. 102,48. So^et ravra Kal dairdi'Tjs 
jxeyaX-ns Kal ttovcov iroXX&v Kal ir pay /xart i as eluai (this seems to be 
the mark of great expense, much labor). Aphob. 1. 814, 4. i/xh eirr ir&v ovra 
(of seven years,'i. e. seven years old). X. An. 7. 4, 16. ~ZiXavbs MaKecrTios, ir&y 
oktoo KaiSeKa &v, en naive i rrj ffaXiTiyyi. 1. 4, 11. 6 Ev(ppdT7]S Trorafibs rb 
evpSs iffTi Terrdpcov ffraftiwv (of four stadia in width = four stadia wide). 
Attributive Gen.: 8 4ica jj.vwv x (a P' l0V -> I sa e. 2, 35 (a place of [costing] ten 
minae). The Gen. is but seldom used to denote other qualities, e. g. rrjs ai/r^s 
yvu>/j.7)s elvai, ejusdem sententiae esse, to be of the same opinion. ( AXKifitdd-ns) &X- 
Xore dxXav earl Xoy<av, PI. Gorg. 482, & (is of different words at different times, 
uses different words, etc). 

Rem. 3. Here belong also the expressions rjye?<x^ai, iroielo-frcu, &£?vai iroX- 
Aov, irXelffTOv, bxtyov, eA.a% i^tou, etc. (to conside/ of great importance, 
etc.), the worth of a thing being considered as a property Usually, however, 
the preposition irepi is joined with the Gen. 

3. The active Genitive stands, in the third place, as that ob- 
ject which embraces one or more other objects as parts belong- 
ing to it; the Gen. represents the whole in relation to its 
parts. Genitive of the whole, or the partitive Genitive. This 
Gen. stands : 

(a) With the verbs, elvai and yiyveo-#cu (to belong to, to be 
of the number of, to be numbered among) ; nSivat, Tt'#eo-#ai, 
7roieto-^at, rjyelo-Sai (to reckon or number among), and with 
many others. 

I'm. ,65. Kal avrbs tf&eXe r&v /xevdurcov e? v at, to be one of tlwse remain- 
ing. X. An. 1. 2, 3. -f\v Kal 6 ~2,ooKpdrT\s t5>v a/xcpl MiXt]tou ffrpaTevojxivuv 
(was among those who carried on war around Miletus, o-Tparevoixivuv here denoting 
the whole, of which Socrates is a part). Cy. 1. 2, 15. o\ av av iv ro?s reXdois 
(avdpdai) diayevoovrai aveirlXrjirTot., outoi rwv ye pair e pcav yiyvovrai (are 
reckoned among the elders). Dem. Phil. 3. 122, 43. r) ZeXeid iari ttjs 'Act i as 
(belongs to Asia, is a part of). Plat. Phaed. 68, d. rbv frdvarov yyovvrai navres oi 
&XXot ruv fK-ylo-TCDj/ kukuv elvai (among the greatest evils). Pl.Rp.376,e. 
uo ucr tKTJ s 5', elirov, ti'&ijj \6yovs ; ad musicam refersne sermones? Phileb. 
60, d. <pp6vntsiv Kal aXrj&ri §6£av ttjs avrijs Ideas ri&ep:ai (I consider prudence 
and true glory as of the same nature, ad eandem ideam refero). Rp. 8. 567, e. iroi- 
e iff bat riva tSiv 8opv<pop<av. Her. 7, 6. KareXeye rav xpT)ff[i.Gtv (re- 



$ 273.] PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 37$ 

citabat vaticimorum sc. partem). So refiveiv yr)s {devastate terrae, sc. partem) 
imBaiveiv rrjs yTJs, to set foot upon. 

Rem. 4. With the partitive and attributive Gen., two cases are to be distin- 
guished : the Gen. denotes the whole either as a plurality in relation to the indi- 
vidual parts, as TLoAAol rS>v avfrpuTrav : or as a unity in relation to a certain 
qrantity, e. g. Uevre raKavra apyvpiov. This last partitive Gen. may be called 
t>*. Gen. of quantity. Both these genitives occur very frequently : 

fa) With substantives, e. g. ~2,rayoves vSaros (vSaros expressing the whole, 
and arayoves the parts): aoofiaros fiepos ; if with the name of a place, 
the country where it is situated is mentioned, the name of the country 
as denoting the whole, stands in the Gen., and usually before the name 
of the place denoting the part, e. g. 'O arparbs acplicero rr)s 'Att lkt)s 
es Olv6-nv (into Oenoe, a part or city of Attica), Th. 2, 18 (never is rrjs 
'Attiktjs OIvqtjv). 

(b) With substantive adjectives, in the positive, comparative, and superlative, 
when it expresses the highest degree ; with substantive pronouns and 
numerals : ol xp y \ <TT0{ - T <* >v CLv&pairwv, ol ev (ppovovvres rav av&pojnoov (the 
useful, well disposed part of men) ; — iroAAoi, oKiyoi, rives, irAeloves, irkeTaroi 
TOiv av&pcvirwv (many, few, some, etc. among or of men). In addition comp. 
above, § 264, Rem. 5. On the contrary, ol frvnrol av&pcoiroi, since the 
property of mortality belongs to the race ; iroAAoi or oAiyoi av&pwrroi ex- 
presses a whole consisting of many or few (a great or small number of 
men) ; ivoAAol or bxlyoi av&pojiruiv denotes the many or few as a part of 
the whole : so rpeis r)/xe?s r)fiev, i. e. we icere three in all, there were three of 
us ; rpeis T^jioov r)aav, i. e. there were three of us (three out of our whole num- 
ber) there; 

(c) With adverbs : (a) of place, e. g. ttov, ttov, nf), irS&ev, ov, r), ovSafiov, irav- 
raxn, Tr6ppGo, and 7rpo<rco (further), etc. Her. 2, 43. ovSafir) Alyinrr ov 
(nowhere in Egypt). PI. Rp. 3. 403, e. elSevai, '6 ttov yr)s icm (where 
inthe world). 'EyrauS-a rrjs rjAinias (at this age) ; evravSra rov \6yov 
(to this point in the discourse or argument ) . 'Opart, oTirpoeAriKv&ev acreAyeias 
[what a degree of insolence he has reached, quo intemperantiae progressus sit), 
Dem. Uavraxov rr) s yrjs, ubivis terrarum. Il6ppw a o (pi as eAav- 
veiv or rJKeiv (to advance further in wisdom). — (/3) of time, e.g. diph 
rrjs r) fie pas, r ov xp^fov, r r) s rjkiKias (late in the day, late in life). 
T pis rrjs rj fie pas. TloAKaKiS rrjs % fie pas. 

Rem. 5. By means of an abbreviation of the expression (comp. § 323, Rem. 
6), the partitive Gen. stands also with a superlative which belongs to the predi- 
cate. Her. 7, 70. ol 4k rrjs AlBvtjs Al&ioires ov\6rar ov rpixufia ex ov<Tl nav- 
rwv av& pair oj v (properly instead of ov\6rarov ruv rpixojfidrwv a irdvres 
livdpaTroi exovo~iv). X. Cy. 3. 1,25. vdvrcov rdv Seiv£>v 6 <poj3os fiaXiara. 
KarairArjrrei ras tyvxds. 

(b) With words which signify: (a) to take part in, partici- 
pate ill, share in, e. g. /xcre^eti/, /xirea-ri jxol, SiSoVai, /xeraSiSoVai, 
7rposo"i$6Vcu, SiaSiSoVai, kowowclv, kolvovoScii, hvapKexv {to give a share 
of), avvepyos, apLotpos, etc. ; kolvos and taos, which commonly, 
however, govern the Dat. ; — ((3) to touch (both physically and 
intellectually), to lay hold of, to be in connection with., to border on, 
e. g. $iyydvea', ij/avew, aTrreoSai, 8parr£0"«?at ; Aayu./3ttv€owou, w.era-, 
crvWa.p.fia.ve:w, im,-, drrtAa/x/3di'ecr3cu ; avvaipcoSai ; ZxtcrSai {to ad- 



380 syntax. l'$ 273. 

here to, be next to, to border o?i), avr-, Trcpte^ecr^ai, yXt^ecr^atj 
e7rixa)/H05, dSeA</>05 (seldom with Dat), StaSo^o? (often also with 
Dat), e^?, e^e^s (more rarely with Dat.), irpoo-Sev, e//,7rpoo-#ey, 
oTTicrSev, fxeraiv, and many other adverbs ; — (y) to acquire and 
attain, e. g. ruy^aveii/ (fo acquire and hit), Aay^avetv, e£-, i(f>iKvei- 
crSai, KXypovo/xetv (with Gen. of the thing, to inherit; with Gen. 
of the person, to be the heir of some one ; with Ace. of the 
tiling and Gen. of the person, to inherit something from one), 
7rposr}K€L (/mot. twos, I have to do ivith something, have part in) ; 
— (§) to strive to acquire something, e. g. 6peyecr#ai, e<£tear#ai, 
di/Ti7roietcr$ai, ivrptTreoS-ai (to turn one's self to something, to give 
heed to, to respect) ; o-Toxd£eo-#ai (to aim at something). Most 
of the words included under this rule have a partitive idea. 
Besides the Gen. several of the above verbs take also a Dat. 

Dem. 24, 49. rols &kovctiv a/xaprdvovai fiereo~ri o~vyyv<a p,r\s {those who err 
unwillingly obtain pardon ) . PL Pol. 322, a. <5 aVd/Jco7ros betas per e ax* /xoipas 
(participated in divine destiny). X.Pv.L. 1,9. rov fiev yevovs Kal rrjs Svvd- 
uecos koivovvo vo~ i, r u> v Se XP 7 ! f"> T <*v ovk avr itt o lovvr at (who share 
in the same origin and power, but do not lay claim to their property). Cyr. 7. 5, 78 
sq. &d\irovs fxev Kal tyvxovs Kal crircov Kal irorwv Kal vttvov avdyK-n 
Kal to?s SovXois fxerad iS ovai, it o Ae /xikt) s 8 5 e7r icr r r)ixr] s Ka ^ M-^Kerris 
ov fieraS or eov (to share heat, cold, etc.). C. 1. 2, 60. 1caKpdrr}s naaiv a<p&6va>s 
eirr)pKei ra>v eavrov (shared his effects with). Cy. 1.3, 7. ra>v Kpeuv Sia- 
5 1 8 ova i to?s frepairevTOAS (to distribute the flesh among the servants). PI. Phaedr. 
238, b. to rovrcov o8eA.»a (horum similia). Hel. 4. 4, 6. (&£iov ecm) tG>v 
ye KaWiffr wv Kal fx eyi fra> v ctya&cDj/ dp ey o [xevovs a^ieiraiv or d- 
r-qs reXevrr)s rvx^Tv (that they, desiring to obtain the most noble and val- 
uable acquisition, should meet a most honorable death). 4. 8, 18. r)v 6 ®epo , av8pos 
ov jxovov av\r)rris aya&6s, aAAa Kal ctA/cvjs avr eiro ie7ro (ad fortitudinem eni- 
tebatar). Th. 1, 8. e (pie jxe vo i r£>v KepS&v oi f/crcrous virefxevov rrjv rwv 
Kpeicraovav 5ov\eiav (the inferiors desirous of gain, etc.). Cy. 1.2,3. irovqpov 
tivos t) alo~xpov epyov ecpiea&ai. 3.3,10. eiraivovo'i Kal aaira^ovrai oi 
roiovroi (crv/xfiaxoi) robs o/xotovs, vo[xl£ovres ffvv epyovs avrovs elvai rod koi~ 
vov ay afro v (thinking that they are coadjutors in the common interest). PL Symp. 
181, c. vfipews dfioipos (ivithout sharing in insolence). Menex. 241, c. epyov 
Kotvbv AaKedai/xovlcav re Kal 'Afryvalcov (common to the Laced., etc., like 
communis alicujus rei). "Airr o/xai T7/s x ei P° s - Her. 1, 93. \ifivn exerot 
rov arifAaros /xeydfai (borders on). 3, 72. epyov ix<*> V-s^a (opus aggredia- 
mur). Hepiexo/xal rivos (cupide aliquid amplector) . Th. 1 , 140. rrj s yv 6 litis 
rrjs avrrjs exofxai (I hold to the same opinion). 4, 10. avSpes oi £vvapd[xevo i 
rovSe rod kivSvvov (who have taken part in this danger). PL Rp. 2, 362, a. 
v.\ri&sias exoiievov (cum veritate conjunctum). Dem. 01. 1, § 20, eus earl /cat- 



$ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 381 

p6s, avr t\afi6<r&€ rwv irpayixdrwv (capessere). Isocr. Nicocl. 22, b, c iireilih 
&V7]tou ff&ixaros eTv%es, a&avdr ov 5e ^pvxvs, ireipw T7js tyvxys o&d~ 
varov /xvt)(xt]v KaraXnre?v (since you obtained a mortal body, but an immortal soul), 
Tvyxdveiv, Xayxaveiv XP 7 7i U( * T& " / > tvrvx'ias — rvx^v reXevrrjs, bvSfxaros, etc. X. 
C. 2. 1, 20. at Sia Kaprepias iirijx4XeLai (studia assidua) rwv KaXwv re Kaya- 
&wv e pywv k^iKvzlG&ai iroiovcriv (make them attain noble and illustrious deeds ) . 
Isocr. Paneg. 80, 187. ovk icpiKVod/iai rod /xey4&ovs rwv irpayixdrwv 
(non assequor). P. Crit. 52, c. o&r iicetvovs rovs Xoyovs alaxvvri, ovre i)/xwv, 
rwv v6/xwv, ivrpeiTT) (neither do you respect us, the laws). X. C. 4. 5, 11. 
8o/cets- fxoi X4yeiv, ws avSpl r\rrovi rwv 8ia rod cwjxaros t)8ovwv irafxirav oiide fxias 
apery) s irposri k e t (that no virtue belongs to a man who is a slave to bodily pleas- 
ures). Dem. in Aristocr. 690, 14. ovroi KXrjpovo /xovcri rrjs vfxerepas 
So^ris Kal rwv vfier4pwv aya&wv. PI. Georg. 465, a. rov i)54os aro- 
Xa^erat avev rod fieXriaTOV. 

Rem. 6. With verbs expressing participation, sometimes the word denoting 
a part stands in the Ace, e. g. X. Hier. 2, 6. ol rvpavvoi rwv /xeyiarwv ayd&wv 
vXelara per e'^ou a. An. 7. 8, 11. 'Iva fxfy /xera8o7ev rb fx4pos XPV^- 
rwv. According to the analogy of verbs of touching, verbs of entreating and 
supplicating, are connected with the Gen., which denotes the person or thing, b j 
whom or by which one entreats or supplicates, e. g. Xicraecr&ai, licereveiv, iKveicr- 
hai, since the suppliant, touching the knee or the image of the divinity, utters 
his prayer. Od. /3, 68. Xiao-o/xai r)fxev Zrjvbs 'OXv/xttlov 7/5e &4/xio-ros (I supplicate 
Zeus). So Xiacreoftai irarpbs, roK-r\wv. Comp. II. k, 454 sq. 6 (x4v fxiv 4/xeXXe 
yeveiov x ei P^ 7ra X eL V uty&P-evos Xiaaecr^ai. 

Hem. 7. The poets connect many other verbs with the Gen., among which 
are those mentioned under (b) ; so any verb may govern the Gen., when its 
action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part only. II. 77, 56. fi 4 o'- 
er ov Sovpbs kx6v (having seized the middle of the spear). Od. y, 439. fiovv 5* 
ay4rr\v Kepdwv (took by the horns). II. a, 197. £av&?is Se KOfxr)s eXe 
YlTjXeiwva. In phrases, like Xa{i€?v yovvwv, divreabai riva yeveiov, etc., the knee 
and beard are conceived as the objects, on which the person who touches and 
lays hold, hangs, and, as it were, depends. Here belong, also, in poetry : 

(a) Verbs denoting both physical and intellectual tasting, grasping, reaching 
to, and hence of striving after an object, e. g. iTrifxaieo-^at ctkott4Xov, 
Swpwv, v6<rrov (to seek the rock, gifts, a return). 

(b) Several verbs, which properly express the idea of a hasty motion towards 
an object, and. then metaphorically are used to express an intellectual 
effort, and longing, e. g. ineiyea^ai, dp/xaa&ai, iirifiaXXea^ai, 4Trai<T<reiv 
(rushing upon something, etc.). II. r, 142. iireiy 6 fxevd s nep "Aprfos 
(hastening to, desiring the contest). II. |, 488. wpu4}&7) 8' 'Atcd/xavros 
(he rushed upon^Acamas) . II. £ 68. /xtitis vdv evdpwv iirifiaXXSuevos 
/xer6TricrSev fxi/xv4rw. 

(c) Verbs signifying to take aim, e. g. ro^eveiv, attovrifav (in prose with els, 
and with the meaning, to hit, to wound, with the Ace). H. p, 304. "Eicrwp 
5' air Alavros a.K6vr i<r e Soupl (paeivy (aimed at Ajax). II. i//, 855. 
f; s dp avcvyei r 1 e v e t v. 

Rem. 8. According to the analogy of the above-named verbs of aiming and 
striving, so we find Kara x&ovbs 6/x/xara 7rr)|cu (to fasten the eyes upon the ground)} 
irXe?v iirl 'S.djxou, to sail towards Samos, as if setting out for it (on the contrary, 
iirl ^dfxov, to Samos). — The Gen. of aim accurs in the attributive relation, e. g. 
with 6d6s, v6aros r6irov rivds (way, return to a place). 



382 syntax. [$ 273 

Eem. 9. There also being here : (a) the adverbs evbv (Ion. l&v), straight- 
forward to something, /xexph to, up to; — (b) verbs of meeting and approaching, 
which, however, in prose, are commonly connected with the Dat.; — (c) also 
adjectives and adverbs of meeting, approaching, nearness, e. g. avrios, ivavrios 
(though in Attic, only with the meaning contrarius, opposed to), TrapairX^o'tos, 
which, however, are oftener joined with the Dat. ; avriov, ivavrtov {before, in 
the presence of ) ; 677175 and irXno-iov with the Gen. of local nearness, but in a 
metaphorical sense with the Dat. Her. 6, 95. ex ov (dirigebant) ras veas lfr\> 
rod 'E XXt] sir 6 vrov ical rrjs Qprji'icys (directly to the Hellespont). 2, 34. 
7) Atyvirros rrjs 6 p e 1 v 7) s K i X i k i a s /xaXiard nn avrin Keerai (lies opposite to 
Cilicia). Dem. Ph. 3. 117, 27. irX-neiov Ovficav teal 'ASijvwv (near Thebes). 

4. In the fourth place, the active Genitive denotes the place 
ivhere, and the time when, an action happens. The action or 
event belongs, as it were, to the place and the time, proceeds in 
a measure from them, and is produced by them ; hence the time 
and place are considered as causing or producing the action, or 
at least as the necessary condition of it. 

(a) The Gen. of place is almost exclusively poetic. 

II. p, 372. vecpos 5' ob cpalvero irdcns yains, ovS' bptcav (not a cloud appeared 
on the plain, nor on the mountains). H. i, 219. avrbs 8" avriov T(ev 'Odvo-o-rjos 
S-eioto rolxov rod erepoio (by the other wall). Hence, especially, in Epic 
poetry, with verbs of going and motion, the space or way upon which the going 
or the motion takes place, and to which, as it were, this action belongs, stands 
in the Gen., e. g. II. £, 801. epxovrai iredtoio (go through the plain). %> 23. 
&eeiv rreSioio. v, 64. iredloio dicoKeiv opveov (to pursue over the plain). So 
the prose, Uvai rod irp6o-<a (to go over the forward way, to go forward). 

Rem. 10. In this way are to be explained the adverbs of place, ov,ttov, oiroy, 
avrov, ov8a,uov, aXXaxod, etc - 5 an ^ on tne same principle also it is to be ex- 
plained that adverbs of place with the suffix & e v stand apparently instead of 
adverbs of place with the suffix 3-t, e. g. ZvdoSev, iyyv&ev, rnX6&ev, eKToo-3-ej/, 
e. g. II. p, 582. "EKTopa 5' iyyv&ev tcrrd/xevos iorpvvev ''AttoXXcov. 

(b) The Gen. of time often occurs both in poetry and prose. 
Also the space of time wiihw which something happens, as pro- 
ducing the action, or the condition of it, may be expressed by 
the Gen. The Gen. expresses time indefinitely \ denoting merely 
the period within which or in the course of which the action takes 
place, while the Dat. expresses definite time, a point of time. 

"AvSrn 3-aAAet rod e a p s, the spring is conceived as producing the flowers, and 
hence as the cause of them. Thus frepovs, in the summer time ; x^^vos, in the win- 
ter ; rj/xepas, in the daytime, in the course of the day, by day ; vvktSs, by night ; 8eiA.?is, 
6irti!>pas; as Eng. of a morning, he did it of a fine morning ; also /xrjvos, per month, 
monthly ; iviavrod, yearly, etc.; with attributives, e. g. rov avrov, rod irporepod, e/cao-- 
rov, erovs, the same, the former year, etc. ; ~-r}s avrrjs rjjxipas, on the same day ; ri)s 
iirtovayjs vvkt6s : ^od iiriyiyvofxevov frepovs ' ' avrns rrjs r)/xepas, in the course of this day 



$ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 383 

(but Dat. ravrrj ttj yfMzpa, in that day). Hence the adverbial expressions dpxys, at 
the beginning, and rov Xoiirov, for the future. Her. 4, 48. "itrrpos 1o~os ae* avrbs ewvrcp 
ptei kolL &4povs ko2 x €L l JL ^ V0S {always flows equal to itself in summer and 
winter). 6, 12. rov Xolttov fir] Tre&co/xe&a avrov. PL Phaed. 59, d. ££r)X&o/x<;v 
rod o~ecrjj.(tiT7)piov kcrirepas {at evening). Ov /xaKpov \p6vov, avxvov, tvoXXov, 
irXelarov, bxiyov XP°' V0V { in i within a short, long time) ; iroXXcov Tj/xepiov, £tS>v 
(within many days, years), etc. Her. 3, 134. ravra bxiyov xP^vov iarai 
reXevpeva. X. An. 1.7, 18. fiacriXebs ov /xax^rai Sena 7} fie qui v. PL Symp. 
172, c. ttoXXojv £ru>v 'AydScov iv&dSe ovk £inde8r)fj.7)Kev. 

Eem. 11. By the Gen. of time, the Gen. absolute may be explained, e. g. 
rod Kvpov fiao~ iXe v ovr o s iroXXd re nai KaXd ipya virb ruv Hepaa>v eirpdx&V' 

Eem. 12. Prepositions are often used to define the relation of time more 
exactly, e. g. e/c ttoXXov xP^vov, a<$> eo-irepas, eVl Kvpov, Cyri aetate, Sia ttoXXov 
Xpo"vov, ivrSs or iau> ttoXXov xpovov. Comp. the remarks on the prepositions. 

Eem. 13. The Gen. as well as the Ace. denotes continued ox protracted time, 
but with this difference, that the Gen. denotes the time within any part of which 
the action may take place ; whereas the Ace. of time implies that the action is 
in progress during the whole of the time mentioned, e. g. ravrrjv rr)v v/xe- 
pav avrov TjvXi£ero t he encamped there during the whole of that day ; but with the 
Gen. the meaning would be, that, in the course of that day, sometime in that 
day, he encamped there. Comp. § 279, 6, in regard to the difference between 
the Gen. and Ace. of time and place. 

5. The active Genitive, finally, denotes the material of which 
anything is made, formed, and, as it were, produced, or the 
source from which something is drawn; the material being 
viewed to some extent as the cause of the result. This Gen. 
stands : 

(a) With verbs of making, forming, and the like. 

Her. 5, 82. xa\/cou -rroieovrai ra ayaX/xara (are made of bronze) . 2, 138. 
iarpu/nei/rj iffrX 6Zbs xibov (is paved with stone). Th. 4, 31. epvjia avro&i t)v 
Xi&oov Xoyddnv tt eir on) fiev ov. In the attributive relation : eKTru/xa £vXov 
(a drinking cup [made] of wood) ; rpdire(a dpyvplov, are<pavos vaKiv&wv. 

Rem. 14. This relation is very often expressed by the Dat. also, and more 
definitely by the prepositions £( and cbrJ, also Sid with the Gen. 

(b) With words of fulness and ivant, e. g. irXrj^uv, rrXrjpovv, 
irLfXTrXdvat, yifxuv, (3p[$ew ; vdacreiv, adrretv, ev7ropetv, etc. ; arropecv, 
7re'vecrJcu, Seur^cu, Set, aTravt^etv, XP^> e ^ c - '■> 7r ^°^> TrX-qp-q^, p-tarus, 
vrXovcnos, Saaa>9, etc. ; 7T€vr)<;, cVSe^s; dXts (satis). 

X. Symp. 4, G4. ere a a.y\xevos irXovrov tV ^xV eco/iot (shall be satisfied 
wit/i riches). PL Apol. 26, d. ra, 'Ava£ay6pov fiifixla y e p. e i rovrcav r <x>v Xo- 
ywv (are full of these sayings). Evrrope7v, airopuv, TreveoSai, airavi&iv ruv 
Xpypdrcov (to abound in, to be destitute of means). X. Cy. 3. 1, 3. 8 t a&e 6vro>v 
Kal (XavvSvrwv ib ireolov /xeffrSv (full of person* j uniting about). An. 2. 4, 



384 syntax. [§ 273. 

14. Saabs SevSpoev (thickly set with trees). An. 1. 2, 7. irapddeiffos /xeyas, 
aypicov fr-npiuv irX-^p-ns (fall of wild animals). 1. 4, 19. ivravfra ^aav 
Kw/j-ai iroWat fieffral <rtrov teal oivov. In the attributive relation, e. g. 
§4iras oivov (a goblet of [filled with] loine). 

(c) With verbs signifying to eat, to drink, to taste, to cause to 
taste, to enjoy, to satisfy one's self, and in the figurative sense to 
have the enjoijment, use, and advantage of something; lo-SUiv, 
cbayciv, evoj^eicr^at, mveiv, yeuav, yeveoSai, Kop£o~acr$ai \ aTroXa.ve.LV ', 
kcrnav (to entertain), etc. 

'Ea&leiv Kpeuv (to eat of flesh); Kopeffcurfrai (popfirjs (to satisfy one's 
self with food) , iriveiv oivov (to drink of wine). X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. avdyicri aoi 
airoyeuec&ai tovtwv ruv it avr oZair G>v j3 p a> /xdrav (to taste the various 
kinds of food). 1. 3, 10. Kai ti Srj, 3> Kvpe, raWa pnp.ovp.evos rbv^dicav, ovk cnrepp 6- 
<p7]aas rod oivov ; (lohy did younot gulp downthe wine?). C.4.3, ll.cnroXave iv 
irdvrcov t cou aya&oiv (to enjoy all good things) ; but airoXaveiv r iv6s ri,e.g. 
aya&d or /ca/ca, to receive good or evil from some one. X. C. 4, 3, 10. Ti &XXo (coov 
alywv re /cat oi'wv kcu t 6j v &XXwv {cbwv roaavra ayadrh airoXavei, 
'6(ra oLv&pcairoi ; (what other animal receives so many advantages from goats, etc., as 
man?). T eveaSrai tl/xtjs (to taste, enjoy honor); yeveiv riva ripi^s (to 
cause one to taste or enjoy honor). 

Rem. 15. The Ace. stands with verbs of eating and drinking: (a) when the 
substance is represented as consumed wholly or in a great quantity; or (b) 
when the common means of nutriment is indicated, that which every one takes. 
Od. i, 347. KvkXu^, rr\, trie olvov, eirel cpdyes avS popiea k p e a (drink wine, 
since you eat human flesh). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ovk e kit i op. at avrbs rov olvov. 
1.3, 6. Kp4a ye evo>x o v ( en j°V y our meat). 6. 2, 28. vSari pep.iyp.evnv a el 
r)]V pid^av eo~&iei (always eats maize). Ibid. p.era 5e rbv o~7rov iav olvov 
4 it iirlvu>p.ev, ovdev p.e7ov e%ovaa 7] tyvxh avairavaerai (spoken of a habit). So 
e o~&ie iv Kpea and Kpecov, it Iveiv olvov and oivov. Hence iriveiv olvov is said 
of those whose usual drink is wine, but Triveiv oivov, is to take a drink of wine, to 
drink some of the wine. Hence the Gen. with verbs of eating and drinking has 
a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or drink of something. PI. 
Symp. 176, c. iroXvv iriveiv olvov. 

(cl) With verbs signifying to smell, emit an odor of something, 
etc. ; irvexv, ot^iv, TrposfiaWew. 

"o£eiv icov (to smell violets); p.vpov irvelv (to emit the smell of myrrh) ; 
irpos fiaXXeiv /xvpov, irveTv rpdyov, o£eiv upo p.va>v. Ar. Ran. 341. 
ws ?;5u p.oi irposeirvevffe x oi P*' l<av Kpeuv (so sweet was the smell of swine's 
flesh to me). 

Rem. 16. In poetry many other verbs are constructed with the Gen. of the 
material, e. g. airoffrixPe iv aXei(paros, (veKvas) irvpbs p. eiX laae p.e v, 
Xoveo~&ai ei>ppe?os irorap-olo. See Larger Grammar, II. § 527, Rem. 

(e) With expressions of remembering and forgetting : fjaixv^a- 
Kojaai, to remember, jXLfxvrja-Koi (rtva twos), to remind one of some- 



$ 273.] GENITIVE CASE. 385 

thing, pLvrjjAOJv, d/AVT^aoov, iTrikavSavoixoLi, to forget ; hence also with 
Xa^pa, Aa^ptco?, and Kpv$a ; also with, expressions of being ac- 
quainted and unacquainted with, of experience and inexperienc e % 
of ability, dexterity or skill in anything, e. g. e/xTreipos, airupos, 
€7rLorTrjixojv, hri(TTapLevo<s, ave7rt<Tr^/xa)v, rpifiwv, oayyvoo/xcov, dSa-^s, a7rat- 
Seuros, l8iu>Tr}<s ; d7retpa>5, ^eVcos e^ 00 > with adj e ctives in - 1 k 6 5 ( derive d 
from transitive verbs) which denote skill, ajitness, etc.; also with 
7r€LpC)fMai, to make trial of something. 

X. C. 2. 1, 33. Of yspaiTepoi r)54ws r w v ir a X a i w v ir pd£ewv p.4 (ivn vra i 
(remember the past achievements). Antiph. II. o, 7. 'H iir&v/jLia ttjs Tip.wpias 
aixv-fifLova twv kivSvvwv kc&'kttt) avr6v (rendered him forgetful of dangers). 
X. O. 16, 8. Tl6&ev ovv fiovhei a"p£wp.ai ce ttjs yewpyias viro jxi fivhtrKtiv 
(to remind you of husbandry). Cy. 8.3, 3. Toy <p£r6vov £ire\4\T]o'To (had 
forgotten envy). Attributive: fj.vr)[j.r), \r)hr\ twv nana v. (M e /x v t\ fi a t n, to 
keep something in mind.) "EfnreLpo s or iiri <n-r\\x<a v elfA ttjs t4x v7 1 s {I 
am acquainted with the art). 'AwaidevT os ap e t 77 s, /j.ov<tikt} s (ignorant of 
virtue, music). Her. 2, 49. ttjs &v<rlas TavTTjs ovk adaf)s, aAA.' e pir ei pos 
(not ignorant of that sacrifice, but acquainted with it). X. Cy. 6. 1, 37. ffvyyvA- 
pwv twv avfr pair Iv wi/ ir pay (jlcLt wv (pardoning, not knowing, human errors ) . 
— 'Airelpcos ex €lv TavTrjs ttjs t 4 x^ tj s (to be unacquainted with this art). 
'AiroTreipa>ixai yvdofirjs (I make trial of an opinion). With the poets this 
use of the Gen. is still more extensive. II. 0. 411. t4ktovos, bs pa. re irdo-ns eu 
€t : 5?7 troipl-ns (who is well acquainted with all skill). X. 3. 1, 6. irapacr Keva- 
o~t ikov twv els tov iroKe/Mov tov arpaTTiybv elvai XPV xal tt o p igtikov twv 
iiriTTjSeiav to7s <npaTiwTais (skilful in preparing wJiat is necessary for war, and 
capable of providing provisions). PI. Euthyphr. 3, c. 5 iSa<r kclXikos ttJs avTov 
<ro<plas (able to teach his own learning). Pi. L. 643, a. t4\€ios tt)s tov irpdy/j.a- 
tos apeTr)s (as it were, showing one's self perfect in a thing). Attributive: ipirei- 
pia t t\ sty e w fi e t p i a s, etc. 

(f) "With the words of sensation and perception: Slkovclv, 
aKpoaaSau, alcrSav ecr$ai } oo"(/>paiveo~$ai. 

'Akoww twv \6ywv, bopvfiov (I hear the words, the tumult). X. H. 4. 4, 
4. ttjs Kpavyr)s rjo-frovTo (they perceived the cry). An. 1. 1, 8. fSaffiXevs 
iris irpbs cavrbv in i/3ov\rj s ovk r}a&aveTo (did not perceive the plot). C. 2. 
1,24. tIvwv offcpp ivofxevos r)a&eiris ; (what things would you desire to smell?). 
Akovg iv Siktj s (to hear a case at law) ; ale frdvecrfr ai r)8ovwv, ho- \xr\ s, 
Sropv &ov, fiori&e ias. 

Rem. 17. The attributive Gen. has a much wider signification, e. g. ayeWia 
tt)s X'lov, de Chio (tidings of or concerning Chios) ; ipwTr\<ris tivos (a question about 
something), like the Latin quaestio alicujus rei instead of de aliqua re. 

Rem. 18. 'A /covets, vnaKoveiv, KaTaKo v e iv often take the Gen. also 
in the sense of to obey, and according to this analogy ireid-eo-bai (seldom in 
Attic) and aTret&eiv; so also naTT)Koos, vitt)koos, take the Gen., more 

33 



386 SYNTAX. [$ 27S. 

seldom the Dat. Her. 3, 62. irpoayopevei rjpuv ^p.4pdios fiao-Lkfjos o/cou- 
eiv (commands us to obey king Smerdis). 101. Aapeiov & aff lArjos ov5ap.a 
vir-t]Kov(rav ( they obeyed king Darius nowhere ). 1. 126. vvv 3>v i p. e o Tretd-o^e. 
cot yiVecr^-e i\ev&epoL (now therefore obeying me, be free}. So Th, 7, 73. 

Rem. 19. The above verbs have the following constructions: (a) Gen. of 
the thing, as in the examples given. The Gen. denotes the material as a whole, 
of which one perceives, as it were, single parts, or the sense, the purport of which 
one perceives mentally. AlffSdvop.ca Kpavyrjs (I perceive, as it were, the single 
tones of the cry) ; X. H. 4. 8, 19. cdffSeff&ai rrjs {io-nSreias (I observe something 
of the help); — (b) Ace. of the thing; then it is denoted that one perceives 
the whole thing with his senses, or the thing in its totality. Th. 2, 94. 'Hs 
ija&ovTo tt]V fiori&eiav (when they observed the help approaching = saw with 
their eyes — ecvpcav). The Ace. of the person seldom stands with alff&dveff&cu ; 
when it does, the verb has the sense of eldevai (to know). X. Symp. 4, 36. 
Aicr&dvop.ai rvpdvvovs r ivds, oi ovtco ireivwffi xpv^drcov (I know some kings). — 
(e) Gen. of tlie person, which represents the person, as it were, as the source, from 
which the perception is derived. 'Akovco 'XovKparovs (1 hear Socrates, i. e. the 
words of Socrates). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. Ovk a/cpoco/iei/o: rod adovros u/xvvere 
qSetv apecra (not hearing the voice of the singer). Her. 1, 80. cos off (ppavro rd- 
Xtcrro rwv Kap-^Awv oi 'iiriroL ko\ e?5oj> auras dmaa aviffrpecpov (as soon as the 
horses got scent of the camels). So ffwi-npn (to understand), with the Gen. of a 
person, e. g. Her. 1, 47. kolL km (pod ffvvinpn kolL ov (pwvevvros d/couco (I under- 
stand a mute) ; but with the Ace. of the thing, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. 8? kpp.-nv4a)v 
t a s rwy &ewv ffv fifiovhi as erwlripu (I understand the counsels of thegods). The 
verb ala&dve fffrai is not constructed with the simple Gen. of the person. — 
(d) Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing : "HKovffa XcoKpdrovs rovrov rbv 
Xoyov (audivi e Socrate hum sermonem, I heard this conversation from Socrates). 
So also ti x a ^ e7ro,/ yc&yo-cu TovfAov fiiov j (what have you perceived disa- 
greeable in my manner of life?) X. C. 1. 6, 4. %wir}pi gov rbv A 6 you. — (e) 
Gen. of the person with a participle in the Gen., or with a subordinate clause 
which takes the place of the Ace. of the thing. 'Akovco ^caupdrovs 8<aAe- 
yo/xej/ov (I hear Socrates reasoning, nearly the same as a/couco Sco/cpdVous diaAo- 
yov). X. H. 4. 2, 19. Aa.Keb'cup.ovioi ovk rjff&dvovro irpos iovt go v rwv 7roAe- 
fiicnv (did not perceive the enemy approaching, nearly the same as ydhdvovTo tuv 
iroAefxiuv tV irp6sodov). The person is sometimes also contained in the parti- 
ciple, e. g. Th. 5, 73. rjff&ovro re ix l C°'i'tgov (they perceived them building the 
wall, instead of jjoSovto avr&v reix i C^ vruv or or i T€ t%t £oi ev). X. An. 
1. 10, 4. /3acnAeus 7JKovff€ T iff ff ac/> e p v ov s, on ol "TLKK-nves viKipev (heard 
from Tissaphernes that the Greeks were conquering, like tfnovffe Tiffffa<p4pvovs t^v 
rcov 'EXXtjvwv vlktjv). C. 4. 4, 13. ovk alff&dvop.ai ffov, 6iro?ov v6p.ipi.QV % irotov 
Sikcuov Aeyeis (I do not comprehend you, what you call according to law or according 
to justice). 

Eem. 20. Likewise the Gen. of the person and Ace. of the thing, or the Gen. of 
the person with a participle in the Gen. or with a subordinate clause standing in 
the place of the Ace. [Comp. (d) and (e) Eem. 19], is used with verbs of seeing, 
hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing ; of judging, examining, and say- 
ing ; of admiring, praising, blaming : 6 pay, &eciff&cu, <r Koire7v, vttovogiv, iv- 
ro€?v,yiyv<i)ffKeiv, irrlffTaff&ai, eldevai, iv&vp.e'iff&ai, etc. ; Trvv&d- 
veff&at, p.av&dveiv, Kpivziv, i^erd^e iv, \4yeiv, 8tj A o vv, etc. : cWo- 
dexeff&u (to receive the opinion of one, to agree in opinion with one) ; ct,yaff&ai, 
Sravpid^eiv, endive'tv, p.4p.<peff&ai, tyeyeiv. The Gen. denotes the ob- 
ject (commonly a person) in respect to which one perceives, sees, observes, 
knows, judges something, some action, external indication, or some single cm 



$ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 3S7 

cumstance, etc. ; or of whom one learns, hears, affirms something ; or in whom 
one admires, praises, or c.ensures something. 

X. C. 1. 1, 12. Upurov fxev avrcov (^ooKpdrrjs) £o~ k6it e i, irorepd irore 
vofiiaavres iKavoos tJZt) ravSpooTriva elSevai epxovrai iirl to irepl roiovrwv <ppov 
ri^eiv, r) rd fJLev av&pdoTreia irapevres, rd datfxovia 8e CKOirovvres, r)yovvr ai ra 
irposTjKovTa irpdrreiv (he first considered in respect to them whether, etc.). An. 3. 1, 
19. 5 ia&eu> jxevos avrcov, '6(Tt]v x&pav Kal o'lav %x oi * v {attentively con- 
sidering with respect to them, what a country they had). Cy. 7. 2, 18. eyvco Kal 
fxd\a droira ifxov ttoiovvtos (he perceived in respect to me, that I was doing an 
absurd thing, or eyvoo ifxov, on aroira ir oioinv). PI. Gorg. 463, d. dp" ovv dv 
fxd&ois airoKpiva.fj.evov; (instead of dp" ovv dv fxov fj,d&ois, a. divoKpivofxai , 
will you then understand my answer, i. e. learn from me what I answer ?). 465, e. A e- 
yovrSs (j.ov fipaxea ovk ijxdvbaves (you did not understand me when I spoke 
briefly). The Gen. of the person alone. Ph. Phil. 51, c. e'l fxov fiav&dveis 
instead of ef fxov fxav&dveis, a. \4yoo (if you comprehend me, understand what 1 
say). Th. 4. 6. iirv&ovro rrjs Hv\ov Kar e lXtj fj.fj.evr]s, instead of invfr. 
rr)s TlvXov, on Ka.TeiX-n/j./j.evn r)v (when they harned thaUPylus was captured). 5, 83. 
■po'&ovTo re ix<-C 0j/T(ai/ > instead of rja&. avrcov, on reixK 0Lev (learned re- 
specting them that they were building the walls, i. e. learned that they were building, 
etc.). X. C.3. 6, 16. iv&v fxov tuv &K\oov, ix6repd aoi Sokovctiv iirl ro7s 
roiovrois iiralvov fxaWov rj \poyov rvyxdveiv (observe respecting the others, whether). 
('Ev&vfA€?o-frai with the Gen. of the thing, for example rrjs wpas, X. Ven. 8, 6., 
twv tSttodv, ib. 9, 4, signifies to have a regard for something, and belongs to § 174, 1 
(b) ; iv&v/j.e7ar&ai with the Ace. of the thing signifies to reflect upon, consider 
something, aliquid secum reputare.) PI. Protag. 324, c. diroS4xovrai oi <rol 
■jroAlrai Kal %aAKeajy Kal ffKvr or 6/j.ov avufiovKevovros rd iroXiriKa 
(receive the opinion of the brazier and shoemaker). Her. 6, 76. dyacrStai rov 
'Epacrtvov ov -rrpod iSovr os rovs TroKLr)ras ( to admire Erasin us because he did 
not betray the citizens). Th. 1, 84. rb /3paSu ko.1 ix4\\ov, o fj.4fx<povT ai [xaXiara 
7)fj.uv, ixT] alcrxvveaSe (for which they chiefly complain of us). X. Cy. 3. 1, 15. ei 
dyacrai rod irarpos, r) ocra /3e/?ouAeuTcu, r) ova irlir pax^t Taw vol 
<rvfj.f3ov\evcc tovtov /xi/xeTa^raL (if you admire my father either for the measures he 
has devised, etc.). Ages. 2, 7. rd8' avrov dyafxai, '6ri -KapecrKevdaaro (1 ad- 
mire this in him). 8. 4. iyeb Kal rovro eiraivS} 'Ayy cr i\dov, rb npbs to 
dp4o~Keiv ro7s "EKKnffiv virepide?v rrjv f3actX4oos £evtav (1 praise Agesilaus for this 
also). PI. Men. 95, c. Topyiov fj.d\i(rra ravra ayafxai (1 particularly ad- 
mire this in Gorgias, or Gorgias for this). Theaet. 161, b. '6 &aujnd(w rod 
kraipov, rode Zcrriv (wliat I admire in a companion is this). Criton 43, b. o~ov 
ird\ai bavfidCto, al cr&av 6 /xevo s, cos f/Sea>s Ka&evdeis. Pp. 383, a. 7roAAa 
'O fxr) pov iiraiv ovvr e s & A A a touto ovk iTraiveaofxe^a ( though we praise 
many other things in Homer). 

Rem. 21. In themselves, the above verbs take the Ace, e. g. 6pu nva or ti, 
ckottS} nva or ri, iiraivu, tyeyca, fxefxcpo/xai, dyafxai nva or ri. 



§ 274. (b) Causal Genitive. 

The second division of the causal genitive includes the geni- 
tive, which expresses the cause or occasion, i. e. the object, 
which calls forth or occasions the action of the subject. This 
genitive stands : 

1. With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the 
wind (verba affcctiturti), viz. : 



388 syntax. [$ 274. 

(a) Desire and longing for : IttiSvixuv, Ipav, ipu)Tim<$ e^etv 01 
SiaKeto-#ax; Snj/r)v, Treivrjv; 

(b) Care for, concern for, and the contrary : e7ri/A€A€«r#ai, 
<f>povTit,ew, KrjScoScu, ircpiopaaSai, irpoopav, vTtepopav [to despise}, 
7rpovo€LV, /xeXei, jaera/xeAei, d/AeAeiv, oAiyoopeiv, cjieifteaSai, €vSv{X€i(rSaL 
(to have a regard for, § 273, Rem. 20) ; 

(c) Pain, grief pity: okofyvpecrSaiy 7rev-9xKa)s cx etv ? eAeea> 
and oiKTcipuv (with the Ace. of the person and Gen. of the 
thing); 

(d) Anger and indignation: opyi£eo-#ai (with the Dat. of the 
person and the Gen. of the thing), x a ^ €7r ^ </>cpe«/; 

(e) Envy : <£#ovetv»(with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. 
of the thing), e7ri</>#onos Sia.KeTo-#ai; 

(f) Admiration, praise, blame; #au//,a£eiv and ayacr^at (with 
the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, sometimes 
also with the Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the person, 
which is governed by that thing, see Rem. 2) &7A.01V, evSatfxo- 
vC&iv, lirawuv, jxifjifao-SaL (all with the Ace. of the person and 
the Gen. of the tiling). 

PI. Up. 403, a. 5 opSbs epas Tr4(pvK€ Kofffxiov re teal Ka\ov ffwfypovws re 
Kal fiovaiKus ipav (to love what is well ordered and beautiful). 438, a. ovSels 
ttotov iiri^vfie?, aX Act % p 7} C t o ir or ov, Kal ov o~ Ir ov, ctAAa % p rj o~ r o v 
trirov irdpres yap 'dpa ruv aya&wv iv ifrv/jLovo* iv (no one desires drink, 
but wholesome drink, etc.). Symp. 181, b. ol <pavXoi ra>v av&pc&irwv tS>v cwjua- 
twv /xaXXov, r) ruv xpvx&v ipcoffiv (love their bodies more than their souls). 
186, b. to av6p.oiov avo (jlolodv iiri^v/ne? Kal i pa, (desires and loves what is 
unlike). 216, d. 2w/cpctT7js ipur iku>s StcC/cetTot ru>v KaXwv (is very fond 
of the beautiful). X. Cy. 3. 3, 12. (Kvpos) Katceivovs iiroi-no'ev ipar news %x €lv 
rod fjS-n iroieTv ti (made them desirous of doing something). X. O. 13, 9 
■jreiyuai rod iiralvov ovx t\ttov eviai toou (pvosw, r) a~XXai rwv airwv re 
Kal irorcov (thirst for praise not less than others for food and drink). Attribu- 
tive, e. g. spas, iiri&vfj.la dperrjs (amor, cupiditas virtutis, love, desire for virtue). 
Th. 6, 14. K^Secrd-cu rrjs 7roAea>s (to be anxious about the city). Her. 3, 151. 
4iro\i6pKee (BafivXowlovs) <p p our i Qovr as ov8hv rrjs ir o A iopK ir] s (having 
no concern about the siege). 3, 159. rod airov irpoopav (to have a care for, 
to provide food). X. Symp. 8, 33. ol ^6yov acppovr iffr elv ifrt£6/j.eyoi ovk 
a\ax vV0VTaL alo'xp^v ti Troieiv (those accustomed to be indifferent to censure). 
X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. Tlep(ru>v vofioi (&pxovrai) rov koivov aya&ov iirifie- 
Xoi/fxevoi (Juiving a regard for the public good). MeAet fioi rivos (1 
have a care for something, some one). PI. Crito, 44, c. ri rjfuv ttjs tu>v ttoXXcoP 
S<J£tjs fteAet; (why do we care for the opinion of the multitude?). 5. 1,21. 



$ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 389 

TwfSpva ireipdcrofj.aL iroieTv jut)7tot6 per apeXr) crai rrjs irpbs efie 6dov (tJiat 
Gobryas shall not repent of his journey to me). Id. C. 1. 2, 9. virepopav iiroiei 
tG)v Ka& eo-roorwv v6[j.(av robs avv6vras (made his associates despise the ex- 
isting laws). Th. 4, 124. BpacriSas rrjs Mevor)s it e p to pu> fie vos (solicitous 
about Mende). X. H. 5. 4, 1. &eol ovre ruv o<r efiovvr w v, ovre rSjv av6cna 
tto to v I/ray a/xeXovcri (are regardless neither of the wicked nor the profane) . 
Cy. 8. 7, 15. eavrov ten Serai 6 irpovouv adeXcpov (he who takes thought 
for a brother is anxious for himself). X. Ag. 7, 1. 'AyrjcriXaos, oirov opero rr\v 
rrarpida ri oxpeX-qaeiv, ov xpij^ar&jy i(peidero (did not spare his wealth). 
Attributive, e. g. tppovrh twj/ rraldcop (cura liberorum, care for children). So 
eTri/u.eXr)s rivos (caring for something). X. Cy. 5. 4, 32. 6 Kvpos a.KOvo'as rod 
fieu ird&ous (fi Kreipev avr6v (pitied him on account of his suffering). 5.2, 7. 
r)]v frvyarepa, irev&iKcos ex ov(rav T0 " aoeX<pov refrvntcoros, e^dyav 
&5e elirev (grieving for her dead brother). Symp. 4, 37. rovrovs o'lKreipco rrjs 
&yav xaAe7T7?s v6o~ov (I pity them on account of the disease). Attributive, e. g. 
&Xyos eralpow (de amicis, for, on account of fiends) ; moreover with adjectives 
also (though only in poetry), and especially with exclamations with or without 
interjections. Eur. Or. 413. olfxoi 5 looy/iav, ols eXavvojxai raXas! (alas the 
vexations !). X. Cy. 3, 1,39. <pev rod avdpSs (Oh what a man!). PL Up. 
509, c. "ArroXXov, Sai/xovias vir ep # oXrj s! X. Cy. 2.2,3. r r) s r v x V $> to 
i/xe vvv KX-n&evra Sevpo rvx&v ! ( ill fortune, that lam called hither at this time !). 
Xys. C Philon. 187, 11. Ka&ecrTrjfce ri e&os SiKaiov iraaiv avSpd>irois, rav avrwv 
a 5 ikt) (xdrcov fiaXiara bpyi£ecr&ai ro7s (xaXiara Svvajxevois, fxrj a.5iKe7y, ro7s 
8e ireurjo'iy r) advvdrois ra> aw^ari avyyucofxrjv e%eiy, Sia rb r)ye7o~&ai &Kovras avrovs 
a/xaprdveiv (to be angry on account of the same wrongs). (In poetry, the Gen. is much 
more frequent with verbs expressing anger, e. g. II. £, 266. 'HpaKXrjos rrep ix^' 
era to, 7rai5bs eo7o (was angry on account of Hercules, his son). Od. a, 69. (Tlocreiodcov) 
KvkXoottos /cex^wTai,^ ocp^aX/xov aXducrev (is angry on account of the Cyclops). 
S. Antig. 1177. rrarpl /xrjvicras <povov (having been angry with the father on 
account of the murder). Eur. Or. 749. fcrws cot Svyarepos &v fiov jxevos). At- 
tributive, e. g. x^ os tiv6s (ira alicujus instead of de aliquo, anger on account of 
some person or thing). $Sove7v ni/t rrjs aocptas (to envy one on account of his 
ivisdom). Th. 1, 75. a£ioi io'/xev apxys yz r>s exofiev ro7s"EXXrja-i fir) orvcos Ixyav 
e 7r t (p & 6 v oo s 5 1 a k e 7a & a i (it is not just that we should be so much envied by the 
Greeks on account of our sovereignty). So also in poetry, /leyatpoo, e. g. Aesch. 
Prom. 627. ov /xeyalpco rovb~4 aoi Soop^fxaros (I do not envy you because of 
this gift). Attributive, e. g. <p&6vos riv6s (envy on account of something). X. Cy. 
2.3,21. roviov ovv b Kvpos ayao~&els rrjs re ir pa6rt\ros Ka\ rr\s oioaa- 
KaXias Kal rrjs iir i /xeXeias, 4k aXeare /cat ravrrju r\\v rd\iv eirl to Seiirvov abv 
rop Ta^idpxv (having admired him on account of his gentleness, education, etc.). 
Symp. 4, 45. {7)Xa> ere rod irXovrov (I envy you on account of your wealth). 
PI. Symp. 194, e. Sokovcti irdures robs avSpooirovs evS aip.ovl£eiv rCov aya- 
due, S>v 6 frebs avro7s airios (to consider men happy on account of the good things, 
which, etc.). Ion. 530, b. noXXdnis ye i£r)Xwcra Ofxas rols pa^/wSovs rrjs 
rtxvr\s. Dem. Cor. 296, 204. ris obnav aydcrairo rwv avSpuv ineivb)* 

33* 



390 syntax. [$ 274 

rrjs apeTrjs ; (who would not admire the valor of those men ?). Lys. Simon. 100, 
44. &av/j.d£(a p.d\icrTa tovtov rrjs Siavoias {I admire his purpose). Id. 
Eratosth. 124,41. £&avp.acra rrjs t6\(it)s tcov Xey6vToov. So with ad' 
jectives, e. g. PI. Phaedon. 58, e. evoaip-tuv (xoi 6 dyrjp ityalvero Kal tov 
Tp6irov Kal tuv Xoyoiv, cos adecos Kal yevvaicos ereAeuTa (the man seemed to 
be happy on account of his habits and remarks). 

Remark 1 . The Gen. with the ahove verbs is often governed by preposi- 
tions, especially ire pi, e. g. i7ri/j.eXe?crSrat, <ppovTi£eiv irepi twos. Some verbs 
which denote a state or an affection of the mind, do not govern the Gen. ; thus 
Tro&e?v (to long for, to feel the want of), always governs the Ace, and so 
(pi\e?y, ayairuv, ctt 4 pysiv (to love) ; the last two also in the sense of to be 
contented with, take the Dat. ( = Lat. Abl.). Several of the above verbs have also 
different constructions ; then they common ly express different ideas, e. g. 
(ppovTi^eiv riuos or irepl t ivos, X. C 1. 1, 11. 4. 7, 6. to be anxious for 
something, but (ppourt^eiv ti, scrutari, investigare ; — irpovoelv, irpoopav 
ti (to perceive beforehand, to consider beforehand); vir e po pav ti and tivos, 
despicere, in the same sense. In poetry, fieXei sometimes takes for its subject 
a noun denoting a thing, in the Nom. ; but in prose, it takes only a Neut. 
pronoun in the Nom. The verb is then used personally : MeA^oi/cii/ 5' 
4/j.oI 'I ir ir o t, II. k, 481 . T a v r a ^v ovv Steep peX-hcrei, PI. Phaedr. 238, d. 

Bem. 2. The verbs Savixd£e iv and 'dyacr&ai have the following con- 
structions: (a) the Ace. of the person or the Ace. of the thing alone, when the 
wonder or admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole 
nature of a person or thing, e. g. frav/xdfa top <XTpaT-qy6v (I admire the general) ; 
&av/j.d(co rfyp crocpiav (I admire the wisdom) ; — (b) the Gen. of the person and the 
Ace. of the thing, when one admires something in a person (llem. 20), e. g. 
&av[Ad£co 'XcoKpaTovs ttt\v cro<piav (I admire the ivisdom in S crates, or the wisdom of 
Socrates) ; — (c) the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, when one admires 
a person on account of some quality, e. g. dm>/xa£o> 2w/cpdT7j ttjs aocpias (I admire 
/Socrates on account of his wisdom), see 1, (f ) ; — (d) seldom Gen. of the thing and 
the Gen. of the person depending upon it, when I wonder at the quality of a per- 
son, or admire the quality of a person, e. g. Sravp.d^co ~%caKpaTovs ttjs aocpias (1 
admire the wisdom of Socrates), see 1, (f ) ; — (e) the Ace. of the person, and in- 
stead of the Gen. of the thing, a preposition, commonly Hi with the Dat., e. g. 
Savixdfa ^uKpaTn iirl Trj aocpia (I admire Socrates for, on account of his wisdom). 

2. With verbs signifying to requite, to revenge, to accuse and 
condemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as the cause 
of the requital, revenge, etc. Thus with rt/xcopeto-^at (with the 
Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), also with judicial 
verbs of accusing and condemning, e. g. atriao-Sac, eTrairiacrS-ai, Sico- 
kclv, thayew, virdyetv, ypdcpcaSat, irposKaXelcrSaL (all imth the Ace. of 
the person and the Gen. of the thing), hre^iivai, kyKaXelv, tTno-Krpr- 
reo-^cu (all three with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. of the 
thing) ; <pevyecv (to be accused) ; 8iKa£eiv, Kpivew, alpeiv, to convict 
(all three ivith the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), 
and ak&vai, to be convicted. 

Her. 3, 145. tovs imKovpovs t ifjLco prjao/xai ttjs 4vfrd8e a-rri^ios (will pun- 
ish the allies on account of the invasion of this land). (Seldom TipiupeTv rivi 



& 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 39i 

tivos, as X. Cy . 4. 6, 8. r i p. to p 7j <r e't j/ crot row tt cu 5 & s inviaxvovpai, I avengt 
you for [the murder of] your sen.) 'Enair ici(r&al riva (p 6 v o v { to accuse one of 
murder). Her. 6, 104. (MiXridfka) ol e%d-pa2 48iai£av rvpavvi^os ttjs 4v 
Xzp<rovr)<r<0 (prosecuted Miltiades for tyranny ). 'Eirej-ievat rivl cpovov (to pros- 
ecute one for murder). Tpd<pev&ai riva irapav'6 poov (to indict one for illegal 
measures). Qevyetv kXottt}s, <p6vov, acejSeias (to be accused of theft, etc.). 
Kpivea&ai aaefieias. X. Cy. 1.2, 7. Hepaai 8 iicd (overt. Kal 4 y k X "h p. a - 
tos, ov eveica Hvd-pcoiroi p.i<rov<Ti p.ev aXXrjXovs p.aXiara, hiKa^ovrai 8e f//ci(rra, 
ax&p MTTias (condemn as a crime, ingratitude). C. 1. 2,49. Kara, v6pov (Qecrri) 
Trapavoias kx6 vr i Ka\ r'bv naripa Sriaai (it is lawful for one convicting his 
father of madness). Dem. Aphob. 846. 4tt t<r K-nirr e a&al rivi rwv \bev5o- 
p.aprvpiG>v (to prosecute one for false witness). 861, 58. (pevyeiu if evSo- 
p.aprvp lSjv vtt6 twos. 'AXuvai kXotttis (to be convicted of theft). 

Rem. 3. Also the punishment for guilt is put in the Gen., but this Gen. is to 
be considered as the Gen. of price (§ 275, 3), e. g. fravdrov Kpiveiv, KpiveeStai, 
didoKeiv (to sentence, be sentenced to death). Sometimes the prepositions irepi and 
Uvaca are joined with the verb, e. g. Subnet npa -n-epl <p6vov : and apri with 
Tip.aipz?(r&cu. 'EyKaXeiv besides the above, has the following constructions : (a) 
the Dat. of person and Ace. of thing, to charge something upon some one ; — 
(b) the Dat. of person followed by a clause with on or by the Inf. ; — (c) the 
Dat. of person alone, to accuse [§ 284, 3. (6)] ; — (d) the Ace. of thing alone, 
to bring as a charge. Karr\yope7i>, to accuse, is construed : (a) with Gen. of per- 
son, sometimes with Kara and Gen. ; — (b) with Gen. of person, and Ace. of 
thing, to lay something to one's charge ; — (c) with Gen. both of person and of thing, 
sometimes -with nepi and Gen. of thing ; — (d) with Ace. of thing alone. 

3. Finally the Gen. of cause is also used in the following 
instances : 

(a) With rod p.7] and the infinitive. See § 308, 2, (b). 

(b) With the adverbs ev, KaXa>s, p. er pi cos, and the like, also with ws, 
ttws, 'Situs, fj, ottt], ovtcos, wSe, usairws, connected with the verbs 
ix* lv an( l "/Ken/, sometimes also with elvai and other intransitive verbs, the 
object by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. KaXas 
e%« 7ro5o)i> (lamwellin respect to my feet). Her. 6, 116. 'AfrnuaToi, ws iro- 
Zwv elxov, rdxicra 4$o-i]&€ov 4s rb &trrv (as they were able with respect to their 
feet, i. e. as quickly as their feet would carry them). 5, 62. xp r U JL ° t - TU3V e ^ y kop- 
res (well off for, to have a plenty of means). So ev, KaXus, p.erplcos Zx* lv &' l0V > 
<ppevoov, yeuovs, dvudpecos (to be well off as to the means of living). Ol "EXXypes 
ovroos elxov op.ovoias irpbs aXXyXovs. X. Cy. 7. 5, 56. ovrco rp6irov 
« X e t s (you are thus in respect to circumstances, yoj£ are in such circumstances). 11. 
4. 5, 15. ws rdxovs eKacrros elxev (as each was able in respect to swiftness, as 
Quickly as each was able). 



392 syntax. [$ 275. 

$ 275. (c) Genitive denoting certain Mutual 
Relations. 

The third division of the causal Gen., includes the Gen. by 
which certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation 
of the ruler to the subject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a 
subject, and a subject a ruler, an inferior, a superior, etc., the 
one may, in a measure, be considered the cause or occasion of 
the other. Hence the Gen. is used : 

1. With verbs of ruling, superiority, excelling, surpassing, sub- 
jection, inferiority : ap^co/, Kparuv, ^(nrots-iv, rvpavveiv, rvpawtvew, 
crrpaTrryeLV, ivLTpoTrevew, iiricrTaTeiv, /3acrtA.euetv, rryep,ovev€iv> r)y€Lcr$ou, 
etc.; with the adjectives eyKparrj?, tt/c/xmjs ; — also with 7r/ooe^etv, 
avexew, 7T€/H€trai, 7repiyiyveo-#ai, 7rpocrrar€tv, V7r€pj3d\\€iv, vrrep^eptw, 
Trpitirevew, Trpeo-fieveiv, TrpoKpivuv, TrpoTip.av, 7r\cov€KT€LV, etc.; — tjttol- 
tr-^at, voTC/octv, wTepi£civ, iXaTTOvafrai, piuovcr Sai, iaciovcktclv, varepov 
€Lvai, yjTTOva eTrai, etc. 

Her. 7, 97. rod vavriKov iffrpariiyeov o75e {these had the command of 
the naval forces). 3,15. iirirpoireve iv Alyvirrov.(to be the governor of 
Egypt). Th. 1, 69. 6 \6yos tov epyov itcpdrei (the report exceeded the 
thing itself). X. Cy. 1. 1, 2. &pxovr e s fiiv eitrt Kal ol PovkoAoi tuv fioiav, 
Kal ol hnro<popfio\ ru>v %tcttq)v, Kal irdvres 8e ol Ka\ovy.evoi pofieis, wv av £tti(T- 
Taruo'i £a>cov cikStcos av &px<>VT es rovrcav vopd^oivro (all those called 
herdsmen might properly be considered the commanders of those animals of which they 
have the rule). 1. 2, 8. (ol Ylepaai robs iraldas) Zi8dcTK0vcriv iyKparels eTvat 
yao-Tpbs Kal iroTov (teach them to be masters of their belly, etc., temperate in 
eating and drinking). 4.1, 14. i/xol Se 5o«:ei rrjs peyto-rrjs ydovijs iroXb 
ndkiara o-vfupepeiv iyKparri elvai (to be master of able to control the greatest pleas- 
ure). 5. 1,14. to. /xox&Tjpa av&pdbiria iraacov, oT/xat, toov imS-v/Aioe v an parr) 
iari (depraved men are subject to, not able to control all their passions). Her. 6, 61. 
KaWio'Tevce i rb iraiZiOV iraffecav rdv £v 'Zirdprrf yvvaikwv (will surpass 
all the Spartan women in beauty). Th. 1, 81. ro?s firXots avrav Kcd rep nA^S-ei 
virepty 4 pojxsv (are superior to them in arms, etc.). X. Ag. 5,2. 'AynariAaos 
yyelro &pxovn irposljKeiv ov /j.a\aKia, aAAa Kapreplq rwv Idiwr&v irepieTvai 
(that the commander ought to excel the privates, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 19. rdx*i ire- 
oteyevov avrov (you excelled him in despatch). PI. Gorg. 475, b. <rK€\p(i>{xe&a, 
Spa Xvirr) vttc p fiaWe i rb adiKe?v rod aSj/ceto'&ai, Kal aAyovai fxaWov ol 
aSiKovyres, if) ol aZiKovjxevoi (the Ace. is more usual with vwepfidAkeiv). L. 752, 
e. irpeo-peve iv tG>v ttoWwv loAfwy (to take the preceaence of many 
cities). So also &j/e'xe<r3-a{ rivos usually with a participle, to endure, per- 
mit, properly to hold one's self up over one). PI. Apol. 31, b. aviy efffr xi redp 
oiKeiwv ape\ovix4voov (to permit domestic affairs to be neglected) . "ttr &£4- * 



$ 275.] GENITIVE CASE. 393 

ovk avex*T<xL tov &\Xa \4yovros. 'HrTaff&ai ruu iiri&vfjua>v (to be sub- 
ject to one's desires). Dem. Cor. 308, 244. ovdafiov 7) tt 77 frets aTrrjX&ov r S>v 
irapa QiXimrov tt p ecr j8 ew v (being overcome by or yielding to the envoys). X. C. 
1.3,3. 2o>KpaT7js &v<rias &vuu fiiKpas airo fxiKpwv ovdhu TjyeTro /tie iova&ai rwv 
awb iroWwv Kal ixsyaXuv iroKKa Kal /xeydha Stvovt <av (did not think that he was 
inferior to those making many great sacrifices, etc.). Hier. 4, 1. fieyaXov aya- 
&ov fxeioveKTeT (comes short of a great good). 'T tr t e /> e tV rrjs /xdxys (to come 
after the battle). 'Tcrrepi^etj/ ruv icaipwv (to be behind opportunities, to fail 
to use them). 'Yctt epi^eiv riav ipy<av. X. Hier. 1, 18. Tavrn ttj eixppocrvvr) rrjs 
4\ttiSos fJLeioueKTOva t Tvpavvoi tuv ISlcotcou. 2, 1. fxeio v e ktovvt as 
koX a-ircav Kal ttotuv Kal otycov (coming short of food, etc.). 

Remark 1. 'Hye/xov eveiv and riyelcr&ai in the sense of to go before, 
to show the way, with 656u expressed or understood, govern the Dat. ; Kparelv in 
the sense of to conquer, regularly governs the Ace., but in the sense of to be 
master of, potiri, to rule, have the command of, the Gen., e. g. upareTv to i/s iro- 
\e/LLiovs (vincere) ; Kparziv t i) s x&pas, rrjs ir6hzw s, tuu ivavTi&v, twv 
ex i&vfjLLuv, t ov opovs (all in Xen.). 

Eem. 2. That in which one excels another, in prose, is usually put in the 
Dat., but is often expressed by prepositions, e. g. %v rm, eft ti, Kard ti, itrl 
tivi. — With 7)TTao-&ai vir6 is often joined with the Gen., e. g.. Th. 1, 62. rb 
CTpaTOTreSov fjffcraTO vnrb t&v 'Afryvaiuv. 

2. The Comparative and adjectives in the positive with the 
force of the Comparative, e. g. numerals in -ao-tos and -77X01)5; 
Sevrtpos, 7reptrTo'g, etc., take the object by which the comparison 
is expressed hi the Gen. Genitive of Comparison. 

X. An. 7. 7, 41. ou5e;/ vo(xi(ca avdpl naWiov efvcu KTriiJ,a ouSe \afiir por e pov 
apeTT]s kou ZiKaioGvvns Kal yevu <xi6tt]t os (I do not think that man has 
any possession more beautiful than virtue, etc.). X. Cy. 7. 5, 83. ov Syirov tov 
&PXOVTO. t&v apxopevov ir ovrj p6r e pou irposrjKa. eluai (it does not become a 
commander to be more base than his subjects). Eur. Med. 965. XP V<T0S *>e Kpelcr- 
atov fivpiwv \6ycov fipoTois (is better than a myriad of words). Her. 7, 48. 
to 'EWyviKOV aTpdrevfxa (patueTcu iro\\aTr\-t)G iov ecrea&cu tov r] /xgt e pov 
(that the army will be much more numerous than ours). 8. 137. 5 1 ir \ 4\ a- 1 o s iytveTO 
avTbs kuxiTov (he was twice as great as before). 6, 120. vaTepoi airiKOfj.evoi 
ttjs av/xfiohri s Ijx^ipovro '6/j.us &e-f}crao-&ai tovs MtjSous 1 (though they came later 
(Ivan the battle, after the battle). Ovdevbs Sevrepos (second to, inferior to no one). 
Ovtievbs vct € pos . Tuv apKovvrwv ir ep itt a. KTiiaaabai (to acquire more 
than enough). 

Rem. 3. Sometimes the object of comparison is denoted, like a space-rela- 
tion, by irp6 and oj/ti with the Gen., or by irapd and irp6s with the Ace. See 

prepositions. 

3. With verbs of buying and selling, e. g. wi/eto-^cu, ayopd'Cw, 
irptaaSac, KraaSat, 7rapaAajU./3aveiv ; 7ra)A.etv, ujro&i&ocrSai, TrepiSiOoowai, 
StSoVat ; — also with verbs of exchanging and bartering, e. g. 



394 SYNTAX. [$ 275 

dAXarrciv, aWd,TT€<r$ai, Sta/x,ei/3eo-#cu, Xvetv, etc. ; — with verbs of 
valuing, e. g. TLfiav, Ti//.acr#cu, 7roteto-«9-at, d£iow, d£iot>o-#ai, and with 
the adjective d£ios. Genitive of price. 

Her. 5, 6. (ot Qpft'ices) wveovr ai Tas yvvaircas irapa rwv yoveuv %pr\//.dr wv 
p eyd\ a v (buy their wives at a great price). X. C- 2. 1,20. to?*/ ir6vo»v iraXov- 
civ r)fuv irdvra rayd^ ol 3-eot (se/£ a// (700c? things to us for toils). Cy. 3. 1, 36 
cry 5e, 5 Tiypdvrj, Ae£o»> ^tot, iroVou af irpT a to, wstc T^f 7wcu/ca cnroAafie7i> 
(what would you pay to regain your wife). 'Eyw yXv, zcp-n, S> Kooe, kav rr)s ^i/%vjs 
it p 1 a i /XT] v f wsre /xt?7tot6 Xarpevaai ravrrju (I would buy her at the expense of my 
life). H. £, 236. Teu%e' fafxeifiev, xP V(X * a x«^k«W, kKar6[x^oi ivvea&oiav (was 
exchanging arms, golden for brazen, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 37. kcu cro 5e, <& 'Ao/teVte, 
airdyov rr)v re 71/yat/ca /cat aiirovs ircuSas /xridev avrtav KaTa&eis (nulla re pro 
iis deposita, having paid nothing for them). Ot ayaSrol ovdevbs av Kepdovs ttjv 
rf/s iraTpldos £\ev&epiav av t a\\d£aivro (the good would exchange the freedom 
of their country for no gain). 11. A, 514. l-nrphs yap avrjp ttoXXwv avrd^ios 
ctAAaj' (is worth as much as many others). Her. 3, 53. 6 AvuStypoov ouSe av a- 
k pier 10 s r}£loo(T€ rbv (pepovra rrjv ayy zhir\v (thought the one who brought the 
message not worthy of an examination). 6,112. i/xaxovro a£t«s \6yov (worthy 
of praise). 'A£iovv riva rip.7)s (to consider worthy of honor). X. Cy. 2. 2, 17. 
£70)76 ovZev avLcruTepov vo/xifa roov iv av&pa>iroLs elvai rov ruv Xcrcav t6v re 
Kaicbv Kal ayaSrbv a£iovo'§ai. Ti/xav rivi rivos and riva rivos, e. g. 5e/ca to- 
Kavrcav, rod fravdrov (to fine one ten talents, to sentence one to death, to con~ 
sider one worthy of punishment). So the Mid., usfed of the accuser : Ttuaafr at 
tivl apyvpiov, fravdrov, to impose a fine, or penalty of death upon one ; com- 
monly, however, Bikt]v is here supplied. 

Rem. 4. With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usually 
considered like a relation of space, and is denoted by avri with the Gen. 

Rem. 5. The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen. § 262, b.) expresses a 
much greater variety of relations, than the Gen. with verbs. For where two 
objects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutual 
relation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, seems 
united with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. Hence the 
rule : When two substantives are connected with each other, the substantive which 
completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in the Gen. As ad- 
jectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to the substantive, 
many adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from which they are 
derived, take the Ace, e. g. icpariarou irarpbs 'EAXrjvojv r pa (pels (sprung from, 
like natus alicujus), S. Ph. 3. 

Rem. 6. The attributive genitive is called the Subjective, the Objective, 
or Passive genitive, according to the mode in which it originates in the sen- 
tence : 

(a) It is called the Subjective Gen., when it originates from the subject of 
the sentence or from a Gen. depending on elvai and yiyvecr&ai. It always de- 
notes something active (instead of passive), the cause, author, hence also the 
possessor, the whole in relation to its parts, e. g. 01 rod 5 4v 8 p v Kap-Koi (arising 
from rb devdpov (pepei Kapnovs), the fruits of the tree, the fruits which the tree 
produces. To tt\s crocplas KaWos (arising from rj aro(pia irapex* 1 KaAAos or 
}) (to (pi a Ka\r) ianv or KaAAos 4o~tX rr)s 0* o <pi as), the beauty of ivisdom, the 



ft 276, 277.} accusative case. 395 

beauty which wisdom causes. To rod 'Ofj.r)pov iroi-fifxara. 'O rod fiacr i\eat 
vlos. 'H rov audpbs apery. 

(b) It is called the Objective or Causative Gen., when it originates from the 
object of the sentence, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of an intransi- . 
tive verb, e. g. ^ rr\s aro<pias em&vp.ia, the desire for wisdom (eTri&vficb rrjs 
aocpias, the cro<ptas being the cause of the iTri&v/j,u) ; 6 rrjs apery s epccs, vir- 
tutis amor, the love of or for virtue (epeo rrjs aperrjs) ; evvoid rivos, good-will 
towards one (evvovs elfxi nvi) ; eirifxeXeia r a> v ir t\e jaikwv epywv, cura rerum 
bellicarum (eirijieXovfxai. rSov iroXe/j.iKcouepya)v). 'H rau TLXar aiewv eiriarpa- 
reia instead of vrpbs robs XL, the expedition against the Plataeans. Th. 1, 108. 
4v airofidaei rijs yrjs instead of iirl rijs 777s, in disembarking on the land. 

(c) It is called the Passive Gen., when it originates from the passive object 
of transitive verbs in the Ace, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of a 
transitive verb, and so denotes the thing affected or caused by the transitive 
action, e. g. r) rys iro'A.ews ktictis (from tcri£ei rr\v rroXiv), the city being that which 
is possessed. 'O rrjs eirio'roXris ypa<pevs (from ypdcpei eiriaroXriv), the imff- 
roXii being the object acted upon. 'H ru>v KaXwv epycov rrpa^is. 

Rem. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives expressing dif- 
ferent relations. Her. 6, 2. 'lanalos vireSwe ra>v 'I do vav ryv r)yep.ovir)v rov 
irpbs Aapelov tto Xe /j.ov the command of the Ionians in the v:ar against Darius. 

4 276. (2) Accusative. 

The Ace. is the Whither-case, and hence denotes: (a) in the 
local relation, the goal, limit, or point to which the action of the 
verb is directed, e. g. oxrrv poXelv, to go to the city; — (b) in the 
causal relation, the effect, consequence, object produced; also 
the object put by the action in a. passive condition, i. e. the object 
on which the action is performed. 



§ 277. A. Local Relation. 

The Ace. in its local relation (Ace. of local termination), denotes the local 
limit, place, or object towards which the subject moves. Hence this Ace. is 
used with verbs of motion, going, coming, etc. ; yet this usage is found only in 
the poets, especially in Homer. Od. 7, 162. ol fj.hu airocrrptyavres efdav veas 
aiKpieKiaaas (they went to the ships). II. a, 317. Kvicrat] 5' ovpavbv f/ce (arose to 
heaven). Od. a, 176. rroXXol Xcrav avepes r)[xerepov Sw (came to our house). S. 0. T. 
35. &arv KaSfxelov fMoXeiv. Eur. Med. 7. Mr)5eia irvpyovs yys eirXeva 'laXKias. 

Remark. In prose, and usually also in poetry, a preposition is joined with 
the Ace, winch defines still more definitely the relation indicated by the Ace, 
c. g. els, in, into, &s, to, Kara, downwards, aj/d, upwards, virep, over, eiri, wjton, -rrepi 
and a,u<pi, around, round about, /ierd, into the midst, after, irpos, to, into the presence 
of, irapd, near to, vir6, under, e. g. levai is rrjv irSXiv, -KpoeXSrelv ws rbv fiacriXea, 
Tepi or ap.<p\ rr\v ir6Xtv fiaiveiv — eirl rbv &p6vov avafiaiveiv — eX&e?v p.era Tpuas 
— levai rrapa {SaaiXea — levai rrpbs "'OXvp.irov — levai virb yatav. 



396 syntax. [$ 21b. 

B. Causal Relation. 
§ 278. (a) Accusative denoting Effect. 
l.Tlie Accusative denoting effect is used as in other lan- 
guages, e. g. ypdcfxo tTno-Tokrjv. The original and simplest form 
of the Ace. of effect (of the object produced), is where a verb, 
either transitive or intransive, takes the Ace. of an abstract 
substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or 
has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pro- 
noun or an attributive clause commonly belongs to the Ace. 
This is often called the Cognate Accusative. 

PI. Symp. 181, b. ovtSs ia-riu (6 epws), %v ol <pav\oi )&v av&pdnrcw ipu<riv 
(which bad men love). PI. L. 680, e. Pa<r tAelav iracSuv ZiKaiordr-qv f$a<ri- 
\ev6fX€Poi (ruling a kingdom). Prot. 325, c. eirtjue Xovvrai tracrav iw+ft4-- 
\eiav (they care for with all care, bestow all care upon). Dem. Aph. 845, 4. 
deof.Lai v/Aav SiKaiav derjetv. X. An. 1. 3, 15. <tt par f\yi]<T ovt a. i/xe 
ravT-ny rr]v o-rpar-nyiav (to be general of this command, army). 6.3,6. evrv- 
X'noav rovro rb evrvxyH-a (were fortunate in this good fortune, obtained this 
advantage). Id. H. 7. 1,5. TrAetaTovs Kat fieylcrrovs ayuivas ijywv ifffxiv ot 
Kara &d\aTTai> iXax^ra /xej/ airoreTvxf]KaT€, irAeicra 8e KanopfrctiKare (having 
contended in the greatest contests). Andoc. Myst. 5, 31. apaardfitvoi ras /xeyia-- 
ras a pas v/jui/. So KaXasirpd^isTrpdrreiv', ipyd^abai epyov koKov; &px^tv 5iKalav 
apx^v 5 alffxpav SovAeiav SovAeveiv ; fxiyav ir6\e[AOv iroXe/xelv ; %<*^ e7r V v6aov voaCiv. 
'EKd'fjfj.ovs ffr pareias ii;T)ecrav (like e£o5oj/ e£teVcu). Th. 1, 112. Aaicedaifj.6- 
vloi rbv Upbv KaKovfj^vov irSXefiou iar par eu aav (like (rrpareiav arpaTevew). 
So opicovs ofAvvvcu, aff&eveiv v6crov, Qqv filou. X. Hier. 6, 7. irotov Se viva virvov 
iKoi/xw. If the idea of the verb permits, the passive construction also can 
be used, e. g. f O oiKeios tj/juv ir6Xe/j.os ovrcos iiroXe fA"f]&7} (our intestine war 
ivas so warred, so managed), PI. Menex. 243, e. KaXal irpd£eis irpdrrovrat. 
So also with adjectives, e. g. Ka/col iraaav Kaiciav, PI. Rp. 490, d. In certain 
phrases, such as (pvXaKas (pvXdrreiv, excubias agere, <popov (<p6povs) <pepetv, tribu- 
tum solvere, ito/xtttju irofnreiy, pompam ducere, the substantive can stand without 
an adjective, because here the substantive is used in a special and pregnant 
sense. 

2. In place of the substantive from the same stem as the 
verb, or of a similar signification with it, an attribute of such 
cognate substantive, can also be used ; in this case, the verb 
frequently has a pregnant sense, since it contains, at the same 
time, an additional idea. 

N iKciv fxdxf}v = v'tKTjp fidxris (to conquer a battle, i. e. to win a battle) ; so 
O A v fx 7r i a (— 'OXvfXTrivv viK-nv) v ucav (to conquer in the Olympic games), Th. 1, 
126. NjkSj/ uav/xax^as = vi\a\v vavfxax^v (to gain a naval victory), 7, 66' 



♦ 278.] ACCUSATIVE case. 397 

vikclv yvd/xrjv, sententiam vincere, viKav 81kt]i/ (to carry one's opinion, one's 
suit, triumphantly); like &v/xa frveii/ is: ra iir iv'iKia (Upd or &v/j.aTa), ei/077^ 
\ia, Sia/Zarripia, yev4&\ta, ra AvKaia, yd/xovs &veti/ (to offer a 
sacrifice on account of victory, a festive offering, etc., i. e. to celebrate the victory, etc. 
by a sacrifice)] rb lie per inbv wpx^To (danced the Persian dance), X. An. 
6. 1, 10; ravra (crvv^7}fxara) ffv vfr*/j.€ vol (having made these agreements) ; 
ravT a ( = opicovs tovtwv) o/j-Scrayres (having taken these oaths) ; rapdrreip 
noXe/xop — rdpay/xa iro\4/j.ov (to stir up war, turbando bellum concitare, as it is 
said, bellum miscere), PI. Up. 567. a. Passively, iroKe^os irpbs tous 'Afxcpiao-els 
irapdx&y, Dem. Cor. 277, 151. 

3. The following constructions, likewise, mostly confined to 
poetry, deserve special notice ; in these, also, instead of the 
substantive from the same stem as the verb or with a kindred 
signification, the attributive of such kindred substantive is put 
in the Accusative : 

(a) Verbs signifying to shine, to burn, to flow, to pour, to shoot or spring forth, 
e. g. acrr pd-n-re iv yopywnbv a4\as = aarpair^v yop. <r4haos (to lighten a 
fearfully* bright light, i. e. casting a bright and terrific light), Aesch. Pr. 356 ; 
fr d A A e 1 v fiiou (germinating, producing the means of, life), Pers. 61 7. 'Epefi- 
vbv alp e 5 e v <r a (I poured out black blood), S. Aj. 376. Sro^etc ddupva, 
aT/j.a, xd/jLireiv cr4\as, pe?v yd\a (all confined to poetry). 

(b) Verbs whicb express sound, laughter, panting, and smelling ; here, instead of 
the substantive, commonly an adjective merely, or even a pronoun is used, 
e. g. <p&4yyeo~&ai a<r&ev4s, rcareiv6v = <p&oyybv ctcr&ej/Tj, etc. (to sound 

feeble, etc.); rjdv (= tjSvv y4\wra) yz\av (to laugh heartily) ; rjSv irvelv (to 
breathe sweetly) ; p.4vea irvetovres 5 A%atoi breathing spirit) ; y Apea 7rj/€iV 
(Maiiem spirare) ; 6£eiv fjdv: &epiv6v re /cat Myvpbu vttt)X € ? (o toitos) 
t£ rwv Terriyccv x^PV (resounds summer, etc., with a summer-like and shrill 
sound, comp. Lat. aestivum sonat, vox hominem [= sonum hominis] sonat), 
PI. Phaedr. 230, c. 'A v e k d y x a cr 4 T€ fj.d\a vapMvtov (burst into a sardonic 
laugfi), Rp. 337, a. 

(c) Verbs signifying to see, to look. Od. t, 446. avs irvp (= S4py/xa irvpds) b<p- 
&a\/*o7<n SeSop/ccos ( looking fire, flashing fire ). So /3 A e 7r e t ;/, Sep/ce- 
crfrat "Aprjv = P\4/Afj.a "Apeos (to look war, terror) ; bpav ctA/djp (to look 
courage or boldness) ; d4pKecrfrai Seivoy, o-/j.ep8aX4ov, ranepd (to look terri- 
bly, etc.); <p6fiov fr\4irsiv (to look fury). II. a, 105. /cdV baaijxevos 
(looking evil, with a threatening look, comp. Eng. looking daggers). /3, 269. 
a-Xpeiov iBdbv, looking foolish. PI. Ion. 535, e. nXaiovrds re Kal Seii/bv 
e fj. /3 A 4 ir v t a s. 

Remark 1. By this use of the Ace. numerous adverbial expressions can be 
explained, the place of the Ace. with its accompanying adjective being sup- 
plied either by a pronoun alone (tovto, t65(, ravra, rdSc, t\, t'l, ov54v, ^SeV, 
i, fi, etc.), or by a neuter adjective, e. g. TauTa \vire7(r^ai nal tout a x^'P* 1 * 

34 



398 ■ syntax. [$279. 

toTs iroWots {to grieve at the same things, and to rejoice at the same), Dem. Cor. 
323, 292. &av fAa&Ta inirXrirrovrai {are wonderfully astonished), PI. Symp. 
192, c. Th Kpdr terra tfv&rjaais {were most flourishing), Th. 1,19. So fiaicpbu* 
KXateiv; iravra evdai/J.ove'iv ; axpeAetf, fShdirreiu, Qq/xiovv aeyaXa, fiucpd) 
evepyerelv to. /j. 4 y i <r t a, r]8v yeXav, jiieye or jLieydka (ppovelv, ay.aprdvei.Vj 
§e?<r&ai, 8iacp4peiv Ti, etc. 

Rem. 2. Here also belong such adverbial expressions as : x°-P lv {gratia, for 
Hie sake of), xdpiv efxrjv, gt\v {mea, tua, gratia), dcopedv {gratis), dwrivvv, npolita, 
jxdrnv {iiicassum). So also rovro., ravra {therefore), ri {why), 6 {therefore). Eur. 
Hec 13. ve(t>r.aros 5' i\v Tlpta/xio'cov' o Kai /xe yrjs vne^Tve^av. PL Prot. 310, C 
uAA.' avra ravra vvv tjkco irapa a 4 {on this very account). 

4. The Ace. denotes also the effect merely aivied at, the de- 
sign of the action ; yet almost always with neuter pronouns or 
adjectives merely, whereas with substantives a preposition, as 
ci9, 7rpo?, bn, is commonly used. The following verbs, in partic- 
ular, belong here: 

Xpvjo-i&cu rivi ti (originating from xpV^ai tm xP*' iav )>t° use something 
for something; irei&eiv (originating from irel&etv riva ire?o*iv), iiralpeiv, 
iiror pvveiv, irpoKaKelo'Srai, avayKa^eiv r ivd r i, etc. Quk ex», on 
XP'ho'ofjiai avrcS. Ti 5rj XPV ^d /j.e&a rovrco ; {for what purpose shall we use 
him, what use shall we make of him?). Trj Kprjvv t« irXelo-rov al-ia exp^vra 
{ad res maximi momenti), Th. 2, 15. Tl€i(r&7jvai rrjv avax wpyo-iv, to be 
persuaded to a retreat (instead of the usual construction els r. avax&p-), ib. 21> 
Tavrd ere eiror pvvu {I excite you to this). 'Air 4 pxop.cu, irpiv xmb crov rt (let- 
£ov avayicao-& rjvai {before I am compelled by you to anything more severe), PI. 
Phaedr. 242, a. Tovro ovk eireifre robs $coKcu4as {did not persuade the Pho- 
caeans of this), Her. 1, 163 ; but iiror pvveiv els /ad.xW' 

Rem. 3. The Ace. of design or purpose, is transferred to the manner according 
to or in which something takes place. Here the fundamental idea is that of 
striving for an object. Thus rpoirov, rovrov rbv rp6irov {hunc in modum, in this 
manner), irdvra rp6irov, riva rpoirov, Sinwv {in morem, according to the manner of 
like), ojxoia {in like manner), emr-nZ4s (consulto), rdxos and Kara rdxos (celeriter), 
Commonly, however, prepositions are used with such adverbial expressions. 



^279. (b) Accusative of the suffering Object, i.e. the 
Object upon which the Action is performed. 

Only those verbs will be mentioned here, which, in Latin, 
take some other Case than the Ace, or are constructed with 
prepositions. 

1, The verbs a)qE)£A€«', ovwavai, ovwacrSai, fiXairrziv, dStKetv, evo^- 
keiv (commonly with Dat.), vj3pi£,av, Av/Aaivecr#ai, Aco/3acr$ai, <rt- 
veo-SaL, AotSopetv (to chide) ; evcrefieiv, do-e/3etv ; ko^a-v, iv&pevav ; rt- 
fAuipcxoSac ; Stpairevew, 8opv<f>opelv, iiriTpoTrevtw (to provide with fl 



$ 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 399 

guardian); KoXaKCvew, ^coTreuetv ($<j}tttuv Poet.), 7rposKwetv; 7T£i 
#eiv; a/xet/?eo-^at (Poet, respondere), remunerari ; (pyXdrreor^aL, 
evXafiuaScu ; yui/xeicr^cu, £77X01)1/ (fo emulate). 

X. C. 1.2, 64. (2w/c/3aT7js) (pavepbs t)v Repair evoov robs freovs [evidently 
worshipped the gods). Aesch. Ctes. 618. ris av d-q driy-aycoybs roiovros, ostls rbv 
fxev Sri/xov Sarrevcrai Svvairo, robs §e Kaipovs, ev oh r)v cc^ecr&cu rr\v ttoXiv, 
aTrSSoiro; {as would be able to flatter the people). Hei&eiv rb ttXtj&os (topersuade 
the multitude). X. Hier. 4, 3. oi TroXlrai 5 opvcpo povcr i piev aXXi]Xovs &vev /.uo-frov 
(keep guard over each other). R. L. 12, 5. /xerao-rparoiredevovrai ye (ot AaKehaijjLovioi) 
firju ttvkvcl Kal rov o'lvec^rai robs iroXe/xiei-s eveKa, Kal rov acpeXelv toils' 
(piXovs (for the sake of injuring their enemies, ar.d assisting their friends) . C. 4. 3, 
1 5. eKeivo Se a&v/j.a>, on p.oi So/ce? r a s rcav &ecov evepyeaias ovtf av eh irore av- 
&pcoir(t>v al-iais ~)(a.pio~iv a/j.eifieo'drai. Her. 6, 138. ix6xv <r a v fas rcov'A&rjvaicvv 
yvvaiKas. Til. 1, 32. TlXeio~r apx ov > rbv Aecvvidov, out a pac i\4 a Kal 
veov en, 67reT p 6it evev (6 Tlavaavias). X. H. 5. 1, 17. ri tjSlov, t) (xrio'eva 
av&pcoTTtoV KoXaKeveiv p.i)re "E X X r] v a, ix4\tg fidpfiapov, elveKa fiio~&ov; — • 
Upo SKweiv fiaaiXea, PI. Rp. 334, b. wep eXelv (xev rovs (piXovs (SoKe?) 
r) Sucauxrvvr}, fixdirr eiv Se robs ix&povs. 'ASiKeiv robs (piXovs, 
vj3pi£eiv robs ira75as. UoXXaKis Kal SovXoi r i/xov povvr at robs a5l- 
kovs 8eo~ir6ras (take vengeance on their unjust masters). X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. ot 
(pi/XaKes eXoiSSpow avrov (but the Deponent XoiSopelaSai nvi, to reproach). 

Remark 1. Some of the above verbs take a Dative or a preposition with 
its Case: (a) axpeXe'tv nvi but very seldom, and then in the poets; (£) 
a.SiKe?v els, irp6s, and irepi riva; (y) acrefie?v els and irepi riva; evcre- 
fie?v eh riva, irepi, irp6s riva; (5) Au p.aive aSrai nvi frequently; (e) Xcafia- 
ar&ai nvi sometimes ; (Q vfipi(eiv eh riva often ; (77) eir ir poirev eiv riv6s 
somewhat frequently (§ 275, 1). "Apeo~Keiv takes the Ace. only in the sense 
of to satisfy, but the Dat. in the sense of to please. 

Rem. 2. Awpe'icr&ai nvi ri (donare alicui aliquid, to present something to 
some one), is the construction in Attic prose, not 5w/>e?<rdm nvd rivt (donare 
aliquem aliqua re, to present one with something). 

2. Verbs signifying to do good or evil to any one, by word or 
deed, C. g. evepyereiv, KOLKOvpyeiv, KaKOiroiclv ; euAoyetv, KaKoAoyetv ; 
ev, KttAtog, kclkws Xiyetv, et7rety, coray opeveiv. 

S. Aj. 1154. 'av&pccire, (xr) Spa robs r eSrv7]K6r as /ca/ccDs (do not injure the 
dead). X. Cy. 1. 6, 29. KaKovpyelv robs (plXovs (to harm one's friends). 
Ev epyer e7v rr\v it ar pida (to do good to one's country). X. C. 2. 3, 8. Trees 5' 
av c-760 aveTUO'rf) l ucvv e1r\v a$eX<p<£ XPV°~& a h eiriffrdpi.eu6s ye Kal ev Xe y e iv rbv ev 
Xeyovra, Kal ev Troielv rbv ev iroiovvra] rbv fxevroi Kal X6yca Kal epyep 
ireipco fxevov ep.e avixtv ovk av 8vvat/j.r)v ovr ev Xeyetv, ovr ed tt ie?v (know- 
ing how to speak well of one who speaks well of me, and to do good to one who does well 
to me ; but I should not be able to speak well of or to do good to one who, etc.) In- 
stead of the adverbs el and KaKws with iroielv, etc., the Greek uses also the cor- 



400 SYNTAX. [$ 279. 

responding adjectives ; hence icaXa, Kaica iroielv, Aeyeiv rivd (to do good 
or evil to one, to say good or evil of one). See § 280. 

3. Verbs signifying to 'persevere, to await, to wait for, and the 
contrary, e. g. jxivuv (like manere), Tte.pip.eye.iv, Sappexv, Kaprepe.lv;. 
<j>evy€tv } aTro<j>e.vye.iv, cbroSiopacrKeij/, hpaTrerevew. 

M?) cpevye rbv tclvdvvov (do not flee from danger). QappeTre bdvarov (fidenti 
animo expectate mortem). X. An. 3. 2 5 20. ras fiev fidxas &appe?re (bravely 
stand or endure the battles). Cy. 5. 5, 42. elf rives ae rifiwo'iv, avraa-ird^ov Kal evdoxet 
avrovs, "iva a e Kal d-a/5 prjacc a iv (that they may confide in you, ut fiducia te 
complectantur). 'O SovAos aired pa rbv 8eo~Tr6rr}-v (ran away from his master). 
PI. Symp. 216, b. 5 patrer evto ovv avrbv nal <pevy<a (I run away from him, 
etc.). Dem. I. Phil. 50, 37. ol ra>v irpayfidroov Kaipol ov fie v over i r^v i) fieri - 
pav fipadvrrjra (do not wait for your slothfulness). 

Rem. 3. After the analogy of <p e i y e i v, other verbs also, which contain 
the idea of fleeing, e. g. those signifying to turn back from, to retreat from, to 
abhor, are constructed with the Ace, though but seldom, e. g. v iv o % co p e Iv rbv 
oxAov (to retire from the crowd) ; eKCrrfvai kIvSwov (to shrink from, shun fear) ; 
e/c rpeir eff&a i, vir eKT p eiv eo"&at, vir e£epxecr& at, airoffr pe <peo~&ai. 
©appetv rivi signifies to have confidence in something (fidere aliqua re). 

4. Verbs of concealing and being concealed: \av3dvetv, Kpvir- 
Ttiv (celare), Kpv7rTe<T$cu; — also the verbs (frdaveiv (antevertere), 
A.€t7reiv, €7riA€t7reiv (defcere) ; — verbs or particles of swearing, 
the person or thing by which one swears being in the Ace. 

PI. Rp. 365, d. freovs ovre Aav&dveiv, ovre Pido-aoftat SvvarSv (to escape 
the notice of be concealed from the gods). Kpvirretv rivd ri (to conceal any-' 
thing from any one), see § 280. Her. 6, 115. irepieirAcaov ^owiov fiovXofievoi 
(p&rjvai robs 'A&rivaiovs airncSfievoi is rb do-rv (wishing to anticipate the 
Athenians). 'EiriAeiirei fie 6 xp^vos, i\ ij/iepa (fails me). X. An. 1. 5, 6. rb 
ffrpdrevfia 6 atros iir eAiir e. "O/ivv/xi irdvras dreovs (1 swear by all the 
gods). Hence fid, ov fid, val fid, v)f Ala. 

Rem. 4. Also the two impersonal verbs Se? and %p?'/, in the sense of to 
need, are constructed with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or person, 
of which or whom one is in need ; this construction, however, belongs only to 
poetry, e. g. Od. a, 124. fivfrfto-eai, '6rre6 a e XP"h (y ou W M tell of what you are 
in need). Aesch. Pr. 86. avrbv ydp a e Set Upo fi-n&ecos (you yourself need 
Prometheus). Ae? with the Dat. of the person belongs to prose and poetry, e. g. 
PI. Menon. 79, b. 8e t ovv ffoi rrjs avrrjs ipwrrio-eas (you need the same inquiry). 
In the sense of necesse est, opus est, with an infinitive, the Ace. of the person is 
common with both verbs, e. g. 5e? (xpv) o-e ravra iroieiv : the Dat. is much more 
rare, and with xpt seldom even in poetiy. X. C 3. 3, 10. el troi deoi SiMo-neiv. 
Comp. X. O. 7, 20. S. Ant. 736. &AAca yap 3) 'fiol XPV 7 e T vs5 y dpx^v 
X&ov6s. 

5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an affection of the mind, 
e. g. cfto fielcr $ai, Setaat, rpelv', alcrxyvccr^at (revereri), ouSetcr^at; 8vs- 
Xpcuvav ; eK7rA^TTea-#at, KaraTrX^rrecr^aL ; d\o<j>vp€<r$cu {miser ari). 



$ 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 401 

X. Cy. 8.1,28. /xaWov r ovs alSovfxcvovs alSov vr a i rwv auaiBav oi 
fobpooiroi {respect the respectful). An. 1. 9, 6. Kvpos &pKrov irore iiricpepo- 
fi.4vqv ovk zTpeo-ev (was not afraid of a bear). Cy. 3. 3, 18. {ol iroAe/xioi) 
/xa?<\ou 7) [xas (pofi-qcrovrai, '6rav aKovauaiv, on oi>x &s <pof}ov[j.ei/ot tttt) <rcr o - 
fiev avrobs oXkoi Ka^rjfxevoi. (will fear us, hearing that we shall not crouch with 
fear on account of them). Alo-x^^o/xai tov Szov {I feel ashamed before the 
god). R. L. 2, 11. atSeiVd-at robs &pxovras. Cy. 1. 3, 5. nal <re, & 
7ra7T7re, fivtraTT Sfitvov ravra ra fipcofiara 6pG> (I see that you are dis- 
gusted with, loathe this food). PI. Symp. 173, c. robs It alp ovs eAea). Dem. 
Cor. 290, 185. KaTair\ayrjvai rbv $l\nrirov (to be panic-stricken by 
Philip). In poetry this use of the Ace. is much more extensive. 

Eem. 5. Verbs which express the idea of motion, sometimes take (as transi- 
tive verbs) the Ace. of the thing put in motion by them, as a passive object ; 
this construction is used in poetry, seldom in prose. The following 
verbs especially belong here, /Halve iv, a'icro-eiv, -irepav, -irXeTv perreiv, 
airevdeiv, etc. S. Ant. 1158. rvxv nar afip eir ei rbv evrvxovvra 
(fortune sinks the fortunate man). 'Ek /Halve iv, €irai<raeiv iroda (to put out 
the foot, move the foot quickly) ; aiao-eiv x*P a (furiously to set or move the 
hand to); {3d<riv, it 68 a irepav, all poetic. Th. 6, 39. Kaica aTrevde iv (ac- 
celerare). In this way, verbs expressing sound, in the pregnant sense of putting 
an object in motion and. causing it to sound, are sometimes constructed with the 
Ace. II. A, 160. '{-mroi Kelv' ox ea Kpor aXi^ov ava irTo\ejj.oLO yeepvpas (rattle 
the chariots', hurry off the chariots with a rattling sound). Her. 6, 58. Kefirira 
Kporeovai (rattle the kettle, strike it again and again). So also in a pregnant 
sense, the poets say, &ebv x°P* v * lt/ i 4 A t <r <r eiv (deum choreis, saltando cele- 
brare). Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 552. 

6. With verbs of motion, the space or icay passed over is put 
in the Ace., these being the objects on which the action of the 
verb is performed; so also the time during which an action 
takes place (in answer to the question, How long?), is put in 
the Ace, as being the object measured by the* action ; so too 
measure and iceight (in answer to the question, How much?), 
are put in the Ace, these also being the objects on which the 
action of the verb is performed. 

Balis civ, irepav, epire iv, ir o pev ecr&ai 6d6v (to go the way, etc., comp. 
itque reditque viam). Eur. Med. 10G7. a\\' el /ml yap 8r) tAtj p. op car art] v 
68 6 v (will go the way). X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. jxr^ri to Sis Para iro p evov, ctAAa 
KeAeve aot robs ^yep-ovas tJ)c pa err 77*/ (686v) yyelo-frai (do not march over 
the difficult places, but command your giddes to lead over the easiest road). An. 4. 4, 
1. in opevbrj aav Oia. rr\s 'Ap/xevlas ireSlov airav /ecu Kelovs yn\6<povs 
(marched over a plain, etc.). R. Equ. 8, 10. t/v 6 p.ev (pevyp i tr I tov 'Uttov irav 
ro7a x w P ia (} Jer varta loca). Cy. 1.6, 43. &yetv (arpaTiav) ^ arevas f) 
vKarelas ddovs. Dem. I. Phil. 49, 34. &yuv koI (pepcav robs irKeovras &d~ 
Xarrav (sailing through thesea). Xpovov, rbv xp°' vov ->f ora time, (different 
from XP" U V) ° vv XP^V, i>h ty time, gradually), vi/Kra, rj/xepav (during the night, day). 
Her. 6, 127. t) 2u/3apts f)Kp.a(e tovtov rbv XP^ V0V M c ^ l(rTa (was flourishing 
34* 



402 SYNTAX. [$ 279. 

during this time). X. An. 4. 5, 24. KaraXafifidvei r)]v hvyarepa rod Kw/xdpxon 
4 v vdr 7] v rijxepav yeyaur\^.evr\v (who had been married nine days). Cy. 6. 3, 1L 
Hal x^es- Se /cai rpir-nv Tj/xepav rb avrb rovro etrparrov. Dein. Phil. 3. 116, 23. 
Xvxvvav Se ri koX @T]0a?oi rovs reXevraiovs rovroval xpdvovs fiera, r))V 
iv AzvKTpots /J-dxyv (during these last times). Her. 1,31. aradlovs irevre ko\ 
rea-aepaKovra 8iaKOi.uQ-avres air'tKovro is rb lp6v (having passed over forty-five 
stades). 6, 119. airexeiv 5e/ca kcu 5 irjKocrlovs <rraSiovs (to be distant two 
hundred and ten stades). 6, 135. MiXTidd-ns aireTrXee TLapov TroXiopKi)(Tas re e| 
Kal elKQff i ripe pas. "Ecpecrov atrexei anb ^.dpbeoov rpiuv ■tjfiepwv odov. X. C. 
3. 6, 1. ov$4ir(o e%ico<riv err] yeyovdos (like viginti annas natus, twenty years old). 
Here belongs the Ace. with Svvaa&ai, to be worth. Her. 3, 89. rb BafiuXdviov 
raXavrov dvvarai Evfioidas e/3 Sofxi] ko vra uveas (the Babylonian talent 
is worth [weighs as much as, amounts to] seventy Euboean minae). 

Rem. 6. In poetry, the Ace. of the local object is sometimes used even with 
verbs denoting rest, e. g. Ke7(r&ai, cravat, r)o-bai, &dcro-eiv, Ka&l(eiv, etc. (instead 
of iv with the Dat., as in prose). Here also the Ace. represents the space as 
the object acted upon, or taken possession of, e. g. S. Phil. 145. (t6itov wposideTv 
i&eXeis) Svriva KeTrai (quemjacens occupation tenet). Comp. Larger Oram. 
Part II. § 554, Kern. 3. 

Rem. 7. The following prepositions are joined with the Ace. to define more 
fully the extension in space and time, viz., avd,from a lower to a Mgher -place, 
e. g. ava TroTafxbv irXetv, ava, vvKra ; — Kara, from a higher to a lower place, e. g. 
Kara irorap.bv TvXeiv, Kara rbv fiiiov ; — aucpi and irepi, round about, e. g. fiaiveiv 
a/u.<pl (or irepl) rr\v ir6Xiv, ap.(p\ rbv x* l P-& va i 7re ^ T « M^St/ca ; — vtt6, under, v<p' 
riXiov, inrb vi/Kra, sub noctem ; — virep, over ; — irapd, near by, along, by the side of, 
e. g. irapa rbv irorap-bv iropeveaSai, irap 1 oXov rbv fiiov ; — iiri, upon, C. g. iirl vwra 
^aXdao--ns irXelv, iirl iroXvv x?^ vov '•> — ^«> through, e. g. dia Swuara fiaiveiv, Sta. 
vvKra; — fiera ravra, postea ; — npbs ecrirepav, towards evening. 

Rem. 8. Prom this use of the Ace. to denote space, time, and quantity, 
very many adverbial expressions have originated: (a) rr\v rax'io-rr)v (65oV), 
celerrime ; rr\v irpoor-nv, primum ; rrjv ev&e?av,recte, straight forward ; fxaicpdv, far ; 
izXXyv Kal'&XX-nv, sometimes here, sometimes there, etc. II. \p, 116. ttoXXo. b" avav- 
ra, Karavra, irdpavrd re, boxi-'-i-d r r)X&ov (they passed over many uphills, 
down hills, straight and cross ways; — (b) ar)/j.epov, to-day ; avpiou, to-morrow; apxw, 
ttjv apxvv, properly, at first, omnino ; reXos, rb reXevraiov, finally ; veov, lately ; 
irpSrepov, Ttparov, rb irpcorov, rb irpiv, rb avr'iKa, ravvv, rb iraXai, rb TraXatov, rb 
Xoiirov, etc. 5 — (c) TroXXd, saepe; ra iroXXa, plerumque ; iroXv, fxeya, ueyaXa, fxe- 
yicrTa, bxiyov, fMLKpov, (MiKpd, avxvd, uaKpd, tcrov, roaovro, irdvra, etc. So also 
p.T)KOS, irXri&os. 

7. Finally the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs 
and intransitive adjectives of every kind, to explain and define 
their meaning more fully. Here, also, the Ace. represents the 
object as acted upon or suffering, since it denotes the object to 
which the intransitive action of the verb or adjective, refers 
or is directed. This Ace. is used most frequently in specifica- 
tions relating to the body and the mind. This is called the Ace. 
of more definite limitation, sometimes the Ace. of synecdoche. 



9 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 403 

Her. 2, 111. Koifxueiv robs 6<p&a\p.ov s (to be pained in or in respect, to the 
eyes). 3, 33. ras <pp4vas vyiaiveiv (to be sound in mind). X. C. 1. 6, 6. aKye'iv 
robs TroSas (to have pain in the feet) . 4.1,2. (pavepbs -f\v ^caKpdr-ns ov rwv ra 
<rct> fiara irpbs &pav, aAAa rcou ras ;// u % a y irpbs aperrji/ eu irecpvKorcau icpie/jLevos 
(that he was not desirous of those well-constituted in body for beauty, but of those well- 
adapted in mind, etc.). PI. Up. 453, b. 5ia<p4pei yvvi) avSpbs ri]v tyvcriv (woman 
differs from man in respect to her nature). 462, d. 6 'avfrpwiros rbv 5aK.rv\ov 
a\yei (is pained as to, has a pain in, his finger). KaXos eari ra 6/xpi.ara (is 
beautiful as to his eyes, has beautiful eyes). Ka/afc effTi r ^ v ^ v x "h v. So aya&6s, 
aocpSs, (ppovLfxos, xpy&LfJ-os, xpr/cTTos, d'lKaios, etc., with the Ace. 'Aya&bs r 4 x v t\ v 
t i v a. Her. 3, 4. $dvns Kal yv&p.'nv iKavos, Kal ra iro\4 p.ia clXki/j.os $v. X. 
Cy 2. 3, 7.ai/4(TT7] 4?epai\as rb a" cop. a ova a<pvr]s, Kal r)]v if/ux^y ovx ayevvel 
cwdpl ioLK&s. 8.4, 18. 5eivbs ravrrjv r)]V r 4xvi]v. So &avp.acrrbs rb p.4- 
ye&os, rb (ccAA.os (wonderful for his size and beauty, of wonderful size and 
beauty). The English commonly uses prepositions to express the force of this 
Ace, viz. in, in respect to, of; or when it stands with an adjective, the English 
sometimes changes the Ace. of the thing into a personal substantive, and 
makes the adjective as an attributive agree with it, e. g. ayd&bs r4xvt\v, a good 
artist, comp. Eng. he is a good shot, i. e. marksman ; or the prepositions of or with 
are placed before the substantive denoting the thing, and the attributive ad- 
jective is made to agree with that substantive, e. g. veavias Ka\bs r\\v ^vxw, of 
or with a lovely spirit. 

Rem. 9. Sometimes the prepositions els, irpSs, Kara are joined with the Ace, 
in which case the relation is analogous to an Ace. of space, denoting direction, 
as 5ia<p4peiv eis ri, e. g. els aperrjv. X. C. 3. 5, 1. ev5o^or4pa 7} iroMs els rh. 
iro\ep.iKa ecrrat. ~Zocpbs irpos ri. — On the Dat. see § 285, (3), (bj. 

Rem. 10. Erom this use of the Ace, many adverbial expressions have orig- 
inated. Thus the expressions of measure: evpos, ityoy, p.4ye&os, j3dxros, prjicos, 
ttXtj^os, api&p.6u; also yevos, ovopa, /xepos, rb abv p.4pos, itpofyacriv, under pretence, 
rb aX-n&is, yvwjJL-nv ep.-nv. Her. 6, 83. KAeavSpos yevos eoov $iya\evs air 'Ap- 
naSi-ns (being a Phigalian by birth). 7, 109. XipLvn eovcra rvyxduei oosel rpiriicoyra 
ara5'io>v rrjv irepioSov (in circumference). X. An. 2. 5, 1. piera ravra acpi- 
Kovro eirl rbv Zafiarov irorapbv rb evpos rerrdpeev irAe&poou (four plethra in 
width). 4. 2, 2. ol piev eiropevovro rb irXrjSros cos Sisx^ol (two thousand in 
number). — Moreover rovvavilov, rauavria, on the contrary ; TaAA.cc, in respect to 
other things ; rb oXov, omnino ; ap.cp6repa, rovro (ravra) p.4v — toOto (lavra) 54] 
ov54u, in no respect; rl, in some respect ; iroXkd, irdvra, etc. — Tb eV ip.4, rovv 
ip.4, roviri ere, rb els ep.4, quantum ad me (te), as far as it relates to me, etc. 



§280. Double Accusative. 

In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the 
Ace. with one verb : — 

1. When, in the construction given under $ 278, 1, the verb 
has a transitive sense, as <pikiav (piXtiv, then the idea of activity 
consisting of the verb and a cognate substantive (with which 



404 SYNTAX. [$ 280. 

an adjective usually agrees), being blended into one, may at 
the same time be extended to a personal object, e. g. <ja\<* 
fjLeyakrjv <£iAxav (= <£iAu>) rov 7rat8a. 

Her. 3, 88. ydfxov s robs tt pdrovs eydpi.ee 6 Aapelos Kvpov Sua &uya- 
rep as, "Aroaadv re Kal 'Aprvcrrdvnv {contracted very honorable marriages 
withthe two daughters of Cyrus). 154. ew'vrbv Xcofiarat X&fS-nv avfjKecr- 
r ov (maims himself with an incurable maiming, maims himself incurably). Th. 8, 
75. fapKuffav rovs ffr par i<aras robs fieylffrovs opKovs (made the sol- 
diers take the most solemn oaths). X. Cy. 8. 3, 37. e/xe b irar^p rrjv ru>v iraidav 
iraiSeiav eTraidevev (educated me in the education of boys). PL Apol. 19, a. 
Metros fie eypd\paro r)\v ypacprjv ravr^nv. 36, c. eKacrov evepye- 
rely r^jv fieylaryv ev epyefflav. Her. 1, 129. Se?7r v ov r 6 (= o) fj.iv 
efroiviffe. Th. 1, 32. r^v v av fiax'^av answer dfie&a Kopiv&iovs (like 
vIkt)v viKav), we repelled the Corintlio.ys in the naval battle. PI. Gorg. 522, 
a. rroWa Kal rjoea Kal it avrooava evwxovv v/xas. Especially with 
verbs of naming, after the analogy of ovofia bvofxdfav rivd: X. 0. 7, 3. koAou- 
cl fxe rovro rb ovofia (they called me this name, by this name). PI. Pp. 471, 
d. avaKaXovvr es ravra ra bvbfiara eavrovs. 

Remark I. Instead of the substantive denoting the thing effected, the Ace. 
of a pronoun is frequently used. X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. raXXa /xi/xovfievos rbv 
~2,aKav. An. 5.7,6. rovro v/xas i^airarrjaai. This is especially the case with 
verbs of praise and blame, of benefit and injury, after the analogy of eyKdofiiov 
iyKoopud^eiv rivd and the like. PI. Symp. 221, c. ttoXXo. fiev oSV av ris Kal &XXa 
€%ot ^wKpdr-nv eiraiveaai (one could praise Socrates for many other things). 
Pp. 363, d. tout a 8)7 Kal oAAa roiavra ey k<o fiid£ov or 1 SiKaioavvnv. 
MeyaXa, fJLiKpd, irXeiw, fj.ei£a) u<peXe?v, fiXairr e iv, adiKe7v rtva. 

2. Expressions of saying or doing good ov evil (which generally 
contain an Ace, or its equivalent in an adverb, of the tiling said 
or done), take the object to which the good or evil is done, in 
the Ace, e. g. ayaSd, KaXd, KaKa Troielv, Trpdrretv, £pyd£e- 
o-Scu, Aeyeiv, cl-ireLv, etc. rivd (to do good, etc., to some one). 

X. 0. 5, 12. 7] yrj rovs 'dpcara & e pair ev ovr as avrfyv irXelcrra aya&a 
a vr 1 it 1 e 7 (returns the greatest advantages to those who cultivate it best). Her. 8, 
61. r6re 87? 6 QefuaroKXe-ns Ketvbv re Kal robs Kopiv&iovs iroXXd 
re Kal KaKa. eXeye (said much evil of him and the Corinthians). X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. 
ovdeirwiroTe enavovro iroXXa KaKa fjfxas iroiovvr es (never ceased to do much 
injury to us). 

Pem. 2. Instead of the Ace. of the object acted upon or suffering, the Dat. 
is sometimes used, which is considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvan- 
tage (Dativus com.modi or incommodi). Dem. Aphob. 855, 37. ri voi iroi-no-wo-iv 
ol fxdprvpes ; (quid tui tibi prosint testes?) X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. irpocrKoirei, ri cot 
Troi-qo-ovcnv ol apxovevoi (consider what your subjects will do for you) ; on the con- 
trary with ere (what they will do to you). An. 4. 2, 23. irdvra eiroirjcrav ro?s 
airo&avovo-iv (showed all honors to the dead). Cy. 7. 2, 27. ^v touto fioi 
irai-fiays a Xeyeis (if you perform for me what you promise). So also in the sense 
of, to do something with some one, as PI. Charm. 157, c. oi/k av exoip-eVf o rt ttoioT- 



$ 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 405 

fi4v (xo i. But the Dat. often depends upon the adjective, e. g. Dem. Cor. 243, 
55. SiareXet irpdrraiv Kal \4yuv ra ft 4 At terra r <£ S^fia) (continue to do and 
say what is best for the people). 

3. With verbs : (a) of entreating, beseeching, desiring, inquir- 
ing, asking : cuTeiv, dTraireiv, rrpdrruv (to demand), elsirpdrreiVf 
7rpa,TTe<T$ai ; kpoyrav, ZpioSai, e^era^eiv, lo-Topew, dvLcrropexv ; — (b) of 
teaching and reminding: $l$ol<tk€lv, TraiSsvav, dvaixtpuvrja-Keiv, viro- 
fUfjLvrjo-Kav (with both, of these the Gen. of the thing is more 
usual) ; — (c) of dividing and cutting into parts : BaUaSai, Stai- 
pav, TefAvew, Siave^ai/, Karave/Aav ; — (d) of depriving and taking 
away : arepetv, aTToarcpuv ; arepto-Ketv, crvkdv, d<f>aLpeLcr$cu ; — ( e) of 
concealing or hiding from : kpvwtclv (/ccu^eiv Poet.) ; — (f ) of put- 
ting on and off, clothing and unclothing, surrounding ivith : iv- 

hvuv, €kSv€LVj a/X<pL€WVVOU, 7r€pLJ3dX\.€(T$ai. 

Her. 3,1. irefi\pas Kafifivffys is AXyvirrov K-fjpvKa air ee "Afi&ffif. frvyar4pa 
(ashed Arnasis for his daughter). 58. avrobs eKarbv rd\avra e7r p-n^av 
(demanded of them a hundred talents). X. C. 1. 2, 60. ovo4va ir&irore fiiff&bv 
rrjs ffvvovffias 4ir pd£aro 2a>/cpaT7js (never demanded a reward of any one for 
his instruction). H. 4.1,21. 'Hpi7r7ri5as aire? rbv 'AynjffiXaov birXiras 
re is 5ts%iAtovs Kal ireXraffras aWovs roffovrovs (asks of Agesilaus 
about two thousand hoplites, etc.). Cy. 6. 2, 35. ra. els rpo<p))V o4ovra 4^erd- 
£ere robs txp' vfilv (inquire of those under you respecting the things necessary for 
food). Eur. Hipp. 254. iroKKa oiodff Kei ydp fi 6 tto\vs fiioros (teaches me 
much). Antiph. 5. 131, 14. 6 XP^ V0S Ka ^ V ifiireipia ra fir] Ka\a>s exovra 
e/cS id dffKei robs av& pdnrovs (teach men what is not proper). Her. 1. 136. 
nraioevovrx i robs iraToas rpia fiovva (they teach boys three things only). 6, 
138. yXSiffffdv re r)]v 'Attiktjv Kal rpSirovs ru>v 'A&rjvaliov 48 loaffKov 
robs iralZas. X. An. 3.2, 11. ava/ivr) ff <a vfias Kal r obs k iv8vvovs(l will 
remind you of the dangers). Hier. 1, 3. vir 4 fivnffds fie ra, 4v rep iSiwriKcp (3iq>. 
Her. 7, 121. r pets fiolpas 5 aep^rjs Oaff dfievos irdvra rbv ire^bv ffr pa- 
r6v (having divided all the land army into three divisions). T4 fiveiv, o ia ipe?v r i 
fi4 prj, /xoipas (to cut, to divide something into parts). X. Cy. 7. 5, 13. 6 Kvpos r b 
ffr pdrevfia Kar4ve i/ie SdoSeKa p.4pi) (divided the army into twelve parts). 
PI. Polit. 283, d. di4\cofiev abrj)v (rr)V fier pi\r ikt]v) dvo fi4pt\. X. Cy. 4. 
6,4. rbv fiSvov fj.01 Kal <pl\ov iraloa a<pei\ero rh\v tyvx~hv (deprived my 
only child of life). Eur. Hec. 285. rbv irdvra 8' o\&ov r)fiap ev fi a<pe(- 
\ero. Dem. Aphob. 839, 13. rrjv rtfii]v air off re pe7 fie (robs me of honor). 
Phil. 54, 50. ra. r)fi4re pa Tffias air offr e p e7 (6 $t\nnros). Kpvirrca ffe rb 
arvxyp-a (I conceal the misfortune from you). Eur. Hipp. 912. ov fir)v <pi\ovs 
ye, k&tl fiakXov r) (pi\ovs, Kpvirreiv SiKaiov ffds, irdrep, Ovsir p a^ias. X. 
Cy. 1. 3, 17. irats fi4yas fiiKpbv 4%<^v x^&va, erepov natSa /iik p 6v, fieyav 
%X<>vra x'Twi/a, 4 KSvffas avr6v, rbv fiev eavrov 4 k etvov 7] fi (pie ffe, r)>v St 
eKelvov avrbs 4v 4 S v (a large boy stripped another small boy of his large tunic and put 



406 SYNTAX. [$ 2S0. 

his own tunic on him). Her. 1, 163. re?x os weptj3aAe<rd-at r)\v tt6\iv (to 

surround the city with a ivall). 

Rem. 3. Several of the above verbs are sometimes otherwise constructed, 
commonly, however, with some difference in the sense expressed; thus, air el v 
ti irapd rivos; ipwrav riva irepl Tiros; with verbs of dividing and cut- 
ting into parts, not unfrequently the preposition els, sometimes also Kara, 
is joined with the Ace, e. g. tovs iroAiras els e£ fioipas 5iel\ov ; or the word p-epos, 
etc., is governed directly by the verb, and the object to be divided is put in the 
Gen., depending on p.epos, etc., e. g. dvo fxolpas Avdajv irdvToov Sielkev (he divided ah 
the Lydians into two parts), Her. 1, 94; passively, 8«5e/ca Tlep<rS>v (pv\al Strjp-nvTai 
(the Persians are divided into twelve tribes), X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Verbs of depriving 
and taking away, have the following constructions : 

(a) b.-Koo"r epetv and a<paipe?(r&ai with the Ace. of the thing alone, e. g, 
Tlcos Uu ovros e&eAoi r a a\\6r p la air octt epelv ; (how could he be willing to 
take away the things of others ?), X. Ag. 4, 1. Xd\a(cu r a tcaKcas eyvwff- 
peva (provisa) Kal v eiro iripeva a<pa ipouvrai (take away, destroy 
the provisions), 0. 5, 18 ; the Ace. of the person alone is but rarely found ; 
thus with a<paipelffSai (to rob, take from), e. g. Andoc. 4. 32, 27. ro7s 
ttoXitous ova e'| taov xpTjrcu, aWa tovs peu a<p ai p ov p. ev o s, tovs 8e 
tvtttcou ovSevos a£iav ttju 8r)poKpa,Tiay a-rrocpaivei. 

(b) ffT epelv, air off Tepelv, ffTepiffKetv, acpat pz?tr&ai nvd ti very 
often. 

(c) crepe TV, airoo~T e pe?v tip a tlvos, like spoliare aliquem aliqua re, to 
deprive one of something, see, § 271,2; but acpatpelff&ai very seldom 
has this construction, and indeed only in the sense of to restrain, to pre- 
vent. Ol b^i^opevoi a<paipovvTai Tas pev Kvvas r ov.evpetv tov Aay<2, 
avTovs 5e ttjs axpeAelas, X. Ven. 6, 4. 

(d) a(paipe?o-&ai, airoff r e pelv with the Gen. of the person and the Ace. 
of the thing ; they then signify to take something from some one, to withdraw 
something from some one. This is a more rare construction. Ol irXeoveKrai 
tS)V &Woov acpaipovpevo i xp'hl xa ' ra ^ocvtovs SoKovcri TrXovri^eiv 
(taking their property from others, seem to enrich themselves), X. C. 1. 5, 3. 
Svju^axiaJ afyatpov pevov ttjs tz 6 Ae cos (= twu tto\itc!>v) Dem. 
Cor. 232, 22. Ei ti fiovXovTcu iiriT-nfieveiv ko.\S>u, obZevbs air o ffT epet 
(to. Kvvnyeffia), X. Ven. 12, 8. "Osris, prj &AAWV eavTov awoffTepcbv, 
aff(pa\eitxs delrai (properly, aliis se subducens, i. e. ab aliis desciscens ; eavrbu 
is here to be considered as the Ace. of the thing), Th. 1, 40. 

Rem. 4. On the double Accusative with the verbs irei&eiv, iiroTpweiv, iirai- 
peiv, TTpoKa.Xe'iff&ai, avayKa£eiv, see § 278, 4. 

4. An Accusative of the object acted upon, and an Accusa- 
tive of the predicate (winch is often an adjective), is used with 
the verbs mentioned under § 240, 2, when they are changed 
from the passive to the active ; hence two Accusatives stand 
with verbs signifying to make, to constitute, e. g. 7roieiv, nSevai, 
reddere ; to choose, to appoint, e. g. alpelcrS-at, creare, etc. ; to consider, 
represent, and regard as something, to declare, to knoiv, e. g. vofxi- 
tecv, rjyeLcrSau, etc. ; to say, to name, to praise, to chide, e. g. Aeyav, 
oVo/xa^eiv, koXzlv ; to give, to take, to receive, e. g. 7rapaAa/3eu/ Se- 
^ecr&u, etc, ; to produce, to increase, to form, to teach, to educate. 



$ 281.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 407 

Kvpos tovs (piKovs i-no'iyce rr\ovcrlovs (made his friends rich). Tlac- 
Seve iv t iv a o~o<pov (to educate one wise, i. e. make wise by education). N o /x i - 
£eiv, 7}ye'i(r&ai Ttva &v5pa ay a&ov (to think,regard, consider one a good man). 
Dem. Cor. 5,43. ol ©erraAol Kal Qrjficuoi (piXov, ev e pyerrjv, (rcorrjpa rbv 
*: Ai7Tir ov yyovvTo. 'Ovo/xd^eiv r iva. <ro(p icrr yv (to call one a sophist). 
Aipe?<r& ai Tiva o~t par-nyov (to choose one a commander). X. Cy. 5. 2, 14. 
rbv T wfipv av o-vvbe nrvov irapeXa/Hev. Dem. Chers. 106. 66.7r<£Aea>s eycoye 
tcXovt o v yyov/xai o~v /x/xdxov s, iriarTtv, evvoiav. Andoc. 3. 24, 7. ^ 
dpyvy rbv 8y fxov to>v 'A&yvaloov vtyy\bv ^pe Kal tear ear 7} a ev lo~x v po"v. 

Rem. 5. On the use of the Inf. elvai with the Ace., see § 269, Kem. 1. 



§281. Remarks on the use of the Accusative ivith the 

Passive. 

1 As the Greek considers the passive as a reflexive (§ 251, 1), it follows that, 
on the change of the Act. to the Pass., the Ace. may remain with every transitive 
verb which in the Act. takes an Ace. of a thing as the object acted upon, e. g. 
(k6tttov(ti to yueTo>7ra) , k6ttt ovrai ra ft 4 r a> it a, which may mean, either that 
they strike themselves on the forehead, they strike their forehead, or they let their forehead 
be struck, they are struck on the forehead ; Her. 7, 69. 'ApdfSioi £eipas vire^axr- 
ix 4 v o i e (Tav, Alblones Se irapSaXeas re Kal \€0vt4os iva/x /xevoi (the Arabians 
were girt with the zaira, but the Ethiopians were clothed icith leopard and lion-skins). 

2. Hence, when the verbs mentioned under § 280, 1 and 3, which in the Act. 
govern two accusatives, are changed into tbe Pass., the Ace. of the person or of 
the object acted upon, is changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing, or the 
effect remains, (a) Ovtos /xevroi 6 eTraiv6s e'crTi ko\6s, b v o~v vvv iiratve? vir 
avSpuv a|iW iria-Tevea^rai (this is honorable praise by which you are now praised), 
Pl.Lach. 181, b. T pav fxario-frels iroXXd (sc. rpavfxara), (wounded with many 
wounds), Th. 4, 12. "Ovo/xa rb /xev irparov ZayKXy i\v virb rcov 2t/ceAa>i/ kXtj- 
&e?o~a (y 2i/ceAta), 6, 4 (ivas called by its first name). 'H Kpiais, yv lK.pihi\ 
(to which he was condemned), Lys. Agor. 134, 50. Ta jxeyiffra r i/xy&yv ai, 
S. 0. R. 1203. Aeajxbv 8vs e£y vv crro v eA/cerca Se&eis, Eur. Hipp. 1237. 
So u<peXe7cr&ai, (n/xiova&ai /xtyqXa, fiXdnTeoSai iroXXd. — (b) Mover lktjv virb 
Ad/xwpov iraiZ tv^rsis, pyT op iKyv Se vir' Avncpcvvros (having been educated 
in music and rhetoric), PI. Mcnex. 236, a; so SiSax&yvai t 4xvyv wo" twos 
(to be taught an art by someone); i paTy&yvai r^v yvdo/xyv viro vivos (to be 
asked an opinion ) . Ty Kal olKyazis to. avr a ixipy 5 iavs jxt] Sryru (be di- 
vided into the same parts), PI. L. 737, e. 'Yirb (lacriXzoos Trewpay/xevos tovs 
<p6pov s (having demanded the tribute), Th. 8,5. 'A<pai p e&yvai, airovT e py- 
&yv ai ttjj/ apxhv ^ 7r0 ' twos. Kpvfp&yvai r i (celari aliquid) . II e i(r&-7j vat 
tt)v dvaxd>pr)ir iv (§ 278,4). ' Afx'pUvvvo'^ai x'Tw^a occurs only with the mean- 
ing to put a garment on one's self but not I let myself be clothed by another, the garment 
was put on meby another; but ivSv&yvat x iT ^ va i to ^ e dotted with a tunic) is in use. 

3 As the Greek may form a personal Pass. (§ 251, 4), of every intransitive 
verb, whicli has its object in the Gen. or Dat., e. g. a/xeXov/xai, y/xeXyfrnv, (p&or- 



408 syntax. [j§ 282, 283. 

ov/xai, ecp&ovfaw ; so may it also with such transitive verbs as have, together 
with the Ace. of the thing, a Dat. of the person, the Dat. of the person being 
changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing remaining. Th. 1. 1, 26. ol 
tuv 'Adrijvalcov iir irer pafievot r)]v <pv\a.K-f]V (quibus custodia demandata 
erat, those of the Athenians who had been entrusted with the guard, from eiriTpeiro) tiv\ 
rty <pv\a.K.iiv). 5, 37. ol Kopiv& tot ravra eire o~tcc\[jl4 vo i avex&pow 
(having been commanded these things) : 1, 140. el ^vyxup^io-ere, teal &\\o ri pe?- 
£ov ev&vs e7rtrax^'J0'€<r3-6 (you will be commanded something greater). X. 
An. 2. 6, 1. ol (TrparTjyol airor fir) & eyres ras Ke<pa\as ereKevT7]Cav. 



$ 282. (3) Dative. 

1. The Dat. is the Wkere-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a 
local relation, the place at or in which the action of the subject 
occurs; — (b) in a causal relation, the object upon which the 
action of the subject shows itself or becomes visible — the ob- 
ject which shares in or is concerned in an action. — This object 
is : (a) a person, or a thing considered as a person, e. g. J3or]$£> 
rots 7roAtrais or rfj 7roAei; (/?) a thing, or an object considered as 
a thing, e. g. ayaXKo^ai rrj vikt). In this way the Dat. may be 
treated under three divisions. In the first, the Dat. is regarded 
as a local object, in the second, as a personal object; in the 
third, the object is a thing, and is called the Dat. of the thing or 
instrumental Dat. 

$ 283. A. Local Dative. 

1. The Dat, as a local object, designates the place in (by, 
near, at) which an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al- 
most exclusively poetical ; in prose, prepositions are commonly 
joined with the Dative. 

II. t, 663. abrap 'AxiAAeuy ev5e fivxv K\iffirjs evTrrjKTov (slept in the corner of 
the tent), tt, 595. 'EAAaSt oticta vedwv (dwelling in houses in Hellas). /3, 210. 
Kvjxa iro\v<p\ol(TfSoio fraAdcro-ns alyiaXcp (xeyaXco ^pe/xerai (roars upon the 
shore). S. Trach. 171. (e^) r\\v iraXaihu (pyybv avS^a-ai irore Audwvi (that the 
beech tree once uttered an oracle at Dodona). Here belong the Locative forms very 
common in prose, viz., MapaSwi/i, 'E\ev<r7vi, TIv&o?, 'Io-fyio?, oIkoi, 'Afrf)i>r)(rt, 
UXaraiao-L, etc. (at Marathon, etc.) ; also, ravrrj, Tj?8e, here, 77, where. So also, 
Od\ 0, 227. Tlv\ioi<ri fiey e|o%a Scifxara valwp. 

2. Hence the Dat. is used also with the attributive pronoun 
auTos, to express the idea of together with. 



$ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 409 

Her. 6, 32. ras w6Aias iveTrlfj.irpa(rav abrola t r o7<r t Ipolcri (they burned 
the cities together- with the temples — cities, temples and all). X. H. 6. 2, 35. cu 
curb ~2,vpa.Kov<Tuv vrjes airaaai kahwaav avToTs avSpdff iv (the ships were taken 
together with the men). 

3. The local relation is transferred to the time in which some- 
thing happens, and then from the time to the circumstances 
under which something happens. Hence the Dat. denotes the 
time (definite) and circumstances of an action. 

In prose with 7]/j.epa, pvktI, firjvi, erei, iviavrQ, Sipa and the like, in connection 
with attributive demonstratives, ordinals, and adjectives, as irpSrepos, varrepos, 
imdv, irapeX&aiv and the like. The Dat. therefore usually expresses definite 
time. T??8e ttj vvkt'i, ravrri ttj rjfiepa, i ice ivy rfj Tjjxepa, rfj aitr-p 
vvkt'i, iroWoTs eTeffi, rpirco fiyvi, rrj avrrj Si pa, t<£ iiri6vri erei, 
eKeivcp r $ cret, r <2 varepu erei, rovry r<$ iviavry, etc. X. An. 
4-. 8, 1. ttj it pu>Tri 7] fie pa. aty'iKovro iirl rbv Trorafx6u (the first day or on the first 
day). Also & p a x^H-wos (in time of winter), vovfj.r)vla (at the time of new moon) ; 
likewise, TlavaSrnvalois, Atowalois, rpaycodo7s KaivoTs, at the time of the Panathenaea, 
etc. The preposition iv is joined Avith the Dat. : (a) when the substantive 
stands without an attributive, e. g. iv Tjfxepa, iv vvkt'i, iv frepei : often also when 
a demonstrative stands with it, e. g. iv tovtw t$ iviavrcp ; (b) usually, when a 
apace of time is to be indicated ; hence with substantives in connection with 
cardinals and the adjectives bxiyos, fipaxvs, /xiKp6s, 7roAvs, etc., e. g. 8ir)yayov 
iv rptalv rj/xepaLs (in three days, in the space of three days), X. An. 4. 8, 8 
Od. £, 253. itrXeofiev Boper) ave^co afcpai'i KaAw (with a good wind). II. a, 
418. t$ <re k aKrj atcy tgkov iv fj.eydpoi(Tiv (under an evil destiny). Her. 6, 139. 
iireav fiofcr) av4jxa> avTrjfxepbv vtjvs i^avvcrr) e/c ttjs vfxercp-ns is rrjv rjfieTepriv, 
t6tz irapabuaofxev (when a ship shall come with a north wind). 



$ 284. B. The Dative as a Personal Object. 

1. Both the Dat. of the person and of the thing denote an 
object, upon or in which the action of the subject shows itself 
or becomes visible ; both denote an object which participates 
in, or is concerned in, the action of the subject; accordingly, 
the language regards the Dat. of the person and of the thing 
as the same. The distinction is merely this, that the former is 
a personal object, or is considered as such, and consequently 
has the power of will ; the latter is a mere thing, or is consid- 
ered as such, and of course without will. As the idea denoted 
by the term where, is intermediate to that denoted by whence 
and whither, so the Dat. (the Whcrc-case), when it is a pcr.so/i, 

35 



4 10 SYNTAX. [$ 284. 

stands in contrast with the Ace. {the Whither -case) ; when it 
is a thing, in contrast with the Gen. (the Whence-case). 

2. The Ace. denotes an object effected, accomplished by the 
action of the subject, or the object acted upon; the Dat. of the 
person, on the contrary, denotes an object merely aimed at by 
the action of the subject and sharing in it; the action of the 
subject is indeed employed on the object and becomes mani- 
fest in it, yet it does not make it a passive object, but the ob- 
ject itself appears in distinction from the subject as active; 
between the subject and the object a reciprocal action takes 
place. The Gen. denotes the immediate cause ; the Dat. of the 
thing, on the contrary, a mediate, indirect cause (the ground, 
the means, the instrument) ; the Gen. denotes an object as 
calling forth and producing the action of the subject; the Dat. 
of the thing, only such an object as exhibits in or upon itself 
the action of the subject. 

Remark 1. In poetry a local limit or object is very often considered as a 
person, and is indicated by the Dat. ; this sometimes occurs, though but seldom, 
in prose. II. o, 369. nracri. frzotcriv x e ?P as auiaxovres (raisiny up the hands to 
all the gods). So a'tpecrSai, iiraipea&ai Sopv nui. II. e, 709. Kifxvrj K€K\i(ie- 
vos KtvpicriZi (dwelling at the Cephisian lake). t\, 218. TrpoKdkeo-ffaro X&PPV {he 
challenged to the contest). Th. 1, 13. 'A/Ae^o/cA^s Hictfiiois ^A&ej\ 3, 5. avTots 
MeAeas Ao.kcov cupiKi/etrcu. 

Rem. 2. From this use of the Dat., the fact may be explained, why many 
verbs of motion compounded with the prepositions ds, irp6s, 4iri, etc., take 
their object in the Dat. ; also why most adverbs with the Dat. (or Locative) in- 
flection [§ 101, 2. (b)], may express both the relation of rest (local Dat.) and 
the direction whither (personal Dat.), e. g. xwu'h humi, humum; so, likewise, the 
adverbs in -rj, e. g. &AAt? those in -co, e. g. Hvco, Kara, etc. ; those in -o i, e. g. 
7re5o?, humi, humum; ivrav^oi, hue and hie (but 61, oiroi, iroi, always denote the 
direction whither). 

3. Most verbs, which take the personal Dat, as the object 
sharing or participating in the action, express the idea of associa- 
tion and union, e. g. SiSovat, irapi^civ, viTi(j)Q>£io-$ai, apira.tf.iv tl tlvl. 
The following classes of words, therefore, govern the Dative: — 

(1) Verbs expressing mutual intercourse, associating with, mix- 
ing with, participation. — Dative of communion, e. g. 6/uA.etV, 
uiyvvvcu, fJciyvvoSai, kolvovv, KOivov<r$ai, Koivoovew, oi-, KaraAAaTTCiv 
(to reconcile), Si-, KaraAAarTccr^at (to reconcile one's self to), £evov- 
crSai, o-7revSecr#ai or o-7rovoas 7roi€tcr#ai, 7rparretv (agere cum aliquo) ; 
ct7retv, Aeyeiv, 8iaAeyeo-#ai, cu;(€Ov9<n, KarapaaS^at, etc. ; also adjec- 
tives and adverbs, sometimes even substantives which express 






$ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 411 

a similar idea, e. g. kolvos, o-vvrpocpos, cnyx^wvos, o-vyycvrjs, /xeTatTios ; 
many other words of a similar signification, compounded with 
avv and fx^rd, also "with, ev, 7rpos, and irapd. 

'Ofii\et ro7s aya&ois av&pcfnrois {associate with good men). Her. 3, 
131. 6 AefxoK7}8r)S Tlo\v k par ei* u/xtX^cre. 6,21. ir6\ies avrat fxaKiara a\- 
\r)\r) (Tt i£e ivub-no-av (cultivated hospitality with each other). — E tf x ° A* a l 
to is &eo?s (I pray to the gods). X. H. 2. 2, 1 9. <r tt 4 v 5 e c & a t 'A & 77 v a 1 1 s (to 
make a treaty with the Athenians). 3.2,20. aW-nXot s airovoas irro i-naav- 
to (they made treaties with each other). Isocr. Paneg. 42. 9. at irpd£eis at irpoye- 
yevrip.4vai KOtval iraa iv 7jfj.iv KaTe\sl<l>frno'av (common to us all). On the 
Gen. with koiv6s, see § 273, 3, (b). 

(2) Verbs of contending, litigating, vying with, e. g. ipi&v, 
ad^eaSai, 7roAc/xetv, dywvC&arSaL (usually 7rpos two), SiKa£e<x#cu, dp.- 
<f>isj3r}T€Lv, <TTa.aridtf.iv, etc. ; also of going against, encountering, 
meeting and approaching, and the contrary, as those of yield- 
ing, e. g. V7ro(TTTJvaL and vcpLaraaSaL ; d-Travrdv, viravrav, v7ra.VTid£ew, 
irXrjcnd'Cfiv, 7re\d£,av, kyyltf.iv, etc. ; ecKCiv, v7T€lk€lv, x(ope?>, 7rapa^cop£tv, 
etc. ; the adjectives and adverbs 7rX^crtos, evavrtos, 7reAa?, etc. 
(seldom eyyvs)- 

Oi"EX\r]V€S avSpetws to7s lie po*ais ip-ax^cavT (fought bravely with tlie 
Persians). M77 et/ceTe to7s ttoXg/aIois (do not yield to the enemy). Xp}) 
toIs e'x&P ** rrjs r)p.eT€pas (x&pas) ir apax& pyo*ai, Isocr. Archid. 118, 13. On 
the Gen., see § 271,2. '?Tro<rTrjvai avTo7s (llepcrais) 'A&Tji/aloi ro\/j.r)- 
o~avres, ivitctjaav abrovs (having dared to encounter them), X. An. 3. 2, 11. "£<picr- 
raabai £vp.(popa7s, Th. 2, 61. "O/uolov 5jxoiu> ail 7re\d£ei (like always 
draws to like), PI. Symp. 195, b. "I^ovto clvtIoi to?o~i AaKe8aip.ovloiai (encamped 
opposite the Lacedaemonians), Her. 6, 77. Tvpavvos anas ix&P 0S £\ev&epla Kal 
v 6/j.o is iv avrios. On the Gen., see § 273, Bern. 9. 

(3) Verbs of commanding, entreating, counselling, inciting, en- 
couraging; of following, accompanying, serving, obeying and diso- 
beying, trusting and distrusting, e. g. Trposrarreiv, kmrdTTZiv, trapai- 
vetv, Trapa/ceAevecr&xi, etc. (but KeXcveiv with Ace. and Inf.) ; orecr&u, 
aKoXovSetv, StaSc^ccr^ai (to succeed to, take the place of) ; 7rei$eo-- 
#ai; v7raKOveLv, dTretSetv, incrTeveiv, 7T€7roi$evcu, etc.; the adjectives 
and adverbs ukoXovSos, <xkoAou#(09, £Trop,€v<x><;, oidooxos, e£r}<>, £<pe£r)<;. 

X. Cy. 8. 6, 13. tovtwv S>v (instead of &) vvv vp.lv rrapatc *\cvop.ai ouSej/ 
ro7s 5ov\ois trposTaTTO) (I enjoin upon the slaves none of these things irli ich 
J in nn command you). Her. 3, 88. 'Apdfiioi ovdap.5. k 0T17 Kovcrav iir\ SovXocrvvri 
Ufparjo-L (never obeyed, were never subject to the Persians). 6,14. evavp-dx^ov 
kvr)KovarTf)(ravTcs r o7<r 1 a r par-qy o7<r 1 ( they fought in disobedience to their 



412 SYNTAX. [$ 284 

commanders). X. Cy. 1. 1,2. ras ay 4\as ravras idoKovfxeu bpav piaXKov i&eAovcrai 
irel&eff&ai ro?s vofi€v<r iv, % robs av&pcairovs ro'is &pxov(Ti (more willing 
to obey their shepherds, than men their rulers). 8.6,18. t£ rffispivcp ayyiKai 
(<pa<rl) rbv vvKrzpwbv Sia&ex 60 " 1 ^" 4 (that the night messenger succeeds the one for 
the day). PI. Rp. 400, d. evAoyta dpa Kal evappocrrta Kal evo'xypoo-vvri Kal evpvfr- 
(Jila cvn&etq a/coAouS-e?. Eur. Andr. 803. kclkov k a k <j3 didSoxov. PL 
Phaed. 100, c. ckStt^i 5r) ra e^rjs iiceivois (consider the things next in order 
to those). 

(4) Expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness 
and unlikeness, of agreement and disagreement, e. g. ioiKeuat, 
6/JLOLOvv, 6fJLOLovo$ai } ofxoios, ofAOiws, icro?, tcroos, ifi(j>ep^<; and 7rpo<s<{i£pr)S 
(similar) , 7rapaTrXrjaL0<s, irapairXiicrLQi^ b avros (idem) , a/xa ; Sia</>opos 
(discordant, hostile), $L<i<jiUivo<s; and very many words compounded 
with 6/xov, crvv, fJLCTci, e. g. 6/xovoclVj 6/x6y\o)TToSy oixdiWjAos, crvfjicjiaivelv, 

<TV[X(f>lDVO<S, <TWO)SoS. 

Her. 1, 123. ras Trd&as ras Kvpov rfjcri koavrov 5 po iov pcvos (likening, com- 
paring the sufferings of Cyrus with his oion). 6, 23. 6 "P-nyiov rvpavvos didcpopos 
(fiv) rotai ZayicAaloi(r i (was hostile to the Zancleans). X. Cy. 7. 1, 2. wtt- 
Ai<ryttej/ot irdvres i\aav oi Kepi rbv Kvpov ro'is avro?s r $ Kvpca SirAois (were 
furnished with the same arms as Cyrus). 5. 1, 4. 6 p. o lav rats Sou Act is eT^e 
rj)v 4o~&rjra (Tldv&eia). 7. 5, 65. 6 olSvpos aviao? robs ao&evels rots lcrx v ~ 
pots iv t$ iroAepcp (makes the weak equal to the strong). Isocr. Paneg. 43, 13 
XaXeirov iariv taavs robs Aoyovs rep peyi&ei roov epyoov i£evpe?v. Th. 1, 49. 
7] vav/xaxia ire£o fiax^a "* p o o<p eprjs (fy). 

Rem. 3. On the Comparatio compendiaria with expressions of likeness and 
similarity, see § 323, Rem. 6. On the Gen. with iyyvs, irXTjcriou, § 273, Rem. 9. 
The coordinate copulative particle /ecu, is not seldom employed with adjectives 
of likeness and similarity instead of the Dative. Her. 1, 94. AvSol vSpoiai pev 
Trapair\it)ffioio , i x?^ VTal Ka ^ "EAA^es ( = c/ EAA7jo'i or ro?s 'EAArjvcov), the 
Lydians and Greeks have similar laws, instead of the Lydians have laws similar to 
the Greeks. So iv fcrw, ftm, bpoicas, u>savrci>s, Kara ravra Kai, etc. PL Ion. 500, 
d. ovx opolcos TreiroLrjKacn Kal "Oprjpos. Comp. similis ac, atque. There also 
occur, particularly in Attic prose, the particles of comparison, &s, &sirep with 
Xaos, 6 avros. Dem. Phil. 3. 119, 33. rbv avrbv rpoirov, ftsirep, k. t. A. 

(5) Expressions signifying to be becoming, suitable, fitting, 
to please, and the contrary, e. g. rrpk-Ktw, apjxoTTtiv, Trpo^rjKcw (with 
an Illf. following), 7rp€7r6vT(DS, airperruis, ei/cos eorti/, €lk6to)s, apiaKew 
(avddvav Ion.). 

PL Apol. 36, d. ri ovv Trpeirei avd pi ir ivnr i; (what then is becoming a poor 
man?). Her. 6,129. etovrcp ap torus opxeero (he danced pleasing himself j. 
X. Cy. 3. 3, 39. ap e'er kgiv vp?v irsip&vrai (they endeavor to please you). 

(6) Verbs signifying to agree with, to assent to, to reproach, tv 
be angry, to envy, e. g. ojuoAoyetv, etc. ; /*e/x<£eo-3ai (to reproach , 



§ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 413 

fji€/jL<fi€(rSai two. means to blame), XoiSopeio-Scu (to reproach), Izrtf*- 
fiav, iyKaXecv (tlvl tl), ItvlkoX^lv (tlvl tl), kTTLTrXrrrTCLv, 6VeiSt£av, evo^Aetv 
(more seldom with the Ace.), etc. ; Svfxovo-Sai, fipifiovo-Sai, ^aXc- 
iraiveiv, etc. ; <p%ve7v (tlvl twos, $ 274, 1, more seldom tlvl tl), 
jSaa-Kaivecv (to envy ; fiacrKaiveLv TLvd, to slander'). The Ace. of 
the thing very often stands with the Dat. of the person. 

Her. 3, 142. kybi ra (== a) t£ ireXas iimrX-fjcrcrct}, avrbs Kara Zvvap.iv ov 
TToiijcrca (what I rebuke in my neighbor I will not do myself). Th. 4, 61. ov to?s 
&pXeiv fiovXofxevois p. 4 p.<pop.ai, aWa t o?s viraKoveiv It o ijaot 4 po is ovcriv 
(I do not reproach those wishing to rule, but, etc.). Deni. 01. 2. 30, 5. yvcax^-ei 
7]fi7y 6 QihiTT-Kos {gave trouble to us). X. An. 2. 5, 13. Alyvrrriovs, oTs p.aXicrTa 
vfxas vvv yiv&cTKca T€&vpap.4vovs, KoAao~eo~&e (with whom I know you are angry). 
Cy. 1. 4, 9. 6 St?os avTcp iAoidope?ro, 7-771/ &pa<rvT7)Ta 6pu>v (reproached him). 
4. 5, 9. Kva£dpr)s e/3 pi/xovT o t<£ Kvpcp Kal to7s MtjZois t$ KaraAnr6vTas 
avrbv ip-np-ov o?xe0"frat (was wroth with Cyrus, etc.). 

(7) Verbs of helping, averting, and being useful, e. g. aprjyeLv, 
ap*vv€iv, dXe^eiv, rt/xcopetv, f3or]$€LV, i7rLKovpeiv, aTroXoyucrS^aL, Xvctlt€- 
Xe?v, iirapKecv, )(paLcrpL€LV and the like (but ovLvdvaL and ax^eAetv 
with Ace. $ 279, 1.) ; also several verbs compounded with 
crvv, e. g. crvpLtpeptLv {conducere), avpL7rpaTT€Lv, crvvepyziv, etc., and 
many adjectives of the same and similar significations, and 
the contrary, e. g. xPW 1 ^ ^ fiXapepos (but /^Acra-reiv with Ace. 
$ 279, 1.), tp-iXos, ix^pos, 7roX£pLLos, etc. 

X. R. L. 4, 5. ap-n^ovcri tt} tt6\€1 iravrl abhsi (they assist the city with all 
their strength). Cy. 3. 3, 67. (al yvvaiKes) iKertvojjo'i irdvras p.r] (pevyeiv Kara\nr6v- 
ras, a\\' a/ivvai Kal avraTs, Kal t4kvois, Kal acpicriv ai>To7s (to de- 
fend them, their children and themselves). 4. 3, 2. tovtois yap <paaiv avdyK-nv 
elvai irpo&v/xoDs a\4£eiv (they say it is necessary to defend these). Eur. Or. 922. 
('Ope orris) ri^e\7]<re ti/x cape?]/ iraTpl, KaK^v yvva?Ka K&freov KaraKTavcav 
(wished to help his father). PI. Ap. 28, c. et Tipuop-nff e is riarpo'/cAa) t$ 
eTaipco tov <p6vov (if you shall avenge the murder of your friend Patroclus, i. e. 
if you shall avenge for him). 

Rem. 4. The words <pi\os, e x & p <f *> iro\4 pubs are also used as sub- 
stantives, and govern the Gen. X. An. 3. 2, 5. tovs iKtlvov £x&' ia " r ovs 
(his bitterest enemies). Hence the Dative stands, in general, with verbs and ad- 
jectives of all kinds, when the action takes place for the advantage, favor, honor, 
harm, disadvantage of a person, or an object considered as a person (Dativus 
commodi et incommodi), where the English uses the prepositions to or for. Here 
belong particularly the rites performed in honor of a divinity, e. g. opxe7o-&cu 
Tots &eo?? (to dance in honor of the gods) ; (TTecpavovoSai dew (to crown one's self in 
honor of the gods). Her. 6, 138. 'ApT 4 p. iZ i dpr^v &yeiv (to keep a feast in honor 
of Diana). The Dative with K\veiu (Poet., especially Epic), is also to be re- 
garded in the same way : k\v&1 p.oi, listen to me favorably. Here belongs, also^ 

35* 



414 - SYNTAX. [§ 284. 

the phrase, mostly poetic, dex e(r & a ' 1 Tt TlJ/ ^ t° receive something from some one, 
since it involves the additional idea that the reception of the thing will he re- 
garded as a relief, as agreeable, etc. to the person. Od. 7r, 40. &s 'dpa cpwvhcras o i 
iSQaro x^Keov eyX 0S ( received from him [as a favor to him] the brazen spear). 
See Larger Gramm. Fart. II. § 597, Rem. 3. 

(8) Verbs of observing, finding, meeting with something in a 
person. 

'TiroXa/xfidveiv Setry rotovrcv, oti evf)&r}S ris ctv&pwTros (scil. icrriv), PL 
Pp. 598. d. "Erepa 8r), ws tome, ro?s (pvKa^iv evp-fi Ka/x e v, 421, e. Qapffovffi 
udAiorra iro\4fxwi, orav ro7s ivavrio i s Trpdyfiara Kal dcrxoAias Trvv&dvwvr at 
(when they perceive troubles and hindrances in those opposed to them), X. Hipp. 5. 8. 

(9) The Dative stands with €.a-ri(v) and elo-i(v), to denote 
the person, or thing considered as a person, that has or possesses 
something. The thing possessed stands as the subject in the 
Nom., but the verb is translated by the English have, etc., and 
the Dat. as the Nom. So also with ytyveo-^at and v-rrapx^v (to 
be, exist), also with i'Sios and oAAot/hos. 

Kvpca "t\v /*eyd\r) /3a<n\eia ( Cyrus had a great kingdom ). — To7s ir\ovcriois 
iroAAa irapa/xv^td <pa<Tiv elvai, PL Pp. 329, e. ^Hffav Kpoicrca Svo ira75es 1 
Her. 1, 44. When the above verbs are connected with a predicative abstract 
substantive, they may be translated to prove, to serve. Xaipicpcau i/xo\ £-n[iia 
HaWov, % ca<p eAe id icrriv, X. C. 2. 3, 6. (Ch. mihi detrimento potius est, quam 
emolumento, is an injury, proves an injury rather than a benefit). 

Rem. 5. The possessive Dat., or the Dat. of the possessor, is to be distin- 
guished from the Gen. of the possessor (§ 273, 2). The Dative is used, when 
it is asked, what the possession is (what has one 1), and the possession desig- 
nated is contrasted with other possessions, e. g. Kvpca Tjy fx€yd\-n /3a<ri\eia, 
Cyrus had (among other things also) a great kingdom ; the Gen. is used, when it 
is asked who the possessor is (whose is this ?), and the possessor is contrasted 
with other possessors, e. g. K v p o v l\v iieyd\n flacriAeia, to Cyrus (and not to 
another) belonged a great kingdom. The Dative describes the person as one to 
whom the possession has been imparted, divided, given, and under whose con- 
trol it now is ; the Genitive, as one who has gained possession, from whom the 
possession has proceeded. 

(10) The Dat. is used universally when an action takes place 
in reference to a person, or a thing considered as a person, so that 
the person in some way shares or participates in it. Here be- 
long the following instances : — 

(a) In certain formulas, the Dative designates the person to whose judgment, 
consideration, or estimate, an idea is referred, and thus it first gains a definite 
authority or value ; i. e. the assertion is made in view of the judgment, etc. of 
the person to whom the matter had been submitted. This Dat. therefore shows 
when and under what circumstances the assertion is true, e. g. Her. 1, 14. aXrj&ti 8i 



$ 284.] DATIVE CASE. 415 

\6yw xpswp-zv 'V ou K-opwfriwv rod St\}xoo-{ov io~r\v 6 frno~avp6s {rede aestimanti hit 
thesaurus non est Corinthiacus, in the judgment of one estimating the matter correctly, 
it is not the Corinthian treasury). Th. 2, 49. to Qa&ev aiTUjuevw o-u>/j.a ovk ayav 
frep/jLOv i\v {the external part of the body, when one touched it, in the view of one touching 
it, was not very hot). Here belong especially the Datives elsfidvri, i£i6vn, avafSduriy 
inrepfiduTi and the like, with local specifications. Her. 6, 33. anyiuvi-qs b.iraXXao-o-6- 
fievos 6 volvtikos o-rparbsra. eV apiarepa istrXeovr i rov 'E\\7)stt6ptov alpee ndyra 
{the naval force subjugated all parts of the Hellespont, upon the left as one sails into it, 
or with respect to one sailing into it). X. Cy. 8. 6, 20. {Kvpos) \4yerai Karaarpe^/aa^cu 
irdvrara. e&vn, oaa 1,vpiav elsf3dvri olice? fJ.expl ipv&pas Sra^.do-arjs {which dwell as 
one enters Syria [from the entrance of S.] to the Red Sea) Also the expression cos 
<rvve\6pri elirelp, to speak briefly, to say in a word, properly to say it when one 
has brought the whole together into a small compass, has comprehended the whole, e. g. 
"Apev apx^>VTwu ovSep ap ovre ko/\6p, ovre aya&bp yepotro, cos fxep o~vv e\6vr i 
elirelp, ovSauov, X. An. 3. 1, 38. 

(b) So also the Dat. of the person often stands in connection with cos, in 
order to show that the thought which is expressed, is not a general one, but 
has its value only according to the opinion of the person named. X. C. 4. 6, 4. 
6 ret, vrepl robs &eovs p6p.ip.a elS&s op&ws ap y\\x1v evaefiris upicrjxepos etVj {nos- 
tro judicio, in our opinion). S. 0. C. 20. /naKpap ydp, cos yepopri, irpovo-rdx-ns 
6S6p {you went forward a great way, for an old man, as an old man would view it). 
Ant. 1161. Kpeap yap ^u QnXooros, cos ifxoi, irore {in my opinion). PI. Soph. 
226, C rax^av, cos ifMot, aneipip iirirdrreis. Her. 3,88. ydfxovs robs irpurovs 
iydfj.ee lie p a v<ti 5 Aapetos {matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima, con- 
tracted very honorable marriages, in the judgment of the Persians). Altogether 
usual in the phrase &£i6s el/xi tip 6 s tip., or even without the Gen., & £ 1 6 s 
el fit r ipi {lam of value in the estimation of some one). X. C 1. 2, 62. i/xol p.ev 
87? ~2.u>Kpdrr]S roiovros tap eS6i<ei rifxrjs &£ios elpai rfj nr 6 A e i /xaWop, -f) bavdrov 
{rather merits honor than death, in the estimation, in the view of the city). PI. Symp. 
185, b. ovtos iarip d ttjs Ovpaptas &eov epoos Kal ovpdvios Kal 7ro/\Aoi/ &£ios Kal 
ir6\e i Kal IS t6rais. 

(c) Here belongs the use of the Dat. of a person with f3ov\ofj.eva>, r]Sop.epu, 
acryueVco, eATro/ueVco, axd^eVco, TrposSexop-epui and the like, in connection with 
verbs, most frequently with elpai and yiy veer bat. Such a participle gives 
definiteness to an otherwise indefinite assertion. El ravrd <rot fiov\o/j.epco 
iariv {if this is to you wishing it, if this is your wish). Ovtos fxoi 7\Sop.ep(a 
b.Tr})VTT]o-ev {he met me to my joy). Her. 9, 16. tjSo jxepo icr ip tj/uTi/ oi \6yoi ye- 
y6vaai. Th. 6, 46. r <£ Ni/ci'a 7r po sS e%o p.e pep i\v to. izepl ru>p 'Ey effraiav 
{were as Nicias expected). PI. Rp. 358, d. a\?C opa, el trot fiovXo p.ep w (sc 
io-Tit), a Aeyco, whether what I say pleases you). 

(d) The Dat. of the personal pronouns, first and second persons, is often 
used, not because they are really necessary for the general sense, but to show 
that the statement is made in a familiar, humorous, and pleasant manner. This 
is called the Ethical Dat. {Dativus ethicus). X. Cy. 1.3, 2. bpwp 877 top Kdo-fxou 
rod TrdTnrov, euf3Aeirwi> ourcp, eKeyev {& Kvpos)' ^Xi P-^rep, us Ka\6s fxoi 6 ndr 



416 SYNTAX. [$ 284. 

iros (0 mother, how beautiful grandfather is, in my eyes). 15. fjv Se jne KaraKiirns 
ev&dde, Kal fxdSa) iinreveiv, orav fxev ev Tiepaais S>, olfxai a oi eneivovs robs aya&ovs 
ra. Tre£iKa pab"ias viK-qcreiv (to gkatify YOU, i" think I shall easily surpass those 
skilled in foot exercises). 

(11) The Dative often stands with the Perf. Pass, (rarely 
with other tenses of the Pass.), to denote the active person or 
agent. The Pass., in this case, expresses a state or condition, 
and the Dat. represents the author of this condition at the same 
time as the person for ivhom this condition exists, while by v-n-o 
with the Gen., the author merely is expressed. 

Her 6, 123. 3>s jjloi irpSrepov 5e8i]\wTBi (as has been before shown by me). 
Dem. Aphob. 844, 1. Set diriyr)crao-&ai ra rovra it eirpay fxev a nepl rjfiuv (it is 
necessary to describe what has been done by him). 01. 1. 26, 27. ri tt en pater at 
ro?s &\\ois ; (what has been done by others ?). In this way a Perf. Act., which 
is wanting, may be supplied, e. g. ravrd jjloi XeXeKrai (I have said this). 

(12) So also the active person or agent stands regularly in 
the Dative with verbal adjectives in -tos and -rtos, [$234, 1, (i)], 
both when they are used, like the Latin verbal in -dum, im- 
personally in the Neut. Sing. : -tov, -t£ov, or PI. -?-a, -rea (§ 241, 
3.), or when they are used personally, like the Latin participle 
in -dus ; those dsrived from transitive verbs, i. e. such as govern 
the Ace, admit both the Impers. and the Pers. construction ; 
but those derived from intransitive verbs, admit only the im- 
personal. The impersonal verbal Adj., in addition to the Dat. 
of the agent, governs the same Case as the verb from which 
it is derived. 

To arpdrevfxa eveiri&er ov ?]V evrav&a to?s TroKefiio is (could be easily 
attacked by the enemy), X. An. 3. 4,20. 'A<r/c7?Teov (or -rea) ecrri ffoi r^v 
aperrjv (you must practise virtue or virtue must be practised by you). 'E ir i & v fi r\ - 
reov earl ro?s av& pdoirois rr\s apsTTjs (there must be a desiring by men, men 
must desire virtue). 5 E7rixeip7?Teo*> iari o~oi t$ epyep (you must attempt the 
work). $T][x\ o)] fio7)&7)Teov elvai ro?s irpdyixaaiv vfx7v (I say that you must 
render assistance), Dem. 01. 1. 14, 17. KoXaffr eov eari cot tov dvhpamov 
(you must punish the man). 'Aa/cyrea eari aoi 7] aper-h. 'Q,(peXr)rea aoi t\ 
TroAis ierr'ur, X. C. 3. 6, 3. So the Deponents (§ 197), e. g. /xi/x-nreov early 
■Qixlv robs aya&ovs (from fxifxeta^ai nva) or pnyL-qreQi elaiv ^{xtv oi aya&oi 
(you must imitate the good) . 

Eem. 6. The verbal adjectives of those verbs whose middle form has a Pass. 
as well as a reflexive or intransitive sense, have, likewise, in the impersonal 
Neut. form with eari, a two-fold signification ; and when an object is joined 
with them, a two-fold construction, e. g. ireiareov earlv rjfuv avr6v (we must 



$ 285.] DATIVE CASE. 417 

convince him) from irei&co nvd ; and tt^ktt 4ov 4o~t\v tj/j.7u to7s v6/j.ois (we must 
obey the laws, obtemperandum est a nobis legibus) from Trd&o/j.ai nvi, obtempero 
alicui ; air aAAa/cr 4ov 4vt\v r\\uv avrbv rov kixkov (we must rid him of the evil) 
from airaWarretv nvd rov kcikov ; and diraAAaKT 4ov ecrrlv tjjjuu rov av&pdnrov 
(we must get rid of the man) from aTraXKaTTeaSai twos (to get rid of something). 

Rem. 7. Not unfrequently, however, the verbal adjectives in -re 6s, among 
the Attic writers, take the active person or agent in the Ace. also, as these ver- 
bals have the force of the impersonal verb Set with the Inf., e. g. PI. Gorg. 
507. d. rov JiovAofAeuov evdai/j.ova elvai cucppoo'vuriv 8 ico kt 4 oy teal ao~K7)' 
t4ov (whoever wishes to be happy must seek and practise sobriety). Often, also, 
the construction of verbal adjectives is changed into the Inf. ; in this case the 
agent must necessarily stand in the Ace. X. C. 1. 5, 5. 4/xol jxkv Sokc? . . . c'Aeu- 
&4p<d avSpl evKTov eivai jxtj tvx^7v dovAov toiovtov 5ov\gvovto, 8e . . . 
Ikct even/ tovs freovs K. t. A. 



$285. C. The Dative of the thing {Instrumental 
Dative). 

1. The Dative of the thing expresses relations which in 
Latin are denoted by the Ablative. The relations expressed 
by this Dat. are : 

(1) The ground, reason, or cause, e. g. <f>6/3o) airqX^ov,. evvoia, 
doWa, <f>6p(p, vj3p€i irouiv tl ; especially with verbs denoting the 
state of the feelings, e. g. xacptLV, ^Seo-^at, dydAAecr#ai, e7rat/3€0-- 
#0.1, Air7r€tcr#ai, avLaaSai, aky&v, Ik-, KarairXriTTZvSai ; Savp.a&LV ; 
eA7ri£eiv ; orepyav and dyewrdv, apiaKCcrSca, dpK€tcr$ai (all four : to 
be content, to be pleased ivith something) ; djyavo.KT<uv, S^s^epatVeiv, 
^aXe7rw5, /Sapecos <f>£p€iv, d^ecr^at ; aurxyvecrS-ai, etc. 

X. C. 1.3,1. ol &eol to?j irapa tuv eva-f^eo-Tarcov rivals ixaKicrra x a ' l P 0V ' 
a i v (are especially pleased with the honors from the most devout). Her. 478. 8 1 a i - 
T-n ovSa/xws 7] p4o~KeTo Ikv^ikt) (was by no means pleased with the Scythian 
mode of life). Th. 4, 85. &av/j.dC(a r rj airo k Aeitr e t /xov rwv icvAwv (1 am 
surprised at the shutting of the gates against me). 3, 97. £ATrl£eii/ t rj tvxV 
(to hope in fortune). ~2,T4py<a to?s trap ova iv (I am content with the present 
things). 'AyaTroi) to7s virdpxova iv ayafro7s. XaAeiru s <p4ow tois 
it a povcri irpdy/j.a<r 1 (lam troubled by the present state of affairs), X. An. 1: 3, 3. 
AiVxwo/icH to7s trsTrpayixtvois (lam ashamed on account of what has been done), 
C. 2. 1,31. PI. Hipp. maj. 285. e. cIk6tus aoi x a ^ oova ' LV °< A-aKedaifxSvtoi, are 
voXAa cl56ri. 'Ay d\ko fxai ttj vikt). IloAAoi ay av aicr ov <r i tu> ha- 
vaTu. A vsx*P a ' iVW to7s \6yois. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 14. aya-ir-ft aas to7s 
ireTrpayixevo is 'ocrvxi-a^ ^X^ " 61 ' 'I o"X"ei v t o ?s <r w^acr t, X. C. 2. 7, 7. So 
also with adjectives, e. g. lo~xvpbs xtpv' 1 ") toxvs iroatu, etc. 

Remark 1. The preposition hrl, on account of. at, is very often joined with 
the Dat. ; thus commonly, x**-*™ 5 $4pziv iirl tiki, Srav/xdCeiu iiri rivi : 5 v jx«- 
paiuiv usually with the Ace, § 279, 5 ; we also find ayairu, aTtpyw, Pap4ws, 
XaAei) u>s <p4pca ti. 



418 SYNTAX. [J 285. 

(2) The means and instrument, by which an action is accom- 
plished. Hence the Dat. also stands with xPV (r ^ aL ( u ^) an< ^ 
its compounds, and with vofit&iv (to be accustomed to). 

TidWeiv \l&oi s (to throw with stones = to throw stones). *AKovri£eiv alxf**?s 
(to hurl with spears = to hurl spears). X. Cy. 4. 3, 21. 6 /j.ev IttiroK-evravpos 
Svotv 6(p&a\(io?v trpoeuparo Kal dvo?v iarotv f\Kovev iya> Se Terrapin 
{lev 6<p^a\fio?s .reKfiapovfjiai, rerrapat 8e war I TTpoaio-^cro/xai' iroAAo 
yap <pafft Kal 'imrov av&p&irois ro7s 6<p^aXfio7s irpoopwvra S-nXovv, iroWa Se 
to is ual irpoaKovovra o-nfiaiveiv (the centaur saw with two eyes, and heard with 
two ears; but I shall see with four eyes, etc.). 18. irpovoelv ytev ye e£w irdvra 
t?7 avfrpcoirlvn yydfxrj, raTs Se x^P a ^ v o : irAo<popr}0'w, Siw^o/xat Se rip 'lir- 
7toj, rbv S' evavriov avarptyo) tt? rod '[-Kirov pdfxv. X. C. 4. 2, 9. at rwv 
crocpuv avSpwv yuuptat aperrj irXovrl^ovai robs KeKT-nfxevovs (enrich with virtue 
those who possess them). Her. 3, 117. ovrot 3>v, o'lirep efjtirpocr&ev idb&eo'au 
Xpao-&ai rip vSart, ovk exovres avrcp xpacr^ot, av/xcpopfj fieyaKr) St- 
axpswTai (those who before were accustomed to use the water, not being able to 
use it, experienced a great inconvenience). Dem. Cor. 277, 150. nevrj irpoepdo-et 
ravrrj Karaxp^' But tear axpyo~& at and 5iax077o-&cu in the sense of 
consumere, to kill, as transitive, govern the Ace. Comp. Her. 6, 135 ; Antiph. 1. 
113, 23. With xpv<r&at a second Dat. often stands, by means of attraction, 
or els with the Ace. or the Ace. of a pronoun or neuter adjective (§ 278, 4), 
to express the design or purpose, e. g. xp<*>f.al °* ot "Tier rep <pl\a>, as in the 
Lat. utor te fido amico, I have thee for a true friend). X. An. 1. 4, 15. i>fi?v 
ir terror drois XP^ (T eTai Kc " € ' s <ppovpia Kal els Xoxayias (will employ 
you as the most faithful both for guards and commanders). Her. 4, 117. <p(avp m 
'S.avpofxdrat v opt I (overt ^kv^ikt} (are accustomed to use the Scythian language). 
Th. 2, 38. ayuxrt Kal frvcriats Sterrjeriots voptl^overt. 

Rem. 2. The Dat. is very often used without ervv in military expressions, 
with reference to a retinue or force, in order to represent this as the means by 
which something takes place ; this usage is found particularly with verbs of 
going and coming. Such Datives are arparcp, err6\ep, Trkyfrzi, vaveri(v), 'Ittttois, 
o-rpartwrats, etc. (In Latin the Abl. without cum, as magno exercitu venire, to 
come with a large army). Her. 5, 99. ol 'A^-nvaTot a-KiKearo eXKoert vrjvo'i (came 
with twenty ships). Th. 1, 102. AdTjz/cuot %A&ov Tr\j]&ei ovk bhlyea (with not 
a small number). 4. 39. ol Tle\oirovvi)o-ioi avex^pva'av r cp err par <p e/c rris UvKov. 
X. Cy. 1. 4, 17. avrbs ro?s 'ittttois wpose\daas irpbs rot ru>v M-fi5<av (ppovpia Kare- 
fxeivev (having rode up with the cavalry). An. 7. 6, 29. bappdkeais r)puu eepeitrovro 
ol TroAe/Aioi Kal lirir tK<p Kal ireXraerr t k cp. 

(3) The following relations also maybe considered as the 
means, and are expressed by the Dat. : (a) the material of 
■which (= ivith which) anything is made ; — (b) the rule or 
standard, according to which anything is measured, judged of, 
or done ; hence the Dat. stands particularly with verbs of 
measuring, judging, inferring, e. g. erraS fxaej^ai, yiyiwKeu', eiKa* 






$ 285.] DATIVE CASE. 419 

£eiv, Kpivew, T€K[xaipe<r$aL ; also in general, to express a more deft 
nite limitation, to denote in ivhat respect a word is to be taken ; 
thus, for example, with verbs signifying to be distinguished, to 
excel, to be strong and powerful, and the contrary ; also with very 
many adjectives (instead of the Ace. of more definite limita- 
tion, $ 279,7); — (c) the measure, by, according to which an 
action is defined or limited, especially with comparatives and 
superlatives, as well as with other expressions, which include 
the idea of comparison, in order to denote the degree of 
difference between the objects compared; — finally, (d) the 
ivay and manner in which any tiling is done (How ?). 

Her. 3, 57. r\ ayopj] Kat rb irpvravriiov liapiu Xl&a) T](TKrijx4va (f\v) [were decora- 
ted with Parian marble). On the Gen. of the material, see § 273, 5. Her. 2, 2. 
roiovrta <TTa&in}<raix*v oi tr p-nyfiar i (ex tali re judicantes, having judged 
from or by such a circumstance). 7, 16. rfj crfj i<r&7JTi r eK/j.aip6 fievov (ex 
tua veste judicium faciens). X. Cy. 1. 3, 5. rlvi 877 <ru reK/xaipS/xeuos, & 
7ro?, ravra \eyeisj (judging by what rule, do you say this?). 3. 3, 19. at fidxai 
Kpluovrai /xaXXov rats t|/ux«<s> % Tc " s T ® v cafj-drcov pcafiats (are decided 
more by courage, than strength of body). H. 7. 3, 6. ovroi irduras av&pwirovs 
virepfiefiX-fiKao-i. r6Xfiri re koI /xiapla (have surpassed all men in daring 
and brutality) . C. 2. 7, 7. Iffx^eiu ro?s (ru/xaa-i (to be strong in body). Cy. 
2. 3, 6. iyu) ovre irotriv el/xi rax^s, ovre x c P <Tlv lo~X v P^ s ' Hence t&5 
ourt, t{) aXrj^eia, t<£ Xoyu>, tw epyco (according to the nature of etc.) ; also yvcofiv 
<r<pa\rivai, ■tyevoSriva.i (to be deceived in opinion), Th. 4, 18, Her. 7, 9. Her. 1, 184. 
^.e/iipafjus yeverjai rcevr e ir p6r e p ov iyeuero rr\s NtrwKptos ( was before 
Nitocris by five generations). So iroXXy, oXlyco, fxiKpcp, toctovtco, o<tu> fxelfav 
(greater by much, by little, by so much = much greater, a little greater, so much greater, 
etc.). Her. 6, 89. v<rr ipioav rj/xepv jjurj ttjs cvyKtiixivns (a day later than 
was fixed upon, later by a day, etc.). 106. it 6X1 Xoylfxy t] 'EXXds yeyove ao~- 
bcveo-T e p-n (has become weaker by [the loss of] a distinguished city). So with 
irp6 with the Gen., and /xerd (after) with the Ace, e.g. Ae/ca erect irpb rris eV 
SaAa/^Vt uav/xaxias (before the battle of Salamis by ten years, i. e. ten years before, 
etc.). 'E|tjk o<t rif eret fiera 'IXiov aXaxriv (sixtieth year after the sack of 
Troy). Here belong, also, (rux-iovy riva x iXlais Spaxinatj^avciTw (/o 
fine one [with] a thousand drachmas, etc.), and the like. Her. 6, 136. 6 drjfxos i £tj - 
1*1(0 (re (rov MiAnaSea) Kara. rr\v a5iKL-nv it evri]KO vt a t aXavr oicr t (fined 
him fifty talents). Th. 4, 73. t<S j3eA.Ti(rTw rod ottXitlkov fSXa(p$r?ivai (jactti- 
ram facere, to suffer defeat by [the loss of] the best portion of the heavy armed force). 
II. 7, 2. Tpues fj.eu icXayyrj t iuoirfj r Xaav, opv&es &s (advanced with a noise and 
a cry). X. Cy. 1.2, 2. (oi u6fj.oi) TrpocrrdTTovcri /r); /3ia els oiiciav rcapieuai (forbid 
to enter a house by force). So &opvf3a>, Kpavyfj, /3o?7 o-iyij Troieiu ri (to do something 
with a noise, etc.) ; 81/07, eirifieXela, 877/xoo-ia (sc. 6S£), 15 la (o5u>), ire£ri (65w), icom] 
(65$), in common, r$ Tpoiru) Toi<£8e ; Kop.i5fj, properly with care, hence, entirely, 



420 syntax. [$ 286 

quite; cttouSt?, with. pains, aegre, scarcely, hardly ; ^KKy, ravrrj, Sixfi-, duplici modo^ 
elitj), frustra. Comp. § 101, 2, (b). 



9 286. II. Substantive Object with Prepositions, or 
the Construction of Prepositions. 

1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence, whith- 
er, where, and the causal relations, which were originally 
considered as local relations, so the prepositions express 
another local relation, viz., the extension or position of 
things in space, — the juxtaposition of things (by the side 
of, over, around, toith), or the local opposites above and 
below, ivithin and without, before and behind. Prepositions 
therefore denote the relative position of the things described 
by the substantives which they connect ; and the relation 
expressed by them may be called the relation of position. 

2. The Cases connected with the prepositions, show in 
which of the local relations, whence, whither, where, the 
preposition is to be understood. 

Kemark 1. Thus, for example, the preposition irapa denotes merely the 
local relation of near, by the side of, by ; but in connection with the Gen., e. g. 
7) A & e Trap a rod fiaaiXeus, in addition to the idea of nearness, it denotes, 
at the same time, the direction whence (he came from near the king, de chez le 
roi) ; in connection with the Ace, e. g. 77 e i irapa rbv /3a<riAea, at the same 
time, the direction whither (he went into the vicinity or presence of the 
king) ; and in connection with the Dat. e. g., cctt 77 irapa t<$ SacriAeT, it de- 
notes simply the place where (he stood near the king). 

3. Prepositions are divided according to their construction : 

(a) into prepositions which govern the Gen.: avri, before (ante), air 6, from 
(ab, a), i k, out of (ex), irpo, before (pro) ; 

(b) into those which govern the Dajfc. : iv, in (in with abl.) and trty, ivith 
(cum). 

(c) into those which govern the Ace: avd, up, els, into (in with ace), ws, 
to; 

(d) into those which govern the Gen. and Ace: Sid, through, Kara, down 
fi'om (de), virep, over (super), per a, ivith; 

(e) into those which govern the Gen., Dat., and Ace: a/x<pi, about, iiri, 
upon, irapa, by, irepl, around (circa), irp6s, before, and viro, under 
(sub). 

4. Prepositions are divided according to the relations of posi* 
tion which they denote : 



$287.] prepositions. — 'Avrt, 77700. 421 

(a) into such as indicate a juxtaposition: irapd and afi(pi, near, iirl, at 
and upon, avv and fierd, with ; 

(b) into such as express local opposites : iiri, upon, a yd, up,vir4p, over, 
and u7to, under, Kara, down {under), irp6, irp6s and avri, before, in 

front of, and the improper prepositions oiricrbev, after, behind ; iv and 
els, in, within, and e/c, e|, from, out of ; did, through, and ire pi, around, 
outside ; &> s, to, up to, and air 6, from, away from. 

5. The relation of position expressed by prepositions is trans- 
ferred to the relations of time and causality, e. g. Ot 7roAe//,coi 
a,7ro ttJs 7roAew5 a.7r£<fivyov. 'Arro vvktos a7r^A^ov (from 
night, immediately after the beginning of night). 'A7r6 £vp.- 
//.a^ias avrovo/xoi etcrtv (from, by virtue of the alliance). 

6. Each preposition has a fundamental meaning, which it 
everywhere retains, even when it is connected with two or 
three Cases ; but it receives various modifications according to 
the different Cases with which it is connected, because the 
local relation varies with each Case. Comp. Rem. 1. The 
fundamental meaning of prepositions is most evident, when 
they express local relations ; it is generally quite evident in those 
of time also ; but in the causal relations, it is often veiy obscure. 

Eem. 2. Originally all the prepositions were merely adverbs of place. See 
$ 300, 1. The prepositions enumerated in No. 3, may be called Proper prepo- 
sitions, inasmuch as during the cultivated period of the language, they either 
were not used at all, or but very seldom, as adverbs of place, without a sub- 
stantive ; accordingly, they have the regular functions of prepositions : they 
differ from the Improper prepositions : of these latter, the following classes 
maybe named: (a) both adverbs of place and other adverbs, which, though 
they regularly have the functions of adverbs, are sometimes, in connection 
with a substantive, used as prepositions, e. g. air6ivpohev, dvev, Sixa, d/.ia ; — (b) 
substantives in connection with the Gen., e. g. hin-qv, instar, x°-? iv > gratia, evena, 
on account of. 



I. Prepositions with the Genitive only. 

§ 287. (1) 'Avti and 7rp6, before. 

1. 'AvTt (Lat. ante, before, in the face of opposite, etc.), orig- 
inal signification: in the face of (before, over against) (1) in 
a local sense (in prose seldom) ; (2) in a causal or figurative 
sense: (a) in adjurations, instead of the common word -v-pos 
with the Gen.; — (b) with expressions denoting comparison 
(e. g. with the comparative), valuing, weighing, requital; hence 
with words of buying, selling, bartering, value, worth, likeness or 

36 



422 syntax. [$ 287 

unlikeness, preference ; — (c) of the cause or ground, when i< 
expresses the idea of making compensation, as in dvS^ ov, av& a>v, 
for what ? ivherefore ? — (d) of substitution, giving an equiva 
lent, etc. 

(1) (Tb xvpiov icrrl) 5a<ru iriTvcri SiaXenrovcrais fieyaXais, av& uv co-ttjkStcs 
&vdpes Tt av irdcrxoiev r) virb twv (pepofiivcov Xl&oov, r) virb twv KyXivdov/xiyuv ; (be- 
hind which, since the trees stood before the soldiers), X. An. 4. 7, 6. (2) (a) 
'A.vr\ iraiduv rcivSe... iKerevo/xev, sc. ere (for the sake of, as it were standing 
before), S. 0. C. 1326. (b) (Avicovpyos KareipydaraTo) iv rfj irotei aipert&r epov 
thai rbv Kakbv Shx.vo.tov avrl alaxpov filov (is better than, is preferable to a 
disgraceful life), X. R. L. 9, 1 . Trjv TeKevrrjv avrl r rj s twv tyvTwv cruTrjpias 
i]\\d^avTo (exchanged death for the safety of the living), PL Menex. 237, a. IToT^p 
vibv avrl irdvrcov twv &XAwv XPV pdrwv irpoTi(j.a. So alpe?<T&ai ri avrl 
twos, instead of the common tiv6s. Tijv ikev&epiav k\oiixr\v av avrl wv ex« 
irdvrwv (in place of all ivhich 1 have), X. An. 1. 7, 3. (d) AovXos avrl 5e<r- 
ttStov (a slave instead of a despot). 'AvtI Tj/m-epas vv£ ZyevtTo, Her. 7, 37. 
'Avrl tov (xdxeo-bai irei&ea&ai i&etei, X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. 'Arri is never used 
of time. 

2. Up 6, original signification: on the foreside (pro, prae, be- 
fore, figuratively, in behalf of), (1) local; — (2) of time ; (3) 
causal and figurative : (a) in behalf of (for the good, for the 
weal) ; with expressions denoting comparison (hence with the 
Com. degree), valuing, estimation, like avri, but always with the 
accompanying idea of standing before, preference ; hence it is 
used to express preference in general; — (b) of an inivard, 
mental cause, occasion, inducement (only Poet.) : on account of, 
prae, e. g. II. p, 667. 77-/00 c)>6fioLo (prae metu, for fear, on account 
of fear). 

(1) Mivwa 7/ vrj<ros Ktiranr pb M eydp wv, Th. 3, 51. (2) Tlpb r) /x e p a s a7rf/A- 
&ov. (3) Tldvres a^iuxrovci ce irpb at) twv f3ov\eve(r&ai (desire you to consult for 
them), X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. Mdx*oSai, airo&ave?v irpb ttjs ttolt plSos, SiaKivSv- 
veveiv it jb fiao - i\4ws (for, in behalf of, one's country), X. Cy. 8. 8, 4. Autaio- 
repov u)[JLriv Ka\ KaWiov elvai irpb rod <pevyeiv Te Kal airoS id pdo~ Ke iv vire- 
Xeif Trj ir6\ei Siktjv i\vtiv av Tarry (1 thought it more just in preference to fleeing, etc.), 
PL Phaed. 99, a. Tlpb iroWov iroi-ficracr&aL ti (to esteem before or above much, 
i. e. very highly). Tlpb iroXXwv XP 7 ) P-**-™" Tifii)(ra<r&ai ti (to value before much 
wealth). (Tovrov) irpb irdvTwv x P V H- <*■ T m v Ka ^ Ttovwv TrpiaL/xrjv av <pl\ov 
fxoi elVcu, X. C. 2. 5, 3. Tlpb tovtov Te&vdvai av /xaWov e\oiro (for him), PL 
Symp. 179, a. 'Eiraivelv irpb 5 iicaioffvv 77 s aSaclav (to praise injustice before, 
rather than, in preference to justice), Pp. 361, e. 

Remark. The reason that the prepositions avri and irp6 are not con- 
nected with the Dat., like prepositions of the same meaning in other languages, 



♦ 288.] prepositions. — -'A7TO, e/c. 423 

but with the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language regards the 
relation denoted by before, in front of not merely as local, but implying action, 
a relation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions vir4p, irp6s, 
5 id, b.jx(pi, ire pi, iiri, viro with the Gen., since the Gen. represents the 
place as the cause or occasion of the action, and hence likewise, a relation of 
dependence. See § 273, 4. 



$288. (2) 'A7ro, from, and e£, Ik, out of. 

Preliminary Remark. These two prepositions denote an outgoing, a re- 
moval, departure, but a ir 6 denotes a removal from the exterior of an object, while 
e k (e £), always implies a going out from within a place or object ; and in the 
causal relation, the former denotes a remoter cause, the latter, oDe more direct. 

1. 'A7ro (ab), from, denotes: (1) in a local relation: (a) re- 
moval from a place or object with verbs of motion, also of free- 
ing, and the like, e. g. \vav, iXevSepovv, also of missing ($ 271, 2), 
hence, oarb vkottov ; then it is transferred to mental failures, as 
in ajr cAiuoW, airb yvuifx-qs, aliter ac sperabam, putabam (as if 
aberrans ab eouspectatione, ab opinione) ; (b) distance from a 
place or object with verbs of rest; — (2) of time, going out 
from a point of time : from, after ; — (3) causal or figurative : 
(a) of origin, as with etrai, ytyvea-^at ; (b) of the whole in rela- 
tion to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it ; (c) of the 
author with Pass, verbs instead of viro (§ 251, Rem. 4), but al- 
ways with the accompanying idea of on the part of; (d) of the 
occasion or cause; (e) of the material; (f) of the means and 
instrument; (g) of conformity. 

(1) (a) 'A7rb T7js tt6\}(os aire<pvyov oi iroKcfitoi. (b) 'O \6yos ovk airb 
rod <TKOirov 48o£ev elprjofi xt, X. S. 2, 1 0. ( Ai iraXaiaX iroAeis) airb &a\do~o-i}s 
paWov cfKla-Srrjaav (at a distance from the sea), Th. 1, 7. (2) 'Airb ravrrj s rr\ s 
7]/j.4pas, airb vvkt6s, of hair 4 pas; airb ruv airwv (afterthemeal),~X..H. 
L. 5, 8. (3) (a) 'A ir b 'A \ k fx a I <a v o s koX avns Meya/cAe'oj iyevovro Kal icdpTa 
Xafxwpot (very distinguished men sprung from), Her. 6, 125. (b) Tas Tprfpeis, 
a"irep i\(TOLV avT<p airb r wv KaraKeKp&cio-wv ( which he had of those that were 
left), Th. 4, 9. To airb rrjs Setpfjs (ornaments for the neck, necklaces), Her. 
1,51. So oi airb fiov\ris (qui sunt a consiliis, those xvho belong to the council) ; 
oi airb riActT cavos (the pupils of Plato, the Platonics) ; oi airb tt)s 'A/coStj- 
fiias, etc. (c) 'Eir pdx&V a 7 ""' avrusv ovSev epyov a^ioKoyov (was done by 
them, on the part of ), Th. 1, 17. (d) 'Airb 5 ina to o~vvn s (by, on account of), 
Her. 7, 164. T<£ a7rc» tu>v iroXe/xicav <p6$q> (metu ab hostibus, fear of, from the 
enemy), X. Cy. 3. 3, 53. 'Ac/)' kavTOv (from his own impulse), (e) Tpecpeiv rb 
va.vTiK.bv airb ir po s odoav (by revenues), Th. 1, 81. (f) 'Airb ru>v vp.eT(put 
v/jTiv TroAejuet (*iAi7T7ros) a v/ip-dx m (sociorum vestrorum ope), Dem. Ph. 1. 49, 



424 SYNTAX. [$ 288. 

34 ; hence many adverbial phrases, e. g. airb <rr6[xaros, airb yXwrr-ns elireiv (by 
heart, by word of mouth) ; airb (nrovb'rjs (zealously), (g) \A.7r' OvAi \iirov oijpz- 
os KaXeoi/Tcu OvXv/xTrirjuoi (are called from, derive their name from mount Olympus), 
Her. 7, 74. 'Airb ^vfj/./xax^s o.vt6vo[xoi (by virtue of), Th. 7, 57. 

2. 'E£ €k (ex), out of (opposite of Zv, in), denotes (1) in a 
local relation : (a) removal either from within a place or object, 
or from immediate participation or connection with a place or 
object, with verbs of motion; hence an immediate succession 
of one object after another; (b) distance with verbs of rest: 
ivithout, beyond (Epic), e. g. ex /3eAeW, extra teloricm j actum; — 
(2) of time, immediate outgoing from a point of time; then 
especially the immediate development of one thing from anoth- 
er, an immediate succession of two actions ; — (3) in a causal 
and figurative sense : (a) of origin ; (b) of the whole in relation 
to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it, often with the 
accompanying idea of choice and distinction; (c) of the author 
with passive or intransitive verbs, instead of wo, , almost ex- 
clusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, seldom in Attic 
prose ; (d) to denote the occasion or cause ; (e) of the material ; 
(f ) of the means and instrument ; (g) of conformity : according 
to, in consequence of, by virtue of, after. 

(1) 'E/c tt) s tt6\€cos airrj^ov, e/c rrj s /xdxvs %<pvyov (out from the city, 
out from the battle, while ano would merely signify away from) ; e/c yrjs eVctu- 
(xa.xn<r av (out from the land). PI. Polit. 289, e. ol 8e ir6hiv e/c irShews oAAar- 
tovtcs Kara SaXarrav Kal TreQj (changing from city to city). Apol. 37, d. Ka\bs &u 
fxoi 6 fiios eJVj ci\A77t' i£ &\\ris irSXeoos cfyie*/3o/xeVa> (comp. ex alio loco in alium 
migranti). (2) 'E| if^ipas (ex quo dies illuxit, as soon as it was day) ; e/c rov- 
rov (sc. xptvov) immediately after this; e/c vvkt6s or e/c vvktuv; e/c iral- 
5 ay (from very childhood); e| ixrripov (subsequently); e/c rod Xonrou. 
Her. 9, 8. e| 7}fx4pns is r]fj.4pnu ava$a\\6}j.Gvoi (ex die in diem, delaying from 
day to day, day after day). 1,87. e/c Se al&plws re Kal vnv spivs <rvve$pa- 
Mey Qairivns v4<pea (immediately after fair weather, etc.). Th. 1, 120. e/c /j.hp 
slp-huns Tro\e/xe7v, e'/c 8e tto\4/ji.ov irdxiv ^v/n/37Jvai (to go to war after peace, 
etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 17. 5 abs iraTTjp eV rrjds rrj (xia yfjiepq e£ a'cppovos adocppwp 
yey ivrjTai. (3) (a) Elvai, ylyvea&cu e/c tivos (to be descended from some one, 
e'/c indicating more direct descent, while an 6 may be used of one more remote), 
(b) 'E| 'A&wvalav ol ^piffTOi (the bestof). (c) Her. 3, 62. ra ivTZTa\fj.4va e/c 
tov Mdyov (the things commanded by Magus). lb. irpodedoo-frcu e/c Tipn^do-ireos (to 
be betrayed by), (d) 6, 67. ec^euye AvfidpnTos e/c HirdpTws e/c roiovSe oust- 
Seos (on account of ). So e/c iravrbs tov vov (with all the heart) ; 4k fiias 
and the like. Her. 2, 152. e/c rrjs otyios rod dvelpov (in consequence of), (g) 



J 



$289.] prepositions. — *Ev, a-vv. 425 

PI. Criton. 48, b. e/c rav 6/j.oXoy ovfj.4v(av tovto o'Kein&ov (in accordance 
with what has been admitted). So oz/o/m£ecrd-ai e/c tivos (to be named after or for 
some one, like virtus ex viko appellata est, is called or takes its name from vie). 
'Ek rod ; why ? 

Remark. The adverbs which, in the character of improper prepositions, take 
the Gen., have been already considered, in treating of the Gen. Besides these 
adverbs, the following substantives, as improper prepositions, take the Gen. : 
a. 8 i k 7) v [Seij.as, Poet.), instar ; — b. xctpiv, gratia, for the sake of commonly 
placed after the Gen., seldom before it. Instead of the Gen. of the personal 
pronouns i/xov, <rov, etc., the possessive pronoun, as an attributive adjective, is 
regularly used with x^P lv t e - £• *V-"h v i ffV X"? 1 ^ mea, tua gratia; — c. eVe/ca 
(eVe/ce^ even before consonants, as k'veica even before vowels in the Attic writers, 
eiVeKa and eiVe/cej/, Ionic, but not wholly foreign to the Attic dialect, ovvsna in 
poetry), causa, gratia. The Gen. more frequently stands before than after eveica. 
It very frequently signifies, with respect to, concerning, in regard to. Her. 3, 85. 
Sdpaee r ovrov etVe/ce, loith respect to this, be of good courage. It often denotes 
a remote reason, e. g. by virtue of, by reason of PI. Pp. 329, b. ei yap ?jv tovt 
oUtmv, Kav eya* to. avra ravra £ireir6v&ri eVe/ca ye yq pec s, i. e. by reason of old 
age ; — d. e/c 77 r 1 (poetic only), by or according to the will of (a god), Aibs e/ttjr*, 
Homer and Hesiod. In other poets it has the signification of evena. 



$ 289. 2. Prepositions with the Dative only. *Ev 
and crvv (£vv). 

1. *Ev (eVi Poet., elv and elvl Epic) denotes that one thing is 
in, upon, by or near another. In general, it indicates an actual 
union or contact with an object, and hence is the opposite of 
Ik. It denotes ( 1 ) in a local relation : (a) the being in, inclosed 
in, encircled, surrounded by ; used with reference to place, cloth- 
ing, persons : in, amo?ig, in the midst of, and with verbs of speak- 
ing, before, in the presence of {coram) ; then it is transferred to 
the external and internal state or condition in which one is taken, 
or is found, by which he is, as it were, surrounded ; — also to the 
business in which he is engaged, to persons, in whose hands or 
power something is placed; it also denotes (b) the being upon 
something, and (c) the being near a thing, particularly of cities, 
near which (in the territory of which) something took place, 
especially a battle ; — (2) of time (§ 283, 3) ; — (3) in a causal 
and figurative relation: (a) of the means and instrument ; (b) 
of the manner ; (c) to denote conformity : according to, in con- 
formity with. 

(1) (a) 'Ei/ t?j ir6\ei, eV Trj vf)(ra>, £v ~2irdpTr} tovto eyeveTO. PI. L. 
625, b. avdiravXai kv to?s vty-nXo'is Se'i/Spe <r I v elffi ffiaapai. "Ev '6tt\ois 9 
iv t6%ois d lay wvi&o-frai; iv e'<r&7jTt, $v o-retpdvois (crowned); iv roll 

36* 



426 syntax. [$ 289, 

a v&p (xsirois {inter). Dem. Chers. 108, 74. Titf&eSs iror itcwos iv vp.7v e5>}« 
wny6pr)<rev (in our presence). 'Er iro\e p.cp, iv epycp, iv datri, iv <p6fiq>, iv 
opyv elvai. PL Crito. 43, C. Kal &\\oi iv TOiavrais ^vp.(popa7s a\i<r- 
Kovrai (are taken in, involved in such calamities). Phileb. 45, c. iv toiovtois 
voo~T\p.a<T iv ixopevoi. Gorg. 523, b. iv irdo"p eboaipiovia. olKeiv (to live in 
the enjoyment of all prosperity). Her. 2, 82. ol iv iroi-ho-ei yev6pevoi (those who 
have been in poetry = poets). Th. 3,38. ol i v irpdy p. a a i (those engaged in 
state affairs = the ministers). X. Cy. 4. 3, 23. ol p.ev 5}/ iv rovrois rols \6~ 
yois ?j<rav (were engaged in these discourses). PL Phaed. 59, a. iv <pi\o<ro(pia 
elvai. Ot iv yewpyiais; iv t£x v V 6 '"«'« Hence various adverbial ex- 
pressions have originated, e. g. i v iVa> elvai (to be equal)] iv yoovjj p.ol io-Tiv(it 
is pleasing to me) ; so also with %x elv an( ^ Toietadrai, Q.g.iv 6p.oleo, iv i\a(p p$ 
iroie?a&ai (to esteem equally, to esteem lightly). y Ev ip.ol, ev <roi icrri ti (penes me, 
te, it is in my power, etc.) ; hence the phrase iv eavrcp elvai (to be in one's senses, 
sui compotem esse) ; (b) iv op effi v, iv '/tttt ois, iv &p6 vois ; (c) 'H ivMav- 
t iv eta p.a'x'n {the battle near). — (2)'Ez/ rovrcp rep XP 0V< ?\ * v § (idhile, 
during); iv irevre 7} p. e pais (during, in the space of). — (3) 'Opav, opacr&ai, 
iv b<p&a\p.o?s, Poet, (to see, be seen with the eyes) ; then in other connections 
among the poets, iv irvpl Kaleiv, iv oe<rp.cp drjo-ai, iv X 6 / 30 "' Aa^etV, Horn. 
(to burn with fire, etc.). In prose, especially in Xenophon, eV is used to denote 
the means, in the expressions dr)\ovv, SrjKov elvai, o-np.aive.iv ev rivi. X. Cy. 1. 
6, 2. on p.ev, S> ttcu, ol &eoi ae 'l\ew re Kal evp.eve?s Treuirovo~i, Kal iv lepo?s 5rj- 
Kov Kal iv ov pavtois a 7] p. el is (is evident both by the sacrifices and the signs 
from heaven). 8. 7, 3. io"n p.7]vare p.01 Kal iv lepo7s Kal iv ovpavlots 
o"np.elois Kal iv olcovo'is Kal iv (pi) p.ais, a r* ixPV" noielv Kal a ovk ixPW- 
'Ev SIkt), iv o-iQ}Trfj. Th. 1, 77. iv ro7s opiolois vop.ois ras Kpiaeis 
■Koielv (according to the same laws). So iv piepei (according to his part, in turn). 
'Ev ip.ol, ev 001, iv iKelvta (Poet.), ex (according to) meo, tuo, illius judicio. 

2. Sw (^w mostly old Attic) corresponds almost entirely with the 
Latin cum, and the English with; it always expresses the idea of 
union, participation and accompaniment : ( 1 ) in a local relation 
often of an accompaniment which implies help or assistance ; — 
(2) in a causal sense to denote : (a) the means and instrument ; 
(b) the manner ; (c) the measure or rule, by which the action 
of the verb is measured, as it were, or defined ; (d) conformity. 

(1) 'O crrparriybs crvv ro7s o~t par iwrais avex^pneev. — Sue &e&5 (with 
the help of God). 'Zvv rivi elvai or ylyveo&ai (to be on the side of one, of one's 
party). ~2,vv r iv 1 p.dxea$ai, to fight in company ivith one, to aid one in fighting 
(2) (a) X. Cy. 8. 7, 13. 77 kttjo'is avrwv (sc. ttictuiv (plXoiv) io~riv ovSap.u>s <rvt 
rfj &la, aWa paWov avv rrj evepyeffia (not by violence, but rather kindness). 
(b) Uoo'ievai crvv Kpavyrj, cvv ye\cort i\&e?P (with a shout, etc.). X. Cy 
3. 1, 15. Trorepa S 1 7^777, & Kvpe, &p.eivov elvai, avv r $ ay aya&<p ras Tip.a>plaS 
iroieloSai, % crbv rfj o"ij £rjp,ia; (with, for your advantage, or for your injury) 






$290.] prepositions. — 'Ava, ek, cos. 427 

(c) 1. 3, 17. avv t$ v6fMco ovv itc4\euev ael rbv SiKacrrrjv tt\v \j,r)<pov rl&ea&ai 
(to vote with, in accordance with the laic). (d)2i/j/ r <p v 6 p.ca rr\v ^jjfpov Ti&ec&e. 
"Svv t <£ 8 1 k a i w. 

Remark. Of the adverbs used as improper prepositions, there belong here 
ap.a (una cum), and several which are constructed also with the Gen., as has 
been seen, in treating of the Gen. and Dat. 



$290. 3. Prepositions with the Acc. only: 'Avd, ets 

AND to?. 

1. 'Ava (on, up, upon) signifies from a lower to a higher place, 
and is directly opposite to /cam with the Acc, which signifies 
from a higher to a lower place ; the use of avd is more frequent 
in poetry than in prose. It is used (1) in a local relation : (a) 
to denote a direction towards a higher object; (b) to denote the 
extension from a lower to a higher point, from bottom to top : 
throughout, through, both with verbs of motion and rest; — (2) 
in a temporal relation, to denote continuance or a period of time : 
per (seldom) ; — (3) in a causal sense to denote manner ; then 
particularly in a distributive sense with numerals. 

(1) (a) Od. x> 132. £> <pi\oi, ovk av St) ris av 6 p <r o&v pr\v ava$a'n\ (up to 
the lofty gate). This use is rare and only poetic ; in prose only in the phrases 
ava. rov Trora/xov, ava p6ov rrAelv, up the stream (the opposite of Kara 
TroTa.fu.6v, down the stream); (b) II. v, 547. (<p\ki\>) ava. va>ra Seovo~a Sia/xirepes 
(ab injima dorsi parte usque ad cervicem) ; so ava dcoua, ava. orparov, ava fiaxWy 
ava. HfxiXov, ava. &arv, ava. Svfxov (through the house, through the army, etc.), 
all in Homer; Her. 6, 131. Kal ovtu 'AXKfxaiojvlSaL i(3axr$7)crav ava T -)/ v 'EA- 
Xada (throughout Greece). X. Vect. 5, 10. ava Tracrav yr)v Kal frdXarr av 
eipijvn tdTai. Hicr. 7, 9. ava. ar6y.a ex^iv (to have continually in the mouth). 
(2) Her. 8, 123. ava. rbv Tr6Xejxov rovrov (throughout). So ava. iraaav 
rriv Tj/jLcpav, per totum diem (the substantive must here have the article; 
without the article ava iracrav rj/xepav, signifies daily, day by day, ava ttciv zros, 
every year, yearly, see No. (3) and § 246, 6), ava vvura (per noctem, all night 
through). 7, 10. ava. XP°' V0V Qevpoi ris &v (in the time). (3) 'Ava Kpdros (with 
all one 's might); ava fxe po s (by turns) ; ava. rrav er o s (quotannis). X.An.4,6, 
4. "EXXr^ves iiropvb-ntrav iirra. crra^/j.ovs ava tt4vt€ tt apaadyy as ryjs r)/j,4pas 
(Jive parasangs daily). 

Rehabk 1. In the Epic and Lyric languages, avd is constructed with the 
Dat. also : instead of it iv is elsewhere used, e. £■ ava o-K^irrpcv, &p.a), Yapydpta 
&Kpu> in Homer. So ei/'Sci 8' dj/a aKanrw Aibs alerts, Pind. 

2. Eis (es Ionic, Doric, and old Attic) is only a modified form 
of iv, and denotes the same relations of position as are ex- 



428 syntax. [$ 290, 

pressed by iv, but always in the direction whither; hence it is 
used of motion into ilie interior of an object, up to, into the im- 
mediate presence of; in general to denote the reaching a definite 
limit. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a local limit; (b) a 
limit in quantity : about, up to; (c) extension; (d) in the sense 
of before, in the presence of, coram, but with the idea of the di- 
rection whither; — (2) of time, to denote a temporal limit: till, 
towards; (3) in a causal sense : (a) of a mental aim,, object or 
purpose ; (b) of the manner ; with numerals either in the sense 
of about or in a distributive sense ; (c) in general to express a 
reference to something : in respect to. 

(1) (a) 'IeVcu els r)\v iv6Xiv; so also of persons with the accompanying 
idea of their habitation or country. PI. Apol. 17, c. els v/xas elstepai, i. e. 
els rb Sucao'T'hpiov elsievai. X. An. 4. 7, 1. iiropev&ricrav els Ta^ouj {went 
into the country of the Taochoi). Among the Attic writers, also in a hostile 
sense: contra, in. Th. 3, 1. iarparevaav is ttjv 'Attik^ {into, against At- 
tica). "With the verbs cvWeyeiv, awayeipeiv, a\i£eiv and the like, the Greeks 
use els, where we say, to assemble at or in a place. Comp. § 300, 3. (b). Th. 
2, 13, twv He\oivovv7)(ri(av ^vXXeyo^evwu re is rbv 'Iff&fxbv Kal iv 68u> ovruv. 
Comp. 4, 91. 8, 93. So the Latins say: congregari, convenire, etc., in urbem. 
(b) Th.1,74. vav s is ras rer paKocias. (c) 'Ek &aXd<T(TT]s els SraXaacrav. 
PL Gorg. 526, b. els Kal irdvv iXX6ytp.os yeyovev els rovs &XXovs"EXXr)j/as, 
'ApicTTeiSris {among), (d) Aoyovs TroLeTaSai els rbv Srjfiov {to speak before, in 
the presence of the people). PL Menex. 239, a. ol irarepes iroXXa. S^ Kal KaXa epya 
aire^vavro els irdvras av&pdnrovs {before all men). (2)'Es rjeXiov k<x- 
v aSvvra {till sunset), Homer ; hence els eairepav {towards, till evening, proper- 
ly to evening as a boundary) ; so in prose, els ttjv vcrrepalav {till the following 
day, on the following day); els r piTnv 7]/j.epav{till,on). (3) (a) 'Exp^craTo rols 
Xp^y-aa-iu els r)]V ir6Xiv {forthecity). E?s ri; {for what?) ; els KepSosn 
dpau {to do something for gain), (b) Els KaXbv %Keis {opportune); els rdxos 
{quickly) ; els dvpafxtv, according to one's ability ; els eKarSv {about a hundred 
or by hundreds, centeni), especially in the arrangement of soldiers, e. g. els Svo 
{two deep, two by two), (c) @av/xd(eiv, iiraivCiv riva ets r i {to admire, praise one 
with respect to, on account of something) ; so Siacpepew tivos els aper-fjp, (ppoyi/xos, 
evdSKifxos e?s r i, els iravra, in every respect; fiXeireiv, airofiXeireiv els ra 
7r pay ix. a t a, like irp 6s. . ^ 

3. z Q<s (ad), to, does not like the other prepositions, denote the 
relation of position, but only the direction whither; it is used 
only of persons or of the names of cities, when they stand for 
the inhabitants. 

Th. 4, 79. Bpacridas acpiKero ws UepSiKKav Kal ets r^v XaXKiBtK'fjP {came to 



§ 291.J PREPOSITIONS. Aid. 429 

Perdiccas). Dem. Phil. 1. 54, 48. irpe<r&eis TreTropupev us fiaai\4a. Th. 8, 
36. riKOvros as r)]V MiAtjtoj/ (ad Milesios). 

Rem. 2. This us is to be distinguished from that which stands with els, inl, 
and Trpos with the Ace. (us els, as iiri, us irp6s riva). This latter us is not a 
preposition, but it expresses a supposition, just as when it is joined with the par- 
ticiple, and does not denote an actual direction to a place, but only one sup- 
posed, and hence intended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. a&poi(ei us iirl tovtovs rb 
ffTpdrev/xa (quasi his helium illaturus, he collects as if against these). Hence this 
us also stands with the prepositions governing other Cases, e. g. Th. 3, 4. 
ZkttXow iirorfiffavTo rav veu>v cos iirl v av fxax't-a (as if f or the purpose of fight' 
ing a naval battle). 1, 134. ol be iroi-ncrdixeuoi %aAK:ot)s avbpidvras bvo us avvl 
Tlavaaviov aveSeaav (quasi essent Pausaniae loco, as if in the place of Pau- 
sanias). 



4. Prepositions with the Genitive and Accusa- 
tive: Sid, Kara, V7r4p, /xcrd. 

§ 291. (1) Ata, through. 

1. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (2) to denote a mo- 
tion extending through a space or object and again coming ont : 
through and out again, out of (Homer expresses this relation 
still more distinctly, by uniting the preposition Ik or -n-po with 
Sid, e. g. Od. PjASO. Sick fxeydpoio dva^wpetv) ; (b) to denote ex- 
tension through something, but without the accompanying rela- 
tion stated under (a) of coming out of the object; on the Gen., 
see § 287, Rem. ; — (2) of time, to denote the expiration or 
lapse of a period: after, properly to the end of a period, through 
and out; — (3) in a causal sense, to denote origin (rare) and the 
author (very frequent) ; (b) to denote quality (possessive Gen.) 
in connection with ehai and ytyveo-^at ; (c) the means, both of 
persons and things; (d) manner; (e) worth (rare); (f) com- 
parison (rare). 

(1) (a) Her. 7, 8. peXXu eXav arparbv bib t^j EvpuirrjS iirl rr]v 'EXXdba. 
2, 26. bie^eX^uu bib irdarjs EvpuTrrjs. 7, 105. itfXavve vbv arparbu 
bib T7js Qp-n'iK-ns iirl t)}v 'EXXaba. 3, 145. biaKinpas bib rrjs yopyvp7] s 
(having crept out through the prison), (b) Od. n, 335. bib vy<rov luv, bib -rre- 
8 1 o v (per campum). X. Hier. 2, 8. 5 1 a TroXe/iias iropeveaSai (to march through 
the enemy's country). Figuratively in the phrases, bib biicaio cvvns Uvai (to 
go in the way of justice, to go through justice, i. e. to be just) ; bib tov biKaiov 
iropeveabai ; bib. <p6$ov epx^^ai (to fear), Eur. Or. 747. Ata (piXias Uvai 
nvi (to be friendly to one), X. An. 3. 2, 8. (2) At' Ztovs {through, fur a year) ; 
bib, iroXXov, fxaicpov, oXiyov xP^vov (through, for a long, a short time) ; 
also 5t' oXiyov, bib ttoXXov without XP^ V0V > or bib. xp^vov ?}A&e (h« 



430 syntax. [$ 292. 

came after a long time) ; Si a iravrbs rov xp^ vov roiavra ovk eyevero (during 
the whole time); Si a, 7}fj.4pas, Sia vvkt6s (through, throughout the day, etc.). 
So also of an action repeated at stated intervals, e.g. 5ta rptrov erovs 
(Twr\saav (every third year, tertio quoque anno, always after three years, through 
and out again); Sia. ir4fj.irrov erovs, Sia. irevre irwv (every fifth year, 
etc., quinto quoque anno) : Sia rpir-ns rj/Jiepas. (3) (a) Aia /3a<n\eW iretyvxcos 
(descending from a continued line of Icings, owing one's birth to kings), X. Cy. 7. 2, 
24. TlavTa Si eavrajv irpaTTscr&ai (to accomplish everything by themselves); 
hi kavrov KTT\cra.o-&ai ri. (b) Aia (pofiov thai, S i ex^ p as yiyuecr^ai twi, 
8 i epiSos, 6py7js, aacpaXelas ehai or yiyveff&ai (to be in fear, to be hostile, 
to be angry with, to be safe), (c) At' 6<p^a\fia>p opav (to see with the eyes). 
PI. Theaet. 184, c. 2,k6tt€1, air6Kpicris iroTtpa op&orepa, $ opu/xty, rovro tlvai 6<p&aA- 
f/ovs, ri S i ov Spw/xev, Kal § a.K6vo/xev, 3>ra, f} S i ov aKovofxev. (TheDat. denotes 
the means used, Sid with the Gen. the active means.) "Exeiv riva Si opyrjs (to 
be angry with) ; Sia. x* l P& v *X* IV ( to work upon, to be engaged in, to handle) ; 
also of persons, e. g. "E-rrpal-av ravra Si EvpvLidxov, Th. 2, 2. (d) Aia 
o"7rovSr)s, Sia Ta%ous iroieiv ri (with earnestness, earnestly, etc.). (e) S. O. C. 
584. Si ovSevbs iroieToftai (to consider of no value), (f) Her. 1, 25. &ens &^tov 
Sia rrdvrwv ruv ava&r) nareo v (in comparison with, among). 

II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation to denote extension 
through a place or object: through, throughout (only poetic) ; — 
(2) of time to denote extension through a period of time, 
throughout ; — (3) in a causal sense : (a) to denote the reason, 
mediation : on account of, ob, propter, by ; (b) of the person by 
whose means something is effected. 

(1) (a) Eur. Hipp. 762. Si a it6vtiov Kv/xa eTropevcras i/xav &va<rcrau 
(through the wave of the sea). (2) Aia vvtcra. (3) X. An. 1. 7, 6. ion fiev 
riixlv 7] apxh V "Tarpwa irpbs fj.lv ixean/xfipiau /xe'xpts ou Si a Kavfia vi> Svvavrai 
oiKe?v &v&pwiroi (on account of the heat). 4. 5, 15. St a ras roiavr as ovv 
avdyfeas inreXetirovTo rwes tSjv (TTparicoTwu. (b) An. 7. 7, 7. St' r)fxas avp 
&eo?s e% eTe T^eSe T V X c *P av (ty y our ^-eans, mediation). Kanol Sokov[xsp elvai 
Si a. to Drop (hujus culpd). 



§292. (2) Kara, from above, down. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) of motion from 
a higher to a lower place (desuper, deorsum) ; (b) of a direction 
towards a place or object situated below : down to, down upon, 
doion under (on the Gen., see § 287, Rem.) ; (c) seldom of rest 
in, upon or at a place or object ($ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal 
and figurative sense, to denote the cause or occasion. 



4 292.] prepositions. — Kara. 431 

(1) (a) II. a, 44. (3rj 5e /car' Ov\v/jlttoio Kap-fivwv {down from the heights). 
Her. 8, 53. eppiirreov ecovrobs Kara rod reix^os Kara, (b) Her. 7, 6. acpa- 
viCea&ai Kara, rrj s 3- a A a <r o"7j s (to disappear down under the sea). 235. /cara- 
SeSvKevai Kara, rr^s & a\do~ at\ s. X. An. 7. 1, 30. evxo/J-ai /xvpias e/u.4 ye 
Kara, yrjs bpyvias yeveoftai (to be sunk under the earth). So figuratively of a 
direction to a lower object, as ro^eveiv Kara rivos, iraieiv Kara rivos, to 
shoot at something, to strike at something (the preposition denoting the direction 
towards the mark, viz., down), rvirreiv Kara. Kopp-ns, on the head (§ 273, 
Kem. 8); (c) Her. 1, 9. Kara vdsrov yevev&ai (to come behind, to be behind). 
Th. 4, 32. Kara vwrov elvai (in the rear). 33. Kara vdrov Ko^reffrr\Kevai. 
(2) Aeyeiv Kara rivos (dicere de aliqua re) ; in this connection, the idea of hos- 
tility especially is expressed by the preposition, e. g. Xeyeiv, \6yos Kara rivos 
(against one). X. Apol. 13. i/>eu5e<r&at Kara rod &eov (to say anything falsely 
of or against the God) ; but also in an opposite relation, Dem. Phil., 2. 68, 9. o Kal 
fi4yi(Tr6v effri Ka& vfiwv eyKdefiiov (in honor of you). Aeschin. Ctes. 60. 
ol Kara A 17 fj-off Stevovs eiraivoi. 3,K0Tre?v Kard rivos (secundum, in respect 
to). Plat. Phaed. 70, d. fir] Kar av& pdnrvv GK6rrei fi6vov rovro, a\\a Kal 
Kara £<ixav irdvrwv Kal (pvruv. So also in Attic adjurations and oaths, 
e. g. euxeo-^oj, ifivvvai Kara rivos, for example, lepuv reXeiwv( Th. 5,47), 
to swear by unblemished victims (as it were holding the hands over them) ; so 
also evxtcr&ai Ka& eKar6fifir]s, Kara. fio6s. 

II. Ill a local and temporal relation, Kara with the Ace. is 
directly opposite to dvd, in respect to the point from "whence 
the motion of the action begins ; but it agrees with avd in de- 
noting the direction to an object and the extension over it. 
The use of avd is more confined to poetry, but Kara has no such 
limitation. (1) In a local relation : (a) to denote the direction 
of the action to a lower object; (b) to denote extension from 
above to below, from a higher to a lower object: throughout, 
through, over ; (c) in the historians in the sense of e regione, 
over against, opposite to ; — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
or duration; — (3) in a causal sense: (a) to denote purpose and 
design ; (b) conformity, and the respect in which anything is con- 
sidered, and hence also a reason: on account of; (c) an indefinite 
measure (abouf) ; (d) the manner ; hence also with the distribu- 
tive specifications of number. 

(1) (a) BaWeiv Kara, yaarepa (to strike on the abdomen), and the like in 
Homer. Her. 3, 14. rraprjeaav at Trap&evoi Kara, robs it are pas (to the fathers 
sitting) : then of the course of a stream, Kara p6ov, down the stream (see avd). 
Her. 4, 44. (Scylax cum suis) eirXeov Kara rrorafibv rrpbs t)w re Kal r)\iov ava- 
ro\as is Std\a<r<Tav. (b) Her. 3, 109. al ex^vai Kara, irao-av rrjv yrjv elcri. 
Kara yrjv, Kara 2rd\ao-<rav Tropevea&ai (through, over, by), (c) Th. 2,3a 



432 syntax. [$ 293. 

KeiTcu 7] Ke(pa\\r]v(a Kara. 'Anapvavlav (opposite to). (2) Kara rbv av- 
rbv XP° V0V > K<*Ta rbv irpor epov ir6\efjiov (during the same time, etc.) - , 
ol Kard Tiva (contemporaries of any one). (3) (a) Her. 2, 152. Kara \7jiriv 
iKirXd)ffavras (having set sail for the purpose of plunder). Th. Kara &4av fJKeu> 
(spectatum venisse). Kara rl; why? wherefore? (b) Korci vo\x.ov, Kara 
\6yov (ad rationem, pro ratione,in conformity with, according to) ; Kara yvd- 
fj.7)v r))V i/x-ffv. Her. 2, 3. Kara r)]v rpo(p)}V rS>v iraidcav roaavra eXeyov 
(in respect to nourishing the boys). Her. 1, 85. Kara rbv Kpnrrjpa ovrus ecrx*- 
Kard ri (in some respect, quodammodo) ; k a t' ovd 4v, Kara it dvr a (in no, 
every respect) ; Kara, rovro (hoc respectu, hence propter hoc) ; Th. 1, 60. Kara 
(piXiav avrov o l irXsiffroi e/c Koplv&ov <rrparia>rai i&eXovral j-vveo-irovro (on ac- 
count of his friendship). Dem. Chers. 90, 2. ovs Kara robs v6/xovs i<p' vfxlv 
io-riu, '6rav PovX-noSe, KoXa&iv (to punish according to the laws). Kara (pvaiv 
(secundum naturam) ; Kara dvvafiiv (according to one's ability, to the best of one's 
ability); Kara, Kpdros (with all one's might), (c) Kara ££riKovra er-n 
(about sixty years); Kara fiiKp6v (gradually); /cot 5 bxiyov, Kara tto\v, 
Kara, iroWa (by far), (d) Ka&' y&vxiciv (quietly); Kara Ta%os (quickly); 
o-vvrvxio-v (casu, by chance); Kara rb l<rx v pov (per vim, violently); 
Kara fie pos (in order, in turn). Her. 6, 79. &woivd icrri Svo /xveai Kar dvdpa 
(viritim, for each man) ; Kara K&fxas (vicatim, by villages) ; Kara iir\va (sin- 
gulis mensibus, every month, monthly); Ka& 7)(i4pav, %v ko& '4v (one after the 
other, one by one, i. e. singly) ; Ka& eirrd, septeni. 

Remark. Very many verbs compounded with Kara, are constructed with the 
Gen. to denote the person who caused the action, and towards whom it is directed, 
e. g. KaraSiKaCca, KarayiyvuxTKu, KaraKplveo, Kara\p7]<pi(ofj.al rivos, to give judgment, 
bring a charge, pass a vote against any one ; Kara^ievdojxai rivos, to lie against any 
one ; Karaye\w rivos, to laugh at, to deride one ; Kara<ppova> rivos, despicio aliquem. 
An Ace. very frequently stands with these, e. g. Kar-qyopeiv ri rivos, to accuse 
one of something, KarayiyvaxrKeiv ri (as avoiav, kXotttjv) rivos, KaraKpiveiv rivbs 
frdvarov, KaradiKafeiv rivbs frdvarov, Karaty-n(pi£scr$rai rivos Sei\iav. 



§ 293. (3) 'Yirip, super, over. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote resting, 
abiding over or above a place or object ($ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in 
a causal sense : (a) for, for the good of; (b) to denote an inter- 
nal, mental cause, instead of the more nsnal v-n-o with the Gen. ; 
(c) with verbs of entreating, imploring : for the sake of some 
one; (d) to denote cause; in connection with rov and the Inf. 
to denote purpose, which by the language is considered as the 
cause; (e) in general to denote in respect to, instead of the 
more usual rrcpC with the Gen. 

II With the Ace. : over, above and beyond, used in relation 
to space and time, and also to measure and number. 



§294.] PREPOSITIONS. Mera. 433 

I. (1) X. C. 3.8,9. 6 rjXios rev &epovs virep rjfiwv Kal ruv areyaiv iropev' 
ifievos GKiav avrwv irapex*i (passing over us and the houses). Her. 7. 69. 'Apafiiwr 
Kal Al&ioircov rwv virep Alyvirrov olKrj/xevcov fipx* 'Apcrd/tys (who dwell above 
Egypt), "firep Sra\dcro"r]s oik€?u (properly to dwell beyond the sea, i. e. on, by 
the sea). (2) (a) Maxecr&at virep tt)s irar plSos (to fight in defence of some- 
thing, as if standing over it); 6 virep rrjs 'EWaSos frdvaros (death in behalf 
of , for Greece); iro\irevecr&ai, arpar'nyetv virep rivos (in alicujus gratiam) ; 
virep rav irpayiJ.drwvcrirovdd^eiv,deC)OiKevai virep r iv o s (timer ealicui). (b) 
virep irev&ovs (for, because of grief ). (c) II. a>, 466. nal fuv virep irarpbs 
Kal fxrirepos ijvkS/xoio Xiacreo Kal reiceos (entreat him for the sake of his 
father, etc. (d) PL Symp. 208, d. virep aperrjs a&avdr ov Kal roiavrt] s 
S6£r)s evKXeovs irdvres irdvra iroiovariv (on account of for the sake of imper- 
ishable distinction, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 52,43. virep rod /j.r} ira&e?v Kaicccs 
virb QiXiirirov (for the purpose of not suffering evil, etc.). — II. Her. 4, 188. piirre- 
ov<tl virep rbv oSjjlov (over the house). Seldom of mere extension, as ro?s 
®pa£l rots virep 'EXXrisir ovr ov oIkovcti (the Thracians dwelling beyond the 
Hellespont, i. e. on the Hellespont); virep r^v yXiKlav (beyond one's years, 
age); virep 8 v v a jx i v (beyond one's power); virep frvfrpwirov (beyond man, 
i. e. beyond what could be expected of him). Her. 5, 64. virep ra recrcrepd 
icovra ertj (beyond, more than, forty years). 

'§ 294. (4) Mera, with. 

I. Merd, allied to //io-os (in the middle, betiveeri) denotes the 
being in the midst of, being among persons or things. With the 
Gen., fiera denotes an intimate connection, a participation, a 
sharing in (comp. /xcTexetv) ; the Gen. denotes the whole, of 
which the subject of the sentence constitutes a part; it conse- 
quently differs from avv with the Dat, which merely denotes 
the connection (association) of one object "with another, with- 
out the one being considered a part of the other (comp. o-wexeiv). 
It is used (1) in a local relation: in the midst, among ; then to 
denote an active participation in aid of some one : with ; — (2) 
in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote the means or 
manner ; (b) conformity. 

(1) Eur. Hec. 209. /iera veKputv Kelffo/xai (to lie among the dead, and one's 
self to bedead). PI. Rp. 359, e. Ka&rja&ai fxera ruv dXXcov. Mera tivos 
fjidxeoSrai (to fight in active participation with one). Dem. Phil. 3. 117, 24. per a 
ruv t/8 ik 7) p.ev co v iroXejxelv (to participate in carrying on war icith those who had 
been injured). Elvai, arrival fierd r ivos (to be on the side of one)-. PI. Pp. 467. 
e. crca^rjcrovrai, [xera. ir peer fivr e pcav rjyefx6vcav eirS/xevoi (they follow the 
older leaders, and as it were, hold fast to them 5 wholly different from eirecr&at 
usrd riva and avv rivi). (2) (a) Th. 1, 18. /a era kivovvcov ras fxeXerat 

37 



434 syntax. [$294 

iroiov/xevot (i. e. surrounded by, in the midst of dangers). X. C. 3. 5, 8. per' 
apery? irpareveiv (as it were in an intimate connection with virtue). Dem.PkiL 
3. 130, 74. vfiiv oi irpoyovoi rovro rb yepas eKr-fjaai/ro Kal KareXnrov fiera ttoK- 
\cov /col fieyahoov kivSvvcov. (b) Isocr. Archid. 129, 66. roirs v6fiovs, fie&' 
£> v oiKOvvres evhaifiovecrraroi ro>v 'EXX4\vu>v ^ffav {agreeably to which, ruv voficop 
eX^evoi, legibus quasi adhaerentes). PL Ap. 32, c. fiera, rod vdfiov Kal r ov 
SaiKai ov cpfirjv fiaXXov fie delv diaKivdviteveu/, r) fie& vfiutv yevecr&at. (J.)] Si/ccua 
povXevofiei/av (in conformity with law and justice). 

II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) (Poet.) to de- 
note a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv- 
ing to be united with a person or tiling, in a friendly or hostile 
relation, and generally to denote a succession in space ; (b) to 
denote a local extension between two objects, in the prose 
phrase /tcra ^etpas e^etv n, to have something in hand; — (2) 
(prose and Poet.) to denote succession in time and in order: 
after, next to, next in order; — (3) in a causal sense (only Poet.), 
to denote purpose and conformity. 

(1) 'I/ceV&cu fiera T pea as Kal 'A%afoi5s (to come into the midst of the Tr 
and Gr.). II. p, 460. ai(r<ra>u u>sr alywribs ft era x^ vas (among the geese). 
Seldom used of things. II. fi, 376. '6s fie fie r' dirp-fjKrovs epiSas KalveiKea 
fiaXXei (into the midst of contention). Brjvai fiera Neffropa (to go to Nestor, 
properly into a connection with him ) ; fir} Se fi e r 'iSofievrja, (to goto Idomen. 
to follow after him, properly to go into the -engagement or battle with him), P. 
v, 297. II. v, 492. Xaol eirou^, cosei re fiera Kr'iXou eenrero firjXa (behind the 
ram). (2) Merit, rbu rod iraiBbs bdvarov, X. (after the death). Mera 
ravra (after) ; the Ace. often has a participle agreeing with it, e. g. Her. 1, 34. 
fiera SoAwya olx^f-^vov (after the departure of Solon). Mc& -rjfiepav 
(interdiu, in the day time, properly after the break of day), X. An. 4. 6, 12. 
Ka/ceTvos eXu&e fier i fie Sevrepos (second after me), Cy. 2. 2, 4. YloXiu (e?%ov) 
tV irXov<ricardrr]v iu rfj 'Aala, /xer a BafivXava (the richest next to Babylon), 7. 2, 
11. (3) Od. a, 184. irXe7v fiera x a ^ K & v { a d aes petendum). Eur. Ale. 67. 
Evpv<r&ec*>s irefityavros 'linreiov fiera oxVH-a (f or i a fi er a chariot). II. o, 52. 
rep Ke TlocTeiSaoov ye . . . afya fxeracrrpetpeie v6ov fiera crbv Kal ifibv Krjp t 
(agreeably to, according to, your desire and mine). 

Kemaek. MeTc£ is constructed with the Dat. only in poetry, particularly m 
the Epic, to denote merely local union or association in place ; in prose, ev and 
aw are used instead of it. It commonly stands with the plural, or with the 
singular of collective nouns ; the words with which it stands may denote per- 
sons, or things considered as such, and the parts or members of animate things, 
e. g. fier abavdrois, with, among) fiera crrparw ; fiera X B P a h noa ', yevvcri, yaficpr]- 
Xa?s (in the midst of), between, fiera <ppe<riv, in the mind, fiera vnvai, Kvfiaai ; fierh 
wvoirjs aveuoio, Homer. 



$295.] prepositions. — 'Afiff>i t irept, 435 

5. Prepositions with the Genitive, Dative, and 
Accusative: ajxcftt, irzpi, Ittl, 7rapa, irpos, vtto. 

§ 295. (1) 'AfjLtpL and -repL 

1. The prepositions afxcpC and 7re/3t express nearly the same 
relations of position: around, about; a fx </> i, on both sides, ire pi, 
on all sides; they also agree in their use, though the use of 
dfxcpc is rarer, and is more Ionic and poetic than ircpi, which ex- 
presses a far greater variety of relations and has a more gen- 
eral application. 

2. 'A/x</>t denotes in general the surrounding of something 
(on both sides), the being near and close to something. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote re- 
moval from that winch surrounds (Poet.) ; (b) to denote dwell- 
ing or rest around something ($ 287, Rem.), though but seldom; 
— (2) in a causal sense, to denote the occasion or cause : about, 
for, on account of, though but seldom in prose, izzpi with the 
Gen. being generally used instead of it. 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation (Poet, only), to de- 
note rest around, at, near, among ; — (2) in a causal sense (very 
seldom in prose, indeed not at all in Attic prose) : (a) to denote 
the cause or occasion, as with the Gen., with this difference, 
however, that with the Dat., the relation of causality is con- 
sidered as wholly local; (b) to denote an internal and mental 
reason (Poet). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation, to denote local 
extension : about, around, on; — (2) to denote time and number 
approximately or indefinitely ; — (3) in a causal and figurative 
sense, to denote a mental dwelling upon an object, taking pains, 
and being employed about it. 

I. (1 ) (a) Eur. Or. 14G0. a/xcpl iropepvpicav ireTrAcov fupr) crirdcravTes {from the. 
garments which were around the sword), (b) Her. 8, 104. a/xcpl ravrTjs oIk(ovoi 
T7) y tt6\ios {dwell around this city). (2) MaxeoScu a/xepi tivos {for, on account 
of some one, or something). X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. els Kaipov tjkcis, Hircos ttjs SiK-ns clkov- 
c-ns irapuiv rr\s a/xcpl rod Trarp6s {about, relating to your father). II. (1) Te- 
Kauwu d/icpl gtt\&zggiv {around the breast), II. £, 388. 'A/xcpl KAdoots c£ecr&ai 
{to be surrounded by branches, to sit among). (2) (a) II. ir, 5G5. a/xcpl v4kvi 
KaTaTedi/7jwTt /xdxecr&ai {about, on account of a dead body). II. y, 157. a/xcpl 
yvvaial a\y*a icdcrx^v. I Icr. G. 1 29. oi /xvi)CTTTipis Zpiv fix *' a/xcpl /xovcriKfj. 



436 syntax. [$ 295. 

62. <pofir)&els a/x(pl rfj yvvaiicl (respecting). 3. 32. a/x<pl r$ &av<xT<f 
avrijs 8t£bs Xeyerai Xoyos. (h) 'A/jupl <p6ficp (prae metu, for, on account of) ; 
ct^^t &v/j,$ (prae ira). III. (1) X. Cy. 6. 2, 11. ((rvXXeyerai) to <xt pir evpz 
afitpl rbv UaKT(u\bv iroraix6v. 2. 4, 16. re^-fipaKa aficpl rb. opia 
(around, on the borders). Hence also of the persons around any one, as in ol 
aficpl riva, see § 263, d. (2) 'AfKpl rov x €l l JL "> 1/a (about winter); a/j.(pl 
delXyv (sub vesper am, about twilight); b.fx<p\ robs fxv plovs (circiter). (3) 
"Exew a jx (pi ti (to be employed about something), e. g. ajxpl Zeiirvov, a/xtf 'lirirovs, 
apjiara. 

3. Ilept signifies all round, round, in a circle. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling or 
rest around an object. This use of it is confined to poetry, and 
even here is very rare ; comp. $ 287, Rem. — (2) in a causal and 
figurative sense : (a) to denote the cause or occasion, a respect, 
in a great variety of connections : about, concerning, for, on ac- 
count of, in respect to; — (b) to denote a mental cause : for, from, 
on account of, prae, though but seldom ; (c) to denote the rela- 
tion of a person or thing to that which belongs to them, which, 
as it were, surrounds them and refers to them (Gen. of the 
possessor) ; (d) to denote worth and superiority. 

(1) Od. e, 68. avrov rerdwcrTo irepl ffireiovs yXa<pvpo7o i)p.epls (there 
the vine was stretched around the cave). 130. rov /xev eycbv io'dooo'a ire pi rp6irios 
fiefiaS>Ta. (2) (a) MaxeoSai, airo^ave?v ire pi ttjs it ar pi 80s (for, on account 
of) ; with verbs denoting a physical or mental perception, aKoveiv, elSevcu, etc., 
with verbs of saying and asking, e. g. Xeyeiv irepi twos, \6yos irepi rivos, with verbs 
of anxiety, fear, and such as express all other affections, e. g. <po$ei<r&ai irepl 
Trarpldos, em/AeXe?(T&cu, eiri/j.eXeia irepi rivos (to fear for one's country). Dem. Phil. 
1,52,43. 7) apxh rod iroXe/xov yey evnrai irepl rod r i/j.wp-fjo'aff&ai $iXnnrov 
(with respect to talcing vengeance on Philip), (b) Ilepl bpyris (prae ira, on ac- 
count of, because of anger), Th. 4, 130. (c) Ta ire pi t ivos (the affairs, fortune, 
circumstances of any one, etc.) ; ol ire pi tivos (those belonging to anyone, asso- 
ciated with him, and as it were surrounding him). Dem. Phil. 1. 50, 36. ev ro?s 
ire pi rov iroXe/xov Kal rrj tovtov irapao-Kevy &raKra airavra (sc. eV-nV) (in 
matters pertaining to the war), (d) In the Common language, irepl iroXXov, irepl 
irXeiovos, irepl irXeio'TOV, irepl bxiyov, irepl eX&TTOVOS, irepl eXaxicrov, irepl ovSevbs 
irote?a&ai or riyelcSai tl (to value high, higher, etc.) ; so also 7repl iroXXov eariv 
7)\uv (of great value). 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling 
or rest around or near something, with the idea of surrounding 
or encircling it (seldom in Attic prose) ; (2) in a causal sense : 
(a) like ap<pi with the Dat., but much more frequently ; (b) te 
denote an external or internal reason or cause (Poet). 



$ 296.] prepositions. — 'E7rt. 437 

(1) Her. 7, 61. irepi rrj<ri necpaXfj or i slx ov Tidpas. PI. Up. 359, d. irepi 
rfj X €l P t XP V(T0 ^ V ScwctuAioj/ (pepeiv. (2) (a) MdxeoSai ire pi rivi (for some- 
thing, some one), (Poet.), in prose especially with verbs of fearing: Th. 1, 60. 
SeSt6res ire pi tu x w p' 1 V [fearing for the town). 4, 70. Scleras 7re pi UeXo- 
irovvija I ois. 6,9. irepi rep i/xavrou aeajxari oppwdui. PI. Phaed. 114. d. 
Sappelv irepi nui (to be of good courage about something), (b) (Poet.) TJepl 
Xap/xari, (p6fia>, cbevei, bfivvrj (prae, for joy, fear, etc., as it were surrounded by 
them). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: around, (a) to de- 
note motion round about something, into the circle or vicinity of 
an object (Poet.) ; (b) extension around, in or at, through some- 
thing, with verbs of rest; — (2) of time and number stated in- 
definitely or approximately ; — (3) in a causal or figurative sense, 
to denote a mental dwelling about an object, taking pains with 
it, being employed about it ; also in respect to. 

(1) (a) H. k, 139. ire pi <ppevas %\v& Icor], the clamor came round his mind; 
(b) Her. 3, 61. Kafx0v(rn XP 0V ' 1 C 0VTL wept Ktyvirro v eirauicrrearai &v8pes Ma- 
yot (round in Egypt). 7,131. 6 /xev irepi Uieplrjv Sierpifie rjfxepas ffvxvds. 
Th. 6, 2. &KQW QoivlKes ire pi iravav rrjv Is.iK.e'klav aKpas re eirl rfj StaXdacrri 
awo\a^6ures xal ra. iirucelfieva fnalSia (in Sicily around on all the coasts). 
Hence ol irepi riva (those around any one, connected or associated with him) ; ol 
ire pi nAaTwca (§ 263, d). Comp. a{i<pl. (2) Th. 3, 89. ir ep I r ovrovs 
robsxP°' vovs (about). Ilepl fx.vpiovs (about). (3) Ot irepi fiov<ruc7)v 
ovres, ol irepi rr\v yeca/x erpla v hiarpifiovres, o"irovdd£eiv irepi rt (those oc- 
cupied about, with music, etc.). 'A^ueAws %X* lv ir^pinva. X. An. S. 2, 20. 
e^a/xaprduetu irepi riva (with respect to). 1.6,8. &8ikos irepi riva. C. 1. 1, 
20. crueppovelv irepi robs &eovs. Al irepi rb au/xa 7)8ovai; ra irepi r^p 
aperi\u (the essence of virtue, what pertains to it). 



$ 296. (2) 'Etti, upon. 

With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote rest upon 
a place or object, bordering on a place, the place being regarded 
as the point of support, that on which the action leans, hence : 
upon, at, near to {h 287, Rem.) ; (b) a direction to a place (§ 273, 
R.em. 8) ; — (2) in a temporal relation to denote the time in or 
during which something takes place ($ 273, Rem. 12) ; — (3) in 
a causal and figurative sense : (a) with verbs of saying, sivear- 
ing and affirming before any one (as it were leaning or resting 
on some one) ; (b) to denote the occasion or author, especially 
in the phrase, to be named after some one or some tiling ; (c) 

37* 



438 syntax. [§ 29a 

conformity, with, verbs signifying to examine, to judge, to con- 
side?', to say, and to shoiv ; (d) dependence or resting on some- 
thing, a steadfast abiding by (on) something; (e) the manner ; 
(f ) the purpose, which is then considered by the language, as 
the cause, with the verb rax&Jvai, and the like, to be set over 
something, and in certain phrases. 

(1) (a) PL Menex. 246, d. ovr iirl yrjs, ot& inrb yrjs. Her. 7, 111. rb 
fxavrrfiov rovro i(TTi iirl tuv ovpicav r 5>v v^nXor dr cav. 6, 129. iirl 
rijs r pa.it i^ns bpx'ho'aro {danced upon the table). 2, 35. ra #x&ea oi pikv 
&v8pes iirl ruv K€(pa\4(av (popeovai, at 8e "yvvcuK.es £tt\ rwv iop.uv. X. 
An. 4. 3, 28. fievocpwv irefxtyas 'dyyeXov KeXevei (avrovs) avrov [xe7vai iirl rov 
irora/nov (at, near the river), (b) Th. 1, 116. irXe?v iirl ~Xd.fji.ov (to sail for 
Samos). X. Cy. 7. 2, 1. iirl Xdpdewv cpeiyeiv. Dein. Phil. 3. 123, 48. ava- 
X&;pe?j/ iir' oXkov (to return homewards) . (2) Her. 6,98. 4tc\ Aapelov eyev- 
zto irXica /ca/ca tjj 'EXXaSi {in the time of, during the reign of Darius). X. Cy. 1. 
6, 31. iirl rwv y fxere pcav it poy ovcov. So e7r' i/xov, i<p* Tjfiuv, i(f>' 
vfxwv (mea, nostra, vestra memoria, in, within my memory, etc.). The Gen. often 
stands in connection with a participle, but always Avith the present ; hence iirl 
often denotes the duration of time, e. g. iirl Kvpov fiacrtXevovros (during 
the reign of Cyrus). (3) (a) Aeyeiv iirl 8iKao-ra>v, iirl /xaprvpcou (before, 
in the presence of properly, resting or leaning upon). Dem. Cor. iircofiSo-avro 
iirl ruv <rr par-nyuv (took an oath in the presence of the generals). Similar to 
the preceding is, Her 9, 11. elirav iir' opKov (said on oath, quasi substrato vel 
supposito jurejurandO) waning or resting on the oath), (b) KaXe?cr&ai iirl rivos 
(to be called after one). Her. 7, 40. 'Niaaloi aaXiovrai 'liriroi iirl rovde (fortius 
reason). 74. iirl Avdov rod *Arvos toxov rh\v iiruwixinv. Ti)V iiroovvfxiav 
iroie7o-&ai iirl rivos (to be called, to take a surname from one). 'E^' iavrov (of 
one's own accord, sua sponte) ; iirl irpocpdo-ews (simulatione, under pretext). Atyziv 
iiri rivos (dicere de aliqua re). PI. Charm. 155, d. iirl rod KaXov xiyoop 
iraiS6s. (c) Znreiv ri iirl rivos, Kpivsiv ri iirl rivos, ffKOireiv ri eirl ri- 
vos, Xiyeiv ri iiri rivos, iiridei^at ri iiri rivos, etc. (to judge something accord- 
ing to a thing or person, as it were resting upon). PL Rp. 597, b. fiovXei ovv, ecpnv, 
i'K avrcav rovrcov rbv /xifinr^v rovrov Q")ri]o-o}p.€V, rls iror icrriv ; (visne, ad 
haec ipsa imitator em istum exigamus?) (d) 'E <£' i avrov, eavruv, rjfxcov av- 
ruv, I avrri s (by one's self, separately, of one's own accord, properly, resting or 
depending on one's self, independent of others). X. An. 2. 4. 10. oV'EXX-nves 
t/cpopaivTes robs fiapfidpovs avrol i (pi 1 kavrwv ix^>pow riye/iiSvas exovres (marched 
by themselves). Her. 5, 98. oiKeovras rijs $pvyi-ns x&pov Te teal K(t>fj.vv iir eav- 
rwv (by themselves). 4, 114. olneccfAsv iir rj/xeuv avrcov. Here seems to 
belong the phrase so frequently found in the Attic historians: 'E<p' £v6s, 
iirl rpiutv, rerrdpcov rtrdx&ai, arrival, one, two, three men deep or in file, 
properly to be placed or stand on one, the row resting or leaning on one, 
etc.). Dem. Phil. 1.42, 7. av ical vfxeTs iirl rrjs roiavr'^s e^eX^o-^Te yev- 
ca&ai yvc&fXTjs (frmiter adhaerere huic rationi). 9. ($i\nriros) ovx oT6s r icrriv, 



$296.] prepositions. — E?ri. 439 

€Xojj/ a KarecTTpaTrTcu, fieveiv inl tovtwv (cannot remain with, satisfied with, 
those things which he has conquered). Phil. 2. 66, 3. kwKiktcut av ii<e?vov npdr- 
Teiu Tavra, i<p* uv icrri vuv (quibus nunc studet). So fxzveiv inl avoids, (e) 
Dem. Cor. 230, 17. ovre SiKaiais, ovt in a A. tj & e i as o u 5 e /xias dpri/j.4va 
(stated neither with justice nor in adherence to the trutlt, as it were, resting on 
truth), (f) Her. 5, 109. in ov irdx^V^v (cui rei praefecti sumns). Dem. Cor. 
266, 118. e7r2 tgv & e a piicov Karao-robeis (placed over the theatre-money). 
Hence a! inl twv npay par oov (those placed over business, those at the head of 
affairs). 

II. With the Dat, (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the 
tarrying or resting upon, or (b) more frequently, at, by or near a 
place or object; — (2) of time (mostly only poetic) ; — (3) in a 
causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote dependence : penes, 
in the poiuer of; — (b) a condition under which something takes 
place ; (c) the purpose, design, or determination; (d) the goal or 
limit ; (e) the reason, with verbs expressing an affection of the 
mind {k 285, Rem. 1). 

(1) (a) Th. 1, 56. (Yloridaiarai) oIkovo-iv inl t<3 'Icd^w ttjs TlaXX-nvvs. X. 
An. 7. 4, 4. Oi @pa.K€S ras aXcaireictSas inl Tats K e<p aXats (popovai Kal ro?s 
biffi, Kal C el P a s H-tXP^ r &v noSav inl twv 'Innoov %\ovaiv, wear fox-shin caps on 
their heads and ears, and have cloaks reaching to their feet when upon their horses 
(ini with the Dat. purely local, but inl tuv 'innoov, inasmuch as the horses are 
considered as active), (b) Her. 7, S9. ol Qoivlkss to -naXaibu oXkcov inl rrj 
'Epv&prj fraXdacrri (upon, by). So also where one thing is said to be along 
with another, or in addition to it, e. g. iadiziv iirl t<? ariru o^ov (to eat the 
o^ov with bread); iirl rep airca niveiv (to drinlc with one's food) ; iirl tt? icu- 
Xikc a8eiv (to sing over one's cups). Hence, in I tovtois (upon, in addition 
to this, i. e. besides) : finally it is also used to denote a succession of things in 
time and space. Od. 77, 120. 6yx v V ^*" ^>1X V V ynp<*-o-Kei (pear on pear). X. 
Cy. 2. 3, 7. aviarn in avrep QepavXas (after him). $6vos iirl <p6va> (murder 
upon murat)-), Eur. (2) 'E7rl vvktI (II. &, 529), in, during the night, comp. 
4 283, 3, (b). (3) (a) Dem. Chers, 90, 2. e>' vfiiv iirrt (tovtovs) KoXdCw 
(penes vos, it is in your power, etc.). (b) 'E7rl tovtw, in ovSevi (hac, nulla 
conditione, nullo pacto, on this condition, etc.). Her. 3, 83. inl tovtu> vn^icrra- 
fxai rrjs apxn'S,in aire vn ovdevbs ifxiu>v ap^ofxai. Hence of price, e. g. inl 
LiicrScp (on condition of for, a reward); inl /xeyaXo is toko is 8avei(zoSai 
(to borrow on high interest); inl noffcp (at what price) . (c) Her. 1, 68. e7rl KaK$ 
avbpunov ciZnpos avevprjTat (in perniciem hominis). So inl tovtc? (hoc coil' 
si/io, for this purpose, with this design). X. S. 1,5. Upoirayopa noXv apyvpiov 
Se'SwKas inl <ro<pla (ad discendam sapientiam). PI. Ap. 20, e. ^evSerai re 
Kal inl SiafioXi) rfj i/u.rj Xiyei. Hence ol inl raij pn)X ava ^ s (those 
placed over the machines) ; oi inl to7s npay /j. a 01 (those intrusted with business); 
4*1 T(f &e<optK$ &v (charged with, the money for the public sliows). Dem. Cor- 



440 syntax. [$ 297. 

264, 113. (d) Aeyeiv iirl rivi (to pronounce a eulogy on one); vS/xovs d-ecr&ee. 
€7ri rivi (for). And so 6vofid£eiv or /caAetV ri iirl rivi (nomen alicui impo- 
nere, to call a person or thing something). PL Up. 470, b. enl filv rf) rod olicelov 
€%&?<? crdcns KeKXrjrai, e it I 5 6 t ij rod aWorpiov tt6Ag/aos (to hostility at home, 
the name insurrection was given, i. e. hostility at home was called insurrection, that 
abroad, war). Also, against, in a hostile sense. Her. 6, 88. t& irav /n-nxwfio-a- 
<r&cu iir 3 Alyivfjrrjai (against the Aeginetans). Th. 1, 102. rr\v yeuofxevvv 
iirl t$ Mi) Sea £u / u / uax«« / . (e) FeXay, /x4ya (ppove?v, fialveo'&ai, ayav aKreiv, etc. 
iirl rivi (to laugh at, be greatly elated at, etc.). 

III. With the Ace, (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote the 
local limit, the direction or motion to or upon a place or object; 
(b) extension over an object: over, upon; — (2) of time : (a) to 
denote the temporal limit {up to, till), also the limit of quantity 
(about) ; (b) extension over a period of time {during) ; — (3) in 
a causal and figurative sense: (a) to denote purpose, design; 
(b) conformity, manner; (c) in respect to. 

(1) (a) 'AvafZalvetv e<p' 'Ittttov, iirl frpovov. PI. Crit. 112, e. (oi 'ASnvcuoi) 
iirl iracrav Ev pcoTrrjv nal 'A a ( a v Kara, re croo/xdrcov KaWrj Kal Kara. rr\v roov 
■tyvx&v iravroiav aperrjy i\\6yifioi fjcrav (over all Europe, etc.). 'E7ri oe^id, ctt' 
apicrr e pa (upon the right, left, to the right, left). (2) (a) 'Ec/>' ecrirepav (until 
evening); (b) iirl iroWas rjfiepas, e<p' yfxepav. Th. 4, 1. to 'Vi]yiov etrl 
iro\hv %p6vov io~rao~la£e (for a long time) . 94. ol onTurai iirl o/ctcV irav rb 
ffrparSireZov erd^avro (by eights, eight in file). 5 E7rl jxiya, ttoKv, irXeov, /uet£bj/> 
fiaWov, [xaxp6v, iirl r6crov, i<p' '6aov (greatly, especially, much rather, etc.). Terdx- 
Sai iirl iroWots (many in file). (3) (a) Her. 1.37. iirl St-fjpav Uvai (venatum 
ire). 3, 14. e7ri #5 cop Uvai (aquatum ire). Hence e7rt ri; wherefore ? In a 
hostile sense, e. g. crparevecr&ai eirl Avdovs (upon, against the Lydians) ; eActt> 
veiv iirl Hep a as; (b) eV la a (equally, in the same way). Her. 3, 71. r)]v 
iTTixsipycTLv ravrr\v fit) ovrca ffvvrdxuve ajSouAcos, a A A 5 eirl rb (Tbxppo veer re pov 
avrty Xdfi^ave (more according to reflection, more considerately), (c) PI. Rp. 370, 
b. diacpepcav iirl t pa£ iv. Tb eV i fie (quod ad me attinet). 



$297. (3) TLapd, by, near. 

ILapd denotes nearness to something : by the side of by, near. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation with verbs of going 
and coming, to denote a removal from near a person (Poet., 
also from near a thing) ; — (2) in a causal sense, to denote the 
author. 

( 1 ) 'EAS-eT^ trap* r ivos, like the French de chez quelqu'un (from near soma 
one, from some one). (2) (a) yet almost purely local: Her. 8. 140. dyyeXir} %xn 



f 297. J PREPOSITIONS. Hapa. 44! 

ir a pa fiao~ihr}os (comes from the king, with the accompanying idea that it waa 
done by his direction). So irapd is regularly used of ambassadors, e. g. &yye\oi f 
irpecficis it a pa rivos, ayyeWeiv Trap d rivos, to irapd rivos (the commis- 
sion, command, etc., from any one) ; (b) with passive verbs (see § 251, Rem. 4) ; 
(c) with verbs of learning and hearing, e. g. fxavSdveiv irapd rivos, aKoveiv irapd 
rivos; (d) nop' iavrov, iavrStv (sua sponte, of one's own accord); (e) with 
verbs of giving and the like, e. g. irap" eavrov SiSovai (from himself i. e. from 
his own resources). 

II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote facetting 
or restnesnc a person (Poet, also near a thing) ; — (2) in a causal 
or figurative sense, to denote the possessor ; then also in relation 
to the judgment or opinion of a person. 

(1) y £(TT77 irapa rep fSao-i\e?. (2) IIoAAa xP'*U JLa ' Ta wpa T <? j8a<riA.t* 
i)v. Her. 3, 160. irapa. Aapela Kpirrj (judice Dario, in the opinion of). 1, 
32. irap' i/u.oi (meo judicio, in my opinion). 86. robs irapa. o-(plo-i avro7o~i 
SoKeovras ohfiiovs. Dem. 01. 1. 18, 3. roaovrco Savfxacrrorepos irapa iraai vo- 
fxi^rai (6 QiXiic-Kos). 

Ill With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a 
direction or motion to a person so as to come beside or near 
(Poet, also of a thing) ; (b) a direction or motion near a place 
and by or beyond it: along, along by, by, beyond; (c) extension 
near a place or object {along, per), generally to denote indefi- 
nite nearness (by) ; — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
(during) ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote 
dependence, the possessor (penes) ; (b) a comparison and estima- 
tion ; hence (c) conformity, with verbs of considering, showing, 
and the like ; (d) a reason or cause (wholly likepropter, by vir- 
tue of, on account of) 

(l) (a) Her. 1, 36. 'XSAcdv is Alyvirrov amxero it ap a. "A p-dc iv Kal 87/ Kal is 
idpSis irapa Kpolaov. (b) riapa r i] v Bafiv\wva irapiivai (along, near, 
by Babylon). From this have originated various ethical expressions, e. g. irapa. 
fxo?pav (near fate and by it, i. e. against, contrary to fate) ; irapa do£av (praeter opin- 
ionem, contrary to expectation) ; irap ihiriZa, irapa <pvo~iv, irapa ro ZiKaiov, irapa. robs 
opKOVS, irapa. Zvvap.iv. (It is the opposite of Kara, C. g. Kara /xolpav, 5vvap.iv, ac- 
cording to.) Hence it has also the signification of besides, praeter, e. g. irapa 
ravra ( praeter haec) ; (c) Her. 9, 15. irapa rov 'A(rwir6v (along the Asopus). 
Dem. 01. 1. 24, 22. i) rvxv irapa irdvr iar\ ra. rwv avStpwirwv irpdyp.ara 
[per omnes res dominatnr). Her. 4, 87. ovros KareXdcpd-n irapa rov vt)6p 
[near). Zryvai irapd riva (and irapd rivi). (2) II ap i\p.ipav, irapa 
rov x6\€ ft o if (during)] irapa ri)v irSffiv (inter potandum, while drinking). 
Bo also of single points of time, during which something takes place, c. g. 



442 syntax. [$ 293 

nap' avrbv rbv kivSvvov {in ipso discriminis tempore, in the very moment of 
danger). (3) (a) Isocr. Archid. 126. wpoAoyelro trap a, rovrov yevea&ai rrjv 
o-wrnpiav avrdis (constabat, in hoc Us positam esse salutem, that their safety depended 
on him). Her. 8, 140. nvv&dvecr&e r^v vvv trap 4p.e eovaav 8wap.iv {is in my 
power, with me), (b) Her. 7, 20. &sre p,i]re rbv Aapeiov {o~r6\ov) rbv en\ ^tcvfras 
napa rovrov (sc. rbv o~r6\ov) p.7) 'S ev <palvea&ai {in comparison with this). So 
nap' bxiyov noie?o&at ri {to make of little account). Hap' oXiyov, napa. 
fxiKpov, j8pa%u, nearly, almost, irapa noAv, by far, nap' ovoev rl&ea&ai, 
{to make no account of) ; after comparatives and expressions implying compari- 
son, as &AAos, erepos, 8id<popos. Th. 1, 23. T]Klov eKXefyeis nvKv6r epai nap a 
ra 4k rov np\v xp^vov ixvnp.oveu6iJ.eva {more frequent in comparison with those men- 
tioned informer times). PL Phaed. 93, a. ovSe p.rjv noietv ri, ovde ri ndax^v &A\o 
trap' a av eKeiva 7) noifj 3) ndo'xV' Hence of alternations: ripepa irap" T\p.epav 
{one day in distinction from another, day by day, every other day, alternis diebus, also 
nap ypepav alone). Often with the accompanying idea of preference, prae, 
praeter. X. C. 1.4, 14. napa ra &\Xa C^ a > &snep &eol, oi avStpwnoi f3iorev- 
ovai {in comparison with, beyond, other animals), (c) 'Op<£, ctkottcD ri nap' &Wo 
t i {to consider something in conformity with another thing, in comparison with it, 
properly, holding it near to something). Dem. Aph. 1. 824, 34. napa rbv \6- 
yov, hv airotpepovcriv, imSei^ca {in conformity with, properly, holding an object near 
to another.) (d) Dem. 1.43, 14. ohZe $lKinnos napa r^v avrov p do p. rj v roaov- 
rov enev^nrai, '6 gov napa r)]v 7]p.er 4 p av ap.eKe lav {on account of his own 
strength). So napa. rovro, propterea, nap' '6, quapropter. 



§ 298. (4) lip 09, before. 

Up os (formed from irpo), denotes before, in the presence of. 

I. "With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote a direction 
or motion from the presence oL an object, especially from the 
situation of a place ; — (2) in a causal relation, to denote an 
active person, as it were an outgoing from the presence of a 
person exercising power, or of an object considered as a person, 
(a) of derivation ; (b) of a person or thing to whom or which 
something belongs {quality, peculiarity) [§ 273, 2, (c) (a)] ; (c) 
of thn author or cause, 

(1) Her. 3, 101. oliceovci npbs vSrov avepov {toward the south, properly 
from the south). Comp. a meridie instead of ad meridiem. 107. npbs p.eo--np- 
{Spivs 'Apafii-q earl {lies towards the south). X. An. 2. 2, 4. eneoSre rw 7)yov/j.e- 
vcp, ra. p.ev vno^vyia exovres npbs rod nor ap.ov {towards, on). (2) (a) npbs 
narpos,npbs p.nrp6s {on the fathers or mother's side), (b) Upbs yvvaiuSs 
ear i {it is the manner of ivomen) ; npbs 81kt)s eariv {it is conformable to justice). 
X. An. 1. 2, 11. oinc fiv npbs rod Kvpov rpSnov, exovra p.)) anodLoSvai {was 
not in accordance ivith the custom of Cyrus). Antiph. 2. 121, 2. ?; pev d6^a roiv 



§ 298 ] prepositions. — IIpos. 443 

7rpax&zi'T<0V irpbs rwv \4yeiv Zvv anevwv iariv, 7) 5e d\7}&eia irpbs ra>f 
8'iKaia Kal offia irpaffo-ovruv. Also, elvcu irp6s tlvos (to stand or be on the 
side of one). Th. 4 ; 92. xph iricnsvffauTas t<£ &e<£ irpbs 7)/j.o>v eo~e<r&ai, 6/j.6ae 
Xo>pyo-cu ro7s Tro\€fj.iois (trusting in God that he will be on our side). Hence PL 
Hipp. 1, 285, b. Bokc7s jjlol rbv \6yov irpbs ifxov \4yeiv (for my advantage). 
(c) to receive, to have something from some one, then with passive verbs (§ 251, 
Rem. 4), intransitive (§ 249, 3), and in phrases of a passive sense. Her. 2, 139. 
kqlk6v n irpbs &ecav if) irpbs av&p dtnrcov \ap.fidveiv. X. An. 7. 6, 33. %x wp 
%-tpo.ivov iTo\bv irpbs vfiuv aireiropev6{X7}v (having much praise from you). Her. 
1, 61. aTtfid^ea-^at irpbs Heicrio-Tpdrov. X. An. 1. 9, 20. <pl\ovs onoKoyeTrai 
Kvpos irpbs irdvTcav KpdriaTos Vr\ yevecr&ai bepaireveiv (is admitted by all). Oec. 

4, 2. at f5avav<ru<a\ KaXovftevai ado^ovurcu it pbs r S>v ir 6\e(av (are held in no esteem 
by the cities). Her. 1, 73. ravra irpb s Kua£apea> ira&6vTes (from Cyaxeres). 7, 

5. arparr\Xd.T^ tirl tus 'A&yvas, 'iva \6yos <re %XV "* pb s av&pcairwv ayaJ^os 
(ut lauderis ab hominibus, as it were, in the presence of men). With forms of swear- 
ing and protestation, e. g. irpbs &ewv (per deos, properly, before the gods). 

II. With the Dat, to denote dwelling or rest near or by an 
object; also of being busily engaged in or with a tiling; finally.. 
in the sense of besides, in addition to {praeter). 

Th. 2, 79. is fJ-axw Ka^icravrai 01 'Afrnvaioi irpbs oirp rrj ir6\ei. Elvai, 
yiyvecr&di irpbs irpdy(j.aai TL pbs rovrep, irpbs rovrois (praeter ea). 

Ill "With the Ace, (1) in a local relation: (a) of the situation 
of n. place : towards [where the Gen. also maybe nsed, see No. I, 
(1)] ; (b) of the direction to persons, or tilings considered as 
persons, sometimes also to places, both in a friendly and in 
hostile relation ; (c) of extension ; — (2) to denote time indefi- 
nitely ; — (3) causal and figurative : (a) to denote the purpose 
or object ; (b) conformity ; hence (c) the reason or cause (prop- 
ter') ; (d) a comparison, for the most part with the accompanying 
idea of superiority ox preference (prae, praeter); (e) in respect to. 

(1) (a) Tlpbs ixeo-7}p.Ppiav, irpbs kairipav (towards). Th. 2, 55. (77 yrj) 
irpbs Tle\oir6v vnaou 6pa. (b) X. An. 5. 7, 20. ipxovrat irpbs rj/j-as (to 
us, properly, come before us). 7. 6, 6. ifxas irpwl &.£op.eu ir pbs cut ovs. 5. 4, 5. 
Siao-ca&Yii'ai fSov\6jx&a irpbs rr)v 'EA\aSo(i.C. irpbs robs "E\\r]uas, to go in soft ty 
to Greece). Aeyeiv, ayopeveiv, i^rd(eiv n ivpos riva (to speak before, to one) \ 
arirouSds, avjxjxax'iav iroie7(r&ai irpSs riva (with one); pLax^bai, iro\ep.e7v irp6s 
riva (against one). These phrasefl everywhere imply the meaning to come 
into the presence of before the face of any one ; also, \oyi(ecr&ai, o~K€\paa&ai, cko- 
Ti7u, 4v&vf*e7(rSai irpbs kavrov (secum reputare) ; likewise, ('Xwupdr^s tfv) 
*pbs x ei /*&>j>a Kal Sepos Kal irdvras it 6 u v s KaprepiKuiraros (against), 
X. C. 1. 2, 1. (c) 2fcwpaT77$ 7e Kal irpbs robs &\\ovs au&pwirovs xdauor 



444 syntax. [$ 299 

rfj ir6\ei irapeixe {among other men, etc. the preposition here extending the idea) 
ibid. 61. (2) Tlpbs Tifiepav (towards daybreak). (3) (a) Dem. Phil. 2. 71, 
23. iravTodaira. evpnfiei/a ra?s ir6\sffi irpbs (pv\aK^}v teal crcaTTjpiav (for a guard, 
etc.); (b) Her. 1, 38. irpbs t)]v f-tyiv Ta.vT-nv rbv yd/xov tovtov Zcnrevaa (in 
accordance with this view). So Kptveiv ri irpos ti, Aeyew irpbs x&P lv > irpbs 
to r]5v, irpbs rb aya&6v. Also, irpbs fiiav (violently, against the ivill), 
irpbs avdyKyv, irpbs rjdoyfjy, irpbs aiepifie lav (accurately, in conformity 
xoith accuracy, etc.). (c) Tlpbs ravra (properly, in accordance with this, hence 
for this reason, therefore), (d) X. 3. 5, 4. tj tuv 'A&rjvaitffv $6t;a (TeTaireivwTai) 
irpbs robs Boiwrovs (in comparison with the renown of the Boeotians). So 
also to denote an exchange, e. g. PI. Phaed. 69, a. rjSovas irpbs ^Sovhs Kal 
Xviras irpbs \viras Kal (pSfiov irpbs (pSfiov KaTaWdrrecr^ai, Kal /J.d£ca irpbs 
fAoTTB, tisirep vojx{ffp.aTa (to exchange pleasures for pleasures, etc.). (e) 2ko- 
ire7v t fiAtireiv irp6s ti (to consider with respect to something); Siacpepeiv irpbs 
apeTTiv, na\bs irpbs dpofiov, irpbs ira\T\v, reAeos irpbs aper-fty. 



§ 299. (5) e Y7ro, sub, under. 

I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a mo- 
tion out from a lower place : forth from under, away from under 
(more obvious in the Horn. Wk with Gen.) ; (b) to denote a 
quiet rest under an object (§ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal and 
figurative sense : (a) to denote the author with passive and in- 
transitive verbs (§ 254, Rem. 4) ; (b) an outward or inward 
(mental) occasion, influence; (c) a mere instrumental cause, 
means, manner. 

(1) (a) Od. t, 140. abrao iirl Kparbs Xi/xevos peet ayXabv v5wp, \tpi\vr\ virb 
cireiovs (from under the grotto), rj, 5. virb air7]V7]S Xveiv "irirovs (from under 
the chariot). X. An. 6.4,25. (s,evo<pa>v) XafiZov fiovv virb a/J-d^-ns cr<payLao-d/j.- 
euos i{io7)&ei. (b) H. &, 13. e\d>v (iiv ptyco is Tdprapov . . . fix 1 fid&icrTov virb 
X$rov6s eon fiep&pov (under the earth). 'Tirb yijs oiksTu. (2) (a) Kreifecr- 
&cu vir6 tivos, airofrave'iv vir6 tivos (to be slain by one), (b) X. An. 5. 1, 
15. Ae^iiriros aire&avev virb N ucdvSpov. 7. 7,23. fxiya fioi 8oKe? e3 aKoveiv 
virb av&pcaircav (to hear himself well spoken of by men). 3. 4, 11. aircaXeoav 
T V «PXV v7ro Tlepccov MrjSoi (lost the government by the Persians = spoliati 
sunt imperio a P.). 7. 2, 22. ahiav ex« vir6 tivos (= accusor ab aliquo). Her. 
3, 104. virb tov KavfiaTos ol /xvp/xifKes acpavees yivovTai virb yr\v (under the in- 
fluence of the heat, on account of the heat). Th. 2, 85. virb av4fjucov Kal virb 
airXoias ivSieTpityev ovk b\lyov XP& V0V i on account of the winds, etc.). 'TV 
avdya-ns (from necessity), "tirb fie^rjs {jutlveoftat, PL 'Tirb fflyovs. Her. 
1, 85. virb deovs Kal KaKov <pav))v e^7?|e (spoke from fear and grief ). So 
virb xccpas, <p&ovov, bpyrjs, airetpias, o~ cacp p oo~v vn s, acppocrvvi] s, etc. 
(c) Her. 7, 21. &pvff<rov virb u.ao~Tiycav (dug under the lash, that being the 



$300.] prepositions. — 'Ytto. 445 

means) ; also of persons : 9, 98. virb tchpvicos irpony6peve (under the help of the 
herald, i. e. praeconis voce) ; particularly of the accompaniment of musical in- 
struments, e. g. Her. 1, 17. iarparevero virb a aXiriyy <av. So vn ai'Aov 
Xopeveiv, virb <pop/j.iyy<ap, virb tv [Air di> a v, etc. 

II. With the Dat (1) in a local relation, to denote a quiet 
rest under an object ; — (2) causal and figurative : (a) to denote 
the author (almost exclusively poetic, see k 251, Rem. 4) ; (b) 
to denote the means, as with the Gen., but only Poet. ; (c) to 
denote subjection. 

( 1 ) 'T ir b yri chai ; with mountains, at the foot of, e. g. virb T fx & X <a (at the 
foot of Tmolus). 'Tirb rep 'T /j. r\ ff cr <$. (2) (a) Aa/j.9}vai vir6 rivi, iriirreiv 
vir6 rivi (to be conquered by one, etc.), Horn, (b) 'Tirb fiapfiircp x°P^ elv i 
vir y avXep, etc. (to dance to or by the music of the lyre), (c) Tloufiu ti vir6 rivi 
(to subject something to one), and iroie?cr&ai ri v<p y kavrcp (to subject something to 
one's self, sibi sub jicere). Her. 7, 157. ttjv 'EXXaSa iir kuvry iroirjaao-^ai. Th. 
1, 110. AlyviTTos virb jSaciAe? iyivero (teas under the power of the king) . X. 
Cy. 8. 8, 1. Kvpos rovs v<fi kavrip &sirep kavrov iraidas irifxa (those subject to 
him). 

III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote the 
aim, direction or motion towards and under ; (b) extension under 
an object; — (2) of time: (a) in an indefinite specification of 
time (approach to a point of time) ; (b) extension in time 
(during) ; — (3) causal, to denote subjection. 

(1) (a) 'IeW, virb yrjv (to go under). X. An. 1. 10, 14. virb ai/rbv (rbv 
\6(pov) GT-hvoj rb (TTpaTev/Aa irefiirei Avkiov. (b) Her. 2, 127. vireari ohch/xara 
virb yr\v (are under the earth). 5. 10. to virb t^v dpurov aoiKvra So/ceei 
thai (the parts beneath the north pole). X. An. 7. 4, 5. iv rais virb rb opos k&- 
ficus. (2) (a) 'Tirb vvKTa (sub noctem, towards)', virb t))v irpdoTrji/ iircA- 
Sovvav vvKTa; so also xm6 ri (aliquatenus, in some measure), (b) Her. 9, 51. 
virb tt]u vvKTa (during). (3) X. Cy. 1. 5, 3. (6 "'Kaavplow fiaaiAevs) Siair4/x- 
irei irpos re rovs v<f? eavrbv iravras, Ka\ irpbs Kpolaou. 6.2, 11. 6 cvWoyos 
ruv vvb /3 a <r i A e a fiapfiapwv. 



$ 300. Remarks on Peculiarities in the use of the 
Prepositions. 

1. The proper prepositions were originally (except is, to) adverbs of place 
(§ 286, Hem. 2), i. e. they denote the local relation of an action ; in this way 
nearly all are very often used in the Homeric language. This use is also fre- 
quent in Herodotus, but in good Attic prose, only irpbs 5e, koX irp6s, praeterea 

38 



446 syntax. p 300. 

Od. £, 40. iroWbv yap airb irXvvoi el<ri 7n$A77oy. t, 116 — 118. vrjcros — T6to- 
vvarai v\i]e<ra\ iv 8" aiyes aireip4<riai yeydaffiv Ixypiai. Also in Her., e. g. 3, 39. 
4 v 8e 8$) kuI Aeo-plovs eT\e {among them, i. e. in Us).. II. c, 562. fx4\aues 8' avb 
&6rpves fitrau {grapes were thereon). Od. i, 184. irepl 8' av\^} fyrjX}) 848/j.vto tea- 
rwpvx4e<rai Ai&oiaiv. a, 66. *os tt e p I ftey j/Joi/ icrrl fipoTSoi/ {he is beyond, i. e. eminenl 
above). &, 44. t<£ yap pa 3-ebs ire pi 8wKev aoi8r]u {in a special manner, especially), 
H. <r, 529. ktzivov 8' e7rl [jLTjAofiorripas {in addition, besides). Also not rare in 
Pier., iirl 84 {thereupon, turn); fiera 84 {postea), Her.; irp6s ye, irpbs 84 
very common from Homer downward, also in Attic poetry and prose. 

Remark 1. Sometimes two prepositions stand together in poetry, most fre- 
quently in Epic, the first of which always has an adverbial meaning, but the sec- 
ond may be connected as a preposition with the Case of a substantive. Aia irp 6 
{through and out) : II. p, 393. ravvrai 84 re iracra {fioelr)) 8ia irp6. 'Aficpl ire pi 
{round, about). Od. A, 608. aficpl ire pi (TT-fj^ea-ffiv. II. <p, 10. o%&ai 5' afi(pl 
irepl /xeyaX' 'laxov. £,305. afxipl irepl Kpi]ur]u. Ilape/c (with the Gen. near 
to, with the Ace. near by, along by), e. g. Od. i, 116. it ape k \ija4vos. /jl, 276. 
aAAa irapei- rrju vrjerov ikavvere vr\a [t.4\aivav. II ape| (as a Paroxytone) often 
in Her. with the meaning besides, e. g. 3, 91. irdpel- tov apyvpiov. 'Tit4k 
{from under, out from under), in Homer; also Her. 3, 116. \4yerai vireK twv 
ypvnoiv apird^eiv 'Api/j.acnrovs (sc. rbv X9 va, ou). 'Air oirpb (pepeiv, II. it, 669, 679. 
Ilepi irpb. II. A, 180. irepl it pb yap eyx^'i &vev {around and before) . 

Rem. 2. Also the improper prepositions even: a and x^P tv > though very 
seldom, are connected with the proper prepositions, as in Eng. on account of, for 
the sake of , airb /3o7js even: a (for the cry's sake). Lys. Evandr. 793. ire pi r&v 
ev b\iyapx^ ap^durcov e v e k e v . 

2. Since prepositions in composition retain their original meaning as ad- 
verbs of place, and as the older language habitually uses the prepositions as 
adverbs of place, it follows of course, that the ancient language often employs 
the simples, and separates the preposition as an adverb from the verb, where 
the Attic writers regularly use the compounds. The two following instances 
must be distinguished : — 

(a) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the verb. H. y, 34. 
vit6 re rpS/xos eAAajSe yvia. y, 135. irapa 8' eyx^a /xanpa ireiryyev. 8, 
63. iirl 8' etyovTai 3-eol aAAot. 8, 161. e/c re Ka\ o\fe TeAe?. &, 108. ous 
("irirovs) ttot air Alveiav eXo^-qv (e\4cr&ai Tivd ri, II. 7r, 56). 

Rem. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged mode of expression, where 
several sentences follow each other, which consists in using the compound, 
which should stand in each sentence, only in the first, while in the others 
the preposition merely is repeated, e. g. II. i//, 799. Kara, fieu 8oAixo'<tkiov eyxos 
&r)ic is aycoua (pepcav, Kara 8' aairiSa Kal rpv<pd\eiav. Often also in Her., 
€. g. 8,33. Kara fxev eaavaav Apv/xbv ir6\iv, Kara 8e XapdSpnv (where, how- 
ever, the first may be taken as Tmesis. See Rem. 4). 

Rem. 4. In the later periods of the language, and particularly in the Attic 
writers, the prepositions are so closely connected with the verbs, that both 
mingle and form one whole. It is only from this time that there is what may 
be properly called Tmesis, i. e. the separation of a verb, by means of one or 
more intervening words, from the preposition in connection with which it forms 
one whole or one idea. The Tmesis of compound verbs is found somewhat 
often in Her. ; also in Pindar, and in other poets, seldom in the Attic poets in 
the lyric choral songs, and still more seldom in the dialogue ; but when it does 
occur, only a particle comes between the two parts of a word, so that the unity 



J 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PREPOS TIONS. 44^ 

of the idea is not destroyed. Her. 7, 15. "Eeptys dvd re eSpa/xe 4k T7js Koirrfi 
Hal irejxiteL dyyeKov. 8, 89. &7ro p.ev e&ave 6 OTpavqyos. Eur. Iph. Aul. 1365 
5l" dp' b\&\ap.ev. The Attic prose remains free from this license, with a few 
special exceptions, e. g. Th. 3, 13. p.7) |uj/ KaKws iroielv avrovs p.er 'A^-nvaiuiv, 
dAAa £weAevdepouv (so as to make the contrast emphatic). PL Gorg. 520, e, 
dvr eZ •xoie'iv and el ev iroi-ncras ravrrfv ttjv evepyeaiav avr ev ireicreTat. 
PI. Phaedr. 237, a. £vp. p.oi Ad&eff&e tov [xvdov (take part). 

(h) ffliose instances where the preposition is separated from the Case of its sub- 
stantive. Here also, throughout Homer, the preposition exhibits its original 
adverbial meaning, and belongs to the verb ; the verb and the adverbial prepo- 
sition together^ form one verbal idea, and this, not the preposition alone, gov- 
erns the Case. H. e, 292. to v 8' ct7rb fiev yA5><ro-av rd/xe (Gen. of separation). 
c, 382. TrXelcrra Souois ev KTrifxara Kelrai (lies within the house), o, 266. a/xcpl 
8e x°" Tai &P-ois ai<r<TovTai, on the shoulders about (local Dative), ir, 291. ev 
yap TldrpoKAos <p6fiov ritcev air a civ, he cast fear into all (Dat. of limit or am, 
§ 284, Eem. 1). So the Ace. denoting local aim or object (§ 277). II. £-, 115. 
tw 8* els h[i(pGTep(a Aiop.r]5eos 'dpfiara ^rjTrjv (entered the chariot). Ace. of the 
object receiving an action (§ 279): II. £, 156. 'A^7jvair]v"Hpr] Trpbs jxv&ov 
eeiirev (addressed, spoke to Athene). 

PiE3r. 5. In the second case (b), a Tmesis is admitted only when mere par 
tides, like p.i\v, de, re, pd, yap, dp', 8' dpa, come between the preposition and the 
Case of the substantive, — a very frequent usage of the post-Homeric period, 
and even in the Attic writers. Comp. Rem. 4. 

3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, particularly of the Homeric language, 
that it often connects prepositions followed by the Dat., with verbs which ex- 
press the direction whither ; and, on the other hand, prepositions followed by 
the Ace, with verbs whose signification presupposes a quiet resting in a place 
or object. This construction arises from a blending of two ideas, since the 
speaker either conceives and expresses, along with the moment of motion, the 
moment of the rest which succeeds ; or along with the moment of rest, the moment 
of motion which precedes. Hence this may be called the pregnant Construction. 

(a) The ?&b of motion involves the idea of the rest which succeeds, when preposi- 
tions with the Dat. stand instead of prepositions with the Ace. The moment of 
rest (the relation to the continuing result of the action) must then be regarded 
as the predominant one. The principle above stated holds with the following 
prepositions : — 

"With ev, particularly in the Epic language. H. e, 370. ^8' ev yovKacrt 
irlwre Aicvirns 8? 'A<ppo8'iT7) (she fell on her knees, and then lay on her knees). Od. 
o, 200. eyu fjt.avTevcrou.ai, ojs evl &vp.<p o&dvaroi fidAAov<ri. II- A, 743. 
ij pure 8' ev kovitjgiv (fell into the dust and lay there). In prose, r i £• ev a i 
ev xepcriv like the Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. first: 
is 8e rb"Hpaiov ko.t eepvyov r and then ol 8' ev r <S "Hpalco Karaire(pevy6res 
i^eorav (those who had fled and were then in the Heraeum). PI. Euthvd. 292, e. 
iv tout?) rrj airopia ev err e-rr t u>Ke iv. (Caes. B. G. 5. 10. naves in lit tore 
ejectas esse. Sail. Jug. 5. in amicitia receplus). — Also with dp. (pi and ire pi 
with the Dat. instead of the Ace. II. \, 17. Kvy/uuSas fxev irpwra irepl kvu ny- 
triv efrnicev (he put the greaves around his legs, so that then they set fast to them). 
Od. 3, 434. d/j.<pl Trvpl (TTTicai rpliroha. With iiri: II. a, 55. t<£ ydo 



448 SYNTAX. * [$ 300 

Girl <ppeo~l S-7J/C6 §ea \evKc*>\ei>os "Hprj (like iu (ppeal &e?vai). With irp6s: 
Od. i, 284. via fj.su fioi Karia^e Tloo-eiddaj/ ivocix^ov , npbs irer pyffi j8aAc6i>. 
289. <rvv 5e Svoo /j.dp-tyas, cbsre GncvAaKas, irorl yair) k6ttt€. So fidWeit 
irorl yairj. — With viro, in prose, in the phrases, viro r ivi ylyvea&ai (to 
come under the power of any one, and continue under his power) ; it oietv r i viro 
nvi (alicui aliquid subjicere)) TroietG&cu ixp" eavrq) [sibi subjicere, §299,11, 
(2) (c)]. 

Rem. 6. In the following and like examples from Homer, the Dat., without 
doubt, expresses the relation of aim or object: %e?pas IdWeiu iiri aira, fiKai fieXos 
iiri nvi, irefxtyai bveipov iiri nut, iXavveiv 'lirirovs iiri V7)vviv, TnaiveoSrai rd^a iiri 
nvi, aAAeo-frcu iiri nvi, ndxeoScu iiri tivi, irereafrcu eV &v&eo~iv. See § 284, 
Rem. I. 

(b) The verb expressing rest involves the idea of the motion which precedes, when 
the preposition e I s stands with the Ace, instead of the preposition i v with the Dat. 
The moment of the preceding motion must then be regarded as predominant. 

H. o, 275. 4 <pdvn A?s els oSo'c (came into the road and appeared). Her. 4, 
14. (pavr\vai is YlpoK6vvna ov. Eur. Iph. T. 620. ciAA 1 els avdytcyv «ei- 
fie&a (to come into and to be in). Her. 3, 62. irpo-nySpeve ffras is (xecrov ra 
ivTeraXfieva (placing himself in the midst and there standing). Very frequent in 
prose is irapeivat els rdirov rivd (to have come to a place, and to be present 
there) ; comp. " he is in church, in town, or on the land," in which the idea of 
previous motion is necessarily supposed. X. An. 1.2, 2. iraprja-av els 2 dp- 
Sets (came to Sardis and werethere). Her. 8, 60. is r^v ~ZaXafi7va vtt4k- 
Keirai v/uv reava re ical yvvcuKes (to carry to Salamis and leave there in safety). 
PI. Up. 468, a. rbv £G>vt<x els rovs iroXe (j-lovs aX6vra, i. e. els rovs 
rroXefiiovs irecr6ura a-Xavcu. 

(c) Verbs signifying to hang, to attach to, to suspend, etc., as Kpe/xavi/vvai, avap- 
rav, cK-, Kara-, avaSetv, avdirreiv, alwpeio'&ai, are connected with the prepositions 
air 6 and e/c (as in Lat. with ab and ex), in order to express, together with 
the idea of suspending anything to a place, the idea of hanging down from or 
depending from a place. 

Od. fr, 67. Kad 8' es 7r ao~craX6(pi Kpe jxaff ev (pSpjaiyya Xiyeiav (he hung the 
lyre on the peg, so tha u it then hung down from it). X. H. 4. 4, 10. Tia.o-iiJ.axos 
tear a$-f)G as dirb deudpcoi/ rovs 'lirirovs fxera rwu iSeXovr&v rjei ivavriov tols 
'Apyeiois (having fastened the horses to the trees). X. C. 3. 10, 13. &di>paKes ii 
t £>i/ io/xcov Kpep.djxevoL (hanging upon the shoulders and depending from them). 
So avaprav ri e/c rivos. Her. 4. lO. e/c ru>v £a>o'Tr) pav <popeiu (piaXas (on the 
girdles, so that the bowls hung down). In poetry, this usage is very widely 
extended. See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, (c). 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, as well as prepositions, are sometimes used in a 
pregnant sense : (a) adverbs denoting rest instead of those denoting the direc- 
tion whither. S. Trach. 40. Ke?uos 8' oirov (instead of oiroi, quo) fiefS-nKev, 
ov'bels olZe (no one knows where [whither] he has gone). X. H. 7. 1, 25. '6irov 
/3ovAri&e?ev i£e\&e?v. — (b) adverbs expressing the direction whither, instead 
of adverbs expressing the relation where. Eur. H F. 74. irot irar^p direo-n 
yr\ s ; 1157. ir o7 Kaneav iprifxiav evpu ; (quo me vertam, ut requiem inveniam?). 
Arist. Av. 9. oiroi yr\s icrp-ev ; (whither [where] are we?). Dem. Chers. 102, 50. 
7ro? auadvo [u,e&a; (quo nos vertamus, ut perniciem vitemus?). Phil. 1. 51, 40. 
6 ir\7)ye\s ael rrjs ir\r]yrjs e%eTcu, Kav erepwere irard^r) tls, i/celc e elcriv at X e ?P €S - 

(4) A second peculiarity in the construction of prepositions is, when the 
article (alone or with a substantive) in connection with a preposition and it* 



$ 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PREPOSITIONS. 449 

Case, has a substantive idea, and when the preposition iv, which expresses the 
relation where only in the most general manner, should be used, this preposition 
is changed either into air 6 and e /c or into e I s y attracted, as it were, by the 
verb, expressed or understood, which denotes either the direction whence or 
whither. This construction may be called the attraction of prepositions : — 

(a) 'An 6 and e/c instead of iv, or Trap a with the Gen. instead of nap a 
with the Dat. Oi i k tt)s ay op as dv&panroi arricpvyov (instead of oi iv 
ri] ayopa dvSponroi arr4(pvyov e/c rrjs ay o pas (those IN the agora fled FROM it). 
X. H. 4. 6, 4. iravres oi e/c ruv ay pu>v 'Aicapyaves ecpvyov is ret dart) (in- 
stead of iravres oi iv rots ay po7s ecpvyov e/c rwv dypwv is to. dart)). Th. 
1, 18. oi e/c rrjs &\Xr]s 'EAAaSos (rvpavvoi) virb Act/ceScu^oi/iW /careAv- 
&r]crav. 3.22. rjcr&ovTo oi e/c ruv irvpyav <pv\aKes (the guards upon the 
towers perceived it from the towers). 7, 70. oi dirb rS>v Karao-Tpcafxarav 
rots duovTiois ixp&vro (those upon the decks used their darts from the decks). 
PI. Apol. 32, b. vixzis robs Seica CTpaTnyobs robs oi>K a ve\o /j. 4vovs robs e'/c 
rrjs vavixax'tas i&ov\€(r&e afrpSovs icpiveiv (you wished to condemn all at once 
the ten commanders in the naval battle, who did not carry off the dead from it). 
Phaed. 109, e. oi e/c ttjs Sa\aTTr)S i'xid-ves dvaKvirrovr es (the fish IN 
the sea coming up out of it). Dem. Phil. 3. 114, 15. tow e'/c ^eppiov rei- 
Xovs orTpaTicaras e|e'j8aAej/. X. An. 1. 1, 5. ostis 5° acpiKVolro rwv irapa 
fSaa iXsws 7rpbs avrov (instead of twv irapa fSao-i\ei ovtwv Tvapa f3a<riX4as 

d(plKl/0?T0). 

Rem. 8. The same principle of attraction holds, also, with adverbs of 
place, e. g. e'/ce?^ei/ and eVSofrev instead of eVe? and evdov. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 15. 
dyvoe? rbv e'/cei&ez/ irSXtjxov Sevpo rj^ovra. X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. "va r)cro~ov to. ot/ca5e 
"jro&oir]. See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, Rem. 2. 

(b) Els instead of iv (far more seldom). Her. 2, 150. ekeyov oi iirix&pioi, 
&s is T7jv HvpTiv t))i/ is AifivT] v i /c 8 id oT i) ki fj.fr] avrrj virb yrjv (empties into 
the Syrtis which is in Lybia). X. H. 1. 7, 29. ''Epao-ivihifs (e'/ceAeuej/) iirl robs is 
M iTvkr)vT)v irokefxiovs ri]v raxicTrjv irkelv airavras (against the enemies in 
Mitylene). 

5. On the repetition and omission of prepositions, the following things are 
to be noted : — 

(a) In a series of coordinate substantives, the preposition is either repeated 
before each single substantive, when each single idea is to be considered sep- 
arately and is to be made emphatic, or when the contrast or difference between 
the ideas is to be denoted, e. g. PL Tim. 18, c. Kara te ir6kefxov koI Kara. ttjv 
&\\t}u Stairau ; or the preposition is placed only before the first substantive, and 
omitted with the others, when the ideas are meant to express one whole, 
whether they are of the same kind or different, e. g. X. C. 1. 4, 17. tt epl t£>v 
ivbatie Kal irepl rasv iv Alyuirrcp Kal iv 'Siicekla (ppovri^etv (instead of 
Kal irepl tuv iv 2t/ceAta). 2. 1, 6. ayvixvacrrcos %X €lJ/ if p 6 s re ^pvxv Kal 
Sakirr). X. H. 1. 1, 3. air 6 re rwv veSiv Kal ttjs yrjs. PI. Phaed. 99, 
a. r) ire pi Me yap a r) Bo iwt ov s. 

(b) When a substantive connected with a preposition, is followed by a rcla- 
ative pronoun standing in the same relation with the substantive, the preposition 
in prose is often repeated before the relative, but more frequently omitted : 
PI. Symp, 213, c. air itce'ivov rod xp^ov, a<j> ov rovrov r)pdo-&r)v. X. Hier. 1, 

38* 



450 SYNTAX. [§ 300. 

11. ol ISicorai (cives) epxovrai els irSXeis, as olv fiovhtovrai, freaiidrcov eVe/ccc. X, 
S. 4, 1. iv rep xp6vy> $ vpSou aKovco. (Comp. in Latin Cic. Fin. 4, 20. Zeno negat 
Platonem, si sapiens non sit, eadem esse in causa, qua tyrannum Dionysium). 

(c) The preposition is very often omitted in questions and answers, e. g. PL 
Soph. 243, d. ire pi Se rov fieylarrov re Kal apxvyov irpdorov vvv GKeirreov. 
Theaet. Tlvos S77 \eyeis ; X. S. 5, 5, olaSra ovv, ecpv, G(p&ah/.i5>i/ rlvos eVe/ca 
deo/xe&a j Ar\Xov, ecpT], on rod opav. 

(d) The preposition is commonly omitted with a word in apposition. X 
An. 5. 5, 3. ol "EXXnves dcpiKovro els Korvccpa, ttoXiv 'EXXtjv id a. Comp. 4. 
8, 22. 5. 3, 2. 6. 2, 1, But when a greater emphasis rests upon the word in ap- 
position, as is particularly the case, when it is used to explain a preceding 
pronoun, then the preposition is regularly repeated. X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. (<piXiav 
Xafioisav) Trap eKeivcav, oT/xai, ecprj, trap a ra>v firjdeirore iroXep.icov yeyevr]/j.e- 
vwv'(you might acquire friendship from those who have never been enemies). PI. 
Prot. 358, h. al eirl rov rov irpd^eis airaarai, iirl rod aAvirces £r}v Kal ^Secos, 
ap ov KaXai ; (all the actions pertaining to this, viz., the living without grief are they 
not praiseworthy ?) ; also in clauses expressing comparison, subjoined by cos, 
cbs-n-ep, the preposition may be either omitted or repeated. PI. Rp. 330, c, 
vepl ra x p 77 ,u a t a cnrovSd(ovatv, ws ipyov eavrcvv. PI. tt a p 7) Lias (poiras, 
&s iraph. cpiXovs. But when the member expressing the comparison pre- 
cedes the other, the preposition stands with the first member only, if the parti- 
cle of comparison is ws; but the preposition is repeated, if it is &sir ep. PI. 
Pp. 1.4, 14, e. Se? ccs ir e pi jx-nrpos Kal rpocpov rrjs x^P as dfxvveiv (i. e. irepl 
TTJs x^P as )' 2L Cy. 1. 6, 4. as npbs (plXovs ovras lloi robs &eovs ovrat 
Sia.KeifA.aL — PI. Phaed. 82, e. (tj ipvxh o.vayicd£erai) & strep St' elpyiiov dia 
rod acoiiaros o~Koire?a&ai ra ovra, 

6. The natural position for prepositions is directly before their substantive, 
or before the attributive belonging to a substantive, e. g. irpbs rbv avdpa, irpbs 
rbv croepbv dvdpa. But this position is often changed in the following instances : — 

(a) When a particle follows the substantive, as ye, iiev, yap, fxev yap, Se, oh, 
also [Av ovv, ad, Kal, etiam, rolvov, faces, also ol/xai used as an adverb ; these 
small words often come between the preposition and the substantive, e. g. e* 
fxev elp7]vr), ev /xev yap elprjvn. 

(b) The preposition irp6s in oaths send exclamations is separated from its 
substantive. Soph. O. C. 1333. irpos vvv o~e Kp-nvcov, nobs &ea>v dfxoyvlcov 
alrco 7ri&ecrSrai. So in Latin, per te deos oro. 

(c) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is sub- 
ject to anastrophe ; in Attic prose, this takes place only with irepl when con- 
nected with the Gen., but here it is very frequent. PI. Bp. 469, b. irp&rov p.et 
av5 pairodio-fiov ire pi; it is also separated by other words. Her. 6, 101 
rovrov crept eiieAe ire pi. PI. Apol. 19, C. u>v iyco ovdev ovre Lieya ovre ctuih 
?bv irepi iiraic*. See § 31, IV. 



01,302.] pronouns. 45J 

CHAPTER IV. 

§301. The Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At- 
tribute, and Object. 

The subject, predicate, attribute, and object are expressed 
by pronouns, when these members of a sentence are not 
designed to represent objects or qualities themselves, but 
when it is to be denoted merely, that an object refers either 
to the speaker himself, or to the person addressed, or to 
another person or thing. 

2. All the rules which have been given on the substan- 
tive and adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective 
pronouns ; still, some remarks are here subjoined on the 
use of the pronouns. 

§ 302. I. Personal Pronouns. 

The substantive personal pronouns, as the subject (in the 
INom.) : eyoj, o-v, r)fj.€is, etc., and also the adjective (posses- 
sive) pronouns, as attributives, e. g. e/x6s irarrip, are used in 
Greek, as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic; 
hence particularly in antitheses, but also, for the sake of per- 
spicuity, e. g. Kat crv ravra hrpaJ;a<s. Kat 6 cros 7rarr]p airtfjavev. 
'Eyo> fxkv aTrcLjxL, av hi fxeve. But where this is not the case, 
they are omitted, and the substantive pronouns are expressed 
by the endings of the verb, and the adjective (possessive) pro- 
nouns, by the article prefixed to the substantive, e. g. Tpd<pu), 
ypa<£ei5. 'H fxrjrrjp elrre piOL (my mother). 01 yovets aripyovcri 
to. rcKva (their children). 

Remark 1. The distinction between the accented and the enclitic forms of 
the personal pronouns, e. g. i/xov and /xou, etc. (§ 87), lies in the greater or less 
emphasis with which they are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented 
forms are always employed, for example, in antitheses, e. g. ifxov pXv Karzyi- 
Aaae, a\ 8e i-rnjvtatv. — The personal pronouns are often used instead of the 
reflexive (No. 2). On the use of the Gen. of the substantive instead of the 
adjective (possessive) pronouns, see Rem. 4. On an apppsitiye in the Gen. 
joined with a possessive pronoun, e. g. rinerepos avrwv naT-ftp, see § 266, 2. 

Rem. 2. The adjective personal pronouns more commonly have a subjective or 
active sense, e.g. i^ &ov\t} (my counsel, i. e. one which I originate, not one which 



452 syntax. [$ 302. 

relates to me) but sometimes they take the place of the objective Gen. and then 
hare an objective or passive sense. Od. \, 201. <rbs ir6&os, a desire for the& 
(like Ter. Heaut. II. 3, 66. desiderio tuo instead of tui). X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. 
tvvoia nal cpiXia rrj ey.fj (benevolentia et amore mei, from good will and love TO me), 

2. The reflexive pronouns always refer to something already 
named, to the Subject or Object, since the person or thing to 
which the reflexive refers, stands in contrast with itself as an 
object or attribute : — 

(a) In relation to the subject : f O aocpos eavrov Kpare?. 2^ a- e avr op ap/f- 
Keis. 'O ircus kavrbv eiraivet. Of yoveis aycnraxrt robs eavroov iraib'as. 
Tv£>&i o* e avr 6 v. Ovros 6 avijp irdvra St 1 e a v r o v fiefjLa^rjKev. 'O arparr^ybs 
virb rwv eavrov ffr par loor cov aire&avev. 

(b) In relation to an object of the sentence : X. Cy. 1. 1, 4. Kvpos SirjveyKe 
ru>v a Wooi/ flacr i\ewv, rwv apxas St' eavrwv Krr]o-a/xevojv. Ar. Nub. 384. 
airb ffavrov iy<i> c« 5tSa|co (per te ipsum). 

(3) The reflexive pronouns may also be used in Greek, as in 
Latin, in the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive 
and of the Participle ; also in such subordinate clauses as stand 
in a close relation to the principal clause, particularly in clauses 
expressing design, and in dependent interrogative clauses, as 
well as in all other subordinate clauses which do not contain 
the sentiment of the speaker, but the sentiment of the subject 
of the principal sentence. Also in this case the reflexive 
refers either to the subject or to an object. When the subject 
of the principal clause and the subject of the subordinate 
clause (or of the Inf.), are different, the reflexive may refer 
either to the former or to the latter, its particular reference 
being determined only from the context. In the cases men- 
tioned under this rule, the English often uses the personal 
pronouns him, her, it, etc. instead of the reflexive. 

'O rv paw os vo/xi£ei robs iroXiras virr)pere?v e avr op. X. Cy. 1. 1, 5. Twv 
e^vwv rovrwv ?ip^ev (Kvpos) ovfr e avr op 6/xoy\(t>rrojv ovrav, ovre aKX^Xois. 
C. 1. 2, 8. eirlo'reve (5 co k p a r r\ s) roov £vv6vtojv e avr op rovs airo5e^afj.evovs, 
Eirep avrbs edoKi/xaCev, els rbv irdvra filov e avr op re Kal a\X-fj\ois (pi^ovs aya&ovs 
eo-eo-frai. 52. 6 Karrjyopos e<pt) rbv 2<w Kpdrrjv avaireiSovra robs veovs, &s avrbs 
efy crocpwrards re Kal aWovs iKavojraros iroiriaai ffocpovs, ovtoj diari&evat rovs 
eavrop cvv6vras, usre p.r\^afJiov itap avrois rovs ciAAous elvai irpbs eavr6v (in 
comparison with him). Th. 2, 92. ra vavayia, ocra irpbs rfj eavrwv (yrj) fy, avei- 
hovro (= Ta vavayia ra irpbs rfj e avr cov yrj ovra). Her. 8, 24. offoi gov crrparoi 
rov eavrov ?)cra.v venpo\ efratye. Comp. the examples in Rem. 3. 



§ 302.] pronouns. 453 

4. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun airo?, 
-•q, -6: viz., avrov, -rjs, avr uj, -fj, avrov, r}V, -6, airoiv, or even 
those of a demonstrative pronoun, are universally employed, 
when an object does not stand in contrast with itself, but 
with another object, e. g. 6 Trarqp airw (to him, the son) eoWc 
to /3l/3Xlov. ^ripyo) avrov (him). 'ATre^o/xai avrov (from him). 
The pronoun avrov, etc. is merely the personal pronoun of the 
third person, but is much weaker than the demonstrative 
ovros ; wherefore, it does not, like ovro<s, usually stand first in a 
sentence. 

Rem. 3. The personal pronoun ov, of, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense 
in the Attic writers (but, in the Ion. writers and in the poets, also the meaning 
of the personal pronoun). But it is regularly employed, only when the reflex- 
ive relation has respect, not to the nearest subject, but to the remoter one. It 
is in general much more freely used than the compound reflexive, since it is 
also employed where the connection with the principal clause is much looser, e. g. 
e O rvpavvos vo/xiCei robs iroAiras \rnr\pereiv o I (but not 5 rvpavvos %apt^eTai ol). 
X. An. 7. 5, 9. 'HpaKAdSrjs elsayaykv robs IzAAovs errparr]yobs irpbs S/ceu^f Aeyeip 
4k4\€V€V avrovs, on ovSev av ijrrov c<pets aydyoiev rrjv crparidv, § s,evo<pwv 
(SE ducturos esse). Th. 5, 73. ol 'Afr-nvaToi a>? i£4icAivev (6 'Ayis) airb <r(pu>v 
to crrparev/xa, k<z& rjavxiav iaw&rjaav. 6, 32. ^vvsirevxovro leal 6 &Wos, '6/j.iAos, 
rcav re iroAirav kolL t% ris aWos evvovs irapriv o~<p(o~i. Even after yap, e. g. X. H. 
1.7, 5. ol o'Tpa.Trjyol fipax^a eKaaros aTreAoyrjcraTO • ov yap irpovTt&r) o~<pio~ i Xoyos 
Kara rbv v6/xov. But Thucydides and some later writers use it, also, in relation 
to the nearest subject, e. g. Th. 7, 5. 6 TvXnriros eVer^C 6 ro7s Ai&ois x?^l x ^ vos ^ 
ovs ol 'A&yvaToi irpoirape^aXovro o~<picriv. The forms ol, o~(pio~i and o-(pas 
have sometimes also the meaning of personal pronouns : of, Mm, her (e. g. X. 
Cy. 3. 2, 26) ; cr<piai, to them (e. g. X. H. 6.5,35) ; o~(pas, them, e.g. Th. 5, 49), 
when the object to which they refer, is more important in respect to the sense, 
than the subject of the sentence. Still, it is to be remarked in relation to the 
use of this pronoun, that in place of it with a reflexive sense, the compound 
reflexive e avrov, -rjs, etc. is commonly employed; and in place of it with 
the sense of the Pers. pronoun third person, the corresponding forms of avr 6 s 
are used by the Attic writers. The form ov (oi>) is used in prose only in PI. 
Symp. 174, d. Rp. 617, b. 617, e.; I (I) 327, b. 617, e. Symp. 175, a. c. 233, 
b. ; ol occurs far oftener (seldom accented ot), ando-0e?s, <r<pa>v, aty'iai, 
a (pas, somewhat often. 

5. In the instances mentioned under No. 3, the correspond- 
ing forms of avro's are very frequently used instead of the 
reflexive pronoun ; this is always the case where a member of a 
sentence or a suborinate clause is not the expression or senti- 
ment of the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the senti- 
ment of the speaker (writer). 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. (Ot TroXe/jLioi) evdvs a(p-f}aovo-i rrjv \eiav, eiretdav IStocri rivas eV 
avrovs iXavvovras (contra SE). C. 4. 7, 1. Ttjv kavrov yvcvfjLrjv airecpaivero 2o>k- 
odrrjs irpbs robs bp.iAovvras avrcf. Apol. 33. (2a>«paT7js) Zyvu> rov en (tjv rh 
rcdvdvai avrcf Kpzlrrov elvai. 



454 syntax. [$ 302. 

6. In compound reflexive pronouns, the pronoun avros eithei 
retains its exclusive force, or loses it, i. e. it is sometimes em- 
phatic, and sometimes not. 

(a) Isocr. Panath. 16, 242. 8iKai6v ecrri (plXovs fxev troieia^ai rovs 6/xoicos art- 
ro7^ re (or <r<j>i<ri re abro7s) Kal ro7s &XXois xpw^eVous, <pofie?(T&ai Se Kal 
Sedievai rovs irpbs acpas fxev avrovs (or e avrovs) oiKei6rara diaKei/xevovs, 
irpbs Se rovs aXXovs aXXorplws (se ipsis and se ipsos). Th. 4, 102. eiroiicovs 
<T<p£>v re abrwv Kal rwv &XXwv rbv fiovXofxevov irepApavres. 1, 60. ire/xirovo~iv 
eavrwv re e&eXovras Kal rcov aXXwv HeXoirovvrjcriwv [xio~&<2 ireiaavies. 8, 8. i(p' 
eavrwv Sievoovvro &XXq> o~r6X(a irXe7v (soli per se). The Nom. abr6s is some- 
times added to strengthen this exclusive or emphatic force (comp. in Lat. Cato 
SE IPSE interemit), e. g. PI. Phaed. 94, e. ovre yap av 'Ofxr)pa> 6fxoXoyo7/xev, ovre 
abrol r)fx7v avrots. — (b) Oi arpariurai irape7xov eavrovs (or o~<pas 
avrovs) avSpeiordrovs (se). Th. 7, 82. irape8oo~av ol irdvres ff<pas avrovs (or 

eavrovs) (se). 

• 

Kem. 4. The reflexive possessives are either used alone, e. g. Dem. c. Nicostr. 
4, 1250. rwv xpVpdrwv coi rS>v ifxwv KiXP 7 ?^- c - Nausim. 11, 993. diKai6repov 
&7j7rou to 7) fx ere pa rj/xas ecrriv exetj/, r) rovrovs. C. Boeot. 2, 1010. v/xe7s airav- 
res rovs v fxer e povs ira7das ayairare. Ol iroX7rai ra ff(per e pa cct>£eiv eiretpwv- 
ro; or with the addition of the Gen. of abr 6s according to § 266, 2; or in- 
stead of the possessives, the Gen. of the compound substantive-reflexive is 
used; indeed in Prose, this is uniformly the case with the Sing. (mine,thine,his, 
thus 6 e /xavr ov, ffeavr ov, eavrov wari'ip, and not 6 epos avrov, 6 o~bs avrov 
iraryp, which last mode of expression is found only in poetry), and with the 
third Pers. PI., it is more frequent than the possessive : but the possessives are 
commonly used when the pronoun is plural (our, your), except in the third 
Person. Hence as follows : — 

S.rbv ejxavrov (aeavrov, eavrov) irarepa not rbv ifxbv (o~bv) avrov ir. 

r\\v ejxavrov (aeavrov, eavrov) /xrjrepa not rr}V ijxrjv (o~r)v) avrov /w. 

ro7s ejxavrov (aeavrov, eavrov) \6yois not ro7s ifxo7s (o~o7s) avrov X. 

P. rbv rj/xerepov avrwv irarepa very rare rbv ijxwv avruv ir. 

rr)v vjxerepav abrwv jX7]repa very rare ry\v vjxojv avrwv <x. 

ra ijjxerepa avrwv a/xaprrifxara very rare ra tjjxojv abrwv a. 

rbv acperepov abico; irarepa more frequent rbv eavrctiv irarepa, but never 

rbv acpcav abrwv ir. 

Here also the Pronoun abr 6 s either retains its exclusive or emphatic force, or 
loses it: (a) f O ira7s vfipi^ei rbv eavrov irarepa (STJTJM IPSIUS patrem). '"Cjxs7s 
v&pi£ere rovs v/xerep ov s abr Si v irarepas (VESTROS IPSORUM patres). Ol 
ira78es vBpiCov(Ti rovs eavrwv irarepas (suos ipsorum p). X. Hier. 3, 8. iroXXovs 
Se Kal vim yvvaiKOJV rSiv eavrav rvpdvvovs Siecp&ap/xevovs (evp^aeis) (a SUIS IP- 
SORUM conjugibus). X. An. 6. 1, 29. (voixifa) '6sris ev TroXe/xw hv arrao~id£ei irpbs 
dpxovra, rovrov irpbs rr\v eavrov crwrrjpiav ffraaidCeiv (contra SUAM IPSIUS 
salutem). In order to strengthen the exclusive or emphatic force, the Pronoun 
abr 6s is frequently added: abrbs rbv ip.avrov, etc. ; abros is also sometimes 
placed between the article and the reflexive of the third Pers., e. g. Aeschin. 
Ctes. 85, 87. KaraXeXvKe ri)V abrbs avrov Svvacrreiav. — (b) Th. 2, 101. 
^rparoviKTiv, r))v eavrov aSeXcpyv, St&cocri ^evfrn (SUAM sororem). Aeschin. 
fals. leg. 30, 40. irpbs rrjv fiovXrjv rbv aBeX<pbv rbv e jxavr ov Kal rbv a8eX(pi$ovr 
Kal rbv larpbv eire/Aipa. Th. 6, 21. iroXv airb rrjs 7] /xerep as avrwv /xeXXc/xeP 
wAeir (a nostra patria). Lysias. rjyovvrai ovKert ro7s o~(perepois avrwv afxap- 



♦ 302. j pkonouns. .455 

r-fl/xacri rbv vovv v/xas irape^eiv. Her. 5, 87. {Xeyoveriv) elpcoTav eKa-CT-nv avTecoP 
{twv yvvaiKuiv), o'/ctj eti) 6 ecovTrjs avf]p (ubi SUUS vir esset). X. H. 4. 4, 17. oi 
AaKedaifJ.6vL0t t&v eavTuv erv/x/xaxw KareeppSvovv. 

Rem. 5. It is very rare in good classical authors, that the Gen. of Pens. Pro- 
nouns refers to the nearest subject, e. g. PI. Lach. 179, c. aiTicv/xe&a robs Trare- 
pas rj/xcvv, oti rj/xas /xev etcoy rpv<pav (instead of rovs 7) jxeT e pov s -ware pas or 
tovs 7] fj.iT e pov s avToov ir.). Antiph. 1, 114. iyd) 8 5 v/xas inrep tov irarpos /xov 
Te&ve&Tos alrovfxai (instead of irrcep tov e fxavT ov iraTpos). Th. 4,8. iirl Tas 
ev Tjj Keptcvpa vavs cr<pa>v eirefxtyav (instead of iirl Tas ev t. K er<peT epas 
ovtoov v. or Tas eavrcav v.). 

Rem. 6. The pronoun abTbs with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after 
both the substantive and adjective (possessive) personal pronouns, whether its 
exclusive power be retained or lost, c. g. t)[xu>v avrwv, vfx7v avTo?s, er<pas avTovs, 6 
v/xcTepos avTciy iraTr)p, etc. In the Attic writers the exceptions to this position 
are extremely few, e. g. X. Cy. 6. 2, 25. vvv to. erriTr}deia (ri/xas) 8e7 els tt?\v 
65bv erverKevd£ecr2rai avTols Te 7]fx?v, Kal 6iv6o~ois TeTpdiroeri xpc^ue^a. But in 
other writers, also, such exceptions are quite rare, e. g. Her. 5, 91. ervyyivdccrKo- 
fxev avTolcri rifxlv ov iroiyeraeri op&ws. This position is never found with the 
third Pers. PI., consequently never avTovs erepas instead of ercpas avTovs. 
But when the Pers. pronouns are used without their reflexive force, then ovtSs, 
in its exclusive or emphatic sense, may either precede or follow the personal pro- 
noun : (a) avTov ifxov {/xov), ainw e/xoi (fxoi), avrbv ifxe (/xe), avTovs rj/xas, etc., 
e. g. PI. Phaed. 91, a. ccut<£ ifxol oti fxaXierTa ho£ei ovtcos ex^v. Symp. 220, 
C. avvdieffaffe Kal Ta onAa Kal avTbv ifxe. X. C. 2. 9, 2. r)S4o>s y &v (sc. &pe- 
ypai/xi Tbv &vSpa), ecprj, el fj.7) epofiolfxriv, birws fxrj eV avTov /xe Tpdirono.— (b) 
e/xov avTov, e/xol avrq>, ere avr6v, r)fxcov ai)Ta>v, etc., e. g. Dem. 01. 3, 36. ird&ev 
&\AoSev lo~xvpbs yeyovev r) trap rj/xcov avTcov $(Annros] X. C. 3. 8, 9. tov 
Sepovs 6 7]kios virep tj/xcov avT&v Kal tu>v erTeywv iropevo/xevos erKiav Trapex*i- 
Cv. 5. 5, 20. ere /xev ah Tbv dcprJKa. 6. 1, 14. erTeyai r)/j.?v ai>To?s eleriv. PL 
Apol. 41, a. e/AOiye Kal avTcp &avfxaerT7j av eXr] r) Siarpt/3?? avTS&i. 

7. The reflexive pronoun is very often used instead of the 
reciprocal pronoun, in all the persons. 

Dem. C. Olympiod. 116ft. r6& t)V-1v avTots ZiaXe\6ix&a. PI. Pp. 621, c. 
hiKaioo-vvriv (xeTa (ppovr)creois iraurl Tp6trca eirnn^evaofieu, 'iva Kal r\\x7v avTots 
<pi\oi o)jxev, Kal tois &eo?s. Lys. 114. eiretddu v/xiu iyco f.Lt]vierc», irpbs ifias ou- 
tovs Tpeipea&e KaireiTa Ka& eva eKaerTov vfxTv avToTs a7re^i7crecr^6. X. C. 
3. 5, 16. (p&ovoveriv eavTots jxaXKov, % Tots aWois av^pcairois. 

Rem. 7. Both the reciprocal and reflexive pronoun is used when the action 
refers to an object that has been named. Both consequently express a reflexive 
idea, and are related like the species and genus ; since now the genus includes 
the species, so the reflexive may take the place of the reciprocal, in cases 
where it is readily perceived that several persons so perform anything together 
that the action appears as reciprocal. But when the reciprocal is antithetic to 
eavTbv eKaffTos, but the reflexive used for the reciprocal, to &\\ovs, it is 
clear that the reciprocal must then necessarily stand, where the antithesis 
eavTbv eKaerTos is either expressed or implied, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. fiaWop 
X^poveriv eirl to7s aAAriAcov Kaicots, ^ toTs avTcbv ISioifi aya&o?s (i. C. -/) eVl 
to7s avTov eKao-Tos ayaSols), then rather rejoice in each others evils, than in their 
own good. i. e. than each one in his own. PI. Phaedr. 263, a. ajx<pis&T)Tovixev a\- 
A-llAois Te Kal y fx? v avTols. On the contrary, it is natural that the reflex- 
ive should be regularly used, where other persons (&\\ovs), either expressly or 
by implication, are contrasted with the reflexive, e. g. Isocr. Aegin. 387. irefl 



456 syntax. [$ 303. 

TAeovos rip. as avrovs f)yov{Ae&a, $} robs a.Be\<pov s (tve think more of ourselves 
than of [others'] our brothers), de Pac. oi p.ev ( ®erra\o\ ) <r<plo- iv avrols iro\ep.ov- 
cw (inter se, non contra exteros hostes). With the Nom. avrot added, e. g. X. H. 
1. 5, 9. (Set) GKOirelv Uttcos roiv 'EAAtjvcoi/ p.r]Beves tffxvpol 2>criv, aAAa irdvres aa&e- 
ve?s, avrol iv eavrots <rra<naQovres. So 6p.o\oye'i<r&ai, ap.<pisl37)Te7o-&ai, Si- 
evex^V val i ivavriov elvai and ttparreiv o'cplaiv avrols or eavroTs. But 
when neither the one nor the other antithesis exists, then the reflexive and the 
reciprocal are used without distinction, often in the same sentence, merely for 
the sake of variety, e. g. X. C. 2. 6, 20. (p&ovovvres e avrovs fiio~ov<rtv &AA7J- 
Kovs. 7, 12. avrl vcpopwp.eva)V eavras r/Sews a\\r] \as edepuv. 

8. The reflexive pronoun of the third Pers. often takes the 
place of the reflexive of the first and second Person. The re- 
flexive then denotes not a definite person, but only confines the 
reflexive force to the subject; hence it has often merely the 
meaning of ZStos ; the particular person, to whom it refers, must 
be clearly denoted by the construction of the sentence. 

X. C. 1.4, 9. ovSe yap rr]v eavrov [= o~eavrov] av ye ^i>xV fyfa (his own soul ; 
aeavrov is a false reading). 2. 1, 31. rod Be iravrwv riBiarov anovapiaros iiraivov 
eavrr) s [= aavrrjs] , avfjKoos el (self praise). Andoc. de myst. avrbs, p.ev avrbv 
airdoWvov (instead of ip.avr6v). PI. Prot. 312, a. av Be ovk av alax^voio els robs 
"EAArjvas avi o v ao<piarr\v trapex^v ; Isocr. Paneg. BiereXeaap.ev aaraalaaroi irpbs 
c<p as avrovs. X. H. 1. 7, 19. evp-i\aere a (pas avrovs 7}p.aprt]K6ras ra p.e- 
yiara is &eo!<s. 

Rem. 8. In the Epic language, this usage occurs also with a<piai and '6 s 
(suus). II. k, 39S. 'bv^iv fiov\evoire jxera a<plaiv (instead of fiefr vp.lv). 
Od. t, 28. ovroi eyn've tjs yalrjs Bvvap.ai y\vKepd>repov &AAo iBea&ai. 



§ 303. II. The remaining Pronouns. 

1. OSros, ovtws, rotovros, too-ovtos, and oSe, toSe, tol- 
058 e, roarosSe, are commonly used with this distinction, that 
the first four refer to what immediately precedes, the others, to 
what immediately follows. 

Her. 6, 53. ravra (the foregoing) p.\v AaKe8aip.6vioi Xeyovai rdBe (the 

following) Be — iycb ypacpoo. Th. 1, 53. 01 /xev 8^ (Kopiv&ioi) roiavra elirov • 
— 01 Be 'A&r)valoi r 16.Be aireicptvavro. 

Remark 1. Still, not seldom ovros, roiovros, roaovros, ovrcos 
refer to what follows ; far more seldom 6 8 e, roiosBe, roaosBe, S>oe refer 
to what goes before, X. C 1. 2, 61. Aixas 6vop.aarbs eVl rovrca yiyove (by 
what follows). Th. 2, 34. £>8e p.ev SrairTovai (in reference to what precedes). 
But often 8 e, w 8 e, etc., are so used that they represent an object as present, as 
it were before our eyes, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 3, 35. iyw Be vp.lv p.ev irapaiv&v, iroiovs 
rivas XPV ^Ivai iv r$ roicpBe, alcrxwo(p.r]v av (= in praesenti rerum statu). 
Regularly, however, ovros precedes the relative clause, e. g. vvr6s ianv, 






$ 303.] pronouns. 457 

hv elSe? &v8pa. — "When ovtos and iice?vos are used in opposition to each other, 
the latter refers to what is more remote, the former, to what is nearer, though 
the reverse is sometimes the case, as with the Latin hie and Me. 

2. The adjective demonstratives are often used in poetry, 
especially in Epic, and sometimes in prose, instead of the 
adverbs here, there, according to § 264, 3. 

Od. a, 76. aXX' &ye&, TjjJ.e'is o75e •7r€pi<ppa£a>iJ.e&a irai/res [let us here deliber- 
ate). 185. vyvs Se fxoi 778' eo-T7\Kev eV aypov voacpi ttoXtjos (stood there in the field). 
Od. cr, 239. us vvv^lpos eice?vos eV avXelyo-i&vpycru' rjo-rai (there). Th. 1, 53. r]fj.as 
tov sSe ivpuTovs XafSovres xP^ (ra(T ^ as wo\e/j.iois (nos, qui HIC sumus). PI. Pp. 
327, b. 7ip6/A7]v, ottov eXt). Ovtos, €<p7], oTTKT&ev irposepxeTai (heee he comes be- 
hind thee). Hence in the Attic poets avrjp 85 e instead of iy<& t e.g. S. O. T. 
1464, and ovtos in prose instead of <rv, e. g. PL Gorg. 489, b. ovtoo-1 av))p 
ov iravveTai <pXvapu>v ; instead of av ov irauo-g ; 

Eem. 2. In the Epic language, where two sentences, whose subject is not 
doubtful, follow each other, the subject is often repeated in the second by y e 
with a certain emphasis, in order to bring out prominently the identity of the 
subject for both sentences, e. g. II. j8, 664. aX^a 5e vTJas eir-n^e, iroXvv S 3 076 
(idemque) Xabu ayelpas jS-J) (pevywv eVi ttSvtov. II. 0, 586. ""Avt'iXoxos 8' ov [xelve, 
&o6s irep ewu TroXffiiaTTjs, aXX' by ap eTpecre. So also in the Epic language and 
particularly in Her., far rarer in the Attic writers, when a series of actions fol- 
low each other, 6 5e is used with reference to the same subject, where we may 
translate 6 8e by, on the contrary, then, etc. Her. 6, 3. tt\v /u.eu yeuofj.ewt\v ai/ToTci 
cuTir)v ov uaXa e£e<pcuue, o Se eXeye <r<pt (on the contrary). X. An. 4. 2, 6. ol Se 
. . . ivTCLv&a ejxevov, ws KarexovTes rb &Kpow 01 8' Ka.Telx ov (iidemque). This 
usage very often occurs in Horn, and Her. in disjunctive clauses : 3? — 3) bye. 
Od. /3, 327. ¥1 Tivas e'/c TlvXov £|et ap.vvTopas . . . , ?) 075 kcu 27r aprnbev. Her. 
2, 173. Xa&oi ?iw %\ r 1 fiaveis, ?7 bye o.tt6ttXtiktos yev6/xevos. 

3. The use of the pronoun auTos is as follows : — 

(1) Autos properly means av tos, again he, and then self, ipse, 
e. g. 6 utos auros or (xvtos 6 vlos, the son himself. It can also 
refer to the person implied in the predicate, e. g. auros airier]. 
So auro tovto or tovt auro, hoc ipsum, this itself {not another) 
When used with exao-Tos, avros always precedes. Her. 7, 
19. $e\o)V (tiros eKaaros ra TrpoKei/xeva SuJpa Xafitiv. 

(2) In the oblique Cases, it is used for the third person of 
the personal pronouns (§ 302, 4). 

(3) In connection with the article (6 avro's), it means the 
same, idem ($ 246, 3). On the position of the article with 
anos in connection with a substantive, see $ 246, 3. 

Eem. 3. Horn, and Her. often use avr6s in the place of the reflexive pro- 
nouns of the three persons. Od. S, 247. frXXu 8' avrbv (instead of eavrhv) 

39 



458 SYNTAX. [$ oOS. 

</>o?Ti KaTaupvirrow fj'LcxKev. (, 27. col 8e 705^05 o^eS^ etfTip, « a XP^I Kdka fxep 
avT7)u (instead of ffavr^v) evvva&cu. Her. 7. 10, I. rb Se avTotffi eveffTi 
deivov, i/xe coi d'ucaiSv icrri <ppdfav (quid autem in hobis timendum insit). 

Rem. 4. From the exclusive or emphatic force of this pronoun, the following 
specific significations arise : (a) self in contrast with another, hence alone, solus 
(ipse, non alius) ; fx6vos, on the contrary, in contrast with several. X. An. 4. 7, 11. 
dXXov ouSeVa (irapaxaXecras) X w P e <* a " T °' s (goes alone); (b) eyerc and se//^ like zpse, e. g. 
AutJjs o '%(t>Kpa.Tr]s iBaKpvffev (even Socrates, Socrates himself ) ; so «:al auTos, 
ov5' abr 6 s, vel ipse, ne ipse quidem ; (c) self in contrast with foreign aid, of himself, 
etc., sponie, like ipse ; (d) in Homer especially, avr6s often forms a contrast with 
another object, expressed or understood, this object being different from that de- 
noted by abr 6s, as the soul in distinction from the body, or the body in distinction 
from the soul, e. g. II. a, 4. a b t o v s 5e kXwpia TeD%e Kvveff&iv (made them [their 
bodies, not their souls] a prey), or a man in distinction from his affairs, or asso- 
ciates, etc. Hence abros is sometimes used of a lord, master, e. g. auras ecp-n , 
so also avr6, id ipsum, often in connection with a following adjective-clause; 
(e) it is used with a proper name and an ordinal from rpiros upwards, to de- 
note the number of official associates with the person named, who is generally 
the principal one, e.g. Th. 1, 46. Kopiv&iwv ffTpaTryybs l\v aevoKXetSrjs ire /mitt 03 
abros (Xenoclides was the commander of the Corinthians with four associates). 

4. The indefinite pronoun tis when joined with adjectives, 
indefinite numerals, and adverbs, is used like the Latin quidam, 
to bring out distinctly the idea expressed by these words, some- 
times making them more, sometimes less emphatic, according 
to the meaning of the word or the connection of the discourse ; 
but with pronouns and cardinal numbers, it corresponds to the 
Latin fere {almost, about, someiuhat). 

Meyas ris awnp (some great man),[Micp6s tis, irasris, e/cacrr<fc rts, obdelsris, bxiyoi 
rives, ttoIos ris, tc6o~os ris, fipaxv T h 4yyvs ti, ffx&o'v Tt, irdvu ti, iravTaiva.ffi ti, iroXi) 
ri, obdev Ti, iraXai ti, diacpepovrcas ti. Aeivijv riva Xeyeis SvvafJLtv rrjs aperrjs 
thai (incredibilem quandam vim, a hind of incredible power). X. C. 1. 1, 1. 97 
ypacpt) KaT avTov (^caKpdrovs) TotaSe tis -tjv (haec fere, was nearly, was for 
substance this). 3. 6, 5. Xe£ov, ir6o~ai rives elffi (sc. at irpSsodoi rfj irSXei), tell 
me about how much the revenues are. So ovrw ti, or ovrca, wSe itcds (sic, fere, 
nearly thus) ; rpe?s rives (about three, some three or so). 

Rem. 5. The regular position of the pronoun t ) s, as an enclitic, is after the 
word to which it belongs, e. g. avr\? tis, na\6s tis av-np. But sometimes, in con- 
nected discourse, it precedes, e. g. ea-n roivw t 1 s eb-khris x6yos. On the rela- 
tive and interrogative pronouns, see under adjective and interrogative sentences. 

Rem. 6. The indefinite pronoun one, any one, is usually expressed in Greek : 

(a) by t\s, e. g. Ovk dv t ts evpoi dvSpa crocpcarepov (one would not find, etc.) ) 

(b) by the second Pers. Sing. Opt. with dv, and the Ind. of a historical tense 
with dv, when it is intended to represent the subject as indefinite, e. g. <pai-ns 
dv (dicas, one may, can say); vofii(ois dv (credos, one might suppose), e IS es 
dv (videres, one might have seen); riyfjffca dv (putares, etc.). The English, 
however, frequently translates the second Pers. by you, e. g. you may, can say. 



M 304 305.] pronouns. 459 

$ 304. Prospective and Retrospective Use of the 
Pronoun. 

1. The personal pronoun ov, 61, %,piv t and the demonstrative 6, t\, r6, are fre- 
quently used in Homer to direct the attention to a following substantive, and 
as it were to prepare for it. II. u, 321. avrlica rep jj.hu e-rreira tear bcp^aXfj-wv 
%Uv a%\vv, II 7] A c i 5?7 'AxtATji'. II. <p, 249. 'Lva \jliv iravtreie ir6voio, 8?oj> 
'A % t A A 77 a. 

2. In the same way, the Neut. of a demonstrative is used to prepare for a 
following substantive, or a following Inf. or entire sentence. PI. Apol. 37, a. 
rovrov rifico/xai, iv Trpvraveia <r t t 77 <r e w s (/ am deemed worthy of this, viz., a 
maintenance in the Prytaneum). X. Cy. 8. 7, 25. ri rovrov pa/cap icortpov, rov 
yrj /j.ix&yva.i; (what can be more blessed than this, to mix with the earth ?) ; PI. 
Gorg. 515, e. aAAa r65e pot etVe irrl rovrca, et Xiyovrat 'A&r]j/a7oi 5tc\ 
Tlept/cAea )8e At I ovs yeyo v 4vai. Dem. Phil. 1. 41, 5. otSev . . . rovro 
koAws iiceii/os, '6rt ravra fiev iffriv diravra ra %aj/3io S&Aa rod iro- 
\4fx.ov Kelfieva iu fiecrco. Comp. § 266, Rem. 3. 

3. On the contrary, a demonstrative pronoun, particularly avr6s, is fre- 
quently put in the same sentence after a preceding substantive or pronoun, 
partly for the sake of perspicuity, e. g. when between the Case and the verb 
which governs it, there is an unusually long intermediate clause, and partly for 
the sake of rhetorical emphasis. Such a pronoun again resumes the preceding 
substantive or pronoun, and either recalls it to the memory, or fixes the atten- 
tion particularly upon it. Her. 3, 63. 6 8e pot May os, rhu (= ov) Kap^varis 
iTrirpoiTou voiv olntow a7reSe|e, ovros ravra eVereiAaro (Magos, whom Cambyses 
appointed steward of his domestic affairs, he gave me these commands). Th. 6, 69. 
ai oi/cjot rov irpoaareiov iird\^eis XajifSauovaai, avrat virripyov epv/xa. So 
also with the personal pronouns, in which case the pronoun which resumes a 
preceding one, is regularly an enclitic form. Eur. Phoen. 507. e/x ol p.eu, el teal /Jj 
Kafr 1 'EAA^vwj/ %3wa re&pd/j.fj.z& > (educati sumus), &AA 1 ovv £vverd fioi So/ceTs \4yetv. 



CHAPTER V. 

The Infinitive and the Participle as an Object 
and Attribute. 

$ 305. A. The Infinitive. 

The Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract 
substantive idea, but differs from the substantive in the fol« 
lowing respects : 

(1) The Inf. without the article can be used only as a Nom. 



460 SYNTAX. [$ 306. 

(either as a subject, or in connection with Zotti(v) as & predicate), 
and as an object in the Accusative ; 

Subject :"E7T€Tat Tj7 apery (rw(e <r&ai eis -rov ir\elo> xpovov fxaWov, fy tt? /ca/aa 
(to 6e preserved for a longer time results rather from bravery than cowardice), X. R. 
L. 9, 1. Predicate: To dl/cnv 5i86uai irdrepov ira<rx* lv T ' L svtw, t] irotelv 
PL Gorg. 464, d. Object: BovXo/xai ypdcpeiv. See § 306. 

(2) Yet it so far retains the nature of the verb, as 

(a) It denotes, by different forms, the different circumstances 
of the action : duration, completion, futurity, and has active, 
middle, and passive forms. 

Tpd<p€iv, scribere, yeypacpevcu, scripsisse, ypdipcu, scripsisse or scribere (§ 257), 
ypd^eiv, scripturum esse ; fiovXeveabai, to deliberate or be advised, fiePovXevoScu, 
to have deliberated or have been advised, jSouAeucracrftcu, to have deliberated or to de* 
liberate, fiovXevfrrjvai, to have been advised or to be advised, etc. 

(b) It retains the government of the verb, i. e. it governs the 
same Case as its verb, e. g. Tpdcpew kTricrroXrjv 3 hnSvpLtw rrj<i 
aperr}?, fxa^ecr^ai rots 7roAe//,iois; 

(c) It has an adverb for its attributive expletive, and not, as 
in the case of an actual substantive, an adjective, e. g. KaAws 
airoSavziv (on the contrary, kciAos #avaros). 

The Inf. will first be considered without the article, and then 
with it. 



§306. 1. The Infinitive, as an Object, ivithout the 
Article. 

1. The Inf. is used, as the complementary 1 object in the 
Ace, to express something aimed at or effected: — 

(a) With verbs otivilling and the contrary (verba voluntatis), 

e. g. fiovXofJLCLl, €$eA(0, fxiXXd), llTlSv^S), a^LW, SlKCUCO, tflTU), 7rpO$VjJLOV- 

pai, 7rp63vjxo<s eipii, eVi^ci/Dco, 7reLpwpLai, fiovXevopLai, 7rapa<x/cei;a£o/i.ai, 
yx^avco/xai, roA/xto, vtto}jl£vu>, etco$a, etc. — hiop.au (to entreat), tKereuco, 
Trapawui, IttltIXXw, Trapo^vvw, 7rei$co, crvfifSovXevu), vov$erio, KeAeuto, 
Trposrarra), etc. — ecu, o-vy^oipw, a/xeXCj, etc. — SeSoiKa, <poj3ovp.ai, 

1 The verbs which take an Infinitive after them, are usually such as do not 
express a complete idea of themselves, but require an Inf. or some other con 
struction, to complete the idea. The Inf., therefore, is the complement of the 
verb on which it depends. Other verbs take a Participle for their complement 
See § 309. 



$ 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 461 

(fievyw, avaj3dWoiJLa.L, okvio, etc. — a—ayopeuu), Kareyw, kojXvio, etc. ; — 
fjavxiav, irpay^ara, aa^oXiav, oyXov 7rap£)(Q) tlvl, i£ov(Ttav SiSovat, and 
the like. 

BovXo fxai ypdepeiv. 'Eir i&v/xoo iro peveer&ai. To\/xco vir o fxev eiv 
rbv kIvZvvov. Tlapaivu eroi ypdcpeiv. 'Ay afiaWo jxai eroi airo icpiv e erdr ai. 
PL Gorg. 457, e. epo&ov/xai die\eyx* i" °~*- Phaed. 98, d. a/ie A<£ Taj as 
aKrj^ws curias Keyeiv. Dem. 01. 3. 16, 25. ris au abrbv en kwXvct e i b~evpo 
fiadi£eiv; X. Ag. 1, 7. 'AyrjcrlAaos inreerrr) acrxoAiav abra) (t£ fSaeriXel) 
irape^eiv errpareveiv eirl robs "EKkrjvas. Dem. Chers. 102, 53. i\ervx^v 
iro i o v er i v eKeivca irpdrreiv, on $ov\er at. 

Ee3iaek 1. On the difference between the Inf. and the Part, with alcrxv- 
veer&ai, aiSe7ir^ai, irepiopav, apxecr&ai, iraveiv, iravroiov yiyueerSrai, irapacrKevd(eer- 
&aty ireipaoSai, see § 311. Verbs of preventing and hindering, and the like, have 
the following constructions: (a) (not very frequent) Eipya ere arciivai. Ob 
kwKvo) ere airievai. (b) (usually) Etpyw ere /xy airievai according to § 318, 
7 : and after a preceding negation: 'Aarvdyrjs, on tieoiro abrov b Kvpos, obdeu 
iSvvaro avr 4x elv PV ov X a p' l C*°~& al > X. Cv. 1. 4, 2. according to $ 318, 9. 
(c) Tov 8 pair er eve iv (ol Seerirorai robs o'lKeras) Seer/j.o7s aire ipyovc i, X. C. 
2.1,16. (d) Has olo-kos 8vo avdpas e£ ei ro v /xtj KaraSvva i, X. An. 3. 5, 11. 
(e) (seldom) MeAAojuei/ rovrovs etpyeiv, asre /at) ovvacrdrai fiXairreiu i)fj.a.s, 
ib. 3. 3, 16. (f) Tbv ir\e7arou opuKov ruv -tyiXuiV elpyov rb /j.7] to eyybs rrjs 
Tr6\e<ns KaKovpyelv, Th. 3, 1. according to § 308, Bern. 1. (g) very fre- 
quently after a preceding negation : Ok air eixovro obS* airb rwv <piXwv rh 
fj.7] obx^ irKeoveKrelv irap abrau it eipaer&ai, X. Cv. 1. 6,32. according to 
§ 318, 9. 

Rem. 2. The verb it e t &e i v, to persuade, regularly takes for its object a sub- 
stantive-sentence, expressed by the conjunction us and a finite verb ; it takes 
the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) more seldom. X. C. 1. 1, 1. noWd/cis ibavjxaera, 
rleri nore Aoyois 'Afrnvaiovs eireierav ol ypa^/dp.evoi ~2.wKpdri}v, 60s a£ios etrj 
Savdrov rfj iroXei. 

Rem. 3. In order to express more definitely the idea of something which 
is to be done, effected, etc., the Greeks sometimes join the conjunction &sre 
with the Inf. governed by verbs of this class. Her. 7, 6. aveireiere xep^ea, 
&sre iroteeiv ravra (to do this). Sometimes, also, in order to make the pur- 
pose or object more emphatic, Situs, 6js with the Subj., Opt. or Fut. Ind., is 
used. So in Attic prose, the verbs irpo&vfxelcr&ai, SiavoeloSai, fj.7]xa-vaoSai, irapa- 
K€\evecr&ai, 8iaKe\evecrdai, irapacrKevd(ea^ai, are connected with oircos and the 
Fut. Ind. 

(b) With verbs of thinking, supposing, saying, and the con- 
trary (verba cogitandi, putandi, et dicendi), e. g. Aoyi^o-^at, 
•fp/elaSaL, vo/zi£av, ekrri'Czw, ev^ea^at, Sokclv, KLvSwevetv, etc. — Aeyetv, 
<pdvaL, etc. — dpvetcr«?at (to deny), o-ttlcttzlv, etc. 

Nojui^w a /xapr e7v (I think [to have erred] that I have erred). 'EXiri^e* 
ebrvxvo'eiu (I hope to be happy). Avr-q 7} 86£a /caAws Sok et e%€ tv. Th. 3 
74. 7] ir6\ts e kivSvu ever e iraera S ia(p&apr) vai. Aeyeo elSevai ravra (1 
say [to know] that 1 know this). 

Rem. 4. On the difference between the Inf. and Part, after the verba 

39* 



462 syntax. [$ 306. 

b.Koveiv, eiSeW, 4-rtiaraa^at, fxav&dveiv, yiyvdxrKeiv, ixifxvi]0-KeoSai, irvvSdveoSai, 
al(T&dvea&ai] SeiKvvvai, airocpaiveu', SvXovu, ayy4h\eiv, (paiveoSai, coucevcu. seo 
§ 311. 

Rem. 5. It will be seen (§ 329), that, after the verbs above mentioned, the 
object may be expressed also by a complete substantive-sentence with ws or 'on. 

(c) After expressions denoting ability, cause, power, capacity, 
ox fitness (verba facultatis), e. g. Swa/xai, Swaros, dSwa-ro?, olos r 
elfXL, e^a), (possum) — ecrrtv, Trdpccrnv, e.^ccrriv, kvecmv (licet) — 7rotw, 
$La.77paTTOfxa.L Karepyd^ojxaL, KaracrKevd^oi, etc. — Seivos (powerful, 
capable, fit), txavos, cVtT^Seios, kcu<6s, tjttuv, alVio? efyu, etc.; — after 
verbs of choosing, appointing, naming, educating, teaching. 

Avva.fji.ai iroielv ravra. Her. 2, 20. ol irrjciat. &v€(xoi elo~i atrioi ir\t)- 
frveiv rbv TrorafiSv. 7. 129. aviavv^ovs robs &\Xovs eTvai iroieei. 5, 97. 
arparrjybu airod 4 £avr es avrSov elvai MeAdv&iov. Ol6s t' el/ul iroieTv 
ravra. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. rls av aov ye 'iKauure pos ireiffai ; 3, 18. 8etu6- 
repos 8 i 8 a <r k e iv. HoiS> <re ye/Kav. AiSdo'Kco ae ypdfeiv. 

Rem. 6. On iroielv with the Part., see § 310, 4 (b). 

Rem. 7. The relation of the result, the thing to be effected, which is expressed 
by the Inf. with these verbs, is sometimes stated more definitely by adding the 
conjunction &sre. PL Prot. 348, c. aSvvarou vfxiv, &sre UparaySpov 
rovde ao<pu>rep6u nva kxiffbai. So often in Plat. Ixavbs &sre. X. Ag. 1, 
37. iiroirjffev (sc. Agesilaus), &sr duev (pvyrjs Kal Savdrav rhs iroAeis dia- 
t e A e cr a i. 

(d) The Inf. is also used after the verb ire<fiVKevai, after the 
impersonal verbs and phrases 7rposr)Kei, rrpkirzi, vvpfiaivzi, Set, ^prj, 
dvayKoiov, Slkcuov, uxfriXifxov icrnv and the like ; after verbs of 
giving, taking, going, sending, and many others ; after adjectives 
of various significations, e. g. a£ios, Si/caios (ivorthy, ivorth), ^Su?, 
paSto?, x a ^ €7 ™ ? an( 3- many others ; after abstract substantives, es- 
pecially in connection with etvai and yiyvco-Sai, as dvdyK-q, 1\ttL<s, 
(rxoXrj, woa ia-TLv, to express a purpose or determination, a result 
or effect. 

Th. 4, 61. tr4(pvKe rb avfrpanreiov dia, iravrbs lapxeiv \xkv rov e^KOvros, <pv- 
Ad<r<reo-&at Se rb iinov {men are so constituted as always to rule those who yield, 
but to guard against those ivho assail). "HKOfxev fxav&dveiv {ad discendum). 
Th. 2, 27. tois Alyivrjrais ol AaKeSaifiSvioi eSoo-av Gvp4av oik el v tca\ rr]v yr\v 
j/efiecr&ai. PI. Apol. 33, b. 6/j.oioos kcu irXovaicp Kal ir4vnri 7rope%w 4/j.avrbu 
e pear a v. X. An. 5. 2, 1. rb rjfxio'v rod ffrparei/fxaros Kar 4/Knr e "Eevocpcov 
<pv\drreiv rb o , rpar6iTe'5ov. *A.£i6s iffri &av/j.dCeo'&ai. Her. 4, 53. 
BopvoSr4uns iriveffbai rjdi<rr6s iart, (dulcissimus ad bibendum). 6, 112. r4cas 
r\v ro!o~i"lLKArt)o~i. Kal rb ovvojxa rb Mr)d<av <p6 fio s aKovcai {a terror to hear). 

Rem. 8. Homer makes the Inf. depend on adjectives also, to express the 
same relation as is denoted by the Ace. of more definite limitation (§ 279, 7). II. <c, 



§ 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 46S 

437. freieiv 8' b.vep.oio~w 6p.o?oi ('i-rnroi) (equal to the winds in speed). In a 
similar manner, the Inf. elvai in the phrase eicibv eTvai, must probably be 
explained (willing so far as it depends on my being or nature, as far as depends on 
me, i. e. actually iciliing). Her. 7, 104. eK&v re eTvai ov5''av /j.owojiax4oip.i 
(could I have my own choice, or so far as concerns me, I would not fight even in 
single combat). PL Phaedr. 252, a, obev 877 eKodcra elvai ovk airoAeiireTai 77 
ipvxv- This phrase is used but seldom in affirmative sentences. 

Rem. 9. As the poets say fravfia I8ea&ai (a wonder to see), so also in prose, 
the complementary Infinitive 6 pap, el so pay and ide?v, are sometimes 
joined with verbs of appearing and showing one's self. X. Cy. 5. 4, 11. xre eirava- 
Seaorofievos ya, oirdlos tls (paivy I8e?v 6 roiavTrju tyvxw ^X°° v (-^ came t° see 
what sort of a looking person you are, you, who have such a soul). 

Rem. 10. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that, instead of the Pass. Inf., it 
commonly uses the Inf. Act. or Mid., with the adjectives mentioned under (c) 
and (d), e. g. Swar6s, a^ios, etc., and with substantives e. g. &avp.a, <pofios, and 
with verbs of giving, etc. Such Infinitives, the English translates both actively 
and passively, e. g. Tavra pdSid eari p.a&e?v (these things are easy to learn or be 
learned). KaAos itrrw I5e2v (pulcher est visu, he is beautiful to see or to be seen). 
Th. 1, 38. a|tos &av p.dcrai. PI. Phaed. Aoyos dvvarbs Kar av orjo- ai (capable 
of being understood). The active subject of the Inf. is easily supplied, in all 
examples of this kind, e. g. he is beautiful foe. us to see. A Dat. is often ex- 
pressed with such an Inf., e, g. PI. Rp. 599, a. pdSia iroieiv p.7]v eioori rty 
aA7)&eiav. So ^ocKpdrys iraci irapeix^v eavrbv epcarav (he yielded himself to 
all to question, i. e. he permitted all to question him). 

Rem. 11. Prom the use of the Inf. after verbs of willing, wishing, entreati'\g, 
and imploring and the like, the following peculiarities in the use of the Inf. we 
to be explained : 

a. The Inf. is very frequently used in the Epic writers instead of the second 
person Imperative, sometimes also instead of the third person ; instead of the 
second person, not seldom also in other poets, and even likewise in Herodotus 
and in the Attic prose- writers. The Inf. must then be considered as the object 
depending on the Imp. of a verb of willing, which is to be supplied, e. g. ed-eAe. 
Hence when predicative expletives are joined with the Inf., these, inasmuch as 
they refer to the subject <ru contained in the omitted Imp., are put in the Xom. 
The Imp. is also often interchanged, with the Inf. Od. a, 290, sqq. voo-tt}- 
o~as 877 eireira (piAnv is iraTpib'a yaiav Gr\p.d re et xeOou, /cat iirl KTepea KT6- 
p e t | a i . . . ical avepi /lyrepa oovvai (and then having returned to your dear father- 
land, heap up a mound, etc.). II. &, 75. v/ie?s 8' &AAo&ev &\Aos ip-nrveiy e^eeo-<nv. 
IL £, 89—92. 7] 8e . . ot^aaa KAyTdi &vpas tepo?o So/jloio, ireirAov . . &eivai 'AStj- 
vains iir\ yovvacriv t)vk6ploio. Her. 6, 86. av 877 p.ai /cat to. xp'hl lara 8e|o(, koL rdSe 
ra av/xfioAa aco^e Aafioov ts 8' av ix° 3V rav ^ ra OLirairey, tovtu> airodovvai (ei 
redde). Th. 5, 9. av 8e, KAeapt'Sa, al<pvidioos ra.s trvAas avoi^as iir e K&e7v 
Kal ivelyea&ai ws Ta^'CTa ^vp.p.i^ai. 

b. When the Inf. refers to the third Pers., its subject as well as the accom- 
panying expletives of the predicate, are commonly in the Ace. This Ace. 
with the Inf. is to be considered as the object of a verb of iciliing, which is to 
be supplied, e. g. evxo/xat, 8<fc, iroUi, or of a verb denoting what ought to be, must 
be, e. g. xWi 5^; so with wishes, entreaties, precepts and compacts. II. 77, 179, sq. 
a>5e 8e tis elireaicev, Iduu els ovpavbv evpvv Zed irdrep, 77 A? aura AaxeiV, 77 
TvSeos vi6v, ?) avTov &a<ri\r\a iroAvxpviToio MvKTjvns ! (grant or cause that 
either Ajax may obtain it by lot, etc.). Aescli. Suppl. &eol iroAlrai, p.7) p.e SovAeias 
TvxeTj/. X. Veil. 6. 11. rbv 8e nvvny er-n v ex^vra 4£ievai eAacppav 
ea&rJTa iirl rb Kwnyeo-iov, rbv 8e apKvupbv eireo-^ai. 

c. Hence the Inf. is sometimes used in reference to the first and second Pers , 
in questions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. & fiaaiAev, Kirepov Aeyeiv irphs 



464 syntax. [§ 307. 

ae ra vottov rvyxdvoo, % ffiyav kv rep irapeSvTL xp^VJ {shall I speak or be Si« 
lent?). Od. «:, 431. S SetXoi ir6a t/xevj ri Kaicwv 1/ji.eipeTe tovtwv ; {whither to 
go, i. e. whither are you to go ?). 

d. Finally, the Inf. is used instead of the Opt., with al ydp, ej&e, as the ex- 
pression of a wish. Od. &>, 375, sq. at yap, ZeO re irdrep . . , toTos ewj/ Tot 
X&'^s eV i)jj.erepotat dS/xoKri, reuxe' exw &jj.ohtlv, i (p e &T d/xe v ai Kal aftvveiv 
&v5pas lAirncrrripas. (instead of icpeffTairjv k. ap-vvoipn). 



$ 307. Noon., Gen., D at., and Ace. with the Infinitive. 

1. Most verbs which take the Inf. have, in addition to this 
object, also a personal object, which is put in the Case that the 
verb requires, e. g. Aeo/xai crov eA^eiv. ^,v fx/3ov\evoi croi 
crwcfjpovuv. 'EiTTOTpvvoi ore pid^ecrSaL. 

Remake 1. So also /ceAeveii/, which signifies to impel, to urge, hence to 
command {jubere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Ace. and the 
Inf., e. g. /ceAeuw ere ypdcpeiv {jubeo te scribere). 

2. When predicative expletives, consisting of adjectives or sub- 
stantives, and referring to the personal object of the govern- 
ing verb, are joined with the Infinitive, they are either put by 
attraction hi the same case as the personal object, or in the 
Accusative without attraction. 

(a) Gen. with Inf. Aeo/xai gov ir po&v/xov elvai {I beg you to be zealous). 

Atonal ffov tt p6&v(xo v elvai. X. H. 1. 5, 2. Kvpov 
45eovTO us it po&v /a or dr ov irpbs tov TrStefiov yev4cr&ai 
{begged C. to be as zealous as possible in the war). Her. 6, 
100. ""k&rjvaitov ederj^no'av acpiai fior]&ovs yevea&cu 
{requested the Athenians to aid them). If the Gen. is fol- 
lowed by the Inf. accompanied by a more definite ex- 
pletive, this expletive is always put in the Ace, e. g. 
Lys. 118. Seo/xat vjxtov Karatynfpio'aoSai ®€Ofj.wf}o~Tov, iv- 
&v {xov/xivovs, offos fxoi 6 ayuu icriv {I pray you to 
condemn Th., considering, etc.). Th. 1, 120. avo pS>u dya 
fr W v i(TTiv, aS iKov/jLevovs e| ccp^jj/ns iraXtfXfZv {it is the 
characteristic of brave men, lohen injured, to exchange peace 
for war). 

(b) Dot. with Inf. 2u,aj8ouAeu&> a 01 ir po&v fxq> elvcu {I advise you to be zeal' 

ous). ~2,vfxl3ov\evci} o~oi irpo&v /aov dual. X. An. 2. 1,2. 
eSo£e ro?s ruv 'EWrjVtoV err pa.Tt\y o?s trucr/c evaaa/j.' 
evois a elxov Kal e£o7rAt<r ap.£v 01s irpo'Uvai. X. 
Hipparch. 7, 1. iravrl irposr]Kei &pxovn (ppovific* 
ehai {it becomes every ruler to be prudent). X. An. 1. 2, 1 
Hej/fo 7}kziv irapyyyeite \afi6 vra robs tftvdpas {con* 



$ 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 465 

manded Xenias to come, having taken men). 7. 1, 21. vvv 
cr o i eletrTif & v 8 p I yevea&ai (you can show yourself a man). 
X. Cy. 2. 1. 15. e£e(rnj> Vfx7v el /SouAecTi&e, Xafiovrai 
oir\a ds KivSwov ifAfialveiv. 
(c) Ace. with Inf. 'Ettot pvvca ere ir p 6 & v /a o v Hvai. KeAevcw or e lrp6&V' 
p.ov elvou. 

Rem. 2. The Ace. in the examples under (a) and (b), may be explained by 
considering the object of the governing verb, e. g. Zio/xai v/xuy, as being at the 
same time the subject of the Inf., i. e. this object stands in a two-fold relation, 
being both the object of the governing verb, and the subject of the Inf. (see 
Rem. 3),e. g. Aeo/xat v\xuv \vp.as\ fioyfrovs yeviaSai (I beg you that you will aid). 

Rem. 3. Verbs which take the simple substantive object, in the Gen. or 
Dot., sometimes take, in the construction with the Inf., this object in the Ace, 
the object of the governing verb and the subject of the Inf. being united in 
one. This construction is used when the ichole action of a person and not the 
person himself, is made specially prominent. Lys. Fragm. S. 3, p. 144. deo- 
fiai oZv v/xas avyyvw/j.r]v %x^ lv (I beg therefore that you would pardon). Th. 4, 
97. ir poayo pevco avrovs e'/c rov iepov air iovt as aircxpepeoSai. rd (Tcpdrepa 
avTwv (instead of aureus amovcriv airo(p.), I give orders that they, going out of the tem- 
ple, should carry their effects with them. So irapayyeWco, dirayyeAAa), TrposTaTTco, 
dia.Ke\evofjLal <re airievai. X. C. 4. 7, 1. ^coKpdrrjs avr dpneis ev reus TrposrjKov- 
arcus irpd^ffiv avr ovs (tov s 6 pnXovvr as avraj) elvai in e /J.eA€?T o. So also 
the verbs elire?i/, \4yeiu, <p pd(eiv, epeav elv in the sense of jubere, are con- 
structed with the Ace. and the Inf., in the Attic poets. S.Ph. 101. \4yca cr £y& 
5o A<w ^iXoktt]TT]V Aa/3 etV. Also ir po si] zee i, it p 4 it e i, e|ecrTz, av p. /3 alv e i, 
£vp.(pop6v iarr i with Dat. or Ace. with Inf., 5e?, XPV (§ 2 "9> Rem. 4). The 
Ace. is necessary, when the statement in the sentence does not refer to a 
definite person, but is altogether general in its nature. PI. Ion. 539, e. ovk av 
•npi-noi ye err i\r)o~ fiova ehat paipab'bj' &i>8pa (it ivov.ld not be fitting that 
<x rhapsodist should be forgetful). 

3. Besides the case already mentioned, the Ace. icith the 
Inf. is used in Greek, as in Latin, in the following case also. 
When a subject with its predicate, as l O dya^o? dvrjp evSai/xovet, 
is made the object of our thought or will, the subject is put in 
the Ace. (rbv aya%v dvSpa) and the predicate in the Inf. (erScu- 
fjLovetv, e. g. No/Ai£w tov ayaSbv avSpa evSaijaovet v (Ibelieue 
that the good man is happy). If the predicate is an adjective, 
participle, or substantive with cTwu yiyveo-Sat, etc. ($ 240, 2), as 
r O dya#os avrjp evSaifxwv icrriv, then these words also are put in 
the Ace., e. g. No/v.i£co tov dyad-bv dvSpa euSai/xova etvat. 

4. But when the subject of the governing verb is at the same 
time the subject of the Inf. also, the subject of the Inf. is not 
expressed in Greek, as it is in Latin, by the Ace. of a personal 
pronoun, but is wholly omitted ; and when adjectives or sub- 
stantives stand with the Inf. as expletives of the predicate, 
they are put, by attraction, in the Nom. 



466 SYNTAX. [$ 30? 

Ofopai apaprelu {I believe I have eired, or that I have erred, credo me errasse). 
Qtei a/xapreiv (you think that you have erred). Oferai apapreiv. Olo/.L€&a ap.aprsiu, 
OHo/xai ev5alp.cou elyai (I think lam happy, or that lam happy, credo me boatum 
esse). OUi e vSaifxuv dual. Oferai svSai/xcou eluai. OlS/x&a €vSalp.ou e s 
dual. 'O ffrparriybs e<pi) irp6§vfxos dual iTriftow&du. 

Rem. 4. If, however, where the subject of the governing verb and of the Inf. 
is the same, the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is particularly 
the case in antitheses, then the Ace. with the Inf. is used, as in Latin, e. g. Her. 
2. 2. ol Alyvirrioi iu6p.i£ou ewi/Tous irpurovs yeueo~&ai irduroou au&p&iroou (se, non 
alios homines). 1, 34. KpoTaos iu6/j.t£e koovrbu dual irdurcou oKfiidorarou. But 
instead of eavr6u, where there is a contrast between persons, avr6s (== se 
ipsum) is likewise used, by attraction. Her. 7, 136. aepfys ovk Z<p-n 6/j.oios ea-ea&ai 
AaKefiaifjLOvioiori' Keiuovs /uev yap criryxeat to irdurocu aufrpcbrrwu v6/xifia, airoic- 
r eiuaur as K-hpvKas, avrbs (ipsum instead of se ipsum) 5e ravra ov iroL-fio-tiu. 
Th. 4, 28. KAeW ovk e<pr) avros, aAA 1 £kziuou (Nuciav) ffrpar-nydu. So also by 
means of attraction the personal pronouns iyd>, av, yp-eTs, vp.us, ff<pds, are 
joined with the Inf. 'E-rrofAuvu croi . . i) p.))u iyco fiovtecr&ai au /j.era <rov (airo- 
Saudu), I swear to you that I ivould rather, etc., X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. El o5fecr&e XaA/ciS- 
4as rrju c EAAa5a crctxretu, vp.e7s 5' airodpdo-ea&ai ra Trpdy/xara, ovk op&oos otecr&e. 
Dem. Ph. 3, § 74 {if you think that the Chalcidians will save Greece, and that 
you will escape the trouble of it, etc.). (Ol iu 2a^w Zcpaaav) ttSAiu ccpiaiu virapxew 
~2,djxov ovk ao~Sevr\ . . Kal dvuar cor e poi dual o~(pe?s . . rropifea&ai ra iirir^deia 
rS>u iu rfj 7rJAet, Th. 8, 76. — Sometimes the enclitic pronouns are used without 
any special emphasis. PI. Pp. 400, b. ol/xal p. e a.K7]Ko4vai. — When the governing 
verb has an object, and this object is at the same time the subject of the Inf. also, 
then the Inf. merely (without the Ace.) is used, but the predicative expletives 
are put in the same case as this object. OuS' au rovrots iirio-revou e/t- 
uSuois eVecrfrcu, X. Cy. 3. 3, 55 (/ would not even trust these that they will be 
steadfast). OuSei/1 auSrpwTroou ixpei/xrjv au ovre fi4\Tiou ov& tjSlou ifxov /8e- 
fSiooK e uai, X. C. 4. 8, 6 (to no one ivould I grant that he had lived better, etc.). 
When the object of the governing verb is also the object of the Inf., this also is 
used only in the first place, but is omitted in the second. IwKpdr-ns, Z<pn 6 
Karfiyopos, robs irarepas Trpoirr}\aKi£eiu eSiSacr/ce, ireiSoou p.\u robs avuouras 
avrQ> cro<pcorepovs 7roie7u rSiu irarepau, X. C. 1.2,49 (persuadens discipidis suis, se 
EOS sapientiores reddere patribus). 

5. When the governing word is an oblique Case of a parti- 
ciple, the predicative expletives which are connected with the 
Inf., are put, by attraction, in the same Case as that participle. 

PI. Apol. 21, b. ?jA&ou i-rri riua rcou Sokovutcou aocpwv dual (veniebam ad 
aliquem eorum, qui se sapientes esse opinabantur). Her. 1, 176. rwu uvu AvkIcou 
<f>afi4ucou aauSioou dual ol iroKkoi dcri eVrjAuSes (eorum Lyciorum, qui se 
XANTHIOS ESSE dicebant). X. Cy. 6. 1, 34. (Kvpos apeyihaaev) eVl tw Kpeiro- 
vi rod epwros <pdo~Kovri dual (at the one affirming that he was above the influ- 
ence of love. 

6. The Ace. with the Inf., like the Inf. alone, is used after the 
following classes of verbs and expressions : (a) of ivitting and 
the contrary [$ 306, 1, (a)] ; (b) of thinking, believing, saying 
p 306, 1, (b)] ; (c) of causing, choosing, appointing, naming 



307.] 



NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 46 7 



[$ 306, J, (c)] ; (d) after impersonal verbs and expressions sig- 
nifying must, ought, slwuld, it Jiappem? e. g. Set, rrpos-qKei, rrpkiz^ 
e^ecrrtv, iirieiKts, kolXov, kolkov (etc.) icTTW, (TVfJi(3aiveL. 

'AffTvdyTjs fiovXo fi€Pos rbv iraida us TJSzaTa o enrveiv Trposrjyayeu avTu 
•ravTolaird fip&piaTa, X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. N o/ii£& v pi as ipiol slvai Kal irarpiSa Kal 
•ty'iAovs kgI (rvfx/jjxxovs, X. An. 1.3, 6. 'E\tt(£u eiteivovs eAfretV irpbs ah 
ftaAAoy, ^ irpbs ifie, X. Cy. 2. 4, 15. Tbv fiMr&bv viri <r%v elre avrols oAt- 
yuv 7)jxsp€)V eKirAewy it ap4<r e<r&ai, X. An. 7, 5, 9. Tbv pikv KaXbv tca- 
ya&bv &vopa evoaifieva zlvai (p-np-i rbv koX irovnpbv &&\iov, PI. 
Gorg. 407, e. K pet Troy (sc. io~Ti) xrbv voXkots oiKovvTa acrcpaXus apKovvra 
%x eiu y % ia6 v ov o lairoo [X€VQV to, r&y itoKituv 4nriKivovvws irduTa /c e /c t 7) o* - 
&ai, X. C. 2. 3. 2. 

Rem. 5. "With the impersonal verbs and expressions above mentioned, the 
Ace. with the Inf. is not to be regarded as the grammatical object, but as the 
grammatical subject of the sentence ; but logically^ i. e, in respect to the sense, 
the Ace. with the Inf. must even here be regarded as the object, and the im- 
personal expressions as transitive verbs, e. g. Aoice? /xoi (= vo/xi(u) Kdpov 
<ro<pd>Ta.Tov yei'4<r&au Thus it can also be explained why the Greeks and Lat- 
ins in quoting a phrase, e. g, zvSaipiova thai, felicem esse, fSaai\4a dvai, regem 
esse, use this construction. 

Rem. 6. The Greeks are fond of changing the impersonal construction into 
the personal, by elevating the object into a subject, making the impersonal 
expression personal, and referring it to the person of the subject. By this 
construction, the subject is rendered prominent ; while in the construction of 
this Ace. with the Inf. the whole idea of the sentence is made the principal 
thing. This is the case: (a) with \4yerai, dyy4\\erai, dp. oXoyelr a i 
and the like; (b) with oeKtt, it seems ; (c) with 0-vp.fSaivzi, accidit ; where 
this last verb is used personally, the subject stands before it, while with the 
Ace. and the Inf., it follows the verb; (d) in the phrases oittaiov, d\iov, 
iiri8o£ev, ovvar sv, a p.7] x av ° u > x a ^ e7rov 4xttiv, etc.; (e) in the phrase 
Toaovrov $4 a with the Inf. followed by Sne with the Inf. or Ind. (tantum 
<ibest, ut — ut) so far is it from, and iroKKov Sew with the Inf. 

A4y erai rbv fiao~i\4a aire<pvyeiv and A. e y erai 6 fiacr i\ev s diro(pvye7i/, 
X. Cy. 5. 3, 30. 6 'Aetrvp 10 s els ttjv X c *-'P au 4p.f5d\\eiv ayy4\\erai. Her. 
3, 124. e8(JKet ei rbv Trar4pa \ovo~Sai p.eu virb rod Aios, XP' iea & aL °* ^ iro T °u 
x H\tov. X. An. 3. 1, 21 . \€\v<r&Qt p.oi d o Ke? Kal i] 4-Keivuv v f$ p i s Kal 7] 7) p. €T 4 pa 
■viro^'ia. PI. Phaed. 74, a. dp' ov v ov Kara irdvra ravra <rv p. ft aiv e i t yju av d- 
fiU7](Tiy zlvai jxlv def o/xoiuv ktA. 67, c. k dSra,p<r is elvai ov tovto £u /nfiaiv e i. 
— At Kai6s ei/Ai tovto irpaTTeiv instead of SiKaiov eVrt fxe tovto irpaTTeiv. A ' - 
KaiLs elpii elvai ikev&epos. Her. 6, 12. iirido^oi Toovrb tovto Treicrea^al eiai. 
X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. a|to i y4 t i<rp.ev tov yeyevf]\x4vov irpdyp-aros tovtov diroKavaai ti 
aya&ov. Isocr. Paneg. /6, 168. toctovtov 5 4ovo~iv i\ee?v, wsre Kal p.d\\op 
Xaipovoiv iirl to?s aWrjTuoy KaKoTs (so far are they from pitying, that they rather 
■rejoice even, etc.). 

Rem. 7. The personal construction with the verbs 8ok6?j/, ioiK4i/ai, \4yeoSai. 
and the like, extends also to clauses with iu, expressing comparison, as is the 
case in Latin Avitli ut videor, ut videris, etc., instead of ut videtur. PI. Rp. 426. 1>. 
ovk iiraiveTTjs el, 4<pr\v iyu>, us eoiKas, tojv toiovtwv dvSpwv (you do not praise, as 
it seems [instead of as you seem] such men). X. An, 1, 10, 18. i}<rav 8' avTai, is 
4\4yovT o, TtTpaKoaiai ap.a£ai (these chariots were four hundred, as it was said). 
<6. 3, 25. ol iroA4puoi o4, u>s y rjpuy ib~6K0vv, tovto Setcrcu^res dirijtJbov. 



468 syntax, [$ 308. 

Rem. 8. On the Ace. with the Inf. in exclamations, see § 308, Rem. 2. On 
'6ri and &s after verba sehtiendi and dicendi, see § 329. 



§ 308. II. Infinitive with the Article. 

1. The Inf. with the article is treated in all respects like a 
substantive, and, indeed, is such, since, by means of the article, 
it can be declined through all the Cases, and is capable of ex- 
pressing all the relations, which are indicated by the Cases of 
the substantive with and without prepositions. On the contrary, 
it here also, as in the Inf. without the article [§ 305, (2)], re- 
tains the nature of a verb. 

(a) Tb ypdcpeiv, rb ypdtyai, rb yeypacpevai, rb ypdtyeiv. (b) Tb iiriarro- 
\t]V ypdcpeiv, rb rrjs aperi)s 4in^vfj.e7v, rb ro?s iroAsfxlo i s fcaxecr&cM. 
(c) Tb Ka\a>s ypdcpeiv, rb Ka\S>s airo&avelv {honorable death). Yet pronouns 
in the Neut. Sing., as attributive adjectives, are joined with the Inf., e. g. Plat. 
avrb rb aTro&vr)crKeiv. By prefixing the article, whole sentences can be 
represented as one extended substantive-idea. 

2. When the Inf., whether as a subject or object, has a sub- 
ject of its' own and predicative expletives, both the subject and 
expletives, as in the case of the Inf. without the article, are put 
in the Ace, because the Inf., even as a subject, is considered 
dependent (§ 307, Rem. 5). When, however, the subject of the 
Inf. is not different from the principal subject of the sentence, 
it is not expressed, and the predicative expletives are put, by 
attraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the 
sentence, i. e. in the Norn. 

(a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. rb afxaprdveiv av&pdirovs 
ovras ovdev, ol/xai, SavjAaffrov (that men constituted as they are should err, is not 
strange) ; here rb a/xaprdveiv which is the subject of iffrl, has avUtpcbirovs for its 
own subject, and ovras as its predicative expletive. 7. 5, 82. ov rb /xr) Xa- 
j8e2V ra aya&a. oxirca ye xa\<zir6v, wsirep rb Xaf3 ovr a err eprj&rjvat Xv- 

7V7]pOV. 

(b) Genitive : (a) as the object of verbs and adjectives or as an attributive 
of a substantive. X. An. 1. 3, 2. KX4ap%os jxiKpbv 4%4(pvye rod fir] Karairer- 
poo&rjvai (just escaped being stoned to death). Cy. 1. 4, 4. oos 8e irporjyev 6 
%p6vos avrbv (rbv Kvpov) cvv rca fxeye&ei ets 8>pav rod rr p 6 sr) f3 ov yevea&ai 
(as time advanced him to the period of [becoming a man] manhood) ; here the Inf 
yeveor&ai, which is used as an object in the Gen., has its predicative expletive 
t:p6s7)l3ov in thence. 1. 5, 13. ri ovv iariv t) rod aX4 £ao~&ai dLKaiortpov, § 



$ 308.] INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 469 

rod toij (plXois api\yeiv tcdXXiov ; C. 1. 2, 55. 'ScoKpdrrjs irapeKaXei eTrtfie?^ 
fio~draL rod as (p pov ip ar bt ov eTvai /col a cpeXijxwr ar ov. "Very fre- 
quently rod, rod fjL-f] is used to denote a purpose, object : in order that, in order 
that not [§ 274,. 3, (a)], since by the language, as is frequently the case, that 
which calls forth the action, is substituted for that which is to be done, or for 
the result. Th. 1, 4. Miv&s to Xtjo-tikoi/ Ka&ypei e/c rrjs &aXd(ro-ns rov ras 
irpos6dovs jxaXXov lev at avrip (in order that his revenues might come in bet- 
ter). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ot rcov /3a<nAeW olvoxooi els rrjv apiarepav (oXvov) eyxedp.e- 
voi Karafipocpovcn, rov Si), el (pap/Aana eyx^oiev, fxr] Xvar ir eXe?v avrois (in 
order that it may not be well for them, if they mingle poison with it). 6, 40. rod fx-rj 
5 ia(pevyeiv rbv Xdyav e/c rwv Slktvwv o-kottovs Kahtarr]s. (/3) With prepo- 
sitions, e. g. & v r i, instead of, or in the sense of the Latin tantum abest, ut — ut, 
4 k, from, in consequence of, /nerd, in connection with, irp6, for, ire pi, in order that, 
sspecially eVe/co and virep in connection with /ir), in order that not, in order 
not; also &vev and %cop:s, without, /xexpt(s), until. Th. 1, 69. avrl rod 
iireX&e?v (invadere) avrol ajxvvecrSrai fiovXecr&e p.aXXov eVicWas. X. H. 3. 
4, 12. 6 iAyrjaiXaos avrl rov eirl Kapiav levai, ev&vs ravavrla airocrrptyas 
hel &pvyias eiropevero. Hier. 4, 3. Sopvcpopovcriv eirl robs natiovpyovs virep rod 
p. 7] dev a rwv ttoXitgov fiialcp fravdrco air o^rv^ff /ce iv. 

(c) Dative : (o) As the object of single verbs and adjectives, e. g. airiffrco, 
irLcrreva, eoiKa, o/jloios, avavrios, very often as the instrumental Dat. X. Ap. 14. 
amarovo'i r$ epie r er 1 firj cr &ai inrb daip.6vcav (do not believe in my having been 
honored, that I have been honored). Pl.Phaed. 71, c.rcp £rjv earl ri evavriov, wsivep 
Ti? eyp-nyopevai rb Ka&evdetv ; ( is there something opposite to living, as sleeping 
is to waking). X. Hier. 7, 3. 5o/cet rovrcp biacpepetv avrjp rcov &XX&ov (docov, rip 
ri/jLTJs op eyea&ai (seems to differ from other animals in this, that). (/3) With 
prepositions: iv, in, eirl, on the condition that, in order that, because, irpSs, 
besides. PI. Gorg. 456, e. Trape8oo~av eirl r $ 8 iicaiw s xP 7 ) cr ^ al rovrois 
(ro7s oirXois) irpbs robs iroXep.iovs (they put them [ajins] into their hands in order 
that they might use them aright). S. Aj. 554. ev r cp <p p ovetv — ifjdio-ros fiios. 

(d) Accusative : (a) Sometimes as the object of transitive verbs. PI. Gorg. 
522, e. avrb rb air o&vt)<r iceiv obhels (pofieirai (no one fears death itself). 
(/3) With prepositions: eirl, els, irp6s, in order that, in order to, in relation to, 
Kara, in relation to, irapd, in comparison, especially did, on account of , because 
that. X. C 1. 2, 1. ^wKpdrrjs irpbs rb fierpiuv 8e?o-&ai ireTraibevp.evos (r)v) 
(was trained to have moderate desires). Cy. 8. 1,3. pieytcrTov aya&bv rb ireiStapx^v 
(paiverai els rb /cot an parr eiv to ay aha. With attraction : X. Ven. 12, 
21. 7] aperr) iravraxod irdpecm. bib. rb etvai a&dvaro s (on account of its 
being immortal, because it is immortal) ; here abdvaros is attracted into the 
case of aperj), instead of being in the Ace. Cy. 1. 4, 3. 6 Kdpos 5 1 cc rb (/) t A • 
ua&7)S eluai iroXXa robs irap6uras awrjpdra, Ka\ b'cra avrbs vn &XXwv (sc. d//7}- 
Doyraro), Sia. rb ayx'^ovs elvai raxb aireKplvero (because he ivas fond of 
learning). 

Remakk 1. Many verbs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con- 
structed with an Inf. merely, sometimes take also the Inf. Avith the article r 6, 

40 



470 syntax. [$ 309. 

even when they would have their object, if a substantive, in the Gen. The 
addition of the article gives greater emphasis to what is expressed by the Inf. 
X. C. 3. 6, 6. t& tt\ov(t loot e pav tt)u tt6Aiv iroistv a.va/3 a kov /x e&a. Th. 3, 1. 
rbv ttXsIcttov ojxi'kov t&v -tyiX&v elpyov rb jx^ ra iyyvs rrjs ttq\€cos tcaicovp- 
yeiv (etpyetv nvo. twos). But when a preposition precedes an Inf., the article 
can never be omitted, because then the Inf. becomes an actual verbal substan- 
tive. 

Rem. 2. As the Ace. of a substantive, so also* the Inf. with the Ace. 'of the 
article, is used in exclamations and questions implying indignation. In poetry, 
however, the article is sometimes omitted with the Inf. X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. iicelvos 
iravb avia&eis eiffe Trpbs kavr6v Trjs rix^is, rb i/xe vvv KArj&evTa Sevpo 
t i»x e ?* • {th ai 1 h ave J ust n0l ° oeen called hither !). "Without the article : Aesch. 
Eum. 835. ifxe Tra&elv T&de, <ptv, i f&e iraAo.locppova KaTa yav ot/cezV, drie» 
rov, (pev, fivo-os ! 

Rem. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in which 
the article t6 is placed before the Inf. dvai which stands in connection with an 
adverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as adverbial 
Accusatives. See § 279, Rem. 10. The Inf. elvai denotes a state or condition. 
e. g. rb vvv elvai, the present state, condition, and as an adverbial expression, 
with respect to, or according to the present state of affairs, pro praesenti temparis 
conditione ; TbT-hfiepov elvai, pro hodierni diei conditione. X. An. 1. 6. 9. 
rb Kara tovtov elvai (so far as he is concerned). H. 3. 5, 9. rb /xev eir* 
c nelvo is elvat airoXiiKare (so far as it depends en them). 



$309B. The Participle. 

1. The Participle represents the idea of the verb as an adjective 
idea, and is like the adjective, both in its form and in its attrib- 
utive use ; for it has three genders, and the same declension as 
the adjective, and cannot, more than the adjective, be used in- 
dependently, but must always depend upon a substantive, and 
hence agrees with it in Gender, Number, and Case. The Par- 
ticiple denotes either an active or passive condition, but the 
adjective, a quality. 

2. On the contrary, the participle differs from the adjective, 
In retaining, like the Inf., the following properties of the verb : 

(a) The participle has different forms to denote the different 
circumstances of the action : duration, completion, and futurity, 
e. g. ypoicfioiv, writing, yeypa^cos, ypauf/as, one who has written, ypdiff 
w, one who will write (§ 257, Rem. 3) ; 

(b) The participle has Act., Mid,, and Pass, forms, e. g. ypdty- 
et?, ypa\]/apL€vos, ypacfiels. 

(c) The active and middle (deponent) participle governs the 
same Case as its verb, e- g. ypdcposv e7rtcrroA^v, l-mSvprnv r^s 
ctp €7-775, ^a^o/xevos to is 7ro A,e/u,iois. 



$ SiO.j THE PARTICIPLE. 471 

3. The participle is used as follows : — 

(a) Either as an immediate attributive qualification of a sub- 
stantive, e. g. 6 ypdcpwv 7rats or 6 irais 6 ypdcfxDv, the ivriting 
boy ; or in connection with chat, as a predicate ($ 238, Rem. 5), 
e. g. to p6$ov avSovv Icttlv {the rose is blooming}. 

(b) As the complement of the verb, e. g. 'OpS tov ttcuSo, 
rpe^ovra. 

(c) To denote such an attributive qualification of the sub- 
stantive as is expressed in English by placing the participle 
after the substantive, or by the relative who, which, and the 
verb, e. g. Yvvv, ns opvtv ef^e koS €KacrT??v rj/xepav wov avrrj tlktov- 
aav (a hen laying, or which loAd an egg daily). 

(d) To denote, adverbially, subordinate qualifications of the 

principal action, e. g. Kvpos yeAwv efrrev (said laughing, or 

laughingly). 

Eemaek. As the use of the participle, mentioned under 3, (a), is explained 
in §§ 264, 1. and 238, Rem. 7, and as No. (c) has no further difficulty, only the 
usage mentioned under 3, (b) and (d) now remains to be considered. 

§310. 1. The Participle as the complement of the verb. 

1. As the participle is an attributive, and consequently ex- 
presses an action as already attached or belonging to an object, 
only those verbs can take a participle for their complement 
which require, as a complement, an action, in the character of 
an attribute, so attached or belonging to an object, that this 
object appears in some action or state. The action or state de- 
noted by the participle is, therefore, usually prior to that denoted 
by the verb with which it is connected, sometimes coincident. 

2. The construction is here evident. The Participle agrees 
in Case with the substantive-object of the principal verb, 
this object being in the Case which the principal verb re- 
quires. 'Akotjoj ^aiKpaTOvs and rjKOvcrd 7tgt€ 2 UiKpdro vs vrepl 
<£iA.a>v StaXeyop.evov. Xcu'pco o~ot and yulpo) crot iXSovri. 
0,o S avSpunrov and op to dvS ponrov Tpe^ovra. 

3. But when the subject of the principal verb is at the same 
time its object also, as OlSa (eyo>) ip.avrbv Svrjrbv ovra, then the per- 
sonal pronoun, which would denote the object, is omitted, and 
the participle is put, by means of attraction, in the same Case 



472 SYNTAX. f$ 310. 

as the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the Nom. (Comp. 
$ 307, 4), e. g. oTSa Svrjrbs wv. For more examples, see No. 4. 

Remark 1. Yet the Ace. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the 
object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is to be 
made emphatic. Comp. § 307, Rem. 4. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. ovx, c* Kpdrruv fjSei &v, 
ravra irpovKaKelro robs avvSvras, ciAA 5 drrep ei> fjdei kavrbv H]rrova our a, ravra 
e|/)pX e « 5, 10. TrepielSov avrovs yhpa. atvvdrovs ys vop.4 vovs (they permitted 
themselves to become enfeebled by old age). 

Rem. 2. With avvo t S a, crvyyiyvdoo* /cw e fiavrdp, the participle can 
either refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun 
which stands with the verb ; if the participle refers to the subject, it is put in 
the Nom., if to the pronoun, in the Dat., e. g. avvoiSa ((rvyyiyvwaKU)) £p.avr(p eu 
iroiTjaas or orvvoiZa £p.avrw ev iroi-fjcavri (I am conscious that I have done well). PI. 
Apol. 21, b. eyo> £i> voiSa i fxavrcf o~ o <pb s &v (I am conscious that I am ivise). 
22, d. efiavrcp ^wrjSeiv ovdev 4tt i ctt a/j.4 v a>. But when the subject is 
not at the same time the object, but is different from the object, then the object 
with its participle is either put in the Dat,, e. g. avvotBd aoi eu iroirjo-avri, — ■ 
X. S. 4, 62. Tt fioi avv oia&a roiovrov et^oc/ieVw; (quid me tale commisisse 
scis ?), or (though more seldom) the substantive is put in the Dat., but the partici- 
ple in the Ace, e. g. £yu> a o i avvo&a eS it o irjcravr a. X. 0. 3, 7. iyci> a oi cv- 
vo tS a e7rt jxkv Kwp-cpSuiv &eav /ecu -navv irput dv la r dp.ev ov, Kal irdvv uutpdv odbv 
$a8i£ovr a Kal ep.e dv air ei&ovr a irpo&v/Aws avu&€a(T&cu. Also Aai&dvca 
£ fxavrbv iro iwv r i (I conceal myself doing something, i. e. I do something secretly). 
X. An. 6. 3, 22 (ol linreTs) e\a&ov avrovs inl rep \6<pca yev6p.evoi (reached 
the height unobserved). — With ioiKtvai, to appear, to seem, to be like, and 
'6/j.oiov elvai, the participle in relation to the subject, sometimes stands in 
the Nom., though more frequently in the Dat., and with pp.oi.ov ehai, in the Dat. 
almost without an exception. X. H. 6. 3, 8. eo'iKare rvpavv'io~i p.aKKov %\ iro- 
\ireiais t) 5 6 pL<=vo i. An. 3. 5, 13. Hfioioi ^aav Savp.d£ovres. PL Menon. 
97, a. opioioi £o-p.ev ovk op&ws u> p.o\oyn ko a i. Rp. 414, c. eoiicas, ecpr}, 
okv ovvr i Xeyeiv. See § 311, 9. 

4. The verbs and expressions, with 'which the participle is 
used as a complement, are the following : — 

(a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the 
senses or by the mind, e. g. bpav, olkovuv, elSevau (to knoiv), Ittlct- 
racrSaL (to know), piavSaveLV (to perceive), yvyvoxTKtw (to know), iv- 
#v/xeto-#cu (to consider), rrvvSavzaSai (to perceive), aiov9uveo-#ai, 
fjLLpLvrjcTKeoSaL, iiri\av$a.ve(T$a.i, etc. 

Th. 1, 32. r)p.e?s dSv varoi 6pwp.ev ovres irepiyevioftai (we see that ice 
are unable, etc.) . 'Opu> ere r pe^ovr a. 'Akovsiv with the Gen. when one 
hears with his own senses, or with the Ace. when one learns by hearsay. 
X. C. 2. 4, 1. ViKovca ^uKpdrovs irepl (piXcav SiaXeyo p. ivov (I heard 
Socrates discoursing concerning friends). H. 4. 8, 29. tficovffe rbv 0ao<ri;- 
fiovXov irpos iovra (he heard that Thrasybulus was coming). Cy. 1.4,25. 
Kap.fivo~7]s ¥)Kov o~ ev dvdpbs tfd-n epya diax^ l p l C^f xej/0J/ fbv Kvpov. 
OJSa frvnrbs lav (I know that I am mortal). OlSo frvSpwrrov frv-nrbi. 
ovra. Her. 3, 1. Si fiacriXev, Staj8e/8A.?j/iei/os virb 'Ap.dcrios ov p.av&dveis 
(do you not see that you have been deceived?). 40. r)dv irvv&dve<r&a i &vf>pa 



$ 310.] THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OP THE VERB. 473 

<pi\ov Kal £e7vov e 5 7r p 7/ cr <r ovr a. X. Cy. 1.1,2. civ&pwTroi eV oi>S4vas /uaAAo* 
avvlaravrai, fj irrl rovrovs, ovs av ata&cavrai apx*w avrwv €7rt%eipoDj/Tas 
(idiom they know are endeavoring to rule them). With the Gen. [§ 273, 5, (e)]. 
4. 4, 11. ijo-&7]crai ovv irdnror4 fxov i|/ evSo pa prv povvr os % o~vko (pav- 

TOVVJOS. 

(b) Verba dcclarandi, i. e. verbs which signify to declare, to 
show, to make clear, and the like, e. g. SeiKvvvat (to shoiv, to ex- 
liibii), SrjXovv, $r)\ov ttoizlv, cpaivew (to show), cpatveaSaL (to shoio 
one's self, apjparere), SrjXov and <pavepov elvat, iXiy^etv, i^eXey^ctv, 
(to prove, to convict), dAto-Ke<r#at (to be convicted), ttol&v (to rep- 
resent), <zvp'«TK<ziv (to find), etc. 

PL Phaed. 101, c. 77 ^vxv aha.varos (palverai ovffa (the soul appears to be 
immortal). Her. 6, 21. 'A^j/cubi 8t\Xov iiroirjcrav vire pax&eo-&4vres ry 
MiXyrov a\d>crei (made it evident that they were exceedingly grieved on account of the 
capture of Miletus). Isocr. Evag. 190, d. ro7s ttoitjtcus robs &eob s oTov r io-rl 
it o iT)o~ a i h al 5 laXeyo \i4v ov s Kal o~vvayu)viCo[x4vovs, ols av fiovX7)§w- 
aiv (the poets can represent the gods both conversing, etc.). Dem. Aph. 1. 819, 20. 
paSiocs iXeyx&V&erai tyevSofievos (will easily be convicted [that he falsifies] 
of falsehood, or if he falsifies). 

Rem. 3. Instead of the impersonal phrases SrjXov £<rri, <pavepov io~rt, (paiverai, 
apparet, the Greek uses the personal construction (comp. § 307, Rem. 6), e. g. 
firjXos et" £, (pavepo s elfii, (paivo/iai r^v irarpiSa e5 ir 01 7] a as (I am evi- 
dent having done well, i. e. it is evident that 1 have done well for my country). X. 
An. 2. 6, 23. o~r 4 pyo>v (pav epos jxkv i]v ov84va, otco 5e (pair) cpiXos slvai, rovrco 
evSrjXo s iyiyvero iir ifiovXevccv (he teas evident loving no one, i. e. it was 
evident that he loved, etc.). PL Apol. 23, d. KardSrjXo t ylyvovrai irpos- 
iroiov/j.evo 1 i±kv dZ4vai, e I 5 6 r e s 5e ov§4v. 

(c) Verba affectuum, i. e. verbs which denote an affection or 
State of the mind, e. g. ^cupeif, ^Seo-^cu, dyaAAecr^at, ayairav (to be 
content), d^ecr^ai, ayavaKTUV, aiSeicr$ai and aio-^wecr^at (to be 
ashamed), p.£TapLeXaar$ai } /xera/xeAei, opyi^eoSca, fiapvvecrSai, paStcos, 
^aXe-ojs (frepeiv, etc. 

X. II. 6. 4, 23. 6 &ebs iroXXaKis x ai P* L fobs fj.ev p.iKpobs fj.eyaXovs ttoicov, 
rovs Se jxtyaXovs fuKpovs (rejoices to make the small great). Hier. 8, 4. d laXeyS/ji.- 
evol re ay aXXo/xe&a ro?s irporeri\x.-r\\x.4vois /xaXXov, 7) rots in rod Xo'ov Tifuv 
ovai (ive are proud to converse with those preferred in honor, etc.). Th. 1, 77. ad 1- 
kov fxevo 1 01 avdpwiroi paXXov bpyi^ovrai, 77 fiia^ojxevo 1 (men are more 
indignant w'hen they are injured than when they suffer violence). 4, 27 (ol ' ' KS-nvaloi) 
ix tr e p. 4 Xovr ras airovZas ov de£d/A€voi. 5.35. robs iic rrjs vt]0~ov Secr- 
ixu>ras /i6T« fi4x ovr a7ro5e 5w k.6 r e s. Eur. Hipp. 8. r ifidi /xevo t X ai " 
p ova iv (ol §eo)) av&puirwv vtt6 (rejoice to be honored). Xalpco coi 4\Sr6vri 
(I rejoice that you have come). PL Rp. 475, b. virb o-pnKpoT4pwv Kal <pav\or4pwp 
r ifxwixzv 01 ayairwaiv. 

40* 



474 SYNTA.X. [§ 310. 

(d) Verbs signifying to be satisfied ivith, to be pleased ivith, to 
enjoy, to be full of e. g. ripTTtoSaL, e/x7rc7rAao-$at, pcearbv efj/ai, and 
the like. 

Od. a, 369. j>t)y jitey daivv fievo i r epird p.e&a (let us delight ourselves in 
feasting). II. », 633. iirel r dp"Kt\ffav is aXXrjAovs 6 powvr es (when they were, 
satisfied at looking at each other), S. 0. C. 768. p.eo~rbs ?j v bvp.ovp.evos. 
Eur, Ion. 924. ov rot ffbv fSAzirwv ip.TrlirXap.at ir p6 scan ov. Her. 7, 146, 
iixeav ravra frnev p.evo t ecaffi it X t\ p 4 e s. 

(e) Verbs signifying to overlook, to permit, to endure, to per- 
severe, to continue, also to be iveary, to be exhausted, e. g. rrepi- 
kol$- ets- icfiopav, rrpoUoSai (to neglect, to permit), dve^ecrJat /capre- 
petv, v7rofJi4veiv, Xnrapelv (per sever are), Koip.v€Lv, aTTtnTelv, etc. 

Her. 7, 168. ov ireptoTrr 4t} icrrl i) 'EXXas diroXXv p.evrf ( Hellas is not to be 
perm itted to be destroyed) . 1 01 . et "EXXrjves biro p.ev4ovcr i %^P as e V°* « v T a e l " 
p6p.evoi (will venture to witJistand me). 9,45. Xnrap4ere p.4vovres (con- 
tinue to remain). 3, 65 (vp.lv iTriffKrjTTTca) p.)) ir epi'iZ elv rr]v fiy e p.ovit\v 
avTis is Mytiovs tt e p teX& over av (not to permit the hegemony to return again to 
the Medes). Isocr. Archid. 125, 47. direiiro tp.ev av o.kovovt4s re Kal 
X4y ov r es, el irdcras rets rotavras irpdfcets i^erd^oip.ev (we should be weary 
of hearing and speaking). An. 5. 1, 2. airelpt]Ka. ^787] ffvffKeva^S p.evos 
Kal fSac)i£<av Kal r pey^iav Kal rd oirXa <p4 pea v Kal iv rd£ei I w v Kal (pvXaKas 
<pvXdrrwv Kal p.axo pevos (I am weary of packing up, walking, running, etc.) # 
Th. 1, 86. robs 1-vp.p.dxovs ov ir e p io\p 6p.e& a a 8 ikov p. 4 vov s (will not 
permit the allies to be injured). 2. 73. 'A&nvcuol cpacriv, iv obfievl rip. as irpo4cr- 
$rai a 8 ikov p.4vovs. PL Gorg. 470, c. p.)] Kap-ns ty'iXov iivdpa ev epyercav 
(do not be weary of doing good to a friend). For dv4x*o'&ai with the Gen., 
see § 275, 1. 

(f ) Verbs signifying to begin and cease, cause to cease, to omit, 
to be remiss, e. g. dp^eo-^at, vnapyziv ; TTa.ve.iv, TravecrSai, XrjyeLv, 
SiaAAdrrav, airaXka,TTZ<j$ai ; /xe#tecr#ai, A.aVecr#cu, c/cAeiVaj/, €7riAet- 
?retv, etc. 

Her. 6, 75. KXeop.evns TrapaXaffcav rbv fflSnpov, dpx^TO in rcav Kvnp.4cav 
eca'vrbv Xca$cbp.evos (began to mutilate himself). Uavca ere dStKovvra (1 
cause you to cease doing wrong). Uavop.ai ere dBiKiav (I cease to do wrong tc 
you). X. 0. 1, 23. (at iiri&vp.lai) at ki£6 p.ev ai ra ffcap.ara rcav dvSpdnrcav Kal 
rds $vx&s Kal robs o'ikovs ovirore A^yovo'tv, esr av apx^ctv avreov (never cease to 
torment). Kal aAAa ye 877 p.vpia imAe'tirca \4ycav (to omit in speaking). 'O 
ay abbs ovk iWeiir erat ev irotwv robs evepyerovvras eavrov (does not fail to 
do good to his benefactors). PI. Phileb. 26, b. 186, b. 'dp£op.at airb rrjs larptKrjs 
\4ycav. Menex. 249, b. robs reXevrrjcravras rip. toff a ovl)4irore eKheivet 
\rj irSXts). 



$ 310.] THE PARTICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 475 

(g) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish one's self, 
to excel, to be inferior, to do ivett, to err, e. g. evrv^uv, vlkolv, Kpa- 
reiv, rp-ro.crSai, €v iroieiv, 6.jxapr aveiv, dSiKetv, etc. 

Her. 5. 24. ev e 71-0177 eras airiKo fxtv os (you did ivett in coming, that you 
came). Th. 1 . 53. a 5 i k e it e iro\4fxov apxovr e s /ecu <nrovdas Xvoures (you do 
wrong in beginning icar, etc.). 2, 71. ov 5'iKaia 7rote?Te is yrjv tt> ITAaTcueW 
<rr parevovr es. 'A/xapr dveis ravra tto i 6b v (you are in fault in doing this). 
PI. Pliaed. 60, c. eu y i tto ir\cr as ava/xvrjeras fj.e (you did well in reminding 
me). X. Hier. 11, 14, sq. nvdvras (robs (pihovs) ireipw vucuv ei5 iroiuv ihv 
yap tovs (p(\ovs Kparrj s ei> ttoiqov, ov jxt] ecu fivvwvrai avrix^ lv °* ^o\4/xlol (to 
endeavor to excel all in doing good). An. 2. 3, 23. oi>x t)ttt\o~6 fxe&a eu 
iro iovut € s (we will not be inferior in- acts of kindness). 

(h) The verbs ireipacr^ai (especially in Herodotus), to try 
or attempt something, 7rapao-/ceva£€cr#ai (usually with ws and 
%ie Fut. Part), and the Ionic phrases 77-oA.Aos eijiti, ey/cet/xat, 
y t y v o /x a i, to be urgent about, to lay it to heart, to consider im- 
portant. 

Her. 7, 9. iTreiprj&rjviireXavvcov iirl tovs dvdpas tovtovs (I attempted to 
march against). PI. Phileb. 21 , a. iv aol ne ipdofie&a fiaa avi^ovr es ravra 
(let us try to examine these). Th. 2, 7. ol 'AS-nvaioi it ape a /ceu d^ovro us 
iro\e/jt.-f}<roi>T6 s (were preparing to icage rear). Without cos: 18 (ol Ue\oirov- 
vriaiot) irpos froths 7rapec Kevd^ovT o i: otrjcr ofxzvoi. X. H. 4. 1, 41. napeo 1 - 
hevd£eTO iropevo~6 p.sv os. Her. 7, 158. 6 T4\oov iroWbs iv4iceiTo 
\4yb)V (spoke urgently). 9,91. iroWbs t] v Aitr co \jlsvo s 6 £e?yos (entreated 
earnestly, was all entreaties). 1, 98. At)i6kt}s i\v iroKKbs imb navrbs avdpbs 
alve 6y.evos (was much jnaised). 7. 10, 3. iravr o?oi 4y4vovT o ~2,Kv&at 
SeSfxevoi 'luvuv AOcrcu rbv ir6pov (earnestly entreated the Ionians to break down 
the bridge). 

(i) Certain expressions, mostly impersonal, e. g. it is fit, use- 
ful, profitable, good, agreeable, shameful, it is to my mind, and 
the like. 

Tip 4tt€ i fioi aya&a) our i and aya&w elvai (it is proper for me to be good). 
Th. 1, 118. iirripuTuu tov &eoV, el (sc. avTols) it o A e fj. ov o" iv afxeivov earai 
(whether it will be better for them to engage in war). PI. Alcib. 1, 113, d. gkotvov- 
aiv, 6iror4pa cvvoltrei it pd\a<r iv. After these expressions, however, the 
Inf. is more frequent, since the action of the dependent verb is not considered 
as already attached or belonging to the person, but as first resulting from the 
action implied in the above impersonal expressions. 

(k) The verb «?x e iv, in the sense of to be in a condition or state t 
has an active, middle, or deponent participle joined with it, ic 



476 syntax. U 310. 

order lo express the continued condition of the action (similar 
to the Latin aliquid pertractatum habere). 

Her. 3, 65. Z6\<a %x ov(TL avTT]u (tV riysfiovinv) kt v ffd/xevoi (properly, 
they have themselves as those who have acquired the hegemony, i. e. they have acquired 
and still possess, comp. principatum pabtum habent). X. An. 1. 3, 14. iro\\h 
XpripaTa ex^f avn pir aK 6 r e s (we have plundered much property and still 
have it). 4. 7, 1. x w P' a <Zkovv lax^pa ol Taoxoi, iv ols Kcd to eVtTirjSeia irdura 
elxov ai/a,K€KoiJ.i<r (jl4voi ( into ivhich having conveyed all their provisions they 
had them there, or, as this idiom is more commonly expressed in English, into 
which, they had conveyed their provisions). Dem. Phil. 3. 113, 12. nal $epas irpwnv 
cos (pthos els QeTTaAtaj/ iA&oov e%ei Kar aA«/3a> v. (On the contrary, ex« 
Aeyziv, lean say). 

(1) Finally, the participle is used as a complement with the 
following verbs.: (a) rvy^vw, to happen; (/?) Xav&avw, to be 
concealed; (y) SiaTcAco, 8iayiyvo/x,cu, Stay co, to continue^ 
(8) <£#ava>, to come before, to anticipate; (e) oi'^ojaai, to go 
aivay, to depart. In English, most of these verbs are often ren- 
dered by an adverb, and the participle connected with them, 
inasmuch as it contains the principal thought, by a finite verb. 

Her. 1, 44. 6 Kpoicros cpovea rod iraiSbs i\dv&av€ $6gkv>v (Croesus nour- 
ished the murderer of his son unwittingly, without knowing it). AtcSyw, 
SiareAw, Siaylyvofiai /caAa iroiwv (I ALWAYS, CONTINUALLY do what is 
honorable). 1, 157. ^x eT0 (pevycav (he fled away). 6. o?x°/" at <p4p<av (1 
carry away). Th. 4, 113. ervxov 07tA?tcu eV t?? ayopq, Ka&evSovr e s ws 
ireuTrjKoi/Ta (about fifty hoplites were then, just then sleeping in the agora, hap- 
pened to be, were by chance, sleeping), Tvyxdva is always used, where an event 
has not taken place hy our intention or design, but by the accidental coopera- 
tion of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things. In English 
it can sometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance; often it 
cannot be translated at all. X. Cy. 1. 3, 12. x^^of fy &XXov (p&dffai rouro 
ir oiT)ff avra (it was difficult for another to do this before him, or to anticipate him 
in doing it). Her. 4, 136. e (p&yarav 7roAAcp ol 2kv&cu tovs Tlipo'as iirl t\\v ye- 
(pvpav 67r ik6 jxej/o 1 (anticipated the Persians much in coming to the bridge, came 
to the bridge long before the Persians). Also the conjunction irp\v % (or tf alone) 
with the Inf. can follow (p&di/eiv, e. g. Her. 6, 116. ecpS-nffav aTriK6/xevoi t 
nrplv f) tovs fiapfidpovs rjKeiv (they arrived before the barbarians came). Ob 
(p&dveiv followed by /ecu, teal ev&vs, may be translated by scarcely — when, no 
sooner — than, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. 58, 86 (ol AaKeScu/xdvioi) ovk ecp&wo-av irv- 
&6uevoi tov irepl t\\v 'Artt/crjv iroX^ixov, /col irdvruv tS>v &Kk(av dyueA^cravTey 
flKoy i]iuv ajji.vvovvTes (the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard of the war in Attica, than 
they left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely heard when, etc.). So in 
the phrase, ovk Uv (pfrdvois iroicoi/ tl (you should do nothing quicker,!, e. 
you cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly). X. C 2. 3, 11. ovk tt,v (p&dvois 



$ 311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 477 

Xiywv; (you could not be too quick in speaking = speak quickly). 3. 11, 1. ovk 
av (p& avoir , tcprj, aKoXoSovvr es ; (will you not follow immediately? = 
follow immediately ) . ovk av cpSdvois ire pa.iv <av ; (= statim reliqua conclude ) . 

Rem. 4. "With XavSdve iv and (pSdvcy the relation is sometimes re- 
versed, the participles of these verbs being used as the complement of the 
governing verb. X. Cy. 3. 3, 18. <p&dv ovr e s tf8r) Sjjodfxev r^v eKeivav yr\v 
( we ravage their country, anticipating them = we anticipate them in ravaging their 
country). 6. 4, 10. tj Se Aa&ovcra avrbv o'vvecpel'irero (she followed unknown 
to him). 

Rem. 5. The Part, of the verb elvai, connected with adjectives or sub- 
stantives, with several of the above named verbs, is sometimes omitted, even 
when ehai is an essential word ; thus after Verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. 
Dem. Ph. 1. 45, 18. fiSwj ei»Tpe7re?s i/j.as (knowing that you are ready). 54, 41. 
iav iv Xeppovfiaq) 7r v & r\ a $• e Qihiinrov ( sc. ovra, if you should learn that Philip 
is in, etc.); very often with (paivopai, not seldom also with rvyxdv<a y 
SiareXw, 5 tayiyvo p.ai, e. g.X. C. 1.6, 2. avvTr687)r6s re na\ axnuiv 5 tar e AeTs. 



$ 311. Remarks on the interchange of the Participle 

and Infinitive. 

Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with the 
Inf., yet with a different meaning. 

1. 'A k o v e i v with a Part., implies both a direct perception by one's own senses, 
and an indirect one, though certain and well-grounded ; with the Inf., it im- 
plies only an indirect perception obtained by hearsay, e.g. 'A/couw avrov 
SiaXeyo fievov (i. e. ejus sermones auribus meis percipio). Kapi^va-ns 
j]Kovo~e rbv Kvpov avSpbs f/Sr) eypa S ia% e ipL (6/j.evor. See §310, 
4, (a). But X. Cy. 1. 3, 1. I$e7v iire&vfAei 6 'Aarvdyrjs rbv Kvpov, on % Kove 
(ex aliis audiverat) KaXbv KayaSfbv avrbv elvai. 

2. EtSevcu and iirlo-rao-Sai with the Part., to know; with the Inf. tc 
know how to do something, to be able. 0?Sa (iiricrraixai) freovs eref}6fx- 
evos (I know that I honor the gods); but Eur. Hipp. 1009. iirtar afiai 
&eovs <r e j8e iv (I know how to honor the gods, I can honor the gods). S. Aj. 
666. eio-6/j.eo-^a jxlv &ebis e?Keiv. — Also vofii^ziv in the sense of 
to be assured, to know (elSevai), has a participle connected with it ; still this 
occurs very rarely. X. An. 6. 6, 24. v6)xi£e 8', iav i{x\ vvv airoKrdvrjs . . 
avSpa iya&bv a. wo kt eivcav (be assured that, if you slay me, you slay a good 
man). 

3. Mav&dveiv with the Part., to perceive ; with the Inf. to learn. Mav Sa- 
ve* o~o<pbs &v (I perceive that I am wise); aocpbs elvai (I learn to be 
wise). X. Cy. 4. 1, 18. fia&Tjo-ovrai ivavr tovar&ai (rois iroXe/xiois). 

4. Fiyv wo-kciv with the Part, to know, to perceive ; with the Inf. to learn, to 
judge, to determine. T tyveva kcd aya&ovs ovras ro?s arparidorais rovs 
aywvas (I know, I perceive that the prize-fights are useful, but ay a Sobs 
elvat, I judge that, etc.). X. Apol. 33 (^.wKparvs) eyvca rov en (fiv rb 
reSvdv ai avrai Kpelcffov slvai (judged that it was better for him to die 
than to live longer). Isocr. Trap. 361, d. eyvucav Uaaiuva ifiol ■rrapao'odvai 
rbv iraida (they concluded to give up, etc.). 

5. Alo-frdveo-Sai with a Part, to perceive, to observe, to understand, to learn ; 
with the Inf. to think, to imagine (opinari). Alo-Sdvo/xat o-e fxeya irapa 
fiuaiXe'i dwdpLevov (I perceive that you have great influence with the king) 



478 SYNTAX. [$311 

Th. 6, 59. al cr& a v 6/xevos avrovs fx4ya rcapa fiaaiXel Aapeica ovvao'&ai 
5, 4. ouk4ti irrl robs aXXovs epx^Tai, aifffrS/xevos ovk av -Jrei&eiv avrovs 
(opinans, se iis non esse persuasurum). 

6.Tlvv& dveo-&ai with a Part, to hear, to perceive ; with an Inf. it is used 
with the same difference of meaning as in the case of aKovetv. Tlvv&d- 
vo/xai ere x4yovra (I hear you saying). Lys. Nicom. 184, 17. irvvStd- 
vofxal re avrbv X4ye iv, a>s dcre/3w KaraXvcov ras bvartas (ex ALUS 
audivi). X. H. 1. 4, 11. avi'ix&y eVi Karao~Koirfj rcov rpirjpojv, as eirvv^dve- 
ro AaKedaifxoviovs avrddu irapacr Keva(e iv. Th. 5, 55. ttv&oixg- 
vol robs AaK eSai/xovlovs e £eo~r par evar& at. 

7. Me/xvrjo-^ai with a Part, to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf. to con- 
template doing something, to intend, to endeavor. M4/xvr)fiat ed iroir)o-as 
tovs iroXiras (I remember to have done good) ; ed 7rotrjcrai (I strive, wish, to 
do good). X. An. 3. 2, 39. /xe/xv-f) cr&o> avyjp aya&bs elvai (remember, 
strive, to be a man). Cy. 8. 6, 6 (ol crarpaTrai) o ri av ev rfj yfj eKaarri KaXbv 
fy aya&bv p, fxe/xv-f) arovr ai Kal devpo airoir 4{xit eiv. S. 4, 20. /x e jx v 7] cr r) 
diaKpt&rjvai ivepl rov KaXXovs (thou wilt prepare to contend with me). 

8. $aiveo~&ai with a Part, to appear, apparere, to shoio one's self; with an Inf. 
to seem, videri. 'E<paiv ero KXaiiav (it was evident that he wept, or in 
English we often use the adverb, evidently : he evidently wept ; ecpaivero 
KXaie iv (he seemed to weep). X. S. 1, 15. Kal a/xa x4ycov ravra aTre/xvrrerS 
re (6 yeXcaroiroibs) Kal rfj (pwvrj cra<pa>s KXaie iv e<paivero (he seemed to 
weep, but did not weep). 

). 'E o t k 4 va i with a Part, in the Nom. to appear ; with a Part, in the Dat. to 
be like (§ 310, Rem. 2) ; with the Inf. to seem ; 'Eol Kare rvpavvt<ri fxaXXov, 
$ ttoXirelais T)d6 fxevoi (you appear to enjoy, you evidently enjoy, etc.) (comp. 
!No. 8). PI. Pp. 444, c. eotKas OKVovvri X4yetv (you are like one in doubt 
in speaking = you seem to speak like one in doubt). X. Hier. 7. 1. eoiKev 
e<pr), ix4ya ri elvai ■/) rijxi] (honor seems to be something important). Cy. 1. 4, 
9. iroiet, ftircos (ZovXet • av yap vvv ye 7]fxa>v eotKas fiaa iXebs elvai. 

\0 1 Ayy4x\eiv with a Part, is used of the annunciation of actual events ; 
with an Inf. of the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed. 
Dem. 01. 2. (3). 29, 4. airrjyy 4X&7] QiXtiriros v/x?v ev ®paKn rpirov 77 re- 
raprov eros rovrl 'Kpalov re?x os v oXtopK&v (a settled fact). X. Cy. 1. 
5, 30. 'Aaavpios els r)\v x^P au e /xfiaXXeiv dyy4xXerai (whether he 
had made an actual irruption or not, is uncertain). 

11. Ae iKvvvai and airo<paiveiv with a Part, to show, to point out ; with an 
Inf. to teach. *EBei£d ae ad tK-haavra (1 showed that you had done wrong). 
X. An. 2. 3, 14. d(p'iKovro els Kde/xas, '6Sev air 48ei£av ol 7)ye[x6ves Aafxfid- 
veiv to eirir-fjdeia (where they pointed out to them that they might obtain pro- 
visions). Dem. Cor. 271, 135. (7} {Sov\7] Alo"x^w) k<*1 Trp o8 6rr}v etvat 
Kal icaicSvovv v/x?v drc4^aivev (docuit). But the Inf. is likewise used 
with SeiKvvai, when the object of this verb is not to be represented as 
something perceived, but only as something possible, e. g. X. C. 2. 3, 17. 
KivSwevo~eis eir id e?|a£, av fxev xP r l ~ T0 's re Kal (piAadeAcpos elvai, eKe?vos 
Se (pavXos re Kal ovk d^ios ei/epyecrlas. 

12. At)\ovv with a Part, to make evident, to show ; with an Inf. to say, to an- 
nounce, to command. At]XS> cr e ad iKovvra (I make it evident or shoi& that 
you do wrong). X. Ag. 1,33. K-npvyfxari edrjAov, robs jxev eXevSreplas 
Seofxevovs cos irpbs o'v/x/xaxov abrbv irapelvai (edixit, ut adessent) . 

13. Tloie?v with a Part, to represent [§ 310, 4, (b)] ; with an Inf. (a) to cause, 
(b) to suppose, to assume. Tlotoi o~e yeXcovra (1 represent you laughing). 
YI01& <re yeKav (I cause you to laugh). PI. Symp. 174, c. dKX-nrop 
eTTolrjo'ev ('O/xypos) eX&6vra rbv M eveXeav eirl r)\v froivnv (represent* 



1311.] INTERCHANGE OF THE PAP.TICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 479 

Mehelaus coming unbidden to the feast). X. An. 5. 7, 9. iroiw S 1 vp.lls 
i^airar-nSre vras koX Karayorjr ev&4v ras far 4/j.ov H]Keiv els $aau. 
(1 trill suppose, 1 will put the case, trill assume, that you having been deceived 
come to Phasis). 

14. A i o- x v v e <r h a t and a t 5 e ?a & a i with a Part, to be ashamed on account of 
something which one does ; with an Inf. to be ashamed or afraid to do something, 
to abstain from doing something through fear or shame, to be prevented from doing 
something by shame. A I o~xvv o fxai KaKa tt p array rbv <pi\ov {lam ashamed 
of doing evil, or that I do evil to a friend) : oiVx^o fxai KaKa irpdrr e iv 
rbv cpiXov (I am prevented by shame from doing evil, etc.). X. Cy. 5. 1, 21. 
rovrofx.hu (sc. airo8i8ovai x^-P lu f J -V 7rw A 46 Svvaa&at) ovk alo~x vvo A 4 " 4 \e- 
ywv rb 84' 'Eai' fievnre iva.p 4fio\ airoSaxra), rovro, ed '(are, on alo~x vv olfxi)v 
av ehreiv. S. Aj. 506. a?8eaai iiev irarepa rbv abv 4v \vypu> yfipq irpo- 
Xeiirwv. X. S. 8, 33. rovrovs yap av e<pr] oleoSai fiaXiara al8e?a&ai 
oXXt}Xovs air oXeiiv eiv. 35. al8 ovvr ai robs irapovras air oXeiir e iv. 
P. L. 9, 4. iras av ris alax v v^eiT] rbv KaKov avaKrivov irapaXafi e?v. 

15. TLepio pav [§ 310, 4, (e)] is sometimes, though seldom, constructed with 
an Inf. also, without any marked difference, as avyxoopelv, 4av, e.g. Th.4, 48. 
ovb" els lev at ecpaffav Kara, ovvafi.iv tt e p i6\pe a &ai ov8 ev a {they said they 
would not permit any one to enter). 'Eirir p erreiv, to permit, is commonly 
connected with an Inf., rarely with a Part. X. An. 1.2, 19. ravr-nv r^v 
X<*>pa.v eirerpe^e 8 tapir da ai ro?s "EXXrjatv { permitted the Greeks to plun- 
der). Isocr. Pac. 7) ttoXis avro?s ovk eir ir peip e i tt apaf3aivov<r i rbv 
v6fxov. The verbs oce'xfc&ai and {nro/neve iv with the meaning of 
audere, are constructed with the Inf. Her. 7, 139. Kara,ueivavres avear- 
Xovro rbv eiridvra iirl rr\v x&PW 84%ao~bai {dared to withstand the enemy 
making an incursion into their country). 

16.*Apxeo-&ai with a Part., when it has the meaning to be in the beginning of 
an action (in contrast with the middle or end of an action), or also when 
the way and manner, in which the beginning of an action takes place, is to be 
stated ; with an Inf , to begin to do something, to commence {something intended, 
aimed at). "H p^avro ra relxv o'iKo8ofxovvres and oIkoSo p. el v. Th. 

1, 107. ijp^avro Kal ra fxaKpd reixv 'A&rjva'ioi ol ko8 o jxelv. X. Cy. 8. 8, 

2. oLp^ofxai 8 i8ao' kojv 4k rcov frelcav. C. 3. 1, 5. ir6&ev f\ p\ar 6 a e 8 i- 
8aGKeiv rr\v arpar-nyiav. 5, 22. 6ir6re iraXaieiv ^p^oj fxav&dv eiv. 6,3. 
elirov T}f£v, %k rivos dp^rj fh v Ttfotj/ eve py ere? v. 5, 15. 'ASnva?oi cnrb 
ra>v irar4poov apx°vr ai Kar a<p povelv rcov yepair4pwv. 

17. Have iv with the meaning to hinder, is constructed with an Inf., e. g. PI. 
Pp. 416, C. ras olK'ocreis Kal rr\v dXX-nv oha'iav roiavrrjv avroTs irapecrKevdoSat 
{8e7), yjtls fi-^re robs (pvXaKas cos apiarovs elvai ivavaoi avrovs ktX. 

18. Tleipaffbai with a Part., to make trial of anything, to practise [§ 310, 4, 
(h)] ; still this construction is rare : with trie Inf. to attempt to do something ; 
Trapao- Kevd(ea-&ai is very often also connected with the Inf. The 
Ionic phrase iravrolov yiyv eo-frai, is constructed with the Ace. and 
Inf. Her. 3, 124. iravroir] iyevero fxrj air o8r) fx.r\o~ at rbv TloXvvpd- 
rea {she used every expedient, etc.). 

Remakk. By comparing § 306 with § 310, it will be seen that the Inf., as a 
complement of the verb, denotes something aimed at, intended, something ef- 
fectcd, while the participle, inasmuch as the idea expressed by it is prior to, or 
coincident with that of the verb with which it is connected, implies the actual 
existence of the idea designated by it. The participle, therefore, implies that 
the action denoted by it actually takes place, while the Inf. does not. 



480 SYNTAX. [§ 312. 



§ 312. The Participle used to express Adverbial cr 
Circumstantial Relations. 

1. In the second place, the Part, is used to denote such an 
attributive qualification of a substantive, as will, at the same 
time, define the predicate of the sentence more exactly. In 
this case, the Part, expresses the adverbial relations of time, 
cause, motive or purpose, condition and concession, manner. 

The English often uses a Part, in this case, e. g. he said laughing (yeX&u) ; 
the city, besieged by the enemy, suffered much distress (tt6\is virb r&v iroXe/xicav iro- 
\iopKovfi4vr]). Instead of the Part., the English often uses either a subor 
dinate clause with the conjunctions when, after, while, since, because, as, inasmuch 
as, in order to, if, although, or a substantive with a preposition, e. g. Kvpos t\\v 
ttSXiv e\cav aHjAd-ev (after Cyrus had taken the city, he returned, or after taking 
the city, etc.). 

2. In English we often translate the participle by a verb, 
connecting it with its own clause by one of the above-named 
conjunctions, using as a subject either the word with which the 
participle agrees, or a pronoun referring to it. 

Ol iroXe/xioi (pvyovr es xnrb ra>v iroKe/niav e'5ic«j%^7jcrav (WHEN the enemy FLED, 
they were pursued by the enemy, or the enemy fled and were pursued). To?s 
Uepcrais els rrjv yrjv els fi aX over iv ol "EWyves y\vavTi<i)&y}(rav (WHEN the 
Persians made an irruption into the country, the Greeks went out against them). 

3. In the examples given under No. 2, the participle always 
agrees with a substantive or pronoun which is connected with 
the principal verb, either as subject or in some other relation, and 
may then be called the dependent participle. But very often the 
substantive with which the participle agrees has no connection 
with any verb, but stands alone in the Genitive. This is called 
the Genitive absolute or independent, because it has no gram- 
matical connection with any other word in the sentence. 

X. 0. 4, 2. TcDy ffci) fidritiv &rj\vvo p.ewv, Kai at 4"^X a ' toAu appcaarSTepaL 
yiyvovrai (when the bodies are exhausted, the animal spirits become weaker). 

Kemark 1. The Genitive absolute can never be used when the action refers 
to the subject ; in this case the participle must always be made to agree with 
the subject. It is otherwise in Latin, on account of there being no active par 
ticiples in the past tense ; the Latin must, therefore, use the Abl. Absolute, 
even when the action refers to the subject, e. g. ol arpanunai t\v ttoXiv Ka&e- 
\6vres els to (Trparoire^ov h.vex^pr\(fo.v (milites, urbe diruta, in castra se re- 
ceperunt, after the soldiers had taken the city, they returned to the camp). In this 



j 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 481 

example, the actions denoted by the participle and the verb, both refer to 
<rrpariS)Tai, and therefore the Gen. Absol. could not be used. 

Rem. 2. The reason why the Greeks chose the Gen. absolute, has been 
seen in treating of the Gen., § 273, Rem. 11. Subordinate clause? also may be 
used instead of the participial construction, either for the sake of greater em- 
phasis, or for perspicuity. 

4. The Participle as described under 2 and 3, is used to 
denote : — 

(a) A specification of time, where the English uses subordi- 
nate clauses, with the conjunctions when, while, during, after, 
since, or a substantive with a preposition. 

X. C. 1. 2, 22. ttoWoI ra xp^ara avaActxr av re s, wv Trp6<r&ev direixovro 
Kepduv, alaxpa vofxi^ovres efoai, rovroov ovk a7re%oj/rat [after wasting their money, 
after, when they had wasted). An. 'Aicovcracri ravra rots arpaT-nyois rb iv&vjxrnj.a 
Xapieu idoKei (when the generals heard this, on hearing this, after hearing this, they 
thought the device ingenious). So the frequent circumlocution with iroi^ffas 
in the sense of thereupon. Her. 6, 96. £v£irpr)(rav koX to. ipa koX t\\v tvoXlv • ravra 
5e itoit] cravr e s iirl ras &\\as vrjaovs avdyovro (thereupon they set sail for 
the other islands) ; or with the repetition of the Part, of the preceding word. 
Her. 7, 60. wavras toiitco t$ rpoivca t£t) pi& [A7j(T aw dp i3- p. 4] a avr e s 5e Kara 
e&j/ea ZUraacrou (in this way they numbered all; thereupon they arranged the 
army by nations). Gen. absolute, X. H. 5. 1, 9, vav /xaxlas irphs tV (reX-fjvnv 
yevopevn s, rerrapas Tpii\psLs Xapfidvei Tcapydoiras (a naval battle having been 
fought by moonlight). 4.58. vir o<paiv o vt os tov tfpos, ! ' A.ynai\aos k\ivott€- 
t^js ^v (when the spring appeared). E. a, 88. ovtls £p.€v (covtos ical eVi x&oj/} 
Se p KOfxiv o lo crol Koi\rjs wapd vqval (iapeias xelpas eVoicrei (while I live, as long 
as Hive and look upon the earth). 

Rem. 3. The following participles, which may be sometimes translated in 
English by adverbs, also belong here : (a) apx 6/.<.evos, in the beginning, origi- 
nally. Th. 4, 64. airep Kal apxo /xevos elirou. (This is to be distinguished 
from ap^d/xeuos aw 6 tlvos, which may be translated, especially, before all. 
The Part, ap^d/xeuos agrees, for the most part, in Number, Gender, Case, with 
the substantive which is more exactly defined, e. g. PL Rp. 600, e. ovkovv ti&co- 
/xeu dwb '0/j.ripov dp \ap.i v ov 9 w avr as robs woirjr ikovs pi/xrjrds ejSco- 
\(»v operas elvat (that all the poets, particularly Homer, etc.). Sometimes, how- 
ever, the Part, dp^d/xevos agrees with the subject of the sentence. PI. Symp. 
173, d. SotceTs /xoi drex^cos wdvras av&pcawovs d&Xiovs rjyeTcr&aL w\t}V ~2,c*>Kpdrovs, 
awb crov apt, a pevo s, you seem to me to think all men unhappy except Socrates, 
particularly yourself '). — (#) T eXevr&v, properly ending, finally, at last. PI. 
Rp. 362, a. r sAevr S>v wdvra Kara wa&cbv dva(TKiv8u\ev&'f)o~eTai. X. An. 6. 3, 8. 
Te\evTwvr € s ku\ dirb rov vSaros dpyov (robs "EAh-nvas) oi Qpaices (at last the 
Tliracians kept the Greeks from the water). — (y) A LaAiwcbv xP^vov, after 
some time, after a while, subsequently, or 5mA. woAvv, dxiyov xp-i £w icrxuv woAbv 
Xpbvov, p.iKp6v. PI. Phaed. 59, e. ob wokbv ovv xpovov iwiax^v 7)Ke. 

Rem. 4. The Part, in the Gen. sometimes stands without a subject, when 
the subject can be readily supplied from what goes before, or when the subject 
is indeiinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words wpdypara xPVP^ra, 
&v&pu)TToi, etc., used in a general sense, may be understood. Th. 1, 116. Tlepi- 

41 



482 SYNTAX. jj 312. 

kXtjs u>x* ro Kara to%os eVl Kavvov ko.1 Kaplas, isayyeXfr 4 vruiv, oti Qolvio-o'ai 
vyes eV ai>Tovs TrX4ovtriu (it having been announced that Phoenician ships were sailing 
against them). X. Cy. 1.4, 18. (rvfxav&4vT<av §e t<£ 'Aarvdyei, '6ti iroXe/xioi 
daiv eV Trj x™P a e&fio-fi&ei nal aurbs irpbs rh opia (it having been signified to 
Astyages). 3. 1, 38. 5 iacr Kt)vovv tco v 8e (sc. arnuiv) //.era to Selm/op, iirripera 
6 Kvpos. Also in the Sing. Th. 1, 74. cra<pu>s 07)Xa>^4uros, '6ri eV reus vavffl 
r&v 'EXXrjvcou ra TrpdypaTa eyeVero (it having been made very evident that). Comp. 
the Latin cognito, edicto, petito, etc., instead of postquam cognitum est, etc. 

Rem. 5. In order to define the time more .exactly, the preposition iirl is 
frequently connected with the Gen., yet only when the Part, is in the Pres. 
tense, e. g. 3 E7tj Kvpov fiacr iXgvovt os (while Cyrus washing). See § 296, 

1, (2). The relation of past time is sometimes made more definite by the pi'ep- 
osition (A era, after, with the Ace. e. g. Her. 6. 132. fxera Ss eV Mapab&vi 
rpS>ixa yevo/j-svov MiA-naS^s av^ero (after the slaughter made at Marathon). 
See § 294, II, (2). The relation of indefinite time expressed by about, nearly, 
is indicated by vir6 with the Ace, e. g. virb t\\v irpdoTrjv iire X&ov aav 
vvkto. [§ 299, III, (2)]. the coincidence or contemporaneousness of one thing with 
another, is expressed by a pa with the Dat., e. g. a/x rip. 4 pa 5 ia<p<aa-Kovo-rj 
(as soon as daybreak)', a pa r$ air (a aupdCovr i (simulac frumentum adul- 
turn est). 

Rem. 6. In order to determine more exactly the relation of time, temporal 
adverbs are often used with the dependent participle and the Gen. absolute : 
ai/7 i Ka, ev&vs, i^ai<pv7] s, pera^v, dpa. PI. Rp. 328, c. ev&vs oZv pe 
idebv 6 K4<paXos 7](Tird(eT6 re Kcd elireu (simul ut me conspexit). Lys. 207, a. 6 
Meue^vos e/c ttjs avXrjs pera£v irai£cav ehepx^rai (while he played). Phaed. 
77, b. owoos pr] a p. a air o&vr] a kovt o s rov av&pcbirov SiaoTceSdVj/wTai f) 
rpvxv (as soon as man dies). Her. 9, 57. Kal dpa KaraXafiSvres irposeKearo 
ffepi (as soon as they had come up with the enemy, they pursued them closely). Th. 

2, 91. iirai&vityv re a p. a •kx4ovt es (inter navigandum, while sailing). 

Rem. 7. In order to denote more clearly and emphatically the succession of 
time and a consequence or result, the following adverbs are very often appended 
to the predicate of a sentence: ivrav&a, ovra>(s), ovrto oi\, a>oe. X. C. 

3, 10, 2. e/c ttoXXwv ffvvdyovrss ra e£ e/cao"Tou KaXXicra, ottrccs oXa to 
ad>para icaXd iroiure (paivecr&ai (collecting from many the most beautiful features of 
each, in this WAY you make the entire forms appear beautiful). 

(b) A cause or reason, where trie English often uses subor- 
dinate clauses with since, because, as, inasmuch as, or a substan- 
tive with a preposition. 

X. C. 1. 2, 22. ttoXXol ra XP'hp-o-' 7 "- avaXcocraures, S>v irpocr&ev airelxovTO /cep5<2j/, 
alo~xpa> vopi^ovr es dlvai, tovtoov ovk air4x 0VTal (many having squandered their 
estates, did not abstain from those gains from which they before abstained, because 
they accounted them base). Ta iirir^eia i%oiev e'/c ttjs %wpas, ttoXXtjs Kal aya&rjs 
oftens (they might obtain supplies from the place, since, because, inasmuch as, it was 
extensive and fertile). 

(c) A motive, purpose, or object, where the English uses the 
Inf. with to, in order to, or a finite verb with that, in order that, 
so that. Generally, only the Fut. Act. Part, is used to denote 
tliis relation; sometimes also the Pres. Act., (§ 256, Rem 3). 



$ 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PARTICIPLE. 483 

This usage occurs most frequently with verbs of going, coming, 
sending. 

Her. 3, 6. rovro %pxo[J.ai (ppdcrav {I have come to say this). 6, 70. is AeX 
<pobs XPV ff ° /xeyo s t<£ xPW <rTr ip' lc t > it o pever at (he goes to Delphi to consult the 
oracle, in order to, that he may consult, etc.). X. C. 3. 7, 5. <r4 ye 8i8d£wp 
'dip fj.T]jxaL. He/xiru) <re Xe^ovra (I send you that you may, to, in order to, say). 

(d) A condition, where the English often uses a subordinate 
clause with if; or a concession, where the English uses a sub- 
ordinate clause with although, though. 

X. Cy. 8, 7, 28. robs (piXovs ev epyer ovvr es Kal robs ix&pobs SvvqaecrSre ko- 
Xa^eiv (if you confer benefits on friends, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 41, 2. rS>v a&Xr)- 
r S> v Sis TO<ravTT]u pca/rnqv XafS6vr<av, ovSev av irXeov yevoiro ro7s &XXois, evb s 
Se avdpbs ev <p povii\ aavr os, airai/res av airoXavo'eiav oi ^ovX6pevoL KOivutvelv rr\s 
eKeivov Siauoias. X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. as bxlya Sv vdpevo i irpoopav foSpomoi irepl 
rod /xeXXovros ttoXXo. eTrix^ipovpev irpdrreiv (although men can foresee little, yet, 
etc.). 

Eem. 8. When the Pai-t. expresses a concession, the particles Kal (neg. ov5e, 
p-nSe), Kaltrep, Kal ravta, are commonly joined with it. X. An. 1. 6, 10. 
irposeKvuriffav COp6vT7]v) Kaiirep el8 6res,ori iirl &avdrcp dyoiro (although they 
saw, that). Eur. Ph. 1618. ovk av irpoZoi-qv ov§ eirep irpd.crcro)V kcikoos. PI. 
Pp. 404, b. "Ofjunpos iv reus rwv 7]pcx>wv earidaeo'iv ovre Ix&vo-iv avrobs earia, Kal 
r avra iirl baXdrrn ev 'EXXyisttovtw ovras (andthat too, though they were, etc.). Tavra 
in such connections, may often be governed by the verb iroieca : and he did this, 
although they were, etc. The words opus, elra, Kara, eireira, k air e ira, 
are often added to the predicate of the sentence. Her. 6, 120. varepoi Se air i- 
K6fxevot ttjs o-vjxfioXris Ipeipovro ofiws &er]cracrSrai rovs Mjfiovs (although they 
came after the battle, still they desired to see the Medes). PI. Charmid. 163, a. viro- 
Sepevos o'cocppoo'vvnv eivai to ra eavrov irpdrreiv, eireira ovSev <pr)cri KwXveiv 
Kal robs ra rGiv aXXcov irpdrrovras acocppovelv. "O [xco s is often in poetry 
joined to a Part., e. g. Aesch. S. 712. irei&ov yvvaiQ Kaiirep ov arepycov o peas, 
or (what also sometimes occurs in prose) is placed before the Part., e. g. PI. 
Phaed. 91, C. Hip/Aias <pofle7rai, /J-v V "tyvxh Sjuws Kal &ei6repov Kal KaXXiov ov 
rov crw/xaros icpoairoXXvnTai (that the soul, though more god-like and beautiful than 
the body, will nevertheless p>erish). 

(e) The manner and means, where the English sometimes 
uses a participial noun with a preposition. 

re A a) j/ elirev (he spolce laughing). X. Cy. 3. 2, 25. X-ni^o/xevoi &<riv 
(raptu vivunt, they live by plundering). C. 3. 5, 16. irpoaipovvrai /xuXXov ovru 
Kepdatveiv an aXXrjXuv, ^ avvaxpeXovvres avrovs ( prefer to gain some advan- 
tage from each other, rather than by assisting themselves). Isocr. Panath. 241, d 
robs "EXX-nvas iSioa^av, 'bv rpdirov SioiKovvres ras avrwv irarpib'as Kal irpbs ovs 
iroXe/xovvres jxeyaXijv rr)v 'EXXdoa iroLT](retav. So often xp ( ^>l J - eV0S with the 
Dat., where the English may use the preposition with, e. g. iroXXij rex v V 
Xp^pevos robs iroXe/jiiovs iviKijcrev (conquered the enemy ivith great tact). 

Eem. 9. Here belongs the phrase Xrjpe7s tx wv -> or m a question, ri 



484 SYNTAX. [$ 312. 

A 77 pels ex<0V; i- e. you keep trifling so, or why do you keep trifling so ?, ex<*> here 
expressing the idea of duration. PI. Gorg. 490, e. iroia. vTroZiifxara <pXvap€?s 
e x w v i [what shoes are you aliuays prating so much about ?). Here belong also the 
Part, <pe pSfievos, and <p4pcav used intransitively, summo studio, maximo impetu, 
dedita opera, with verbs of motion. Her. 8, 91. 8/cojs Se rives robs'A&rivaiovs 
§ia<pvyoiev, <pe p6 jievo 1 {cum impetu delati) 4s4irnrrov 4s robs Alyiv-ffras (as often 
as they escaped the Athenians, rushing on violently they fell into the hands of the 
Aeginetae). 8,87. (vavs) SicoKO/xewn iirb rrjs ' ArriKrjs (p4povo~a ev4/3a\e vrft (ptXip 
(cum impetu aggressa est amicam navem, being pursued by the Attic ship, made a 
violent attack on a friendly ship). Aeschin. Ctes. 82. 4s rovro <p4pa)i> irepi4arr]o-i 
ra irpdyixara (he designedly brought things to this state). Comp. ib. 90 and 146. 

Rem. 10. In like manner the Greek employs the participles ex&>y, Hyav, 
<p4pwu, \afZcbv, where the English may use the preposition with; ex<w is 
used both of animate and inanimate objects, which may be in the possession of 
any one, &y<au of animate objects, (p4pwu of inanimate, Xafitiov of both, e. g. X. 
Cy. 1. 3, 1. epx*Tcu 7) Mavddwn rrpbs rbv varepa Kal rbv Kvpov rbv vibv ix ov<Ta 
(with her son Cyrus, etc.). So 6 Kvpos £i<pos <p4pcav irposyXaaev, 'hrirov dycov 
tfx&ev, lirireas Xaficbv robs iroXe/xiovs /<aTe5ia>£ei/. The Homeric and Poetic 
language often connects the participles %x wv i <p4p<av, Xafi<av, and aycov with verbs 
of giving, placing, etc., in order to present the idea of the action that preceded 
the giving and placing, graphically, as it were, before the eyes of the hearer. 
II.77, 305. Sw/ce £i<pos apyvp6r]Xov cbv KoXecp re <p4pcov Kal £vj-4<rrip reXafxcovi 
(bringing he gave, he brought and gave a sword studded with silver). 

5. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Accusative is also used, 
but for the most part only when the Part, has no definite sub- 
ject, consequently where the verb from which the participle 
comes, is impersonal, e. g. i£6v (from e^eo-n, licet), quum liceat, 
liceret, while, token, since it is or was allowed; or with impersonal 
phrases, e. g. alvxpov ov (quum turpe sit, esset, while, because, 
since it is or was shameful.') The idea of extension in time, which 
is expressed by the Ace. ($ 279, 6), is, in this construction, trans- 
ferred to the state or condition of an object; the conjunctions 
while, when, express this corresponding relation. 

(a) Accusative absolute. PI. Menex. 246, d. y\iuv 4£bv (rjv /xtj naXoos, KaXws 
alpoi(xe&a p.aXXov reXevrav (since it is not in our power to live honorably). Protag. 
358, d. otolv avayKaa&fj Svo?v k<xk<hv rb erepov alpe?o~&ai, ovdels rb p.e7£ov aip^Ce- 
rai, 4£bv rb ixarrov (aipeiafrai), no one will choose the greater, when it is in his 
power to choose the less. Her. 1, 129."Ap7ra7os', irapehv avrcp /3a<riX4a yev4<r&ai, 
&XXq> irepie&rjKe rb Kpdros (when it was in his power to become a king). 5, 49. 
irap4x ov (quun 1 liceat) rris AcItjs ird(X7]s dpx^v euirer4oos, 6.XX0 ri alp'qcrecr&e ; 
Th. 5. 14. (ol ""ASrivcuoi p.€rep.4Xovro, on /xera ra iv TivXco (yevo/j.eva), KaXcos ira- 
> a o"x & v, ov £vvefir)o-av (when a favorable opportunity presented itself). So vir dp- 
Xov, quum liceat, liceret ; 84ov, quum opus (necess*) sit, esset; d6 £av avro?s (quum 
iis visum sit or esset, when it pleased them, when they had decreed) ; 801c ovv (quum 
videatur, videretur) : tt p srj kov (quum deceat, deceret). Passive participles: 
Th. 1 125,. Se So yp.4 vo v Se avrots, ev&bs fxev aSvvara tfv iirixzipziv airapaff- 
Kevon ovo-iv (and though they had determined, it ivas not possible for them, etc.). E i oi} • 



9 312.] THE PARTICIPLE. 485 

\x£vov (qnum dictum sit, esset). Adjectives with ov, e.g. SrjAov 6u (quum 
appareat, appareret) ; adrjAov ov, SvvaTov ov, a 5 vv clt o v ov. Also some- 
times without oj/, e.g. BrjAov, avay Kalov. 

(b) Accusatives absolute. Though the participles of impersonal verbs usu- 
ally have no subject joined with them in the Ace. Absol., yet a neuter pronoun, 
not a substantive, may be joined with them as their subject. Her. 2, 66. 
ravra y ivSfieva, irev&ea /xeydAa rovs Alyvirrlovs KaraAajxPavsi (when this 
is done, the Egyptians are filled with great grief). Th. 4, 125. tf8n ap.<poTepots 
pXv Sokovv avax^peTv, Kvpa&ev 5 e ovSev (scd quum nihil decretum esset), e'x^- 
povv eV otnov. X. H. 3. 2, 1 9. do^avra 5e ravTa Kal tt epavS ivT a, to, p.ev 
0-Tpa.Tzv/ji.aTa airriA&ev (when these things had been agreed upon and accomplished). 

Rem. 11. The Genitives absolute, however, are more frequent than the Acc.,when 
a neuter pronoun is joined with the impersonal verb. X. H. 1 . 1 , 36. § 6 1 a v t s 
r ovtov cpxeTo (hac re decreta, this having been agreed to, when this had been, etc.). 
7, 30 and 5. 2, 24. 8 o£dvr tov tovtco v. Cy. 4. 5, 53. t ovtov vvvSokovv- 
ros (ace. to the best MSS.). 4.5,53. t ovtov ovtccs ex ot/T os. Also 86!-- 
av TavTa (from e8o£e tovto) occurs. X. An. 4. 1, 13. So^av TavTa, e/crj- 
pv£av ovTu iroieTv (when this was approved, they gave orders by the herald to do ac- 
cordingly). With such impersonal verbs as contain the subject in a measure 
in themselves, the Gen. is used, e. g. vovtos, o-aAirifyvTos [§ 238, 5. (b)]. 
Elsewhere the Gen. but very seldom occurs with impersonal verbs and phrases, 
e. g. X. Hipp. 4, 2. aS-fiAov ovtos, ei ktA. 

6. The particle of comparison &> s, is connected both with the 
dependent Part. ($ 312, 3), and also with the Gen. and Ace, 
absolute, when the idea expressed by the Part, is to be in- 
dicated as a representation, as a subjective view, opinion, 01 
purpose of the actor or speaker. This w? has the same signifi- 
cation as a Part, of a verb of thinking or saying, followed by 
an Inf., or Ace. with an Inf. The English can express this o>s 
by 'the expressions thinking, intending, with the intention of, 
saying, or by as though, as if, under the pretence that, because. 

(a) Simple Participle. X. Cy. 1. 1, 1. ot Tvpavve7v iTnx^p'fio'avTes, Kav otto- 
ffovovv XP^ V0V &PX 0J/T€S Sttryevtwi/Tai, &av/j.d£ovTai, cos crocpol re Kal hvtvx^s yz- 
yevr) \ikvoi ( properly, as those are admired, who are wise men = vo/j.i(6 p.evoi 
aocpoi re Kal cvtvx^s yeytvrjtrfrcu, thought or reputed to be wise). PI. Rp. 329, a. 
ayavaKTovoriv, ch s pceyaAcov tlvcov air e ltt e py fievo t (i.e. 7]y ov fx. evo i fxey. t. 
airzo'Tep?io'&at (as if they had been deprived, thinking they had been deprived). X. 
An. 1. 1, 11. 'E/ceAeixre (Up6^vov) Aafi6vTa dvdpas otl TrAeltTTOvs Trapayevetr&ai, 
cos is IletcriSas PovAofievos en paTevetrfrai (pretending that, under the pretence 
that, saying that, he wished to march against the Pisidians). 'Cls is very often 
connected with the Put. Act. Part., when a- purpose in the mind of another 
is expressed. X. An. 1. 1, 3. 'ApTa^ep^vs orvAAa/xfidvet Kvpov cos diro kt evciv 
(arrests Cyrus for the purpose of putting him to death). The writer here states the 
view or purpose as it existed in the mind of Artaxei-xes, and not his own vie\¥ 
of the matter. So also very often with irapao-K^vd^a^ai, § 310, 4, (h). 

41* 



486 SYNTAX. [$ 312 

(b) Genitives absolute. X. H. 7. 5, 20. trapiiyyeiXev avro?s irapaaKevdCea&ai; 
&s (J.dxys eo-op.evTjs (i. e. \eywv (idxyv e<recr&ai) (he commanded them to pre 
pare themselves, because, as he said, or saying that, there was to be a battle). 5. 4, 9. 
iKTjpvTTOV iliivai rrdvras ©-qPatovs, ws ruv rvpdvvwv r e&ve&r uv (quiatyranni 
mortui essent, because, as he said, the tyrants were dead). Th. 1, 2. es 'lcaviav vcxre- 
pov, us ovx iKavris ovens rrjs 'Attiktjs, airoiKias i£eirep.\pav (i. e. vo p.l£ovres 
ovx iKav)]v eivai) (afterward sent colonies to Ionia, thinking that Attica was not large 
enough). 

(c) Accusative absolute. X. An. 5. 2, 12. 6 5e rots TreAracrrah ttuo-i irap-fjy- 
YeAAe $n)yicvAwp.4vovs Uvea, a> s, 6ir6rav a-np.^vp; aKovrl£eiv 5 e ij crov (he com- 
manded all the peltasts to advance, ready to shoot, saying, that it would be necessary 
for them to hurl their javelins, etc.). PL Rp. 425, a. rots 7jp.erepois iraialv ev- 
vop.(aripov eb&bs TrcuSias p.e&eKreov, w s, irapa.v6p.ov yiyvop.evns avrrjs, evvofiovs re 
Kal crrrovSatovs dvdpas av^dveoSai ddvvarov 6 v. Sows i£6v, cos Trapov, etc. 

(d; Accusatives absolute. X. C. 1. 2, 20. Sib Kal robs vle?s ol irarepes airb 
Toiv irovTjpwv av&pdbirwv etpyo vo~iv, &> 5 r^v p.ev ruv xPV (J ' r ^ 1/ op.i\lav dffKKio'iv 
ovcav rrjs aperrjs, r^v 5e ru>v itovnp&v KaraAvcriv (assured that, knowing that, 
the intercourse ivith good men leads them to practise virtue). 3, 2. ev"x €ro 2a>/c- 
parr\s irpbs robs &eobs air\S>s rdya&d SiSovai, us robs freobs KaAAio'Ta 
elSSras (thinking that, convinced that, the gods knew what was best). This con- 
struction is very common, and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the 
one mentioned in No. 5, (b). Perhaps this construction is not absolute, but 
depends upon a verb of perception to be supplied, indicated by as. 

Rem. 12. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with &s, oc- 
curs with the verbs eldevai, iirio-rao'&ai, voe?v, %x* lv yv(a/j.ijv, Sia- 
tceia&ai rr\v yva>p.7]v, (p povri^eiv, also sometimes with Aeyeiv, and the 
like verbs, with which, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. of the substan- 
tive with a Part, or the Ace. with an Inf., would stand as the object. The 
consequence resulting from the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by 
ovTca(s) joined to the predicate. X. An. 1. 3, 6. aj ifiov ovv lovros, oirn av 
Kal vp.e7s, ovra> r^v yvavnv e%eTe (as if then I shall go, etc., seeing then that 
I shall go, so form your opinion, i. e. be assured that I shall go wherever you go, me 
iturum esse, quocunque etiam vos, statuite). Cy. 2. 3, 15. ws olv 4/j.ov ye Kal 
ay av iov fxevov Kal, birolos &v tis d>, Kara r^jv d^iav p.e ripidv a|i taaovro s, 
ovroos, e<pT], 8> Kvpe, yiyvoiffKe. PI. Cratyl. 439, c. 8 iavor]&evres &s 
I6vruiv re dnavrav del Kal pe6vru>v (reputantes, omnia semper ire et fluere). 

Rem. 13. Instead of ws, Sosirep (quasi) is sometimes joined with the Part. 
In order to bring out emphatically an objective (actually existing) ground or 
reason, the particles are (are d-h), seldom oTa, oTov (in the tonic writers, 
also, Sjtc), in the sense of inasmuch as, because, quippe, are connected with the 
participle. Her. 6, 59. are ttvkvov e6vros rov dAaeos, ovk &pcov oi evrbs 
robs eKrSs (because the grove was thick). X. An. 4.8, 27. are ^ewfiev u>v 
rSiv eraipcov, iroAA^ <piAoveiKia iylyvero (because the hetaerae were looking on, 
there was much rivalry). 5. 2, 1. ol KoAxoi, « Te eKireirr uKores [e/c] rcov 
oIkiSsv, iroAAol f^aav a&pooi Kal virepeKa&rjvro eirl rcav &Kpc»v (inasmuch as they had 
been driven out of their houses, etc.). Th. 2, 5. ^aav Kal dvhpwxoi Kard robs dy povs, 
ola airposdoKT]Tov KaKov iv elpr)vr) yevop.evov. PL Charm. 153, a. olov did 
Xpovov d(piyp.evos dafievus pa eirl rds ^vvrj^eis Biarpifids. 



$ 313.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE PAP,TICIPLE. 487 

4 313. Special peculiarities in the Particii^iao con- 
struction. 

1. The Nom. of a Part often refers to a preceding substantive in the Dat, 
Ace., or Gen., when the Dat., Ace, or Gen. in the preceding clause denotes the 
object in a grammatical point of view, but the subject in a logical respect, e. g. 
in SoKe? p. oi = iyu rjyovpai, I think. This is a species of Anacoluthon 
{§ 347, 5). 

(a) Dative. Th. 3, 36. e8o£ev avrois (i. e. £^-n<pi<ravTo, voted) ov tovs ira- 
pSvTas (xovov airoKTe'ii'ai, aWa teal tovs diravTas MnvXrivaiovs, iir i KaXovvT e s 
tt/j/ dXhriv aTToo-racriv k. t. A. (as Sallust. Jug. 102. populo Romano melius visum = 
rati). 6,24. ipcas iveireo'e traciv (= iwe&vpovi/ irdures) 6/j.oicos iicir\€v<rai • 
to 7s pkv ir p ecr j8ut epois us . . KaTaaTpexpopeuois i(p' a eirXeov, ..ro?s 5' iu 
-tjXik'lo. . . ei>4 Kir ides o v r e s <ra>£rf)crecrScu. — (b) Accusative. Eur. Hec. 970. 
alSds p? exet (= aldovpai) iv Tcpde irdTpcp Ticyxai/oucr' 'iv elpl vvv. — (c) Geni- 
tive. Her. 4, 132. Aapetov r) yvup-n e-nv ( = iyiyvooaKev) ei/cafwc. Th. 4, 
23. Ta 7reol Tlv\ov vir ap.(poT 4 p<a v Kara Kpdros iiroXe pe?ro (= refc irepl IT. 
apupSrepoi £iro\4povv), 'Aid-Tj vaio i pkv . . ttjv vrjaov tt e p nrX 4 ov t e s . . , II eA- 
ottovvtjo' ioi §€ iv Trj 5 H7retpa; arr paroir ed ev6p.cuoi (comp. § 266, 3). — 
Sometimes also the Ace. and Dat. of the Part, is constructed according to the 
sense of the preceding phrase or clause, and not according to its grammatical 
form, e. g. S. El. 479, sq. vireari p.oi Srpdcros aSvTrvSwv KXvovcrav aprioos 
oveipaTwv (instead of Spd<ros p.' ex el KKvovaav). Th. 1, 62. i\v yv&p.i\ 
rod } Ap ictt 4 cu s (= e5o£e rep 'A pi ere?) rb pkv pe& kavTOv CTpaToireZov 
^X oyT l * v T( ? 'Io~&p.<p iniTripeiv tovs 'A&Tjvaiovs. 

Remark 1. On the Nom. of the participle in the partitive apposition, seo 
4 266, 3. — The Nom. of the Part, sometimes stands in a sentence alone, with- 
out a finite verb, so that the Part, apparently, but only apparently, takes the 
place of the finite verb. The finite verb must then be supplied from the pre- 
ceding or following sentence. Her. 1, 82. AaKtScupovioi ra ivavTia tovtwv 
e&evto v6p.ov ov yap ko p.wv t es irpb tovtov onrb tovtov Kopav (sc. vSpov 
c&evro). So also conjunctions stand without a finite verb, e. g. el, idv, oTav, 
etc. X. C. 2. 1, 23. bpSi <re airopovvTa, iroiav oSbv eVi tov fiiov rpdinj' iav ovv 
ipk <t>i\7]v tvo n)crdfievos (scil. tV eVl rbv fiiov 6Sbv Tpdiry). In very many 
passages, however, the Part, may be explained by inserting dpi. 

2. The genitives absolute sometimes occur where the subject of the participle 
is not different from the subject of the predicate or an object of the predicate ; here 
it is to be noted, that the subject of the participle is often wanting, since it can 
be easily supplied (§ 312, Rem. 4). The reason of this peculiar construction 
is commonly found in the effort to express the member of the sentence with 
greater emphasis. 

Instead of the Nominative. Th. 3, 13. fiorj^rjcravT ccv vpoiv irpo&vpcos 
tt6Xiv irposAr)\pecrdG (you aiding, you will more readily, etc.). 70. koI is \6yovs 
tear ao~rdvT <av (KepKvpaicou) i^cpiffauTO Kepicvpa'ioi (the Corcyraeans having 
had a conversation, determined). X. Cy. 1. 4, 20. ravra *Itt6vtos ait tov e8o|e 
ri (sc. clvtos) \4yeiv tcS 'Ao-Tvdyei. Instead of the Accusative. Her. 9, 99. oi 
^dpioi, air iko p.iv wv * A«fnv aiw alxpa\&T<av . . t ovtov s Xvcrduevoi -ndv- 
Tas aTroirepirovai . . is Tar 'A&T)i/as (when the Athenian captives had come, the Sami- 
aits having ransomed them, send all back to Athens). Instead of the Dative. Th. 
1, 114. k<x\ is avTrjv S ta /3e /3tj k 6t o s ^877 lie pmhiov s . .rjyyiAfrn avT<p 
(UepiK\e7) (when Pericles had crossed over into it, it teas announced to him). 

Rem. 2. These examples must be distinguished from those in Homer, where 
the Gen. of a Part, follows a Dat. of a pronoun, or the Dat. of a Part, follows 
a Gen. ; then instead of the possessive Gen., Homer sometimes uses the Dat 



488 



SYNTAX. 



[M 314, 313 



Od. i, 257. 7]jx7v 8' o5t€ KareKXacr^r] <pi\ov ijrop 8 e iffdvr cav <p&6yyov re fiapbr 
avrov re ireXcopov (=7)/j.wj/ fjrop). 458, sq. t£ /ce ol iyicecpaASs ye diet, crireos 
&\Av8is ttWrj kreivofxev ov patoiro irpbs ovSe'i. II. £, 140. 'Arpeidr), vvv 877 irov 
5 A x t A Atj o s oA-obi/ /c%> yrj&ei ivl aTTj^ecrai <p6vov iced <pv£av 'Axcuoov depicofievcp. 



CHAPTEE VI. 
$314. The Adverbial Objective. 

The objective construction, finally, is expressed by adverbs. 
Adverbs denote the relation of place, time, manner, the quantity 
of a predicate or attribute, or of another adverb, e. g. ZyyvSev 
r}\$ev, X"^ s aTrefir), kcxAcos a7r£$avev, 7roAAa/cis r)\$ev; adverbs 
are to be viewed in a measure as resembling the Cases of sub- 
stantives, since by these also, as has been seen, the relations 
just mentioned are expressed. Hence it is evident why most 
adverbs have a definite Case -inflexion, e. g. ov, where, avw, kclto), 

61, olKOL, TTTj, OTTY], etC. (§ 101, 2). 

Remark. In addition to the above adverbs, the language has other adverbs, 
which do not, like those mentioned, define the predicate more exactly, but ex- 
press the relation of the predicate to the subject. These are called Modal 
Adverbs. They denote the certainty or uncertainty, the extension or limita- 
tion, the affirmation or negation of the proposition ; or they exhibit the propo- 
sition interrogatively. Several of them have been changed from adverbs to 
mere suffixes, and hence always depend on xi particular word, which by them 
is made emphatic. The interrogative adverbs will be treated under the sub- 
ject of im;errogative sentences. Of the other adverbs alluded to, the following 
deserve a more particular consideration. 



§ 315. A. Ar/, SrJTa, 3-rjv, 8f)$ev, §r)Trov&a>, Sou. 

1. A^ is the abridged form of fjdi), being conformed to it in usage ; but it 
can never, like tfdr], stand as the first word in a sentence (except in the Epic 
87? r6re, turn vero, 87? yap, jam enim), but is used only as a mere suffix (§ 314, 
Rem.). It denotes in general that which is certain, sure, settled, a reference to 
something known (already, now, even, precisely, exactly) ; it is not used of a par- 
ticular time exclusively, but may refer to any time. It is very often employed, 
in order to denote a consequence which follows of itself, nothing further being 
taken into the account. Tavra, a vvv 877 Xeyeis [just now, at this very time) ; & 
vvv St> eAeyes (just now, just then). X. Cy. 4. 1, 23. vvv St) av SyXcixreis, el 
a\7}£rij e\eyes (now certainly). Ovdev 87) kclkov ■KeirSvdrap.ev (nihil jaw or nihil 
dum, thus far, as yet, up to this time). ObSev 87^ kolkov TreKro/xe^a (nihil jam = 
further). With an Imp. or hortative Subj., it signifies, now, then, now then, I pray. 
X. C. 1. 2, 41. 8i8a£oi/ 8 77 npbs rav &ewv (now then teach, teach then, I pray). 



$ 315.] Arj } SrJTa, Srjv, SrjSev, S^Trou^ev, Sat. 489 

"Iw/jlgi/ S-f] (now then let us go, come now). After relatives, it often denotes a ref- 
erence to a thing which is known. X. Hier. 11,8. Kal Trpurov fxev ebStvs Kareip- 
yacr/xevos av etns rb <piXe?a&ai vrrb to>v apxo/xeuav, ou Stj av eTri^-v/xwy rvyxdveis 
(quod, uti satis constat, expetis). Hence i-ireiS-fi (since now, quoniam, i. e. quum 
jam), because now, puisque, in respect to something conceded, known ; us S-f], 
seeing that, quandoquidem, el S77, si jam, if now. In a series of sentences con- 
nected hy Kal, S-f] is placed after the word which is to he made emphatic. PL 
Men. 87, e. vyteia, <pa/xeu, /cat iV%us Kal KaAXos Kal -itAovtos 877. So Kal t& 
5 77 /xeyuTTOv; further, aAAos re — Kal 877 Kai. Her. 1, 30. els Myvirrov airiKero 
irapa, "Ap.aaiv, Kal 877 Kal es H,dpSis irapa Kpoiaov (and even also, and moreover 
also to Sardis). — Tt ovv 5 77; (why therefore, I pray ?) Uu>s ovv S-f\, (how now 
then, how, Ipray?). 

2. In general, 5 77 is very often used in order to render emphatic and define 
more exactly, the word after which it stands : precisely, exactly, even (in English 
often indicated only by the tone of voice). X. Cy. 2. 3, 13. /xeya <ppovovo~iv, 
'drnreTraiSewTai 8)7 Kal -Jrpbs AL/xbu Kal "irpbs Styav Kal Trpbs piyos Kaprepe7v (just 
because they have been taught, because they have been taught, forsooth). PI. Prot. 
320, a. 8e8io>s irepl avrov, [xt] Sia(p&apfj §77 vn 'AAKifiidSov (lest he should be cor~ 
rupted, forsooth). With adjectives and numerals, it has either a limiting or en- 
larging sense, according to the nature of the adjective or numeral, e. g. fxSvos 
877 (quite alone), ev Ppaxe? 8 77 (in a very short time), aa&evTjs S-f] (very weak), 
ttoAAo! 677, TToAAa/cis 877, KpaTL<rrot 8 77 (the very best, confessedly the best). With 
a pronoun, it expresses the distinction, importance, prominence of a person or 
thiug as known, e. g. eKe?uos 877, that (well-known) man, <rv 877 ravra iroAfx-na-as ; 
(did you especially, you of all others dare this ?) ; ovtcc S-f], ivrav&a 877 ; so with other 
interrogative pronouns, X. C. 4. 4, 10. Kal iroTo s 8 77 <tol, ecp-q, ovros 6 Aoyos iariv ; 
(what kind of reasoning, I ask, I pray ?). Eur. Med. 1012. r i Si] Karr]cpe?s o/x/xa 
Kal SaKpvppoels ; So T( 877 -jrore; (what then in all the world?). Tis 8)7 obv ; 
(who then now, who 1 pray?). With an indefinite pronoun, it increases the in- 
definiteness, e. g. &AA01 8 77 (others, wlwever they may be), oaos 877, ott6(tos S-f], ostls 
877 (some one or other, any one whatever, nescio quis), £t)v 6ir6oov 877 x?^ vov {I know 
not how long). With conjunctions and other particles, it signifies : (a) even, 
precisely, e. g. w s Stj, Iva 877, indeed, just exactly, just even; (b) truly, assuredly, 
when a thought is to be expressed with assurance and decision, e. g. % 877, 7) 
fid A a S-f], Kal S-f], S-f] ttov, certainly indeed, assuredly, ov S-f] irov, yet surely 
not at all, certainly not, ydp S-f], for surely. 

3. Atjtc*, which is formed from S-f], serves like 877, only in a higher degree, 
to render prominent, and more exactly define the word, which stands before it. 
It may be joined with all the parts of speech, in order to define them, whether 
it be to extend or restrict them. It is very often used after interrogatives, e. g. rl 
Stjt, €7T6i5aj/ tovto yeu-nrai; (quid tumdemum dicetis, quum hoc factum erit ?). It 
is also quite frequently employed in answers (even so, precisely so, certainly so). 
Also, % 8 77 t a, yes, forsooth, ov Stj to (minime vero, no, by no means), /xt] Srjra 
\nay, do not), e. g. fxr] St) to Spdays ravra ; Kal Syra (and jbrsooth, and truly). 

4. The enclitic &-f]u is a Doric particle, but it also appears in the Epic lan« 



490 SYNTAX. [$ 3ia 

guage. In Homer, &r)v has always an ironical sense, like the Attic St}ttov, 
without doubt, certainly. II. /3, 276, ob &i)v jxiv irdMu avris avfjo-ei &v/xbs ayrjuwp 
veiKeieiv fiatrikrjas oveiSelois eVeWo'ij'. 

5. A^€v (from 5?7 and &r)v) almost always expresses scorn , irony (scilicet, 
truly, indeed) ; it is very seldom used as a mere explanatory particle. X. Cy. 4. 
6, 3. aireir€fx\pdfji.r]v (rbv vlov), fx4ya (ppov&v, '6t>. dyj&ev tt)s /Sao-iAe'cos frvyarpos 
o^oi/xrjv tov i/xbv vlbv ya/x4Tf]v (because, forsooth, I should sec my son the husband of 
the king's daughter). 

6. AjjTTov&ev (from 54)ttov and &7)v), I hope so indeed, I suppose, certainly 
(nempe, ironically). X. Cy. 4. 3, 20. iyb 8 , t)v lirireieiv juadw, qtolv /xeu iirl tov 
'{ttttov yevoofiai, to, tov iirnoKtvTavpov dyjTrov^ev diairpdZo/xai (I shall, as I hope, 
act the part of a centaur). 

7. Acu is a lengthened form of 877 (as vox of vt\). It is used only in the 
phrases -rt 8al; ttws Saij it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder (what then f 
how so ? airf tu ? itane ? itane vero ?). 



$ 316. B. Confirmative Adverbs. 

1. Mt)u (Dor. and Ep. fidu) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, as- 
severation, truly ; often also, like vero, it is used adversatively : still, but. But it 
cannot stand as the first word in a sentence, as it commonly depends on another 
word, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly on particles. 
Its use with particles is as follows: (a) ^H ixi\v, surely, certainly, hence used 
particularly with oaths, asseverations, or solemn promises. X. Cy. 4. 2, 8. Ta 
ttio-to. SiScoo'iv avTois, t) fX7]v ws <pl\ois nal TTiarToh xP'h '* '** - 1 avTo?s (that he as* 
suredly would treat them as friends). — (b) O v fX7}v, (xfy fx-qv, truly, assuredly 
not. — (c) Kal jxt]v, and indeed, yea surely, nay more. PI. Phaed. 58, e. Kal 
(i))V 670)76 &av/xdo-ia eira&ov TrapayevS/xeuos. Kal fx^v is often used, when a 
new assertion is adduced to strengthen or corroborate the meaning. Od. A, 
582. Kal fx7]v TdvTohov elseiSov ] so, often in the dramatic writers when atten- 
tion is to be directed to the entrance of a new person : and sze ! and lo ! Also 
Kal n^v Kai, et vero etiam, and indeed too ; Kal ix)\v ov5 4, and indeed not even. 
— (d) 'AAAa fiTjv, at, sed vero, but indeed, but assuredly. In a question, Ti 
ixii v ; ir cos \xt\v ; quid vero ? quid quaeso ? what indeed ? lohat I ask ? 

Remark. Instead of /x ?j v, the Ionic writers employ the shorter form /x 4 v, 
which, as well as /x-fjv and. /xdv, is found in Horn. also. Even in the Attic dia- 
lect, p.4v is sometimes used instead of fx-fju, e. g. in an answer. X. C. 1. 4, 4. 
iroTepa yvwp.7]S epya Kptveis 5 Up4iret fxev to. eV wcpeAeia ytyuo/xeua yvcajx-qs epyu 
ewai. This confirmative jx 4 v, instead of fxrjv, occurs in the following con- 
nections : (a) MeVroi expresses confirmation, surely ; very often in antitheses, 
like vero, to denote a limitation; thus, Kal jx4vtoi, ov [x4vtoi, aX\h /x4y- 
tol. — (b) Mevovv or jxeu ovv, sane quidem, quite certainly, yea indeed, is 
used, for the most part, only in replies, e. g. irduv /xev ovv; very often when 
some correction is made. X. C. 2. 7, 5. ol irapa. aol tovtoov ovSeu litio-Tavrai 
tzouIv; YidvTa fxhv ovv (but do those with you know nothing of these things'? 
yes, everything, immo vero omnia). So ov or fxr] /xevovv, immo non. — (c) 
MeySfj or /xhr 877, quite certainly, yea indeed; always in the phrases 7) /xevd-fi. 



$ 317.J EMPHATIC SUFFIXES 7rep, ye, toL 49i 

ou fievZ-r), aWa fievS-h, ««! fievdr), ye {lev — 817 instead of 7) /u?V di], 
etc. On the concessive fiev, see § 322, 3. 

2. ^H expresses confirmation (profecto). In order to strengthen it, fii\v is 
often joined with it. T H irov, surely indeed, often ironically. The Epic tfroi 
like 9i, expresses assurance : surely, certainly, 

3. N v in Epic, expresses also an asseveration, but generally in an ironical or 
scornful manner (like the Attic Stjttov), indeed, forsooth, certainly, nempe. 

4. N 77, the Lat. nae, expresses an asseveration, but only in affirmative sen- 
tences, e. g. v}] rhv Ala, in truth, surely. — From vn is formed the lengthened v a i 
(as Sal from S/j), which has the same meaning, and is often used with fid. — 
Ma likewise denotes an asseveration; in affirmative sentences: val fia rbv 
Ala ; in negative : ov fia. rhv Ala. But where fia Ala stands without a nega- 
tion, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear from the context 
and from an accompanying adversative particle, that the sentence is to be un- 
derstood as negative, like X. CL 3. 13, 3, 



§ 317. C. Emphatic suffixes 7rip, yi, rot. 

1. Hep is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb nept, 
through and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of irep is through and 
through {throughout). Hip agrees with ye in that, like the latter, it gives empha- 
sis to the word with which it is joined, but it differs from ye, in making the 
emphasis extensive (consequently denoting the measure, size, the extent of the 
idea) ; ye, on the contrary, makes the emphasis intensive (consequently de- 
noting degree, the inward strength or force of the idea). In the Common 
Language, irep is not used alone, but in relation to another thought. Hence it 
is often connected with conjunctions and relatives, e. g. '6snep, throughout, en- 
tirely, the very samz who, oaosirep, altogether as great as, precisely as great, o16s -n-ep, 
entirely, exactly of such a character as, etc., ottov irep, just where, wherever, 'SSev 
Tep, just whence, whence soever, eas irep, up to the very time, as far as, until, eirel wep, 
since, eireiS-h nep, forasmuch, seeing that, whereas, eXirep, if indeed, if even. In Eng, 
the meaning of both particles is often given by merely emphasizing the word 
to which they belong. 

2. r e denotes intension, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus ren- 
ders an idea emphatic and distinguishes it from others ; it may be used either to 
augment or restrict the force of a word, e. g. iyd ye (I indeed, I for my part, 
however it may be with others), av ye, out 6s ye, iroXXa ye, bxlya ye, etc. It 
depends, like the enclitics, on the word whose meaning it renders emphatic. 
In connection with relatives and conjunctions, it serves to confirm or complete 
the preceding statement. Thus, osye, who or which indeed, who certainly, qui 
quidem; SisTrep ye, just as indeed ; eXye, if indeed, if however, siquidem ; after 
adversative conjunctions: icalroi ye, aXXd ye, etc., and yet indeed (like 
quamquam qiddem, verum quidem), ye makes an antithesis prominent, since it 
defines more exactly, limits or corrects what precedes. X. C. 1#2, 3. k air 01 



492 



SYNTAX. 



[$318 



•ye ou5e7rw7roT6 wre<TX eT0 Siddo-KaAos elvai rovrov (certainly Socrates made his 
pupils useful men, although, etc.). Te is very often used in implies and answers, 
in order to indicate that they either confirm, augment, complete, limit, or 
correct, the thought contained in the preceding question. 

3. Tot (enclitic) means surely, certainly, certe, and serves also to render an 
object marked and prominent. It is often connected Avith pronouns, e. g. iycb 
rot, eyooye roi, I surely, I most certainly, t)jj.zis roi, ravrd roi. It is particularly 
employed in quoting general propositions and proverbs, since by it an assertion 
is referred to a general truth and thereby confirmed. Theogn. 74. iravpot r o t 
iroXKwv iricrrbv exovcri voov. With adversative particles, e. g. Kairoi, tamen, 
quamquam (properly and surely), /xevroi, tamen (§ 316, Rem.), ardp rot, 
a A. A. a roi, but certainly. Also, ovroi [(xt]toi), certainly not, yap r o t, for 
indeed, for certainly, ftoi, — t\, still stronger tfroi ye — ij, either indeed — or. 



§ 318. D. Negative Particles ovk and /xrj. 

1. Ov (like its compounds, e. g. ovSe, ovre, ou Sets, etc) is an objective 
negative; /x-f] subjective, i.e. ov is used when something is denied absolutely, 
independently, by itself [objectively) ; p.-fi (and its compounds), on the contary, 
when something is denied in reference to the conception, view, or will of the 
speaker or of some other person [subjectively). Both are commonly placed before 
the words to which the. negation is to be applied. On the position after the 
word to be negatived, see § 15, 4. 

2. Hence ovk stands : (a) in all sentences containing a direct assertion, wheth- 
er these are expressed by the Indicative or Optative ; hence also (b) in subor- 
dinate clauses with Sri and ws [that); (c) in simple interrogative clauses, 
both direct and indirect ; (d) in subordinate clauses denoting time, with S r e, 
iireiS-f}, etc. 5 (e) the ground or reason, with '6ti, diori, 4 Tret, etc.; (f ) the 
consequence, with &sre either with the Ind. or Opt. ; (g)Jn adjective clauses, 
with os, '6 sr is, etc., which denote a concrete, objective attributive explanation; 
(h) when an absolute negative meaning is to be given to a single word in a 
sentence, e. g. ovk aya&os, ov KaK&s; in this case ov sometimes changes the 
idea of the word to an opposite sense. 

(a) Tovro ov yiyverai, ovk eyevero, ov yevf]0~erai. Tavra ovk av ylyvoiro. 
— (b) OlSa, Sri ravra ovk iyevero. ''EXeyev, Sri rovro ovx ovrcas eTx^v. — 
(c) Tts ovk oXo~xvverai (or ovk av alo~xvvoiro) KaKa Xeyuv rbu aya&bv dvdpa; 
— ^Ap' ov &av/j.d£eis rbv ~2,wKpan) ; — Ov Spdcreis rovro; — Oi; Trepi/xsveTs (§255, 
4). — $ps, t) ov; or <prjs, $) ov (pys; — Ae£ov, et [whether) ovx Tjfiapres ravra 
/\e£as. On the dependent double question, see No. 3. — (d) "Ore ovk t)aSov 
ol iroXefxioi, ol "EAA7)ves ^o"u%a£bz/. — (e) "Oti ol fidpfiapoi ovx f)rT-f]frno~av, ot 
"EAA^ves ra opt] ov KariKiTTov. — (f ) X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. Ta%u ra ^rjpta avy)\(aKei 
[Kvpos), 8>sre 6 'Avrvdyns ovk4t el%ef avrcp ffvAkeyeiv &r]pla. — (g) 'Avfjp, 
tv ov k eides. 'Avfjp, ov ovk av &avfxd£ois. 

3. Mi) onsthe contrary, stands : (a) with commands, learnings ; hence with thP 



$ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND fxt]. 493 

Imp. and with the imperative Subj.; (b) with wishes and exhortations; (c) in 
deliberative questions [§ 259, 1. (b)] ; (d) in clauses denoting purpose, with Vj/«, 
etc. (also with owns and the Indie. Put.) ; (e) in conditional clauses, with el with 
the Indie, or Opt., edv, '6 ray, eirdv, ecas &y with the Subj., ore ye = siqui- 
dem ; so also in subordinate clauses which denote a repetition, whether they are 
introduced by a temporal conjunction, or by el, edv, or by the relative, etc. ; 
(f) in clauses denoting consequence or result, with &sre and an Inf.; (g) in 
adjective clauses with os, osns, etc., which imply a condition or purpose, in 
general when a subordinate clause contains an idea which is expressed only as a 
conception, supposition ; hence when the idea of a class or species as such is more 
precisely defined, and the sentence may be resolved by is, qui with the subjunctive 
(= ita comparatus, ut) ; (h) in the second member of a dependent disjunctive 
question {whether — or not), ov as well as /xi) is used. PL Phaed. 70, d. o7ce^c*>- 
fieSa, eXr dpa ev aSov elcrlv ai tyvxal re\evrr\a-dvroov ra>y ay&peoiruy, eXre Kal ov. 
Crit. 48, b. GKeirreov, izbrepou diKaiov e/xe ey&eyde ireipacr&ai i^ievai, jxt} cupieyrcoy 
'A&nyaiay, r) ov ZiKaiov. PI. Pp. 339, a. el a\r)&es (b heyeis), t) lit), Treipdaoixai 
fxa&e?y. Phil. 21, b. rovr avro, el r) ^at/jets, r) fxr] x«'V €IS ) avdyKi] Srjirov ae 
ayvoetv, Kev6v ye fyra irdar]S <ppoyr)aews, Isae. 5, 14. ov Set vfxas e/c rwv tov kcc- 
rnyopov Koytav robs \6yovs Kara/xay&dveiy, el Kak&s v/x?y Ke7vrai, r) fir), aAA' e« 
rwv yS/xuy robs rod Kar-nyopov \6yovs, el bp&S>s v/xas didd^ov&i rb rrpayfxa, 7) v. 
But in those dependent questions, in which there is merely & distinction between what 
is, and what is not, fxi) is used, when the predicate of the first member is not repeated, 
but must be supplied ; but v as well as \x i), when it is repeated. Dem. Cept. § 142. 
\oyio~ao~&e irpbs v[xas avrovs, ri re o-vfxfirjaerai Karexprjcpia'fxeyois v/x7y rov ySfxov Kal ri 
fi 7). X. C. 3. 6, 10. ola&a, 6ir6crcu re (pvAaKal eiriKcupoi elo~i Kal 6ir6crai fxf), Kal 6ir6aai 
re (ppovpol tKavoi elcrt Kal birdaoi /x-i] elan. Aesch. 1, 27. yofxo&errjs diappr)dr]y 
airedei^ey, ovs XPV SvfxrjyopeTu Kal ovs ov Se? Xeyeiv ev r$ df)/xcp. ■ — Mr) is also used 
in direct and indirect interrogative sentences, which express fear, anxiety on the 
part of the inquirer, and hence require a negative answer ; (i) in forms of 
swearing, and not seldom when one swears that something shall not happen, but 
sometimes also, when one swears that something has not happened ; in the latter 
case, the feeling by which the denial or abhorrence is expressed, is denoted 
by u»>, 

(a) Mr) ypd<pe, /x 77 ypdrpys (§ 259, 5). — (b) E'foe fxr) ypd<pois\ — Mr) rovro 
yevoiro ! — M ij Xcojxev ! — M rj ypdcpw/xeu ! — (c) PI. Symp. 213, a. a\\d fxoi Ke- 
7€Te, els'too, r) fxr); avfnrleo'&e, r) ov ; Pp. 337, b. irws Keyeis ; /xr) arroKpiycc/xai ; 
(shall I not answer thee?). — (d) Ae^w, 'ha fxr) iroifjs. — (e) El /xrj Xeyeis. — 
'Eay /XT) Xeyps. — "Or ay ravra fxr) yevnrai. PL Prot. 345, e. bs ay fir) /ca/ca 
■xoirj eKcoy, rovr coy (prjaly erraiver-ns elvai (as often as one does not willingly do evil, 
etc.). X. Cy. 2. 3, 20. el ('ore) /xr) &K\o ri o"irovo'ai6repov irpdrroiev, ravrrj rrj 
TraiZia expuvro (as often as, whenever, they were not engaged in more important busi- 
ness). — (f ) PL Phaed. 66, d. rb cca/xa 7]fxas eKTrKi)rrei &sre fir} Svi/acr&ai vtt avrov 
Kabopav ra\T}£res. — (g) PL Ap. 21. & /xr] olba, ovSe otojxai clSevai (= et riva /xtj 
olSa). Hence '6r t pi), unless, nisi (properly oboev '6n fxi), then generally instead of 
el fxr)), oaoi fxi), except those who not. Her. 1, 32. £y t<£ ixaKpai xp^V no\Aa \xev dart 

42 



•194 SYNTAX. [$ 318. 

ideeiv, to (= %) fjtf) ns e&eAet (multa, quae ita sunt comparata, ut, one can see many 
(Jungs of such a nature that he would not wish to see). Andoc. 3, 41. \pw(pio-ao~&« 
Totavra, e£ wv p.n8 4ir or e vpuv fieTafieX^o-et. — (h) M77 TtSrvriKev 6 irarrip v - 
(my father is not dead, is he ? = is it not to be feared that my father is dead ?) 
<&ofiov/j.ai, p.)] 6 irar)]p ribvi]K€v ; {I fear that my father is dead, I am anxious to 
know whether my fatlter is dead). M77 dpdffeis tovto 1 {you will not do this, will 
you?). M77 SetAol icr6p.e&a ; {we shall not be cowards, shall we? shall we be cow- 
ards?). M77 voceis ; ^Apa /j.rj voveis ; {you are not sick, are you?). — (i) Ar. 
Eccl. 999. ju& r)]v 'AcppoUrriv . . ju^ 'y(*> <r 3 b.<p4]vw {I will not let you go, the thing 
shall not be). Aor. 194. /ta yrj v . . fir] 'yw vonjxa KopjtyoTtpov ^Kovcrd -nw, Beware! 
I have not listened. M77 is not unusual with the Inf. X. An. 7. 6, 18. bpLvvw 
vij.li/ freebs {Liravras koX irdcas p-yde & ifxol IMa virecx^TO Se&hjy e%etj/. 

Ebmaek 1. In all the instances above given, except (a) (b) (g), ov is used 
when a single word in the sentence is to be made negative, e. g. O b <pwp.ev ; 
negemus? Isocr. Paneg. 71, 6. Xafi6vres i^aKisx^Xiovs r&u 'EXXrjvwv, ot iv rais 
avrwv ovx oToi r i)&av (fiv {nequirent) ; hence in the combinations ovdels 
jisris ov; ovdevbs or ov ov, etc. (§ 332, Rem. 12); so also in ovk eir^' 
oirws ov; for these expressions are, as it were, blended in a single word, like 
nullus non. El ov 8wo~ei {recusabit). Dem. Cor. 320, 283, Sost ov p. e pt. v 7} cr • 
&at ( = oblivisci). Moreover « can stand with ov, when the clause takes the 
place of a causal sentence. 

Rem. 2. On ovk a.v Xeyois ravra, instead of p.r} Xeye, see § 260, 2. (4) (b) ; 
on ov 8pdo~eis tovto (instead of pi] dpaays) and ov dpdveis tovto; {— do this 
indeed), see § 255, 4» 

4. Mr) is regularly used with the Inf. But after verbs of thinking : otopai, vo* 
ui^w, viroXap.fia.vw, Sokw, as well as after xpypi and axovw, ov is commonly used, 
since the Infinitive (Ace. with Inf.) in this case has the force of an affirma- 
tion ; much more seldom after other verba putandi et dicendi. When, however, 
these verbs are in the imperative, or in the imperative Subj., or in another con- 
struction which requires pr)<, then pi) follows. 

PI. Theat. 152, b. etxbs (roepbv &vdpa p.^ X-npe?v. X. C. 2. 1, 3. to pr) (pevyeip 
tovs ttSvovs. 1.1,20 &avpd(;w, oirws irore £it e Iff&n <r av 'A&rjva7oi ^wKpdTnv 
irepl tovs &eov$ p.}) u &<ppove?v. An. 7. 6, 18. bpvvw i>p?v, /J. 7] 8' a ipol idle, 
vttesx*to 2ewd^s %X elv ' -^-- C. 1. 1, 19. {ol iroXXol) oiovrai tovs heovs to. p\v 
eldevai, to. 8' ovk eldevai. 2. 4. TavTvv ttjv Qiv {vivendi rationem) t\\v ti\s ^vxhs 
iiripiXeiav ovk ip.iroo'i^eiv e<prj. 1. 15. irio~Tevwv freois irws ovk elvai freovs 
4vopi£ev; X. C. 4. 8. 2. 6 poXoye?T ai ovdeva ira twv pvnp.ovevopivwv av- 
bpcinrw KdxXiov fr&varov iveyKeiv. More frequently /x-fj, as: Isocr. Phil. 109. 
00 pLoXoyovv fi 7) Serbs Tc<airoTe tocovtov irpdyp.aTos diapapTeiv. Id. Dem. 22. 
V 6 p.t£e pi.r]Sev elvai twv av&pooTrivcov fieftoAOV. 

Rem. 3. When an abstract substantive or substantive adjective stands in- 
stead of the Inf., then either ovk or p,i) may be used, according to the nature 
of the clause into Avhich the substantive or the substantive adjective may be 
resolved, e. g. Ar. Eccl. 115. Seivbv 8' £ct\v t) pLT] ipiireipia (= el p.i) t'ls e<r- 
tiv ep.ireipos). Th. 1, 137. ypdipas ttjv twv ye<bvp<cv ov 8 idXvc iv {— ori Of 
&>S [that] al yeipvpai ov 8ieXv&VQ~av). 



§ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES ovk AND flrj. 493 

Rem. 4. With some verbs, e. g. <pdvat, otea^ai, a£iovv, vir nrxveio-" 
^oi, the negative, which properly refers to the Inf., is usually joined with the 
finite verb, thus ov (prjpi, like nego, I deny, refuse. X. An. 1. 3, 1, ol crrpariu' 
rcu ovk e (pacrav levai rev irp6o~us (negaverunt se ituros esse). Th, 2, 89. £vveKaX- 
etra (vfxas), ovk a^i&v ru p)] Beiva ev bppwdia %x eLV (desiring that you should 
not fear ichat is not to be feared). 

5. With the participle or adjective, p f> is used only when these can be re- 
solved by a conditional clause, or when they stand in a connection which 
requires pi\ ; in all other cases, o v is used. O v Swdpevos, one who cannot, or is 
tumble, ov fiovXopevos, nolens, ovk avayKaiov, unnecessary, ra ov KaXa, fiovXev- 
para, turpia consilia ; 6 ov irio-revcov (one ivho does not believe, is qui non credit, or 
quum (since) non credit, or quia non credit) ; 5 ov <piXo<ro<pwv (is qui non philoso- 
phatur) ; 6 /xt] TTio-Ttvow (if one does not believe, si quis non credit). X. An. 4. 4, 
15. ovros yap id6Kei Kal irp6repov rroXXh. tfdrj aXr;&ev<rai rotavra, ra ovra re fas 
ovra, Kal to. p. 7) ovra ws ovk ovra (if anything was not, he represented it as not 
being). So 'H aocpta r$>v deivav Kal py Seivcov avdpeia iariv, PI. Oldd o~e ravra 
oi) iro'.-f]o-a.vra. "YlyyeiXe rrjv ir6Xiv ov -KoXiopKr^elo-av. Protag. 360, d. used 
in philosophical definitions of an ideal assumption ; on the contrary ra ov Seivd 
objective, used of actual dangers. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. ov av yva>o-i Swdpevov pkv x°-P iV 
airoSidSvat, pi] aired id cut a fie, koXo.£ovo~i rovrov lo~x^pS>s (= idv riva ktX.) (whoever 
they knew capable of repaying a kindness, if he did not repay it, they, etc.). 3. 1, 16. 
ri yap av . . xP'h ITal ' !? &v ris ' Lcr X v P^ *1 avSpeia) p^ o~d&<ppovi ( = 6t p$) o-axppoov eYi}). 

6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or adverbs, e. g. any 
one, any how, any where, atttny time, ever, etc., these are all expressed negatively 
These negative expressions neither destroy nor strengthen each other, as they 
do not stand in an opposite relation, but each of them is to be considered inde- 
pendent. The negatives must be of the same kind, i. e. either compounded 
of ovk or p.7). Double negatives in Latin, English, and the modern languages, 
destroy each other, but not in Greek. 

PI. Rp. 495, b. ar/xiKpa cpvais ovdev piya ovS eiror e ovZeva ovre Idicorriv 
o ijT e ir6Xiv Spa. (a mean nature never does anything noble either for ant private 
individual or for the State). Hipp. Maj. 291, d. (rb KaX6v) o prideirore ewer- 
Xpov p-nSapov pride vl (pave?rai (which never anywhere seems to any one 
displeasing). Lysid. 214, d. 6 KaKbs ovr aya&y, ovre KaKw ovdeirore els 
a.Xr]Srrj cpiXiav epx^rat. In like manner the simple negative (ov, p-fj), which in 
this case must always precede the other negatives, is so connected with its 
compounds that neither lose their force ; hence ovk eo-nv ovdev (there is not 
anything, there is nothing) ; so also the negative parts arc joined with the nega- 
tive whole, C. g. Ov dvvarai oftr' ei Xeyeiv oftr' ed iroieiv robs (piXovs, he can 
neither — nor; in like manner also ovde, pi] Be, not even, ne — quidem, are used 
in a negative sentence, c. g. ov dvvarai ovde vvv eZ iroietv robs cplXovs (he is not 
able, not even now, to benefit his friends). 

Hem. 5. If the finite verb is connected with a participle) the negative, when 
it refers to both, is usually placed with the Part., though only when the Part. 
precedes the verb. Th. 1,12. pera ra Tpui'iKa. i) 'EXXas en peraviaiaro Kal Kar- 
0}Ki(eT0*, wsre prj rj a v x d cr a a a av£r]&rjvat (i.e. wsre pi] riffvxdaai Kal /xh 



496 SYNTAX. [$ 318, 

avfyj&rjpcu). Where the negative is so placed, it must be considered as belong- 
ing to the whole sentence, and not to a single word. 

7. Ov fj.T) with the Subj. or Tut. Indicative, is elliptical, since with ovk a 
verb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also expressed, must be sup- 
plied, and fx-fj must be referred to this verb. Hence ov p-ft is used, when the 
idea to be expressed is, it is not (ov) to be feared that (/xr)) something will happen, 
e. g. ov (<pofiov/xcu) jx^j yivtrrai rovro (non vereor, NE hoc fiat, this certainly 
will not happen). PI. Crit. 46, c. ev fo&i, on ov fi-h aoi ^vyx^p'h '^ ( oe assured, 
that I do not fear that I shall make concessions, i. e. be assured, that I certainly shall 
not make concessions to you). In a question with the second Pers. of the Put. 
Indicative. Ar. Nub. 505. ov fxi] \a\-f)o-eis, oAA. 1 aKoAovfrrjo-eis i/xoi: I shall not 
expect that you will talk == do not talk (§ 255, 4). 

8. After verbs and expressions of fear, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt, distrust, — 
denying, hindering, abstaining, — preventing, forbidding, contradicting, the Inf. 
with the negative /xr] commonly follows instead of the Inf. without jx-q, the 
Greek repeating with the Inf. the negative idea implied in these words, for the 
purpose of strengthening the negative view of the sentence. This use of ^ 
is sometimes regarded as pleonastic; but it is entirely in accordance -with the 
frequent usage of the language in employing two negatives for the purpose of 
increasing the negative force of the sentence ; hence, when a negative was 
contained in a preceding word, it was not unnatural to join a negative with 
the Inf. that followed. 

Kw\v(o ffe fir] ravra 7rote?u (I prevent you front doing this). Her. 3, 128. 
AapeTos airayop ev ei v/x7u p.7) dopvcpopeeij/'Opotrea (Darius forbids you to act as 
a body guard to Oroetes). 66. 6 Hpn^do-Trns e^apvos ^v p.^] airoKreTvai Hfxepo'tv 
(denied that he killed Smerdis). Th. 3, 6. rrjs /xtv SraAdao-ns elpyov fx)] xPW^at 
robs MiTv\.r)vatovs. 5,25. h.it io~-%.ovT fxrj 4ir\ t\\v kKaripcau yrjv o'Tparevo'cu 
(they abstained from marching into the country of each other). (But alo-xvuo/iai. 
/u.7) iroieiu ti signifies, lam ashamed not to do something, X. An. 6. 5, 4.) 

Eem. 6. "When expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt and the like, are followed 
by fxri with 'h.e Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), jut must be considered as an interrogative, 
numne, whether not, and may often be translated by that; 1 e. g. SeSoiKa, fxrj airo- 
Savy (metuo, ne moriatur, I fear whether he will not die = that he will die) ; e'Se- 
8oiKeLu, fj.7] airo&dvoi (metuebam, ne moreretur) ; deSoiKa, [xt] Te&i/wKev (ne mor- 
tuus sit, I fear whether he has not died, is not dead = I fear that he has died, is 
dead). On the contrary, fi^ ov with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt.), is used after 
the above expressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will not 
take place, or has not taken place ; e. g. SedoiKa, /xtj ovk arcoSdvri (ne non mo- 
riatur, I fear that he will not die); ideSoiKeiv, fj.7] ovk airoSdvoi (ne non morere- 
tur, I feared that he would not die); SeSoi/ca, fxi] ov TebunKev (ne NON mortuus 
sit, that he is not dead). 

1 In expressions of fear, there is always a double idea in the mind, the fear, 
that something will take place, and the hope that it will not. This double idea 
both the Greek and Latin seem to indicate by using a negative after verbs of 
fear, the negative being referred to a verb of hoping understood ; but as the idea 
of/ear only is expressed in English, the negative is rendered that. Hence AeSoi- 
«s, /it) anofravr) (metuo, ne moriatur, I fear that he will die, but hope that he mil not), 



$ 315.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND pJ]. 497 

9. Even -when , instead of the Inf., the conjunctions on, ws with the finite 
verb follow expressions of doubt and denial, the negation is sometimes repeated 
in the dependent subordinate clause by ov. 

X. E. Ath. 2, 17 apv e?o-&ai reus 6.KXois, on ov iraprjv (to deny to others that 
he was p-esent). PI. Meno. 89, d. on & ovk eanv k-xiaTr\}xr\, vKe\ai, idv aot 
Soku eiKorws an iar e?v (but consider whether I seem to you justly to doubt tJuit 
this is knowledye). Dem. Onet. 871, 14. ws S° ovk eKuvos iyewpyei ttjv yrjv, ovk 
ydi/var apvn&rjvai. (he could not deny that he cultivated the land) . Isoc. Archid. 
I 4S. ovBds av To\fj.-f)o~eiev avr e iir e?v, ws v r^]V ejxireiplav /LiaAAov twv &.h\wv 

Eem. 7. So even after ov fxaWov (or when the clause in which pLaKkov 
stands, has a negative sense), ov is sometimes used, which in English is pleo- 
nastic. Comp. the Erench, where after a Comparative que ne is regularly 
used, e. g. E donne plus que vous n' avez donne, for the purpose of giving em- 
phasis to the idea of diversity (consequently a negative idea), which is contained 
in the Comparative (the gift of one is different from, not like that of the other). 
Her. 4, 118. 7j/cet 6 Hepo"ns ovoiv ri jxaWov eV Tineas, t) ov Kal eVl vfxeas 
(does not come against us more than against you). X.H.6.3, 15. ti ovv 5e7/( = ov 5e?) 
skzIvov rbv XP° V0V avauiveiv, kws av vtto TrAy&ovs KaKWV ave'nrwixzv, fxaXXov, $) ovx 
ws raxio-ra rrjv elp4]vnv irolricracr&ai : in Th. 3, 36. the negation is contained in jxera- 
void tis -f\v avrols (they repented = they no longer approved). riA^j/ ou is some- 
times used in a similar manner. X. E.L. 15. 6. kdpas iravres irrravio-Tavrai fiaaiAeis, 
i?Kr]v ovk ecpopoi. (all the kings rise from their seat, except the ephori). 

10. Mtj ov with the Infinitive is used instead of the Infinitive without nega- 
Jion, with the expressions mentioned in Xo. 8., when the negative ov or 

another word which may be considered a negative, precedes ^77 ob. M$j ov is 
here merely equivalent to the simple ^, and hence is not expressed in English 
where ^77 would not be (comp. Xo. 8, above). 

OvSev KwKvei ere /z 77 ovk a-Kobaveiv (nothing hinders you to die, from 
dying). X. An. 3. 1,13. ei yevno-o/xe&a hrl /tadAe?, ri ipnroSwv (= ovohv e,u- 
iroSwv) fir) ovxi (^as) vfipifrfxevovs airoSaveli/ (wliat hinders us from dying after 
being treated with insult); Yect. 3, 7. ou dvse\iris el/xi to ^77 ovxl irpo&v- 
fiws av robs iroXiras els ra rotavra els<pepsiv (I am not without hope that the citizens 
would contribute for such purposes). Cy. 2. 2, 20. alaxpov ( = ov koKov) ov 
avn\4yeiv, /it] oi>xl rbv TrAe?o~Ta Kal irovovvra Kal w<pe\ovvra to koivov, rovrov 
Kal /xeyio'Twv a£iovcr&ai. 

Eem. 8. It is seldom in this case that /utj is used instead of prn ov with the 
Inf. With the real negative expressions, u 5vvap.ai, aovvaros, ovx oT6s 
t el/xl, ovSe fiia p.r\x a - v 'h ear 1 (= ov ovv ar6v io~7 iv), ov ireiSw, ovx 
oo~i6v icrriv, ovk etKos £o~tiv (it is not probable), ov <pr}fj.t, and the like, 
and also such as &voia, avSnrov tart, the following Inf. is actually made 
negative by the accompanying jurj ou (sometimes also by [x-q alone), since the 
above expressions, when "separated from the negative connected with them (or 
the a privative), have no negative force. Ou ovva/xai fiy ov noielv (non pos- 
sum non facere, I cannot not do, i. e. I must do). X. Apol. 34. ovre jat) (xe/xvriadai 
b°vva/j.ai avTov, ovre ixepLVV/xevos ^77 ovk iiraivziv (I must think of him, and if I 
think of him I must praise him). Fl. Ep. 427, e. ovSev Keyas- av yap viriax ov 
{vTrjaeiv, ws ovx oo , i6v o~oi ov u.77 ov fionSziv SiKaioavvrj us 0vvap.1v iravrl 
rpdnw (since it would not be right for you xot to render assistance). Her. 7,5. ovk 

42% 



498 SYNTAX. [§ 319. 

eiK6s £<tti 'A^Tjz/ciGus ipyaaafx4i'ous rroWh fjdj} KaKct, Uepcras, fir] ov Sovi/ai Si 
Has, twv (= wy) Ziro'n)cra.v (it is not right that the Athenians should NOT atone for 
their injustice). PL Symp. 218, c. ivavv b.v6t\Tov riyovficu elvai aoi /a?j ov ical 
tovto x<xp' L (zo~dai (non sanum judico tibi hoc NON gratijicari). Ov (pnjxi tovto /j.ij 
ovTus *x* iV (^ t ego id sic se non habere, I deny that this is not so). — Also after the 
expressions deivbv elvai, aicrxp6v, aio-xvvriv elvai, a I a %w v e a&at, 
which contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with /x^ ov, when it is to be 
made negative. X. An. 2. 3, 11. wsre Tcao-iv altrxvvy eli/ai, fxr] oi»xl 
avo-rrovSafav (so that all were ashamed [= none were willing] not to be busy). — 
Sometimes fx)] ov occurs after negative sentences with participles also, in the 
sense of if not, except, instead of the usual fx-n. PL Sys. 212, d. ovk ean (pthov 
ru> (piXovvTi ovdev /x^ ovk ai/ricpiXovv (nothing is lovely in the eyes of the lover^ 
except that which returns love). 



SECTION II. 

SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE 



CHAPTER VII. 
§ 319. A. Coordination. 
When two or more sentences stand in a close connection 
with each other, there is a two -fold relation to be distin- 
guished. They are either so related to one another as to 
exhibit a unity of thought, though each is, in a measure, 
independent of the other, e. g. Socrates was very wise, 
Plato also was very wise ; or so, that they are wholly uni- 
ted, the one defining and explaining the other, the one 
being the dependent member of the other, e. g. when the 
spring comes the roses bloom. The first kind of connection 
is called Coordination, the last Subordination, and the sen- 
tences Coordinate and Subordinate. In coordinate sen- 
tences, therefore, the members are independent of each 
other, but in subordinate sentences, one member is de* 
pendent on the other. 

I came, I saw, I conquered. — Coordinate. 
Wlien I came, I conquered, — Subordinate. 



f$ 320, 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 499 

Remark 1. The coordinate as -well as the subordinate conjunctions are 
properly used only to connect whole sentences ; but when several sentences 
have single members in common, these common members are usually expressed 
but once. In this way the sentences are either contracted into one sentence, the 
subject or predicate common to the sentences being expressed but once ; or 
there is at least an abbreviation of the sentences, each sentence having its own 
separate subject, but the predicate common to the sentences being expressed 
only with the subject of one sentence. O I "E A A -n v e s ro?s TroAefj.iois iire&ev- 
to kcu KaXus i fx.ax4o~avr o. HcoKpaT-ns Kal UXarcov (rocpol ifffav. Oi fxev"E\- 
Krjues ivapa rbv noray-ov, oi Se neper at iv opecriv iaTpaTOTredevaafro. 

Rem. 2. In respect to the grammatical form of connection, all coordinate 
sentences are alike ; they are all treated grammatically as principal sentences ; 
but in respect to their meaning and logical relations, they may be different. 
For every thought which forms a complementary member of another thought, 
can be expressed in a coordinate sentence, as was always the case, in the ear- 
liest use of language, e. g. Tb tap ^A&e, Kal ra poSa av&e?, instead of '6 r e rb 
tap -?] A3- e, to p. a. (the spring came and the roses bloom, instead of when the spring 
has come the roses bloom). 



§ 320. Different forms of Coordination. 
Coordination consists either in expanding, contrasting, or ex- 
cluding a thought. The first is called copulative coordination, 
the second adversative, the third disjunctive. Sentences alsc 
which stand in a causal relation to each other, may be coordi- 
nate, and are called causal coordinate sentences. 

§ 321. I. Copulative Coordination, 

1. A copulative coordinate sentence is one in which two or more thoughts 
which are considered independent, are so united together, that the thought ex- 
pressed in the coordinate sentence, gives a greater extent to the thought of the 
preceding sentence. A copulative coordinate sentence is either annexive or 
enhansive ; in the former, a second thought or clause is merely joined to a pre- 
ceding one ; in the latter, the statement made in the sentence applies with more 
force to the second member than to the first. An annexive coordinate sentence 
is made : — 

(a) By Kai, et, and, more seldom in prose by the enclitic re, que, and; 
Kai and t4 have, in general, the same difference of meaning as et and que. 
Kal connects members of a sentence equally important, or those in which the 
one following is stronger than the one preceding ; hence it often strengthens or 
enhances the idea of the 'preceding member or is a more full explanation of it 
(ac, atque, et quidem); t4 appends some addition which belongs to the preceding 
member; in prose, words are seldom connected by a simple r4, but sentences 
much oftener. — (b) in a more emphatic and definite manner by Kai — Kai, 
et — et, both — and, not only — but also, more seldom by t 4 — re; the difference 
between the two in this case is, that with the former (/cat — Kai) the single 
members appear more independent and forcible, than with the latter (t4 — t4)j 



500 SYNTAX. [§ 321. 

hence the former is used, when the members are of different kinds or are anti- 
thetic ; — (c) by r e — Kai, both — and, not only — but also, when it is to be indi- 
cated that the connected members stand in an intimate connection with each 
other; by the stronger Kai, the second member is emphatically joined to the 
first ; they often correspond with the Lat. quum — turn, when the discourse pro- 
ceeds from the general to the particular and more important. 

'XcoKparvs Kai UXarcau aocpol tfcrav. PL Apol. 23, a. 77 av&pcoirivn o~o<pia bxiyov 
ripbs a£ia earl Kai ovBevos. So iroAAa Kai irownpa, iro\\a Kai (xeyd\a; hence 
Kai ravra, and that too. X. An. 3. 2, 16. direipoi oures roov 7ro\e/j.icav to t e irArj&os 
dfxerpov opwures, op.ccs eroX/j.Tjo'aTe ievai els abrovs. PI. Phaedr. 267, a. Ticriav Se 
Topyiav r e edao^ev eudeiv; — ''KvSrpooiroi Kai aya&ol Kai KaKoi (but not Kai KaKol 
Kai Trounpol). K al -rrevvres k al ir\ovaioi. Kai xpVf J - aTa K a I avfipes. Kai vvv 
Kai aei. Kai Trpcara Kai varara. X. C. 1. 2, 4. (^coKpdrrjs) rod edojxaros 
avros t e ovk 7]/j.e\ei, rovs r a.fie\owras ovk iirpvet. Ka\6s re Kai aya&os. In 
antitheses: ' Ay a&d re Kai KaKa {the good as well as the evil), xpycroi re Kai 
irownpoiy rd r e epya dfioioos Kai ol \6yoi. HoWa r e Kai Ka\d epya aireSei^aro. 
Her. 6, 114. iroAAoi re Kai ivvofxacrroL "AAAoi re Kai ^coKparns (quum alii, 
turn, S.). Her. 6, 136. MiXriadea ecrx op * v o~r6/j.ari ol re &AK01 Kai fxd\i<na 
zavbiirrros. Hence &A\ws re Kai (quum aliter, turn, not only in other respects, 
but also), especially (but & A A. cos re without Kai signifies praetereaque, adde 
quod, i. e. and especially). The connection is expressed still more strongly by 
re — Kai 877 Kai (quum — turn vero etiam). PI. Rp. 357, a. 6 TAavKcov aei re 
avtipeioraros &v rvyxdvei irpbs airavra, Kai d$) Kai r6re rod ®pao-v/xdxov r)]V 
airoppr\o~iv (desperationem) ovk aTre5e£aro. — It is to be observed that, after djj.a, 
^877, ovttw, ob (p^duw and the like, a coordinate clause with Kai or re — Kai often 
follows, instead of a subordinate clause with '6re. X. An. 7. 4, 16. 77877 re dia 
rov bp6(pov ecpaiuero irvp, Kai ~2iAavbs crwfJLaivei rr\ aaXiriyyi (the fire already began 
to appear through the roof, and [when] Silanus gives notice with his trumpet). Isocr. 
Paneg. 119 a p. a T)p.eis re rrjs apxys airecrrepovfxe^a, Kai ro7s"E\\vo-iu apxh T &v 
KaKuv eyiyuero. 

Remark 1. Kai has this strengthening, intensive force also, when it stands 
at the beginning of a question, where the interrogate? takes up, with surprise, 
the remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the nul- 
lity or absurdity of the other's statement. X. Cy. 4. 3, 11. &AA. 1 efrrot rts &u, 
'6ti Troubles ovres ijxdvSavov ; — Kai iv6repa 7raTSes elai cppovifj-corepoi, &sre /xa^e?u ra. 
<ppa(6fxeua Kai SeiKuv/xeua, 7) avfipes ; = ac multo minus prudentes sunt. So espe- 
cially Kai 7rcos; PI. Ale. 1, 134, c. dvvairo dv ris /xeradiSouai, b /j.}) ex et ? — Kai 
7tws ; = ac minime quidem. 

Rem. 2. If more than two numbers succeed each other, they are connected 
in the following manner: (a) with the first member the connective is omitted, 
and the other members are annexed by Kai repeated; (b) Kai — Kai — Kai, 
etc.; (c) re — re — re, etc. ; (d) re — Kai — k ai, etc. X. Cy, 1. 4, 7. dpKroi 
re ttoWovs ^7877 irXno'idaavras 8ie<p&eipav Kai Aeovres Kai Kairpot Kai TrapSaAeis • 
al Se e\a<poi Kai SopKaSes Kai ol dypioL 6'Ces Kai ol ovoi ol dypioi daivels elaiv; (e) 
re — re, etc., itai (Epic.) Od. y, 413. 'Execppoov re ~2,rparios re Tlepcrevs r 
'Apnros r e Kai avrifreos @pa<rv/j.r)8ws. (f) re — re Kai — Kai, etc. (seldom) X. 
C. 2. 2, 5.71;^ virodei-a/j.ej'ri re <pepei rb (popriov rovro, fiapwofxevn re Kai KLvfivvev- 
ovffa . . Kai . . Kai kt\. After k a i two members, considered, as it were, one 



$ 321. J COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 501 

whole, can follow with re /ecu. Her. 7. 1. (4irera£e e/ca<rroicn) (cai yea? re 
koi olrov Kal ir\o7a. X. An. 4.4,2. (KcofXTj) ixeyaXr) re r)u Kal fiaaiXeiov re 
el^e tw aaTpdirr], Kal eVt reus TrXeiarais olic'icus rvpo-eis iirricrav. — But Kai — t 4 
are never used as corresponding particles, in Attic Greek ; where they are 
found in this position, the member introduced by Te, is subjoined only as a mere 
addition to the preceding one. Th. 1, 54. Kopiv&toi fxev Kparr)cravres . . Kal dv- 
Spas exoj/Tes alxp-aXwrovs ovk 4xdo-aovs %iAtW, vavs r e ( praetereaque) KaraSv- 
aavres rrepl kfSSo^Koura eo-r-naav rpoiraiov. As infrequently, likewise, is Kai — 
r e used in the sense of etiamque. 

Rem. 3. As an enclitic, r 4 must always rest upon a preceding word, and indeed 
on that word, to which -re specially belongs in the member to be connected. But 
where the article, the attributive genitive and prepositions are used, re commonly 
stands between these and the word it connects, e. g. r d re dwpa, ire pi re eipi)vns 
Kal Tro\4fiov, "2 « k par ov s re crocpia Kal aper-f]. If Te belongs to the whole 
sentence, it is usually joined to the first word of the sentence. Her. 6, 123. 
o'lrives ecpevyov r e rov irdvra XP^ V0V T0 ^ s rvpdvvovs, 4k /j.r}xavr]s r e rr)s rovroov 
4£eXnrov oi Yleicricrr partial rrjv rvpavviSa. It is, also, often joined to the predi- 
cate of the sentence, if that precedes, although it would stand after another 
word. X. C. 3. 5, 3. § (qua re) rroXXol 4iraip6ixevoi irpor p4Trovr ai re aperrjs 
4TrifMe\e7cr&ai Kal aXKi/xoi yiyvea&ai (instead of aperrjs re eV.). 

Rem. 4. In the Epic writers (and in imitation of these in the Lyric writers 
also, though more seldom in the latter, and in the Attic writers in only a few 
fragments), re is very frequently joined with conjunctions and relative pro- 
nouns, in order to represent, in a more definite manner, the mutual relation 
and intimate connection between the corresponding members (as well — as, 
as — so). This r4 either stands in both of the members, in which case the first 
r4 refers to the following member, anticipating it, as it were, and the second 
refers back to the preceding ; or more frequently it stands in only one of the 
corresponding members ; thus often etnep re — re, or etirep — Te'; /x4v re 
— Se re or aXXa r e, as on this side, so on that, or /xev — Se re (aXXa re); 
fxeure — Se (a\\o); also the whole of the first member can be omitted, and 
be supplied by the mind, from what precedes; thus Se re, a A. A. a re, also 
often without the corresponding fxev: Se — Te; Te' — Se"; r4 — avrdp; then 
Kai re, atque, yet moreover, when the corresponding member is contained in 
what precedes (not only — but also). II. i, 509. rov Se fiey tivwaav, Kai r zkXvov 
ev£a[j.4voio. Also '6sre, he, who (not only in the poets, but also sometimes in 
Herodotus), osris re, ol6s re, b'o'os re (=roios, oTos] rocros, ocros, of such 
a nature, so great, as much as), iosre, so as, so that, ws ei re, dr e, ijvr e, ott a> s 
re, '6 re re, then, when, o&i re, 'Iva re, there, ivhere. In Attic prose, the fol- 
lowing combinations still remain, viz., oT6s r4 el pi with the Inf., signifying 
lam in the condition, &sre (so that), useire and esre (i. e. 4s o re), quoad. 
Moreover, 4 ire ire, postquam, as used by Herodotus, should also be mentioned. 

Rem. 5. Kai is originally an adverb, also, even, etiam. But the idea of 
emphasis which is expressed by Kai, also, even, necessarily supposes a reference 
to another clause, e. g. Kal 6 ^wKparvs ravra eXe£ev (sc. ov jaovov oi &XX01, or 
wsTrep Kal oi dXXoi). According to the nature of* the corresponding member to 
be supplied, the emphatic Kai may have either a strengthening (even, yet, entirely, 
etc.) or a weakening force (even only, only even), e. g. Kol KarayeXas jxov (you 
even laugh at me). Kal ov ravra eXe^as (even you said this) ; — Kal fiaXXov (yet 
rather), Kal rpis, Kal Kapra, (very much), Kal irduv, Kal ttoXvs (not much), 
Kal bhiyov, Kal /x i k p 6 v (but little), Kal ttcis — Kal traXai (even long ago), Kal 
X&e's, Kal avrUa, Kal vvv or en Kal vvv — Kal ws, Kal ovrus (vel sic), — 
Kal p-ovos, Kal els. With questions, e. g. Dem. Phil. 1, 53. rt xp'h Kal -rrpos- 
SoKau; (ivhat is only to be expected even?) (=?iihil plane expectanduir> est) 
In Homer, after a temporal protasis, this Kai often introduces an apodosis, 
and may then be translated by immediately. II. a, 478, rjjAos 5* i)piy4veia 



50S: syntax. [$ 32. 

(pavT) podotiaKTvAos 'Hdcs, Kal r6r eireir avdyovro jxera crpaibv evpvv Axaiwv, 
The use of /ecu in such concluding clauses, shows that the two clauses are co* 
ordinate, and /ecu may he said to have its usual connective force, though that 
force cannot well be expressed in English. 

2. If the annexive coordinate sentences are negative, they are connected : — 
(a) By o v 5 4 {[i n 8 e), not — nor, when a negative member precedes ; (b) by 

Kal ov (nal /U7?), and not, when an affirmative member precedes; this is the 
regular form in Attic prose ; but in the Ionic and poetic writers ovS4 or untie 
can also be used here ; (c) in a more emphatic and definite manner by otfre 
— ovre {pyre — fx^re), neque — neque (neve — neve), neither — nor; (d) by 
ovre — t4 (seldom k a i), neque — et, — on the one hand not — and on the other ; 
as not — so also. 

X. An. 1. 4, 8. ou/c eycaye avrovs Sioj|co, ou8' epe? ovdeis, ws eyk avrovs KaKws 
iroiCo. C. 3. 7, 9. Siareivov /xaAAov irpbs rb cavrq irpos4x*iv, Kal fx)) a/x4\et ruv 
rrjS ir6\eoos. Dem. Cor. 254, 85. tpaivo/xai eyco xdpiros rervxnK^s r6re Kal ov 
p.4u$ea)s ovSe riucapias. Th. 3, 14. eirauvvare ..Kal fxr) irp6ncr&e rjuas. PI. 
Zysid. 207, e. ewaiv dpa ere a {SovAei iroie?v Kal ovSev eirnrX^rrovo'iv, ovdh 
SiaKcoXvovo'i iroie?v 3>v av eiri&vfxrjs. — Ovre &eot, ovre av&pcaTroi. — X. An. 2. 
2, 8. Houocrav . . urfre irpoZuxreiv aWriAovs o~vfxuaxoi re eo'eo'&ai. 5. 1, 6. ovre 
ayopd ianv luavri, 77 re x^P a ToAeuta. Th. 1, 118. ol AaKe8aifx6vioi ala&ou- 
evoi ovre eKwAvov, el u)) enl /3pa%u, r\(Tvxa^6v r e rb ir\4ov rod x?^ VQV ' 

Bem. 6. The following connective forms are more rare, and belong mostly 
to poetry, viz., oijre — ov, ov — otfre; re ov — re; oUre — re ov ; in the 
two last forms ov combines with the verb and forms, as it were, one thought. 
Th. 2, 22. 'EKKAwcriav re ovk eiroiei . ., ri\v re ix6\iv £<pvAacro-e (he called no 
assembly and guarded the city); 1, 126. oftre eKeivos en Karev6n(Te, r6 re 
fxavrelov ovk e'SrjAov ; ovre — ovS4, neither — and not, which is found often in 
prose also. 

Bem. 7. OvS4 expresses either an antithesis (but not), or it serves to con- 
nect a new clause (and not, not even). When ovd4 — ov8 4 follow one another, 
they are not to be considered correlative particles and translated neither — nor, 
but are to be translated not even — and not. X. C. 3. 12, 5. ev yap tcr&i, or: 
ovfie ev ctAAw ovdevl aywvi, oit§e ev ivpd^ei ovdeuia ue?ov ef^eis Bia rb f}4\nov 
rb acaua napeo-KevdoSrai. OvSe as a connective in negative sentences, corre- 
sponds to Kai in positive sentences, mentioned in remark 5, and signifies not 
even, ne — quidem, e. g. old' 6 Kpiiriaros iroK/xnaev avrcp udxso'&ai — ov8e els 
(ne unus quidem), ouS' &s (ne sic quidem), etc. 

3. An enhansive or emphatic coordinate sentence, as has been seen (Bem. 
5), is expresssed by the simple Kai, but more definitely by: — 

(a) ov 1x6 vov or ov fxovov '6n (also ou% ^ Tt V-ovov) or^fjj '6rt — 
a A. A. a Kai, not only — but also. (Ou/c '6ri originates from if Keyca, tin, as 
(M7) Hri from fity /\4ye, on.) ^coKpdrns ov fxovov cro<pbs i\v, a A Act Kal aya- 
&6s. PI. Symp. I79,b. inrepairo&vr)0-Keiv e&eXovo'iv ol epoovres, ov /xSvov '6ri 
&vSpes, aAAos Kal yvva?Kes. X. C. 2. 9, 8. ovx #rt fiovos 6 Kplrwv ev 7]°" v x' La 
?)V, ctAAct Kal ol <pi\oi avrov. Cy. 8. 1, 28. fii] yap '6ri 'dpxovra, a\\a Kal 
ovs ov (pofiovvrai, /xaWov robs al5ov/j.4vovs albovviai rwv avaidav ol frvfrpooirot. 



$ 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 503 

Rem. 8. Ou /xopop — aXXd without Kai is used, when the second mem- 
ber includes the first, whether the second is stronger than the' first in extent or 
degree. Isocr. Phil. 5, 146. ov \x.6pop £ttI tovtcop avrovs mj/et t-)]p ypco/u.7)P ravrnp 
exovras, a XX' e7rl it a pt cop o/xoioos. Panath. 37. ov /xopop ap evpeheinv 
i-rrl toTs pvp Xeyo/xevois ravrnv %x (i>v T W Sidpoiap, dAA' 6/xoicos 1*1 Trap too v. 
X. C. 1. 6, 2. IfjLuriop i)fxcpieo'ai ov /xopop cpavXop, aXXa rb-avrb frepous re 
Kai xet^wvos. 

(b) Ovx '6ir(os — dAAa Kai, not only not — but even, or ovx oirwj or /xt) 
o it cos — a A A' ovde,not only not — but not even. ("Ottos = how; I say not or ( Imp. ) 
say not how, which involves the idea, I say not or say not, that not.) Also jxi) on 
(followed by dAA' ouSe) is used in the sense of not only not, when both clauses 
have a common predicate, and this stands in the last clause. Dem. Cor. 271, 1. ovx 
Sir cos X^pw avTo7s (to?s 'A&rjuaiois) ex eis dAAd /xHr&dbcras o~eavrbv Kara tovtoopi 
TToKirevr) (non modo non — sed etiam). Dem. Phil. 2, 67. (robs Qyfiaiovs i)ye?To) 
ovx ottcos apriirpd^eip Ra\ SiaKCoXvaetp, aXXa Kai GvarpaTevffeip. Isocr. 
Plataic. 586. ovx Ottcos tt\ s koiptjs eXev&epias /xerexo/xev, dAA' ovde dovXeias 
fxerpias fyiufrq/xev tvx^ip (non modo non — sed ne — quidem). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. 
/xt) ottcos bpxzi&SoLi cV pu^, a A A' ou8' bpSovc&ai idvpaa&e (non modo non 
saltare poteratis, sed ne rectis quidem pedibus stare). Isae. 10, 1. iyoo /xt) Sri 
vrrhp aXXov, a A A 5 ouSe virlp i/xavrov ttcottotg S'lkvp Idiap etpnKa (as in Latin: 
non modo de alio, sed ne- de me quidem unquam causam dixi, instead of non 
modo non, the Latin using non modo — sed ne — quidem, instead of non modo 
non — sed ne — quidem, when both the clauses are negative, and the common 
predicate of both is in the latter clause). 

Rem. 9. When ovx # T * — dAA* ouSe has the sense of not only — but not 
even, the predicate of the first member contains a negation, or at least has a 
negative sense. Th. 2, 97. ravrr} (rrj ~2,Kvdr£>p Icrx^) dSvpara (sc. eVriV) e£- 
laovo&ai ovx otj to iv rrj EvptioTrr), a XX' o v 8' ip Trj 'Aaia e&pos. (Scytharum 
potentiae non modo Europae imperia exaecmari non possunt, sed ne Asiae quidem 
gens). Dem. 702. ovx ori tcop optcop air car ep-q/xr} v dp, a A A' ov8 y ap 
e(np. (In a.TT€crT eprj/xvy is contained the idea: non haberem.) Also jit) or i 
followed by dAA' ovSe is used in a similar manner, since a negative precedes /xt) 
'6ti. X. C. 1. 6, 11. tt]p olniav t) &XXo ti cop KeKTVo-ai, po/xi£cop dpyvpiov d\iop elvai, 
ovSepl clp p. 7] on TvpoiKa 80177s, dAA' ouS' eXaTTOP tt)s d£ias Xaficbp (you 
would not only not give your house to any one gratuitously, but not even for a less price, 
iJian it is worth ; properly you would give to no one, not to say, gratuitously, nay not 
even for a less price, etc.). 

(c) Ov(k) — dAAa Kai, not — but even; ov(ic) — dAA' ou5e, not — nay 
not even. Dem. Mid. 24. ov -iropvpSs, dAAd ical Txdvv xpnvi'o'S' X. C. 2. 3, 8. 
rbp Kai XSycp Kai epyco Treipco/xepop 4/xe apiap ovk ap Svpai/xnP ovt ev Xeyeip out* 
eS TToie?p, dAA' ouSe ireipdao/xai. An. 1. 3, 2. (SapeiKobs) Xaficov ovk els rb 
HSiop Kar&i'fi.nv i/xol, a A A' o v 8 e Ka^nSvird^vo-a, dAA 5 els v/xas iSairdpcop. 

(d) Ov84 — firi '6ri, not even — not to say, much less (ne-quidem — nedum). 
X. Symp. 2, 26. Ka\ ovSh dvaTTpeiv, /at) oti Xeyeiv ri hvvno-6jj.eba (we shall be 
able not even to breathe, to say nothing of speaking, or much less to speak). 



504 syntax. [$ 322. 



$ 322. II. Adversative Coordinate Sentences. 

1. An adversative coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses that stand 
in opposition to each other, are united and form one thought. 

(a) The opposition is of such a nature, that the thought expressed in the 
coordinate clause either wholly abrogates the thought of the preceding clause, 
since another thought is substituted for it ; this is done : (a) by placing the 
conjunction a A A. a (but) in opposition to a preceding negative; (b) by placing 
the conjunction aAAa together with the negative ou in opposition to a pre- 
ceding affirmative ; in the last case, aKka may be translated and, or be wholly 
omitted: (a) ov% ol irXovaioi zv5aifxop4s elcrip, a A. A. 1 ol aya&oi. (b) 'E/ceTfref, 
a A A' ovk eV&eVSe ripirdorfrn (he was seized there, and not here, or not here). 

(P) Or the opposition is of such a nature that the thought in the coordinate 
clause merely limits or restricts that in the preceding clause. The limitation is 
expressed by Se, aXXa (but), ar dp (avrdp, Epic), Kairot, fi4vroi y '6/xas. 

2. A e most generally has an adversative force, and hence can express every 
kind of contrast or opposition. In respect to its signification, it ranks, like 
the Lat. autem, between the copulative connectives (t4, Kai) and the adversa- 
tive (aAAa, etc.), since it contains both a copulative and adversative force, and 
hence either opposes one thought to another (adversative), or merely contrasts 
it (copulative). Hence it is very frequently used in Greek, where the English 
uses and. The new thought being different from the preceding, is placed in 
contrast with it. 

3. The mutual relation between the concessive and adversative clauses, is 
commonly expressed by the concessive /m4p, which, as it denotes concession 
and admission, points forward to the limitation expressed in the second member 
by S e. As 54 can denote both a strong and slight contrast, so the signification 
of fieu is sometimes stronger and sometimes weaker. 

4. The original signification of fi4v (arising from ^qv, § 316, Eem.) is truly, 
in truth ; yet its signification is not always so strong as this ; indeed, in innu- 
merable places its force is so slight, that it cannot be translated at all into 
English. To fiep w<p4Xifj.op KaX6p, to Se fiXafispbp alo'xpo'v- Th. 3, 68. 5ie<p&ei- 
pav TlAaTcueW (xev avrcav ovk. ixdaaovs 5iaKOffiwp, 'AfrrjpaiGOP Se ireure Kai 
eiKOffiv. 

5. M ev — S 4 are especially used in the following cases : — 

(a) "With divisions of place, time, number, order, and persons, e. g. 'Evrav&a 
fi4v — ewe? 5 e, £v&a \i4v — ev&a Se, Tore (x4v — Tore 5 4, 7rore fx4v — 
•TroTe § e, at one time, — at another, sometimes — sometimes, &K\ore fi4v — &A- 
AoTe 5 e, a/xa \i4v — dfia 5 4, sometimes — sometimes, irpS>rov (jl4j/ — iVem* 
S e, to y.4u — to Se, to. \i.4v — <to. Se and tovto fj.4p — tovto Se, partly, — ■ 
partly, on the one side — on the other, both — and, not only — but also, 6 /m4p — & 
Se, hie — ille. 

(b) When several predicates belong to the same object, and also, when sev- 



$ 322. J ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 505 

eral actions refer to the same object. S. Ph. 239. iyu yevos p.ev elp.i rrjs irep- 
ippvrov ~5,K.upov, irXew 8' is o'ikov, av8<7>/.iai 8 e ttcus 'A^iAe'cas ~Neoirr6\ep.os. So 
also in a principal and subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. ol ise&aXov p.ev is rr\v 
> A<t'lt)v, Kip.p.eplovs iKJ3a\6vres e/c rrjs Evpwinjs, tovtohti 8 e iTno~ir6p.evoi (pevyov&t 

OVTto) is TT)V Mr]8lK7)V X^pV^ diriKOVTO. 

c. Where the same or an equivalent word is repeated in two different clauses. 
X. C. 2. 1, 32. iyv o~vveip.i p.ev &eo7s, avveip.i S" dv&pa>irois ro7s ayaSoiis. 
1. 1, 2. 2w/cpaT7]s Svcov (pavepbs if ir oAAa/c is p.ev ockoi, iroWdicis Se iirl 
rwv koivSiv ti)s iroXecos $u>p5>v. Yet this principle is not always observed. 
Mev is regularly omitted, when Se /cat follow, e. g 2. 8, 5. x a ^ eiro v ovr<a 
ri iroirjcrcu, 8>sre p.r]Sev dp.apre7v, xaAeir&j/ Se Kal dyap.apr7]rws re ironiaavra 
fi}j ayva>p.ovi Kpiry -Kepirvx^v. 

Eejiaek 1. When pev stands in an adjective or adverbial clause, it is some- 
times repeated, for the sake of emphasis, in the corresponding demonstrative 
or concluding clause. Her. 2, 121. koL rbv (i. e. bv) p.ev Kdkeovo'i &epos, 
rovrov p.ev irposKvveovo-'i re Kal ev Troiovaf rbv Se x el f JL ^ va K ' T « ^- So also, 
when, instead of the adjective clause, the Part, with the article is used. Isocr. 
Pancg. 52, GO. rco p.ev v-n-epeveyic6vTi rj]v avSrpwKivqv (pvaiv ("HpaK\e7), . . rovr(a 
fi\u (Evpvcr&ebs) iiriraTTwu . . SiereXeaev. So also sometimes two preceding 
pUv's correspond with two following Se 's ; this always implies a strong emphasis. 
PI. Apol. 28, e. eyw ovv Seivd dv eir] elpya<rp.evos, S> dvSpes 'AStji/cuoi, el, ore 
p. e v pe ol apxovres erarrov, o'vs vpe7s e'lXecr&e dpx^-V p.ov, Kal iv HoriSaia Kal iv 
'AptynrSXei Kal iirl AiqXiw, rore fie v ov iKe7voi erarrov ep.evov — Kal iicivSvvevov 
diro&ave7v, t ov he &eov rdrrovios, cbs iyca cv-fi&Tjv re Kal vireXafiov, (piXoaocpovvrd 
pe b~e7u £t)v ko.I i^erd^ovra ipavrbv Kal rovs UXXovs, ivravftra Se (pofiri&els f) 
Sdvarov $) aXXo oriovv irpdypa Xtivoipi rrjv rd^iv. Yet this parallelism is but 
seldom found "so regularly carried out. 

Rem. 2. On the position of p.ev — Se, the following points are to be no- 
ticed : They are commonly placed after the words, which are opposed to each 
other: yet they are often to be referred to the predicate or to the whole clause. 
X. C 1. 1, 10. Kal eXeye p.ev {~2,o)Kpdrt]s) ws to ttoXv, ro7s Se fiovXopevois ihfiv 
aKOveiv. An. 3. 4,2. eira&e piev ovSeu, 7roAAa Se KaKa iv6p.tcre iroirjo-ai. 
When a substantive or adjective is connected with the article or a preposition, 
neu and 5e are commonly placed between the article and the preposition, and 
between the preposition and substantive or adjective, e. g. irpbs p.eu robs <pl- 
kous — 7r p b s 8' ix^povs ; yet this conformity is by no means observed in cor- 
responding members, e. g. X. C. 1. 1, 12. rd p.ev av&pcvireia irapevres, rk 
5ai p.6v i a oe aKOirovvTes r\yovvrai rd Trpos-fjKOUTa irpdrreiv. 2, 24. Sid p.eu 
KaWos — did Svvap.Lv 8 e. Or inversely, Isocr. Paneg. G4, 114. iv ra7siro\- 
ireiais p.ev — iv Se ra7s crvvdi}Kais. 

Rem. 3. It is evideat that any other adversative connective instead of 8 e, 
can follow p.ev, c. g. dxxd, drdp, etc. But in place of the adversative connec- 
tives, sometimes also the copulatives re, i<-ai, are used, by a kind of anacoluthon, 
or he construction is entirely changed, no reference being had to the preceding 

|UcV. 

Rem. 4. The adversative connective which would be expected to follow 
fxev, is sometimes omitted, although there is a corresponding adversative mem- 
ber. This is the case, when the word expressing the contrast is such, as of 
itself without Se, to make this contrast sufficiently manifest, as e. g. with 
ivrav&a pev — iice7, and almost always witli irpcor o v p. e v — eireira. 
Secondly, even the clause expressing the contrast, can he wholly omitted, in 
which case, it must be supplied by the mind {p.ev satitarium). Her. 3, 3. \ty 

43 



506 syntax. [$ 322, 

erat '6de 6 \6y<?s, e pol fiev oh ir&avos (to me improbable, perhaps probable to 
Others). 'Eyi /xev ovk olSa; us fxeu Key ova iv ; ravra /xev rjjxiv ijyy eihe 
ris: olfiai fie'y, r)yovf.iai per, 80/cw jUeV, »v« &I80 ftey and the like, I 

INDEED, CERTAINLY, think. 

Rem. 5. On account of its general signification, Se, like ante?n, frequently 
connects sentences even, which stand in a causal relation to each other ; then 
the hearer or reader can gather from the context the particular mode of con- 
nection. Thus 5e very often expresses the reason, and is used instead of yap. 

Rem. 6. In questions, 5e has either an adversative force, when the interro- 
gator gives vivacity, by omitting the concessive member, e. g. X. C. 2. 9, 2. Kal 
6 2. Eiire fxoi, e<pT), £> Kp'iTwv, Kvvas Se Tpecpets, 'Iva croi tovs Xvkovs airb t5>v irpo- 
ISdrcoy air ep vKwai ; (you are unwilling to support a man who could protect you 
from your enemies, and yet do you keep dogs ?). Or, Se has a copulative force 
and continues the question which had been interrupted by the answer of the 
other, e, g. X. C. 3. 5, 2. ovkovv olaSa, ecpr}, SVt TrXrj&ei fxev oi/Seu fxeiovs elalv 
'A&7]vcuoi Boicarun/ ; — 0?5a yap, ecpr], "Xco/xara Se aya&a. Kal KaAa Tr6repoy e/c 
Boiootw olet irXelu; ay e/cAe^S^jKai, ?) e| 'Afr-nvuv. The same principle holds in 
answers. 

Rem. 7. Kai — Se (in the Epic writers Kal 5 4 not separated), and, though 
more seldom, the negative ovoe — Se, in which connection Se' has an adver- 
bial force, can be translated by and on the other hand, and also ; and on the other 
hand not. X. H. 5. 2, 37. o'i re &AA01 Trpo&v/j.eos t<$ TeAeim'a virnpeTOvv, Kal rf 
T(hv Q-nfiaiow Se tt6\ls irpo&v/Licos ^vueirefxire ical onvXiras Kal linreas. An. 1. 8, 20. 
Kal obSev ouSe tovtov •Jrad-e?^ ecpaaav, o v 5' &\Xos 5 e r&y 'EAXtjuccv ev Tavrrj rrj 
fxdxj] eVa&ey ovdels ovdei/. 

Rem. 8. In the apodosis, as in principal clauses, Se' has a double force, either 
adversative, or merely contrasting (copulative). Sometimes p.iv stands in the 
first member. 

a. The adversative Se' in the apodosis, denotes the contrast between that and 
the protasis. It is used: (o) after hypothetical antecedent clauses, though 
aAAa also is often found instead of Se; (/8) after relative antecedent Clauses, 
and such as denote comparison, (a) X. Cy. 5. 5, 21. dAA 5 el /j.r)8e tovt, ecpr], 
fiovXei airoKpiuaa&ai, ab Se TovvTev&ev Aeye (say on the contrary). (/3) 8. 5, 12. 
wsirep ol 67tATtcu, ovtco 5 e Kal 01 ireXTaaTal Kal 01 ro^drai (so on the other hand). 

(b) After a temporal protasis, Se' commonly has a contrasting or merely copu- 
lative force, though sometimes adversative also (very often in the Homeric lan- 
guage, also in Herodotus, but seldom in the Attic writers) ; this Se' may often 
be loosely translated by then. Od. A, 387. abrap iirel $vxas fj.lv aireaKedaa' ctA- 
AuSts &AA77 ayvT] Uepae<p6veia yvvaiK&v SeXvTepawv, r)\&e 5' iirl ^vx?) ' Ay a[Aep.voi/os 
'ATpetSao. So oeppa — r6<ppa 5 e', 07nfre — 8 e, ecos — 5 e. X. An. 4. 1, 2. enel 
Se acpLKOvro, eV&a 6 /J.eu Tiyp-ns 7roTa,ubs iravTairacnv airopos r)u Sia to fid&os Kal /ie- 
ye&os, irdpoSos (transitus) Se ovk i\v . ., idoKei Se rots GTpaTic&Tais 81a. r<av bpecav 
ifQpevreov elvai (then, or on the contrary). As Se'is used after the protasis, so also 
in like manner after participles, which supply the place of a protasis. PL 
Svmp. 220, b. Kai iroTe ovt os nrdyov o'iov Seivordrov, Kal iravrcov . . iyeiXiy- 
jjLevcav tovs TroSas els ttI\ovs Kal apuaKiSas, ovtos S' ev tovtois efyjei ex^v IjAaTiov 
. . 6l6virep Kal tvp^repov elcb&ei (pope7v. X. C 3. 7, 8. Savjxafa Gov, el eKeivovs pa- 
oius xet/jov/xevos, tovtois Se fj.7)Beva TpSirov 0U1 ovvfjo-ecr&aL Ttposevex&wai. 

6. 'AX\d (Neut. PI. of ^AAos), but (sed, at), yet, however, generally expresses 
difference and separation. It always stands at the beginning of the sentence. 
According to the nature of the preceding member, it either abrogates what is 
affirmed in that member (see No. 1), or it restricts and limits it (yet, however) 



♦ 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 507 

He is indeed poor, but brave — he is not brave, but cowardly ; (here the clause but 
brave restricts the one preceding, and but cowardly wholly denies or abrogates 
the idea of brave). Tovto to irpay/na w<peXi/j.ov fieu eariv, a A A' ov KaXou. The 
use of dAAa is very frequent in objections (= at), also in questions, when the 
question expresses a contrast, or when an objection is introduced in the form 
of a question. Dem. Cor. rl yap Kal $ovX6pi.ef/oi /j.ereTre,uTreo^r' av avrovs, eirl 
TTiv elpr\vr\v ; d A A' vivripx^v dirao'iv. 'A A A' eirl rbv iroXe/xov ; d A A 5 avrol irepl 
elp-f]V7)S efiovXevea&e. Eur. Med, 325. XSyovs avaXo?s • ov yap av ireicrais irore. 
"'AAA' e£eXas fie, Kovoev aldeaai Xirds ; " very frequently &AA' ?} — ,- but 
really — ? X. An. 7. 6, 4. teal o'l etirov 'AAA' t) o-nfiayuiyel 6 av7]p robs dvopas ; 

Rem. 9. 'AAAa is used in negative, non-concessive clauses, when by it the gen- 
eral signification of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted by an excep- 
tion. Here dAAa is the same as -KX-hv or el fi-h, nisi, and can be translated into 
English by except, than. In the first member, aAAos (erepos) is commonly 
placed, e. g. ovoels dXXos, dAAa, and this aAAos points forward to the following 
dAAa, corresponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. ev t<£ fieacp &XXt) fiev iroXis ovSe- 
fiia ovre <piXia, ovre 'EXXrjvls, dAAa Qpaaes Kal Bt&vvoi (between there is no other 
friendly or Grecian city [there are none\ except Thracians and Bithynians). 

Rem. 10. In the frequent combination of & A A' r\ after a preceding nega- 
tive, or after a question implying a negative, or even after the addition of 
aAAos, erepos to the negative, consequently, ovk, ovoev a A A' tf; ovoev dx- 
Xo, a A A' ¥i; ovoev er epov, a A A 5 ^ : rl aXXo, d A A' 77 : dxXo n (with a pre- 
ceding interrogative pronoun), dAA' tf, — d A A' seems to be merely aXXo, but 
on account of its close connection with ^, it appears to have changed its ac- 
cent (aXXb rj) and to have lost it (dAA' %). X. An. 7. 7, 53. dpyvpiov fiev ovk 
€%&>, dAA' t) jxiKp6v ri. 0. 2, 13. ovre aXXos ircairore fioi Trapeorx e T " eavrov Biol- 
Ke7v, dAA' 7/ crv vvv\ eSeXeis itapix^v. PI. Phaed. 97, d. ovoev dXXo aKoireTr 
irposyKeiv dv&pwirq}, dAA' v) rb dpiarov Kal rb fSeXriarov. 

Rem. 11. Also the following elliptical expressions are to be mentioned: 
ov ixtjv aXXa ov ov fievro i dAAa, yet, veruntamen, ov yap dAAa, then 
certainly, certainly. These must be completed by joining with the negative the 
verb of the preceding clause, or in place of it, such expressions as tout' iyeve- 
ro, rovr early. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. 6 'liriros rriirTei els ySvara, Kal fiiKpov KaKelvov 
iterpaxv^LCW ov firjv (scil. iqerpaxfaurti') dAA' e-xefieive v 6 Kvpos fioXis reus, 
Kal 6 '[ttttos Qavear-i}. 

Rem. 12. 'AAAa is, moreover, used to denote a transition to a different or an 
opposite thought ; this is the case in exhortations and exclamations, in general, 
when the discourse is suddenly interrupted, and something new is quickly in- 
troduced, e. g. dAA' evrvxoirjs • (well then !) — dAA' dva (icell now) — dAA' eJa ! — 
also when one answers or replies quickly and decidedly, e. g. dAAa fiovXotxai, 
well, I will. 

7. From the adverb av, on the contrary, again, rursus, and a. pa, igitur, have 
originated the Epic avrdp and the prose drdp. They always stand at the 
beginning of the sentence, and have the signification of 5e or dAAa, but : yet, as 
it seems, with this difference, that, on account of their composition with &pa 
(igitur), they are more closely and intimately connected with what precedes. 
— Mevroi has been already treated ($ 316, Rem.). Ko(toi, yet, verum, sed 
tamen, atqui (§ 317, 8), is used especially, when the speaker wishes to correct 
something he had said ; the Latins use quamquam in the same way, e. g. 
KoiToi rl <pt]fxi ; (quamquam quid loquor?, and yet why do I speak?). "O/xost 



508 syntax. [$ 323 

(from 6/x6s, equal, like), nevertheless, yet, however, places the second clause, as an 
unexpected one, in opposition to the first. Th. 6, 50. Ad/xaxos p.ev ravra dirk? 
'■ifAws irpose&ero Kai aurbs rfj 5 AA/a/3ia5ov yva>jj.r). 'AAA 1 '6/x(os is Still stronger. 



§ 323. III. Disjunctive Coordination. 

1. A disjunctive coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses composing 
the entire sentence, are united into one whole, one of which excludes the other; 
hence the one can be considered to exist only when the other does not. This 
disjunctive relation is denoted by : — 

V H, or, aut, vel, or more emphatically and definitely by ^ — •*?, and when the 
first member is to be made emphatic, fJToi — fj, aut — aut, vel — vel, either — or ; 
elre — eire (with the Ind.) or edvre — edvre or &vre — &j/re (with the 
Subj.), sive — sive, whether — or, when the speaker wishes to indicate, that he 
does not know whether he should decide for the one or the other ; on the mode 
used in these hypothetical disjunctive clauses, see § 339. 

'O iraT-fip, $) 6 vibs avTov airefravev. — *H 6 Trarrjp, r) 6 vibs avrov aTre&avev. Th. 
4, 118. el 5e ti v/mv etre KaWiou, eXr e diKaiorepou tovtcov SoKe? elvai, I6vres es 
AaKeSalfiova SiddaKere. PI. Rp. 493, d. etr' ev ypcxpiKr), elr' ev fiov<riirp, cifre 
5 77 ev iroAiTiKrj. Apol. 27, C. elr oZv Kaivd, etre ira\aid. 34, e. etr ov v 
akiri&is, eXr oZv tyevdes. Pp. 453, d. dvre ris els Ko\vfjLfS-r)&pav fJUKpav efiireavy 
&vr e els rb fieyiffrov ireAayos fxeaov, op.ws ye vet ovSev fjrrov. 

Eemaek: 1. The following forms, also, are sometimes used: el — etre 
(si — sive) ; el re — el Se (sive — si vero), when the second member contains 
something opposite to the first; etre — 77 ; ¥1 — ejTe (seldom and only Poet.) ; 
eire but once (poetic). 

Rem. 2. The disjunctive connectives ij — $, in the Epic writers, very seldom 
in the Tragedians, are united with /xevandSe: i}fxev — 77 5 e. In this case, 
they do not have a disjunctive, but like koX — Kai, re — re, a copulative force. 
Instead of i]8e, Ide is also used according to the necessities of the verse. II. e, 
128. 6<pp' ev yiyvucrtcris ijfxev &e6v, i]5e Kai dvSpa, both — and, not only — but 
also. 

2. The particle ij is not only used to denote the disjunctive relation, but also 
in expressing comparison, in which it does not exclude, or express the opposite 
of the preceding member, but only expresses separation or difference. As in its 
disjunctive relation, one $ corresponds with another, so here tf stands in rela- 
tion to a word, which expresses a difference, e. g. &AAos, ovSels dWos, aAAozos, 
evavrlos, tdios, Siacpepoo, etc.; also in relation to comparatives, as well as to all' 
words which have the force of a comparative, e. g. SnrAaaios, irplv, (p&dvw, etc. 
PL Phaed. 64, a. ovSev ciWo avrol eirLT7]devovcriv, f) aTro&wqaiceiv re Kai 
re&vdvai. 

Rem. 3. The comparative % is sometimes used after the omitted /uaAAov or after 
a positive. This is the case after expressions of willing, choosing, and the like, 
because these contain the idea of preference ; thus after J3ovAe<r&ai, e'3-e'Aftv, 
al pe?cr&ai, a'lpeffiv Sovvat, eir i&vjj.e?v, Sexecr&ai, £"77 re IV, Av(rireA~ 
*?v (= potius esse). H. a, 117. fiovXofx eyio Xabv oSov ejx^evai, % airoXecr&ai. 



i 323.] DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. -509 

Lysias de aff. tyr. x. {^rovcri KepSatveiv, 7) vfias irel&eiv. X. Ag. 4, 5. ('A^r/* 
ffiXaos) 77 p e ito /cal <rw tw yevvaiw fxeioveKTe7v, 7) ffbv r<2 a8i/cw irXeov ex^v. 
Andoc. Myst. 62. TeS-pdVai vofj.i£ovcra XvcrireXe7v, 7) £r)v. 

3. The other member of the comparison is joined to the Comparative by ij, in 
the same Case as the comparative, and without a verb, when both members have the 
same verb in common. When this is not the case, the second member must stand 
as a complete sentence with its subject and predicate ; commonly, however, merely 
the subject is expressed, but the predicate omitted ; often also after the omitted 
copula, by attraction the same Case is used as in the first member. Instead of rj 
the Gen. also can be used (§ 275, 2), most frequently for the Norn, and Ace, 
often also for the Bat. But the Gen. is avoided, when the use of it would occa- 
sion ambiguity ; it must be avoided when the time of the two clauses is different. 

Eur. Or. 1148. ovk effriv ovSev k pe7ffffov, 7) <plXos ffa<pr)s, ov ttXovtos, ov rv- 
pavvis. 'O <pi\6cro<pos fxaXXov eiri^vfiel ttjs ffo<plas 7) tcov ■x.pt)\xa.Ttov. Xapi£6fj,e&a 
fxaXXov ro7s aya$67s t) to7s tca.Ko7s. ^iXov/xev fiaXXov robs ayaSobs rj robs kcucovs. 
Isocr. Pac. extr. to7s veccre pois /col fxaXXov a Kfj. d(ov<r iv, r) eyu (sc.aKfxd- 
fa), irapawS). Th. 7, 77. rjfir) rives /col e'/c Se ivot e pec v r) rotaivSe effia^nffav 
(from a more dangerous situation, than the present is). II. a, 260. 7JS7) yap ttot eyh 
zeal ap el off iv Tjeirep vfi7v avS pdff iv cjfiiXrjffa (with braver men than you 
are). Her. 7, 10. crb fieXXeis eV dvSpas ffrpareveffSrai iroXv afieivovas, r) 
2/cu^ay. Eur. Or. 715. iriffrbs iv KaKo7s avrip upeiffffuv ya\r)vr]s vav- 
riXoifftv elsopav (instead of 7) yaX-fjvT}). Th. 6, 16. Trpos^Kei fioi fxaXXov eTe- 
p <w v . . apx^v (instead of?) erepois). 7,63. touto ro7s oTtXirais ou% rjffffov 
twv vavTuv irapaKeXevofxai (instead of 7) to7s vavrais). Od. 1, 27. ovroi e-ycoye 
f] s yaiTjs 8vva.fj.cu yXv tcepwr e pov aXXo ISeff&ai. X. Cy. 2. 3, 12. ifj.ol SoKei 
Kvpos, oust was av bpa ayabovs, <piXe7v ovSev t\ttov eavr o r (instead of 7) eav- 
rov). Her. 2, 134. MvKep7vos TrvpafilSa aireXiweTO iroXXbv e> JLffffw rod Trarp6s 
(instead of 7) 6 irar-hp, or properly instead of tt)s tov irct/p6s). 

Eem. 4. With irXeicov, eA d rr (av, ir X eov, e A arrov, fie 7 v, when they 
stand in connection with a numeral. 7) is commonly omitted, without change 
of construction, i. e. the Case is the same as if there was no comparative in the 
sentence (comp. decern plus or amplius homines). PI. Apol. 17, d. vvv iyti irpu- 
rov evl SiKaffT-fjpiov ava/3e[3r)Ka, €ttj yeyovecs irXeia} e@Sofj.7iKOVTa (annos plus 
septuaginta natus). X. An. 6. 4, 24. ol'iinreis airoKTeivovffi tS>v avSpoov ov fie7ov 
irevTaKOfflovs. Th. 6, 95. 77 Aeia eirpabT) raXavraiv ovk eXarrov irevre teal eltco- 
ffiv. X. Cy. 2. 1, 5. 'nnreas fiev tt£ei ov fxe7ov difffivpiccv. With the Nom. and 
Acc. irXeov, eXarrov, the numeral specification can also stand in the Gen., e. g. 
"Ex<0 ob TrXeov (eXarrov) SeKa TaXavruv. The Greek can consequently say: (a) 
irXetovs (eXaTrovs, fieiovs) I7 SeKa rj/xepai ; (b) irXelovs SeKa Tjfiepwv] (c) irXeov 7) 
SeKa i)fiepai\ (d) nXeov SeKa 7)fj.epai. It will be obseiwed from several of the 
above examples that irXeov, fxelov, etc. stand as mere adverbs in the Acc, with 
substantives of a different gender and number. 

Eem. 5. Sometimes, also, the particle t 3 ? is found with the Gen. Such exam- 
ples are to be explained in a two-fold manner. The Gen. cither expresses its 
own appropriate relation, being wholly independent of the comparative, e. g 
PI. L. 765, a. fiT] eXarrov 7*; TpiaKovra yeyovus erwv [just as the Greek says 
ylyveff&ai TpiaKovra iruv § 273, 2, (c)] ; or the Gen. is a preparative demonstra- 
tive pronoun, with which the clause introduced by % may be regarded as an 

43* 



510 SYNTAX. [$ 323. 

appositive or explanatory clause. Od. £, 182. ob /x\v yap rnuyt < p el <r <ro v 
Kal &peiov, t) ofr o/xocppoveovTe vor)fx.aaiv oIkov %x(\tov avr\p ^5e yvvf) ( = rov ore 

Rem. 6. (Comparatio compendiaria). In comparisons, instead of comparing 
the attribute of one object with that of another, the Greeks often compare the 
attributive of one object with the other object itself to which the attribute 
would belong. In this case the Gen. is regularly used. X. Cy. 3. 3, 41. x^P av 
e%eTe ouSe</ t)ttov -tjixuv (instead of rrjs rmerepas) %vtI/jlov. Moreover, in ev- 
ery other comparison, this mode of expression is often employed, e. g. II. p, 51 
aifiari ol Sevovro K6p.ai Xapirecaiv dfioTai (instead of reus rav Xapirwv). 
Comp. the examples under § 284, 4. This mode of comparison, though not 
strictly correct, is frequent in English, e. g. he has an expression like his father, 
instead of like his father's. 

4. When two attributes or predicates (adjectives or adverbs), belonging to 
the same object, are compared with each other, then both are put in the compar- 
ative, and the last is annexed by fj. 

QaTTcov, ?) a o <pcar epos, celerior, quam sapientior [more smft than wise, or 
not so wise as swift). PL Rp. 409, d. irXeovdicis irovr\po7s, t) XP 7 ! ' 70 ^ evTvyx&vwu 
aoepdrepos, t) a/xa^4(rr e po s Sofcet ehcu avry re Kal &\\ois. Her. 3, 65 
iiroi-nffa rax^T^ pa, t) o-oepwrepa {celerius, quam prudentius). 

5. The subject is compared with itself, i. e. the subject exhibits at some time 
a quality in a higher degree than usual. In this case, the Gen. of the reflexive 
pronouns i/xavrov, o~eavTov, kavrov, is used with the comparative, and the pro 
noun out os with the pronoun of the third person. The other mode of ex- 
pression by t\ is not admitted here. 

Be\Ti(i)v €i/u ifiavrov. BeXricov el o"e avrov. BeXriwv io~Tlu av- 
rbs e avrov. Th. 3, 11. dvuarwrepoi avrol avruv eyiyvovro. In like man- 
ner, the superlative is used in connection with avrSs and the Gen. of the re- 
flexive pronouns, when the subject is to be represented, as, at a given time, 
exhibiting the quality belonging to it, in the highest degree (in a higher degree 
than at any other time). "Apicrros avrbs kavrov. 'Apio-rrj avrrj eou- 
rrjs. X. C. 1.2, 46. ei&e croi, 3> UepiK\eis, r6re a , vveyev6ix-nv i '6 re 8eiv6raros 
<r avrov ravra rjaSa {when you surpassed yourself in these things, when you had the 
highest distinction in these thiiigs, higher than at any other time). 

6. The following is a peculiar mode of comparison : When a"n object in re- 
lation to some quality is compared, not with another object, but with a whole 
thought (sentence), this thought is compressed into one substantive idea, and 
this substantive is put in the Gen. depending on the comparative. Here, also, 
the other mode of expression by ^, does not occur. 

Her. 2, 148. i\aav at irvpa/xiSes \6yov fMe^oves (oratione majores, i. e. ma- 
jores, quam id oratione explicari possit). Th. 2, 50. yevSfxevov Kpelacrov \6yov 
rb e?5os rrjs voo-ov {the nature of the disease being too severe to be described, severe 
beyond description). Upay/xa iX-n-tdcav Kpelrrav {too great to be hoped for, 
beyond hope). Instead of substantives, participles are also used, e. g. deovros. 
PL Rp. 410, d. ol yvp.vacrriKfj anpaTcp xpWx-H-w 1 ay piwrepoi rod Siovros 
farofiaivovaiv. 



§ 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 511 

7. When it is to be indicated, that a predicate or an attribute is in a higher 
or lower degree than could be expected, in proportion to another object, then 
the comparative is constructed with 7) Kard, or (though seldom) ?) irpos 
with the Ace. (= quam pro). 

Th. 7, 75. |U6tC w ^ Kara ddicpva TreirovSra (I have suffered too much for 
tears). PI. Pp. 359, d. vexpos pei^av % Kar &v&po)irou {a dead body greater 
than in accordance with a human being, greater than could be expected for a human 
being, too great for that of a human being). X. H. 3. 3, 1. ("Ay 15) e-rux 6 <r efivo- 
repas % Kara av& pooirov racprjs. Comp. Liv. 21, 29. proelium atrocius, 
quam pro numero pugnantium, editur (more bloody tluxn could have been expected 
considering the number). 

•8. Pr the predicate or attribute is represented as being in so high or low a 
degree, that another cannot coexist with it, then the comparative is used with 
§ Site and the Inf., e. g. Ka/ca pelCu %v, ^ wsre KXaieiv, evils greater 
than one could iceep for). X. An. 1. 2, 4. T}yT\adp.Gvos efoai % ws eVl Ueiaidas rty 
irapaaKevrju (having thought that the armament ivas too great to be [greater, than to 
be] against the Pisidians). 3. 3, 7 . fipaxvrepa tikSi/ti^ov 7) wj i^ixvelcrSrai ricv a<ptv- 
Sou-nruu (threw too short a distance to reach the dingers). See § £41. 3, (a). 

Eem. 7. The comparative is frequently used without the seosnd member of the 
comparison, and can then be translated by giving a strong emphasis to the 
positive, or more frequently by joining the adverbs too, pretty, somewhat, a little, 
right, to the positive. (Comp. English, too sweet, pretty, somewhat, a little warm.) 
This usage is found when the second member is evident from the connection ; 
•but very frequently, also, when such thoughts as, than it ivas before, than was 
before, than ivas usual, proper, right, becoming, were more or less distinctly before 
the speaker's mind. Her. 3, 145. MaiavSpicp 5e t<3 rvpdvvw i\v adeh<pebs virop.- 
apyirepes (hebetioris ingenii, very dull of perception, a little crazy). 6, 108. 
7)fMe7s kicaGT 4p<a oIk e p.eu (we dwell too far, very far from you ) . So particu- 
larly the neuters aueivov, fieAriov (better than is right), ndWiov, piaWov, x^pov, 
atfo~x iov > kolkiov ; also vecorepoi/, more seldom Kaivorepov,{ since naivos is used synony- 
mously with vecarepos) and the like, especially with a negative, e. g. ov koAKiov, 
ovk &iJ.eit/ov, ov kixklov, ov Kpzirrov, ov x^pov, ov paov (not so easy, as it seems)^ etc. 
Her. 3, 71. TTOteW avrUa p.01 Sotcezi Kal /u.77 vTrepfia\4cr&af gv yap &pL*ivov (for 
this would not be better, than if we did it immediately). PI. Phaed. 105, a. ird\u/ 
8e avafjapLv-naKov • ov yap x*'ip 6V ToWaKis duoveiv. Pinally, also, when antith- 
eses are compared with each other, e. g. To x*' l P 0Va ™\\e2s 7rAet« «tt2 tup 
a/j.€tp6v(Dv (the viorse is more in number than the better) . 



$ 324. IV. Causal Coordinate Sentences. 

1. Finally, those sentences are coordinate, the last of which denotes either the 
ground, cause, or consequence of the preceding sentence, or the conclusion from iL 

2. The Greeks denote the ground or reason by yap, which is never the first 
word in a sentence, but is commonly placed immediately after the first word. 
F dp is compounded of 7 e and a p a, and hence denotes proof confirmation, 
(ye, yes, certainly), and at the same time, an inference, or conclusion (6. pa, igitur, 
now, therefore). Hence, according as the one or the other meaning prevails, 



512 SYNTAX. [§324 

ydp may express: (a) a ground or reason, (b) an explanation, (c) a confirmution 
or assurance; and hence it may be translated- (a) by for, (b) that is, for ex- 
am-pie, (c) indeed, certainly. 

PI. Phaedr. 230, b. v)\ tt/i/ "Rpav, KaXr] ye r\ Karayuryf} • H] re yap irXaravos 
avrn [xdx* a t u<piXacpr)s re Kal i>yp7)\r) (yes, certainly = for). Tap has its explana- 
tory sense, especially after demonstratives and the phrases reKfi-qpiou he, jxaprv- 
piov 5e, aTfii^iov 5e, Zt\Xov 5e scil. eo~ri, de'iKvvy.1, 84, idrjXctxre 8e, ffKe\tya(r&e 5e, and 
the like. It expresses confirmation or assurance, particularly in rejoinders and 
replies. X. C. 3. 5, 10. apa Xeyeis rrju ru>u fre&v Kpiaiv %v ol irepl KeKpoira St 5 ape' 
77}*- eKpivav ; — heyw yap, yes, certainly. 10, 2. 4k ttoXXwu crvvdyovTes ra e| e/coo'- 
rou KaXXiara, ovrws oka ra acafxara KaXa iroielre (paiveoSai; — Tioiov/xev yap, 
e<prj, ourcos (certainly, we do so). — In addresses, tcishes, commands, and ques- 
tions, the meaning of yap, as denoting inference or conclusion, clearly 
appears. Arist. Pan. 251. tovtI Trap* vjxtiv XaLifidvca ; Aeiva. yap TreiaS/j-e- 
du! (am I so treated by you ? well! then we shall have hard things to bear I) Ka- 
ku>s yap e£oXoio\ may you perish then! So, el yap, ei^re ydp. X. C. 1. 7, 
2. on S 1 aXrjSrj eXeyev, Side eSidaffKev fLy^v/xcofMeSa yap, %<pr), eX ris lit) wc aya.- 
&bs av\riT7]s doicelv flovXoiro, ri au avrS iroirireou eX-n ; (now then let us consider). 1, 
4, 14. oh yap irdvv croi KardZiqXov, on irapa ra aXXa £a)a ustzep Seol &v&pa>iroi 
{Siorevovcri ; is it not then clear to you ? (nonne igitur — ?). II. er, 182. ^Ipc Sea, r i s 
yap (re beau epol dyyeXov fjKey ; (therefore who then has sent you f). X. C. 2. 3, 
17. Kal 6 XaipeKpdr-ns elirev 'Eau ovv, ipov ravra iroiovvros, eKelvos fjujb'ev fSeXr'iaiv 
yiyvt\rai ; Tt yap aXXo, ecprj 6 ~2u>Kpdry)S, ^ KivSvvevffeis, k. t. X. ; (what else 
then will happen except that you will run the risk, etc.?) Dem. Ph. 1. 43, 10. 
ye voir yap av ri Kaivorepov, fj Ma/ceSa^ avrip 'A&rivalovs KarairoXejxwv ; (ichy, 
can there be a greater novelty ?). So, Tt yap; quid ergo? Kal ri yap ; and how 
then ? litis yap; and it 6 & e v yap; as an emphatic negative answer = by no 
means. Uus yap ov; (instead of it, iro^eu Se ov is used with an antithesis) 
as an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 13. ovkovv 6 fxeu ra SiKaia irpdr- 
ruv ZiKaios, 6 5e ra aSiKa &diKos ; Uus yap ov ; (is he, therefore, who does what 
is just, just, but he who does what is unjust, unjust ? to be sure, how not?). 

Remark 1. The explanatory sentence with ydp very often precedes the 
sentence to be explained, particularly in Herodotus, e. g. Her. 6, 102. Kal, ijv 
yap 6 MapaSav iirirriSe&rarov %uipiou rrjs 'ArrLKrjs iviirKevcrai, is rovro crept Kar-nr 
yeero 'Iimitis (and, for Marathon icas the most suitable place in Attica for the cav- 
alry, Hippias led them to this place). So especially with aAAo ydp, at enim, but 
certainly, really, indeed, &AA' ov ydp. PI. Apol. 20, c. r}Ppvvo/u.r)v &v, el T)Tnardivnv 
ravra- aXX" ov yap irriaraLiai (I should be proud, if I knew this, but certainly 1 do 
not know). 

Rem. 2. The two sentences, the preceding explanatory one with ydp, and 
the following one whose meaning is to be confirmed, are often so closely con- 
nected with each other, that the subject of the last is transferred to the first, 
and its government made to depend on it. Th. 8, 30. ro?s iv rfj 2ct^w 'A&77- 
vaiois TTposa<piyp.evai yap fjaav Kal olKO&ev aXXai vr\es Kal arparrjyoi, Kal ras 
airb Xiov irdaas Kal ras*aXXas t > vvayay6vres efSovXovro, etc., instead of ol-— 
'A.Srnvaloi — ifiuvXovro, avroTs ydp, k. r. X. 

Rem. 3. Ko ( ydp commonly means for also, rarely etenim, but sometimes 
the K%i corresponds to a following nai, thus nam et — et. 



♦ 324.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 513 

3. The consequence or inference is denoted : — 

(a) By dpa (hence, then), which never stands as the first word in a sentence, 
though commonly near the beginning, also sometimes emphatically at the end. 
It expresses a consequence which comes as a matter of course, which is wholly nat- 
ural. In many passages, it hardly admits of translation into English, since it 
often implies only a very slight consequence, and merely refers to something 
mentioned, to something existing in the context, or only in the conception of 
the speaker, in conformity with which the thing is in the state in which it is 
affirmed to be. Hence it is very often used like the English indeed, as it seems, 
in such explanatory causes as more exactly define, or distinguish, something 
before said, or pointed out. 

Euc. Jup. trag. 51. ei etcrl fiw/xoi, elal /ecu S-eoi* aWa p.\v etVi $u>noi t\a\v dpa 
/ecu &eoi (then there are, consequently there aregods also). X. Cy. 7. 3, 6. ravva aKovaas 
5 Kvpos iiralcraTo dpa rbv ji-npov (when he had heard of the death of his friend, 
thex he smote on his thigh, as was natural). It is often connected with an 
Impf, when, in consequence of a better view of the subject at present, one is 
undeceived in regard to a former opinion, e. g. 1. 4, 11. 5 ircuSes, as &pa 
£ <pAvapovp.e v, ore ra eV tw irapadeiacv brjpla ifrr}pio/j.ev • Ofxotov efxoiye 5o/eeI 
ehai, olovirep ei ris SeSeoyieVa C&a frnpep-n (noiv how childjsh ice were then, as I now 
indeed see). 1. 3, 8. 2ct«:o 5e, (pdvai rbv 'Ao-rvdynv, t§ olvoxoco, tv iyca jxahiara 
Tiu.w, ovZ\v didoes; 'O Se 2a/eas dp a k<x\6s re &v eTi/yxave, Ka - L Tip-V** ix (av ^posd- 
yeiv tovs deo/xevovs 'Acrrvdyovs (now the Sacian happened to be beautiful, the Sacian 
was beautiful, as it seems). 9. c5 2ct/ea, cbr^AwAas • e/e/3aA<£ ere e'/e T7js Tip.r\S' rd Te 
yap dWa, (pdvai, trov KaWiov olvoxorjO~co, /ecu ovk inirio/xai avrbs rbv olvov • ol 5 1 
dp a rccv fiaaiXeuv olvox6oi — KaTappotpovcri. Dem. Cor. 232, 22. iroA/xa Aeyeiv, 
us dpa iyco — kckwKvkws efyv ttjv ttSAiv (tt]v elprivnv) iroi-iiaaaSrai (that I indeed, 
that I, as it seems). Hence the use of y dp and the strengthened form yaf. 
dpa. — Et dp a and ei /*r? dpa correspond to the Eatin si forte, nisi forte, if 
perchance, unless perchance, the inferential force of dpa being reduced to a mer* 
conjecture, and are often used ironically. X. C 1. 2, 8. ttcZs av ovv toiovtoj 
avrip Siacp&eipoi tovs veovs \ c4 p.7] dpa 7] rrjs dperrjs iiriueAeia diatpSopd zctiv 
(properly, that if such an excellent man can corrupt the young, then ice must draiu 
the conclusion that, etc.). So also, et dpa, num forte, whether then, whether per- 
chance. X. C. 4. 3, 9. aKOirw, el dpa ri £o~ti ro7s £eo?s ipyov, 2) dv&punrovs &e- 
paireveiv (ichether perchance, forsooth, the gods have any other employment than, etc.). 
"A pa stands very often in interrogative sentences. Aesch. S. 91. ris dpa 
bvaerai; ris 8' dp 1 eVapte'cret &ea>v ; (quis igitur defendet ? quis iyitur arcebit ?). 

Rem. 4. "A pa seems to be derived from the verb 'APH, i. e. to be adapted, 
suitable, and hence to express the inward relation, the immediate connection 
of two thoughts, and in such a manner that one seems, as it were, to he en- 
tirely fitted to the other, — tlie one perfectly corresponding to the other 
(= precisely, exactly, just). In this sense it is \\<c<\ in Bomer, e. g. II. 77, 182. 
e'/e S' edope KKr\pos nvveris tv dp IjdeAov avroi, precis/ ly the One which, just tic 1 one 
which, tij/xos dpa, just then, or' dpa, just. uh<n,r6r & p a, precisely then, e »' 
firi dpa, if not precisely, cos dpa, exactly 80 ; ovk — , a A A' dpa, not — but 
just; iirtl f>a, since just, yap p a, for j tut. Homer uses dpa, in general, in 



514 SYNTAX. [$ 325 

order to connect thoughts together, which are intimately related, and are de* 
veloped from each other. • 

Rem. 5. The lyric, tragic, and comic writers also employ the lengthened 
form a pa instead of &pa. Thus el dip a, ejfr 5 5 pa, instead of el &pa, ei*-' 
&pa. On the interrogative a p a and on &pa in a question, see § 344. 

(b) Ovv (Ion. &v), which commonly has the second or third place in a sen- 
tence, means, consequently, hence, therefore (ergo, igitur) ; it appropriately points 
out the effect of a cause, the necessary consequence of what precedes, and is ac- 
cordingly far stronger than <kpa, but is also used in a more general sense. 

Rem. 6. O 3 v is used as a suffix to pronouns and conjunctions, and in this case 
also, retains its conclusive sense : oaris ovv, osirep ovv, oo-oi oiiv, jxev oZv, yovv, 5' odv, 
aAA 5 ovv, eft-' odv, yap ovv. It expresses a conclusion, a setting aside of every- 
thing else, and a persisting in that which is affirmed ; hence it may express also 
confirmation and assurance. So 6 cr t i s ovv, osirep ovv, ivhoever he may be then, 
ooroi ovv, how many so ever then, /xev ovv, yes indeed (§ 316, Rem.), yovv, cer~ 
tainly, surely, ovkovv, truly, certainly not, 5' odv, aAA' ovv, arap ovv, but 
surely, el re ovv, be it this or that, yap o vy, for surely, el 5' ovv, if then. 

Rem. 7. Ovkovv, as a Paroxytone, means: (a) non ergo, without interro- 
gation (consequently ovk in connection with the syllogistic ovv, ergo) ; still in 
this sense it is also written ovk ovv; (b) nullo modo, nequaquam, by no means, 
without interrogation (consequently ovk in connection with the emphatic suffix 
ovv) most frequently in answers, e. g. X. O. 1, 9. ovkovv epoiye So/ce?. — Ov- 
kovv, as a Perispomenon : (a) in a question : nonne igitur ? nonne ergo ? X. C. 
2. 2, 12. ovkovv, e<pt] 6 2., Kal tw yeirovi fiovAei av apeaKeiv, — ''Eywye, e<pt), 
Also in this case it is written on ovv, as well as ovkovv; the latter has been 
adopted in modern times, yet it is to be limited to such questions as involve a 
special emphasis in the negative, and so ovkovv is equivalent to nonne certe ; 
like S. Aj. 79. ovkovv yeXcos ^Slcttos els ix^povs yeXav ; (b) without interrogation, 
ergo, igitur. X. C. 3. 6, 6. ov kov v, ecpv, to fxev irXovaicoTepav t\\v tt6Xiv ivoielv 
avafiahovixe&a. This last ai'ises from its use as an interrogative, and ovkovv is 
in this case properly nonne igitur ? The frequent use of this interrogative form 
has caused a gradual weakening in the interrogative tone, and thus its sense 
has become obscure, e. g. is it not true therefore we shall put off? (= conse- 
quently we shall put off). 

(c) T o iv v v, which never stands as the first word in a sentence, is derived 
from the Epic t $, therefore, and the slightly inferential or deductive vvv, now, 
which is derived from the temporal adverb vvv ; it is used : (a) to make 
a transition; thus especially, /cal rot vvv, and now, en rot vvv, moreover 
then; (b) to mark a conclusion, therefore noio, so then. Tolyap (from the Epic r<£, 
therefore, and yap) corresponds to the Eatin ergo, therefore, but is poetic ; still 
stronger is TOi.y6.pioi, just on this account, precisely so, and to tyapovv, on this 
account then. They commonly stand as the first word in a sentence. 



§ 325. Asyndeton. 

1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction (haw- 
SeVcos). Only some of the more prominent instances will be mentioned : — 

(a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. II. x» 295. (of Hector) o-ttj 
5e KaTa(pr\cras, ovd' aAA' e^e /xeiXivov eyx°S' Ay'tyofiov 5' enaXei XevKaairida, fiaK' 
phv avcrai jj t e e /mv S6pv p.aKp6v. — (b) Asyndeton is very common in explana- 



$ 326.] PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 515 

tory clauses, which are elsewhere connected by £pa {therefore, then, that is) and 
yap. The second clause gives a more exact explanation of what was"' stated 
only in a general, indefinite, indistinct manner in the first. So particularly 
when there stands in the first clause a preparative demonstrative, e. g. tovtq, ro'Se, 
eijTcos, eo5e, etc X. An. 3. 2, 19. e v I f*6v(p irpoexevaiv rjfxas oi tinre&" <pevy€Lt> avroTs 
aatyahdffTepov iariv, %) r\\uv. — (c) Related to the above is the asyndeton in the 
beginning of a discourse or new paragraph, which is intended to strengthen a pre- 
ceding thought. PL Phaed. 91, c. 'AAA.' It4ov, ecprj. Upwr^v y.e inrofj.V7)o~aTe 
& eAeyeTe, iav fir) (paiwopat fX€}ivT]p.4vos. — (d) The connecting particle is often 
wanting, but is, in a measure, involved in another word. This is the case es- 
pecially with demonstratives, e. g. ovtws, t6vos, toTos, etc., as in Latin with sic, 
talis, tantus, etc. — (e) Before ra roiavra. cetera, aWa, oi &\\oi in the 
enumeration of several objects, teal is veiy ccmmonly omitted, as et before ce- 
ieri, alii, reliqui, in Latin, when these words have a collective sense, i. e. when 
one would include in these expressions all which is still to be named in addi- 
tion to what has been already mentioned. PL Gorg. 503, e. olov el fiovXei ISelv 
robs faypdcpovs, robs olKodofjLOvs, robs vavTrriyovs, robs aWovs iravras drj/xiovp- 
yovs. — (f ) In antitheses, which are to be represented as taking place equally, 
and without distinction, the conjunctions are omitted. PL Prot. 319, d. <rv/i- 
jSouAeuet irepl rovruv 6/xolccs [ikv re/crav, bjj.oiws 5e x a ^ Ke ^ s ■CKvroro/j.os e/xTropos 
vavK\7]poSt irKovaios ir4vqs, yevvcuos ayeuvfjs. In poetry, particularly in Epic, 
two or four adjectives, belonging to one substantive (of which each two 
form a whole), or even three, are often placed together, without a connec- 
tive, if they are merely ornate epithets which, as it were, paint and vividly 
describe the object. II. ir, 140 and 802. eyxos fipi&v, fxiya, <m$ap6v, KeKopu- 
4>fX(VOV. Od. a, 96. KoAa ir4Si\a, a/j.fip6(na, xp^eLou 



CHAPTER Yin, 

B. Subordination. 

§ 326. Principal and Subordinate Sentences. 

1. When clauses, which together present one united thought, 
are so related, as to their import, that the one is a dependent 
and merely complementary or limiting member of the other, 
then their connection may be expressed either by coordinate 
conjunctions, as kcu, Se, yap, apa, etc., e. g. to lap rjkSe, ra. Se p68a 
dvJet (the spring came, and the roses bloom) ; or in such a man- 
ner, that the. clause, which merely completes or limits the 
other, is manifestly in its outward form, a dependent, or a sim- 
ply completing or limiting member of the other, e. g. oVe to 



516 SYNTAX. [$ 326 

tap 7)\$e, ra p6$a avSei.. This mode of connection is called 
Subordination, and the clauses or sentences Subordinate. 

2. The clause to which the other as a complementary or 
limiting member belongs, is called the principal clause ; the 
complementary or limiting clause, the subordinate clause, and 
the two together, a compound sentence. Thus, for example, in 
the compound sentence, "Ore to Zap r)\3e,T<x p6Sa dv^e?, the clause 
ore t6 zap r)\$e, is the subordinate clause, the other the principal 
clause. 

3. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of a substantive 
(substantive subject or object), or of an attributive adjective, 
^r of an adverb, and hence must be regarded as substantives, 
adjectives, or adverbs, expanded into a sentence; accord- 
ingly, there are three classes of subordinate clauses : sub- 
sta?itive, adjective, and adverbial clauses. 

Thus, for example, in the sentence, " The victory of Cyrus over the enemy 
was announced," the subject may be expanded into a subordinate clause, 
viz., " That Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ; " further, in the 
sentence, " Sing to me, Muse, the far-wandering man," the attributive far- 
toandering, may be expanded into a subordinate clause, " &i>8pa /xoi ewe-ire, 
Movaa, iroXvrpoTcov, %s fidXa iroXXd irXdyx^V^ (who has wandered far). 
Comp., " He announced the victory of Cyrus over the enemy," with " He an- 
nounced, that Cyrus had conquered the enemy ; " " In the Spring the roses bloom," 
with, " when the Spring is come, the roses bloom." 

Remark 1. The use of subordinate clauses in Greek is not so common 
as in English, since the Greek makes a much more frequent use of Participles 
than the English. Comp. " when the enemy had come," with t&u TToXefxlwv 
iXSovToov ; " when he had done this, he went away," with ravra Trpd^as airefir) ; 
" Cyrus, who had conquered the enemy, came back to the camp," with Kvpos 
robs iroXe/j.lovs viKTjcras els rb arparoTredou di/rjX&eu. 

Rem. 2. To substantive clauses belong also dependent or indirect inter- 
rogative clauses ; for these form the object of the governing verb, e. g. " He 
asked me whether my father had returned, i. e. concerning, or in regard to, the return 
of m.y father ; " He showed, who had plotted the conspiracy, i. e. he showed the 
author of the conspiracy : " " He wrote me, when he should depart, i. e. the time 
of his departure," etc. Still, as the laws relating to dependent and to direct 
interrogative clauses, are often blended together, both will be treated in a 
special section in the sequel. 

Rem. 3. The subordinate relation of the dependent to the principal clause, 
is indicated in Greek by conjunctions, and also by the relative pronoun, which in 
an adjective clause has the meaning of an adjective. The conjunctions are 
correlatives, i. e. relatives which stand in a reciprocal relation to demonstra 
tives in principal clauses, e. g. Ovt 6s eariv 6 a,vr\p, o v eWes. T b frSSov, b av&e? iu 
Tea ktjtto), KaXXi(rr6v iariy. y EA.e£e tovto, '6ti 6 av&p&iros afrdi/arSs effriv. 
fatos — oTos) '6 a a — t off ovt ca. 'Cls eXe£a, ovt as eyeveTO. OvTca tea- 



f 327.] SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 517 

Xws irdvTa eirpa^v, &sre iiraivou fxeytarov &^ios r)u. "Ore 6 Kvpos i^A&e, 
T 6 t e irduTes p.eyaXws ixdprjcrav. *Efj.eive ^XP l t ovt ov, ov 6 (3ao~iXevs €7rfjA« 
frev. A substantive may also stand instead of a demonstrative correlative, 
e. g. iv rovTcp tw xp° vc Pi 0Te (instead of tot€, ore). Still, when the reciprocal 
relation is not to be brought out emphatically, the demonstrative is commonly 
not expressed, e. g. v EAe£ei', '6tl 6 dv^pcoiros afrdvaros Zcttiv. KaXws irdura 
€irpa^ev, &st e ktX. "Ore 6 Kvpos rjx&e, ivdpTts jisydXus ix ( *P r l a ' aJ '- ^Ejuetye, 
fiexpi ov d fiatnXevs £irr)X&ev, etc. Even both pronouns may, in certain cases, 
be omitted, e. g. "Efxeiue, /ue'x/n & fiacrtXevs eTrr)X&ev. 

Eem.4. The form of the demonstrative, in the principal clause, either 
actually expressed or understood, determines the nature of the subordinate 
clause. The substantive demonstrative denotes a siibstantive clause ; the ad- 
jective, an adjective clause ; the adverbial, an adverbial clause. But the 
subordinate clauses themselves have special characteristics by which they 
may be distinguished from each other, viz., the introductory conjunctions and 
the constructions connected with these. 



§ 327 a . Sequence of the Subjunctive Tenset in Sub- 
ordinate Sentences. 

1. For the use of tenses in subjunctive subordinate clauses, the 
following general rule applies in Greek, as in Latin : — 

The tenses of the subjunctive subordinate clause correspond 
to those of the principal clause; i. e. a principal tense (Present, 
Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect) in the principal clause, is fol- 
lowed by the subjunctive in the subordinate clause, and an his- 
torical tense (Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist) in the principal 
clause is followed in the subordinate clause, by the Optative, 
i. e. the Subjunctive of the historical tenses. 

Tovto Xiyco, tovtS fxoi AeAe/crcu, tovto Ae£eo, 'iva yiyvu o~ Kr\ s (yvcos), 
hoc dico, dixi (Pcrfectum praesens), dicam, ut cognoscas. Tovto eXeyov, tovt6 
pot eAeAe/cTo, tovto eAe£a, 'ha y lyvwff kois (y voir] s), hoc dicebam, dix- 
eram. dixi (Perfect. Histor.), ut cognosceres. Ovk ex«, ottol Tp4irco/j.ai (rpd 
ir co fj. a t), non habeo, quo me vertam. Ovk elxov, 'Siroi Tpeiroip.riy (Tpairoi- 
fi.7)v), non habebam , quo me verterem. Of iroXe/xtoi irdvTas, otco av £vt vx (t30 ~ l > 
kt eiv ov cr iv. Oi iroXzfxioi irdvTas, otco evTvxoiev, eKTeivov. 

2. But it is to be observed that the Greek confines itself less 
regularly to the above r-ule, than the Latin, but has much 
greater freedom. Very often in lively narration, the Greeks 
refer the predicate of a subordinate clause directly to the 
present time of the speaker, without any regard to the principal 
clause, so that, therefore, an historical tense in the principal clause 
is followed by the same mode ( Subj.) and the same tenses which 

44 



a 18 SYNTAX. [§ 327. 

accompany the principal tenses. The dependent clause or dis- 
course then assumes the character of independent or direct dis- 
course (an objective mode of expression) ; the speaker, in his 
lively conceptions, brings the past into present view ; the past 
becomes present to him. See § 345, 5. 



§ 327 b . Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses. 

The use of modes in the different kinds of subordinate 
clauses, will be considered in treating these clauses each by 
itself. Here, only those characteristics will be noticed which 
are common to several kinds of subordinate clauses. 

1. There is very often an attraction of the mode, a subordi- 
nate clause which forms an intermediate member of another 
clause, taking the mode of this clause. 

(a) This occurs with the Indie, of the historical tenses in those subordinate 
clauses, which form an intermediate or accessory member of a hypothetical 
proposition with et and a preterite Indie, in the Protasis, and a preterite Indie, 
with av in the Apodosis [§ 339, 2, I. (b)]. X. C. 1. 4, 14. (au^puiros) ovre pobs 
hv %X<»v 0-wf.M, av&pceirev Se 7^^771/, 48vvar au irparreiv, a e fiovXero (as in 
Lat. efficere posset, quae vellet). 3. 5, 8. e! ifiovXo [xe&a XPV^T^^ &v ol &\Ao* 
<e!x ° v avTiiroie?<r&ai (si vellemus expetere opes, quas alii haberent). Isocr. Paneg. 
19. ixPV v { T0VS pyrropas) fJLT) irporepovirepl rcov 6p.oXoyovfX€Uoou o~vjj.fiovXeveii/, irp\p 
rrepl tS)v kjA(pisf5T}Tovp.£vo}v 7}{ias i8i8al-av (oportebat . . priusquam . . docuissent). 
PL Gorg. 506, 6. TjSecos av KaXXacXe? tovtcc en 5 ieXey6 /j.7)v, eoos avrcp . . 
cLweSwKa (usque dum reddidissem). Prom this maybe explained the use of 
the Indie. Imperfect or Aorist in final clauses after an Indie, of an historical 
tense with or without &v. See § 330, 5. 

(b) Very often with those subordinate clauses which are intermediate or ac- 
cessory members of optative clauses, i. e. clauses expressing a wish ; hence with 
adjective, adverbial, or final clauses, as members of a clause expressing a tvisk, 
or as intermediate members of an optative proposition expressed conditionally. 
II. p, 640. etT] 3' osris ercupos airayyeiXeie rdx^crra TIr)Xei5r) (0 that there 
were a friend to announce as quick as possible). Ar. Vesp. 1431. epSoi ris, fyy 
Hkckttos etSei 77 r£x vr i v - PI- Phaedr. 279, C. rb xp v ^ov irXrj&os e)frj /xoi, oaov 
fi^re (pepeiv, /xtjt' dyeiv Svvair' &XXos, 3) 6 <rc*>(ppcov. II. <r, 464, sqq. a? yap 
pay fravdroio Bvstjx^os a>5e dvvalfirjv v6o-<ptv airoKpvxpai, ore fxiv /x6pos alvb. 
Ixdvoi. — X. S. 8, 17. ris /xicre7v Svvair &v, ixp? ov etSei?? na\6s re Ka\ aya- 
&bs vopu£6p.evos. C. 4. 6, 7. ircos yap av ris, a ye pvq i Trier air 0, ravra ao<pbs 
etrj; PL Phaed. 72, c. et air o&vi)(r kol fxkv irdvra, Hera rov grjv jxeraXa^o 1, 
e 7r e 1 8 77 5e airofr dvoi, jxevot 4v rovrco rep ffxvpari ra reSvewra nal ftr) waXiv 
avafiicbffKoiTO, ap ov ttoXXt) avdynr reXevruvra irdvra re&vdvai Ka\ fxi^dev £r}v' 



9 32'7.] MODES IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 519 

X. 0. 1, 13. e?Tis x?V ro T( ? apyvplco, &st€ kolkiov to aw/xa e%of, iru/s av eTi 
to apyvpiov avTU) w(pe\L/xov elr) ; S. Ph. 325. &v/xbv yevoiTO X e 'P^ ir\r]pa>cral 
TTore, %v at MvKr)vai yv o 7 ev . . , oti XV ^Kvpos avSpwv aXKifxoov fxf)Tr]p e<pv. Eur. 
Troad. 698. 7ra78a TOvSe 7rai8os i K&pe\pais &v, Tpoias fxeyiarTov u<pe\r]fx\ 'Lv ol 
iroTe e'/c aov yev6fxevoi Tra78es*lAiov irdXiv KaT o iiclae lav Kal tt6Ais yevoiT eTi. 
X. An. 2. 4, 3. ovk eirio-TdjxeSa, o t t fiaffiXevs Tj/xas airoAecrat rrepl iravTos &v 
it o 17) o~ a it o } Xva nal to7s &Wois"EA\r)cri fbofios eXr] eirl fiacriXea /xeyav o~ToaTev- 
eiv (according to the best MSS.). Comp. 3, 1, 18. X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. « drj irei- 
<rais eiraivetv ere iroT^Kovs, ott as Sol-av \dfiois, &pri e|7j7rcmj/ccbs e%t]s dv. Comp, 
2. 4, 17. But since the Optative in a clause expressing a wish as well as the 
Optative in hypothetical propositions, has a present signification (§ 259, 3), ac- 
cording to § 330, 2 the Subj. must properly follow after the final conjunctions, 
as is frequently the case. PL Apol. 28, d. avTiKa TeSvairjv, 'iva /xtj ev- 
&d8e fxeva KaTayehacrTos. X. An. 3. 1, 38. oto/xai av v/xas fxeya bvr)aai rb crTpd- 
rev/xa, el eiri}j.ehr)&elr]Te, ott a s o.vtI twv drvoXaKoTay us Tax^Ta o~TpaT7)yol 
olvt iKct.Tao~T a&ooiriv. Cy. 3. 2, 28. xP r )l JLa ' Ta Tposyeve< ftai eTi av fiovXoi- 
fxrjv r)fx?v, ott us ex® p-KT&bu a.(p&6vus 8id6vai. Also with /xr) (whether not = 
that). An. 1. 3, 17. eya OKVoir,v fxev av els to ir\o?a e/xflaiveiv, a t\\juv 80177, /xtj 
rjixas avTais tcus Tpir)peo~i k aT aSvcrw, (po^olfx-nv S 5 av to> r)ye/xovi § doir] 'eirecr- 
&ai, /XT] Tjfxas ay ay r), o&ev ovx oT6v re earTai QeXSelv. 

Rejiakk. But in substantive-clauses with oti or us, that (§ 329), and in 
dependent interrogative clauses, after a conditioning or conditioned Ind. of 
the historical tenses, the Ind. of the principal tenses remains ; also after an 
optative principal clause, since these clauses have but a loose connection with 
the principal clause, and hence they readily assume the form of direct discourse. 
X. An. 5. 1, 10. el /xev 7)ir io~t d/xe&a cracpus, oti 7?|et Xeipto~o<pos, ovb°ev av 
e8eL av /xe\Xu Keyeiv. (So in the best and most of the MSS. instead of 7j£oi.) 
Dem. 19,40. eypacpov av 8tappr)Sr]v, yXiKa v/xas e5 rroir)cru, el ev ydeiv Kal 
TTjv avjxfxaxio-v (xot yevricrofxevnv. — Dem. 16, 4. oi»8 5 av els avTeiiroi, is ov 
o-v/x<pepei t?7 iroXei, Kai AaKedaijxoviovs aa&eve?s elvai Kal &7]^aious. X. An. 3. 
2, 36. et vvv air oS eix& e ' L7 1> Tiva XP^ vye7aSrai (ducere) tov irXaiaiov, . . ovk 
av . . fiovXeveoSai 7]jxas Seoi. 

2. The Subj. and Opt. are used in subordinate clauses to de- 
note indefinite frequency or repetition ; the Subj., when the prin- 
cipal clause contains a principal tense (Pres. or Fut), the Opt., 
when the principal clause contains an historical tense (usually 
the Impf.). This relation in Greek is regarded as a conception, 
inasmuch as the idea of repetition arises from bringing single 
actions together in conception. The conjunction or relative of 
the subordinate clause is translated by as often as. 

II. )8, 391. ov Se k eycov airdvev^e ]xdxr)S ebeXovTa v or) (Too jxijxvd^eiv rrapa 
vnval Kopcovlo-LV, ov ol errena apKiov eo-aeiTai (pvyeeiv Kvvas t/5' oloovovs (as often as 
I shall observe). X. Cy. 3. 3, 26. drrSTav (ol fidpfiapoL fiaaiXeTs) ctt paT oire- 
Sevu'vTai, Tacppov rrepifidWovTai evirerus 5ia tt;j/ rroXvxeipiav. C 3. 1, 1. '6 Tt 
yukv (2«K-paT7j$) avTbs elSeir], rcdvTwv rrpo^v/x6TaTa idl8ao~Kev, '6t ov 8e avTos 



520 syntax. [H 328, 329. 

aireipdrepos etr), irpbs robs iirio-ra/xevovs ^yeu avrovs. An. 6. 1, 7. oiroVf ol 
"EWTjves ro7s iroXe/xlois iirloiev, padleos airecpevyov. 4. 5, 30. oirov aeyo<pwp 
iraplo t Kcofirju, irp4irero irpbs robs eV reus Koofxais. 1. 9, 18. et ris yd n Kvpca irpos- 
rd£avri icakws vir-n perr) a e lev, ovdevl 7rdnrore axdpicrrou eiWe r)]v irpo&vfxiav. 



$328. I, Substantive-Clauses. 

Substantive-clauses are substantives or infinitives expand- 
ed into a sentence, i. e. they have the force of a substantive, 
and stand as the subject, as well as the attribute or object of 
a sentence. Comp. § 326, 3. 



$329. A. Substantive-Clauses introduced by on o? 

w§, that. 

1. Substantive-clan ses introduced by ori and w?, that, 

express the object of verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. bpav, 

clkov€lv, voelv, /xcu/#aveiv, ytyvco<TK€tv, etc. ; Aeyav, $r]\ovv, SeiKvvvai, 

dyyeAAeiv, etc., [$' 306, 1, (b)] ; in the second place, subordinate 

clauses introduced by on, express the object of verba affectuum, 

e. g. SavfJid^eLV, a)ft€cr$ai, dyavaKretv, alaxyvecr $ai, /xe/x<£ecr#ai, etc. ; 

on is also used to introduce a subordinate clause, which con • 

tains an explanation of the principal clause, or of a single word 

in it. 

Remark 1. 'Sis, properly, how, differs from on, in expressing the thought 
more indefinitely and undecidedly, than '6n ; hence wj is used particularly after 
verbs of believing, thinking, and after negative verba sentiendi and declarandi. 
— After verbs of believing, thinking, judging, hoping, promising, swearing, denying, 
the 7??/ or the Ace. with the Inf. usually follows, very seldom or i or w s ; after 
verbs of saying, mentioning, and the like, both constructions occur with equal 
frequency ; after verbs of knowing, showing, and the like, either on or &s 
follows, or a participle, or, under certain conditions, the Ace. ivith the Inf. See 
§311. Sometimes, also, 6 it cos and the Poet, o vvsk a, also d&ovveica in the 
Tragedians, are used nearly in the same sense with on, that. 

Rem. 2. When a subordinate clause refers to a Pass, verb or to an imper- 
sonal phrase Avith icrriv, e. g. 57)Aoj>, SetvoV, aiaxp^u ianv, and the like, it stands 
as the grammatical subject. 

2. The predicate of this substantive-clause may be* ex- 
pressed : (a) by the Ind., (b) by the Opt. (c) by the Opt. with 
av, (d) by the Ind. of Hist, tenses with av. 

3. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when the statement ia 
to be represented as a fact, something certain or actual. Par 



$ 329.] SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 521 

ticularly is the Ind. used regularly, when the verb of the prin- 
cipal clause is a principal tense (Pres., Perf, or Fut). 

4. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when the statement is 
to be represented as a conception or supposition, therefore, par- 
ticularly, when what is stated as the opinion of another is to be 
indicated as such ($ 345, 4). When the Ind. interchanges with 
the Opt., then one thought is represented as a fact, the other, 
as a mere thought or conception, something uncertain. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 7. ol 8' eXeyov, '6ti 'dpKToi iroXXobs f?8rj irX-qcrida'auTas 8 lecp&e i- 
pa v. Th. 1, 114. 7}yyeA&ri, otl Meyapa a (peo"T 77 /ce, Kal HeXoTrovvrjaioi fi4x- 
Xova iv isfiaAXeiv is ttjv 'ArnK-fjV. Her. 3, 140. TrvvSraverai (Hist. Pres.) 6 2u- 
XodS)V, u>s 7) fiacrihri'iri it ep teXr}Xv&o i is tovtov rbv &vdpa. X. An. 1. 1, 3. 
Tia(ra(p4pvris 8ia/3aAAei (Hist. Pres.) rbv Kvpov rrpbs rbv dfieXcpov, a> s iirifSov- 
Xevoi avrcf. Cy. 1. 1, 3. oVe /xev 87/ TaGra iveSfv/j.oviJ.e&a, ovtcds iyiyvcoo'KO/j.ev 
trepl avTwv, w s dv&pu>Tra> ire<pvK6n irdurcov ra>v aXXav paov e?7] ^wuv, ^ dv&pw- 
ttwv dpx*w. An. 2. 1,3. ovtoi eXeyov, '6ti Kvpos fxkv r4§v7)Kev, 'Apicuos Se 
7T ecpevycos etr} Kal Xeyoi, on ravrrju t^v 7]fx4pav rspLfMciveiev dv avrovs. 

Rem. 3. "When the Ind. Imp/, instead of the Opt. follows an historical tense 
in the principal clause, the mode of expression resembles the form of direct 
discourse, since the Ind. of direct discourse remains, e. g. zevocpwv eXeyev, r 1 
6pS£>s j)T iwvt Kal avTO to epyov avroTs fj.apTvpo(r), X. A. 3. 3, 11. (oratio recta: 
op&ws air luvrat). See § 345, Rem. 5. But when the Ind. of the principal 
tenses follows an historical tense in the principal clause, then the subordinate 
clause assumes wholly the coloring of direct discourse (§ 345, 5). Hence it 
sometimes happens, that the form of the oblique discourse is either partially 
or wholly changed into that of the direct. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. ivrav&a 8^7 rbv 
Kvpov yeXacrai re e/c rcov Trp6a&ev daKpvcav Kal eiireTv avrcp bjnhvra &appsiv, on 
it ap4crrai avroTs oXlyov XP^ V0V ' <*> STe °pw (?oi i^ecTTai Kav flovXr} daKap- 
SauvKrd. Hence on maybe used, when the exact words of another are quoted 
in the same form in which they were spoken by him, when in Eng., a colon or 
marks of quotation are used, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. €?7re 8 1 , '6tl- Els naipbv rineis 
e<p7}, he said: "you have come at the right time." An. 2. 4, 16. Upo^vos 
dtvev, or i' Auto's (1/u.l, ov (r)Te?s. It is used even before the Imp., e. g. PI. Criton. 
50, C. Vaus dv ctrroiev [01 vofxoi), ori' ^£1 ^wKpares, /jlt] &ai>fAa(s rd Xtyofxeva. 

5. The Opt. with av is used, when the statement is to be 
represented as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, 
or as an undetermined possibility [§ 260, 2, 4, (a)]. 

X. An. 1. 6, 2. KaraXXayels 8e outos Kvpa>, elrrev, e! aurw So it] tinreas X 1 ^ 1 ' 
ovs, o t i robs irpoKaruKaiovras linreas tj KaraKavo l dv iveSpevcras, 2) (covras 
ttoXXovs avrwv eXoi, Kal kuXvq- tie rov tcdiziv imSi/ras. Cy. 1. 6, 3. fxe/iu^/xat 
dKovo-as ttot4 crov, otl zIkotws 'b.v Kal irapd &twc irpaKTiKcvrtpos etrj, cosirep /ecu 
nvapd dv&pwTVtov, osns fj.7], dirSre iv dirSpois efy, rore KoXaKevoi, aXX* 8tc tc* dpicrra 
irpdrroi, t6t€ /xaXicra twv &ewv /j.e/j.v<£T0 (ostis (jlt] ktX. instead of e3f ns /J.^ 
ktX.). Dem. Aphob. 851, 22. o?8a, '6n irdvTts &v 6{ioXoyf)(raiT€. 

44* 



622 SYNTAX. [§ 329. 

6. The Incl. of the Hist, tenses with av is used, when the 
affirmation is to be represented as a condition, whose actual 
existence or possibility is denied £$ 260, 2, (2) (a)]. 

Dem. Aphob. 830, 55. el fiev 6 irar^p yirlo'Tei rovrots, StjAov, Sti our' av 
raAAa eirer peirev, ovr av rav& ovrco KaraXnrcov avro?s ecppa(ev. Lys. c. 
Agor. 137, 75. ovde-rrore ireio'eis ovdeva av&pwirwv, cb s &pvvixov airoKTelvas acpei' 
&T}S &v, el fid] fxeydka rbv 8?]Lt.ov rcov 'A&nvaiojv Kal avt]Keo~ra KaKa elpydaa. PL 
Rp. 1. 330. ®t/j.L(TTOKArjs aireKpivaro, on ovt av avrbs lep'upoos &v ovo/xao'rbs 
iy ever o, ovt' eKe?vos *A&r]va?os (&v). 

Rem. 4. Impersonal forms of expressions are often changed iuto thoscwhich 
are personal, the subject of the substantive-clause l>eing transferred to the 
principal clause and the impersonal expression becoming its predicate. 
Comp. §§ 307, Rem. 6, and 310, Rem. 3. Th. 1, 93. Kal StjAtj i] oUoSofila 
en Kal vvv ecrnv, or i Kara anovd^v eyevero. X. C. 4. 2, 21. (doKe? 6 toiovtos) 
SrjXos V7] A? elvai, on a <pero elSevai 0VKt>l8ev. X. O. 1, 19. '6ti Trovnpor- 
aToi elai, ovde ae \av&dvovo~iv. 

Rem. 5. In the place of a substantive-clause introduced by on or d>s, the 
Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) or the Part, may stand after verba declarandl and sen- 
tiendi. That there is a difference of meaning between the construction with 
the Inf. and that with the Part., has been seen in § 311 ; but the difference be- 
tween the construction with a Part, and that with on or ws, is only in form. 
The difference between the construction with on and d>s with the finite verb 
and that of the Inf. (Ace. with Inf.) is, that in the former, the affirmation is 
more objective and definite (as a fact) ; in the latter, on the contrary, subjective 
and indefinite (as an assumption). Hence verbs which express a merely sub- 
jective meaning, as, oieaSrai, 8oKe?v, i\iri(eiv, and also <pdvai (i.e. 
verbs which denote such a subjective view), are constructed almost exclusively 
with the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.), very seldom with on or cos. That the distinc- 
tion between the three modes of construction is very often unessential, is clearly 
seen from the fact, that examples are found in which the same thought is ex- 
press^ by the same writer in different places in each of the three forms, e. g. 
Her. o, 63. e^ayyeXXei, cos ol Tra?s yeyove. 65. ore ol e^T]yyei\e 6 o'lKerni 
TrcuSa yeyovevai. 69. ore avra> av rjyyeXxrrjs y eyevn fievos. 

Rem. 6. The verbs fj.efj.vvfj.ai, oT8a, a/couaj and others of similar mean- 
ing, are not unfrequently followed by an adverbial clause, introduced by ore, 
instead of a substantive-clause introduced by on or cos. This construction 
seems to have arisen from an ellipsis, as ro'v xpovov, e. g. fiefiv-nfiai (rod xpovov), 
'6re ravra eXe^as, as in Eng. I remember very well when the war broke out. X 
Cy. 1. 6, 8. fj.efx.vnfj. at Kal rovro, ore, o~ov Xeyovros, o~vve§OKei Kal ifiol vireofiey- 
e&es elvai epyov rb KaXas &px^LV. Dem. Ol. 2(3), 29, 4. fie fxvr, c^e, or airny- 
ye\&-n $i\iinros TrepiopKcov. Comp. memini, quum darem ; vidi, quum prodiret, 
audwi eum, quum diceret. 

Rem. 7. Verbs expressing emotion (No. 1 ), instead of being followed by a sub- 
stantive-clause introduced by '6n or cos, are often followed by a subordinate clause 
introduced by a conditional or interrogative el, if whether, when the object of 
admiration, etc., is not to be represented, as actually existing, but as merely pos- 
sible, or as still a matter in question, e. g. Sfav/xd(co, on ravra yiyverai and ei 
ravra yiyverai. Attic politeness, which often blends in its language a coloring 
of doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of expression, frequently employs 
this form even in settled and undoubted facts ; in this case el has the force of 
otl. Aeschin. Ctes. ovk ay airy, el /xt) S'ikvv edcoKev (he is not satisfied, that). 
PI. Lach. 194, a. ay av aKru el ovrcoal a voa> (xt) olos r elfj.1 elirelv. Rp. 348, 



$ 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 523 

e. t 68 e 4^-avfj.acra, e i eu apeTTJs Kal cro<pias rlfrns fiepei ttjv dStKiav, ttjv Se 5t- 
kcuo<tvv7]v iv ro7s ivavrlois. Dem. Mid. 30, 548. ovk t) vxvvSrT), e! toiovto 
Kanbu iirdyei tw (that he brings such a calamity upon one). 

Rem. 8. Instead of on ovrios, the relative &s,that, is often nsed, and 
instead of on r oiovros or on r 6 cos, the relatives oTo s, ocro s. PL 
Phaed. 58, e. evSaifxcav /jloi 6 dvrip icpalvero, cos ddeccs Kai yzvvaicos h-eXevra (that 
he died so fearlessly, etc.). Her. 1, 31. al 'Apyelai ijxaKapi^ov t))v /xrjTepa, o'lusv 
renvwv eKvprjcre (that she is possessed of such children). 



$330. B. Final Substantive -Clauses , denoting pur- 
pose and result, introduced by di?, Iva, etc. 1 

1. The second class of substantive- clauses are those which 
denote a purpose, object, or a result. These clauses are intro- 
duced by the conjunctions Iva, ws, o-cos (ocppa, Poet.), Iva 
/xrj, ws /x?/, o ttcjos fArj. 

2. The mode in final clauses is commonly the subjunctive 
or optative, since the purpose or object is something merely 
imagined, or conceived. When the verb of the principal clause 
is a principal tense : Pres., Perf, Fut, or an Aorist with the sig- 
nification of the present [$ 257., 1, (a) and (b)], then the final 
conjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the purpose, etc., 
is followed by the Subj. ; but when the verb of the principal 
clause is an historical tense : Impf , Plnp., Aor., then the final 
conjunction is followed by the optative (but never by an Opt. 
Fut). 

Tavra ypdcpcv, y4ypacpa, ypd\pco, 'iv i\hr\s (lit Veritas, that you may 
come). Ae|oi/ (with the sense of the Pres.), 'iv ei'Sai (die, ut sciam,that 1 
may know). Tavra eypacpov, iyeypdcpeiv, eypa\j/a, 'iv i\hois (ut ve- 
nires, that you might come). II. A, 289, sq. aAA' fobs i\avver e /iww%ay tWous 
l<p&iixwv AavaSiv, 'iv xmeprepov €v~x os dp 7] a foe (ut gloriam vohis paretis) ; but, 
II. e, 1 — 3. evSr" av TvBdSr) Ai0fir]8e'i UaWas 'A^rjvri ScD/ce fievos Kal frdperos, 'iv 
eKdrjXos /xera iracriv 'Apyeloicri y 4v o n o, i5e k\4os icr&\bv dpoiro (ut clarus 
feret et gloriam sibi pararet). r, 347. Jupiter said to Minerva, aAA' Tfot ol veKrap 
Te Ka\ dfj.fipo<Tir]v ipareivrjv crrd^ov (with the sense of the Pres.) iv\ crr-ifoecra , 
%va fir) fiiv \i/j.bs 'iK-nrai (ut ne fames eum occupet) ; hut, 352, r) 5' 'Ax'A7jt j>e/c- 
rap ivl crrr)deocri Ka\ d/j.flpocTLriv epareivrjv ardg, 'iva fir) fiiv Xifibs areprrrjs yov- 
vcfo* " koi to (ut ne occuparet). Dem. Cor. 239, 39. y4ypa<pa bfiiv, 'Iva fir) 
irrl tt\(7ov eVoxAijff^e irepl rovruv. X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. rl ovv, %.cpr\ 6 Kvpos, ov 
Kal rrjv hvvafiiv eAe|as fioi [=Ae|oj/ fioi, § 256,4, (e)], Sir cos — j8 ov Aeuw- 

1 For practical reasons both kinds of subordinate clauses are brought together 
here although they properly belong to adverbial clauses denoting purpose. 



524 syntax. [$ 330. 

jwe^a, ottos av dpiffTa dywvi^oiixe&a; 1. 2, 3. (£k ttjs TaV Hepruv eXev&epas 070* 
pas KaXovfj.evn)s) ra fiev &via Kal ol ayopcuoi aire A?} XavTat els &XXov tSttov, ws 
/xi] ixiyvi)7)T at r\ tovtwv Tvpfir] rfj t£>v ireiraidev/nevcov evKoa/j.ta. 15. 'iva he 
ca<peaTepov SrjXco^fj ^aaa rj Ylepawv TroXiTeia, /xiKpbv eirdv eifj.t (paucis repe' 
tarn). 4, 25. Kap.^vo-t]S Tbv Kvpov air e KaXe i, O7rcos Ta eV nepcrais iirixupia 
e7r iT€\olr). PL Apol. 28, d. avTiKa reSvai-nv (with the sense of the Pres.), 
Yj/a ju.77 iv&dde p.evca KaTayeXacrTos. 

Remark 1. The Subj. often follows an historical tense : (a) in vivid nar 
ration, where past actions are regarded as present (objective manner of repre- 
sentation, § 327, Rem. 2) ; (b) when the purpose or effect is to be repre- 
sented as continuing in the present time of the speaker, (a) Her. 1, 29. 26xwv 
air e5r) /j.ri (T e erea Sena, 'iva 877 (XT) Tiva roou vo/xoov avay Kaffbrj Xvaai twv 
(= £>v) e&ero (Solon icas absent ten years, in order that he might not be compelled, 
etc.). 7, 8. avXXoyov TIepaeojv toV apiaToov eiro te er 0, 'iva yvd/xas re irv&ri- 
rai a<pecvv Kal avrbs iv iraai elir-p to. &eXei. Th. 4, 1. Kal e s e fi e /3Atj Kecr av 
a/xa is ttjv 'F-nylvwv oi AaKe8aifx6vioi, 'iva jut) (ol 'J?i)yivoi) £tt ifior) & wo" t rois 
Meaanvtois. — (b) Od. A, 93. riirr ai>T, 3> SvaTT]ve, Xiirwv <pdos r]eXioto fjXv&es, 
u<ppa i8r? veKvas Kal aTepirea x&pov. Her. 7, 8. Sib i/xeas vvv iyk avveXe^a, 
'iva to ( = 0) vo4u> irprjaaeiv vir ep&e cc/xai vfxiv. P*em. Phil. 3, 117,26. rds 
TrSXeis avT&v TrapypWTai Kal TeTpapx<-a-S KaT eo~T t]C ev, 'iva jU.77 p.6vov Kara. n6- 
Xeis, d\hd Kal Kara, e^vrj S vXevw cr iv. PL Crit. 43, b. iiriTrjSes <re ovk eyei- 
pov, 'iva ws Tjdio-ra Sidyns. 

Rem. 2. On the contrary, a preceding principal tense, or an Aor. with Pres. 
sense, is sometimes followed by an Opt. : (a) when the present of the principal 
clause is an historical present, or when/in the use of the Pres., the speaker has 
at the same time contemplated a past action ; Eur. Hec. 10. ttoXvv Se <rvv ifiol 
Xpvtrbv i k tt 4 pi. it e 1 Xa&pa TraTrjp, 'iv', etiroT 'ixiov Teixv ireaoi, to?s faaiv eir) 
natal p.7] Gravis filov. X. An. 4. 6, 1. tovtov 8' 'Eiricr&evei . .irapaSiSuxr 1 <pv- 
Aarreiv, ottus, el Ka\5>s rjyrjaaiTo, %x°> v Ka ^ tovtov air i 01. Ar. Ran. 24. avrbs 
)3a8i(w Kal novo*, tovtov 8' o%w, 'iva /ij/ t aAatranrco po?TO, pr)?? &x& os 
<pep 01 (I let this one ride on an ass = I placed him on an ass, in order that he 
might not suffer hardship), (b) when the speaker adduces the intention or pur- 
pose which a person entertains, not as coming from his own, i. e. the speaker's 
mind, but from that of the person himself, so that the intention is indicated as 
one that had a previous existence; PL Rp. 410, b. ap olv, tfv 8' eyed, & TAau- 
Koev, Kal ol KoSio-iaVTes [aovo~ikjj Kal yv\xvao~TiK?\ iraiZeveiv oi>x ov eveKa Tives otov- 
Tai Ka& LCTacr iv, 'iva Trj jxev rb acojxa Repair ev lvt 0, t?7 8e t^j/ xpvxw 5 
(the view of the lawgiver, i. e. his purpose). X. An. 2. 4, 4. "«ras Se irov (/3a- 
o-i\evs) t) diroo-KaTTTei. ti ^ diroTeixK* 1 -) & s diropos eit] 7) 6d6s (the view of the 
king), (c) when in the principal clause, the Opt. stands with or without &v 
m 259, 3, (a) and 260, 2, (4), (a)], then an Opt. commonly follows, for the con- 
ceptions in the principal and subordinate clause are represented as separated 
irom the present time of the speaker (§ 259, 3) ; still, a Subj. may follow by 
attraction of the mode, since the present &ense of the Opt. is assumed. See 
§ 327b, 1. (b). Theogn. 881. elp-fivrj Kal ttXovtos e%ot iroXiv, oeppa fieT aWcov 
KOfiird^o ifx l. Soph. Aj. 1217, sq. yevoi/j-av, 'iv v\dev eireaTi tt6vtov Tcp6$~ 
X-npC oX{kXvo~tov — , Tas Upas ottus it pos e'nro ifxev 'ASrfivas. 

3. When two or more final clauses follow each other, the 
Subj. sometimes interchanges with the Opt. The two clauses 
are then placed in a kind of antithesis to each other, the former 
representing the result of the purpose or aim as certain, 






f 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 525 

the latter, without this accessory idea, and consequently as 
uncertain, undetermined, or only derived from what precedes. 

H. o, 597, sq. w E/CTopi yap ol &v/xbs efiovXero Kudos op4£ai Tlpiap.idr), 'tv a vt)vgI 
Kopwviai &eo"iridaes irvp e ,14/3 a A 7/ aKap.arov, ®4ridos 8' il-ai<rioi/ aprjv iracrav eiri- 
Kp-f)veie. Her. 9, 51. is tovtov drj rbv x&P 0V 4fiov\evcravTO fxerao-Trjvai, 'Iva 
Kal vSari %x <a0 ~ l XP"- (T ^ al acpSovco, Kal ol lirir4es a<p4as p.7} ff ivoiaro. 8,76 
TwSe 5e e'lveKev avrjyov (ol Hepcrai) ras vrjas, 'iva drj rcub-t "EAArjcri fiTjSe <pvyeeiv 
e|j? ctAA' a.iro\a/x<p^4vres 4v rfj 'Sakafiivi doTev t'htiv t£>v eV 'Aprefxiaicv. 

4. The modal adverb av, referring to a conditioning clause 
(generally not expressed), is sometimes joined with the final 
conjunctions ws and 7tcds (more seldom Iva). 

Od. e, 167, sq. Tr4iATpa) 84 roi ovpov o-moSev, &s /ce /idV acncri&ris crrjv irarpiSv 
yaiav 'LKf\ai, a% /ce beoi y i&4\u><ri. £-, 20, sq. koli jj.lv fiaKporepov Kal irda- 
ffova 3-7/zce ld4o~&cu, a> s Kev $air]Keo-o't (pi\os iravreco'i yevono (sc. el irpbs robs 
$ai7]Kas CKpiKoiTo). Her. 3, 44. iderifrn, ok (as av Kal irap' ecovrbv Tr4fx\j/as is 2a- 
fiov d4oiro o-rparov (ut, si opus esset, exercitum a se peteret). X. Cy. 5. 2, 21. 
8ia rrjs o-r]S x^P as d^eis VH-as, '6 tods av eld after, are Se? <pl\ia Kal iroKefjaa 
pofiifav (in order that, when we set our foot on the land, we may know, etc.). H. 4. 
8, 16. £5&>/ce xP^H- ara 'A.VTa\Ki5q, oircos &v, tt\t) pa& 4vto s vavr ikov virb 
AaKedaifioviav, o'i re 'A&Tjvcubi Kal ol arvfifxaxoi avrcov /j.SAAoj/ ttjs elpiivns 
irpo s § 4o ivt o. 

5. The final conjunctions Iva and w? (more seldom <mtg>s), 
are connected with the Ind. of the historical tenses, when it is 
to be indicated that the intended purpose is not accomplished, 
or is not to be accomplished. In this case, in the principal 
clause, the Ind. of an historical tense stands both with and 
without av. See $ 227 b , 1. (a). 

Ar. Pac. 135. ovkovv expv v °~ e TlTjydo'ou ^ev^ai irrep6v, oircas ecpalvov to?s 
&eo7s r pay ikuit epos. PL Criton. 44, d. el yap HxpeXov ohl re ehai ol ttoWo) ts 
fx4yio-Ta KaKa i^epyd^ec^ai, 'iva otoi re ^ffav aZ Kal cVyct&ct to. \x4yio~Ta, Kal 
KaXuis av e?%e. Lys. Simon. 98, 21. e ^ovKofirfV 5' dv ^.tfiwva tV avrr}V 
yvco/xrjv, ifjiol exeiVi'lv afJupor4pav Tjfitvv aKoiiaavTes rdh7j^rri pqdtoos eyvcare rot 
dtKaia. 

6. Verbs which express care, anxiety, considering, endeavor- 
ing or striving, effecting, and inciting, e. g. hn^ekeicr^ ai, cppovn- 
£,£lv> SeSteVcu cfivXaTTGLV, CTKOTretv, crKeipaaS^ai, fiovXeveoSac, opav, 7rotetv, 
irpaTTCiv (curare), fMrj^avaa^at, irapaKoXeiv, TrapayyeWeiv, TrpoenreLV, 
aheLo-Sai, a£iovv, aye (up then), and the like, are followed by the 
conjunctions oVus (oVus ixrj), sometimes also by w?, either 



526 SYNTAX. [§ 331. 

(according to No. 2) with the Subj. and Opt., or with the Fut 
Ind., when the accomplishment of the purpose is to be repre- 
sented as something definitely occurring and continuing. 

X. Cy. 1. 2, 3. ol TIepaLKol v6p.oi eir ip.eXovT ai, '6 it cos t)]v apxV H-% toiov* 
rot. £ govt a i ol iroX?Tai, oloi (= oosre) irovnpov r) alaxpov epyov ecpieo~§ai. 3. 2, 
13. cb 9 5e KaXus e£ei ra vp,erepa, $)v (piXoi yevrja^e, i/xol p.eX'fjO'ei. Dem. 01. 
1. 21, 12. CK0ire?a^e tovto, co dvdpes 'ASrivcuoi, it cos p.)) x6yovs epovffi 
p.6vov ol Trap' vp.wv irpeafieis, aXXa Kal epyov ri deiKvieiv ei^ovaiv. PI. Ion. 530, 
b. Sye &rj, 8 it cos Kal ra Tlava&ijvaia v ikt] & p.e v. The Fut. Iud. also stands 
very often after an historical tense, according to § 327, Rem. 2 ; far more rare 
in this case is the use of the Put. Opt. X. Cy. 8. 1, 43. iirep-eXelTo 5' '6ira>s 
pArre dviTOi, pAyre diroTol irore ecroivro. 

Rem. 3. Sometimes '6ir<o s &v is connected with the Fut. Ind., and is then 
to be referred to an implied condition. Her. 3, 104. ol 'IvSol rpSiroo toiovtco 
Kal (ev£ei xpcw/xei/oi eXavvovat eirl rov XP V(T0V XeXoyio'p.evcos, ok cos av Kavp.arcov 
tcov &epp.oTaTcov 16vtcov eo~ ovr a 1 iv rfj apirayfj (i. e. orav Ka.vp.aTa ^epp.6raTa 77). 

Rem. 4. "O it cos or tineas p.i\ with the Put. Ind., sometimes refers to a 
word to be supplied, viz. '6 pa, Spare, vide, videte. X. An. 1. 7, 3. '6ircos oZv 
eo~eo~Se dvSpes &£ioi Tr\s eXev&epias, (see) then that ye are men worthy of liberty. 
PL Menon, 77, a. aAA 1 '6ircos p.^j ovx 016s t eaop.ai iroXXa Toiavra Xeyeiv. A 
similar ellipsis occurs in the phrase, 5 e7 a (sc. crKoireTv) '6irco s in the Attic poets. 
Soph. Aj. 556. 5e? a* '6ivcos irarpbs 8ei'£ets ev ex&pois, oios e£ o'iov Wpdcpys. 

Rem. 5. Yerbs expressing care, anxiety, are very often followed by Uncos 
(sometimes also by cos) &v with the Opt., in order to express the idea of anx- 
iety, solicitude how something might happen [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. In this case, 
Situs and wj are clearly adverbs (how). X. Cy. 2. 1,4. jSouAevcrJ/xe&a, 
it cos av ixpio'Ta aycovi £0 ip. e&a. 



§331. II. Adjective -Clauses. 

Adjective -clauses are adjectives or participles expanded into 
a sentence, and, like adjectives, serve to define a substantive 
or substantive pronoun more definitely. They are intro- 
duced by the relative pronouns os, y, o, osns, ^rts, o ri, 
olos, etc. 

Ol iroXepnoi, aft aire<pvyov ( = ol air o<pvy6vT es iroXep.ioi). To irp6.yp.aTa, & 
'AXe£avdpos eirpa^ev (to. inrb 'AXe£dvdpov irpaxS *vt a irpa.yp.aTa or to. tov 'AXe^- 
o.vopov irpa.yp.aTa). f H iroXis, ev fj 5 Tleicrio*TpaTOs rvpavvos "r\v (= 7) vito tov 
T\eicrio~TpaTov Tvpavvev$re7o~a it6Xis). 

Remark 1. Homer often uses the pronoun '6 s in a demonstrative sense. 
II. <p, 198. aXXa Kal bs SeidoiKe Aihs p.eyaXoio KepavvSv. So also, o'i — o'i, these, 
those, the one, the other. In the Attic writers, as well as in Ionic prose, this usage 
is confined to the following instances: (a) Kal '6s. Kal f), instead of Kal 
ovtos, Kal avTt). X. Cy. 5.4, 4. k a I b s i^airaT^els SiciKei ava Kpdros. 4. 5, 



f 331.] ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 527 

52. Kal o'i ye\daavres ei-nov. Antiph. 1. 113, 16. Kal $? vireax^ro. In the ob- 
lique Cases the article (§ 247, 3), is used instead of it, e. g. Kal rov, et eum. — 
(h) bs ix ev — bs 5e in Demosthenes, yet very seldom, often in later writers, 
and earlier in Doric writers, as well as in Hippocrates ; and it occurs not only 
in the Norn., but also in all the Cases of the Sing, and Plural. Dem. Cor. 
248. iroXeis 'EWyvidas as /xev avaipav, els as Se robs <pp.yaoas Kardycav. — (c) 
b s Kal os, this and that, it not being determined who, any one that you please 
(very seldom). Her. 4, 68. ras fiaaiX-nias tarias e-Ki6pKr\ae bs Kal os, exclu- 
sively in the Nom. (in the Ace. rbv ko.1 rov, rb Kal to, see § 247, 3). — (d) in the 
phrase ^ 5' os, ?) 5' H\, said he, she. 

Rem. 2. The reciprocal relation in which the substantive stands to an ad- 
jective-clause, and an adjective-clause to a substantive, is expressed thus : a 
demonstrative adjective pronoun or the article 6 rj r6 standing in a principal 
clause, refers to a relative adjective pronoun standing in a subordinate clause, 
and the latter, on the other hand, refers back to the former, e.g. ovros 6 
avnp, bv eldes, rb p6Zov, b avSreZ So also, roiovros, olos, roaovros, 
Sa os (§ 326, Rem. 3). But when the object, to which the relative refers, is to 
be represented as a general one, then the article is omitted, and the relative 
refers immediately to the substantive, e. g. avr\p, %s koKos eariv ( = avrjp Ka- 
xSs). When the relative refers to a personal pixmoun, then the relative takes the 
place of the demonstrative, e. g. eyca, '6s — av, os, etc. When the personal pro- 
nouns have no special emphasis, they are omitted, and the relative refers to 
the person indicated by the inflection of the verb, e. g. KaXus eivoi-naas, bs ravra 
eirpa£as. 

Rem. 3. The demonstrative, to which the relative refers, is often omitted. 
and not only when the Cases are the same, but when they are unlike, if the 
pronoun has no special emphasis ; hence especially when the omitted demon- 
strative denotes some indefinite object, and is equivalent to rls, some one, or 
when the relative os, osris, may be resolved into siquis. Eur. Or. 591, 3. ydfxoi 
8' oaois yiku ev irircrovaiv Ppor&v, (rovrois SC.) (xaKapios ala>v • 61s Se /j.7) ir'nrrov- 
ffiv ev, (ovroi sc.) rd r evSov elal rd re &vpa(e dvsrvxels. Th. 2, 41. ovSev 
irposoeo/xevoi ovre 'Op.7)pov eiraiverov, ovre (rivbs SC.) osris eireai fxev rb avr'iKa 
Tepxpei ktX. 

Rem. 4. When the relative is used substantively, i. e. when it refers to a sub- 
stantive pronoun, either expressed or understood, then the adjective-clause, 
bike the adjective standing without a substantive, has the meaning of a sub- 
stantive, e. g. ^HA&o*/ o'L dpiffroL fjaav = '^Adw oi apiaroi (sc. avSpes). — 
Here belongs also, the formula eariv, o'l, £>v, oh, ovs, a. This formula has be- 
come so fixed, that commonly neither the number of the relative has any 
effect on the verb ean, nor does the tense undergo any change, when the dis- 
course relates to past or future time : thus it has assumed entirely the charac- 
ter of a substantive-pronoun (evioi), and also, since ianv may be connected 
with every Case of the relative, has a full inflexion, e. g. 

Nom. eariv o'i (=evioi) airecpvyov 

Gen. ear iv oov (= eviw) aireax^ro 

Dat. eariv oTs (= e viols) ou% ovrcos edo£ev 

Ace. eariv ovs ( = ivlov s) aire Kreivev. 

The Nom. ear iv o'i is rare, for example, X. Cy. 2. 3, 18 ; in place of it, commonly 
elalv o'L Th. 2. 26. KKeSir o/j.ttos rrjs ivapa^aXaaaiov e ar iv a eZijwae. So in the 
question, eariv o'lrives] X. C. 1.4, 2. eariv ov sr iv as av&pdbirwv reSrav/xaKas 
€Trl aocpiq : in Xenophon l\v also occurs. An. 1. 5, 7. 7 Hj> Se rovrcvv ru>v ara§- 
H&v ovs irdw f-iaKpovs tfXawev (and some of these marches which he made, mere 
very long, or he made some of these marches very long). II. 7. 5, 17. r&v iroXe/xicvv 
%v oris viroair6vSovs atrefioaav (there was some of the enemy which they restored by 
truce, or they restored some of the. enemy by truce). 



528 syntax. [$ 332. 

Eem. 5. In like manner, the following phrases, formed with effriv, are 
used wholly as adverbs with reference to all relations of time. 

effriv ore = ivtSre, est quando, i. e. interdum, e. g. effriv ore e\e£ev ; 

effriv 'I va or oirov, est ubi, i. e. aliquando ; 

effriv ov or ev&a, est ubi, somewhere, in many places ; . 

ovk eff& ottov, nunquam ; 

effriv rj or otttj, quodammodo, in many places ; 

ovk effriv o7r<as, nullo modo, ovk effriv oiras ov, certainly. 

ecrriv '6 ir ws; in the question, Is it possible, that? 



$332. Agreement of the Relative Pronoun. 

1. The relative agrees in Gender and Number with, the sub- 
stantive or substantive pronoun (in the principal clause) to 
which it refers ; the Case of the relative, however, depends on 
the construction of the subordinate clause, and hence is deter- 
mined either by the predicate, Cx oy some other word in the 
subordinate clause, or it stands as the subject in the Nom. 

'O avftp, b v e?b~es, (plAos (jlov icrriv. 'H apery, ij s irdvres ol aya&ol iirifrv/xov- 
ffiv, jxeya a.yaSr6v icrriv. Ol crrpariajrai oTs i[xaxecrd/j.e&a, av8pei6raroi i)ffav. 
®av/j.d£ofj.ev ^coKparrj, ov r\ ffocpla jxeyiffrr} 1\v. 'Et i&vu.ov/xev rys aperrjs, % 
TT7]yf) icrri irdvrccv rS>v KaKwv. 

2. The person of the verb in the adjective-clause is deter- 
mined by the substantive or substantive pronoun (expressed or 
implied) to which the relative refers. When the relative is 
connected with the first or second person, then the English uses 
the form, I am the one who, Iivho, Thou who, etc. 

'Eycii, b s ypdcpca, crv, b s ypdcpeis, 6 avftp or e/cetVoy, bs ypdcpei. Th. 2, 60. 
i/j.ol roiovrqj avSpl 6pyl£eff&e, bs ovSevbs otofxai rjffcrcov elvai. Isocr. Paneg. 
ira>s ovk tf$7) diKaiov icrriv rjfjias iiraivelv, o'lrives rr\v apxbv Karaffx^v 
77 5 vvf)&ri(Ji€v; X. Cy. 5. 2, 15. /col oiKia ye ttoXv [xeifav rj vfierepa rr\s i^s, 
o% ye oiKia. xpTjff&e yfj re /cat obpavcp. Hence after the Voc, the second per- 
son is regularly used, e. g. a'v&pooir'e; bs Tj/xas roiavra /ca/co iiroi-nffas. 

3. When the relative refers to two or more objects, it is in 
the plural, and agrees in Gender with the substantives, when 
they are of the same Gender ; often, however, it is in the neu- 
ter, when the substantives denote inanimate objects. Comp 
h 242, 1, (a), (0). 

^l. 3, 97. T) pdxr), Bidets re kcl\ virayicyai, iv oTs afxcporepois rjffffovs ?)ffav ol 
'A&r)vcuoi. X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. (Kvpos) opuv (rbv irdinrov) KeKOff/xi]/xevov Kal d<p&a\fiwv 
inroypacprj, /cat XP^paros ivrptyei Ktxl Ko/Jiais irpos&erois, a 8t] voni/xa i\v iv Mifiois. 



$ 332. J AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE TRONOUN. 529 

IsOCr. Panath. 278, b. Tavra elirov, ov irpbs ttji/ evaefteiav, ovoe irpbs rrju StKaiocrv- 
vr\v, ovoe irpbs tt)V <pp6vr)cnv airoj3Ae'i//as, & av Zir\\&es. 

4. If the substantives are of different gender, then the rela- 
tive, when persons are spoken of, agrees in gender with the 
Masc. rather than the Fern., etc. ($ 242, 1) ; but when things 
are spoken of, it is usually in the neuter. 

Od. 0, 284. SdvaTov Kal Krjpa /xeXatvav, os 5?/ crept ax^6v iart. Isocr.de 
Pac. 159, a. i'iKO,uev iKK\r)aid£ovTes irepi re iroKefxov Kal elp-f]VTjS, a /j.eylaTi]v *X fl 
ovvap.iv iv tw pia) twv avSpwrruv. Dem. Cor. 317, 273. e\iriou)v Kal £V)\ou kcu 
tijucov, h\ irdvTa irposi]v to7s Tore irpaTTOfxevois inr' i/j.ov. PI. Apol. 18, a. iv £k€lvt) 
tt} <p(t>vfj re kcu rep rpoircp iv oisTrep iTebpdij.fxriu. Sometimes, also, the rela- 
tive takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. fy oe t)]v 
elpi'ivqv Tron)cru>ix&a, /xera. irokkris aa(pa\eias ttjj/ ttoKlv olK-fjaofxev, airahXayivTes 
iroKe/xuv Kal kivovvwv Kal t apaxv $> e 'S fy v vvv irpbs aWr]\ovs KaT iaT-r^iev . 

5. The following exceptions occur to the rule stated under 
No. 1, respecting the agreement of the relative :- 

(a) Constructio Kara crvveatv ($241, 1), not often in prose 
with the names of persons, but frequently with collective nouns, 
or substantives which are to be considered as such. 

Her. 8, 128. irepiedpaue '6/j.IXos — , o* abr'iKa rb ro^ev/xa XafiovTes — ecpepov 
iirl tovs (TTpaTrjyovs. Th. 3, 4. rb to>v ' AS-qvaicov vavr ik6v, o} wp/xovv iv rp 
MaAea. PL Phaedr. 260, a. irk-q&ei, o'lirep oiKaaovai. 

Remark 1 . The following cases belong here : — 

(a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Sing., but the rela- 
tive in the PL, when it does not refer to a definite individual of the class, but 
to the whole class, and in this way takes the signification of oTos. This usage, 
however, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. /jl, 97. ktjtos, a jxvpia 
&6<tk<zi aydarovos 'AucpiTpiri]. PI. Ep. 554, a. avx.u-npos ye tls &v Kal airb iravrbs 
irepLovcriav ■n-oiovjj.evos, ErrjcravpoTroibs avrjp, ovs or] {cujusmodi homines) Kal iiratve? 
rb irXrjbos. 

(b) On the contrary, a relative in the singular refers to a PL substantive, 
when the relative has a collective signification, e. g. ostis, os dv with the Subj.. 
quisquis, quicunque. E. A, 367. vvv av rovs &X\ovs hriebofuu (perseqiiar), 
ov Ke Kixeicc. So in particular, irdvTes, ostis or ts av* (never irdvTes ogives, but 
always irdvTes oaoi or ostis), e. g. Th. 7, 29. irdvras 4|v?s, otw ivrvxoiev, Kal 
TralSas Kal yvvaxKas ktzlvovtgs. PI. Ep. 566, d. acnvd&Tai irdvTas, y av 
irepiTvyx&vxi- 

Eem. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender 
of its substantive, when the idea contained in the substantive is not to be con- 
sidered as a particular one, but as general (§ 241, 2), or when the relative is not 
so much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sentence. ' S. 
O. T. 542. ap ovxl /xupov icrTi Tovyxeip-n,o.d crov, dvev re irArj&ovs Kal cpiXcav rv- 
oavvid a &r)pav, b xpVH- a -°'' lv & aXiaKerai. 

45 



530 syntax. [$ 332 

(b) Connection of the Dual with the Plural ($ 241, 5). 
Tu^eioe, as o $tb<s inl to o-vX\afxJ3dv€LV dWyXaiv iTroirjvzv, X. 

C. 2. 3, 18. 

(c) When a predicative substantive, in the adjective -clause, 
is in the Norn. ($ 240, 2) or in the Ace. ($ 280, 4), the relative, 
instead of agreeing in Gender and Number with its substan- 
tive, by a kind of attraction often takes the Gender and Num- 
ber of the predicative substantive, which is considered the more' 
important. 

Her. 2, 7. r\ bobs irpbs r\u> rpeirerai, rb (= b) KdAeerai Tlr)Aovcriop 
arSfia. 5, 108. r^p &Kpijp, o'l KaAevprai < A 77 'i'Scs ttjs Kvirpov. 7, 54. 
Tic pa inbv £i<pos, rbp (=bp) o.kivo.k-t\v KiAeovci. PL Phaedr. 255, C. f) 
rod frevjxaros itcelvov irrjyfi, op 'i fie pop Zeus Tapv/j.-f}5ovs 4pa>p copofxacre. Phileb. 
40, a. A 6 y 1 elfftp 4p znacrrois 7]fj.S>p, as 4 Air i8 as dpofxd£ofiep. 

Eem. 3. So also, when the relative does not follow its own substantive im- 
mediately, hut a predicative substantive, it sometimes agrees by means of at- 
traction with the latter, as being the more important, instead of agreeing with 
the former. PI. L. 937, d. teal Sitci) 4p avSp&irois irus ov KaAop,b trdvra ijfie- 
pwne ra. avSp&iriva] Gorg. 460, e. ovo'tiror av efy 77 p'rjropiic}] 6.01 nop irpay- 
fia, '6 y act irep\ 8tKcuoffvi>7]S robs Aoyovs iroieTrai. 

6. When the relative would be in the Ace, and refers to a 
substantive in the Gen. or Dat, then, when the adjective-clause 
has almost entirely the force of an attributive adjective, the 
relative commonly assumes the form of its substantive, i. e. the 
relative takes the same Case as its substantive. This con- 
struction is called attraction. Attraction also takes place, when 
instead of the substantive, a substantive demonstrative (§ 331, 
Rem.), is used. The demonstrative, however, is omitted, when 
it contains no special emphasis. By means of attraction, the 
substantive is frequently transposed and stands in the adjective- 
clause. See No. 8. 

Th. 7, 21. ct,ywv airb ra>v iroAecop wp eireicre (= rSov ireiff&eiffSip) arparidv. 
X. Cy. 3. 1, 33. crvv rots £-77 <r av p o?s ols 6 irari\p KareAiirev (= rois virb rov 
irarpbs KaraAzup&elcnv) , 2. 4, 17. oirore ov irpoeArjAv^roirjs crbp rj %x ois Zvvdjxti. 
3. 1, 34. 4yco virioxvov/j.ai, %v 6 Srebs ev 5i5£, ap& wp av 4fio\ 8avelcrr)s &AAa irAeio- 
vos &|:a svepyer^creiv (instead of avrl rovrwv^d). PL Gorg. 519, a. Urap ra, ao- 
Xaia irposairoAAvwcri irpbs ols 4Kri\cravro (instead of irpbs rovrois, a). Phaed. 70, 
%. (77 tyvxh) airr]AAayfi4vri rovrcop reap Kattcop 3>v av vvp 87^ SnjAfres. Isocr. 
Paneg. 46, 29. up eAafiep diraaip fieredcaKev (instead of rovrwv a). Evag. 198. 
roiovrois e$- scrip o'lois Evayopas fiev elxer. Th. 5,87. 4k rwv irap6pra>» 
Ka\ w p Spare (instead of koX 4k tovtwp, a opare). The preposition is frequently 



$ 332.] ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE IRONOUN. 53] 

repeated, e. g. Dem. Chers. 96, 26. a<p' £>v ayetpei Kal irposaire? Kal Savei^eTai, 
airb tovtwv Sidyei (instead of airb tovtcov Sidyei a>v ayeipei or acff &>* 
ayeipei — didyei without airb tovtwu). 

Rem. 4. By attraction, the adjective-clause acquires entirely the nature of 
an adjective or participle, which combines with its substantive to form a single 
idea, and which also agrees with it in form, e. g. x°" / / >w ra?s iirio-ToXa'is 
als eypatyas (= x^P 00 TC " S vir0 v™ ypacpeicrais iTricrTo\a?s). The blending of 
the adjective-clause with its substantive by attraction, is still more clear and 
beautiful, when the adjective-clause is transposed and stands in the place of the 
substantive, e. g. %aipw als eypatyas i ir iar o\a?s. 

Rem. 5. When predicative substances or adjectives belong to an attract- 
ed relative, these also must be attracted*. Dem. Cor. 325, 298. i/xe oure Kcupbs 
irposrjydyero w v %Kpiva SiKaioov Kal o~v jx<p e po vr wv rfj irarptdi ovdev irpodov- 
vai (instead of a tKpiva dUaia Kal cv^ipovra). Ph.2. 70, 17. ols oZffiv v/xer- 
4pois (4>iA.i7T7ros), rovrovs ao~<pa\ws Ke/mjTat. 

Rem. 6. The Nom. and Dat. of the relative very seldom suffer attraction. 
Th. 7, 67. iroXKal (vriis) paarai is rb fi\dirTea&ai a.(p' $>v 7)/x?v Trapeo-Kevao~Tai 
(instead of airb rovrcov, a). X. Cy. 5. 4, 39. tfyero §e Kal tS>v kavrov rtav re 
ttkttSiv, 61s rjSero, Kal S>v (for iKeivwv, ols) T)TricrTei iroAAovs (i. e. secum duxit 
multos suorum, et Jidorum, quibus delectabutur, et eorum, quibus diffidebat). 

Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, also, sometimes suffer attraction, the relative 
adverb taking the form of the demonstrative adverb, or, when instead of the 
demonstrative adverb a substantive precedes the form which expresses the 
direction denoted by the substantive. Th. 1, 89. 5lsko/x((ovto ev&bs (sc. ivrev- 
Sev) o&ev (instead of ov, obi) vire^iSrevro iralSas. S. Ph. 481. i/xfia\ov /x oirrj 
freAets ayow, is avrXiav, is irpiapav, is ir pv\xvt)v oiroi (instead of ov, 
ubi) H]Kiara [xeWcti robs irap6vTas aXyvvttv. 

7. The relatives oto?, 6'cro?, 69x150 vv, rjXt ko ?, are attracted 
not only in the Ace. but also in the Nom., when the verb clvai 
and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause, 
e. g. oto? crv et, 0105 eKetvo? or 6 ^Go/cpcm?? eo-rt (such as ynu are, such 
as he or Socrates is). This attraction is made in the following 
manner. The demonstrative in the Gen., Dat., or Ace, to which 
the relation refers, is omitted, but the relative is put in the Case 
of the preceding substantive or (omitted) substantive demon- 
strative, and the verb eti/at of the adjective-clause is also omit- 
ted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the Case 
of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause 
has, in all respects, the force of an inflected adjective ; the 
connection of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still 
more complete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in 
the adjective-clause ; for example, in the full and natural form 
of the sentence x a P^°f JLai avSpl tolovtio, oto? o-u et, by omitting the 
demonstrative tolovtoj, to which the relative oto? refers, by at- 
tracting oto? into the Case of the preceding substantive avSpi, 



532 



SYNTAX. 



[$ 332. 



and by omitting el of the adjective-clause and attracting the 
subject av into the Case of the relative, we have the common 
form x a P%° H- at <*vSpi oto) croc, or, by transposition, x<ipi£ofiai olio vol 
dvSpi. In English the above relatives may be translated by as 
or such as. 



Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



ipco o'lov tr ov avS p6 s 
Xa.pi(o/j.ai o'lco crol avSpl 
i-naivco oi ov ere avS pa 
ipco o'lcov v /xcov avd pcov 
Xapi£o/j.ai o'tois v/xlv avdpdcriv 
iiraivco o'iovs v/j.as dvSpas 



ipco o'lov crov 
XapiC°P at o'lec crol 
iiraivco oJov ff e 
ipco o'icov v /jlcov 
XapiCofiai o'lois vfxlv 
iiraivco o'iovs v fias. 

Th. 7, 21. irpbs dvdpas ToX/Jinpovs o'iovs Kai ""A&nvalovs (instead of oToi 
'A&rjvalol eleriv). Lucian. Toxar. c. 11. ov epavXov to epyov, avSpl o'lco a o\ iroX- 
€/j.io-rfj /j.ovo/j.axvo'ai. PI. Soph. 237, C. o'ltp ye ifjiol iravTairaeriv diropov 
(sc. iari, instead of rep toiovtco, oT6s ye iyco eifii, &irop6v icrTiv). Her. 1, 160. 
iirl /Aicr&Lp Hercpdr) (mercede, quantulacunque est). PI. Pp. 335, b. eerTiv iipa Siicaiov 
avdpbs fiXdirTeiv Kai out iv ovv av&pcoircov (instead of av&pcoircov Kai ostisovv 
icTTiv). X. An. 6. 5, 8. eaTijerav airexovTes oerov ire VTeKalS eK a aradlov s 
(instead of toctovto, oerov elerl ir. ffTadioi). 

Pem. 8. Attraction also takes place, when oTos or oTos re, is used in- 
stead of costs, and is constructed with the Inf., signifying, I am of such a na- 
ture, character, that (is sum qui with the Subj.), hence I can, am accustomed, am 
ready (§ 341, Rem. 2). Dem. 01. 1. 23, 19. (irepl avTbv $iXnriros ix") roiov- 
tovs av&pcoirovs o'iovs fj.e&vcr&e vt as bpxslcr&ai. Luc. Hermot. c. 76. 
~2,Tto'iKcp t oiovt cp o'lco fjLr\T€ Au7r€?(r^oi [j.7]t dpyl£ecr&ai. The demon- 
strative is commonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. fx6vnv Tr\v tcov av&pcoircov 
(yXcoTTav) iiroinerav (ol &eol) o'lav apSpovv Te ttjv epeovftv, k. t. X. 

Pem. 9. When the adjective-clause has the signification of a substantive 
(§ 331, Rem. 4), the article is sometimes placed before the attracted oTos, 
7)Xikos, and in tiiis way, the adjective substantive-clause acquires entirely 
the force of fcii inflected substantive, e. g. 



ol oToi v/j.e?s avdpes 
tcov o'lcov v/xcov avSpcov 
to7s o'lois ifMV duSpderiv 
tovs o'iovs v(j.as avdpas. 



Nom. 6 otos erv avr]p 

Gen. tov o'lov crov avdpos 

Dat. Tcp o'lep crol avb*pi 

Ace. tov oTov ere dvSpa 

X. Cy. 6. 2,2. ol oToi irep v/j.e?s dvSpes iroXXaKis kou to. fiovXevo/xeva Kara- 
fxav^rdvoveriv (men like you). H. 2. 3, 25. yv6vTes to7s o'lois f]fA?v re Kai 
v /J.7-V x ^ 671 "^ 27 TToXneiav elvai Sn/J-oKpaTiav (such men as we and you). Ar. 
Eccl. 465. ineivo Seivbv Toleriv 7\XiK0ier i vcpv (instead of tvXlkovtois, tjXikoi 
vcf ierfxev). 

Rem. 10. A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex- 
pression as &av[j.acrTbv '6 crov irpobxMpncre = &av/j.acrT6v icrTiv ocrov irpovxco- 
pvcre (mirum quantum processit, instead of mirum est, quantum processerit). 
Even in PI. Pp. 351, d. /xera ISpcoTos 3- avjxacrT ov '6aov (instead of fravfxaaTov 
i&Tiv /xedr' '6aov). Hipp. M. 282, c. xP^l xaTa eAaj3e Srav fiacrTa '6cra (instead 
of ^avjxacTTov icTTiv, oaa). Her. 4, 194. ol 8e (sc. Tri&rjKoi) crept &cp&o v oi Hcroi 
iv to7s ovpetri ylvovrai. Also in the adverbs ^rav jxacTT cos cos, &av fiacrlcos 
co s, etc., e. g. &avp.acricos co s &&Xios yeyove (instead of Sfavp.dcri6v icrTiv, cos a&Xios 
yeyove). PL Phaed. 66, a. iirepcpv cos cos aXrj&rj Xeyeis. Symp. 173, C. 
vir e pepveo s cos x ai P w > instead of inrepcpves icrTiv, cos x&ip&' 



$ 332.] INVERTED ATTRACTION OF THE RELATIVE. 533 

Rem. 11. Sometimes an attraction takes place in the adjective-clause di- 
rectly the opposite of that mentioned under Xo. 6, the substantive being 
attracted into the Case of the relative which refers to it. instead of the 
relative into the Case of the substantive. This is called inverted attrac- 
tion (Attractio inversa). This attraction occurs most frequently, when the 
substantive of the principal clause attracted by. the relative, would stand 
in the Nom. or Ace. S. Tr. 283. rastf (instead of cu'5') asnep elsopas, i\ 
dxfiiwv afyXov evpovcrai filov, tjkovctl irpbs cr4. Lysias pro bon. Arist. 649. r^t 
ovcriav (instead of r\ ovaia) %v KaTeXnre tw vie?, ov -KXelmvos a^ia icrriv. X. EL 
1.4, 2. eXeyov, on AaKeSai/xovioi Travrav £>v SeovTai ireirpayoTes elev rcapa /8a- 
aiXews. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun is found in the principal 
clause, to supply the Case of the substantive which is attracted into the Case 
and into the clause of the relative. PI. Men. 96, c. w/xoXoynKa/xev, irpa.yij.a- 
r os ov /X7JT6 bibdo-KaXoi, fxr\re fxa^vjal thv, tovt o SibaKTbv fxr] elvai. 

Rem. 12. This inverted attraction is very common with ovSzls Sstls 
ov after an omitted £<rriv. PI. Prot. 317, c. ovbsvbs otov ov iravTwv av 
vjx&v ko& rjXinlav TraTrjp eirjv (there is no one of you all whose father I might not be, 
considering my age). Phaed. 117, d. nXaicov ical ayavaKrccv ovbeva ovriva ov 
KctTCKXavcre twv irapovrwv. Dem. Cor. 295, 200. irepl £>v ovbiva k'ivSvvov 
Oct iv oi>x inrefieiuav ol irpoyovoi. In this way the phrase ovScl s o st is ov 
appears as a pronominal substantive (nemo non), which can be declined through 
all the Cases, e. g. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



ovbels bsris ovk av ravra iroirjo-eiev 

ovb evbs orov ov KareyeXacrev 

ovb e vl or a> ovk aireKpivaro 

ovbeva ovriva ov KareKXavcrev. 



Rem. 13. The inverted attraction is also found sometimes with adverbs of 
place, the demonstrative adverb taking the form of the relative. S. 0. C. 
1227. firivai Kel&ev b&ev irep rjKei (instead of /ce?cre, odev). PI. Crit. 45, b. 
iroXXaxov yap Kal dXXocre oiroi av acpiKrj, ayair-naovo-i ae (instead of aXXaxov 
oiroi). 

8. The adjective-clause very frequently stands before the 
principal clause ; then, when the relative refers to a substan- 
tive, the substantive is transferred from the principal to the 
adjective -clause (though it is not generally placed immediately 
after the relative), and is governed by the verb in the adjective- 
clause. This change of the substantive into the adjective- 
clause is called transposition. When the attributive relation 
expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be made emphatic, a 
demonstrative, referring back to the substantive which is joined 
with the relative, is supplied in the principal clause ; this 
demonstrative, however, is often used for perspicuity also. 
The substantive can also be transposed, when the demonstra- 
tive stands before the adjective-clause. 

*Oj ri/xas iroXXa. ayada. iiroirjcrev, ovros airebavev, or b s rifxas iroXXa. ayaSfh 
iiroi7)crev, aire&avev, or ovros air&avev, bs 7]/j.us ktX., or airedavev, hs ktX.— 
"O v f ISes avbpa, ovr 6 s icrriv, or ovros icrriv, & v e?5es a v 5 p a. PI. Lys. 
222, d. iraXiv apa, ovs rb irpurov x6yovs airsf5aX6p.z&a irepl cpiXias, els rov- 

45* 



534 syntax. [$ 333, 

rovs elsireTrrd>Ka/J.ev. Eur. Or. 63, sq. H\v yap tear* oIkovs eXicp', or e* Tpoiar 
tirXei, irdp&ev ov . . ravrrj yeyrj&e. 

Rem. 14. When attributive adjectives belong to the substantive, they are 
frequently separated from their substantive in the principal clause, and intro- 
duced into the adjective-clause, when they serve at the same time to explain 
more fully the adjective-clause or are to be made emphatic. Or the substantive 
together with the attributives is introduced into the adjective-clause. Some- 
times also the attributive adjective remains, while the substantive with which 
it agrees, is transferred to the adjective-clause ; then the attributive is emphat- 
ic. Eur. Or. 842. irdrvC 'HXeKrpa, x6yovs &kov<tov, ovs croi Svsrvx^ls tjkco 
<p4pcav (hear the words which I bring to you as sad, i. e. the sad words, etc.). Th. 6, 
30. rois oirXois Kal oo"t) &XXr] irapao~Kevr) ^vveiirero, irpSrepov elprjro ktX. 
(instead of Kal rij &XXr} irapaaKevrj, oar)). Eur. H. E. 1164. riKco £vv aXXois, 
o'l nap' 'Aadnrov pods jxivovoiv evoirXot yrjs 'A&rjvaiav Kopoi. Ar. Ran. 889. 
erepoi yap elcriv, oTaiv evxo{xai &eo?s; 

Rem. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the relative 
clause refers, is sometimes attracted into the subordinate clause, and depends 
upon that clause for its government. In this case also, the transposed apposi- 
tive serves to explain more fully the adjective-clause. Od. a, 69. KvkXuitos 
KexoAcarai, tv dcpbaX/xov aXdwaev dvri&eov UoXvcprf /ac v (whom Ulysses 
blinded, although he was the god-like Polyphemus). PI. Hipp. Maj. 281, c. ri irore 
to alriov, on 01 iraXaiol in el vol, wv ovouara /xeyaXa Xeyerai eirl cro<pta, 
TlirraKOv Kal Biavr s, (paivovrai direxofMevoi rcov ttoXitikwv irpd^ewv ; 

9. When the adjective -clause has another clause subordinate 
to itself (or a participle used instead of such clause), the two 
are commonly united, the relative, instead of taking the con- 
struction of its own adjective-clause, taking that of the subor- 
dinate clause, i. e. the relative has the construction which the 
omitted demonstrative of the subordinate clause would have 
had ; in such cases there is no relative connected with the ad- 
jective-clause. 

Isocr. de Pace p. 16, 168. dv&pd>irovs atpovp-e^a rovs pXv diroXioas, rovs 8' avro- 
p.6Xovs, oTs oirSrav ris irXelova (xicrfrbv Sidcp, (xer eKeivoov i<p' r]/u.as 
aKoXov^Tjcovaiv (instead of o'l, 6ir6rav ris avrols 8i5<£, dKoXov&7}orovo~iv). 
PI. Pp. 466, a. on rovs (pvXaicas ovk ev^aip.ovas iroio?fxev, oTs i£bv irdvra 
%X* lv ra tcDj/ ttoXitSjv, ovSev exoiev] (instead of o'l, e£bv avrols — , ovdev 
exoiev). Dem. Phil. 3, 128, 68. "iroXXa av elireiv exoiev^OXi/v^ioi vvv, & r6r el 
7r poeiS our o, ovk av diroiXovro (instead of o'l, el ravra r6re Trpoeid., ovk av car.). 



§ 333. Modes in Adjective- Clauses. 

Is The Indicative is used, when the attributive relation ex- 
pressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as actual 
or real, e. g. rj 7roAis, rj KTi^erai, rj eKTicrSr], rj KTioSrjcrercu. The Fut. 
Ind. is very frequently used (even after an historical tense, 



$ 333.] MODES IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 535 

§ 327, Rem. 2), to denote what should be done or the purpose 
(§ 255, 3), e. g. CTTpaTYjyovs alpovvrai, dl 7o> Qikumrip 7ro\€pr}crov- 
<tiv (they choose generals who should carry on war, or to carry on 
war). Also after negatives, the Greek employs the Ind., where 
the Latin has the Subj., ■e, g. irap Ipol ovStls, osns prj Ikolvos 
icrnv tcra ttouliv i/xoi {nemo, qui non p>ossit). 

2. The Ind. is also used, as in Latin, in such adjective- 
clauses, as are introduced by the indefinite or generalizing rela- 
tives, e. g. osns, quisquis, 6Wis 8rj, quicunqice, 6'otis Sy irore, ocros 
Srj, ocros ovv, qua?ttuscunque, ottoctos, O7rocrosovv 3 etc. 

Her. 6, 12. SovKrfirjv v-Keixelvai, fjns ear at, qualiscunque erit. X. An. 6. 5, 
6. e&airrov, Sirocrovs in e\d fifi av-ev f] err par id. Here t)jte idea of indefinite- 
ness is denoted by the relative ; but it is otherwise, when this idea is contained 
in the predicate, see No. 3, and 4. 

Remark 1. The Put. Ind. with k4 (only Epic) is used, when it is to be 
■denoted, that something will take place in the future .under seme condition 
1§ 260, 2. (1)]. R. i, 155. 4v §' avhpes vatovo'i TrGhvpprjves, ivo7\.vfSovrai o'l k4 e 
Zoorlvycri &ebv &s r i/j-rja ov <r iv (icho will honor him, if he shall come to 
them). 

3. The relative with av, e. g. os av, rj av, o av, osns av, etc., is 
followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is 
a principal tense (Pres., Perf, or Fut), if the attributive rela- 
tion expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as 
one merely conceived or assumed, Hence it is also used in in- 
definite specifications of quality or size, and also to denote 
indefinite frequency (as often as, $ 227 b , 2). The adjective- 
clause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, i. e. 
as one ■which expresses the condition under which the action 
of the principal clause will take place ; and the relative with 
av can be resolved into the conjunction idv with rh or any other 
pronoun followed by the Subj. 

X. Cy. 3. 1, 20. oil s av (= idv rivas) fieXriovs rives eavrobv 7]yf]0~a)vrai, rovrois 
vroWdnis Kal S.vev avd.yict^s i&4\ovo~i Tret&ecr&ai. 1.1,2. &v&p<inroi in ovSevas fxaWov 
<ruvi<Travyni, % inl rovrovs, ot) s a v (= idv rivas) ato~& covr ai £pxetz/ avrcav iirix~ 
sipovvras. 7. 5, 85. o v s av 6 poo ra KaXa Kal raya&a. imrrj^evovras, rovrovs rifirj- 
<r<a. 8. 8, 5. 6fio7oi rives yap av ol irpocrrdrai & cr i, roiovroi Kal ol vn avrovs 
o>s inl rb iroXv yiyvovrai. Her. 6, 139. f) TlvSir) o-<peas {KeAevei) 'A&Tjvaloicri 5'iKas 
did6vai ravras, ras (=a.s) av avrol 'A&r]va?oi Siicao-axri (QUASCCNQUE — 
constituent). II. )8, 391. bv 5 4 it iywv curdvevbe fj.dxn^ iSeXovra voT\cna 
fjiifj.vd(eiv irapa. VT\val Kopwvlcriv, oH ol eireira &pKiov iacrelrai <pvy4eiv Kvvas ifi 
olvpovs (as often as I perceive or shall perceive). 



536 syntax. [§ 333. 

Rem. 2. The Subj. is also used, when the adjective-clause forms a member 
of a comparison, viz. when the attributive idea expressed by the adjective-clause 
is the condition or assumption, under which the object to which the adjective- 
clause refers, belongs to the comparison. In this case, the principal clause 
may have either a principal or historical tense. II. v, 179. 6 8' avr tirecreu, 
(jLeAni Sis, '{] t' opeos Kopvcpfj . . ^aA«&5 rafj.uofj.4ur] repeua x^ ^ <pvAAa it eXacr o~n. 
p, 110. &sre A?s i)vy4u€ios, ov pa icvues re Kal 'auSpzs ano ara^fj.o?o Sicovrai. 

Rem. 3. The modal adverb a v is so closely united with the relative, as to 
form with it one word, as in orav, iirdu, etc., § 260, 2. (3) (d), and hence should 
be separated from the relative only by smaller words, such as 8e. This 'du is 
very frequently omitted in the Homeric language, often also in the Tragedians, 
and sometimes in Herodotus, seldom in the Attic prose-writers. 

4. The relative (icithout av) is connected with the Opt., in 
the first place, with the same signification as when followed 
by the av and the Subj. (No. 3), but referring to an historical 
tense in the principal clause. Hence it is used in general and 
indefinite statements ; also in expressing indefinite frequency 
(h 227 b , 2), — in which case the verb of the principal clause is 
usually in the Imp/, or in the Iterative Aor. Here, also, the 
adjective -clause may be resolved by el with the Opt. 

Th. 7, 29. irduras e£r)s '6ra> (= et rivi) iurvx oiev i Kal iraiSas nal yvua?Kas 
Krduovres. II. £, 188. ovriva (== ef riua) fi\v fSaanArja Kal e£oxov &uSpa Kix* ' l7 l 
rbu 8' ayauois iireeo~(riu ep'nrvo' acr K€ irapaffrds. 198. ov 8' av b~i)fxov r aub~pa 
?do i, fio6wurd r i<peipoi, rbv (TKrjTrrpw eAacao" k e. Th. 2, 67. irduras yap 
8rj Kar dpxds rod ivoX£fJ.ov ol AaKedaifj-ovioi, 'baovs (= elf rivas) \df3oiev iv 
rf} &a\do-o-r} t ws TroAefxiovs 8 lecp&cipov. X. Cy. 3. 3, 67. I K e T e v o v a t (Hist. 
Pres.), or a lvrvyx^ v0l ^ v -> W>\ <pevyeiu. 

5. In the second place, the Opt. (without av) is used without 
reference to the tense of the principal clause, when the attrib- 
utive relation expressed by the adjective-clause is to be repre- 
sented as a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption. Then, 
the adjective-clause is to be considered as an uncertain, doubt- 
fid condition [$ 259, 3, (a)]. 

X. Cy. 1. 6, 19. rod [xev avrbu Aeyeiu, a fir) cra<pS>s eld sir), (peldecr&ai Set (he 
must beware of saying anything, which he does not know, or if he does not know it). 
Tor examples of Optatives used by means of an attraction of the mode, see 
§ 327b, 1. Ar. Vesp. 1431. epSot ris, %v eKacrros elSety t4xw\v (any one can 
practise the art with which he is acquainted (= if he is acquainted with it). 

6. The Opt. with av is used, when the attributive relation ex- 
pressed by the adjective -clause is to be represented as a condi- 
tional supposition, conjecture, assumption, or undetermined possi- 
bility U 260. 2, (4) (a)]. 



$ 334.] ADJECTIVE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 537 

X. C. 1. 2, 6. ~XcaKpam]s tovs Ka/j.f3duouTas rrjs 6p.iX.ias pucr&bv avSpairooio-Tas eavruf 
a7re/caAet. Sia rb avar/Kcuov avTois eluai diaAeyecr&ai, Trap" §>v av \dj3oieu rbu 
p.i<r&6u (from whom they might or could receive a reward). PI. Phaed. 89, d. ovx. 
iariv '6 ri &v tis p.el£ov tovtov kolkov ird&oi [there is no evil which any one could 
experience greater than this). 

7. The Ind. of the historical tenses is used with jiv, when it 
is to be indicated that the attributive idea denoted by the ad- 
jective-clause could exist only under a certain condition, but 
did not exist, because the condition was not fulfilled [§ 260. 2, 
(2), (a)]. 

Od. e, 39, sq. 7r<$AA' o<t au ovdeirore Tpolrjs i^7]paT 'OSvtrcreus, e'tirep airrj- 
p.uu ^A&e, \ax&>v airb Xtj'ioos alcrau. Eur. Med. 1339. ovk ccttiu 77 Tts tout' 
av 'EKAyuh yvurj erX-n (quae sustinuisset hoc). PI. Apol. 38, d. ols av (\6yois) 
€7T€icra, el (apt) u oeiu d-rrauTa Troielu /cat Xeyeiu. On the Ind. of the historical 
tenses in intermediate clauses of a conditional proposition, see § 327b, 1. (a). 

Rem. 2. On the Inf. in adjective-clauses, in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 6. 



$ 334. Connection of several Adjective- Clauses. — Interchange of 
the Subordinate Clause ivith the Adjective- Clause. — Relative 
instead of the Demonstrative. 

1. When two or more adjective-clauses follow each othei-, which either have 
the same verb in common, or different verbs with the same government, the 
relative is commonly used but once, and thus the two adjective-clauses are 
united in one, e. g. dwf]p, bs TroXXd p.eu dyahd robs (piXovs, iroXXa Se /coko tovs 
TroAe/Aiovs eirpa^eu — b.vr\p, bs Trap' rjpuu l]u /cat (bs) inrb irdurcov e(piXe?TO — dwhp, 
bu £&avp.d(o/j.su na\ (bv) irdvres icplXow. But when the adjective-clauses have 
different verbs governing different cases, generally, the Greek either omits the 
relative in the second adjective-clause, or introduces, in the place of the rela- 
tive, a demonstrative pronoun (mostly ovtos), or a personal pronoun: in this 
way the relative clause is changed into a demonstrative one, and acquires the 
nature of a principal clause, (a) Od. t, 110. djx-KeXoi, a'/re <pepovo-iu oluou ipio-- 
rd<pv\ov Kai (sc. as) crcpiu (KvKXc&ireacri) Aibs oj-ifipos de£et. Isocr. Panath. ibv 
x6you, bu oXiycp fj.hu irpSrepou p.e& T]douTjs StrjAidw, /xixpco 8' vcrTepou fj/xeAAe p.e 
AvTT-fjo-eiu (and which was to grieve me). Lys. Dardan. 166. oTs v/xe7s xap'eurd-e 
nal (sc.ovs) Trpo&vfAorepovs iroi-qaeTe. Dem. Cor. 252, 82. avroou, ovs 7} [xev 
irSxis ws ix^povs . . aTTTjXao-e, vol 8e r)crau (piXoi (sc. o'i). X. An. 3. 2, 5. 'Apialos 
o4,bu Tret's rj^eXop.€u /3acnAecc Ka&iffTauai /cot (sc. a>) idc*>Ka l ueu ku\ (sc. Trap' o v) 
ixd@0fxeu iricrrd . . , rip.a* tovs Kvpov cp'iXovs KaKcos iroieiu 7re iparai. — (b) PI. Pp. 505, 
e. b St; Stw/cet fj.hu dirao-a ^vxv Kal tovtov tueKa irduTa rrpdrret. Dem. Phil. 3 
123, 47. Aaveh'aip.Suiot, 0* SraXaTT-qs p.\u i)PX ov K0 ^ TVS awd.aris, fSao~iXea Se crv/j.p.a- 
Xou elxou, vcpiaraTo 8' ovSeu a v t o vj (instead of ovs ovohu ixpicrraTo, quibus nihil non 
cessit). X. Cy. 3. 1, 38. ttov ti<e?u6s iariu & dur)p, bs o~vve&7)pa rjfjuu ical av fxoi 
uaAa iS6K(:is davy.d(ei.u ai>T6u. 

2. The adjective-clause frequently takes the place of other subordinate 
clauses, e. g. Qavp-ao-rbu iroie7s, bs tj/juu piku ovBtu SiScvs (ix that or BECAUSE 
you give us nothing), X. C. 2. 7, 13. The adjective-clause is very frequently used 



538 syntax, [$$ 335, 335, 

instead of a hypothetical adverbial clause (comp. § 333, 3) ; so also instead of 
an adverbial clause introduced by Sue; the last case occurs : — 

(a) after ovtws or wSe. Dem. Chers. 100, 44. ov yhp ovtoo y cv-fj^s 4<rrlu 
vfxwu ovdtis, 'bs viroXafx^duei (neither is there any one of you so simple, as to 
suppose). X. Cy. 6. 1, 14. ris ovtous l<rxvpo$, bs Xi/aco koI piyet, hvvaiT "du 
[xaxo^vos o~Tpa,Teve(r&ai J 

(b) after roiovro s, t7]\ikovtos, t ocr ovtos. In most instances, these 
demonstratives are followed by the corresponding relatives olo s, '6aros, 
which, like the adverbial clause introduced by &st<=, usually have an Inf, 
depending upon them. X. An. 4. 8, 12. aAAa jxoi doice? r ovovtov x w p' 1 ' 
ov Karaax^ (sc. 7]fj.as), ocrov e|w tovs icrxdrous A^xoi/y yeveo'&ai rap 
iro\sp.ic0v Keparav (it seems to me best that we should occupy so much ground, 
as that, etc.). PL Apol. iyta rvyxdvui &v t o iovt os, olos virb rod &eov 
rp 7roAet 8 e 8 6 cr & a i. 

3. The relative pronoun serves not only to connect subordinate clauses with 
the principal one, but it is also used to connect clauses generally, inasmuch as 
it takes the place of a demonstrative which would refer to a word of the pre- 
ceding clause. This mode of connecting sentences belongs to the Latin as 
well as to the Greek, though it occurs very rarely in the latter compared with 
the former. Thus in Greek, e. g. it is altogether common for clauses to begin 
with Tavra 8e ewnWes, ravra 5e aKOvaavrts, fxerd 8e ravra, 4k tovtov 8e, us 5h 
i-owTa iyevero, etc, where the Latin generally uses the relative qui. 



§ 335. III. Adverbial Clauses. 

Adverbial clauses are adverbs, or participles used adverbially 
($ 326, 3), expanded into a sentence, and, like adverbs, express 
an adverbial object, i. e. an object which does not complete the 
idea of the predicate, but merely defines it, e. g. ore to eap rjX&e, 
(to re) ra av$yj SdWti. 'Os eAe£as, (ovtois) errpa^as. 



§ 336. A. Adverbial Clauses of Place. 

Adverbial clauses denoting place, are introduced by the 
relative adverbs of place, ov, rj, oirrj, ottov, 'dv$a (ubi) ; o#ev, hS-ev 
(unde) ; ol, 6W, rj, oirrj (quo), and, like adverbs of place, express 
the three local relations, ivhere, whence, and whither. The use 
of the Modes in these clauses, is in all respects like that in 
adjective-clauses ($ 333). 

Her. 3, 39. '6kov l&vcreie (TTpaTeveafrai, irdvra ol e'x^pee evrvx^cos (indefi- 
nite frequency). Th. 2,11. eireoSre (iiceiat), '6iroi dv tis rjyTJTai. X. An. 
4. 2, 24. /xax^evoi 8e ol iro\4p.ioi /ecu, '6ir-q sir) vtgvov x (a p' l0V '> "TpoKardKafifiavoy 
res eKcaAvov rds ■Kapob'ovs (Opt. on account of 4k6\vov). Cy. 3. 3, 5. ib-npa 
UirovTTsp iirirvyxduoiev &r)p(ois (ivherever)* PI. Apol. 28, d. oC dv tis 
kanrbv tr£t7, ivravfra 8e? piivovra kiv dvvevzip. 



$337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 539 



§ 337. B. Adverbial Clauses of Time. 

1. Adverbial clauses denoting time, are introduced by the 
conjunctions ore, birore, ws, fprina. (when), iv to, etos (while) ; eret, 
€7reiS?7 (postquam), eTreiSr) rayio-ra (-rrpoyrov), or cos Ta^iora (as soon 
as), i£ ov, i£ otov, also i£ &v, ex quo, and d<£' ov (since) ; Trpiv, irplv 
f} (priusquani) , coos, ecu? ov, els o, e'sre, fte^pt or a^t o£, /xe^pt otov, 
jj<£xP l (titt, until). 

2. On the use of the modes, the following points are to be 
observed : — 

3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented 
as a fact; hence in speaking of actual events cr facts. 

Her. 7, 7. us av tyvdxr&'q p,4p%r\s o-TpaTevea&cu iirl tt\v 'EAAaSa, ivbavra 
OTpaTi)'C7]v TroieeraL [when Xerxes was persuaded, etc.). 1, 11. us r}ix4p-n rdxto'Ta 
4yey6vee (quum primum, as soon as). X. H. 1. 1, 3. 4p.dxovro, jx4xpis ol 
*Afrr}i/cuoi av€Tr\ev<rav. An. 1. 3, 11. tad '4 us [i4vofj<.ev avrov, (TKerrreov [jlqi 
8ok4i elvat, Hirus us a<rcpa\4crTaTa (xevovixsv. 

4. The conjunction eoos (till), is followed by the Ind. of the 
historical tenses, when an object is to be represented as unat- 
tained or not to be realized. Comp. $ 327 b , 1, (a). 

PI. Gorg. 506, b. 7)84us hv KaAAt/cAe? tqvtu en 8 ieAey6 /xtj v, etas aincp 
a ir 4 8 a k a (usque dum reddidissem). 

5. The Subj. is used, when the statement is to be indicated 
as a conception or representation, and must be referred to the 
predicate of the principal clause, the verb of which is in one 
of the principal tenses. In the Common Language, the con- 
junctions take the modal adverb av, e. g. otov, b-TTorav, tjvlk av, 
hrav (hrqv), iireiSdv, iv to av, Trpiv av, eoos av, p-tXP 1 Q- v > *$T om [$ 2 GO, 
2, (3), (d)]. 

6. Accordingly the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions 
from orav to irplv av, when the statement of time is also to 
be represented, at the same time, as the condition under which 
the predicate of the principal clause will take place. But witli 
the conjunctions which signify until, the Subj. expresses a limit 
expected and aimed at. The Subj. is also very frequently used, 
to denote indefinite frequency ($ 333, 3). 

PL Prot. 335, b. 4 ire i8av <ru fiovhy 8iak4yea^ai, us tyu 8vvap.ai eirea&at 
r6re coi 8 ia\4£o/j.ai (whenever you wish to, if at any time you ivish to discourse 



540 syntax. [$ 337. 

etc.). Til. 1,21. ol dv&pooiroi, ev <£ av iroKe p.u>a i, rbv irap6vra iroXe/xov del 
(xeyiffrov Kpivovcriv. X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. tcoKlv ovirca ecbpaKas dvrirarroy.evr]V 
irpbs ttoXiu erepav, tjtis, eireiSdv Tjrrri&fj, TrapaxpV/J-a ravrrj dvrl rod [id- 
X*o-&ai irefeeoSaL i&eAei. 3. 3, 26. birorau (ol fidpfiapoi BaaiKeis) err par o 
7re5 eixavrai, rd<ppov ir ep iBaWovr ai evirerws 5id r\]v itoXvxsip'iav (as often 
as). Dem. Ph. 3. 128, 69. eeos dv crd^yrai rb crKacpos, r6re xph Ka ^ tclvttjp 
Kal KvBepvr\r7]v Trpo^v/j.ovs elvai (dum servari possit). 

Remark 1. The Subj. is also used in the Epic language, when the adver- 
bial clause forms a member of a comparison, since a case is then supposed 
(comp. § 333, Rem. 2). II. |, 16. us S J '6re it op (pipy ireXayos , . ws 6 yepoov 
&pixcuve. o, 624. ev 5' eirea, as ore kujjlo. &orj ev vn'l' it 4 a y a i v. 

Rem. 2. On the Subj. after an historical tense instead of the Opt., and on 
orav, e-rrdv, irplv dv, etc. with the Opt. in the oratio obliqua, see § 345, 
Rem. 4. 

Rem. 3. The mode of connection by ore, 6ir6re, -n-ptv, etc. without dv with 
the Subj., occurs only in the Epic language frequently, sometimes also in 
Ionic prose, and not seldom in the Attic writers with /j.4xP l an d irpiv. 

7. The Opt. is used with conjunctions of time, without dv, just 
as the Subj. is, but referring to an historical tense of the princi- 
pal clause. When the Opt. is used to denote indefinite fre- 
quency ($ 327 b , 2), an Impf. or an Iterative Aor. usually stands 
in the principal clause, and the conjunctions ore, eVei, etc. (ex- 
cept those which signify before and until), are translated by as 
often as. 

II. k, 14. avrap or is vi]ds re tdoi Kal \abv 'Axcuav, iroWas e'/c Ke<pa\7]S irpo 
freAv/jLVOvs e\Kero x a ' lTas ( as often as). Her. 6, 61. okoos ( = ore) eve'iKeie 
7) rpocpbs (rb naidlov), irpSs re rayaXjxa "icrra Kal eKlccer o r)\v bebv dira\- 
Aa£cu T7js dvsp.op(plr)S rb TraiUov (as often as). X. An. 6. 1, 7. 6 it or e ol"E\Xrjves 
ro?s TToXe/xioLS iirloiev, padias iir e cpevyov (as often as the Greeks made an at- 
tack, whenever they made an attack). Od. e, 385. 3> pcre 5' en-l Kpanrvbv Bopeyv, irpb Se 
Kv/xar ea£ev, eas oye 3>ai^/cecrcri epi\7iper/j.oicri jxiyeij] (but opvvcri Bope-qv Kal 
dyvvcri Kv/xara, eas av . . fJ-iyji)' PI. Phaed. 59, d. irepiepi.evofj.ev e/caoTore, e»s 
avoix&eLy rb Secrfxar-fipiov. 

Rem. 4. On dv in the principal clause, see § 260, 2. (2), (B). 

8. Moreover, the Opt. without av is used with conjunctions 
of time, without reference to the time of the principal clause, 
when the statement of time is to be represented as an uncer- 
tain and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture, or 
assumption; also, generally, when the subordinate clause forms 
a part of a principal clause expressing a wish. 

PI. Amat. 133, a. 6 it ore rb <pi\o<ro<pe?v alcrxpbv T)yr\<r alfxriv elvai, oi>c? av 
dv&pairov von'iaaiyu ip.avrbv eivai (when I shall assume, if I shall ever assume). X. 
Cy. 3. 1, 16. iras 'dv r6re irXeicrrov dfyoi yiyvoivr ol dv&pairoi, 6ir6re dDiKOvv- 



4 337.J ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF TIME. 541 

res aXia-Koivro (ichen they are, if they are, convicted of acting unjustly) ; — II. 
<r, 465. ot yap fj.iv Stavdroio Bvstjx^os wSe SwaifJ.rjv v6v<piv airoKptyai, ore jj.iv 
fwpos alvbs Ik a. vol. 

9. The conjunction trplv (Trporepov rj), besides the construc- 
tions already mentioned, is also followed by the Inf. The dif 
ferent constructions of irplv are to be distinguished as follows : 

(a) When a past event, one that has actually occurred, is spoken of, the Ind, 
of an historical tense is used (No. 3). The principal clause is negative; yet it 
is sometimes also affirmative, when -rrplv signifies until ; thus often in the Tra- 
gedians and Thucydides (in the latter Trplv 877 and -rrplv ye S77). 

(b) When a future, merely conceived action is spoken of, which can be con- 
sidered as the condition of the principal clause, the Subj. is used, when the sub- 
ordinate clause refers to a Pres. Perf. or Put. in the principal clause ; but the 
Opt., when the subordinate clause refers to an historical tense in the principal 
clause (No. 5 and 7) ; yet only when the principal clause is negative, (fc contains 
a question implying a negative. 

(c) But when vile action is to be represented only as a conception, a conceived 
limit, not as an independent occurrence, but only as a subordinate matter, and a 
casual or incidental designation of time, the Inf. is used (=irp6 with the Gen.). 
Hence the Inf. can stand both for the Ind. of an historical tense, and for the 
Subj. or Opt., both after an affirmative and a negative principal clause, when it 
does not serve to define more fully the subordinate clause. 

Isocr. de Big. 348, b. ov -rrporepov eiravaavTO, irplv t6v re irarepa e'/c tol 
arpaToiredov /xer eire fxipavr 0, Kal rcov (plXcov avrov rovs /xev aireKreivav, 
rovs 8' e/c tvjs -rrSXeus e'£e /3aXov. X. An. 6. 1, 27. ov irpoa&ev iiravaavTo 
iroXe/xovvTes, ir plv eir ol-ncr av -rracrav T V iroXiv bfioXoyeiv AaKeSai/xovlovs 
Kal avTwv i)yefxovas elvai. — Eur. Med. 279. ovk direiLii irpbs SSpovs -rraXiv, 
ir plv &v <re yalas repfx6vcov e\<a /3a Aw (= eav fxi) irporepov ere eK/3aAa>). 
X. An. 5. 7, 12. /xri aireXfr-nT e, -rrplv av aKovo"nr e. II. (p, 580. 'Ay-fjvojp 
ovk e&eXev (pevyeiv, Trplv tt e 1 p-f] ffair 'AxiXyos (= el /x}] irp6Tepov ireip-r)- 
Cairo). X. An. 7. 7, 57. oi eiriT-r)b°eioi ev rep o-TpaTOireb'ca (avrov) iSeovro /xtj 
aireX&elv, rrplv a-rraydyoirb crrpdrev/xa Kal Qif3pwvi irapaSol-n. — Her. 6, 
119. Aapelos, it plv [xev alxf^-aXdorovs y eveo~&ai rovs 'Eperpieas, eVeT^e a<pi 
Seivbv x^Aoy. 7, 2. errav Aapelco, Kal -rrpor epov i) j3a<r iXevaai, yeyovores 
rpels 7ra?8es. X. An. 1. 8, 19. -rrplv ro^ev/xa 4^ikv e?cr& at, eKKXlvovaiv oi 
$dpf3apoi Kal (pevyoveri. 10, 19. -rrplv k ar aXvcr ai rb arpdrev\xa irpbs dpiarov, 
fiacriXees i<pdvi). 4. 1,7. iirl rb &Kpov avafialvei Xetplcrocpos, trplv riva alo~- 
&eo~&ai rwv -rroXe/xlcw. Cy. 7. 1, 4. irplv bpav robs -rroXefxlovs, els rpls 
aveiravae rb arpdrev\xa. 2.2, 10. -rn&avol ovrws elcrl rives, wsre Trplv elZevai rb 
irposraaaS/jLevov, irporepov -rrel&ovrai. With attraction (§ 307, 4) : ib. 5. 2, 9. 
(ttoXXo'i &v&puirot) cnro^vrio-Kovo'i irp6repov, irplv 8 7} A 1 y e v ea&ai, oloi i)crav. 

Rem. 5. The Homeric -rrdpos, when it is not used as a mere adverb, is al- 
ways constructed with the Inf. 11. cr, 245. is 8' ayoprjv ayepovro, -rrdpos Uprroi* 
Hedeff&ai. 

46 



642 syntax. [$$ 338, 339. 

C. Causal Adverbial Clauses. 
§ 338. I Adverbial Clauses denoting Ground, Cause, 

1. Such adverbial clauses as express the ground or cause in 
the form of temporal adverbial clauses by the temporal 
conjunctions ore, 6tt6t€, ws, inci, quoniam, puisque, because, 
since, eTreiSrj, quoniam, and oVou, quandoquzdeni. In these adver- 
bial clauses, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode ; but the Opt. with 
av may be used according to § 260, 2, (4) (a), and also the Ind. 
of the historical tenses with av, according to § 260. 2, (2) (a). 

H. <p, 95. fjcf] fie KTtlv, eirei eu% 6/j.oyd<rTpLos r 'EKTop6s el fit (quoniam sum). 
X. An. 3.2,2. xa\e7rcfc ra irapovra, 6ir6Te avdpcov ffTpar-qyuv toiovtwv «TTe- 
pSfiefra Kal Xoxayw Kal arparicorSiv (since we are deprived of such generals, etc.). 
Dem. 01. 1, in. ore to'ivvv Tav& ovrws tfx 6l > irpQs4\K€i Trpo&vfjLws 4&e\ew aKoietv, 
X. C. 1. 4, 19. ^aicpdrris ou p.6vov rovs <rvv6vras idoKei iroieiv, 6ir6re virb tu>v 
av^pdirwv Spyvro a7rexec:3at r ^ iV o-vocrlwv re Kal ab'iKwv, aAAa Kal oirore iu 4pr}/xi<f 
elev, iireiirep rjyffO'aivTo ixr]Sev &v irore oiv TrpdrToiev &eovs dia\a&e?v. — PL 
Prot. 335, d. peofiai ovv crov irapafxtlvai tj/mu, ws iyw ov8' av evbs ifiiov aKov- 
ffaifxt 77 Gov. — II. o, 228. inr6ei,^ev x^pas e/xds, inel ov Kev avidpcorl y' 4re\~ 
€(r3-7j (since, if he had not escaped, the thing would not have been accomplished with- 
out effort). 

Remark:. 5 E it e i also introduces interrogative and imperative clauses, 
where we must then translate it by for. For the explanation of this use. see 
§ 341, Rem. 4. 

2. Such adveibial clauses as express the ground or cause in 
the form of substantive clauses by the conjunctions on and 
Slotl (arising from Sea tovto, otl) and the Poet. ovveKa (arising 
from tovtov eveKct, o) or 6Sovv€Ka (instead of orov eW/ca, o). 
The Ind is here, also, the prevailing mode, when the statement 
is not conditional. 

PI. Euthyphr. 9, e. apa rh '6<nov, Hti offi6v £o~ti, <pi\eircu inrb tS>v ^ecov, tf, Sri 
(piKe'ir at, oardv icri ; 

§339. II. Conditional Adverbial Clauses. 

1. The second kind of adverbial clauses are the conditional 
clauses, which are introduced by the conjunctions et and idv 
(rjv, av, which must not be confounded with the modal adverb 
av). The principal clause expresses what is conditioned by the 
subordinate clause, or the consequence and effect of the sub- 



• 



$ 339. j CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 543 

ordinate clause. As the conditioning clause precedes the con- 
ditioned, the cause, the effect, the subordinate clause is called 
the introductory clause or Protasis, and the principal clause, the 
conclusion or the Apodosis. 

2. The Greek has the following modes of expressing condi- 
tionality : — 

I. In the first place, the condition is expressed as a reality or 
fact, as something certain, and hence by the Indicative. Two 
cases are here to be distinguished : — 

(a) The Protasis has et with the Ind., and the Apodosis, 
likewise the Lid. Then both the condition and conclusion 
are- considered by the speaker as a reality or fact, and hence 
as certain, whether the thing be so objectively or not. The 
result is very frequently a necessary one. If the Apodosis 
contains a command, the Imp. is used, and when this command 
is negative, the Subj. also ($ 259, 5). 

E I rovro \4yeis, ap.apr dv e t s. — Et $-e 6s i ffr i, crocpSs iffr iv. — X. Cy. 
1. 5, 13. fit ravra iyca \4yo) Trepl vjjmv &h\a yiyvaffKuv, i/xavrby e^airar eo 
(here something is spoken of, which in his heart the speaker wholly denies). — 
E t rt exets, 80s. — Et rovro ireiroir)Kas, iiraivuirhaL a£ios e ?. Her. 3, 62. to 8eV- 
irora, ovk eerrt ravra a\r]Sf4a, okcos (= on) Kor4 crot ~2,/x4pdis aSeAcpebs 6 crbs iiraviff- 
rr]K€ ' iyw yap avrbs e&atyd p.iv X e P°~^ r V (TL ip-to'vrov • e i /x4v vvv ol re&veoHres ave ff- 
r 4ao~ i, irp o s 8 4 k e 6 roi Ka\ 'Acrrvdyea rbv MtjSov iiravaarr\o-^o-^ai • e I 8' tar t, ws- 
7rep nrporov, ov fx'f] ri roi eK ye e/ceiVow yecorepov avaj3Kacrrr]aei (here in the first con- 
ditional clause, something is spoken of, the opposite of which the speaker is per- 
suaded is true). — Ef Tt e?xe, koX 48'ifiov. — Et rovro e 7r e it o t 'ft k e t s, (vp-tas 
a^ios tfo'&a. — Et e /3p6vrr) o~ e, ko\ tf ffr paipev. Et rovro Ae'|ets, afxap- 
r-ftari. X. Cy. 2. 1, 8. e5f ri ire i a o vrai MrjSoi, is Tl4pcras rb Seivbu v} £et. 7. 
1, 19. et cp& do" o p.ev robs ttoXz/aiovs KaraKrav6vres, ovCiels 7][xSov airo&av ei- 
rai. 

(b) The Protasis has el with the Ind. of the historical 
tenses, and the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense 
with av; then the reality, both of the condition and con- 
clusion is to be denied. This form is used only of the past, 
or where there is a reference to the past; here it is affirmed 
that something could take place under a certain condition, 
but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. The 
use of the tenses is the same as in simple sentences. 
See $ 25G. 

Here the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of expression 



544 syntax. [$ 339. 

itself, for the Ind. of the historical tenses necessarily always denotes a past 
occurrence or fact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to say, it con- 
sists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the past and applied 
to the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to what is not a reality in 
the present. The past reality expressed in the conditional clause stands in 
opposition to another present reality (either expressed or to he supplied from 
the context), which contains precisely the opposite of that past reality, e. g. 
if the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. e. if the enemy had come, ive should have 
been destroyed, .but now the enemy has not come ; from this contrast it 
is now inferred, that the assumed fact if the enemy came, did not take place. 

£i rovro eXeyes, ijixdpraves &v (si hoc dixisses, err ares, if you said this 
you erred, or if you had said this, you would have erred ; hut you have not said it, 
consequently you have not erred). PI. Apol. 20, b, c. ris, fy b" iyw, Kal 7ro8a- 
tt6s ; Kal iroaov StSdV/cez ; Evrjvos, e<pr], S> 'XdiKpares, Tldpios, Trevre fj,vwv. Kal iyw 
rbv Evr]vov e/xaKapiaa, el wj aXr]&ws ex et ravry\v rrjv rex^W Kal ovrws e/x/AeXws 
SiddcTKei' iyw yovv Kal avrbs i KaXXvv 6 fx7\v re Kal 7} )8 pvv6/xr]V &v, el 
TiiciffTafjLriv ravra' aXX' ov yap iir io-rafxat, w &vdpes 'A&yvaloi (here also 
something past is spoken of, as is evident from i/j.aKapLaa). 31, d. el iyw 
irdXai e7re%e ip7}Ga ivparreiv to ttoMtiko. irpdyixara, irdXai av an oX&Xt) Kal 
ovr' clv vjxas wepe A 77 /c 77, ovt ay i/xavrdv. Th. 1,9. ovk av ovv vhffwv i Kpdr e i 
('Aya/xe/jLvcou), el fx-fj ri Kal vavTiKbv elxev (he would not have ruled over the 
islands unless he had a fleet ; hut he had a fleet, consequently he could also rule 
over the islands). PI. Gorg. 516, e. el 9j(rav aVSpes aya&ol, ovk &v irore ravra 
eirao-xov (if they — Cimon, Tliemistocles, and Miltiades — had been good men, 
they would never have experienced this injustice). X. Cy. 1. 2, 16. ravra ovk av 
eSvvavr o (ot Tlepo-at) ivoielv, el fxr} Kal tiiairri jxerpia ixp&vr o. 3.3,17. el 
fiev (xe'i^wv ris Kivdvvos efxeXXev rjfuv elvai ewe? (sc. iv rfj iroXefj.(a), ^ iv&dSe (sc. 
ev rfj <piXia), Xcrws rb aacpaXeararov -fj v av alpereov vvv Se foot (lev eKelvot (oi 
Kivdvvoi) eaovrai, ^v re iv&dde v-KOjj.evwjj.ev, tfv re els r)\v eKetvwv (rwv iroXe/ilwv) 
lovres inravra>fj.ev avrols (here also a past action is spoken of: as long as we were 
unarmed, and therefore were in greater danger in a hostile than in a friendly 
country, it was necessary for us to remain here ; hut now, since we are armed, 
the danger here and there will be equal). 8. 3, 44. aXrj&rj, ecprj, Xeyeis- el ydp 
roi rb ex €iJ/ ovrws, wsirep rb Xa/x^dveiv, 7]Sv 'Tjv, iroXv av 5 ie<p e pov evdai/aovia. 
ol ivXovcrioi rwv irevi]ru>v (in reference to the preceding conversation). An. 7. 6, 
9. 7]fj.e?s fxev, w AaKeSai/xovioi, Kal iraXai av ^fiev irap ifj.7v, el fii] "B.evo<pwv bevpo 
Tjixas ireio-as air'hyayev. Lys. defens. Call. 102, 1. el fiev irepl &XXov rtvbs § 
rod adfiaros KaXXias yywvi^er o, e^i]pKei &v fioi Kal ra irapa rwv &XXwv 
elpr]ueva' vvv Se fxoi 5 o zee 7 alcrxpbv elvai /x)) fiorj&rjo'ai KaXXta, ra SiKaia. Purg. 
sacril. 109, 15. el //.ev alo~xpbv ^v [xovov rb Trpay/xa, Xffws 'av ris rwv irapiovrwv 
7\[ieXr]a e • vvv 5e ov irepl alo~x vvr ) s, > &XXa ivepl rr]S /J.ey(o~r7]S £n/j.las eKivSvvevov. 

Remark 1. On the omission of &v in the Apodosis, see § 260, Rem. 3. Ok 
the Ind. of the Hist, tenses in the intermediate clause of such a proposition, 
§ 327b, 1. (a). 



$ 339.J CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 545 

II The condition is expressed, in the second place, as a 
conception or representation. The Greek has two different forms 
to denote this relation : — 

(a) The Protasis has et with the Opt., and the Apodosis, the 
Opt. with av. (The Fut. Opt. is here not used.) By this form, 
both the condition and the conclusion are represented as a 
present or future uncertainty, as an undetermined possibility, a 
mere conjecture, assumption, or supposition, without any refer- 
ence to the tiring supposed being real or not real, possible or 
impossible. 

Et ti exoty, 5 o 1 1\ s av (si quid habes des, if you had anything, you icould 
give it ; here it is. neither assumed nor denied that you have anything, but is 
merely a supposition. Et tovto \4yois, a/xaprdvo t s av (if you should say 
this, then you would err). — PI. Symp. 175, d. ev av %X 0l > e ' toiovtov et-n t) 
ao<pia, wst 4k tov TrXTjpecrTepov els rbv Kevurepov pelv r)/j.aiv, 4av a-rrr^fxe^a a\\-f}- 
Xctiv ' el yap ovtoos e^ei Kal y\ aocpla, iroWov Tt,uw^tat ttjv irapa o~ol naTanXicriv. 
Lysid. 206, c. eX p.oi i&eXrjcrais avrbv 7roirj(rai els Aoyovs e'A&etV, tcrcas av 8v- 
valur)V (to i £irt8e?l-ai, & xph avrw 8ia\4yecrSai. Menex. 236, a. nal ti av 
exois eiirelv, el 8 4ol ae \4yeiv; Hipp. Maj. 282, d. et yap elSeirjs ocrov 
apyvpiov eipyacruai, &av ado* ai s &v. Ion. 537, e. e X ere e poiarj v, el (whether) 
rfj avrfj t 4xvr\ yiyvaaKouev tt? ap&a-qTiKrj to. aura eyu re /cat av, r) &Wrj, (pairjs 
av 07]ttou t?7 avTrj. 5. 6, 9. Kal 6 TlapS4vios dfiaros' ecp' hv eA^oire &v, et rbv 
a A\vv o tafSairiT e. 6.2,21. et KaraAnrovres to. aKev-n ev t£ epv/xva x a P l V 
ws els p-axw irapeaKevaa/x4voi totaev, lavs av to lepa fxaWov irpox^poirf 
tj/aTv. (Of the assumption of something past, in Herodotus [§ 260, (4) (a)] 7, 
214. et5eiT7 &v Kal eoov p.r) MyAiebs ravrriv ttjv arpairbv 'Ovrir-ns, et rfj x^PV 
7roAAa w/xlAti koj s et-n, Onetes might have known this way, if he had been very 
familiar with the country). 

(b) The Protasis has idv (yjv, av) with the Subj., and the 
Apodosis also, the Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fu- 
ture (also the Imperative). By this form, the condition is rep- 
resented as a conception or supposition, the accomplishment of 
which, however, is expected by the speaker, and is regarded as 
possible. The conclusion resulting from the subordinate clause, 
is represented as certah? (necessary). 

Rem. 2. As the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, idv with the Subj. 
almost whollv corresponds to e t with the Put. Ind. ; the only distinction is, 
that by e I with the Fut. Ind., the form of the condition implies" that the action 
will actually take place in future : but by 4dv with the Subj., the form of the 
condition implies that the actual occurrence of the action is merely assumed 
or expected by the speaker. The reason for the use of the Subj. is not to bo 
found in the conditioned relation itself which it is necessary to express, but in 

46* 



546 syntax. [$ 339 

the fact, that, aside from this relation, it is used to denote a concession expected 
by the speaker (§ 259, Rem. 4). 

'Eap tovtq A e 777 s, ajj-apT-fjCTi^ if you say this, shall say it, you will err. 
(Whether you will actually say this, I do not yet know; but I expect, I as- 
sume that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.) 
— 'Eav tovto Ae|r?s, ajxapT7](xri (si hoc dixeris, errabis). Dem. 2, 14. aVas 
ASyos, Uv airrj ra irpdyfxaTa, fxdraiov ri (palverai /cat KevSv. PI. Ep. 473, d. iav 
/xtj t) 01 (pi\6(ro<poi fia'aiAevffaxr iv iv rats irdAecriv, r) 01 /3aoiAr]s re vvv Aeyofx- 
evoi koL dvvdffTcu <piAoo~o<pri crw o~ 1 yvrjericas re Kai iKavas, Kai tovto els tclvtov 
J-v/att 4er), Svva;xis re iroAiTiKr] Kai <piAoo~ocpta, ovk ecrTt KaKoiv iravAa Tais ir6 At- 
tn. Lysid. 210, c. iav fxhv Ixpa o-oepbs y4vr], S> itai, irdvTes aoi c/uAot /cat irdvTes 
ffoi oliceToi 4o~ovTau X. An. 1. 8, 12. tcav touto, etyy, viKwfxev 7raV$-' Tifuif 

•JT 67TG 'l7)T at. 

Rem. 3. 'Eai/ with the Subj. and ei with the Opt. are also used to denote 
indefinite frequency. Comp. § 327b, 2. In the place of idv with the Subj., et 
with the Opt. occurs, when the conditional clause is made to depend on an 
Hist, tense. Still, see § 345, 4. On idv with the Opt. and et with the Inf. 
in orat. obliq., see § 345, Rem. 4, and No. 6. 

3. Besides the common forms of the Apoclosis already men- 
tioned, which correspond to those of the Protasis, the Apodosis 
is very often found in a form that does not correspond to the 
Protasis. This interchange of forms gives great delicacy of 
expression. The following cases occur : — 

(a) The Opt. with &v in the Apodosis, very often follows et with the Ind. 
and idv with the Subj., when the conclusion as uncertain, doubtful, an undeter- 
mined possibility, is to be contrasted with a condition which is certain, or which 
is expected or assumed as certain. But the Greek, particularly the Attic dialect, 
very often employs this form of the Apodosis with a degree of civility, even 
when speaking of settled convictions [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. 

(a) Ei tovto \4yeis, afxapTavois &v (if you assert this, you would err). 
PL 30, b. et iiXv olv TavTa Xeycav dia<p&elpo) tovs veovs, tovt av e%T] fiAafiepd. 
Ale. II. 149, e. Kai yap av Seivbv el 7], et irpbs to, Swpa Kai Tas &v<rias airofiAev- 
ov<r iv 7]ll5)V 01 freet, aAAa fxr] Trpbs ttjv -^vychv, &v ris ocrios Kai StKOios &v Tvy- 
jtavn. X. C. 1. 2, 28. et Sw/cparTjs aafypovSiv SteTeAet, irws av dixaloos rr)s 
ovk ivov<rt]s avT<*> /caw as afoiav ex oi i Th. **, 92. et noAe/niSs ye hv ccpddoa 
efiAaiTTOv, Kai Uv (piAos &v iKava>s u><peAoiy]V. 

(/3) X. Apol. 6. t)v Se al o-grdvoofxai X e ' l P av JtyvS/xevos Kai KaTap,4fx- 
<pco/xai ifxavrov, tvws av iyeb av rj^ecas fi lot evoi /xl; PL Menex. 239, c. e^ 
ovv TjLieTs iir t%e ipS>p.ev to. avTa Aoyca \J/tA<£ Koa/xe^v, rdx &v Seurepot (paivoi- 
fxe&a (then we should be inferior). 

(y) E t with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the 
denial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. with &v is used in speaking of 
the past, instead of the usual Ind. of the Hist, tenses with av. This use is not 



$ 340."j ELLIPSES OF THE PROTASIS. 547 

frequent, and is found only in Homer [$ 260, (4). (a)]. II. &, 80. el fxev n$ 
rbv uveipov 'Axaiau aAAos evicrirev, tyevoos Kev cpalfiev Kal v ocr<p i^oifie- 
&a p.a\\ov vvv 5' i5ep, bs p.ey 'apiaros 'Axaiwv evx^Tai elvai {if another had 
told the dream, we should pronounce it false, and not believe it). H. e, 311. Kal vv 
Kei ev^r air oXo no dva\ avdpuv Alveias, ei p.)} dp b£v v 6 t\ ere Aibs ^vyarrjp 
'AcppaSiTri (and ^Eneas would certainly have perished there, if Aphrodite had not 
d it). Comp. § 388. p, 70. [On ei -with the Opt. in the Protasis and the 
Opt. with &v in the Apodosis, in speaking of something past, in Herodotus, see 
No. II. (a) at the end.] 

(b) On the contrary, the Ind. in the Apodosis sometimes follows el with the 
Opt. X. C. 1. 5. 2. el 5' eVt TeXevri] rod fiiov yevofievoi (3ov\o(/Ae£td ra> 
iirirpe^ai $) iraidas dppevas iraidevo~cu, $) frvyarepas iraphevovs dia(pv\d£ai, ?i XP*I~ 
fxara diaawaai, ap' d^ioiriaTov els ravra 7)y 7) cro p.e&a rbv aKpairj ] 

(c) The Ind. of the historical tenses with &v in the Apodosis follows : — 

(a) sometimes e I with the Ind. of a principal tense, if the condition is re- 
garded as a fact or something actually existing, while the conclusion is consid- 
ered as not real or actual. X. Hier. 1. 9. el yap ourw ravr' exei, ttccs av iroA- 
Kol /xeu eir e&v fiow ivpavvelv . . , Tra>s oe irdvres i£-h\ovv av robs rvpawovs ; 
(if this is really so, why should many strive after sovereignty, and all esteem tyrants 
as happy?) Eur. Or. 565, sq. el yap yvvaiKes is rotf r)£ovo-iv &pd<rovs, &v- 
Spas (poveveiv, Karatyvyas Troiov/ievai is reKva . . , Trap' ovSev avraTs r) v a v oKkvvai 
ir6aeis ; 

(/3) rarely idv with the Suhj. (PI. Phaedr. 256. c), but very often el with 
the Opt., when, in the Apodosis, an action is to be represented as repeated in 
past time [see § 260, 2, (2), (£)], but seldom when the reality of the conclusion 
is to be denied, e. g. X. Cy. 2. 1, 9. el exoifii, wj rdx'-O'T av oirXa eiroiov- 
fxr\v ■jrao'i Tlepaais rols irposiovcriv. PL Ale. I. 111. e. el $ov\T)&eir}[j.ev elde- 
vat /it] p6vov, ttoIol avSrpunvoi elo-iv, a?JC dicdloi vyieivoi, r) vocruSeis, dpa iKavol & v 
■qffav oiSdaKaXoi ol 7roAAot; 

(d) The Ind. of a principal tense in the Apodosis. is sometimes contrasted 
with the Ind. of an historical tense in the Protasis: (a) affirmatively : Dem. 
Cor. 293, 195. ei fierd rav Q-n&atwv r)u7v aycovi^ouevois ovtus e'lfxapTo (fato 
constitution erat) irpa^ai, ri xph nposSoKav ; — (£) negatively: Th. 3, 65. el 
pXv yap Tjfiels avrol irpos re ri]v tt6\iv i\&6vres ejicax^eS-a (pugnavissemus) 
Kal ttjv yr)v iSyov/xev (devastassemus) ws iroXepuoi, a.5 iKov/xev el 5e dvdpes 
vficov ol TrpcoTot . . iTreKoKeo'avTo (advocaverunt), rl aSiKovpev. 



$ 340. Remarks. 

I. Ellipsis of the Protasis. The Opt. with &v often stands without the 
I conditional Protasis ; yet this is contained in an adjective-clause, or in a par- 
ticiple, or, in general, in a word of the sentence which may be expanded into a 
conditional Protasis, e. g. in the adverb ovtws, in a preposition, or it is indica- 



548 syntax. [$ 340 

ted in what precedes or follows. a O s ravra \eyoi (= elf ris ravra Aeyoi), 
afxaprdvoi dv {whoever should say this, if any one should say this, he loould err), 
Tavra Ae£as (= el av Xe^ais) djxaprdv o is dv. Oiirco y (= ei ovrca ye 
iroirjo-ais) av d/xaprdvois. Very often, however, the Protasis is actually 
wanting ; particularly, general Protases are almost always omitted, since they 
can be easily supplied by such phrases as : if one wishes, if it is allowed, if 1 
can, if circumstances should favor, e. g. B ovKoifx-nv dv (scil. el owai/xr)v), velim 
'Kdeoos av a.Kovaaifxi\ often also, the conditioned Apodosis must be supplied, 
as the conditioning Protasis, e.g. Her. 9, 71. d\\d raxr\n /xev Kal (pfrSvca av 
etiroiev (sc. el eXnoieu). Comp. § 260, 2, (4), (a). So also, the Ind. of 
the historical tenses with dv is often used without a conditional Protasis, 
e. g. Tavra Ae'|as nfj/xapres dv. "Avev creia^ov ovk av rovro o-vvefir). 
Efiov\6(xr)v dv ov e/3ov\'f)&y]i, dv (sc. el iBvvd/xrjv) , voluissem, vellem (differ- 
ent from fiovXoi \xr\v av, as vellem from velim). "Ey&a 5^) eyvws dv (sc. el 
iraprjo-fra), turn vero videres. See § 260, Eem. 2. 

2. Ellipsis of the Apodosis. On the contrary, the Apodosis may be omitted 
in certain cases : — 

(a) In the expression of a wish, e. g. et&e rovro yevoiro (sc. evrvxfc av 
etV), that this might be! et&e tovto eye vero (sc. evrvxhs av tfv), that 
this had been ! Comp. § 259, 3, (b), and Eem. 6. 

(b) Often in excited, impassioned discourse (Aposiopesis). II. a, 340, sq. eXirore 
S 5 aZre XP €l ^ 4/xe7o yevrjrai aeiKea Aoiyhv dfxvvai ro?s dWois — . 

(c) When the Apodosis may be easily supplied from the context. This oc- 
curs in Homer in the phrase et 5' ed-e'Aets with or without an Inf. H. <p, 
487. el S' £&e\eis iroXejxoio dar]/xevai (sc. dye, fxdxov efxot) • o<pp ev eldfjs. 
Very often also in Attic writers, where two conditional clauses are placed in 
contrast by el (eav) fxev — et (eav) Se /xV/; in the first the Apodosis is 
omitted, since it contains a thought which can be easily supplied, and the dis- 
course hastens on to the following more important thought. PI. Prot. 325, d. 
Kal eav jxev etcoov irei&r}Tai (sc. Ka\u>s e%et) • et Se /x-fj, — ev&vvovaiv aTeiAais Kal 
irAriyaTs. 

3. A partial ellipsis of the Protasis occurs in the Homeric phrase et 8' dye, 
i.e. el Se fiovXei, dye. II. a, 524. et 8' dye roi KecpaAij Karavevo'Ofxai. Also 
when et 8e or et 5* dye is used as an antithesis, where a verb must be sup- 
plied from the context. H. a, 302 ; t, 46. &AA 5 d\\oi /xeveovai Kap-nKo^covres 
'Axaioi, elsoKe irep Tpolrjv diairepao/xev • et Se Kal avrol (sc. p.)} peveovcri), (pevyov 
ru>v gvv vnval (pi\7]v is irarpida yaiav. 

4. Et Se' instead of et 8e p-f] and el Se p-i\ instead of et Se'. When two 
hypothetical clauses are contrasted with each other, et Se is often used instead 
of et Se pi], since the opposed or contrasted member of itself abrogates 
the first member. PL Prot. 348, a. k a v pev fiov\r) en epwrav, eroipos el/xi (rot 
vapexeiv (sc. epe) diroKpivopevos • eav tie fiovXri, o~v epol irapdo~x e (if you wish to 
propose further questions, I am ready to reply, but if you do not tvish, etc.). On the 
contrary, a negative clause is followed by et 5 e p-h, instead of et Se, this form 



$ 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 549 

being very common in abrogating or expressing the opposite of the preceding 
clause. X. Cy. 3. 1, 35. npbs tu>v &e£>v, (xt] ovtu Aeye- el de fxi] {otherwise), ov 
SappovvTa /xe Qeis. 

5. When el fx-n has the meaning of except, another ei is sometimes sub- 
joined, thus el /x )] el, like nisi si, except if, unless, the predicate of el /xr) being 
omitted. PL Symp. 205. e. ou yap to eavTwv, oT/xai, eicao-Toi ao-ird£oi/Tcu, el /x^ 
et tis to /xev ayaSbv olKelov Kakei. 

6. "Ay in the Protasis with el and the Opt. or the Ind. of the historical 
tenses. Sometimes dv is found, also, in the Protasis, so that it contains a con- 
dition for the Apodosis, but it is itself dependent on another condition, com- 
monly not expressed, but implied, e. g. el toCto Xeyois dv means : If you should 
say this exder circumstances (= in case circumstances require, in case an oppor- 
tunity should present, in case one should ask you), etc. X. Cy. 3. 3, 55. tovs 5* 
airaiSeVTOvs TravTairaaiv apeTTJs ^avfxd^oi/x 1 dv, et TiirKeou av a> (p e \tj o~ e i e AC- 
yos kclAws pr)&els els dvSpaya&iav, ^ tovs diraiSevrovs fxovaiKrjS da/xa fxaXa nakus 
da&ev els fxovcriK-qv. PI. Prot. 329, b. eyu> etirep aXKu> tw dv&punraiv irei&oi- 
fi7]v dv, no! col irei&o/xai (si ulli alii, si id mihi affinnet, fidem habeam). 

7. "When Kai is connected with el (idv), the hypothetical Protasis contains a 
concessive meaning, and the Apodosis, an adversative meaning : the Protasis 
denotes a concession; the Apodosis, often in connection with ofxees, tamen, 
denies the expected consequence, and places another consequence in opposi- 
tion to that expectation. Kai either follows el, — el Kai or precedes it, — k a I 
el — . In the first case, Kai means also, and refers not merely to el, but to the 
entire concessive clause, and el Kai means although. In the last case, koI 
means even (enhansive), and refers only to the condition, and Kai el means 
even if, e. g. el Kai &vt)t6s el/xi, although 1 am mortal (conceding what is actu- 
ally the case, Kai el dSrduaTos i\v, even if I were immortal (conceding what is 
not the case). S. 0. P. 302. ir6Xiv fxev, el Kai /x$) PXeireis, (ppoveis 5' ofxws, o'la 
v6aw IvveoTiv, etsi (quamquam) caecus es, vides tamen, quo in malo versetur civitas. 
Aesch. Choeph. 296. Kel /xr] ireiroi^ta, Tovpyov eW eypacTeov, etiamsi non fdo, 
perpetrandum facinus est. To the el (edv) Kai, the negative el (ecu/) jx-noe 
corresponds,- to the Kai el {idv), oub' {/x-nd') el {idv). 

Remark. Concessive clauses are far oftener expressed in an abridged form 
by the participle, either alone, or in connection with Kai, Kaiirep, etc., § 312, 4, 
(d) and Rem. 8. 



§ 341. III. Adverbial Clauses denoting Consequence, 
or Effect. 

1. Adverbial clauses, denoting consequence or effect, are 
adverbs of manner expanded into a sentence, and are intro- 
duced by the conjunction wstc (more seldom 69), which refers 
to the demonstrative adverb ovtgj(s), either expressed or under- 
stood, in the principal clause, e. g. ovtu koXos eortv, wsrt Sav 



550 SYNTAX. [$ 341. 

fid&crSaL ( = SavfAao-LUis Ka\6s ecrrtv). Yet these clauses often 
have also the meaning of a substantive or Inf. in the Ace. and 
denoting an effect, and must then be considered as substantive- 
clauses. In this last case, the relative wsre of the subordinate 
clause corresponds to a demonstrative substantive-pronoun; 
either expressed or to be supplied, e. g. tovto, hi the principal 
clause, e. g. 'Ave7reicre Hepfeca tovto, wste irotiicv ravra (Her:). 

2. The Ind. is used in these clauses, when the consequence 
or effect, is to be indicated as a fact, something real and actual. 
The negative is in tins case (ov, § 318, 2). 

Her. 6, 83. "Apyos audpeev exvp^V ovrco, &sre oi SovXoi avrecav %crx ov 
ttdvra ra Trp^y/xara. X. Cy. 1.4, 5. Kvpos ra%v Kal ra |j/ t<£ irapadeio-q} &npla 
avwXcoKei, 8>sre 6 'AaTvdyws ovKer' elx ev avru) o'vXXe^eiv frnpia. 15. ovtcos 
fjaST] rfj rSre frfipq (5 ' ' Acrrvdyns) , u>sre aet, 6tt6t€ 616v re eXn, Cure £77 e i t<£ 
Kvpca, Kal &XXovs re iroXXobs irap eXdfxfiave. 

3. The Inf., on the contrary, is used, when the consequence 
or effect is to be represented as merely a conceived or supposed 
one, inferred from the inward relation of things, or assumed as 
possible. (On attraction with the Inf., see § 307, 4, and on the 
negative, $318, 2.) The particular cases where the Inf. is used, 
are the following : — 

(a) When an effect or consequence is specified, which results from or has its 
ground in the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1. 2, 1. en 5e irphs rb fxer- 
picov 8e7o~&ai TreTraih'evfxevos i)v ^ZaKpdrns ovtcos, &sre Trdvv jxiKpa KeKr-njxevos irdvv 
paSi'ws %x* lv apKovvra. Cy. 1. 1, 5. eSwdcrSn} Kvpos iirLSrv/xlav efAf3aXe7v roo-av- 
rnv rod irdvras avrw xapt&o'&ai, u>sr e ael rfj avrov yvcajin a £ 1 o v v Kv/3epud(r- 
&ai. 2, 1. (pvvai 6 Kvpos Xeyerai (piXori/xSraros, to sre irdvra fxeu tt6vov avar- 
Xrivai, nrdvra Se kivSvj/ov vtto [x.e?vat rov eTraweTcrSai eveKa. !For the Same 
reason,?) wjte (quam ut) is used with the Inf., after a comparative. Her. 3, 
14. 5 7to? Kvpov, ra fxeu olicfiia i\v fiefa Katcd, t) usre avaKXaieiv {greater than 
that any one can bewail, i. e. too great for one to bewail). X. C. 3. 5, 17. <po/3ov/j.ai 
ael, fit'/ n p.e?£ov i) 'do sre (pepeiv hvvaa^rai Kanbv rfj Tr6Xei o~v/j./Si). Hence 
So sre with an Inf. may also be used to explain a preceding clause, e. g. Th. 4, 
23. TLeXoirovvricrioi ev rrj rjirelpca crrparoTredevo-dfxeuoi, Kal TrposfioXas Troiovjxevoi t$ 
Tet%e£, arKoirovvres Kaipov, el ris Trapairecroi, oosre robs dvh'pas trwerot (ivatch- 
ing for an opportunity, if any should occur, by which their fellow-citizens could be 
saved). X. C. 1. 3, 6. % ro?s icXeicrrois 4pycodeo-rar6v ecrriv, So sre (pvXdtaa&ai rb 
virep rbv Kaipbv e^TriirXaa^raL, T<~ r iro paStoos Trdvv "SooKparris ecpvXarrero. 

(b) When the consequence is to be represented as one merely possible. X. 
An. 2. 2, 17. Kpavyriv ttoXX))v eiroiovv naXovvres aXXi]Xovs, &sre Kal robs rroXefxi* 
ovs aKoveiv (itt etiam hostes audire POSSENT), &sre ot p.ev eyyvrara rwv waXe/jit- 



$ 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 551 

wv Kal ecpvyov (a fact). 1.4, 8. oure aTroiretyzvyacriv • e%co yap rpi-npeir, 8>st c 
f AeiV to 4kzIvu?v trXoiov. 

(c) When the consequence or effect iacludes, at the same time, the Idea of 
purpose or aim. Th. 2, 75. irpoKaAv/jL/AaTa eT^e Beppeis Kal b~i<p&epas, atsre tovs 
£pya£o[ievovs Kal to |vAa yU7jT6 irvp<p6pois oiarois fidWeff&ai, eV acrcpakela T€ 
elVai (so *Aa£ fAose a£ nwrfc aW the wood might not be hit, etc.). Dem. Cor. § 81. 
sroAAa fiev av xp^ara eSw/ce $i\icrTi8r)S, wjt ! e^ 6 "' '%>eoV (w£ obtineret 
Oreum). 

(d) When the consequence is to be indicated at the same time as a condition of 
the statement in the principal clause {under the condition,that, or it is presupposed, 
that). Dem. Ph. 2. 68, 11. ££bv avrols ra>v Koittwv dpx^iv "EXXr\vctiV, & sr avTovs 
viraKOveiv ^ao-tAet (quum possent ceteris Graecis it A imperitare, UT ipsi dicto 
audientes essent regi, since they could rule the rest of the Greeks, provided they 
themselves obeyed the king). X. Cy. 3. 2, 16. Kal tovto iiriaTa, e<pv, d> Kvpe, on 
iycx>, ust€ a 7r e A a a" a i XaXdalovs airb tovtuv tuv aKpav, TroWaTrhaaia av e5a>/ca 
Xprip-ara, av av vvv e% 6iS 7ra p' *\i.ov. 

(e) When instead of an Inf. alone, the Inf. with wsre is used for the sake 
of emphasis. Th. 1, 119. (iderj&Ti crav). kKaarav lola, &STeTpr)cplaaa&ai 
70V Tro\e/j.ou. 2, 101. avaTreifr erai inrb ^.ev&ov . . , 8> s t iv rdxei a.7re\&e'iv. 
6, 88. Kal ol Kopi'vSioi ev&vs ityvtyicravTO avrol irpwToi, &sre irdan Trpo&v/u.ta 
afxvveiv ktA. X. H. 6. 1, 9. Kal 'ASrvvdioi Se ndvra tto irjaaiev dv, Sisre 
avfifiaxoi T)\u-v yevecr&ai. 

(f) In general, when the speaker, without respect to the objective relation 
of things, apprehends, in his mind, solely the causal connection between the cause 
and the effect. In this way. a consequence actually existing may be expressed 
by &sre with an Inf. X. An. 1. 5, 13. tfXavvev iirl tovs Mevccvos (arpaTiuiTas), 
wst iKetvovs £ ktt eir\rix&& 1 Kal avrbv Mevwva Kal rpix* lv e7rl to 07rAa. 

(g) In oblique discourse. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. (rbv Kvpov) evaxv.u-o'vajs ttoos irpose- 
veyKe'tv Kal ivZovvai tt\v (pid\r]v to; -Rainrcc, usre ttj /xnrpl Kal tw 'Aarvdyei ttoKvv 
yeKoora "n ap aa x^ v - 

Rem. 1. When the Inf. connected with &sre depends on a condition, the 
modal adverb av is subjoined to the Inf. [§ 260, 2, (5), (a)]. Th. 2, 49. to ivrbs 
ovtus iKaiero, &sre riSiaraav is vSup tyvxpbv a<pas avrovs piizr e iv. X. An. 
6. 1, 31. Kai fMOL ol Sreol ovrws £v rots Upols 4ar,p.nvav, & sr e ical iBicirnv av yvw- 
vai, on TavT7)s ttjs jxovapxlos direx*o~&ai /xe Set (i. e. Kal et tis ISluittjs etVj). 

Rem. 2. Instead of tisre with the Inf. or Ace. with Inf., a relative, particu- 
larly oTos, lktos, is very often used in connection with the Ace. with Inf., 
this relative corresponding to a demonstrative, particularly tolovtos, roaovros, 
either standing in tjie principal clause or to be supplied. PL Crit.46. b. 4yw — 
to io vt os {sc. el/j.1), olo s to)V i/j-uv jj.nb'Gvl &W(p 7re id- 6 o~&ai, ■?] tQ \6yw. X. 
Cy. 1. 2.3. ol TIepcriKol v6jjloi i-jri/xeXovTai, oiroos ttjv apxyy /J-V t o iovto l tcrovrai 
ol TroATYai, oJol irovnpov rivos v) alaxp°o epyov 4<ple(r^ai. X. H. 6- 5, 7. TO to S- 
ros 6 ~2,TdiTLTnros 9iv, ol o s (xt) fiov\eo-&ai ttoWovs cnroKTivvvvai ruv ttoXltuiv. 
Th.3, 49. 7] /xev ecp&aae t oaovr ov, o a ov riax7jTa aveyvcoKevai to ^'piaua. 
1. 2. ve/j.6/j.evoL to avrwv (KacrToi, oaov diro^v (so far that they could live on 
them). On the attraction in this mode of expression, see § 332, Kern. 8. 

Rem. 3. Special mention must be made here of apparently independent 



552 



SYNTAX. 



[* 341. 



parenthetic clauses, which often occur, and which are introrlaced by ws (seldom 
&sre) with the Inf. In this way the Inf., particularly of verbs of "saying, think- 
ing, judging, hearing, is used with us for the purpose of expressing restriction or 
limitation. That, of Avhich such a subordinate clause expresses the consequence 
or effect, must be supplied, e. g. roiovru rp6wu. Th. 4, 36. us /xiKpbv p.eydxu 
ehcaaai {to compare small with great). So us eiros clirelv (especially with 
iras and ovSeis), ut ita dicam, propemodum dixerim, us (TvveXbvr i elirelv, ut 
paucis absolvam, us ye p. o t SokcIv, ut mihi guidem videtur, properly tali modo 
ut mihi videatur, us epe ev pe pvrj abat (as far as I well remember). us ye 
ovrucrl aKovaai (so far as we hear). Such clauses are very often expressed in 
anabridged form without us, e.g. ovrucl aKovcai, SoKelv epoi, oh iroX- 
\$ Xbyu e t ire? j/, especially bxiyov, piKpov oelv,ita ut paulum absit, and 
in the still shorter form, bxiyov, prope, paene. — According to the same analogy, 
oo~ov, '6 a a, '6 n connected with an Inf., are used instead of us. (Rem. 2), e.g. 
'6 crov y4 p elSevai, as far as I know, quantum sciam (properly pro tanto, 
quantum scire possim), '6 r i p.' eloevai. In like manner, us with the Inf. is 
used in Herod, in sentences which express a limitation. 2, 8. to &v ty curb 
''IXiovttSXhjs ovKeri iroXXbv x^P^i ws e I> cu Aiyvirr ov (ut in Aegypto, for 
Egypt, i. e. considering its whole extent). 

4. The Opt. ivith av is used when the consequence or effect 
is to be represented as a conditioned supposition or presumption 
l§ 260, 2, (4), (a)] ; finally the Ind. of the historical tenses is 
used with av, when it is to be stated, that the consequence 
would take place under a certain condition p 260, 2, (2), (a)]. 

Isocr. Archid. 130, 67. els rocavrnv api^iav iXwXv&acnv, & s r* ol pev KeKrrtpe- 
voi ras ovaias tjSlov av els r))v baXarrav ra acperep' avruv e pfiaXXo lev, ir) to?s 
Seopevois eirap neveiav. PL Menex. 236, d. o~oi ye 8e? x a p' l C ear & a h Sstc 
kclv bxiyov, ef fie KeXevois airodvvra bpxyo-aa&cu, x a P 10 ' aiprjv av. — Symp 
197, a. jxavTiKT]V 'AttSxXuv avevpev, 'EiriSrv/aias Kal"Epuros 7]y epovevcravros, usre 
Kal ovros "Epuros av elw paStf]TT]s. — Dem. Cor. 236, 30. ovk av upKi^qpev 
$lXnnrov, usre rrjs elprjvns av 8 ir\ papr-n /ce l Kal ovk av a/j.(p6repa e?xe, Kal 
r))v elprjvnv, Kal ra. x rj3 P' ia " ■%-• Ag. 1, 26. irdvres iroXepiKa oirXa KarecrKeva^ov, 
3>sre tt]v ttSXiv ovr us av riyfjcu iroXepov epyaariipiov eTvai. 

Rem. 4. The Opt. without ay is used only in the case mentioned in § 227b, 
1, (b). When usre is connected with the Imp., or the imperative Subj. [§ 269, 
1, (a)], the dependent discourse is suddenly changed, with rhetorical emphasis, 
into the Oratio recta. Dem. Phil. 3. 129, 70. ypd<pu Se, 8>sre, av fiovXyo-be, 
Xe iporovfijo-are (I ask that you would decree, if you ivish, properly : decree, if 
you wish). So, likewise, 8>sre can be connected with a question. Dem. Aphob. 
858, 47. el 6 iraryp 7]izicrrei rovrois, Sr/Xov fri ovr av raXXa enter peirev, ovr av 
eKelv ovtu KaraXiiruv avro?s e<ppa£ev, &sre ir6&ev lo'ao'iv) (ergo wide scie- 
runt?) Comp. § 344, Rem. 6. # 

Rem. 5. Instead of usre with the meaning ita or ea conditione, ut, the post- 
Homeric language also uses i(p' ure (more seldom e<p' §), which refers to 
the demonstrative iirl rovru in the principal clause, either expressed or im- 
plied ; either the Fut. Ind., or the Inf. are here used, e.g. Her. 3, 83. iirl 
rovru 8e vire^icrraj.Lai rrjs apxys, in (pre vir ovSevbs v/xeuv dp^o fiai. X. 
H. 2. 2, 20. eiToiovvro elpyvnv, i fi q> rd re [xaxpa relxv KC ^ T ^> v TleLpaia KaSeX6v- 
ras AaKefJaipoviois eirea&ai. 4, 38. ol §e dir)XXa£av, icp 7 <£re elp-fjvyv exetv. 



$ 342.] COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OF MANNER. 553 

D. Adverbial Clauses denoting Manner and 

Quantity. 

$ 342. I. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Manner. 

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quality and man- 
ner, compare the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to 
quality and manner, with the predicate expressed in the adver- 
bial clauses. They are introduced by the relative adverbs, w?, 
wsre, GJS7rep, o7t(ds, which refer to a demonstrative adverb, e. g. 
onto?, in the principal clause, either expressed or understood. 

2. The use of the modes in these adverbial clauses corre- 
sponds with that in adjective clauses (§ 333), e. g. Aeyas ovtws, 
<£>? <f>povel<s (you speak as you think). Zevs Si&axrw, o7ro)<s e$e- 
Xet or o7rws av eSeXr) (j 333, 3), e/cacrTO) (gives to each, as he 
ivishes). Very often d>s av or ws7rep a v is used with the Opt. 
($ 333, 6). PI. Plmed. 87, b. e/xot yap So/cei o/xotws Aeyecr^ai 
raura, u>%ire.p av ri? 7rept avS-pomov vcpavrov Trpecrfivrov a7ro9-av6vTO<s 
Xeyot tovtov rov Aoyov. 

Remark 1. In comparisons, either the Present tense is used, since the com- 
pared object is placed in present view, or the Aor. [§ 256, 4, (c)]. In respect 
to the Modes, it is to be noted, that in Homer, the adverbs of comparison & s, 
& sre, yvre, are connected either with the Pres. or Aor. Ind., when the com- 
parison is stated as an actual fact, or with the Pres. Subj., or commonly with 
the Aor. Subj. (§ 333, Rem. 2. ; the Aor. Subj. often retains the appearance of 
the Put. by the shortening of the mode-vowel). R. k, 183. cos Sh tcvves irepl 
fir/Xa Bus co p-f) cr out a t 4v avAf) — , cos tcou wf}dv/j.os virvos curb fiXecpapoi'iv 6\co\ei. 
p, 434. Sire o-tt)\t) fieuei efiiredou, 'r\r iirl tv/a/Hco auepos ecrnrj/cei. k. 485, sq. 
cos 5e Xecov jXT)\oiGii> ao-rifxavTOLCTLV iireX&cov cuyetriv ■£) o'iecrcn kccko. cppovicov i v o - 
pov cry cos fxev Qpri'ixas avZpas iircpxcTO Tvoeos vlos (as it may happen that a lion, 
etc.). 

Rem. 2. Ovtco s (Los) — ws arc used in ivishes or asseverations, the clause of 
comparison, introduced by ds, expressing the asseveration or protestation. 
Thus in Latin, ita me dii ament, ut ego nunc laetor, may the gods love me, as 
I rejoice, = may the gods not love me, if 1 do not rejoice, or as sure as I wish the 
gods to love me, so sure I now rejoice. II. v, 825. el yap iycov ovt co ye Aibs rrcus 
alyi6xoio etnv . . , cos vvv vfJ-epn r)0€ kclkov cpepei 'Apyeloicri iracri /xaXct (would that 
I were the son of Zeus as truly as this day brings evil to all the Greeks). 

Rem. 3. In clauses introduced by cos, &sirep, cos re, an attraction of the 
Case sometimes occurs, particularly in the Ace. Lys. Accus. Agor. 492, 136. 
ovSa/xov io"riv 'Ay6paTov 'ASi7)ucuov fivai 'co strep p eta v fiovXov (should be 
auch as Thrasybulus is). But the Nom. is often found, for which a verb must bo 
supplied from the context. Dem. Mid. 363. expw avrhv to. ovtcx avaXio-KovTtx 
fosirep iyed, ovtco p.ev acpaipeitrdai t^v ulkvu. 

Rem. 4. An appositivc is often used with cos denoting comparison, as in 

47 



£54 syntax. p 343. 

Latin with ut, for the purpose of explaining the predicate of the principal 
clause. This & s, ut, expresses either comparison or limitation, and in the first 
case is to be translated by as, in the latter by for ; the former occurs, when it 
is presupposed that the object connected with d> s possesses in a high degree 
the thing affirmed in the predicate of the sentence ; the latter, when it is pre- 
supposed that the object possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed by 
the predicate of the sentence, S. 0. R. 1118. Aa'iov yap ?jv, etirep ris &\Xos, ma* 
t6s, &s vo/xevs avhp (ut pastor, as a shepherd ; the fidelity of shepherds be- 
ing presupposed). But Th. 4, 84. i)v 8e ou5^ advvaros, ws AaKedaip.6vios, 
€i7r€?v (ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian ; it being presupposed of Lacede- 
monians as a thing known, that they were not great orators). 



$ 343. II. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 

Quantity. 

1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quantity, compare 
the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to quantity or 
degree, with its predicate. The compared predicates are con- 
trasted either as equal or unequal to each other. 

2. The equality of the predicates is expressed in the follow- 
ing manner : — 

(a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative oVw 
(ocrov), which refers to the demonstrative toctovtio (too-ot>- 
tov), in the principal clause. 

X. Cy. 8. 1, 4. roffovrov Siacpepeiv r]fxas SeT rcav BouXcov, oaov ot fiev fiovXot 
&KovTes ro?s deo-rrSrais xm-nptrovaiv (it becomes us to excel slaves as much as slaves 
unwillingly serve their masters). 

(b) The adverbial clause is likewise introduced by So- to 
(oo-ov), which refers to the demonstrative roa-ovno (too-ovtov), 
in the principal clause ; the predicate of both clauses, however, 
stands either in the comparative or superlative. 

X. An. 1. 5, 9. (Kvpos) voftlfyv, haw /xkv av barro? e?&oi roaoirep 
airapaaKevaarorepcp jSacnAe? fxaxea^ai (quo [quanto] celerius — eo [tanto] 
imparatior, thinking that the quicker he came, the more unprepared he would find 
the king to fight). 0. 7, 42. oacp av Kal epol koivwv6s, Kal iraialv oXkov <pvAa£ 
a/xeivuv yivn, roaovrco Kal r ifiiure pa iv rep of km %an {quo [quanto] mehor 
— eo \tanto] honor atior, the — so much the). Hier. 1, 19. o a a> av TrXeico ris ira- 
pa&rjrai rh Trepirra, rcov inavcov, roaovrca baaaov Kopos i/Airfarei rr\s id(ti$r}s. 
Th. 8, 84. oacp /xaXiara Kal iAev&epoi rfaav vavrai, roaovrcp Kal Srpaffv- 
tut a irpos7rea6vres rbv fiia&bv air-prow. The Superlative may also stand in 
the first member, the Comp., in the last. Dem. 01. 1. 21, 12. oacp yap troi- 
u6rar y avrtp (rep \6ytp) doKOvjxev xPV^o-h roaovru (xaKXov airiarovai 
irdvres avrcp. 



$ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 555 

Remark 1. Sometimes TOffovra> is omitted, especially when the relative 
member of the comparison follows. PI. Gorg. 458, a. /xe7(ov yap avrb aya- 
&bu Tjyovfjicu, offooirep /j.e?^ov aya&ov iariu avrbu anaAAayrji'at Kanov rov jue- 
yiarov ?) &Woy airaWa^ai. Also after the omission of '6<rca — toctovtcc, both 
clauses may be blended into one, e. g. X. C 4. 1, 3. al dpia-rai 8okou<tcu efocu 
(bixreis fiaXiara ircuSeias Seovrai. 

Rem. 2. A comparative clause, introduced by &s, oir<as, rj (as), ocrov, and 
expressing a possibility, often serves to strengthen a superlative. X. C. 2. 2, 6. 
iiri/x€\ovv7ai ol yoveis irdura iroiovvres, oircas oi iraiSes avroTs yevwvrai cos Svua- 
rbv p4\Ti(TT0i (as good as possible, quam fieri potest optimi). Cy. 7. 1, 9. if 
au Svvwfxcu rdx^o'To- (as quick as possible). For the like purpose, also, 
ofos, on are used in connection with elvai. X. C. 4. 8, 11. e5o/cei toiovtos 
ilvai, olos av eiy apiffrSs ye avrip €v8ai/J.oy4(TTaTos. The following 
elliptical expressions originate from the omission of the verb: ou &p terra 
oTov xa^sTuraTov, or i fid\ terra, etc. (§ 239, Rem. 2). In the same 
manner, the expressions &s ahri&cos, in fact, really, &$ arexv&s, utterly, &s irdvv, ws 
£ttI rb ttoXv, plerumque, are to be explained ; also cos tKaarot, i. e. eKaerrot, cos 
eKaerrot -f]erav. 

3. The inequality of the predicates compared, is expressed 
by appending to the Comparative a coordinate clause with the 
comparative particle r\. See § 323. 

Rem. 3. The relation of quantity is expressed by comparing the predicate 
of the principal clause, in respect to its magnitude or degree, with the conse- 
quence or effect of that clause, the consequence being expressed by a subordi- 
nate clause with Sosre and the Inf. If the degree of the predicate in the prin- 
cipal clause stands in an equal relation with its effect, then the predicate of the 
principal clause is in the positive, e. g. ovrcos at/SpeTos ierrtv, Sjt« 3-au- 
fid^ea-bat. But if the relation is unequal, i. e. if the predicate of the princi- 
pal clause is represented as one which exists in a higher degree than another 
standing with it, then the Comparative is used with fj Sosre and the Inf., e. g. 
to KaK a, fie i Coo eerriv, $ Sosre avanXaietv (greater than that one, i. e. too great 
to be bewailed). See § 341, 3, (a). 



CHAPTER IX. 

$ 344. I. Interrogative Sentences. 

1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence 
or dependent upon it, e. g. Has the friend come ? and / do not 
know ivhether the friend lias come. The first is called a direct 
question, the last, indirect. Both may consist either of one 
member, or of two or more members, e. g. lias the friend come, 
or Has he not yet come ? Do you not know whether he is come or 
whether he is not coming ? According as the question refers to 
an object (person or thing) or to a predicate, the questions are 
divided into nominal and into predicative questions, e. g. who 



556 syntax. [$ 344. 

has done this? (nominal question), and hast thou written the 
letter ? (predicative question). 

2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in which the 
inquirer wishes to receive an answer on a single ivord in the 
sentence (subject, attributive, or object), are introduced by the 
substantive, adjective, or adverbial interrogative pronouns, -rt's, 

TTOtOS, 7r6(TO<5, 7rOT€pOS, 7RO?, 7TTJ, 7TOV, 7TO#l, 7TO$eV, 7TOCTe, etC. If the 

nominal questions are indirect, then they are introduced by the 
interrogative pronouns (§ 93, Rem. 1.) compounded with a 
relative : osris, 677-0105, 6?roo-os, OTrorepos, 07RDS, 07T7], o7rov, biroSeVy 
biroae, etc. 

Tis %X&ev] — Tl iroiels] — Ho?6v ere %wos (pvyev '4pnos 686vtcov ; — II £>s Ae- 
y^ts; — TV 6 ere (pevyere; — Ovk ol8a, '6srks effriv. — Ovk ol8a, 'Situs tovto rb 
irpayfia eirpa^ev. 

Remark 1. Often, however, the indirect question takes the character of 
the direct, and then the direct interrogative pronouns are used instead of the 
indirect. Sometimes, indeed, in clauses that immediately follow each other, 
the first clause takes the indirect interrogative, the last more seldom, the direct. 
Ovk ol8a, r is ravTa eirpa^ev. X. C. 4. 6, 2. e?7re /xoi — it o 76 v ti vofxi^eis ei)ffe~ 
fieiav elvai; yet there follows immediately, ex* iS ovv el-new , otto? 6s tis 6 evere- 
fi-fts effriv \ Comp. Rem. 2. PL Crit. 48, a. ovk &pa rjfxiv ovtw (ppovriffreov, ri 
epovffiv ol iroXXol T)p.as> aAA 5 r t 6 eTral'iwv irepl twv ducaicw Kal aS'iKcov. X. C. 4. 
4, 13. ov yap alff&dvo/xai ffov, oirolov v6p.1p.ov, $) tto?ov 8'ikcuov Xeyeis. — In 
indirect questions, the simple relative is sometimes used, instead of the indirect 
interrogative, e. g. '6s instead of ostis, oTos instead of dirotosy etc. 

Rem. 2. The adverb Trore, like the Latin tandem, is sometimes appended 
to the interrogative, in order to express the impatience or desire of the inquirer 
for an answer, or to denote wonder, or emotion in general. X. C. 1. 1, 2. 
irola> it or' expfoavro reKfirfpica ; (what proof, I pray, did they bring?) l.iroX- 
XaKis e&avp.acra, r iff 1 irore x6yois 'A&rjvaiovs eireicrav ol ypatydp.evoi ^caKpdrriv, 
&s &£ios etr] fravdrov tt? iroXei. R. L. 1, 1. ifrav/xaffa, orca it ore rpoirw tovt 
eyevero. 

Rem. 3. The article is prefixed to the interrogative, when one of the speak- 
ers has mentioned an object or quality, in order to define it more exactly, while 
the other does not expect this more exact definition, but interrupts the dis- 
course, and, by means of the article referring to that general definition, asks 
"what that means." PL Phaedr. 277, a. 2a>Kp. Nuj/ 87? iKelva t)'St7, S> Qcudpe, 
8vvdp.e&a Kpiveiv, tovtcov &p.oXoyT)p.evcov. #. T a irota; (in reference to the 
preceding eKe7va). 279, a. 2aw/>. Neos eri, 3) $a78pe, ' Iff k part) s' o p.evroi p.av- 
Tevop.ai kclt avro'v, Xeyeiv eSeXsa. <£. T b iro7ov 8t) ; So Ta iro?a ravra 
Xeyeis ; Prom this mode of expression, that is to be distinguished, in which a 
substantive with the article or a demonstrative follows an interrogative with- 
out an article. In this case, the inquiry relates to the nature or quality of an 
object already existing. II. it, 440. irolov rbv p.v&ov eenres ,- which the 
Eng. translates by means of two sentences, " What is that word, that thou 
hast spoken % " The word is already spoken, and the other now asks what it 
means. Her. 7, 48. 8a.ip.6vie av8pcov, Ko7a (= 7TG?a) ravra Xeyeis elvai 860 jxoi 
TToXejxiuraTa; (what are these two things which you say are most hostile to me?) 
PL Gorg. 521. a. e7rl irorepav ovv p.e irapanaXeTs r)]V frepdireiav ttjs ir6Xevs 
(= TTorepa iffrlv 77 frepdireia, ecp' "]V p.e irapaKaXels ,-) 



$ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 557 

Rem. 4. In order to make the subject matter of the question emphatic, when 
there is an antithesis, or a transition in the discourse, the words which denote this 
subject matter are often taken from their own sentence and placed first with t I 
8 p, and then the predicate of the proper interrogative clause is commonly placed 
with a second interrogative. PI. Rp. 341, d. tI Se KvfSepvr\T7]s ; 6 op&ws kv- 
fSzpvr]TT]s vavraiv &px<*>v ecrriv, t) vavrrjs ; Gorg. 502, a. t: 8e 6 iraTTjp avTov MehTjSj 
r) irpbs 7"b f3e\Tio~TOV f5\e~rrtov 48oKei tfoi Ki&apca8e?v ; 

Rem. 5. The expressions, ri fia&a>v, ri ira&Av, cur? why? always ex- 
press disapprobation or censure of that respecting which the question is asked. 
The former implies that the thing* censured was done designedly ; the latter that 
it was done accidentally, e.g. Ti /a a beau tovto eiroi-qcras ; {what has come into 
your mind to do this, with what object in view did you do this ?) Tl Tra&oov tovto 
iiroirjcras ; (quid expertus hoc fecisti ? what happened to you that you did this ?) PI. 
Apol. 36, b. Tt &|ios el/XL irabelv, r) airoT?crcu, <jtl [xa&oov 4v t§ f$icp ovx rjcrvxiav 
i)yov ; (what punishment do I deserve, that /purposely have had no rest in my life?). 

Rem. 6. A rhetorical turn of the Greek language, of frequent recurrence, 
consists in suddenly changing a subordinate clause, introduced by a conjunc- 
tion, into a direct interrogative clause, yet in such a way that the earlier con- 
struction remains unaltered. In such a case, the Eng. changes the subordinate 
clause into the principal, and the principal into the subordinate. X. C. 1. 4, 
14. ah 5e afjUpOTeptov tgov irXeiaTov a^icav tstvxv k ^ s ovk °* et °" ^ &*ovs 4Tri/xe\e7o'- 
Sai, &AA.' orav tl it o it) ar w a i, vofxiels avrovs o~ov <ppovTi£eiv ; (but what must the 
gods do, to make you believe that they care for thee ?). Dem. Phil. 1. 43, 10. ir6re 
a XPV 7rpa|6Te ; 4 ire l8 av tI yevnrai; (but what must take place if you are to 
do your duty?). Hence the elliptical expressions, 'Iva rlj us tI; (sc. yevq- 
tcu) to what purpose, for what object? '6tl ti; (sc. yiyverai), on what ground? 
So also in the adjective-clause, e. g. PL Phaed. 105, b. el yap ipoi6 /ae, § tv t I 
4f TtS (TUfxaTi iyye vr}Tai, &ep/xbv ecrTai, ov t)]V acrcpaAr) <roi 4pco air6Kpio-iv (if 
you would ask in what condition of body he must be, so that it might be warm ?) So 
also ti ov is inserted in the midst of clauses without change of construction 
(nihil non). Dem. Cor. 241, 47. vfipi£ofj.evcav Kal tl nanov oi>xl TacrxovTwv 
iraaa r) o'lKovfj-evn fxeaTT] yeyove 7rpo8oTa>v. 

Rem. 7. The Greek may place two, or even more interrogatives, without 
Kal, under one common predicate, e. g. litis tl ixp av aywvi(oi/xe^a ; (how and 
what?). [Comp. Eng. " what and what manner of time," riva t) ttolov Kaip6v, 1 
Pet. 1: 11.] PI. Rp. 400, a. iro7a 8' biroiov fiiov fii/jLTj/xaTa, ovk €%&> Keyeiv 
(what imitations and of what life?). Dem. Cor. t'ls t'lvos atriSs 4aTi; So 
also with the relative. Isocr. Archid. 124, 42. tls ovk olSev, 41- o'iuv £v/A<popwv 
els oo"nv ev8ai/xoviav Kar ecrTnaav . 

Rem. 8. Both the relatives and interrogatives in Greek are very often con- 
nected with a participle. Thus a great brevity in expression is effected ; the 
Eng. in this case changes the Part, together with the interrogative or relative 
belonging to it, into a principal clause, and the finite verb into a subordinate 
clause. X. C. 3. 7, 3. T771/ Se 4/xtjv 8wafj.iv, ecprj 6 Xapfj,i8r]s, 4v iroia> epyto Ka- 
t a(j.a&u>v Tavra fj,ov KarayLyvticrKeLS ; (by what work hast thou learned my ability, 
so that thou couldst pass such a sentence about me?). The Greek may also insert 
an interrogative clause between the article and the participle belonging to it, 
and in this way blend the two questions into one. X. C. 2. 2, 1. Kara/xe /xdfrriKas 
ovv tovs ti TroLovvras to ovofxa tovto airoKa\ovo'i ; instead of KaTa\xe\xabr)Kas, 
vivas to ovojxa tovto airoKaKovcrLV, Kal ri ■koiovo'lv ovtol, ovs t5 ovojxa tovto clttok- 
aXovoiv ; 

3. Predicative questions, i. e. those where the inquirer de- 
sires only an affirmation or denial to his inquiry, are expressed 
in English merely by placing the finite verb first and by the 

47* 



558 syntax. [$ 344. 

accentuation, e. g. Art thou sick ? Hast thou seen thy friend ? 
In Greek, also, the predicative question is indicated, in the first 
place, merely by the tone of the question and the position of 
the words, the word on which the stress of the question lies, 
being placed first in the sentence ; still tins mode of expression 
is not very common; it is used most frequently, when the ques- 
tion involves a certain degree of emotion. 

Od. e, 204. ovro) 5r/ oi/coVSe (piArjv is irarplSa ycuav avriKa vvv e&eAeis Uuai; 
This is found very often with negatives, e.g.Ok iStzKus Uvai; 

4. In the second place, the predicative question is introduced 
by certain interrogative s ; this is the more common usage. In 
indirect questions, these interrogative s are translated by whether. 
When the predicative question consists of more than one mem- 
ber, and of such a nature that one member is excluded by the 
other {disjunction, § 323), then one of the interrogatives stands 
in the first member, while r\, or {an), stands in the second and 
following members. 

5. The interrogatives in the predicative questions are the 
following : — 

(a)' r H implies an asseveration (§ 316, 2), and hence is used when it is sup- 
posed that that which forms the subject of the question actually exists. X. Cy. 
1. 4, 19. ^ ovroif d> 7ro7T7re, iroXefuoi etVif, ot £(p€(TT-f]Kaai to?s i]pip.a ; HoKe/xioi iikv 
rot, ecprj. PI. Pp. 341, e. f\ 6p&a>s o~oi 8o/ccD, e(p7]V, av elveiv ovrca Xeycou, fj oti ; 
'Op&ws, e<pn. Very often used in connection with other particles, e. g. pA\v 
(§ 316, 1), 5tj, H ttov (§ 315, 1, 2), Stjto ($ 315, 3), &pa, ydp [§ 324, 2, 3, (a)], 
Kai, irov (§ 316, 2), Trob &pa. X. 0. 4, 23. ri Xiyeis, 8> Kvpe; % yc\p orb 
reus (reus x*P a ^ rovrai/ tl icpirevaas ; (Now did you actually plant any of these 
with your own hands ?). T H ydp; (is it not true ?). PI. Hipp. Min. 363, c. % y dp, 
5 'liriria,idv ri ipcoraae ^onKpar-ns, airoKpive? ,-^H irov; (surely? surely indeed?). 
PI. Lysid. 207, d. ^ irov, fy 8' iyd>, & Avert, <r<poSpa <pi\*i <re o irar^p koI y fi-firyp; 
Udw 76, ^ S' '6s. Still, ^ irov is also used when the inquirer would express 
doubt whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned. 
Eur. Med. 695. % irov reT6hp.r]K ipyov aX<rx i(TT0V To5e ; (has Jason indeed, 
actually dared this thing ?). 

(b) ? A/)a (only post-Homeric) originates from the inferential &pa, igitur 
[§ 324, 3, (a)], and hence implies the idea of consequence, effect; by frequent 
use, however, the appropriate meaning (igitur), becomes weakened and ob- 
scured: hence the inferential particles &pa, ovu are sometimes added to a 
question introduced by c\pa. ^Apa leaves it undecided, whether the inquirer 
expects an affirmative or negative answer. Hence, when it is to be definitely 
indicated, that either an affirmative or a negative answer is expected, then in 



§ 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 559 

the first case, d.p ob (nonne), is used; in the last case, apa fi-f] (num, whether? 
is it not ?); fit always expresses solicitude, fear. X. C. 3. 6, 4. d.p ecpn 6 3,coKpdr7]s, 
&sivep, <pi\ov oTkov el ab%r\o~ai (SovXoio, irXovo'idorepov avrbv eirixeipoiris av Troirj<rcu ; 
Tldvv jxev oZv, Z<pri. 10,1. apa, e<p7], £> Tiappdaie, ypa<piK7i eo~Tiv 7] elKacria 
twv opw/xevuv ; — 'A X Tj^rj X eye is, e<pT). 2. 6, 16. "dp ovv ola&d Tivas, 0$ avco- 
obeAets ovres wcpeXi/xovs dvvavTai (piXovs TreieioSrat ; Ma AC ob Stjt' e(pr]. 3. 13, 
3. ap ovv, e<pr), Kal olnsTai crov axdwrat Trivovres re abrb Kal Xovo/xevoi avrw ; 
Ma tou AC, ecprj (profecto non aegre ferunt). 4, 2, 22. dp' ovv Sia. ttjv tov %aA- 
v.eveiv a/j.a&tav tov 6v6/j.aros rovrov rvyxdvoviriv; Ob drjra. 1.5,4. apa ye 
ob XPV "fdvra dvBpa, rjyrjo'dfievov t)]V eyKpdreiav aperr\s eivai jcpijirlSa, ravr-qv 
irpaiTov iv Trj i\/vxv KaTaffKevdcraor^rai ; (nonne certe). 2.6,34. a.pa /at) Siafidx- 
AeoSai 56^eis utt' eiiov ; 4. 2, 10. ti 8e 877 fiovXofievos aya&bs yevecr&ai, e</)7j, Si Eb- 
Svb'yfj.e, avXXeyeis to. ypdpuara ; — ''A pap.)) laroos ; e(p7) • — Kal 6 Eb&vdrip.os • 
Ma At', e(p7], ovk eycaye. 0. 4, 4. "dp a [*.7] alayyv^p-ev rbv Tlepo~Siv fiaaiXea 
/iii/Afio'acr&ai ; Double question : PI. Euthyphr. 9, e. Z.pa rb ocriov, '6ri '6<ri6v io~Ti, 
$iXe?Tai virb twv Se&v, $\, on (ptXurai, ocri6v iari ; (is then that which is holy loved 
by the gods because it is holy, or is it holy because it is loved ?) 

(a) M&v (probably originating from ^ and the confirmative ovv, § 316, 
Rem.), corresponds entirely to the Latin num, is it not ? is it so ? whether ? and 
hence always leads one to expect a negative answer. For the sake of perspi- 
cuity, the particles ovv and /jltj are often added, e. g. p.a>v ovv, /xwv fi-f]. But 
if the negative ob is added to p.Siv, then the question is affirmative (nonne). PL 
Lysid. 208, c. aXX' opx et T 'S gov ; "OSe iraidayooySs, e<pr\. M.<ov dovXos &v ; (but 
not a slave, is he ?) Eur. Hec. 754. ri xpyp** f*ao~Tevovo-a ; fxwv iXev&epov aluva 
&eo~&ai ; pdb~iov yap ecrri croi. Hecuba answered : O b Srjra • rovs KaKovs 5e ti/xco- 
poviievn alwva rbv ^vfxiravTa dovXevo'ai &eXai. Eur. Andr. 82. /j. w v ovv doKe?s 
o~oi (ppovrtcrai riv ayye\u>v ; PL Phaed. 84, c. ti, e<pr], v/j.7v ra Ae^freVra ; /x w v 
(j,^ Sone? ivdecos Aeyea&ai; — 'Ev oh ri XP*I V "iroieiv ijxi ; fiwv obx airep eiroiovv ; 
(nonne, quod faciebam ?) 

(d) There is the same difference between ob and /x-h when used without 
Z.pa, as when used with it, see (b) : i. e. ob is used in affirmative questions, fi-q in 
negative. Ovk ifreheis livai; (non or nonne vis ire % do you not wish to go?) PL 
Prot. 309, a. ob av fj.hvroi 'O^pov ivaiveTris el ,• (are you not in fact an eulogist? 
on fievroi, see § 316, Rem.). On ovkovv (nonne igitur) and oVkovv (nonne 
certe) in a question, see § 324, Rem. 7. X. C. 4. 2, 10. aAAa /mt) apxireKTwv 
&ov\ei yevecrfrai; Ovk olv eyco-/, e<pr}. 'AA\a fxrj yeccfterp-ns im^vjj.e?s, tcpy, 
yevea&ai ayaSrSs ; Ou8e yeuaerpris, %<py\ ktX. 2, 12. /i^ ovv, e<pr) 6 EvSrvdr]/j.os, 
ob Svvauai iycb ra rrjs SiKaioo-irvrjs epya e^r}yi]<Tao'^ai ; (sliall I not be unable, etc. ? 
the negative ob belongs to the single word dvvcofiai). This interrogative fx-q is 
used very often in an indirect question, after expressions of considering, ask- 
ing, inquiring, of solicitude and fear. It appropriately means, whether not, but m 
Eng. can be often translated by that. X. C. 4. 2, 39. (ppovrlCa, ^ Kpario-rov 
fj i*oi -aiyav (lam anxious whether it is not best). For more examples of /x-f] and 
also for the construction, see § 318, Rem. 6. 

(e) Elra and e ire it a, and more emphatically k%tu, k& ire it a, introduce 



560 syntax. [$ 344 

questions of astonishment, indignation, and irony. They express antithesis of 
contrast, and yet, since they show that an unexpected conclusion has been 
drawn from a previous thought (§ 312, Kem. 8). X. C. 1. 4, 11. ev fo&i, ecp-n, 
on, el vojxiQoi^i Sfeobs av&pw-ircov ri cppovri^eiv, ovk av a/xeAoi-nv avrwv. 2. *E ir e l r 
ovk oUi <ppovri£eiv ; cit irpSrrov fxev /xovov ra>v tyow &v&pwrrov op&bv avecrr-naav ktA. 
(and yet do you not think that they do care for men?). Cy. 2.2,31. K&ireiru 

TOtOVTOV OVTtX OV (plAe?S ttVT 6v J 

(f) U6repov (ir6repa) — ^ (Homer ^ — tf) is used like the Latin utrum — 
an, in direct and indirect double questions. Uorepov is sometimes omitted in 
the first member. X. C. 2. 3, 6. Kal 6 ^wKpdr-ns ecp-n' Hot e pa de, 5 XaipeKpa- 
res, ovBevl apecrai bvvarai XaipecpSiv, f) eariv ols Kal -irdvv apitrnei; Cy. 3. 1, 12. 
ri Se, %v xpT\[na.Ta. ttoAAo, exy, eas irAovrelv, r) irevnra iroLels ; C. 1.4, 6. ravra 
ovrco TcpovorjTiK&s ireirpay/xeva, airopels, it or e pa rvx~ns, ? h yv&WS epya eariv ; 

(g) "AAAo ri tj (arising from &AAo ri ecrri or yiyverai, % or yevoir &v, %) and 
&AAo Tt,has the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4. 7, 5. oA Ko ti -if) ovSev 
KwAvei -napiivai ; (does anything else than nothing hinder = does anything hinder ?) 
PI. Hipparch. 236, e. ciAAo ri ovv o'lye <piAoKepde7s cpiAovcri rb KepSos ; 

(h) y H, like the Lat. an, is properly used only in the second member of the 
question ; but often the first member is not expressed in form, but is contained 
in what precedes or may be easily supplied from it. y H can then be translated 
by perchance. X. C. 2. 3, 14. tto.vt 'dpa o~v ye ra iv av&pc&irois cp'iArpa eiricrrdiie- 
vos iraAai cnreKpinrrov • 7) oKveh, ecp-n, dp^ai, fir] alcrxpbs (pavfjs, eav irpSrepos rbv 
adeAcpbv ev iroifjs ; ( = ?) &pa — aireKpvirrov, 77 pKveh — ;) 

(i) £i and idv [with the Subj., comp. § 339, 2, II, (b)], whether, is used only 
in indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in double questions, and de- 
notes a wavering or doubting between two possibilities ; but often only one 
member is expressed, while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. 
Hence el and eav are especially used after verbs of reflecting, deliberating, inquir- 
ing, asking, trying, knowing, and saying. The connection must determine whether 
the interrogative sentence has an aflirmative sense (whether — not), or a nega- 
tive one (whether). X. An. 7. 3, 37. cue^ai, el 6 'EAA-nvccv vofxos koAAlov £%€*, 
(whetJier — not). C. 1. 1, 8. ovre rep a-rpar-nyiKcp drjAov, el (whether) avjxcpepet. 
crpar-nyetv ovre rep nvoAiriKcp SrjAov, el (whether) o-vfxcpepei tt)S iroAeas 
irpocrrarelv ' ovre rep KaA^v yi^xavTi, 'iv evcppaivrjrai, drjAov, el (whether — 
not) 5ia ravr-nv avidcrerai, ovre rep dvvarobs ev rfj ir6Aei Krjdeo-ras AafiSvri SrjAov, 
el (whether — not) Slc\ rovrovs areprjcreTai rrjs -iroAews. C 4. 4, 12. CKerpai, eav 
rode (ro\ ixaAAov ape (Tier). PI. Apol. 18, a. Seo/^ot vp.S>v tovtco rbv vovv irpose- 
X*iv, el St/cam Aeyia, f) fx-r]. — On el after verba affeciuum, see § 329, Rem. 7. 

Rem. 9. Yery frequently, especially in Homer, verbs which express some 
action, are constructed with this deliberative eav with the Subj. and el with 
the Opt. (Epic e'l «e, at Ke), in which case a verb like OKo-nelv, ireipacrbaiy 
is to be supplied by the mind. Th. 1, 58. Tloridaiarai. eire/x^av /j.ev Kal iraf? 
'A&rjvaiovs Trpeafieis, ei ttcos ireicr eiav (having sent envoys to the Athenians [to see, 
to ascertain] whether they could persuade them). II. v, 17 2. yAavmowv 5' l&bs <pepe- 
rai (JLevei, tfp riva Trecpvy avdpwv. 

(k) Eire — el re are used in indirect questions like el — *?, except that 



f 344. J INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 561 

by efre — eire the indecision and hesitation of the speaker between two possi- 
bilities, are made more prominent. S. Ant. 38. Kal deists rdxa, *Xt evyev^s 
irecpvKas, cXt eoSXav natti]. The poets also say efre — ■#, or el — eiVe, or they 
omit the first efr-e altogether. 

6. On the use of Modes in interrogative sentences, the fol- 
lowing points are to be noted : The Ind. is used in direct and 
indirect questions ; it is also used after /x-q in indirect questions, 
when the interrogator wishes to express his conviction, that 
that which is the object of his anxiety or fear actually exists. 
The Subj. and Opt. are used in deliberative questions [§ 259, 1, 
(b), and 2] ; but the Opt. also (after an Hist, tense), when the 
question is to be represented as the sentiment of another (§ 345, 
4), and also when the question depends on a clause expressing 
a wish ($333, 5). The Opt. with av and the Ind. of the histor- 
ical tenses with av, are used as in principal clauses, § 260, 2, 
(2) and (4). 

Tt \4yeisj (Also in questions expressing wonder or astonishment, the 
Greeks use the Ind., e. g. ttus old a; (how could I know?) — El ire, on Ae 
yets; Th. 3, 53. (pofiov/xeSa, /jl tj ajAcportpoiv 77 /xapr-h Ka/xev. X. Cy. 3. 1, 27. 
opa, jur| iiceivovs o3 Secret ere auHppovlfav !Vi /xaWov, r) fifJias vvv i84r]<rev. Tl 
eiirwfjLei'; (what can toe say, what are we to say ?) — Ouk olda, o n sXirwfxsy 
(I know not what we can, shall say). Od. e, 473. SeiSw, ^rj Srr)peo~aw '4\ap Kal 
Ki>pp.a y e v w p. a i (that I shall become). X. C. 4. 2, 39. (ppovTtfa, /xr] Kpdriarov 
77 pot criyav (whether it is not best). Ovk e?x<w, otto i r pa-Koifx-nv. PL ftp. 614, 
b. avafiaiovs eXeytv, a licet XSoi ( what he Jiad seen there ). ^Apd fioi i&sXrio-ais 
av ebreiif (sc. eX (T€ epwTcpnv) ) X. An. 6. 1, 28. £kuvo ivvow, /at) Xiav av rayy 
aw (ppovi a&e i7j v. C. 4. 2, 30. irpbs ce airofSXeirw, eX /xoi i&eX-naais av 
ifryi'ioracrdai (sc. €t fiovKoio). — ^Apd ae eiretaa &v (sc. et a o i ravra eAe|a) ; 
(persuasissemne tibi?) X. Apol. 28. av 5e, Z> (piXraTe 'AtroXXoSwpe, fxaXXov av 
ifiovXov p.* dp civ SiKalus, ?] aSt/cws a-Kohv^aKOvra ; (vellesne?) Ovk oJS eX as 
tire ia a a v. 

Rem. 10. On fxi) (whether — not) with the Opt. after a principal tense, see 
§ 345, Rem. 2. On the Ind. of the principal tenses, and also on the Subj. af- 
ter an historical tense, see § 345, 5. When the Subj. is followed by an Opt., then 
the latter, as in final clauses (§ 330, 3), expresses the more remote thought. II. 
7r, 650, sq. <ppd(ero Svp.y . . p-epjiripifav, 4) ^877 Kal ksivov. "EKrcop xaA/cq[> Sri way 
arr6 t wjxwv Teux*' e A 77 T a 1, 7*) en Kal rrXrjoveaaiv 6<peXXeiev irSvov alirvv. 

7. The answer made to predicative questions by yes, is com- 
monly expressed by repeating the word which contains the sub- 
stance of the question. The answer made by no, is usually 
expressed by prefixing ov to the word which contains the sub- 
stance of the question. Yes is also expressed by vat, vr] tov 



562 



SYNTAX. 



[§ 346. 



Ata, navv, Kapra, ev and the like, </>?7/xi, cprjfA €7(0, eyw with- 
out ffnjfiC] and no, by ov, ov <j>r)[xi, ovk eyw. Commonly also 
strengthening adverbs are joined with the words which answer 
a question: ye (§317, 2), e. g. eywye, ovk eywye; yap (§ 324, 2), 
rot (§ 317, 3), il£vtol ($ 316, Rem.), bw [$ 324, 3, (b)], /xev- 
ouv (§316, Rem.). The answer to nominal questions is made 
by naming the object respecting which the inquiry is made. 

Eur. Hipp. 1395, sq. bpas fte, Zeairoiv, cos ex&j, rbu &&Mov ; — 'Opu>. lb. 90, 
sq. ol<r& olv, fSpoToiaiv ts Ka§£aT7)K€V v6p.os ; — Ovk olda. X. C. 4. 6, 14 
(py s ah a/xeiuco tto\Itt}v thai, tu crv iiraiveTs, $ %v iydo ; — &r)p.l yap ovv. 



§345. n. Oblique or Indirect Discourse. 

1. When the words or thoughts of a person, whether the 
second or third person or the speaker himself, are again re- 
peated, unaltered, in precisely the same form as they were 
stated by us or another person, then the discourse or thought 
quoted, being independent of any view or representation 
of the narrator, is called direct discourse (oratio recta), e. g. 1 
thought: peace has been concluded. The messenger an- 
nounced: peace has been concluded, — or without a preced- 
ing verb : peace has been concluded. 

2. When the words are not repeated in the precise form in 
which they were first spoken, but are referred to the rep- 
resentation of the narrator, and thus are made to depend 
upon a verb of perception or communication (verbum sen- 
tiendi or declarandi), standing in the principal clause, the 
discourse is called indirect {oratio obliqud), e. g. We believed, 
that peace was concluded. The messenger announced, that 

PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. " . 

3. The principal clauses of direct discourse, to which also 
belong clauses introduced by coordinate conjunctions, e. g. 
koll, Se, yap, ovv, kolitoi, etc., are expressed in oblique discourse, 
when they contain a simple affirmation or an opinion, and de- 
note something which happens, has happened, or will happen : 
(a) either by the Ace. with the Inf. ($ 307, 6), or by on and 
ws with the finite verb ($ 329), or even by the participle [$ 310, 
4, (a)], e. g. 'E7r^yyeiAe toiis iroXefxiov^ a7roc^>vyeiv — on 01 



$ 345.] OBLIQUE OR INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 563 

7roAe/xto6 a.7rocf>vyoi€v — tovs iroXefJLiovs airocjivydvTas ; when 
they express a command, wish, or desire: (b) by the Inf. and 
in continued oratio obliqua by Setv, xp^rai with the Inf., more 
seldom by the Inf. alone., ($306), e. g. *E\e£e tols Q-Tpa.TLojTa.Ls 
e7ri#ecr#cu tols 7toX€jj.lols (oratio recta, hrlSeoSe). 

Remaek 1. Intermediate clauses of the oratio obliqua, and particularly such 
as are connected with the preceding by yap, although they are grammatically 
principal clauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the Opt. without any 
conjunction to introduce them ; commonly a sentence expressed by on or &s 
with the Opt. or by the Ace. with the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7. 3, 13. Z\eyov ttoAAo* 
Kara. Tavrd, on iravrbs a*M \4yot, ^ev^rjs ■ x^^v yap e X 77, Kal ovre 0f/ca5e airoTrXeTu 
r<£ ISov\oix4va> hvvarov ett\, K. r. A. H. 3. 2, 23. aivoKpiva^vwv Se tuv 'HAeiW, 
art ov iroirjaeiay ravra' i-mXrj'tdas yap %x 0lev tos 7roAets • (ppovpav %<pr\vav oi 

&pGPOl. 

4. The subordinate clauses of direct disccarse, undergo no 
change in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical 
tense in the principal clause, they take the Opt. in the place of 
the Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre- 
sented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub- 
ordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of 
the person spoken of, and not that of the narrator. "Av, which 
is joined with the Opt. and Ind. of the historical tenses, still 
remains in indirect discourse. • 

X. An. 7. 1, 33. (KoipardSrjs) eAeyev, on eroi/xos 6^77 riyeicr&at. avro?s . . , evidti 
ttoAAcc Kal aya&d \-r\tyoivTo (oratio recta: croifx-os el/xi . ., Zi>&a totyea&e). Ag. 1, 
10. Ti(r<ra(p4pv7]s iofxoaeu 'Ayqai\du, el aire la" air 0, '4cos eh&o lev, ovs ir4/x~ 
i|/ e t e ivphs (SaaiXza ayyeAovs, dta-n-pd^eo^ai avrw acpeHrrjvai avToi/6y.ovs Tas if rff 
'Acta ir6\eis 'EW-quiBas (oratio recta : iav o-irziay, ews av ehSwaiv, o'bs ireijutyoi . . 
oiairpdlojxai). 

Rem. 2. When, however, the subordinate clauses of direct discourse would 
be expressed by the Ind. of an historical tense, the Ind. remains even in indi- 
rect discourse, because the Opt. would leave it undetermined, whether in direct 
discourse the Ind. of a principal tense, or the Ind. of an historical tense had 
been used. X. An. 7. 7, 55. ol GTpan&rai iXzyov, ws 'Eeuocpuu o?x 0lTO Tpbs 2eu- 
&r)v olKT]o-(au Kal a bir 4cr x* T ° avrai aTro\7]\l/6fj.euos (oratio recta: H. oXx*to irpbs 
2. a vir 4crx* T ° aTro\r)ip6/xei>os). X. C. 2. 6, 13. ijKOvaa, on YlepiKXris ttoAAos 
(iircpdas) iiviaTaLTO, as iirdSwv rfj Tr6\ei eiroiei avT-qv <pihziv abr6v (oratio recta; 
n. e'7n<7TaTai, as . . i-rroiei). But subordinate clauses with on (quod, quia) fol- 
low the principal rule (Xo. 4). X. H. 7. 1, 34. e?xe (rieAo7ri5as) Ae'yeu/, ws Aa/cc- 
daijx6vioi Sia. tovto TroXffj.'^o'eiau auTo7s (to?s ®rifiaiois), bri ouk i&e\7]0~aiev 
uer *Ayno~iKdov i\de7v eV o.\>t6v (rbv /3atnAea), oratio recta: A. dia tovto eVo- 
\4u.T)o-av, on ouk r\&4xt)(rav. The reason why the Greek avoids the Subj. in 
indirect discourse after a principal tense, is, that it always uses its Subj. only 
with reference to the Future [$ 257, 1, (a)]. But the use of the Opt. after a 
principal tense is inappropriate, because this, as being the Subj. of the histor- 
ical tenses, always accompanies the historical tenses. There are. bowever, a 
few single examples, in which the Opt. follows a principal tense. But then a 



564 syntax. [$ 345, 

thought is quoted as the sentiment of another, who, at the moment of quota- 
tion, is to be represented as one no longer present. Her. 7, 103. op a, jxfy part}* 
k6^-kos 6 x6yos 6 elpnfievos eXn (whether the statement made was not idle boasting) 
X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. dv ns eKeltre e £ ayyelXn 8^, cos eyco f3ovXoi/j.r)v fj.iya\nv &7j- 
pav Troirjaai (if any one announces there, that I intended). C. 1. 2, 34. €i /xeu 
yap (tt)v tcov Xoycov rex^nu) abv rots op&cos (Xeyofxevois elvai vofjci^ovres direx*cr&ai 
KeXevere), SrjXov on dcpeKreov ely rod op&cos Xeyeiv {if you mean that philosophy 
is not to be used in reasoning right, it is evident that it was your view, that we 
must abstain from reasoning right). Hence if the Greek, after a principal tense, 
wishes to represent a statement as the sentiment of another person, it must use 
the Ace. with the Inf. instead of on with the Subj. Thus, e. g. the English 
phrase, He says that we are immortal, is not to be expressed in Greek by Xeyei, 
on 7]fxe?s dSdvaroi 3>jxev, or on t\. a&. el/xev, but by Xeyei rifxas d&avd- 
rovs elvai. — In hypothetical Protases with el and the Ind., the Ind. remains. 

Hem. 3. The oblique discourse is sometimes used even in the subordinate 
clauses of direct discourse, when the speaker wishes to bring forward an ex- 
pression or thought, not in his own person, but as the sentiment of another. Her. 
7, 2. earacria^ov (ol Traldes), 6 fxeu ''Aprafia^dvns, Karon irpecrf3vrar6s re el r\ irav- 
rbs rod yovov, Kal on vofii^o/xeva elrj tt pb s irdvr cov av&panrew, rbv Trpecrfivrarov 
t))v dpxV ex* iv ' Se'plrjs 8e, cos 'Aroacrns re ttois eln, Kal on Kvpos etr) 6 KTTjLrdfx- 
evos rolai Hepayai tt)v eXev&np'njv. 

Rem. 4. When the Opt. of oblique discourse is used instead of the Subj. of 
direct discourse, all the conjunctions may be connected with dv. Th. 8, 54. Kal 
i^vcpiaavTO irXevtravra rbv UelcravSpov Kal 5e/ca dvdpas fxer avrov irpdcrcreiv, oiry 
Uv avrois Soko it] dpiara e^eiv. X. H. 2. 4, 18. 6 p.dvns irapfiyyeiXev avrois, /J.rj 
7rp6repov eTuri&ea&ai, irplv av rcov ccperepcov r) tt e c o i ns, f/ r p co&e it). 5.4, 
47. eiceXeve TrpoKaraXafieiv re &Kpov Kal cpvXarreiv, ecos dv avrbs eX&oi. 

5. Very often, however, in Greek the oblique discourse takes 
the form of the direct, since even after an historical tense in 
the principal clause, the predicate of the subordinate clause is 
expressed by the Ind. of the principal tenses and by the Subj., 
as in direct discourse. The actions and representations be- 
longing to the past, are thus transferred to the present time of 
the speaker, and assume a more direct and definite character 
than if they were stated in the form of indirect discourse 
(§ 327, Rem. 2). 

X. Cy. 2. 2, 1 . del fxev ovv eirefxeXer o 6 Kvpos, SirSre cTvffKnvolev, '6-ircos evxa-pw- 
rSraroi xSyoi ififiXri^'fio'ayrai. Comp. § 327, Rem. 2. H. 2. 3, 2. e5o|e t<£ 
Srj/j.a} rpiaKovra eXetr&ai, oi robs nvarpiovs vojxovs l-vyyp dipo vcri, /ca^' ovs tto- 
Xir ever over i. Her. 1, 1G3. eKe Xe v e rrjs eavrov x&P 7 )"* o'lKeTi/, o kov fiovXov- 
rai. Th. 2, 4. oi UXarairjs ifiovXevovro, elr e Kar a k aver over iv, costrep 
exovciu, e[xirpT\cravres rb oXKnfxa, elre n &XXo xP"h (T0VT al ' 1 3 107. e8o|e 5' 
avrois ffKtyaafrai, orco rp6trco dtrcpaXecrrara 5 lairopev tro vrai. Her. 1, 29. 
bpKioitri fxeyaXoiai Kareixovro 'A&nva'ioi, Se/co erea xpvo~ea&ai v6/xoiai, robs d> 
o~cpi ~Z6Xco)/ 3- r\ r a i. X. Cy. 4.5, 36. robs Imreas e/ceAevtre (pvXarreiv robs aya~ 
ySvras, ews dv ns at]\i.dvn. H. 2. 1, 25. AvaavSpos §e rds rax^ras rwv ve&v 
eKeXevaev eTrea&ai ro?s 'A&nvaioiS' eireiddv 5e eK(3a>(ri, Kand6uras '6 rt 
rroiovoiv, aTroirXetv. On '6n, cos (that), see § 329, 4 and Rem. 3. 



4 346.] ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGY. 565 

Rem. 5. The Imperfect (seldom the Plnpf.) Indicative, referring to the his- 
torical tense of the principal clause, is sometimes used instead of the Pres. 
(Perf.), in a subordinate clause which is associated with other suboi'dinate 
clauses in the Opt. X. An. 1. 2, 2. Kvpos tovs cpvydSas iKeAevcre avv abrtp arpa- 
Teuecrdxu, xnrocrx^^vos avrols, el KaA&s Karairpd^eiev, ifi a i o~t p ar eu ct o, ^77 
irpoadev iravffaa&cu, irplv avrovs Karaydyot ofcade. (Oratio recta: iav Karairpd^'j), 
i<p y a (TTparevo/xaiy ov irp. iravaofxai, irplv av v/xas KaTaydyca). But the Ind. is also 
used in the subordinate clauses of oblique discourse, when the narrator intro- 
duces his own remarks and explanations into the statement or thought of 
another, or when the thoughts in the subordinate clause do indeed belong to 
the statement or idea of another, but are to be exhibited as definite facts or as 
general truths, or when the thoughts of the other are to be represented, at the 
same time, as those of the narrator. In oblique discourse, the Ind. and Subj. 
are often interchanged with the Opt. Then there is a mingling of the direct 
and indirect discourse in order to form a coutrast between the certainty, reality, 
fact, and directness expressed by the two former, and the uncertainty, possibility, 
mere conception, and indirectness denoted by the latter. X. An. 2. 3, 6. %Keyov 
'6ti tiKora do Ko?e v Aeyeiv j8ao"iA.e?, Kal rjKoiev r)yefx6vas ex°VTes, ot avrovs, 
iav at crirovSal y 4vc»vt ai, a£ovaiv, ev&ev e£oua-i ra iirirrjSeia. 3. 5, 13. 
Ofioiot tfo'av &av/j.d£ovTes y oVot 7tot€ t p4\j/ ocrai ol "EWrjves, Kal ri iv v$ 
tX 0l€J/ ' 

6. The Greek can also use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of 
the finite verb, in every kind of subordinate clauses. 

Her. 6, 117. &vdpa 01 SoKeetv 6itA(t7)v avTicrTTJvai fj.4yav, rod (instead of ou) 
to yeveiov ttjv ao~iri8a iracrav o-Kid^iv. 6, 84. liKv&as (sc. (pacri) tovs vofidSas, 
irrei re o~(pi Aapeiov is fiaKtlv is tV X&PWi Mctcs ravTa fie/xovevai [xiv TtVatr- 
Sai (postquam invasisset). Th. 4, 98. ot 'A&rivaloi e<pao~av, el /xev iiwcAeov dvvn- 
& rival tt)s iKelvuv Kparr]crai, tovt av ex en/ ( SI ampliorem illorum agri partem in 
suam potestatem redigere possent se earn retenturos). See Larger Grammar, 
Part II, $ 849. 

PvEM. 6. The spirited mode of representation among the Greeks, and the 
desire to make past events appear as present, often changes the indirect dis- 
course into direct, or the direct into the indirect. In the first case, there is of- 
ten an interchange of person, comp. § 329, Rem. 3. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. ivTavba 
8r) tov Kvpov yeXaaai re e/c twv irp6o~bev SaKpvcov Kal elirelv avTcp airiSvTa frapfieTv, 
Sti irapkarai avTois hxiyov xp^ vov ' &ST6 opav o~oi e£ecrrcK, Kav fiovAr), dcr/cap- 
Safj.vKT€i. On the contrary, An. 7. 1, 39. e'A&cbj/ 5e KXtavSpos • MaAa poAis, e<pr), 
Siairpa^dfievos tjkw Aeyeiv yap 'Ava^ifiiov, oti ovk iirir^eiov enj, k. t. A. 



TTT. Special peculiarities in the construction of 

WORDS AND SENTENCES. 

$ 346. Ellipsis. Brachylogy {Zeugma). Contraction. 
Pleonasm. 

1. Ellipsis is the omission of a sentence or a part of a sen- 
tence which is logically subordinate, and hence of less impor- 
tance, but viewed grammatically, must necessarily be supplied 
in order to express an idea or thought. The idea of the omit- 

48 



586 syntax. [$ 346. 

ted woid can only be of a very general and indefinite nature, 
and is frequently contained in the idea of the qualifying word, 
as, e. g. ol SvrjTOL (sc. av$pa)iroi), r) avptov (sc. rj/xipa), or is evident 
from the context or frequent usage, as e, g. in efc SiSao-KoAov 
uVat. In like manner, the omitted sentence must express a 
general idea, and hence one which may be readily supplied, or 
one which is indicated by the context. The single instances 
of Ellipsis have been noticed in the course of the Grammar. 
See Index under Ellipsis. 

2. Ellipsis is to be distinguished from brevity of expression 
or Brachylogy. In Ellipsis, there is an actual omission of an 
element, grammatically necessary to express an idea or thought; 
but in Brachylogy, there is not a real, but only apparent omis- 
sion of such an element, that element being in some way in- 
volved in the sentence or in a member of it. The simplest 
instances of brevity of expression have already been presented 
($ 319, Rem. 1). The following additional instances may here 
be mentioned : — ■ 

(a) One form of a verb must often be borrowed from another. Th. 2, 11. 
(a^iovai) t\\v tcov irekas (yrjv) Srjovy fy r\v eavrwv dpav (sc. dr)ov[x4vr}u). 

(b) In antitheses, one member must often be supplied from the other. Dem. 
01. 3. 30, 17. iirpd^afxev ^ue?s (sc. -n-pos eKeivovs) /cal itceTvoi irpbs yjiaus e\pt\vnv. 

(c) From a negative word, an affirmative one must often be borrowed ; this 
takes place most frequently, when an antithetic clause is introduced by an ad- 
versative conjunction. Her. 7, 104. 5 v6(xos avwyet Tuvrb ael, ovtt e&v (pevyeip 
ovSev TrArj&os av&pdoirwv etc fiaxys aWa (sc. aucvyau) [xevovras ev rrj rd^ei eirucpa- 
reeiv, ^ a.Tr6A\v<rdrcu. PL Apol. 36, b. d/xeA?j eras, &v ol iroWot (sc. etc tpeXovv- 
rai). So from ovdeis the idea of els or e/cacrros is to be borrowed, as in the foi- 
l-owing sentence,from ovtf eh, the subject of the first clause, eh or eKacros is to 
be borrowed as the subject of the second clause. PI. Symp. 192, e. ravra d/cou- 
o-as ovb" a.v els e^apyr]^eir], a\?C arexv&s otoir' h.u aK-qKoevai k. t. A. 

(d) Prom a following verb with a specific meaning, a verb with a general 
meaning must be borrowed, e. g. lioielv, epyd£e<r§ai, yiyveo~Sai, elvai, crvn-fiaiveiv 5 
This is the case in the expressions, ri &\Xo %, — ovdev &X\o ^ — a\Ko 
ti ■#. instead of ri &\\o voie? or ecrriv or the like, 3) on. Th. 3, 39. ri &X\o 
ovtoi, 1) eirefiovXevcav ; 4, 14. ol Aa.Ke8aiiu.6i> 10 1 &\Xo oi>dev tj e/c 717s evavfxd- 
Xovu. 

(c) When two verbs connected together have a common object, even if they 
govern different Cases, the Greek usually expresses the o>^et but once, and 
makes this depend on the nearest verb. Indeed, the object of a clause is not 
unfrequently transferred and made the subject of the following clause, without 



$346.] ELLIPSIS. BRACRYLOGY. ZEUGMA. 56? 

its place being supplied by a pronoun. X. 0. 4, 8. tovtois /xku x&P av r h v dx- 
\t]v it posriSi]<T i noil Swpois KOff/xeT (sc. auTovs). PI. Gorg. 460, c. ov Sei 
to?s iraiSoT plftais iy KaXeTv oi»5' e/cj5aA Ae t j> (sc. avrovs) e/c tu>v iroXewv, 
Pp. 465, a. TTpecrfivTepcp v cut 4 pwv irdvTwv &px eitr Te Kal KoXd^e iv (sc. 
cvtous-) irposTeTcl£eTai. Th. 5, 54. ('A/^/eToi) e ? s e fiaXov 4 s tijv 'Eiridav plait 
kcu iSijow (sc. avTT)v). This case occurs most frequently where a partici- 
ple is connected with a finite verb. Th. 1, 20, r<£ 'lirirdpxv t))v UavaSrn- 
vai.K~r\v irofXTTTiv 8 laKotr /xovv r i air 4kt sivav (sc. avr6v) [while Hipparchus 
was arranging the Panathenaic procession, they killed him). lb. 144. tovtois 
airoK p ivd/xevoi airoir 4 fi\p u /xeu (sc. aifTovs). But sometimes the Case is 
made to depend on the more remote finite verb. Th. 2, 65. oaou xp° vov 
irpovcrTT] (TlepiKXrjs) tT/s iroXews . . , aatpaXas 8ie<pvXai;ev avT-fjv, ical iyeveTo 
(sc. avTi}) ht 1 ine'ivov fieyiarr]. X. An. 2. 5, 24. Tavra (Ticro-a<p4pvqs) elir&v e5o|e 
t<2 Khedpxv aXri^ij X4yeiv, /cat dnev (sc. 6 KX4apxos). 

3. An important figure of Brachylogy is Zeugma, i. e: a con- 
struction in which a verb, that in sense belongs only to one 
subject or object, is connected with several subjects or objects. 
The verb, however, must always be of such a nature as to ex- 
press an idea which may be taken in a wider or more limited 
sense. 

II. y, 326. tjx l exacTTa 'liriroi depcriTroSes /col irottciXa Teux 6 ' 4k€lto (to lie, as 
well as generally to be in a place, to be in store). Her. 4, 106. ecncHjTa Se <pop4- 
ovo-l irfj 2,kv&ikt) o/j.ol7}u, yXuxraav 5e Idi-ni/ (they wear garments like the Scythi- 
ans, but have or speak a language of their own). A compound verb is often 
used in a pregnant sense, since along with the signification of the compound, 
the signification of the simple is at the same time to be included. Th. 1, 44. 
ol 'P&nvaloi. fxeT 4yv(acrav Kepuvpalois |u/x^ox«av /xri ivoiricraoSai (instead of fxe- 
T4yucoaau xa\ zyvwaav) changed their minds and determined not to form an 
alliance with the Corcyraeans. 

4. Contraction in coordinate clauses has already been spoken 
of ($ 319, Pvem. 1) ; this is more seldom in subordinate clauses, 
though frequent with those introduced by os7rep, wsTrep. 

Eur. Med. 1153. cpiXovs vo fii^ovcr' ovsirep av ir6ais a4beu (sc. vo/xi^n). PI. L. 
710, d. irdfTa ax e ^ u a7re lpyao~T ai t<2 &eu? arrep (sc. drrepyd^eTai) bray (Sow 
XrjSij SiaepepSvTus ev irpa^ai iiva it6Xiu. So also el or eXirep tls or &XXos tis or 
efrrep irov, efrrep ttot4, etc. Her. 9, 27. rjjjuv cctti iroXXa re Ka\ ei) %xovra, el t4oi- 
<ri Kal aXXoio-i 'EXX-r]vwy. 

5. Pleonasm is the use of a word, which, in a grammatical 
point of view, is superfluous, the idea conveyed by it having 
been already expressed in what precedes, either by the same 



568 syntax. [§ 347. 

or by another word. The desire of perspicuity or emphasis is 
commonly the cause of Pleonasm. 

X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. o'l, $v eV ifceluovs rj/xeis iKavyw/xev, viroTefxovi/Tai y/xas e/ceT' 
vol. 3, 15. Treipdcro/xai rcj> irdiririo aya&wv iiririwv Kpdriaros &v 'nnrevs o-v/x/xa' 
X^lv <xvt $. 

Remark. Grammatical Pleonasm is to be distinguished from the rhetorical, 
which consists in the use of two or even more words of a similar signification 
to strengthen an idea or make it more palpable (a) A verb with an abstract 
substantive, as ixdxw fidxeo-frcu, Tv6Kefxov iroAe/xei ; — (,6) A verb with a partici- 
ple, as (pevywv e<pvye, eiirov Xeywv : — (7) An adjective with an abstract substan- 
tive in the instrumental Dat., as /xey&ei fxiyas, 7rA7?&et iroWoi ; — (8) An adjec- 
tive or adverb with an adverb (mostly poetic) as oi6&ev olos {wholly alone) ; — 
(e) Synonymous adverbs, as ev&vs irapaxpriiJ-a, ^aKiv avSis, ael awex&s ; — (£) 
The part is very often joined with the whole by Kai or re, for the purpose of 
making the part pi-ominent, as "E/cto/u pikv Kai Tpcoai (Horn.); Zeu /cat &eol ; 
'A&nvaioi km 'I<piKpdT7)s ; (77) Eor the sake of emphasis, the same thought is 
often expressed twice, once positively and then negatively, or the reverse, as 
\4£co Trpbs vfxas Kai oi>K a-KOKpv\\io{xai (Dem.) ; II. o. 416. eVei toi alcra fxtpvv&d irep, 
ovTi /j.d\a b*-f}v (since your life is short, and not very long). See Larger Grammar, 
Part II. § 858. 



$ 347. Contraction and Blending of Sentences. 
Anacoluthon. 

1. In the contraction of a compound sentence, sometimes 
the verb which is common to the principal and subordinate 
clauses, is placed in the subordinate clause and made to 
agree with the subject of that clause; in this way the two 
clauses are much more closely united, than in the common 
mode of contraction ($ 319, Rem. 1). 

X. Cy. 4. 1, 3. avrbs oiSa, olos $v ra [xkv yap &\\a (scil. iiroiei) '6<rairep, olfxai, 
Kai TrctKTes v/xeis i ir o i e ir e. 

2. When a participle stands in a sentence with the finite 
verb, the parts of the sentence are frequently blended with 
each other, by making the substantive which would be gov- 
erned by the participle, depend upon the finite verb, as the 
more important part of the sentence. Comp. Larger Grammar, 
Part II. § 856, b. p. 609—611. 

Soph. El. 47. cryyeAAe 8' '6pK(a TrposT&eis, instead of ctyyeAAe iroosTi&eh '6pKov. 
X. Cy. 1. 6, 33. ottws o~vv tolovtco e&ei e&icr&eVres Trpa6Tepci iroXlrai yivow- 
ro ; ed-e£ is here governed by vvv and connected with yivoivro, instead of being 
in the Dat. depending on edto-freWes, which would have been the natural con» 
Btruction. X. Cy. 7. 1, 40. ovtoi 5e e7ret5}/ t)itooovvto, kvk\co irdvTO&tp irotr}- 






§ 347.] CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. 569 

ad/xeuo i, wsre opaa&ai to. oir\a, inrb rais aaviaiv 4Kd$r\VTO (instead of kvkXov 
iroirjo'dfxevot iKadyvTo). 2. 3, 17. ro7s 8' erepois elirev, on fidAAtiv Serjaoi aval- 
pov/x4vovs Tats )8 « A ots. 

3. A very common mode of blending the principal with the 
subordinate clause, in the manner of attraction, and one which 
belongs to almost all kinds of subordinate clauses, consists in 
transferring the subject of the subordinate into the principal 
clause, and making it the object of the principal clause. 
(Comp. nosti Marcellum, quam tardus sit, instead of quam 
tardus sit Marcellus). 

Her. 3, 68. outos irpSoTos inroirrev cr e tov Mayor, wj ovk efy 6 Kvpov ^/xip- 
Sis (he first suspected the Magian, that he was not Smerdis the son of Cyrus = sus- 
pected that the Magian was not ) etc.). 80. e 5:8 ere t\v Kafx^vaeco vfipiv, 4ir' 
ovov iire^rjK^e (see the insolence of Cambyses what a pitch it reached = see what 
a pitch the insolence, etc.). 6,48. a-rreire iparo tSjv 'EA.A17 va>v, ri 4v v$ 
eX 0i€1/ ' Th. 1, 72. tt\v ccpere pav iroXiv 4fiovkovTO o-q/xaiveiv, oo"n sit) dvva- 
[xiv. X. Cy. 5. 3, 40. ol apxovTes avTuiv 4tt i/xeXelo-frav, ottcos o'vo , Kevao-fx4voi 
^ai irdvTa. In the same way also, when the subordinate clause forms the ob- 
ject of a substantive in the principal clause, the subject of the subordinate 
clause is frequently transferred to the principal clause, and is put in the Gen., 
as the object of that substantive. Th. 1, 61. ^A3-e 8e ko\ to?s 'Afrnvatois ev&vs 
7) ayyeXia tuv irShecov, on acpeo-Tacri (the report immediately reached the 
Athenians respecting the cities, that they had revolted = the report reached the Athe- 
nians, that the cities had revolted). 97. a/xa Se KaX ttjs apx^s cnroS e t£ iv e%et 
tr\s tSjv 'Afrnvalwv, 4v o'lcp rpoirco KcnecrTr). So also a substantive on which an 
Inf. depends is often attracted by the verb or substantive which governs the Inf 
Th. 3, 6. T7js baXdo-o-Tis elpyov fxt) xPW°~& al T0 ^ s MirvXrivatovs. 5, 25. 
iTri&vixia t&v avdpwv rwv 4k ttjs yqcrov KOfxtcraoSai. PL Crit. 52, b. ouS 1 
eni&viiia ere &XXt]s 7roAecos, ovb" aWoov v6fX(ov eAa/3ej/ — etSeVcu. 

4. The principal clause is frequently blended with the sub- 
ordinate clause, by making the former, as a substantive- 
clause introduced by ore or w?, or still more frequently, as a 
substantive-clause expressed by the Ace. with the Inf., depen- 
dent on the subordinate clause. 

X. An. 6. 4, 18. is 70/3 iyw ¥)Kovffd twos, '6ri K\4av5pos 4k Bv^avriov ap- 
pLOffTris /x4\Xei i']£eiv (instead of ws fJKovo-a, KA.. fxeWet Y]£etv), for as I heard 
from some one, that Cleandros is about to come, etc. = for Cleandros is about to 
come, as I heard from some one. Her. 1, 65. us 8' avrol AaKedat/x6vioi \4yov<ri 
Avicovpyov iir it poTr zvaavT a 4k Kpr)T7)s ay ay 4o~&ai touto. 3. 14. its 
5i \4y€T at \m AlyvrrTiwv, fiaKpvciv [xtv Kp olffov. 4.5. us 8e ~2,Kv&ai 
\iyovo~i, vt(i)T aTov airdvTuv 4&v4wv elvai to o~<\>4t epov. 

48* 



570 syntax. [$ 348 

5. Aiiacoluthon (from a privative and cWaov^os, -ov, following) 
is a figure used to denote a change in the construction. It 
cakes place when the construction with which the sentence 
begins, is not continued through it, but changed into another, 
which grammatically does not correspond with the former, but 
logically, i. e. in relation to the signification and meaning, is 
like or similar to it. The cause of Aiiacoluthon may be attrib- 
uted to the vivacity of representation among the Greeks, or to 
their desire of perspicuity, brevity, strength, or concinnity (pro- 
priety or keeping) of discourse. There are two kinds of Aiia- 
coluthon: (a) grammatical, (b) rhetorical. There are also in- 
stances where it evidently originates from carelessness and in- 
attention. The grammatical Aiiacoluthon, which is, for the 
most part, caused by attraction, has been treated in several 
places in the course of the grammar. Only two instances of 
the rhetorical Anacoluthon, need now be mentioned : — 

(a) A Yery natural and frequent instance of Anacoluthon is, where the word 
ffhich gave rise to the whole thought of the sentence, is placed as the logical 
subject in the Nom. at the beginning of the sentence, but after the interruption 
of the sentence by an intermediate clause, is made the grammatical object of 
the verb of the sentence. X. Hier. 4, 6. &sirep ol a&\7)Tal ovx, orav ISicotwi/ 
yeucourcu Kpe'iTTOves, rovro avTovs evcppalvei, aW* orav tuu avrayowiaTcov 7Jttovs, 
tovt avTovs oLVia (instead of toutoj evcppaivovrai — aviSivrai), as the athletes, when 
they are superior to common men, this does not elate them, but when they are inferior to 
their competitors, this gives them pain = as the athletes are not elated when, etc. 

(b) In order to make the contrasted ideas in a sentence prominent or em- 
phatic, they are often placed in the same form at the beginning of their respec- 
tive sentences, although the natural construction of each would necessarily be 
different. PL Phaedr. 233, b. Toiavra 6 epcos iTrideiKi/vraL • dvsrvxovur as 
uev, a p.)] Xvir-nv rois akhois 7rape%ei, aviapa iroieT uo/xi^eiv, e v.tvxo v vras 5e 
kou to. (x$i rjdovrjs a%ia Trap' eKeiuwv iiraivov avayKafa rvyxdueiu (instead of Trap 
evTvxovvTcav 5e Ka\ ra. /at) tjSoptis &£ia iiraivov auayKa^i rvyxayeiy, or evrvxovi/ras 
:e Kal to. fx)] r)8. #£. tiraiv£v avayK&^ei). 



CHAPTER X. 

$ 348. Position of Words and Sentences. 

1. The intimate relation between the members of a sentence 
and between one sentence and another, and the connection of 



$ 348.] POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 571 

these so as to form one thought or idea, are expressed as has 
been seen, partly by inflection, or by formal words (§ 38, 4) 
which supply the place of inflection, partly by the accent and 
position of the members of a sentence and of the sentences 
themselves. As the accent can be made prominent only in 
living discourse, and commonly agrees with the position, only 
the position needs to be treated. 

Remark. The position of particular parts of speech, as the pronouns, 
prepositions, etc., has already been stated, in the sectiorfs where these are 
treated. See the Index under Position. 

2. There are two kinds of position : the usual or grammati- 
cal, and the rhetorical or inverted. The first denotes the 
logical and grammatical relation of the members of a sentence, 
and of the sentences themselves to each other, and the union 
of these in expressing a single thought or idea; the second 
makes one member of a sentence, which is specially important, 
more prominent than the other members, by giving to it a posi- 
tion different from the usual or grammatical order of the words. 

3. The usual or grammatical position of the words in Greek 
is. the following : — 

The subject stands first in the sentence, the predicate last; 
the copula et/ti stands after the predicative adjective or sub- 
stantive ; but the attributive follows its substantive ; the object 
is placed before the predicate ; the objectives, i. e. the qualify- 
ing statements or circumstances, are so arranged, that the most 
important one is placed immediately before the predicate, and 
the other objectives precede this, following each other in such 
order as they would naturally be joined to the first objective, 
the one suggesting itself last to the mind being placed before 
one already existing ; or in other words, the broader limitation 
usually precedes the narrower, the less necessary, the more 
necessary. 

Kvpos, 6 fiaaiXsvs, koAus airz&uvsv. Kvirpioi trdvv irpodv/xcos abru a wear par ei/- 
<rav. rials fx4yas — av)]p ayaSos — 6 ireus & fxi-yas — d av^p 6 ayc&os — 6 irais 5 
tov Kvpov — 6 ir6\€fxos 6 irpbs robs TLepaas. But the Inf. or the Ace. with the 
Inf. and the Fart, follow the governing word. Sec the examples under §§ 306, 
307, 310. Oi "E\\r)uts tovs Tlepaas iv'iKrjaau. 01 "EWyves eV Mapc&aui robs 
Tlepaas iviKrjcrav. Ot "EAA^ves ravTij rrj rj/xtpa iv Mapc&wi/i tovs Htpaas iv'\.K-r\aa.v. 
In this way, the ad^ erb of place and time commonly precedes the causal ob- 



572 syntax. [$ 348. 

ject {r6re or ravrr) rrj 7i!J.epa robs II. iviKT](rav), the personal object precedes 
that denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Ace. (rbv iraiSa r\]v ypap.iiariK.riv diddcricw 
— t$ iraiBl rb fiifixiov dida/xi), the adverb of time the adverb of place (tote of 
ravry rf} yfiepa ev Mapa&wn robs U. iviK-rjarav). The adverb of manner, even 
when another word is the principal objective, usually stands immediately be- 
fore the predicate, e. g. oi "EAAyves ravrr} rfj T]p.epa ev Mapa&a>i/i robs llepaas 
KaXws iviK7]crav. 

4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the 
position of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose 
place they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective-clause, for 
example, occupies the place which the adjective would take; 
and so of the others. 

PI. Phaed. 50, e. 6 &vpwp6s, tisirep ela>&ei viraKove iv, e?ire Trepijxeueiu. 
X. Cy. 3. 2, 3. 6 Se Kvpos, ev cp crvveXeyovr o, e&vero' errel 8e KaAa r) v 
ra tepa avr<p, ffweKaXeffe rovs re ruv Uepacov r)yep.6vas koX robs rwv Mrjdcav. 
'Eirel 8 e 6 /xov %o~av, e\e|e roidSe. Yet the substantive-clauses, even when 
they express the grammatical subject, stand after the governing verb. Ibid. 1. 
4, 7. ot cT* e A e 7 o *>, '6r i &p kto i iroWobs ^Se ir\r) cr id a avr as 5 lecp&ei- 
pav. 

5. In the rhetorical or inverted 1 position of words, the predi- 
cate is placed before the subject, the attributive before the sub- 
stantive to be defined, but the objective, particularly the adverb, 
is placed after the predicate. 

'Aya&bs 6 av-fjp. 'O &acr i\eb s Kvpos. 'O irpbs robs Tl4po~as irSXe/jios. 
'Ep-axecravro KaXas. Th. 2, 64. <pepeiv re xph r & Te ^aifxovia avay icai<t> s, rd 
re curb rav iroKep.iwv avdpelus. 

6. When the subject is to be specially distinguished, it is 
placed at the end of the sentence ; and when two words in the 
same sentence are to be made emphatic by their position, one 
is placed at the beginning, the other at the end of the sen- 
tence, e. g. Ilao-cov dpercov yye/xcov iartv rj €vo-4/3eia. Gener- 
ally, both the first and the last place in a sentence is considered 
emphatic, when words stand there, which, according to the 
usual arrangement, would have a different position. 

7. Inversion is still more frequent in subordinate clauses 
than in the case of the words whose place they take, perspi- 
cuity often rendering such an inversion necessary. Substan- 

1 This inverted position is a species of Hyperbaton, a construction by which 
the natural order of words and sentences is inverted. 



$ 348. j POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 573 

tive-clauses with oti, ws {that), and final substantive-clauses, 
are placed before the governing verb, when the ideas they 
express are to be brought out prominently. 

"On fxeyas e/c jxiKpov 6 $iXnnros 7}v^7}Tai, irapaXetyc*). — "ivu. ffa<pe<TT€poi/ BriXu^f 
iracra 7] Hepcrwu iroXirzia, fxiKphv iiravdifxi. The inversion of adjective-clauses 
(bv eTSes &v8pa, olrSs tarty) has been already treated, § 332, 8. ■ Inversion is 
not used in adverbial clauses of time and condition, since these, according to 
the common position, usually precede the principal sentence. 

8. When a word in a subordinate clause is to be made more 
prominent than the others, it is sometimes placed before the 
connective word (relative, etc.) which introduces the clause, 
e. g. roiavr Icttl koll raAAa, 7repc i/xov aoi 7roAAot Xiyovcriv. 

9. A means of rendering a word specially emphatic by posi- 
tion, is the separation (Hyperbaton) of two words which would 
be naturally connected together, as forming one thought, by 
introducing one or more less important words between them. 
By this separation, only one of the two words is commonly 
made emphatic, though often both even, especially when both 
stand in an emphatic part of the sentence. 

Dem. Phil. 3, 110. iroXXZv, S> &v8pes 'Afrnvaiot., Xoycov yiyvoiihwv. X. S. 1, 
4. olfxai oiu ttoXv av tt\v Kara<XK^vr\v lloi XafxirpoTtpav (paurjvai (instead of iroXv 
Xa/x-rrpoTipav. ) This separation (Hyperbaton) very often takes place even in sen- 
tences as well as in case of words. This consists in placing the principal 
clause, as the one less important, within the subordinate clause, and thereby, in a 
logical point of view, making it secondary to the subordinate clause. PL Prot. 
331, d. rb yap Xevubv r$ /x4Xaui itrriu oirn irposeot/ce (instead of tariv yap oirn 
rb XsvkSv, etc.). X. C. 3. 11, 10. <piXeiv 76 firjv ev &T8' tin iiriffTao-ai (instead of 
eS oT5' on <ptXe?v, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 53. wsre irep\ pXv ttjs eV rots "EXXrjai ovva- 
crre'ias ovk o?5' ottqjs &v tis aacpearepop iiride7}-ai dwn&e'n). Dem. Phil, ovtoi p.\v 
yap &pxovTes oi) iroXvs XP™ * e '£ °^ • • ^l^Sfov. 

10. Ideas that are alike or similar, or especially such as are 
antithetic or opposite, are made emphatic in their position, by 
being placed near each other. 

Thus avrbs outoG, etc. C. g. rj irdXis avT$] itap avTijs 8'iK-nv Xrixj/erai. 
X. Hier. 6, 2. \vvt\v p.\v rjXiKicorais r]S6 /xeuos -tidofievois i/xoi. PI. L. 934, d. 
Liaivovrai ir 0XX0I ir oXXob s rpSirovs. Hence, &XXo s &XXo, alius aliud ) 
&XXos &XX0&1, alius alibi, HxXos aXXcxre, alius alio, &XXos tLxXobev, 
alius aliunde, &XXos &XX-n, alius alid (sc. vid), etc., of which the English 
makes two sentences, the one did this, the other that, etc. 



APPENDIX A 



VERSIFICATION. 

§ 349. Rhythm, Metre, Arsis and T/iesis. 

1. Rhythm (pvSfioi) is the harmony produced by the alternation of 
long and short syllables, accompanied by the recurrence of an emphasis 
at intervals ; when the emphasis occurs at fixed intervals, the rhythm be- 
comes meter, each one of the intervals forming a metre or measure. 

2. The emphasis with which particular parts of a verse are pro- 
nounced, is called the Arsis, and the corresponding weaker tone with 
which the other parts are pronounced, the Thesis. The former implies 
an elevation of the voice with an accompanying stress (§ 29. 1.), the latter, 
a depression of the voice. The terms Arsis and Thesis are also trans- 
ferred to the particular syllable or syllables on which they rest, and 
hence the syllable on which the emphasis falls is called the Arsis. The 
Arsis is often called the metrical ictus, or merely the ictus. 

3. The Arsis is naturally on the long syllable of a foot ; consequently 
in the spondee ( — ) and the tribrach ( wwv '), the place of the Arsis can 
be determined only by the kind of verse in which they are found. In 
every verse, the original foot determines the place of the Arsis in all the 
other feet which are substituted for it. Hence, as the second syllable of 
an iambus is long, and as the Arsis naturally falls on the long syllable, 
the spondee in iambic verse would have the Arsis on the second syllable, 
thus - — ; so also in anapaestic verse. But as the first syllable of the 
foot is long in the trochee and dactyl, the spondee in trochaic and dac- 
tylic verse takes the Arsis on the first syllable, thus . Again, as a 

short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, and as in a long 
syllable the emphasis or ictus necessarily falls on the first of the two 
units composing this long, it is evident that, in iambic verse, the tribrach 



* 350. J VERSIFICATION. 575 

would take the Arsis on the second syllable, thus , w ° " ; and in trochaic 
verse on the first. So where the dactyl takes the place of the spondee 
with the Arsis on the last syllable, the arsis of the dactyl is on the first 

short, thus — ww ; but where the anapaest stands for the spondee (— — ), its 

Arsis is on the first short, thus M " '— . 

§ 350. Metrical Feet. 

1. The portions into which every verse is divided, are called feet. 

The feet are composed of a certain number of syllables, either all 
long, all short, or long and short together. 

A short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, every short 
syllable being one mora or time, and every long one two morae. 

The feet used in poetry may be divided, according to the number of 
syllables, into four of two syllables, eight of three, and sixteen of four 
syllables. 

The dissyllabic feet are four : 

w « Pyrrhich l (tvttov) 

— Spondee (tuVto)) 
w - Iamb (tv7tojv) 

— v Trochee (tvtttz) 

1 Derivation of names of feet. — Pyrrhich. This was so called from 
the celebrated war-dance {wppix^), in which it was used, as being rapid and 
energetic. — Iamb. From Idirrw, to abuse; because Archilochus the inventor 
used it in violent invectives. — TrocJiee. From Tp4x<», to run : because of its 
running, saltatory style. — Trilrrach. Tph fipaxvs, because consisting of three 
short syllables. — Spondee. So called, hecause it was used iv reus otrovtious, in 
sacred rites, from its slow, solemn sound. — Dactyl. 'Airb rod SaKrvAov; because 
it is, like the finger, composed of one long joint and two short ones. — Ana- 
paest. From ava-naib), to strike back ; because the Ictus was contrary to that of 
the Dactyl. — Amphibrach. 'Afx<pl fipaxvs ; because the short syllables are on 
each side of the long one, (a/j.<pi) — Oretic Because much used by the Cretans. 
— Bacchlus. Used in the Dithyrambic Games in honor of Bacchus. — Antibac- 
chlns. The converse (avri) of the former. — Proceleusmatic. From ice\evap.a, the 
boatswain's call or command; because rapidly uttered. — Paeons. Because 
used in the Paeonic Hymns. — Choriamb. Trochee or Choree -f- Iamb. — An- 
tispastus. 'Ai/Tiatrdw, to draw to the opposite side ; because, being converse of 
the former, it appears to draw the Trochee to the other side of the Iamb. — 
lonicus a majore, lonicus a minore. Feet much in use with the Ionians ; a majore^ 
when beginning with the long syllables; a minore, when beginning with the 
short ones. — Epitrite. Most probably from eVi and rplros ; because, in addition 
to (eVi) the 3d syllable, it has a short one over. — The Diiamb is an Iambic 
syzygy, admitting the Spondee in the first place. — The Ditrochee is a Trochaic 
syzygy, admitting the Spondee in the second place. 



^76 VERSIFICATION. ($ 360. 

The trisyllabic are eight : 

w o ^ Tribrach (enmw) 
Molossus (jvirrioixoLi) 

— ~ — Anapaest (rervcficos) 

— -"" Dactyl (rv7rT€re) 

* — « Amphibrach (Itvj-tov) 

— ^ — Cretic (rv7rro/u,ai) 
Bacchius (rvrrrp-ixi) 

w Palinibacchius (TV7rr>7Te) 

The tetrasyllabic are sixteen : 

" w M " Proceleusmatic (ei-weTo) 

_ . Dispondee (jv^urjTqv) 

w — " — Diiamb (ctuttto/^i/) 
_ - _ v Ditrochee (rt>7rrera)crav) 
M " Antispast (Irv^Sryrov) 

— w w — Choriamb (Tv—TOfxevov) 

w ~ Ionicus a minori (eTeTVfXfjLrjv) 

— u ^Ionicus a majori (rvxpaifAeSa) 
— « « * first Paeon (tutttojucvos) 

— _ w u second Paeon (ejwrere) 
^ ~ - ^ third Paeon (ireTvxf/o) 

w " w - fourth Paeon (IrvTro^-qv) 

w first Epitrite (iTvij/doSrjv) 

— u — second Epitrite (u> n>7rovo-cu) 

« _ third Epitrite (nx^r/cro/xai) 

" fourth Epitrite (rv^eiqaav) 

2. Simple metres are formed by the repetition of simple feet; com- 
pound, by combining the simple feet with each other. 

Simple feet consist of but one Arsis, and one Thesis, e. g. u * w ~ «, 

Compound feet consist of two Arses and Theses, of which one Arsis 
and Thesis, taken together, is considered as a single Arsis or Thesis, e. g. 



Of the simple feet, only those which have a long syllable in the Arsis 
and a short one in the Thesis, give natural variety, e. g. - ", — ~ w , w -', 
ww — ' . Hence the trochee and dactyl, the iamb and anapaest, are consid- 
ered as the fundamental feet of all rhythm. The other feet may be 



$ 351.] VERSIFICATION. 577 

combined with these by resolving a long into two short syllables, or by 
contracting two short into one long syllable. 

4. Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are not measured by single 
feet, but by dipodies, or pairs of feet, two feet being necessary to make 
an independent metre or dipody. Hence, four iambs make an Iambic 
dimeter, and six an Iambic trimeter. Dactylic verse, on the contrary, 
is measured by the single feet ; six dactyls, therefore, form an hexameter, 
and five a pentameter. 



§ 351. Caesura. 

Caesura (a cutting) is the separation, by the ending of a word, of syl- 
lables metrically connected, — or the cutting of a metre by the ending 
of a word, before the metre is completed. 

Remark 1. The design of the Caesura is to give variety and harmony to 
the verse ; for if each metre or foot terminated with the end of a word, there 
would be only a constantly recurring monotony. But the Caesura, by pre- 
venting a uniform coincidence between the ending of the metre or foot, and the 
ending of a word, promotes the variety, beauty, and harmony of the verse. It 
is not inconsistent, however, with the rhythm of the verse that the ending of 
the foot and the word should sometimes coincide ; this coincidence is called 
metrical Diaeresis. The principal Diaereses are after the first, second, third, 
and fourth foot. 

¥l<r&iov | avrap 6 \ rolcriv acpeiKero \ v6<tti[aov \ rffJ-ap, 

There are three kinds of Caesura ; 

1. Caesura of the foot. 

2. Caesura of the rhythm. 

3. Caesura of the verse. 

(1) Caesura of the foot is where the word ends before a foot is com- 
pleted. 

Nik?7 | era? e$e | Aa crrvye | prjv c/xe | gikolo | ayeaSux. 

In this line there is a Caesura of the foot after each of the syllables eras, 
Xa, prjv, and kcl$\ Only two cases of this Caesura can occur in a dac- 
tyl ; for the word either ends after the Arsis, - | u -, and forms the mas- 
culine Caesura, or in the Thesis, - w | ~, and forms the feminine or trochaic 
Caesura. Thus the Caesuras after eras, Xet and prjv are masculine, that 
after otKaS' is feminine or trochaic. 

(2) The Caesura of the rhythm is where the Arsis falls on the last 
syllable of a word, and thus separates the Arsis from the Thesis. In the 
line above quoted, the Caesura of the rhythm occurs after the syllables 
eras, Act and prjv, the Arsis falling on each of these and being separated 

49 



578 VERSIFICATION. [§ 352 

from the following Thesis by the Caesura. This Caesura can take placa 
only in such feet as have the Arsis on the first syllable. 

(3) The Caesura of the verse is a pause introduced to render the re- 
citation more easy. This is also called the Caesural pause, and divides 
the verse into two parts. 

In several kinds of verse this Caesura has a fixed place ; this is the 
case in the Trochaic, Iambic, and Anapaestic tetrameter, which have their 
natural Caesura at the end of the fourth foot. See under these verses 
below. Other kinds of verse may have more than one Caesura, the 
place of which is not fixed. In Hexameter verse, however, the Caesura 
of the verse more usually occurs after the Arsis of the third foot. Thus, 

KiAAav re '^aS^erjv, || TcveSoLO re tc£i avMraeis, 
or in the Thesis of the third foot, thus, 

Kat tot€ &y] Sdpo-no-e, || kol rjvSa [xavTis aixvfjaov. 

Rem. 2. The three kinds of Caesura often occur together ; for example, 
after the syllable r\v of Cc&erjv, there is the Caesura of the foot, of the rhythm, 
and of the verse. 



$ 352. Different kinds of Verse. 

1 . A verse is often named from its predominant foot. Thus Dactylic 
verse is so called, because the dactyl is the predominant foot, and Iambic 
verse, because the iamb is the predominant foot ; so Trochaic, Anapaestic, 
etc. Verses are also named from their inventors, as the Sapphic, from 
Sappho, Alcaic, from Alcaeus, etc. ; likewise from the kind of composi- 
tion in which they are used, as the Heroic, used in describing the 
achievements of heroes, also from the number of measures, as manometer, 
dimeter, trimeter, hexameter, etc. 

2. A verse is called acatalectic, when it has its full number of feet or 
syllables, as trimeter iambics, ~ — w — |~— ' ~-| w — « — . A verse is called 
catalectic, when one or two syllables are wanting to complete the verse, 
as the trimeter, •" — ^ — |~ — » — | w ~ « . In dactylic verse, if the last foot 
wants one syllable, the verses are called catalectic on two syllables, e. g. 
_' uu _«v,_«j if two syllables are wanting, catalectic on one syllable, e. g. 
Jo «_««_. Verses in which the last dipody (a pair of feet) wants an 
entire foot, are called brachy catalectic, e. g. w — w — | V- ^ — | w — . Verses 
which have one or two syllables more than enough, are called hypercata- 
lectic, e. g. ■" — w — | ° — w — | " — w — **-• 

Remark. When the regular rhythm of a verse is preceded by an unen> 



$$ 353 — 355.] versification. 579 

phatic introductory syllable, such syllable is called an Anacrusis, an upward or 
bach beat; when there are two such syllables, forming an introductory foot, 
they are called a Base. The anacrusis and base belong to lyric verse. 



§353. View of the different kinds of Terse. 

The most usual kinds of verse are those which consist of the repeti- 
tion of the same foot. Of these the most frequent are the Dactylic, Iam- 
bic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic. 

§ 354. Dactylic Verse. 

The fundamental foot in this verse is the dactyl, the place of which 
may be supplied by a spondee. 

§ 355. Hexameter. 

The Hexameter was employed by the Greeks at an early period, and 
is the metre of Epic or Heroic and Pastoral poetry. 

The Hexameter consists of six feet ; the fundamental foot is the dac- 
tyl, the verse being formed by five repetitions of the dactyl with a dis- 
syllabic catalectus. The sixth foot is usually called a spondee ; but when 
the last syllable is short, it may be considered a trochee. 



In each of the first four feet, a spondee may take the place of the dac- 
tyl. The fifth foot is regularly a dactyl ; but sometimes it is a spondee, 
and the line is then called a spondaic line, as 

Ov yap eyo) Tpcocov eVe/c' rjXvSov al^(jxr]Td(i)V. 

- --I --I - --I- - I--I-- 

The principal Caesura in Hexameter verse occurs after the Arsis or in 
the Thesis of the third foot, and is called the Penthemim ; sometimes also a 
Caesura occurs after the Arsis of the fourth part, which is called the 
Hephthemim. This Caesura in the fourth foot is commonly preceded by 
one in the second foot, which is called the Triemim. The Caesura oc- 
curring at the end of the fourth foot is called the Bucolic Caesura, from 
its use in pastoral poetry 

'AAA' 6 /xev Al$t07ra<; \\ /xcTCKta-^e rrjXoS^ eoVra? 

AvSpa fxoi 4Wc7re, Movcra, 1 1 TroXvrpoTj-ov os /xaXa ttoXXo. 

*H Atas 1 1 77 'iSo/zeveu? I j rj STos 'OoWo-ev? 

'Hye/xoVwv, || ootis 01 ap^HI erapoLariv ap\vva.i 

Mi/xm^ecv 7rapa vr}vo~l Kopowicriv, \\ ov ol hrura. 



580 versification. [$$ 356, 357. 

The beauty of Hexameter verse is promoted by varying the feet by 
an interchange of dactyls and spondees, and by introducing these in dif- 
ferent places in different verses. For the same reason it is desirable that 
the Caesuras should occur in different places in different lines. 



§ 356. Pentameter. 

This verse is divided into two parts, each of •which consists of two 
dactyls and a catalectic syllable, thus, 

M^Se $upa£e KeAev' || ovk eS-eXovr leuai. 
Spondees may take the place of the dactyls in the first half, but not in 
the second, because the numbers at their conclusion should run more 
freely, instead of being retarded by the slow movement of the spondees. 
The long syllable at the end of the second half can be short. The 
Caesura is here the same as in the Hexameter, except that there must be 
a division, by the ending of the word, in the middle of the verse. When 
the word, however, has more than two syllables, Elision may take place. 

This kind of verse is commonly found only in connection with Hex- 
ameter, a Hexameter and Pentameter following each other alternately. 
A poem composed of these two measures is called Elegiac, being at first 
devoted to plaintive melodies. 

"Apn fxe yevofxevov £a>a.9 fipicpos rjpiTacrc Aai/xcov Hexam. 
Ovk oiS' etr dya.$u)i/ 1 1 curios, cure kclkwv, Pentam. 

'AirXrjpuiT 'Aioa, ri jjlc vrpnov r^)7rao-as a<£va> ; Hexam. 
Tt oTrevSets ; ov crot j j 7rdrres o<£aAo/xe$a ; Pentam. 



§ 357. Dactylic Tetrameter. 

The dactylic tetrameter catelectic on one syllable consists of three feet 

and a syllable. 

JloXXa fipoTwv Sia//,ei/3o/xeva,. 

-' - i-^H-'v-h. 

The dactylic tetrameter catalectic on two syllables consists of three feet 
and two syllables, which may form a spondee or trochee. 
(haivGixcvov kolkov ot/caS <rye<x$ou. 

-'..- "1- "I -"I -' - 

The dactylic tetrameter acatalectic consists of four feet ; instead of a 
dactyl, in the last a cretic is admissible. 



i 358 361.] VERSIFICATION. 581 

Y7tv obvvas dSa?;9j V7rv€ 8' aAyeW. 
Mcocr', aye KaAAioVa Svyarep Aios. 

-'- -i-'-i-'-i---. 



§ 358. Dactylic Trimeter. 

The dactylic trimeter catalectic on one syllable consists of two feet 
and a syllable. 

"EvSev ae£6fJLevov. 

The dactylic trimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of two feet 
and two syllables, which may form either a spondee or trochee. 
"Evpi'i KVfiaTa ttovtw. 



§ 359. mDactylic Dimeter. 

The dactylic dimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of a dactyl 
and a spondee or trochee. 

^acrfxara crrpovSCiV 
TotcrS' o/xocfi(Dvov. 



The dactylic acatalectic dimeter consists of two dactyls, and usually 
stands in connection with tetrameters. 

Qvs vtto retVea't. 

-'-I-'- -• 

$360. Trochaic , Iambic and Anapaestic Verse. 

It has been already observed (§ 350, 4.) that Trochaic, Iambic, and 
Anapaestic verse is measured by dipodies, i. e. by pairs of feet Hence 
verses of two feet, are called monometer, of four, dimeter, of six, trime- 
ter, of eight, tetrameter. The Latins named these according to the 
number of feet, and not by dipodies. Thus a verse of four feet was 
called qualernius, of six, senarius, of eight, octonarius. 

$ 361. Trochaic Verse. 

The Trochee is the predominant foot in this verse. The last syllable 
of each dipody may be doubtful ; hence the last foot of each dipody may 

49* 



582 



VERSIFICATION. 



[« 362, 363. 



be a spondee. Therefore, a spondee is admissible in every even place 
(2, 4, 6, 8). The Arsis or long syllable of every foot can be resolved 
into two short ones, and hence, a tribrach can stand in every place ; a 
dactyl and anapaest can stand in the even places, instead of the spondee. 
A dactyl is not admitted, however, except in a proper name, and then 
may stand in all the places but the fourth and seventh. 

A trochaic tetrameter acatalectic would then present the following 
scheme : 



r f r r r r r r 

r r f r 

I i ill l 

til i 



Remark. Trochaic verse has a rapid saltatory metre, and is used especially 
in the choral parts of Comic Poetry, when the Poet wishes to infuse more than 
ordinary wit and spirit into the colloquy, to arrest the spectator's attention and 
vary the grave monotony of the Iambic. 1 



§ 362. Trochaic Monometer. 

The trochaic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet. It is gener* 
ally found in systems of trochaic trimeters. 



§ 363. Trochaic Dimeter. 

The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. 
KoAvtSos re yas Zvolkol. 

The trochaic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable. 
It is usually found among acatalectic dimeters. 

Kat ^kvS-tjs o/xiAos, oi yas (acatalectic). 
"Ecr^arov roirov afxcfi Mat- (catalectic). 

OiTIV €)(OV(Tl Xtjxvav. 



1 See Manual of Greek Prosody, by L. P. Mercier. 



« 364, 365/ 



VERSIFICATION. 



583 



364. Troch, 



Tetrameter Catalectic. 



The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a syllable 
(two dimeters, the second catalectic). Its Caesura is at the end of the 
second dipody, and is often omitted by comedians, but rarely ever by 
tragedians. 

TrjSe 7ras Ittov, SiWe 1 1 koX tov avSpa 7rvv$avov 
"At rive? rrjpovfxcv vjnas 1 1 rjv yap 77 res e£o8o<s. 



r r r r / / I / 



Remark. The Trochaic tetrameter acatalectic, which consists of two tro- 
chaic dimeters acatalectic, and the trochaic pentameter, which consists of nine 
feet and a syllable, are very rarely used by the Greek poets. 
Et ns aydp&v evrvx'ho'ais % avu cv8o£ois ae&AoLSy 
~Svv &eq> yap roi (pvrev&tls oA^Sos ap&p&Troicn Trapfiov&Tepos. 



§ 365. Iambic Verse. 

The fundamental foot in this verso is the iamb. Instead of the first 
iamb, every dipody may have a spondee. Hence a spondee is admis- 
sible in the odd places (1, 3, 5, 7). 

Again, as the long syllable of every iamb may be resolved into two 
short syllables, a tribrach may stand in every place, except the last ; and 
as the last syllable is common, a pyrrhic is admissible. In the odd places 
a dactyl or anapaest may stand instead of a spondee. 

Hence the iambic trimeter or senarius, would present the following 
scheme : 



/ / / / / 

/ / / 

r r i 



Remark 1. The dactyl, hoAvever, is most frequent in the first place ; it occurs 
in the third place only when the first syllable of the foot is followed by the 
penthemimeral Caesura, or when the word is a monosyllable. The dactyl oc- 
curs in the fiftli place only in Comedy, where it is admitted in all the uneven 
places. 

Rem. 2. The anapaest is admitted only in the first foot, except in Comedy 
and in proper names ; in these cases it is admissible in all the feet except the 
last. The anapaest in the first foot must be included in one word, except in 
case of the article or preposition and its Case. The anapaest in proper names 
must not be divided between two words. 



584 



VERSIFICATION. 



366—368 



Eem. 3. The Iambic is the opposite of the Trochaic, being a steady, grave, 
but easy metre, and was applied to the stage as best adapted to the language 
of ordinary life. 1 

§ 366. Iambic Monometer. 

Iambic monometer consists of two feet. Its use is very rare, and it 
occurs mostly in systems of dimeters, 

Kat tols koAois 









§ 367. Iambic Dimeter. 
Iambic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. 

03 ev SofioLdi rots £/XOt9 

—'I-.-' I'l— 'I— '■ 

Iambic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable. 
©eAco Aeyeiv 'Arpa'Sas, 
Xatpotre Xolttov rjjXiV 



This verse is commonly found in systems of acatalectic diicaters. 



§ 368. Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic, commonly called 

Senarius. 

This is the most noted of the Iambic verses. It consists of six feet. 
O re/cm, KaS/xov rov 7raAai via rpo^rj, 

*lKT7)pL0lS KXdSoLaLV l<gZ.O , T€.\X,\KivOi; 

"AAAcov GLKOvew, avrbs wS' iXrjXvSa 



t r ft ft 

/ / / r r t 



The tragedians admit a dactyl only in the first and third foot ; they ad- 
mit an anapaest chiefly in the first foot, but in proper names, in any foot 
except the last. 

McveAco? *YiXLvt)V 6 Se KXyTaLjAvqcrTpas Ae^os, 
UoTajjL&v re 7rr]yaL, TrovrtoiV re kv/a&twv 
Ovk apiSjjiov aAAoos dAA* vtt eprarovs $pvyiov 



/ r / / J / 

/ / / / I / 



See Mercier. 



ft 369, 370. 



VERSIFICATION. 



585 



The most frequent Caesura here is in the third foot (Penthemim). 
This Caesura, however, is often neglected, others being used, or some- 
times, none. 

'E^^ptov aSco/ra 1 1 Swpa kovk ovr]<jLfia. 
The Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot (Hepthe- 
mim). 

'E7ret 7raT7]p ovtos cros, || ov Sprjvtis da'. 
The Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent. 

§ 369. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The iambic tetrameter is very much used by the comedians. It con- 
sists of seven feet and a syllable. The Caesura is usually at the end of 
the fourth foot, but is sometimes omitted. The scheme is nearly the 
same as the trimeter iambic. The anapaest occurs in the seventh foot 
only in case of a proper name. 



/////// 
/ / / 

f / / r i r / 



Ov cprjcn xprjvai tovs veovs | j do-Ketv • cyco Se (prj/ju, 

-~ I—' ll--'h-[l--l;-'lh-'h 

The iambic tetrameter acatalectic is but little used by the Greek poets. 



§ 370. Anapaestic Verse. 

1. The anapaest is the predominant foot in this verse. But by uniting 
the two short syllables in one long, the spondee maybe substituted for 
the anapaest. Again, the second long syllable of the spondee may be 
resolved into two short syllables, and hence a dactyl take the place of a 
spondee. 

2. In Anapaestic verse the most usual system is the dimeter, consist- 
ing of a greater or less number of perfect dipodies, followed by a 
pair of dipodies, the second of which is catalectic. This catalectic dime- 
ter, consisting of three feet and a syllabic, is called paroemiac (jrapoi- 
fxtai) from its use in proverbs. The anapaestic verse is, therefore, al- 
ways terminated by a catalectic dipody, and also by a long syllable ; i. e, 
if the final syllable is not long by itself, it is made long by its position 



686 



VERSIFICATION. 



371—373 



"with respect to the next line, the scanning being continuous, and an an 
apaestic series being constructed as if there were but one verse. The 
following is the scheme for an anapaestic tetrameter catalectic* 



w w w w w ww I 

t I t / / f"\ , 

- --. -«,| „ 

/ / / / / I 



Remark. An anapaest does not follow a dactyl in the same dipody ; gen- 
erally a dactyl does not follow an anapaest or spondee in the same dipody. 
The third foot of the paroemiac is usually an anapaest ; but a spondee is some- 
times found. The dactyl does not occur in the sixth and seventh feet. The 
Anapaestic metre was the favorite one for martial music. 



$371. Anapaestic Monometer Acatalectic. 

The anapaestic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet. 
(dvyarrjp, cog XP^> 

$ 372. Anapaestic Dimeter Acatalectic. 

The anapaestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. The legiti- 
mate Caesura occurs after the second Arsis, at the end of the second foot. 
But the Caesura is often found after the short syllable which follows the 
Arsis. 

'A7roXets /m 3 <z7roAeTs. || ov Karapu^eis 

Hpoo-ifirj p-avia. [ | n's 6 TnySryo-a?, 

ILrcpvyuiv eper/x.o tcrtv 1 1 ipecra-opiivYj. 



/ / / t 

' ww ' w w ' w w ' 



h 373. Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic. 

The anapaestic dimeter catalectic {paroemiac) consists of three feet 
and a syllable, and has no Caesura, the Caesura not being used in the 
paroemaic. 

Ei Aero ^copas £<pop€v€LV 

Ata, tov crbv irpwKrov d<f>\rj(r€t>. 



§ 374.] 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



5S7 



$ 374. Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

The anapaestic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a sylla- 
ble, being formed by adding the anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiac) 
to the anapaestic dimeter acatalectic. This verse is also called Aris- 
tophanic, from its use by Aristophanes, though not invented by him. 
The spondaic paroemiac, which sometimes occurs in the regular system, 
is not admissible in the tetrameter. 

The Caesura is at the end of the fourth foot, sometimes, though rarely, 
after the short syllable immediately following. There is generally also 
an incisure at the end of the second foot. 

Upoepel ns act raiv 6pvL$u>v \ \ fxavrevopLevii) irepl rov 7r\ov ; 

Ilois 8' vyUiav Swcrovcr avTois. 1 1 ovkto-v irapa rdlori ^eotcrtv ; 

Twv apyvpioiv • ovtol yap Xcracri. 1 1 Xiyovcn Si rot raSe 7ravTej. 



v ' ' ' f V „ ' w w ' 



Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic does not seem to have been used by 
the Greek poets. 



APPENDIX B. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

1. For the convenience of those who may wish to read some of the 
earlier editions of the Greek writers, the following table, containing old 
forms of some of the letters, and also abbreviations of certain words 
or parts of words, is subjoined. 

2. No. I. contains certain single letters or elements, which are of con- 
stant occurrence in the compound characters, and are found nowhere else. 
No. II. contains characters, the elements of which would not at once be 
obvious, and for this reason alone they are not placed alphabetically in 
columns III — VI. Indeed, the characters in Nos. I. and II. might all 
have been arranged alphabetically in columns III — VI. The characters 
in columns III — VI. are arranged alphabetically ; the initial letter of 
these characters, by the aid of those in No. I, will be readily known. 1 



See Robinson's Buttmann, p. 46G. 



5S8 



TABLE OE ABBREVIATIONS. 



a 



r 
7 



A C 

d € 



I. 

€ 7C 



V 



A? 



II. 

Z $ * 4 <f 5 ^ ^ & i 

" ov yap yap « *? £ ^ ^ „ T£ J J 
III. 



2^ afo 
A) aA 
ctaj a,U 

<V ccv 
&f ap 
cjjG avxo 

yTJry 

^ y*v 

Dfy yivBxai 

'p yo 

<&? <r«j 

COL' ^1/ 

2^ dta 

$f<p diet 



eivrxi 



IV 

ctt^ ineidy 

'TTvU £7l£V 

Qn Itli 

uj/i" inl 
tf> ep 

9& Tiara O P° 

^<~r, ,. & oa 

J^5 xecpaAaiov 



V. 
pty vera 

CI ° l °^ 

cho ovx 
C$VP ovrog 
^r^naga 
/ z£f> Jiep 
7T negl 



7f 



no 



fj^ fiaxcov 

/SS ^ 

ft, pev 
t\ . 

Ai i"^ 
/jy [xavog 



o3C o&ai 

G °° 

COT G7t 

(XT C6 

Q> 6CO 

d «« 



6i Teal ti 

VI. 

9^§> rav&a 



tf TO 



r 



TOV 
TOV 
TOV 



C5W rovg 

zs ™ 

T TCOV 

V VI 

uv vv 

*\jzt v7i 






I. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



N. B. The figures refer to sections. K. is used for remark. 



Abbreviations, Appendix B. p. 588. 

Ablative expressed by Dat. 285, 1. 

Absolute, Case Absolute, see Cases. 

Abrogation of clauses by alia 322, 6. 

Abstracts 39, in PI. 243, 3, (3). 

Absorption of Diphth. in Crasis, 10, 
4,5. 

Acatalectic verse 352, 2. 

Accentuation 29 ; change and re- 
moval of the accent by Inflec, 
Compos, and Contract. 30 ; in 
connected discourse (Grave in- 
stead of the Acute), in Crasis, 
Elision, Anastrophe 31. Accent, 
of first Dec. 45 ; second Dec. 49 ; 
third Dec. 65 ; adjectives and 
participles 75 ; words ending in 
vg, eia, v 76, II ; wg, av 78. R. 
7, and 29, R. 5 ; ojv, ov 78, R. 9, 
and 65, 5 ; r t g, eg 78, R. 11 ; verb 
118. 

Accusative 276 sq. ; local relation, 
limit, aim 277 ; of the object pro- 
duced with a verb of the same 
stem or one of a cognate signifi- 
cation (ud/rjv [luxead-cu ; $jv ptov) 
278, 1 and 2 ; with verbs denot- 
ing to shine, to flow, etc. 278, 3 ; 
object, design 278, 4; manner 
278, R. 3 ; of the object on which 
the action is performed or the 
.50 



suffering object 279 ; with verbs 
signifying to profit, to hurt, etc. 

279, 1 ; of doing good or evil to 
anyone, etc. 279, 2; to persevere, 
to wait for, etc. 279, 3 ; to turn 
back, flee from, etc. 279, R. 3 ; to 
conceal, to be concealed, to swear, 
and with cp&dvsw, "kdnuv 279, 4 ; 
with oil, %qi] 279, R. 4 ; fiulvsiv, 
nXslv, etc., which denote motion, 
etc., with verbs of sacrificing or 
dancing in honor of any one 279, 
R. 5 ; denoting an affection of 
the mind 279, 5 ; of space, time, 
quantity 279, R. 8; (y.aXbg t« 
bfAuata, aXyel %i\v xscpaXrjv) 279, 
7 ; double accusative : qptAw 
cpiXlav o"?, etc. 280, 1 ; y.aXu, 
xay.a noico, Xeyoi as 280, 2 ; with 
verbs of beseeching, asking, teach- 
ing, reminding, dividing, depriv- 
ing, concealing, clothing and un- 
clothing, surrounding, etc. 280, 
3 ; with verbs of appointing, 
choosing, educating, naming, etc 

280, 4 ; in the oyj]ua ycttf uXov 
v.. pigog 266, R. 4 ; Ace. in 
adverbial expressions, e. g. fxrx- 
y.gbv y.Xaiuv, y.iya yatgstv 278, 
R. 1 ; %uqiv, dcaosuv, iovto, 
therefore, 278, R. 2 ; tovjov jov 



590 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



tqottov, dlxrjv, bfioia 278, R. 3 ; 
ttjv Ta/laTtjv ; uqxijv, etc 5 noXkd, 
saepe, ollyov, etc. 279, R. 8 ; 
svQog, vipog, raXXcc, etc. 279, R. 
10 ; with Pass, verbs 281 ; with 
verbal Adjectives in T&og 284, 
R. 7. 

Accusative with Inf. 307 ; instead of 
Norn, with Inf. 307, R. 4 ; instead 
of Gen. or Pat. with Inf. 307, R. 
2 ; as a subject after Xiysrai, do- 
xel, etc. 307, R." 5 ; with the Art. 
see Inf. ; with exclamations 308, 
R. 2 ; in the subordinate clauses 
of the oratio obliqua 345, 6. 

Accusative with the Part. 310, 2 ; 
absolute 312, 5 ; with wg 312, 6 ; 
Ace. of Part, instead of another 
Case 313, 1. 

Active verbs 102, 248, 249. Comp. 
Transitive ; with the meaning to 
cause to do 249, R. 3. 

Acute accent 29, 4 (a). 

Addition of consonants 24. 

Adjective (and Part.) 74 sq. ; Dial. 
215 ; Accent. 75 ; of three end- 
ings 76, 77 ; of two endings 78, 
79 ; of one ending 80 ; Com- 
parison of 81 ; used as a Subs. 
263, a ; Attributive 264 ; as Subs. 
with the Gen. (77 noXXrj ii]g yijg 
instead of to noXv jijg yijg) 264, 
R. 5 ; instead of the Adv. 264, 3. 

Adjectives Verbal, see Verbal Ad- 
jectives. 

Adjectives Numeral 96, 2. 

Adjective Substantive Clause 331, 
R. 4. 

Adjective pronoun used as a Subs. 
263, a. 

Adjective clauses 331 ; several con- 
nected together 334, 1 ; inter- 
changed with other subordinate 
clauses 334, 2. 

Adverb 100 ; formation 101 ; com- 
parison 85 ; expressed by an ad- 
jective 264, 3, as expressing an 



objective relation 314 sq. ; use& 
as adjectives 262, d ; as substan- 
tives (ot vvv) 263, c ; in a preg 
nant sense (onoi yijg iafjiev, etc.) 
300, R. 7 ; (o sxu&tv noXiy,og 
Sevqo ifist instead of 6 ixu 7r.) 
300 R. 8 ; adverbs of place at- 
tracted 332, R. 7 ; inverse at- 
traction of Adv. of place 332 
R. 13. 

Adverbial correlatives 94, 3. 

Adverbial clauses 335 sq. ; of place 
336 ; time 337 ; cause 338 ; con- 
dition 339; concession 340, 7; 
consequence or effect 341 ; way 
and manner 342 ; quantity with 
oo-cr), oaov 343. 

Adversative coordinate clauses ex- 
pressed by di, aXXa, etc. 322 ; 
negative adversative coordinate 
clauses 321, 2. 

Agreement 240 sq. ; of the Attrib. 
Adj. 264, 1 ; of the Rel. Pron. 
in Gend. and Numb. 332 ; in 
Case 332, 6. 

Alphabet, history of, 2 b . 

Anacoluthon 347, 5 ; in the Part. 
construction 313, 1, (a). 

Anacrusis 352. R. 

Anapaestic dimeter acatalectic 372. 

Anapaestic dimeter catalectic 373. 

Anapaestic monometer acatalectic 
371. 

Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic 
374. 

Anapaestic verse 370. 

Anastrophe 31, IV. 

Anomalous substantives third Dec 
67 sq. ; Dial. 214 ; verbs 157 sq. 

Answer yes or no 344, 7. 

Aorist 103 ; Aor. Pass, with a 131 ; 
first Aor. Act. without 0* 154, 7 ; 
second Aor. with cr 154, 8 ; sec- 
ond Aor. Act. and Mid. accord- 
ing to analogy of verbs in pi 191 
sq.; Aor. of some verbs with 
both a Mid. and Pass, from 197, 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



591 



R. 1 ; Aor. of some Mid. verbs, 
•whose Flit, has a Pass, from 197, 
R. 3 ; second Aor. Act. with In- 
trans. meaning and first Aor. Act. 
with Trans, meaning 141,4. — 
Syntax 256 ; iterative meaning 
256, 4, (b) ; in comparisons 256, 
4, (c) ; instead of the Pres. 256, 
4, (d) ; Aor. with zl ovv ov 
256, 4, (e) ; instead of the Fut. 
256, 4, (f) ; to denote the com- 
ing into a condition 256, 4 (g) ; 
signification of the Aor. Subj., 
Opt, Imp., Inf. and Part. 257. 

Aorist, first and second Mid. always 
reflexive (or Intrans.) 251, 3 ; 
Aor. Subj. in subordinate clauses 
instead of the Fut. Perf. as used 
in Lat. 255, R. 9. 

Aphaeresis 14, 5. 

Apodosis 339, 1. 

Apocope 207, 7. 

Aposiopesis 340, 2, (b). 

Apostrophe 13, R. 1. 

Apposition 266 ; in Gen. with Poss. 
Pron. (e t ubg tov a&liov (jIo$) 266, 
2 ; Distrib. or Partitive apposi- 
tion 266, 3. 

Arsis and Thesis 349, 2 ; place of 
349, 3. 

Article 91 ; 244 sq. ; demons, and rel- 
ative 247 ; as proper article 244 ; 
with common nouns 244, 2 — 5 ; 
with abstracts, nouns of material, 
proper names 244, 6 and 7 ; with 
the Adjective and Part, used as 
substantives 244, 8, 9 ; with ad- 
verbs of time and place, used as 
adjectives 244, 10 ; with pro- 
nouns and numerals 246 ; (t« 
lijg tioXeok, ol ntql tivcc, oi vvv 
uvOqojtiolJ 244, 10. 263 ; • with 
every word or part of speech 
244, 11 ; position 245 ; with nug, 
o'/.og 246, 5 ; with cardinal num- 
bers 246, 9. 

Article omitted with common nouns 



244, R. 3 ; with abstracts 244, R. 4 ; 
with proper names 244,7; with Adj. 
and participles 244, R. 8 ; with 
demonstrative pronouns 246, R. 1. 

Article with the subject and predi- 
cate 244, R. 1. 

Article in apposition 244, R. 6. 

Article repeated 245, 2. 

Article in place of the Poss. pro- 
noun (o naxr]Q instead of epos 
n.) 244, 4. 

Asper, see Spiritus. 

Aspirate before another aspirate 
changed to a smooth 17, 4 ; 21, 3. 

Asjnrates 5, (a). 

Asyndeton 325. 

Atonies 32. 

Attic second Dec. 48 ; Attic Redup. 
see Redup. 

Attraction of Gend. 240, 3 ; Numb. 
241, 6; with Prep, and Adv. 300, 
4, comp. 300, 3 ; with the Inf. 307, 
4. 308, 2 ; with o^t?, 341, 3 ; with 
the Part. 310, 2; of Modes 327 b ; 
of the relative 332, 6 ; of oiog, 
udog, tjUxog, 332, 7 ; inverted 
attraction 332, R. 12 ; with ovdug 
ogng ou; with adverbs of place 
332, R. 13; attraction of the 
relative in position 332, 8 ; at- 
traction of the relative in a 
clause subordinate to the adjec- 
tive clause 332, 9 ; attraction of 
the Case in comparative sen- 
tences introduced by wg, wgnzg, 
ugTS 342, R. 3., comp. 344, R. 7. 
and 324, R. 2. 

Attribute 239, 2. 

Attributive relation of sentences 
262, sq. 

Augment, 108, 3 ; 119 sq. and 219 ; 
in compounds 125 and 215, sq. 

Blending of two or more interroga- 
tive sentences into one (rig tivos 
aiTiog tyivtTo) 344, R. 7. 

Brachylogy 346, 2. 



592 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



Barytones 29, R. 7, (f). 
Bucolic Caesura 355. 

Caesura 351. 

Cardinals 96, sq. 

Cases 41 ; Synt. 268, sq. ; Case 
Absolute: Gen. Abs. 312, 3; 
Ace. Abs. 312, 5. 

Cataleclic verse 352, 2. 

Characteristic of the verb 108, 5 ; 
of the tenses 110 ; pure and im- 
pure 142, 2 ; of verbs in pi 170. 

Circumflex accent 29, 4. 

Classes of verbs 102. 248. 

Clauses, principal and subordinate 
326 ; substantive clauses 328 sq.; 
adjective clauses 331 ; adverbial 
clause 335. 

Comparatio compendiaria 323, R. 6. 

Comparison of adjectives 81 sq.; 
Dialects 216 ; of substantives 84, 
R. 4. 216, R. 2; of adverbs 85. 

Comparative degree 239; strength- 
ened and more definitely stated 
239 ; use of ?j and of the Gen. 
■with the comparative 323, 2 sq. 

Comparative without a second mem- 
ber of the comparison 323, R. 7.; 
apparently used instead of the 
positive 323, R. 7. 

Comparative ?J and the compar. 
Gen. 323 sq. ; compendious com- 
parison 323, R. 6. 

Comparative subordinate clauses 
342, 343. 

Composition of words 236. 

Compound words 236 sq. 

Concessive clauses 340, 7. 

Concretes 39. 

Conditional sentences, see d in the 
Greek Index. 

Conjugation 107 sq. ; in w 115 sq. ; 
in pi 168 sq., in the Dialects : 
in w 219, in pi 224. 

Conjunctions 199, 319. 

Consequence, clauses denoting, with 
ixga, ovv, toIvvv, etc. 323, 3. 



Consonants 3, 2 ; division 5 ; mova* 
ble at the end of a word 15 ; chan- 
ges 17 sq. ; metathesis 22 ; doub- 
ling 23 ; strengthening of and ad- 
dition 24 ; expulsion 25, 3 ; omis- 
sion 25 ; final consonant of a 
pure Greek word 25, 5 ; inter- 
change of consonants in the dia- 
lects 202—204 ; changes of in 
the dialects, 208. 

Coordinate attributive adjectives 
264, 2. 

Coordinate sentences 319 sq. ; cop- 
ulat. coordinate sentences (if— 
v.ai) 321, 1, a; negative (ovts, 
olds) 321, 2; (ov povov — alia y.ctl, 
etc.) 321, 3. adversative coordi- 
nate sentences, (piv — ds) 322, 1 
— 5; {alia) 322, 6; disjunctive 
(i\ — »/, etc.) 323 ; reason, cause 
(ydg) 324, 2 ; consequence or 
inference (ulqa, rolvvv) 324, 3. 

Copula uvai 238, R. 6. 

Copulative coordinate sentences 321. 

Coronis 10, R. 1. 

Correlative pronouns and adverbs 94. 

Crasis 10 sq.; in the Dialects 206 ; 
in relation to the accent 31, II. 

Customary, wont, 256, 4 (b). 

Dative 282 sq. 

Dative local (where ?) 283, 1 ; (a) 
amotg Tolg c innoig 283, 2. (/?) 

UTQUTM, OTolct), Tllv&El, VaVffl, 

etc. 285, R. 2 ; of time (when ?) 
tqItji ij^EQcc', of the condition 
under which anything happens, 
283, 3. 
Dative as a personal object 284 ; in 
a local relation (whither) with 
verbs of motion (<xvi%Hv xuqa^ 
ovqavC)) 284, R. 1 ; Dat. of com- 
munion 284, 3 ; with verbs ex- 
pressing mutual intercourse, as- 
sociating with, participation 284, 
3, (1) ; with verbs of contend- 
ing, approaching, yielding ; with 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



593 



the adjectives and adverbs, nlr}- 
alog, ivavrlog, nilag (ey/vg) etc. 
284, 3, (2) ; with verbs of com- 
manding, entreating, counselling, 
inciting, following, serving, obey- 
ing, accompanying, trusting, with 
the adjectives and adverbs, av.6- 
Xov&og, diado/og, e$ijg, etc. 284, 
3, (3) ; with expressions of like- 
ness and unlikeness 284, 3, (4) ; 
with expressions denoting to be 
becoming, suitable, pleasing 284, 
3> (5) ; of agreeing with, blam- 
ing, reproaching, being angry 
with, envying 284, 3, (6); of 
helping, averting and being use- 
ful 284, 3, (7); with all verbs 
and adjectives when the action 
takes place for the honor, advan- 
tage or disadvantage, etc. of a 
person (Dativus commodi et in- 
commodi) 284, 3, R. 4; with 
verbs of observing, finding, meet- 
ing with something in a person 
284, 3, (8) ; Dat. of possession 
with iivcu and ylyveaxrub 284, 3, 

(9) ; instead of Lat. Dat. (ali- 
quid mihi est honori) 284, 3, (9) ; 
when an action takes place in 
reference to a person 284, 3, 

(10) ; ethical Dat. 284, 3, (10), 
(d) ; with Pass, verbs 284, 3, 
(11); with verbal adjectives in 
Tog and riog instead of vno with 
the Gen. 284, 3, (12). 

Dative of the thing, or instrumental 
Dat. 285 ; of the ground or rea- 
son with verbs denoting the state 
of the feelings 285, 1, (1); of 
the means and instrument with 
Xoya&ai and vo^iQav 285, 1, 
(2) ; manner, material, standard, 
rule and measure 285, 1, (3). 

Dative with the Inf. 3C7, 2, (b). 

Dative with the Part. 310, 2. 

Dative of participle instead of anoth- 
er Case 313, 1, (a). 



Declension of the substantive 41, 3 ; 
first Dec. 42 — 44 ; quantity and 
accent 45 ; Dialects 211 ; second 
Dec. 46 — 48 ; accent 49 ; gen- 
der 50 ; Dialects 212 ; third Dec. 
51 — 69 ; quantity 64 ; accent 65 ; 
gender 66 ; Dialects 213 ; anoma- 
lous nouns 67 sq. 214 ; defective 
nouns 69. 214, R. 2. 

Declension of adjectives and partici- 
ples 74 — 79, see adjectives. 

Declension of pronouns 87 sq. 

Declension of numerals 99, 5. 

Defectives of the third Dec. 69, 73, 
2. 214, R. 2. 

Demonstrative pronouns, see Pro- 
nouns. 

Denominative verbs 232, 1. 

Deponents 102, 3 ; Passive Depo- 
nents 197, Syn. 252. 

Derivation of words 232 sq., of ten- 
ses 128. 

Derivatives 231, 2, 4, (b). 

Desiderative verbs 232, Rem. 3. 

Diaeresis 4, R. 6 ; in the Dialects 
205, 6 ; metrical diaeresis 351 R. 

Dialects page 13 ; 202 sq. 

Diastole 37, 2. 

Digamma 5, 2, (a) ; 25, 2 ; 200. 

Dimeter 360. 

Diminutives 233, 2, (c). 

Dipody 350, 4. 

Diphthongs 4, 3. 

Disjunctive coordinate sentences 
323. 

Distributive apposition 266, 3. 

Division of syllables 36. 

Double consonants 5, 4. 

Doubling of consonants 208, 4. 

Dual number 41 ; 106 ; with a PI 
verb 241, 5 ; interchanged with 
the PI. 241, R. 8; Dual verb 
with a PI. Subj. 241, R. 9 ; Dual 
of the Fern, with the Masc. (tov- 
tw tu rs'xva) 241, R. 10, (b). 



50* 



Elision 13 sq. ; in the Dialects 206, 



594 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



5 ; elision in respect to the ac- 
cent 31, HI. 

Ellipsis 346, 1 ; of the subject and 
especially of the Subs. 238, 5 ; 
of the copula sivau 238, R. 6 
and 7 ; of the Subs, to which 
the attribute belongs 263 ; of av 
260, R. 3. 6, 7 ; of the Protasis 
and Apodosis 340. 

Emphasis in sentences 321, 3. 

Enclitics 33 sq. ; accented 35. 

Enliansive sentences expressed by 
v.ai, ov fiovov, uXXa xal 321, 3. 

Epicenes 40, R. 5. 

Essential words 238, 1. 38, 4. 

Etymology 13. 

Euphonic Prothesis 16, 10. 

Expulsion of consonants 25. 

Factitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c). 

Feminine PL with Sing, verb 241, 
R. 6 ; with the neuter (al [istu- 
(3oXal XvxtrjQor) 241, 2 ; with a 
Neut. (to yvvaly.iov ecm aaXrj) 
241, 2, sq. ; Fern. Dual with the 
Masc. (zovtoj t« tiyva) 241, R. 10. 

Final clauses 330. 

Frequentative verbs 232, R. 2. 

Formal words 238, 1. 38, 3. 

Formation of words 231 sq. 

Future tense 103 ; Attic 117 ; Doric 
in aov^iai 154, 3 ; without a 154, 

4 ; in ovy.ai with mute verbs 154, 

5 ; Mid. instead of Act. (axovw, 
axovaoiiai instead of axovavi) 
154, 1, and 198 ; Synt. 255, 3, 
4 ; Fut. Inf. after verbs of think- 
ing, hoping, etc. 257, R. 2. 

Future Perf. 103 ; in Act. form 
154, 6 ; Synt. 255, 5 ; instead 
of the simple Fut. 255, R. 8 ; 
the Lat. Fut. Perf., how ex- 
pressed in Greek 255, R. 9. 

Gender of the substantive 40 ; first 
Dec. 42 ; second Dec. 50 ; third 
Dec. 66 ; of Adj. and Part. 74. 



Gender of the adjective, etc. in the 
const, y.ara avvsaiv 241 ; in gen- 
eral statements 241, 2 ; with sev- 
eral subjects 242 ; of the Superl. 
with Part. Gen. 241, 7 ; of the 
relative pronoun 332. 

Genitive, attributive 265 ; used el- 
liptically 263, (b). 

Genitive in the objective relation 
270. 

Genitive, separative, with verbs of 
removal, separation, loosing, de- 
sisting, freeing, missing, depriv- 
ing, differing from 271, 2, 3 ; 
with verbs of beginning 271, 4. 

Genitive of origin and author, with 
verbs of originating, being pro- 
duced from 273, 1. 

Genitive, possessive, (a) with dvai, 
yiyvw&ai, (/?) Idtog olxtiog, etc. 
273, 2. 

Genitive of quality 273, 2, (c). 

Genitive, partitive, with dvav and 
yiyvea&ai', Ti&hai, Tioina&cu, 
riytfof-&ai 273, 3, (a) ; in attribu- 
tive relation with substantives, 
substantive adjectives, substan- 
tive pronouns, numerals and ad- 
verbs 273, R. 4; with words 
which express the idea of parti- 
cipation, sharing in ; with verbs 
signifying to touch, be in connec- 
tion with ; of acquiring and at- 
taining ; of physical and intellec- 
tual contact, of laying hold of; 
of hasty motion, striving after an 
object 273, 3, (b), and R. 7 ; with 
verbs of entreating and suppli- 
cating 273, R. 6 ; with the ad- 
verbs sv&v, l&v, (a&xqi ; with 
verbs of meeting and approach- 
ing 273, 3, R. 9 ; Part. Gen. in 
poetry 273, R. 7. 

Genitive of place 273, 4, (a). 

Genitive of time 273, 4, (b). 

Genitive of material 273, 5 ; with 
verbs of making, forniing 273, 5, 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



595 



(a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of 
eating, drinking, tasting, enjoy- 
ing, having the enjoyment of 
something intellectually, etc. (c) ; 
of smelling (d) ; of remember- 
ing and forgetting ; with expres- 
sions of being acquainted and 
unacquainted with, of experience 
and inexperience, ability, dex- 
terity, of making trial of, with 
verbal adjectives in -iy.6g, etc. ex- 
pressing the idea of dexterity 

(e) ; with words of sensation and 
perception (uy.ovsiv, uy.Qoua&ui, 
aia&avsa&ai, bvcpQaivta&UL (f) 
and R. 19.; with verbs of hear- 
ing 273, R. 18; with verbs of 
seeing, hearing, experiencing, 
learning, considering, knowing, 
judging, examining, saying, ad- 
miring, praising, blaming 273, R. 
20. 

lenitive of cause 274 ; with verbs 
denoting a desire, longing for 
(a) ; care, concern for (b) ; pain, 
grief, pity, with adjectives having 
a similar meaning, particularly in 
exclamations, with interjections 
(c) ; with verbs expressing an- 
ger, indignation, envy, admira- 
tion, praise and blame (d), (e), 

(f ) ; with verbs expressing re- 
quital, revenge, accusing and 
condemning 274, 2; xov with 
the Inf. 274, 3, (a) ; with the 
adverbs sv, y.ulotg, puglwg, wg, 
ntig, bnwg, ovio)g f etc. connected 
with £/£iv, i\y.uv, livai 274, 3, 
(b). 

Genitive with verbs of ruling, supe- 
riority, and inferiority, subjuga- 
tion, with the adjectives iyy.ouxr^g, 
uy.oar^g 27 5, 1. 

Genitive after the comparative 275, 
2 ; use of the Gen. and 7; with 
the comparative 323, 2 sq. 

Genitive of price 275, 3. 



Genitive with substantives and ad- 
jectives 275, R. 5. 

Genitive, double, governed by one 
substantive 275, R. 7. 

Genitive with the Inf. 307, 2, (a). 

Genitive with the Part, 310, 2. 

Genitive absolute 312, 3 ; when the 
subject is the same as that of the 
predicate 313, 2; with ojg after 
eidevai, voeiv, etc. 312, R. 12. 

Gentile nouns 233, 2, (a). 

Grave accent 29 ; instead of the 
acute 31. 

Heteroclites 59, R. 2; 67, (b) ; 71. 
Heterogeneous substantives 70, B. 
Hexameter verse 355. 
Hepthemim 355. 
Hiatus 8 ; 206, 7. 
Historical tenses 103, 2 ; 254, 3. 
Hypercalalectic verse 352, 2. 
Hypodiastole 37. 
Hypothetical sentences, see d. 

Iambic dimeter 367. 

Iambic monometer 366. 

Iambic trimeter acatalectic 368. 

Iambic tetrameter catalectic 369. 

Iambic verse 365. 

Imitative verbs 232, 1, (a). 

Imperative 104, III ; Synt. 258, 1, 
(c) ; use of the Imp. 259, 4 ; 
third Pers. Sing. Perf. ]\Iid. or 
Pass. 255, R. 6. 

Imperfect tense 103 ; analogous to 
verbs in p.L 196 ; Synt. 256, 2 — 4. 

Impersonal construction, see per- 
sonal construction. 

Impersonal verbs 238, R. 2. 

Inclination, see Enclitic. 

Indeclinable nouns 73, 1. 

Indicative 104, 1 ; Synt. 258, (a) ; 
Fut. with Sv 260, 2, (1) ; 
Impf, Plup. and Aor. with ixv 
200, 2, (2; ; difference between 
the Inipl'., Aor. and Plup. 25 6 ; 
Fut. instead of the Imp. 255, 4 \ 



696 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



■with ov, e. g. 01* navaj} liyav ib.; 
Ind. of the Hist, tenses with words 
expressing a wish 259, R. 6; Ind. 
in subordinate sentences, see the 
separate conjunctions ; Ind. in 
orat. obliq. 344, 6. 

Indirect form of discourse, see ob- 
lique form. 

Infinitive 105, (a) ; Synt., the 
Pres. and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (c) ; 
Aor. Pres. and Fut. after verbs 
of thinking, etc. 257, R. 2 ; with 
«V 260, 2, (5). 

Infinitive 305 ; without the Art. 306 ; 
with verbs of willing and the 
contrary, etc. 306, 1. (a) ; with 
verbs of thinking, supposing, 
saying 306, 1, (b) ; after expres- 
sions denoting ability, cause, 
power, capacity 306, 1, (c) ; with 
adjectives and substantives, with 
eivai, Tiecpvy.svcu and ylyvsa&ccL 
with a substantive, after avfiftal- 
vsi, dtl, XQV and the like, after 
substantives, adjectives, demon- 
strative pronouns, after verbs of 
giving, sending, etc. 306, 1, (d). 

Infinitive, or Ace. with Inf. differ- 
ent from Part. 311 ; Inf., or Ace. 
with Inf., different from cm, wg, 
that 329, R. 5 ; in forms express- 
ing command or wish 306, R. 11 ; 
in forms expressing indignation 
306, R. 11, c ; with at yaq, 
sl&s 306, R. 11, (d). 

Infinitive with Nom., Gen., Dat. 
and Ace. 307. 

Infinitive with the Art. instead of 
the Inf. without the Art. 308, R. 1. ; 
in Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
308, 2 ; in exclamations and 
questions implying indignation 
308, R. 2 ; as an adverbial ex- 
pression (to vvv sivai and the 
- like) 308, R. 3. 

Infinitive Act. instead of the Pass. 
306, R. 10. 



Inflection 38. 

Inflection-endings of the verb 103 
sq. ; Remarks on 116 ; of verbi 
in pi 171, 172. 

Intensive verbs 232, R. 2. 

Interchange of vowels 201 ; conso- 
nants 202—204. 

Interpunction-m&rks 3 7. 

Interrogative pronouns, see Pro- 
nouns. 

Interrogative sentences 344 ; modes 
in 344, 6 ; connection with a 
relative sentence 344, R. 3 ; 
change of a subordinate sentence 
into a direct interrogative sen- 
tence (oxav %l noirjaaai) 344, 
R. 6 ; blending of two or more 
interrogative sentences into one 
(rig tIvoq cutioq saii) 344, R. 7. 

Intransitive verbs 248, (1) (/?) ; as 
Trans, with the Ace. 249, R. 2 ; 
instead of the Pass. 249, 3 ; in 
the Pass. 251, 4, and R. 6. 

Interrogative sentence with the Art. 
344, R. 3. 

Inversion 348, 5. 

Iota subscript 4, R. 4. 

Iterative form in axov 221. 

Lengthening of the vowels 16, 3. 207. 

Lenis Spiritus 6. 

Letters, sounds of 2 a . 

Limitation of sentences 322, 1 — 5. 

Litotes 239, R. 3. 

Local substantives 233, 2, (d). 

Masculine PL with Sing, verb 241, 

R. 6 ; connected with the Neut. 

(ol noXXol dsLvov) 241, 2 ; Masc. 

with a Neut. (ixeiqumov taxi xa- 

log) 241, 1 ; Masc. PI. with Fern. 

241, R. 11. 
Metaplasm 67, (c). 72. 214, R. 1. 
Metathesis of the liquids 22. 208, 

3 ; of the aspirates 21, 3 ; verb 

156. 
Middle form 102 ; Synt. 248, (2) ; 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



597 



■with reflex, sense 250 ; with the 
meaning to cause to do 250, R. 
2; when an action is performed 
to the advantage or disadvantage 
of the subject 250, R. 3 ; with a 
reflex Pron. 250, R. 3; with a 
subjective meaning, figuratively 
250, R.4 ; with a pass, sense 251. 

Modes 104 ; Synt. 258 sq. ; in subor- 
dinate clauses 327 b , 1 ; attraction 
of 327 b ; comp. the separate con- 
junctions, in Greek Index. 

Mode vowels 111 ; summary of 112 ; 
of verbs in [il 171; in the Dial. 
220. 

Movable final consonants 15. 

Multiplicatives 96, 1, (d). 

Negatives, ov, firj 318; accumula- 
tion of negatives 318, 6 ; appa- 
rent Pleonasm of 318, 6—9. 

Neuter of names of persons con- 
nected with Masc. or Fern. 241, 2, 
R. 3 ; PL instead of the Sing, with 
verb, adjectives 241, 3 ; PI. of 
pronouns 243, 4 ; PL with Sing, 
verb 241, 4. 

Nominal question 344, 2. 

Nominative with the change of the 
Act. construction of the verb 
with the Gen. or Dat. into the 
Pass., e. g. niaTsiofxaL 251, 4. 

Nominative Case 269 ; with ovofia 
(art fioi, ovofia l/co, with verbs 
of naming 269, R. 3 ; Nom. of 
an abstract instead of a Lat. Dat. 
(mihi est Jionori) 269, R. 2 ; Norn, 
instead of the Voc. 269, 2 ; in 
o"/r { aa v.a.& oXov v.uX pigog 266, 
3, R. 4. 

Nominative with the Inf. 307 ; in- 
stead of the Ace. with the Inf. 
307, 4. 

Nominative with a Part. 310, 3 ; in- 
stead of another Case 313 ; with- 
out a finite verb 313, R. 1. 

Numerals 96 sq. 218. 



Number 41. 106 ; Synt. 243 ; in the 
const, xaia avveaiv 241 ; with 
verb, adjectives in tog riog 241, 
3 ; the number of adjectives 
when they are connected with 
several subjects 242, 1 ; number 
of verb with several subjects 242, 
2 ; with several subjects disjunc- 
tively connected 242, R. 3 ; num- 
ber of the Rel. Pron. 332. 

Object in a sentence 239, 2. 

Objective construction of sentences 
267 sq. 

Oblique discourse 345 sq. 

Omission of consonants 25. 

Optative mode 104, IL see the Subj. 
Synt. ; nature of the Opt. 258, 1, 
(b). 259 ; with av 260, 2, (4) ; 
without av 260, R. 7; in exhor- 
tations 259, R. 1 ; Opt. Delib. 
259, 2 ; to express frequent rep- 
etition (as often as) 327 b , 2 ; to 
express a supposition, uncertain- 
ty, possibility, presumption, ad- 
mission 259, 3, (a) ; wish 259, 3, 

(b) ; instead of the Imp. 259, 3, 

(c) ; desire, wish, inclination 259, 
3, (d) ; in direct questions 259, 3, 
(e) ; Opt. without av instead of 
with av 260, R. 7 ; Opt. in sub- 
ordinate clauses, see the separate 
conjunctions ; in or alio obliqua 
345, 4. 

Oratio obliqua 345. 
Ordinals 96 sq. 
Organs of speech 3. 

Participle 74 sq. 105, (b) ; Synt. 
309 sq. 

Participle as the complement of the 
verb 310 ; Nom., Gen., Dat,, Ace. 
of the Part. 310, 2 ; after verba 
sentiendi 310, 4, (a) ; verba de- 
clarandi 310, 4, (b) ; verbs de- 
noting an affection of the mind 
(verba affectuum) 310, 4, (c) ; to 



598 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



be satisfied with, to enjoy, be full 
310, 4, (d) ; overlooking, permit- 
ting, enduring, persevering, 310, 
4, (e) ; beginning and ceasing 
310, 4, (f) ; to be fortunate, to 
excel, to be inferior, to do well 
or ill 310, 4, (g) ; after nsigm^iai, 
nagcHTxsvix&ixai, etc. 310, 4, (h); 
after the phrases it is fit, useful, 
etc. 310, 4, (i) ; after i'/eiv, to be 
in a conditio)!, or state, e. g. £#w 
XTrjaupsvog 310, 4, (k) ; with 
Tvyzdvco, Xav&dvo), diccTsXoj, did- 
yw, cp&dvcj, oY/opai 310, 4, (1). 

Participle different from Inf. after 
several classes of verbs 311, and 
R. 

Participle as the expression of ad- 
verbial subordinate relations 312. 

Participle with wg 312, 6; with 
wgis, vgntQ, are, oia, olov 312, 6, 
K. 13. 

Participle with thai, instead of a 
simple verb 238, R. 5. 

Participle with av 260, 2, (5). 

Parlicipials 105 ; see Inf. and Part. 

Participial construction 309 ; ana- 
coluthon 313, 1. 

Particles 38, R. 

Particles expressing purpose, design 
330. 

Parts of Speech 38. 

Passive verb 102; Synt. 248, (3). 
251. 

Patronymics 233, 2, (b). 

Pentameter verse 356. 

Perfect tense 103 ; with a 131 ; ni- 
nvorfxai, etc. 223, 14 ; Subj. and 
Opt. Perf. or Plup. Mid. or Pass. 
formed without the aid of an aux- 
iliary verb 154, 9 ; Perf. and 
Plupf. of verbs in (il with short- 
ened form 193; Perf. and Plup. 
analogous to verbs in pi 193 — 
195 ; second Perf. with Intrans. 
meaning 141, 4. 249, 2 ; Synt. 
255, 2; in the third Pers. Sing. 



Imp. Mid. or Pass. 255, A. 6 ; 
with the signif. of the Pre*. 255, 
R. 5; instead of the Fur. 255, 
R. 7. 

Person of the verb 106 ; with sev- 
eral subjects 242 ; in adjective- 
clauses 332, 2. 

Persons, interchange of in the orat. 
obliq. 345, R. 6. 

Personal construction, instead of 
the Impers. with Inf. 307, R. 6 
and 7; with Part. 310, R. 3; 
with otl, wg 329, R. 7. 

Personal endings 111 ; view of 113 ; 
difference between endings in 
the principal and subordinate 
tenses 114 ; of verbs in fit 172 ; 
Dialects 220. 

Personal pronouns 87 — 90. 

Plural number 41 ; with the sub- 
stantive in the Gen. 241, R. 2 ; 
PI. subst. with Dual verb 241, R. 
9 ; PI. of subst. in proper names, 
names of materials, and abstracts 
243, 3 ; change to the Sing. 241, 
R. 12 ; in an address to one per- 
son 241, R. 13 ; the first Pers. 
PI. instead of the Sing. 241, R. 
12 ; Neut. PI. in verbal adjec- 
tives instead of the Sing. 241, 3 ; 
PI. of verbs with collective nouns 
in the Sing. 241, 1 ; with sub- 
stantives in the Dual 241, 5 ; 
ravxa, Tads, (xslva used of one 
idea 241, R. 3 ; PI. interchanged 
with the Dual 241, R. 8. 

Pluralia tantum 73, 2. 

Pluperfect 103. Comp. Perf. Synt. 
256, 2. 

Position of words 348. 

Position of av 261 ; article o, f\, to 
245 ; prepositions 300, 6 ; pro» 
nouns, see the separate pronouns. 
Adverbs and particles, see the 
separate adverbs and particles ; 
of ts 321, R. 3 ; p:iv and ds 322, 
R. 2. 



INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 



599 



Positive degree, see Comparative. 

Possessive pronouns 90. 

Predicate 238, 2. 

Predicative relation of sentences 238. 

Pregnant construction 300, 3. 

Prepositions 199 ; Synt. 286 sq. ; as 
adverbs of place 300 ; Tmesis 
300, R. 4 ; in const. Praeg. tt/tt- 
tsiv iv yovraai) 300, 4 ; "with 
the Art, attracted (ol i/. rrjg ccyo- 
gug vlvSqwtioi ecpvyov) 300, 4 ; 
repeated and omitted 300, 5 ; po- 
sition 300, 6. 

Present tense 103 ; Pres. andlmpf. 
analogous to verbs in \ii 196; 
Synt. 255, 1 ; Hist. Pres. 255, 1 ; 
instead of the Perf. 255, R. 1 ; 
instead of the Fut. 255, R. 3. 

Primitives 231, 2. 

Principal clauses 326. 

Principal tenses 103, 2. 254, 2. 

Proclitics 32. 

Pronouns 86; Dialects 217; De- 
clension 87 sq. ; Synt. 301— 304. 

Pronoun, correlative 94 ; demon- 
strative, Decl. 91; Dialects 217, 
4. 303, 1 and 2 ; avxog 303, 3 ; 
prospective and retrospective 
304 ; omitted before a relative 
331, R. 3. 

Pronoun indefinite iig %l Decl. 93. 
303, 4 ; position 303, R. 5. 

Pronoun interrogative, rig Decl. 93 ; 
see Interrog. sentences ; with Art. 
prefixed 344, R. 3. 

Pronoun personal Decl. 87. 302; 
third Pers. prospective 304; re- 
trospective 304, 3. 

Pronoun possessive 90 ; Dialects 
217, 3. 

Pronoun reciprocal Decl. 89. 

Pronoun reflexive Decl. 88. 302, 2 ; 
third Pers. instead of the first 
and second 302, 8 ; instead of 
the reciprocal 302, R. 7. 

Pronunciation 29, 36 ; of letters 3. 

Purpose, particles denoting 330, 1. 



Proportionals 96, 1, (e). 
Protasis 339. 

Prothesis Euphonic 16, 10. 207, 8. 
Punctuation-marks 37. 

Quantity 27 sq. ; in Dialects 209 ; 
first Dec. 45, (a) ; third Dec. 64. 

Redundant nouns 70. 

Reduplication 108, 4. 123, 219 ; in 
sec. Aor. 219, 7; Att. in Perf. 
and Plup. 124 ; second Aor. 124; 
R. 2 ; in compound words 125 
sq. ; as strengthening of the stem 
163. 

Reflexive verbs 102 ; Synt. 248, (2). 

Reflexive pronouns 88. 

Relation of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 2. 

Relative construction changed to the 
Demonstrative 334, 1. 

Relative pronoun Decl. 92; Synt. 
331 sq. ; instead of the demons. 
331, R. 1; agreement of gender 
and number 332 ; Case (attrac- 
tion) 332, 6 ; attraction with 
olog, oaog, ijXUog 332, 7 ; inverse 
attraction 332, R. 11 ; with ovdelg 
ogxtg ov 332, R. 12 ; with ad- 
verbs of place 332, R. 13 ; at- 
traction in position 332, 8 ; rela- 
tive pronoun of an intermediate 
clause attracted 332, 9 ; construc- 
tion of the relative pronoun 333 ; 
rel. pron. changed to a demons. 
or pers. 334, 1 ; rel. pron. in- 
stead of a demonstrative 334, 3. 

Relative clause, see adjective clause. 

Reciprocal pronouns 89. 

Reciprocal verbs 248, R. 1. 

Resolution of contract verbs 222. 

Restriction of sentences 322, 1 — 5. 

Rhythm 349. 

Roots 231, 2. 

Scheme, see cr/^« in Greek Index. 

Sentences 238, 1. 

Sentences denoting effect or re- 



600 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



suit with ccgtx f ovv, rolvvv, etc. 
324, 3. 

Sequence of tenses 327 a . 

Shortening of the vowels 16, 4. 
207,4. 

Singular verb with Masc. or Fern. 
PI. 241, E. 6 ; with Neut. PI. 241, 
4 ; with several common nouns 
in PI. 242, E. 2. 

Singular of substantives 243, 1 ; 
changed to the PI. 241, E. 12 ; 
Sing. Imp. e. g. elns in an ad- 
dress to several 241, E. 13. 

Spiritus Len. and Asp. 6. 

Stem of the verb 108, 1 ; pure and 
impure 138 ; strengthening the 
consonant and prolonging the 
stem-vowel 139. 

Stems 231, 4, (a). 

Strengthening of the vowels 16, 1 ; 
consonants 24 ; stem of impure 
verbs 139. 

Subject 238, 2 ; change of the ac- 
tive construct, into the Pass., e. g. 
TiHTTevofxcu from maTsvb) xivl 
251, 4 ; ellipses of 238, 5. 

Subjunctive Mode 104, II. Perf. 
and Pip. Mid. or Pass, without 
an auxiliary verb 154, 9 ; Subj. 
and Opt. Act. and Mid. of verbs 
in vfn without auxiliary verb 
176, 5. Synt. 258, 1, (b). 259; 
Subj. Aor. instead of Fut. Perf. 
of Latin 255, E. 9. 

Subjunctive with av 260, 2, (3) ; 
(with and without av) instead of 
tie Fut. Ind. 259, E. 4; Subj. 
hortative 259, 1 (a) ; delibera- 
tive 259, 1, (b). 260, 2, 3, (b) ; 
Subj. to den. indefinite frequen- 
cy (as often as) 327 b , 2, 333, 3 ; in 
comparisons 333, E. 2 ; with pr\ 
instead of the Imp. 259, 5 ; in 
subordinate clauses, see the sep- 
arate conjunctions ; in Or. obliq. 
345, 5. 

Subordinate sentences 326 sq.; class- 



es 326, 3 ; characteristics 326, E- 
4 ; subordinate sentences changed 
into direct interrogative senten- 
ces 344, E. 6. 

Substantive 39 sq. ; Gen. 40 ; Numb., 
Case and Dec. 41 ; Dec. I. 42 
sq. ; Dec. II. 46 sq.; Dec. HI. 
51 sq. 

Substantive 39 sq. ; number 242. 

Substantive instead of adjective 264, 
E. 3. 

Substantive clauses expressing design^ 
aim, with ag, oncag, \va, etc. 
330. 

Substantive clauses wrth oti, ag, that 
329. 

Superlative 81 sq. Synt. 239 ; strength- 
ening and more exact definition 
of, 239, E. 2; Gend. with the 
Part. Gen 241, 7. 

Syllables, division of 36. 

Synizesis 12. Dialects 206, 4. 

Syncope 16, 8. 207, 6; in substan- 
tives 55, 2 ; in verbs 155. 

Syntax 238 sq. 

Tenses of the verb 103 ; of the sub- 
ordinate modes 257; derivation 
128 ; formation of the secondary 
tenses, use of the same in con- 
nection with the primary 141 ; 
Tenses primary and Sec. 103, E. 
141. 

Tenses, Syntax 254 ; sequence of 
in subordinate clauses 327 a . 

Tense-formation of verbs in w 127 ; 
pure verbs 129 ; mute 142 sq. ; 
liquid 149 ; verbs in pi 173 ; in 
Dialects 223. 

Tense-characteristic, see character- 
istic. 

Tense-endings 110. 

Tense-stem 110, 2. 

Theme of the verb 138, 3. 

Tliesis and Arsis 349. 

Time, difference between Gen. and 
Dat. of time, 273, E. 13. 



INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 



601 



Tmesis of Prepositions 300, R. 4. 

Transitive verbs 248, (a) (a) ; with 
In trans, or Reflex, signif. (tostim 
instead of rgsjro^aL) 249, 1, 2 ; 
with the sense to cause to do 249, 
R. 3. 

Transition from direct discourse to 
indirect and vice versa 345, R. 6. 

Transposition of the attributive 
adjective and Subs, (ol xqr^xol 
twv avxTQUTHov instead of ol xqtj- 
(Ttoi uv&qcotioi) 264, R. 5. 

Triemim 355. 

Trochaic verse 361. 

Trochaic monometer 362. 

Trochaic dimeter 363. 

Trochaic tetrameter catalectic 364. 

Variable vowels 16, 6 ; in the stem 
of impure verbs 140 ; change of 
sc into ol 140, 4 ; of e into o 
231, 6. 

Verb 102 sq. 219 sq. ; division of 
verbs in ca according to the char- 
acteristic 127 ; barytones 127, 
R. ; pure verbs (and contract) 
129 — 137; Perispomena 127, R; 
impure 127. 138—141 ; mute 
127. 142—148; liquid 127. 149 
—153 ; special peculiarities of 



verbs (pure and impure) 154 ; 
anomalous in « 157 sq. ; in (it 168 
sq. ; in w which in certain tenses 
are analogous to verbs in fit : sec- 
ond Aor. Act. and Mid. 191 sq. ; in 
Dialects 227; Perf. and Plup. 
193—195 ; in Dialects 228 ; 
Pres. and Impf. 196 ; verbs De- 
nom., Frequent., Imitat., Intens., 
Fact, Desid. 232. 

Verbs active, with Mid. Fut 198 ; 
those which have both an active 
and middle form for the Fut. 
198, R. 

Verb Act. Trans., Reflex., Recip., 
Pass., Intrans., Mid. 248 — 251. 

Verb finitum and infinitum 105, R. 

Verbal adjectives in jog and xiog 
234. 1, (i) ; PI. instead of Sing. 
241, 3 ; Construction 284, 3, (12). 

Verb characteristic 108, 5. 

Versification 349. 

Vowels 4 ; change 8 — 1 6 ; weaken- 
ing or attenuation of 16, 2 ; in- 
terchange in the Dialects 201; 
change in the Dialects 205 — 207. 

Weakening of vowels 16, 2. 

Zeugma 346, 3 ? 



51 



II. GREEK INDEX. 



Abbreviations. Adv. atlverb ; adj. adjective ; Comp. compare ; comp. com- 
pared ; c. a. with the accusative ; c. d. with the dative ; c. g. with the genitive ; c. 
inf. with the infinitive ; c. part, with the participle ; coll. collective ; con. construction ; 
Dec. declension ; dec. declined ; euph. euphonic ; ins. instead of; int. intensive ; 
intr. intransitive; pers. personal; prep, preposition; priv. privative; R. remark; 
trans, transitive. 



A pure 43, 1, (a) ; a priv., 

coll., int. 236, R. 3, (b); 

a euph. 16, 10. 
aya&os comp. 84, 1. 
dyaAAeo^cu C. dat. 285, 

1,(1); c. part. 310, 4, 
, (c). 
ayavanTeiv c. d. 285, 1, 

(1); c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
ayairav c. a. and d. 274, 

R. 1; c. d. 285, 1, (1); 

c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
dyaoSrai c. gen. and ace. 

273, R. 20; nud twos 

274, 1, and R. 2. 
ayyeKkw c. Inf. and part. 

311, 10. 
ayyiWsrai pers. ins. c. a. 

and inf. 307, R. 6. 
&ye referring to several 

persons 241, R. 13. 
ayvoeiv c. part. 310, 4, (a). 
ay opd^ziv C. g. 275, 3. 
ayvLcvs dec. 57, R. 2. 
&7Xi c. g. 273, R. 9. 
ayw, with, 312, R. 10. 
aywvi&o-bai c.d. 284,3 (2). 
dScnj/c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
afeX(p6s C g. 273, 3, (b). 
d5ftfe?M c. a. 279, 1 ; c. two 

ace. 280, 2; c. part. 310, 

4, (g). 
arjtiuv dec. 55, R. 2. 
'A&6ws dec. 212, 7. 
ai see el ; at yap c. inf. 
* 306, R. 11, (d). 
alSzlaSrcu c. a. 279, 5; c. 

part, and inf. 311, 14. 
alSolos comp. 82, I, (dj. 
aldus dec. 60, (b). 



atpeiv riva. fxeyav etc., 

280, 4. 
alpelu c. g. 274, 2. 
alp€?o-&ai c. two a. 280, 4. 
aio-^dt/0/j.ai ins. the perf. 

255, R. 1. 
aiV^-avecr^-at c. g. and a. 

273, 5, R. 19; c. part. 

310, 4, (a). 
dWeij/ c. a. 279, R. 5. 
c»Vxp<k comp. 83, II. 
alaxvyeoSfai c. a. 279, 5 ; 

c.d. 285,1, (1); c.part. 

and inf. 311, 14. 
ahetv c. two a. 280, 3. 
aiTiao-frai c. g. 274, 2. 
curio's Et/u c. inf. 306,1, (c). 
&K^Aou&oy, -etc, -ws, -TJTt- 

kos c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
aKovriCtiv c. g. 273, R. 7. 
aKoveiv, audivisse, 255, 

R. 1. 
d/coveti/ c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(f) and R. 19; to obey, 

c. g. and d. 273, R. 18; 

c. inf. and part. 311, 1. 

CLKpOLTT]; c. g. 275, 1. 

UKparos 82, I, (e). 

dfcpoaafrai c. g. 273, 5, (f ) 
and R. 19. 

dA7e?j/C. d. 285, 1, (1). 

aAyeivSs comp. 84, 4. 

dAe|eu/ C. d. 284, 3, (7). 

a\i€vs dec. 57, R. 2. 

aMs c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

aXlo-Kear&qi c. p. 310, 4, (b). 

dAAcj 322, 6; in a ques- 
tion ib. ; dAAd yap 324, 
R. 1. 

aAAa, dKXoi, ol &\Aot,with- 



out Ktd in a series 325, 

(e) ; dAA 5 ¥i {ovk, oi>8ev 

dAA' tf ; ovlhu ciAAo, dAA' 

tf ; ti dKXo, dAA' ¥i ; &AAo 

Tt, dAA' ij) 322, R. 10. 
dAActTreij/, -ecr&ai c. g. 

275, 3. 
dAA^Aw*' dec. 89 ; use of 

302, R. 7. 
&AAo or &AAo Ti $ ellipti- 
cal 346, 2, (d). 
dAAo?os C. g. 271, 3. 
ciAAos ttAAoj/ (ctAAos ctAAo- 

•S-ev) with another Nom. 

266, 3. 
&AAo ti tf and ctAAo ti in 

a question: nonne 344, 

5, (g). 
aWoTpios e. g. 271. 3. 
aAs dec. 54, (a) and R. 1. 
aXtavai C. g. 274, 2. 
aAwj/ dec. 56, R. 1. 
aAcos dec. 48, R. 1. 70, A, 

(a). 72, (b). 
&fui c. d. 289, R.; with 

part. 312, R. 6; c. d. 

and part. 312, R. 5. 
a/LiapTaueiy C. g. 271, 2 ; C. 

part. 310, 4, (g). 
afxeifieiv, -eofrai C. g. 275, 

3; c. a. 279, 1. 
d/xetVw^ 84, 1. 
dfieXelv c. g. 274, 1 ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (a). 
ajArixMos elpa c. inf. ins. 

apJixo-vSv icrTi c. a. et 

inf. 307, R. 6. 
anoipos C. g. 273, 3. (b). 
dfiweiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
afxepi prep. 295, 1, (2) ; c 



GREEK INDEX. 



603 



d. in a pregnant signif. 

ins. c. a. 300, 3, (a). 
a/jL<pl irepi 300, R. 1. 
afj.(pievuwai c. two a. 

280, 3. 
an<pis$T)Te1v c.d. 284,3, (2). 
&/A<p<o dec. 99, R. 
av- priv. 236, R. 3, (b). 
&v 260; c. ind. fut. 260, 

2, ( 1 j ; ind. impf., plup. 

and aor. 260, (2) and 

333, 7; c. subj. 260,(3); 

c. opt. 260, (4); c. inf. 

and part. 260, (5) ; po- 
sition and repetition of 

aV 261. [2, (3), (d). 
&v with conjunctions 260, 
aV /ce 261, R. 3. 
&v with the relative 333, 3. 
av in Protasis 340, 6. 
&v omitted with the Opt. 

260, R. 7 ; with Pret. 

Ind. omitted 260, R. 3 

and 6. 
&v ins. idv, which see. 
&va voc. 53, R. 4. 
dva inst. of dvdo-TT]St. 31, 

R. 3. 
avd prep. 290, 1. 
avafiaWea&ai c. inf. 306, 

1, (a). 
avaynd^iv rivd ri 278, 4. 
avaicayydfciv c. a. 278, 3. 
avafunvfiariceiv C. two a. 

280, 3. 
dva\ dec 54, (c). 
avSdveiv c. d. 284, 3, (5). 
ai/eTTKTT'ftiu.tov C. g. 273, 5, 

(e). 
&vev C. g. 271, 3. 
at/€xe<r&ai c. g. 275, 1. 
di/e'xeo-^ai C. inf. 311, 15; 

c part. 310, 4, (e). 
aVeco(s) 25, 4, (c). 
dj>7jp dec. 55, 2 ; to denote 

employment (dv-hp, fidv- 

tis) 264, R. 3. 
aviaa&ai c. d. 285, 1. 
aviiTTopelv c. two a. 280, 3. 
df/rexeo-^oi c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
ami prep. 287, 1. 
iurndfav c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
dvTi\afj.@dvea&ai c. g. 273, 

d^Tios and amiov c. g. 273, 

R. 9. 
d»/TJiroiei(r^aic.g.273,3.(b). 



a.vdi>ye(tiv dec. 48. 

o|ios et> c. inf. 307, R. 6 

&£ios, apices, d^iovv, -ovcr- 

bai c. g. 275, 3 ; &£i6s 

tiv6s elfii tivl 284, 3, 

(10) (b). 
d£iovv c inf. 306, 1, (a). 
dirayopeveiv (e3, nanus) c. 

a. 279, 2; c. inf. 306, 1, 

(a). 
airaiSevros C. g. 273, 5, (e). 
d-rraireiv c two a. 280, 3. 
airaWdTTtiv c g. 271, 2 ; 

-eo-^cu c. part. 310, 4, 

. (f) ' 

airavrdv C. g. 273, R. 9 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (1). 
direi^dv c. g. 273, R. 19 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
direnreiv c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
aVeipos e.g. 273, 5, (e). 
direipus ex ea/ c# &• 273, 5, 

airex*w, d-n-execr&cu C. g- 
271, 2. 

airier e?v c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 

air\ovs, -y, -oO^ dec. 77. 

air\ovs comp. 82, I, (b). 

dir6 prep. 288, 1 ; with 
pregnant sense ins. iv 
c. d. 300, 3, (c); (otto 
with the art. ins. eV 
(ol dirb rrjs ay o pas 
dvSpwiroi dir4(pvyov)300, 

4, (a). 

airb — eveica 300, R. 2. 
d7ro5exe<r£ai C. g. 273, 

R. 20. 
diroSidooSai C. g. 275, 3. 
diro8tb~pd<rKeiv c. a. 379, 3. 
dirohaveiv C. g. 273, 5, (c). 
diroKoyeioSai C d. 284, 3, 

(7). 
'AiroWwv dec. 53, 4, 1, 

(a); 56, R. 1. 
diroireipdcr&ai C g. 273, 

5, (R). 
diroirpd 300, R. 1. 
diropelv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
diro<rrepe?v c. g. 271, 2; 

Ttl/a Tl, TWOS Tt, TlJ/<iy 

Tivo 280, 3, and R. 3. 
aTTo<niK&eiv c.g.273,R.16. 
diroo~rp4<pzo-&ai c. g. 279, 

R. 3. 
ancKpaiveiv c. part, and inf. 

311, 11. 
dirocpevyeiv C. a. 279, 3. 



dirpeiras c d. 284, 3, (5). 
dirrea^ai c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
Spa 324, 3. 

Spa ins. apa 324, R. 5. 
apa interrogative 344, 5, 

ap4<TK€iu rivd 279, 1 ; dp- 
e<TKea&ai C. d. 284. 3, 
(5); c dat. of the in- 
strument 285, 1, (1). 

apriyeiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 

y Ap7js dec. 59, R. 2. 

&pi(TTOS 84, 1. 

'Api<TTocpdv7)s dec. 59, R. 2. 

apKe?a&ai C. d. 285, 1,(1). 

dp/j.6rreiv c. d. 284, 3, (5). 

apveiabai c. inf. 306, l,(b). 

dpyos 55, R. 3. 

ap^d/xevos airS twos, par- 
ticularly 312, R. 3. 

dpX*w, to begin, c. g. 271, 
4 ; to rule, c. g. 275, 1. 

&pX*(r&at. c. g. 271, 4 ; c. 
part. 310,4, (f): c.part. 
and inf. 311, 16. 

apxo/xevos, in the begin- 
ning, originally, 312, 
R. 3. 

dcre^elj/ c. a. 279, 1. 

acrKov, ao-KOjiTiv 221. 

da/xevos comp. 82, R. 6. 

daaa, acrcra 93. 

da"n7p dec. 55, R. 3. 

darpdirreiv C. a. 278, 3. 

&<ttv dec. 63. 

aTai ins. vrai 144, R. 1. 

drap 322, 7. 

are c. part. 312, R. 13. 

arepos 10, R. 2. 

v ArAa Voc. 53, R. 2. 

oto ins. ^to 144, R. 1. 

drpe/xa(s) 25, 4, (c). 

otto and otto 93. 

aO, awTap 322, 7. 

avTina with part. 312., R.6. 

outJs dec. 91 ; Dial. 207, 
4, (c). 

au-nk use 302, 4; 303, 
3 ; with the art. 246, 
3, 8. 

avr6s in avrols 'irnvois, to- 
gether with the horses etc. 
283, 2, (a) ; 6 aur6s c. 
d. 284, 3, (4). 

avrod dec. 88 ; use 302, 2. 

cKpaiptlabai C. two a. and 
rivd rivos, riv6s 71 280, 
3, and R, 3. 



e 



604 



GREEK INDEX. 



&(p&oi>os comp. 82, E. 6. 
a<piivai, -ietr&cu c g. 271, 2. 
&<puw(s) 25,4, (c). 
&X&eofrcu c d.285, 1,(1); 
c. part. 310, 4, (c). 

B euph. 24, 2. 

/SaiVery 7ro5a and the like 

279, E. 5. 

fSapioos (pepeiv c. d. 285, 
(1) ; eVt tivi and c. a. 
285, E. 1. [(c). 

Papvvea&ai c. part. 310, 4. 

PcuriXeveiv c. g. 275, 1. 

ftaaiXevs dec. 57, 2. 

ficurKaiveiv c. d. and a. 
284, 3, (b). 

Barred) 212, 3. 

Bad 97, 2. 

tfe'Araros 84, 1. 

jSe'Arepos 84, 1. 

ySe'ATKTTos, ySeArtW 84, 1. 

/SAaTrreij/ C. a. 279, 1. 

fZXairreiv fieydXa, etc. C. a. 

280, E. 1. 
fiXeireiv c. a. 278, 3. 
j8o??&e?j/ c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
/3o/5pSs Dec. 44, E. 2. 
/3ouAet c. subj. 259, 1, (b). 
povXe<r&aic. inf. 306,1, (a). 
fiovXevecrfrai C. inf. 306, 1, 

(a) ; c forws and ind. 

fut. 330, 6. 
fiovs dec. 57, 2. 
Operas dec. 61, E. 1. 
Ppifretv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
Ppinovafrcu c. d. 284, 3, (6). 

TdXa dec. 54, (c). 
yaXws dec. 212, 7. 
7ap 324, 2 ; in an answer 

344, 7. 
yaffrrip dec. 55, 2. 
7e 317, 2 ; in an answer 

344, 7. 
7eAa> c. a. 278, 3. 
yeAws dec. 71, B, (c). 
y4fxeiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
7ewaV, parentem esse 255, 

E. 1. 
yevos dec. 61 (b). 
yepcuo's comp. 82, I, (c). 
yipas dec. 54, E. 4. 
-yeuetj/, 7eueo-£ycu c. g. 273, 

5, (c). 
77?pas dec. 54, E. 4. 
7fyj/e(r&ai syncopated, 

155, 2 ; with the sense 



• of the Pres. 255, E. 1 ; 

c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c g. 

posses. 273, 2 ; c. g. 

partit. 273, 3, (a); c.d. 

284, 3, (9). 
yiyvsTai fxoi ti fiovXoixivw, 

iKirofxiuca 284, 3,10, (c j ; 

yiyverai. and an abstract 

substantive with an inf. 

306, 1, (d). 
yiyvuxrictLi/ c. g. 273, E. 20: 

ti tivi 285, 1, (3); c. 

part. 310, 4, (a) ; c. inf 

and part. 311, 4. 
yiyvdovKO) c. ws and gen. 

abs. 312, E. 12. 
yiyvdicxKbi ins. eyvoona 255. 

E. l. 
yX-nx^v dec. 56, E. 1. 
7Atxe<rd-at a g.273. 3, (b). 
y6w dec. 54, (c) ; 68, 1. 
ypavs dec. 57, 2. 
ypd(petr&cu a g. 274, 2. 
yv/j.v6s c. g. 271, 3. 
ywji dec. 68, 2. 

A euphon. 24, 2. 

SSep Voc. 53, 4, (1) (a). 

8af315, 7. 

8aie<r3-cu c. two ace. 280, 3. 

SaKpv and ddupvov 70 B. 

Sacrvs C. g. 273, 5, (b). 

8e 322, in a question E. 6. 

8e' suffix 235, 3 and E. 3 ; 

after a demons. 95, (c). 
SedoiKevai C. inf. 306, l,(a). 
Set e.g. 273, 5, (b); c. ace. 

and dat. 279, E. 4 ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (d) ; c. d. 

and ace. c. inf. 307, 

E. 3. 
Set o> faces 330, E. 4. 
StiKvwai c. part. 310, 4, 

(b) ; c. part, and inf. 

311, 11. 
8e?ra dec. 93, E. 2. 
8eiv6s c. inf. 306, 1 (c). 
8e?<rai c. a. 279, 5. 
5e«r&ai c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
8ep.as c. g. 208, E. 
SevSpos dec. 72, (a). 
SeVas dec. 61, (a). 
depKeabai c. a. 278, 3. 
5eo-7r^^ety c. g. 275, (1). 
Seo"7r^T7]s dec. 45, 6. 
SeiW c. a. 278. 2. 
Seurepos C. g. 275, 2. 



Sexeo-^ai c. two ace. 280, 
4 ; tivi ti 284, E. 4. 

877 95, (b) ; 315, 1. 2. 

S7j3-ej/315, 5. 

SrjXoy elvai, iroie?p with 
part. 310, 4, (b) ; drjx6s 
et/it iroiuiv ti 310, E. 3. 

StjA^s et^t 6Vt 329, E. 4. 

8?7Aow/ c. g. and a. 273, 
E. 20 ; c. part. 310, 4, 
(b) ; c. inf. and part. 

311, 12. 
Ar}/j.r}T7)p dec. 55, 2. 
Arnxo(Tb4vT]s dec. 59, E. 2. 
dyiroT€ 95, (b). 
STjTTou&ej/ 815, 6. 

Stjto 315, 3. 
Sid Prep. 291. 
Sza TrpJ 300, E. 1. 
Sidyeiu c. part. 310, 4, (1). 
diayiyveoftcu c. part. 310, 

Mi). 

StaSe'xecr^a*, StaSoxos, 8t- 

a5o X ^7 c. d. 284, 3, (3). 

SiaSiSSvai c. g. 273, 3, (b). 

diddoxos c. g. and d. 273. 

3, (b); 284,3,(3). 
Siaipe?u c. two ace. 28Q, 3. 
StoKetc^at t}]v yv(i>p.r\v 

with as and gen. abs. 

312, E. 12. 
StaAeVo-^ot C. d. 284, 3, 

(1). 
tiiaXnro))!' xpovov 312, E. 3. 
StaAAarreti/ C. part. 310, 

4, (f )• 
diaXXaTTew, -aTTec&ot C. 

d. 284, 3, (1). 
Sia/meiPeaSrai c. g. 275, 3. 
Siavep-eiv c. two ace. 280, 3. 
5iavoeT(r&ai C. forces c. ind. 

fut. 330, 6 ; c. &s and 

g. abs. 312, E. 12. 
diairpaTTefffrai C inf. 306, 

1, (C). 
StareAetV c. part. 310, 4, 

(b). 
Sia<p4peiv c. g. 271, 2. 
8id<popos c. g. 271, 3 ; c. d. 

284, 3, (4). 
didepojpos c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
Biaxpy(r&ai c. d. and ace. 

285, 1, (2). 
SiddaKeiv c. two acc. 280, 

3; c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
didoi/ai c. g. partit. 273 
3, (b) ; c. g. price, 275, 
3. 



GREEK INDEX. 



605 



Sie'xeu' C. g. 271. 2. 
8tnd(etv c. g. 274, 2; St- 

/ca("eo-dai c. d. 284,3, (2). 
Mkcuos el/xt c. inf.,personal 

ins. SiKaiou icrri c. a. 

and inf. 307, R. 6. 
SiKaiovv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
d'lKTju c. g. 288. R. 
Hioplfav c. g. 271, 2. 
StoTi see oTt. 
St'xa c. g. 271, 3. 
Stya and Stifos 70, B. 
SiipTJv c. g. 274, 1. 
Siwkciv c. g. 274, 2. 
5o/ce?i> c. inf. 306, 1, (b) ; 

videri, pers. 307, R. 7. 
5Jpu dec. 54, (c) and 68, 3. 
8opo<popeif c. a. 279, 1. 
5pa7reTeL'eti/ C. a. 279, 3. 
ZpOLTT£(T&CU c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
Svvaahat C. a. 279, 6 j C. 

inf. 306, 1, (c). 
Zvvaros el/xt C. inf. 306, 1, 

(c) 5 personal ins. Swa- 

r6v io-Ti c. ace. and inf. 

307, R. 6. 
Svo dec. 99, 5; with the 

Subst. in the PL 241, 

R. 10. 
Svs in composition, 236, 

R. 3, (b), (jB). 
5usx e P a ' f/e "' c * a - 279, 5 ; 

c.d. 285, 1, (1). 
Scapeai/, gratis 278, R. 2. 
Swpelar&ai rtvi rt and nvd 

rtvt 279, R. 2. 
Auptevs dec. 57, R. 2. 

'Eau c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
idv cons. 339, 2, II, (b) ; 

ichether, an 344, 4 ; eav 

Se' ins. idv Se /X7j 340. 4 ; 

e'av «ai ib. 7. 
e'aV Te — e'dV re 323, 1. 
tap dec. 56, R. 2. 
carat, earo ins. -nvrat, t\v- 

ro, ovro 220, 13. 
eauToO dec. 88 : use 302,2. 
iduv 215, R. 
iyyi(etv c. g. 273, R. 9 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
iyyvs C. g. 278, R. 9 ; C 

d. 284, 3, (2). 
iyKaKetv C. g. 274, 2 ; C.d. 

284,3, (6). 
4yKparr)s C. g. 275, 1. 
*7X€\vs dec. 63, R. 5. 



eyd> dec. 87; use, 302, 1. 

eya^e 95, (a). 

6770s from evs 215, R. 

IfreAew c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 

et ins. 7] aug. 122, 3. 

et ins. redup. 123, 3. 

ei II. Pers. ins. p 116, 11. 

el cons. 339. 

ei concessive 340, 7 ; in 
wishes 259, 3, (b). 

el an, whether 344, 5, (ij. 

ei yap 259, 3, (b). 

et 5' &ye 340, 3. 

et Se ellipt., 340, 3 ; el Se 
ins. et Se fi-fi and et Se 
^ ins. et Se' 340, 4. 

et /cot 340, 7. 

eJf /ce see e'dV. 

et /U7j iron. 324, 3, (a) ; el 
fx-fi except 340, 5 ; et fir) 
el, nisi, si, ib. 

eia, etas, ete, eiav opt. ins. 
ot)t*i and etc. 116, 9. 

et'SeW c. g. 273, R. 20 ; c. 
partic. 310, 4, (a) ; dif- 
ference between inf. 
and part. 311, 2 ; c. us 
and g. abs. 312, R. 12. 

etfre in wishes 259, 3, (b) 
and R.3, 6. ; c. inf. 306, 
R. 11. 

eiKa^eiv ri rivi 285, 1, (3). 

elueiv c. g. 271, 2 ; c. (1. 
284, 3, 2. 

elKos, eUorcas C. dat. 284, 
3, (5). 

elu&v dec. 55, R. 2. 

etjxev, e?re, etev ins. 6*77- 
fj.ev, etc. 116, 7. 

elvat as copula 238, 6 ; as 
an essential word {to be, 
to exist, etc.) 238, R. 4 ; 
with adv. 340, R. 4; 
(hat with a part. ins. 
of a simple verb 238, 
R.5 ; omitted 238, R.6,7. 

elvat apparently unneces- 
sary with 6voftd(etv, 
-ecr^at 269, R. 1. 

elvat c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. 
g. possess. 273, 2 ; e.g. 
partit. 273,3, (a) ; c.d. 
284, 3, (9) ; elvat and a 
subs. c. inf. 306, 1, (d). 

etVe' referring to several 
persons 241, R. 13, (a). 

elwe7v e5, KaKus rtva 279, 
2;Kcuca, KoAac.a.280,2. 
51* 



elire?v c. d. 284,3, (1); c 
d.anda. c.inf.307,R.3. 

eXpyetv, -<r&ai C. g. 271, 2. 

els (is) Prep. 290, 2; in 
pregnant sense ins. eV 
c d. 300, 3, (b) ; with 
the art ins. eV (7] \i[i.vn 
e/cStSo? is ri)v 'Zvprtv 
^is Atj3v7]v) 300,4, (b). 

els, fiia, ev dec. 99, 5. 

els with Supcrl. 239, R. 2. 

elsdyetv C. g. 274, 2. 

etaav ins. eaav in plup. 
116,6. 

elsopav, to permit c part. 
, 310, 4, (e). [3. 

elsirpdrretv c. two.acc.280, 

elra with Part. 312, R.8; 
eh a in a quest. 344, 5, 
(e). 

elre—eXre 323, R. 1 ; et— 
etre, iire — et Se' etc. 323, 
R. 1 ; in an indirect 
question 344, 5, (k). 

elw&evat c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 

4k, eg 15,3; Prep. 288,2; 
in Preg. sense ins iv 
c. d. 300, 3, (c); U 
with the Ait. ins. eV 
(01 iic rijs ay pas 
dv&pcvTroi dired>vyov) 
300, 4, (a). 

eKas C. g. 271, 3. 

eKaaros with the Art. 246, 
6. 

e'/cSueti/ c. two ace. 280, 3. 

eKel&ev with the Art. ins. 
iKe? (6 i k e 73- e v ir6\e- 
fxos Sevpo T)t,ei) 300,R. 8. 

ixelvos dec. 91 ; Dial. 2 17, 
4, (d); use 303, 2; with 
the Art. 246, 3. 

iKetvoai(v) 15, 1. (e). 

e'/ceto-e in Preg. sense ins 
e/ce? 300, R. 7. 

e/cTjTt c. g. 288, R. 

iKXetireiv c. part. 310, 4, 
(f). 

iKTrAr)rre<T&ai c a. 279, 5 ; 
c. d. 285, 1. 

iKarrjvat c. a. 279, R. 3. 

enrpeireaSrat c. a. 279,R.3. 

enoev elvat 306, R. 8. 

eKarrov without r) 323, 
R. 4. 

eXarrova^at c. g. 275, 1. 

iXarrujv 84, 6. 

ihdxtcrros 8-1, 6. 



606 



GREEK INDEX. 



4\£yxeiv c. part.310,4,(b). 
iAeyXKTTOS 84, R. 4. 
eAee?j> c. g. 274, 1, (c) ; 

c. a. 279, 5. 
ihev&epos, 4\ev&epovv c. 

g. 271, 2, 3. 
kX'uraeiv SreSv 279, R. 5. 
eA^s dec. 54, (c). 
i\iri(eii> c. d. 285, 1 (1) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 
ijxavTov dec. 88 ; use 

302, 2. 
i/x6s ins. pay, 302, R. 2. 
WO 25, 4, (c). 
Jz/xireipos c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
i/AireAdfccr&ai. C. g. 273, R. 

9; c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
efjnr'nrAaa&aL C part. 310 

4, (d). 
e/MTrpoabev c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
ifxcpepys c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
cu ins. 7)<rav 220, 14. 
eV Prep. 289, 1 ; in Preg. 

sense ins. els 300, 3, 

(a)j c. g. 263, (b). 
4v rols, 4v reus c. Superl. 

(e. g. irpuroi) 239, R. 2. 
ivavriov, -los c. g. and d. 

273, R. 9 and 284, 3,(2). 
ivBefo c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
ci/Sod-e^ with the Art. ins. 

iviiov (tV Zvfio&sv rpa- 

TreCoJ/ <|>epe) 300, R. 8. 
4v8veiv c two acc. 280, 3. 
ivedpeveiv c. a. 279, 1. 
eVe/co, eVewev, eiVe/ca, € r /- 

V€Kev,ovveKa c. g. 288, R. 
eveo-Tiv c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
4v&v}xe7<r&ai c.g.273,R.20; 

c. part. 310,4 (a). 
%vi ins. tVeoTt 31, R. 3. 
eivoeSc c. g. 273, R. 20. 
eVox^iV c. a. 279, 1 ; c. d. 

284,3,(6). 
ivTavd* with Part. 312, 

R. 7. 
fVTpeireaSai 273, 3, (b). 
e| Prep. 288, 2 ; see 4k. 
i£al<pvr]s with Part. 312, 

R. 6. 
e^apx 64 " C. g. 271, 4. 
e|eAe'7X«*' C. P ai *t- 310, 4, 

(b). 
^eo-Tti/ c inf. 306, 1, (c) ; 

c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, 

R. 3. 
i^rdCeivc. g, 373, R. 20; 

c. two acc. 280, 3. 



Qrjs c. g. 273, 3, (b) j c. 

d. 284, 3, (3). 
et'io-Tao-frat C. g. 271, 2. 
ilopKovv c. a. 279, 4. 
e|a> c g. 271, 3. 
iotKevat c. d. 284, 3, (4) ; 

c. inf. 307, R. 7.; c. 

part. 310, R. 2 ; c. inf. 

and part. 311, (9). 
£6s ins. ip.6s, <r6s 302, R. 8. 
4iraive?i/ c. g. and a. 273, 

R. 20 ;TiudTivos 274,1. 
iwaipeiu rivd ti 278, 4. 
4iralpc<r&ai c. d. 285,1, (1). 
4irdt(r<rciv c. g. 273, R. 7. 
4iraiTia<rfrcu C. g. 274, 2. 
€7roA£ets dec. 213, 19. 
4irdv see oTav under oreS 
4irapKilu c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
irrel see frre ; in interrog. 

and imp. clauses 341, 

R. 4. [(b). 

4irelye<r&<u C g. 273, R. 7, 
4Trei5dv see otcw under 

ore. 
4irei5-f) see #re. 
eireira in a question 344, 

5, (e). 
e7T6tTawith part. 312, R. 8. 
4-ir^iivai C. g. 274, 2. 
eW&ai c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
4ttt]v see 4irdv. 
€iri ins. eirecrri 31, R. 3. 
cVi' Prep. 296 ; c. dat. in 

Preg. sense ins. c. a. 

300, 3, (a); c. g. and 

part. 312, R. 5. 
€7ri)8aAA.e(r^at a g.273,R.7. 
4vi8o^6s el/xi c. inf. 307, 

R. 6. 
iv&vpetv c. g. 274, (1); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
4viKa\eiv c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
4TriKovpe?u c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
4TTLXap.l3du€(r^ai c. gen. 

273, 3, (b). 
4TriAav£rdvea&ai C g. 273, 

5,(e); c.part.310,4,(c). 
iirikelireiu c. a. 279, 4; c. 

part. 310, 4, (f ). 
4irtfiaU<r&ai C. g.273,R.7. 
eTn/ieAecr&cu, -e?(r&ai C. g. 

274, 1 ; c. oirctis c. ind. 
fat. 330, 6. 

e7rt7reSoy comp. 82, R. 6. 
4TrnrX.T]<r(Teiv c. d. and acc. 
284, 3, (6). 



4iri(TKi]iTT€o$tat c. g. 274, 2. 
4m<rTd{j.evos c. g.273,5,(e). 
4irtaTa<rSrai c. g. 273,R.20; 

c. partic. 310, 4, (a); c. 

part, and inf. 311, 2; c. 

us and gen. abs. 312, 

R. 12. 
47riaTaTe?v c. g. 275, 1. 
4-rrKn^/j.oDv e.g. 273, 5, (e). 
4m<rx<»v XP^ov 312, R. 3 
4niTdTT€ti/ c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
€7nTeAAe«/ c. inf. 306,1, (a). 
€ViT^5eios c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
4iriTi[xavC. d. 284, 3, (6). 
4irirp€TT€iy c. inf. and part. 

311, 15. 
4iriTpoireveiv c. g. 275, 1 : 
^ c. a. 279, 1. 
4Tri(pS6voi)s 5iaKe?<r&cu c. g. 

274, 1, (e). 
4irixeipe7j/ c.inf. 306, l,(a). 
4mxd>pios c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
eirop.4v<as C. d. 284, 3, (3). 
4-Korpiueiu Tivd ti 278, 4. 
e/m*/, epaa&ai C.g.274, 1. 
4pyd£€<r&cu /caAa, /co/cci C. 

a. 280, 2. 
4p€(r&ai c. two acc. 280, 3. 
epeeiVeti/ c.two acc. 280, 3. 
eprinos, eprjfiovy c. gen. 

271, 2, 3. 
4pT)Tveiv c. g. 271, 2. 
epf&w c - d. 284, 3, (2). 
4ppcofi4vos comp. 82, 1, (e). 
4pcorau C two acc. 280, 3. 
4pa>TiK.5}S *x* lv c - &• 274, 1. 
4<T&teiv c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) and R. 15. 
€<tkov, eaKOfiTiv 221. 
esr* &y see ews. 
esre see ecos. 
eaTt fxoi ti fZovKofxevw 284j 

3, (10) (c). 
tan (licet) c. inf. 306,1, (c). 
eVri with the PI. 241, R. 6. 
tariv o'L, &v etc. 341, R. 4. 

%<TTIV OT€ y forOU, #7T77, Ottos', 

ov, "va, iv&a, ri 331,R. 5. 
icrx^Tos with the Art. 

245, R. 5. 
eVepos in Oasis 10, R. 2; 

c. g. 271, 3. 
en with the Comp. 239, 

R. 1. 
€Tt 7roAA<£ with the Comp. 

239, R. 1. 
€v and euin the Aug. 121, 

R.; 125,2. 



GREEK INDEX. 



607 



eS Aeyet;/, rcoiziv, etc. C. a. 

279, 2. 
cv.iroieiv C.part.310,4,(g). 
Ev&oevs dec. 57, R. 2. 
sv§ai[j.ovi^iv, evSai/AWV C. 

g.274, 1, (f). 
€w5ios coinp. 82, I, (d). 
evepyerelu c. a. 279, 2. 
ei^wpos comp. 82, R. 6. 
eu&v C. g. 273, R. 9. 
ev&uj with Part. 312, R. 6. 
€v\afie?<T&cu C. a. 279, 1. 
tvXoyelv c. a. 27 9, 2. 
sviropeiv C g. 273, 5, (b). 
evpi(TKeiu, -ecrfrcu c. part. 

310, 4, (b). 
euere/Seu/ C. a. 279, 1. 
€UTuxe« / c. part.310,4,(g). 
€v X ea^ai c. d. 284, 3, (1); 

c. inf. 306, 1. (b). 
eucoxeTo-^ai c.g.273, 5, (c). 
e^)e|^s c. g. and d. 273, 3, 

(b); 284, 3, (3). 
4<pleo&ai c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
icpLKueTa&cu C. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 

£<popav c. part 310,4, (e). 
e> J <£, eV ^Te c. ind. fut. 

or inf. fut. 341, R. 5. 
*X*w c. inf. 306, 1, (c) ; c. 

part. Troikas ex« 310, 

4, (k). 
eX^ e^» KaAws, etc. C. g. 

274, (3). 
i'x 6 "' yvuifiriv c cos and g. 

abs. 312, R. 12. 
^Xeo-^at C. g. 273, 3, (b). 
e'x&pos comp. 83, II. 
£x<tf, possum, c. inf. 306, 1, 

eX^v A77pe?s, (p\vapeis 312, 
R. 9 ; *x«"> uaM, 312, 
R. 10. 

e'ws dec. 48. R. 1. 

ecus construction 337. 

Zaxpy&u 213, 14. 
& suffix 235, R. 3. 
Zevs dec. 68, 4. 
£t)\ovv c. g. 274, 1 : c a. 

279, 1. 
Cnreiv c. inf. 306. 1, (a). 
Cvyos and £vyJj/ 70, A,(b). 

"H, (a) tf alternativum, or, 
323, 2 ; in a question 
344, 5, (h); — (b) f) 
oomparativum 323, 2 ; 



after the omission of 
fxaXXou 323, R. 3 ; omit- 
ted with irXeou, 7rAeic», 
eXarrou in connection 
with the numeral 323, 
R. 4; with the Gen. 
after a comparative 
323, R. 5. 

7] ins. eiv in Plup. 116, 6. 

t) union vowel 237, R. 1. 

r) Kara, or r) irp6s C. a. 
323 7. 

*) fore' c inf. 341, 3, (a). 

r) 316, 2. 

^ ^316.2. 

^ ttov 316,' 2. 

?7 with Sup. 343, R. 2. 

^ interrogative 344, 5. 

r) 5' os 331, R. 1. 

^7e?crfrcu c. g. 273, 3, (a) ; 
c. g. and d. 275, 1, and 
R. 1 ; c. two a. 280, 4 ; 
c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 

r)ye/j.oveveiv c. g. and d. 
275, 1, andR, 1. 

rjSe, and, 323, R. 2. 

7?5ecr&cu c. d. 285, 1,(1); 
c. part. 310, 4, (c). 

rjdvfxos comp. 82, R. 6. 

7)8vs comp. 83, I. 

7}Keiv e$, KaXws etc. C g. 
274, 3, (b). 

7]Kl(TT0S 216, 2. 

t)koo, veni, 255, R 2. 
t?AiW attracted 332, 7. 
%*»'— ^Se 323, R. 2. 
Tifii in compos. 236, R. 3, 

(b)._ 
77fttv, ^iv 87, R. 4. 
Tj/xurvs dec. 76, R. 2 ; ^ 

7}fj.i(reia 7t)s yrjs and the 

like 264, R. 5, c. 
7)ixav 87, R. 4. 
t)v sec ecu/. 
fr'tica, w/zen, see Are. 
fyje^a comp. 84, R. 3. 
Tipws dec. 60, (a). 
7)<r&ai c. a. 279, R. 6. 
^crcra)!', Attic 7jttcoi/ 84. 
7)<T<T(av tlfxi c. inf. 306, 1, 

(c). 
t](tvxos comp. 82, I, (d). 
¥,roi 316, 2; froi — r) oye 

303, R. 2. 
riTTuaSau c. g. and vtt6 

twos 275, 1, R. 2. 
TjTTaa&aL with the sense 

of the Perf. 255, R. 1. 



TjTTcur&ai c. part. 310, 4, 

(g). 
t?X&> dec. 60, (b). 
f)ws dec. 60, (b). 

®a\7\s dec. 71, A. (a). 
frdWew c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
frapp" uv c. a. and d. 279. 3, 

and R. 3. 
frdcraew c. a. 279, R. 6. 
frdcrauy 83, I. 
frarepa, etc. 10, R. 2. 
fravfidfav c, g. and a. 273, 

R. 20 ; Tivd twos 21 A, 

1, (f) and R. 2; c. d. 

285, (1): iiri twi 285, 

R. 1. 
fravixao-row oaov 332. R. 

10. 
feao-frcu C. g. 273, R. 20. 
&e\£iy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
&ejuty 73, 1, (c). 
frei/ suffix 235, 3, and R. 

1 and 2. 
frepcnrevew C. a. 279, 1. 
frepdirwv dec. 68, 5. 
&77V 315, 4. 
&t suffix 235, 3. 
friyydvew c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
&tri]o-K€iv ins. Perf. 255, 

R. I ; utto twos 249, 3. 
frpdo-ffto 17, R. 4. 
&pi£ dec. 54, (c). 
frvydT7jp dec. 55, 2. 
&ueti/ iiriviKia, yevefr\ia, 

yd/xovs 278, 2. 
frv/xovcrfrai C. g. 274, 1 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
frcavevew, frwirTew c. a. 

279, 1. 
&d>s dec. 60, (a). 

I union- vowel 237, 1, and 
R. 2. 

Id4, referring to several 
persons, 241, R. 13, (a). 

Wlos comp. 82, 1, (d). 

tdios c. g. 273, 2. 

lhid)T7)s c. g. 273, 5, (c), 

ISpcos dec. 213, 7. 

i'eW, el/xi with the mean- 
ing of the Fut. 255- 
R. 3. 

Up6s c. g. 273, 2. 

lbv(s) c. g. 273, R. 9. 

Ikwos c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 

lueTevew C. g. 273, R. 6 
c inf. 306, 1, (a). 



608 



GREEK INDEX. 



iKvuoftai c. g. 273, E. 6. 
"pa, that, in order that 330. 
'Iva ri 344, E. 6. 
Xcros comp. 82, I, (d). 
Xaos c. g. and d. 273, 3, 

(b), and 284, 3, (4). 
lo-Topelv c. two a. 280, 3. 
Ix&vs dec. 62. 
iX<>> ins. Ix&pa 213, 11. 

K movable 15, 4. 
Ka&apos c. g. 271, 3. 
Kafri£eiv c. a. 279, E. 6. 
Ka&i<TTavai C. two a. 

280, 4. 
KaSopav, to permit, c. part. 

310, 4, (e). 
koi 321, 1 ; with Sup.239, 

E. 25 with part. 312, 

E. 8] Kai ins. ore 321,1. 
Kal yap 324, E. 1 and 3. 
Kal idv, Kal €i 340, 7. 
Kal ixakuna with Sup. 

239. E. 2. 
/coi os ins. «al ovros 331, 

E. 1. 
Kal ov, Kal fir} 321, 2. 
koI TaDra with part. 312, 

E. 8. 
Kaiirep with part. 312,E.8. 
KairoL 322, 7 ; with part. 

312, E. 8. 

K&KKTTOS, KdKtW, 84, 2. 

KaicoXoyeiu, KaKonoieiv C. 

a. 279, 2. 
kcck^s comp. 84, 2. 
kokos ej/u c. inf. 306, l,(c). 
KaKovpyeiv C. a. 279. 2. 
kcuccos Xeyeiv, iroLelu, dpav 

etcc. a. 279, 2. 
KaKelv c. two a. 280, 4. 
KaAAicrreuea' C. g. 275, 1. 
KaWiaros, KaXhictiV 84, 3. 
KaAos comp. 84, 3. 
xaAov/izuos, so called 264, 

E. 1. 
KaAws dec 48 ; 70, A, (a). 
Ka/j.i/€LV c. part. 310, 4.(e). 
Kaireira with part. 312, 

E. 8. 
Kapa dec. 68, 6. 
Kaprepelu c.part.310,4,(e). 
Kara Prep. 292 ; koto, in 

composition, construc- 
tion with 292, E. 
Kara with part. 312, E. 8. 
KaraKoveip, to obey, c. g. 

273, E. 18 and 19. 



KaraXXarreiv, -drrea^ai, 

c. d.284, 3, (1). 
Karavep.eiv C. two a. 280,3. 
KarairXT)rreaSai -c. a. 279, 

5; c d. 285, ' i). 
KarapavSai C. d. 284, 3,(1 ). 
Kardpx^v c. g. 271, 4. 
Karaxpy&&ai c. d. and a. 

285, 1, (2). 
Karevavriov c. g. 273, E. 9. 
Karepyd(ea&ai c. inf. 306, 

1, (c). 
Karix^tv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
Kar^jKoos c. g. and d. 273, 

E. 18. 
ire, kcV, see aV. 
kc?vos see inelvos. 
itelafrai c. a. 279, E. 6. 
KeXeveiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; 

c a. et inf. 307, E. 1. 
KeuSs c. g. 271, 3. 
Kepa/j.eovs 76, 1. 
Ktpas dec. 54, E. 4. 
Kep5iW216, E. 2. 
Kevfreiu c. two a. 280, 3. 
KT^Sea-^cu c. g. 274, 1. 
ktjpos see e/cetVos. 
KivSvvevetv c. inf. 306, 1, 

(b). 
kIs dec. 62. 
K\€is dec. 68, 7. 
K\eos dec. 61, (b). 
KXeirrrjs comp. 82, II. 
KX-qpovopeiv C. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
KAuetv C. d. 2S4, E. 4. 
Kvecpas dec. 61, E. 1. 
ko^os, Koivovcr&ai c. g. 

273, 3, (b). 
kolvSs, koivovv, -ova&ai e. 

d.284, 3, (1). 
Koivwvelv c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; 

c d.284, 3, (1). 
koivwpSs dec. 72, (a). 
KoXaKtveiv C. a. 279, 1. 
Kopivvvff&ai c. g. 273, 5, 

(c). 
KcW dec. 212, 7. 
Kpareiv c. g. and a. 275, 1, 

and E. 1. 
Kpareiv C. part. 310, 4, (g). 
KpaTLCTTOS 84, 1. 

K/je'ay dec. 54, E. 4. 

Kpeicrawv, Kpelrrow 84, 1. 

Kpfoei;/ c. g. 273, E. 2 and 
20 ; Kpivetr&ai c. g. 274, 
2 ; Kpiveiv ri rivt 285, 1, 
(3). 



k/hVoj/ dec. 72, ^a). 
Kpcucreco 212, 3 
KporaXi(eiv c. a. 279, E. 5 
Kporeiv C. a. 279, E. 5. 
Kpvirreiv -ecr&ai c. a. 279 f 

4 ; c. two a. 280, 3. 
Kpv(pa c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
KTacrd-at c. g. 275, 3. 
Kvdpds comp. 83, II. 
kuk6w 56, E. 1. 213, 11. 
Kwrepos 216, E. 2. 
Kvpios c. g. 273, 2. 
Kvav dec, 68, 8. 
Kwas dec. 61, E. 1. 
KuXveiv c. g. 271, 2; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (a). 

Aas dec. 72, (a). 
Xafrav, with, 312, E. 10. 
\ayx°weiv c. g.273, 3, (b). 
xdyws dec. 48, E. 1 ; 70, 

A, (a). 
Xa&pa, Xa&pauos C g. 273, 

5, (e). 
Aa&coj/, secretly 310, E. 4. 
AaAos comp. 82, I, (f ). 
Aa/43aW&at C. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
Xdfxireiv C. a. 278, 3. 
XavSdvav c a. 279, 4. 
XavbdveoSrai c g. 273, 5, 

(e). 
Xav&dveiv c part. 310, 4, 

Xaos and Aecos 70, A, (a). 
Xeyeiv C. g. 273, E. 20. 
Xeyeiv c. two a. 280, 4 ; c 

d. 284, 3, (I); c. inf. 

306, 1, (b) ; c. d. and a. 

and inf. 307, E. 3. 
Xeyeiv c. cos and g. abs. 

312, E. 12. 
Xeyeiv eS, KaK&s C a. 279, 

2 ; KaAo, KaKct, etc. c. a. 

280, 2. 
Xeyerai C. a. et inf. 307, 

E. 6. 
XeyS/xevos 264, E. 1. 
AetVeiz/ c. a. 279, 4. 
Aenrecr&cu C. part. 310, 4, 

(f>- 

X-hyew c part. 310, 4. (f ). 
Xypeh tx <x ' v ^23, E. 9. 
AtV eAcuco 68, 9. 
Xmapeiv c. part. 310, 4, 

(e). 
Ak dec. 214, E. 2. 
Aicrcreo-Sju C. g. 273, R 6. 



GREEK INDEX. 



\oyi(er&cu c.inf.306,l,(b). 
\oi8ope7i/ c. a. 279. 1. 
\oi8ope?a&ai tivi 284, 3, 

(6). 
XoveoSai C. g. 273, E. 16. 
Xoxav c. a. 279, 1. 
Kvtiv c. g. sep. 271, 2; c. 

g. (if price 275, 3. 
\vfiaii/€<T&ai C. a. 279, 1 ; 

c. d. 279, E. 1. 
AuireT/crdai c. d. 285, (1). 
\vo-ne\e7v c. d. 284,3, (7). 
\aPaoftcu c. a. 279, 1 ; c. 

d. 279, B. 1. 
AajcToy 84, 1. 
Kcpoov 84, 1. 

Ma 316,4; fia Ala 279, 4. 
uanpos corap. 84, 5. 
uaKpy with Com. and 

Sup. 239, E. 1 and 2. 
fidXiara with Sup. 239, 

E. 2. 
/uaXAoj/ with Com. 239, 

E. 1. 
IxuKhovti oh 318, E. 7. 
fidv 316, 1. 
/ucw&dVeii/ with sense of 

the Perf. 255, E. 1. 
fiavhdvsiv c. g. and a. 273, 

E. 20; c. part. 310, 4, 

(a); c. part, and inf. 

311,3. 
ixaprvs dec. 68, 10. 
fidaawv 84, 5. 
fMTnv, incassum 278, E. 2. 
ixax^ai C. d. 284, 3, (2). 
fiiya with Com. and Sup. 

239, E. 1 and 2. 
fieyalpeiv C. g. 274, 1. 
fieyas dec. 77 ; comp. 84, 8. 
fieyia-rou with Sup. 239, 

E. 2. 
/tiedie<rdat C. part. 310, 

4, (f )• 
fieifav 84, 8. 
/xejAicro-eo-^ai C. g. 273, 

E, 16. 
ixziou without ¥) 323, E. 4. 
ueis 214, 4. 

fieioi/eKielv C. g. 275, 1. 
fieiovadai C. g. 275, 1. 
;uetW 84. 
fie\ei /xoi tu/os and ri 274, 

l.andE. 1. 
p.(\\eiu c. inf. 306. 1. (a). 
ue/j.vnp.a.1 #re ins. 6'ti 329, 

E. 6. 



fic/MpeoSat c. g. and a. 273, 
E. 20 ; rivd tivos 274, 
l,(f); c. d. and a. 284, 

3, (6). 

fiev ins. pA]v 316, E. 
/ueV — Se'322, 5. 
fievH 316, E. 
fitvsiv c. a. 279, 3. 
fisvovv 316, E. 
jueVrot 316, E. 322, 7. 
^ecr7j7u(s) 25, 4, (c). 
^ueVos comp. 82, 1, (d) and 

E. 5 ; with the Art. 245, 

E. 5. 
tieo-Tou chat C. part. 310, 

4, (d). 

fiearos C. g. 273, 5, (b). 
/i€Ta Prep. 294 ; /x4ra ins. 

fxzreo-Ti 31, E. 3. 
(jL€Ta8i56vai c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
fierafieXti /jlol tivos and ri 

274, 1, (b) andE. 1. 
(j.€Ta,ueAu c. part. 310, 4. 

(c). 
fj.eTafj.eAe7<r&at C.part. 310. 

4, (c). 
fiera^v c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
[xeTa£u with part. 312. 

E. 6. 
^uerecTTi ^oi Tij/os 273, 3, 

(b). 
fxeT^xeiv c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
V-eXpi(s) 25, 4. (b). 
fi4 XP i(s) c. g.273, E. 9 ; 

H-eXpL{s),neXP l ( s ) ° T0V > 
/j.4xpi{s) aV, see eeos. 

/i7) c. imp. and subj.259, 5. 

/i7j 318; fi-ft pleonastic, 
after expressions signi- 
fying to fear, to doubt, 
etc. 318, 8. 

fir) interrog. 344, 5, (d). 

flT) OTl, fXT) OTTWS aWa. 

koa (a\\d) 321, 3. 
fir) ou318, 10. 
firjSe 321, 2, (a). 
fivSeis dec. 99, E. 
Lii)Kio~Tos 84. 
^j/316, i. 

firjvlziv c. g. 274, 1. 
/i7)j>ts dec. 63, E. 5. 
Li-nre — LL-nTe 321, 2, (c). 
fx.T)TT)p dec. 55, 2, 
/ti^Tpws dec. 71, B, (c). 
^xa^wcr^ai c. iDf. 306, 

1, (a) ; c. '6-rrus and ind. 

fut. 330, 6. 



fiiyvvvai, ulyi/voSrai c. d- 

284,3, (.). 
(juKp6s comp. 84, 6. 
fiifi<zi<r&at. C. a. 279, 1. 
/xifxvno-Keiv -ea&ai c. g. 

273, 5, (e). 
ui/j.vrio-Kecr&ai c. part. 310. 

4, (a) ; c. part, and inf. 

311,2. 
Mti>ws dec. 71, C. 
fioi, ethical Dat. 284, 3, 

(10) (d). 
fx6vos with the Art. 245, 

E. 6; different from 

fi6vov 264, E. 7. 
fi6vos c. g. 271, 3. 
fiovo<pdyos comp. 82, 1, (f ). 
fj.ov, fioi, fie use 87, E. 1. 
fivKrjs dec. 71, A, (a). 
fivo-dTTeabai c. a. 279, 5. 
fiuv 344, 5, (c). 

N i<pG\Kvo~TiKov 15, 1 and 

E. ; in the Dialects 

206, 6. 
val 316, 4; val fia Ala 

279, 4. 
va6s and i/ea$s 70, A. (a). 
vditT) and ya7ros 70, B. 
vdcaeiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
vavs dec. 68, 11. 214, 5. 
veaTos 82, E, 5. 
veas and j/cwfe 70, A, (a). 
j/77 316, 4; y}/ Aia 279, 4. 
inyrri from yeos 82, E. 5. 
vinav 'Okvfnria, yvufirjv 

278, 2. 
j/ikSi/ with sense of the 

Perf. 255, E. 1. 
vikolv c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
vlv [viv) ins. auTouy or 

avrds 87, E. 3. 
voCiv c part. 312, E. 12. 
vofil^iv c. two a. 280, 4 ; 

c. d. (uti) 285, (2) ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (b); c.part. 

311, 2. 
vo<T(pl(eiv C. g. 271, 2. 
x/oudeTe/V c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
j/u316, 3. 
vutqs and vurov 70, A. 

(b). 

EeroOcr&ai c. d.284, 3, (1). 
£eVcos exeiv c. g. 273, 5, 
• (e). 

£vficpop6y ia-Ti c. d. and a. 
c. inf. 307, K. 3. 



610 



GREEK INDEX. 



Zvv Prep. 289, 2. 

O union- vowel 237, 2. 
6— in diralos, 6i?6aros, etc. 

93, R. 1. 
b, 7), t6 dec. 91 ; relat., 

demons., as a prop. Art. 

see under Article. 
b rjXiKos attract. 332, E. 9. 
6 oTos attract. 332, R. 9. 
076 use 303, R. 2. 
25e, ??8e, ro'Se dec. 91 ; 

Dialects 217, 4, (b) ; 

use 303, 1 ; with the 

Art. 246, 3. 
6M 95, (e). 
6&iv e.g. 273, 5, (d); c. 

a. 278, 3, (b). 
b&ovveKa ins. oti 329, R. 

1 ; because 338, 2. 
ola/x<pi (irepi) r iva 263, (d). 
oTa c. part. 312, R. 13. 
Oltiiirovs dec. 71, B, (b). 
oIkcTos c. g. 273, 2. 
oiKTeipeu/ C. g. 274, 1, (c). 
oiKTp6s comp. 83, II. 
olWc.part. 312, R. 13. 
ohs with Sup. 239, R. 2 ; 

olosy olos t elfii c. inf. 

306, 1, (c). 

olos ins. oti toiovtos 329, 
R. 8. 

oTos attracted 332, 7 ; c. 
inf. 332, R. 8. 

ohs ins. wsre 341, R. 2. 

0I0-&' '6 Spaffov, 0I0-&' us 
irolrjaou 259, R. 10. 

otxotwu, abii, 255, R. 2. 

o?x<V«uc. part. 310, 4,(1). 

oKvziv c. inf. 306, 1, (a.) 

oXiyos comp. 84, 7. 

bxiyu, bxlyou with Corn- 
par. 239, R. 1. 

oXiyupelv C. g. 274, 1, (b). 

oXocpvpeo-frai c. g. 274, 1, 
(c); c. a. 279,5. 

6fu\e?v c. d. 284, 3. (1). 

ofxuvvai c. a. 279, 4. 

fyuna toIs C. Sup. 239, 
R. 2. 

'6/xoiov elvai C. partic. 310, 
R. 2. 

ZfjLoios c. g. 273, 3, (b); 
6/xoios, bfxoiovv, -oCcrfrcu, 
b/xolus c. d. 284, 3, 4. 

fyoAoyeu/ C. d. 284,3, (6). 

bfxoKoy^lrai c. a. and inf. 

307, R. 6. 



ops 322, 7 ; Avith a part. 

312, R. 8. 
hveiUQeur c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
oveLpos dec. 72, (a). 
bvivdvai, -acr&ai c. a. 279,1. 
ovo/xd £o~tl fxot and the 

like 266, R. 1. 
bvo/xdfav c. two a. 280, 4. 
ovtuv ins. tTuaav 116, 12. 
fato-bev c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
oiroL in pregnant sense 

ins. oirov 300, R. 7. 
Sirorau see Sroy under #re. 
Snore see ore. 
forou in pregnant sense 

ins. foot 300, R. 7; 

$7rou, quandoquidem see 

forws with Sup. 239, R. 2. 

cIttcos ins. 8-ri 329, R. 1. 

'Situs, that, in order that, 
330 ; '6ttus and '6irus /xf) 
c. ind. fat. ellip. 330, 
R.4. 

ttirus, when, see '6tc. 

'6irus, as 342. 

bpav c. g. 273, R. 20 ; bpav 
oXkw 278,3, (c); with 
verbs of appearing, 
showing 306, R. 9 ; c. 
part. 310, 4, (a). # 

bpyi&oSrai C. g. 274, 1 ; C 
part. 310, 4, (c). 

opeyeo-bai C. g. 273, 3, (b). 

opSpios comp. 82, I, (d). 

bp/xaa&ai c. g. 273, R. 7, 
(b). 

dpv&o&r)pas dec. 44, R. 2. 

fyvis dec.54,(c) and 68,12. 

6p(pai/6s c. g. 271, 3. 

'6s, v, o dec. 92 ; use 331, 
sq. ; agreement in gen. 
and num. 332, sq.; Case 
(attraction) 332, 6 ; 
Attractio inversa 332, 
R. 11; attraction in 
position 332, 8 ; '6s, 
7i, '6 before intermedi- 
ate clauses, attracted 
332, 9 ; modes 333 ; '6s 
changed into a demons. 
334, 1 ; '6s ins. the de- 
mons. 334, 3 ; '6s ins. 
'6ti, since, because, ins. 
'Iva, ut (after ovtus, 

ude, TOIOVTOS, T7]XlK0V- 

tos, toctoutos) ustc, ins. 
idv or et 334, 2. 



os, If], ; os fxzv — bs 5e ; 
os teal '6s demons. 331, 
R. 1. 
bcrov {'60'u) — too~outov(to 

covtu) 343. 
'6<rov, hcu with Comp. 
and Sup. 239, R. 1 and 
2 ; oaov, offa c. inf., e. 
g. '6oov y y e/*' elSevai 
341, R. 3. 
oo-os ins. '6ti t6<tos 329, 

R. 8. 
'6<ros attracted 332, 7. 
'6(ros ins. &st€ 341, R. 2. 
bariov = ogtovv dec.47,1. 
'6stis dec. 93. 
dacppaivea&ai c. g. 273, 5, 

(f), andR. 19. 
'60'u — too-ovtu 343,2, (b). 
'6rav see '6t€. 
'6t€ and orav const. 337. 
ore fundamental mean- 
ing 338, 1. 
oti with Sup. 239, R. 2. 
oti, that, const. 329 ; dif- 
ference between oti, a. 
c. inf. and part. 339, R. 
5 ; in citing the words 
of another 329, R. 3. 
'6ti, since, because, const. 

338, 2. 
on rl 344, R. 6. 
ov(k) 15, 4. 17, R. 2; oti 
at the end of a sen- 
tence 15, 4. 
ov 318 ; ov pleonastic, af- 
ter expressions denot- 
ing doubt, denial, after 
Comp. and Sup. ex- 
pressions 318, 8, and 
R. 7. 
ov yap aXXa 322, R. 11. 
ov interrog. 344, 5, (d). 
ob with Sup. negative 

adjectives 239, R. 3. 
ov /xevroi aXXa 322, R. 11. 
ov fxr) 318, 7. 

ov /xf) c. second pers. ind. 

fut. interrog. (ov /a), 

<pXvapi)ffeis ; ins. fx), 

(pXvdpei) 255, 4. 

ov fxriv aXXd 322, R. 11. 

ov fxSvov — aXXa Kai 321,3 

ov pron. dec. 87 ; us« 

302, R. 3. 
ovBas dec. 61, R. 1. 
ouSe'321,2. 
ovtiels dec. 99, R. 



GREEK INDEX. 



611 



ouSets fisris ob attracted 
332, R. 12. 

OVK ZCTTiV OTOV, OITtoS 331, 

R. 5. 
ovkovu and ovkovv 324, 

R. 7. 
ovv suffix 95, (b) ; con- 
clusive 324, 3, (b) ; in 

an answer 344, 7. 
ovi/eica c. g. 288, R. ; ov- 

vena ins. oTi 329, R. 1 ; 

since, because 338, 2. 
ods dec. 54, R. 4. 
o(/T6 — ovtg ; eure — tc 

321, 2. 
oStos dec. 91 ; Dialects 

217,4, (c); use 303, 1; 

with 'the Art. 246, 3. 
ovtos, heus! 269, 2, (a). 
oirrocri 95, (e). 
ouTa(s) 15, 2. 
ovtcos, us in wishes 342, 

R.2. 
ovtws with part. 312, R. 7. 
ovx oirws {on), oi>x on, 

— aXXa Kai ; ol»x <» *' 

— aAAa 321, 3- 
o(/>po, that, so that, 330. 
&jt>pa, until, see ecos. 
<ty<os comp. 82, I, (d). 
fyocpdyos comp. 82,1, (f ). 

notVoc. 53, 4, (1), (c). 
iraifeveiv C. two a. 280, 3. 
tto\cu6s comp. 82, I, (c). 
iravroiov eluai, yiyveoSai 

c Part. 310, 4, (h) ; c. 

a. c. inf. 311, 18. 
irapd Prep. 297 ; irapd C. 

g. ins. c. d. 300, 4, (a). 
ndpa ins. irdpecm 31, R. 3. 
tcapaivziv c. d. 284, 3, (3) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
TrapaKeXeveadai c. d. 284, 

3, (3). 
napaXa/xfiaue^ C. g. 275, 

3 ; c. two a. 280, 4. 
TrapairXrjcrios C g. 273, R. 

9; c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
Trapao-Kevd£zcrdai 306, 1, 

(a) ; c. faces c. ind. fut. 

330, 6 ; c. part, and c. 

us and part. 3 10, 4. (h). 
iropaxupsiv c. g. 271, 2; 

c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
irapen, 7rape'|, irdpe£, 300, 

k i. 

ndpio-nv C. inf. 306, 1, (c). 



7rapo|uj/eti' c. inf. 306, 1, (a) 
mis with the Art. 246, 5. 
iras ris with the second 

pers.imp.241,R.13,(c). 
Trdo~<rai> 216, 2. 
irdffX* lv vv6 tivos 249, 3. 
irarrip dec. 55, 2. 
Trdrpws dec. 71, B. (c). 
7raue«/, -eo-fra* c. g. 271, 2 ; 

c. part. 310, 4, (f ) ; c, 

part, and inf. 311, 17. 
Traxvs comp. 216, 2. 
ireL&eii/ rivd ri 278, 4 ; c. 

a. 279, 1; c. inf. 306, 1, 

(a); c. a* 306, R. 2. 
Treteeo-d-cu c. g. 273, R. 18 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
ireivrjv c. g. 274, 1. 
Ileipaievs dec. 57, R. 2, 
ireipaafrcu c g. 273, 5, (e); 

c. inf. 306, 1, (a); c. 

part, and inf. 311, 18. 
TreAd(eu/, ireXas c. g. 273, 

R. 9 ; c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
rreveo-&ai, Trevns C g. 273, 

5, (b). 
irevSnuias e^ei? c. g. 274, 

Mc). 

ir4irepi dec. 63, R. 1. 
TreTTOi^eVcu c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
tt4tto)j/ comp. 84, 11. 
7re> 95, d; Synt. 317, 1. 
irepcuos comp. 82, I, (c). 
irspav C. g. 271,3. 
irepav C. a. 279, R. 5. 
-rrepi Prep. 295, 1 and 3. 
irepi — eVe/co 300, R. 2. 
7repi c. d. in pregnant 

sense ins. of the ace. 

300, 3, (a). 
irzpi ins. irepUcrTi 31, R. 3. 
ireptfidxXeiu c.two a. 280,3. 
Trepiyiyvea&ai C g. 275, 1. 
TrfpioiSoo-frcu c. g. 275, 3. 
Trepier^ai c. g. 275, 1. 
7repie'xecrdxu C. g. 273, 3. 

TrepaSeTv see irepiopav. 
IlepiKXrjs dec. 59, 2. 
irepi/j.ev€ij/ c. a. 279, 3. 
irepiopav c. part. 310, 4, 

(e) ; c. part, and inf. 

311, 15. 
irepiopaa&ai C. g. 274, 1. 
7repl irpo 300, R 1. 
irepm6s c. g. 275, 2. 
ire<pvn4vai c. inf. 306, 1, (d). 
V VX VS dec. 63. 



7n'apa 78, R. 8. 
TTiixirXriixi c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
trivziv c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) and R. 15. 
TriTTTeiu viro tivos 249, 3. 
mo-reveii/ c. d. 284, 3. (3). 
iritav comp. 84, 12. 
■nXziv c. a. 279, R. 5. 
7rAe«n-oj/ with Sup. 239, 

R.2. 
nXziov without tf 323, R. <*.. 
7rXeicop, ttX€io~tos 84, 9. 
irXiov ins. rcX4o3i/ 78, R. 5. 
TrAeW without ^ 323, R.4. 
irXeoveKTtLi' C g. 275, 1. 
TrAeo's C. g- 273, 5, (b). 
irXeoos dec. 78, R. 5. 
ttAtj^cw e.g. 273, 5, (b). 
irXr]u c. g. 271, 3. 
irXypns, irXypoo) C. g. 273, 

5, (b). 
irXncrid^eiv, irXTjaiou c. g. 

273,R.9;c.d.284,3, (2). 
irXno-iov comp. 84. 
irXoos = ttXovs dec. 47. 
ttXoihtws C. g. 273, 5, (b), 
nveTv eg. 273, 5, (d): c. 

a. 278, 3, (b). 
irvvt, dec. 68, 13. 
ttoSxuv c. a. 274, R. 1. 
7roi in Preg. sense ins. iroi 

(ubi) 300, R. 7. 
7nne?j/ c. g. of material 

273, 5, (a) ; c. two a. 

280, 4. 
irotetj/ eu, Kax&s c. part. 

310, 4, (g);c. a. 279, 2} 

dyaSrd, icand etc. c. a. 

280,2; c. inf. 306, l,(c). 
iroieiv c. part. 310. 4. (I>) ; 

c. part, and inf. 311, 

13. 
iroieioSai c. g. 273, 2 and 

3, (a) : c. g. of pric 5 
275,3. 

iroLOs with the Art. 344 

R. 3. 
iroXeixslv C. d. 284. 3. (2). 
7rJAts dec. 63. 
iroXXbu eluai, eyK£?adcu, 

yiyveadai C. part. 310, 

4, (h). 

ttoXXov 8eu> C. inf. 307, 

R. 6. 
■jtoXXu) with comp. and 

supcrl. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
ttoXv with Comp. and 

Supcrl. 239.1M and 2. 



612 



GREEK INDEX. 



71-oA.us dec. 77. 
Tloaetiiov dec. 53, 4, (1) 
(d); 56, E, 1. 

7T0T6, TIS 7T0T6 etC. 344, 

E.2. 

Tr6repa, irorepov — ¥\ in a 
direct and indirect 
question 344, 5, (f ). 

irpaos dec. 76, XIV. 

wpdrreiu eu, KaK&s C. a. 
279, 2 ; signification of 
the first and second 
Perf. 249, 2; ayaSrd, 
K*Ka etc. c. a. 280, 2 ; 
Trparreiv, -e<r&cu, to de- 
mand, c. two ace. 280, 
3; c. d. 284, 3, (1). 

irpir.eiv, irpeTrSvTeos C. d. 
284, 3, (5) ; c. inf. 306, 
1, (d) •, c. d. and a. c. 
inf. 307, E. 3. 

T-p4irei c. part. 310, 4, (i). 

7rpeV/3ets, TrpeafivTys, rrpi- 
<r$vs 70, B. 

TTp€<T^€VeiV c. g. 275, 1. 

Trpeafiiaros 83, E. 2. 
Trpiatr&ai C. g. 275, 3. 
7iynV, Trplu dv, irplv ¥j const. 

337. 
irp6 Prep. 287, 2. 
irpoix^v c, g. 275, 1. 
■n-po&v/xbi' ehai, Trpo&vfj.e'to'- 

&ai c. inf. 306, 1, (a); 

c oircos c. ind. fut. 330, 6. 
vpolKa 278, E. 2. 
TrpoKa\e7cr&ai nvd rt 278, 

4. 
irpoKpivziv C. g. 275, 1. 
irpovotiv c. g. 274, 1 . 
7rpool/Aiov 17, E. 4. 
irpoopav C. g. 274, 1. 
7r/)cfc Prep. 298 ; c. d. in 

Preg sense ins. c. a. 

300, 3, (a). 
irposPaAAeiv C. g. 273, 5, 

(d). 
irposSiSovcu c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
irpos-fiKeiv c. d. 284, 3, (5) ; 

c. inf. 306, 1, (d); c.d. 

and a. c. inf. 307, E. 3. 
irpos7jK€i fxoi c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
vp6sbev C. g. 273, 3, (b). 
irposKaAelo-frai C. g. 274, 2. 
Trpos/cuyeiV C. a. 279, 1. 
irpoaiarelp C. g. 275, 1. 
irposrirreiv c. d. 284, 3, 

(3); c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 



TTpocrcpepris C. d. 284, 3, (4). 
TrpoTifxav c. g. 275, 1. 
irpovpytaiTepos 84, E. 3. 
irpo<p4pGiv c. g. 275, 1. 
irpox ^ dec. 71, B, (b). 
irp&ios comp. 82, 1, (d). 
TVpWTZVUV c. g. 275, 1. 
irpwros and irpurou 264, 

E. 7. 
iTT^a-aeiy c. a. 279, 5. 
7rr«x<fc comp. 82, I, (f ). 
7rw3xtveo-&cu with the sig- 

nif. of Perf. 255, E. 1. 
irvvfrdveaSrai C. g. 273, E. 

20; c part. 310, 4, (a); 

c part, and inf. 311, 6. 
irooXtuv C. g. 275, 3. 
ttws dv c. opt. 260, 2, (4) 

fa). 

'PaStws <p4peiv c. part. 310, 

,4, (c). 
pawv, pa,(TTos 84, 10. 
pe?v c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
piireiv C. a. 279, E. 5. 
£o0s dec. 47. 

2 omitted 25, 1 ; mova- 
ble at the end of a 
word 15; in the for- 
mation of tenses of 
pure verbs 131, and 
133; euphonic or con- 
necting letter 237, 1 
and E. 2. 

crdrreij/ c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

cravTov or creavrov dec. 
88 ; use 302, 2. 

o-e Suffix 235*, 3 and E. 3. 

<r4\as dec. 61, (a). 

ays dec. 68, 14. 

<r3- in inflex. changed to 
d 25, 3. 

o-^a inflex. 116, 2. 

cSmv ins. a&ooaav 116, 12. 

at union syllable 237, 1. 

aivairi dec. 63. 

aivea&cu c. a. 279, 1. 

ckov, an6p.7)v 221. 

a-Koire?u c. g. and a. 273, 
E. 20 and 21. 

atc&p dec. 68, 15. 

aoi ethical Dctf.284, 3,(10) 
(d). 

cros ins. aov 302, E. 2. 

ciravi&iv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 

o-TreVSeo-^ai C. d- 284, 3, 



o-7T6uSeij/ c. a. 279, E. 5. 
(rirov8d(eii/ c. inf. 306, 1 , a 
e-rrovdeuos comp. 82, E. 6. 
ard^ivc. a. 278, 3, (a). 
(TTc&ixaa&ai ri tivi 285, 1. 

(3). 
areap dec. 68, 16. 
arevd^ivQ. d. 285, 1, (1). 
a-repyeii/ c. a. and d. 274, 

E. 1 ; c.d. 285, (1). 
<rrepe?j/ c. g. 271, 2 ; c. 

two ace, rivd twos 280, 

3 and E. 3. 
o-TTJvcu c. a. 279, E. 6. 
2t? see Bad 97, 1. 
(TTOxdCeo-frai c. g. 273, 3. 

(TTpaT-nyeiu c. g. 275, 1. 
<ru dec. 87 ; use 302, 1. 
(TvyyiyyctXTKca ifxavTcp C 

part. 310, E. 2. 
cvyvv&uoovc.g. 273, 5, (e). 
<ru7\<upeu/ c. inf. 306,1, (a). 
av\av c. two ace. 280, 3. 
o-u/j.Palvzu' c. inf. 306, 1, 

(d) ; c. d. and a. c. inf. 

307, E. 3 ; personal 307, 

E. 6. 
crviJ.fiovXsveu' c. inf. 306, 

1, (a). 
(Tv/j-TTpaTreiv C. d. 284, 3, 

(7). 
o-vfupepeiv c. d. 284, 3, (7). 

<rvp.(p4p€i c. part. 310, 4, 

(i). 

(TV[x(pop6v ecrrt c. d. and 

ace. c. inf. 307, E. 3. 
civ, £vv Prep. 289, 2. 
avvaipea&ai c. g. 273, 3, 

(b). 
trweAoWt 284, 3, 10, (a). 
cvveTrea&cu C. g. 273, 3. (b). 
cwepyos C. g. 273, 3, b. 
cvvikvai c. g. and c. g. and 

a. 273, 5, (f) and B. 19. 
avvoida ifxavrip c. part. 

310, E. 2. 
cvvTepLOVTi 2S4, 3, 10, (a). 
cvs dec. 62. 

o-^aAAeff-^at C g. 271, 2. 
a<piau ins. fyuV 302, E. 8. 
ax^oy c. g. 273, E. 9. 
axv, ua Ka &' '^ ov Ka ' P*P°s 

with the Nom. 266, 3; 

with the Ace. 266, E. 4. 
(txoAcuos comp. 82, I, (c). 
^,coKpdT7]s dec. 59, 2 and 

E. 2. 



GREEK INDEX. 



613 



trus dec. 78, R. 6. 

cwrep Voc. 53, 4, (lj (a). 

Tcfc roiavra without Kal 

following 325, 1, (e). 
rapdrreiu iro\ep.ou 278, 2. 
ravra referring to one 

thought 241, E. 3. 
raxvs comp. 83, I. 
raws dec. 72, (b). 
re 321, 1 ; re — kcu, ib. 
rsyyeiv C. a. 278, 3. 
reKpalpeaSai ri tivi 285, 

1, (3). 
tckvovv, parentem esse 255, 

R. 1. 
rehetos C. g. 273, 5, (e). 
TeXevrav, finally, lastly 

312, R. 3. 
refiveiv c two ace. 280, 3. 
repas dec 54, R, 4. 
rep-irso-frou c. part. 310, 4, 

(d). 
rdrrapes dec. 99, 5. 
tt)Xikovtos dec. 91. 
t: 8e344, R. 4. 
ri p.c£r6v, ri irc&cav 344, 

R. 5.^ 
ti ov, ti o5v ou 256, 4, (e). 
TiSfivai, -etr^ot C. g. 273, 

3, (a) ; c. two ace. 280,4. 
t'ikthv, parentem esse 255, 

R. 1. 
Tip.av, Tipaabai C. g. 275, 3. 
np-wpCtv c. d. 284, 3, (7) ; 

Tip.u)pe7(rdai Tivd twos 

274, 2 5 c. a. 279, 7. 
t\s and tis dec. 93. 
rls or 7rSs rts with the II. 

pers. Imp. 241, R. 13. 
rls use 303, 4; tIs 

omitted 238, 5, (e). 
t/s ins. ostis in indirect 

question 344, R. 1. 
t6, tov, t$ c. inf. or c. a. 

c. inf. 308 ; r6 c. inf. or 

c. a. c. inf. in exclam. 

and question 308, R. 2. 
rb Kal t6, rbv Kal t6v 

247, 3. 
to vvv zlvai, to T-qpapou 

tluai, rb Kara tovtov 

thai 308, R. 3. 
rot 317, 3; in answers 

344, 7. 
Tolyap, TOiyapovv 324, 3, 

(c). 

roiydpTo: 324, 3, (c). 



toiW 324, 3 (c). 
TOiovros dec. 91 ; toiou- 

to's elp.i c. inf. 341, R. 2. 
TO?s8eo~i 217, 4. 
To\p.au c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
ro^veiv c. g. 273, R. 7. 
Tocouroy — baou ; tocoutoj 

— bVa> 343, 2, (b). 
Toaovro -outcu with Com. 

and Sup.' 229, R. 1 

and 2. 
ToaouTos dec. 91. 
TocrovTov 5eo> c. inf. and 

a-sTe c. inf. 307, R. 6. 
tov or tov pA] c.inf. 274.3, 

(b). 
Tpacpeis twos 2/5. R. 5. 
TpeTj/ c. a. 279. 5. 
rpels- dec. 99, 5. 
Tpifiwv c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
Tpi7]pr]s dec. 59, 2. 
TU7x c " /€tJ/ c - S- 273,3, (b); 

c. part. 310,4, (1). 
Tvpavvtuv, -veveiv C. g. 

275, 1. 
Tv<pws dec. 72, (b). [(e). 
twvto ins. to avT6 21 7, 4, 

'rpplCetv c. a. 279, 1. 
v&pio~TOTepos 82, II. 
{/5wp dec. 68, ID. 
vt6s dec. 72, (a). 
vp.wv, vp.iv, Zjxiv 87, R. 4. 
virdyeiv c. g. 274, 2. 
vwaKoveiv c. g. 273. R. 18 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
viravio-Tao-bai C g. 271, 2. 
vnavTav, xnvavTid^iv C. g. 

273, R. 9 ; c. d. 284, 

3, (2). 
vTtdpx*w c g. 271, 4; c.d. 

284, 3, (9) ; c. part. 

310, 4, (f.) 
virelKeiv C. g. 271, 2 ; C. d. 

284,3, (2). 
U7re/c300, R. 1. 
wreKTp4ireo-&ai C. a. 279, 

R. 3. [R. 3. 

wre^pxeoSai C. a. 279, 
inrep 293. 
irKtpfSaXXeiv C. g. and a. 

, 27 ?' L 

virep(:X^ lv c - £• 275, 1. 
vnepopav C. g. 274, 1. 
virep'pepeiv C. g. 275, 1. 
wrriKoos c. g. and d. 273, 

K. 18. 
wr-nx^u c. a. 278, 3, (b). 
52 



foro 7 Prep. 239; c. d. in 
Preg. sense ins. c. a 
300, 3, (a) ; c. a. and 
part. 312, R. 5. 

v-ko ins. vweaTt 31, R. 3. 

wropeueiv c.inf. 306,1. (a), 
311, 15; c. part. 31ft 

« 4) (e) ; 

vTrop.ip.wr)o~Ksiv c. two ace 

280, 3. 
vkovo&v c. g. 273, R. 20. 
viroo-TTivai C d. 284, 3, (2) 
{nroxuptiv c. g. 271, 2. • 

c. a. 279, R. 3. 
vo'Tcpslv, varepou elvai, 

vcrTepi£eiv c. g. 275, 1. 
v<pi(TTa<r&ai c. d. 284, 3, 

(2). 
ityto-Tos 216, R. 2. 

$ayeiv c. g. and a. 273, 5, 

(c) andR. 15. 
(paiuetu, (paiveaSai c. part 

310, 4, (b) ; (paivop.ai 
ttoiwv ti ib. R. 3. 

(paiveo-frai c. inf. and part. 

311, 8. 

(pdvai c. inf 5 96, 1, (b.) 
cpavepos elfit ttoiuv ti 310, 

R. 3. 
cpeiSeo-frai. C. g. 274, 1, (b). 
(pipe, referring to several 

persons 241, R. 13, (a). 
(pspop-tvos, <p£p(dv, maxima 

studio 312, R. 9 ; (pepwv, 

with ib. R. 10. 
(pepTaros 84, 1. 
(peprepos, c()4pio~TOS 84, 1. 
(pevyzii/ with signif. of 

Perf. 255, R. 1 ; cpev- 

yeiv C. g. e. g. kXotttjs 

274, 2 ; imo tivos 249. 3. 
(pevyeu/ c. a. 279, 3 ; c inf. 

306, 1, (a). 
cp&dp.ei>os, (pdds, quickly 

310,4, (e). 
<p&dveiv c. a. 279, 4 ; c. 

part, followed by %, 

7rph^310, 4, (1) 
<p&4yyeo-&at. c. a. 278, 3. 
(f&oVyos and ^077^7 70, 

B. 
(pbois dec. 68, 17. 
<pdoi>ziv c. g. 274, 1, (t) ; 

c.d. 284, 3, (6). 
<f>iA.os comp. 82, R. 4. 
jbtAos c. g. 273, 3, (bj. 
<pi( v). suffix 210. 



614 



GREEK INDEX. 



^ojSeTo-^at a a. 279, 5 ; c. 

inf. 306, 1, (a). 
fyoiviKovs 76, R. 3. 
tpovevu with signif. of 

Perf. 255, R. 1. 
<$>pa£tiv c. d. and a. c. inf. 
# 307, R. 3. 
<ppeap dec. 68, 16. 
ibpoifjuov 1 7, R. 4. 
(ppouri^eiu e.g. and a.. 274, 

1 and R. 1 ; c. us and 

g. abs. SI 2, R. 12 : c. 

oirus c. md. fut. 330, 6. 
(ppovSos 17, R. 4. 
(pvtiv ; <pvvcu c. g. 273, 1. 
(pv^aTTeaScu c. a. 279, 1. 

Xa/peii/ c. d. 285, (1) ; c 

part. 310, 4, (c). 
XaAe7rcuVeii> c. g. 274, 1 ; 

c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
Xa\eir6s elpu c. inf. ins. 

Xa\eir6v eari with ace. 

c. inf. 307, R. 6. 
Xateira>s cpepew C. g. 274, 

1, d; c. d. 285, (1); c. 

iiri tlvl and c. a. 285, R. 

1 ; c. part. 310, 4 (c). 
Xdpvs dec, 71, A, (a). 
Xapiv 278, R. 2; c. g. 288, 

R. ; x^P LV *t x 'h ,/ i a "h v IU - 
X*Lp dec. 55, R. 1. 
Xeipurros, x*' l P <av 84, 2. 
XeAiScoj/ dec. 55, R. 2. 
X^povv c. g. 271, 2. 
Xvovs dec. 47. 
Xoeus dec. 57 and 68, 18. 



XoXova&ai C. g. 274, 1 ; c. 

d. 284, 3, (6). 
Xopeveiv SeSv 279, R. 5. 
Xovs dec. 68, 18. 
Xpaia/xeTu c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
Xpsuv 73, 1, (c). 
Xptws dec. 69. 
Xp-h c g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. a. 

and d. 279, R. 4, c. inf. 

306, 1, (d); xp-h c. d. 

and a. c. inf. 307, 6, 

and R. 3. 
XprjoSai tiv'i ti 278, 4 ; c. 

d. 285, (2). 
Xpus dec. 68, 19. 
Xcope?u c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
X<»pi-(z lv c - £• 271, 2. 
Xwpis c. g. 271, 3. 
X&pos and %cfy>a 70, B. 

Yaveip c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
\p4yeiv c. g. and a. 273, 

R. 20. 
xf/evdea&ai C. g. 271, 2. 
^euSifc comp. 82, IL 
$i\6s e.g. 271,3. 

T H5e with Part. 312, R. 7. 

£>va};, Siva 53, R. 4. 

uveioSca c. g. 275, 3. 

us Prep. 290, 3 and R. 2. 

o>s if/iai, see oti. 

us ut, in wishes (utinam) 
259, 3, (b). 

us, as, so as, const. 342 ; 
ovtus (us) — us in wish- 
es and asseverations 



242, R. 2; us with a 
Subs, (as might be ex- 
pected, us Aa.Kedcup.6- 
vios, ut Laced, for a La- 
cedaemonian) 342, R. 4. 

us with Superb 239, R. 2. 

us c. d., as : us yep6vTi, 
us ijJioi, meo judicio, us 
ip.fj 56ty 284,3, (10) (b). 

us c. part, and case abs. 
312, 6; c. part. fut. 312, 
6, (a). 

us ins. on ovtus 329, R. 8. 

us, that, so that 330 ; us wc, 
c. opt. utinam 260, R. 9. 

us, when, see 2re. 

<Jjs ins. ust€, so that, see 

UST€. 

us slireiv and wy tiros el- 

7re«/ 341, R. 3. 
us els, iiri, irpos C. a., us 

iiri c. d. 290, R. 2. 
<ws ti 344, R. 6. 
us &<pe\ov, -es, -e C inf. 

259, R. 6. 
8>s7rep, as, const. 342 ; with 

Part. 312, R. 13. 
usj€ c. inf. ins. of a sim- 
ple inf. 306, R. 3. 
usre c. part. 312, R. 13. 
usT€ t so that, const. 341. 
&sre, as, so as, const. 342. 
uvtos ins. 6 avros 217, 4, 

(e). 
u<pe\e7v c. a. 279, 1 ; C. 

two a. 280, R. 1 : c. d. 

279, R, 1. 



III. INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF THE VERBS. 



Abbreviations. A. Aorist ; A. I. first Aor. ; A. II. second Aor. ; Aug. Aug- 
ment ; Char. Characteristic ; Comp. Compare ; Dial. Dialect ; P. Future ; P. 
Passive; Pf. Perfect; Pf. M. Perfect Middle; Plup. Pluperfect; R. Remark; 
Red. Reduplication. 



Adu 230. 
ayalop.ai 230. 
Hyafiai 179, 1. 
aydop.ai, ayaiopai 230. 
aydpu Pf. with Att. Red. 
124, 2, (6). DiaL 230. 



ayvoeu 230. 

&7*/i^t 187. 1. Dial. 230. 

& 7 w,A.I. f)la, Qai in Thu. 
and Xen. ; A. II. 124, 
R.2; Pf.I.Act. 124,2; 
Pf.M. fiyfxai. Dial. 230. 



adu (Poet. aei5a>), P. dVo- 
^uai (deicrojuat), Att. 
(aelcu, aau n on- Att.); 
Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230. 

aelpu 230. 

ai)8i£op.cu Aug. 122, 1. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



615 



'AHMI 230. 

aidCw Char. 143, 6. 

alSeo/jLcu, cuoop.ai 166, 1. 

Dial. 230. 
alvew, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d), 2. 
atyvfiai 230. 
alpew 167, 1. Dial. 230. 
otipci} see detpcy 230. 
o.l(T^a.vojxai 160, 1. 
aicrffca Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 

230. 
aiu Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230. 
CKax'C^ 2 30. 
a/caxMeVos 230. 
d/ceo/xot, formation of 

tenses 130, (d), 1. 
fanfiiw 230. 
olkovu, Pf. with Att. Red. 

124, 2 ; F. a.Kov<rofj.cu. 

Pass, with a- 131, 2. 
aKpodofj.ai, P. -dao/mai 129, 

R. 1. 
dAaAa(>, Char. 143, 6. 
a\do/j.cu 230. 
dAcm-afc 223, 5. 
a\8aiuca 230. 
dAei>a>, Pfwith Att. Red. 

124, 2. 
dAe'£co 166, 2. Dial. 230. 
aAeofxcu or a\evo/j.aL 230. 
dAea>, formation of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
dA&Tjo-Kw, -&{<tko) 230. 
a\i(TKO/j.ai 161, 1. 
ahiTaivoo 230. 
dAKadet!/, see dAe£w 162. 
dAAao-(ra>, Char. 7. 143, 1. 

—A.I. and II. P. 141, 

4, (b). 
aWofxai, a in format. 149, 

R. 2. Dial. 230. 
dAocuo, F. -dVw. 129, R. 1. 
dAu/cTecw 230. 
aXvffKw 230. 
ahtyaivu), -dvco 230. 
a/xaprdvu 160, 2. Dial. 

230. 
d^jSAicr/fw 161, 2. 
a/xirex^ 159, 4. 
a/j.ir\a.Ki<TKC0 230. 
ajxvvta, a/xvva&ou 162. 
afj-cpiyvoeco, Aug. 126, 1 

and 3. 
a/JMpisvi'viJ.i 184, 1. 
adepts far too, Aug. 126, 2. 
avafSiwanofxai 161, 3. 
iyahiffKa) 161, 4. 



di/5<£//a> 230. 

'ANE0n 230. 

d^e'xo/xat Aug. 126, 1. 

avfyoba (Ep.) 230. 

avoiyvvfj.i, avoiyco 187, 6. 

auopS6(», Aug. 126, 1. 

dj/rdco 230. 

avvT<a, avvoo formation of 
tenses 130. (b), 1. Dial. 
230. 

3i/a>7a 230. 

airavpdca 230. 

airacpiaKco 230. 

dTTctAew 230. 

a.7rex&di/0{iai 160, 3. 

dTi^epo-e 230. 

o.tt6xpv 177, 3, contrac- 
tion 137, 3. 

cnroxpufJ-ai 230. 

'APAft 230. 

apecrKco 161, 5. 

apK6<a, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d), 1. 

ap/xoTTcc, -£», Char. 143, 3. 

fyvv/jLcu 188, 1. Comp.230. 

dp(ta, formation of tenses 
130, (e). 

dp7ra(w, Char. 143, 7. 

apvroi), apvco, foi'mation 
of tenses 130, (b), 1. 

'APH, apapio-KO) 230. 

$<r<rci), ai'acrca 230. 

avaivoo, Aug. 122, 1. 

'ATAAZOMAI, Char. 143, 
6. 

'AYPAXl, see aTravpdw. 
Comp. 230. 

au|dvo>, av^co, 160, 4. 
'ATPI2KOMAI, <?7raup.230. 

cupiKveofxai 159, 2. 

acpvaaoo, Char. 143, 4. 

'A<f>n, aira<pi<TK<»> 230. 

^X^ /"^ 166,4. 

'AXn, d/faxi'Cw 23 °- 

'AH, (Ep.) 230. 

dtapro (aeipu) 230. 

Bdfy, Char. 143, 6. 
Paivoo 158, l.Dial. 230. 
j3aAA« 156,2. Comp.230. 
pdwTco, Char. <£. 143, 1. 
Papew 230. 

paardCai, Char. 143, 7. 
BAH, see Paivca. 
)3eiO/uoj, fieo/xai 230. 
j8ido/iai 230. 

at>3aC« 163, 1. Comp. 
/SaiVw 230. 



pippdbo-Kco 161, 6 Dial. 

230. 
Pioa 192, LO. 
Piu<TKOjxai 161, 3. 
/3Aa7TTo>, Char. 0, 143, 1: 

Red. 123, 2. 
fiXacrrdvca 160, 5. 
P\aa-(p7]p.ew, Red. 123, 2. 
ySAeVw, A. II. P. 140 R. 1. 
0AiTTo> Char. 143, 3. 
P\a>aKa> 230. 
£oaa> 230. 
fiocTKU) 166, 5. 
Povhofxai 166, 6. Dial. 230. 
Ppdacroo, Char. 143, 3. 
/Spe'xw A. II. P. 140, 2. 
Ppifa, Char. 143, 6. 
Ppvxdofxai 230. 
fivveco, fivi/o/JLcu, five* 159,1. 

Ta/j.4a) 165, 1. Comp.230. 

yduv/xai 230. 

TAXI, see yiyvojAou. Comp. 
230. 

yey wvtarKco 161, 7. Comp 
yiyoiva 230. 

yelvop.ai 230. 

yskdu), formation of ten- 
ses 130 (c). 

ysvTo 230. 

TENn, lee yiyvofxai. 

yevca, A. P. with a 131, 3, 

77?£ew 165,2. 

777 pdcrKW, yr\pd<a 161, 8. 
Dial. 230. 

yiyvofj.cu, yiuofxai 163, 2. 

7t7^wcr«:w, 7ij/cccr/cc«; 161,9 

7<>aco 230. 

ypr)yop4(a, see £yelp<a. 

Aaifa 143. 6. 223, 5. 

5cuVu/a 230. 

Saia> 230. 

5d/«/w 158, 9. 

Sa/xdw, Safidfa 156, 2. 

Sa/jLvdu 230. 

Sap&dj/w 160, 6. Dial. 230. 

Sareo/Aai 230. 

AAH 230. 

Searo 230. 

8e?166, 7. 

8ef5o>, Pf. mia 193. 

Comp. 230. 
fcttcvvpi 17 5, 187, 2. Dial. 

230. 
Sc?!/, see Se7. 
AEKH, sec deiKuv/xi and 

Se'xojuot. 



616 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



Se'/xw, formation of ten- 
ses 156, 2. 

Seofxai contract. 137, 2. 

SepKO/xai, Pf. SedopKa with 
the meaning of the 
Pres. 140, 4. Dial. 230. 

8e>«,A. II. P. andPf.A. 
140, 2 and 4. 

Sexojuai 230. 

Sevw 230. 

5e«, formation of tenses 

130, (d), 2, contraction 
137, 2. 

Sew, see 8e7. 
Smtrao), Aug. 126, 2. 
Sta/coveco, Aug. 126, 2. 
StaAe-yo/iia', Aug. 123, K. 2. 

dlSaGKOO 161, E. 

AIAHMI 230. 
Si5pd(TKca 161, 10. 
5i'5a>;iu 175. 
5f£w*eu 180, K. 3. Dial. 

*230. 
AIHMI 180, E. 3. Dial. 

230. 
Si(TTd(a>, Char. 143, 7. 
8nJ/o&>, contracted 137, 3. 
5tV230. 

Siwkci}. ihi'JjKo&ov 162. 
Soda-aaro 230. ^ 
8ok4u) 165, 3. 
doviriu 230. 
8paa>, formation of tenses 

131, 3. 
APEMH see rpe'xw. 
5wa,uat 179, 2. Accent 

176, 1. Dial. 230. 
5iW, 5uo> 158, 2. Dial. 
230. 

'Ecc^tj see ottto) 230. 

t a«, Aug. 122, 3. For- 
mation of tenses 129, 
E. 1. 

iyeipcc Pf. with Att. Ked. 
124,2, (b);Pf.ILwith 
variable vowel 140, 4. 
Aor. II. M. 155, 1. 
Dial. 230. 

'ErKH, see (pepca. 

iyX*Lpeo), Aug. 126. 5. 

e5a> ; see ecrd-iOJ. 

eCo/u.a.1, see ko&1£q}. 

ifreXco 166, 8 

42ri&, Aug. 122, 3. 

'E0n Aug.l22,3,Dial.230. 

s EIAn, see Space. 

€t/ca^co, Aug. 121, E. 



'EIKfl, Pf. Zouca, Plup. 

ZcpK&v 140, P. 3 ; Aug. 

122, 5. Inflection of 

eoiKa 1 95, 2. Dial. 230. 
efrcw, efooSw 162. 
€tAea>, etAeaj, ei'AAw and 

eiAAco, see e?Aw. 
e¥Av« 230. 
eTAo) 166, 9. 
ctjttl 181 and 225. 
eT/xi 181 and 226. 
e'ivv/j.1, see apuptei/vv/xi. 
'Einn, see (prj/xi. 
elpyvvpu 187, 3. 
e2p7w 187, 3. Comp. 230. 
'EIPOMAI 166,11. Comp. 

230. 
'EIPYMI, see ipvca 230. 
dpva>, see ipvu. 
e'ipeo 230. 
euro, Aug. 122, 3, Dial. 

230. 
tfw&a, see i&ifa. 
iXawca 158, 3. Dial. 230. 
ixdw, see (havvu). 
eAe'7x w » Pf-with Att.Eed. 

124, 2. 
e'AeAi'Cw, Char. 143, 6. 

Dial. 230. 
s EAEY©n, see epxo/J.ai. 
eAiWw, Aug. 122, 3.— Pf. 

with Att. Eed. 124, 2. . 
'EARTH, see eA/ca>. 
e'A/cw 166, 10. 
eAirca, Pf. eoAira, Plup. 

icaXireiu 140, E. 3. Aug. 

122, 5. 
'EAfl, see alpeca. 
i/xew, formation of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
ififii 225. 

ifMvrj/xvKe, see r//iww. 
ifxiri-KX^pn 177, 5. 
ivapi(w, Char. 143, 6. 
ivavw, Pass, with (T 131,2. 
5 ENE©n, see ivfyodra. 
'ENEKfl, see (pepw. 
eVeVw, see ^>77yu.t. Comp. 

230. 
e^A 230. 
iviTTTca 230. 
eWeVw, see ^)7]|Ui. Comp. 

230. 
euvvp.1, see afxcpievvvfii. 

Comp. 230. 
eVoxAew, Aug. 126, 1. 
&n/ca, see 'EIKfl. Comp. 

230. 



eopya, see 'EPm. 
eopTa^w, Aug. 122, 5. 
iirdiio 230. 
iiravpicnao 230. 
eTrdyo/jLcu 197, E. 2. 
eTrt&vfxta), Aug. 126, 5. 
i-rrla-Tafxai 179, 3. Dial 

230. 
cW, Aug. 122, 3. Comp 

230. 
epa/xai 179, 4. 
ipdca see epafxai. 
ipyd(op.ai, Aug. 122, 3. 
!>7&> 230. 
'EPm, pWp. idcpyeiv 122, 

5. — Perf. with variable 

vowel 140, E. 3. 
epSco see 'EPm. Comp. 

230. 
ipeidca, perf. with Att. 

Eed. 124, 2. Dial. 230. 
ipetiroD 230. 
e>eWa> 143, 3. 
ipidaivca 230. 
e>X w 230. 
'EPOMAI see 'EIP. 
kpirvfa, epira, Aug. 122, 3. 
eppco 166, 12. Dial. 230. 
ipvyydvu) 160, 13. 
ipv&aiva) 230. 
epu/cw 230. 
epv/xai see epuco 230. 
epvw, formation of tenses 

223, 1. Comp. 230. 
epXOfjiat 167, 2. Comp. 

23.0. 
iafriu,, iV&w 167, 3. 
eo-Tictco, Aug. 122, 3. . 
evade see aj'Saj/w. Comp. 

230. 
evdoo see Ko3-euS«. 
evpicTKw 161, 11. 
evXOjxai Aug. 121, E. 
ex&d-vojxai see direx^. 
exa> 166, 14. Comp. 230. 
eij/co 166, 15. 

Zcta, contract. 137, 3 

Comp. j8to«. 
^eWjiu 184, 2. Comp. Ce». 
^evyvvpa. 187, 4. 
£ea>, formation of tenses 

130, (1), d. 
Qwvvvfxi 186, 1. 

?jj8aV«:w, 7J)8aa>, 1 61 , 12. 
T)yep4&op.cu see a7?^po», 
Comp. 230. 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 



61? 



fepebofiai see aXpu. Comp. 

230. 
foai 190. Dial. 230. 
fjfi^poTov see afMaprdvca. 
rjfii 178, E. 3. 
i/jiva 230. 

0aTTTo>, Char. <p 143, 1. 
SreXo} see edeAw. 
Sepo/Mou 230. 
&e» 154, 2 ; contract. 137, 

1. Comp. rpexco. 
dTjAeco 230. 
0Hnn 230. 
^47701/0; 160, 14. 
&\da>, formation of tenses 

130, (c). 
Sv-hanw 16 1,1 3. Comp. 230. 

bpd.TTO} from TO.p6.TTd} 156, 

E. 
bpavcc Pass, with a- 131, 3. 
,fyi/AAi£a>, Char. 223, 5. 
fy>v7rra>, Char. <f> 143, 1. 
SpaaKa) 161, 14. 156, 2. 

Dial. 230. 
3-iW and ^i5w 158, 4. 
&uw, fonnation of tenses 

130, (b) 2. 

'I5p<ta, contract. 137, E. 

1. Dial. 230. 
l^duca see Ka&ifa. 
%(u see Ka&ifa. 
%-niu 180. Dial. 230. 
lnvioyw, 'Ua> 159, 2. See 

a(piKv4o/nai. Comp. 230. 
l\d(TK0/xcu 161, 15. 
'IAHMI 230. 
5f\Aw see elAw. 
l/xda-a-w, Char. 143, 3. 
fcrd/it 230. 

'i(TTt]p.l 175. 

XaxvoAvu)) a in format.149, 

E. 2. 
laxv^opxu. and Xaxop-ai 

see vincrxvtop.a.1. 
'1X2 see ef^t. 

KAA-, KAIA-, see Kot- 

Wftcu. 
KaSe(op.ai, Aug. 126, 3. 
Ka&e8ovp.ai 154, 5. 
/ca^ewSa; 166, 13. 
Kc^juat, Aug. 126, 3. 
Ka&i(dvu> sec Kadi'Co. 
Ka.ivvp.ct.i 230. 
Kaico «da> 154, 2. Dial. 

230. 



/caAeo>, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (d) 2: Opt. 

Plup. M. or. P. 154, 85 

metath. in Pf. 156, 2. 
Kdfxvco 149, 5, and 158, 10. 

Dial. 230. 
KdjxTTTca Pf. M. or P. 144, 

E. 2. 
KaTrjyopeoo, Aug. 126, 5. 
ndcc see Kaica. 
/ceT/iat 189. Dial. 230. 
Keipco 230. 
KEIfi see Keijxai. 
/ceAeuw, Pass, with er, 

131,2. 
KeAAo> 230. 
KeXo/xai 230. 
/cevTeco 230. 
Kepdvvvp.1 183, 1. Dial. 

230. 
KtpSaivca, a in format.149, 

E. 2. Pf. I. Act. 149, 6. 

Comp. 230. 
Kev&w 230. 

ktjSoj 166, 17. Dial. 230. 
KiSfafiat 230. 
Kivvfiai 230. 
Kipvdw 230. 
Kixdvo), -o/xai 230. 
icixpyfu 177, 1. 
Ki'w 230. 

K\ayydvo} 160, 8. 
/cAaCw, Char. 77 143, 84 

Dial. 230. 
kAcu'o> 154, 2 and 166, 18. 
kAoco formation of tenses 

130, (c). 
K\eia) Pass, with o- 131,3. 

Dial. 230. 
KXeiTTw, Char. 7r 143, 1. 

P. M., A. II. P. 140, 2. 

Pf. I. and Pf. M. or P. 

140, 5. 
«Aew 230. 
KArjj'aj, kAt/w see /cAeia> 

230. 
kAiVw, Pf. A. and M. or 

P. and A. I. P. 149, 7. 

and E. 4. 
kXvu 230. 

kj/cuw Pass, with cr 131, 2. 
Kvdco Pass, with <r 131, 2. 

contract. 137, 3. 
kvuxto-u, Char. 143, 3. 
Kotfc, Char. 143, 6. 
KoiXaivw, a in form. 149, 

E. 2. 
KoAouw,Pass.witho-131,3. 



k6ttto), Char. 71-, 143, 1 

Dial. 230. 
ko'Jvwixi 182. Dial. 230. 
KOTeca 230. 
/cpo(a>, Char. 7 143, 6; 

Perf. 194, E. Comp. 

230. 
Kpaivw 230. 
Kpefiafiai 179, 5. 
Kpei.i.dvuvp.1 183, 2. 
Kpivw Pf. A. and M. or 

P. and A. I. P. 149, 7, 

and E. 4. 
Kpovw, Pass.with cr 131,3. 
KpirnTO) 143, 1. 
k/^Co, Char. 143, 6. 
KTaofjiai, Eed. 123, E. 1 ; 

Subj. Pf. and Opt. 

Plup. 154, 8. 
KTetvvfxi 188, 2. 
KTeivw, P. ktzvw. A. I. ck- 

Tetva, (A. II. %kto.vov 

doubtful in prose) ; Pf. 

A. %KTova 141, 4; Pf. 

P. eKTa/xai and Aor. 

P. inTafrriv ( ittTdv&riv 

in later writers) 149, 

E, 3. Poet, and DiaL 

230. 

KTlVWp.1 See KTCtUVfil. 

ktvtt4(o 165, 4. 
KvXtca, Pass wither 131, 2. 
fccwew 159, 3. 
Kvpeu, Kvpco 230. 

Ao7Xai'<M 160, 15. Dial. 
230. 

AAZTMAI 230. 

XanPduu 160, 16. Dial. 
230. 

Xavbdvo) 160, 17. Dial. 
230. 

\da-Kca 230. 

Ae7&>, (a) to say, without 
Pf. A.; Pf. M. Ae'A€7- 
p.0.1. A. P. eAe'x^v.— 
(b) to collect, and in 
compounds Pf. eifAoxa, 
M. or P. tfXayfxai 140, 
5 ; Aug. 123, 3 5 A. II. 
P. i\eyni> and A. I. P. 
140,E.l. Comp.AEXn. 

A617TC0, A. eAl7TOJ/, Pf. II. 

\e\oiira 140, 4. A. II. 
A. and P. 141, 3. cor« 
responding form 160, 
18. 
AeVw, A. II. P. 140, B. 1 



618 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OP VERBS. 



Aet»KaiVcw,d in for.149, R. 2. 
AeiWw, Char. 143, 3. 
Xevw, Pass, with <r 131,2. 
AEXn 230. 
KijJ.Tra.voo see Xe'nra). 
Ai/a6ttco, Char, r 143, 3. 
Xia-ap/xai, Char. 143,3. 
Aouw, contract. 137, 5. 

Dial. 230. 
Xvfj.alvofx.ai Pf. M. or P. 

149, 8. 
Xvw, formation of tenses 

130, (b) 2. Dial. 230. 

Maivofxai 230. 
fiaiofxai 230. 

fuu/frdvu 160, 19. Dial.230. 
ixa.pvap.ai 230. 
fiaprvpeca 165, 5. 
/uacrcw, Char, y 143, 1. 
fLao-rifa, Char. 143, 6. 
fidxofxai 166, 19. Dial. 

230. 
MAH 230. 
juefrvovco) 161, 16. 
fisipofxai 230. 

/xe'Aet 166, 21. Dial. 230. 
fxeXXw 166, 20. 
^eAa> see fi4Xci. Comp. 

230. 
ftevoivdco 230. 
p£w 149, 5; 166, R. 2. 

Comp. MAG. ^ 

fierafieXeti fj.eTafj.4Xofj.ai, 

166,21. 
fjLfpfjLTjpiCa, Char. 223, 5. 
fj.rjKvofA.ai 230. 
/Mtatvu), [tirjvaiy fxiavai 149, 

Pv. 2= Pf. Act. fx^layKa 

149, 6. Pf. M. or P. 

fizfiiacrfxai 149, 8. Dial. 

230. 
/J7W/U 187, 5. Dial. 230. 
/jLifivfjo-Kco Subj. Pf. and 

Opt. Plpf. M. 154, 8; 

161, 17. 
fxio-yco see filyvv/xi. 
fioXovjxai see /3\doo"K(i}. 
/ioAjWPf.M.orP.149,1. 
fiv^cc, to suck, 166, 22. 
fj-vfai to groan, 143, 7. 
fj.vKdofj.ai 230. 
/uvco, formation of tenses 

130, (b) 1. 

Ncuco 230. 
vdcrcrai 143, 4. 

VeiKCQe 230. 



vGHTo-ofxai see vi<rcro/.iat. 

v4fiu> 166, P. 2. 

re'co 154, 2. 

yea> (j/^w). Pass, with 

(T 131,3. 

yew, Pf. M. or P. with 
and without o~ 131, 3. 

vio-aofxai, Char. 143, 3. 
Dial. 230. 

vo4<a contract. 205, 5. 

wo-rdfa 143, 7. 

Hew, formation of tenses 

130, (d) 1. 
tycuVo Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. 
£vpeu 165, 6. 
Ivw, Pass, with <r, 131, 2. 

'OSafc, Char. 143, 6. 
b8v<rao~Sai see "OAT2- 
20MAI 230. 

st* y»&, 23. 

olaKifa Aug. 122, 1. 
oXyvvfji, dtya see avoly. 
618a see ojpow. Comp. 

230. 
OiScuVw, oiSdvoo, olddca 

160,9. 
oiKovpioo 122, 2. 
o?,aai see oXofiai. 
olfxduo 122, 2. 
ol/icofa 143, 6. 
'oiVt<> 122, 2. 
oivoxoea) 219, 5. 
otVJw, Aug. 122, 2. 
oiofiai 166, 24. Comp. 230. 
01610, olob&rjv 122, 1. 
olo-rp4co 122, 2. 
o^xofj-ai 166, 25. 
ofto see oiofiai and <£ep&>. 
oAio-&aj/ctf 160, 10. 
oAAUjtit 182, B. 
oXoXvfr, Char. 143, 6. 
dfj-aprea, Epic SfxaprijTrjv 

222, R. 1. 
fl/wi^u 182, B. 
dfioKXaw, Epic bfiottXeop 

222, I. A, (2). 
bfiSpyvvfxi 187, 7. 
'OMOil see ofxvvfxi. 
oveip&TTCi} 143, 3. 
ovivrffii 177, 4. 
bvofxai 230. 
'OUTO see opaco. 
opc£a> 167, 4. 230. 
opyaivca, a in form. 149. 

R. 2. 
'OPErNTMI 230. 



bp4ya> 230. 
opvvfxi 230. 
o/jiWco, Char. 7 143, 1. 

Pf. with Att. Red.l 24,2. 
bacppaivofiai 160, 11. Dial 

230. 
dacppao-frai see 6o~(ppalvo 

fiat, 
ovpeoo, Aug. 122, 4. 
ouraw 230. 
(tye/Aw 166, 26. Dial 

230. 
6<p4xXa> 230. 
b<p\i(TKdv(a 160, 12. 

IW£», Char. 143, 7. 

ttojw 166, 27. 

iraXaioo Pass.with a 131, 2. 

irc^AAw 230. 

TTapavofxto), Aug. 126, 5. 

irapoiviw, Aug. 126, 1. 

Trapo£woo Pf. M. or P. 

149, 8. 
irdcraw, Char. 143, 3. 
Trdo-xc 161, 18. Dial.230. 
Tvareofjai 230. 
iravco, A. P. with <r 131,4. 
iraxwoj Pf. M.or P. 149, 8. 
irei&(a, Pf. II. ireiroi&a 

140, 4. Dial. 230. 
Tretvdu), contract. 137, 2. 
7reKTeco,7r6/cTft>,7rei/cco 143,2. 
■n-eAaCco 230. 
7reAe,iu£a>, Char. 223, 5. 
v4i*ira>, Pf. I. and ^>f. M. 

or P. 140, 5. 
nEN©n, see irdo-xoo- 
ireTralvw, a in the format. 

149, R. 2. 
irepaivcc, a in form.149, R. 

2 ; Pf. M. or P. 140, 8. 
irepdoo, formation of ten- 
ses 13D, (c). 
Trepdcc 166, 28. 
irepfrco 230. 
TreTavvvfii 183, 3. 
■ireTOfiai syncopated Aot. 

iTTTSfxnv 155; 166, 29. 

Dial. 230. 
IlETn see TrlirTw. 
7Tev&0fj.ai, see irvvbdvofxai. 
ir4(pvov, eice4>vov 230. 
irr)yvvfxi 187,8. Dial.230. 
iriXvafxai 230. 
vifiir\nni 177, 5. Dial.230. 
7ri|U.7rp7|Ui 177, 6. 
it'ivta 158, 5. 
iwriffKb) 161, 19. 



INDEX FOR THE FORJVIS OF VERBS. 



619 



irm-pdo-Kca 161, 20. 

irlirTo) 163, 3. Dial. 230. 

irnvdu 230. 

vKafa, Char. 77 143, 8. 

irAcLd-M, see Tre\d(co. 

ir\d(T(rw, Char. 143, 3. 

TrAe'/cw A II. P. 140, R. 1. 

ir\4co, formation of ten- 
ses 154, 2; contract. 
137, 1. 

7rA7}crG-w, Char. 7 143, 1 ; 
A. II. P. 140, R. 2. 

■kXvvu), Pf. A. and M. or 
A. LP. 149, 7 andK.4. 

ttAww 230. 

irvev, formation of ten- 
ses 154, 2j contract. 
137, 1. 

Tro^eo), format, of tenses 
130, (d), 2. 

vo\ep.ifa, Char. 223, 5. 

iroviu), format, of tenses 
130, (d), 2. [143, 1. 

irpa<T<rw, TrpdrTa, Char. 7 

npiaadai 179, 6. 

Tptoe, Pass, with a 131, 2. 

TrpoSrv/j.ovfxai, Aug. 126,5. 

7TToia>, Pass, with <r 131, 2. 

TTT7}acrci} 230. 

TTTLO-a-CD 143, 3. 

xtuo) 130, (b), 1. 
irvvbduopicu 160, 20. 

'PatWPf.M. orP.149,8; 

Dial. 230. 
odVrw, Char. 143, 1. 
ie'fa, Char. 143, 6. 
£e£&>, see epocc 230. 
6e&>, formation of tenses 

154, 2 and 192, 7. 
'PEfl, see (^u,i. 
biiyvvpn 187, 9. 
5i7€oj 230. 

01700;, contract. 137, 3. 
^Vtw, Char, <p 143, 1. 
^yTro'co, Red. 219, 6. 
pwrdfa, Char. 143, 6. 
buvvvpa 186, 2. 

SoATrtXw, Char. 77 143, 8 
<ra6u> 230. 
crfievvviJLi 184, 4. 
(m'to, Pass, with cr 131, 2. 
aevu} 230. 
o-tJtto; 140, R. 2. 
<T7}naivu>, t\ and d in for- 
mat. 149, It. 2: Pf. M. 

ua, 8. 



o-KaTTTco, Char. <£ 143, 1. 
(jK^dvvvp.i 182, and 183,4. 
<r/ceAA&>, cr/ceAea 166, 30. 
cnciSva/xai 230. 
07*00?, contract. 137, 3. 
aovrai, (Tovao (coO), see 

ceuco. 
(T7ra&>, format, of tenses 

130, (c). 
cnreipco, Pf. e<rir< pa 140, 4. 
o-TreVSw 144, R. 1. 
errata Char. 143, 6. 
o-TaAdfy, Char. 143, 6. 
o-re'AAo/, A. II. P. 140, 2. 
o-Tei/afcj Char. 143, 6. 
arepyca, Pf. II. ecrropya 

140, 4. 
o-TepiCTKO?, (rrepeco 161, 21. 

Dial. 230. 
crTepifa, Char. 143, 6. 
crr/Cu, Char. 143, 6. 

(TTOpeUUVIJLl,(TT6pUVIXl 184,5. 

o-Tpe</>w A. II. P. 140, 2. 

Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
(TTp(t>i>vv/£i 182 and 186, 3. 
(TTvyeu) 230. 
<ruAao), Ep. <tvXt)tt)v 222, 

R. 1. 
<rupi(a> (a-uptTTco), Char. 

143, 6. 
acpdfa, c<paTT&), Char, y 

143, 1 and 6. 
acpiyyw, Char. 144, R. 2. 
<r(pv(w, Char. 143, 6. 
trxaw, format, of tenses 

130, (c). 
(TxKu> Char. 143, 5. 
crw^oj, see <ra6cc 230. 

TAm 230. 

TAAAn 230. 

ravvu, format, of tenses 

223, 1. Comp. 230. 
Tapdacro), bparro) 156, R. 

Dial. 230. 
rdaaco, tuttw, Char, y 

143, 1. 
reiVo> 149, R. 3. 
TeAew, format, of tenses 

130, (d), 1. 
re/xi/ci) 158, 11. 
TEMtt 230. 
repirco 230. 
rer/xou, see TEMH. 
TtTpaivw 163, 4. 
Teyx« 230. 
TT7KW 140, R. 2. 
TIEH 230. 



ri^Tj/xi 175. 
TLKTCti 143, 2. 

Tivvvpn 185 ; Comp. 230. 

rlri/co 158, 6. 

Ttrpdca 163, 4. 

TiTpaxTKco 161, 22. 

t/« 158, 6. 

TAAH, 194, 4. 

rA^va: 177, 7. 

Tfxi)yo> 230. 

Tpa X iWPf.M.orP.149,8. 

rpiira), variable vowel in 
A. n. Act. M. P. 140, 
2; A. I. Act. M. P. 141, 
3 ; Pf. I. Act. and Pf. 
M. or P. 140, 5, 6. 
Verb. Adj. rpeirrSs and 
with middle sense 
rpaTT-qreos. 

rpecpec, Pf. rerpcxpa 140, 
4. Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
A. I. P. e&pecpdrjj', ra- 
rer than A. II. P. irpd- 
(pyu 140, 2. Dial. 230. 
verb Adj. &peirT6s. 

Tpix°> 167, 5. 

rpeo), format, of tenses 
130, (d), 1. 

rpiCco, Char, y 143, 6. 

Tvyxdvoo 160, 21. 

TVTTTOi} 166, 31. 

"tTrep.VTjiJ.VKe see i)fxv(a 230. 
vTTi(rxveoiuti 159, 4. 
vttvcStto), Chai\ 143, 3. 
uw, formation of tenses 
withtr 131, 2. 

Mm see eV&io>. 

(potW Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. 

Pf. II. vecpriua 149, 9. 

151. Dial. 236. 
(pd<TKw 161, 23. 
(peido/j.a.1 230. 
4>ENX1 see Treepvov 230. 
(pepca 167, 6. comp. 230 
(pevyca see (pvyydvu). COiup. 

230. 
(p-n/xi 167,7, 178. 
(pbdvw 158, 7. Dial. 230. 
cpbeipw, A. II. P. 140, 2. 

Pf.II. 140,4. comp. 230. 
<p^Vo> 158, 8. Dial. 230. 
<pi\ew 135. Dial. 230. 
cp\eya>,A. II. P. 140, R. 1. 
<p\vfa Char. 143, 6. 
<pondw, Ep. (ponr\TT)v 522, 

R. 1. 



&y 



620 



INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 






tipdyuv/xt 187, 10. 
tppdCco 148. Dial. 230. 
<ppd<r(T(o, Char, y 143, 1. 
fppew, formation of ten- 
ses, 131, 2. 
Qplaara, Char. k. 143, 1. 
rpvyyduca ((pevyco) 160, 22. 
(pvpca 230. 
<pvco 192, 11. comp. 230. 

XdCofiat 230. 

Xaipca 166, 32. comp. 230. 

XaXdoo, formation of ten- 
ses 130, (c). 

XO'VSdvu 160, 23. comp. 
230. 



XaffKco 161, 24. 

Xe'C«, Char. 5 143, 5 ; Pf. 
II. Ke'xoSo 140, 4. Fut. 
X*<rov(Aai 154, 3. A. II. 
Act. according to the 
analogy of A.I. 154, 8. 

X«o, formation of tenses 
154, E. 1. 230. 

X<ta, Pass, with <r 131, 2. 

Xpdo/Acu, formation of 
tenses 129, E. 2.; A.P- 
with <r 131, 4; con- 
tract. 137, 3. 

Xpdco, formation of ten- 
ses 129, E. 2; contract. 
137, 3. 



XP077,2. *.A^ 

Xp'"», formation of tenses 

130, (a). 
Xp(*>vyv/xi 186, 4. 

Wava, Pass, with a 131,2. 
•tydca, Pass, with <r 131, 3; 

contract. 137, 3. 
$eyco, A. II. P. 140, E. 1. 
^vx*>, A. II. P. 141, E. 



wfreoo 165, 7. 
euveoixcu, Aug. 



comp. Trplao-frou. 



122, 4. 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 035 547 7 



